1 


LIBRARV  ) 


OF  THK 


University  of  California. 


OIKT  Ol^ 


Accessions  No. S^//S^.        Chns  No.    *7^  0  • 


J 


Digitized  by  tine  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/collegegrammarOOandrrich 


^itbixfas'  Series  of  f  atiu  Sejool  ^mh. 

PUBLISHED  BY  CROCKER  AND  BREAVSTER, 

51  WASHINGTON  STREET,  BOSTON. 

THE  LATIN  SCHOOL  BOOKS  prepared  by  Prof.  E.  A.  Andrews,  exclu- 
sive of  his  Latin-English  Lexicon,  founded  on  the  Latin-German  Lexicon  of 
Dr.  Freund,  constitute  two  distinct  series,  adapted  to  different  and  distinct  pur- 
poses. The  basis  of  the  Fii*st  Series  is  Andrews'  First  Latin  Book ;  of  the 
Second,  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar. 

riEST   SERIES. 

This  Series  is  designed  expressly  for  those  who  commence  the  study  of  Latin 
at  a  very  early  age,  and  for  such  as  intend  to  pursue  it  to  a  limited  extent  only, 
or  merely  as  subsidiary  to  the  acquisition  of  a  good  EngUsh  education.  It  con- 
sists of  the  following  works,  viz. : — 

1.  Andrews'  First  Latin  Book ;  or  Progiessive  Les- 
sons in  Reading  and  Writing  Latin.    This  small  volume  contains  most  of  the 

leading  principles  and  grammatical  forms  of  the  Latin  langiiage,  and,  by  the 
logical  precision  of  its  rules  and  definitions,  is  admirably  fitted  to  serve  as  an 
introduction  to  the  study  of  general  grammar.  The  work  is  divided  into  les- 
sons of  convenient  length,  which  are  so  arranged  that  the  student  will,  in  all 
cases,  be  prepared  to  enter  upon  the  study  of  each  successive  lesson,  by  pos- 
sessing a  thorough  knowledge  of  those  which  preceded  it.  The  lessons  gen- 
erally consist  of  three  parts : — 1st.  The  statement  of  important  principles  Ln 
the  tonn  of  rules  or  definitions,  or  the  exhibition  of  orthographical  or  etymo- 
logical forms;  2d.  Exercises,  designed  to  illustrate  such  principles  or  forms; 
and  3d.  Questions,  intended  to  assist  the  student  in  preparing  his  lesson.  In 
addition  to  the  grammatical  lessons  contained  in  this  volume,  a  few  pages 
of  Reading  Lessons  are  annexed,  and  these  are  followed  by  a  Dictionary  com- 
prising all  the  Latin  words  contained  in  the  work.  This  book  is  adapted  to 
the  use  of  all  schools  above  the  grade  of  primary  schools,  including  also  Acad- 
emies and  Female  Seminaries.  It  is  prepared  in  such  a  manner  that  it  can  be 
used  with  little  difficulty  by  any  intelligent  parent  or  teacher,  with  no  previous 
knowledge  of  the  language. 

2.  The  Latin  Reader,   with  a  Dictionaiy  and   Notes, 

containing  explanations  of  difficult  idioms,  and  numerous  references  to  the 
Lessons  contained  m  the  First  Latin  Book. 

3.  The  Viri  Romae,  with  a  Dictionaiy  and  Notes,  re- 
ferring, like  those  of  the  Reader,  to  the  First  Latin  Book.    This  series  of  three 

small  volumes,  if  faithfully  studied  accoi'ding  to  the  directions  contained  in  them, 
will  not  only  render  the  student  u  very  tolerable  proficient  in  the  principles  or 
the  Latin  language  and  in  the  knowledge  of  its  roots,  from  which  so  many  words 
of  his  Endish  language  are  derived,  but  will  constitute  the  best  prepara'tioii  for 
a  thorough  study  of  the  English  grammar. 

SECOND   SERIES. 

Note.— The  " Latin  Reader"  and  the  "  Viri  Romue,"  in  this  series,  are  the  same  as  in 
the  first  series. 

This  Series  is  designed  more  especially  for  those  who  are  intending  to  becnne 
thoroughly  acquainted  with  the  Latin  language,  and  with  the  principal  classical 
authors  oi  that  language.    It  consists  of  the  following  works: — 

1.     Latin  Lessons.    This  small  volume  is  designed  for  tiie 

younger  classes  of  Latin  students,  who  intend  ultimately  to  take  up  the  lai-ger 
Grammar,  but  to  whom  that  work  would,  at  first,  appear  too  formidable.  It 
contains  the  prominent  prhiciples  of  Latin  grammar,  expressed  in  the  same 
language  as  in  the  larger  Grammar,  and  likewise  Reading  and  Writing  Lessons, 
with  a  Dictionaiy  of  the  Latin  words  and  phi*ases  occurring  in  the  Lessons. 
1 


NEW   SERIES   OF   LATIN   SCHOOL   BOOKS,    t 

I  hare  reason  to  beliere  that  the  improvements,  introduced  into  the  last  edition  of 
Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  by  my  respected  and  lamented  friend  Dr.  An- 
drews, a  little  before  his  death,  add  very  decidedly  to  the  ralue  of  a  work,  which  has 
done  more  to  give  the  knowledge  of  that  language  to  the  youth  of  this  country  than  any, 
perhaps  than  all  others.— TAeot/ore  W.  Woolsey,  President  of  Yale  College,  New  Haven. 

No  book,  probably,  has  done  more  to  improve  classical  training  in  American  schools 
tlian  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar.  Its  use  is  almost  universal ;  and  where  it 
has  not  itself  been  adopted  as  a  manual,  it  has  made  grammars  of  similar  excellence 
necessary.  The  last  edition,  the  sixty-fifth,  was  carefully  revised  by  the  lamented  Dr. 
Andrews,  not  long  before  his  death,  by  whom  it  was  greatly  enlarged  by  the  incorpora- 
tion of  much  valuable  information,  derived  mainly  from  the  last  edition  of  the  Latin 
Grammar  of  Professor  Zumpt.  It  will  therefore  be  found  to  be  much  improved  as  a  re- 
pository of  the  principles  and  facts  of  the  Latin  language. —  Thomas  A.  Tfiacher,  Profes- 
sor of  Latin  in  Yale  College,  Neio  Haven. 

It  is  unnecessary  to  commend  a  Latin  Grammar,  which  has  been  for  twenty  years  in 
common  use  in  our  Colleges,  and  has  genenilly  superseded  all  others.  The  RevLsed 
Edition  contains  the  results  of  the  labors  of  Dr.  Andrews,  during  all  that  time,  on  va- 
rious Latin  Classics,  and  on  his  great  Latin  Lexicon;  and  cannot,  therefore,  but  be 
greatly  improved. — Edward  Robinson,  D.  D.,  LL.  D.,  Prof  of  Biblical  Literature  in 
Union  Tlieol.  Seminary,  New  York  City. 

I  regard  Andrews'  and  Stoddard's  new  Latin  Grammar,  as  an  exceedingly  valuable 
work.  It  evidently  contains  the  results  of  the  Author's  careful  and  long  continued  in 
vestigation,  and  from  itz  fulness,  clearness,  and  accuracy,  will  undoubtedly  become  the 
Standard  Latin  Grammar  of  this  Continent.  In  Western  New  York,  we  have  for  a  long 
time  been  using  the  earlier  editions,  and  they  have  rapidly  won  upon  the  public  regard. 
This  new  edition  will  give  it  a  stronger  claim  upon  our  favor.  It  must  rapidly  super- 
sede all  others.  I  can  unhesitatingly  recommend  the  New  Grammar  as  the  best  in  xise. — 
Lewis  H.  Clark,  Principal  of  Sodus  Academy,  Wayne  Co.,  N.  Y. 

I  have  looked  over  the  new  edition  of  the  Grammar  with  great  interest.  It  is  now 
eighteen  years  since  I  introduced  it  into  this  college,  and  I  have  never  felt  inclined  to 
cluinge  it  for  any  other.  The  revision,  without  changing  its  general  character,  has  added 
greatly  to  its  fulness  and  completeness.  It  is  now  fully  equal  to  Zumpt's  in  these  re- 
spects, and  far  superior  to  it  in  adaptation  to  the  cla.ss  room.  There  is  no  otiur  school 
grammar  that  can  pretend  to  compare  with  it.  I  have  introduced  the  new  edition  here, 
and  have  no  idea  I  shall  ever  wish  to  substitute  another.  The  services  of  Prof.  Andrews 
in  the  cause  of  classical  learning  in  the  United  States  cannot  be  over  estimated.— JM.  Stur- 
gus,  Professor  in  Hanover  College,  Indiana. 

I  am  willing  to  say  that  I  am  decidedly  in  fevor  of  Andrews'  Latin  Series.—  Geo.  Gale, 
Galesville  University,  Wisconsin. 

Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  I  consider  decidedly  the  best  Latin  Qrammar 
ever  published. — Ransom  Norton,  North  Livermore,  Maine. 

Such  a  work  as  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Revised  Latin  Grammar  needs  no  recommend- 
ation, it  speaks  for  itself. — A.  A.  Keen,  Professor  of  Greek  and  Latin,  Tufts  College, 
Medford,  Ms. 

I  have  examined  the  revised  edition  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar,  and 
think  it  a  complete  success.  I  see  it  has  all  of  Zumpt's  merits  and  none  of  his  defects, 
»nd  welcome  its  advent  with  great  pleasure. — James  M.  Whiton,  Hopkins  Grammar 
ScJiool,  New  Haven,  Conn. 

I  have  examined  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar,  and  say,  without  hesita- 
tion, that  the  principles  of  the  I^atin  language  can  be  mftre  easily  and  systematically 
acquired  from  it  than  any  work  I  have  ever  seen.  The  arrangement  and  simplicity  of  its 
terms  are  such  as  to  make  it  e."u«ily  comprehended  by  the  beginner,  while,  at  the  .«ame 
time,  its  copiousness  is  sufficient  for  the  most  advanced  student.  The  author  has  evi- 
dently not«i  and  profited  by  the  defects  in  this  respect  of  most  of  the  Latin  Grammars 
now  in  use.— C.  W.  Field,  Mauch  Chunk.  Pa. 

The  superior  merits  of  the  original  work  are  too  well  known  and  appreciated  to  need 
any  commendation  from  me.  I  have  had  some  means  of  knowing  how  great  pains  and 
labor  Dr.  Andrews  has  bestowed  upon  this  final  revision  and  improvement  of  the  work, 
and,  therefore,  was  not  unprepared  to  find  its  acknowledged  excellence  materially  in- 
creased, and  I  do  not  hesitate  to  say,  that  its  value  has  been  greatly  enhanced,  and  that 
it  has  been  brought  as  near  as  practicable  to  the  present  state  of  philological  science. — 
John  D.  Philbrick,  Superintendent  of  Public  Schools,  city  of  Boston. 

I  have  looked  the  Grammar  through  with  much  care  and  a  great  degree  of  satisfaction, 
and  I  unhesitatingly  pronounce  it  superior  to  any  Latin  Grammar  in  method  and  man- 
ner  of  ilisru^sion.  and  Imppil'  nd.'iptcd  fo  tlio  wants  of  both  teachers  and  pupils. — J.  W. 
Siiitonds,  Prill  ipal  oj  Aiv  En^iniil  I'hr.siian  Institute,  Andover,  N.  H. 


NEW   SERIES   OF   LATIN   SCHOOL   BOOKS. 

We  have  lately  introiuoed  the  Revised  Edition,  and  regard  it  as  a  great  improvement 
apon  former  editions.  We  shall  use  it  inclusively  in  future. — E.  Flint,  Jr.,  Princijiai 
of  Lee  Hig/i  School. 

After  a  dwi  examination,  I  am  happy  to  state  that  the  Author  has  admirably  accom- 
plished the  objects  which  he  aimed  at  in  making  this  last  revision.  H«  hiis  added  much 
that  is  in  the  highest  degree  valuable  without  materially  changing  the  arrangement  of 
the  original  work.  The  Avork  appears  to  me  well  adapted  to  the  daily  use  of  our  Classi- 
cal Schools,  and  I  shall  hereafter  direct  my  classes  to  use  it. —  C.  L.  Cushman,  Principal 
0f  Peabody  High  School^  South  Danvers,  Ms. 

The  Revised  Grammar  seems  to  me  greatly  improved  and  to  be  every  thing  a  scholar 
could  wish. — Z.  B.  Sturgis,  Charleslown,  Indiana. 

I  have  sulyected  the  Revised  Edition  to  the  test  of  actual  use  in  the  recitation  room, 
and  am  persuaded  that  in  its  present  form  it  decidedly  surpasses  every  other  Latin  Gram- 
mar in  point  of  adaptation  to  the  wants  of  students  in  our  Academies,  High  Schools 
and  Collies. — William  S.  Paltner.,  Central  High  School,  Cleav^land,  Ohio. 

I  think  Andrews'  Series  of  Latin  Works  the  most  systematic  and  best  arranged  course  I 
have  ever  seen, — and  believe  if  our  pupils  would  use  them  altogether,  we  should  find 
them  much  better  scholars.  I  shall  use  them  wholly  in  my  school. — A.  C.  Stocking 
Principal  of  Monmovth  Academy,  Maine. 

The  examination  of  the  Revised  Edition  has  afforded  me  very  great  pleasure,  and  leads 
me  to  express  the  deep  and  sincere  conviction  that  it  is  the  most  complete  Grammar  of 
the  Latin  language  with  which  I  am  acquainted,  and  be.st  adapted  for  ready  consultation 
upon  any  subject  connected  with  the  study  of  Latin  Authors.  The  paper,  the  typography, 
and  the  binding, — the  whole  style  of  publication — are  such  as  to  commend  the  good  tastw 
and  judgment  of  the  Publishers.— >/.  R.  Boyd.,  Principal  of  JSlaplevoood  Young  Ladies 
Institute,  Pittsfleld,  Mass. 

I  find  the  Revised  Edition  to  be  just  what  is  needed  for  a  Latin  Grammar,— clear,  com- 
prehensive, yet  concise,  in  the  subject  matter.  I  shall  introduce  it  as  a  permanent  text- 
book.—B.  F.  Dake,  Principal  of  Clyde  High  School,  Wayne  Co.,  N.  Y. 

I  have  carefully  examined  your  Revised  Edition  throughout,  particularly  the  Correc- 
tions and  Additions.  It  now  appears  to  me  all  that  can  be  desired.  It  seems  like  part- 
ing %vith  a  familiar  friend  to  lay  aside  the  old  edition,  with  its  many  excellencies,  and 
adopt  the  new.  but  I  shall  cheerfully  make  the  sacrifice  for  the  greater  benefit  that  will 
accrue  to  those  commencing  the  study  of  Latin  from  time  to  time. — J.  H.  Graliam,  Prin- 
cipal of  Northfield  Institution,  Vermont. 

I  thought  before  that  the  old  edition  was  entitled  to  the  appellation  of  "  The  Latin 
Grammar,"  but  I  perceive  its  value  has  been  much  increased  by  the  numerous  emenda- 
tions and  additions  of  Prof.  Andrews.  The  Grammar  is  nov  fitted  to  be  a  complete 
hand-book  for  the  Latin  scholar  during  his  whole  course. — E.  TV  Johnson^  Canton  Acad 
emy.  Canton,  N.  Y. 

I  unhesitatingly  pronounce  the  Revised  Edition  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin 
Grammar  the  best  Grammar  of  the  Latin  Language,  and  shall  certainly  use  my  influence 
in  its  behalf.— Jf.  E.  J.  Clute,  Edinboro\  Pa. 

After  a  thorough  examination,  I  have  no  hesitation  in  pronouncing  it  the  best  Latin 
Grammar  for  the  purposes  of  the  recitation  room  that  I  have  ever  examined.  In  its 
present  form  it  ought  certainly  to  displace  a  large  majority  of  the  Grammars  in  common 
use.  Its  rules  of  Syntax  are  expressed  with  accuracy  and  precision,  and  are  in  fact, 
what  all  rules  ought  to  be,  reliable  guides  to  the  learner.— >7a»?i«s  W.  Andrews,  Principal 
of  Hopewell  Acadtmy,  Penn. 

Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar,  in  the  arrangement  and  adaptation  to  the 
learner,  has  excelled  all  others,  and  the  revised  edition  Is  certainly  a  great  improvement, 
and  I  do  believe  is  better  adapted  to  the  wants  of  the  student  than  any  other.  The 
whole  seems  to  be  critically  revised  and  corrected.  Prof.  Andrews  was  truly  the  stu- 
dent's benefa'^tor. — M,  L.  Severance,  North  Troy,  Vermont. 

It  gives  me  great  pleasure  to  bear  my  testimony  to  the  superior  merits  of  the  Latin 
Grammar  edited  by  Professor  Andrews  and  Mr.  Stoddard.  I  express  most  cheerfully, 
unhesitatingly,  and  decidedly,  my  preference  of  this  Grammar  to  that  of  Adam,  which 
has,  for  so  long  a  time,  kept  almost  undisputed  sway  in  our  schools. — Dr.  C.  Beck,  Cam- 
bridge. 

I  know  of  no  Grammar  published  in  this  country,  which  promises  to  answer  so  well 
the  purpo55es  of  elementary  classical  instruction,  and  shall  be  glad  to  see  it  introduced 
into  our  best  schools. —  Charles  K.  Dillatvay,  Boston. 

Your  new  Latin  Grammar  appears  to  me  much  better  suited  to  the  use  of  studentd. 
than  any  other  grammar  I  am  acquainted  with.— Pro/.  Wm.  M.  Holland,  Hartford,  Ct 

6 


NEW   SERIES   OF   LATIN   SCHOOL   BOOKS. 

I  have  adopted  the  Latin  Grammar  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard  in  the  school  under  my 
rharge,  belieTing  it  better  adapted,  upon  the  whole,  for  elementary  instruction  than  any 
similar  work  which  I  have  examined.  It  combines  the  improvements  of  the  recent  Ger- 
man works  on  the  subject  with  the  best  features  of  that  old  favorite  of  the  schools,  Dr. 
Adam's  Latin  Grammar. — Henry  Drisler,  Professor  of  Latin  in  Columbia  College. 

A  careful  review  of  the  Revised  Edition  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar, 
shows  that  this  favorite  text-book  still  continues  to  deserve  the  affections  and  confidence 
of  Teachers  and  Pupils,  incorporating  as  it  does  the  results  of  Prof.  Andrews'  own  con- 
stant study  for  many  years  with  the  investigations  of  English  and  German  Philologists. 
No  other  Grammar  is  now  so  well  fitted  to  meet  the  wants  of  the  country  as  the  rapid 
demand  for  it  will  show  beyond  doubt.— JL.  -S.  HartweU,  University  of  St.  Louis. 

This  Grammar  of  the  Latin  Language,  now  universally  pronounced  the  very  best,  u 
greatly  improved  by  the  corrections,  revisions  and  additions  of  this  revised  edition.  We 
do  not  believe  a  text-book  was  ever  vrritten  which  introduced  so  great  an  improvement 
in  the  method  of  teaching  Latin,  as  this  has  done.  We  wish  the  revised  edition  the 
greate.<!t  success,  which  we  are  sure  it  merits. — Rhode  Island  Schoobnaster. 

I  have  examined  your  revised  edition  with  considerable  care,  and  do  not  hesitate  to 
pronounce  it  a  great  improvement  upon  the  old  editions,  and  sis  near  perfection  as  wo 
are  likely  to  have.  I  have  no  doubt  it  will  come  into  general  use.— -4.  Williams,  Professor 
of  Latin,  Jefferson  College,  Canonsburg,  Pa. 

I  have  been  much  interested  in  the  Revised  Edition.  The  improvement  is  very  striking, 
and  I  shall  no  longer  think  of  giving  it  up  and  putting  Zumpt  in  its  place.  I  am  much 
pleased  with  the  prreat  improvement  in  the  typography.  You  have  given  to  our  schools  a 
book  fifty  per  cent  better  in  every  respect,  and  I  trust  you  will  have  your  reward  in 
largely  increased  sales. — William  J.  Rolfe,  Master  of  Oliver  High  School,  Lawrence,  Ms. 

I  can  with  much  pleasure  say  that  your  Grammar  seems  to  me  much  better  adapted 
to  the  present  condition  and  wants  of  our  schools  than  any  one  with  which  I  am  ac- 
quainted, and  to  supply  that  which  has  long  been  wanted — a  good  Latin  Grammar  for 
common  use. — F.  Gardner,  Principal  of  Boston  Latin  School. 

The  Latin  Grammar  of  Andrews  and  Stoddard  is  deserving,  in  my  opinion,  of  the  ap- 
probation which  so  many  of  our  ablest  teachers  have  bestowed  upon  it.  It  is  believed 
that,  of  all  the  grammars  before  the  public,  this  has  greatly  the  advantage,  in  regard 
both  to  the  excellence  of  its  arrangement,  and  the  accuracy  and  copiousniess  of  its  infor- 
mation.— H.  B.  Hackett,  Prof,  of  Biblical  Literature  in  Newton  Theological  Seminary. 

The  universal  favor  with  which  this  Grammar  is  received  was  not  unexpected.  It  will 
bear  a  thorough  and  discriminating  examination.  In  the  use  of  well-defined  and  ex- 
pressive terms,  especially  in  the  syntax,  we  know  of  no  Latin  or  Greek  grammar  which 
is  to  be  compared  to  this. — Am£rican  Quarterly  Register. 

These  works  vrill  furnish  a  series  of  elementary  publications  for  the  study  of  Latin 
altogether  in  advance  of  any  thing  which  has  hitherto  appeared,  either  in  this  country 
or  in  England. — American  Biblical  Repository. 

I  cheerfully  and  decidedly  bear  testimony  to  the  superior  excellence  of  Andrews  and 
Stoddard's  lAtin  Grammar  to  any  manual  of  the  kind  with  which  I  am  acquainted. 
Every  part  bears  the  impress  of  a  careful  compiler.  The  principles  of  syntax  are  happily 
developed  in  the  rules,  whilst  those  relating  to  the  moods  and  tenses  supply  an  important 
deficiency  in  our  former  grammars.  The  rules  of  prosody  are  also  clearly  and  fully  ex- 
hibited.— Rev.  Lyman  Coleman,  JSIanchtster,  Vt. 

This  work  bears  evident  marks  of  great  care  and  skill,  and  ripe  and  accurate  scholar- 
ship in  the  authors.  We  cordially  commend  it  to  the  student  and  teacher. — Biblical 
Repository. 

Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  is  what  I  expected  it  would  be — an  excellent 
book.  We  cannot  hesitate  a  moment  in  laying  aside  the  books  now  in  use,  and  intro- 
ducing this. — Rev.  J.  Penney,  D.  D.,  New  York. 

Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  bears  throughout  evidence  of  original  and 
thorough  investigation  and  sound  criticism.  It  is,  in  my  apprehension,  so  far  as  sim- 
plicity is  concerned,  on  the  one  hand,  and  philosophical  views  and  sound  scholarship  on 
the  other,  far  preferable  to  other  grammars ;  a  work  at  the  same  time  highly  creditable  to 
Its  authors  and  to  our  country. — Professor  A.  Packard,  Bowdoin  College,  Maine. 

I  do  not  hepitate  to  pronounce  Andrews  and  Stoddard's  Latin  Grammar  superior  to 
any  other  with  which  I  am  acquainted.  I  have  never  seen,  any  where,  a  greater  amount 
of  valuable  matter  compressed  within  limits  equally  narrow. — Hon.  John  IMl,  Principal 
of  Ellington  School,  Conn. 

We  have  no  hesitation  in  pronouncing  this  Grammar  decidedly  superior  to  any  now 
In  rue. — Boston  Recorder. 


VALUABLE    CLASSICAL    WORKS. 


ItabiiBaifs  ie^enius. 


BobinSOn's  Hebrew  Lexicon.     Sixth  Edition,  Revised 

and  Stereot,yped.  A  Hebrew  and  English  Lexicon  of  the  Old  Testament,  in- 
clnding  the  Biblical  Chaldee.  Translated  from  the  Latin  of  William  Gesenius, 
late  Professor  of  Theology  in  the  University  of  Halle- Wittemberg.  By  Edward 
EoBiNsoN,  D.  D.,  LL.  t).,  Professor  of  Biblical  Literature  in  the  Union  The- 
ological Seminary,  New  York.  A  new  edition,  with  corrections  and  large  ad- 
ditions, partly  furnished  by  the  author  in  manuscript,  and  partly  condensed 
from  his  larger  Thesaurus,  as  compiled  by  Eoediger.  These  corrections  and 
additions  were  made  15y  Dr.  Gesenius,  during  an  interval  of  several  years, 
while  carrying  his  Thesaurus  through  the  press,  and  were  transcribed  and  fur- 
nished by  him  expressly  for  this  edition.  They  will  be  found  to  be  veiy 
numerous,  every  page  having  been  materially  corrected  and  enlarged,  and  a 
large  number  of  articles  having  been  re-written.  It  is  printed  on  a  new  type, 
the  face  and  cut  of  which  is  very  beautiful,  and  has  been  highly  commended 
and  approved. 

Dr.  Robinson  had  already  been  trained  to  the  business  of  lexicographical  labor,  when 
he  began  the  translation  of  the  present  work.  He  is,  in  an  uncommon  degree,  master 
of  his  own  native  tongue.  He  has  diligence,  patience,  perseverance — yea,  the  iron  dili- 
gence of  Gesenius  himself.  For  aught  that  I  have  yet  been  able  to  discover,  all  that  can 
reasonably  be  expected  or  desired,  has  been  done  by  the  translator;  not  only  as  to  ren- 
dering the  work  into  English,  but  as  to  the  manner  and  the  accuracy  of  printing.  The 
work  will  speak  for  itself,  on  the  first  opening.  It  does  honor,  in  its  appearance,  to  edi- 
tor, printers,  and  publishers.  I  have  only  to  add  my  hearty  wish,  that  its  beautiful 
white  pages  may  be  consulted  and  turned  over,  until  they  become  thoroughly  worn  with 
the  hands  of  the  purchasers. — Prof.  Stuart^  in  the  Biblical  Repository. 

There  is  no  lexicon  in  English  that  can  be  put  on  a  level  with  Robinson's.  I  recommend 
the  present  as  the  best  Lexicon  of  the  Hebrew  and  Biblical  Chaldee  which  an  English 
scholar  can  have. — Rev.  Dr.  Samuel  Davidson,  of  London. 

Gesenius'  Lexicon  is  known  wherever  Hebrew  is  studied.  On  the  merits  of  this  work 
criticism  has  long  ago  pronounced  its  verdict  of  approval. — London  Jewish  Chronicle. 

This  is  a  very  beautiful  and  complete  edition  of  the  best  Hebrew  Lexicon  ever  ypt 
produced.     Gesenius,  as  a  Hebrew  philologist,  is  unequalled. — London  Clerical  Journa* 

This  is  decidedly  the  most  complete  edition  of  Gesenius'  Manual  Hebrew  Lexicon.— 
London  Journal  of  Sacred  Literature. 

A  Harmony  of  the  Four  Gospels,  in  Greek,  accord- 

ing  ^o  the  text  of  Hahn.  Newly  arranged,  with  Explanatory  Notes,  by  Ed  ward 
RoBixsox,  D.  D.,  LL.  D.,  Professor  of  Biblical  Literature  in  the  Tjnion  Tlie- 
ologlcal  Seminary,  New  York.    Revised  Edition. 

This  work  of  T, .-.  Robinson  confines  itself  to  the  legitimate  sphere  of  a  Harmony  of  the 
Gospels;  and  we  do  not  hesitate  to  say  that  in  this  sphere  it  will  be  found  to  be  all  that 
a  Harmony  need  or  can  be.  The  original  text  is  printed  with  accuracy  and  e]eg!u.c« 
It  is  a  feast  to  the  eyes  to  look  upon  a  page  of  so  much  beauty.  Its  arrangement  iw  dis- 
tinguished for  simplicity  and  convenience.  No  one  will  ever  be  able  to  comprehend' the 
relations  of  the  Gospels  to  each  other,  or  acquire  an  exact  knowledge  of  their  contents, 
unless  he  studies  them  with  the  aid  of  a  Harmony.  The  present  work  furnishes  in  this 
respect  just  the  facility  which  is  needed ;  and  we  trust  that  among  its  other  effects,  it 
will  serve  to  direct  attention  more  strongly  to  the  importance  of  this  mode  of  study.— 
Prof.  Hackett,  of  Neiuton  Theological  Sejninary. 

Arithmetic,  Oral  and  Written,  practically  applied  by  means 
of  Suggestive  Questions.  By  Thomas  H.  Palmer,  Author  of  the  Prize 
Kssay  on  Education,  entitled  the  "  Teacher's  Manual,"  "  The  Moral  Instruo- 
tor,"  etc. 

r 


VALUABLE  CLASSICAL  WORKS. 

^obimmfs  l^amang  of  %  Gospels,  in  €\\^\\s\ 

A  Harmony  of  the  Four  Gospels,  in  English,  accord- 
ing to  the  common  version ;  newly  arranged,  with  Explanatory  Notes.  By 
Edward  Eobixso])?,  D.  D.,  LL.  D. 

The  object  of  this  work  is  to  obtain  a  full  and  consecutive  account  of  all  the 
facts  of  our  Lord's  life  and  ministry.  In  order  to  do  this,  the  four  gospel  nar- 
ratives have  been  so  brought  together,  as  to  present  as  nearly  as  possible  the 
true  chronological  order,  and  where  the  same  transaction  is  described  by  more 
than  one  -writer,  the  different  accounts  are  placed  side  by  side,  so  as  to 'fill  out 
and  supply  each  other.  Such  an  arrangement  affords  the  only  full  and  perfect 
survey  of  all  the  testimony  relating  to  any  and  every  portion  of  our  Lord's  his- 
tory. The  evangelists  are  thus  made  their  own  best  interpreters;  and  it  is 
showu  hov.'  wonderfully  they  are  supplementary  to  each  other  in  niiniite  as 
well  as  in  important  particulars,  and  in  this  Vay  is  brought  out  fully  and 
clearly  the  fundamental  characteristics  of  their  testimony,  unity  in  diversity. 
To  Bible  classes.  Sabbath  schools,  and  all  who  love  and  seek  the  truth  in  their 
closets  and  in  their  families,  this  work  will  be  found  a  useful  assistant. 

I  have  used  ''  Robinson's  English  Harmony  "  in  teaching  a  Bible  Class.  The  result,  in 
my  own  mind,  is  a  conviction  of  the  preat  merits  of  this  work,  and  its  adaptation  to  im- 
part the  highest  life  and  interest  to  Bible  Class  exercises,  and  generally  to  the  diligent 
study  of  the  Gospel.  It  is  much  to  be  desired  that  everyone  accustomed  to  searching 
the  Scriptures  should  have  this  invaluable  aid. — Rev.  Br.  Skinner,  New  York. 

i[0bins0n's   gitti0narj  0f  i\t  iibh* 

Hobinson's  Bible  Dictionary.    A  Dictionary  for  the 

nse  of  Schools  and  Young  Persons.  By  Edward  Robinson,  D.  D.,  LL.  D. 
Illustrated  with  Engravings  on  wood,  ani  Maps  of  Canaan,  Judea,  Asia  Minor, 
and  the  Peninsula  of  Mount  Sinai.  Idumea,  etc. 

(Bhnxtnis  af  |istr0n0mj* 

The  Elements  of  Astronomy ;  or  The  World  as  it  is 

and  as  it  Appears.  By  the  author  of  "  Theory  of  Teaching,"  "  Edward's  First 
Les.sons  in  Grammar,'"'  etc.  Revised  in  manuscript  by  George  P.  Bond,  Esq., 
of  the  Cambridge  Observatory,  to  whom  the  author  is  also  indebted  for  super- 
intending its  passage  through  the  press. 

St0tt's  iunlu  liHK 

Scott's  Family  Bible.  Boston  Stereotype  Edition. 
6  vols,  royal  8vo.,  containing  all  the  Notes,  Practical  Observations,  Marginal 
References,  and  Critical  Remai'ks,  as  in  the  most  approved  London  edition, 
with  a  line  engraved  likeness  of  the  Author,  Family  Record,  etc. 

This  Edition  is  the  only  one  that  has,  or  can  have,  the  benefit  of  the  final 
Additions  and  Emendations  of  the  Author,  The  extent  of  these  may  be 
judged  from  the  fact  that  upwards  of  Four  Hundred  Pages  of  letter-press  were 
added ;  and  as  they  consist  chiefly  of  Critical  Remarks,  their  importance  to 
the  Biblical  student  is  at  once  apparent.  The  Preface  to  the  entire  work  con- 
talus  an  elaborate  and  compendious  view  of  the  evidences  that  the  Holy  Scrip- 
tures were  given  by  inspiration  of  God.  Prefixed  to  each  Book,  botli  in  the 
Old  and  New  Testament,  is  an  Introduction,  or  statement  of  its  purport  and 
intent.  There  are  also  copious  Marsrinal  References,  with  various  Tables,  a 
Ohrouological  Index,  and  a  copious  Topical  Index. 

i^' Orders  .solicited. 
8 


GRAMMAR 


LATIN  LANGUAGE; 


-       >^\ 


)ULh 


USE  OF  SCHOOLS  AND  COLLEGES. 


E.  A.  ANDREWS  AND   S.  STODDARD. 


THE  SIXTY-FIFTH  EDITION. 
REVISED   WITH   CORRECTIONS   AND   ADDITIONS, 

BY  E.  A.  ANDREWS,  LL.  D. 


BOSTON: 
PUBLISHED  BY  CROCKER  AND  BREWSTER, 

51  Washington  Street. 
1864. 


^V-Si. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  CJongress,  in  the  year  1867, 

BY  CROCKER  AND  BREWSTER, 

In  the  Clerk's  Office  of  the  District  Court  of  Massachusetts. 


ip 


PREFACE. 


i'^A   2.0  9' 


As  more  than  twenty  years  have  elapsed,  since  the  first  publication  of  this 
Grammar,  it  can  scarcely  be  necessary,  in  oflfering  to  the  public  a  revised 
edition  of  the  work,  to  make  more  than  a  passing  allusion  to  its  original  plan 
or  to  the  circumstances  to  which  it  owed  its  origin. 

For  some  years  previous  to  the  date  of  its  publication,  the  progress  of  classi- 
cal learning  in  Europe,  and  particularly  in  Germany,  had  been  such,  as  plainly 
to  indicate  the  necessity  of  a  corresponding  advance  in  the  manuals  of  Latin 
gi-ammar  emploj-ed  in  the  schools  of  this  country.  Their  deficiencies  had 
indeed  become  so  apparent,  that  various  attempts  had  already  been  made  to 
furnish  a  remedy  by  means  of  translations  of  German  grammars ;  but  none  of 
these,  however  excellent  in  many  respects,  had  seemed  to  be  fully  adapted  to 
the  purpose  for  which  they  were  intended. 
^  To  unite  the  acknowledged  excellencies  of  the  older  English  manuals  and  of 
the  more  recent  German  grammars  was  the  special  aim  of  the  authors  of  this 
work;  and  to  this  end  their  attention  was  directed,  first  to  the  preparation  of 
more  extended  rules  for  the  pronunciation  of  the  language,  secondly  to  a  clearer 
exposition  of  its  inflectional  changes,  thirdly  to  the  proper  basis  of  its  syntax, 
and  fourthly  to  greater  precision  in  its  rules  and  definitions. 

The  system  of  rules  for  the  division  and  accentuation  of  Latin  words,  pre- 
pared in  pursuance  of  the  plan  which  has  just  been  specified,  was  accordingly 
more  copious  than  any  previously  found  in  the  Latin  grammars  in  common 
use  in  this  country.  For  the  purpose  also  of  preventing  the  formation  of  erro- 
neous habits  of  pronunciation  in  the  early  part  of  the  student's  course,  the  pe- 
nultimate quantities  of  all  Latin  words  occurring  in  the  Grammar  were  care- 
fully marked,  unless  determinable  by  some  general  rule,  and  the  paradigms 
were  divided  and  accented  in  such  a  manner  as  to  indicate  their  true  pro- 
nunciation. 

In  their  treatment  of  Latin  etymology,  the  authors  aimed  to  render  its  study 
less  a  mere  exercise  of  memory,  and  in  a  greater  degi-ee  an  efficient  aid  in  the 
general  cultivation  of  the  mental  powers.  The  principal  means  adopted  for  this 
purpose  consisted  in  the  practical  distinction,  every  where  made  in  treating 
inflected  words,  between  the  root,  or  ground-form,  and  the  termination. 


4  PREFACE. 

The  third  ^>rominent  peculiarity  of  the  original  -rork  was  its  direct  derivatioa 
of  the  rules  of  Syntax  from  the  logical  analysis  of  sentences,  and  its  distinct 
specification  of  the  particular  use  of  each  of  the  several  words  of  which  a  sen- 
tence is  composed.  This  method  of  treating  syntax— a  method  previously  un- 
known in  the  schools  of  this  country — ^has,  since  that  period,  heen  extensively 
adopted,  and  in  some  instances  greatly  extended,  particularly  in  a  portion  of 
the  English  grammars  recently  published  in  this  country,  and  has  probably 
contributed  more  to  the  advancement  of  grammatical  science,  than  any  other 
innovation  of  modem  times. 

The  errors  noticed  in  the  original  work  have  been  corrected,  as  successive 
editions  have  issued  from  the  press,  but  no  opportunity  has  occurred,  until  the 
present,  of  thoroughly  revising  it  in  every  part  Two  years  of  continuous 
labor  have  now  been  devoted  to  its  revision,  and  to  the  purpose  of  rendering 
it  conformable  in  all  respects  to  the  advanced  position  which  it  originally 
aspired  to  occupy. 

In  all  the  modifications  which  have  now  been  made,  I  have  aimed  to  accom- 
plish these  two  purposes — to  preserve,  as  far  as  possible,  the  identity  of  the 
work,  and  at  the  same  time  to  bring  it  as  near,  as  should  be  practicable,  to  the 
present  state  of  philological  science.  Hence,  while  I  have  made  no  changes 
either  in  language  or  arrangement,  but  such  as  appeared  to  me  quite  neces- 
sary, I  have  omitted  none  which  logical  accuracy  or  requisite  fulness  of  ex- 
planation seemed  to  demand.  In  doing  even  this  it  soon  became  evident,  that 
the  changes  and  additions  must  be  more  numerous,  than  would  well  consist 
with  the  convenient  use  of  the  old  and  the  new  editions  in  the  same  classes. 
Though  not  insensible  of  the  trouble  occasioned  to  the  teacher  by  altera- 
tions in  a  familiar  text-book,  I  ^ould  not  but  suppose,  that  such  modifications 
as  the  progress  of  the  last  twenty  years  had  rendered  necessary,  would  still  be 
welcomed  by  him,  notwithstanding  the  personal  inconvenience  arising  from 
the  disturbance  of  his  previous  associations.  To  his  pupils,  who  will  have 
known  no  other  form  of  the  Grammar,  than  that  in  which  it  now  appears,  the 
work,  it  is  believed,  will  not  only  be  as  easy  of  comprehension  in  its  new,  as 
in  its  old  form,  but  in  its  practical  application  far  more  satisfactory. 

Of  the  minor  changes  and  additions  occurring  on  almost  every  page,  and 
even  of  the  occasional  rearrangement  of  small  portions  of  the  materials,  it  is 
unnecessary  to  speak  particularly.  The  student  familiar  with  former  editions 
will  at  once  detect  these  slight  modifications,  and  note  them  in  his  memory 
for  future  use ;  and  though  he  may  fail  to  find  a  rule,  exception,  or  remark  on 
the  page  where  he  has  been  wont  to  see  it,  he  will  still  meet  with  it  in  the 
same  relative  position, — in  the  same  section  and  subdivision  of  the  section  in 
which  it  formerly  appeared. 

In  the  department  of  Orthoepy  will  now  be  found  some  account  of  the  Con- 
tinental mode  of  pronouncing  Latin;  and,  by  means  of  the  joint  exhibition  of 


PREFACE.  ,  5 

this  and  of  the  Engh'sh  methods,  the  student  will  be  able  to  use  the  Grammar 
with  equal  facility,  whether  choosing  to  adhere  to  the  usual  pronunciation  of 
English  and  American  scholars,  or  preferring  that  of  the  continental  schools. 

In  the  Etj-mology  of  nouns,  no  other  alteration  need  be  specified,  exce])t  the 
introduction,  in  the  third  declension,  of  "  Rules  for  forming  the  nominative 
singular  from  the  root."  These  are  copied,  in  a  modified  form,  from  the  edi- 
tor's Fii-st  Latin  Book.  In  themselves  they  are  of  considerable  utility  in 
•showing  the  mutual  relations  between  the  sounds  of  certain  letters,  and  they 
are  also  closely  connected  with  corresponding  changes  in  some  of  the  verbal 
roots.  In  the  Etymology  of  adjectives,  besides  the  minor  modifications  already 
alluded  to,  a  few  changes  in  arrangement  have  been  made  in  those  sections 
which  relate  to  Comparison.  To  pronouns  have  been  added  some  remai'ks  on 
Pronominal  Adjectives,  which  seemed  to  require  a  more  particular  notice, 
than  they  had  heretofore  received,  both  in  their  relation  to  each  other  and 
to  the  Adverbial  Correlatives.  The  Etymology  of  particles  has  been  treated 
somewhat  more  fully  than  in  former  editions — a  fulness  especially  observable 
in  relation  to  adverbs  and  conjunctions,  and  which  was  rendered  necessary 
by  the  more  extended  treatment  of  those  particles  in  the  revised  Syntax. 

In  almost  every  section  of  the  Syntax  the  student  will  meet  with  modifica- 
tions and  especially  with  additions,  which,  as  in  other  parts  of  the  work,  are 
introduced  in  such  a  manner  as  seldom  to  interfere  with  the  references  made 
to  former  editions  in  tlie  series  based  upon  this  Grammar.  The  principal  ex- 
ception to  the  latter  remark  is  to  be  found  in  sections  247 — 251,  which  relate 
to  certain  uses  of  the  ablative. 

A  comparison  of  the  Prosody  in  the  present  and  former  editions  will  show, 
that  it  has  been  i-evised  with  minute  care  in  every  part.  Similar  attention  has 
also  been  given  to  the  Appendix,  in  which  will  be  found  some  additions  relat- 
ing to  Roman  Money,  Weights  and  Measures.  For  the  gi-ealer  convenience  of 
.he  student  the  Index  in  this  edition  has  been  much  enlarged. 

In  conclusion,  I  would  briefly  indicate  the  principal  sources  from  which 
have  been  derived  the  various  additions  and  corrections,  to  which  allusion  has 
been  made.  In  preparing  the  original  work,  the  earlier  editions  of  Zumpt's 
Grammar  were  consulted  at  almost  every  step,  and  while  frequent  use  was 
made  of  the  grammars  of  Scheller,  Grant,  Adam,  Ruddiman,  Hickie  and 
ethers,  the  treatises  of  Zumpt  were  even  then  regarded  as  the  most  valuable 
embodiment  of  the  principles  of  Latin  philology.  It  was  therefore  natuml 
and  almost  unavoidable,  in  revising  a  work  which  had  in  so  many  points  re- 
ceived both  its  form  and  its  substance  from  the  earlier  labors  of  that  distin- 
guished gi'ammarian,  to  look  to  his  maturer  works  for  many  of  the  materials 
by  means  of  which  our  original  sketch  should  be  made  more  complete. 
Accordingly  I  have  constantly  consulted  the  last  edition  c  his  Grammar, 
translated  by  Dr.  SchmitZj  and  have  freely  incorporated  in  this  edition  suoh 
1* 


6  PREFACE. 

of  its  materials,  as  were  suited  to  my  purpose  In  most  cases  his  ideas  have 
been  either  expressed  in  my  own  language,  or  in  language  so  modified  as  to 
suit  the  general  plan  of  my  work.  In  the  Etymology,  and  not  unfrequently  in 
the  Syntax  also,  the  copious  Grammar  of  Kamshom  has  furnished  valuable 
materials ;  and  the  Grammars  of  Key  and  of  Kflhner,  the  latter  translated  by 
Prof.  Champlin,  have  been  consulted  with  profit  and  satisfaction.  In  the 
sections  comprising  conjunctions,  and  especially  in  those  relating  to  gram- 
matical analysis,  I  am  happy  to  acknowledge  my  indebtedness  to  Prof.  S.  S. 
Greene  of  Brown  University.  To  the  sources  aheady  specified  I  must  add  the 
L.atin  Lexicon  of  Dr.  Freund,  in  editing  a  translation  of  which  I  had  frequent 
occasion  to  note  such  matters  fi,s  promised  to  be  of  utility  in  the  revision  of  this 
Grammar.  The  additions  in  the  Appendix  relating  to  Koman  money,  etc., 
are  taken  principally  from  Dr.  Riddle's  translation  of  Dr.  Freund's  School 
Dictionary.  To  these  references  I  will  only  add,  that  such  other  notes  re- 
lating to  Latin  philology,  as  I  have  made  during  the  past  twenty  years,  so 
far  as  they  were  adapted  to  my  purpose,  have  either  been  used  in  my  former 
occasional  corrections,  or  are  incorporated  in  the  present  edition. 

In  taking  a  final  leave  of  the  earliest  of  the  elementary  Latin  works  with 
which  my  name  has  been  associated,  and  with  which,  in  my  own  mind,  must 
ever  be  connected  the  pleasant  memory  of  my  early  fi-iend  and  associate, 
Prof.  Stoddard,  I  trust  I  shall  be  pardoned  in  commending  it  once  more  to 
the  kind  indulgence  of  the  teachers  of  this  countr/,  and  in  expressing  the 
hope  that,  in  its  present  form,  it  will  be  deemed  not  altogether  unworthy  of  a 
continuance  of  the  favor  which  it  has  so  long  received.  I  cannot  indeed  ven- 
ture to  indulge  the  hope,  that  all  the  imperfections  of  the  work  have  even  now 
been  removed,  or  that,  in  my  attempts  to  render  it  more  perfect,  I  may  not 
sometimes  have  fallen  into  new  errors ;  but  this  I  can  truly  say,  that  since  its 
first  publication  I  have  devoted  much  time  to  its  revision,  and  have  sought  to 
manifest  my  sense  of  the  kindness  with  which  it  has  been  received,  by  doing 
all  in  my  power  to  render  it  less  unworthy  (f  pubhc  "avor. 

E.  A.  ANDREWS. 

ifeto  Britain^  Conn.,  Oct.,  1867. 


CONTENTS 


Page. 
ORTHOGRAPHY. 

Letters  9 

Division  of  letters 10 

Diphthongs 10 

Puuctuation 10 

ORTHOEPY. 

Continental  pronunciation 11 

English  pronunciation 11 

Sounds  of  the  letters 11 

of  the  vowels 11 

of  the  diphthongs 12 

of  the  consonants 13 

Quantity  of  syllables 14 

Accentuation 15 

Latin  accents 15 

English  accents 16 

Division  of  words  into  syllables. ...  16 

ETYMOLOGY. 

Nouns 19 

Gender 20 

Number 22 

Cases 23 

Declensions 23 

First  declension 25 

Greek  nouns 26 

Seco'nd  declension 26 

Greek  nouns 29 

Third  declension 29 

Formation  of  nom.  sing 30 

Rules  for  the  gender 33 

oblique  cases. ...  36 

Greek  nouns 45 

Fourth  declension 45 

Fifth  declension 47 

Declension  of  compound  nouns. .  47 

Lregular  nouns 48 

Variable  nouns 48 

Defective  nouns 49 

Redundant  nouns 54 

Derivation  of  nouns 56 

Composition  of  nouns 60 

Adjectives 61 

Adjectives  of  the  first  and  second 

declensions 62 

Adjectives  of  the  third  declension  64 
Rules  for  the  obhque  cases. ...  67 


Page. 

Irregular  adjectives .   69 

Defective  adjectives 69 

Reduildant  adjectives 69 

Numeral  adjectives 70 

Comparison  of  adjectives. . ..  ^ . .  74 

Irregular  comparison 75 

Defective  comparison 76 

Derivation  of  adjectives 78 

Composition  of  adjectives 81 

Pronouns 82 

Substantive  pronouns 82 

Adjective  pronouns 83 

Demonstrative  pronouns 83 

Intensive  pronouns 85 

Relative  pronouns 86 

Interrogative  pi'onouns 87 

Indefinite  pronouns 88 

Possessive  pronouns 89 

Patrial  pronouns 90 

Pronominal  adjectives 90 

Verbs 91 

Voices 91 

Moods 92 

Tenses 93 

Numbers 95 

Persons 95 

Participles,  gerunds,  and  supines  95 

Conjugation 96 

Table  of  terminationi 98 

Sum 100 

Prosum,  Possum,  etc 102 

First  conjugation 103 

Second  conjugation 108 

Third  conjugation Ill 

Fourth  conjugation 116 

Deponent  verbs 120 

Remarks  on  the  conjugations. . .  121 

Periphrastic  conjugations 123 

General  rules  of  conjugation  ...  124 
Formation  of  second  and  third 

roots: 125 

First  conjugation 125 

Second  conjugation 129 

Third  conjugation 131 

Fourth  conjugation 139 

Irregular  verbs 140 

Defective  vex-bs 146 

Impersonal  verbs 147 


8 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 

Redundant  verb? 150 

Derivation  of  verbs 152 

Composition  of  verbs 154 

Particles 155 

ADVEuns 155 

Derivation  of  adverb? 160 

Composition  of  adverbs 162 

Comparison  of  adverbs 163 

PRErOSITIONS 163 

Prepositions  in  composition 167 

coxjuxctioxs 170 

Interjections 176 


SYNTAX. 


Sentences  and  Propositions 

Subject 

Predicate 

Apposition 

Adjectives 

Relatives 

Demonstratives,  etc 

Keflexives 

Nominative 

Subject-nominative  and  verb. 

Predicate-nominative 

Genitive 

Genitive  after  nouns 

after  partitives 

after  adjectives 

after  verbs 

of  place 

after  particles 

Dative 

Dative  after  adjectives 

after  verbs 

after  particles 


Accusative 

Accusative  after  verbs 

after  prepositions . . . 

• of  time  and  space  . . 

of  place. .  .* 

after  adjectives,  ad- 
verbs and  interjections 

Subject-accusative 

Vocative 

Ablative 

Ablative  after  prepositions 

after    certain    nouns, 

adjectives  and  verbs 

of  cause,  etc 

■  of  price 

of  time '. 

of  place 

after  comparatives 

absolute. 


Connection  of  tenses. 

Indicative  mood 

SubjunctivB  mood. . . . 


177 
178 
181 
183 
184 
189 
193 
198 
200 
200 
205 
206 
206 
211 
214 
216 
221 
222 
222 
222 
225 
230 
231 
231 
237 
239 
240 

241 
242 
243 
243 
243 

244 
246 
252 
252 
254 
255 
258 
261 
263 
265 


Page. 

Protatis  and  apodosis 268 

Subjunctive  after  particles 269 

after  qui 275 

in  indirect  questions  278 

in  inserted  clauses..  279 

Imperative  mood 2S1 

Infinitive  mood a&2 

Participles 292 

Gerunds  and  gerundives 296 

Supines 299 

Adverbs , 300 

Prepositions - 303 

Conjunctions 304 

Interjections 306 

Arrangement \ 306 

Arrangement  of  words 306 

of  clauses 310 

Analysis 312 

Parsing 313 

»  PROSODY. 

Quantity 319 

General  rules 319 

Special  rules 322 

Fii-st  and  middle  syllables .. . .  322 

Derivative  words 322 

Compound  words 324 

Increment  of  nouns 325 

Increment  of  verbs 329 

Penults  and  antepenults —  331 

Final  syllables 336 

Versification 341 

Feet 341 

Metre 342 

Verses... 342 

Figures  of  prosody 343 

Arsis  and  thesis 346 

Caesura 347 

Dilfferent  kinds  of  metre 347 

Dactylic  metre 347 

Anapaestic  metre 350 

Iambic  metre 351 

Trochaic  metre 353 

Choriambic  metre 354 

Ionic  metre 355 

Compound  metres. 356 

Combination  of  verses ^ 356 

Horatian  metres A 357 

Key  to  the  odes  of  Horace.' 359 

APPENDIX. 

Grammatical  figin*es 361 

Tropes  and  figures  of  rhetoric 363 

Roman  mode  of  reckoning  time.. .  367 

money,  weight,  etc.  370 

Abbreviations 374 

Different  ages  of  Roman  literature  374 

Writers  of  the  different  ages 375 

INDEX 378 


LATIN   GRAMMAR. 


^ 


§  1,  The  Latin  language  is  the  language  spoken  by  the  an- 
cient Romans.  Latin  Grammar  teaches  the  principles  of  the 
Latin  language.     These  relate, 

1.  To  its  written  characters ; 

2.  To  its  pronunciation  ; 

3.  To  the  classification  and  derivation  of  its  words ; 

4.  To  the  construction  of  ita  sentences  ; 

5.  To  the  quantity  of  its  syllables,  and  its  versification. 

The  first  part  is  called  Orthography ;  the  second,  Orthoepy ;  the 
third.  Etymology ;  the  fomih.  Syntax ;  and  the  fifth,  Prosody. 


1 


OETHOGRAPHY. 

$5.    Orthography  treats  of  the  letters,  and  other  characters 
f  written  language,  and  the  proper  mode  of  spelling  words. 

1.  The  Latin  alphabet  consists  of  twenty-five  let^rs.  They  have 
the  same  names  as  the  corresponding  characters  in  English.  They 
areA,  a;  B,  b;  C,  c;  D,  d ;  E,  e ;  F,  f ;  G,  g;  H,  h;I,  i;J,j; 
K,k;  L,l;  M,m;  N,n;  O,  o ;  P,p;  Q,q;  R,r;  S,s;  T,t;  U,u; 
V,v;  X,x;  Y,y;  Z,  z. 

2.  The  Romans  used  only  the  capital  letters. 

3.  /  and  j  were  anciently  but  one  character,  as  were  likewise  u  and  v. 

4.  W  is  not  found  in  Latin  words,  and  k  occurs  only  at  the  beginning  of  a 
few  words  before  a,  and  even  in  these  c  is  commonly  used,  except  in  their  ab- 
breviated form ;  as,  K  or  Kal.  for  Kalencke  or  Calendce,  the  Calends. 

5.  Y  and  z  are  found  only  in  words  derived  from  the  Greek. 

6.  H,  though  called  a  letter,  only  denotes  a  breathing,  or  aspiration. 


The  consonants  are 
divided  intx) 


10  DIPHTHONGS. PUNCTUATION.  §  3 5. 

DIVISION   OF  LETTERS. 

§  3.     Letters  are  divided  into  vowels  and  consonants. 

1.  The  vowels  are a,  ^,  i,  o,  m,  y. 

'Liquids, I,  m,  n,  r. 

r Labials, p,  b,  f,  v. 

Mutes,  ■<  Palatals, c,  g,  Ic,  q,  J. 

(Linguals,    .  .  .  .  t,  d. 

Sibilant, s. 

Double  consonants, ....  a;,  z. 
_  Aspirate, h. 

2.  Xis  equivalent  to  cs  or  gs;  z  to  ts  or  ds;  and,  except  in  com- 

f)Ound  words,  the  double  consonant  is  always  written,  instead  of  the 
etters  which  it  represents.  In  some  Greek  words  x  is  equivalent 
to  cJiS. 

Diphthongs. 

~t"     §  4.     Two  vowels,  in  immediate  succession,  in  the  same  syl- 
lable, are  called  a  diphthong. 

The  diphthongs  are  ae,  ai,  au^  ei,  cm,  oe,  oi,  wa,  uc,  ui,  uo,  uu,  and  yu 
Ae  and  oe  are  frequently  written  together,  ce,  os. 

PUNCTUATION. 

§  0»  The  only  mark  of  punctuation  used  by  the  ancients  was  a  point, 
whicli  denoted  pauses  of  «liffefent  length,  according  as  it  was  placed  at  the  top, 
the  niid<lle,  or  the  bottom  of  the  line.  The  modems  use  the  same  marks  of 
puiictnatioii,  in  writing  and  printing  Latin,  as  in  their  own  liuiguages,  and  as- 
sign to  them  the  same  power. 

ilarks  of  (/wintity  and  of  accenl  are  sometimes  found  in  Latin  authors,  espe- 
cially in  elementary  works : — 

1.  There  are  three  marks  of  quantity,  viz.  ",  -,  ";  the  first  de- 
notes that  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands  is  short ;  the  second,  that  it 
is  long ;  the  third,  that  it  is  doubtful,  that  is,  sometimes  long  and 
sometimes  short 

2.  There  are  also  three  written  accents — ^the  acute  ('),  the  grave 
(  "'),  and  the  circumflex  (").  These  were  used  by  the  old  granmia- 
rians  to  denote  the  rising  and  sinking  of  the  voice  in  the  Roman  mode 
of  pronouncing  words.  (See  §§  14  and  15.)  In  modern  elementary 
Latin  works,  the  acute  marks  the  emphatic  syllable  of  a  word,  (§  16), 
the  grave  distinguishes  certain  particles  from  other  words  spelled  in 
the  same  manner;  as,  quod,  because  ;  quod,  which  ;  and  the  c.ircum- 
flex  is  placed  over  certain  penultimate  and  final  syllables  that  are 
formed  by  contraction. 

The  diajresis  (")  denotes  that  the  vowel  over  which  it  stands  does 
not  form  a  diphthono;  with  the  preceding  vowel ;  as,  aeVf  the  air.  It 
is  used  principally  with  oc,  at,  and  oe. 


§  6,  7.  ORTHi.  EPY. SOUNDS    OF   THE   VOWELS.  11 


OKTHOEPY. 

V  §  6,     Orthoepy  treats  of  the  right  pronunciation  of  words. 

The  ancient  pronunciation  of  the  Latin  language  being  in  a  great  measxire 
lost,  the  learned,  in  modem  times,  have  applied  to  it  those  principles  which 
regulate  the  pronunciation  of  their  own  languages;  and  hence  has  arisen,  in 
different  countries,  a  great  diversity  of  practice. 

The  various  systems  now  prevalent  in  Europe,  may,  however,  be  reduced  to 
two— the  Continental  and  the  English — the  former  prevailing,  with  only  slight 
diversities,  in  most  of  the  countries  of  continental  Europe,  and  the  latter  in 
England.  Tlieir  principal  difference  is  found  in  the  pronunciation  of  the  vowels 
and  diphthongs,  since,  in  both  methods,  the  consonants  are  pronounced  in 
nearly  the  same  manner. 

The  Continental  Method. 

[According  to  this  system,  each  of  the  vowels,  when  standing  at 
the  end  of  a  syllable,  is  considered  as  having  but  one  sound,  which, 
however,  may  be  either  short  or  long.     Thus, 

Short  a,  as  in  hat.  Long  o,  as  in  no. 

Long  a,  as  in  father.  Short  u,  as  in  tub. 

Short  c,  as  in  met.  Long  u,  as  in  full. 

Long  c,  as  in  there.  se  or  oe,  as  e  in  there. 

Short  i,  as  in  sit.  au,  as  ou  in  our. 

Long  i,  as  in  machine.  eu,  as  in  feudal. 

Short  6,  as  in  not.  ei,  as  i  in  ice. 

Remark.  These  sounds  are  sometimes  slightly  modified  when 
followed  by  a  consonant  in  the  same  syllable.] 

The  English  Method. 

In  the  following  rules  for  dividing  and  pronouncing  Latin  words,  regard  has 
been  had  both  to  English  analogy  and  to  the  laws  of  Latin  accentuation.  See 
§  14  and  15.  The  basis  of  this  system  is  that  which  is  exliibited  by  Walker  in 
his  "  Pronunciation  of  Greek  and  Latin  Proper  Names."  To  pronounce  cor- 
rectly, according  to  this  method,  a  knowledge  of  the  following  particulars  is 
requisite: — 

1.  Of  the  sounds  of  the  letters  in  all  their  combinations. 

2.  Of  the  (Quantities  of  the  penultimate  and  final  syllables. 

3.  Of  the  place  of  the  accent,  both  primary  and  secondary. 

4.  Of  the  mode  of  dividing  words  into  syllables. 

OF  THE  SOUNDS  OF  THE  LETTERS. 
L  Of  the  Vowels. 

§  7.  A  vowel,  when  ending  an  accented  syllable,  has  al- 
ways its  long  English  sound ;  as, 

pa'-ter,  def-dit,  vi'-mis,  t(/-tus,  tu'-ba,  Ty^-rus ;  in  which  tJe  accented  vowels 
are  pronounced  as  in  fatal,  metre,  vital,  total,  tutor,  iyrami. 


12  SOUNDS   OP  THE  DIPHTHONGS.  -  §  8,  9. 

1.  Aj  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable,  has  nearly  the  sound 
of  a  in  father  or  in  ah,  but  less  distinct  or  prolonged ;  as,  mu'-sa, 
e-pis'-to-la,  a-cer'-bus,  Pal-a-me-des  ;  pronounced  mu'-zah,  etc. 

2.  E,  o,  and  u,  at  the  end  of  -an  unaccented  syllable,  have  nearly 
the  same  sound  as  when  accented,  but  shorter  and  less  distinct ;  as, 
re'-te,  vo'-lo,  u'-su-L 

3.  (a.)   /  final  has  always  its  long  sound ;  as,  qui,  au'-di,  le-gct-tu 

Reu.  1.  The  final  t  of  tibi  and  sibi  has  its  short  sound. 

(&.)  /,  at  the  end  of  an  unaccented  syllable  not  final,  has  an  indis- 
tinct sound  like  short  e;  as,  Fa'-bi-us  (fa'-be-us),  phi-los'-o-phus  (phe- 
los'-o-phus). 

Exc.  /  has  its  long  sound  in  tiie  first  syllable  of  a  word  the  second  of  which 
is  accented,  when  it  either  stands  alone  before  a  consonant,  as  in  ird(/-ne-^tSf  oar 
ends  a  syllable  before  a  vowel,  as  inJi-e^-baiH. 

Rex.  2.    Y  is  always  prononnced  like  t  in  the  same  situation. 

§  8,  A  vowel  has  always  its  short  English  sound,  when  fol- 
lowed by  a  consonant  in  the  same  syllable ;  as, 

mag'-nus^  rt^-mam^fin'-go^  hoc^fus^^,  cyg'nus,  in  which  the  vowels  are  pro- 
nounced as  in  magnet,  seldom,  Jirnsh,  copy,  lustre,  symbol. 

ExcEPTiox  1.  A,  when  it  foUows  qu  before  dr  and  rt,  has  the 
sounds  of  a  in  quadrant  and  in  quart ;  as,  qua'-dro,  quad-ra-gin'-ta, 
quar'-tus.  In  otiier  connections  a  before  r  has  the  sound  of  a  in 
part ;  as,  par-ti-ceps,  ar'-ma  ;  except  when  followed  by  another  r,  as 
in  par-ri-ci-da. 

Exc.  2.  Es,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  is  pronounced  like  the  English 
word  ease  ;  as,  ig'-nes,  au'-des. 

Exc.  3.  Os,  at  the  end  of  plural  cases,  is  pronounced  like  ose  in 
dose  ;  as,  nos,  il'-los,  dom'-i-nos. 

Exc.  4.  Post  is  pronounced  like  the  same  word  in  English ;  so 
also  are  its  compounds  ;  as,  post' -quam,  post' -e-a  ;  but  not  its  deriva- 
tives ;  as,  pos-tre-mus. 

Exc.  5.  E,  %  and  y  before  final  r,  or  before  r  in  a  syllable  not  final,  when 
followed  in  the  next  svllable  by  any  other  consonant,  except  r,  have  the  sound 
of  c  and  %  in  the  English  words  her  and  jJr ;  as,  fer,  fert,  fer^ti-Us ;  hir,  hir^- 
CM,  myr^-ius. 

n.    Op  the  Diphthongs. 

§  O.  Ae  and  oe  are  always  diphthongs  unless  separated  by  diae- 
resis. They  are  pronounced  as  e  would  be  in  the  same  situation  ;  as, 
ce'-tas,  ces'-taSj  pce'-na,  ois'-ti'um. 

1.   Ai,  ei,  oi,  and  yi,  usually  have  the  vowels  pronounced  separately.  * 
When  they  are  accented,  and  followed  by  another  vowel,  the  i  is 
pronounced  like  initial  y,  and  the  vowel  before  it  has  its  long  sound ; 
as,  Maia,  Pompeius,  Troia,  Harpyia ;  pronounced  Msi'-ya,  Pom-pe'- 
yus,  Tro'-ya,  Har-py'-ya. 


§  10,  11.  SOUNDS    OF   THE   CONSONANTS.  18 

Remark  1.  Ei,  when  a  diphthong  and  not  followed  by  another  vowel,  is 
pronounced  like  i ;  as  in  /lei,  om'-neia. 

2.  Au,  when  a  diphthong,  is  pronounced  like  aw  ;  as,  laus^  au-rum, 
pronounced  laws,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  termination  of  Greek  proper  names,  the  letters  au  are  pro- 
nounced separately;  as,  Men-e-ld-'^m. 

3.  Eu,  when  a  diphthong,  is  pronounced  like  long  u  ;  as,  Tieu,  Or- 
pheus (or'-phuse),  Eu-phra-tes.  ^ 

Rem.  3.  The  letters  eu  are  pronounced  separately  in  the  terminations  eus 
and  eum  of  Latin  nouns,  and  of  all  adjectives,  whether  Greek  or  Latin,  except 
neuter ;  as,  ur^-ce-us,  me'-vs,  mef-um,  e-um.  In  other  situations  they  form  a 
diphthong;  as,  Eur^d'-pa,  The'seus,  e'-Jieu. 

4.  Ua,  ue,  ui,  uo,  uu,  when  diphthongs,  are  pronounced  like  tea, 
toe,  etc. ;  as,  Un'-gua,  que-ror,  sua'-de-o,  quo'-tus,  e'-quus.  They  are 
always  diphthongs  after  q,  usually  also  ai&r  g,  and  often  after  s. 

5.  Ui  in  cui  and  huic,  when  monosyllables,  is  pronounced  like  loi,  and  by 
some  like  long  i. 

Itl.    Op  the  Consonants. 

§  10.     The  consonants  have,  in  general,  the  same  power  in 
Latin  as  in  English  words. 
The  following  cases,  however,  require  particular  attention. 

C- 

C  has  the  sound  of  s  before  e,  i,  and  y,  and  the  diphthongs  cb,  cb, 
and  eu ;  as,  ce'-do,  ci'-hus,  Cce'-sar,  cce'-lum,  ceu,  Cy'-rus.  In  other 
situations,  it  has  the  sound  of  k;  as,  Ca-to,  cru'-dus,  lac. 

1.  CJi  has  always  the  sound  of  ^;  as,  cAarto  (kar'-tah),  macAtna 
(mak'-e-nah). 

Exc.  C,  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable,  before  i  followed  by  a 
vowel,  and  also  before  eu  and  yo,  has  the  sound  of  «A;  as,  soda  (so'-ehe-ah), 
caduceus  (ca-du'she-us),  Sicyon  (sish'-e-on). 

Bemake.  In  the  pronunciation  of  the  ancient  Romans,  the  hard  sound  of  c  and  g  seemB 
to  have  been  retained  in  all  their  combinations. 

G  has  its  soft  sound,  like  y,  before  c,  t,  and  y,  and  the  diphthongs 
€R  and  02 ;  as  ge'-nus,  ag'-i-lis,  Gy'-ges,  GcB-tu-li.  In  other  situations, 
it  has  its  hard  sound,  as  in  bag,  go. 

Exc.  When  g  comes  before  g  soft,  it  coalesces  with  it  in  sound;  as,  agger 
(aj'-er),  exaggeratio  (ex-aj-e-ra'-she-o). 

IS. 

§  11«     S  has  generally  its  hissing  sound,  as  in  so,  thus. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  When  si  followed  by  a  vowel  is  immediately  preceded  by  a 
consonant  in  an  accented  syllable,  the  s  has  the  sound  of  sh ;  as,  Per^-ti-n 
(per'-she-a). 


14      QUANTITIES    OP   PENULTIMATE    AND    FINAL    SYLLABLES. 

(6.)  But  when  si  or  zi  followed  by  a  vowel  is  immediately  preceded  by  ao 
accented  vowel,  the  s  or  z  has  the  sound  of  zh;  as,  As-^a'si-a  (as-pa'-zhe-ah), 
Sa-ba'-or-a  (sa-ba'-zhe-ah). 

Note.  In  a  few  proper  names,  s  preceded  by  a  vowel  in  an  accented  syllable  and  follow- 
ed by  I  liefore  another  vowel,  has  the  sound,  not  of  zA,  but  of  sh  ;  as,  A'si-a  (a'-fihe-a) :  BO 
Sosia,  TheoUosia^  Lysias. 

Exc.  2.  5,  at  the  end  of  a  word,  after  c,  <c,  aw,  J,  m,  n,  and  r,  has 
the  sound  of  z  ;  as,  res,  cc5,  laus^  trahs^  hi-mns,  lenSj  Mars. 

English  analogy  has  also  occasioned  the  »  in  Cce^sar,  cce-su'-ra,  mi^-ser,  mf/- 
sa,  7'e-sid'-u-um,  cau'-sa^  ro'-sa,  and  their  derivatives,  and  in  some  other  words, 
to  take  the  sound  of  z.  Cczs-cu-ref-a,  and  the  oblique  cases  of  Caesar^  retain  the 
hissing  sound ;  so  likewise  the  compounds  of  tram  ;  as,  tran$'-e-o. 


§  IS.  1.  Tj  following  or  ending  an  accented  syllable  before  i 
followed  by  a  vowel,  has  the  sound  ofsh;  as,  ratio  (ra'-she-o),  Suljpi- 
tins  (sul-pish'-e-us). 

Exc.  T,  in  such  case,  retains  its  hard  sound  (a^  after  s,  t,  or  x ;  as,  SalAug^- 
ti-us,  Bitft'-ti-i,  Sex'-ti-tis:  (b)  in  proper  names  in  iion  and  tyon;  as,  FAt-rut'-irOn^ 
Ani-phic'-ty-on  ;  aud  (c)\n  old  infiuitives  in  er;  as,  Jle</-ti-er,  iatfiec'-U. 


2.  X,  at  the  beginning  of  a  syllable,  has  the  sound  of  2;  at  the  end, 
that  of  ks ;  as,  Xenophon  (zen'-o-phon)  ;  axis  (ak'-sis). 

Exc.  1.  When  ex  or  «a:  is  followed  by  a  vowel  in  an  accented  syllable,  x 
has  tlie  sound  of  gz;  as,  exemplum  (eg-zem'-plum),  t«?-o'-n-t«  (ug-zV-re-us), 
inexhnustus  ( in-eg-zaus'-tus ). 

Exc.  2.  A",  endhig  an  accented  syllable  before  i  followed  by  a  vowel,  and 
before  u  ending  a  syllable,  has  the'  power  of  ksh;  as,  noxiui  (nok'-she-us), 
pexui  (pek'-shu-i). 

Remark.  Ch  and  ph,  before  tA,  in  the  beginning  of  a  word,  are  silent;  as,  Chthonia 
(tho'-iii-a).  Phihin  (thi'-a).  Al.«o  in  the  following  combinations  of  consonants,  in  the  be. 
ginning  of  word-s  of  Greek  origin,  the  first  letter  is  net  sounded: — mne-7non^-l-ca,  gnaf- 
vus,  tnu'sis,  Cte^si-aSf  Ploi-e^nce'-us,  psai'4o. 

OF   THE    QUANTITIES    OF   THE   PEMILTIMATE   AND 
FINAL  SYLLABLES. 

§  13.  1.  Tlie  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  the  relative  time  oc- 
cupied in  pronouncing  it. 

2.  A  short  syllable  requires,  in  pronunciation,  half  the  time  of  a 
long  one. 

Rem.  The  pentdtimate  syllable,  or  penult,  is  the  last  syllable  but  one.  The  antepenult 
Is  the  last  syllable  but  two. 

The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  generally  to  be  learned  firm  the  rules  of  prosody,  §5  282 — 
801 ;  but  for  the  conTenience  of  the  student,  the  folloT.ing  general  rules  are  heze  La- 
Berted:— 


8.   A  vowel  before  another  vowel  or  A  is  short. 
4.  Diphthongs,  not  beginning  with  «,  are  long. 


§  14,  15.  ACCENTUATION.  15 

5.  A  vowel  before  a:,  z,  /,  or  any  two  consonants,  except  a  mute 
followed  by  a  liquid,  is  long  by  position,  as  it  is  called. 

6.  A  vowel  naturally  short  before  a  mute  followed  by  a  liquid  is 
common,  L  e.  either  long  or  short. 

In  this  Grammar,  when  the  quantity  of  a  pennlt  is  determined  by  one  of  the  preceding 
rules,  it  is  not  marked;  in  other  cases,  except  in  dissyllables,  the  proper  mark  is  written 
over  its  vowel. 

'Jo  pronounce  Latin  words  correctly,  it  is  necessary  to  ascertain  the  quantities  of  their 
last  two  syllables  only;  and  the  rules  for  the  quantities  of  final  syllables  would,  for  this 
purpose,  be  unnecessary,  but  for  the  occasional  addition  of  enclitics.  As  these  are  gen- 
erally mono.«yllables,  and,  for  the  purpose  of  accentuation,  are  considered  as  parts  of  the 
words  to  which  they  are  annexed,  they  cause  the  final  .syllable  of  the  original  word  to 
become  the  penult  of  the  compound.  But  as  the  enclitics  begin  with  a  consonant,  the 
final  vowels  of  all  words  ending  with  a  consonant,  if  previously  short,  are,  by  the  addi- 
tion of  an  enclitic,  made  long  by  position.  It  is  neces.«ary,  therefore,  to  learu  the  quan- 
tities of  those  final  syllables  only  which  end  with  a  vowel. 

OF   ACCENTUATION. 
I.   Of  Latin  Accents. 

§  I4r«      1.   Accent,  in  Latin,  signifies  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  voice  in 

f)ronouncing  the  syUables  of  a  Latin  word.  It  is  a  general  rule  of  the  Latin 
aiiguage,  that  every  word  has  its  accent.  The  enclitics,  however,  have  no  ac- 
cent of  their  own,  but  they  modify  the  accent  of  the  words  to  whicii  tliey  are 
annexed,  and  prepositions  lose  their  accent,  when  they  precede  the  cases  which 
they  govern. 

2.  The  Latin  language  has  three  accents,  the  acute  ('),  or  rising  tone,  the 
grave  ( ^ ),  or  falling  tone,  and  the  circumflex  ^ ),  composed  of  the  acute  and  the 
grave,  i.  e.  of  tlie  rising  and  the  falling  tone. 

3.  A  monosyllable,  when  short  by  nature,  takes  the  acute,  when  long  by  nature,  the 
circumtlex  accent;  as,  pix^  it,  pars;  dos,  jus,  spSs. 

4.  In  words  of  two  syllables,  the  penult  is  always  accented ; 
as,  pd'ter,  md'-ter,  pen'-na. 

Rem.  1.  Words  of  two  syllables  have  the  circumflex  accent,  when  the  vowel  of  the  pe- 
nult is  naturally  long  and  that  of  the  last  syllable  short;  as,  RH-md^mfi-sd,  Id-cd .  jh-rts ; 
if  otherwiise,  they  have  the  acute;  as,  hH^-mS,  di^as,  Ro'-ma  (abl.),  and  ar^-tS,  in  which 
a  is  long  only  by  position. 

5.  In  words  of  more  than  two  syllables,  if  the  penult  is  long, 
it  is  accented  ;  but  if  it  is  short,  the  accent  is  on  the  antepenult ; 
as,  a-mi'-cus,  dom'-l-Jius. 

Rem.  2.  When  the  accent  of  a  word  of  more  than  two  syllables  falls  upon  the  penult, 
It  may  be  either  the  circumflex  or  the  acute  according  as  the  last  syllable  is  shorter  long. 
The  antepenult  can  take  no  accent  except  the  acute,  and  in  no  case  can  the  accent  be 
drawn  farther  back  than  to  the  antepenult. 

Exc.  V^ocatives  of  tlie  second  declension  in  i,  instead  of  le,  from  nominatives 
in  ins,  and  genitives  in  i,  instead  of  «,  are  accented  as  they  would  be,  if  the  re- 
jected letters  were  annexed,  i.  e.  with  the  acute  upon  the  penult,  even  wlien 
it  is  short;  as,  Vl)'-(jil-i ;  Vfi-le'-ri,  in-fje'-ni.  So,  also,  the  compounds  of  yacio 
with  words  which  are  not  prepositions ;  as,  cal-t'fd'-cit,  tep-e-faf-cit. 

§  15.  If  the  penult  is  common,  the  accent,  in  prose,  is  upon 
the  antepenult ;  a.--,  vol'-n-cris,  phai-' -e-tra,  ib'-t-que :  but  genitives 
in  ncs,  in  which  i  is  common,  accent  their  penult  in  prose ;  as 
Urm'-us,  is-ti'-us. 


16  DIVISION  OP  "WOBDS.  §  16-18. 

Rex.  8.  All  the  syllables  of  a  Latin  word,  except  that  on  which  the  acute  or  circum- 
flex accent  falls,  are  supposed  to  have  the  grave  accent,  and  were  pronounced  with  the 
lower  tone. 

1.  The  rules  for  the  accentuation  of  compound  and  simple  words 
are  the  same;  as,  se-cum,  sub'-e-o.  • 

2.  In  accentuation,  the  enclitics  que,  ne,  ve,  and  also  those  which 
are  annexed  to  pronouns,*  are  accounted  constituent  parts  of  the  words 
to  which  they  are  subjoined ;  as,  t'-to,  it'-a-que  ;  vi^um^  vi-rum'-que. 

n.  Of  English  Accents. 

§  16.  Accent,  in  English,  is  a  particular  stress  of  voice  upon 
certain  syllables  of  words.   Cf.  §  5,  2. 

According  to  the  English  method  of  pronouncing  Latin,  a  word  may  have 
two,  three,  or  even  four  accents.  That  accent  which  is  nearest  to  the  termina- 
tion of  the  word,  and  which  always  corresponds  in  position  with  the  Latin  ac- 
cent, is  called  the  primary  or  principal  accent,  and  ttie  secondary  accent  is  that 
which  next  precedes  the  primary.  The  third  and  fourth  accents,  in  like  man- 
ner, precede  the  secondary,  and  are  subject  in  all  respects  to  the  same  rules; 
as,  pd'-ter,  maf-ier,  ser-md'-nes,  domf-i-ms ;  pe^c^-ii4u7n,  conf^-jur^a'-ti-o,  oj^'^- 
por-4vif^-ni4d'-tes,  ex-€r''^^-<i4a'''^ti-on''-i-busf-qu6. 

1.  If  only  two  syllables  precede  the  primary  accent,  the  secondary 
accent  is  on  the  first ;  as,  mod"-e-ra-tus,  tol"-e-rab'-t-lis. 

2.  If  three  or  four  syllables  stand  before  the  primary  accent,  the 
secondary  accent  is  placed,  sometimes  on  the  first,  and  sometimes  on 
the  second  syllable;  as,  de-mon"-stra-han-tur,  ad"~o4es-cen-ti-a. 

3.  Some  words  which  have  only  four  syllables  before  the  primary 
accent,  and  all  which  have  more  than  four,  have  three  accents ;  as, 
mod'"^-ra"-ti-o-niSf  tol"'-e-ra-^U"-i-o-rem^  ex-er"'~ci-ta"-tirO-nis. 

DIVISION  OF  WORDS  INTO  SYLLABLES. 

VOWELS. 

§  17.  Every  Latin  word  is  to  be  divided  into  as  many  syllables, 
as  it  has  separate  vowels  and  diphthongs. 

Remark.  Li  the  following  rules,  the  term  vowd  includes  not  only  smgle 
vowels,  but  diphthongs ;  and  when  a  particular  vowel  is  mentioned,  a  diph- 
thong, also,  ending  with  that  vowel  is  intended. 

CONSONANTS. 

SPECIAL    RULES. 

§  18«  Remark.  The  followmg  special  rules,  relating  to  particular  letters 
or  to  particular  combinations  of  letters,  are  in  all  cases  to  be  regarded  rather 
than  the  general  rules,  §§  19 — ^23,  when  the  latter  are  inconsistent  with  the 
former. 

1.  jET,  when  standing  alone  between  two  vowels,  is  always  joined 
to  the  vowel  that  foUows  it. 
Thus,  mi^-hi,  tra'-h&-re,  c(/-hors,  co'^-kor-ta^-ti-o. 

•  These  are  &,  met,  pte,  ce,  cine,  and  dem;  as,  tute,  egdmet,  nuapte,  hicce,  hkchu,  idem. 


§  19-21.       DIVISION    OP    WORDS. — SIMPLE    WORDS.  17 

2.  Ch,  ph,  and  th,  in  the  division  of  words  into  syllables,  are  con- 
sidered, not  as  separate  letters,  but  as  single  aspirated  mutes,  and 
hence  are  never  separated. 

Thus,  A-chW-les,  Ach"-ra-dY-na,  Neph'-^-le,  Te^-ihys, 

.  3.    GU  til  an^l  thl,  when  standing  alone  between  any  two  vowels, 
unless  the  first  be  «,  and  bl  after  u  are  always  separated. 

Tims,  ^(/'-le,  Aff4au'-^tis,  At'-las,  ath-lef-i-cus  ; — Ftib'-lt-uSf  Pub-li(/-6-la,  res- 
pvb'-ll-ca. 

4.  In  writing  syllables,  a:,  when  standing  alone  between  two  vowels, 
is  united  to  the  vowel  before  it,  but,  in  pronouncing  such  syllables, 
its  elementary  sounds  are  separated. 

Thus,  sax'-um  ( sak'-sum) ;  ax-iV-la  (ak-sil'-lah) ;  ex-emf-plum  (eg-zem'-plum) ; 
ux-o'-ri-us  (ug-zo'-re-us). 

GENERAL   RULES. 

I.    Simple  Words. 

§  10.     A. — A  single  Consonant  between  two  Vowels. 

1.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  between  the  last  two 
voioels  of  a  word,  or  between  the  vowels  of  any  two  unaccented  syl- 
lables, must  be  joined  to  the  latter  vowel. 

Thus,  t  in  pcY-ier  and  au'-tem ;  th  in  osf-ther ;  cl  in  Ei-er^-d-cles ;  q  in  a'-qua  ; 
cr  in  d'-cris  and  vol'-ii-cris  ;  chr  in  a'-chras ;  r  in  toV'-e-ra-bil'-i-us  ;  m  in  et"-y- 
mo-lZ-gi-a  ;  IXnamf^-bu-ld-W-ri-us;  and  gr  in  per^^-e-gri-na'-ti-o.  Respecting 
ch  and  th  cf,  §  18,  2. 

Exc.    TW-i  and  siV-i  are  commonly  excepted. 

§  30.  2.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  before  the 
vowel  of  an  accented  syllable,  must  be  joined  to  the  accented  vowel. 

Thus,  t  in  i-tin'-e-ra ;  d  in  vi-de'-to;  th  in  ce-ihe'-ri-us ;  cl  in  Eu-clV-des  and 
Jler^'-a-de'-a ;  gr  in  a-ares'-ti$  and  a-gric^-d-la  ;  pr  m  ca-pre'-d-lus  ;  q'm  a-qua'- 
ri-us ;  and  phr  in  Eu-priraftes. 

§  31.  3.  A  single  consonant  after  the  vowel  of  any  accented 
syllable,  except  a  penult,  must  be  joined  to  the  accented  vowel. 

Thus,  m  in  dom'-i-nus  and  domf'-i-na'-ti-o ;  i  in  paV-e-ra ;  th  in  Scyth^-i-a ; 
and  q  in  aq'-ui-la  (ak'-we-lah),  and  Aq'^-ui-ta'-ni-a  (ak'^-we-ta'-ne-«h). 

4.  When  a  mute  with  Z  or  r  follows  the  vowel  of  any  accented 
syllable,  except  the  penult,  the  mute  is  to  be  joined  to  the  accented 
vowel. 

Thus,  cr  in  ac'-H-tcr,  a&^-ri-m(/-ni-a ;  tr  in  def'-ri-menf-tum ;  pr  in  cap'-ri- 

ges,  cap"-ri-Tnul'-gus,  phi  in  Paph'^-la-go'-ni-a ;  and  phr  in  Aph'^-ro~dis'-i-a. 
espectmg  phi  and  phr  cf.  §  18,  2. 

Exceptions  to  the  3d  and  4th  Rules. 

-*<;:;  Exc.  1.  A  single  consonant,  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  after  an  accent- 
ed a,  e,  or  o,  and  before  two  vowels  the  first  of  which  is  e,  i,  or  y, 
must  be  joined  to  the  syllable  following  the  accent. 

2* 


18  COMPOUND  WORDS. — ETYMOLOGY.      §  22-24. 

Thus,  d  in  ra'-cU-tts,  toe'-tU-um,  m^'-di-a'-ior ;  r  in  hxf-rerO^  Ca^'-ry-af-te$ ; 
ch  in  bra^-chi^m ;  q  in  re^-qui-es,  re^^-qni-es^-co ;  tr  in  paf-tri-us,  CE-no'-ti-i-a  ; 
and  r  and  I  in  cef'-re-df-U-<i. 

'^-     Exc.  2.   A  single  consonant  or  a  mute  with  I  or  r,  after  an  accent- 
ed M,  must  be  joined  to  the  vowel  following  it. 

Thns,  r  in  Ivf-H-dus,  au'-re-us;  cr  in  Ei/-cri-tus  ;  gl  in  jvf-glans  ;  and  pt  in 
Nai/-j>U-us,  duf-pU-co,  and  du''-pU-ca'-iirO.    Cf.  §  18,  3. 

§  S^.     B. — TWo  Consonants  between  two  Vowels, 

Any  two  consonants,  except  a  mute  followed  by  Z  or  r  in  the  cases 
before  mentioned,  when  standing  between  two  vowels,  must  be  sepa- 
rated. 

Thus,  rp  in  cor^-ptis,  rm  in  for' -ma  and  aer-m^nus ;  rv  in  ca-ter^-va;  sc  in 
ad-o4es'-cens ;  nn  in  an^-4ius  ;  phth  in  aph'-ma  ;  cch  in  Ba</-chus  and  Ba&^-cha- 
na'-li-a :  and  <AZ  in  aih-le^-ta. 


.X 


C. — 2%ree  or  four  Consonants  between  two  J^ywels. 

1.  When  three  consonants  stand  between  any  two  vowels,  the  last, 
or,  if  that  be  Z  or  r  after  a  mute,  the  two  last,  are  joined  to  the  latter 
vowel. 

Thus,  mpt  in  emp'-ior,  ad-emp'-ii-o ;  str  m.  fernes^-tra ;  mpl  in  ex-em^-plum ; 
rihr  in  ar-thrl'-tis. 

2.  When  four  consonants  stand  between  two  vowels,  two  are  joined 
to  each  vowel ;  as,  nstr  in  trans-trum. 

n.  Compound  Words. 

§  33*  1.  In  dividing  a  compound  word  into  syllables  the  com- 
ponent parts  are  to  be  separated,  if  the  former  part  ends  with  a  con- 
sonant ;  as,  db-es'-se^  in'-ers,  cir'-cum-er'-ro,  su-per-est^  sub'-i-tus,  prce- 
ter'-e-a,  trans-X-tur^  sub'-stru-o.  So,  also,  if  a  consonant  is  inserted  to 
prevent  hiatus,  it  is  joined  to  the  preceding  vowel ;  as,  prod'-e-o,  red'- 
e-o,  sed-U'-i-o. 

2.  But  if  the  former  part  either  ends  with  a  vowel,  or  has  dropped 
its  termination,  it  is  to  be  divided  like  a  simple  word ;  as,  de/'-e-ro, 
dil'-i-genSj  be-nev-o-lus,  prces'-to,  eg'-o-met ; — po'-tes,  po-tes'-tis,  an"-i- 
mad-ver'-tOj  ve'-ne-o  (from  venum,  eo),  mag-nan -i-mus^  am-bd'-geSj 
lon-goB-vus. 


ETYMOLOGY. 

§  34.     1.   Etymology  treats  of  the  different  classes  of  words, 
their  derivation,  and  their  various  infle  ;*tions. 

2.   The  classes,  into  which  words  are  divided  in  reference  to  their  significa- 
tion, are  called  Parts  of  Speech, 


§  25, 26.  NOUNS.  19 

--  3.  The  parts  of  speech  in  Latin  are  eight — Substantive  or 
Noun,  Adjective,  Pronoun,  Verb,  Adverb,  Preposition,  Conjunc- 
tion, and  Interjection. 

4.  The  first  four  are  inflected;  the  last  four,  which  are  sometimes 
called  Particles,  are  not  inflected,  except  that  some  adverbs  change 
their  termination  to  express  comparison. 

Rem.  Substantives,  pronouns,  and  adjectives  are  often  included  by  grammarians  un- 
der the  general  term  nouns;  but,  in  this  Grammar,  the  word  noun  is  used  aa  synony- 
mous with  substantive  only. 

\  §  25,  1.  To  verbs  belong  Participles,  Gerunds,  and  Supines, 
which  partake  of  the  meaning  of  the  verb,  and  the  inflection  of  the 
noun. 

%■-  2.  Inflection,  in  Latin  grammar,  signifies  a  change  in  the  ter- 
mination of  a  word.  It  is  of  three  kinds — declension,  conjuga- 
tion, and  comparison. 

3.  Nouns,  adjectives,  pronouns,  participles,  gerunds,  and  supines, 
axe  declined;  \erb3  a,TG  conjugated,  a,nd  adjectives  and  adverbs  are 
compared. 

NOUNS. 

§  26.     1.   A  substantive  or  noun  is  the  name  of  an  object. 

2.  A  proper  noun  is  the  name  of  an  individual  object ;  as, 
Caesar  ;  Roma,  Rome ;  Tiberis,  the  Tiber. 

3.  A  common  or  appellative  noun  is  the  name  of  a  class  of 
objects,  to  each  of  which  it  is  alike  applicable ;  as,  homo,  man  or 
a  man  ;  avis,  a  bird ;  quercus,  an  oak ;  leo,  a  lion ;  mendacium, 
a  falsehood. 

4.  A  collective  noun  is  one  which,  in  the  singular  number,  de- 
notes a  collection  of  individuals  ;  as,  exercitus,  an  army. 

Rem.  1.  The  following  are  examples  of  nouns  used  as  collectives,  viz.  ezerctttts,  gens^ 
juventus,  multitudo,  nobitUas,  plebs,  popUlus,  turba,  vis,  and  vulgus. 

5.  An  abstract  noun  is  the  name  of  a  quality,  action,  or  other 
attribute ;  as,  bonitas,  goodness  ;  gaudium,  joy ;  festinatio,  haste. 

Rem.  2.  A  concrete,  in  distinction  from  an  abstract  noun,  is  one  which  denotes  an  ob- 
ject that  has  an  actual  and  independent  existence ;  as,  Roma,  hdmo,  populus,  ferrum. 

6.  A  material  noun  is  the  name  of  a  substance  considered  in 
the  gross ;  as,  lignum,  wood  ;  ferrum,  iron  ;  cibus,  food. 

Rem.  3.  Proper,  abstract,  and  material  nouns  become  common,  when  era- 
ployed  to  denote  one  or  more  of  a  class  of  objects.  A  verb  in  the  infinitive 
mood  is  often  used  as  an  abstract  noun 

7.  To  nouns  belong  gender,  number,  and  case. 

Kem.  4.  Adjectives  and  participles  have  likewise  different  genders,  num- 
bers, and  cases,  corresponding  to  those  of  nouns. 


20  GENDER.  §  27-29. 

.     GENDER. 

§  27,  1.  The  gender  of  a  noun  is  its  distinction  in  regard  to 
sex. 

2.  Nouns  have  three  genders — ^the  masculine^  the  feminine^  and 
the  neuter,. 

3.  The  gender  of  Latin  nonns  is  either  natural  or  grammatical. 

4.  Those  nouns  are  natunilly  masculiue  or  ferauiiue,  which  are  used  to  de- 
signate the  sexes;  as,  rtV,  a  man;  muUer,  a  woman. 

0.  Those  are  grammatically  masculine  or  feminine,  which,  though  denoting 
objects  that  are  neither  male  nor  female,  take  adjectives  of  the  form  appropriat- 
ed" to  nouns  denoting  the  sexes. 

Thus,  domlnus,  a  lord,  is  naturally  masculine,  because  it  denotes  a  male;  but  sermo^ 
speech,  is  grammatically  masculine,  because,  though  not  indicative  of  sex,  it  takes  an 
adjectiTe  of  that  form  which  is  appropriated  to  nouns  denoting  males. 

6,  The  grammatical  gender  of  Latin  nouns  depends  either  on  their  significa- 
tion, or  on  their  declension  and  termination.  The  following  are  the  general  rules 
of  gender,  in  reference  to  signijication.  Many  exceptions  to  them,  on  account 
of  lermination,  occur:  these  will  be  specified  under  the  several  declensions. 

§  S8.  ]\L\scuLiXES.  1.  Names,  proper  and  appellative,  of 
all  male  beings  are  masculine ;  as,  Homerus,  Homer ;  pater,  a 
father ;  consul,  a  consul ;  equus,  a  horse. 

As  proper  names  usually  follow  the  gender  of  the  general  name  under  which  they  are 
comprehended;  hence, 

2.  Names  of  rivers,  winds,  and  months,  are  masculine,  because 
Jluviusy  ventus,  and  mensis,  are  masculine ;  as,  Tiberis,  the  Tiber ; 
AquUo,  the  north  wind ;  AprUis,  April. 

£j:c.  Styx  and  some  names  of  rivers  in  a  and  e  are  feminine.  §§  62,  and  41, 1. 

8.  Names  of  mountains  are  sometimes  masculine,  because  mons  is  mascu- 
line; as,  O/Arys,  a  mountain  of  Thessaly;  but  they  usually  follow  the  gender 
of  their  tennuiation ;  as,  hie*  Atkis,  hcec  Ida^  hoc  ^ratte. 

§  29.  Feminines.  1.  Names,  proper  and  appellative,  of 
all  female  beings  are  feminine ;  as,  Helena,  Helen ;  mater,  a 
mother ;  juvenca^  a  heifer. 

2.  Names  of  countries,  towns,  trees,  plants,  ships,  islands,  poems, 
and  gems,  are  feminine  ;  because  ierra^  urhs,  arbor,  planta,  ndvis,  in- 
sula, fabula,  and  gemma,  are  feminine  ;  as, 

^;7r/;j/M5,  Egj-pt;  Corinihus,  Corinth ; /n'ru5,  a  pear-tree;  nardm,  spikenard; 
Cmtauriis,  the  ship  Centaur;  Sdmos,  the  name  of  an  island;  £uniUkus,  the 
Eunuch,  a  comedy  of  Terence;  ameihystus,  an  amethyst. 

Exc.  Names  of  countries  and  islands  in  um,  i,  and  (plur.)  a,  orum,  are  neuter. — Names 
of  towns  in  r.  orum  ;  four  in  o,  onis,  viz.  Tricslno,  Hippo,  Narbo,  and  Sidmo,  with  Tunes, 
TuTfis.  and  Canupus,  are  masculine.  Names  of  towns  in  vm  or  on, »,  and  (plur.)  o.  Cnim; 
those  in  e  and  ur  of  the  third  declension,  indeclinable  nouns  in  »  and  y,  and  .«ome  barba/- 
rou.s  names,  as  SuUnd,  Hispid  and  GufJir  are  neuter. — Names  of  trees  and  plants  in  er  of 
the  third  declension,  (]  60).  with  ioccarand  rCburare  neuter.  A  few  names  in  vs, »',  (§  60), 
witli  iilfftsier.  pinaster,  Styrax  and  unido  are  masculine. — A  few  names  of  gems  in  us,  ij 
are  also  masculine. 

*  To  disting^sh  the  pender  of  Latin  nouns,  grammarians  write  hie  before  the  m  Acu. 
Ujm,  kcK  befm*  the  lemudue,  and  koe  before  tis)d  neuter.     - 


§  30-32. 


COMMON   AND    DOUBTFUL    GENDER. 


21 


§  SO.  Common  and  Doubtful  Gender.  Some  words  are 
either  masculine  or  feminine.  These,  if  they  denote  things  animate, 
are  said  to  be  of  the  common  gender ;  if  things  inanimate,  of  the 
doubtful  gender. 

Of  the  former  are  parens,  a  parent;  hos,  an  ox  or  cow:  of  the  latter,  Jinis,  an 
end. 


The  following  nouns  are  of  the  common  gender: — 


Adolescens,  a  youth. 
Aff  inis,  a  relative  by  mar- 
riage. 
Ales,  a  bird. 
Antistes,  a  chief  priest. 
Auctor,  an  author. 
Augur,  an  augur. 
Bos,  an  ox  or  cow. 
Ciinis,  a  dog. 
Civis,  a  citizen. 
Gomes,  a  companion. 
Conjux,  a  spouse. 
Consors,  a  consort. 
Convlva,  a  guest. 
Gustos,  a  keeper. 
Dux,  a  leader. 


Exsul,  an  exile. 
Grus,  a  crane. 
Hospes,  a  guest,  a  host. 
Hostis,  an  enemy. 
Index,  an  informer. 
Infans,  an  infant. 
Interpres,  an  interpreter. 
Judex,  a  judge. 
Juvenis,  a  youth. 
Martyr,  a  martyr. 
Miles,  a  soldier. 
Municeps,  a  burgess. 
Mus,  a  mouse. 
Nemo,  nobody. 
Obses,  a  hostage. 
Patruelis,  a  cousin. 


Palumbes,  a  wood-pigeon. 
Parens,  a  parent. 
Par,  a  mate. 
Praeses,  a  president. 
Praesul,  a  chief  priest. 
Princeps,   a  prince    or 

princess. 
Serpens,  a  serpent. 
Sacerdos,    a  priest    or 

priestess. 
Satelles,  a  life-guard. 
Sus,  a  swine. 
Testis,  a  witness. 
Vates,  a  prophet. 
Vema,  a  slave. 
Vindex,  an  oA^enger. 


The  following  hexameters  contain  nearly  all  the  above  nouns: — 

Conjux,  atque  parens,  princeps,  patruelis,  et  infans, 
Aflf Inis,  vindex,  judex,  dux,  miles,  et  hostis. 
Augur,  et  antistes,  juvenis,  conviva,  sacerdos, 
Muni-^e-ceps,  vates,  adolescens,  cIvis,  et  auctor, 
Gustos,  nemo,  comes,  testis,  sus,  bos-^Me,  canis-^we, 
Pro  consorte  tdrl  par,  prsesul,  vema,  satelles, 
Mus-^t^e  obses,  consors,  interpres,  et  exsiil,  et  hospes. 

§  31.  1.  When  nouns  of  the  common  gender  denote  males, 
they  take  a  masculine  adjective ;  when  they  denote  females,  a  fem- 
inine. 

2.  The  following  are  either  masculine  or  feminine  in  sense,  but 
masculine  only  in  grammatical  construction : — 

Artlfex,  an  artist. 
Auspex,  a  soothsayer. 
Eques,  a  horseman. 


Latro,  a  robber. 


Fur,  a  thief. 

Heres,  aw  ftetV.  Liheri,  children. 

Homo,  a  man  or  woman.     PSdes,  a  footman. 


^  To  these  may  be  added  personal  appellatives  of  the  first  declen- 
sion ;  as,  advena,  a  stranger ;  and  some  gentile  nouns ;  as,  Persa,  a 
Persian. 

§  3d*     1.    The  following,  though  masculine  or  feminine  in  sense, 
are  feminine  only  in  construction : — 


Copiae,  irocps. 
Gustodise,  guards. 
Excubiae,  sentinels. 


OpSrse,  laborers. 


VigUiae,  watchmen. 


22  EPICENES. NEUTERS. ^NUMBEK.  §  33-35. 

2.  Some  nouns,  si^nifj-ing  persons,  are  neuter,  both  in  their  termi- 
nation and  construction ;  as, 

Acroama,  a  buffoon.         Mancipium,  )  „  „»  ^^  Scorttmi,        )  „  ^„„,ju„*^ 

AuxUia,  auxii;!aries.        Servitium,    j  «  ^^^^         Prostibulum,  J  <' Prostitute, 

3.  (a.)  In  some  personal  appellatives  masculines  and  feminines 
are  distinguished  by  different  terminations  affixed  to  the  same  root 
The  masculines  end  in  m5,  er,  o,  for,  etc. ;  the  feminines  in  a  or  trix; 
as,  corjuus,  coqua ;  magister,  magistra  ;  leno,  lena;  inventor^  inventrix] 
tibicen,  tibicma;  dvus,  avia  ;  rex,  reglna;  poeta,  po'etria. 

(h.)  So  also  in  some  names  of  animals ;  as,  equus,  equa ;  gallus 
gallina ;  leo,  lea  and  lecena.  Sometimes  the  words  are  wholly  differ^ 
ent ;  as,  taurus,  vacca. 

4.  Some  names  of  animals  are  sometimes  masculine  and  sometimes 
feminine  without  regard  to  dillerence  of  sex ;  as,  anguis,  serpens^  (lor- 
ma,  talpa,  tigrls,  coluber  and  colubra,  etc. 

§  33»  Epicexes.  Names  of  animals  which  include  both  sexes, 
but  admit  of  an  adjective  of  one  gender  only,  are  called  epicene. 
These  commonly  follow  the  gender  of  their  terminations. 

Tluis,  i>asser,  a  sparrow,  con^s,  a  raven,  are  masculine;  aqulla,  an  eagle,  wi- 
pes, a  fox,  are  i'eniinine;  though  each  of  them  is  used  to  denote  both  sexes. 

Note.  This  class  includes  the  names  of  animals,  in  which  the  distinction  of  sex  ifl 
Kldnm  attended  to.  When  it  is  necessary  to  mark  the  sex,  mas  ox  femlna  is  usually 
added. 

§  34.  Neuters.  Nouns  which  are  neither  masculine  nor 
femmine,  are  said  to  be  of  the  neuter  gender ;  such  are, 

1.  All  indeclinable  nouns ;  as,  fas,  nefas,  nVi'd,  gwnmi,  pondo. 

2.  Names  of  letters ;  as,  o  longum,  long  o.  But  these  are  some- 
times feminine,  litera  being  understood. 

3.  Words  used  merely  as  such,  without  reference  to  their  meaning ; 
as,  paler  est  dissylldbum ;  pater  is  dissyllabic. 

4.  All  infinitives,  imperatives,  clauses  of  sentences,  adverbs,  and 
other  particles,  used  substantively ;  as  scire  tuum,  your  knowledge ; 
vitlmum  vale,  the  last  farewell;  lioc  diu,  this  (word)  diu. 

Uemahk.  1.  Words  derived  from  the  Greek  retayi  the  gender  which  they 
have  in  that  language. 

Rem.  2.  Some  nouns  have  different  genders  in  the  singular  and  plural,  and 
are  culled  htteror/ejituus  nouns.    See  ^  92. 

NUMBER. 

§  35#  1.  (a.)  Number,  in  nouns,  is  the  form  by  which  they 
denote  whether  they  represent  one  object  or  more  than  one. 

(h.)  Latin  nouns  have  two  numbers, — the  singula}  and  the  plural, 
— which  are  distinguished  by  their  terminations.  The  singular  num- 
ber denotes  one  otyect ;  the  plural,  more  than  one. 


§  36-39.       PERSON. CASES. — DBCLENSIONS.  28 

PERSON. 

2.  The  person  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  is  the  character  sustained 
by  tlie  object  which  it  represents,  as  being  the  speaker,  the  per- 
son addressed,  or  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of. 

Hence  there  are  three  persons.  The  speaker  is  of  the  firsit  person, 
the  person  addressed  is  of  the  second  person,  and  the  person  or  thing 
spoken  of  is  of  the  third  person. 

CASES. 

§  36.     Many  of  the  relations  of  objects,  -which,  in  Enghsh,  are 
denoted  by  prepositions,  are,  in  Latin,  expressed  by  a  change  of  ter- 
-^r-ijaination. 

\  Cases  are  those  terminations  of  nouns,  which  denote  their  re- 
lations to  other  words.  Latin  nouns  have  six  cases  ;  viz.  Nomi- 
native, Genitive,  Dative,  Accusative,  Vocative,  and  Ablative. 

Re:mark.  Though  there  are  six  cases  in  each  number,  no  noun  has  in  each 
number  so  many  difi'erent  terminations. 

§  ST.  1.  The  nominative  denotes  the  relation  of  a  subject  to  a 
finite  verb  ;  as,  ego  scribo,  I  write.     Caius  dicii,  Caius  says. 

2.  Tlie  genitive  denotes  origin,  possession,  and  many  other  rela- 
tions, which,  in  Enghsh,  are  expressed  by  the  preposition  of  or  by 
the  possessive  case ;  as,  Vita  Ccesaris,  the  life  of  Coisar,  or  Ccesar's 
hfe. 

3.  The  dative  denotes  that  to  or  for  which  any  thing  is,  or  is  done ; 
as,  Ille  mihi  Ubrum  dedit^  He  gave  the  book  to  me. 

4.  The  accusative  is  either  the  object  of  an  active  verb,  or  of  cer- 
tain prepositions,  or  the  subject  of  an  infinitive. 

5.  Tlie  vocative  is  the  form  appropriated  to  the  name  of  any  ob- 
ject w^liich  is  addressed.  • 

6.  The  ablative  denotes  privation,  and  many  other  relations,  espe- 
cially those  expressed  in  English  by  the  prepositions  with,  from,  in, 
or  by. 

Eemark.  The  nominative  and  vocative  are  sometimes  called  casiis  recH^ 
i.  e.  the  uninflected  cases;  and  the  others,  casus  obllqui;  i.  e.  the  obhque  or  in- 
flected cases. 

DECLENSIONS. 


-t 


S 


§  38.  The  regular  forming  of  the  several  cases  in  both  numbers, 
by  annexing  the  appropriate  terminations  to  the  root,  is  called  de- 
clension. 

The  Latin  language  has  five  declensions  or  modes  of  declining 
nouns,  distinguished  by  the  termination  of  the  genitive  sin<5ular, 
which,  in  the  first  declension,  ends  in  ce,  in  the  second  in  i,  in  the 
third  in  is,  in  the  fourth  in  us,  and  in  the  fifth  in  et 

§  «S9«  The  following  table  exhibits  a  comparative  view  of  the  termina- 
tions or  case-endings  of  the  five  declensions. 


24 


TERMINATIONS. 


§40. 


L 

Nom. 

a, 

Gen. 

8B, 

DaL 

ae, 

Ace. 

am, 

Voc. 

-  a, 

Abl, 

a. 

M. 


Tekminations. 
Singular. 

n. 


N. 


us,  er,  um, 

i» 

o, 

um, 
e,    er,  um, 

o. 


nL 

M. 

N. 

or,  etc.  Q, 

etc. 

is. 

ij 

em,(im),e 

,etc. 

or,  etc.  e, 

etc. 

e,  (i.) 

IV. 


JVbm. 

ae. 

5,               5, 

Gen. 

arum, 

orum, 

Dot. 

is, 

is, 

Ace. 

as, 

OS,             a, 

Voc. 

88, 

i,               a. 

Abl. 

is. 

is. 

m: 

us, 

ui, 
um. 


us, 


N. 


ua. 


es, 

ei, 

ei, 

em, 

es. 


uiim, 
ibus,    (ubus), 
us,               ua, 

erimi, 
ebus, 
es, 

us,              ua, 
ibus,    (ubus). 

es, 
ebus. 

Plural. 

es,      a,  (la), 
um,     (ium), 

ibus, 
es,      a,  ria), 
es,      a,  (ia), 

ibus. 


Remarks. 

§  4:0«  1.  The  terminations  of  the  nominative,  in  the  third  dedension, 
are  very  numerous.    See  §^  55,  58,  62,  66. 

2.  The  accusative  singular  of  masculines  and  feminines,  always 
ends  in  m. 

3.  The  vocative  singular  is  like  the  nominative  in  all  Latin  nouns, 
except  those  in  W5  of  the  second  declension. 

4.  The  nominative  and  vocative  plural  always  end  alike. 

5.  The  genitive  plural  always  ends  in  um. 

6.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  always  end  aU^e ; — in  the  1st 
and  2d  declensions,  in  is ;  in  the  3d,  4th,  and  5th,  in  hus. 

7.  The  accusative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines,  always  ends 
in  s. 

8.  Nouns  of  the  neuter  gender  have  the  accusative  and  vocative 
like  the  nominative,  in  both  numbers ;  and  ihese  cases,  in  the  plural, 
always  end  in  a. 

9.  The  1st  and  5th  declensions  contain  no  nouns  of  the  neuter  gender,  and 
the  4th  and  5th  contain  no  proper  names. 

10.  Every  inflected  word  consists  of  two  parts — a  root,  and  a  ter- 
mination. The  root  or  crude  form,  is  the  part  which  is  not  changed 
by  inflection.  The  termination  is  the  part  annexed  to  the  root  The 
root  of  a  declined  word  may  be  found  by  removing  the  termination  of 
any  of  its  oblique  cases.  The  case  commonly  selected  for  this  pur- 
pose is  the  genitive  singular. 

11.  The  preceding  table  exhibits  terminations  only.  In  the  fifth  declension, 
the  c  of  the  final  syUable,  though  unchanged,  is  considered  as  belonging  to  the 
termination. 


§  41-43. 


FIRST   DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS. 


25 


FIEST  DECLENSION. 

\      §  41.     Nouns  of  the  first  declension  end  in  a,  e,  as,  es.  Thoge 
in  a  and  e  are  feminine ;  those  m  as  and  es  are  masculine. 

Latin  nouns  of  the  first  declension  end  only  in  a.     They  are  thus  declined  :— 


Singular. 


Norn,  mu'-sa, 
Gen.  mu'-sae 
Dat.  mu'-sas 
Ace.  mu'-sai 
Voc.  mu'-sa, 
AU.     mu'-sa, 


a  muse  ; 

of  a  muse  ; 

to  a  muse  ; 

a  muse  ; 

0  muse  ; 

with  a  muse. 


Plural. 
Nam.  mu'-sae, 
Gen.  mu-sa'-rum, 
Dat.  mu'-sis, 
Ace.  mu'-sas, 
Voc.  mu'-saB, 
AU.     mu'-ffls, 


muses  ; 
of  muses , 
to  muses 

muses  • 

0  muses  ; 

tvith  muses. 


k 


In  like  manner  decline 
Au'-la,  a  hall.  Lit'-e-ra,  a  letter.  Sa-git'-ta,  an  arrow, 

Cu'-ra,  care.  Lus-cin'-i-a,  a  nightingale.     Stel'-la,  a  star. 

Ga'-le-a,  a  helmet.     Mach'-i-na,  a  machine.  T6'-ga,  a  gown. 

In'-su-la,  an  island.   Pen'-na,  a  feather,  a  quill.    Vi'-a,  a  wag. 

Note.  As  the  Latin  language  has  no  article,  appellative  nouns  may  be  ren- 
dered either  with  or  without  the  EngUsh  articles  a,  an,  or  the,  according  to  their 
connection. 

Exceptions  in  Gender. 

§  4:2.  1.  Names  proper  and  appellative  of  men,  as,  SuUa,  Cinna ;  poeta, 
a  poet;  nauta,  a  sailor;  and  names  of  rivers,  though  ending  in  a,  are  mascu- 
line :  §  28, 1  and  2.  But  the  following  names  of  rivers  have  been  used  as  femi- 
nine :  viz.  Albula,  Allia,  Druentia,  Garumna,  Eimera,  Mairdna,  Mosella,  Trebia. 
Lethe  is  always  feminine. 

Ossa  and  (Eta,  names  of  mountains,  are  mascidine  or  feminine. 

2.  Eadria,  the  Adriatic  sea,  dama  in  Virgil  and  Statins,  and  fa§?a  in  Virgil, 
are  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

§  4:3.  Genitive  singular.  1.  The  poets  sometimes  formed  the 
genitive  singular  in  ai ;  as,  aula,  gen.  aulai. 

2.  Familia,  after  pater,  mater,  flius,  or  f Ha,  usually  forms  its  gen- 
itive in  as ;  as,  mater  familias,  the  mistress  of  a  family ;  gen.  matris- 
familias ;  nom.  plur.  matres familias  or  familiarum.  Some  other 
words  anciently  formed  their  genitive  in  the  same  manner. 

Genitive  plural.  The  genitive  plural  of  patronymics  in  es,  of  sev- 
eral compounds  in  cola  and  gena,  and  of  some  names  of  nations,  is- 
sometimes,  especially  in  poetry,  formed  in  um  instead  of  arum ;  as, 
^neddum,  Coelicolum,  terrigenum,  Lapithum.  So  amphorum^  drach- 
mum,  for  amphorarum,  dmchmdrum. 

Dative  and  Ablative  plural.  The  following  nouns  have  sometimes 
abus  instead  of  is,  in  the  dative  and  ablative  plural,  especially  when 
it  is  necessary  to  distinguish  them  from  the  same  cases  of  masculines 
in  MS  of  the  second  declension  having  the  same  root ;  as,  Jiliis  et  f /id- 
bus,  to  sons  and  darghters. 


26  GREEK  NOUNS. SECOND    DECLENSION.  §  44-46. 

Dea,  a  goddess.  Equa,  a  mare. 

Fiiia,  a  daughter.  Mula,  a  slie  vitUe. 

The  use  of  a  similar  termination  in  antma,  astna,  liberta,  ndta,  conserva,  and 
some  other  words,  rests  ou  iulerior  authority. 

Greek  Nouns. 

§  44.  Nouns  of  the  first  declension  in  e,  as,  and  es,  and  some 
also  in  d,  are  Greek.  Greek  nouns  in  a  are  declined  like  musa,  ex- 
cept that  they  sometimes  have  an  in  the  accusative  singular;  as, 
Ossa;  ace.  Ossa7n,  or  Ossan. 

Greek  nouns  in  e,  as,  and  es,  are  thus  declined  in  the  singular  number: — 

N.  Pe-nel'-o-pe,  N.  iE-ne'-as,  N.  An-chl'-ses, 

G.    Pe-nel'-o-pes,  G.   ^-ne'-ae,  G.    An-chi'-sse, 

D.   Pe-nel'-o-pas,  D.  ^-ue'-se,  B.   An-chi'-sae, 

Ac.  Pe-nel'-o-peu,  Ac.  .^-ne'-am  or  an,  Ac.  An-chi'-sen, 

V.    Pe-nel'-o-pe,  V.   ^E-ne'-a,  V.    An-chi'-se  or  a, 

Ab.  Pe-nel'-o-pe.  Ab.  .£-ne'-a.  Ab.  An-chi'-sa  or  e. 

§  4t>.      In  like  manner  decline 

Al'-o-e,  aioes.  Ti-a'-ras,  o  turban. 

E-pit'-o-me,  an  abridgment.  Co-me'-tes,  a  comet. 

This'-be.  Dy-nas'-tes,  a  ruler. 

Bo'-rf -as,  the  north  wind.  Pri-am'-I-des.  a  son  of  Priam. 

lll'-das.  Py-ri'-tes,  a  kind  of  stone. 

1.  !Most  proper  names  in  es,  except  patronymics,  follow  the  third  declension; 
but  in  the  accusative  they  often  have  both  em  and  era,  and  in  the  vocative  both 
es  hirI  e.     See  §^  80,  iv,  and  81. 

2.  Greek  nouns  of  the  fii-st  declension,  which  admit  of  a  plural,  are  declined 
in  that  inimber  like  the  phiral  of  musa. 

S.  The  Latins  frequentlv  change  the  terminations  of  Greek  nouns  in  es  and 
i  into  a  ;  as,  Atrults,  Atrlda,  a  sou  of  Atreus;  Ptrses,  Persn,  a  Persian;  geo- 
metres,  gfomefrn,  a  geometrician ;  Circe,  Circa  ;  epitdine,  ejntdmn  ;  grammatics, 
grammallca,  gronmiar;  rhttorlce,  rhetorica,  oratorj'. — So  aLsO  tiaras,  tiara. 

SECOND  DECLENSION. 

§  46.  Nouns  of  the  second  declension  end  in  er,  tr,  uSy  t/Wi, 
OS,  on.  Those  ending  in  um  and  on  are  neuter;  the  rest  are 
masculine. 

Nouns  in  er,  us,  and  um,  are  thus  declined : — 


A  lord. 
N.    dom'-i-nus, 
G.    dom'-i-nl, 
D.    dom'-I-no, 
Ac.  dom'-i-num, 
V.    dom'-i-ne, 
Ab.  dom'-i-no. 


Singular. 

A  son-in-law. 

A  field. 

A  kingdom. 

ge'-ner, 

a-gor, 

reg'-num, 

gen'-e-ri, 

a'-gri, 

reg'-ni, 

gen'-e-ro, 

a'-gro, 

reg'-no, 

gen'-e-rum, 

a'-griim, 

reg'-num, 

ge'-ner, 

a'-gor, 

reg'-num. 

gen'-ero. 

a'-gro. 

reg'-no. 

§  47-49.  SECOND    DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS.  27 


Plural. 

N. 

dom'-i-ni, 

geii'-e-ri, 

a'-gri, 

reg'-na, 

G. 

doin-i-no'-rum, 

gen-e-ro'-rum, 

•a-gro'-riim, 

reg-no'-riim, 

D. 

dom'-i-nis, 

gen'-c-ris, 

a'-gris, 

reg'-nis, 

Ac. 

dom'-i-nos, 

gen'-e-ros, 

a'-gros, 

reg'-na, 

V. 

dom'-i-ni, 

gen'-e-ri, 

a'-gri, 

reg'-na, 

Ah. 

dom'-i-nis. 

gen'-e-ris. 

a'-gris. 

reg'-nis. 

Like  dominus  decline 

An'-i-mus,  the  mind.  Fo'-cus,  a  hearth.  Nu'-me-rus,  a  number. 
Clip'-e-us,  a  shield.  Gla'-di-us,  a  sword.  O-ce'-a-nus,  the  ocean. 
Cor'-vus,  a  raven.      LH'-cus,  a  grove.        Tr5'-chus,  a  trundling-hoop. 

Note.    Nouns  in  us  of  the  second  declension  are  the  only  Latin  nouns,  whose  nomina- 
tive and  Tocatiye  singular  differ  in  form.    See  §  40,  R.  3. 

§  4T#  A  few  nouns  in  er,  like  gener^  add  the  terminations  to  the 
nominative  singular,  as  a  root.  They  are  the  compounds  of  gero  and 
fero ;  as,  armiger,  -eri,  an  armor-bearer ;  Lucifer ^  -eri,  the  morning 
star ;  and  the  following : — 

A-dul'-ter,  an  adulterer.    Li'-ber,  Bacchus.  Pu'-er,  a  lay. 

CeK-O-ber,  a  Celdberian.  Lib'-e-ri,  (plur.),  children.  So'-cer,  a  father-in-law. 
F-ber,  a  Spaniard.  Pres'-by-ter,  an  elder.  Ves'-per,  the  evening. 

MuV-d-ber,  Vulcan,  sometimes  has  this  form. 

§  4L8.  1.  All  other  nouns  in  er  reject  the  e  in  adding  the  termi- 
nations, (§  322,  4),  and  are  declined  like  ager ;  thus, 

A'-per,  a  wild  boar.  L!'-ber,  a  book.  Al-ex-an'-der. 

Aus'-ter,  the  south  wind.         Ma-gis'-ter,  a  master.  Is'-ter. 

Fa'-ber,  a  workman.  On'-a-ger,  a  wild  ass.  Teu'-cer. 

2.  Vir,  a  man,  with  its  compounds,  and  the  patrial  Trevir^  (the  only 
nouns  in  tV,)  are  declined  like  gener. 

Like  regnum  decline 

An'-trum,  a  cave.        Ex-em'-plum,  an  example.  Prse-sidM-um,  a  defence. 

A'-tri-ura,  a  hall.         Ne-go'-ti-um,*  a  business.  Sax'-iim,  a  rock. 

BeF-lum,  war.  Ni'-trum,  natron.  Scep'-trum,  a  sceptre. 

Exceptions  in  Gender. 

§  4:0.      1.   The  following  nouns  in  us  and  os  are  feminine : — 

Abyssus,  a  bottomless  pit.  Dialectos,  a  dialect.  lliltos,  vermilion. 

Alvus,  the  belly.  Diphthongus,  a  diphthong.  Phanis(os),  a  lif/ht^ouse. 

Antidotus,  an  antidote.  Donms,  a  house,  home.         Plinthus,   the  base  of  a 

Arct08(us),  the  Northern  Eremus,  a  desert.  column. 

Bear.  Humus,  the  ground.  Vaunus,  a  comrfan. 

Carbasus,  a  sail. 

2.  Greek  nouns  in  ddus  {f]  oSoc\  and  m^tros,  are  likewise  feminine;  as, 
synddus,  an  assembly ;  diametros,  a  diameter. 

*  Pronounced  n6-g</-she-wn.    See  i  12. 


28         SECOND  DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS.     §  50-53. 

§  ^Oa      Names  of  countries,  towns,  trees,  plants,  etc.  are  feminine.     See 
h  29,  2. 
Yet  the  following  names  of  plants  are  masculine: — 

Acanthus,  bear's-fooi.  Ebiilus,  an  elder.  Riibus,  a  blacTcherry-bvjsh. 

Amarantus,  amaranth.  Helleborus,  hellebore.  Tribulus,  a  caltrops. 

A=;paragus,  asparagus.  Intubus,  endive. 

Calamus,  a  reed.  Juncus,  a  bulrush.  And  sometimes 

Carduus,  a  thistle.  Raphanus,  a  radish.  Amaracus,  marjoram. 

Diimus,  a  bramble.  Rhamnos,  buck-thoi'n.  Cytisus,  snail<lover. 

Oleaster  and  pinaster,  names  of  trees,  are  also  masculine. 

The  following  names  of  gems  are  also  masculine : — 

Beryllus,  a  beryl.  Chrysoprasus,  chrysqprase.      So  also, 

Carbunciilus,  a  carbuncle.    Op^us,  opal.  Pyropus,  g<Mbrome, 

ChrysoUthus,  chrysolite,  and  smaragdus,  an  emerald,  are  doubtful. 

Karnes  of  females  in  um  are  feminine :  §  29,  1 ;  as,  mea  Glycerium,  Ter. 

Names  of  trees  and  plants  in  um  are  generally  neuter;  as,  opium,  parsley; 
aconitum,  wolf's  bane. 

Campus,  Pontus,  HeUespontus,  Isthmus,  and  all  plural  names  in  t  of  countries 
and  towns  are  masculine.    Ahydus{os)  is  doubtful. 

Names  of  countries  and  towns  ending  in  um,  or,  if  plural,  in  a,  are  neuter; 
as.  Ilium  or  lUon ;  Ed>dta.na,  orum. 

§  Sm.»     The  following  are  doubtfal,  but  more  frequently  masculine: — 

Balanus,  a  date.        Grossus,  an  unripe  Jig.        Phaselus,  o  Ught  vessel. 
Barbltos,  a  lute.        Pamplnus,  a  vinerleaj. 

Aidmus,  an  atom,  and  cdlus,  a  distaff,  are  doubtfal,  but  more  frequently  femi- 
nine. 

Pelagus,  the  sea,  and  virus,  poison,  are  neuter. 

Vulgus,  the  common  people,  is  neuter,  and  rarely  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

§  52.  Genitive  singular.  When  the  genitive  singular  ends  in  ft, 
the  poets  frequently  contract  it  into  I ;  as,  ingeni,  for  ingenii. 

Vocative  singular.  The  vocative  of  nouns  in  tw  is  sometimes  like 
the  nominative,  especially  in  poetry ;  as,  Jiuvius,  Latlnus,  in  VirgiL 
So,  audi  tu,  popiUus  Albdnus.   Liv. 

Proper  names  in  lus  omit  e  in  the  vocative  ;  as,  Horatius,  Hordti; 
Virgilius,  Virgtli. 

Filius,  a  son,  and  genius,  a  guardian  angel,  make  also  ^li  and  geni.  Other 
nouns  in  itts,  including  patrials  and  possessives  derived  from  proper  names, 
form  their  vocative  regularly  in  e;  as,  Ddius,  Delie ;  Tirynthius,  TirytUliie; 
Laertius,  Laertie. 

§  ^3*  Genitive  plural.  The  genitive  plural  of  some  nouns  of 
the  second  declension,  especially  of  those  which  denote  money,  weight 
and  measure,  is  commonly  formed  in  um,  instead  of  orum:  §  322,  4. 

Such  are  particularly  nummum,  sestertium,  denarium,  medimnum,  jugerum, 
modium,  talentum.  The  same  form  occurs  in  other  words,  especially  in  poetry; 
as,  deum,  libirum,  Danaum ;  etc.,  and  sometimes  om  is  found  instead  of  um  ; 
85,  Achlvom.    Virg.     Cf.  §  322,  8. 


§  54,  55.  THIRD    DECLENSION.  29 

Deiis,  a  god,  is  thus  declined : — 


Sir 

igular. 

Plural 

N. 

de'-us, 

N. 

di'-i,  Ji,  or  de'-i. 

G. 

de'-i, 

G. 

de-o'-rum, 

D. 

de'-o, 

D. 

di'-is,  dis,  or  de'-is. 

Ac. 

de'-um, 

Ac. 

de'-os, 

V. 

de'-us, 

V. 

di'-i,  di,  or  de'-i, 

Ah. 

de'-o. 

Ah. 

di'-is,  dis,  or  de'-is. 

Jesiis,  or  lesus,  the  name  of  the  Savior,  has  um  in  the  accusative,  and  u 
in  all  the  ;  iier  oblique  cases. 

Greek  Nouns. 

§  54L,  1.  Os  and  on,  in  the  second  declension,  are  Greek  ter- 
mination?, and  are  commonly  changed,  in  Latin,  into  us  and  ion ;  but 
sometimes  both  fonns  are  in  use  ;  as,  Alpheos,  and  Alplieus ;  Illon  and 
Ilium.  Greek  names  in  ros  after  a  consonant  commonly  change  ros 
into  er ;  as,  Alexandros,  Alexander;  Teucros,  Teucer.  In  a  few  words 
ros  is  changed  to  rus ;  as,  Codrus,  kydrus,  and  once  in  Virgil,  Teucrus. 

Greek  nouns  are  thus  declined  in  the  singular  number : — 


Singular. 
N.   DeMos,  -  Andro'-ge-os, 

G.    DeMi,  An-dro'-ge-6,  or  I, 

D.    DeMo,  .    An-dro'-ge-6, 

Ac.  DeMon  or  iim,  An-dro'-ge-6,  or  on, 
V.    De'-le,  An-dro'-ge-os, 

Ab.  De'-lo.  An-dro'-ge-6. 


Barbiton,  a  lyre. 
N.   bai-'-bi-ton, 
G.  bar'-bi-tl, 
D.  biir'-bi-to, 
Ac.  baK-bi-ton, 
V.    bar'-bl-ton, 
Ab.  bar'-bi-to. 


2.  The  plurals  of  Greek  nouns  in  os  and  on  are  declined  like  those  of  domlnus 
and  regnum ;  but  the  nominative  plural  of  nouns  in  os  sometimes  ends  m  as , 
as,  canejjfidroe. 

8.  In  early  writers  some  noims  in  os  have  a  genitive  in  fi  (ow);  as,  Menandru. 
Ten 

4.  A  genitive  plural  in  on,  instead  of  drum,  occurs  in  the  titles  of  books  and 
in  some  names  of  places ;  as,  Georglcon ;  Philenon  arce.     Sail. 

5.  Greek  proper  names  in  eus  (see  §  9,  R.  3),  are  declined  like  dominus,  except 
that  the  vocative  ends  in  eu;  but  sometimes  in  the  genitive,  dative,  and  accu- 
sative also,  they  retain  the  Greek  form,  viz.  ^en.  eos,  dat.  ei  (contracted  Ft), 
ace.  M  or  ed,  and  are  of  the  third  declension.  See  §§  86,  and  306,  (1.)  So  in 
Lucretius  the  neuter  peldgus  (Greek  ^rsA^i^c?,  S5f)  has  an  accusative  plural 
pelage  for  pelagea  after  the  third  declension.  §  83, 1. — See  also  respecting  a  geni- 
tive in  i  of  some  proper  nouns  in  es,  §  73,  Rem. — Panihu  occurs  in  Virgil,  A.  2, 
822,  as  the  vocative  of  Panthus.  Cf.  \  81. 

THIRD  DECLENSION. 

§  55.  The  number  of  final  letters,  in  this  declension,  is 
twelve.  Five  are  vowels — a,  e,  i,  o,  y ;  and  seven  are  conso- 
nants— c,  I,  n,  r,  s,  t,  X.  The  number  of  its  final  syllables  ex- 
ceeds fifty. 

Rem.    The  following  terminations  bebng  exclusively  to  Greek  nouns ;  viz. 
wa,  i,  y,  Sti,  fn,  Ofi,  gn,  er,  gr,  ifi,  etc$,  yx,  inx,  ynx,  and  plurals  in  6. 
8* 


30  THIRD   DECLENSION.  §  56. 

Mode  of  declining  Nouns  of  the  Third  Declension. 

To  decline  a  word  properly,  in  this  declension,  it  is  necessary  to  know  its  gender,  its 
nominative  singular,  and  one  of  its  oblique  cases ;  since  the  root  of  the  ca«58  is  not  al- 
ways found  entire  and  unchanged  in  the  nominative.  The  case  usually  selected  for  this 
purpose  is  the  genitive  singular.  The  formation  of  the  accusative  singular,  and  of  the 
nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative  plural,  depends  upon  the  gender:  if  it  is  masculine 
or  feminine,  these  cases  have  one  form ;  if  neuter,  another. 

§  OO*  The  student  should  first  fix  well  in  his  memory  the  terminations  of  one 
of  these  forms.  He  should  next  learn  the  nominative  and  genitive  singular  of  the  word 
which  is  to  be  declined.  K  is  be  removed  firom  the  genitive,  the  remainder  will  always  be 
the  root  of  the  oblique  cases,  and  by  annexing  their  terminations  to  this  root,  the  word  is 
declined ;  thus,  rupes,  genitive  (found  in  the  dictionary)  rM;?is,  root  rup,  dative  rupi^  etc. : 
BO  ars,  gen.  artis,  root  art,  dat.  arti,  etc. ;  opus,  gen.  opgris,  root  opSr,  dat.  opiri,  etc. 

Rules   for    Forming  the  Nominative   Singular   of   the 
Third  Declension  from  the  Root. 

V     L    Roots  ending  in  c,  g ;  h,  m,  p  ;  m,  f,  J,  and  some  in  r,  add  s  to 
Torm  the  nominative ;  as,  trains,  trabs  ;  hiemls,  hiems  ;  grms,  grus. 

Remark  1.  T,  d  and  r  before  s  are  dropped;  as,  nepdtis,  nejws;  loMdia,  kins; 
Jlai-is,  flos.     So  hovis,  bos,  drops  v. 

Rem.  2.  Cand  g  before  s  form  x;  as,  rocis,  vox ;  regis,  rex.  So  vs  forms  x 
in  mris,  nix.     Cf.  \^  3,  2,  and  171,  1. 

Rem.  3.  Short  i  in  the  root  before  c,  h,  p,  t,  is  commonly  changed  to  5;  as, 
poUicis,  poUex;  coeUbis,  ccdebs;  principis,  princeps;  comitia,  comes.  So  «  is 
changed  to  ^  in  aucupis,  aiiceps. 

Rem.  4.  Short  ^  or  ^  before  r  in  neuters  is  changed  to  u ;  as,  gen^is,  genus; 
tempdris,  tempus. 

Rem.  5.  Short  e  before  r  is  changed  to  f  in  the  masculines  cineris,  cinis ; 
cucumeris,  cucumis  ;  pidveris,  pulvis ;  vomeris,  vomis. 

Rem.  6.  A  few  and  those  mostly  monosyllabic  roots  of  masculines  and  fem- 
iniiies,  not  increasing  in  the  genitive,  add  es  or  is,  instead  of  s  alone ;  as,  gen. 
rupis,  nom.  ripes ;  gen.  auris,  nom.  auris. 

Rem.  7.  A  few  neuters  add  e  to  the  root  to  form  the  nominative ;  as,  ret\s,, 
rite ;  inar\%,  mdrS. 

n.  To  roots  ending  in  I  and  n,  to  some  in  r  and  s,  and  to  those  of 
most  neuters  in  t,  no  addition  is  made  in  forming  the  nominative ;  as, 
animalis,  anXmal ;  canorv^,  canon  ;  honoris,  honor ;  assis,  as. 

Remark  1.  Final  on  and  in  in  the  roots  of  masculines  and  feminines,  become 
o  in  the  nominative ;  as,  sermmis,  sermo ;  arundims,  arundo. 

Rem.  2.  Final  tn  in  the  roots  of  neuters  becomes  eh  in  the  nominative ;  as, 
^MT7»tnis,  fiumen.     So  also  in  the  masculines,  oscen,  pecten,  tiblcen  and  tubicen. 

Rem.  3.  TV  and  br  at  the  end  of  a  root,  take  S  between  them  in  the  nomina- 
tive; as,  patris,  pater;  iTnbris,  imber.     Cf.  §§  108,  48,  and  106. 

Rem.  4.  Short  d  is  changed  to  a  in  ebdrh,  ib&r ;  femdris,  femur ;  Je^dris,  j^ 
cHr ;  and  robdris,  rdbur. 

Rem.  5.  In  the  roots  of  neuters  at  drops  t,  and  it  becomes  ui  in  the  nomina^ 
tive ;  as,  po^mdtis,  poema ;  capitis,  caput. 

Rem.  6.  Roots  of  this  class  ending  in  repeated  consonants  drop  one  of  them 
in  the  nominative ;  as,  /eZfis,  fd ;  farr\&,  far ;  assia,  as ;  bessis,  oes. 


§57. 


THIRD    DECLENSION. 


81 


The  following  are  the  two  forms  of  termination  in  this  declension: 


Singular. 

Plural 

Masc.  and  Fern.    Neut. 

Masc.  and  Fern. 

Neut. 

N.    *                 * 

N.    es, 

um,  (lu. 

G.    IS,                IS, 

G.    vm.  (ium), 

D.    i,                 i, 

D.    ibus, 

ibus, 

Ac.  em,  (im),     * 

Ac.  es, 

a,  (ia), 

V.     *                   * 

V.     es, 

a,  (ia), 

Ab.  e,  (i).           e. 

0). 

Ah.  ibus. 

ibus. 

The  asterisk  stands  for  the  nominative,  and  for  those  cases  which  are  like  it. 
§  57^.     The  following  are  examples  of  the  most  common  forms  of 
nouns  of  this  declension,  declined  through  all  their  cases. 


Honor,  lionor  ;  masc. 

Turris,  a  tower;  fern. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.     ho'-nor, 

ho-no'-res. 

N.     tur'-ris, 

tur'-res. 

G.     ho-no'-ris. 

ho-no'-rum. 

G.     tur'-ris, 

tur'-ri-nm, 

D.     ho-no'-ri. 

ho-nor'-i-bus, 

D.     tur'-ri. 

tur'-ri-bus, 

Ac.  ho-uo'-rem. 

ho-no'-res. 

Ac.  tur'-rim,  rem 

,  tur'-res, 

V.     ho'-nor. 

ho-no'-res. 

V.     tur'-ris. 

tur'-res, 

Ab.  ho-no'-re. 

ho-nor'-i-bus. 

Ab.  tur'-ri,  or  re. 

tur'-ri-bus. 

Riipes,  a 

rock;  fern.    . 

Nox,  night;  fern. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.    ru'-pes, 

ru'-pes. 

N.    nox, 

noc'-tes. 

G.    ru'-pis, 

ru'-pi-um. 

G.    noc'-tis, 

noc'-ti-mn,* 

D.     ru'-pi, 

ru'-pi-bus, 

D.    noc'-ti, 

noc'-ti-bus, 

Ac.  ru'-pem. 

ru'-pes. 

Ac.  noc'-tem, 

noc'-tes, 

V.    ru'-pes, 

ru'-pes, 

V.    nox, 

noc'-tes, 

Ab,  ru'-pe. 

ru'-pi-bus. 

Ab.  noc'-te. 

noc'-ti-bus. 

Ars,  art;  fern. 

Miles,  a  soldier  ;  com.  gen. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.     ars,^ 

ar'-tes, 

N.    mi'-les. 

mil'-i-tes. 

G.    ar'-tis, 

ar'-ti-um,* 

G.    mil'-i-tis. 

mil'-i-tum, 

D.    ar'-ti. 

ar'-ti-bus. 

D.    mil'-i-ti. 

mi-lit'-i-bus, 

Ac.  ar'-tem, 

ar'-tes. 

Ac.  mil'-i-tem, 

mil'-i-tes. 

V.    ars. 

ar'-tes. 

V.    mi'-les. 

mil'-i-tes. 

Ah.  ar'-te. 

ar'-ti-bus. 

Ab.  mir-i-t>e. 

mi-lit'-i-bus. 

Sermo,  speech;  masc. 

Pater,  a  father  ;  masc. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.    ser'-mo, 

ser-mo'-nes. 

N.    pa'-ter, 

pa'-tres, 

G.    ser-mo'-nis, 

ser-mo'-num, 

G.    pa'-tris, 

pa'-trum, 

D.     ser-mo'-ni. 

ser-mon'-i-bus, 

D.    pa'-tri. 

pat'ri-bus, 

Ac.  ser-mo'-nem 

,    ser-mo'-nes, 

Ac.  pa'-trem. 

pa'-tres, 

V.    ser'-mo. 

ser-mo'-nes. 

V.    pa'-ter, 

pa'-tres. 

Ah.  ser-mo'-ne. 

ser-mon'-i-bus. 

Ah.  pa'-tre. 

pat'-ri-bus. 

*  Pronounced  ar^she^m^  no</-she-itm.    See  $  12. 


82 


THIRD    DECLENSION. 


§57. 


Sedile,  a  seat;  nent 


Singular. 

N.  se-di'-le, 

G.  se-di'-lis, 

D.  se-dl'-li, 

Ac.  se-di'-le, 

V.  se-di'-le, 

Ab.  se-di'-lL 


Plural. 
se-dil'-i-a, 
se-dil'-i-um, 
se-dil'-i-bus, 
se-dil'-i-a, 
se-dil'-i-a, 
se-dil'-i-bus. 


Carmen,  a  verse;  neut 

Plural. 
car'-mi-na, 


Singular. 

N.  car'-men, 

G.  car'-mi-nis, 

D.  car'-mi-ni, 

Ac.  car'-men, 

V.  car'-men, 

Ab.  car'-mi-ne. 


car'-mi-num, 

car-min'-i-bus, 

car'-mi-na, 

car'-mi-na, 

car-min'-i-bus. 


Iter,  a  journey;  neut 


Singular. 
N.    r-ter, 

i-tin'-e-ris, 

i-tin'-e-ri, 

i'-ter, 

i'-ter, 

i-tin'-e-re. 


G. 
D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ab. 


Plural. 
i-tin'-e-ra, 
i-tin'-e-rum,. 
itri-ner'-i-bus, 
i-tin'-e-ra, 
i-tin'-e-ra, 
it-i-ner'-i-bus. 


Lapis,  a  stone  ;  masc. 


Singular. 
N.    la'-pis, 
lap'-i-dis, 
lap'-i-di, 
lap'-i-dem, 
la'-pis, 
lap'-i-de. 


G. 
D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ab. 


Plural. 
lap'-i-des, 
lap'-i-dum, 
la-pid'-i-bus, 
lap'-i-des, 
lap'-i-des, 
la-pid'i-bus. 


Virgo,  a  virgin ;  fem. 


N. 

G. 

D. 

Ac. 

V. 

Ab. 


Singular. 


vir  -go,  ^ 

vir'-gi-nis, 

vir'-gi-ni, 

vir'-gi-nem, 

vir'-go, 

vir'-gi-ne. 


Plural. 
"vir'-gi-nes, 
vir'-gi-num, 
vir-gin'-i-bus, 
vir'-gi-nes, 
vir'-gi-nes, 
vir-mn'-i-bus. 


Animal,  an  animal ;  neut. 


Singular. 
N.     an'-i-mal, 
G.    an-i-ma'-lis, 
D.     an-i-ma'-li, 
Ac.  an'-i-mal, 
V.     an'-i-mal, 
Ab.  an-i-ma'-li. 


Plural. 
an-i-ma'-li-a, 
an-i-ma'-li-um, 
an-i-mal'-i-bus. 
an-i-ma'-li-a, 
an-i-ma'-li-a, 
an-i-mal'-i-bus. 


Singular. 

N.  o'-pus, 

G.  op'-e-ris, 

D.  op'-e-ri, 

Ac.  o'-pus, 

V.  o'-pus, 

Ab.  op'-e-re. 


Opus,  work  ;  neut. 

Plural. 
op'-e-ra, 
op'e-rum, 
o-per'-i-bus, 
op'-e-ra, 
op'-e-ra, 
o-per'-i-bus. 


Caput,  a  head;  neiit. 


Singular. 

N.  ca'-put, 

G.  cap'-i-tis, 

D.  cap'-i-ti, 

Ac.  ca'-put, 

V.  ca'-put, 

Ab.  cap'-i-te. 


Plural. 
cap'-i-ta, 
cap'-i-tum, 
ca-pit'-i-bus, 
cap'-i-ta, 
cap'-i-ta, 
ca-pit'-i-bus. 


Poema,  a  poem ;  neut 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.    po-e'-ma,  po-em'-a-ta, 

G.    po-em'-a-tis,  po-em'-a-tum, 

D.    po-em'-a-ti,  po-e-mat'-i-bus,  or  po-em'-S-tis, 

Ac.  po-c'-ma,  po-em'-a-ta, 

V.    po-e'-ua,  po-em'-a-ta, 

Ab.  po-em'  i-te.  po-e-mat'-i-bus,  or  po-em'-a-tis. 


§  58-61.     third  declension. gender.         83 

Rules  for  the  Gender  op  Nouns  op  the  Third  Declension. 

§  5o.  Nouns  whose  gender  is  determined  by  their  signification,  accord- 
ing to  the  general  rules,  §  28 — 34,  are  not  included  in  the  following  rules  and 
exceptions. 

^  MASCULINES. 

Nouns  ending  in  o,  cr,  or,  es  increasing  in  the  genitive,  05,  and 

w,  are  masculine ;  as, 

sermo,  speech;  ddlor,  pain;/o«,  a  flower;  career;"  a,  prison;  i?es,  a  foot; 
cdnon,  a  rule. 

Exceptions  in  O. 

§  59 •  1.  Abstract  and  collective  nouns  In  io  are  feminine ;  as, 
ratio,  reason ;  legio,  a  legion. 

Eem.  1.  But  numerals  in  io;  as,  binio,  trinio,  etc.,  except  wnio,  tmity,  are 
masculine. 

2.  Nouns  in  do  and  go,  of  more  than  two  syllables,  are  feminine ; 
as,  arundo,  a  reed;  imago,  an  image.  So  also  grando,  hail.  But 
comedo,  a  glutton  ;  unedo,  the  arbute  tree  ;  and  harpdgo,  a  grappling- 
hook,  are  masculine. 

Rem.  2.  Margo,  the  brink  of  a  river,  is  doubtful.  Cupldo,  desire,  is  often 
masculine  in  poetry,  but  in  prose  is  always  feminine. 

3.  Garo,  flesh,  and  Greek  nouns  in  o,  are  femimne ;  as,  echo,  an  echo.  Biibo, 
the  owl,  is  once  feminine,  Virg.  A.  4,  462. 

Exceptions  in  ER. 

§  OO*      1.  Laver,  a  water  plant,  and  tuber,  the  tuber  tree,  are  feminine, 
but  when  the  latter  denotes  the  fruit,  it  is  masculine.    lAnter,  a  boat,  is  femi- 
nine, and  once,  in  Tibullus,  masculine.     Siser,  skirret,  is  neuter  in  the  singu- 
lar, but  masculine  in  the  plural. 
2.  The  following,  in  er,  are  neuter: — 

Acer,  a  maple-tree.  Papaver,  a  poppy.        Tuber,  a  eweUing. 

Cadaver,  a  dead  body.         Piper,  pepper.  Uber,  a  teat. 

Cicer,  a  vetch.  Slier,  an  osier.  Ver,  the  spring. 

Iter,  a  journey.  Spinther,  a  clasp.         Verber,  a  scourge. 

Laser,  assafoetida.  SUber,  a  cork-tree.      Zingiber,  ginger. 

Exceptions  in  OR. 

§  Gl.  Arbor,  a  tree,  is  feminine:  ador,  spelt;  cequor,  the  sea;  marvwr, 
marble ;  and  cor,  the  heart,  are  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  ES  increasing  in  the  genitive. 

1.  The  following  are  feminine : — 

Compes,  a  fetter.  Quies,  and  Requies,  rest.        TSges,  a  mat. 

Merces,  a  reward.  Inquies,  restlessness. 

Merges,  a  sheaf  of  com.        Seges,  growing  com. 

2.  Ales,^  a  bird;  c6mes,  a  companion;  hospes,  a  guest;  interpres,  an  inter- 
preter; miles,  a  soldier;  obses,  a  hostage ;  j?rcEses,  a  president;  and  satelles,  a 
life-guard,  are  common,  §  30.    JEs,  brass,  is  neuter. 


S4  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENDER.  §  62,  63. 

Exceptions  in  OS. 

8.  Arhos,  a  tree;  cos,  a  whetstone;  dos,  a  dowry;  eo»,  the  morning;  and 
rarely  nejx)s,  a  grandchild,  are  feminine:  sacerdos,  ctcstos,  and  bos  are  common, 
4  30:  OS,  the  mouth,  and  6s,  a  bone,  are  neuter;  as  are  also  the  Greek  words 
g»5,  epic  poetry;  and  tnelos,  melody. 

Exceptions  in  N.  • 

4.  Nouns  in  men  with  four  in  n  are  neuter — gluten,  glue;  inguen,  the  groin: 
pollen,  fine  flour;  and  unguen,  ointment. 

6.  Four  nouns  in  on^are  feminine— oecfon,  a  nightingale;  halcyon,  a  king- 
fisher; icon,  am  image;  and  sindon,  muslin. 

FEMININES. 

§  02.  Nouns  ending  in  as,  es  not  increasing  in  the  geni- 
tive, is,  ys,  aus,  s  preceded  by  a  consonant,  and  x,  are  .feminine  ; 
as, 

cetas,  age;  nubes,  a  cloud;  dru,  a  bird;  chldmy$,  a  cloak;  laus,  praise;  trabs, 
a  beam;  jpax,  peace. 

Exceptions  in  AS. 

1.  3fas,  a  male,  vas,  a  surety,  and  <m£  a  piece  of  money,  or  any  unit  divisi- 
ble into  twelve  parts,  are  masculine.  Greek  nouns  in  as,  antis,  are  also  mascu- 
line; as,  addnms,  adamant.  So  also  Melas,  the  name  of  a  river,  §  28,  2.  Areas 
and  Nomas  are  common. — 2.  Vas,  a  vessel,  the  indeclinable  nouns,  /as  and 
ne/as,  and  Greek  noims  in  as,  aiis,  are  neuter;  as,  artocreas,  a  meat-pie;  iw;#- 
ras,  a  species  of  herb. 

Exceptions  in  ES  no<  increasing  in  the  genitive. 

3.  ^ctTiaces,  a  scimitar,  and  coles  or  colis,  a  stalk,  are  masculine.  Antistes, 
palnmbes,  vdies,  and  vepres,  are  masculine  or  feminine.  Cacoetiies,  hippomdnes, 
nepenthes,  and  panaces,  Greek  words,  are  neuter. 

Exceptions  in  IS. 
§  G3.     1.  Latin  nouns  in  nis  are  masculine  or  doubtful. 

(1.)  Masc.  Q'tnis,  hair;  i^is,  fire;  J9ants,  bread;  Traanes,  (plur.),  departed 
spirits. — (2.)  Masc.  or  fem.  ^mnis,  a  river ;  cinis,  ashes;  finis,  an  end;  clunis, 
the  hamich;  canis,  a  dog;  funis,  a  rope.  The  plurals,  cineres,  the  ashes  of  the 
dead,  and  fines,  boimdaries,  are  always  masculine. 

2.  The  following  are  common  or  doubtful : — 

Anguis,  o  snake.  Corbis,  a  iasket.         Tigris,  a  tiger. 

Callis,  a  path.  PoUis,  fne  flour.        Torquis,  a  chain. 

Canalis,  a  conduit  pipe.  Pulvis,  dust. 

Contubemalis,  a  comrade.  Scrobis,  a  ditch. 

3.  The  following  are  masculine : — 

Axis,  an  axle.  Cenchris,  o  serpent.  Follis,  a  pair  ofbeUows. 

Aqudlis,  a  water-pot.  Collis,  a  hill.  Fustis,  a  club. 

Cassis,  a  net.  Cucumis,  a  cucumber.  Glis,  a  dormouse. 

Caulis,  or  )       .f,  Ensis,  o  svcord.  Lapis,  o  stone. 

Colis,        j  a  »   «c-  Fa«cis,  a  bundle.  Lemiires,  pL,  ^>ectret. 


64,  65.       THIRD  DECLENSION. GENDER.  85 


Mensis,  a  month.  Sanguis,  hhod,  Sentis,  a  brier. 

Sodalis,  a  companion. 
Torris,  a  jirehrand. 
compounds  Unguis,  a  nail. 

of  OS.  Vecris,  a  Itvtr. 


MugiliSj  a  mullet.  Semis,  or 

Orbis,  a  circle.  Semissis, 

Fhc[%  a  Jish.  Bessis, 

Postis,  a  post.  Centussis, 


Quiris,  a  Roman.  Decussis, 

Samuis,  a  Samnite.  Tressis, 


Vermis,  a  norm.  ' 
Vomis,  a  jjhutjhshare. 


4.  Names  of  male  beings,  rivers,  and  months  in  is  are  masculine  ; 
as,  Dis,  Pluto  ;  Anubis,  an  Egyptian  deity  ;  Tigris^  the  river  Tigris ; 
Aprllis,  April.     See  §  28. 

Exceptions  in  YS. 

Names  of  rivers  and  mountains  in  y$  are  masculine ;  as,  Bdlys,  OOirm.  See 
§  28,  2  and  3 

Exceptions  in  S  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

§  G4.    *  1.  Dens,  a  tooth;  ybns,  a  fountain;  mons,  a  mountain;  and  pons,. 
abridge,  are  masculine.     So  also  are  auceps,  a  bird-catcher;  chulybs.  steel; 
cliens,  a  client ;  ellqps,  a  kind  of  fish ;  epops,  a  hoopoe ;  gryps,  a  griffin ;  nydrojjs, 
the  dropsy;  merops,  a  kind  of  bird.    Budens,  a  rope,  is  masculine  and  very 
rarely  feminine. 

2.  The  following  nouns  also  are  masculine,  viz.  (a.)  these  which  are  properly 
adjectives — confiuens  and  torrens,  scil.  amms ;  occidens  and  oriens,  scii.  sol; 
(b.)  compounds  of  dens — tridens,  a  trident,  and  Udens,  a  two-pronged  mattock ; — 
but  bidens,  a  sheep,  is  feminine;  (c.)  the  parts  of  as  ending  inns;  as,  sextans, 
guadrans,  triens,  dodrans,  and  dextans. 

3.  The  following  are  common  or  doubtful : — 

Adeps,  grease.         Seps,  a  hind  of  serpent.      Serpens,  a  serpent. 
Forceps,  jnncers.     Scrobs,  a  ditch.  Stirps,  the  trunk  of  a  tree. 

Antmans  an  animal,  which  is  properly  an  adjective,  is  masculine,  fenuuine, 
or  neiiter. 

Exceptions  in  X. 

§  0^«  1.  AX.  Anthrax,  cinnabar;  cdrax,  a  raven;  cordax,  a  kind  of 
dance;  dropax,  an  ointment;  styrax,  a  kind  of  tree;  thorax,  a  breast-plate;  and 
Atax,  the  river  Aude,  are  masculine ;  Umax,  a  snail,  is  common. 

2.  EX.  Nouns  in  ex  are  masculine,  except  /cea;,  forfex,  lex,  nex,  prex, 
(obsolete  in  nom.  and  gen.  sing.),  a,nd  supellex,  which  are  feminine;  to  which 
add  (§  29)  cdrea;,  Uex,  murex,  pellex,  a,nd  vltex.  Atriplex  is  neuter  and  very 
rarely  masculine  or  feminine.  Alex,  a  fish-pickle ;  coi-tex,  bark ;  imbrex,  a  gut- 
ter-tile; obex,  a  bolt;  and  sllex,  a  flint,  are  doubtful:  senex,  an  old  person; 
grex,  a  herd;  rumex,  sorrel;  and  pumex,  pumice-stone,  are  masculine  and 
vei?y  rarely  feminine. 

3.  IX.  Cdlix,  a  cup ;  fornix,  an  arch ;  phcenix,  a  kind  of  bird ;  and  spadix, 
a  palm-branch,  are  masculine :  larix,  the  larch-tree ;  perdix,  a  partridge ;  ana 
varix,  a  swollen  vein,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

4.  OX.   Box  and  esox,  names  of  fishes,  are  masculine. 

5.  UX.    Trddux,  a  vine-branch,  is  masculine. 

6.  YX.  Bombyx,  a  silk- worm;  calyx,  the  bud  of  a  flower;  coccyx,  a  cuckoo; 
dryx,  a  wild  goat,  and  names  of  mountains  in  yx,  as  Eryx,  are  masculine. 
(fnyx,  a  box  made  of  the  onyx-stone,  and  sardonyx,  a  precious  stone ;  also, 
calx,  tlie  heel,  and  calx,  lime ;  lynx,  a  lynx,  and  sandyx,  a  kind  of  color,  are 
masculine  or  feminine. 

NoTK.     Bombyx,  when  it  signifies  sUk,  is  doubtful. 

7.  Quincunx,  sepiunx,  decunx,  deunx,  parts  of  as,  are  masctiline. 


36  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  §  66-69. 

NEUTERS. 
§  66.     Nouns  ending  in  a,  e,  i,  y,  c,  /,  t,  ar^  ur,  ics,  and  merif 
are  neuter ;  as, 

diad^ma,  a  crown;  rete,  a  net;  hydromSU,  mead;  lac,  milk;  vecRgal,  revenne; 
cdput,  the  head;  cofcar,  a  spur;  guttur,  the  throat;  pectus,  the  breast;  and  ^- 
fwen,  a  river. 

Exceptions  in  L,  C,  and  E. 

Mugil,  a  mullet,  and  aoi,  the  sun,  are  masculine.  Scd^  salt,  is  masculine  or  neuter, 
in  the  singular;  but,  in  the  plural,  it  ii  always  masculine.  Lac  is  neuter  and  rarely 
maaculine.    Praneste  is  neuter,  and  once  in  Virgil  feminine. 

Exceptions  in  AR  and  UR. 

§  67*  Furfur,  bran;  talar,  a  trout;  turiur,  a  turtle  dove;  and  vuUur,  a 
vulture,  are  masculine. 

Exceptions  in  US. 

1.  LSpus,  a  hare;  and  Greek  nouns  in  pits  (?rouf),  are  masculine;  as,  tripuSj 
a  tripod ;  but  lagopus,  a  kind  of  bird,  is  feminine. 

2.  Nouns  in  us,  having  utis,  or  udis^  in  the  genitive,  are  feminine ; 
as,  juventus,  youth ;  incus,  an  anvil. 

8.  Pecus,  -iidis,  a  brute  animal,  and  teUus,  the  earth,  are  feminine.  Pesstnus, 
and  Selinus,  names  of  towns,  are  also  feminine.    See  §  29. 

4.  Grus,  a  crane ;  mus,  a  mouse ;  and  siis,  a  swine,  are  masculine  or  feminine. 

5.  Rhus,  sumach,  is  masculine,  and  rarely  feminine. 

KULES  FOR  THE  ObLIQUE  CaSES  OF  NoUNS  OF  THE  ThIRD 

Declension. 

GENITIVE    SINGULAR. 

§  68.  1.  The  genitive  singular  of  the  third  declension  of  Latin 
nouns  always  ends  in  is,  in  Greek  nouns  it  sometimes  ends  in  as 
and  us. 


2.  Nouns  in  a  form  their  genitive  in  dtis;  as,  di-a-d^-ma,  di-a- 
dem'-a-tis,  a  crown ;  dog -ma,  dog'-ma-tis,  an  opinion. 

E. 

3.  Nouns  in  e  change  e  into  is;  93,  r^-te,  rt-iiSf  a  net ;  se-dt-le, 
se-dl'-lis,  a  seat 


4.  Nouns  in  i  are  of  Greek  origin,  and  are  generally  indeclinable ;  butAy- 
drom'-i-U,  mead,  has  Jiyd-ro-mei'-i-tis  in  the  genitive. 

o. 

§  60.     Nouns  in  o  form  their  genitive  in  onis  ;  as,  ser'-mo,  ser 
mo-nis,  speech ;  pd'-vo,  pa-vo-nis,  a  peacock. 


§  70,  71.  THIRD    DECLENSION. <JENITiyE.  37 

Remark.  Patrials  in  o  have  dnis;  as,  Macedo, -&nis ;  but  some  have  6ma, 
as,  Eburones,  etc.    See  Zd  exception  to  increments  in  0,  §  287. 

Exc.  1.  Nouns  in  do  and  go  form  their  genitive  in  mis  ;  as,  a-run- 
dOf  a-run'-di-nis,  a  reed ;  i-ma-go,  i-mag'-i-nis,  an  image. 

But  four  dissyllables — cUdo,  Mo,  ligo  and  mango;  and  three  trisyllables — 
cormdo,  unedo,  and  harpdgo,  have  mis. 

Exc.  2.  The  following  nouns,  also,  have  inis: — Apollo;  hdmo,  a  man;  nemo, 
nobody;  and  <Mr6o,  a  whirlwind. 

Giro,  flesh,  has,  by  syncope,  camis.  Anio,  the  name  of  a  river,  has  Anienis  ,• 
Nerio,  the  wife  of  Mars,  Nerienis ;  from  the  old  nominatives,  Anien,  and  Ne- 
rienes. 

Exc.  3.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  o  form  their  genitive  in  us,  and  their  other 
cases  singular,  in  o ;  as.  Dido,  gen.  Didus,  dat.  Dido,  etc. ;  Argo,  -m ;  but  they 
axe  sometimes  declined  regularly;  as.  Dido,  Didonis. 


Greek  nouns  in  y  have  their  genitive  in  yos;  as,  mXsy,  misyoSj  or,  by  contrac- 
tion, misys. 

c. 

§  #  0«  The  only  nouns  in  c^  are  af-lec,  a4e^-cis,  fish-brine,  and  lac,  Icu/- 
«w,  milk. 

L.  N.  R. 

Nouns  in  I,  n,  and  r,  form  their  genitive  by  adding  is ;  as,  con'-sfily 
con-sU-lis,  a  consul ;  cd'-nouy  can-o-nis,  a  rule ;  ho -nor,  ho-nS'-Tis, 
honor. 

So,  An'-I-mal,  an-i-ma'-lis,  an  animal,  Cal'-car,  cal-ca'-ris,  a  spur. 

Vi'-gil,  vi^-i-lis,  a  watchman.  CaK-cer,  car'-ce-ris,  a  prison. 

Tl'-tan,  Ti-ta'-nis,  Titan.  A'-mor,  a-mo'-ris,  love. 

Si'-ren,  Si-re'-nis,  a  Siren.  Gut'-tur,  guf-tii-ris,  the  throat. 

Del'-phin,  del-phi'-nis,  a  dolphin.  Mar'-tyr,  mar'-ty-ris,  a  martjfr. 

Exceptions  in  L. 
Fel,  gall,  and  mel,  honey,  double  I  before  is,  making  felKs  and  meJUi, 

Exceptions  in  N. 

§  71.  1.  Neuters  in  en  form  their  genitive  in  Xnis;  as,  flU'-men, 
fiu'-mi-^is,  a  river ;  glu-ten,  glu'-ti-nis,  glue. 

The  following  masculines,  also,  form  their  genitive  in  Inis  :—Qscen,  a  bird  which  for«- 
boded  by  its  notes;  pecten,  a  comb;  tiblcen,  a  piper;  and  tubicen,  a  trumpeter. 

2.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  on  form  their  genitive  in  ontis;  as,  Laxmidcm,  Lao- 
medontis.  Some  in  In  and  gn  add  is  or  os;  as,  Trachin,  or  Trdchyn,  Trachinis 
or  Trachgms. 

Exceptions  in  R. 

1.  Nouns  in  ter  drop  e  in  the  genitive  ;  as,  pa'-ter,  pa-tris,  a  father. 
So  also  imber,  a  shower,  and  names  of  months  in  ber ;  as,  October, 
Octobris. 

4 


38  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  §  72-74. 

But  crater  J  a  cup;  soter^  a  savior;  and  Idier,  a  brick,  retain  e  in  the  gen- 
itive. 

2.  Far,  a  kind  of  corn,  has  farrU ;  hepar,  the  liver,  hepdtis ;  Lar  or  I^rs, 
Lartis;  iter,  a  journey,  has  ttineris  from  the  old  nominative  tffncr;  Jupiter^ 
Jdvis ;  and  cor,  the  heart,  cordis. 

8.  These  four  in  ur  have  dris  in  the  genitive  :—ebur,  ivory;  femur,  the  thigh  j 
jicur,  the  liver;  robur,  strength. 

Fimur  has  also  feminis,  and  jecur,  jedndris,  and  jocindria. 

AS. 

§  72.  Nouns  in  as  form  their  genitive  in  atis  ;  as,  <8'-<a5,  m-tot' 
tisj  age ;  pi'-e-tas,  pi-e-ta-tis,  piety. 

Exc.  1.  .4s  has  assis ;  mas,  a  male,  mans ;  vas,  a  surety,  vadis  ;  and  ra<,  a 
vessel,  vasis.    Anas,  a  duck,  nas  amtis. 

Exc.  2,  Greek  nouns  in  as  form  their  genitive  according  to  their  gender; 
the  masculines  in  antis,  the  feminines  in  dais  or  ados,  and  the  neuters  in  dtis  ; 
as,  addmas,  -antis,  adamant ;  lampas,  -ddis,  a  lamp ;  Pallas,  -ddis  or  -ados ;  buce- 
ras,  -dtis,  a  species  of  herb.  Areas,  an  Arcadian,  and  N6m/is,  a  Numidian, 
which  are  of  the  common  gender,  form  their  genitive  in  adis.  Melas,  the  name 
of  a  river,  has  Melanis. 

ES. 

* 

§  73.  1.  Nouns  in  es  form  their  genitive  by  changing  es  into  is, 
ttis,  etis^  or  etis;  as,  ru-pes,  ru'-pis,  a  rock ;  mi-les,  mU'-i-tis,  a  soldier; 
se-ges,  seg'-e-tis,  growing  corn  ;  qui'-es,  qui-e-tis,  rest 

Bemabk.  a  few  Greek  proper  names  in  es  (gen.  is)  sometimes  form  their 
genitive  in  ei,  or,  by  contraction,  t,  after  the  second  declension ;  as,  Achilles,  is, 
e»  or  -« ;  and  a  few  m  a  after  the  first  declension ;  as,  Orestes,  is  or  ce. 

2.  Those  which  make  iti$  are, 

Ales,  a  bird.  Gurges,  a  whirlpool.  Poples,  ike  ham. 

Ames,  a  fowler's  staff.  Hospes,  a  guest.  Satelles,  a  lifeauard. 

Antistes,  a  priest.  Limes,  a  limit.  Stipes,  the  stock  of  a  tree, 

Caespes,  a  turf  Merges,  a  sheaf  of  com.  Termes,  an  oliveoough. 

Comes,  a  companion.  Miles,  a  soldier.  Trames,  a  by-paih. 

Eques,  a  horseman.  Palmes,  a  vine-branch.  Veles,  a  sHrmislier. 

Fomes,  touchwood.  P6des,  a  foot-soldier. 

3.  The  following  have  ^rfs; — abies,  a  fir-tree;  aries,  a  ram;  indiges,  a  man 
deified;  interpres,  an  interpreter;  paries,  a  wall;  seges,  a  corn-field;  and  ieges, 
a  mat. 

4.  The  following  have  €tis:—C%bes;  Ores,  a  Cretan;  Ubes,  a  caldron;  mag- 
n€S,  a  loadstone ;  oMtes  and  rejuics,  rest ;  inquies,  restlessness;  and  tapes  (used 
only  in  ace.  and  abl.),  tapestry. — Some  Greek  proper  names  have  either  etit  ot 
is  in  the  genitive;  as,  ChrSmes,  -etis,  or  -is.    Dares,  -etis,  or  -is. 

Exc.  1.    Obses,  a  hostage,  and  presses,  a  president,  have  idis.    Eeres,  an  heir, 
and  merces,  a  reward,  have  edis ;  pes,  a  foot,  and  its  compounds,  have  edis. 
Exc.  2.    C^res  has  Cereris  ;  bes,  bessis ;  prces,  proedis ;  and  as,  ceris. 

IS. 

§  741.  Nouns  in  is  have  their  genitive  the  same  as  the  nomina* 
tlve ;  as,  au'-ris,  ai  -ris,  the  ear ;  a -vis,  a-vv<,  a  bird. 


§  75,  76.  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  89 


he  following  have  the  genitive  in  Sris: — dnis,  ashes;  pulvis,  dust; 
)',  a  ploughshare.     Cucumis,  a  cucumber,  has  SiHs  and  rarely  is. 


Exc.  1.   The 

vdmis  or  voTner, 

Exc.  2.  The  following  have  tdis  :—cdpis,  a  cup ;  cassis,  a  hehnet ;  cuspia,  a 
pomt;  lapis,  a  stone;  and  prdmulsis,  an  antepast. 

Exc.  3.   Two  have  inis  :—pollis,  fine  flour,  and  sanguis  or  sanguen,  blood. 

Exc.  4.  Four  have  itis:~I>is,  Pluto;  lis,  strife;  Quiris,  a  Eoman;  and 
Samnis,  a  Samuite. 

Exc.  5.    GUs,  a  dormouse,  has  £r?zm. 

GREEK  NOUNS. 

1.  Greek  nouns  in  is,  whose  genitive  ends  in  to*  or  eos,  {to;  or  «aif ),  form  their  genitive 
in  Latin  ints;  as  (a.)  verbals  in  «w  ;  as,  basis,  matkSsis,  etc.  (i.)  compounds  of  2^olis 
{?n?^c);  as,  metropolis,  NeapOlis,  etc.;  and  (c.)  a  few  other  proper  names,  a&'Charybdis, 
LachSsis,  Syrtis,  etc.  In  some  nouns  of  this  class  the  Greek  genitive  is  sometimes  found; 
as,  NemSsis,  Nemesios. 

2.  Greek  nouns  in  is,  whose  Greek  genitive  Is  in  Idos  (^off),form  their  Latin  genitive 
iatdis;  ns,  cegis,  aspis,  ephe?nSris,pyramis,tyrannis,  JEnSis,  Iris,  Nereis,  etc.  Tigris 
has  both  is  and  idis  ;  and  in  some  other  words  of  this  class  later  writers  use  is  instead 
of  idis. 

3.  Ch&ris  has  Charttis ;  SaMmis,  Salamlnis,  and  SimSis,  Simoentis. 

OS.  • 

§  yS.  Nouns  in  os  form  their  genitive  in  oris  or  oth ;  as,  flos, 
flo-ris,  a  flower ;  ne-pos,  ne-po-tis,  a  grandchild. 

The  following  have  Oris : — 

Flos,  a  flower.  Labos  or  labor,  labor.        Os,  the  mouth. 

Glos,  a  husband's  sister.        Lepos  or  lepor,  mL  Eos,  dew. 

Honos  or  honor,  honor.         Mos,  a  custom. 
Arbos  or  arbor,  a  tree,  has  dris. 
The  following  have  Otis : — 

,  Cos,  a  whetstone.         MonocSros,  a  unicorn.  T^^^o^,  a  grandchild. 

'Dos,  a  dowry.  Rhinoceros,  a  rhinoceros.        Sacerdos,  a  priest. 

Exc.  1.    Custos,  a  keeper,  has  custodis ;  bos,  an  ox,  bdvis ;  and  ds,  a  bone,  ossis. 

Exc.  2.  Some  Greek  nouns  in  os  have  dis  in  the  genitive;  as,  heros,  a  hero; 
Minos;  2Vos,  a  Trojan;  and  some  Greek  neuters  in  os  are  used  in  the  third 
declension  in  the  nominative  and  accusative  only;  as,. .^r^^o*,  cetos,  epos,  m^los. 

US. 

§  T6«  1.  Nouns  in  us  form  their  genitive  in  eris  or  oris;  as,  g<^- 
nus,  gen-e-ri^,  a  kind ;  tern' -pus,  tem'-pS-ris,  time. 

2.  Those  which  make  eris  are,  dcus,  ( chaff  ),/£bc7ms,  funus,  genus,  gldmus,  IS. 
tus,  munus,  dlus,  6nus,  dpus,  pondus,  rudus,  sceliis,  sldus,  ulcus,  vellus,  viscus  and 
vulnus.    In  early  writers  pignus  has  sometimes  pigneris. 

8.  Those  which  make  6ris  are,  corpus,  decus,  dedecus,  f acinus,  fenus,  fngus^ 
lepus,  lUus,  nemus,  pectus,  pecus,  penus,  pignus,  stercus,  tempus,  and  tergus. 

Exc.  1.  These  three  in  us  have  udis : — incus,  an  anvil ;  pdlus,  a  morass ;  and 
subscus,  a  dove-tail.    Pecus,  a  brute  animal,  has  pecOdis. 

Exc.  2.  These  five  have  utis  :—juventiis,  youth ;  ^dlus,  safety ;  senectUs^  old 
age;  sereitiis,  slavery;  virtus,  vii"tue. 


40  THIRD    DECLENSION. GENITIVE.  §  77,  78. 

Exc.  3.  Monosyllables  in  us  have  iiris ;  as,  crus,  the  le^ ;  Jus,  right ;  jus,  broth ; 
mus,  a  mouse;  pus,  matter;  rttf,  the  country;  tus,  frankincense;  except  qnis, 
and  sus,  which  have  gniis,  and  suis ;  and  rh'us,  which  has  rhois  or  roris.  2\llus^ 
the  earth,  has  ielluris ;  and  Ligus  or  Ligur,  a  Ligurian,  has  Ligui-is. 

Exc.  4.   Fraus,  fraud,  and  totw,  praise,  have  /raucEs,  laudis. 

Exc.  5.  Greek  nouns  in  pus  (s-cuc)  have  ^is;  as,  iripus,  tripddis,  a  tripod; 
(Edipus,  -ddis;  but  this  is  sometimes  of  the  second  declension. 

Exc.  6.  Some  Greek  names  of  cities  in  us  have  untis ;  as,  Amdihus,  Amaihun- 
tis.     So  Trapezus,  Opus,  Pessinus,  and  Sellnus. 

Exc.  7.  Greek  nouns  ending  in  eus  are  all  proper  names,  and  have  their 
genitive  in  eos ;  as,  Orpheus^  -eos.  But  these  nouns  are  found  aiso  in  the  second 
declension ;  as,  Orphms,  -ei  or-i.    Cf.  §  64,  6. 

YS. 

§  TT,  1.  Nouns  in  ys  are  Greek,  and  make  their  genitive  in 
pis  (contracted  ^5),  or,  as  in  Greek,  yos  (i/of)  ;  as, 

G>tys,  gen.  Cotyis  or  Ootys ;  Teihys,  -yis  or  yos.  So  Atys,  Capys,  Erinnys, 
H&lys,  Othrys.    A  few  have  §dis  ;  as,  chldmys,  chlampdis. 

S  preceded  by  a  consonant. 

2.  Nouns  in  s,  with  a  consonant  before  it,  form«their  genitive  by 
changing  s  into  is  or  tis ;  as,  trabs,  tra-bis,  a  beam ;  hi'-ems^  hi'-e-miSf 
winter ;  pars,  par -tis,  a  part ;  frons,  fron'-tis,  the  forehead. 

(1.)  Those  in  hs,  ms,  and  ps ;  as,  scrobs,  Hems,  stirps,  change  <  into  is ;  except 
gryps,  a  griffin,  which  has  gryphis. 

Remark.  Compounds  in  ceps  from  cdpio  have  tpis ;  as,  princeps,  prindpiSj 
a  prince.    But  auceps  has  aucupis. 

(2.)  Those  in  Is,  ns,  and  rs,  as,  jw&,  ^'ctm,  ars,  change  s  into  <w. 

Exc.  1.  The  following  in  ns  change  a  into  dis :— frons,  fohage :  glans,  an 
acoTH',  juglans,  a  walnut;  lens,  a  nit;  and  libripens,  a  weigher. 

Exa  2.    Tiryn*,  a  town  of  Argolis,  has  TiryntMs  in  the  genitive. 

T. 

§  78.  1.  Nouns  in  t  form  their  genitive  in  ttis.  They  are,  caputj 
the  head,  gen.  cap'-X-tis  ;  and  its  compounds,  occXput  and  sinciput. 


2, 

inserting 
a  law. 


5.  Nouns  in  x  form  their  genitive  by  resolving  x  into  cs  or  gs,  and 
arting  i  before  5  ;  as,  vox  (vocs)  vo-cis,  the  voice ;  lex  (legs)  le-gis^ 
iw. 

(1.)  Latin  nouns  m  ax  have  dew;  as,  fomax,  fomads,  except /oa;, /dcig. 
Most  Greek  nouns  in  ax  have  acis ;  as,  thorax,  thoracis ;  a  few  have  acis ;  as, 
cdrax,  cwacis ;  and  Greek  names  of  men  in  nax  have  nactis  ;  as,  Asiydnax, 
Astyanactis. 

(2.)  Nouns  in  ex  have  fcts;  as,  judex,  Judicis:  dbex  has  oJicis  or  objicis  ;  and 
rliear,  viblcis.  Nex,  prex,  (nom.  oDs.),  mea;  and  fenisex  have  ecw ;  dZear,  nar- 
thex,  and  vertex  have  ects,  and  y«a;,  feeds.  Lex  and  rex  have  #^5 ;  aquilex 
and  ^rrea:  have  e^;  remex  has  remigis;  senex,  senis;  and  supeUex,  supeUecUUs. 


§  79,  80.    THIRD  DECLENSION. DATIVE  AND  ACCUSATIVE.      41 

(3.)  Nouns  in  ix  have  Ids;  as,  cervix,  cervicis;  and  less  frequently  Ids;  as, 
cdlix,  calids.  But  nix  has  nivis ;  strix,  foreign  names  of  men,  and  gentile  nouns 
in  rix  have  igis ;  as,  Biturix,  Dumndfix,  etc. 

(4.)  Nouns  in  ox  have  ods;  as,  vox,  vods;  but  Capp&dox  has  Cappaddds; 
AUdbrox,  Allobrdgis ;  and  nox,  noctis. 

(5.)  Of  nouns  in  wx,  crux,  dux,  trddux,  and  nux  have  ads;  lux  and  Pollux^ 
uds. —  Conjux  has  conjugis,  frvx  (nom.  obs.)  frugis,  and  faux,  fauds. 

(6.)  Fx,  a  Greek  termination,  has  yds,  yds,  or  ygis,  ygis.  Onyx  and  sar- 
ddnyx,  in  which  x  is  equivalent  to  c/is  (§  3,  2)  have  ychis;  as,  ^n^a;,  onychis. 

DATIVE    SINGULAR. 
f'§  TO.     The  dative  singular  ends  in  i;  as,  sermo,  dat.  sermoni. 

Anciently  it  also  ended  in  e ;  as,  morte  ddtus.  Varro  in  GeUius.  So  cere  for 
ceri,  Cic.  and  Liv. ;  and  Jure  for  /mH.  Liv. 

ACCUSATIVE    SINGULAR. 

L     (a-)    The  accusative  singular  of  all  neuter  nouns  is  like  the  nomi- 

^  native. 

(&.)  The  accusative  singular  of  masculines  and  feminines,  ends  in 
em.  Yet  some  Latin  nouns  in  is,  which  do  not  increase  in  the  geni- 
tive, have  im,  and  some  Greek  nouns  have  im,  in,  or  a. 

1.  Many  proper  names  in  is,  denoting  places,  rivers,  or  godSj  have  the  accus- 
ative singular  in  im ;  as,  Hispdlis,  Tiberis,  Anubis ;  so  also  Albts,  Athesis,  Bostis, 
Arar  or  Ardris,  BilbiUs,  Apis,^  Osiris,  Syrtis,  etc.  These  sometimes,  also,  make 
the  accusative  in  in;  as,  Albin.  Scaldis  has  in  and  em,  and  Llris,  im,  in,  and  em. 
lAger  has  Ligerim. 

2.  The  following  also  have  the  accusative  in  im : — 

Amussis,  a  TOosora's  T^Ze.  Mephitis,  /b«Z  air.  Sinapis,_  wMsiart^ 

Buris,  a  plough-tail.  Pelvis,  a  basin.  Sitis,  thirst. 

Cannabis,  hemp.  Ravis,  hoarseness.  Tussis,  a  cough. 

Cuciimis,  {gen.  -is),  a  cucumber.  Seciiris,  an  axe.  Vis,  strength. 

8.  These  have  im,  and  sometimes  em : — 

Febris,  a  fever.     Puppis,  the  stern.     Restis,  a  rope.     Turris,  a  tower. 
But  these  have  em,  and  rarely  im: — 

Bipennis,  a  battle-axe.         Navis,  a  ship.  Sementis,  a  sowing. 

Clavis,  a  key.  Prsesepis,  a  stall.       Strips,  a  flesh-brush. 

Messis,  a  harvest. 

4.  Lens  and  pars  have  rarely  lenUm  and  parUm;  and  crdtimtrora  crates,  is 
found  in  Plautus. 
6.  Early  writers  formed  the  accusative  of  some  other  nouns  in  im. 

Accusative  of  Greek  Nouns. 

§  80.  The  accusative  singular  of  masculine  and  feminine  Greek 
nouns  sometimes  retains  the  Greek  terminations  in  and  a,  but  often 
ends,  as  in  Latin,  in  em  or  im. 

I.  Masculine  asd  feminine  Greek  nouns,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  o», 
impure,  that  is,  with  a  consonant  going  before,  have  their  accusative  in  em  ora; 
as,  lampas,  lampddis  (Greek  -J'oc),  lampdda;  chldmys^  chiamydis,  cSiiaj:^dem^  or 
-yda;  Helicon,  Heiicoms,  JSi-Hcdna. 
4* 


42     THIRD  DECLENSION. VOCATIVE  AND  ABLATIVE,     §  81,  82. 

Remark.  In  like  manner  these  three,  which  have  is  pure  in  the  genitive— 
7/w,  Troh^  Troem,  and  TVoa,  a  Trojan;  heros,  a  hero;  and  Minos,  a  king  of 
Crete. — ^Ar,  the  air;  cether,  the  sky;  ddpMn,  a  dolphin;  a.nd  pcean,  a  hymn, 
have  usually  a;  as,  aira^  cEQiera^  dtlphlna,  jxEdna.    Pan,  a  god,  has  only  a. 

Exc.  1.  Masculines  in  is,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  os  impure,  have 
their  accusative  in  im  or  in;  sometimes  in  idem;  Pdris^  Paridis;  Parim,  or 
Partdem. 

Exc.  2.  Feminines  in  is,  increasing  impurely  in  the  genitive,  though  they 
usually  follow  the  rule,  have  sometimes  im  or  in;  as,  £Us,  EUdis;  Elin  or  Ea^ 
dem.     So  tiffris,  gen.  is  or  idis  ;  ace.  tigrim  or  tigrin. 

n.  Masculine  and  feminine  Greek  nouns  in  is  not  increasing,  and  in  ys,  gen. 
yos,  form  their  accusative  by  changmg  the  s  of  the  nominative  into  7»  or  n;  as, 
Charybdis,  (gen.  Lat.  -is,  Gr.  t»f),  ace.  Charybdim  or  -in;  Hdlys, -yis  ot -yosy 
Halym  or  -yn.     So  rhus,  gen.  rivois,  has  r/iura  or  rhum. 

III.  Proper  names  ending  in  the  diphthong  etis,  gen.  ei  and  eos,  have  the  ac- 
cusative in  ea ;  as,  Theseus,  Thesea ;  Tydeus,  Tydea.     See  §  54,  5. 

IV.  Some  Greek  proper  names  in  es,  whose  genitive  is  in  is,  have  in  Latm, 
along  with  the  accusative  in  em,  the  termination  en,  as  if  of  the  first  djclension; 
as,  AdtiUes,  AchUlen;  Xerxes,  Xerxen;  Sqphdcles,  Sqphdclen.  Of.  §  45,  1.  Some 
also,  which  have  either  etis  or  is  in  the  genitive,  have,  besides  item,  eta,  or  em, 
the  termination  en ;  as,  Chremes,  Tholes, 

VOCATIVE    SINGULAE. 
^    §  81.     The  vocative  is  like  the  nominative. 

Resiabk.    Many  Greek  nouns,  howerer,  particularly  proper  names,  drop  s  of  tbe 

nominative  to  form  the  vocative;  as,  Baphnis,  Daphni;  Tithys,  Tethy ;  Melamput, 
Melampu;  Orpheus,  Orpheu.  Proper  names  in  es  (gen.  is)  sometimes  have  a  vocative 
in  i,  after  the  first  declension ;  as,  Socrates,  Socrate.  $  45, 1. 


A 


ABLATIVE    SINGULAB. 

§  83.     Hie  ablative  singular  commonly  end»  in  e. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  Neuters  in  e,  al,  and  ar,  have  the  ablative  in  i;  as, 
sedile,  sedUi ;  animal,  animali ;  calcar,  calcdri. 

(b.)  But  names  of  towns  in  e,  and  the  following  neuters  in  ar,  have  c  in  the 
ablative;  viz.  baccar,  an  herb;  /ar,  com;  hepar,  the  liver;  jubar,  a  sunbeam; 
nectar,  nectar;  par,  a  pan-;  sal,  salL  Rete,  a  net,  has  either  e  or  »/  and  mare, 
the  sea,  has  sometimes  in  poetry  Tware  in  the  ablative. 

Exc.  2.  (a.)  Nouns  which  bave  im  alone,  or  both  m  and  in  in  the 
accusative,  and  names  of  months  in  er  or  is,  have  i  in  tbe  ablative  ; 
as,  vis,  vim,  vi ;  Tiberis,  -im,  i ;  December,  Decembri ;  Aprllis,  Aprlli. 

(b.)  But  Bceiis,  cannabis,  and  sindjns,  have  e  or  i.  Tigris,  the  tiger,  has 
tigrtde ;  as  a  river  it  has  both  ■  Tigride  and  Tigri. 

Exc.  8.  ^  (a.^  Nouns  which  have  em  or  im  in  the  accusative,  have 
their  ablative  m  e  or  i;  as,  tun-is,  turre  or  turru 

(6.)  So  EUs,  ace.  Elidem  and  Elin,  has  Elide  or  Eli.  But  resfis,  and  most 
Greek  nouns  with  idis  in  the  genitive,  have  e  only;  as,  Pdi-is,  -idis,  -ide. 

Exc.  4.  (a.)  Adjectives  in  is^  used  as  nouns,  have  commonly  i  in  the  ablar 
tive,  but  sometimes  e ;  bs,  familidris,  a  friend;  naidUs,  a  birth'day;  socIdUs,  a 
companion ;  tHremis,  a  trireme. — Participles  in  w,  used  as  uouus,  have  com- 
monly 6  in  the  ablative,  bu    "umUnem  has  ». 


§  83.  THIRD    DECLENSION. ^PLURAL    CASES.  43 

(b.)  When  adjectives  in  is  become  proper  names,  they  always  have  e ;  as, 
Juvendlis,  Juvendle.  Afflnis  and  cecMis  have  generally  e ;  as  have  always  jtsvi- 
nis,  a  youth;  rudis,  a  rqd;  and  voluo'is,  a  bird. 

Exc.  5.  (a.)  The  following,  though  they  have  only  em  in  the  accusative, 
have  e  or  i  in  the  ablative,  but  most  of  them  have  oftener  e  than  i: — 

Amnis,  Collis,  Igiiis,                 Pars,                 Supellex, 

.  Anguis,  Convallis,  Imber,               Postis,              Tridens, 

Avis,  Corbis,  Mugihs,             Ptigil,                Unguis, 

Bills,  Finis,  Orbis,                Sordes,              Vectis, 

Civis,  Fustis,  Ovis,                 Sors,    ^             Vesper. 
Classis, 

(b.)  Occiput  has  only  i,  and  rus  has  either  e or  i ;  but  r«re  commonly  signifies 
from  the  country,  and  ruri,  in  the  country.    Mel  has  rarely  i. 

(c.)  So  also  names  of  towns,  when  denoting  the  place  where  any  thing  is 
said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  have  the  ablative  in  i;  as,  Carthagini,  at  Carthage; 
so,  Anxuri  and  LacedcBmdni,  and,  in  the  most  ancient  writers,  many  other  nouns 
occur  with  this  termmation  in  the  ablative.    Canalis  has  i,  and  very  rarely  e. 

Exc.  6.  Nouns  in  t/s,  which  have  ym  or  yn  in  the  accusative,  have  their  ab- 
lative in  ye  or  y;  as,  Atys^  Atye,  or  Aty. 

NOMINATIVE    PLURAL. 

'        §  83.     I.   The  nominative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines 

1  ends  in  es ;  as,  sermones,  rupes: — but  neuters  have  a,  and  those 

whose  ablative  singular  ends  in  i  only,  or  in  e  and  i,  have  ia  ;  as, 

c&put^  capita  ;  sedile,  sedilia  ;  rete,  retia.    Aplustre  has  both  a  and  ia, 

1.  Some  Greek  neuters  in  os  have  e  in  the  nominative  plural;  as,  metoa; 
nom.  plural,  mele;  (in  Greek  ^j\«ai,  by  contraction  fAthn)-    So  Tempe. 

GENITIVE    PLURAL. 
\  n.     The  genitive  plural  commonly  ends  in  um  ;  sometimes  in  ium. 

1.  Nouna  which,  in  the  ablative  singular,  have  i  only,  or  both  e 
and  i,  make  the  genitive  plural  in  ium ;  as,  sedlle,  sedllij  sedilium ; 
turriSj  turre  or  turri,  turrium. 

2.  Nouns  in  es  and  is,  which  do  not  increase  in  the  genitive  singu- 
lar, have  ium ;  as,  nubes,  nubium  ;  hostis,  hostium. 

Exc.  Canis.  juvenis,  fdris,  mugills,  proles,  strues,  and  rates,  have  um;  so  oftener 
have  apis,  stitgilis,  and  volucris ;  less  frequently  mensis,  sedes,  and,  in  the  poets 
only,  ambages,  cades,  clddes,  vepres,  and  coelesiis. 

3.  Monosyllables  ending  in  two  consonants  have  ium  in  the  geni- 
tive plural ;  as,  urbs,  urbium  ;  gens,  gentium  ;  arx,  arcium. 

Exc.  Ltfnx,  sphinx,  and  ops  (nom.  obsolete)  have  um. 

Most  monosyllables  in  s  and  x  pure  have  um,  but  the  following  have  ium; 
dos,  mas,  glis,  7is,  os  (ossis),  faux,  (nom.  obs.)  nix,  nox,  strix,  vis,  generally 
fraus  and  mus  ;  so  also  fur  and  ren,  and  sometimes  lar. 

4.  Nouns  of  two  or  more  syllables,  in  ns  or  rs,  and  names  of  na- 
tions in  as,  have  commonly  ium,  but  soiffetimes  um;  as,  cliens,  clien- 
tiwf^  or  clientum ;  Arpinas,  Arpinatium. 


44  THIRD    DECLENSION. PLURAL    CASES.  §  84,  85 

(1.)  Other  nouns  in  as  generally  have  «m,  but  sometimes  ium;  as,  cetas,  cetd- 
ttim  or  cetatium.    Pen<%  ts  and  optirndtes  have  usually  ium. 

5.  The  following  have  ium: — cdro,  compes^Jinter ^  iinber,  iiier,  venter,  SamrdSy 
Qtdris,  and  usually  Insuber.    Fornax  and  pdlris  have  sometimes  ium. 

6,  Greek  noxms  have  generally  um;  as,  gigas,  gigantum ;  Arabs,  Arabum; 
Thrax,  Thrdcum ; — but  a  few,  used  as  titles  of  books,  have  sometimes  on ;  as, 
Epigramma,  epigrammdion ;  Metamorphosis,  -em.  The  patrial  Mcdeon  also  is 
found  in  Ciirtius,  4,  13. 

Resiabk  1.  Bos  has  boum  in  the  genitive  plural. 

Rem.  2.  Nouns  which  want  the  singular,  form  the  genitive  plural  as  if  they 
were  complete;  as,  mdnes,  manium;  cceUtes,  coelitum;  Uia,uium;  as  if  fix>m 
mdnis,  cedes,  and  ile.  So  also  names  of  feasts  in  aiia ;  as,  Saturnalia,  Saturna- 
Uum ;  but  these  have  sometimes  or^m  after  the  second  declension.  Ales  has 
sometimes,  by  epenthesis,  alituum.    See  §  322,  3. 

DATIVE    AND    ABLATIVE    PLURAL. 
§  84:.     The  dative  and  ablative  plural  end  in  thus. 

Exc.  1.  Box  has  bdlnts  and  biibus,  by  contraction,  for  bovVms ;  sus  has  sUbtu  by 
syncope,  for  suV>us.   $  322,  5,  and  4. 

Exc.  2.  Greek  nouns  in  ma  have  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  more  fre- 
quently in  is  than  in  ibus ;  as,  poema,  poemMis,  or  poemaiUms. 

Exc.  3.  The  poets  sometimes  form  the  dative  plural  of  Greek  nouns,  that  in- 
crease in  the  genitive,  in  si,  and,  before  a  vowel,  in  sin;  as,  herois,  tieroidis; 
heroisi)  or  heroisin.  Ovid.     So  in  Quintilian,  Metamorphosesi. 

ACCUSATIVE    PLURAL. 

§  851  The  accusative  plural  ends,  like  the  nominative,  in  e», 
a,  ia. 

Exc.  1.  The  accusative  plural  of  masculines  and  feminines,  whose  genitive 
plural  ends  in  turn,  anciently  ended  in  i5  or  eis,  instead  of  es;  as,  partes,  gen. 
partium,  ace.  parttis  or  partes. 

Exc.  2.  Greek  masculines  and  feminines,  whose  genitive  increases  in  is  or  os 
impure,  have  their  accusative  in  cw ;  as,  lampas,  lampddis.  lampddas.  So  also 
heros,  herois,  heroas,  and  some  barbarian  names  of  nations  nave  a  similar  form; 
as,  BriganiaSj  AUobrdgas. 


\ 


JupXteVj  and  ris,  strength,  are  thus  declined : — 

Singular. 
N.  Ju'-pi-ter, 
G.  Jo'-vis, 
D.  J6'-vi, 
Ac.  Jo'-vem, 
V.  Ju'-pi-ter, 
Ah.  J6'-ve. 


lingular. 

Plural. 

N.  vis, 

vi'-res. 

G.  vis. 

vir'-i-um. 

D.  — 

vir'-i-bus. 

-4c.  vim. 

vi'-res, 

V.   vis. 

vi'-res, 

Ab.^■'. 

vir'-i-bus. 

§  86-88.* 


FOURTH   DECLENSION. 


45 


§  86.     The  following  table  exhibits  the  principal  forms  of  Greek 
nouns  of  the  third  declension  : — 


Norn. 

Gen. 

Vat. 

s. 

Lampas, 

(-adis,         I 
\  -ados,        ) 

-adi. 

PL 

-ades. 

-adum. 

-adibus. 

S. 

Heros, 

-ois. 

-oi. 

PI. 

-oes, 

-oum, 

-oibus. 

Chelys, 
Poesis, 

-is,  -ios,     \ 
-eos,      j 

AchiUes, 

Orpheus, 

Aer, 

Dido, 

-is,  -ei,  -i, 

-eos, 

-eos, 

-eris, 

-lis. 

-ei, 

-eri, 

-0, 

Ace. 
-adem, 
-ada, 
-ades, 
-adas, 
-oem, 
-6a, 
-oes, 
-oas, 

-yn, 

It'    } 

C  -em,_     ) 
I  -ea,  en,  j 

-ea, 

-era, 

-6, 


Voc. 


•OS, 


■y. 


-es,  -e, 


-eu. 


AU. 

aSe. 

-adibus. 


-oibus. 
•ye  or  y. 


e  or  -1. 

See  §  64. 

-ere 

-o. 


^ 


FOURTH  DECLENSION. 

.  87,  Nouns  of  the  fourth  declension  end  in  m  and  u. 
Those  in  us  are  masculine ;  those  in  u  are  neuter,  and,  except  in 
the  genitive,  are  indeclinable  in  the  singular. 

Nouns  of  this  declension  are  thus  declined : — 


Fructus,  fruit. 


Singular. 
N.  fruc'-tiis, 
G.  fruc'-tiis, 
Z).  fruc'-tu-i, 
Ac.  fruc'-tum, 
V.  fruc'-tus, 
AJ).  fruc'-tii. 


Plural. 
fruc'-tiis, 
fruc'-tu-iim, 
fruc'-ti-biis, 
fruc'-tiis, 
fruc'-tiis, 
fruc'-ti-bus. 


Cornu,  a  Jiorn. 


Singular. 
N.  Qor'-nii, 
G.  cor'-niis, 
D.  cor'-nii, 
Ac.  cor'-nii, 
V.  cor'-nii, 
Ah.  cor'-nii. 


Plural. 
cor'-nu-a, 
cor'-nu-iim, 
cor'-ni-biis, 
cor'-nu-a, 
cor'-nu-a, 
cor'-ni-biis. 


Can'-ttis,  a  song. 
Cur'-rus,  a  chariot. 
Ex-er'-ci-tus,  an  army. 


In  like  manner  decline 

Fluc'-tus,  a  wave. 
Luc'-tus,  grief. 
Mo'-tus,  motion. 


Se-na'-tus,  the  senate. 
Ge'-lu,  ice.  (in  sing.) 
Ve^-ru,  a  spit. 


Exceptions  in  Gender. 
§  88.     1.    The  following  are  feminine  :— 


Acus,  a  medle. 
Domus,  a  tome. 


Ficus,  a  fig. 
Manus,  a  hat 


'land. 


Portlcus,  a  gaUerij. 
Tribus,  a  tnbe. 


46  FOURTH    DECLENSION. EXCEPTIONS.  §  89. 

cuius,  a  distaff,  and  the  plurals  Qtdnmidtms,  a  feast  of  Minerva,  and  Idu$,  the 
Ides,  are  also  feminine.   So  noctu,  by  mght,  found  only  in  the  ablative  singular 

Penus,  a  store  of  provisions,  when  of  the  fourth  declension,  is  masculme  or 
feminine.  Secus,  sex,  is  neuter;  see  ^  94.  Specm,  a  den,  is  masculine  and 
rarely  feminine  or  neuter. 

2.  Some  personal  appellatives,  and  names  of  trees,  are  feminine  by 
signification ;  as, 

Arim,  nurus,  socrus ; — cot^us,  laurus,  and  quercus.  Myrtus  also  is  feminine 
and  rarely  masculine.  See  §  29, 1  and  2. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

§  80.  Dmius,  a  house,  is  partly  of  the  fourth  declension,  and 
partly  of  the  second.    It  is  thus  declined : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

N,  do'-mils,  do'-mus, 

G.  do'-mus,  or  do'-mi,  dom'-u-um,  or  do-mo'-rum, 

D.  dom'-u-i,  or  do'-mo,  dom'-i-bils, 

Ac.  do'-mum,  do'-mus,  or  do'-mos, 

V.  do'-mus,  do'-mus, 

Ab.  do'-mo.  dom'-i-btis. 

(a.)  Domus,  in  the  genitive,  signifies,  of  a  house;  domi  commonly  signifies, 
at  home.  The  ablative  domu  is  found  in  Plautus,  and  in  ancient  inscriptions. 
In 'the  genitive  and  accusative  plural  the  forms  of  the  second  declension  are 
more  used  than  those  of  the  fourth. 

(J.)  Cbmus,  a  cornel-tree ;  yic«s,  a  fig,  or  a  fig-tree;  laurus.a,  laurel;  and 
myrtus,  a  mjrtle,  are  sometimes  of  the  second  declension.  Penus  is  of  ttie 
second,  third  or  fourth  declension. 

(c.)  Some  nouns  in  u  have  also  forms  in  iis  and  wn;  as,  comu,  comus,  or  cor- 
num.    Adjectives,  compounds  of  manus,  are  of  the  first  and  second  declensions. 

Bemakk  1.  Nouns  of  this  declension  anciently  belonged  to  the  third,  and 
were  formed  by  contraction,  thus : — 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  fructus,  frutues,  us, 

G.  frnctuls,  -U95  fructuum,  -iim,    * 

2).  finictui,  -u,  fi-uctuibiis,  -iibiis,  or  -ibiis, 

Ac.  fructuem,  -um,  finictues,  us, 

V.  finictiis,  fi-uctues,  -iis, 

Ab.  fiructue,  -u.  finictuibus,  -ubils,  or  -ibiis. 

2.  The  genitive  singular  in  is  is  sometimes  found  in  ancient  authors ;  as, 
anuis,  Ter.  A  genitive  in  i,  after  the  second  declension,  also  occurs ;  as,  send- 
ius,  sendd;  tumultus,  tumuUi.  Sail. 

3.  The  contracted  form  of  the  dative  in  m  is  not  often  used;  yet  it  sometimes 
occurs,  especially  in  Caesar,  and  in  the  poets. 

4.  The  contracted  form  of  the  genitive  plural  in  um  rarely  occurs. 

5.  The  following  nouns  have  ubus  in  the  dative  and  ablative 
plural : — 

Acus,  a  needle.         Artus,  a  Joint  Partus,  a  birth.         Specus,  a  den. 

Arcus,  a  bow.  I.acus,  a  lake.  Pecu,  a  fioch.  Tribus,  a  tribe. 

Genu^  a  knee;  j>orUu,  a  ha.'^^or;  tonitrus,  thunder;  and  v^ru^  a  spit,  have  ibus 
or  i&us. 


§  90,  91.  FIFTH   DECLENSION.  47 

FIFTH  DECLENSION. 

§  90.     Nouns  of  the  fifth  declension  end  in  es,  and  are  of 
the  feminine  gender. 


They  are  thus  decHned :  — 

Res, 

a  thing. 

Dies, 

a  day. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

N.  rss, 

res. 

N.   di'-es, 

di'-es. 

G.  re'-i, 

re'-rum, 

G.   di-e'-i. 

di-e'-riim, 

I),  re'-i, 

re'-biis. 

D.   di-e'-i, 

di-e'-hus, 

,  Ac.  rem, 

res, 

Ac.  di'-em. 

di'-es, 

V.   res. 

res,. 

V.   di'-es. 

di'-es, 

Ab.  re. 

re'-biis. 

Ab.  di'-e. 

di-e'-biis. 

Remark.  Nouns  of  this  declension,  like  those  of  the  fourth,  seem  to  have 
belonged  originally  to  the  third  declension. 

Exceptions  in  Oender. 

1.  Dies^  a  day,  is  mascuhne  or  feminine  in  the  singular,  and  always 
masculine  in  the  plural ;  meridies,  mid-day,  is  mascuhne  only. 

Note.  Dies  is  seldom  feminine,  in  good  prose  writers,  except  when  it  de- 
notes duration  of  time,  or  a  day  fixed  and  determined. 

Exceptions  in  Declension. 

2.  The  genitive  and  dative  singular  sometimes  end  in  e  or  in  f,  instead  of  ei; 
as,  gen.  die  for  diei,  Virg. ;  fide  for  Jidei,  Hor. ;  acie  for  aciei,  Caes. — gen.  plebi 
for  plebei,  Liv. — dat.  fide  for  fdei,  Hor.,  pernicie^  Liv.,  and  pernicii,Ne]^.,  for 
perniciei.  The  genitive  rabies  contracted  for  rabieis,  after  the  third  declension, 
is  found  in  Lucretius. 

Remark  1.  There  are  only  about  eighty  nouns  of  this  declension,  and  of 
these  only  two,  res  and  dies,  are  complete  in  the  plural.  Acies,  effigies,  eluvies, 
fades,  glades,  jrrogenies,  series,  species,  spes,  want  the  genitive,  aktive,  and  ab- 
lative plural,  and  the  rest  want  the  plural  altogether. 

Rem.  2.  All  nouns  of  this  declension  end  in  ies,  except  four— fides,  faith; 
res,  a  thing;  spes,  hope;  and  plebes,  the  comnaon  people; — and  all  nouns  in  ies 
are  of  this  declension,  except  abies,  aries,  paries,  quies,  and  requies,  which  are 
of  the  third  declension. 

Declension  of  Compound  Nouns. 

§  01.  When  a  compound  noun  consists  of  two  nominatives,  both 
parts  are  declined ;  but  when  one  part  is  a  nominative,  and  the  other 
an  oblique  case,  the  nominative  only  is  declined.  Of  the  former  kind 
are  respublica,  a  commonwealth,  and  jusjurandum,  an  oath ;  of  the 
latter,  mater  familias,  a  mistress  of  a  family.   Cf  §  43,  2. 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.  V.  res-pub '-li-ca,  N.  V.  res-pub Mi-cas, 

G.  D.  re-i-pub'-li-cae,  G.        re-rum-pub-li-ca'-rum, 

Ac.      rem-pub'-H-cari,  D.  Ab.  re-bus-pub'-li-cis, 

Ab.      re-pub^-U-ca.  Ac.      res-pub'-li-cas. 


48  raREGULAR  NOUNS.  §  92. 


Singtdai  Plural. 

JV.   jus-ju-ran  -dum,  ju-ra-ju-ran'-da, 

G.   ju-ris-ju-ran'-di,  '■ 

D.    iu-ri-ju-ran'-<.io, — 

Ac.  jus-ju-ran'-dum,  jti-ra-ju«ran'-da, 

V.   jus-jn-ran'-dum,  ju-ra-ju-ran'-da. 

Ab.  ju-re-ju-ran'-do.  


SinffvJar. 
N.  ma-ter-fa-mUM-as, 
G.  ma-tris-fa-mil''-i-as, 
D.  ma-tri-fa-milM-as, 
Ac.  ma-trem-fa-niil''-i-a8, 
V.  ma-ter-fa-mil'-i-as, 
Ab.  ma-tre-fa-milM-as,  etc. 


Note.    The  preceding  compounds  are  divided  and  pronounced  like  the  simple  words  of 
whkh  they  are  compouHded. 


IRREGULAR    NOUNS. 


t 


§  03.    Irregular   nouns   are   divided   into   three    classes— 
Variable^  Defective,  and  Redundxint, 


I.    VARIABLE    NOUNS. 


A  noun  is  variable,  which,  in  some  of  its  parts,  changes  either 
its  gender  or  declension  or  both. 

Nouns  which  vary  in  gen(fer  are  called  heterogeneous ;  those 
which  vary  in  declension  are  called  heteroclites. 

Heterogeneous  Nouns. 

1.  Masculine  in  the  singular,  and  neuter  in  the  plural;  as, 

Avemus^  Dindymus^  IsmdruSj  MasstcuSy  Mcendlus,  Pangceus,  TartdruSj  Taygi- 
tus;  plur.  Avema,  etc. 

2.  Masculine  in  the  singular,  and  mascuHne  or  neuter  in  the  plu- 
ral; as, 

Jdcus,  a  jest;  plur.  jdct,  or  jdca ; — Idcus,  a  place ;  plur.  Idci,  passages  in  books, 
topics,  places ;Idca^  places ; — sibilus,  a  hissing;  plnr.  sibila,  rarely  siblU) — intubus^ 
endive ;  plur.  itUiibi  or  intuba. 

3.  Feminine  in  the  singular,  and  neuter  in  the  plural ;  as, 

carbdsiis,  a  species  of  flax ;  plur.  carbdsa,  very  rarely  carbddj  sails,  etc.,  mad^ 
of  it; — Hieroaolyma,  -<b,  Jerusalem;  plur.  Hierosolyma,  -drum. 

4.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  in  the  plural ;  as, 
codum,  heaven;  plur.   ccdi; — Elysium;   plur.   Elysii; — Argos;   plur.  Argu 

So  sfser,  neut,  plur.  siseres,  masc. 

5.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  masculine  or  neuter  in  the  plural ; 
as, 

frenum,  a  bridle;  jiluT.  fr'eni  or  frena; — rostrum,  a  rake;  plur.  rastri,  or, 
more  rarely,  rostra ;—jmgillar,  a  writing  tablet;  plur.  pugillares  or  pugillaria. 

6.  Neuter  in  the  singular,  and  feminine  in  the  plural ;  as, 
epuluin,  a  feast;  plur.  epulm; — balneum,  a  bath;  plur.  balnea  or  balnea; — 

nundinum,  a  market-day ;  plur.  nundincB,  a  fair. 

7.  Feminine  or  neuter  in  the  singular,  and  feminine  in  the  plural ; 
as, 

delicia  or  dtUcium,  delight;  plnr.  deUcia. 


§  93,  94  DEFECTIVE   NOUNS.  49 

Heteroclites. 

§  93.     1.    Second  or  t  jird  declension  in  the  singular,  and  third 
in  the  plural ;  as, 

nom.  and  a.cc.  jufjei'um,  an  acre;  gen.  jugeri  or  jugeris;  abl.  jugSro  and 
jugere;  plur,,  nom.,  and  ace.  jugera;  gen.  jugerum;  abl.  Jugeris  ana  jugeribics. 

2.   Third  declension  in  the  singular,  and  second  in  the  plural ;  as, 
vds,  a  vessel ;  pKir.  vdsa,  drum.    Ancde,  a  shield,  has  sometimes  anciliorunij 
in  the  genitive  plural. 

Note.  Variable  nouns  seem  anciently  to  have  been  redundant,  and  to  hare  retained 
a  part  of  each  of  their  original  forms.  Thus,  vasa.  -orum^  properly  comes  from  vdsunif 
-i,  but  the  latter,  together  vsith  the  plural  of  vas,  vasis,  became  obsolete. 


^ 


II.    DEFECTIVE   NOUNS. 

\  §  04.     Nouns  are  defective  either  in  case  or  in  number. 

1.  Nouns  defective  in  case  may  want  either  one  or  more  cases. 
Some  are  altogether  indeclinable,  and  |ire  called  aptotes. 

Such  are  poTido,  a  pound ;  most  nouns  in  i ;  as,  gummi,  gum :  foreign  words ; 
as,  Aaron,  Jacob :  semis,  a  half;  git,  a  kind  of  plant ;  the  singular  of  mille,  a 
thousand;  words  put  for  nouns;  as,  vdlesuum,  for  sua  voluntas,  his  own  inclina- 
tion; and  names  of  the  letters  of  the  alphabet. 

A  noun  which  is  found  in  one  case  only,  is  called  a  Monoptote ; 
if  found  in  two  cases,  a  Diptote  ;  if  in  three,  a  Triptote ;  if  in  four,  a 
Tetraptote  ;  and  if  in  five,  a  Pentaptote. 

The  following  list  contains  most  nouns  defective  in  case.  Those 
which  occur  but  once  in  Latin  authors  are  distinguished  by  an  as- 
terisk : — 

*  Abactus,  ace.  pi. ;  a  dHving  away.  Cetos,  ace. ;  a  whale ; — cete,  nom.  and 

Accitu,  abl. ;  a  calling  for.  ace.  pi. ;  cetis,  dat. 

Admissu,  cti?. ;  admission.  Chaos,  nom.  ace;  chao.  a5^.;  chaos. 

Admonitu,  abl.;  admonition.  Cassem,  ace;  casse,  aoL;  a  net;— pi. 

£.s,  not  used  in  gen.  j^l.  entire. 

Affatu,  abl. ;  an  addressing ;— pi.  affa-  Circumspectus,  nom. ;  -um;  -u;  a  look- 
ins,  -ibus.                                  '  ing  around. 
Algus,  nom. ;  algum,  ace. ;   algu,  abl. ;  Coactu,  abl. ;  constraint. 

cold.  Coelite,  abl. ;  pi.  entire ;  inhabitants  oj 

Ambage,   ahl.;   a  going  around;— pi.  heaven. 

entire.  *Commutatum,  ace. ;  an  alteration. 

*Amis3um,  aec. ;  a  loss.  Compedis,  gen. ;  compede,  abl. ;  afet- 

Aplustre,  nom.  and  ace. ;  the  flag  of  a  ier;—2)l.  compedes,  -ium,  -ibus. 

ship  ;—pl.  aplustria,  or  aplustra.  Concessu,  abl. ;  permission. 

Arbitratus,'  nom. ;  -um,  ace. ;  -u,  abl. ;  Condiscipulatu,  abl. ;  companionship  at 

judgment.  school. 

Arcessitu,  abl. ;  a  sending  for.  Cratim,  or  -em,  a^c. ;  -e,  abl. ;  a  hur- 

Astu,  nom.,  ace. ;  a  city.  die  ;—pl.  crates,  -ium,  -ibus. 

Astus,  nom.;  astu,  abV;  craft; — astus,  Cupressu,  abl.;  a  cypress. 

ace.  pi.  Daps,  no77i.,  scarcely  used;  dapis,  gen. 

Cacoethes,  nom.,  ace. ;    an    evil  cm-  etc.  pi.  dapes,  -ibus ;  a  feast. 

torn ; — cacoeVae,   nom.  pi. ;    -e,   and  ^Datij,  abl. ;  a  giving. 

-es,  ace.  pi.  Derisus,  -ui,  dat. ;  -um,  ace. ;  -u,  abl. ; 

Canities,  nom.    -em,  ace. ;  -e,  abl.  indicule, 
h 


50 


DEFECTIVE   NOUNS. 


§94. 


Despicatui,  doL ;  contempt. 
Dica,  nom. ;  dicam,  clcc.  ;  a  legal  pro- 
cess ; — dicas,  ace.  pi. 
Dicis,  gen. ;  as,  dicis  gratia,  Jor  form's 

sake. 
Ditionis,  gen. ;  -i,  dat. ;  -em,  ace. ;  -e, 

abL ;  power. 
Diu,  aht ;  in  die  day  time. 
Divisui,  dat. ;  a  diruling. 
Ebnr,  ivo7-y ; — not  used  in  t  .e  plural. 
*Efflajiiliitu,  abl. ;  imjMrtuniiy. 
*Ejectus,  nom. ;  a  throwing  out. 
Epos,  nom.  and  ace. ;  an  epic  jwem. 
Ergo,  abL  (or  adv.) ;  for  the  sake. 
Esst'das,  ace.  pi. ;  toar  chariots. 
Evectus,  nom. ;  a  canning  out. 
Foex,  dregs,  wants  gen.  pL 
Fame,  abl. ;  hunger. 
Far,  coi-n,  not  used  in  the  gen.,  dot., 

and  abl.  pi. 
Fas,  nom. ;  ace. ;  right. 
Fauce,  ahl.;  the  throat;— pL  entire. 
Fax,  a  torch,  wants  gen.  pi.  « 

Fel,  gall,  wants  gen.  2)1. 
Feminis,  gen.;   -I,  dat.;  -e,  abl.;  the 

thigh  ;^)l.  femina,  -ibus. 
Flictu,  abl. ;  a  striking. 
Foris,  nom.  and  gen.;  -em,  ace;   -e, 

cd}l. ;  a  door;— 2)1.  entire. 
Fors,  nom. ;  -tis,  gen. ;  -tem,  ace. ;  -te, 

abl.;  chance. 
*Frustratui,  abl. ;  a  deceiving. 
Frux,  f-uit,  nom.    scarcely  used; — 

frugis,  gen.,  etc. 
Fulgetras,  ace.  pi.  ;  lightning. 
Gausape,  7iom.,  ace,  ahl. ;  a  rough  gar- 
ment ; — gnusapa,  ace.  pi. 
Glos,  nom. ;  a  husband's  sister. 
Grates,  ace.  pi. ; — gratibus,  abl;  thanks. 
Hebdomadani,  ace. ;  a  week. 
Hieras,  winter,  not  used  in  gen.,  dot., 

and  abl.  pi. 
Hippomanes,  nom.  and  ace. 
*Hir,  nom. ;  tlie  palm  of  die  hand. 
Hortatu,  abl. ;  an  exhorting  ;—pl.  hor- 

tatibus. 
Impetis,  gen.;  -e,  abl;  a  shock;— pi 

impetlbus. 
Incltas,  or  -a,  ace.  pi ;  as,  ad  incltas 

redactus,  reduced  to  a  strait. 
♦Inconsultu,  abl ;  tritliout  adtice. 
♦Indultu,  abl. ;  indulgence. 
Inferiie,  nom.  2^1 ;  -as,  ace. ;  -is,  abl. ; 

sacrifices  to  the  dead. 
Infitia.s,  acc.pl. ;  a  denial;  as,  ire  infit- 

ias,  to  deny. 
Ingratiis,  abl  pi,  (used  adverbiaEy); 

against  one^s  wiU. 
Injussu,  abl. ;  tciOiout  command. 
Inquies,  nom. ;  restlessness. 
Instar,  nom.,  ace. :  a  likeness. 


Interdiu,  abl  (or  adv.);  in  the  day  time. 
*Invitatu,  abl ;  an  invitation. 
IiTisui,  dot.;  -um,  ace.;  -n,  abl;  de- 
rision. 
Jovis,  nom.,  rarely  used;— ^/.  Joves. 
Ju^eris,  gen.;  -e,  abl;  an  acre;—pl. 

jugera,  -um,  -ibus. 
Jiissu,  abl. ;  command. 
Labes,  a  spot,  wants  gen.  pi 
LUcu,  abl ;  day-light. 
*Ludificatui,  aai. ;  a  mockeiy. 
Lux,  light,  wants  the  gen.  pC 
Jlaiidatu,  abl ;  a  command. 
Mane,  nom.,  ace. ;  mane,  or  rarely  -1, 

abl ;  tlie  morning. 
Mel,  honey,  not  used  in  gen.,  dai.^  and 

abl.  pi. 
Melos,  nom.,  ace;  melo,  daL;  melody; 

— ^mele,  nom.,  ace.  pi 
Metus,  fear,  not  used  in  gen.,  dai.,  and 

abl.  2>l 
Missu,  abl;   a  sending ;— pi.  missus, 

-ibus. 
Monitu^  abl;   admonition; — pi  mon- 

itus. 
Katu,  abl. ;  by  birth. 
Nauci,  gen.,  with  non;  as,  homo  non 

nauci,  a  man  of  no  account. 
Nefas,  nom.,  ace. ;  wickedness. 
Nemo,   nobody,    wants    the    voc.    and 

the  pi 
Nepenthes,  nom.,  ace. ;  an  herb. 
Nex,  death,  wants  the  voc.; — ^neces, 

nom.,  ace.  pi 
Nihil,  or  nUiilum,  nom.  and  ace;  -i, 

gen. ;  -o,  abl. ;  nothing. 
Noctu,  abl ;  by  night. 
Nuptui,    dat.;    -um,    ace;    -u,    abl; 

marriage. 
Obex,  nom. ;  -Icem,  ace ;  -lee,  or  -jlce, 

abl ;  a  bolt;— pi  oblces,  -jiclbus. 
Objectum,  ace ;  -u,  abl. ;  an  interposi- 
tion;—/jI  objectus. 
Obtentui,  dat. ;  -um,  ace  ;  -u,  abl. ;  a 

pretext. 
Opis,  gen.;    opem,  ace;    ope,    abl; 

lielp  ;—pl.  entu*e. 
Oppositu,  abl. ;  an  opposing  ;—pl  op- 

positus,  ace 
Opus,  nom.,  ace ;  need. 
Os,  the  mouth,  wants  the  gen.  pi 
Panaces,  nom. ;  -is,  gen. ;  -e,  abl ;  an 

herb. 
Vfis.,  peace,  wants  gen.  pi 
Peccam,  (lAZ. ;  a  fault. 
Peciidis,  gen. ;  -i,  dat. ;  -em,  ace  ;  -e, 

abl  ;—2)l  entire. 
Pelage,  ace  pi  of  pelagus ;  the  sea. 
Permissu,  abl. ;  -um,  ace. ;  permission. 
Piscatus,  nom.;  -i,  gen.;  -wax,  oceuy 

-XkyObl;  a  fishing. 


96. 


DEFECTIYE   NOUNS. 


51 


Pix,  pitch ;  pices,  ace.  pi 

Pondo,  abl. ;  in  weight.    Cf.  §  94, 1. 

Preci,  dat. ;  -era,  ace. ;  -e,  abl. ; prayer; 

—pi.   entire. 
Procer;  nom. ;  -era,  ace. ;  a  peer;— pi. 

entire. 
Promptu,  ahl,  readiness. 
Pus  wants  gen.  dat.  and  abl.  pL 
Relatum,  ace. ; — u,  abl. ;  a  recital. 
Repetixndai-nm,   gen.   pi.  ;     -is,    abl. ; 

money  taken  by  extortion. 
Rogatu,  abl. ;  a  request. 
Ros,  rft'W,  wants  gen.  2^1. 
Rus,  the  country,  wants  gen.,  dat.,  and 

abl.  pi. 
Satias,  nom. ;  -atem,  ace. ;   ate,  abl. ; 

satiety. 
Secus,  nom.,  ace. ;  sex. 
Situs,  nom. ;  -um,  ace. ;  ~u,  abl. ;  situa- 
tion ; — situs,  nom.  and  ace.  pi. 
Situs,  nom. ;  -us,  gen.  ;  -um,  ace. ;  -u, 

ahl. ;  rust; — situs,  ace, pi. 
Sol,  the  sun,  wants  gen.  pi. 
Sordis,  gen. ;  -era,  ace. ;  -e  and  -i,  abl; 

filth  ;—pl.  sordes,-iura,  etc. 
Spontis,  gen. ;   -e,  abl. ;  of  one's  own 

accord. 
Suboles,  offspring,  wants  gen.  pi. 

Remark  1.  To  these  may  be  added  nouns  of  the  fifth  declension,  which 
either  want  the  plural,  as  raost  of  them  are  abstract  nouns,  or  liave  in  that 
number  only  tiie  nominative,  accusative,  and  vocative.  Res  and  c/i'es,  however, 
have  the  plural  entire.   Cf.  \  90,  R.  1. 

Rem.  2.  For  the  use  of  the  vocative,  also,  of  many  nouns,  no  classical  au- 
thority can  be  found. 

§  95.  2.  Nouns  defective  in  number,  want  either  the  plural  or 
the  singular. 

(a)  Many  nouns  want  the  plural  from  the  nature  of  the  things 
which  they  express.  Such  are  generally  names  of  persons,  most  names 
of  places  (except  those  which  have  only  the  plural),  the  names  of 
herbs,  of  the  arts,  most  material  and  abstract  nouns ;  but  these  may 
have  a  plural  when  used  as  common  nouns,  (§  26,  R.  3.),  and  many 
others. 

Rem.  In  Latin  the  plural  of  abstract  nouns  is  often  used  to'  denote  the  exist- 
ence of  the  quality,  attribute,  etc.  in  different  objects,  or  the  repetition  of  an 
action  ;  and  in  poetry  such  plurals  are  used  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  metre. 
See  §  98. 

The  following  list  contains  many  of  the  nouns  which  want  the  plural, 
and  also  some,  marked  jo,  which  are  included  in  the  above  classes,  but 
are  sometimes  used  in  the  plural. 


SuppetisB,  nom.  pi.;    -as,    ace.;  sup- 
plies. 
Tabum,  nom. ;  -i,  gen. ;  -o,  abl. ;  cor- 
rupt matter. 
Tempe,  nom.  aec.  voc.  pi.;  a  vale  in 

Thessaly. 
Tus  wants  gen.,  dat.,  and  abl.pl. 
Venui  and  -o,  dat. ;  um,  ace. ;  -o,  abl, ; 

sale. 
Veprem,  ace.;   -e,  abl;  a  brier;— pi 

entire. 
Verb er is,  gen.;  -e,  abl;  astiipe;—pl. 

verb  era,  ura,  ibus. 
Vesper,  nom.;  -ura,  ace-;  -e,  -i,  or-o, 

abl ;  the  evening. 
Vespera,  nom. ;  -am,  aec. ;  -a,  ahl.  ;  the 

evening. 
Vicis,  gen. ;  -i,  dat. ;   -em,  ace. ;  -e, 

abl. ;  change  ;—-pl.  entire,  except  gen. 
Virus,  nom. ;  -i,  gen, ;  -us,  aec. ;  -o,  abl ; 

poison. 
Yis^  gen.  and  dat.  rare  ;  strength;  pi 

vires,  -ium,  etc.     See  ^  85. 
Viscus,  nom. ;  -cris,  gen. ;  -gre,  abl ; 

an  internal  organ,  pi  viscera,  etc. 
Vocatu,  abl ;  a  calling ; — vocatus,  aec. 

pi 


Aconitura,  wolfsbane,  p. 
Adorea,   a    military   re- 
ward. 
AGr,  the  air,  p. 
iEs,  brass,  money,  p. 
^tlier,  the  sky. 


^vum,  age,  lifetime,  p. 
Album,  an  album. 
Allium,  garlic,  p. 
Axaxc'xtvA.,  friendship,  p. 
Argilla,  white  clay. 
Avena,  oats,  p. 


Balaustium,  the  flower  of 

the  pomegranate. 
Balsamura,  bahnm,  p. 
Barathnxm,  a  gulf. 
Galium,  hardened  sMn,  p. 
Calor,  heatfip. 


•^•■^TT 


52 


DF-FUCTiVE   NOUNS. 


96. 


Cardans,  a  ihisile,  p. 
CekTO,  Jiesh,  p. 
Cera,  wax,  p. 
Cestus,  a  (/irdle. 
Cicuta,  hemlock,  p. 
CoenuiTi,  mud. 
Contagium,  contagion,  p. 
Crocuiu,  saj^ron. 
Crocu?,  s'l^i'on,  p. 
Cmor,  blood,  p. 
Cutis,  the  skin,  p. 
Diluculum,  the  davon. 
Ebiir,  ivory. 
Electrura,  amber y  p. 
Far,  corn,  p. 
Fel,  gall.  p. 
Fei-vor,  neat,  p. 
Fides, /oj<A. 
Fimus,  dung. 
Fuga,  flight,  j>. 
Fiimus,  smoke,  p. 
Furor,  madness,  p. 
Galla,  an  oak-apple,  p. 
Gelu,yro5<. 
Glarea,  gravel. 
Gloria,  glory,  p. 
Glastum,  tcoool 
Gluten,  or 
Glutlnum,  o?u«. 
Gypsum.  zcJiite plaster. 
Be  par,  the  liver. 
Hesperus,    the     evening 

star. 
Bllum,  a  Uule  thing. 
Hordeum,  barley,  p. 
Humus,  tJie  ground. 
Indoles,  native  quality,  p. 
Ira,  anger,  p. 
Jubai",  radiance. 
Jus, justice,  law,  p, 
Justitium,  o  law  vacation. 


Lac,  milk. 

Laetitia,jov,  p. 

Languor,  faintness,  p. 

Lardum,  bacon,  p. 

Latex,  limtor,  p. 

Letum,  aeaih. 

Lignum,  vx)od,  p. 

Limus,  mud. 

Liquor,  liquor,  p. 

Lues,  a  plague. 

Lutum,  clay,  p. 

Lux,  light,  p. 

Macellum,  the  shambles. 

Mane,  the  morning. 

Marmor,  marble,  p. 

Mel,  honey,  p. 

Meridies,  mid-day. 

Mors,  (/eai/t,  p. 

Munditia,  neatness,  p. 

Mundus,  female  orna- 
ments. 

Muscus,  moss. 

Nectar,  nectar. 

Nemo,  no  man. 

Nequitia,  teickedness,  p. 

Nihilum,  nihil,  or  nil,  no- 
tliing. 

Nitrum,  natron. 

Ohlivio,  forgeifulness,  p. 

Omasum,  bullock's  tripe. 

Opium,  opium. 

Palea,  chaff,  p. 

Pax,  peace,  p. 

Penum,  atui 

Fenus,  provisions,  p. 

'Piper,pepper. 

Pix,  pitch,  p. 

Pontus,  the  sea. 

Prolubium,  desire. 

Pubes,  the  yoiUh. 

Pulvis,  dust,  p. 


Purpura,  puryfe,  p. 
Quies,  rest,  p. 
Eos,  dew,  p. 
Kubor,  reaness,  p. 
Sabiilo  and 
Sabulum,  gravel. 
Sal,  so/^ 
Salura,  the  secu 
Salus,  safety. 
Sangui?,  blood. 
Scrupulum,  a  scrvpU^  p. 
Senium,  old  age. 
Slier,  an  osier. 
Sinapi,  mustard. 
Siser,  skirret,  p 
Sitis,  t/iirrf. 
Sol,  the  sun,  p. 
Sopor,  sZeep,  p. 
Specimen,  an  example. 
SpHraa,  yba/ra,  p. 
Sulfur,  sulphur  J  p. 
Supellex,  furniture. 
Tabes,  a  consumption. 
Tabum,  corrupt  matter. 
Tellus,  the  earth. 
Terror,  terror,  p. 
Thyraum,  thyme,  p. 
Tribulus,  a  thistle,  p. 
Tristitiaj  sadness. 
Ver,  spnng. 
Vespera,  the  evening. 
Vetemus,  lethargy. 
Vigor,  strength,  p. 
Viuum,  wine,  p. 
Virus,  poison. 
Viscum,  and 
Viscus,  bird-liTue. 
Vitrum,  woad. 
Vulgus,  the  common  peo- 
ple. 
Zingiber,  ginger. 


§  06,  (b).  The  names  of  festivals  and  games,  and  several  names 
of  places  and  books,  want  the  singular ;  as,  Bacchanalia,  a  festival  of 
Bacchus ;  Olgmpia,  the  Oljinpic  games ;  BucoUca,  a  book  of  pastorals ; 
and  the  following  names  of  places : — 


Acroceraunia,  Baiae, 

Amjclae,  Ceraunia, 

Artaxata,  Ecbatana, 

Athenae,  Esquiliae, 


Fundi, 

Locri, 

Gabu, 

Parisii, 

Gades, 

Philippi, 

Gemonise, 

Puteoli, 

Susa, 
SvracGssB, 
Thermopylae, 
Veil. 


Note.   Some  of  those  in  t  properly  signify  the  people. 

The  following  list  contains  most  other  nouns  tchicTi  want  the  singular, 
and  also  some,  marked  s,  which  are  rarely  used  in  that  number  :— 
Acta,  records.  Alpe?,  the  Alps,  s.  '      Apinse,  trifles. 

Adversaria,  a  memoran-    Annales,  annals,  s.  Argutise,  witticisms,  8. 


dumriook. 
Estiva,  so.  castra, 
tner  quarters. 


Antae,  door-posts. 
Antes,  rows. 
Antiae,  aforelocc. 


Arma,  arms. 
Artus,  the  Joints,  s. 
BeUaria,  sweetmeats. 


§97. 


DEFECTIVE  NOUNS. 


S8 


Bi^ae,  a  two-horse  char- 

to<,  s. 

Braccae,  breeches. 

Branchise,  Hit  gills  of 
fishes. 

Brevia,  shaUaw  places. 

Calendae,  the  Qilends. 

Cancelli,  balustrades. 

Cani,  gray  hairs. 

Casses,  a  hunter's  net,  s. 

CauliB,  sheep-folds. 

Celeres,  the  body-guard 
of  the  Roman  kings. 

Gih2ir'm,  victuals,  s. 

Clitellae,  a  pach-saddle. 

Codicilli,  a  writing. 

Coelites,  the  gods,  s. 

Crepundia,  a  rattle. 

Cunabula,  and 

Cunaj,  a  cradle. 

Cyclades,  the  Cyclades,  s. 

Decimae,  tithes,  8. 

Diras,  the  Furies,  s. 

Divitiae,  riches. 

Druides,  the  Druids. 

Dryades,  the  Dryads,  s. 

Epulae,  a  banquet,  s. 

Eumenides,  the  Furies,  s. 

Excubiae,  watches. 

Exsequise,  yMneraZ  Htes. 

Exta,  entrails. 

Exuviae,  spoils. 

Facetiae,  jileasantry,  s. 

Feriae,  holidays,  s. 

Fides,  a  stHnged  instru- 
ment, s. 

Flabra,  blasts. 

Fraces,  the  lees  of  oil. 

Fraga,  strawberries,  s. 

Gemini,  twins,  s. 

Gente,  cheeks,  s. 

GeiTae,  trifles. 

Grates,  thanks. 

Habenae,  reins,  s. 

Hiberna,  sc.  castra,  winr 
ter  quarters. 

Hj'ades,  the  Eyades,  s. 

Idus,  the  ides  of  a  month. 

Ilia,  the  flank. 

Incunabula,  a  cradle. 

Indutiae,  a  truce. 


Induviae,  clothes. 

Ineptiss,  fooleries,  s. 

Inferi,  the  dead. 

lnfenx,sacriflces  in  honor 
of  the  dead. 

Insecta,  insects. 

InsidiiE,  an  ambuscade,  s. 

Sxx&i'Ji,  funeral  rites. 

Lactes,  small  entrails,  s. 

Lamenta,  lamentations. 

Lapicidinse,  a  stone  quar- 
ry. 

Latebras,  a  hiding  place, 
s. 

Laurlces,  young  rabbits. 

Lautia,  presents  to  for- 
eign ambassadors. 

Lemiires,  hobgoblins. 

Lendes,  nits 

Liberi,  children,  s. 

Luceres,  a  division  of  the 
Roman  cavalry. 

Magalia,  cottages. 

Majores,  ancestors. 

Manes,  the  shades,  s. 

Manubi£B,  spoils  of  war. 

Mapalia,  huts,  a. 

Minaciae,  and 

Minae,  threats. 

Minores,  posterity. 

Moenia,  the  walls  of  a 
city,  s. 

Multitia,  garments  fnely 
wrought. 

Munia,  official  duties. 

Naiades,  water-nymphs,  s. 

Nares,  the  nostrils,  s. 

Natales,  parentage. 

Nates,  the  haunches,  s. 

Nomse,  corroding  sondes  or 
ulcers.,  s. 

Nonae,  the  nones  of  a 
month.   §  326,  1. 

Nugae,  ji'esis,  nonsense. 

Nundinge,  the  weekly  mar- 
ket. 

Nuptiae,  a  marriage. 

Oh].\v\2i,forgetfulness,  s. 

Oifuciae,  cheats,  s. 

Optimates,  the  aristo- 
cratic party,  s. 


Palearia,  the  dewlap,  s. 
Pandectae,  the  pandects. 
Parietinae,  old  walls. 
Partes,  a  party,  s. 
Pascua,  ^flfsittres,  s. 
Penates,  houseliold  gods, 

s. 
Phalfirae,  trappings. 
Philtra,  lovepotious. 
Pleiades,  the  Pleiads  or 

seven  stars,  s. 
Posteri,  posterity. 
Praebia,  an  amulet. 
Praecordia,     the     dior 

phragm,  the  entrails. 
Primitias,  first  fruits. 
Proceres,  nobles,  s. 
Pugillaria,    or    -axes, 

writing-tablets,  s. 
Quadrigas,  a  team  of  four 

horses,  s, 
Quirltes,  Roman  citizeTUf 

s. 
Quisquiliae,  refuse. 
ReUquiae,  the  remains,  a. 
Salebrae,  ruggedroads,  8. 
Salinse,  salt  pits. 
Scalae,  a  ladder,  a. 
Scatebrae,  a  spring,  s. 
Scopae,  a  broom. 
Scruta,  old  stuff. 
Sentes,  thorns,  a. 
Sponsalia,  espousals. 
Stativa,    sc.    castra,    a 

stationary  camp. 
Superi,  the  gods  above. 
Talaria,  vnnged  shoes. 
T^iebrae,  darkness,  s. 
Tesca,  rough  places. 
Thermae,  warm  baths. 
Toi-mina,  colic-pains. 
Transtra,  seats  for  row- 
ers, a. 
Tric£e,  trifles,  toys. 
Utensilia,  utensils. 
Valval,  folding  doors,  a. 
Vepres,  branwles,  s. 
Vergiliae,  the  seven  stars. 
Vindiciae,  a  legal  claim,  a. 
Virgulta,  bushes. 


§  OT.     The  following  usually  differ  in  meaning  in  the  different 
numbers. 


^des,  -is,  a  temple. 
Mdes,  -ium,  a  house. 
Aqua,  water. 
^.quae,  medicinal  springs. 
Auiilium,  aid. 
AnxiHa.  eaioMnry  trams. 


Bonum,  a  good  thing. 
Bona,  property. 
Career,  a  prison. 
Carceres,  the  barriers  (f 

a  race-course. 
OaSti-u*i,  a  cdstie. 


Castra,  a  camp. 
Comitium,  apart  of  the 

Roman  forum. 
Comitia,  an  assembly  for 

election. 
Oopia,j??e»<y. 


54 


BEDXJNDAin:  NOUNS. 


§  98,  99. 


Copiae,  troops^  forces. 
Cupedia,  -:ie,  mintineSS. 
CupeJiae,  -anuu,  atui 
Cupedia,  -tirura,  dainties. 
Facnltas,  ability. 
Facultates,  jtroperiy. 
Fastus,  -us,  pride. 
Fastus,  -uum,  and 
Fasti,  -onim,  a  calendar. 
Fortuna,  Fortune, 
Fortunae,  wealth. 
Furfur,  braii. 
Furfures,  dandruff. 
Gmtia,  favor. 
Gi-atia,  ihatiks. 


Impedimentum,  a  hinder- 
ance. 

Impedimenta,  baggage. 

Lit  era,  a  letter  qjfihe  al- 
phabet. 

Literse,  an  epistle. 

Ludus,  pastime. 

Ludi,  public  games. 

Lustrum,  a  nwrass. 

Lustra,  a  haunt  or  den  of 
wild  beasts. 

Mos,  custom. 

Mores,  manners. 

Naris,  a  nostriL 

Nares,  Hie  nose. 


Natalis,  a  birthday. 
Natilles,  bii-th,  lineage* 
Opera,  loork,  labor. 
OperJB,  vx/rkmen. 
Opis,  gen.  jwicer. 
Opes,  -um,  means,  wealth. 
Plaga,  a  region,  tract. 
Pliigae,  nets,  toils. 
Priucipium,  a  beginning. 
Principia,    </te   generaJts 

quarters. 
Rostrum,  a  beak,  pr<KO. 
Rostra,  iJie  Rostra. 
Sal,  salt. 
Sales,  witticisms. 


§  08.  The  following  plurals,  wltli  a  few  others,  are  sometimes 
used  in  poetry,  especially  in  the  nominative  and  accusative,  instead 
of  the  singular,  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  or  metre. 


^quora,  the  sea. 
Alta,  the  sea. 
Animi,  courage. 
Aurae,  the  air. 
Carui£e,  a  keel. 
Cersices,  the  neck. 
Colla,  the  neck. 
Comae,  the  hair. 
Connubia,  marriage. 
Corda,  the  heart. 
Corpora,  a  body. 
Crepuscula,  twUighi. 
CuiTus,  a  chariot. 
Exsilia,  banishment 
Frigora,  cold. 
Gaudia,  joy. 
Gramina,  grass. 
Guttura,  me  throat. 


Hymenaei,  marriage. 

Ignes,  love. 

Inguina,  the  groin. 

Lrae,  anger. 

Jejunia,  fasting. 

Jubae,  a  mane. 

Limlna,  a  threshold. 

Litora,  a  shore. 

Mensae,  a  service  or  course 
of  dishes. 

Neniae,  a  funeral  dirge. 

Numlua,  the  divinity. 

Odia,  haired. 

Ora,  the  mouth,  the  coun- 
tenance. 

Orae,  confines. 

Ortus,  a  rising,  the  east. 

Otia,  ease,  leiJsure. 


Pectora,  the  breast. 
Reditus,  a  retwn. 
Regna,  a  kingdom. 
Rictus,  the  jaws. 
Robora,  strength. 
Silentia,  silence. 
Siaus,  me  bosom  of  a  i2o- 

man  garment. 
Taedae,  a  torch. 
Tempora,  time. 
Tei'ga,  the  back. 
ThsLlami,  marriage  or 

marriage-bed. 
Tori,  a  bed,  a  couch. 
Tura,  frankincense. 
Viae,  a  journey. 
Vultus,  the  countenance. 


III.    REDUNDANT    NOUNS 


§  00.    Nouns  are  redundant  either  in  termination,  in  declension, 
in  gender,  or  in  two  or  more  of  these  respects. 

1.  In  termination:  (a.)  of  the  nominative  ;  as,  arbor,  and  arbos,  a  tree:  (5.) 
of  the  oblique  cases ;  as,  tigris, ;  gen.  tigris,  or  -idis ;  a  tiger. 

2.  In  declension;  as,  laurus;  gen.  -i,  or  -Qs;  a  laurel. 

3.  In  gender;  as,  vidgus,  masc.  or  neut.;  the  common  people. 

4.  In  termination  and  declension;  as,  senecta^  -<»,  and  senectus,  -utis;  old 
age. 

5.  In  termination  and  gender;  za,pileus,  masc,  vaApileum,  neut.;  a  hat- 

6.  In  declension  and  gender;  as  ^enus,  -i  or  us,  masc.  or  fem.,  and  penus, 
-dris,  neut. ;  a  store  of  provisions,     bpecus,  -us  or  -i,  masc.  fem.  or  neut. ;  a  cave. 

7.  In  termination,  declension,  and  gender;  as,  menda,  -ce,  fem.  and  mendum^ 
-i,  neut. ;  a  fault 


99. 


REDUNDANT   NOUNS. 


55 


The  following  list  contains  most  Redundant  Nouns  of  the  aboye  classes  :- 


Acinus,  -um,  and  -a,  a  berry. 

Adagium,  and  -io,  a  jfvovei-b. 

Admonitio,  -um,  and  -us,  ws,  a  remind- 
ing. 

J)thra,  and  sether,  the,  dear  sky. 

Affectio,  and  -us,  ms,  affection. 

Agamemno,  and  -on,  Agamemnon. 

Alabaster,  tri,  and  j)l.  -tra,  drw.n,  an 
alabaster  box. 

Alimonia,  and  -um,  aliment. 

Allnvio,  and -es,  a  flood. 

Alveariura,  and  -are,  a  bee-hive. 

Amaracus,  and  -um,  marjoram. 

Amygdala,  and  -um,  an  almond. 

Anfractum,  and  -us,  us,  a  winding. 

Angiportum,  and  -us,  us,  a  narrow  lane 
or  alley. 

Antidotus,  and  -um,  an  antidote.  , 

Aranea,  and  -us,  i,  a  spider. 

Arar,  and  Araris,  the  river  Arar. 

Arbor,  and  -os,  a  tree. 

Architectus,  and  -on,  an  architect. 

Arcus,  -us,  and  i,  a  bow. 

Attagena,  and  -gen,  a  moor-hen. 

Avaritia,  and  -ies,  avarice. 

Augmentum,  and  -men,  an  increase. 

Baccar,  and  -aris,  a  kind  of  herb. 

Bacillus,  and  -um,  a  staff. 

Balteus,  and  -um,  a  belt. 

Barbaria,  and  -ies,  barbarism. 

Barbitus,  and  -on,  a  harp. 

Batlllus,  and  -um,  ajire-shavel. 

Blanditia,  and  -ies,  flattery. 

Buccina,  and  -um,  a  trumpet. 

Bura,  am? -is,  a  plough-tail. 

Buxus,  and  -um,  the  box-tree. 

Cffipa,  and  csepe,  an  onion. 

Calamister,  tn,  and  -trum,  a  crisping- 
pin. 

Callus,  and  -um,  hardened  skin. 

Cancer,  cm,  or  eris,  a  crab. 

Canitia,  and  -ies,  hoariness. 

Capus,  and  capo,  a  capon. 

CaiTus,  and -um,  a  kind  of  waggon. 

Casslda,  and  -cassis,  a  helmet. 

Catlnus,  and  -um,  a  bowl,  dish. 

Chirographus,  and  -um,  a  hand-writ  ng. 

Cingiila,  -us,  and  -um,  a  girdle. 

Clipeus,  and  -um,  a  shield. 

Cochlearium,  -ar,  and  -are,  a  spoon 

Colluvio,  and  -ies,  fUh. 

Commentarius,  ant? -um,  a  journal 

Compages,  and  -go,  a  joining. 

Conatum,  and-u?,,  us,  an  attempt. 

Concinnitas,  and  -tudo,  neatness. 

Consortium,  and  -io,  partnership. 

Contagium,  -io,  and  -es,  contact. 

Cornum,  -us,  i,  or  us,  a  cornel  tree. 

Co8toii8,t,  cmd  -um,  «  kind  cf  ahru^. 


Cratera,  and  crater,  a  bowl. 
Crocus,  and  -um,  saffron. 
Ciystallus,  and  -um,  crystal. 
Cubitus,  and  -um,  the  elbow. 
Cupidltas,  and  -pido,  desire. 
Cupressus,  i,  or  us,  a  cypress-tree. 
Delicia,  and  -um,  deliglit. 
Delphinus,  and  delphin,  a  dolphUt, 
Dictamnus,  and -um,  dittany. 
Diluvium,  -o,  and  -ies,  a  deluge. 
Domus,  i,  or  us,  a  house. 
Dorsus,  and  -um,  the  back. 
Duritia,  and  -ies,  hardness. 
Effigia,  and  -ies,  an  image. 
Elegla,  and  -on,  i,  an  elegy. 
Elephantus,  and  -phas,  an  elephant, 
Epitoma,  and  -e,  an  abridgment. 
Esseda,  and  -um,  a  chariot. 
Evander,  dri,  and  -drus,  Evander. 
Eventum,  and  -us,  us,  an  event. 
Exemplar,  and  -are,  a  pattern. 
Ficus,  i,  or  us,  a  fg-tree. 
Fimus,  and  -um,  dung. 
Fretum,  and  -us,  us,  a  strait. 
Fulgetra,  and  -um,  lightning. 
Galerus,  and  -um,  a  hat.  cap. 
Ganea,  and  -um,  an  eating-house, 
Gausapa,  -es,  -e,  and -um,  frieze, 
Gibba,  -us,  and  -er,  eri,  a  hump. 
Glutinum,  and  -ten,  glue. 
Gobius,  and  -io,  a  gudgeon. 
Grammatica,  and  -e,  grammar. 
Grus,  gruis,and ^ruis,  is,  a  crane. 
Hebdomada,  aTia -mas,  a  week. 
Helleborus,  and  -um,  hellebore. 
Honor,  and  honos,  honor. 
Hyssopus,  and  -um,  Jiyssop. 
Ilios,  -um,  and  -on,  Troy. 
Incestum,  and  -us,  us,  incest. 
Intiibus,  and  -um,  endive. 
Jugulus,  and  -um,  the  throat. 
Juventa,  -us,  utis,  and  -as,  youth. 
Labor,  and  labos,  labor. 
Lacerta,  and  -us,  a  lizard, 
Lauras,  i,  or  us,  a  laurel. 
Lepor,  and  lepos,  wit. 
Ligur,  and  -us,  Hins,  a  Ligurian. 
Lupinus,  and  -um,  a  lupine. 
Luxuria,  and  -ies,  luxury. 
Maander,  -dros,  and  -drus,  Moeander. 
Margarita,  and -um,  a  pearl. 
Materia^  and  -ies,  materials. 
Medimnus,  and  -um,  a  measure. 
Menda,  and -um,  a  fault. 
Modius,  and  -um,  a  measure. 
MoUitia,  and  -ies,  softness. 
Momentum,  and  -men,  influence. 
Miigil,  and  -ills,  a  mtdlet. 
iTuloIber,  «r»,  or  eris,  Vttoan. 


56 


DEBIVATTON    OP   NOUNS. 


§100. 


Mnlctra,  and  -um,  a  milh-paiU 
Wtmditia,  and  -ies,  neatness. 
Muria,  and-ie^,  brine  or  j)icHe. 
Myrtus,  t  or  us,  a  myrtle. 
Nardiis,  and  -um,  nard. 
Nasus,  and  -um,  the  nose. 
Necessltas,  wwf -udo,  necessity. 
Nequitia,  and  -ies,  tcorthlessmss. 
Notitia,  and  -ies,  knowledge. 
Oblivium,  and  -io,/orgetfidn€S5. 
Obsidium,  and  -io,  a  sief/e. 
(Edipus,  t,  or  <j£?i5,  CEJipus, 
0.«trea,  and  -um,  a«  oyster. 
Palatus,  and -um,  the  palate. 
Palumba,  -us,  a«rf-es,  a  pigeon. 
Papyrus,  and  -nm,papyrus. 
Paupertas,  and  -ies,  poverty. 
Pavus,  andY>SLVO,  ajjeacock. 
Penus,  i,  -dris,  or  Us,  and'  penum,  pro- 

visio7is. 
Peplus,  and  -um,.  a  veil. 
Pei-seus,  ei,  or  ecs,  Perseus. 
PileQs,  ana -um,  a  hat. 
Pinus,  i,  or  us,  apine-tree. 
Pistnna,  and  -um,  a  bake^unise. 
Planitia,  and  -ies,  a  plain. 
Plato,  and  Platon,  Plato. 
Plebs,   atid  plebes,   ei,   the  common 

people. 
Pornis,  and  -um,  a  leek. 
Postulatum,  and  -io,  a  revest. 
Priesepia,  -ium,  -es,   or  -is,  and  -e,  a 

stable. 
Praetextum,  anJ-uSj  us,  apreiexL 
Prosapia,  an<? -ies,  lineage. 
Rapa,  and  -um,  a  turnip. 
Requies,  etis  or  ei,  rest. 
Rete,  and  retis,  a  net. 
ReticiUus,  and  -um,  a  small  neL 


Rictum,  and  -us,  us,  the  open  vwttth. 
Scevitia,  -udo  and  -ie;^,  ferocity. 
Si'igu'5,  aiid -um,  a  military  cloak. 
Sauguis,  and  sanguen,  bhJod. 
Satrapes,  and  satraps,  a  satrap. 
Scabritia,  and  -ies,  roughness. 
Scorpius,  -OS,  and  -io,  a  scorpion. 
Segmentum,  and -men,  apiece. 
Seguitia,  a/w -ies,  sloth. 
Senecta,  and  -us,  old  age. 
Sequester,  tri,  or  tiis,  a  trustee. 
Sesama,  and  -um,  sesame. 
Sibllus,  and  -a,  drujn,  a  hissing. 
Sinapi,  and  -is,  m,ustard. 
Sinus,  and  -um,  a  goblet. 
Spams,  and  -a,  drum,  a  spear. 
Spurcitia,  and -ies,JiUhiness. 
Stramentum,  and  -men,  straw. 
Suffimentum,  and  -men,  fumigation. 
Suggestus,  and -um,  a  pulpit,  stage. 
Supparus,  aiuJ  -um,  a  linen  garment 
Supplicium,  -ieamentum,  and  -icatk> 

a  public  supplication. 
Tapetum,  -ete,  and  -es,  tapestry. 
Teneritas,  and  -ttido,  softness. 
Tergum,  and  -us.  Oris,  ike  back. 
Tiara,  and  -as,  a  turban. 
Tignus,  and  -um,  a  beam,  timber. 
Tigris,  is,  or  idis,  a  tiger. 
Titanus,  and  Titan,  Tit^n. 
Tonitruum,  a7id  -trus,  us,  thunder. 
Torale,  and  -al,  a  bed-covering. 
Tribes,  and  trabs,  a  beam. 
Tribula,  and  -unij  a  threshing  sledge. 
Vespera,  -per,  en  and  eris,  me  evening. 
VLnaceus,  07K/-a,  orumj  a  grape-stone, 
Viscus,  and -um.,  the  mistletoe. 
Vulgus,  masc.  and  neut.,  the  common 
people. 


Remark  1.  To  these  may  be  added  some  other  verbals  in  us  and  io,  and 
Greek  nouns  in  o  and  on;  as,  Dio  and  Dion;  also  some  Greek  nouns  in  es  and 
e,  which  have  Latin  forms  in  o;  as,  Atrides  and  Atrida.     See  §  45. 

Rem.  2.  Some  propernames  of  places  also  are  redundant  in  number;  as, 
Argos  and  Argi;  Fidena  and  Fidence;  TJiibe  and  Thebop. 

Note.  The  different  forms  of  most  words  in  the  above  list  are  not  equally  common,  and 
some  are  rarely  used,  or  only  in  particular  cases. 

DERIVATION  OF  NOUNS. 


%' 


> 


[    §  100.     Nouns  are  derived  from  other  nouns,  from  adjectives, 
and  from  verbs. 

I.  From  Nouxs. 


From  nouns  are  derived  the  follo-sving  classes : — 
1.    A  patronymic  is  the  name  of  a  person,  derived  from  that  of  his 
fathar  or  other  ancestor,  or  of  the  founder  of  his  natson. 


§  100.  DERIVATION    OF   NOUNS.  57 

Note  1.  Patronymics  are  properly  Greek  nouns,  and  have  been  borrowed  from  that  Ian 
guage  by  the  Latin  poets. 

(a.)  Masculine  patronymics  end  in  ides^  Ides,  ades,  and  lades. 

(1.)  N(.  nns  in  tis  )f  the  second  declension,  and  those  nouns  of  the  third  de- 
clensiov,  whose  nx.t  ends  in  a  short  sylhible,  form  their  patronymics  in  ides; 
as,  Pricimus,  PHamkles  ;  Agamemnon,  gen.  onis,  A<jamemn6nides. 

( 2. )  Nouns  in  eas  and  chs  form  their  patronymics  in  Ides  ;  as,  A-ireus,  Atrides ; 
Heracles  (i.  e.  Hercules,)  Ileradides. 

Rem.  1.  Snides,  in  Virg.  A.  9,  653,  is  fonned  in  like  manner,  as  if  from  jEneiis, 
instead  of  jEneas. 

(3.)  Nouns  in  as  and  es  of  the  first  declension  form  their  patronpnics  in  ddes, 
as  yEncus,  jEneddes;  Elpx>utes,  Hippdtades. 

(4.)  Nouns  in  ius  of  the  second  declension,  and  those  nouns  of  the  third  de- 
clension, whose  root  ends  in  a  long  vowelj  form  their  patronymics  in  iddes ;  as, 
Thestius,  Thesiiddes ;  Amiihitryo  {g&n.  onis),  Amphitryoniddes. 

Eeivi  2.  A  few  nouns  also  of  the  first  declension  have  patronymics  in  iddes ; 
as,  Ancluses,.  AncMsiddes. 

(b.)  Feminine  patronymics  end  in  is,  eis,  and  ias,  .and  correspond 
in  termination  to  the  masculines,  viz.  is  to  ides,  eis  to  Ides,  and  ias  to 
tddes  ;  as,  Tyndarus^  masc.  Tyndarides,  fern.  Tynddris  ;  Nereus,  masc. 
Nereides,  fem.  Nereis ;  Thestius,  masc.  Thesiiddes,  fem.  Thestias. 

Re:m.  3.  A  few  feminines  are  found  in  Ine,  or  lone ;  as,  Nerlne,  Acrisime , 
from  Nereus  and  Acrisius. 

Note  2.  Patronymics  in  des  and  ne  are  of  the  first  declension  ;  those  in  is 
and  as,  of  the  thh-d.  • 

2.  Apatrial  or  gentile  noun  is  derived  from  the  name  of  a  country; 
and  denotes  an  inhabitant  of  that  country ;  as, 

Tros,  a  Trojan  man  ;  Troas,  a  Trojan  woman  :  Macedo,  a  Macedonian ; 
Samnis,  a  Samnite  ;  from  Troja,  Macedonia,  and  Samnium. 

Note  3.  Most  patrials  are  properly  adjectives,  relating  to  a  noun  understood  ; 
as,  honw,  clvis,  etc.     See  §  128,  6. 

3.  A  diminutive  signifies  a  small  thing  of  the  kind  denoted  by  the 
primitive ;  as,  liber,  a  book ;  libellus,  a  little  book. 

Diminutives  generally  end  in  lilus,  ula,  ulum,  or  cuius,  cilia,  culum, 
according  as  the  primitive  is  masuline,  feminine,  or  neuter. 

A.  1.  If  the  primitive  is  of  the  first  or  second  declension,  or  its  root  ends 
in  c,  g,  d,  or  t  after  a  vowel,  the  diminutive  is  formed  by  annexing  ulus,  a, 
um  to  the  root  ;  as,  arula,  servulus,  puerulus,  scutulum,  cornicula,  regulus,  ca- 
pitulum,  mercedula ;  from  dra,  servus,  piter,  scutum,  comix,  {-icis),  rex,  {regis), 
caput,  {-itis),  merces,  {-edis.)  , 

2.  Primitives  of  the  first  or  second  declension  whose  root  ends  in  e  or  i, 
instead  of  fdus,  a,  um,  add  dlus,  a,  um  ;  as,  Jilidlus,  ghriola,  liorreOlum  ;  from 
jUius,  gloria,  horrtum. 

3.  Primitives  of  the  first  or  second  declension  whose  root  ends  in  I,  n,  or  r, 
form  diminutives  by  contraction  in  ellus,  a,  um,  and  some  in  illus,  a,  um ;  as, 
ocellus,  aseli/is,  libellus,  lucellum  ;  from  oculus,  asina,  liber,  lucrum  ;  and  sigillum, 
tigUlum,  from  signum,  tignum. 

B.  1.  If  the  primitive  is  of  tlje  third,  fourth,  or  fifth  declension,  the  diminu- 
tive is  formed  in  cuius,  (or  itulus),  a,  um. 

2.  Primitives  of  the  third  declension  whose  nominative  ends  in  r,  or  in  oa  or 
tis  from  roots  endiag  in  r,  annex  cuIva  to  the  nominative  ;  2i?,,-fraterculm,  soj'or- 


58  DERIVATION    OF   NOUNS.  §  101. 

ca7n,  osdUum,  corpttsciilum ;  from  j  !^ter,  sdror,  ds,  {6ris),  corpus,  {-6ris). — So  also 
primitives  in  es  and  is,  but  these  di'op  the  s  of  the  nominative  ;  as,  igniciUus, 
nub  e  til  la,  diecOla  ;  from  ignis,  niibes,  dies. 

3.  Primitives  of  other  terminations  of  the  third  declension,  and  those  of  the 
fourth,  add  iculus  to  the  root  ;  as,  ponticulus,  coticula,  ossiculum,  vei'siculus,  corni- 
cHlum;  fi'om  ]X)jis,  cos,  Ss,  {ossit  ,  vei'sus,  comu. 

4.  Primitives  in  o,  {inis  or  onis),  in  adding  c&lus,  a,  um,  change  the  final  vowel 
of  the  root  {i  or  o)  into  u ;  as,  homunculus,  sermunculus  ;  from  Mmo  and  sermo  ; 
and  a  few  primitives  of  other  terminations  form  similar  diminutives  ;  as,  avur^ 
cuius,  do/nuncula  ;  fx'om  dvus  and  ddmus. 

C.  1.  A  few  diminutives  end  in  uleus ,  as,  equuleus,  aculeus ;  from  cquus  and 
acus  ;  and  a  few  also  ia  io;  as,  homuncio,  senecio,  from  hdmo  and  senex. 

2.  Diminutives  are  sometimes  formed  from  other  diminutives  ;  as,  asellulus, 
from  asellus ;  sometimes  two  or  more  diminutives  with  different  terminations 
are  formed  from  the  same  primitive ,  as,  komuncClus,  homullus,  and  homuncio ; 
from  hdmo ;  and  sometimes  tne  primitive  undergoes  euphonic  changes  ;  as  nx- 
musdUus,  from  rumor. 

Eem.  Some  diminutives  differ  in  gender  from  their  primitives  ;  as  ranun- 
culus, scamillus,  from  rdna  and  scamnum. 

4.  (a.)  An  amplificatlve  is  a  personal  appellation  denoting  an  ex- 
cess of  that  which  is  expressed  by  its  primitive ;  as, 

Captto,  one  who  has  a  large  head:  so  ndso,  labeo,  bucco,  fronto,  mento,  one  who 
has  a  large  nose,  lips,  or  cheeks,  a  broad  forehead  or  long  chin;  from  capui^ 
nasus,  labia,  bucca,jrons,  and  mentum. 

{b.)  A  few  personal  appellatives  in  io  denote  the  trade  or  profession  to  which 
a  pei"son  belongs  ;  as,  liuiw,  in  actor  ;  pellio,  a  furrier  ;  from  Indus,  a.nd pellis. 

5.  The  termination  ium  added  to  the  root  of  a  noun,  indicates  the  oflSce  or 
condition,  and  often,  derivatively,  an  assemblage  of  the  individuals  denoted  by 
the  primitive  ;  as,  collegium,  colleagueship,  and  thence  an  assembly  of  col- 
leagues ;  serviiium,  servitude,  and  coUectively  the  sei-vants  ;  so  sacerdotium,  and 
ministei-ium ;  from  coUega,  servus,  sacerdos,  and  minister. 

6.  The  termination  inumium  is  added  to  the  root  of  a  few  nouns,  denoting 
something  derived  from  the  primitives,  or  imparting  to  it  its  peculiar  character; 
as,  testimonium,  testimony  ;  so  vadimomum,  patrinumium,  mairimonium ;  from 
testis,  ids  (vddis),  pater,  and  mater. 

7.  The  termination  etum,  added  to  the  root  of  names  of  plants,  denotes  a 
place  where  they  grow  in  abundance  ;  as,  quercetum,  lauretum,  olivetum,  from 
quercus,  laurus,  and  ollva. 

So,  also,  cEsculeium,  dumetum,  myrtUum,  and  by  analogy  saxetum.  But  some 
drop  c  ;  as,  carectum,  salictum,  virgultum,  and  arlmstum. 

8.  The  termination  drium,  added  to  the  root  of  a  noun,  denotes  a  receptacle 
of  the  things  signified  by  the  primitive;  as,  avidrium,  an  aviary;  plantdrium,  a 
nursery  ;  from  avis,  a  bird,  and  j^Zanfa,  a  plant. 

9.  The  termination  He,  added  to  the  root  of  names  of  animals,  marks  the 
place  where  they  are  kept ;  as,  bovlk,  a  stall  for  oxen;  so  capr'de,  ovUe;  from 
DOS,  au  ox,  caper,  a  goat,  and  ovis,  a  sheep. 

Note  1.   This  class  and  the  preceding  are  properly  neuter  adjectives. 
NoTK  2.  Abstract  nouns  are  derived  either  from  adjectives  or  from  verbs. 
See  §  26,  5. 


f 


II.   Fkom  Adjec:iives. 

§  101*    1.   Abstract  nouns  are  formed  by  adding  the  termmation 
UaSj  itudOy  ia,  itia  or  ities^  edo,  and  imonia  to  the  root  of  the  primitive. 


§  102.  DERIVATl  >N    OF   NOUNS.  59 

2.  Abstracts  in  ttas,  (equivalent  to  the  English  ty  or  ity),  are  formed  from 
adjectives  of  each  declension  ;  as,  cVjpidUaSj  teneritas,  celeritas,  crudelitas,  feHcU 
tas;  from  cupldus,  tener,  celer^  crudelis,  and/ elix. 

(1.)  When  the  root  ends  in  i,  the  abstract  is  formftl  in  etas;  Vi?,^pieias,  from 
pius ;  and  -when  it  ends  in  t,  as  only  is  added  ;  as,  honestas  from  honestus. 

(2.)  In  a  few  abstracts  i  before  tas  is  dropped  ;  as,  Uberias,  juventas,  from 
liber,  juvenis.  lufacuUas  and  difflcuUas,  from  facilis,  difficlUs,  there  is  a  change 
also  in  the  root-vowel  from  i  to  u. 

(3.)  A  few  abstracts  are  formed  in  Uus  or  tus,  instead  of  itas  ;■  as,  servUus^ 
juventns,  from  servus  and  juvenis.     See  §  76,  Exc.  2. 

3.  Abstracts  in  itudo  are  formed  from  adjectives  in  us,  and  some  from  adjec- 
tives of  the  third  declension  of  two  or  three  terminations ;  as,  magniiudo,  alti- 
tudo,  fortitudo,  acritudo,  from  magnus,  altus, /otitis,  deer.  Polysyllabic  adjectives 
in  tus,  generally  foi*m  their  abstracts  by  adding  ucfo  instead  of  iiucZo  to  their  root; 
as,  consuetudo,  from  consuetus. 

4.  Abstracts  in  ia  (equivalent  to  the  English  ce  or  cy,)  are  for  the  most  part 
formed  from  adjectives  of  one  termination;  o.^,  dementia,  constantia,  impuden- 
iia,  from  clemens,  constans,  impUdens.  But  some  adjectives  in  us  and  er  ,including 
verbals  in  citndus,  likewise  form  their  verbals  in  ia;  as,  miseria,  angu&tia,  facurir 
dia,  from  miser,  angustus,  facufidiis. 

5.  Abstracts  in  itia  and  ities  are  formed  from  adjectives  in  us  and  is ;  as, 
justitia,  tristitia,  duriiia,  and  durities,  segnitia  and  segmties,  from  Justus,  trisiis,  dH- 
rus,  and  segnis. 

6.  A  few  abstracts  are  formed  in  edo,  and  a  few  in  imonia ;  and  sometimes 
two  or  more  abstracts  of  different  teiTninations  are  formed  from  the  same  adjec- 
tive ;  as,  aaitas,  acritudo,  acredo,  and  acrimonia,  from  deer.  In  such  case  those 
in  itudo  and  imonia  seem  to  be  more  intensive  in  signification  than  those  in 
Has. 

Remark.  Adjectives,  as  distinguished  from  the  abstracts  which 
dre  formed  from  them,  are  called  concretes. 

in.  From  Verbs. 
§  lOS.     Nouns  derived  from  verbs  are  called  verbal  nouns. 
The  following  are  the  principal  classes  :— 

1.  Abstract  nouns  expressing  the  action  or  condition  denoted  by  a  verb,  es- 
pecially by  a  neuter  verb,  are  formed  by  annexing  w  to  their  first  root ;  as, 
amor,  love  ;  favor,  favor  ;  mcei'or,  grief  ;  sp/eTwfcr,  brightness ;  from  dmo,  fdveOj 
nrnreo,  and  splendeo. 

2.  (a.)  Abstracts  are  also  formed  from  many  verbs  by  annexing  ium  to  the 
first  or  to  the  third  root  ;  as,  colloquium,  a  conference  ;  gaudiwn,  joy  ;  exor- 
dium, a  beginnmg  ;  exitium,  destruction  ;  solatium,  consolation  ;  from  colloquor, 
gaudeo,  exordior,  exeo  and  solor. 

3.  Some  verbal  abstracts  are  formed  by  annexing  ela,  imonia,  or  imonium,  to 
the  first  root  of  the  verb  ;  as,  querela  and  querimonia,  a  complaint ;  suadela^ 
persuasion  ;  from  queror  and  suadeo. 

4.  (a.)  The  terminations  men  and  mentum,  added  to  the  first  root  of  the 
verb,  generally  with  a  connecting  vowel,  denote  the  thing  to  which  the  action 
belongs;,  both  actively  and  passively,  or  a  means  for  the  perfonnance  of  the  ac- 
tion ;  ?i?>,futmen  from  fulgeo,  flumen  from  fiuo,  agmen  from  ago,  soldmen  from 
solor,  documentum  from  dOceo,  hlandimenium  from  olandior. 

{b.)  The  final  consonant  of  the  root  is  often  dropped,  and  the  preceding  and 
connecting  voAvels  contracted  into  one  syllable  ;  as,  ago,  {dgfmen,)  agmen;  J'dveOf 
{J'dvlmentum, )  f omentum. 


60  COMPOSITION    OF   NOUNS.  §  103. 

(c.)  Some  words  of  this  class  have  no  primitive  verb  in  use  ;  as,  atramentum, 
ink;  but,  in  this  case,  the  connecting  vowel  seems  to  imply  its  reference  to  such 
a  verb  as  atrare,  to  blacken. 

5.  (a.)  The  terminatio*  vlum,  Mhtm,  c&lum;  brum,  crum,  trum,  annexed  to 
the  first  root  of  a  verb,  denote  an  instrument  for  performing  tlie  act  expressed 
by  the  verb,  or  a  place  for  its  perfonnance  ;  as,  anfffdum,  operculum, yenabulum, 
veniildbrum,  fulcrum,  spectrum,  from  tingo,  opSrio,  venor,  ventilo,fulcio,  sjticio. 

(b.)  Sometimes  culum  is  contracted  into  chtm ;  as,  vimlum  for  rbiculum. 
Sometimes,  also,  s  is  inserted  before  U-um;  as,  rostrum,  from  rodo,  and  a  con- 
necting vowel  is  placed  before  this  and  some  of  the  other  termiutitions;  as, 
aratruvi,  stabulurn,  cublculwn,  from  dro,  sic,  and  ciibo. 

(c.)  Some  words  of  this  kind  are  formed  from  nouns  ;  as,  acetabulum,  a  vin- 
egar cruet ;  turibulum,  a  censer  ;  from  acelum  and  iits. 

6.  (a.)  Xouns  formed  by  adding  or  and  rix  to  the  third  root  of  the  verb,  de- 
note respectively  the  male  and  female  agent  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  verb ; 
as,  adjuixtr,  adjutrix,  an  assistant ;  faiitor,  faiUi'ix,  a  favorer ;  victor,  victrix,  a 
conqueror  ;  from  adjuvo  {cudlut'-),fdveo  (faut-),  vinco  {vict-).  Thev  are  often  like- 
wise used  as  adjectives.  The  femiiiine  form  is  less  common  than  the  mascu- 
line, and  when  the  third  root  of  the  verb  ends  in  s,  the  feminine  is  sometimes 
formed  in  irix;  as,  tondeo  (tons-)  tonstrix. 

(b.)  Some  noims  in  tor  are  formed  immediately  from  other  nouns  ;  as,  viator ^ 
a  traveller  ;  ianitor,  a  door-keeper ;  from  via  and  janzfo.  In  merttrix  from  mereo^ 
i  of  the  third  root  becomes  e. 

(c.)  The  agent  of  a  few  verbs  is  denoted  by  the  terminations  a  and  o  annexed 
to  the  first  root ;  as,  conviva,  a  guest ;  advena,  a  stranger  ;  scrlba,  a  scribe  ; 
erro,  a  vagrant ;  bibo,  a  drunkard ;  comedo,  a  glutton,  from  convtvo,  advemo,  etc. 

7.  Many  abstract  nouns  are  formed  by  annexing  io  and  us  (gen.  us)  to  the 
third  root  of  a  verb;  as,  actio,  an  action  ;  lectio,  reading  ;  fi-om  ago  (act-),  lego 
{lect-) ; — cantus,  singing  ;  visus,  sight ;  usus,  use;  from  cdno  (ca;rf-),  video  (uts-), 
aor  (us-). 

Remark  1.  Nouns  of  both  forms,  and  of  like  signification,  are  frequently  de- 
rived from  the  same  verb;  as,  concursio  and  C07icttrsi»,  a nmning together ;  rndUo 
and  motus,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  Nouns  formed  by  adding  the  termination  ura  to  the  third  root  of 
a  verb,  sometimes  have  the* same  signification  as  those  in  to  and  us,  and  some- 
times denote  the  result  of  an  action;  as,posiiura,  position;  vinctura,  a  binding 
together  ;  from  pono,  and  vincio ;  and  the  termination  ela  has  sometimes  the 
same  meaning;  as,  querela,  complaint ;  loqvila,  speech,  from  queror  and  Idquor. 

Note.  One  of  these  forms  is  generally  used  to  the  exclusion  of  the  others,  and  when 
two  or  more  are  found,  they  are  usually  employed  in  somewhat  diSerent  senses. 

8.  The  termination  di-ium,  added  to  the  third  root  of  a  verb,  denotes  the  place 
where  the  action  of  the  verb  is  performed;  as,  auditorium,  a  lecture-room;  con- 
diiorium,&  repository;  from  aumo  and  condo. 

COMPOSITION  OF  NOUNS. 

§  103,    Compound  nouns  are  formed  variously : — 

1.  Of  two  nouns;  as,  rujncapra,  a  wild  goat,  of  rupes  and  copra.  In  some 
words,  c-^mpounded  of  two  nouns,  the  former  is  a  genitive;  as,  senaiusconsultum, 
a  decree  of  the  senate;  jurisconsulttis,  a  lawyer;  in  others,  both  parts  are  de- 
clined; as,  respublica,ju$Jurandum.     See  ^  91. 

2.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb  ;  as,  artifex,  an  artist,  of  ars  and  fdcio ;  Ju&- 
e«n,  a  harper,  of  Jides  and  cdno;  agricdla,  a  husbandman,  of  d^r^r  and  c6h. 


§  104.  ADJECTH  ES.  61 

3.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun ;  as,  cBjuinocUum,  the  equinox,  of  ceqtms  and 
nox;  millepeda^  a  millepede,  of  mille  &nd  pes. 

In  duumvir,  triumvir,  decemvir,  centumvir,  the  numeral  adjective  is  in  the 
genitive  plural.    _ 

Remark  1.  When  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word  is  a  noun  or  an  adjeo- 
tive,  it  usually  ends  in  f ;  as,  artifex,  nipicapra,  agricdla,  etc.  If  the  second 
word  begins  with  a  vowel,  an  elision  takes  place  ;  as,  quijiquennium,  of  quinque 
and  annus ;  magnanimus,  of  magnus  and  animus. 

4.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun  ;  as,  Tie/as,  wickedness ;  JieTno,  nobody ;  oine,fas^ 
and  h6mo.     So  biduum,  of  bis  and  dies. 

5.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun :  as,  incuria,  want  of  care,  of  in  and  ciira.  So 
intervallum,  an  interval ;  jjrcecorc?ia,  the  diaphragm;  jproverbium,  a  proverb;  sub- 
sellium,  a  low  seat;  superficies,  a  surface. 

Rem.  2.  When  the  former  part  is  a  preposition,  its  final  consonant  is  sometimes 
changed,to  adapt  it  to  that  which  follows  it :  as,  ignobiUs,  illepidu8,imprudmiiat 
irrumpo,  of  in  and  nobilis,  lepidus,  etc.     See  §  196. 


ADJECTIVES. 

§  104.    An  adjective  is  a  word  which  qualifies  or  limits  the 

meaning  of  a  substantive. 

Adjectives  may  be  divided,  according  to  their  signification^  into 
various  classes ;  as  denoting, 

1.  Character  or  quality  ;  as,  J^t«,  good ;  aZ5z«,  white ;  owlctM,  friendly. 

2.  State  or  condition;  as,/e&,  happy;  dives,  rich. 

3.  Possession;  as,  herllis,  a  master's;  patrius,  a  father's. 

4.  Quantity;  as,  magnus,  great;  iotus,  entire;  parvus,  small. 

6.  Number;  as,  unws,  one;  secundus,  second;  tot,  so  many;  guot,  as  many. 
These  are  caUed  numerals. 

6.  Time;  as,  annwifs,  yearly;  Aes^erwMs,  of  yesterday;  Jzmw5,  of  two  years; 
trimestris,  of  tluree  months. 

7.  Place;  as,  alius,  high.',  vicmus,  near;  a&riu*,  aerial;  ierrestris,  terrestrial. 

8.  Material;  as,  aureus,  golden;  fagineus,  beechen;  terrenus,  earthen. 

9.  Part;  as,  nullus,  no  one;  aliquis,  some  one.    These  are  coSled partitives. 

10.  Country ;  as,  Eomunus,  Roman ;  Arplnas  of  A-rpinum.  These  are  called 
patrials. 

1 1.  Dimhiution ;  as,  parvuluSj  from  parvus,  small ;  miseUm,  from  miser ^  miser- 
able.   These  are  called  diminutives. 

12.  Amplification ;  as,  vinosus  and  vinolentus,  much  given  to  wine ;  auritus, 
having  long  ears.    These  are  called  amplificatives. 

13.  Relation ;  as,  drndus,  desirous  of ;  memor,  mindful  of ;  insuetus.  These 
are  called  relatives. 

14.  Interrogation;  as,  quantus?  how  great;  qualis  f  of  ^hatkhxd;  quot?  how 
many?  quotusf  of  what  number?  These  are  called  interrogatives;  and,  whec 
not  use!  interrogatively,  they  are  called  correlatives. 

15.  Specification;  as,  talis,  such;  tantus,  so  great;  tot,  so  many.  These  are 
called  demonstratives. 


62     jldjectives — first  axd  second  declensions.    §  105. 

DECLENSION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  tOS.  1.  Adjectives  are  decKned  like  substantives,  and  are 
either  of  the  rirst  and  second  declensions,  or  of  the  third  only. 

ADJECTIVES    OF    THE    FIRST    AND    SECOND    DE- 
CLENSIONS. 

2.  The  masculine  of  adjectives  belonging  to  the  first  and  second 
declensions,  ends  either  in  us  or  in  er.  The  feminine  and  neuter  are 
formed  respectively  by  annexing  a  and  vm  to  the  root  of  the  mascu- 
line. The  masculine  in  us  is  declined  like  dominus;  that  in  er  like 
gener  or  dger;  the  feminine  always  like  miisa  ;  and  the  neuter  like 
regnum. 

Reha-rk  1.  The  masculine  of  one  adjective,  sdtur,  -lira,  -^rum,  foil,  ends  in 
ur,  and  e  declined  like  gener. 

Boniis,  good. 
Singular. 
Masc.  Fern.  Neut. 

N.       bo'-niis,  bo'-na,  bo'-niim, 

G.      bo'-ni,  bo'-nsB,  bo'-ni, 

D.       bo'-no,  bo'-nae,  bo'-no, 

Ac.     bo'-num,  bo'-nam,  bo'-niim, 

V.       bo'-ne,  bo'-na,  bo'-niim, 

Ab.     bo'-no.  bo'-na.  bo'-no. 

Plural. 

N.  bo'-ni,  bo'-nae,  bo'-na, 

G.  bo-no'-riim,  bo-na'-riim,  bo-n5'-rum, 

D.  bo'-nis,  bo'-nis,  bo'-nis, 

Ac.  bo'-nos,       *  bo'-nas,  bo'-na, 

V.  bo'-ni,  bo'-nae,  bo'-na, 

Ab.  bo'-nis.  bo'-nis.  bo'-nis. 

In  like  manner  decline 

Al'-tus,  high.  Fi'-dus,  faithful.  Lon'-gus,  long. 

A-va'-rus,  covetous.      Im'-pro-bus,  wicked.       Ple'-nus,  full. 
Be-nig'-nus,  kind.        In-i'-quus,  unjust.  Tac'-i-tus,  silent. 

Rem.  2.  Like  bonus  are  also  declined  all  participles  in  t«;  as, 
A-ma'-tas.        Am-a-tfi'-rus.        A-man'-dus. 

Rem.  3.  The  masculine  of  the  vocative  singular  of  adjectives  in  tw  is  some- 
times like  the  nominative ;  as,  0  t?tr  fortis  atqm  amicvs.  Hor.  Mew  has  both 
mi  and  metis.  ^ 

Rem.  4.  The  genitive  plural  of  distributive  numerals  ends  commonly  in  4»» 
instead  of  drum  ;  as,  crasatudo  bin&m  digitorum.  Plin. 


§  106       ADJECTIVES — 

FIRST   AND    SECOND    DECLENSIONS.        6 

8.   ' 

Tener,  tender. 
Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

te'-ner, 
ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-ra, 
ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-e-rum, 
ten'-e-ri, 

D. 

ten'-e-ro, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-e-ro, 

Ac. 

ten'-e-rum, 

ten'-e-ram. 

ten'-e-rum, 

V. 

Ah, 

te'-ner, 
ten'-e-ro. 

ten'-e-ra, 
ten'-e-ra. 

Plural. 

ten'-e-rum, 
ten'-e-ro. 

N. 

ten'-e-ri, 

ten'-e-rae, 

ten'-e-rS, 

G. 

ten-e-ro'-: 

rum, 

ten-e-ra'-rum. 

ten-e-ro'-rum, 

D. 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 

Ac. 

ten'-e-ros. 

» 

ten'-e-ras. 

ten'-e-rS, 

V. 

ten'-e-ri. 

ten'-e-raB, 

ten'-g-r5. 

Al. 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 

ten'-e-ris. 

In  like  manner  are  declined 

As'-per,  rough. 
Ex'-ter,  foreign. 
Gib'-ber,  crook-backed. 

La'-cer,  torn. 
Li'-ber,  free. 
Mi'-ser,  wretched. 

Pros'-per,  prosperous. 
Sa'-tur,  fuU. 

63 


So  also  alter,  except  in  the  genitive  and  dative  singular  (see  §  107),  aemifer, 
and  the  compounds  of  gero  and  fero;  as,  laniger,  optfer. 

Note.    Prosper  is  less  frequent  than  jprosperus,  and  exter  is  scarcely  used 
in  the  nominative  singular  masculine. 

§  lOG*     The  other  adjectives  in  er  drop  e  in  declension ;  as, 


Bger,  slothful 

Singular. 

Masc. 

Fern. 

Neut. 

N. 

pi'-ger. 

pi'-gra, 

pi'-grum, 

G. 

pi'-gri, 

pi-grai, 

Pi'-gri, 

D. 

pi'-gro, 

pi'-gras, 

pi'-gro, 

Ac. 

pi'-grum, 

pi'-gram. 

pi'-grum. 

V. 

pi'-ger. 

pi'-gra. 

pi  -grum, 

Ah. 

pi'-gro. 

pi-gra. 
Plural. 

pi'-gro. 

N. 

Pj'-g^;  . 

pi'-grae. 

pi'-gra,  ^ 

G. 

pi-gro  -ruBC,      pi-gra'-rtim, 

pi-gro'-ru] 

D. 

pi'-gris. 

pi  -gns. 

pi'-gris, 

Ac. 

pi'-gros. 

pi'-gras, 

pi'-gra, 

V. 

Pi;gri, 

pi'-grae. 

pi'-gra. 

Al. 

pi  -gris. 

pi'-gris. 

pi -gris. 

$4  ADJECTIVES THIRD    DECLENSION.         §  107,  108 

In  like  manner  decline 

JE'-ger,  »Wfc.  Ma'-cer,  lean.  Sc&'-ber,  rough. 

A'-ter,  black.  Nl'-ger,  black.  Si-nis  -ter,  left. 

Cre'-ber,  freguent  Pul'-cher,  fair.  Te  -ter,  foul 

Gla'-ber,  «moo^.  Hn'-her,  red.  Ya'-fer,  crafty. 

In'-t6-ger,  entire.  Sa'-cer,  saered. 

Dexter,  right,  has  -tra,  •4rum,  and  less  frequently  -Ura,  -t&rum. 

§  107.    Six  adjectives  in  us,  and  three  in  cr,  have  their  genitive 
singular  in  tu5,  and  their  dative  in  I,  in  all  the  genders  : — 
Alius,  another.  Totus,  wlwle.  Alter,  -t6ra,  -temm,  tJie  other. 

NnUus,  no  one.  UUus,  any.  Uter,  -tra,  -trum,  which  of  the  two. 

Solus,  alone.  Unus,  one.  Neuter,  -tra,  -trum,  neither. 

To  these  may  be  added  the  other  compounds  of  «<er,— namely,  uterque,  each 
of  two;  uiercumque,  uterlibet,  md  utervis,  which  of  the  two  vou  please;  gen. 
nUrittsqw,  etc.— also,  alteruter,  one  of  two;  gen.  alterutrius,  and  sometimes  aZie- 
rius  uirius;  dat  alterutri.  ■  So  alleruterque,  and  unusquisque.    See  §  138,  4. 
Nullus,  sdlus,  totus,  ullus,  and  unus  are  thus  declined  : — 
Singular. 
Fern.  Neut. 

u'-na,  u'-nmn, 

u-ni'-iis,  u-nl-us, 

u'-ni,  u'-ni, 

u'-nam,  u'-nmn, 

u'-na,  u'-nmn, 

u'-na.  u'-no. 

The  plural  is  regular,  like  that  of  lonus. 
RE3IARK  1.  Alius  has  alivd  m  the  nominative  and  accusative  singular  neu- 
ter, and  in  the  genitive  alius,  contracted  for  aUius. 

Rem.  2.  Except  in  the  genitive  and  dative  singular,  alter  is  declined  like  t£ner, 
and  uter  and  neuter  like^^er. 

Rem.  3.  Some  of  these  adjectives,  in  early  writers,  and  occasionally  even  in 
Cicero,  Caesar,  and  Nepos,  form  their  genitive  and  dative  regularly,  like  hdrnis, 
Uner,  or  plger. 

ADJECTIVES  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION. 

§  108.  Some  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have  three  termi- 
nations in  the  nominative  singular ;  some  two  ;  and  others  only  one, 

L  Those  of  three  terminations  end  in  er,  masc. ;  is,  fem. ;  and  €, 
neut ;  and  are  thus  declined : — 


Masc. 

N. 

u'-niis. 

Q. 

u-nl'-us,* 

D. 

u'-ni. 

Ac. 

u'-niim. 

V. 

u'-ne. 

Ah. 

u'-no. 

Acer,  sharp. 

Singular. 

• 

Masc. 

Fem. 

Neut. 

N. 

a'-cer, 

a'-cris. 

a'-cre, 

G. 

a'-cris. 

a'-cris. 

a'-cris. 

D. 

a'-cri, 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 

Ac. 

a'-crem 

I,          a'-crem. 

a'-cre, 

V. 

a'-cer. 

a'-cris. 

a'-cre, 

Ab. 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 

a'-cri. 

•Seejlfi. 


§  109,  110 


ADJECTIVES THIRD    DECLENSION. 

Plural 

N. 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres, 

a'-cri-a. 

G. 

a'-cri-um, 

a'-cri-um, 

a'-cri-iim, 

D. 

ac'-ri-bus, 

ac'-ri-biis, 

ac'-ri-biis, 

Ac. 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres. 

a'-cri-a. 

V. 

a'-cres, 

a'-cres, 

a'-cri-a, 

Ah. 

ac'-ri-biis. 

ac'-ri-biis. 

ac'-ri-biis. 

65 


In  like  manner  are  declined  the  following ; — 


AF-acer,  cheerful. 
Cam-pes'-ter,  champaign. 
CeV-t^-her,  famous. 
E-ques''-ter,  equestrian. 


Pa-lus'-ter,  marshy. 
Pe-des''-ter,  on  foot. 
Pii''-ter,  rotten. 
Sa-lu^-ber,  wholesome. 


Sil-ves''-ter,  woody. 
Ter-res'-ter,  terrestrioL 
VoF-u-cer,  imiged. 


To  these  add  names  of  months  in  -5er,  used  as  adjectives;  as,  October,  etc. 
(cf.  §  71),  and  celer,  swift,  which  has  ceteris,  celere;  gen.  ceteris,  etc. 

EemarkI.  Theterminationerwasanciently  sometimes  feminine;  aa,  volUcer 
fama.  Petr.:  and,  on  the, other  hand,  the  masculine  often  ends  in  m;  as, 
collis  dlvestris,  Cs&s. 

Rem.  2.    VolUcer  has  um  in  the  genitive  pluraJ. 

§  109.  n.  Adjectives  of  two  terminations  end  in  wfor  the  mas- 
culine and  feminine,  and  e  for  the  neuter,  except  comparatives,  which 
end  in  or  and  us. 

Those  in  is,  e,  are  thus  declined : — 


Mitis  mild. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

M.^F. 

N. 

M.4-F.           ^  N. 

N.    mi'-tis. 

mi'-te. 

N. 

mi'-tes,         mit'-i-S,* 

G.    mi'-tis. 

mi'-tis, 

G. 

mit'-i-iim,*  mit'-i-um, 

D.    mi'-ti, 

mi'-ti. 

D. 

mit'-i-biis,    mif-!-biis, 

Ac.  mi'-tem. 

mi'-te, 

Ac. 

mi'-tes,         mit'-i-a, 

V.     mi'-tis. 

mi'-te, 

V. 

mi'-tes,         mit'-i-S, 

Ah.    mi'-ti. 

mi'-ta. 

Ah. 

mit'-i-biis.    mit'-i-biis. 

In  like 

manner  decKne 

Ag'-I-lis,  acUve. 

Dul^- 

cis 

,  meet. 

In-col'-ii-mis,  safe. 

Bre'-vis,  a/wrf. 

For'-tis, 

brave. 

Mi-rab'-i-lis,  wonderftd. 
Om'-nis,  aU. 

Cru-de'-lis,  cruel. 

Grr- 

vis 

,  heavy. 

Tres,  three,  is  declined  like  the  plural  of  mitis. 
Not*.    Several  adjectives  of  this  class  have  forms  also  in  us,  a,  um.    See  §  116. 

§  110*    (a.)   All  comparatives,  except  plus,  more,  are  thus  de- 
clined : — 


Pronotuicet  misk^-e-a,  etc.    Sm  { 12. 


6» 


66 


ADJECTIVES — THIRD   DECLENSION. 


§  111. 


Mitior,*  milder. 

Singular. 

M.  f  F. 
mit'-i-or, 

N. 

N. 

mit'-i-us, 

G. 

mit-i-o'-ris, 

mit-i-o'-ris, 

D. 

mit^i-o'-ri, 

mit-i-o'-ri, 

Ac. 

mit-i-o'-rem, 

mit'-i-iis, 

V. 

mit'-i-or, 

mit'-i-iis, 

Ab. 

mit-i-o'-re,  or  -ri. 
Plural. 

mit-i-o'-re,  or  -i 

M.  f  F. 
mit-i-o'-res, 

N._ 

K 

mit-i-o'-ra. 

G., 

mit-i-o'-riim, 

mit-i-o'-rum, 

D. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus, 

mit-i-or'-i-bus, 

Ac. 

mit-i-o'-res, 

mit-i-o'-ra, 

V. 

mit-i-6'-res, 

mit-i-o'-ra. 

Ab. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus. 

mit-i-or'-i-bus. 

A.'-ti-or,  higher. 
A  i-da'-ci-or,  holder. 
B.-e'-vi-or,  shorter. 


In  like  manner  decline 
Dul'-ci-or,  sweeter.  Gra'-vi-or,  heavier. 

Fe-lic'-i-or,  happier.  Pru-den''-ti-or,  morepru- 

Fe-TO^-ci-OT,Jiercer.  dent. 


Cra-de'-li-or,  more  cruel    For'-ti-or,  braver.  U-be'-ri-or,  moref&rtHe, 

Plus,  morCj  is  thus  declined  : — 


Singular. 
N. 
N.    plus, 
G.    plu'-ils, 

2).    , 

Ac.  Tins. 
V.    ^ , 


Plural. 


M.^F. 

N.    plu'-res, 
G.     plu'-ri-um, 
D.    plu'-ri-bus, 
Ac.  plu'-res, 
V.    -, 


N. 
plu'-ra,  rarely  plu  -ri-&, 
plu'-ri-um, 
plu'-ri-bus, 
pir-ra, 


M.   (plu'-rg,  o6«.)  Ah.  plu'-ri-biis.  plu'ri-biis. 

So,  but  in  the  plural  number  only,  complures,  a  great  many. 

§  111.  m.  Other  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  have  but 
one  termination  in  the  nominative  singular  for  all  genders.  They  all 
end  in  I,  r,  5,  or  x,  and  increase  in  the  genitive. 

They  are  thus  declined : — 


M.SfF. 

N.  fe'-Hx, 

G.  fe-li'-cis, 

D.  fe-li'-ci, 

Ac  fe-li'-cem, 

V.  fe'-Ux, 

^  Ab.  fe-h'-ce,  or  -ci. 


Felix,  happy. 
Singular. 

fe'-lix, 
fe-li'-cis, 


fe-li'-ci, 
fe'-lix, 
fe'-lix, 
fe-li'-ce,  or  -ci. 


*  Pronounced  mwA'-e-or,  «tc.    S«e  }  12. 


§112.  ADJECTIVES OBLIQUE   CASES.  67 

Plural. 

N.    fe-li'-ces,  *         fe-lic'-i-a,* 
G.    fe-lic'-i-iim,*  fe-lic'-i-um, 

D.    fe-lic'-i-bus,  fe-lic'-i-bus, 

Ac.  fe-li'-ces,  fe-lic'-i-a, 

V.    fe-li'-ces,  fe-lic'-i-a, 

Ab.  fe-lic'-i-bus.  fe-lic'-i-bus. 

Prsesens,  present 
Singular. 
M.  ^  F.  N. 

N.    prae'-sens,  prae'-sens, 

G.    prae-sen'-tis,  prae-sen'-tis, 

D.    prae-sen'-ti,  prae-sen'-ti, 

Ac.  prae-sen'-tem,  prae'-sens, 

V.     prae'-sens,  prae'-sens. 

Ah.  prae-sen'-te,  or -ti.        prae-sen'-te,  or -ti. 

Plural. 

N.  prae-sen'-tes,  prae-sen'-ti-ajf 

G.  prae-sen'-ti-um,  prae-sen'-ti-um, 

D.  prae-sen'-ti-biis,  prae-sen'-ti-bus, 

Ac.  prae-sen'-tes,  prae-sen'-ti-a, 

.  V.  prae-sen'-tes,  prse-sen'-ti-a. 

Ah.  praB-sen'-ti-biis.  prae-sen'-ti-bus. 

In  like  manner  decline 

Au'-dax,  -acis,  hold.  Par'-tt-ceps,  -!pis,  par-  SoF-lers,  -tis,  shrewd. 

Coin''-pos,_-6tis,  Kiosferq/*.       ticipant.      ^         ^  Sos'-pes, -itis,  sq/e. 

F  e'-rox, -ocis,  ^erce.  Prse'-pes, -etis,  sz^y^.  Sup'-plex,  -icis,  sup- 

In'-gens,  -tis,  huge.  Pru''-dens,  -tis,  prudent.  pliant. 

Remark.   All  present  participles  are  declined  like  prcesens ;  as, 
A''-mans.    Mo'-nens.    Re''-gens.    Ca'-pi-ens.    Au'-di-ens. 
Note.   A  few  adjectives  of  one  termination  have  redxindant  forms  in  vs,  a. 
um;  see  §  116. 

Rules   for   the   Oblique   Cases   op   Adjectives    op    the 
Third  Declension. 


t^ 


GENITIVE    SINGULAR. 


lid.    Most  adjectives  of  the  third  declension  form  their  geni- 
tive singular  like  nouns  of  the  same  termination. 

The  following  may  here  be  specified: — 

1.  Of  those  in  es  (cf.  §  73)  some  have  -etis ;  as,  hebeSf  perpes,.prcepe8,  and  teres 
—4nquies  and  hcuples  have  -His ; — some  have  -itis ;  as,  dives,  sospes,  and  super- 
ttes ; — some  have  -idis ;  asj  deses,  and  reses ; — bipes,  and  tripes  have  -2)edis  ;—pube» 
ias  puberisj  and  impubes,  imjmbeHs  and  impubis. 

*  Pronounced /e-foW-e-wm,  etc.    See  J  10,  Exc,  and  §  7.,  3,  (&.) 
t  Prcnumnced  pre-zen^'ihe-a^  ©to 


68  ADJECTIVES OBLIQUE    CASES.  §  113,  114 

2.  Compos  and  impos  have  -dtis,  and  exos,  exossis.—Exlex  has  ezlegis,  pemox 
hti&permttis  (§  78), precox, prcecdds.  and  7'edua:,  reducis.  —  Calebs  has  ccelibis, 
(^  77 ) ;  intercus,  intercutis,  and  veins,  vtietis.  Those  in  ceps  which  are  compounds 
of  caput,  have  -cipitis;  as,  anceps,  prceceps  (§  78, 1);  but  tie  compounds  of  cep« 
from  capto  have  -ipis ;  as,  particeps,  pariicipis. — Those  in  cors,  compounds  of 
cor,  have  -cordis;  as,  concorSf  concoi'dis  (§  71,  Exc.  2). — Memor  and  immemor 
have  -<5n5. 

ABLATIVE    SINGULAR. 

'V     §113*   1.  Adjectives  which  have  e  in  the  nominative  smgular  neu- 
ter have  only  i  in  the  ablative. 

Exc.  1.  The  ablatives  bimestre,  ccelesU,  sjnd  perenne  are  found  in  Ovid,  and 
eognomine  in  Virgil. 

2.  Comj^ratives  and  participles  in  n5,  when  used  as  participles, 
especially  in  the  ablative  absolute,  have  rather  e  than  i ;  but  parti- 
cipial adjectives  in  ns  have  rather  i  than  e. 

3.  Adjectives  of  one  tennination  have  either  e  or  t  in  the  ablative. 

Exc.  2.  The  following  adjectives  of  one  termination  have  only  e  in  the  abla- 
tive:— 

Bicorpor,  bipes,  caelebs,  compos,  deses,  discolor,  hospes,  impos,  impubes,  jxi- 
vfnis,  locuples,  pauper,  princeps,  puber  or  pfibes,  senex,  sospes,  superstea, 
tricorpor,  tricuspis,  ami  tripes. 

Exc.  3  .  The  following  adjectives  of  one  termination  have  only  i  in  the  ablar 
tive:— 

Anceps,  concors,  discors,  hSbes,  immemor,  Iners,  ingens,  inops,  memor,  par, 
prseceps,  recens,  rSpens,  "^gil,  and  most  adjectives  in  a;,  especially  those  in 

Bem.  1.  Inerte  occurs  in  Ovid,  recenie  in  Ovid  and  Catullus,  and  prcBctpe  in 
Ennius. 

Rkm.  2.  PrcBsens,  when  used  of  things,  makes  the  ablative  in  t;  when  used 
of  persons,  it  has  e. 


NOMINATIVE,  ACCUSATIVE,  AND  GENITIVE  PLURAL. 

X  §  114U  1.  The  neuter  of  the  nominative  and  accusative  plural 
ends  in  ia,  and  the  genitive  plural  of  all  genders  in  ium  ;  but  compar- 
atives in  or,  with  vettis,  old,  and  uber,  fertile,  have  a,  and  um. 

2.  The  accusative  plural  of  masculine  and  feminine  adjectives,  whose  geni- 
tive plural  ends  in  ium,  anciently  ended  in  is  or  eis,  instead  of  es.    Of.  §  85,  Exc.  1. 

Exc.  1.  Tho«e  adjectives  that  have  only  e  in  the  ablative  singular,  have  um 
in  the  genitive  plural. 

Exc.  2.  Compounds  officio,  cdpio,  and  of  such  nouns  as  make  um  in  their 
genitive  plural,  with  ciler,  compar,  cicttr,  dives,  memor,  immemor,  prcepes,  sup- 
pUx,  and  vigil,  make  their  genitive  plural  in  um. 

Exc.  8.  IHs,  locuples,  sons,  and  insojis  have  either  um  or  ium.  The  poets  and 
the  later  prose  writers  sometimes  form  the  genitive  plural  of  other  adjectives 
and  of  pa^ciples  in  ns,  by  Syncope,  in  um,  instead  .^ium;  as,  aslestum,  Virg. 
Orid,  etc. 


§  115,  116.  IRREGULAR    ADJECTIVES.  69 

IRREGULAR   ADJECTIVES. 

§  IAS*     Some  adjectives  are  defective,  others  redundant. 
DEFECTIVE    ADJECTIVES. 

1.  (a.)  Many  adjectives  denoting  personal  qualities  or  attributes 
want  the  neuter  gender,  unless  when  occasionally  joined  to  a  neuter 
substantive  used  figuratively.     Such  are  the  following : — 

Bicorpor,  bipes,  celebs,  compos,  consors,  degener,  dives,  impos,  impubes, 
industrius,  inops,  insons,  invitus,  juvenis,  locuples,  memor,  pauper,  particeps . 
princeps,  puber,  or  pubes,  redux,  senex,  sons,  sospes,  superstes,  supplex,  tri- 
corpor,  vtgil. 

(6.)  Victrix  and  lUtrix  are  femmine  in  the  singular,  seldom  neuter;  in  the 
plural,  they  are  feminine  and  neuter.  Such  verbals  partake  of  the  nature  both 
of  substantives  and  adjectives,  and  correspond  to  masculines  in  tor.  See  § 
102,  6,  (a.) 

2.  The  following  want  the  genitive  plural,  and  are  rarely  used 
in  the  neuter  gender : — 

Concolor,  deses,  hSbes,  perpes,  rSses,  teres,  versicolor. 

3.  The  names  of  months,  which  are  properly  adjectives,  have  only 
the  masculine  and  feminine  genders. 

4.  Some  adjectives  are  wholly  indeclinable. 

Such  Site  frugi,  temperate;  nequam,  worthless;  sat  or  satis,  sufficient;  the 
plurals  aliquot,  tdt,  qudt,  totidem,  quotquot ;  and  the  cardinal  numbers  from  quatip- 
or  to  centum  inclusive,  and  also  miUe.     Cf.  §  118, 1,  and  6,  (6.) 

5.  The  following  adjectives  are  used  only  in  certain  cases :  — 

Bilicem,  ace. ;  doubly-tissued.  Cetera,  ceterum,  the  rest,  wants  the  nom.  sing, 
masc.  Decemplicem,  ace. :  tenfold.  Exsjies,  nom. ;  hopeless.  Inquies,  nom. ; 
-etem,  ace. ;  -ete,  abl. ;  restless.  Mactus,  anc?  macte,  nom. ;  macte,  ace. ;  honored; 
— macti,  now.  ^Z^r.  Necesse,  aw? necessum,rKW».,  ace.  ;  necessary.  Plus,  now., 
ace. ;  pliiris,  gen. ;  more  ;—pl.  pliires,  -a,  nom.  ace. ;  -ium  gen. ;  Ibus,  dot.,  abl. 
Cf.  §  110.  Postera,  postenun,  coming  after,  wants  the  nom.  sing.  masc.  Potis, 
nom.  sing.  Sind pi.,  all  genders;  able.  Pote,  nom.  sing.,  for  potest;  possible.  Sep- 
templicis,  gen. ;  -ce,  abl. ;  sevenfold.  Siremps,  and  sirempse,  nom.  and  ace. ; 
alike.  Tantundem,  nom.  ax^c. ;  tantidem,  gen. ;  tantandem,  ace.  ;  so  much. 
Trihcem,  ace. ;  trebly-tissued ;  trihces,  nom.  and  hcc.  pi. 

REDUNDANT  ADJECTIVES. 

§  UG.  The  following  adjectives  are  redundant  in  termination 
and  declension.     Those  marked  r  are  more  rarely  used. 

Accllvis,  and  -us,  r,  ascending.  Inquies,  and  -etus,  restless. 

Auxiliaris,  and  -ius,  auxiliary.  Jocularis,  and  -ius,  r,  laughable. 

Bijiigis,  and  -us,  yoked  two  together.  Multiiugis,  r,  and  -us,  yoked  many  to- 

Declivis,  and  -us,  r,  descending.  gether. 

Exanimis,  and  -us,  r,  lifeless.  Opiilens,  and  -lentus,  rich. 

Hilaris,  and  -us,  cheerful.  Praecox,  -coquis,  and  -coquus,  early 

Imbecillis,  r,  and  -us,  weak.  ripe. 

Impubes,  and  -is,  r,  -is  or  -eris,  not    ProcUvis,  and  -us,  r,  sloping. 

grown  up.  Quadrijugis,  and  -us,  yofced  four  to- 
Inermis,  UTid  -us,  r,  unarmed.  gether. 

Infrenis,  and  -us,  unbridled.  Semianimis,  a/idf-us,  half  alive. 


70 


NT7MERAL   ADJECTIVES. 


§117. 


SemiermiSy  and -us,  Juilf  armed.  Subllmis,  otm^ -us,  r,  At^A. 

Semisomnis,  and -us,  r,  half  asleep.  Unanlmis,  r,  and  -us,  unanimous. 

Singularis,  and  -iu3,  sinc/le,  Violen?,  r,  and  -lentus,  violeiU. 

To  these  may  be  added  some  adjectives  in  er  and  is ;  as,  saluber  and  -bris, 
ee«6er  and -Am.    Cf.  ^08,  B- 1- 

NUMEBAL  ADJECTIVES. 

"^K  §  117,    Numeral  adjectives  are  divided  into  three  principal 
classes — Cardinal^  Ordinal^  and  Distrihuiive. 

"^     L   Cardinal  numbers  are  those  which  simply  denote  the  number  of 
things,  in  answer  to  tiie  question  Quot  f  *  How  many  ?  *     They  are, 


1. 

Unus, 

2. 

Duo, 

8. 

Tres, 

4. 

Quatuor, 

5. 

Quinque, 

6. 

Sex, 

7. 

Septem, 

8. 

Octo, 

9. 

Novem, 

10. 

Decern, 

11. 

Undecim, 

12. 

Duodecim, 

13. 

Tredeeim, 

14. 

Quatuord6cim, 

15. 

Quindecim, 

16. 

Sedecim,  or  sexd6cim, 

17. 

Septendecim, 

18. 

Octodecim, 

19. 

Novendecim, 

20. 

Viginti, 

21. 

Viginti  unus,  or 
unus  et  viginti,    ) 

22. 

Viginti  duo,  or           ) 
duo  et  viginti,  etc.,    ) 

80. 

Tnginta, 

40. 

Quadraginta, 

60. 

Quinquaginta, 

60. 

Sexaginta, 

70. 

Septuaginta, 

80. 

Octoginta,  or  octuaginta, 

90. 

Xonaginta, 

100. 

Centum, 

101. 

Centum  unus,  or ) 

centum  et  unus,  etc.,  ( 

200. 

Dvicenti,  -ae,  a, 

800. 

Trecenti,  etc. 

400. 

Quadringenti, 

600. 

Quingenti, 

600. 

Sexcenti, 

700. 

Septingenti, 

800. 

Octingenti, 

900. 

Nongenti, 

1000. 

MiUe, 

2000. 

Duo  millia,  or ) 

bis  naUe,       j 

one. 

I. 

Uoo, 

n. 

three. 

m. 

four. 

nn.ariv.  . 

jfhe. 

V. 

ttx. 

VL 

seven. 

vn. 

dahi 

vm. 

nine. 

VlllLorlX. 

ten. 

X. 

eleven. 

XI. 

twelve. 

xn. 

thirteen. 

xin. 

fourteen. 

Xmi.  or  XIV. 

fifteen. 

XV. 

sixteen. 

XVL 

seventeen. 

xvn. 

eighteen. 

xvm. 

nineteen. 

XV  nn.  or  XTX. 

twenty. 

XX. 

twenty-one. 

XXL 

tioenty-two. 

xxn. 

thirty. 

XXX. 

forty. 

XXXX  or  XL. 

f/ty 

L. 

sixty. 

LX. 

seventy. 

LXX. 

eighty. 

LXXX. 

ninety. 

LXXXX.  or  Xg 

a  hundred. 

C. 

a  hundred  and  one. 

CL 

two  hundred. 

CC. 

three  hundred. 

CCC. 

four  hundred. 

CCCC,  or  CD. 

Jive  hundred. 

10,  or  D. 

six  hundred. 

IOC,  or  DC. 

seven  hundred. 

lOCC,  or  DCC. 

eight  hundred. 

lOCCC,  or  DCCC. 

nine  hundred. 

lOCCCC,  or  DCCCC 

a  thousand. 

CD,  or  M. 

tioo  thousand. 

CIOCIO,  or  MM. 

§  118 


NUMERAL    ADJECTIVEg. 


71 


jive  thousand. 

100. 

ten  iTiousand. 

CCIOO. 

■fifty  tJmisand. 

1000. 

a  hundred  thousand. 

CCCIOOO. 

M. 

F. 

N.  da^-o, 

du'-ffl, 

G.    du-o'-rum, 

du-a'-rum, 

D.   du-o'-bus, 

du-a'-bus, 

Ac.  du'-os,  or  du'-o, 

du'-as, 

F.    du'-o, 

du'-se, 

Ah.  du-o'-bus. 

du-a'-bus. 

5000.   Quinque  millia,  or 

quinquies  mille, 

10000.   Decern  millia,  or 

decies  mille, 
50000.   Quinquaginta  millia, 

or  quinquagies  mille, 
100000.   Centum  millia,  or  ) 
centies  miUe,     ) 

§  118.  1.  The  first  three  cardinal  numbers  are  declined;  from 
four  to  a  hundred  inclusive  they  are  indeclinable ;  those  denoting 
hundreds  are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus. 

For  the  declension  of  unus  and  tres,  see  §§  107  and  109. 

Duo  is  thus  declined : — 

Plural. 

N. 

du'-o, 

du-o'-nun, 

du-o'-bus, 

dn'-o, 

clu'-o, 

du-o'-bus. 

Bemark  1.  Duorum^  duarum,  are  often  contracted  into  du-ilm,  especiallv  in 
compounds;  as,  du^mmr,  and  when  joined  with  millium. — ATubo,  both,  which 
partakes  of  the  nature  of  a  numeral  and  of  a  pronoun,  is  declined  like  dvo. 

*^  2.  The  cardinal  numbers,  except  unus  and  mille,  are  used  in  the 
plural  only. 

Rem.  2.  The  plural  of  unus  is  used  with  nouns  which  have  no  singular,  or 
whose  singular  has  a  different  sense  from  the  plural ;  as,  umB  nuptice,  one  mar- 
riage ;  una  castra,  one  camp.  It  is  used  also  with  nouns  denoting  several  things 
considered  as  one  whole ;  as,  una  vestimenta,  one  suit  of  clothes.  So.  also,  when 
it  takes  the  signification  of  "  alone  "  or  "  the  same  " ;  as,  uni  Vbii,  the  Ubians 
alone ;  unis  moribus  vivere, — with  the  same  manners. 

3.  (a.)  Thirteen,  sixteen,  seventeen,  eighteen,  and  nineteen,  are  often  ex- 
pressed by  two  numbers,  the  greater  of  which  usually  precedes,  united  by  et ; 
thus,  decern  et  ires,  decern  et  ndvem,  or,  omitting  et,  decern  ndvem.  OctodScim  has 
no  good  authority.    See  infra,  4. 

(6.)  From  twenty  to  a  hundred,  the  smaller  number  with  et  is  put  first,  or 
the  greater  without  et ;  as,  unus  et  viginti,  or  viginti  unus.  Above  one  hundred, 
the  greater  precedes,  with  or  without  et ;  as,  centum  et  unus,  or  centum  unus , 
trecenti  sexaginta  sex,  or  trecenti  et  sexaginta  sex.  Et  is  never  twice  used,  but 
the  poets  sometimes  take  ac,  atque,  or  que,  instead  of  et. 

4.  For  eighteen,  twenty-eight,  etc.,  and  for  nineteen,  twenty-nine,  etc.  (ex- 
cepting sixty-eight,  sixty-nine,  and  ninety-eight),  a  subtractive  expression  is 
inore  frequent  than  the  additive  form;  as,  duodeviginti,  two  from  twenty;  unde- 
viginti,  one  from  twenty;  duodetriginta,  undetriginta,  etc.  Neither  un  (unus) 
nor  duo  can  be  declined  in  these  combinations.  The  additive  forms  for  thirty- 
eight,  etc.  to  ninety-eight,  and  for  forty-nine,  etc.  to  ninety-nine,  except  those 
for  sixty-nine,  seem  not  to  occur. 

5.  (a.)  Thousands  are  generally  expressed  by  prefixing  the  smaller  cardinal 
numbers  to  millia ;  as,  decern  millia,  ten  thousand ;  ducenta  millia,  two  hundred 
thousand.  As  there  is  in  Latin  no  unit  above  mille,  a  thousand,  the  higher  units 
of  modem  numeration  are  expressed  by  prefixing  the  numeral  adverbs  to  the 


72  NUMERAL    ADJECTIVE^.  §  119. 

comhinBiion  ceniena  millia;  as,  dedes  centena  millia,  a.  mimon;  cerUies  cerUena 
millia,  ten  millions.  In  such  combinations  ceniena  nuUia  is  sometimes  omitted; 
as,  dtciea,  sciL  centena  nuUia. 

(6.)  The  poets  sometimes  make  use  of  numeral  adverbs  in  expressing  smaller 
numbers ;  as,  bis  sex  for  duodecim ;  bis  centum  for  duceTiti,  etc. 

\  6.  Mille  is  used  either  as  a  substantive  or  as  an  adjective. 

(a.)  When  taken  substantively,  it  is  indeclinable  in  the  singular  number, 
and,  in  the  plural,  has  millia,  millium,  nulltbus,  etc. ;  as,  mille  hominum,  a  thou- 
sand men ;  duo  millia  hominum,  two  thousand  men,  etc.  When  nuUe  is  a  sub- 
stantive, the  things  numbered  are  put  in  the  genitive,  as  m  the  preceding 
examples,  unless  a  declined  numeral  comes  between;  sis,kabuit  tna  millia  trer 
centos  milites. 

(6.)  As  an  adjective,  mille  is  plural  only,  and  indeclinable:  as,  miUe  homines, 
a  thousand  men;  cum  his  mille  hominibus,  with  two  thousand  men. 

7.   Capitals  were  used  by  the  Romans  to  mark  numbers.    The  letters  em- 


pressed. 

(a.)  The  repetition  of  a  numeral  letter  repeats  its  value.  Thus,  II.  signifies 
two;  in.  three;  XX.  twenty;  XXX.  thirty;  CC.  tioo hmidred, etc.  But  V.  and 
L.  are  never  repeated. 

(6.)  When  a  letter  of  a  less  value  is  placed  before  a  letter  of  a  greater  value, 
the  less  takes  away  its  value  from  the  greater;  but  being  placed  after,  it  adds 
its  value  to  the  greater;  thus, 

IV.  Four.  V.  Five.  VI.    Six. 

IX.   Nine.  X.  Ten.  XI.    Eleven. 

XL.  Forty.  L.  Fifty.  LX.  Sixty. 

XC.  Ninety.  C.  A  hundred.  CX.  A  hundred  and  ten. 

(c.)  A  thousand  was  marked  thus,  CIO,  which,  in  later  times,  was  contracted 
into  M.    Five  hundred  is  marked  thus,  10,  or,  by  contraction,  D. 

(d.)  The  annexing  of  the  apostrophus  or  inverted  C  (0)  to  10  makes  its  value 
ten  times  greater;  thus,  100  marks ^re  thousand;  and  I000,^<^  thousand. 

(c.)  The  prefixing  of  C,  together  with  the  annexing  of  0,  to  the  number  CIO, 
makes  its  value  ten  times  greater;  thus,  CCIOO  denotes  ten  thousand;  and 
CGCIOO^,  a  hundred  thousand.  The  Romans,  according  to  Pliny,  proceeded 
no  further  in  this  method  of  notation.  If  they  had  occasion  to  express  a  largei 
number,  they  did  it  by  repetition;  thus,  CCCIOOO,  CCCIOOO,  signified  two 
hundred  thousand,  etc. 

(/.)  We  sometimes  find  thousands  expressed  by  a  straight  line  drawn  over 
the  top  of  the  numeral  letters.  Thus,  HI.  denotes  three  thousand;  X.,  ten 
thousand. 

V^  §  110.  n.  Ordinal  numbers  are  such  as  denote  order  or  rank, 
and  answer  to  the  question,  Quotus  f  Which  of  the  numbers  ?  They 
all  end  in  us,  and  are  declined  like  bonus  ;  as,  primus,  first ;  secundus, 
second. 

m.  Distributive  numbers  are  those  which  indicate  an  equal  division 
among  several  persons  or  things,  and  answer  to  the  question,  Quoteni? 
How  many  apiece  ?  as,  singuli,  one  by  one,  or,  one  to  each ;  bini,  two 
by  two,  or  two  to  each,  etc.  They  are  always  used  in  the  plural,  and 
are  declined  like  the  plural  of  bonus,  except  that  they  usually  have 
Urn  instead  of  Drum  in  the  genitive  plural.     Cf.  §  105,  R.  4. 


§120. 


NUMERAL    ADJECTIVES. 


73 


The  following  table  contains  the  ordinal  and  distributive  numbers,  and  the 
con-esponding  numeral  adverbs,  which  answer  to  the  question,  Quoiies  f  Rovf 
many  times  V  — 

Distributive. 

y  one. 


Ordinal. 

1.  Primus,  Jirst. 

2.  S^-cundus,  second. 

3.  Tertius,  third. 

4.  -QuvLrtxis,  fourth. 

5.  Quintus^jifth. 

6.  Sextus,  sixth. 

7.  Septimus,  seventh. 

8.  Octavus,  eighth. 

9.  Nonus,  ninth. 

10.  Decimus,  tenth,  etc. 

11.  Undecimus. 

12.  Duodecimus. 

13.  Tertius  decimus. 

14.  Quartus  decimus. 

15.  Quintus  decimus. 
•  16.  Sextus  decimus. 

17.  Septimus  decimus. 

18.  Octavus  decimus. 

19.  Nonus  decimus. 
„Q  (  Vicesimus,  or  ) 

■  j      vigesimus.     | 

21.  Vicesimus  primus. 

22.  Vicesimus  secundus. 
nn  (  Triceslmus,  or  ) 

'  I      trigesimus.    ) 

40.  Quadragesimus. 

50.  Quinquageslmus. 

60.  Sexagesimus. 

70.  Septuagesimus. 

80.  Octogesimus. 

90.  Nonagesimus. 

100.  Centesimus. 

200.  Ducentesimus. 

300.  Trecentesimiis. 


400. 

500. 
600. 
700. 
800. 
900. 

1000. 


Quadringentesimus. 

Quingentesimus. 

Sexcentesimus. 

Septingentesimus. 

Octingentesimus. 

Nongentesimus. 

Millesimus. 


2000.    Bis  millesimus, 


Singiili,  ( 

Bini,  two  by  two. 

Terni,  or  trini. 

Quaterni. 

Quini. 

Seni. 

Septeni. 

Octoni. 

Noveni. 

Deni. 

Undeni. 

Duodeni. 

Terni  deni. 

Quaterni  deni. 

Quini  deni. 

Seni  deni. 

Septeni  deni. 

Octoni  deni. 

Noveni  deni. 

Viceni. 

Viceni  singiili. 
Viceni  bini,  etc. 

Triceni. 

Quadrageni. 

Quinquageni. 

Sexageni. 

Septuageni. 

Octogeni. 

Nonageni. 

Centeni. 

Duceni. 

Treceni,  or  trecenteni. 

Quadringeni,  or     ) 
quadringenteni. ) 

Quingeni. 

Sexceni,  or  sexcenteni. 

Septingeni. 

Octingeni. 

Nongeni. 
;  MUleni,  or 

ffngula  millia. 

Bis  milleni,  or  ) 
bina  millia.   ( 


Numeral  Adverbs. 

Semel,  once. 

Bis,  twice. 

Ter,  thrice. 

Quater,  ybwr  times. 

Quinquies. 

Sexies. 

Septies. 

Octies. 

Novies. 

Decies. 

Undecies. 

Duodecies. 

Terdecies. 

Quatuordecies. 

Quindecies. 

Sedecies. 

Decies  et  septies. 

Duodevicies. 

Undevicies. 

Vicies. 

Semel  et  vicies. 
Bis  et  vicies,  etc. 

Tricies. 

Quadragies. 
Quinqxuigies. 
Sexagies. 
Septuagies. 
Octogies. 
Nonagies. 
Centies. 
Ducenties. 
Trecenties,  or  ) 
tricenties.     ) 

Quadringenties. 

Quingenties. 

Sexcenties. 

Septingenties. 

Octingenties. 

Noningenties. 

Millies. 
Bis  millies. 


§  ISO-  1.  In  the  ordinals,  instead  of  primus,  prior  is  used,  if  only  two 
are  spoken  of.    Alter  is  often  used  for  secundus. 

2.  (a.)  From  thirteenth  to  nineteenth,  the  smaller  number  is  usually  put 
first,  without  et ;  as,  tertius  decimus.  but  sometimes  the  greater  with  or  without 
et;  as,  dedmus  et  tertius,  or  decimus  tertius. 

(b.)  Twenty-first,  thirty-first,  etc.,  are  often  expressed  by  unus  et  vicesirmiSf 
unus  et  triceslmus,  etc.,  one  and  twentieth,  etc. ;  and  twenty-second,  etc.,  by 
duo,  or  (dter  et  vicesimus,  etc.,  in  which  duo  is  not  changed.  In  the  other  com- 
pound numbers,  the  larger  precedes  without  et,  or  the  smaller  with  et ;  as,  vicest' 
vius  quartus,  or  quartus  et  vicesimus. 


74  ADJECTIVES COMPARISON.  §  121,  122. 

(c.)  For  eighteenth,  etc.,  to  fifty-eighth,  and  for  nineteenth,  etc.  to  fifiy-nmth, 
the  Bub tractive  forms,  duodevicesimus,  etc.,  and  undevicesimus,  etc.,  are  often  used. 

3.  In  the  distributives,  eighteen,  thirty-eight,  fovty-eight,  and  nineteen  and 
twenty-niue,  are  often  expressed  by  the'  subtractives  emodeviceni,  etc.,  undcvi- 
ceni,  etc. 

4.  (a.)  Distributives  are  sometimes  used  bv  the  poets  for  cardinal  numbers; 
as,  bhm  spkala,  two  darts.  Virg.  So  likewise  In  prose,  with  nouns  that  want  the 
smgular;  as,  blna  nuptia,  two  weddings. 

(b.)  The  singular  of  some  distributives  is  used  in  the  sense  of  multiplfcar 
lives;  as,  b'lnus,  twofold.     So  temus,  qulnus,  septenus. 

5.  In  the  numeral  adverbs,  for  the  intermediate  hurabers  21,  22,  etc.,  the 
larger  number  also  may  be  put  first,  either  with  or  without  tt;  and  for 
twenty-eight  times  and  thirty-nine  times,  duodttricies  and  undequadragies  are 
fotmd. 

§  121.    To  the  preceding  classes  may  be  added  the  following : — 

1.  Multtplicaiives,  which  denote  how  many  fold,  in  answer  to  the  question, 
quot&plex  f    They  all  end  in  plex,  and  are  declined  like  felix ;  as, 

Simplex,  single.  Quinciiplex,^re/bW. 

Duplex,  twofold,  or  doubh.  Septemplex,  sevenfold. 

Triplex,  threefold.  Decemplex,  tenfold. 

Quadruplex,  fourfold.  Centuplex,  a  hundredfold. 

2.  Proportionals^  which  denote  how  many  times  one  thing  is  greater  than 
another;  as,  duplus,  a,  «?»,  twice  as  great;  so  tHpliis,  quadruplus,  octuplus,  de- 
cuplus.     They  are  generally  found  only  in  the  neuter. 

3.  Temporals,  which  denote  time;  as,  btmus,  a,  urn,  two  years  old;  so  irtmus, 
quadrlmus,  etc.  Also,  biennis,  lasting  two  years,  biennial ;  so  quadriennis,  quin- 
ouennisy  etc.  So  also,  bimestris,  of  two  months'  continuance ;  trimestris,  etc., 
biduus,  etc.  To  these  may  be  added  certain  nouns,  compounds  of  annus  and 
dies  with  the  cardinal  numbers ;  as,  biennium,  inennium,  etc.,  a  period  of  two, 
etc.  years;  biduum,  Uiduum,  etc.,  a  period  of  two,  etc.  days. 

4.  Adjectives  in  arius,  derived  from  the  distributives,  and  denoting  of  how 
many  equal  parts  or  units  a  thing  consists;  as,  binainus,  of  two  parts;  temaiius, 
etc. 

5.  Jnterrogatives ;  as,  quot,  how  many?  qvdtus,  of  what  number?  quoteni, 
how  many  each  V  quoties,  how  many  times  ?  Their  correlatives  are  tot,  iotidem, 
60  many;  aliquot,  some;  which,  with  quot,  are  indeclinable;  and  the  adverbs, 
toties,  so  often ;  aliquoties,  several  times. 

6.  Fractional  exjtressions,  which  denote  the  parts  of  a  thing.  These  are  ex- 
pressed in  Latin  by  pars  with  dimidia,  tertia,  quarta,  etc.  Thus,  I,  dimidia 
pars;  \,  tertia  pars,  etc.  When  the  number  of  parts  into  which  a  thing  is 
divided  exceeds  by  one  only  the  parts  mentioned,  as  in  §,  |,  etc.  the  fraction  is 
expressed  sunply  by  dua,  ires,  etc.  partes,  denoting  two  out  of  three,  thi-ee  out 
of  four,  etc. 

COMPAKISON  OF  ADJECTIVES. 


V 


§  122.  1.  Adjective?  may  be  divided  into  two  classes — those  which 
denote  a  variable,  and  those  which  denote  an  invariable,  quality  or 
limitation. 

Thus,  bdnus,  good,  altrn,  high,  and  ttpacus,  dai-k,  denote  variable  attributes; 
but  ceneus,  brazen,  iHphjc,  thieefold,  and  diumus,  daily,  do  not  admit  of  different 
degrees  in  their  signification. 

2.  The  comparison  of  an  adjective  is  the  expression  of  its  quality 
in  different  degrees. 


§123-125.      ADJECTIVES. IRREGULAR  COMPARISON.  75 

3.  There  are-,  ihree  degrees  of  comparison — the  positivej  the  com- 
parative, and  the  superlative. 

4.  The  positive  simply  denotes  a  quality,  without  reference  to  other 
degrees  of  the  same  quality;  as,  alius,  high;  7}iifis,  mild. 

5.  The  comparative  denotes  that  a  quality  belongs  to  one  of  two 
objects,  or  sets  of  objects,  in  a  greater  degree  than  to  the  other ;  as, 
altior,  higher ',    iiiitior,  midder. 

6.  The  superlative  denotes  that  a  quality  belongs  to  one  of  several 
objects,  or  sets  of  objects,  in  a  greater  degree  than  to  any  of  the  rest; 
as,  altissimus,  highest ;  7Jiitissiinus,  mildest. 

Rem  1.  Somethnes  also  the  comparative  denotes  that  a  qiiality,  at  different 
times  or  in  other  circumstances,  belongs  in  different  degrees  to  tlie  same  object; 
as,  est  sapiential'  qiiamfuit,  he  is  wiser  than  he  was. 

Rem,  2.  The  comparative  sometimes  expresses  the  proportion  between  two 
qualities  of  the  same  object;  as,  est  doctior  quam  sajnentior,  he  is  more  learned 
than  wise ;  that  is,  his  learning  is  greater  than  his  wisdom. 

Rem.  3.  The  comparative  is  also  used  elliptically  instead  of  our  *  too '  or 
'  rather ' ;  as,  vivit  liberius,  he  lives  too  freely,  or,  rather  freely.    Cf.  §  256,  R.  9. 

Rem.  4.  The  superlative,  like  the  positive  with^er,  (cf.  ^  127,  2),  often  indi- 
cates a  high  degree  of  a  quality  without  direct  comparison  with  the  same  qual- 
ity in  other  objects ;  as,  amicus  carisslmus,  a  very  dear  friend. 

\^       §  193*     1.   Degrees  of  a  quality  inferior  to  the  positive  may  be  denoted 
by  the  adverbs  minus,  less;  minlme,  least,  prefixed  to  the  positive;  ^9,,jncuiulu8^ 

t     pleasant;  minus  jucundtis,  less  pleasant;  viinime jucundus,  least  pleasant. 
2.   A  small  degi-ee  of  a  quality  is  indicated  hysub  prefixed  to  the  positive;  ns, 
am^rus,  bitter;  subamarus,  bitterish,  or,  somewhat  bitter. 

3..  An  equal  degree  of  a  quality  maybe  denoted  by  tarn  followed  by  ^<am. 
ieque  followed  by  ac,  sic  followed  by  ut,  etc. ;  as,  hibes,  ceque  ac  pecus,  as  stupid 

tas  a  brute. 
§  134:.    1.  The  comparative  and  superlative  in  Latln^^s  in  Eng- 
lish, are  denoted  either  by  peculiar  terminations,  or  by  certain  ad- 
verbs prefixed  to  the  positive.     Cf.  §  127,  1. 

Masc.        Fern.        Neut 

>r      2.   The  terminational  comparative  ends  in     ior,      tor,      itis ; 

the  terminational  superlative  in  tssimus,  issima,  issimum. 
J^    3.   These  terminations  are  added  to  the  root  of  the  positive ;  as, 
altns,    altior,     a/rissimus;       hif^h,     hiorher,     highest. 
mltis,    mitior,   Twidssimus;      mild,    milder,    mildest. 
felix,  (gen.  felicis,')  felicior,  /eZ/cissimus ;  happy,  happier,  happiest. 

In  like  manner  compare 
Arc'-tus,  strait.  Cni-de'-lis,  crtiel.  Ca'-pax,  capacious. 

Ca^-rus,  fZear.  Fer'-ti-lis,/er<^7e.  Cle'-mens,  (^en.-tis)  merciful. 

Doc'-tus,  learned.  Le'-vis,  light.  la'-ers,  {gen.  -tis),  sluggish. 

IRREGULAR    COMPARISON. 

^<r  §  1S5.  1.  Adjectives  in  er  form  their  superlative  by  adding 
Hnms  to  that  termination ;  as,  acer,  active ;  gen.  acrh ;  comparative, 
ucriov ;  superlative,  acerrunus. 


76  ADJECTrTES.-^DEFECTIVE   COMPARISON.  §  126. 

In  like  manner,  pauper,  pauperrimus.  Vetus  has  a  similar  superlative,  veter- 
rtmiu,  from  the  old  collateral  form  veter. 

\    2.   Sbc  adjectives  in  lis  fonn  their  superlative  by  adding  limits  to 
flie  root : — 

Facllis,  facilior,  facilllmus,  easy. 

Difficilis,  difficillor,  difficillimus,  difficult 

Gracilis,  gracilior,  gracillimus,  shnder. 

Humllis,  Eumilior,  Eiimllllmus,  hw. 

Similis,  similior,  similllmus,  lihe. 

Dissimllis,  dissimilior,  dissimillimiis,         unlike. 

JmbeciUus  or  imbedllis,  -v^eak,  has  two  forms,  imiecilUssimus  and  imbedUimus. 

3.  (a.)  Five  adjectives  in /icw5  (from /acio)  derive  their  compar- 
atives and  superlatives  from  supposed  forms  in  ens: — 

Beneflcus,         beneficentior,         bencficentissimus,        benejicent. 
Houorificus,      honorificentior,      honorificentissimus,      horwrahle. 
Magnificus,       magnificentior,      magnificeutissimus,      splendid. 
Muuificus,         mumficentior,        muiiificentissimus,        liberal. 

Maleftcus,  ,        maleficentissimus,        hurtful. 

(h.)  Adjectives  in  dlcens  and  vdlens  form  their  comparatives  and  superlatives 
regularly;  but  instead  of  those  positives,  forms  in  dicus  and  v6lus  are  more 
common;  as, 

Maledlcens  or  dicus,  maledicentior,  maledicentisslmus,  slanderous. 
Benevolens,  or  -volus,  benevolentior,  benevolentissimus,  benevolent. 

4.  These  five  have  regular  comparatives,  but  irregular  super- 
latives : — 

Dexter,  dexterior,  dextimus,  right. 

Extera,  (/em.)      exterior,  extremus,  or  extimus,  outward, 

Postera,  (fern.)      posterior,  postreraus,  or  postumus,       hind. 

Inferus,  inferior,  infimus,  w  imus,  below. 

Superus,  superior,  supremus,  or  simimus,  above. 

Bemark  1.  The  nominative  singular  of  postera  does  not  occur  in  the  mas- 
culine, and  that  of  extera  wants  good  authority. 

_j.     5.  The  fcUowing  are  very  irregular  in  comparison  : — 

Bonus,  melior,        optlmus,  aood,       better,        best. 

Iilalus,  pejor,  pessimus,  bad,         worse,         worst. 

Magnus,        major,         maximus,         great,      greaier,     greatest. 

Parvus,         minor,         minimus,  little,        less,  least. 

Multus,         plurimus,  "j 

Multa,  pluilma,     >     much,      more,  mosL 

Multum,       plus,*         plurimum, ) 

Nequam,      nequior,      nequissimus,    worthless,  etc. 

Frugi,  frugalior,    frugalissimus,  frugal,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  All  these,  except  magnus,  whose  regular  forms  are  contracted,  either 
form  their  comparatives  and  superlatives  ftom.  obsolete  adjectives,  or  take  them 
from  other  words  of  similar  signification. 

DEFECTIVE    COMPARISON. 

§  12G.    1.  Seven  adjectives  want  the  positive : — 

Citerior,  citiraus,nearer.  Prior,  primus, /ornier. 

Deterior,  deterrimus,  worse.  Propior,  proximus,  nearer. 

Interior,  intlmus,  inner.  Ulterior,  ultlmus,  farther. 

Ocior,  o«issimus,  swifter. 

•  See  i  UO.  ' 


^sS- 


§  127.  ADJECTIVES DEFE    TIVE    COMPARISON.  77 

.  2.   Eight  want  the  tenninational  comparative : — 

ConsTiltus,  consultissinius,  sldlftd.  Par,  parissimus,  (very  rare),  equal. 

Inclutus,  inclutissimus,  rmowmd.  Persuusus,  persuasisslmum   (ueuter), 

Invictus,  invictissimus,  invincible.  persuaded. 

Invltus,  invitissimus,  umcllimg.  Sacer,  sacerilmus,  sacred. 
Meiitu>,  meritissimus,  (very  rare,) 
deserving. 

3.  Eight  have  vcr}'  rarely  the  terminational  comparative : — 

Aprlcus,  apriclssTnius,  simny.  Falsus,  falsissTmus,  ^a/se. 

Bellas,  bellissiinus,/H<?.  Fnlus,  fidisslimis, /a<V///*wt 

Coinis,  coinissiinus,  courteous.  Kovus,  novisslimis,  new. 

Diversus,  diversisslmus,  different.  Vetus,  veterrlmus,  old. 

4.  The  following  want  the  terminational  superlative  : — 
Adolescens,  adolescentior,  young.  Proclivis,"  proclivior,  slcjnng. 
Agrestis,  agrestior,  rustic.  Pronus,  pronior,  bending  down. 
Alacer,  alacrior,  active.  Protervus,  protervior,  violent. 

Ater,  atrior,  black.  sequior,  worse. 

Cjecus,  cajcior,  blind.  Propinquus,  propinquior,  near. 

Deses,  desidior,  inactive.  Salutaris,  salutarior,  salutary. 

Diuturnus,  diuturpior,  lasting.  Sa.tis,  sufficient ;  satius,  j»re/era6te. 

Infinitus,  infinitior,  unlimited.  Satur,  saturior, /«//. 

Ingens,  ingentior,  great.  Senex,  senior,  old. 

Jejunus,  '^Q^wmoT,  fasting.  Silvestris,  silvestrior,  woody. 

Juvenis,  junior,  young.  Sinister,  sinisterior,  left. 

Licens,  licentior,  unrestrained.  Suplnus,  supinior,  lying  on  the  hack. 

Longinquus,  longinquior,  distant.  Surdus,  surdior,  deaf. 

Opimus,  opimioi-,  rich.  Teres,  teretior,  round. 

Remark  1.  The  superlative  o^  juvenis  and  adolescens  is  supplied  by  minimus 
ndtu,  youngest ;  and  that  of  senex  by  maximus  ndtu,  oldest.  The  comparatives 
minor  ndtu  and  mdjoj'  ndtu  sometimes  also  occur. 

Rem.  2.  Most  adjectives  also  in  ilis,  His,  dlis,  and  bilis,  have  no  terminational 
superlative. 

5.  Many  variable  adjectives  have  no  terminational  comparative  or 
superlative.     Such  are, 

(a.)  Adjectives  in  bundus,  Imus.  inus  (except  divinus),  drug,  most  in  ivus,  and 
in  us  pure  (except  -quus.)  Yet  arduus,  assiduus,  egregius,  exiguus,  industrius, per- 
petuus, jnus,  strenuus,  and  vacuus,  have  sometimes  a'  termmational  comparison. 
So,  dropping  i,  noxior,  innoxior,  sobrior. 

{b.)  The  following — almus,  calvus,  cdnus,  ctcur,  claudus,  degener,  dellrus,  dispar^ 
egenus,  imjmr,  impiger,  invidus,  lace?',  memor,  mlrus,  nudus,  prcecox,  prcBdltu*, 
rudis,  salvus,  sospes,  su2)erstes,  vulgdris,  and  some  Others. 

^  §  \27',  1.  The  comparative  and  superlative  may  also  be 
formed  by  prefixing  to  the  positive  the  adverbs  magts,  more,  and 
maxime,  most ;  as,  idoneus,  fit ;  magis  idoneus,  maxime  idoneus. 

2.  Various  degrees  of  a  quality  above  the  positive  are  expressed 
by  aclmodum,  aliquanto,  apprime,  bene,  imprimis,  multum,  -^ppido,  per- 
quam,  and  valde,  and  also  hj  per  compounded  with  the  {  ©sitive ;  as, 
di/frcUis,  difficult ;  perdifficilis,  very  difficult.  To  a  few  adj^Bctives  prce 
is  in  like  manner  prefixed ;  as,  prcedurus,  very  hard. 

3.  The  force  of  the  comparative  is  increased  by  prefixing  eiiam^ 
.  even,  still,  or  yet ;  and  that  of  both  comparative  and  superlative,  hy 


78  ADJECTIVES DERIVATION.  §  128. 

prefixing  longe  or  muLto^  much, far ;  as,  longe  nobilissimus ;  longe  meliov , 
iter  multo  facilius;  multo  maxima  pars. 

4.  Fe/,  'even',  and  quam,  with  or  without  possum^  'as  much  as 
possiblr ',  before  the  superlative,  render  it  more  emphatic ;  as,  Cicero 
vel  opth.ms  oratorum  Romanurum.  Quam  maximum  potest  militum  nu~ 
merum  colligit;  quam  doctisslmus,  extremely  learned ;  quam  celerrime, 
as  speedily  as  possible. 

Note  1,  Instead  of  quam  with  jjommto,  qimntus  is  sometimes  used,  in  the  same 
case  as  the  superlative ;  as,  Quantis  maxtirds  potuit  itinerlbus  contendit. 

Note  2.  Unus^  with  or  without  omnium,  is  sometimes  added  to  superlatives  to 
increase  their  force ;  as,  Hoc  ego  uno  omnium  plurimum  utor.  Cic.  Urbem  iinara 
mihi  amicissimam  declindvi,  Id.    It  is  used  in  like  manner  with  excello. 

5.  All  adjectives  whose  signification  admits  of  difierent  degrees,  if 
they  have  no  terminational  comparison,  may  be  compared  by  means 
of  adverbs. 

6.  Instead  of  the  comparative  and  superlative  degrees,  the  positive  with 
the  prepositions  prcs,  ante,  prceter,  or  supra,  is  sometimes  used ;  as,  pros  nobis 
hedius,  happier  than  we.  Cic.  Ante  alias  pulchritvdine^insignis,  most  beauti- 
ful. Liv.  Sometimes  the  preposition  is  used  in  connection  with  the  superla- 
tive; as.  Ante  alios  pulcherrimus  omnes.  Virg. 

7.  Among  adjectives  which  denote  an  invariable  quality  or  limitation,  and 
which,  therefore,  cannot  be  compared,  are  those  denoting  matter,  time,  num- 
ber, possession,  country,  part,  interrogation;  aJso  compoimds  of  jugum,  somnus, 
gero,  and/ero,  and  many  others. 

DERIVATION  OF   ADJECTIVES. 

•^         §  128.     Derivative  adjectives  are  formed  chiefly  from  nouns, 
from  other  adjectives,  and  from  verbs. 

I.  Those  derived  from  nouns  and  adjectives  are  called  denomina- 
tives.   The  following  are  the  principal  classes : — 

1.  (a.)  The  termination  eUs,  added *to  the  root,  denotes  the  material  of  which 
a  thing  is  made,  and  sometimes  similarity;  as,  aui'eus,  golden;  argeTiieus,  of 
silver;  ligneus,  wooden;  tn7reiis,  of  glass ;  rir^iraeMS,  maidenly ;  from  aurum,  ar- 
gentum,  etc.   See  §  9,  Rem.  3. 

(6.)  Some  adjectives  of  this  kind  have  a  double  form  in  neus  and  nus;  as, 
eburneus  and  eburnus,  of  ivory. 

(c. )  The  termination  inus  has  the  same  meaning;  as,  adamantinus,  of  ada- 
niant ;  cediinus,  of  cedar;  from  addmas  and  cedrus.  So,  also,  emis ;  as,  ierrenus, 
of  earth,  from  terra. 

(d.)  The  termination  eOs  or  tus  (Gree^  «of),  and  also  icus,  belong  to  adiec- 
bves  formed  from  Greek  names  of  men,  and  denote  'of  or  '  pertaiuin^r  to': 
as,  AchdU'Us,SophocU'Us,  Aristotelius,  Platonh  us  ;  Pythagoreus  and  Pyihaqorhns; 
ffom^riwundnovierinis.  Names  in  ias  make  adjectives  in  iaacs;  as,  Archias, 
Archiacvs.  Sometimes  though  rarely  in  the  purest  Latin  authors,  adjectives  in 
hS*no7of1hTMScTm  ^^^  "^'^^''  ^''  ^^'"'''^^'''  ^^  -*'«'  ^  ^®«tival    in 

tJ:  ^aI^   The  terminations  dUs,dris,  arius,  His,  atilis,  icim,  tens,  vis,  cus,  and 
iTthe'uf^Tfl^mT^^^^    'I  Ttammg.'  or  'relating  to';  as,'  ca^aU^  relatiug 


§  128.  ADJECTIVES DERIVATION.  79 

So  comitialis,  regalis  ;  ApolUndris,  consuldris,  pilaris ;  argehiarius  ;  civllis^ 
hostllis,  juvenilis;  aquaiills^  fiuviatilis;  tribunicius,  phtricius ;  heUlcus^  civtcus,  Ger- 
manicus;  accusatorius.,imperatorius,  regiiis;  Ilectoreus;  ca7wiu.%  equlnus,  ferlmia^ 
masculmus ;  from  comitia,  rex,  A2)oUo,  consul,  populus,  argentum,  ciiis,  etc. 

(b.)  The  tennination  ilis  sometimes  expresses  character;  as,  JiostUis,  hostile; 
puerilis,  boy isli ;  from  hostis  and  jmer. 

(c.)  The  termination  mus  belongs  especially  to  derivatives  from  names  of 
animals,  and  other  living  beings. 

3.  The  termination  arius,  as  a  substantive,  scil.  fuber,  etc.,  generally  denotes 
profession  or  occupation;  as,  argentarius,  a  silversmith;  from  argentum; — 
cm^iarius,  statuarius ;  from  corium  and  statua.  When  added  to  numeral  adjec- 
tives, it  denotes  how  many  equal  parts  a  thing  contains.     See  §  121,  4. 

4.  The  termuiations  osus  and  lenius  denote  abundance,  fulness;  as,  animosus, 
full  of  courage ;  fi'audulentus,  given  to  fraud ;  from  animus  and  fraus.  So  lapi- 
dosus,  vinosus,  portuosiis,  turhulentus,  sanguinolentus,  molentus.  Before  lentus,  a 
connecting  vowel  is  inserted,  which  is  commonly  w,  but  sometimes  6. 

Note. — Adjectives  of  this  class  are  called  arnpUJicaiives.     See  §  104,  12. 

5.  From  adjectives  are  formed  diminutives  in  ulus,  ctilus,  etc.,  in  the  same 
manner  as  from  nouns ;  as,  didciculus,  sweetish ;  from  dulcis.  So  lentidus,  mi- 
sellus,  parvulus,  etc.  See  §  100,  3,  and  §  104,  11.  Diminutives  are  sometimes 
fornied  from  comparatives ;  as,  majusadus,  duriusculus,  somewhat  great,  some- 
what hard,  etc.  Double  diminutives  are  formed  from  pmicvs,  viz  pauxillus  and 
pauxillulus;  and  from  bdnus,  (benus)  are  formed  bellus  and  belliUus. 

6.  (a.)  From  the  names  of  places,  and  especially  of  towns,  are  derived  pa- 
trial  adjectives  in  ensis,  Inus,  ns,  and  anus,  denoting  of  or  belonging  to  such 
places. 

(&.)  Thus  from  Cannce  is  formed  Cannemis;  from  Sulmo,  Sulmonensis.  In 
like  manner,^  from  castra  and  ciirus  come  castr ensis,  circensis.  But  Athence 
makes  Atheniensis ;  and  some  Greek  towns  in  la  and  ea  drop  i  and  e  in  their 
adjectives;  as,  Antiochensis,  Nicomedensis. 

(c.)  Those  in  mus  are  formed  from  names  of  places  ending  in  ia  and  itim; 
as,  AHcia,  Atnclnus ;  Caudium,  Caudlnus  ;  Capiiolium,  CapiioUnus ;  Latium,  La- 
tinus.  Some  names  of  towns,  of  Greek  origin,  with  other  terminations,  also 
form  adjectives  in  Inus ;  as,  Tarentum,  Tartntlnus. 

{d.)  Most  of  those  in  as  are  formed  from  nouns  in  um;  some  from  nouns  in 
a ;  as,  Arpinum,  Arplnas ;  Capena,  Ccipenas. 

(e.)  Those  in  anus  are  formed  from  names  of  towns  of  the  first  declension, 
or  from  certain  common  nouns ;  as.  Alba,  Albdnus ;  Roma,  Romdnus ;  CumoB, 
Cumdniis;  Thebce,  Thebdnus;  also  from  some  of  the  second  declension;  as, 
Tuscidum,  Tusculdnus ;  Fundi,  Funddnus  :—fons,  fontdnus ;  mons,  montdnus ; 
urbs,  iirbdnus :  ojjpidum,  oppiddnus. 

if.)  Adjectives  with  the  terminations- am/s^  ianws,  and  mus  are  formed  from 
names  of  men ;  as,  Sulla,  Sulldnus  ;   Tullius,  Tullidnus ;  Jugurtha,  Jugiirihlnus. 

ig.)  Gi-eek  names  of  towns  in  jpoZts  form  patrial  adjectives  in  ^0tt7d«Ms;  as, 
NeapoUs,  Neapolitdnus. 

(Ii.)  Greek  names  of  towns  generally  form  patrials  in  ??(s ;  as,  Rhodus,  Rho- 
dius ;  Lacedcemon,  Lacedcemonius  ; — but  those  in  a  form  them  in  ceus  ;  as,  La- 
rissa,  Larissceus  ;  Smyrna,  Smyrnceus. 

(i.)  From  many  patrials;  as,  B'^itannus,  Gallus,  Afer,  Persa,  Arabs,  etc., 
adjectives  are  formed  in  icus  and  ius  ;  as,  Britannicus,  Gallicus,  Africus,  Persl- 
cus,  Arabicus ;  so  Sprus,  Syrius  ;   Th'ax,  Thracius. 

7.  A  large  class  of  derivative  adjectives,  though  formed  from 
nouns,  have  the  terminations  of  perfect  participles.  They  generally 
signify  wearing  or  furnished  with;  as, 

aldtus,  winged;  barbdlics,  bearded;  galedtus,  helmeted;  aurltus,  long-eared* 
turrltu$,  turreted;  c  ^nUius,  homed;  from  ala,  barba,  galea,  auris,  etc. 


80  ADJECTIVES DERIVATIOS  §  129. 

8.  The  termination  anf^s,  annexed  to  the  root  of  aii  adjective  or 
participle  in  us,  expresses  a  resemblance  to  the  quality  denoted  by 
the  primitive ;  as,  supervacaneus,  of  a  superfluous  nature. 

,   ^        §  139»     n.   Adjectives  derived  from  verbs  are  called  verbal  ad- 
X*  jectives.     Such  are  the  following  classes : — 

1.  The  termination  bundus,  added  to  the  first  root  of  the  verb, 
with  a  connecting  vowel,  which  is  commonly  that  of  the  verb,  (see 
§  150,  5,)  has  the  general  meaning  of  the  present  participle ;  as, 

errdbunduSj  moribundus,  from  eirv,  mo)-ior,  equivalent  to  eii'ans,  moriens. 

(a.)  In  many  the  meaning  is  somewhat  strengthened;  as,  gratul^burukis,  full 
of  congratulations ;  lacrimdbundus,  weeping  profusely. 

(6.)  Most  verbals  in  bundus  are  from  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  a  few  from 
those  of  the  Uiird,  and  but  one  from  the  second  and  fourth  respectively,  viz. 
pudibundus  and  lascivibundus. 

(c.)   Some  verbal  adjectives  in  cwnJua  have  a  similar  sense ;  as,  nMcundus^  • 
vei'ecundm,  from  rubeo  and  vereor. 

2.  The  termination  idus,  added  to  the  root,  especially  of  neuter 
verbs,  denotes  the  quality  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb ;  as, 

algidus,  cold;  calidus,  warm;  madidus,  moist;  rapidus,  rapid;  from  algeo, 
cakOj  maaeo,  rapio. 

3.  The  termination  uus,  also,  denotes  the  quality  expressed  by  the 
verb  ;  and  adjectives  in  uus  derived  from  active  verbs  take  a  passive 
meaning;  as, 

congruus,  agreeing,  from  congruo ;  so,  assiduus,  nocuus,  innocuus : — irriguus^ 
well  watered;  conspicuus,  visible;  from  irrigo,  conspicio. 

4.  (a.)  The  terminations  Uis  and  bilis,  added  to  the  root  of  a  verb, 
with  its  connecting  vowel,  denote  passively,  capability,  or  desert ;  as, 

amnbilis,  worthy  to  be  loved;  credihlUs,  deserving  credit;  placabiUs,  easy  to  be 
appeased;  aglUs,  active;  due tt/ts,  ductile;  from  dmo,  credo,  pluco;  ago]  dico. 
Thev  are  rarelv  active ;  as,  horribilis,  terribilis,  fertilis ;  air  per  cuncta  mea- 
biUs'.    Plin. 

(b.)  In  adjectives  of  these  forms,  derived  from  verbs  of  the  third  conjuga- 
tion, the  connecting  vowel  is  i ;  sometimes,  also,  in  those  from  verbs  of  the 
second  conjugation,  in  these  and  other  forms,  i  is  used  instead  of  e ;  as,  honi- 
bilU,  tti-nbllU,  from  horreo  and  ierrto. 

(c.)  These  terminations,  with  the  connecting  vowel,  are  soraetimes  added  to 
the  third  root;  as,  Jleailis,  Jiexibilis ;  cocUlis,  cociibilis,  from  flecto  (flex-),  etc. 

5.  The  termination  icius  or  itius,  added  to  the  third  root  of  the 
verb,  has  a  passive  sense;  as,  Jictitius,  feigned;  conductitius,  to. he 
hired ;  from  Jir^go  (Jict-),  etc. 

6.  The  termination  ax,  added  to  the  root  of  a  verb,  denotes  an  in- 
clination, often  one  that  is  faulty ;  as, 

audax,  audacious;  Idquriz,  talkative;  rdpax  rapacious;  from  audeo,  IdguOTf 
rapio. 

7.  The  termination  was,  annexed  to  the  third  root  of  a  verb,  de- 
notes fitness  or  ability  to  produce  the  action  expressed  by  the  verb; 
as,  diy'unctlvus,  disjunctive,  from  dkjungo. 


§1  130,  131.  ADJECTIVES COMPOSITION.  "  81 

8.  Verbals  in  tor  and  irix^  (see  §  102^  6,  (a.),  ar^ften  used  as  adjectives,  espe- 
cially in  poetiy;  as,  victor  exercttus,  mctrlceslitei^.  In  the  plural  they  become 
adjectives  of  tlu-ee  terminations;  as,  victores,  rlctrlces,  vicir'icia.  So  also  hospes, 
especially  by  the  later  poets,  is  used  as  an  adjective,  having  /iospifa  in  the  femi- 
nine singular  and  also  in  the  neuter  plural. 

A^  §  130.  in.  Adjectives  derived  from  participles,  and  retaining 
their  form,  are  called  participial  adjectioes\  as,  amans,  fond  of;  doc- 
tus,  learned. 

IV.  Some  adjectives  are  derived  from  adverbs ;  as,  crastinus,  of 
to-morrow ;  hodiernus,  of  this  day ;  from  eras  and  hodie. 

V.  Some  adjectives  are  derived  from  prepositions ;  as,  contrarius, 
contrary,  from  contra  ;  posterus,  subsequent,  Irom  post. 


COMPOSITION  OF  ADJECTIVES. 

§  131.     Compound  adjectives  are  formed  variously : — 

1.  Of  two  nouns;  as,_  copripcs,  goat-footed — of  caper  and  pes;  ignicdmus, 
laving  fiery  hair — of  ignis  and  c6ma. 

Note. — See,  respecting  the  connecting  short  ?,  in  case  the  first  part  of  the  compound 
is  a  noun  or  an  adjectiye,  §  103,  R«m.  1. 

2.  Of  a  noun  and  an  adjective;  as,  noctivdgus,  wandering  in  the  night — 
of  nox  and  vagus.     So  lucifugax,  shumiing  the  light — of  lux  and  fugax. 

3.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb ;  as,  corniger^  bearing  horns — of  cornu  and  gero  ; 
letifer,  bringing  death — of  letum  and  fero.  So"  carnivdrus,  causidicus,  ignivd- 
mus,  lucifugus,  j^^'-i'^^f'^ps. 

4.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun;  as,  (equcemis,  of  the  same  Sige—of  cequus  and 
cevum ;  cehripes,  swift-footed — of  celer  and  pes.  So  centimdnus,  decennis,  mag~ 
nanimus,  misertcors,  unanimis. 

6.  Of  two  adjectives;  as,  centumgeminus,  a  hundred-fold;  muUicdvm,  h&y'mg 
many  cavities ;  quintusdecimus,  the  fifteenth. 

6.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb ;  as,  brevildquens,  speaking  briefly — of  breinB 
and  loquor  ;  magnificus,  magnificent— of  magnus  and jfdcio. 

7.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  termination;  as,  qualiscumque,  quotcumque,  uterque. 

8.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun;  as,  bicorpor,  two-bodied — of  bis  and  corpus. 

9.  Of  an  adverb  a,nd  an  adjective ;  as,  maledicax,  slanderous — of  male  and 
cUcajs.     So  antemerididnus,  before  mid-day. 

10.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb ;  as,  beneficus,  beneficent — of  bene  and  fdcio ; 
malevdlus,  malevolent — of  male  and  vdh. 

11.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun;  as,  dmens,  mad — of  a  and  mens.  So  con- 
sors,  decdlor,  deformis,  implumis,  inermis. 

12.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adjective;  as,  concdvus,  concave;  infldus,  un- 
faithful.    So  improvldus,  percdrv^,  prcedlves,  eubalbidus. 

■  13.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  verb ;  as,  continuus,  uninterrupted — of  con  and 
teneo ;  insciens,  ignorant — of  in  and  scio.  So  prcecipuus,  pi'omiscuus,  sttbsiillus, 
superstes. 

Remark.  When  the  former  part  is  a  preposition,  its  final  consonant  is  sometimes 
changed,  to  adapt  it  to  the  consonant  which  follows  it ;  as,  imprudens — of  in  and  prU- 
dens.    See  §  196;  and  cf.  J 103,  R.  2. 


82  PRONOUNS. StTBSTANTITE   PRONOUNS.         §  132,  133. 

^  PRONOUNS. 

§  133.     1.   A  pronoun  is  a  word  which  supplies  the  place 
of  a  noun. 

2.   There  are  eighteen  simple  pronouns : — 

Ego,  /.  Hie,  thb^  iJie  latter.  Suus,  his^  hers,  its,  etc. 

Tu,  thou.  Is,  that  or  he.  Cujus?  whose? 

Sui,  of  himself ,  etc  Quis?  who  f  Noster,  our. 

Ille,  that,  tJie  former.  Qui,  who.  Vaster,  your. 

Ipse,  himself.  Meus,  my.  Nostras,  of  our  country. 

Iste,  that,  that  of  yours.  Tuus,  iky.  Cujas  ?  of  what  country  ? 

3.  Ego,  tu,  and  sui,  and  commonly  also  quis  and  its  compounds,  ai-e  substan- 
tives :  tlie  other  pronouns,  both  simple  and  compoxmd,  are  adjectives,  but  are 
often  by  ellipsis  used  as  substantives. 

4.  Effo,  tu,  and  sui  are  commonly  called  personal  pronouns.  They  are  a 
species  of  appellatives  (^  26,  3,)  of  general  application.  Ego  is  used  by  a 
speaker  to  designate  himself;  tu,  to  designate  the  person  whom^  he  addresses. 
Hence  ego  is  of  the  first  person,  tu  of  the  second.  (§  35,  2.)  Sui  is  of  the  third 
person,  and  has  always  a' reflexive  signification,  referring  to  the  subject  of  the 
sentence.  The  oblique  cases  of  ego  and  tu  are  also  used  reflexively,  when  the 
subject  of  the  proposition  is  of  the  first  or  second  person. 

5.  The  remaining  pronouns,  except  quis  and  its  compounds,  are  adjectives, 
as  they  serve  to  limit  the  meaning  of  substantives ;  and  they  are  pronouns,  be- 
cause, like  substantive  pronouns,  they  may  designate  any  object  in  ceilain 
situations  or  circumstances. 

6.  Meus,  tuus,  suus,  noster,  vester,  and  cvjus,  have  the  same  extent  of  signifi- 
cation as  the  pronouns  from  which  they  are  derived,  and  are  equivalent  to  the 
genitive  cases  of  their  primitives. 

7.  Pronouns,  like  substantives  and  adjectives,  are  declmed;  but  most  of 
them  want  the  vocative.  Sui,  from  the  natvire  of  its  signification,  wants  also 
the  nominative  in  both  numbers. 

8.  The  substantive  pronouns  take  the  gender  of  the  objects  which  they  d^ 
note.    The  adjective  pronouns,  like  adjectives,  have  three  genders. 


SUBSTANTIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  133.     The  suhstantive  pronouns  are  thus  declined : — 
Singular. 
N.  e'-g8,  /.  tii,  tliou. 


G.  me'-i,  of  me.               tu'-i,  of  thee.  \  sn'-l,  of  hvr^elf  her- 

•^                               %^  \     self  Itself 

D.  mi'-hl,  to  me.              tib'-I,*  to  thee.  sib'-i,*  to  himself  etc.- 

Ac.  mc,  me.                      te,  thee.  se,  himself,  etc. 

"  tu,  O  thou, 

te,  with  thee.  se,  witl  himself  etc. 


•Seejl9,l,  Exc. 


§134. 


ADJECTIVE    PRONOUNS. 


83 


N.    nos,  we. 
p  (  nos'-tnim 
'  I  or  nos'-tri 
D.    no'-bis,  to  us. 
Ac.  iios,  us. 
V. 


w 


us. 


Plural. 
vos,  ye  or  you. 
ves'-trumor)   ^ 

ves  -tn,      j  •/  ^ 
vo'-bis,  to  you. 
vos,  you. 
vos,  O  ye  or  ?/om. 
vo'-bis,  with  you. 


su-i,  q; 

sib'-i,  ^o  themselves. 
se,  thamselves. 

se,  wjtV/i  themselves. 


Ah.  no'-bis,  z««VA  m5. 

Remark  1.  3fe  and  mi  are  ancient  forms  for  mihi.  So  min'  for  mihine^ 
Pers.  1,  2. 

Rem.  2.  The  syllable  met  is  sometimes  annexed  to  the  substantive  pronouns, 
in  an  intensive  sense,  either  with  or  without  ipse ;  as,  egdmel^  I  myself;  mihi- 
met  ijjsi,  for  myself.  It  is  not  annexed,  however,  to  the  genitives  plm-al,  nor  to 
tu  in  the  nominative  or  vocative.  In  these  cases  of  iu^  tute  or  iutemet  is  used. 
In  the  accusative  and  ablative  the  reduplicated  forms  wme  and  tete  in  the  sin- 
gular, and  sese  in  both  numbers,  are  employed  intensively.  Mepte,  intensive, 
med  and  ted,  for  me  and  te,  and  mis  and  tis  for  mei  and  tui,  occur  in  the  comio 
writers. 

3.  Nostrum  and  vesirum  are  contracted  from  nostroriim,  nostrdrUm^  and  re*- 
trm-um,  vestrarum.  Respecting  the  difference  in  the  use  of  nostrum  and  nostrif 
vestrum  and  vestri,  see  §  212,  R.  2,  N.  2. 

4.  The  preposition  cum  is  affixed  to  the  ablative  of  these  pronouns  in  both 
numbers ;  as,  mecum,  nobiscum,  etc.    Cf.  §  136,  R.  1. 


ADJECTIVE  PRONOUNS. 

§  134:.     Adjective  pronouns  may  be  divided  into  the  follow- 
ing classes : — demonstrative,  intensive,  relative,  interrogative,  in- 
definite,  possessive,  and  patrial. 
Note.  Some  pronouns  belong  to  two  of  these  classes. 


DEMONSTRATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

Demonstrative  pronouns  are  such  as  specify  what  object  is 
meant. 

They  are  Hie,  tsie,  hie,  and  is,  and  their  compounds,  and  are  thus 
declined : — 


M. 

N.  il'-le, 
G.  il-li'-us,' 
D.  il'-li, 
Ac.  il'-lum, 
V.   il'-le, 
^6.il'-lo. 


Singular. 

F. 
il'-la, 
il-ll'-us, 
il'-li, 
il'-lam, 
il'-la, 
il'-la. 


N, 
il'-lud, 
il-li'-us, 
il'-li, 
il'-lud, 
il'-lud, 
H'-lo. 


M. 

il'-li, 

il-lo'-rum, 

il'-lis, 

il'-los, 

il'-li, 

il'-lis. 


Plural. 
F. 
il'-lsB, 
il-la'-rum, 
il'-lis, 
il'-las, 
il'-las, 
il'-lis. 


N. 
il'-la, 
il-lo'-rum, 
il'-lis, 
il'-lii, 
il'-la, 
il'-lis. 


♦See  J 16, 1. 


84 


DEMONSTRATIVE   PRONOUNS. 


§  134. 


Isteis  declined  like  Ule. 


Singular. 

Plural 

M. 

F. 

iV. 

3L 

F. 

N. 

N.  hlc, 

haec, 

hoc,    -t 

hi, 

h«, 

h«c. 

G.  hu'-jus, 

hu-jus, 

hu'-jus. 

ho'-rum, 

ha'-rum, 

ho'-rum. 

D.   huic*, 

huic, 

huic, 

his. 

his,' 

his. 

Ac.  hunc, 

hanc, 

hsc, 

hos, 

has, 

haec, 

V.  hic, 

hsec, 

hoc, 

hi. 

has. 

ha3C, 

^&.hoc. 

hac. 

hoc. 

his. 

his. 

his. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

iV. 

M.  . 

F. 

N. 

N.  is, 

e'-a, 

id, 

i'-i, 

e'-95, 

e'-a, 

G.  e'-jus, 

e'-jus, 

e'-jus, 

e-o'-rum, 

e-aniin, 

e-o  -rum. 

D.  e'-i. 

e'-i, 

e'-i, 

i'-is  or  e'-is, 

i'-is  or  e'-is, 

i'-is  or  e'-is, 

Ac.  e'-um, 

F.  

Ab.  e'-6. 

e'-am, 

id, 

e'-os. 

e'-as. 

e'-a, 

e'-a. 

e'-o. 

i 

-is  or  e'-is. 

i'-is  or  e'-is. 

i'-is  or  e'-is. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  iUe,  oUus  was  anciently  used ;  whence  oUi  masc.  plur. 
m  Virgil.  lUce  fem.,  for  tW?a  and  illi,  is  found  *in  Lucretius  and  Cato,  as  also 
in  Cato,  ha  for  huic  fem.;  hice  for  /ii,  and  ^cec  for  hce  in  Plautus  and  Terence. 
Im  for  eum,  is  found  in  the  Twelve  Tables ;  eii  for  ef,  and  thus  and  u"6us  for 
tu,  in  Plautus;  ece,  fem.,  for  «',  and  eaizw  for  its,  in  Cato. 

Rem.  2.  From  ecce,  lo !  withiffe,  iste,  and  is,  are  formed,  in  colloquial  language, 
nom.,  ecca;  ecciUa,  ecciUud ;  ace.  sing.,  eccum,  eccam ;  eccillum  (by  syncope 
ellum),  eccillam ;  eccistam ;  ace.  plur.,  eccos,  ecca. , 

Rem.  3.  Istic  and  iUic  are  compounded  of  ts<«  hic,  and  iUekic;  or,  as  some 
Bay,  of  t5<e  ce,  and  tile  ce.  The  former  sometimes  retains  the  aspirate,  asisOuc. 
Tliey  are  more  emphatic  than  Ule  and  iste. 


IsUc  is  thus  declined: — 

Singular. 


M. 

N.  is'-tic, 
Ac.  is'-tunc, 
Ab.  is'-toc. 


F. 

is'-taec, 
is'-tanc, 
is'-tac. 


N. 

is'-toc,  or  is'-tuc, 

is'-toc,  or  is'-tuc. 


is'toc. 
lUic  is  declined  in  the  same  manner. 


Plural 
M.         F. 


N. 
Ac. 


N. 


is'-taec. 


Rem.  4.  Ce,  intensive,  is  sometimes  added  to  the  several  cases  of  hic,  and 
rarely  to  some  cases  of  the  other  demonstrative  pronoims ;  as,  hujuece,  huncce, 
hancce,  hocce,hice,  haece  or  hac,  horunc,  Jiarumce,  hai-unce,  or  har^nc,  hosce, 
hasce,  hisce ;  iUiusce,  illdce,  illosce,  illasce,  illisce ;  isidce,  istisce ;  ejusce,  twee. 
WTien  ne^  interrogative,  is  also  annexed,  ce  becomes  ci ;  as,  hceccine,  hogci)ie, 
hiscine  ;  tstucciru,  istaccine,  istoscine  ;  illiccini,  illancclne. 

Rem.  5.  MOdi,  the  genitive  of  mOdus,  annexed  to  the  genitive  singular  of  q6- 
moiisti-ative  and  relative  pronouns,  imj)arts  to  them  the  signification  of  adjec- 
tives of  quality;  as,  hujusmodi  or  hiijuscemOdi^^lke  talis,  of  this  sort,  such; 
iUiusmddi  and  isliusinddi,  of  that  sort;  cvjusiiiddi,  of  what  sort,  like  (^ualis  ;  ct*- 


*Seef  9,5. 


135. 


INTENSIVE   PRONOUNS. 


85 


juscemddij  cujusquemddi,  cujusmodicumque,  of  what  kind  soever;  cnjusdammddij 
of  some  kind,  bo  also  istinlddi,  cuimOdi  s^nd  cuicuimddi,  instead  of  istimmddi^ 
cujusmdd^  etc. 

Rem.  6.   The  sufl^  dem  is  annexed  to  is,  forming  Idem,  "  the  same,"  which 
is  thus  declined : — 


3L 
N.    i'-dem, 
G.    e-jus'-dem, 
D.    e-i'-dem, 
Ac.  e-un'-dem, 

V.    

M.  e-o'-dem. 


F. 

e^-a-dem, 
e-jus'-dem, 
e-i'-dera, 
e-an'-dem, 

e-a'-dem. 


N. 
I''-dem, 
e-jus'-dem, 
e-I'-dem, 
X'-dem, 

e-o'-dem. 


FlurdL 
M.  F.  N. 

N.  i-i''-dem,  e-aa'-dem,  e'-a-dem, 

G.  e-o-run'-dem,  e-a-run'-dem,  e-o-run'-dem, 

D.  e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem,    e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem,  e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem, 

Ac,  e-os'-dem,  e-as'-dem,  e'-a-dem, 

Ah.  e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem.    e-is'-dem,  or  i-is'-dem.    e-is'dem,  or  i-is'-dem. 

Note  1.  In  compound  pronouns,  vi  before  d  is  changed  into  n;  as,  eundemj 
eorundenij  etc. 

Note  2.  In  Sallust  isdem,  and  in  Palladius  hisdem  occur  for  iisdem ;  and  En- 
nius  in  Cicero  has  eademmet  for  eddem. 


INTENSIVE    PEONOUNS. 


§  ]3^.    Litensive  prbnouns  are  such  as  serve  to  render  an 
object  emphatic. 

To  tHis  class  belong  ipse,  and  the  intensive  compounds  akeady 
mentionffd.     See  §§  133,  R.  2,  and  134,  R.  4. 
Ipse  is  compounded  of  is  and  the  sufiix  pse,  and  is  thus  declined: — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

M. 

F. 

iV. 

M. 

F. 

K 

N.  ip'-se. 

ip'-sa. 

ip'-sum. 

ip'-si. 

ip  -sse. 

ip'-sa, 

G.  ip-si'-us. 

ip-si'-us, 

ip-si  -us. 

ip-so'-rum,  ip-sa'-rum 

ip-so'-rum, 

D.  ip'-si, 
Ac.  ip'-sum, 
V.  ip'-se. 

ip'-si, 

ip'-sam, 

ip'-sa. 

ip'-si, 

ip'-sum, 

ip'-sum, 

ip'-sis, 
ip'-sos, 
ip'-si. 

ip'-sis, 
ip'-sas, 
ip'-sae, 

ip'-sis, 
ip'-sa, 
ip  -sa, 

Ab.  ip'-so. 

ip'-sa. 

ip'-so. 

ip'-sis. 

ip'-sis. 

ip'-sis. 

Remark  1.  Ipse  is  commonly  subjoined  to  nouns  or  pronouns ;  as,  Juplier 
ipse,  tu  ipse,  Jupiter  himself,  etc. ;  and  hence  is  sometimes  called  the  adjunctive 
pronoun. 

Rem.  2.  A  nominative  ipsus,  occurs  in  early  writers,  and  a  superlative  ipsiS' 
slmus,  his  very  self,  is  found  in  Plautus. 

Rem.  3.  In  old  writers  the  is  of  ipse  is  declined,  while  pse  remains  unde- 
clined;  as,  eapse,  (nom.  i.nd  abl.),  eampse,  and  ecpse,  instead  of  ipsa,  iptam, 
and  ipso.    So  also  r eapse,  ,  e.  re  eapse, ''  in  fact." 


86 


KELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 


§136. 


RELATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  136.  Relative  pronouns  are  such  as  relate  to  a  preceiing 
noun  or  pronoun. 

1.  Tbey  are  mii,  -ivlio,  and  the  compounds  quicumque  and  quisquisy 
whoever.     The  latter  are  called  general  relatives. 

2.  In  a  general  sense,  the  demonstrative  prononns  are  often  relatives ;  hnt 
the  name  is  commonly  appropriated  to  those  above  specified.  They  serve  to 
introduce  a  proposition,  limiting  or  explaining  a  preceding  noun  or  pronoun,  to 
which  they  relate,  and  which  is  called  the  aniecedenL 


Qui  is  thus  declined 

— 

Singular, 

M,           F. 

N. 

N.  qui,          qu8B, 
G.  cu'-jus,     cu-jus, 
D.  cui,*        cui, 
Ac.  quern,      quam, 

quod, 
cu'-jus, 
cui, 
quod, 

Ah.  quo.  qua. 


quo. 


M. 

qui,^ 

quo'-rum, 
qui'-bus, 
quos, 


Plural 

R 
quae, 
qua-rum, 
qui'-bus, 
quas. 


quae, 
quo'-rum, 
qui'-bus, 
quae, 


qui'-bus.      qui'-bus.      qui'-biis. 


Remark  1.  Qui  is  sometimes  used  for  the  ablative  singular,  in  all  genders 
and  rarely  also  for  the  ablative  plural.  To  the  ablatives  quo,  qua,  qui,  and  qui~ 
bus,  cum  is  commonly  annexed,  cf.  §  133,  4.  Cicero  uses  quicum  for  quocumy 
when  an  indefinite  person  is  meant.  , 

Rem.  2.  Queis  (monosyllabic,  §  9,  R.  1),  and  quls  are  sometimes  used  in  the 
dative  and  ablative  plural  for  quibus.  Cujus  and  cui  were  anciently  written 
quqjus  and  quoi :  and,  instead  of  the  genitive  cujus,  a  relative  adjective  cujus, 
a,  ttm,  very  rarely  occurs.  ,  • 

3.    Quicumque,  (or  quicunque^,  is  declined  like  quu 

Re>i.  8.  Qui  is  sometimes  separated  from  cumque  by  the  interposition  of 
one  or  more  words;  as,  qua  m^  cumque  vocant  ierroB.  Virg.  A  similar  separap 
Uon  sometimes  occurs  in  the  other  compounds  of  cumque* 


4.    Quisquis  is  thus  declined : — 
Singular. 
M.  F.  N. 

N.  quis'-quis,        quis'-quis,-)'  quid'-quid, 

.4c.  quem'-quem,  quid'-quid, 

Ab.  quo'-quo.         qua'-qua,     quo'-quo. 


Plural, 
M. 
N.  qui'-qii, 
D.  qui-bie'-qui-bus, 


Rem.  4.    Quicquxd  is  sometimes  used  for  quidquid.    Quiqul  for  q;.dsquis  occurs 
in  Plautus;  and  quidquid  is  used  adjectively  i^4^to  R.  R.  48. 


•8ee§9,6;andct  J806,a) 


tCf.Jia7,R.(l) 


§  137.  INTERROGATIVE  PRONOUNS.  .  87 


INTERROGATIVE    PRONOUNS. 

§  137.    Interrogative  pronouns  are  such  as  serve  to  inquire 
which  of  a  number  of  objects  is  intended. 

They  are 

Quis?         1  <,„7i^ 9  <,„7,„/ 9     Ecqms?  1  Cujns?  whose? 

Quisnam?  }  "'^^-  "''^«^-      Ecquisnam?    U^^^.^,,  Cujas?  oftvhat 

Q»!'^      AwMckfwhat?^--'^^'}''        r''''''''''         country? 
Qumam?  y"'"*^"-  ""*"'•  NumquisnamJ 

1.    Quis  is  commonly  used  substantively;  quif  adjectively.    The 
interrogative  qui  is  declined  like  qui  the  relative. 


Quis  is  thus  declined : — 

Singular, 

Plural 

M, 

F.             N. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N.  quis,- 

quas,         quid. 

qui, 

quae, 

quae, 

G.  cu'-jus, 

cu'-jus,     cu'-jus, 

quo'-rum 

,  qua'-rum, 

quo'-rum, 

.D.  cui, 

cui,           cui, 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus, 

Ac.  quern, 

V. 

Ah.  quo. 

quam,       quid, 

quos, 

quas, 

quae. 

qua.          quo. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

qui'-bus. 

RfeMARK  (1.)  Quis  is  sometimes  used  by  comic  writers  in  the  feminine,  and 
even  in  the  neuter.     Quisnam,  quisque  and  quisquam  also  occur  as  feminine. 

Rem.  (2.)  Qui  is  used  for  the  ablative  of  quis  in  all  genders,  as  it  is  for  that 
of  the  relative  qui.    Cf.  §  136,  R.  1. 

Rem.  (3.)  Quis  and  qui  have  sometimes  the  signification  of  the  indefinite 
pronoun  aliquis  (some  one,  any  one),  especially  after  the  conjunctions  ec  (for 
e»),  si,  ne,  new,  nisi,  num ;  and  after  relatives,  as  quo,  quanta,  etc.  Sometimes 
quis  and  qui  are  used  in  the  sense  ofqudlis?  what  sort? 

2.  The  compounds  quisnam  and  quinam  have  respectively  the  sig- 
nification and  declension  of  the  interrogatives  quis  and  qui.  In  the 
poets  nam  sometimes  stands  before  quis.  Virg.  G.  4,  445. 

3.  Ecquis  and  numquis  are  declined  and  used  like  quis ;  but  are 
sometimes  adjectives.  Virg.  Eel.  10,  28:  Cic.  Att.  13,  8. 

Rem.  (4.)  Ecqua  is  sometimes  found  in  the  nominative  singular  feminine ; 
and  the  neuter  plural  of  numquis  is  numqua. 

Rem.  (5.)  Ecqui  and  numqui  also  occur,  declined  like  the  interrogative  qui, 
and,  like  that,  used  adjectively. 

4.  Ecquisnam  and  numquisnam  arc  declined  like  ecquis ;  but  are 
found  only  in  the  singular ; — the  former  in  the  nominative  in  all  gen- 
ders, and  in  the  ablative  masculine ;  the  latter  in  the  nominative 
mascuUne  and  accusative  neuter.  In  the  nominative  feminine  and 
\n  the  ablative,  the  former  is  used  adjectively. 


88  INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  §  188 

5.  The  interrogative  cujus  is  also  defective : — 

.     Singular.  Plural. 

M.              F.             N.     .  F. 

N.  cu-jus,        cu-ja,        cu-jum,  N.  cu-jae, 

ulc.  cu'-jum,      cu'-jam,     .4c.  cu'-jas. 

Ah. cu-ja.         ■ 

6.  Cujas  is  declined  like  an  adjective  of  one  termination ;  cm/cw, 
cujatXs.   See  §  139,  4. 

Note.  The  interrogative  pronouns  are  used  not  only  in  direct  questions  but 
in  such  dependent  clauses  also,  as  contain  only  an  indirect  question ;  as,  e.  g. 
in  the  direct  question,  quis  estf  who  is  heV  in  the  indirect,  nescio  qtdssit,  I  know 
not  who  he  is.  Qui,  in  this  sense,  is  foimd  for  quis ;  as,  qui  sit  apirit,  he  dis- 
closes who  he  is.    Cf.  §  265,  N. 

INDEFINITE    PBONOUNS. 

§  138.  Indefinite  pronouns  are  such  as  denote  an  object 
in  a  general  manner,  without  indicating  a  particular  individual 
They  ai-e 

Aliquis,  some  one.  Quisquam,  any  one,  Quidam,  a  certain  one. 

Siquis,  i/*  any.  Quispiam,  S07»e  owe.  QuUibet,  )  anw  one  you 

Nequis,  lest  any.  Unusquisque,  each.  Quivis,     j  please. 

Quisque,  every  one.  Aliquipiam,  any,  some.  Quis  and  qui,  ^  137,  B.  (3.) 

Note.  Siquis  and  nequis  are  commonly  written  separately,  «  quis  and  ne 
quis:  80  also  unus  quisque.  4 

1.  AUquis  is  thus  declined : — 

Singular. 


M, 

F. 

N. 

N. 

G. 

D. 

Ac. 

V 

al'-i-quis, 
al-i-cu'-jus, 
al'-i-cui, 
al'-i-quem, 

al'-i-qua, 
al-i-cu-jus, 
al'-i-cui, 
al'-i-quam, 

al'-I-quod,  or  -quid, 
al-i-cu'-jus, 
al'-i-cui, 
al'-i-quod,  or  -quid, 

Ab. 

al'-i-quo. 

al'-i-qua. 
Plural. 

al'-i-quo. 

M. 

F. 

N. 

N. 

G. 

D. 

Ac. 

y 

al'-i-qui, 
al-i-qu6  -rum, 
a-liq'-ui-bus,* 
al'-i-quos. 

al'-i-quae, 
al-i-qua'-rum, 
a-liq'-ui-bus, 
al'-i-quas, 

a-liq'-ui-bus. 

al'-i-qua, 
al-i-quo'-rum, 
a-liq'-ui-bus, 
al'-i-qua. 

Ah. 

a-liq'-ui-bus. 

a-Uq'-ui-bus. 

♦  Pronounced  a4ik^-wi-bus.    See  {§  9,  4,  and  21,  8. 


§  139.  POSSESSIVE  PRONOUNS.  .  89 

2.  Slquis  and  nequis  are  declined  in  the  same  manner ;  but  they 
Bometimes  have  quce  in  the  fem.  singular  and  neut.  plural. 

(a.)  Altqui»,  in  the  nommative  singular  masculine,  is  nsed  both  as  a  sub- 
stantive and  as  an  adjective; — aliqui,  as  an  adjective,  but  is  nearly  obsolete. 
AliqucB  in  the  fem.  sing,  occurs  as  an  adjective  in  Lucretius,  4,  2,  64.  Slqui^ 
and  ncqui,  which  are  properly  adjectijKs,  are  used  also  substantively  for  siquis 
and  nequis,  arid  in  the  nominative  singular  masculine  these  two  forms  are 
equivalent.    The  ablatives  aliqul  and  slqul  also  occur. 

(b.)  Aliquid,  slquid,  und  nequid,  like  quid,  are  used  substantively;  altquod^ 
etc.,  like  quod,  are  used  adjectively. 

3.  Quisque,  quisquam,  and  quispiam,  are  declined  like  quis. 

(a.)  In  the  neuter  singularj  however,  quisque  has  quodque,  mddque,  or  quicque ; 
quisquam  has  quidquam  or  qmcquam  ;  and  qtdspiam  has  quodpiam,  quiapiam,  ox 
guippiam.  The  forms  quicque  or  quicque,  quidj)iam  or  quippiam  are  used  sub- 
stantively. 

(6.)  Quisquam  wants  the  feminine  (except  quamquam,  Plant.  Mil.  4,  2,  68), 
and  also  the  plural,  and,  with  a  few  exceptions  in  Plautus,  it  is  always  used 
substantively,  its  place  as  an  adjective  being  supplied  by  ullus.  Quispiam  is 
scarcely  used  m  the  plural,  except  in  the  nominative  feminine,  qucepiam. 

4.  Unusquisque  is  compounded  of  unus  and  quisque,  ■which  are 
often  -written  separately,  and  both  words  are  declined. 

Thus  unusquisque,  uniuscujusque,  unicuique,  unumquemque,  etc.  The  neuter 
is  unumquodque,  or  unumquidque.  It  has  no  plural.  Unumquidquid  for  unum- 
quidque  occurs  in  Plautus  and  Lucretius. 

5.  Quldam,  quilibet,  and  qulvis,  are  declined  like  qui,  except  that 
they  ha,\e  both  quod  and  quid  in  the  neuter,  the  former  used  adjec- 
tively, the  latter  substantively. 

Note.  Quidam  has  usually  n  before  d  in  the  accusative  singular  and  geni- 
tive plural;  as,  quendam,  quorundam,  etc.    Cf.  §  134,  Note  1. 

POSSESSIVE    PRONOUNS. 

~^§  139.  1.  The  possessive  are  derived  from  the  genitives  of 
the  substantive  pronouns,  and  of  quis,  and .  designate  something 
belonging  to  their  primitives. 

They  are  meus,  tuus,  suus,  nosier,  vester,  and  cyjus.  Meus,  tuus, 
and  suus,  are  declined  like  bonus  ;  but  meus  has  in  the  vocative  sin- 
gular masculine  mi,  and  very  rarely  meus.  Cf.  §  105,  R.  3.  In  late 
writers  mi  occurs  also  in  the  feminine  and  neuter. 

2.  Cujus  also  is  declined  like  bonus  ;  but  is  defective.  See  §  137, 5. 
It  occurs  only  in  early  Latin  and  in  legal  phraseology. 

3.  Noster  and  vester  are  declined  ^e  piger.   See  §  106. 
Eemakk  1.  The  terminations  pte  and  met  intensive  are  sometimes  annexed 

to  possessive  pronouns,  especially  to  the  ablative  singular;  as,  suopte  pondere, 
by  its  own  weight;  suapte  manu,  by  his  own  hand.  So  nostrapte  culpa;  su- 
wnple  amlcum ;  medmet  culpa.  The  suffix  met  is  usually  followed  by  ipse ;  as, 
Hannibal  sudmet  ipse  fraude  capius  abiit.  Liv. ;  but  SaUust  has  meamet  facta 

Rem.  2.  Suus,  like  its  primitive  sui,  has  always  a  reflexive  signification,  re- 
fr-'ng  to  the  subject  of  the  sentence.  Meus,  iuus,  noster,  and  vester,  are  also 
tsed  rcilexively,  when  the  subject  of  the  propcsition  is  of  the  first  or  second 
person.   See  \  182,  4. 


90       PATBIAL   PRONOUNS. — ^PRONOMINAL   ADJECTIVES.     §139. 
PATRIAL    PRONOUNS. 

4.  (a.)  These  are- nostras  and  cujas.  See  §§  100,  2,  and  128,  6. 
They  are  declined  like  adjectives  of  one  termination ;  as,  nostras^ 
nostratis,  but  both  are  defective. 

(&.)  Nostras  is  found  in  the  nominative  and  genitive  singular,  in 
the  nominative  plural,  (masc.  and  fem.,  nostrates,  neut.  nostratia)^ 
and  in  the  ablative,  (nostratlbus).  Cujas  or  qiwjas  occurs  in  the 
nominative,  genitive  and  accusative  {cujatem  masc.)  singular,  and  in 
the  nominative  plural,  masc.  (cujates).  Cf.  §  137,  6. — Nostratis  and 
cujdtis  (or  quojdtis)  also  occur  in  l^e  nominative. 

PRONOMINAL    ADJECTIVES. 

V"  5.  To  the  adjective  pronouns  may  be  added  certain  adjectives 
of  so  general  a  meaning,  that  they  partake,  in  some  degree,  of 
the  character  Qf  pronomis.     Of  this  kind  are : — 

(1.)  (a.)  Alius,  tdlits,  nidlus,  and  nonnullus,  which  answer  to  the 
question,  -who? 

(6.)  Alter,  neuter,  alteruter,  uterviSf  and  vlerVCbet,  which  answer  to 
the  question,  ijiter  ?  which  of  two  ?  ^ 

(2.)  Adjectives  denoting  quality,  size,  or  number,  in  a  general 
way.  These  stand  in  relation  to  one  another,  and  are  hence  called 
correlatives. 

Rejiark.  The  relatives  and  interrogatives  of  this  class  begin  with  qu,  and 
are  alike  in  form.  The  indefinites  are  formed  from  the  relatives  by  prefixing 
ali.  The  demonstratives  begin  with  t,  and  are  sometimes  strengthened  bv  dem. 
A  general  relative,  having  a  meaning  more  general  than  the  relative,  is  formed 
by  doublinjg  the  simple  relative,  or  by  affixing  to  it  the  termination  cumque. 
A  general  indefinite  is  formed  by  annexing  libet  or  vis  to  the  relative. 

(3.)  Their  mutual  ;:^lation  is  denoted  by  the  following  table,  with 
which  may  be  compared  the  adverbial  correlatives,  §  191,  R.  1. 

Interrog.  Demonstr.        Relat.  Relat.  general.  Indefin.        Indef  general. 

qualis?  '      talis,  quails,      { jS^m^e,        } ^-^''^"^^'^ 

<l-°t-^       {SSSdem,  N--tus.{^jJ-Sji-'{aUquantu.,  quantusllbet, 
quot?  tot,  totldem,    quot,       {^JotSque,  (aliquot,         quotin)et, 


quStus?  totus,  qnStns,      quotuscumque,        (aliquotus),  . 

Diminutives. 
qnantulus?     tantulus.  .       quantuluscumque.  aliquantulom. . 

Note  1.  The  sufSx  cumque,  which  is  used  in  forming  general  relatives,  is 
composed  of  the  relative  adverb  cum  (quum)  and  the  suffix  qtie,  expressive  of 
universality,  as  in  quisjue  and  in  adverbs,  (see  §  191).  Cumque,  therefore,  ori- 
ginally signified  *  whenever.'  "When  attached  to  a  relative,  whether  a  pro- 
noun,'adjectiye,  or  adverb,  it  renders  the  relative  meaning  more  general;  as, 
qui,  who;  quicumque,  whoever;  or,  every  one  who. 

Note  2.  Cujusnuk/i  is  sometimes  used  for  qualis,  and  hujusmddi,  istiusmddi, 
ejusmidi,  and  ejusdemmOdi  for  tdlis.   Cf.  ^  134,  K.  6. 


§  140,  141.  VERBS. ^VOICES.  91 

VERBS. 

§  14:0.  A  verb  is  a  word  by  which  something  is  affirmed 
of  a  person  or  thing. 

1.  That  of  which  any  thing  is  affirmed  is  called  the  subject  of  the 
verb.  (2.)  That  whid  is  affirmed  of  the  subject  is  called  the  predi- 
cate.   Cf.  §201. 

3.  A  verb  either  expresses  an  action  or  state ;  as,  puer  legit,  the 
boy  reads ;  aqua  calet,  the  water  is  warm ; — or  it  connects  an  attri- 
bute with  a  subject ;  as,  terra  est  rotunda^  the  earth  is  round. 

4.  All  verbs  belong  to  the  former  of  these  classes,  except  smwi,  I  am,  the 
most  common  use  of  which  is,  to  connect  an  attribute  with  a  subject.  When 
so  used,  it  is  called  the  copUla. 

§  1411.    Verbs  are  either  active  or  neuter. 

Note.  Active  and  neuter  verbd  are  sometimes  called  transitive  and  intransi- 
tive ;  and  verbs  of  motion  are  by  some  grammarians  divided  into  active-transi- 
tive and  active-intransitive,  according  as  they  require,  or  do  not  require,  an  ob- 
ject after  them. 

I.  An  active  or  transitive  verb  expresses  such  an  action  as 
requires  the  addition  of  an  object  to  complete  the  sense ;  as, 
amo  te,  I  love  thee  ;  sequitur  consulem,  he  follows  the  consul. 

n.  A  neuter  or  intransitive  verb  expresses  such  an  action  or 
state,  as  does  not  require  the  addition  of  an  object  to  complete 
the  sense ;  as,  equus  currit,  the  horse  runs ;  gradior,  I  walk. 

Eemark  1,  Many  verbs,  in  Latin,  are  considered  as  neuter,  which  are 
usually  translated  into  English  by  active  verbs.  Thus  indulgeo,  I  indulge, 
noceo,  I  hurt,  pareo,  I  obey,  are  reckoned  among  neuter  verbs.  In  strictness, 
such  Latin  verbs  denote  rather  a  state  than  an  action,  and  their  sense  would 
be  more  exactly  expressed  by  the  verb  to  be  with  an  adjective ;  as,  '  I  am  in- 
dulgent, I  am  hurtful,'  etc.  Some  verbs  in  Latin,  which  do  not  usually  take 
an  object  after  them,  are  yet  active,  since  the  object  is  omitted  by_  ellipsis. 
Thus  credo  properly  signifies  to  intrust,  and,  in  this  sense,  takes  an  object;  as, 
credo  tibi  salutem  meam,  I  intrust  my  safety  to  you;  but  by  ellipsis  it  usually 
means  to  believe ;  as,  crede  mihi,  believe  me. 

^-<  To  verbs  belong  voices,  moods,  tenses,  numbers,  and  persons. 

VOICES. 

(a.)  Voice,  in  verbs,  is  the  form  by  which  they  denote  the  re- 
lation of  the  agent  to  the  action  of  the  verb. 

(&.)  Most  active  Latin  verbs  have,  for  this  purpose,  two  forms, 
which  are  called  the  active  and  passive  voices. 

1.  A  verb  in  the  active  voice  represents  the  agent  as  acting 
upon  some  person  or  thing,  called  the  ol^'ect ;  as,  pv^r  legit  U- 
bruntf  the  boy  is  reading  a  book. 


92  VERBS. MOODS.  §  142, 143. 

2.  A  verb  in  the  passive  voice  represents  the  object  as  acted 
upon  by  the  agent ;  as,  liber  legitur  a  puerOj  a' book  is  read  by 
the  boy. 

Rbm.  2-  Bv  comparing  the  two  preceding  examples,  it  will  be  seen  that  they 
have  the  same  meaning.  The  passive  voice  may  thus  be  substituted  at  plea- 
sure for  the  active,  by  making  the  object  of  the  active  the  subject  of  the  pas- 
sive, and  placing^he "subject  of  tlie  active  in  the  ablative  case,  with  or  without 
the  preposition  a  or  ab,  according  as  it  is  a  voluntary  or  involuntary  agent. 
The  active  form  is  used  to  direct  the  attention  especially  to  the  agent  as  act- 
ing; the  passive,  chiefly  to  exhibit  the  object  as  acted  upon.  In  the  one  case 
the  object,  in  the  other'the  agent,  is  frequently  omitted,  and  left  indefinite;  as, 
puer  Uffiti  the  boy  is  reading,  scil.  librum,  Ultras,  etc.,  a  book,  a  letter,  etc. ; 
virtus  lauddtur,  virtue  is  praised,  scil.  ab  hominibus,  by  men. 

The  two  voices  are  distinguished  firom  each  other  by  peculiar  terminations. 
Cf.  \  152. 

§  14:2.  1.  Neuter  verbs  have,  m  general,  only  the  form  of  the 
active  voice.  They  are,  however,  sometimes  used  impersonally  in 
the  passive  voice.     See  §  184,  2. 

2.  The  neuter  verbs  audeo^  I  dare,  fido,  I  trust,  gaudeo,  I  rejoice,  and  soleo^ 
I  am  wont,  have  the  passive  form  in  the  perfect  and  its  cognate  tenses ;  as, 
ausm  sum,  I  dared.  Hence  these  verbs  are  called  neuter  passives,  or  semi- 
dejjonents. 

3.  The  neuter  verbs  •capSlo,  I  am  beaten,  and  veneo,  I  am  sold,  have  an  ac- 
tive form,  but  a  passive  meaning,  and  are  hence  called  neutral  passives. 

4.  (a.)  Deponent  verbs  have  a  transitive  or  intransitive  significa- 
tion with  only  the  passive  form.  They  are  called  deponent  verbs, 
fk)m  depono,  to  lay  aside,  as  having  laid  aside  their  active  form,  and 
their  passive  signification;  as,  sequor,  I  follow;  morior,  I  die. 

(fi.)  Some  deponent  verbs  have  both  an  active  and  a  passive  signification, 
especially  in  tJxe  perfect  participle.  These  are  sometimes  called  common  verbs, 
cf.  ^  162, 17. 

MOODS. 

§  14:3.  (a.)  Moods  (or  modes)  are  forms  of  the  verb,  which 
denote  the  relation  of  the  action  or  state,  expressed  by  the  verb, 
to  the  mind  of  the  speaker  or  to  some  other  action. 

(6.)  Latin  verbs  have  four  moods — the  indicative,  the  subjunctive^ 
the  imperative,  and  the  infinitive, 

1.  The  indicative  mood  is  used  in  independent  and  absolute 
assertions  and  inquiries ;  as,  amo,  I  love ;  audisne  ?  dost  thou 
hear? 

2.  The  sribjufictive  mood  is  used  to  express  an  action  or  state 
simply  as  conceived  by  the  mind ;  as,  si  me  obsecret,  redibo  ;  if 
he  entreat  me,  I  will  return. 

3.  The  imperative  mood  is  used  in  commanding,  exhorting, 
or  entreating ;  as,  anna,  love  thou  ;  amanto,  they  shall  love. 


§  144,  145.  VERBS. ^TENSES.  93 

4.  The  infinitive  mood  is  used  to  denote  an  action  or  state  in 
definitely,  without  limiting  it  to  any  person  or  thing  as  its  sub- 
ject ;  as,  virtus  est  vitium  fugere,  to  shun  vice  is  a  virtue. 

TENSES. 

\\  14:4:.     Tenses  are  forms  of  the  verb,  denoting  the  time  of 
the  action  or  state  expressed  by  the  verb. 

1.  Time  admits  of  a  threefold  division,  into  present,  past,  and  future;  and, 
in  each  of  these  times,  an  action  may  be  represented  either  as  goin^  on,  or  as 
completed.  From  these  two  divisions  arise  the  six  tenses  or  a  Latin  verb, 
each  of  which  is  distinguished  by  its  peculiar  terminations. 

5iQ     2.   They  are  called  the  present,  imperfect,  future,  perfect,  pluper- 
fect, and  future  perfect  tenses. 

Presents    action   "^  amo,  Hove,  or  am  loving;  Present  tense. 
Past      <  not  com-  >  amabam,  I  was  loving;  Imperfect  tense. 
Future  (   pleted ;  )  amdbo,  I  shall  love,  or  be  loving ;  Future  tense. 
Present  i    action   ")  amdvi,  I  have  loved ;  Perfect  tense* 
Past      <      com-     >  amaveram,  I  had  \pved ;  Pluperfect  tense. 
Future  (  pleted;   )  amav&ro,  I  shall  have  loved;  Future  perfect  tense. 

3.  There  is  the  same  number  of  tenses  in  the  passive  voice,  in 
V  which  actions  not  completed  are  represented  by  simple  forms  of  the 
verb,  and  those  which  are  completed  by  compound  forms. 

Present  (    action  ")  amor,  I  am  loved ;  Present  tense. 

Past      <  not  com-  >  amdbar,  I  was  loved ;  Imperfect  tense. 

Future  (   pleted;  )  a7?ia6or,  I  shall  be  loved;  tuture  tense. 

Present  (    action  ")  amdtus  sum,  or  fui,  I  have  been  loved;  Perfect  tense. 

Past      <      com-     >  audius  eram,  or  fueram,  I  had  been  loved ;  Pluperfect. 

Future  (  pleted;  )  amdtosero,  or /ttero,  I  shall  have  been  loved  ;i^«iMrePer/ec*. 

L         §  14:0.     I.   The  present  tense  represents  an  action  as  now 
^  going  on,  and  not  completed ;  as,  dmo,  I  love,  or  am  loving. 

1.  Any  existing  custom,  or  general  truth,  may  be  expressed  by  this  tense; 
as,  apvd  Partkos,  signum  datur  tympdno ;  among  the  Parthians,  the  signal  is 
given  by  a  drum.    A  general  truth  is  sometimes  also  expressed  by  the  perfect. 

2.  The  present  tense  m^y  also  denote  aivaction  which  has  existed  for  some 
time,  and  which  still  exists ;  as,  tot  annos  bella  gero;  for  so  many  years  I  have 
waged,  and  am  still  waging  war. 

3.  The  present  tense  is  often  in  narration  used  for  the  perfect  indefinite.  It 
is  then  called  the  historical  present ;  as,  desiliunt  ex  equis,  2>^ov6lant  in  jirimum  ; 
they  dismout,  they  fly  forward  to  the  front. 

?<  n.  The  imperfect  tense  represents  an  action  as  going  on  at 
some  past  time,  but  not  then  completed;  as,  amdham,  I  was 
loving. 

1.  The  imperfect  sometimes  denotes  repeated  or  customary  past  action ;  as, 
legebam,  I  was  wont  to  read. 

2.  It  may  also  denote  an  action  which  had  existed  for  some  time,  and  which 
was  still  existing  at  a  certain  past  time;  as,  avdiebat  jamdudum  verba;  he  had 
long  heard,  and  was  still  hearing  the  words. 


94  VKRBS. TENSES.  §  145. 

8.  In  letters,  and  with  reference  not  to  the  time  of  their  being  -vvritten,  but 
to  that  of  their  being  read,  the  imperfect  is  sometimes  used  for  the  present ; 
as,  expecidbam,  I  was  expecting,  (i.  e.  when  I  wrote). 

4.  The  imperfect  also  sometimes  denotes  the  intending,  preparing,  or  attempt' 
ing  to  act  j^  a  definite  past  time. 

in.  The  futicre  tense  denotes  that  an  action  will-be  going  on 
hereafter,  but  without  reference  to  its  completion ;  as,  amdho, 
I  shall  love,  or  shall  be  loving. 

IV.  The  perfect  tense  represents  an  action  efther  as  just  com- 
pleted, or  as  completed  in  some  indefinite  past  time ;  as,  amdvi, 
I  have  loved,  or  I  loved. 

Remark.  In  the  fonner  sense,  it  is  called  the  perfect  definite;  in 
the  latter,  the  perfect  indefinite,  historical  perfect,  or  aorist. 

V.  The  pluperfect  tense  represents  a  past  action  as  completed, 
at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  past  action  or  event ;  as,  lit- 
tSras  scripseram,  qmtm  nuncius  venit ;  I  had  written  the  letter, 
when  the  messenger  arrived. 

VI.  The  future  perfect  t^nse  denotes  that  an  action  will  be 
completed,  at  or  before  the  time  of  some  other  future  action  or 
event;  as,  quum  coenavero,  proficiscar ;  when IshaUhave supped, 
I  will  go. 

Note  1.  This  tense  is  often,  but  improperly,  called  the  future  subjunctive. 
It  has  the  signification  of  the  indicative  mood,  and  corresponds  to  the  second 
fuiure  in  Englisli. 

^  Note  2.  Tlie  imperfect,  historical  perfect,  and  pluperfect  tenses  are  some- 
times called  preterites  or  the  preterite  tenses. 

Note  3.  The  present,  imperfect,  and  future  tenses  passive,  in  English,  do 
not  express  tlie  exact  sense  of  those  tenses  in  Latin,  as  denoting  an  action 
which  is,  was,  or  will  be,  going  on  at  a  certain  time.  Thus  laudor  signifies,  not 
*  I  am  praised,'  but '  I  am  in  the  act  of  being  praised,'  or,  if  such  an  expression 
is  admissible, '  I  am  being  praised.' 

Remark  1.  The  six  tenses  above  enumerated  are  found  only  in 
the  indicative  mood. 

Rem.  2.  The  subjunctive  mood,  in  the  regular  conjugation,  has 
the  present  and  past,  but  no  future  tenses.     * 

Note  4.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctiTe  mood  hare  less  deflniteness  of  meaning,  in  re- 
gard to  time,  than  those  of  the  indicative.  Thus  the  present  and  perfect,  besides  their 
common  signs,  may  or  can,  may  have  or  can  have,  must,  in  certain  connections,  be 
translated  by  might,  could,  would,  or  should;  might  have,  could  have,  etc.  The  tenses 
of  this  mood  must  often,  also,  be  translated  by  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  indica- 
tive. For  a  more  particular  account  of  the  signification  of  each  of  the  tenses  of  the  sub- 
junctive mood,  see  §  260. 

Rem.  3.  The  imperative  mood  has  two  tenses — a  present  and  a 
future ;  the  former  for  that  which  is  to  be  done  at  once,  and  the  latter 
for  that  which  is  to  be  done  in  future. 

Rem.  4.  The  infinitive  mood  has  three  tenses — the  present,  the 
perfect,  and  the  future ;  the  first  of  which  denotes  an  inco:nplete,  the 
second  a  completed  action,  and  the  last  an  action  to  be  performed. 


§  146-148.  VERBS. NUMBERS PERSONS.  95 

NUMBERS. 

§  140*  Number,  in  verbs,  is  the  form  by  which  tl  e  unity  or 
plurality  of  their  subject  is  denoted.  Hence  verbs,  like  nouns, 
have  two  numbers — the  singular  and  the  plural,  Cf.  §  35,  1. 

PERSONS. 

§  147'.  Person,  in  verbs,  is  the  form  by  which  they  denote 
the  person  of  their  subject.  Hence  in  each  number  there  are 
three  persons — the  Jirst,  second,  and  third.  Cf.  §  35,  2. 

1.  The  imperative  present  has  only  the  second  person  in  both 
numbers.  The  imperative  future  has  in  each  number  the  second 
and  third  persons,  but  in  the  singular  they  have  both  the  same  form, 
'to  in  the  active,  and  -tor  in  the  passive  voice. 

2.  As  the  sio;nification  of  the  infinitive  mood  is  not  limited  to  any 
subject,  it  admits  no  change  to  express  either  number  or  person. 

3.  The  follomng  are  the  terminations  of  the  dijBferent  persons  of 
each  number,  in  the  indicative  and  subjtmctive  moods,  in  both 
voices : — 

Active.  Passive. 

Person.           1.           2.  3.  1.  2.          3. 

Singular,    o,  i,  orm,     s,  t;  r,  ris,       tur; 

Plural.         mus,        tis,   .  nt.  mur,  mini,    ntur. 

These  may  be  called  personal  terminations. 

Kemark  1.  The  perfect  indicative  active  is  irregular  in  the  second  person 
singular  and  plural,  which  end  in  sii  and  stis,  and  in  one  of  the  forms  of  the 
third  person  pliu-al,  which  ends  in  re. 

Rem.  2.  The  passive  form  above  given  belongs  to  the  simple  tenses  only. 

Rem.  3.  The  pronouns  of  the  first  and  second  persons,  ego,  nos;  iu  and  ro#, 
are  seldom  expressed  in  Latin  as  subjects  of  a  finite  verb,  the  several  penonf 
being  sufficiently  distinguished  by  the  terminations  of  the  verb. 

PARTICIPLES,  GERUNDS,  AM)  SUPINES. 

§  14:8»  1.  A  participle  is  a  word  derived  from  a  verb,  and 
partaking  of  its  meaning,  but  having  the  form  of  an  adjective. 

(1.)  Like  a  verb,  it  has  different  voices  and  tenses;  like  an  ad- 
jective, it  has  declension*  and  gender;  and  like  both,  it  has  two 

numbers. 

(2.)  Active  verbs  have  usually  four  participles — ^two  in  the  active 
voice,  a  present  and  a  future  ;  as,  amans,  loving;  amaturusy  about  to 
love ; — and  two  in  the  passive  voice,  a  perfect  and  a  futur  > ;  as,  arndr- 
tus,  loved,  or  having  been  loved ;  amandus^  to  be  loved. 

♦See  §§  106,  R.  2:  and  111,  R. 


'96  VERBS. CONJUGATION.  §  149,  150. 

(3.)  Neuter  verbs  have  usually  only  the  participles  of  the  active 
voice. 

(4.)  Deponent  verbs,  hoth  active  and  neuter,  may  have  the  par- 
ticiples of  both  voices. 

2.  (a.)  Gerunds  are  verbal  nouns,  used  only  in  the  oblique 
cases,  and  expressing  the  action  or  state  of  the  verb ;  as,  amandiy 
of  loving,  etc 

(&.)  Like  other  abstract  nouns,  they  are  found  only  in  the  singular 
number,  and  by  their  cases  supply  the  place  of  a  declinable  present 
infinitive  active, 

3.  Supines  also  are  verbal  nouns  of  the  fourth  declension 
in  the  accusative  and  ablative  singular;  as,  amdtum,  to  love; 
amdtu,  to  be  loved. 

Remark.  These  also  serve  in  certain  connections  to  supply  the 
place  of  the  infinitive  present  both  active  and  passive.  The  supine 
m  urn  is  called  the  former  supine  ;  that  in  w,  the  latter.  The  former 
is  commonly  used  in  an  active,  the  latter  in  a  passive  sense. 

CONJUGATION. 

§  \^9»  1.  The  conjugation  of  a  verb  is  the  regular  for- 
mation and  arrangement  of  its  several  parts,  according  to  their 
voices,  moods,  tenses,  numbers,  and  persons. 

2.    There  are  four  conjugations,  which  are  characterized  by 
the  vowel  before  re  in  the  present  of  the  infinitive  active. 
In  the  first  conjugation,  it  is  a  long ; 

In  the  second, e  long ; 

In  the  third, e  short ; 

In  the  fourth, i  long. 

Exception.  Do^  dare^  to  give,  and  such  of  its  compounds  as  are  of  the  first 
conjugation,  have  d  short  before  re. 

§  1^0.  A  verb,  like  a  noun,  consists  of  two  parts — ^the  root, 
and  the  termination.  Cf.  §  40,  R.  10. 

1.  The  first  or  general  root  of  a  verb  consists  of  those  letters  that 
are  found  in  every  part.  This  root  may  always  be  found  by  remov- 
ing the  tennination  of  the  present  infinitive. 

2.  There  are  also  two  special  roots,  the  first  of  which  is-  found  iu 
the  perfect,  and  is  called  the  second  root ;  the  other,  found  in  the  su- 
pine or  perfect  participle,  is  caUed  the  third  root. 

3.  In  regular  verbs  of  the  fii'st,  second,  and  fourth  conjuga- 
tions, the  second  root  is  formed  by  adding,  respectively,  dv,  u, 
and  iv,  to  the  general  root ;  and  the  third  root  by  a  similar  ad- 
dition of  dt,  It,  and  it. 

Remark.  Many  verbs,  in  each  of  the  conjugations,  form  their  second  and 
third  roots  irregularly. 


§  151,  152.  VERBS. — CONJUGATION.  97 

4.  In  the  third  conjugation,  the  second  root  either  is  the  same 
as  the  first,  or  is  formed  from  it  by  adding  s ;  the  thu*d  root  is 
formed  by  addmg  t.     See  §  171. 

Note.  In  the  second  and  fourth  conjugations,  e  and  i  before  o  are  considered 
as  belonging  not  to  the  root,  but  to  the  termination.  In  verbs  whose  second 
or  third  roots  are  formed  irregiilarly,  the  general  root  often  undergoes  some 
change  in  the  parts  derived  from  them. 

5.  The  vowel  which  unites  the  general  root  with  the  remaining 
letters  of  the  verb,  is  called  the  connecting  vowel.  Each  conjugation, 
except  the  third,  is,  in  a  great  degree,  distinguished  by  a  peculiar 
connecting  vowel,  which  is  the  same  as  characterizes  the  infinitives. 
See  §  149,  2. 

(a.)  In  the  third  conjugation,  the  connecting  vowel  is  generally  e  or  i.  In 
the  second  and  fourth  conjugations,  and  in  verbs  in  io  of  the  third,  a  second 
connecting  vowel  is  sometimes  added  to  that  which  characterizes  the  conjuga- 
tion ;  as,  a  in  doceant,  u  in  capiunt,  etc. 

(6.)  In  verbs  whose  second  and  third  roots  are  formed  irregularly,  the  con- 
necting vowel  often  disappears,  or  is  changed  in  the  parts  derived  from  those 
roots ;  but  it  is  almost  always  found  in  the  parts  derived  from  the  first  root. 

§  1^1.  1.  From  the  first  root  are  derived,  in  each  voice,  the 
present,  imperfect,  and  future  indicative ;  the  present  and  imperfect 
subjunctive ;  the  imperative,  and  the  present  infinitive.  From  this 
root  are  derived  also  the  present  participle,  the  gerund,  and  the  fu- 
ture participle  passive. 

2.  From  the  second  root  are  derived,  in  the  active  voice,  the  per- 
fect, pluperfect,  and  future  perfect  indicative ;  the  perfect  and  plu- 
perfect subjunctive,  and  the  perfect  infinitive. 

3.  (a.)  From  the  third  root  are  derived,  in  the  active  voice,  the 
supine  in  wm,  and  the  future  participle  ;  the  latter  of  which,  with  the 
verb  esse,  constitutes  the  future  infinitive  active. 

(&.)  From  this  root  are  derived,  in  the  passive  voice,  the  supine  in 
M,  and  the  perfect  participle ;  from  the  latter  of  which,  with  the  verb 
sum,  are  formed  all  the  tenses  which  in  the  active  are  derived  from 
the  second  root.  The  future  infinitive  passive  is  formed  from  the 
supine  in  wm,  and  Iri,  the  present  infinitive  passive  of  the  verb  eo, 
to  go. 

4.  The  present  and  perfect  indicative,  the  supine  in  um,  and  the 
present  infinitive,  are  called  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb,  because 
from  the  first  three  the  several  roots  are  ascertained,  and  from  the 
last,  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the  conjugation.  In  the  passive  voice, 
the  principal  parts  are  the  present  indicative  and  infinitive,  and  the 
perfect  participle. 

Note.  As  the  supine  in  um  is  wanting  in  most  verbs,  the  third  root  must 
often  be  determined  from  the  perfect  participle,  or  the  future  participle  active. 

§  1«5S.     The  following  table  exhibits  a  connected  view  of  the 
verbal  terminations,  in  all  the  conjugations.     By  annexing  these  to 
the  several  roots,  all  the  parts  of  a  Verb  may  be  formed. 
9 


98 


VERBS. — TERillNATIv.  i<8. 


§152 


c  s 


^  .3  a  2 
lllj 


r4    g 


-I 


'5  >=5  >^ 

£  s  a 


22  > 


O     5> 


"  *  « 


'C'S^ 


>o  t- 


??•' 


§•§£.1 

isJ  i:;  IS  "2 


00     00     «  J-t 


w>a)KU*2 


-  "  ao  oe 


k    (1  b  ^ 
,..     g  >s  «e  >^ 


W  ws  i»  10  J;: 
&,     I     I     I     I 


•<J  ic3  -u  ic3 


O 


m 
"n  lei 


5.1 

7    I 


W   rH  «  eo  ■* 


^^l. 

?? 


eo    S  =  §| 


»i   ^ 


i 


fi<? 


§  5  5  oToo" 


,s  >"  t»  03 


I 


eo  >S«3SS 


I  d  .2  .s  i".? 


-9"?  f-' 


4^  «>  -W  '*j 

c  c  c  S 
<?  ^  «  S 


wJ  ici  IS 


00  tc  n  .2 
X3  >3  O  *2 

BHS| 

les  ic3  iS  "q 


leS  IS  IS  |3 


c:  cs  es  S 


(=  £3  . 

.0.0  c  S 


«??•?■ 


tO  .0  -ta  loS 

•7    T     I  T^ 


O    _ 


r^eieo^ 


«  -  "^  S 


53S1 


•?  V'f-T 


SiSeI 


a>>^ 


oTisi  eg" ,5 


§152. 


VERBS. TERMINATIONS. 


99 


42 


>Ss 


."2  M  ^ 
%%% 

>a>  >a)  >v 
en  en  w 
>?  j3  >;a 


a  . 


iif 


a  a 


Sig 


U  ^ 


i^  u 


I 


O 

o 


£i    (1    ^ 

*? '?  *? 

'i 
—  a 


a 
.11 


a  o 


•a  s^ 

CO      CO   ,  . 

.52     PS  ti) 


.2 


3   «  iss  ."S 


III 


«53 
53  Id) 
hf  ID 


W.2 


I 

®     . 


.:r  ^ 


»-<        5>  .2  jS 


a  . 


^    03 


.gi 


I"! 


100  VERBS. SUM.  §  153. 

Bemark  1.  In  analyzing  a  verb,  the  voice,  person,  and  number,  ai-e  ascer- 
tained by  the  personal  terminations.  See  §  147,  3.  The  conjng:ation,  mood, 
and  tense,  are,  in  general,  determined  by  th.<  letter  or  letters  which  intervene 
between  the  root  of  the  verb  and  the  persor.al  terminations.  Thus  in  amaba. 
mus,  mm  denotes  that  the  verb  is  of  the  act.ve  voice,  plural  number,  and  first 
person ;  ba  denotes  that  it  is  of  the  indicative  mood,  imperfect  tense ;  and  thS 
connectuig  vowel  a  determines  it  to  be  of  the  fii-st  conjuration.  So  in  anmrem- 
tHi,  miVw  denotes  the  passive  voice,  plural  number,  and  second  person;  re,  the 
subjimctive  mood,  imperfect  tense;  and  a,  as  before,  the  first  conjugation. 

Eem.  2.  Sometimes,  the  part  between  the  root  of  the  verb  and  the  personal 
termination,  does  not  precisely  determme  the  conjugation,  mood,  and  tense, 
but  only  within  certain  limits.  In  such  cases,  the  conjugation  may  be  learned, 
by  finding  the  present  tense  in  the  dictionary,  and  if  two  forms  are  alike  in  the 
same  conjugation,  they  can  Only  be  distinguished  by  the  sense.  Thus  amemus 
and  docemus  have  the  same  termination ;  but,  as  amo  is  of  the  first,  and  doceo 
of  the  second  conjugation,  the  former  is  determined  to  be  the  subjunctive,  the 
latter  the  indicative,  present.  ^e<7arinay  be  either  the  future  indicative,  or* 
the  present  subjunctive — blbimus  either  the  presenter  the  perfect  indicative. 

§  1^3.  Sum,  I  am,  is  called  an  auxiliary  verb,  because  it  is 
used,  in  conjunction  with  participles,  to  supply  the  want  of  simple 
forms  in  other  verbs.  From  its  denoting  existence,  it  is  sometimes 
called  the  substantive  verb. 

Remark.  Sum  is  very  irregular  in  those  parts  which,  in  other  verbs,  are  formed 
from  the  first  root.    Its  imperfect  and  future  tenses,  except  in  the  third  person 

Slural  of  the  latter,  have  the  form  of.  a  pluperfect  and  future  perfect.    It  is 
los  conjugated: — 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 
Pres.  Indie.      Pres.  Infin.      Perf.  Indie.      Fut.  Part. 
Sum,  es'-se,  fu'-i,  fu'-tu'-rus. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 
•  Present  Tense. 

SINGULAR.  PLURAL. 

I  ri.  sum,  7  am,  sii'-mus,  v^^  ^,^j 


11 


we  are. 
1^2.  es,  thou  art,*  es'-tis,  yef  are, 

Ri  (8.  est,  he  is;  sunt,  they  are. 

Imperfect. 

1.  e-T2JQ,  I  was,  e-Tu-mus,  we  were, 

2.  e'-ras,  thou  wast,  e-ra-tis,  ye  were, 
8.  e'-rat,  he  was;                     e'-rant,  they  were. 

Future,    shall,  or  will. 

1.  e'-ro,  I  shall  be,  er'-i-mus,  we  shall  be, 

2.  e'-ris,  thou  icilt  be,  6r'-i-tig,  ye  will  be, 
S.  e'-rit,  he  will  be;                  e'-runt,  they  will  be. 


•  In  the  second  person  ringular  in  English,  the  plural  form  you  is  commonly  used 
except  m  solemn  discourse ;  as,  tu  es,  you  are. 
t  The  plural  pronoun  of  the  second  person  is  either  ye  or  you. 


§  153.  VERBS. — SUM.  101 

Perfect,    have  been,  or  was. 

1.  fu'-i,  I  have  been,  fu'-i-mus,  we  have  been, 

2.  fu;is'-ti,  thou  hast  leen,  fu-is'-tis,  ye  have  been, 

3.  fu'-it,  he  has  been  ;  fu-e'-runt  (yr  re,  they  have  been. 

Pluperfect  • 

1.  fu'-e-ram,  I  had  been,  fu-e-ra'-miis,  we  had  been, 

2.  fu'-e-ras,  thou  hadst  been,  fu-e-ra -tis,  ye  had  been, 

3.  fu'-e-rat,  he  had  been  ;  fu'-e-rant,  they  had  been. 

Future  Perfect,    shall  or  will  have. 

1.  fu'-e-r§,  I  shall  have  been,  fu-er'-i-mus,  we  shall  have  been, 

2.  fu'-e-rls,  thou  wilt  have  been,  fu-er'-i-tis,  ye  will  have  been, 
S.  £u'-e-rit,  he  will  have  been  ;           fu'-e-rint,  they  will  have  been. 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 
Present    may,  or  can. 

1.  am,  I  may  be,  si'-mus,  we  may  be, 

2.  sis,  thou  mayst  be,  si'-tis,  ye  may  be, 

3.  sit,  he  may  be  ;  sint,  they  may  be. 

Imperfect    might,  could,  would,  or  should. 

1.  es'-sem,  I  would  be,  es-se'-mus,  we  would  be, 

2.  es'-ses,  thou  wouldst  be,  es-se'-tis,  ye  would  be, 

3.  es'-set,  he  would  be ;  .  es'-sent,  they  would  bs. 

Perfect. 

1.  fu'-e-rlm,  I  may  have  been,  fu-er'-l-mus,  we  may  have  been, 

2.  fu'-e-rls,  thou  mayst  have  been,      fu-er'-l-tis,  ye  may  have  been, 

3.  fu'-e-rit,  he  may  have  been  ;  fu'-e-rint,  they  may  have  been. 

Pluperfect    might,  could,  would,  or  should  have. 

1.  fu-is'-sem,  I  would  have  been,       fu-Is-se'-mus,  we  would  have  been, 

2.  fu-is'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have  been,  fu-is-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  been, 

3.  fu-is'-set,  he  would  have  been  ;       fu-is'-sent,  they  would  have  been. 

IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 

Pres.    1.  es,be  thou,  es'-te,  be  ye. 

Fut.      2.  es'-to,  thou  shall  be,  es-to'-te,  ye  shall  be, 

3.  es'-to,  let  him  be  ;  sun'-to,  let  them  be. 

INFINITIVE  MOOD. 

Present,  es'-se,  to  be. 

Perfect,  fu-is'-se,  to  have  been. 

Future,    fu-tu'-rus  (si,  um),  ea'-se,  or  fb'-re,  to  he  about  to  he. 

9* 


102  VERBS. POSSUM.  §  154 

PARTICIPLE. 
Future,    fii-tu'-ms,  a,  um,  about  to  be. 

§  154:.  Resiark  1.  A  present  participle  etis  seems  t:  have  been  an- 
ciently in  use,  and  is  still  found  in  the  compounds  alsens,  prxsens,  and  pdtem. 

Rem.  2.  The  perfect  fui,  and  its  derivative  tenses,  are  formed  from  an  obso- 
lete /«o,  whence  come  also  the  participle  futurus,  an  old  subjunctive  present 

f  nam,  f  lias,  fuat ;  , ,  fnani,  and  the  forms /uifmus,  perf.  ind., /uue- 

rint,  perf.  subj.,  and  fuvisset,  plup.  subj. 

Rem.  3.  From  fuo  appear  also  to  be  derived  the  following  :■ — 

SuM.  imperf.  fo'-rem,  fo'-res,  fo'-r6t;  ,  fo'-rent. 

Inf.  pres.        fb'-re. 

These  forms  seem  to  have  been  contracted  from  fuirem.  etc.,  and  fuere. 
F&rem  is  equivalent  in  meaning  to  essem,  but  the  infinitive  jdre  has,  in  most 
cases,  acquired  a  future  signification,  equivalent  to  fuiiirus  esse. 

Rem.  4.  Stem,  sies,  siet,  sient,  for  «'»»,  sis,  sit,  sint,  are  found  in  ancient 
•writers,  as  are  also  escit  for  erit,  escunt  for  erunt,  ese,  esetis,  and  esent,  for  esse, 
essetis,  and  essetU. 

Rem.  5.  Like  sum  are  conjugated  its  compounds,  absum,  adsum, 
desum,  insum,  intersum,  obsum,  prcBsum,  subsum,  and  supersum. 

Rem.  6.  Peosum,  from  the  old  form  prod  for  pro,  and  5um,  has  d 
after  pro,  when  the  simple  verb  begins  with  e  ;  as, 

Ind.  pres.        pro'-sum,  prod'-es,  prod'-est,  etc. 
imperf.    prod'-e-ram,  prod'-e-ras,  etc. 

Rem.  7.  (a.)  Possum  is  compounded  of  potis,  able,  and  sum. 
They  are  sometimes  written  separately,  and  then  potis  is  the  same  in 
all  genders  and  numbers. 

(6.)  In  composition,  is  is  omitted  in  p5tis,  and  t,  as  in  other  cases,  coming  be- 
fore s,  is  changed  into  s.  In  the  infinitive,  and  imperfect  subjunctive,  es  of  the 
simple  verb  is  dropped,  as  is  also  ^  at  the  beginning  of  the  second  root  In 
every  other  respect  j^wssMffi  is  conjugated  like  sw^n,  wherever  it  is  found;  but 
the  imperative,  and  the  parts  derived  from  the  third  root,  are  wanting. 

Pres.  Indie.    Pres.  Infin.  Perf.  IncHc. 
Pos'-sum,        pos'-se,        p6f-u-i,        lean,  or  lam  able. 

nroicATivB.  suBjuwcnvK. 

Present. 
pos'-sum,  po^-tfis,  po'-test;  pos'-sim,  pos'-sis,  pos'-slt; 

pos'-su-miis,  po-tes'-tis,  pos'-sunt.  pos-si'-mus,  pos-si'-tis,  pos'-sint. 

Imperfect. 
pof-g-ram,  pof-^-ras,  pof-6-i^t;  pos'-sem,  pos'-ses,  pos'-set; 

pot-e-ra'-mOs,  -e-ra'-tis,  -e-rant.  pos-se'-miis,  -se'-tis,  pos'-sent. 

Future. 
p6f-^-r8,  p6f-e-ils,  p6f-€-rit; 
po-t^r'-I-mus,  po-ter'-l-tis,  pof-g-runt. 

Perfeet. 
p6f-u-i,  p6t-u-is'ti,  p6f-u-Tt;  po-tu'-€-rim,  -e-r!s,  -e-rTt: 

pfi-ttt'-I-mOs,  -ia'-tis,  -e'-runt  or  -S'r6.     pot-u-^r'-i-mQf,  -i^is,  -g-rint 


§  155.  VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATION,   AOTIVB.  108 

Ph^erfed. 

po-tu'-S-ram,  -€-ras,  -S-rSt;  p6t-u-is'-sem,  -is'-ses,  -is'-sfit; 

pot-u-^-ra'-mfis,  -e-ra'-tis,  -e-^ttnt.  pot-u-is-se'-miiSj  -is-se'-tis,  -is''-6ent. 

Future  Perfect. 
p6-tu''-e-ro,  p6-tu''-e-rfs,  po-tu'-e-rit ; 
pot-u-er'-i-miis,  pot-u-er'-i-tis,  p6-tu'-S-rint. 

(No  Imperative.) 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPIAL  ADJKCTIVK. 

Pres.  pos'-s§.    Per/^  p6t-u-is'-s6.  po'-tens,  able. 

Note.  The  following  forms  are  also  found;  potissum  for  possum^  poteisunt  for 
possunt,  potessim  and  possiem  for  possim,  possies,  posskt  and  potessit  for  possis 
and  possit,  potessem  for  possem,  potesse  for  posse,  and  before  a  passive  infinitive 
the  passive  forms  poiestur  for  potest,  poterdtur  for  poUrat,  and  possetur  for 
posset.— Potts  and  pote  without  est  are  sometimes  used  for  potest. 

§  155.     FIRST  CONJUGATION. 

ACTIVE    VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL  PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind,        Pres.  Inf.         Perf.  Ind,  Supine, 

A'-mo,  a-ma'-re,  a-ma'-vi,  S-ma'-tum. 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Present,    love^  do  love^  am  loving. 

S'-mo,  Hove,  \ 

a'-mas,  thou  lovest,  \ 

a -mat,  Tie  loves;  \ 

Plur.  a-ma'-miis,  we  love^ 

a-ma-tis,  ye  love, 

a'-mant,  they  love. 

Imperfect    was  loving,  loved,  did  love. 

Sing,  a-ma-bam,  I  was  loving, 

a-ma'-bas,  thou  wast  loving, 

a-ma'-bat,  he  was  loving  ; 

Plur.  am-a-ba'-mus,  we  were  loving, 

am-a-ba'-tis,  ye  were  loving, 

a-ma-bant,  they  were  loving. 

Future,    shall,  or  wUl. 

Sing,  a-ma'-bo,  /  shall  love, 

a-ma'-bis,  thou  wilt  love, 

a-ma'-bit,  he  will  love  ; 

Plur.  a-mab'-i-mus,  we  shall  love, 

a-mab'-i-tis,  ye  will  love, 

a-ma'-bunt,  *                they  will  love. 


104 


VEEBS. — ^FIBST   CONJUGATION,  ACTIVE. 


§155 


Perfect 

Sing,  a-ma'-vi, 

am-a-vis'-ti, 

a-ma-vit, 
Plur,  a-mav'-i-mus, 

am-a-vis'-tis, 

Sm-arve'-runt  or  -re, 


lovedy  or  have  loved. 

I  have  lovedj 
Viou  hast  lovedf 
he  has  loved; 
toe  have  lovedj 
ye  have  lovedj 
they  have  loved. 


Pluperfect 
Sing,  a-mav'-e-ram, 

a-mav'-e-ras, 

a-mav'-e-rat, 
Plur.  a-mav-e-ra -mus, 

a-mav-e-ra'-tis, 

a-mav'-e-rant. 


had. 

I  had  lovedj 
thou  hadst  lovedf 
he  had  loved  ; 
we  had  lovedj 
ye  had  lovedy 
they  had  loved. 


Future  Perfect    shaU,  or  will  have. 


a-mav'-e-ro, 
a-mav'-e-rls, 
a-mav'-e-rit, 
Plur,  am-a-ver'-i-mus, 
am-a-ver'-f-tis, 
Srmav'-e-rmt, 


T shall  have  lovedj 
thou  wilt  have  loved, 
he  will  have  loved; 
we  shall  have  loved, 
ye  will  have  loved, 
they  will  have  loved. 


Sing. 


a'-mem, 
a'-mes, 
a'-met, 
Plur.  a-me'-mus, 
S-me'-tis, 
a'-ment, 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD, 

Present    may,  or  can. 

I  may  love, 
thou  mayst  love, 
he  may  love  ; 
we  may  love, 
ye  mxiy  love, 
they  may  love. 


Imperfect    might,  could. 

Sing,  a-ma-rem, 

a-ma-res, 

a-ma'-ret, 
Plur.  am-a-re'-mus, 

Sm-a-re'-tis, 

&-ma'-rent, 


would,  or  should. 

I  would  love, 
thou  wouldst  love, 
he  would  love  ; 
we  would  love, 
ye  would  love, 
they  would  I've. 


Perfect    may,  or  can  have. 


Plur. 


S-mav'-e-rim, 

a-mav'-e-rls, 

S-mav'-e-rit, 

fim-a-ver'-i-mus, 

am-a-ver'-!-tis, 

ft-nAT'-e-rint, 


/  may  have  loved, 
thou  mayst  have  loved, 
he  may  have  loved; 
we  may  have  loved, 
ye  may  have  loved, 
^ey  may  have  loved 


§156. 


VERBS. FIRST    CONJUGATIOX,    PASSIVE. 


105 


Pluperfect,    mighty  could,  would,  or  should  have. 

^ing.   am-a-vis'-sem, 
am-a-vis'-ses, 
am-a-vis'-set, 


Plur,  am-a-vis-se'-mus, 
am-a-vis-se'-tis, 
am-a-vis'-sent, 


I  tcould  have  loved, 
thou  wouldst  have  loved, 
he  would  have  loved ; 
we  would  have  loved, 
ye  would  have  loved, 
they  would  have  loved. 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


Pres.  Sing,  a'-ma, 

Plur.  a-ma -te, 
Fut.  Sing,    a-ma'-to, 
a-ma'-t5, 
Plur.    am-a-to'-te, 
a-man'-to, 


love  thou  ; 
love  ye. 

thou  shalt  love, 
he  shall  love  ; 
ye  shall  love, 
they  shall  love. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Present,  a-ma'-re,  to  love. 

Perfect,  am-a-vis'-se,  to  have  loved. 

Future,    am-a-tu'-rus,  (a,  um,)  es'-«e,    to  be  about  to  love. 


PARTICIPLES. 


Present,  a'-mans, 

Future,   am-artu'-riis,  a,  um, 


loving, 
about  to  love. 


GERUND. 


G.  a-man'-di, 

D.  a-man'-do, 

Ac.  a-man'-dum, 

Ab.  a-man'-dg, 


of  loving, 
for  loving, 
loving, 
by  loving. 


SUPINE. 
Former,  a-ma'-tum,  to  love. 

§150.     PASSIVE    VOICE. 
PRINCIPAL    PARTS. 


Pres.  Indie. 
A'-mor, 


Pres.  Infin. 
a-ma'-ri, 


Perf.  ParL 
a-ma'-tus. 


106  VEEBS. — ^FmST  CONJUGATION,  PASSIVE.  §  156. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 

Present    am. 

S'-in5r,  I  am  loved, 

a-ma'-rls  or  -re,  thou  art  loved, 

i-ma'-tur,  he  is  loved; 

Pltar,  S-ma'-mur,  toe  are  loved, 

S-mam'-i-ni,  ye  are  loved, 

a-man'-tur,  they  are  loved. 

Imperfect,    was. 

Smg.  S-ma'-bSr,  I  teas  loved, 

fim-a-ba'-ris  or  -re,  thou  wast  loved, 

Sm-a-ba'-tur,  he  teas  loved; 

Plur.  fim-a-ba-mur,  we  were  loved, 

&m-a-bam'-I-ni,  ye  were  loved, 

Sm-a-ban'-tur,  they  were  loved. 

Future,    shall,  or  wUl  be. 

Sif^,   fi-ma'-bor,  I  shall  he  loved, 

a-mab'-e-ris  or  -re,  thou  wilt  be  loved, 

S-mab'-I-tur,  he  will  be  loved; 

Phar,  a-mab'-i-mur,  we  shall  be  loved, 

am-a-blm'-i-ni,  ye  will  be  loved, 

Sm-a-bun'-tur,  they  will  be  loved. 

Perfect    have  been,  or  was. 

Sing.  i-m5'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i,     .  /  have  been  loved, 

&-ma -tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti,  iJiou  hast  been  loved, 

i-ma'-tus  est  or  fu'-it,  he  has  been  loved; 

Plur.  &-ma'-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-I-miis,  we  have  been  loved, 

&-ma'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis,  ye  have  been  loved, 

S-ma'-ti  sunt,  fu'e'-runt  or  -re,  they  have  been  loved. 

Pluperfect    had  been. 

S-ma'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram,  I  had  been  loved, 

&-ma'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras,  thou  hadst  been  loved, 

5-ma'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat,  he  had  been  loved; 

Plur,  fi-ma-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fii-e-ra'-mus,  we  had  been  loved, 

S-ma-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra-tis,  ye  had  b-ten  loved, 

&-ma'-ti  e'-rant  or  fii'-e-rant,  they  had  leen  loved. 

Future  Perfect    shall  have  been. 

Sng.  Srma'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-r8,  I  shall  hase  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-rls,  thou  wilt  have  been  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit,  he  will  have  been  loved; 

Plur,  a-ma -ti  er-i-mus  or  fu-er'-I-mus,  we  shall  have  been  loved, 

S-ma'-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-!-tis,  ye  will  have  been  loved, 

Xr-ma'-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint,  they  will  have  been  loved. 


§  156.  VERBS. — FIRST   CONJUGATION,   PASSIVE.  107 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Present    may,  or  can  be. 

a'-mer,  /  may  he  lovedy 

a-me'-ris  or  -re,  thou  mayst  he  lovedy 

a-me'-tur,  lie  may  he  loved; 

Plur.  a-me'-mur,  we  may  he  loved, 

a-mem'-i-ni,  ye  may  he  loved, 

S-men'-tur,  they  may  he  loved. ' 

Lnperfect.    might,  could,  would,  or  should  he. 

Sing,  a-ma'-rer,  I  would  he  loved, 

am-a-re'-ris  or  -r5,  thou  wouldst  he  lovedf 

am-a-re'-tiir,  he  would  he  loved; 

Plur.  am-a-re'-mur,  we  would  he  loved, 

am-a-rem'-i-ni,  ye  would  he  loved, 

am-a-ren'-tur,  they  would  he  loved. 

Perfect    may  have^been. 

Sirg    S-ma'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim,  /  may  have  heen  loved, 

S-ma'-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-rls,  thou  mayst  have  heen  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit,  he  may  have  heen  loved; 

Plur,  S-ma -ti  si'-miis  or  fu-er'-!-miis,  we  may  have  heen  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis,  ye  may  have  heen  loved, 

a-ma'-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint,  they  may  have  been  loved. 

Pluperfect    might,  could,  would,  or  should  have  heen. 

Sing,  a-ma'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem,        /  would  have  heen  loved, 

a-ma'-tus  es'-scs  or  fu-is'-ses,  thou  wouldst  have  heen  loved, 

S-ma'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set,  he  would  have  heen  loved  ; 

Plur,  S-ma -ti  es-se'-mus  or  fu-is-se'-mus,  we  would  have  heen  loved, 
a-ma'-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis,  ye  would  have  heen  loved, 
S-ma'-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent,  they  would  have  been  loved, 

IMPERATIVE   MOOD. 

Pres.  Sing,   a-ma'-re,  be  thou  loved; 

Plur.  a-mam'-i-ni,  be  ye  loved. 

Fut.  Sing,   a-ma'-tor,  thou  shall  be  loved,     -^ 

S-ma'-tor,  he  shall  he  loved; 

Plur.  (am-a-bim-I-ni,  ye  shall  he  loved), 

a-man'-tor,  they  shall  he  loved, 

INFINITIVE   MOOD. 

Present,  a-ma'-ri,  to  be  loved. 

Perfect,  Srma'-tus  es'-se  or  fh-is'-se,    to  have  been  loved. 
Future,   a-ma'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about  to  be  loved. 


108 


VERBS. SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


§157. 


PARTICIPLES. 
Perfect,  a-ma'-tus,  loved,  or  liaving  been  loved. 

Future,  a-man'-diis,  to  be  loved. 

supint:. 

Latter,  a-ma -tu,         to  be  loved. 
Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  am,  are  de- 
rived 
Active.     Passive. 

Ind.  pres.        amo,        amor. 

imperf.    amaoaOT,  amo6ar. 

—  fut.         amdJo,     amdior. 
Subj.  jn-es.      amewi,      amer. 

imperf.   amdreTW,  amdrer. 

ImperaL  pres.  amd,        anadre. 

Jut.  amdto,      amdtor. 

Inf.  pres.        amdre,     amdn*. 
Part  pres.     amans. 


fuL 

Gerund. 


taaandL 


amandtis. 


From  the  second  root,    From  the  third  root, 
amav,  are  derived  amat,  are  derived 

Active.  Passive. 

Ind  per/.         amav?*,         amatus  sura,  etc. 

plup.         amavgrawi,  amatiw  eram,  etc. 

fut.  perf.  amayero,     amattw  ero,  etc. 

SvbJ.  perf.       amaverim,  amatws  sim,  etc. 

plup.       amavis5e7»,  amatiM  essem,  etc 

Inf.  perf.        amavtsse,  *  amatus  esse,  etc. 

From  the  third  root, 
Inf.  fut.      amaturM5  esse,  amatum  in. 
Part.  fut.    amaturus. 

—  perf.  amatt«. 

Form.  sup.  amatuTTt.      Lot.  sup.  amatu. 


§1W,     SECOND    CONJUGATION. 
ACTIVE   VOICE.  PASSIVE   VOICE. 


Pres.  Ind. 
Pres.  Inf. 
Perf.  Ind. 
Supine. 


VOICE. 

PRINCIPAL 

mo'-ne-6. 
mo-ne'-re. 
mon'-u-L 
mon'-i-tum. 


PASSIVE 
PARTS. 

Pres.  Ind.  mo'-ne-or. 
Pres.  Inf.  mo-ne'-ri. 
Perf.  Part,  mon'-i-tus. 


/  advise. 

Sing.  mo'-ne-8, 
mo'-nes, 
mo'-net ; 

Plur.  mo-ne'-mus, 
mo-ne'-tis, 
mo'-nent. 

/  was  advising, 
S.  mo-ne'-bam, 
mo-ne'-bas, 
mo-ne'-bat ; 
p.  mon-c-ba'-mus, 
mon-e-ba'-ti9, 
mo-ne'-bant. 


INDICATIVE   MOOD. 
Present 

/  am  advised. 
'Sing.  mo'-ne-6r, 

mo-ne'-ris  or  -re, 
mo-ne'-tur ; 
Flur.  mo-ne'-mur, 
mo-nem'-i-ni, 


mo-nen  -tur. 


Imperfect 


7  was  advised, 

S.  mo-ne'-bar, 

mon-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
mon-e-ba-tur ; 

P.  mon-e-ba'-mur, 
moR-e-bam'-i-ni, 
mon-e-ban'-tiir. 


§157. 


VERBS. SECOND  CONJUGATION. 


109 


ACTIVE. 

/  shall  or  will  advise. 

S.  mo-ne'-bo, 
mo-ne'-bis, 
mo-ne'-bit ; 

P.  mo-neb'-i-mus, 
mo-neb'-i-tis, 
mo-ne'-bunt. 


I  advised  or  Jiave  advised. 
S.  mon'-u-i, 

mon-u-is'-ti, 

mon'-u-it ; 
P.  mo-nu'-i-mujs, 

mon-u-is'-tis, 

mon-u-e'-runt  or  -re. 


/  had  advised. 

S.  mo-nu'-e-ram, 
mo-nu'-e-ras, 
mo-nu'-e-rat ; 

P.  mon-u-^-ra'-miis, 
m6n-u-6-ra'-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rant. 


Future. 


PASSIVE. 

I  shall  or  will  he  advised, 

S.  mo-ne'-bor, 

mo-nob'-e-rts  or  -re, 
mo-neb'-i-tur ; 

P.  mo-neb'-i-mur, 
mon-e-bim'-i-ni, 
mon-e-bun'-tur. 


Perfect. 


I  was  or  have  been  advised. 
S.  mon'-i-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 

mon'-i-tiis  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 

mon'-I-tus  est  or  fu'-it ; 
P.  mon'-i-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 

mon'-i-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 

mon'-i-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re- 


Pluperfect. 

/  had  been  advised. 
S.  mon'-i-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat ; 
P.  mon'i-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  e-ra-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant 


I  shall  have  advised. 
S.  mo-nu'-e-ro, 

mo-nu'-e-ris, 

mo-nu'-e-rit ; 
P.  mon-u-er'-i-mus, 

mon-u-er'-I-tis, 

mo-nu'-e-riiit. 


Future  Perfect. 

I  shall  have  been  advised. 
S.  mon'-i-tiis  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
mon'-i-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 
P.  mon'-i-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-I-mu», 
mon'-i-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-cr'-T-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint 


SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 


/  may  or  can  advise. 
S.  mo'-ne-am, 
mo'-ne-as, 
mo'-ne-at ; 
P.  mo-ne-a'-mus, 
mo-ne-a'-tis, 
mo'-ne-ant. 
10 


Present. 

/  may  or  can  be  advised. 
S.  mo'-ne-ar, 

mo-ne-a'-ris  or  -re, 
mo-ne-a'-tur ; 
P.  mo-ne-a'-mur, 
mo-ne-am'-i-ni, 
mo-ne-an'-tur. 


110 


VERBS. SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


§157 


ACTIVE 


PASSIVE 


Imperfect 


I  mighty  couldy  would,  or  should 
adoise. 
S.  mo-ne'-rem, 
mo-ne'-res, 
mo-ne'-ret ; 
P.  mon-e-re'-miis, 
mon-e-re'-tis, 
mo-ne'-rent. 


/  might,  could,  would,  or  should 
be  advked. 
S.  mo-ne'-rer, 

m6n-e-re'-ri«  or  -re, 
mon-e-re'-tiir ; 
P.  mon-e-re'-mur, 
mon-e-rcm'-i-ni, 
mon-e-ren'-tur. 


/  may  have  advised, 
S.  m5-nu'-e-rim, 
mo-nu'-e-rls, 
mo-nu'-e-rit ; 
P.  mon-u-er'-I-mus, 
m6n-u-€r'-I-tis, 
mo-nu'-e-rint. 


J  might,  could,  would,  or 
should  have  advised. 
S.  mon-u-is'-sem, 

m5n-u-is'-ses, 

mon-u-is'-set ; 
P.  mon-u-is-se'-mus, 

mon-u-is-se'-tis, 

mon-u-is'-sent 


Perfect 

I  may  have  been  advised. 
S.  mon'-i-tus  sim  or  fu  -e-rim, 

mon'-i-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-ris, 

mon'-i-tus  sit  or  fu'-e  nt ; 
P.  mon'-i-tl  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mua, 

mon'-i-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-I-tis, 

mon'-i-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint 

Pluperfect 
/  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have 

been  advised. 
S.  mon'-i-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
mon'-i-tiis  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-ses, 
mon'-i-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set; 
P.  mon'-i-ti  es-se'-miis  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
mon'-i-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
mon'-i-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 


Pres.  S.  mo'-ne,  advise  thou; 
P.  m6-ne'-t6,  advise  ye. 
Fut.  S.  mo-ne'-to,  thou  shalt  ad- 
vise, 
mo-ne'-to,  he  shall  advise; 
P.  mon-e-to'-te,  ye  shall  ad- 
vise, 
mo-nen'-to,  they  shall  ad- 
vise. 


Pres.  S.  mo-ne'-re,  be  thou  advised; 
P.  mo-nem'-i-ni,    be  ye  ad- 
vised. 
Fut.  S.  mo-ne'-tor,  thou  shalt  be 
advised, 
mo-ne'-tor,  he  shall  be 
advised : 
P.  (mon-e-bim'-i-ni,  ye  shall 
be  advised,) 
mo-nen'-tor,  they  shall  be 
advised. 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 


Pres.  m6-ne'-re,  to  advise. 
Per/,  mon-u-is'-se,  to  have  advised. 
Fut.    mon-i-tu'-rus  es'-sfi,  to    be 
about  to  advise. 


Pres.  mo-ne'-ri,  to  be  advised. 
Perf.  mon'-i-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se, 

to  have  been  advised. 
Fut.    mon'-i-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  abotii 

to  be  advised. 


158. 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


Ill 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE, 


PARTICIPLES. 


Pres.  mo'-nens,  advising.  j  Perf.  mon'-i-tus,  advised. 

Fut.  mon-i-tu'-rus,  about  to  advise.  \  Fut.   mo-ncn'-dus,  to  be  advised. 

GERUND. 

•  G.    mo-nen'-di,  of  advising^ 
D.     mo-nen'-do,  etc. 
Ac.  mo-nen'-dum, 
Ab.  mo-nen'-do. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  mon'-i'-tum,  to  advise.    |    Latter,  mon'-i-tu,  to  he  advised. 


Formation  op  the  Tenses. 


I 


From  the  first  root,  mon,  are  de- 
rived, 
Active.      Passive. 
Indl  pres.        moneo,     moneor. 

-  xmperf.     wovt'bam^monehar. 

fut.  moneio,    monebor. 

SubJ.  pres.       moneam,  mon ear. 

iinperf.  rx\f^n€re7n,monerer. 

Imperat.  j)res.  moiie,        monere. 

fut.    moiv'to,     vnonetor. 

Inf.  pres.         monere,    monm. 
Part.  pres.      inonens, 

fut.  monendus. 

Gerund.  moiiendi. 


From  the  second  root.    From  the  third  root, 
monu,  are  derived,        monit,  are  derived, 
Active.  Passive. 

Ind.  perf.       monm,         monitws  sum,  etc. 

plup.       monueram,  monlt?zs  eram,  etc. 

fut.  perf.  monu^ro,     mon!t«<s  ero,  etc. 

Subj.  perf.      monuerim,  monlhis  sim,  etc. 

plup.      monuisse?«,  mouItttsessem,etc. 

Inf.  perf.       mouuisse,     moiiitMS  esse,  etc. 

From  the  third  root, 
Inf.  fut.         moniturus  esse,     monltMm  iri. 
Part.  fut.       monitu/"MS, 

perf.  mon!ttt«. 

Fo7-m.  Sup.  monit«m.    Lat.  Sup.  mouitw.. 


§  158.     THIRD    CONJUGATION. 

PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  re'-go. 
Pres.  Inf.   reg'-e-re. 

Pres.  Ind.      re'-gor. 

Pres.  Inf.       re'-gi. 
Perf.  Part     rec'-tus. 

Perf.  Ind.  rex'-i. 

Supine.       rec'-tmn. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

^Present. 

Irule. 

lam  ruled. 

Sing.  re'-g§, 

Sing,  re'-gor, 

re'-gis, 

reg'-e-ris  or  -re, 

re'-git; 

reg'-i-tur ; 

Plur.  rGg'-i-miis, 

Plur.  reg'-i-mur, 

reg'-i-tis, 

re-gim'-I-ni, 

re'-gunt 

re-gun'-tur. 

112 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


158 


ACTIVE. 


I  teas  ruling. 

S.  re-nrc'-bam, 
re-ge'-bas, 
re-ge'-bat ; 

P.  reg-e-ba'-mus, 
reg-c-ba'-tis, 
re-ge'-bant. 


/  shall  or  wiU  rule» 
S.  re'-gam, 

re'-ges, 

re'-get ; 
P.  re-ge'-mus, 

re-ge'-tis, 

re-gent 


/  rtded  or  have  ruled. 
S.  rex'-i, 

rex-is'-ti, 

rex'-it^ 
P.  rex'-Hi-mus, 

rex-is'-tis, 

rex-e'-runt  or  -re. 


/  had  ruled. 

S.  rex'-e-ram, 
rex'-e-ras, 
rex'-e-rat ; 

P.  rex-e-ra'-mus, 
rex-e-ra'-tis, 
rex'-e-rant. 


PASSIVE. 


Imperfect. 


/  was  ruled. 

S.  re-ge'-bar, 

reg-e-ba'-ris  or  -re, 
reg-e-ba'-tur ; 

P.  reg-e-ba'-mur, 
reg-e-bam'-i-ni, 
reg-e-ban'-tur. 


Future. 


/  shall  or  will  he  ruled. 
S.  re'-gar, 

re-ge'-ris  or  -r€, 

re-ge'-tur ; 
P.  re-ge'-mur, 

re-gem'-i-ni, 

re-gen'-tur. 


Perfect 


/  was  or  have  heen  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i, 
rec'-tus  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
rec'-tus  est  or  fu'-it; 

P.  rec'-ti  su'-mus  or  fu'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
rec'-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re 


Pluperfect 

/  had  been  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 

rec'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 

rec'-tus  e'-rat  or  fu'-e-rat ; 

P.  rec'-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-miis, 

rec'-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 

•  rec'-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant 


/  shall  have  ruled. 
S.  rex'-e-ro, 
rex'-e-r!s, 
rex'-e-rit ; 
P.  rex-er'-i-mus, 
rex-er'-i-tts, 
rex'-e-rint 


Future  Perfect 

I  shaU  have  heen  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 
rec'-tus  e'-ris  or  fu'-e-rls, 
rec'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'  e-rit; 

P.  rec'-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fti-er'-i-mus, 
rec'-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-I-tis, 
•ec'-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint 


158. 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


113 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

Present 

/  may  or  can  he  ruled, 
S,  re'-gar, 

re-ga'-ris  or  -re, 
re-ga'-tur ; 
P.  re-jia'-mur, 


/  may  or  can  rule. 
S.  re'-gam, 

re'-gds, 

re'-gat; 
P.  re-g!\'  mils, 

rc-ga'-tis, 

re'-gant 


re-gam  -i-ni, 
re-gan'-tur. 


Imperfect 


/  mipJitj  could,  would,  or  should 
rule. 
S.  reg'e-rem, 
reg'-e-res, 
reg'-e-ret; 
P.  reg-e-re'-raus, 
reg-e-rc'-tis, 


/  may  have  ruled. 

S.  rex'-e-rim, 
rex'-e-rls, 
rex'-e-rit; 

P.  rex-er'-i-mus, 
rex-er'-i-ti3, 
rex'-e-rint 


/  might,  could,  icould,  or  should 
he  ruled. 
S.  rcg'-e-rer, 

reg-e-re'-ris  or  -re, 
reg-e-re'-tur ; 
P.  reg-e-re'-mur, 
reg-e-rcm'-i-ni, 
reg-e-ren'-tur. 

Perfect 

I  may  have  heen  ruled. 
S,  rec'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 
rec'-tus  sis  or  fu'-e-rls, 
rec'-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit ; 
P.  rec'-ti  si'-mus  or  fu-er'-l-miis, 
rec'-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 
rec'-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint 


X  might,  could,  would,  or 
should  have  ruled. 
S.  rex-is'-sem, 

rex-is'-ses, 

rex-is'-set ; 
P.  rex-is-se'-mus, 

rex-is-se'-tis, 

rex-is'-sent 


Pluperfect 

/  might,  could,  would,  or  should  have 
heen  ruled. 

S.  rec'-tiis  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem, 
rec'-tus  es'-ses  dr  fu-is'-ses, 
rec'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-set;  ♦ 

P.  rec'-ti  es-se'-miis  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
rec'-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
rec'-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent 


IMPEEATIVE    MOOD. 


Pres.  S.  re'-ge,  rule  thou, 
P.  reg'-i-te,  rule  ye. 
Fut.  S.  reg'-i-to,  thou  shalt  rule, 
reg'-i-to,  he  shall  rule  ; 
P.  reg-i-to'-te,  ye  shall  rule, 
re^gun'-to,  they  shall  rule. 
id*  <    -  . > 


Pres.  S.  reg'-e-re,  he  thou  ruled; 
P.  re-gim'-i-ni,  he  ye  ruled. 
Fut.  S.  reg -i-tor,  thou  shall  be  ruledf 
reg'-i-tor,  he  shall  he  ruled; 
P.  (rc-gim'-i-ni,  ye  shall,  etc.) 
re-gun'-46r,  they  shall,  etc. 


114 


VERBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


§  15&. 


ACTIVE, 


PASSIVE. 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 


Pres.  reg'-e-re,  to  rule. 
Per/,  rex-is'-se,  to  have  ruled. 
FuL  rec-tu'-riis  es'-se,  to  he  about 
to  rule. 


Pres.  re'-gi,  to  he  ruled. 

Perf.  rec'-tus  es'-se  or  fu;is'-se,  to 

have  been  ruled. 
Fut.  rec'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about  to 


be  ruled' 


PARTICIPLES. 


Pres.  re'-gens,  ruling, 

Fut.  rec-tu'-rus,  about  to  rule. 


Perf.  rec'-tus,  ruled. 

Fut.  r^-gen'-dus,  to  be  ruled. 


GERUND. 

G.  r6-gen'-dl,  of  ruling. 

D.  re-gen'-do,  etc. 

Ac.  re-gen'-dum, 

Ah.  re-gen'-do. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  rec'-tum,  to  rule.      |      Latter,  rec'-tu,  to  be  ruled. 

Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  reg,  are  de- 
rived, 
Active.     Passive. 
Ind.  pres.         rego,        regor. 

xmptrf.     regciam,  reg^Jar. 

fvi.  T&gam,     regar. 

Subj.  pres.        regam,     regar. 

iniperf.   regirem,  regirer. 

Imperat.  pres.  rege,        regere. 

fut.    regfto,      regftor. 

Inf.  pres.         regiref    regt. 
Pari.  pres.       rege/w, 

ftd.  regendus. 

Gerund.  regendL 


From  the  second  root,  From  the  third  root, 
rexj  are  derived,         reel,  are  derived, 
Active.  Passive. 

Ind.  perf,  rext,         rectus  sum,  etc. 

plup.  rexeram,  rectw*  eram,  etc 

fut.  perf.  rexero,      rectus  ero,  etc. 

Subf.  perf.        rexmm,    recttis  sim,  etc. 

plup.         resiissem,  rectus  essem,  etc. 

Inf.  perf.  rexisse.      rectus  esse,  etc. 

From  the  third  root. 
Inf.  fut.     recturus  esse,  rectum  iri. 
Fart.  fut.  recturus. 

perf.  rectus. 

Form.  Sup.  rectum.  Lai.  Sup.  rectu. 


§  150.     Verbs  in  10  of  the  Third  Conjugation. 

Verbs  in  io  of  the  third  conjugation,  in  tenses  fonned  from  the 
first  root,  have,  as  connecting  vowels,  ia,  ie,  to,  or  iu,  wherever 
the  same  occur  in  the  fourth  conjugation ;  but  wliere  they  have 
only  a  single  connecting  vowel,  it  is  the  same  which  character- 
izes other  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation.  They  are  all  conju- 
gated like  cdpto. 


§1.59. 


VEEBS. THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


115 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 

Pres.  Tnd.     ca'-pi-or,  to  be  tahen. 
Pres.  Inf.     ca'-pi. 
Per/.  Part,  cap'-tiis. 


Pre$.  Ind.  ca'-pi-o,  to  take. 
Pres.  Inf.  cup'-e-re. 
Perf  Ind.  ce'-pi. 
Supine.       cap'-tum. 


INDICATIVE    MOOD. 
Present. 


S.  ca'-pi-o, 

ca'-pis, 

ca'-pit ; 
P.  cap'-i-miis, 

cap'-i-tis, 

ca-pi-unt. 


8.  ca-pi-e'-bam, 
ca-pi-e'-bas, 
ca-pi-e'-bat ; 

P.  ca-pi-e-ba'-miis, 
ca-pi-e-ba'-tis, 
ca-pi-e'-bant. 


S.  ca'-pi-am, 
ca-pi-es, 
ca'-pi-et ; 

P.  ca-pi-e'-mus, 
ca-pi-e'-tis, 
ca'-pi-ent. 


Imperfect 


Future. 


S.  ca'-pi-6r, 

eap'-e-ris  or  -re, 

cap'-i-tur ; 
P.  cap'-i-mur, 

ca-pim'-i-ni, 

ca-pi-un -tur. 


S.  ca-pi-e'-bar, 

ca-pi-e-ba'-ris  or  -r6, 
ca-pi-e-ba'-tiir ; 

P.  ca-pi-e-ba-mur, 
ca-pi-e-bam'-i-ni, 
ca-pi-e-ban'-tur. 


S.  ca'-pi-ar, 

ca-pi-e'-ris  or  -rfi, 

ca-pi-e'-tur ; 
P.  ca-pi-c'-mur, 

ca-pi-em'-i-ni, 

ca-pi-en'-tur. 


The  parts  formed  from  the  second  and  third  roots  being  entirely- 
regular,  only  a  synopsis  of  them  is  given. 


Per/*.  ce'-pi. 

Piiip.         cep'-6-ram. 
Fut.perf.  cep'-e-r5. 


Perf.  cap'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i. 

Plup.         cap'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram. 

Fut.  perf  cap'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-6-r6. 


SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 
Present. 


S.  ca'-pi-am, 
ca'-pi-as, 
ca'-pi-at ; 

P.  ca-pi-a'-mus, 
ca-pi-a'-tis, 
cS'-pi-ant 


S.  ca'-pi-ar, 

ca-pi-a'-ris  or  -re, 

ca-pi-a'-tur; 
P.  ca-pi-a'-mur, 

ca-pi-am'-i-ni, 

ca-pi-an'-tur. 


116 


VERBS. FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


160. 


ACTIVE. 


S.  cSp'-€-rem, 
c§p'-6-res, 
cap'-e-ret ; 

P.  cap-e-re'-mus, 
cap-e-re'-tis, 
cap'-e-rent 


Per/,  cep'-€-rim. 
Plup.  ce-pis'-sem. 


Imperfect. 


PASSIVE. 


S.  cap'-e-r6r, 

cap-e-re'-ris  or  -r6, 
cap-€-re'-tur ; 

P.  cap-6-re'-mur, 
cap-e-rem'-i-ni, 
cap-6-ren'-tur. 


Per/,  cap'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 
Plup.  cap'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is''-s 


IMPERATIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  2.  S.  ca'-pe ;     P.  2.  cSp'-i-te. 
FuL  2.      cap-I-to,  c§p-i-t5-te, 


3.      cap'-I-t5 ;         cE-pi-un'-to.       cap'-i-tor ;     ca-pi-un'-t6r, 


S.  cap'-e-re ;  P.  ca-pim'-!-ni. 
cap'-i-tor,      (ca-pi-em'-i-ni,) 


INFINITIVE  MOOD. 


Pres.  cap'-e-re. 
Per/,  ce-pis'-se. 
Fut.    cap-tu'-riis  es'-se. 


Pres^  ca'-pi. 

Per/  cap'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se. 

FuL    cap'-tum  i'-ri. 


PAETICIPLES. 


Pres.  ca'-pi-ens. 
Fut.    cap-tu'-rus. 


Per/  cap'-tus. 
Fut.    ca-pi-en'-dus. 


GERUND. 
G.  ca-pi-en'-di,  etc. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  cap'-tum.        |  Latter,  cap'-tu. 


§160.     FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

PRINCIPAL   PARTS. 


Pres.  Ind.  au'-di-o. 
Pres.  In/  au-di'-re. 
Per/  Ind.  au-di'-vi. 
St^ririe.      &u-di'-timi. 


Pres.  Ind.  au'-di-6r. 
Pres.  In/  au-di'-ri. 
Per/  Part,  au-di'-tus. 


§160. 


VERBS. FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


117 


ACTIVE.  PASSIVE. 

INDICATIVE   MOOD. 


Present 


I  hear. 
S.  au'-di-o, 

au'-dis, 

au'dit ; 
P.  au-di'-mus, 

au'-di'-tis, 

au'-di-unt 


I  was  hearing. 

S.  au-di-e'-bam, 
au-di-e'-bas, 
au-di-e'-bat ; 

P.  au-di-e-ba'-mus, 
au-di-e-ba'-tis, 
au-di-e'-bant 


I  shall  or  wUl  hear, 
S.  au'-di-am, 

au'-di-es, 

au'-di-et ; 
P.  au-di-e'-miis, 

au-di-e'-tis, 

au'-di-ent 


I  heard  or  have  heard. 
S.  au-di'-vi, 

au-di-vis'-ti, 

au-di'-vit ; 
P.  au-div'-i-miis, 

au-dl-vis'-tis, 

au-di-ve'-runt  or  -re. 


I  had  heard. 

S.  au-dlv'-e-ram, 
au-div'-c-ras, 
au-div'-e-rat ; 

P.  au-div-e-ra'-mus, 
au-div-e-ra'-tis, 
au-div'-e-rant. 


/  am  heard. 
S.  au'-di-6r, 

au-di'-ris  or  -re, 

au-dl'-tiir ; 
P.  au-di'-mur, 

au-dim'-i-ni, 

au-di-un'-tur. 


Imperfect. 

I  was  heard. 
S,  au-di-e'-bar, 

au-di-c-ba'-ris  or  -rS, 
au-di-e-ba'-tur; 
P.  au-di-e-ba'-mur, 
au-di-e-bam'-i-nl, 
au-di-e-ban'-tur. 


Future. 


I  shall  or  will  he  heard, 
S.  au'-di-ar, 

au-di-e'-rls  or  -r6, 

au-di-e'-tur ; 
P.  au-di-e'-mur, 

au-di-em'-I-ni, 

au-di-en'-tiir. 


Perfect 

.  /  have  l^en  or  was  heard, 
S.  au-di'-tiis  sum  or  fu'-i, 
au-di'-tiis  es  or  fu-is'-ti, 
au-di'-tus  est  or  fu'-it; 
P.  au-di'-ti  su'-miis  or  fu'-I-miis, 
au-di'-ti  es'-tis  or  fu-is'-tis, 
au-di'-ti  sunt,  fu-e'-runt  or  -re. 

Pluperfect. 

I  had  been  heard. 
S.  au-di'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram, 
au-di'-tus  e'-ras  or  fu'-e-ras, 
au-di'-tus  e'-rat  or  fiT-e-rSt; 
P.  au-di'-ti  e-ra'-mus  or  fu-e-ra'-miis, 
au-di'-ti  e-ra'-tis  or  fu-e-ra'-tis, 
au-di'-ti  e'-rant  or  fu'-e-rant 


118 


VERBS. FOURTH  CONJUGATION. 


160. 


ACTIVE. 

I  shall  have  heard. 

S.  au-div'-e-ro, 
au-div'-c-rls, 
au-div'-c-rit ; 

P.  au-di-ver'-i-mus, 
au-di-vcr'-!-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint. 


PASSIVE. 
Future  Perfect 

I  shall  have  been  heard. 
S.  au-dl'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro, 
au-dl'-tus  c'-ris  or  fu'-e-ris, 
au-di'-tus  e'-rit  or  fu'-e-rit; 
P.  au-di'-ti  er'-i-mus  or  fu-er'-i-mus, 
au-di'-ti  er'-i-tis  or  fu-er'-I-tis, 
au-di'-ti  e'-runt  or  fu'-e-rint 


SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

Present 

I  may  or  can  hear,  I  may  or  can  he  heard. 

S.  au'-di-am,  S.  au'-di-ar, 

au'-di-as,  au-di-a'-ris  or  -re, 

au'-di-at ;  au-di-a'-tiir ; 

P.  au-<H-a'-mus,  P.  au-di-a-miir, 
au-di-a'-tis,  au-dl-am'-i-ni, 

au'-di-ant  au-di-an'-tur. 


Imperfect 


I  mighty  couldy  wovldy  or  should 
hear. 
S.  au-di'-rem, 
au-di'-res, 
au-<li'-ret ; 
P.  au-di-re'-mus, 
au-di-re'-tis, 
au-di'-rent 


I  mighty  could.,  wouldj  or  should 
be  heard. 
S.  au-di'-rer, 

au-di-re'-ris  or  -re, 
au-di-re'-tur ; 
P.  au-di-re'-mur, 
au-di-rem'-i-ni, 
au-di-ren'-tur. 


J  may  have  heard. 

S.  au-div'-e-rim, 
au-div'-e-rls, 
au-div'-e-nt ; 

P.  au-di-ver'-!-mus, 
au-di-ver'-!-tis, 
au-div'-e-rint 


/  might.,  could,  tcould,  or 
should  have  heard. 
S.  au-di-vis'-sem, 
au-di-vis'-scs, 
au-di-vis'-set ; 
P.  au-di-vis-se'-mus, 
auHli-vis-se'-tis, 
au-di-vis'-sent 


Perfect 

.     /  may  have  been  heard. 
S.  au-di'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim, 

au-di'-tiis  sis  or  fu'-e-ris, 

au-di'-tus  sit  or  fu'-e-rit; 
P.  au-di'-ti  si'-miis  or  fu-er'-I-miis, 

au-di'-ti  si'-tis  or  fu-er'-i-tis, 

au-di'-ti  sint  or  fu'-e-rint 

Pluperfect 

/  mighty  could,  tcould,  or  should 
have  been  heard. 
S.  au-di'-tiis  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sern, 
au-di'-tiis  es'-ses  or  fu-is'-scs, 
au-di'-tus  es'-set  or  fu-is'-sct; 
P.  au-di'-ti  es-se'-miis  or  fu-is-se'-mus, 
au-di'-ti  es-se'-tis  or  fu-is-se'-tis, 
au-di'-ti  es'-sent  or  fu-is'-sent 


§160. 


VERBS. ^FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 


119 


ACTIVE. 


PASSIVE. 


IMPERATIVE    510 OD. 


Pres.  S.  au'-di,  hear  thou  ; 
P.  au-di'-te,  hear  ye. 
Fut.   S.  au-di'-to,  thou  shall  Jiear, 
au-di'-to,  lie  shall  hear  ; 
P.  au-dl-to'-te,  ye  shall  hear^ 
au-di-un'-to,    they   shall 
hear. 


Pres.  S.  au-di'-re,  he  thou  heard; 
P.  au-dlm'-i-ni,  he  ye  heard, 
Fut.   S.  au-di'-tor,  thou  shall  be 
heard, 
au-di'-tor,    he  shall  be 
heard  ; 
P.  (au-di-em'-i-ni,  ye  shall 
he  heard,) 
au-di-un'-tor,  they  shall 
be  heard. 


Pres.  au-di'-re,  to  hear. 
Perf.  au-di-vis'-se,  to  have  heard. 
Fut.    au-di-tii'-rus    es-se,    to    be 
about  to  hear. 


INFINITIVE    MOOD. 

Pres.  au-di'-ri,  to  be  heard. 
Perf.  au-di'-tus  es'-se  or   fu— ia'- 

se,  to  have  been  heard. 
Fut.    au-di'-tum  i'-ri,  to  be  about 

to  be  heard. 


PARTICIPLES. 


\Pres.  au'-di-ens,  hearing. 

[Fut.    au-di-tu'-rus,  about  to  hear. 


Perf.  au-di'-tus,  heard, 

Fut.    au-di-en'-dus,  to  be  Jieard, 


GERUND. 

G.  au-dl-en'-di,  of  hearing. 

'  D.  au-di-en'-do,  etc. 

Ac.  au-di-en'-dum, 

Ab.  au-di-en'-do. 

SUPINES. 
Former,  au-di'-tum,  to  hear,       \      Latter,  au-di'-tu,  to  be  heard. 


Formation  of  the  Tenses. 


From  the  first  root,  atic?,  are  de- 
rived 


Active. 

Passive. 

Ind.  pres. 

audio, 

audio?'. 

imperf. 

SiWdiU'bam 

,  auch'^6ar. 

—  fnt.. 

audmni, 

audiftr. 

SttbJ.  jyres. 

audirt»ra, 

audtftr. 

imperf. 

2i\xi\lrem, 

audirer. 

Imperil  t.  pre. 

.  audi, 

aud7re. 

fut. 

aud7<o, 

auditor. 

Inf.  pres. 

audz?-e, 

audwt'. 

Part.  pres. 

audiens, 

fut. 

kudiendus. 

Gerund. 

wxdiendi. 

From  the  second  root.  From  the  third  root, 
aud'iv,  are  derived,         aiidit,  are  derived, 
Active.  Passive. 

Ind.  perf.       audivi,         audltws  sum,  etc. 

2)hip.       audiv^ram,  audltj/serum,  etc 

fut.  perf .  audive/'o,     audltw*  ero,  etc. 

Sub),  perf      di\x(\\\erim,  audlt«/j{  siin,  etc. 

jdup.     audiv/.s'se??i,  audlt?<sessem,etc. 

Inf.  perf.       audiv/sse,    audltws  esse,  etc. 

From  the  third  root, 
Inf.  fut.    auditwrtis  esse,  auditum  iri. 
Part.  fut.  auditu>7<s. 
perf  audltws. 

Form.  sup.  auditwn.       Lat.  gup.  audita. 


120  DEPONENT   VERBS.  §161 

DEPONENT    VERBS. 

§  IGl.  Deponent  verbs  are  conjugated  like  the  passive 
voice,  and  have  also  all  the  participles  and  participial  tbrmatious 
of  the  active  voice.  Neuter  deponent  verbs,  however,  want  the 
fiiture  passive  pai-ticiple,  except  that  the  neuter  in  dum  is  some- 
times used  impersonally.    See  §  184,  3. 

The  following  is  an  example  of  an  active  deponent  verb  of  the  first 
conjugation : — 

PKIXCIPAL    PARTS. 

Mi'-ror,  mi-ra'-ri,  mi-ra'-tiis,  to  admire* 

INDICATIVE  MOOD. 

Tres.  mi'-ror,  mi-ra'-ris,  etc.  I  admire,  etc. 

Imperf.  mi-ra'-bar,  etc.  I  was  admiring. 

Fut.  mi-ra'-bor,  /  shall  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  sum  or  fu'-i,  /  have  admired. 

Plup.  mi-ra'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram,  /  had  admired. 

Fut.  Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-ro,  I  shall  have  admired, 

SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD. 

Pres.  mi'-rer,  ml-re'-ris,  etc.  J  may  admire,  etc. 

Imperf.  mi-ra'-rer,  /  would  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim,  I  may  have  admired. 

Plup.  mi-ra'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem,  /  would  have  admired. 


IMPERATIVE    MOOD. 

Presi.  S.  mi-ra'-re,  admire  thou  ; 
Fut.  S.  mi-ra'-tor,  thou  shall  admire, 
mi-ra'-tor,  he  shall  admire  ; 


P.  mi-ram'-5-ni,  admire  ye. 
P.  (mir-a-bim'-i-ni,  ye  shall,  etc.) 
mi-ran'-tor,  they  shall,  etc. 


INFINITIVE   MOOD. 
Pres.         mi-ra'-ri,  to  admire. 

Perf.  mi-ra'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se,   to  have  admired. 

Fut.  Act.  mir-a-tii'-riis  es'-se,  to  be  about  to  admire, 

FiU.  Pass,  ai-ra.' -turn  i'-ri,  to  be  about  to  be  admired, 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  mi'-rans,  admiring. 

Perf.  ml-ra'-tus,        having  admired. 

Fut.  Act.        mir-a-tu'-rus,  about  to  admire. 
Fut.  Pass,      mi-ran'-dus,     to  be  admired. 

GERUND. 
G.  mi-ran'-di,  of  admiring,  etc 

SUPINES. 
Former  mi-ra'-tum,  to  admire.    \    Latter,  mi-ra -tu,  to  be  admired. 


§  162.      verbs. remarks  on  the  conjugations.  121 

Remarks  on  the  Conjugations. 
Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  .First  Boot. 

§  IGS.  1.  A  few  words  in  the  present  subjiinctive  of  the  first  and 
third  conjugations,  in  the  earlier "writdrs  and  in  the  poets,  end  in  m,  is-  it,  etc. ; 
as,  edim,  edis,  edit,  ed'tmus ;  comedim,  comedis,  comedint ;  for  edum,  etc.  covii- 
dnm,  etc. ;  duim,  duis,  duit,  duliit ;  and  joerduim,  perduis,  perdidt,  perduitU  ;  for 
dem,  etc.  pet-dam,  etc.  from  old  forms  duo  and  pefduo,  for  do  and  jierdo :  so  ere" 
diis,  creduit,  and  also  creduam,  creduas,  creduat,  for  credam,  etc.  from  the  old 
form  creduo,  for  credo.  The  form  in  im,  etc.  was  retained  as  the  regular  form 
in  sim  and  velim,  from  sum  and  volo,  and  in  their  compounds. 

2.  The  imperfect  indicative  in  the  fourth  conjugation,  sometimes,  especially 
in  the  more  ancient  writers,  ends  in  ibatn  and  ibar,  for  iebam  and  ie(/fir,  and 
the  future  in  ibo  and  ibor,  for  iam  and  iar ;  as,  vestlbat,  Virg.,  larglbar,  Propeii;., 
for  vestii'bai,  laryiebur ;  sclbo,  opperlbor,  for  sciam,  op>periar.  Ibavi  and  Ibo  were 
retained  as  the  regular  forms  of  eo\  queo,  and  nequeo.   Cf.  §  182. 

3.  The  termination  re,  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  passive  voice,  is 
rare  in  the  present,  but  common  in  the  other  simple  tenses. 

4.  The  imperatives  ofdlco,  ddco,  fdcio,  and  fer'o^  are  .usually  written  die,  due. 
facj  and  fer ;  in  like  manner  their  compounds,  except  those  compounds  or 
facto  which  change  a  into  i ;  as,  effice,  confice ;  but  calf  dee  also  is  found  in 
Cicero;  and  in  old  writers  dice,  edlce,  aadlee,  indiee,  duce,  abdace,  reduce,  traduce, 
and  face.  Imjer  for  ingere  is  rsjre.  Scio  has  not  sci,  but  its  place  is  supplied 
by  se'ito,  and  seitote  is  preferred  to  scUe. 

5.  In  the  imperative  future  of  the  passive  voice,  but  especially  of  deponents, 
early  writers  and  their  imitators  sometimes  used  the  active  instead  of  the  pas- 
sive form;  as,  arbitrdto,  amiAexdto,  uitto,  nitito ;  for  arbitrator,  Qic,  and  cen- 
sento,  utunto,  tuento,  etc.  for  censentor,  etc. — In  the  second  and  third  persons 
singular  occur,  also,  forms  in  -mino ;  as,  hortamlno,  veremino,  fruimtno ;  for 
hortdtor,  etc. 

6.  The  syllable  er  was  often  added  to  the  present  infinitive  passive  by  early 
writers  and  especially  by  the  poets ;  as,  amarier  for  ainari,  dicier  for  dlci. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Second  Root. 

7.  (rt.)  When  the  second  root  ends  in  v,  a  syncopation  and  contraction  often 
occur  in  the  tenses  formed  from  it,  by  omitting  v,  and  sinking  the  first  vowel 
of  the  termination  in  the  final  vowel  of  the  root,  when  followed,  in  the  fourth 
conjugation,  by  s,  and  in  the  other  conjugations,  by  s  or  r ;  as,  aiulissem  for 
aiutiv'issem,  amasti  for  amavisti,  impUrunt  for  impleyQrzuit,  noram  and  nosse  for 
noviiram  and  novisse. 

(6.)  When  the  second  root  ends  in  iv,  v  is  often  omitted  without  contraction; 
as,  audiero  for  audivero ;  audiisse  for  audivisse. 

(c.)  When  this  root  ends  in  s  or  x,  especially  in  the  third  conjugation,  the 
syllables  is,  iss,  and  sis,  are  sometimes  omitted  in  the  termination  of  tenses  de- 
rived from  it;  as,  evasti  for  evas'isti,  extinxti  for  extinx'isti,  divisse  for  divishse ; 
extinxem  for  extiiixlssem,  surrexe  for  surrexi?,se  ;  accestis  for  accesshtis,  justi  for 
jusshti ;  dixti  for  dixisti.     So  ^axem  for  (faes\%&em,  i.  q.)  feeissem. 

(d.)  In  the  perfect  of  the  first,  second,  and  fourth  conjugations,  a  syncope 
sometimes  occurs  in  the  last  syllable  of  the  root  and  the  following  syllable  of 
the  termination,  especially  in  the  third  person  singular;  as,  fumCd,  audit,  cupit^ 
for  fumdi'it,  auaivit,  ciqnvit.  So,  also,  but  rarely,  in  the  first  person;  as,  sejjekf 
enarrdmus  ;  for  sepellvi,  enarrdvlmus. 

8.  In  the  third  person  plural  of  the  perfect  indicative  active,  the  form  in  ire 
is  ler 8  common  than  that  in  erunt,  especially  in  prose. 


122  *  VERBS. ^REMARKS    ON    THE    CONJUGATIONS.         §162. 

9.  Ancient  forms  of  a  futare  perfect  in  so,  a  perfect  and  pluperfect  subjunc- 
tive in  Mm  and  sem,  and  a  perfect  infinitive  in  se  sometimes  occur.  They  may, 
in  general,  be  fonned  bv  adding  these  terminations  to  the  second  root  of  tl'ie 
verb:  a?;  i-ecep^,  emissim,  atisim  from  the  obsolete  perfect,  nusi,  from  audeo, 
confexim  and  jmmiisseJii :  divisse  and  j^omisse.  But  when  the  root  ends  in  ac, 
and  fre(]uently  when  it  ends  in  s,  only  o,  im,  em,  and  e,  etc.  are  added;  as, 
jiisso,  dixis  ;  tntelltxes,  percepstt ;  surrexe,  snmse.  V,  at  tlie  end  of  the  root,  in 
the  first  conjugation,  is  changed  into  $;  as,  levasso,  locassim.  U,  at  the  end  of 
the  root,  in  the  second  conjugation,  is  changed  into  es ;  as,  habesso,  luessit. 
Sometimes  the  vowel  of  the  "present  is  retained  in  these  fonns,  though  changed 
in  the  other  pails  derived  from  the  second  root;  as,  caj)so,  faxo  (facso)^ 
faxim  (facsim). 

Note.  Faxo  expresses  determination,  - 1  will,'  or, '  I  am  resolved,  to  make, 
cause,' etc.  The  subjunctive  fuxit,  etc.,  expresses  a  solemn  wish;  as,  di% 
iminovtciks  fnxmi.  Ausim,  etc.  express  doubt  or  hesitation,  *  I  might  ven- 
ture,' etfc.  The  perfect  in  sim  is  used  also  in  connection  with  the  present  sub- 
junctive ;  as,  qvuBso  uti  iu  calamiidies  prohii>essis,  defendas,  averruncesque.  Cato. 

10.  In  the  ancient  Latin  a  few  examples  occur  of  a  future  passive  of  simi- 
lar form ;  as,  turbassitur,  jiissitui',  instead  of  turbdtum  fmrit,  and  jussus  Jui- 
rit. — A  future  infinitive  active  in  s^re  is  also  found,  in  the  first  conjugation, 
which  is  formed  by  adding  that  termination  to  the  second  root,  changing,  as 
before,  v  into  $ ;  as,  exphgnassere,  impetrasserej  for  expugnaturum  esse,  etc. 

Of  the  Tenses  formed  from  the  Third  Root, 

11.  The  supine  in  um,  though  called  one  of  the  principal  parts  of  the  verb, 
belongs  in  fact  to  very  few  verbs,  the  whole  number  wliich  have  this  supine 
not  amounting  to  three  hundred.  The  part  called  in  dictionaries  the  supine 
in  «m  must  therefore,  in  most  cases,  be  considered  as  the  neuter  gender  of  the 
perfect  participle. 

12.  In  the  compound  tenses  of  the  indicative  and  subjunctive  moods,  the 
participle  is  always  in  the  nominative  case,  but  it  is  used  in  both  numbers,  and 
in  all  genders,  to  correspond  with  the  number  and  gender  of  the  subject  of  the 
verb ;  as,  aimtus,  -a,  -um,  est ;  amdti,  -ce,  -a,  sunt,  etc. 

(1.)  Ftd,  fueram,  fuerim,  fuissem,  and  fuisse,  are  seldom  used  in  the  com- 
pound tenses  of  deponent  verbs,  and  not  so  often  as  sum,  etc.,  in  those  of  other 
verbs,  but  when  used  they  have  generally  the  same  sense.  It  is  to  be  remark- 
ed, however,  that  fid  with  the  perfect  participle  usually  denotes  that  which 
has  been,  but  which  no  longer  exists.  In  the  pluperfect  subjimctive,  fOrem^ 
etc.,  for  essem,  etc.,  are  sometimes  found. 
(2.)  But  as  the  perfect  participle  may  be  used  in  the  sense  of  an  adjective, 
expressing  a  pennanent  state,  (see  §  162,  22),  if  then  connected  with  the  tenses 
of  sum  its  meaning  is  different  from  that  of  the  participle  in  the  same  connec- 
tion; e/xistdla  sc7'iptu  est,  when  scripta  is  a  participle,  signifies,  the  letter  ha$ 
been  written,  but  If  scrijitn  is  an  adjective,  the  meaning  of  the  expression  is,  the 
letter  is  A\Titten,  and  epistOla  scrijjia  fait,  in  this  case,  would  signify,  Ihe  letter 
has  been  written,  or,  has  existed  as  a  written  one,  unplyiug  that  It  no  longer 
exists. 

13.  The  participles  in  the  perfect  and  future  Infinitive,  are  used  only  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative,  but  in  all  genders  and  in  both  numbers ;  as,  aimtus, 
-a,  -um,  esse  or  fuisse;  anuitum,  -am,  -um,  esse  or  fuisse;  aniuti,  -<b,  -a,  esse  or 
fuisse  ;  amdtos,  -as,  -a,  esse  or  fuisse ;  and  so  of  the  others.  With  the  infini- 
tive fuisse,  amatus,  etc.  are  generally  to  be  considered  as  participial  adjectives. 

(1.)  These  participles  in  combination  with  esse  are  sometimes  used  as  inde- 
clinable; as,  cohortes  ad  me  missum  facias.  Cic.  Ad  me,  mea  Tereniia.  icritns, 
te  vicum  venditurum.  Id. 


§162. 


VERBS. PERIPHRASTIC    CONJUGATIONS. 


123 


\ 


Penphrastic  Conjugations. 


14.  The  participle  mrus^  joined  to  the  tenses  of  the  verb 
sum^  denotes  either  intention^  or  behig  upon  the  point  of  doing 
souietliirig.  This  form  of  the  verb  is  called  the  active  'periphras- 
tic conjiKjation, 

Remark  1.  As  the  performance  of  the  act  depends  either  on  the  will  of  the 
subject,  on  that  of  others,  or  upon  circumstiinces,  we  niav  say,  in  English,  in 
the  first  case,  '1  iuteud,'  and  iu  the  others,  '1  am  to,'  or  '1  ain  about  to'  (be  or 
do  auy  thing). 

Pres, 

Imperf, 

Fut. 

Perf. 

PLup^ 


INDICATIVE, 
amaturus  sum,        /  am  about  to  love* 
araaturus  eram,      /  was  about  to  love. 
amaturus  ero,         I  shall  be  about  to  love.    ■ 
amaturus  fui,  /  was  or  have  been  about  to  lov6. 

amaturus  fueram,  /  had  been  about  to  love. 


SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.       amaturus  sim,         I  may  be  about  to  love. 
Imperf.   amaturus  essem,      J  would  be  about  to  love. 
Per/.       amaturus  fuerim,    J  may  have  been  about  to  love. 
Plup.      amaturus  fuissem,  /  would  have  been  about  to  love. 


INFINITIVE. 
Pres.      amaturus  esse,        to  be  about  to  love. 
Perf.       amaturus  fuisse,      to  have  been  about  to  love. 

Rem.  2.   Fv^ro  is  scarcely  used  in  connection  with  the  participle  in  rus. 

Rem.  3.  Amaturus  si7n  and  amatunis  essem  sei^ve  also  as  6ul)Juiictives  to  the 
future  nmabo.  The  infimtive  amaturus  fuisse  answers  to  the  Kiiglish.  'I  should 
have  loved,'  so  that  in  hypothetical  sentences  it  supplies  the  place  oi  an  infini- 
tive of  the  pluperfect  subjunctive. 

Rem.  4.  In  the  passive,  the  fact  that  an  act  is  about  to  be  pei*formed  is  ex- 
pressed by  a  longer  circumlocution :  as,  in  eo  est,  or  futurw/i  est,  tit  epistdla 
sa-ibdtur,  a  letter  is  about  to  be  written.  So  in  eo  erat,  etc.,  through  all  the 
tenses. 

15.  The  participle  in  dus,  with  the  verb  sum,  expresses  neces- 
sity or  propriety;  as,  amandus  sum,  I  must  be  loved,  or  deserve 
to  be  loved.  With  the  various  moods  and  tenses  of  sum,  it  forms 
6, passive  periphrastic  conjugation'; — thus  : 


INDICATIVE. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres. 

amandus  sum, 

Pres. 

amandus  sim. 

Imperf. 

amandus  eram, 

Imperf. 

amandus  essem, 

Fut.- 

amandus  ero. 

Perf. 

amandus  fuerim, 

Perf 

amandus  fui. 

Plup. 

amandus  fuissem 

Plup. 

amandus  fueram. 

Fut.  Perf.  amaudus  fuero. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres. 

amandus  '?.sse, 

* 

Perf 

amandus  fuisse. 

124  VERBS. RLLES  OF  CONJUGATION.        §  163. 

Rem.  5.  The  neuter  of  the  participle  in  dus  with  est  and  the  dative  of  a  per- 
son, expresses  the  necessity  of  performing  the  action  on  the  part  of  that  person; 
as,  mUu  scribendum  tst^  I  niust  write,  etc.,  and  so  through  all  the  tenses. 

Participles. 

16.  The  following  perfect  participles  of  neuter  verbs,  like  those  of  active 
deponents,  are  tnmslated  by  active  participles: — ccenatus,  having  supped;  jwlus^ 
having  drunk;  ;;mns?«,  having  dined;  and  sometimes  /wrflii^a,  hav'ing  sworn. 
So  ali^  aduUui^  coalltus,  consjnruius^  interllus,  occdsus,  obsoUtus,  and  crttus. 

For  the  active  meaning  of  osus  and  its  compoimds,  see  §  183,  1. 

1 7.  (a.)  The  perfect  participles  of  some  deponent  verbs  have  both 
an  active  and  a  passive  sense  ;  as,  adeptus  libertdtem,  having  obtain- 
ed liberty,  or  adeptd  libei'tatej  liberty  having  been  obtained.  Cf. 
§  142,  4,  (6.) 

So  ahominatus,  comitdtuSj  commentatitSy  complexus,  confessus,  contestatus,  de- 
tesU'tlus,  diijndtus,  dimensus,  effdtus,  emensus,  emeniltus,  emeritus^  expertus,  exse- 
crdtiis,  inlerpreUHtis,  largUus,  machinatus,  meditdtus,  mercatus,  me(fltus,  oblUus, 
opitultus,  orsus,  pnctus,  partittis,  per/unctus,  periclildtus,  pollicitus,  pqpuldtuSj 
cu:pi)puldtus,  stipululus,  testdtus,  uUus,  venerdtus. 

(h.)  The  participle  in  duSj  of  deponent  verbs,  is  commonly  pas^ 
dve. 

1 8.  The  perfect  participles  of  neuter  passive  verbs  have  the  signi- 
fication of  the  active  voice ;  as,  gavlsus,  having  rejoiced.  But  ausus 
is  used  both  in  an  active  and  a  passive  sense. 

19.  The  genitive  plural  of  participles  in  rus  is  seldom  used,  ex- 
cept that  of  futurus.  Venturorum  is  found  in  Ovid,  exiturdrum,  trans- 
iturdrum  and  periturorum  in  Seneca,  and  morilurorum  in  Augus- 
tine. " 

20.  In  the  third  and  fourth  conjugations,  the  gerund  and  future 
passive  participle  (including  deponents)  sometimes  end  in  undura 
and  undus^  instead  of  endum  and  endus,  especially  when  i  precedes; 
as,  faciu7idum,  audiundum,  scribundus.    Potior  has  usually  potiundus. 

21.  Many  present  and  perfect  participles  are  compounded  with  in,  signifying 
not,  whose  Verbs  do  not  admit  or  such  composition;  they  thus  become  adjec- 
tives ;  as,  inscien$,  ignorant ;  impardius,  unprepared. 

22.  Participles,  when  they  do  not  express  distinctions  of  time,  become  adjec- 
tives, and  as  such  are  compared;  as,  avians,  loving;  amantior,  amantissimus. 
They  sometimes  also  become  substantives;  as,  p?'a/eciu5,  a  commander;  cm- 
$um,  an  attempt ;  commissum,  an  ofl'ence. 

Note.  Many  words  derived  from  substantives,  with  the  terminations  of  par- 
ticiples, dtus,  itus,  and  utus,  are  yet  adjectives;  as,  aldtuSj  winged;  twrilus^ 
turreted,  etc.   See  ^  128,  7. 

General  Rules  of  Conjugation. 

t 

§  103.  1.  Verbs  which  have  a  in  the  first  root  have  it  also  in 
the  third,  even  when  it  is  changed  in  the  second  ;  as,  fdcioy  faction  ; 
hdbeOf  habltum. 


§164.  VERBS. SECOND    AND    Til  BD    &OOTS.  125 

2.  The  connecting  vowel  is  often  omitted  in  the  second  root,  and 
in  such  cases,  if  v  follows,  it  Ts  changed  into  u.  This  happens  in  most 
verbs  of  the  second  conjugation. 

Rkmark.  Some  verbs  of  the  first,  second,  and  third  conjugations 
prefix  to  the  second  root  their  initial  consonant  with  the  vowel  which 
follows  it,  or  with  e;  as,  currOj  cucurri;  falloy  fefelli.  This  prefix  is 
called  a  reduplication. 

Note  1.  Sjxmdeo  and  sto  lose  s  in  the  second  syllable,  making  spdpondi  and  steti. 
For  the  verbs  that  take  a  reduplication,  see  §§  165,  K.  2 ;  168,  N.  2 ;  171,  Exc.  1,(6.) 

3.  Verbs  which  want  the  second  root  commonly  want  the  third 
root  also. 

4.  Compound  verbs  form  their  second  and  third  roots  like  the  sim- 
ple verbs  of  which  they  are  compounded ;  as,  audio,  audlvi,  auditum; 
ezaudioj  exaudlvi,  ezaudltum. 

Note  2.  Some  compound  verbs,  however,  are  defective,  whose  simples  are 
complete,  and  some  are  complete,  whose  simples  are  defective. 

Exc.  1.  Compound  verbs  omit  the  reduplication;  but  the  com- 
pounds of  do,  sto,  diaco,  posco,  and  some  of  those  of  curro,  retain  it 

Exc.  2.  Verbs  which,  in  composition,  change  a  into  e  in  the  first 
root,  (see  §  189,  1,)  retain  e  in  the  second  and  third  roots  of  the  com- 
pound ;  as,  scando,  scandi,  scansum  ;  descendo,  descendi,  descensum. 

Exc.  3.  (a.)  When  a,  cb,  or  e,  in  the  first  root  of  the  simple  verb, 
is  changed  in  the  compound  into  i,  (see  §  189,  2,)  the  same  is  retained 
in-  the  second  and  third  roots,  in  case  the  third  root  of  the  simple  verb  is 
a  dissyllable ;  as,  hdbeo,  hdbui,  hdbitum ;  prohibeo,  prohibui,  prohibitum, 

(6.)  But  if  the  third  root  is  a  monosyllable,  the  second  root  of  the 
compound  has  usually  the  same  vowel  as  that  of  the  simple,  but 
sometimes  changes  a  or  e  into  i,  and  the  third  root  has  e  ;  as,  facio, 
feci,  factum;  conficio,  confeci,  confectum;  teneo,  tenui,  tentum;  retX- 
neo,  retinui,  retentum;  rdpio,  rapui,  raptum;  abripio,  abrXpui,  abreptum. 

Note  3.  The  compounds  of  cddo,  dgo,  frango,  pango,  and  tango,  retain  a 
in  the  third  root.    See  ^  172. 

Exc.  4.  The  compounds  ofpdrio,  {ere),  and  some  of  the  compounds  of  do 
and  cubo,  are  of  different  conjugations  from  their  simple  verbs.  See  do,  cubo  and 
pdi-io  in  4^  165  and  172. 

A  few  other  exceptions  will  be  noticed  in  the  followhig  lists. 


Formation  op  Second  and  Third  Roots. 
FIRST    CONJUGATION. 


-^ 


164:.     In  regular  verbs  of  this  conjugation,  the  second  root 
ends  in  dv,  and  the  third  in  at;  as,  amo,  amav^,  amatwm. 

The  following  list  contains  such  regular  verbs  of  this  conjugation 
fts  are  of  most  frequent  occurrence. 


11* 


yf-^^Ot  THE 

•%H  IV  BE  SIT 


126 


VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIHD    ROOTS. 


§164. 


Note.  In  this  and  subsequent  lists,  those  Tcrbs  which  are  marked  *  are  said  to  have 
no  perfect  participle ;  those  marked  t  to  have  no  present  participle.  A  da5h{— )  after 
the  present,  denotes  that  there  is  no  second  root.  The  participles  in  rw.t  and  dus,  and 
the  supines  in  utn  and  u  which  are  in  use,  are  indicated  respectively  by  the  letters  r.,  t/., 
172.,  and  u.  AbuntJo,  for  example,  has  no  perfect  participle,  no  supine,  no  participle  in 
dus  ;  but  it  has  a  pnssent  participle,  and  a  piurticiple  in  rus. 

In  the  lists  of  irrt^ular  Terbs,  those  compounds  only  are  giren.  whose  conjugation  dif- 
fers from  that  of  their  simples. 

AVhen  p.  is  subjoined  to  a  deponent  rerb.  it  denotes  that  some  of  the  parts  which  hare 
commonly  an  active  nfeaning,  are  used  either  actively  and  passively,  or  passively  alone. 
Such  verbs  are  by  some  grammarians  called  common.    Cf.  J  142,  4,  (b.) 


♦Abnndo,  r.  to  overflow. 

Accuse,  m.r.d.  to  accuse. 

t  Adumbro,  to  delineaie. 

.£dif  Ico,  r.  d.  to  build. 

.£qiio,  r.  d.  to  level. 

JE^tlmo,  T.  d.  to  value. 

♦Arabulo,  m.  d.  to  walk. 

Arao,  r.  d.  to  love. 

fAmplio,  d.  to  enlarge. 

Api)eUo,  d.  to  calL 

Apto,  d.  to  Jit. 

Aro,  r.  d.  to  plough. 

♦t  Ausculto,  to  listen. 

*t  Autumo,  to  asse7't. 

tBa-sio,  — ,  d.  to  kiss. 

♦Bello,  m.  r.  d.  to  v>age 
war. 

tBeo,  to6?es». 

*Boo,  to  bellow. 

tBrC'vio,  to  shorten. 

jCaeco,  to  blind. 

tCjelo,  to  carve. 

fCalceo,  d.  to  shoe. 

*tCalcitro,  to  kick. 

Canto,  m.  to  sittg. 

Capto,  rn.  r.  d.  to  seize. 

t  Ca.stigo,  m.  d.  to  thastise. 

Celebro,  d.  to  celebrate. 

Celo,  d.  to  conceal. 

Cesso,  d.  to  cease. 

Certo,  r.  d.  to  strive. 

Clfimo,  to  shout. 

Cogito,  d.  to  think. 

Couci  1  io,  r.  d.  to  conciliate. 

Considero,  r.  d.  to  con- 
sider. 

Cremo,  d.  to  bum. — con- 
cremo,  r. 

tCreo,  r.  d.  to  create. 

Crucio,  d.  to  tormeni. 

rv'nrt*.  r.  fl.  to  blame. 

•  Oriaeo,  d.  *c  wedgt  tn. 
CuTX),  r.  d.  to  care  for. 
Damno,  m.  r.  d.  to  con^ 

demn. 
Decoro,  d.  to  adorn. 

*  ■  l^ciTiieo.  to  lilineate 
l>«8id^ro,  r.  d.  to  desire 


Desttno,  d.  to  design. 

Dico,  m.  r.  d.  to  dedicate. 

Dicto,  to  dictate. 

IDolo,  to  hew. 

Dono,  r.  d.  to  bestow. 

Duplico,  r.  d.  to  double. 

Duro,  r.  to  harden. 

tEfflgio,  to  poi'tray. 

tEnucleo,  to  explain. 

Equito,  to  i-ide. 

Erro,  to  wander. 

Existlmo,  u.  r.  d.  to  think. 

Explore,  m.  d.  to  search. 

Exsiilo,  m.  r.  to  be  ban- 
ished. 

Fabrico,  d.  to- frame. 

tFatlgo,  r.  d.  to  weary. 

Festino,  r.  to  hasten. 

Firmo,  r.  d.  to  strengthen. 

Flag!  to,  m.  d.  to  demand. 

*Flagro,  r.  to  be  on  fire. — 
coiiflagro,  r. — denagro. 

Flo,  d.  to  blow. 

Forrao,  r.  d.  to  form. 

Foro,  d.  to  bore. 

tFraudo,  d.  to  defraud. 

tFreno,  to  bridle. 

tFrio,  — ,  to  crumble. 

Fugo,  r.  d.  to  put  to  flight. 

fFundo,  r.  to  foun/L 

fFurio,  — ,  to  madden. 

fGaleo,  — ,  to  pui  on  a 
helmet. 

Gesto,  d.  to  bear. 

Glacio,  — ,  to  congeal. 

Gravo,  d.  to  weigh  doion. 

Gusto,  d.  to  taste. 

Hablto,  m.  d.  to  dweU. 

*Halo,  — ,  to  breaOie. 

Hiemo,  m.  to  winter. 

*Hio,  d.  to  aape. 

\  hOjQt;,  I.  d.  to  bury. 

Ignoro,  r.  d.  to  be  igno- 
rant of. 

Impero,  r.  d.  to  command. 

timpetro,  r.  d.  to  obtain. 

Inch'X!,  "  'c  begin 

inda^,  r.  d.  to'  tr<ice  out. 


Indico,  m.  r.  d.  to  shoio. 
flnebrio, — ,  to  inebriate. 
Initio,  to  initiate. 
Inquino,  to  jwllute. 
Instauro,  d.  to  renew. 
Intro,  r.  d.  to  enter.     , 
Invito,  d.  to  invite. 
Irrito,  r.  d.  to  initate. 
Itero,  u.  d,  to  do  again. 
Jacto,  r,  d.  to  throw. 
Judico,  r.  d.  to  judge. 
Jugo,  d.  to  couple. 
Jugulo,  m.  d.  to  butcher 
Juro,  d.  to  swear. 
Laburo,  r.  d.  to  labor. 
Lacero,  d.  to  tear. 
*Lacto,  to  suckle. 
t  Lauio,  d.  to  tear  inpieces. 
LAtro,  to  bark. 
Laudo,  r.  d.  to  praise. 
Laxo,  d.  to  loose. 
tLego,  to  depute. 
Livo,  r.  d.  to  lighten. 
Libero,  r.  d.  to  free. 
Libo,  d.  to  jxmr  ouL 
Li  go,  to  bituL 
ILiqno,  d.  to  melt. 
Li  to,  to  appease. 
Loco,  r.  d.  to  place. 
Lusti-o,  d,  to  survey. 
Luxiirio,  to  be  luxuriant, 
!Macto,  d.  to  sacriflce. 
ilaculo,  to  sjM,  stain. 
ILindo,  r.  d.  to  command. 
Manduco,  to  chew. 
*]\Iano,  to  flow. 
JIaturo,  d.*to  ripen. 
Alemoro,  u.  d.  to  telL 
*Meo,  to  go. 
*Migro,  u.  r.  d.  to  dt^par* 
*MlIItu,  in.  I    w  ser7^  as 

'1  s"lflier 
tMinio,  d.  to  paint  red, 
ilinistro,  d.  to  serve. 

JiitigO,  d.  to  p>.u:yu. 

Wonstrn,   r      ic    ikuu.^ 

fdeinonstro,  d 
>luto.  r.  d.  to  rhuattfii 


§165. 


VERLS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


127 


Narro,  r.  d.  to  tell. 

Nfito,  m.  r.  to  swim.  _ 

*Natiseo,  to  be  sea-sick. 

tXavigo,  r.  d.  to  skU. 

Niivo,  r,  d.  to  perform. 

Nego,  m.  r.  d.  to  deny. 

*No,  to  swi7ii. 

Notnluo,  r.  d.  to  name. 

Noto,  d.  to  mark. 

Novo,  r.  d.  to  renew. 

Nudo,  d.  to  make  bare. 

Nuncupo,  r.  d.  to  name, 

Nuntio,  m.  r.  to  tell. — 
renuutio,  d. 

*Nuto,  r.  to  nod. 

Obsecro,  m.  r.  d.  to  be- 
seech. 

Obti-unco,  r.  to  kill. 

Onero,  r.  d.  to  load. 

Opto,  d.  to  wish. 

tOrbo,  r.  to  bereave. 

Orno,  r.  d.  to  adorn. 

Oro,  m.  r.  d.  to  beg. 

Paco,  d.  to  subdue. 

Paro,  r.  d.  to  prepare. 
comparo,  d.  to  compare. 

Patro,  r.  d.  to  perform. 

*Pecco,  r.  d.  to  sin. 

fPio,  d.  to  propitiate. 

Place,  r.  d.  to  appease. 

Ploro,  m.  d.  to  bewail. 

Porto,  u.  r.  d.  to  carry.  . 

Postulo,  m.  r.  d.  to  de- 
mand. 

Pilvo,  d.  to  deprive. 

Probo,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  ap- 
prove.— comprobo,  m. 

Profligo,  d.  to  rout. 

Propero,  d.  to  hasten. 

*tPropIno,  to  drink  to. 

Propitio,  d.  to  apj)ease. 

Pugiio,  r.  d.  to  Jiyht. 

Pulso,  d.  to  beat. 

Purgo,  u.  r.  d.  to  cleanse. 


Puto,  d.  to  reckon. 

Quapso,  d.  to  shake. 

Eadio,  to  emit  rays. 

Rapto,  d.  to  drag  away. 

Kecupero,  m.  r.  d.  to  re- 
cover. 

Recuso,  r.  d.  to  refuse. 

Eeduiido,  to  overflow. 

Regno,  r.  d.  to  rtde. 

fRepudio,  r.  d.  to  reject. 

Resero,  d.  to  unlock. 

*tRetallo, — ,  to  retaliate. 

Rlgo,  to  water. 

Rogo,  m.  r.  d.  to  ask. 

Roto,  to  whirl  around. 

Sacrif  ico,  m.  to  sacrifice. 

Sacro,  d.  to  consecrate. 

fSaglno,  d.  to  fatten. 

Sal  to,  r.  to  dance. 

Saluto,  m.  r.  d.  to  salute. 

Sano,  r.  d.  to  heal. 

Satio,  to  satiate. 

tSaturo,  to  fill. 

Saucio,  d.  to  loound. 

*Secundo,  to  prosper. 

Sedo,  m.  d.  to  allay. 

Servo,  r.  d.  to  keep. 

*tSibilo,  to  hiss. 

Sicco,  d.  to  dry. 

Slgno,  r.  d.  to  mark  out. — 
assigno,  m. 

Simiilo,  r.  d.  to  pretend. 

Socio,  d.  to  associate. 

*Somnio,  to  dream. 

Specto,  111.  r.  d.  to  behold. 

Spero,  r.  d.  to  hope. 

*Spiro,  to  breathe. — con- 
splro.  —  exspiro,  r.  — 
suspiro,  d. 

Spolio,  m.  d.  to  rob. 

Spumo,  to  foam. 

Stillo,  to  drop. 

Stimulo,  to  goad. 

Stipo,  to  stuff'. 


Sudo,  to  sweat. 

Suff'oco,  to  strangle. 

SiigUlo,  d.  to  taunt. 

Siipero,  r.  d.  to  overcome. 

Suppedito,  to  afford. 

*Suppllco,  m.  to  suppli- 
cate. 

*SusuiT0,  to  whisper. 

Tardo,  to  delay. 

Taxo,  d.  to  rate. 

Temero,  d.  to  defile. 

Tempero,  r.  d.  to  temper. 
— obtempero,  r.  to  obey. 

Tento,  m,  r.  d.  to  ti'y. 

Tercbro,  to  bore. 

TermiiK),  r.  d.  to  limit. 

Titubo,  to  stagger. 

Tolei-o,  u.  r.  d.  to  bear. 

Tracto,  u.  d.  to  handle. 

^fTripudio,  to  dance. 

Triumplit),  r.  to  triumph. 

Trucido,  r.  d.  to  kill. 

Turbo,  d.  to  disturb. 

*Vaco,  to  be  at  leisure. 

*Vapulo,  m.  d.  to  be  beat- 
en. Cf.  §  142,  3. 

Vario,  to  diversify. 

Vasto,  d.  to  lay  waste. 

Vellico,  to  pluck. 

Verbero,  r.  d.  to  beat. 

*VestIgo,  to  search  for. 

Vexo,  d.  to  tease. 

Vibro,  d.  to  brandish. 

Vigilo,  to  watch. 

Violo,  m.  r.  d.  to  violate. 

Vitio,  d.  to  vitiate. 

Vito,  u,  d.  to  shun. 

Ululo,  to  hoicl. 

Umbro,  r,  to  shade. 

Voco,  r.  d.  to  call. 

*V61o,  to  fly. 

Voro,  r.  to  devour. 

Vulgo,  r.  d.  to  publish. 

Vubiero,  d.  to  wound. 


§  10^.     The  following  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  are  either 
irrejTular  or  defective. 


*Crepo,  crepui,  to  make  a  noise.  *dis- 
crfpo,  -ui,  or  -avi.  increpo,  -ui  or 
-avi, -1  turn  or -atum.  *tpercrepo, — . 
=*ti'ecrepo,  — . 

*Cubo,  cubui,  {perf.  snbj.  cubai-is;  inf. 
cubasse),  cubitum  (sup.)^  to  recline. 
incubo,  -ul  o?-  avi,  d.  Those  comr- 
pounds  of  cubo  which  take  m  before 
b,  are  of  the  third  conjugation. 

Do,  dedi",  datum,  m.  r.  d.  to  give. — 
So  circumdo,  pessumdc,  satfsdo,  and 


venurado ;  the  other  compounds  of  do 

are    of  the    third  conjugation.     See 

§  163,  Exc.  1. 
Domo,  domui,  domitum,  r.  d.  to  tame. 
Frico,  fricui,  frictum  or  fricatum,  d. 

torvi.     confrico, — ,-atum.  (SoiuM- 

co.  defrico,  — ,  -atum  or  -ctum. 
Juvo,  juvi,  jutum,  r.  d.,  also  juvatu- 

rus,  to  help,   adjuvo,  -juvi,  -jutum, 

m.  r.  d.  also  adjuvaturus. 
*Labo,  labaase,  to  totter. 


128 


VERBS. SECOND   AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


§166. 


Liivo,  lavi,  rar.  irivavi,  lavatum,  lautum 

or  Intuin;  Csi(/^./laiitumo/' hivfitum, 

lavatiinis,  d.  to  wash,     I.avo  is  also 

soiuttiines  of  Uie  third  cojijuyntion. 
*^Iico,   micui,  d.    to  glitttr.     dimico, 

-avi   or  -ui,  -atunis.    *eniico,  -ui, 

-aturus.    *iiitennlco,  — .     *promI- 

co,  — ,  d.  , 

Kf'co,  necavi  or  necni,  necatnm,  r.  d. 

tu  kill,     eneco,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum,  or 

-ctiun,  d.     tinteraeco,  — ,  -atum. 
*tNexo,  — ,  to  tie. 
riicrt,  — ,  plicatum,  to  foUI.    dupHco, 

-avi,  -atum,  r.  d.     multiplico  and  re- 

plico  have  -avi,  -atum,     *suppIjco, 

-avi,   m.   r.     applico,    -avi    or    -ui, 

-atum  or  -itum,  -iturus.   So  implico. 

— compllco,    -ui,  -itum    or    atum. 

explico,  -avi  or  -ui,  -atum  or  -Itum, 

-aturus  or  -iturus. 
POto,  potavi,  potatum  or  potum,  r.  r. 

m.  m.  d.  to  drink.     fepOto,  -avi,  -um. 

— *perpdto,  -avi. 
Seco,  secui,  sectum,  secaturus,  d.  to 

Remark  1.  The  principal  irregularity,  in  verbs  of  the  first  and  second  con- 
jup:!\tions,  consists  in  the  omission  of  tfie  connecting  vowel  in  the  second  root, 
and  the  change  of  the  long  vowels  a  and  e  in  the  third  root  into  t.  The  v  re- 
maining at  the  end  of  the  second  root,  when  it  follows  a  consonant,  is  pro- 
nounced as  u  ;  as,  cttbo^  (cubavi,  by  syncope  cubvi),  i.  e.  cubui;  {ctdfoium,  by 
change  of  the  connecting  vowel,)  cvhltum.  Sometimes  in  the  first  conjugation, 
and  very  frequently  in  the  second,  the  connecting  vowel  is  omitted  in  tlie  third 
root  also;  as,  juco,  (are)  jUvi,  Jutum;  teneo,  (ere)  tetiui,  tentum.  In  the  second 
conjugation  several  verbs  whose  general  root  ends  in  d  and  </,  and  a  few  others 
of  dillereut  tenninations,  fonn  either  their  second  or  third  root  or  both,  like 
verbs  of  the  thu"d  conjugation,  by  adding  s ;  as,  i^eo,  rlsi,  rlsum. 

Rkm.  2.  The  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  whose  perfects  take  a  redu- 
plication are  cto,  sto,  and  their  compounds. 

Rem.  3.  The  following  verbs  in  eoare  of  the  first  conjugation,  viz.  Jeo,  calceo, 
creo,  cUneo,  enucieo,  illdqueo,  coUlneo,  deUneo,  meo,  nausea,  screo  ;  eo  and  its  com- 
pounds are  of  the  fourth. 

§  IGG.  All  deponent  verbs,  of  the  first  conjugation,  are  regular, 
and  are  conjugated  like  miror,  §  161 ;  as, 


cut. — *circnmseco,  — .  *intersfco, 
— ,  d.  *perstco,  -ui.  proeseco,  -ui, 
-tum  or  -atum.     So  restco,  d. 

*Sono,  sonui,  -aturus,  d.  to  sound. 
*conPono,  -ui.  So  ex-,  in-,  per-, 
prae-sono.  *res6no,  -avi.  *assouo, 
— .     So  circum.«ono  and  dissono. 

*Sto,  steti,  statunis,  to  stniuL  *an- 
testo,  -steti.  So  circiimsto,  intersto, 
supers  to. — Its  comjmunds  with  mo- 
nosyllabic prejx)sitions  have  stiti; 
as,  *consto,  -stlti,  -staturus.  So  ex- 
sto,  insto,  obsto,  persto.  *pra?pto, 
-stlti,  -staturus,  d.  *adsto  or  asto, 
-stlti,  -stitunis.  *prosto,  -stiti.  So 
resto,  restiti:  butsubj.  perf.  restave- 
rit,  Propert,  2,  34,  53.  *disto,  — . 
So  substo  and  supersto. 

*T6no,  tonui,  to  thunder.  So  circum- 
tono.  attono,  -ui,  -itum.  intono, 
-ui,  -atum.    *ret6no,  — . 

Veto,  vetui,  rarely  avi,  vetitum,  to 
forbid. 


Abomlnor,  d.  to  abhor. 
Adulor,  d.  to  flatter. 
iEmiilor,  d.  to  invaL 
Ancillor,  to  be  a  handmaid. 
*Apricor,  to  bask  in  Hie 

sun. 
Arbitror,  r.  d.  to  think. 
Aspemor,  d.  p.  to  despise. 
Aucupor,  r.  p.    to   hunt 

after. 
Auxilior,  p.  to  help. 
Aversor,  d.  to  dislike. 
Bacchor,  p.  to  revtl. 
Calumnior,  to  censure  »«- 

fairiy. 


Causor,  to  allege. 

*Comissor,  m.  to  revel 

Coral  tor,  p.  to  accompany. 

Concionor,  to  harangue. 

♦Confobiilor,  m.  to  conr- 
verse  together. 

Conor,  d.  to  endeavor. 

tConspicor,  to  see. 

Contemplor,  d.  p.  to  view 
attentively. 

Crimliior,  m.  p.  to  com- 
plain of. 

Cunctor,  d.  p.  to  delay. 

Deprecor,  m.  r.  d.  p.  to 
deprecate. 


*tDigladior,  to  fence. 
Dignor,  d.  p.  to  deemwor- 

tliy. 
D  oral  nor,  p.  to  rule. 
Epulor,  r.  d.  to  feast. 
*Famulor,  m.  to  waii  on. 
Fatur,  (defect.)  a.  d.  p. 

to  speak.  See  \  183,  6. 
tFerior,r.  to  keep  holiday. 
*Frumeutor,  m.  to  jTor- 

age. 
Furor,  m.  to  steal. 
Glorior,  r.  d.  to  boast. 
Gratulor,   m.  d.   to  oon- 

graiviute. 


§167. 


YrSBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


129 


Hariolor,  to  practise  sooth- 

sayinfj. 
Hortor,  d.  to  encourage. 
ImTror,  u.  r.  tl.  to  imitate. 
Iinligiior,  d.  to  disdain. 
Inl'itior,  d.  to  daiy. 
Insector,  lu pursue. 
Insldior,   r.    d.    to  lie  in 

tonit  for. 
liiterprOtor,  p.  to  exjilain. 
Jacfilor,  p.  to  hurl. 
Joe  or,  to  Jest. 
Lcetor,  r,  d.  p.  to  rejoice. 
Lainentor,  d.  p.  to  oeivfdl. 
*tLignor>  111.    to  gather 

icood. 
Luc  tor,  d.  to  wrestle. 
MedTcor,  r.  d.  p.  to  heal. 
Meditor,  p.  to  meditate. 
Mercor,  m.  r.  d.  p.  to  buy. 
Minor,  to  threaten. 
Mlror,  u.  r.  d.  to  admire. 
Misi-ror,  d.  to  jnty. 
ModCror,  u.  d.  to  yovern. 


Modulor,  d.  p.  to  modulate. 
Moror,  r.  d.  to  delay. 
fMutuor,  p.  to  bm-row. 
Nejjotior,  r.  to  trajfic. 
*tNugor,  to  trijle. 
Obsonoi",  in.  to  cater. 
Obtestor,  p.  to  beseech. 
Opi'i'or,  to  icork. 
Opinor,  w.  r.  d.  to  think. 
Opitiilor,  m.  to  help. 
tOlior,  to  be  at  leisure. 
Pabulor,  m.  d.  to  nraze. 
Paler,  to  wander  about. 
Percontor,  m.  to  inquire. 
Periclitor,  d.  p.  to  try. 
fPiscor,  m.  to  Jish. 
Populor,   r.  d.  p.   to  lay 

waste. 
Praidor,  m.  p.  to  plunder. 
Prc'cor,  in.  u.  r.  d.  to  pray. 
Proelior,  to  Jight. 
Recordor,  d.  to  recollect. 
Kimor,  d.  to  search^ 
Rixor,  to  quarrel. 


*Rust!cor,   to  live  in  the 

country. 
Sciscitor,  ni.  p.  toinquire. 
*Sciror,  m.  to  ask. 
Scrutor,  p.  to  search. 
Solor,  d.  to  comfort. 
Spfitior,  to  wcdlc  abrm. 
Speeulor,  m.  r.  d.  to  spy 

out. 
t  Sri  1 'filer,  p.  to  bargain, 

stipulate.  * 
fSuavior,  d.  to  kiss. 
Suspicor,  to  su.y)ect. 
Testificor,  p.   to  testify. 
Tester,  d.  p.  to  iestijy.   So 

detestor. 
Tutor,  to  defend.  > 

Vagor,  to  wander. 
VentTor,  d.  p.  tovenercUCj 

worship. 
Veuer,  m.  p.  to  hunt. 
Verser,  to  be  employed. 
Vocif  eror,  to  bawl. 


Note.  Some  deponents  of  the  first  conjugation  are  derived  from  nouns, 
and  signify  beimj  or  practising/  that  which  the  noun  denotes;  as,  ancilldri,  to  be 
a  haudmaid;  hariolari,  to  practise  soothsaying;  from  ancilla  and  harif'va. 

SECOND    CONJUGATION. 


§  107.     Verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  end  in  co,  and  form 
their  second  and  third  roots  in  u  and  it;  a^,  moneo,  monu^, 

The  following  list  contains  most  of  the  regular  verbs  of  this  conju- 
gation, and  many  also  which  want  the  second  and  third  roots : — 


*Aceo,  to  be  sour. 

*^^greo,  — ,  to  be  sick. 

*Albeo,  — ,  to  be  lohile. 

♦Arceo,  d._  to  drive  aiony; 
part.  adj.  arctus  or  ar- 
tus.  The  compounds 
change  a  into  e;  as, 
coerceo,  d.  to  restrain. 
exeroso,  r.  d.  to  exer- 
cise. 

*Areo,  to  be  dry. 

*Aveo,  — ,  to  covet. 

*-Cril<'.o,  r.  to  be  warm. 

*Calleo,  — ,  to  be  harden- 
ed. *percalleo,  to  know 
well. 

*Calveo,  — ,  to  be  bald, 

*Candeo,  to  be  loiiite. 

*Caneo,  to  be  hoary. 

*Careo,  r.  d.  to  want. 

*Ccveo,  — ,  iefawn. 


=*Clareo,  — ,  to  be  bright. 
*Clueo,  — ,  to  be  famous. 
*Denseo,  — ,  to  iliicken. 
*Diribeo,  — ,  to  sort  the 

voting  tablets. 
*D6leo,  r.  d.  to  gHeve. 
*Egeo,  r.  to  want. 
*Emiiieo,  to  rise  above. 
*Flacceo,  to  droop. 
^Flaveo,  — ,  to  be  yellow. 
^Floreo,  to  blossom. 
*Fccteo,  — ,  to  be  fetid. 
*FrTgeo,  — ,  to  be  cold. 
*Frondeo,    — ,     to   bear 

leaves. 
Habeo,  r.  d.  to  have.    The 

compounds^  except  post- 

habeo,  change  a  into  i ; 

as.  ad-,  ex-,  pro-hibeo. 

colli  beo,  d.  to  restrain. 

inhibeo,  d.   to  hinder. 


*tperliibeo,d.  toreport. 

tposthabeo,  to  postpone. 

praebeo,  {for  prailiib- 

eo),     r.    d.    to  afford. 

*pr£ehibeo,  — ,  do  beo, 

{for  dehabeo),  r.  d.  to 

010  e. 
*Hf'beo,  — ,  to  be  dull. 
*Horreo,  d.  to  be  rough. 
^Humeo.  — .  to  be  moist. 
*Jriceo,  r.  to  lie. 
*Lacteo,  — ,  to  suck. 
*Langueo,  — ,  /«  befaini. 
*Lateo,  to  he  hid. 
*Lenteo,  — ,  to  be  slow. 
*Liceo,  to  be  valued. 
*Liveo,  — ,  to  be  livid. 
=*Mriceo,  — ,  to  be  lean. 
*]\h'i(leo,  to  be  wet. 
*Msereo,  — ,  to  grieve. 
Mereo,    r.      to  deserve. 


130 


VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


H68. 


fcommSreo,  to  fully  de- 
seire.  tdemPreo,  d.  to 
6(1  i-n.  t  em  i-  reo,  to  serce 
out  one''s  time.  *tper- 
mt'reo, — ,  togotliruuyh 
seirit  e.  pn.>mereo,  to 
dtstixe. 

Bloiieo,  r.  d.  to  advise. 
adiuoneo,  m.  r.  d.  to  re- 
vtiwl.  comraoneo,  to 
iinjtress  j/yxm.  praemo- 
neo,  tojurewam. 

♦Muoeo,  — ,  to  be  viouldy. 

♦Xij^reo,  — ,  to  be  black. 

*Xiteo,  to  shitie. 

Naceo,  m.  r.  to  hurt. 

*01eo,  to  smell. 

♦Palleo,  to  bejpale. 


*P!ireo,  m.  r.  d.  to  obey. 
*rateo,  to  be  open. 
Placco,  to  j)ltuse. 
*rolleo,  — ,  to  be  able. 
*Puteo,  to  stink. 
*Putreo,  to  be  putrid. 
*neindeo,  — .  to  nlitter. 
*Rifreo,  to  be  stiff. 
*Rubeo,  to  be  red. 
*Scateo,  — ,  to  (jush  forth. 
*St'iieo,  — ,  to  be  old. 
*Slleo,  d.  to  be  silent. 
*Sordeo,  — ,  to  beflthy. 
*Splendeo,  — ,  to  shine. 
*Squilleo,  — ,  to  be  foul. 
*Sirideo,  — ,  to  creak. 
*Studeo,  d.  to  study. 
*Stupeo,  to  be  amazed. 


*Sueo,  — ,  to  be  ta  nt. 

Ti'iceo,  r.  d.  to  be  $  lent. 

*Ttpeo,  to  be  icnrr.\. 

Terreo,  d.  to  terrijy.  So 
dexerreo,  to  deter,  fab- 
sterreo,  to  deter,  tcon- 
terreo,  fexterreo,  tper- 
terreo,  to  frif/hten. 

*Tlmeo,  d.  to  fear. 

*Torpeo,  — ,  to  be  stiff. 

*Tumeo,  to  sicell. 

*Va,leo,  r.  to  be  able. 

*Vcgeo,  — ,  to  arouse. 

*Vieo,  — ,  to  plait.  Pa. 
vietus,  shriveled. 

*Vigeo,  to  flourish. 

*Vireo,  to  be  gr^en. 

*Uveo,  — ,  to  be  moist. 


§  108*  The  following  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  are  ir- 
regular in  their  second  or  third  roots  or  in  both. 

Note  1.  As  the  proper  form  of  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation  is,  o,  avi,  attim, 
of  the  fourth  to,  iw,  itunifs^o  that  of  the  second  would  be  go,  evi,  Hum.  Very 
few  of  tlie  latter  conjugation,  however,  retain  this  form,  but  most  of  them,  as 
noticed  in  §  1G5,  Rem.  1,  drop  in  the  second  root  the  connecting  vowel,  e,  and 
those  in  rt'f)  drop  iY ;  as,  a/rco,  (cdv^vi)  cdvi,  (cdoetum  or  cdrUum)  cautum. 
Others,  imitating  the  form  of  those  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  whose  gen- 
eral r<x)t  ends  in'  a  consonant,  add  s  to  form  the  second  and  third  roots.  Cf. 
^  165,  Rem.  1,  and  ^171. 

Note  2.  Four  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation  take  a  reduplication  in  the 
parts  formed  from  the  second  root,  viz.  mordeo,  pendeo,  spojideo,  and  tondeo. 
See  ^  163,  Rem. 


Aboleo,  -evi,  -itum,  r.  d.  to  ejfoce. 

*Algeo,  alsi,  to  be  cold. 

Ardeo,  arsi,  arsum,  r.  to  bum. 

Audeo,  ausus  hum,  {rarely ausi,  whence 
ausim,  ^  183,  R.  1,)  r.  d.  to  dare.    ' 

Augeo,  auxi,  ai\ctum,  r.  d.  to  increase. 

Caveo,  cavi,  cautum,  m.  d.  to  beionre. 

Censeo,  censui,  censum,  d.  to  think. 
recenseo,  -ui,  -um  w  -itura.  *per- 
censeo,  -ui.     *succenseo,  -ui,  d. 

Cieo,  cTvi,  citura,  to  excite.  There  is 
a  cof/n-ate  foi'm,  cio,  tf  the  fourth 
conjxyntion,  both  of  the  simple  verb 
and  of  its  comjmimfs.  The  penult  of 
the  pnrtiiiples  excitus  and  concitus 
is  common,  and  tluU  of  accitus  is  al- 
tcays  Umg. 

*CounIveo,  -nlvi,  to  wink  at. 

Deleo,  -evi,  -etum,  d.  to  blot  out. 

Duceo,  docui,  doctum,  d.  to  teach. 

♦  Fs'iveo,  favi,  fan  turns,  to  favor. 

*Ferveo,  ferbui,  to  b<)iL  Sometimes 
ferv'o,  vi,  of  the  third  conjugation. 

Fleo,  flevi,  fi'etum,  r.  d.  to  weep. 

Foveo,  fovi,  fotum,  d.  to  cherish. 


*Fulgeo,  fulsi,  to  shine.    Fulgo,  of  the 

third  conjugation,  is  also  in  use. 
Gaudeo,   gavisus  sum,  r.    to  rejoice. 

§  142,  2. 
*Hfereo,  haesi,  hassunis,  to  stick.    So 

ad-,  CO-,  in-,  ob-  haereo ;  but  *subhaB- 

reo,  — . 
Indulgeo,  indulsi,  indultnm,  r.  d.  to  in- 

dtdge. 
Jubeo,  jussi,  jussum,  r.  d.  to  order. 
*Luceo,  luxi,  to  shine.  poMceo,  -luxi, 

-luctum. 
*Lugeo,  luxi,  d.  to  mourn. 
*Maneo,  mansi,  mansum,  m.  r.  d.  to 

remain. 
Misceo,  miscui,  mistum  or  mixtum, 

misturus,  d.  to  mix. 
Mordeo,  momordi,  morsum,  d.  to  Ule. 

remordeo,  -di,  -morsum,  r. 
Moveo,  movi,  mutum,  r.  d.  to  move. 
Mulceo,  rnulsi,  mulsum,  d.   to  soothe. 

pei-rai-iceo,  permulsi,  permiUsum  and 

pen^iulctum,  to  rub  gently. 
*Mulgeo,  mulsi    or    mulxi,    to  milk. 

emulgeo,  — ,  emulsum,  to  mdk  oui. 


§  169-171.  VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS 


131 


Neo,  nevi,  neturn,  to  spin. 
♦Pfiveo,  pfivi,  d.  to  ftar. 
*ren(leo,  pepeudi,  ^to  hung,     ^impen- 

deo,  — .     propendeo,  — ,  propensum. 
Pleo,  (obsolete),    conpleo,  -evi,  -etum, 

tujill.    So  the  other  compounds. 
Pniiideo,  prandi,  pranj^unj,  r.  to  dine. 
Rideo,  lisi,  risum,  m.  r.  d.  to  laugh. 
*St*deo,   sGdi,   sessiim,   m.   r.    to    sit. 

The  co7npounds  toith  monosyllabic  j)re- 

positions  diange  e  into  i,  in  the  first 

root ;   as,  iiisideo,  insedi,  insessuin. 

*dissideo,  -stjdi.     So  prsesideo,  and 

rarely  circunisideo. 
Suleo,  solitus  Slim  and  rarely  solui,  to 

be  accustomed.    §  142,  2. 
*Sorbeo,  sorbui,  to  suck  in.     So  *ex- 

sorbeo :  but  *resorbeo,  — .     *absor- 

beo,  -sorbui  or  -sorpsi. 


Spondeo,  spopondi,  sponsunG  -o  pro- 
mise. See  §  163,  Rem. 

*Stri(leo,  Idi,  to  whiz. 

Suadeo,  siiusi,  siiii-Tun,  r.  d.  to  advise 

Teiieo,  tt-niii,  tentuin,  r.  d.  to  hold.  The. 
compounds  ihange  e  into  i  m  the  Jirst 
ana  second  roots;  as,  detiueo,  uetl- 
nui,  detentura.  *attineo, -tiiiui.  So 
pertiiieo. 

Ter^eo,  tersi,  tersum,  to  wipe,  Tergo, 
oj'the  third  conjuyation,  is  also  in  use. 

Tondeo,  totoiidi,  toiisum,  to  shear.  The 
compounds  have  tlie  jierfett  tondi. 

Torqueo,  torsi,  tortuin,  d.  to  ticist. 

Torreo,  toiTui,  tostuni,  to  roast. 

*Turgeo,  tursi,  to  swell. 

*Urgeo  01'  urgueo,  ursi,  d.  to  urge. 

Video,  vidi,  visum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  see. 

Voveo,  vovi,  votum,  d.  to  vofio. 


§  160.     Impersonal  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation. 


D^cet,  decuit,  it  becomes.  ^ 

Libet,  libuit  or  libitum  est,  it  pleases, 

is  agreeable. 
Licet,  licuit  or  licitum  est,  it  is  lawful, 

or  permitted. 
Liquet,  liquit,  it  is  clear,  evident. 
MisCret,    miseruit  w   miseritura   est, 

it  moves  to  pity ;  miseret  me,  I p>ity. 
Oportet,  opoi'tuit,  it  behooves. 

Note.   Lubet  is  sometimes  %vritten  for  libet,  especially  in  the  comic  writers. 
§  i^O.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Second  Conjugation. 


Piget,  piguit  or  pigitum  est,  d.  it  trou- 
bles, grieves, 

Pcehltet,  poenitTiit,  poenitunis,  d.  it  re- 
pents ;  poenitet  me,  1  regret. 

Pudet,  puduit  or  pudituin  est,  d.;  t< 
shames ;  pudet  me,  /  am  ashamed. 

Tsedet,  tagduit  or  titsum  est,  it  disgusts 
or  wearies,   pertsedet,  pertajsum  est. 


Fateor,  fassns,  r.  d.  p.  to  confess.  The 
compounds  change  a  into  i  in  the  first 
root,  and  into  e  in  the  third ;  as,  con- 
fiteor,  confessus,  d.  p.  to  acknowl- 
edge. *tditriteor,  to  deny,  profi- 
teor,  professus,  d.  p.  to  declare. 

Liceor,  licitus,  to  bid  a  price. 


*Medeor,  d.  to  cure. 
Mereor,  raerltus,  to  deserve. 
Mistreor,  miseritus  o?*  miserttis,  topitg, 
PoUiceor,  poUicifus,  p.  to  promise. 
Reor,  ratus,  to  think,  suppose. 
Tueor,  tuitus,  d.  p.  to  protect. 
Vereor,  veritus,  d.  p.  to  fear. 


^ 


THIRD    CONJUGATION. 


171.  In  the  third  conjugatiop,  when  the  first  root  ends 
with  a  consonant,  the  second  root  is  regularly  formed  by  adding 
s  ;  when  it  ends  with  a  vowel,  the  first  and  second  roots  are  the 
sjime :  the  third  root  is  formed  by  adding  t ;  as,  carpo,  carps/, 
carptt^m;  arguo,  argu/,  argutwm. 

In  annexing  s  and  t,  certain  changes  occur  in  the  final  consonant 
of  the  root : — 

I.  The  palatals  c,  g,  gu,  and  also  h,  at  the  end  of  the  first  root,  form  "with  f 
the  double  letter  x  in  the  second  root;  in  the  third  rcot,  cjemains,  and  the 
others  are  changed  into  c  before  t;  as,  dico,  {dicsi,  i.  e.),  dixi,  dictum;  regOf 
{regsij  i.  e.),  7'exi,  rectum;  veho,  vexi,  vectuvi ;  cOquo,  cuci,  cocium. 


132  VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS.  §  171. 

Note,  lluo  and  slrm  form  their  second  and  third  roots  after  the  analogy  of 
verbs  whc  se  first  root  ends  in  a  palatal  or  lu 

2.  B  is  changed  into  p  before  s  and  t ;  as,  scrlbo^  scripsi,  scriptum. 

3.  D  and  t,  before  s,  are  either  dropped,  or  changed  into  s  ,•  as,  daudo,  claud; 
cedo,  ctssi;  niiito,  mlsi.  Cf.  §  56,  I,  Rem.  1.  After  m,  p  is  sometimes  inserted 
before  s  and  / ;  as,  sumo,  sumpsi,  sumptum.  R  is  changed  to  s  before  s  and  t  in 
gero  and  uro. 

4.  Some  other  consonants  are  dropped,  or  changed  into  «,  in  certain  verbs. 

Exc.  J.  IMany  verbs  whose  first  root  ends  in  a  consonant,  do  not 
add  s  to  form  the  second  root. 

(a.)  Of  these,  ?ome  have  the  second  root  the  same  as  the  first,  but  the  vowel 
of  the  second  root,  if  a  monosyllable,  is  long;  as, 

Blbo,        Excudo,        Ico,  Mando,  Scabo,  Solvo,       Verro, 

Edo,         FOdio,  Lambo,     '  Prehendo,       Scando,  Strldo,      Verto, 

Emo,        Fugio,  Lt'go,  Psallo,  Sido,  Tollo,       Volvo; 

to  which  add  the  compounds  of  the  obsolete  cando,  fe^ndo,  and  nuo. 

(6.)  Some  make  a  change  in  the  first  root.  Of  these,  some  change  a  vowel, 
some  drop  a  consonant,  some  prefix  a  reduplication,  others  admit  two  or  more 
of  ^ese  changes ;  as, 

AgO;  egi.  Capio,  cepi.       ,        Facio,  feci. 

,       Findo,  fidi.  Frango,  fregi.    *        Fundo,  fiidi. 

Jacio,  jeci.  Linquo,  llqui.  Rumpo,  riipi. 

Scindo,  scidi.        Sisto,  stiti.  Vinco,  vici. 

Those  wliich  have  a  reduplication  are 

Ci'ido,  cecidi.  Caedo,  cecidi.  Cano,  ceclni. 

Curro,  ciicurri.  Disco,  didlci.  Fallo^  fefelli. 

Pago,  {obs.)  pepigi  Parco,  peperci.  Pario,  peperi. 

and  pegi.  Pedo,  pepedi.  Pello,  pepuli. 

Pendo,  pC'pendi.  Posco,  poposci.  Pungo,  piipiigi. 

Tango,  tetigi.  Tendo,  tetendi.  Tundo,  tutudi. 

Exc.  2.  Some,  after  the  analogy  of  the  second  conjugation,  add  u 
to  the  first  root  of  the  verb ;  as, 

Alo,  alui,  etc.      Consulo,         Gemo,  Rapio,  Tr6mo, 

Colo,  '    Depso,  Geno,  (ois.)         Strepo,         Volo, 

Compesco,  Fremo,  Molo,  Texo,  Vomo. 

Meto,  messui ;  and  pdno,  pdsui;  add  su,  with  a  change  in  the  root. 

Exc.  3.  Tlie  following,  after  the  analogy  of  the  fourth  conjugation, 
add  Iv  to  the  first  root : — 

Arcesso,        Cupio,  Lacesso,        Rudo,        Tero,  droppina  §. 

Capesso,        Incesso,        Peto,  Quoero,  v^th  a  chanr/e  ofx  into  Sj 

Exc.  4.  The  following  add  u,  with  a  chano;e  In  the  root;  those  m 
no  and  sco  dropping  n  and  sc,  and  those  having  er  before  n  changing 
It  to  7-e  or  rd : — 

Cresco,         Pasco,  Scisco,         Spemo,         Lino,         Sero, 

Nosco,        ..Quiesco,         Cenio,  Stemo,  Sino,         iosoro. 

Exc.  5.  (a.)  The  third  root  of  verbs  whose  first  root  ends  in  d  or  <, 
and  some  in  //,  add  .<?,  instead  of  t,  to  the  root,  either  dropping  the  </,  <, 
and^,  or  changing  them  Into  5;  as,  claudo,  clausum;  defcndo,  de- 
fens  um;  cedo,  cessum;  Jiecto,  Jiexum ;  Jigo,  Jixum.  But  the  com- 
pounds of  lo  add  It;  as,  perdo,  perdilwti. 


§  172.  VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS.  133 

(&.)  The  following,  also,  add  s,  with  a  change  of  the  root : — 

Excello,  Fallo,  Pello,  Spargo,  Verro. 

Percello,  Mergo,  Premo,  Velio, 

Exc.  6.  The  following  add  t,  with  a  change  of  the  root ;  those 
having  n,  nc,  nfj,  nqu,  or  mj)  at  the  end  of  the  first  root  dropping  n 
and  in  in  the  third  : — 

Cerno,      Fingo,         Gero,      Sero,        Spemo,        Stringo,        Uro, 
Colo,         Fraiigo,       Rumpo,  Sisto,        Sterno,         Tero,  Vinco; 

to  Avhich  add  the  compoixnds  of  linquo,  and  verbs  in  sco  with  the  second  root 
inv;  the  latter  di'op  sc  before  i;  as,  nosco,  not%  notum;  except /jcwco,  which 
drops  c  only. 

Exc.  7.    (a.)   The  following  have  it : — 

Bibo,  Elicio,  SIulo,        Fvno,  with  a  chnn(;e  of  on  into  6s. 

Geuo,  (obs.  form  of  g\^o,)      Vomo,       Sino,  dropinny  n. 

(b.)  The  following,  like  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  add  It  to 
the  first  root : — 

Arcesso,  Cupio,  Peto,  Tero,  dropping  6. 

Fticesso,  Lacesso,  (^wshto^  wiOi  a  change  of  x  into  ^. 

For  other  irregularities  occurring  in  this  conjugation,  see  §  172-174. 

§  \72.  The  following  list  contains  most  of  the  simple  verbs, 
both  regular  and  irregular,  in  the  third  conjugation,  with  such  of 
their  compounds  as  require  particular  notice : — 

Acuo,  acui,  acutum,  d.  to  sharpen.  -cinui.    So  occino,  praecino.    *accl- 

Ago,  egi,  actum,  r.  d.  to  drive.    So  cir-        no,  — .     So  incluo,  intercino,  succl- 
cumago,  cogo,  and  p6rago.    *ambi-        no,  reclno.    , 

go,  — ,   to  doubt.     So  ^atago.     The  *Capesso,  -Ivi,  r.  d.  to  undertake, 

other  compouiuls  change  a  into  I,  in  Capio,  cepi,  captum,  r.  d.  to  take.  So 
Vie  first  root ;  as,  exigo,  exegi,  ex-  antecapio.  The  other  compounds 
actum,  to  drive  out.  *prodIgo,  -egi,  change  a  into  I,  in  tJie  frst  rout,  and 
to  squander.  See  ^  189,  2.  into  e  in  the  third;  as^  declpio,  doce- 

Alo,  iilui,  altum,  and  later  alltum,  d.        pi,  deceptum. 

to  nourish.  Carpo,  carpsi,  carptum,  d.   to  pluck, 

*An(ro,  an^'i,  to  strangle.  The  comjxmrids  mange  a  intoe;  «, 

Argiio,  ai-gui,  argutum,  d.  to  convict.  decerpo,  decerpsi,  decerptum. 

Arcesso,  -cessivi,  -cessitum,  r.  d.   to  Cedo,  cessi,  cessum,  r.  to  yield, 

call  for.  Pass.  in/,  arcessiri  or  ar-  Cello,  (oiso/e/e.)  excello,  -cellui, -cel- 
cessi.  sum,   to  excel.    *antecello,  — .     8o 

*Batuo,  biitui,  d.  to  heat.  praecello,    riicello.      percello,    -cilli, 

Bibo,  bibi,  bibitum,  d.  to  drink.  -culsum,  to  stnke. 

*Cado,  ct'Cidi,  casurus,  to  full.    The  Cerno,  crevi,  cretum,  d.  to  Jecrte. 

compounds  diange  a,  into  I,  in  the  frst  *Cerno,  — ,  to  see. 

root,  and  drop  the  reduplication  ;  as,  Cingo,  cinxi,  cinctum,  d.  to  gird. 

•  occido,  -cidi,  -cilsum,  r.  to  set.  *Clango,  — ,  to  chmg. 

C.Tdo,  cfciili,  cresum,  r.  d.  tocut.    The  Claudo,  clausi,  clausum,  r.  d.  to  shut, 

compounds  than ge  X.  intoi,  (md  drop  T lie  compounds  change  au  into  \\\  as, 
the  reduplication;  as,  occido,  -cIdi,  occludo,  occlusi,  occlusum,  to  shut 
-cisnm.  up. 

Cando,  {obsolete,)  sipionymous  with  can-  *t  Claudo,  — ,  to  limp. 

dec  of  the  sicond  conjugation,    /fence  *tClt'po,  clepsi,  rardtj  cleni,  to  steal. 

accendo, -cendi,-ceusum,  d.  toA;mJ/e.  Colo,  colui,  cultum,  d.  to  till,  tojiiciilo, 
/So  iiic3ndo,  succendo.  -cuJui, -culmm, -d.  ^» /iiWt. 

*Cano,  ceclni,  d.  _tosin^.     The  com-  Cdmo,  eompsi,  coniptnin, /«/ </e(A;. 

pounds  change  a  into  I;  as,  *concIno,  *Compcsco,  -pescui,  to  restruiu. 
12 


134 


TERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


§172. 


Consiilo,  -siilm,  -sultum,  m.  r.  d.  to 
constUL 

Ctiqno,  coxi,  coctum,  m.  d.  to  cooh, 

Cri'ilo,  crecUdi,  crcdituin,  r.  d.  to  b&- 
liefe. 

♦Cresco,  crevi,  to  ffroio.  concresco, 
-crevi,  -cretum. 

Cubo  is  of  the  Jirst  ccmjugation.  Cf. 
§165.  *accuinbo,-cubui,  to/ie(7</JCTi. 
(&»  the  (Aher  comptiuntlg  iclili  h  insert  m. 

*Cuilo,  — ,  to  j'uvye.  excudo,  -cudi, 
-cusum,  d.  to  stamp. 

Cuj)iOj  cupivi.  cupmim,  d.  to  desire. 
Subj.  iniptrf.  cuplret.  Lucr.  1,  72. 

♦CuiTO,  cucurri,  cursunis,  to  run. 
concnrro,  succurro,  and  transcurro, 
drop  the  reduplication;  the  other  com- 
pounds sometimes  drop,  and  sometimes 
retain  it;  as,  decurro,  decurri,  and 
decucnrri,  decui-sum.  *ant6curro, 
— .     So  circumciiiTo. 

*Dego,  dngi,  d.  to  live. 

Demo,  deinpsi,  dcmptum,  r.  d.  to  take 
away. 

f  Depso,  depsui,  depstum,  to  knead. 

Dico,  dixi,  dictum,  ii.  r.  d.  to  saw. 

♦Disco,  didici,  disciturus,  d.  to  learn. 

♦Dispesco,  — ,  to  separate. 

Dlvido,  di\nsi,  divlsiim,  r.  d.  to  divide. 

Do  is  of  the  Jirst  conjiiaation.  abdo, 
-didi,  -ditiim,  d.  to  nide.  So  condo, 
indo.  addo,  -didi,  -ditum,  r.  d.  to 
add.  So  dedo,  edo,  prodo,  reddo, 
trado,  yenda  fdldo,  -<li(li,  -<lltum, 
to  distribute.  So  abdo,  subdo.  perdo, 
-didi,  -<lltum,  m.  r.  d.  abscoudo,  -di 
or  -nlidi,  -ditum  or  -sura. 

Dixco,  duxi,  ductum,  m.  r.  d.  to  lead. 

Edo,  edi,  esum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  eoL 

Exuo,  exui,  exutum,  d.  to  strip  off. 

Emo,  emi,  emptum,  r.  d.  to  buy.  So 
coemo.  The  other  compounds  diange 
e  to  I ;  as,  eximo,  -emi,  -emptum. 

Fiicesso,  -cessi,  -cessitum,  to  execute. 

Ficio,  feci,  factum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  do. 
Comjwunaed  with  a  preposition,  it 
changes  a  into  \  in  the  Jirst  root,  and 
into  e  in  the  tJnrd,  nud^  -flee  in  the 
imperatice,  and  has  a  regular  passive. 
CumfMjunded  icith  other  tcords,  it  re- 
tains ii,  when  of  this  conjugaiivn,  makes 
fiic  in  the  imperative,  and  has  the  pas- 
tire,  fio,  factum.    See  §  180. 

Fallo,  fifelli,  fulsum,  d.  to  deceive. 
*rcre!lo,  -felli,  d.  to  refute. 

FeiK l< »,  {obsolete. )  de feiido,  -feiiUi,  -fen- 
s«m,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  dej'i-nd.  offendo, 
-lendi,  -fensum,  d.  to  offend. 

Ff  ro,  tuli,  latimi,  r.  d.  to  bear.  See 
n79.  A  perfect  tetuU  is  rare.  Its 
compounds  are  alTcro,  attuli,  allatum; 


aufero,  abstuli,  ablatiun;  diffSro, 
distuli,  dilatura;  confe70,  contuli, 
collatum;  inftro,  iiituli,  illfitum; 
otlVro,  obtuli,  oblatum;  effiro,  ex- 
tiili,  elatum ;  suffi-ro,  sustuli,  subla- 
tum;  and  circum-,  per-,  tnuis-,  de-, 
pro-,  ant"-,  prsef  ero,  -tuli,  -latum. 

*!•  ervo,  vi,  to  boil.    Cf.  ferveo,  2d  conj. 

Fido,  — ,  fisus,  to  trust.  See  §  102,  18. 
confido,  confisus  sum  or  conflili,  to 
rely  on.  difiido,  difl"Lus  sum,  to 
distriisL 

Figo,  fixi,fixum,r.  rarely  Return,  tojix. 

Fiiido,  fidi,  fissum,  d.  to  ileave. 

Fiiigo,  finxi,   fictum,  d.  to  j'eian. 

Flecto,  flexi,  fiexum,  r.  d.  to  bend. 

*Fligo,  flixi,  to  dash.  So  confligo. 
affligo,  -flixi,  -flictum,  to  afflict.  So 
iuflTgo.  profligo  is  of  the  ^rst  conju- 
gallon. 

Fluo,  fluxi,  fluxum,  (fluctum,  obs.)  r. 
to  Jlovo. 

Fodio,  fodi,  fossum,  d.  to  dig.  OH 
pres.  inf.  pass,  fodiri:  so  also  ef- 
fodiri. 

Fran  go,  fregi,  fractum,  r.  d.  to  break 
The  compounds  change  a  into  i,  in  the 
Jirst  root;  as,  infringe,  infregi,  tii- 
fractum,  to  break  in  vjx>n. 

♦Frt-mo,  fremui,  d.  to  roar,  hoicl. 

Frendo, — ,  fresum  orfressum,  to  gnash. 

Frigo,  frixi,  frictum,  rarely  frixum,  to 
i-oast. 

♦Fugio,  fugi,  f ugTturus,  d.  to  Jlee. 

*Fulgo,  — ,  to  Jlash. 

Fundo,  f  udi,  f  iisum,  r.  d.  to  pour. 

*Kuro,  — ,  to  rage. 

*GC'rao,  gi'mui,  d.  to  groan. 

Gero,  ges«i,  gestum,  r.  d.  to  bear. 

Giguo,  (iJtsiileie g^uo,)  genui,  genltum, 
r.  d.  to  beget. 

♦Glisco,  — ,  to  grow. 

*Glubo,  — ,  to  peeL  degliibo,  — , 
-gluptum. 

Gruo,  (obsolete.)  *congruo,  -grui,  to 
agree.     So  ingmo. 

Ico,  Tci,  ictum,  r.  to  strike. 

Imbuo,  imbui,  imbutum,  d.  to  imbue. 

*Incesso,  -cessivi  or  -cessi,  to  attack. 

flnduo,  indui,  indutum,  to  put  on. 

jacio,  jeci,  jactum,  d.  to  cast.  The 
comjAtum/s  ihange  a.  viio  1  in  the  Jirst 
root,  and  into  e  in  the  third.  (§  163, 
Kxc.  3);  as,  rejlcio, rejeci,  rejectum. 

Jungo,  junxi,  juncrum,  "r.  d.  to  Join. 

Lacesso,  -cessivi, -cessitum,  r.  d.  to  pi^o- 
voke. 

Lacio,  ('obsolete. )  The  compounds  change 
a  into  I ;  as,  allioio,  -lexi,  -lectum,  d. 
to  allure.  So  illlcio.  pellicio.  elicio, 
-licui,  -licltuui,  to  draw  out. 


§172. 


VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


135 


Laedo,  Isesi,  Isesum,  m.  r.  to  hurt.  The 
componiuls  ihnn(/e  x  into  I;  as,  illido, 
illisi,  illlsum,  fo  (Irish  against. 

*Liunbo,  Iambi,  to  liik. 

Lego,  iGgi,  lectum,  r.  d.  to  read.  So 
allOgo,  perli'go,  pra?l("go,  relego,  sub- 
lego,  ami  tnuisligo;  the  other  ann- 
pounds  chiin(/e  e  into  I;  as,  colli  go, 
collegi,  collectum,  to  collect.  But  the 
follvwimj  add  s  to  form  the  second 
root ;  ^  171,  1 ;-  diligo,  -Jexi,  -lectum, 
to  love,  intelligo,  -lexi,  -lectum,  u. 
r.  d.  to  understand.  iiegUgo,  -lexi, 
-lectum,  r.  d.  to  neglect.  _ 

I.ingo,  — ,  linctum,  d.  to  licTc.  *delin- 
go,  — ,  to  lick  up. 

Liiio,  livi  or  levi,  Utum,  d.  to  daub. 

*Linquo,  llqui,  d.  to  leave,  relinquo, 
-llqni,  -lictum,  r.  d.  delinquo,  -liqui, 
-lictum.     So  derelinquo. 

Ludo,  lusi,  lusum,  m.  r.  to  play. 

*Luo,  lul,  luiturus,  d.  to  atone,  abluo, 
-lui,  -latum,  r.  d.  diluo,  -lui,  -lu- 
tum,  d.     So  eluo. 

Mando,  mandi,  mansum,  d.  to  chew. 

Mergo,  mersi,  mersum,  r.  d.  to  dip.  So 
immergo;  but  pres.  inf.  pass,  im- 
mergeri.  Col.  5,  9,  3. 

Mcto,  inessui,  messum,  d.  to  reap. 

Mctuo,  metui,  metutum,  d.  to  fear. 

*fMingo,  riiinxi,  mictum,  {sup.)  to  make 
vater. 

MTnuo,'minui,  mtnutum,  d.  to  lessen. 

Mitto,  misi,  missiim,  r.  d,  to  send. 

Molo,  molui,  molltum,  to  grind. 

Mungo,  {obsolete.)  emuugo,  -munxi, 
-munctum,  to  t«y;e  (he  nose. 

Necto,  nexi,  nexum,  d.  to  knit,  innec- 
to,  -iiexui,  -nexum.  So  annecto, 
connecto. 

*Ningo  oi'  -guo,  ninxi,  to  snow. 

Nosco,  novi,  notum,  d.  to  learn,  ag- 
nosco,  -novi,  -nitum,  d.  to  recognize. 
cognosco,  -novi,  -nItum,  u.  r.  d.  to 
know.  So  recognosco.  *internosco, 
novi,  to  distinguish  between,  prascog- 
nosco, — ,  prfEcognitum,  to  fore-know. 
*dignosco, — .  Sopr£Bnosco.  ignos- 
00,  -novi,  -notum,  d.  to  pardon. 

Nubo,  nupsi,  or  nupta  sum,  nuptum, 
m.  r.  to  marrij. 

Nuo,  {obsolete,)  to  nod.  *abnuo,  -nui, 
-nuiturus,  d.  to  refuse.  *annuo,  -nui. 
*So  inimo,  renuo. 

*01o,  olui,  to  S7nell. 

Pando,  — ,  passum  or  pansum,  to  open. 
So  expaiulo.   dispaudo,  — ,  -pansum. 

Pago,  (obs.  the  same  as  paco  whence  pi- 
ciscor,)  pepigi,  pactum,  to  bargain: 
hence 

Paago,  panxi  or  pegi,  pactum,  panctu- 


rus,  d.  to  drive  in.  compingo,  -pegi, 
-pactum.  So  impingo.  *o])p!nigo, 
-pegi.  *depang(),  — .  So  repaiigo, 
sup])ingo. 

*Parco,  pCperci  rnrdii  parsi,  parsunis, 
to  spare.  Some  <f  the  couijinumU 
change  a  to  e ;  a;*,  *comparco  or  com- 
perco.    *iinperco,  — , 

Pario,  ])epi'ri,  ]jartum,  paritunis,  d.  to 
bring  forth.  The  comjxmitds  are  of 
the  fourth  conjugation. 

Pasco,  pavi,  pastum,  m.  r.  d.  to  feed. 

Pecto,  — ,  pexum,  and  pectltum,  d.  to 
comb.     So  d<fi>ecto.     re  pec  to. 

*Pedo,  pepedi.     *oppedo,  — . 

Pello,  pepiili,  pulsum,  d.  to  drive.  Its 
compounds  are  not  reduplicated. 

Pendo,  popendi,  jjensum,  r.  to  weicjh. 
The  compoumds  drop  the  reduplicatum. 
See  §  163,  Lxc.  1. 

Pgto,  petlvi,  petltum,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  ask. 

Pingo,  piuxi,  pictum,  to  paint. 

Pinso,  pinsi,  pinsitum,  pinsum  or  pis- 
tum,  to  pmmd. 

*Plango,  planxi,  plancturus,  to  lament. 

Plaudo,  plausi,  plausum,  d.  to  clap,  ap- 
plaud. So  ap]ilaudo.  ♦tcirc-um- 
plaudo,  — .  The  other  compounds 
change  au  into  6. 

Plecto,  — ,  plexum,  d.  to  tmne. 

*Pluo,  plui  or  pluvi,  to  rain. 

Pono,  posui,  {anciently  posivi),  posl- 
tum,  r.  d.  to  place. 

*tI'orricio,  — ,  to  oj'er  sacrifce. 

*Posco,  poposci,  d.  to  demand. 

Prehenda 

Preudo, 

Premo,  pressi,  pressum,  r.  d.  to  press. 
The  compounds  change  6  into  i,  in  the 
first  root;  as,  imprlmo,  impressi, 
impressum,  to  imjn'ess. 

Promo,  prompsi,  promptum,  r.  d.  to 
bring  out. 

*Psallo,  psalli,  to  play  on  a  stringed  in- 
strument. 

Pungo,  pupugi,  punctum,  to  pHck. 
compungo,  -puiixi,  -punctum.  So 
dispungo,  expungo.  interpungo,  — , 
-punctum.    *repungo,  — . 

Qucero,  quajsivi,  qujBsitum,  m.  r.  d.  to 
seek.  The  compounds  change  ss  into 
i ;  as,  requiro,  requisivi,  requisitum, 
to  seek  again. 

Quatio,  — ,  quassum,  to  shake.  The 
compounds  change  qua  into  cu;  as, 
concutio,  -cussi,  -cussum,  d.  dis- 
cxitio,  -cussi,  -cussum,  r.  d. 

Quiesco,  quievi,  quietum,  r.  d.  to  rest. 

Rado,  rasi,  rasum,  d.  to  shave. 

Eapio,  rapui,  raptum,  r.  d.  to  snatch. 
The  compmindi  change  a  into  I  in  the 


-di,  -sum,  r.  d.  to  seize. 


136 


VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


§172. 


Jirsl  and  second  roots,  and  into  e  in 
Oie  third;  as,  (liriplo,  -ripxii,  -reptum, 
m.  r.  Su  eilpio  and  prserlpio. 

Rego,  rexi,  rectum,  r.  d.  (o  i-ule.  The 
LomjMHnuU  ilinnt/e  e  into  i,  in  Uie^rst 
roiii ;  as,  (lirI<;o,  dircxi,  directum, 
♦perco,  (for  perrigo),  perrexi,  r.  to 
go  /uricttrd.  surgo  (fur  sxinigo), 
surrexi,  purrectum,  r.  d.  to  rise.  So 
porrijio  {/or  prr)i1go),  to  stretch  out. 

♦IIC'po,  i-epsi,  Ut  creirj). 

Kudo,  rosi,  ropum,  r.  to  gnmo.  ab-,  ar-^ 
e-,  ob-,  proe-rudo,  want  tlie  perfect. 

*Rudo,  nidivi,  to  bray. 

Rumpo,  rupi,  ruptum,  r.  d.  to  break. 

Ruo,  rui,  rutum,  ruitunis,  to  faU. 
dlruo,  -rui,  -riitunv,  d.  So  obruo. 
*corruo,  -rui.  So  imio. 

♦Siipio,  sapivi,  to  be  wise.  The  com- 
jhiunds  change  a,  into  i ;  as,  *resipio, 
-sipivi  or  -slpui.  *desipio,  — ,  to  be 
silly. 

♦tScfibo,  scabi,  to  scratch. 

Scalpo,  scalpsi,  scalptuin,  to  engrave. 

Si'iln  or  sallo,  —  salsum,  to  salt. 

*Scaudo,  — ,  d.  to  clii/ib.  The  compounds 
change.a  into  e ;  as,  ascendo,  asceudi, 
ascensum,  r.  d.  desc^ndo,  descendi, 
(anciently  descendidi,)  descensum. 

Sciiulo,  scidi,  (anciently  sciscldi),  scis- 
sum,  d.  to  cut. 

Scisco,  scivi,  scitum,  d.  to  ordain. 

Scribo,  scripsi,  scriiitum,  r.  d.  to  write. 

Sculpo,  sculpsi,  sculptum,  d.  to  carve. 

Sero,  sevi,  siituin,  r.  d.  to  sow.  conse- 
ro,  -sevi,  -slturti.  So  insero,  r.,  and 
obsero. 

Sero,  — ,  sertum,  to  entwine.  Its  com- 
jxtundshave  -semi;  as,  assero,  -semi, 
-serlum,  r.  d. 

♦Serpo,  serpsi,  to  creep. 

*Sid»),  si(ii,  to  settle.  Its  compounds  have 
generally  sedi,  sessum,  from  sedeo. 

*Slno,  sivi,  sitQrus,  to  permit,  desino, 
deslvi,  desitum,  r.  §  284,  R.  3,  Exc.  2. 

Sisto,  stiti,  statiim,  to  stop.  *absisto, 
-stiti.  So  the  other  comjiounds;  but 
circumsisto  wants  Uie  jierfect. 

Solvo,  solvi,  solutum,  r.  d.  to  loose. 

Spargo,  sparsi,  snai-sum,  r.  d.  to  spread. 
The  comjMmnds  change  a  into  e;  as, 
respergo,  -spersi,  -ppersura ;  btd  with 
circuni  and  in,  a  sometimes  remains. 

Specio,  (obsolete.)  The  compounds 
change  e  into  i,  in  the  first  root ;  as, 
asplcio,  aspexi,  aspectum,  d.  to  look 
at.  iusplcio,  inspexi,  inspectum. 
r.  d. 

Spemo,  sprl  vi,  spretum,  d.  to  despise. 

*tSpuo,  spji,  to  spit.  *respuo,  res- 
pui,  d. 


Statuo,  statxii,  statfitum,  d.  to  place. 
The  comjwumls  iliange  a.  into  I;  aSj 
instltuo,  iusUtui,  instltutum,  to  tV 
stitute. 

Sterno,  stravi,  stratum,  d.  to  strew. 

*Steniuo.  steriiui,  to  sneeze. 

*Sterto,  — ,  to  snore,  ♦fdestei'to,  do- 
stertui. 

♦Stinguo,  — ,  to  extinguish,  distlnguo, 
distiuxi,  distiuctum.  So  exstinguo, 
r.  d.  ^ 

*Strepo,  strfpui,  to  make  a  noise. 

*StrKlo,  stndi,  to  creakr. 

S  trill  go,  strinxi,  strictum,  r.  d.  to  bind 
or  tie  tight. 

Struo,  stnixi,  structum,  d.  to  build. 

Sugo,  suxi,  suctum,  to  smk. 

Sumo,  sunipsi,  sumptum,  r.  d.  to  take. 

Suo,  — ,  sutum,  d.  to  sew.  So  consuo, 
dissuo.  iusuo,  -sui,  siitum.  *as- 
suo,  — . 

Tago,  (very  rare),  to  touch.     JTence 

TaiiETO,  tetigi,  tactum,  r.  d.  to  touch. 
The  com/Htunds  ihange  a  iiito  i  in  the 
first  rout,  ami  drop  the  reduplication  ; 
as,  contiiigo,  contigi,  contactum,  r. 

Tf  go,  texi,  tectum,  r.  d.  to  covei: 

*Temno,  — ,  d.  to  desjnse.  coutemno, 
-tempsi,  -temptum,  d. 

Tendo,  tetendi,  tentum  or  tensura,  to 
slretih.  Tlie  comjxmnds  dnp  the  re- 
duplication ;  as,  exteiido,  -tendi,  -ten- 
tum or  -tensum.  So  in-,  os-,  and  re- 
tendo.  detendo  has  tensum.  The 
other  compounds  have  tentum. 

*tTergo,  tersi,  tersum,  to  icipe.  Ter- 
geo,  of  the  second  corn'vgation  has  the 
same  second  and  third  roots. 

Tero,  trivi,  tritum,  d.  to  rub. 

Texo,  texui,  textum,  d.  to  weave. 

Tingo  or  tingrio,  tinxi,  tinctum,  r.  d. 
to  moisten,  tinge. 

*Tollo,  anciently  tetuli,  rarely  tolli,  d. 
to  raise.  The  perfect  and  supine  sus- 
tuli  and  sublatum  from  suffero  take 
the  place  of  the  perfect  am/  supine  of 
tollo  and  sustollo.  *sustollo,  — ,  r. 
to  raise  up,  to  take  away.  *attollo, 
— .     So  extoUo. 

Trfiho,  traxi,  tractum,  r.  d.  to  draw. 

*Tn"mo,  trfmui,  d.  to  fremble. 

Tilbuo,  tribui,  tributum,  r.  d.  to  as- 
cribe. 

Trudo,  trusi,  triisum,  to  thrust.  • 

Tundo,  tutudi,  tunsum  or  tusum,  to 
beat.  The  compounds  drop  tlie  redu- 
plication, and  have  tiisum.  Yet  con- 
tunsum,  detunpum,  obtuusum,  and 
retunsum,  are  also  found. 

Uugo,  {or^  -guo),  tmki,  unctum,  d.  to 
anoint. 


5173. 


VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


137 


Tiro,  iissi,  ustum,  d.  to  hum. 

*Va(lo,  — ,  to  go.  So  supervado.  The 
other  compounds  have  vasi;  C5,  *eva- 
do,  evasi,  r.  So  pervado;  also  iuva- 
do,  r.  (1. 

Velio,  vexi,  vectum,  r.  to  carry. 

Velio,  velli  w  vulsi,  vnlsum,  d.  to  pluch. 
So  avello,  d.,  divello,  evell(x  d.,  re- 
vello,  revelli,  re\njlsum.  The  other 
compounds  have  velli  only,  except  in- 
tervello,  which  has  vulsi. 


*Vergo,  rersi,  to  incline. 

VciTO,  — ,  versiTin,  d.  to  brush. 

Verto,  verti,  versura,  r.  d.  to  turn.   See 

§  174,  Xoie. 
Viiico,  vlci,  victnrn,  r.  d.  to  conquer. 
*V'Tso,  — ,  d.  to  visit. 
*Vivo,  vixl,  victurus,  d.  to  live. 
*V61o,  volul,  velle  {/br  volere),  to  be 

willing.   See  ^  178. 
Volvo,  volvi,  vclutum,  d.  to  roU. 
Vomo,  vomui,  vomitum,  r.  d.  to  vomit. 


Remark.  Those  verbs  in  io  (and  deponents  in  tor),  of  the  third  conjugation, 
which  are  conjugated  like  capio  (page  115)  are.  cdpio,  cOpio,  fdcio,  fodio^  J'^<J^(^i 
iacio,  pdrio,  qudtio,  rupio,  sapio,  compounds  of  Idcio  and  specio,  and  grddwr,  vw- 
lior,  jmtior,  and  mdiior :  but  compare  mdrior  in  §  174,  and  drior,  and  p6iior 
in  §  177. 

Inceptive  Verbs. 

§  1T3.  Inceptive  verbs  in  general  either  want  the  third  root, 
or  adopt  that  of  their  primitives:  (see  §  187,  II,  2).  Of  those  derived 
from  nouns  and  adjectives,  some  .want  the  second  root,  and  some  form 
it  by  adding  u  to  the  root  of  the  primitive. 

In  the  following  list,  those  verbs  to  which  s  is  added,  have  a  simple  verb  in 
nse  from  which  they  are  formed : — 

*Acesco,  acui,  s.  to  grow  sour. 
*jEgi-esco,  to  groio  sick. 
*Albesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  white. 
*Alesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow,   coalesce,  -alui, 

-alitum,  to  grow  together. 
*Ardesco,  arsi,  s.  to  take  f.re. 
*Aresco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  dry.     *exares- 

co,  -ami.    So  inaresco,  peraresco. 
*Augesco,  auxi,  s.  to  increase. 
*Ci\tesco,  calui,  s.  to  grow  warm. 
*Calvesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  bald. 
*Cande?co,  candui,  s.  to  gi'ow  white. 
*Caiiesco,  canui,  s.  to  become  hoary. 
*Ciaresco,  clarui,  s.  to  become  brifjlit. 
*Condonnisco,   -dormlvi,  ■  s.   to  go   to 

f.h;p. 

*C()!iticesco,  -ticui,  to  become  silent. 
*Crebresco,  crebui  and  crebrui,  to  in- 

crense. 
*Crfulesco,  crudui,  to  become  violent. 
*l)Itesco,  — ,  to  grow  rich. 
*l)ulcesco,  — ,  to  grow  sweet. 
*Duresco,  durui,  to  grow  hard. 
-^Evj'iesco,  evilui,  to  become  icortliless. 
*PLxtiniesco,  -tiraui,  to  fear  greatly. 
*Fati.sco,  — ,  to  gape. 
*Flaccesco,  flaccui,  s.  to  tvilt. 
*Fervesco,  ferbui,  s.  to  grow  hot. 
♦  Floresco,  fldrui,  s.  to  begin  to  fiourish. 
*Fracesco,  fracui,  to  grow  rancid. 
*Fngesco,  — ,  s..  to  grQw  cold.     *per- 

ftlgesco,  -frixi.    So  refi-Jgesoo. 
12* 


*Frondesco,  — ,  s.  to  put  forth  leaves. 
*Fruticesco,  — ,  to  put  forth  shoots. 
*GiiIasco,  — ,  s.  io  freeze.    So  *cong6- 

lasco,  s.  to  congeal. 
*Gemisco,  — ,  s.  to  begin  tc  sigh. 
*Gemmasco,  — ,  to  begin  to  bud. 
*Generasco,  — ,  s.  to  be  produced. 
*Grandesco,  — ,  to  grow  large. 
*Gravesco,  — ,  to  grow  heavy. 
*n{Bresco,  — ,  s  to  adhere. 
*Hebesco,  — ,  s.  K  grow  dull. 
*Horresco,  horrui,  s.  to  grow  rough.  ■ 
*Humesco,  — ,  s.  to  grow  moist. 
*Ignesco,  — ,  tn  become  inflamed. 
*liKl61esco,  -dolui.  d.  to  be  grieved. 
*Ins6iesco,  — ,  to  oecome  haughty. 
*Iiitegi-asco,  —  to  be  renewed. 
*Juvt'nesco,  — ,  to  groio  young. 
*Laiiguesco,  langui,  s.  to  gi'oio  languid. 
*Lapi(lesco,  — ,  to  become  stone. 
*Latesco,  — ,  to  graio  broad. 
*LritePco,  to  he  concealed,  s.  *delitesco, 

-litui;  *oblIiesco,  -htui. 
*Lentesco,  — ,  to  become  soft. 
*Liquesco,  — ,    s.    to   become    liquid. 

*deliqnesco,  -llcuj. 
*Lucesco,  — .  s.  to  grow  light,  io  dawn. 
*Lutesco,  — ,  ».  to  become  muddy. 
*Macesco,  — .  s.  )  .  , 

*Macresco,  .:     \  io  grow  lean. 

*remacresco,  -macnii. 
*Madesco,  mldui,  3.  to  grow  moist. 


138 


VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


§174. 


*Marcesco,  — ,  s.  to  pine  atoay. 
♦Mruuresco,  mritfirui,  Ut  lipen. 
♦Mlstresco,  misC'Vui,  s.  /t»  pity. 

♦  Mlresco,  — ,  to  yruw  mill. 

♦  Mnllesco,  — ,  to  yroic  soft. 
♦Mutesco,  — ,  to  become  dumb.    *ob- 

niutesco,  obmutui. 
♦Kigi-esco,  nignii,  s.  to  grow  black. 
*Nitesco,  nltui,  s.  to  grow  bright. 

♦  Nntesco,  notui,  to  become  knoum. 

♦  Obbrutesco,  — ,  to  become  bi-utish. 

♦  Obdonnisco,  — ,  s.  to  fall  asleep. 
*Obsui\lesco,  -surdui,  to  grow  deaf. 

♦  Occiillesco,  -callui,  to  become  callous. 
♦Olesco,   {scarcely  used.)     *ab61esco, 

-olevi,  s.  to  cease,  adolesco,  -olevi, 
-iiltiim,  8.  to  grow  up.  exolesco, 
-olevi,  -oletum,  to  grow  out  of  date. 
So  obsolesco.  inolesco,  -olevi,  -611- 
tiim,  d.  to  grow  in  or  on. 
♦Piillesco,  pallui,  s.  to  grow  pale. 

♦  Patesco,  pfitui,  s.  to  be  qiJened. 

♦  I'fivesco,  pavi,  s.  to  groio  fearful. 

♦  Pertimesco,  -Qmul,  d.  to  tear  greatly. 

♦  Piiipiesco,  — ,  to  grow  jaL 
*l'ul)esco,  — ,  to  come  to  maturity. 
*Pu«'nvsco,  — ,  to  become  a  boy. 

♦Raresco,  — ,  to  become  thin. 
♦Ri'sipisco,  -<«Ipui,  s.  to  recover  one's 

senses. 
♦Rigesco,  rigui,  s.  to  groto  cold. 
♦Riibesco,  rubui,  s.  to  grow  red.    *QTn- 

besco,  -rubui,  d. 


♦Sanesco,  — ,  to  become  sound.    *con- 

sanesco,  -sanui. 
*SCne?co,  st-nui,  s.  d.  to  grow  old.    So 

consenesco. 
^Seiitisco,  — ,  s.  to  perceive. 
*Siccesco,  — ,  to  become  dry. 
*Silesco,  sllui,  s.  to  gr-ow  silent. 
♦  Sulrdesco,  — ,  to  become  solid. 
♦Sovdesfco,  sordui,  s.  to  become  flthy. 
*Splendesco,  splendui,    8.    to  become 

bright. 
*Spumesco,  — ,  to  begin  to  foam. 
*Sterilesco,  — ,  to  become  barren. 
♦Stupesco,  stiipui,  s.  to  become  dston 

ished. 
Suesco,  suevi,  suetum,  s.  to  become  ac- 

ctislomed. 
*Tabesco,  tabui,  s.  to  waste  away. 
♦Tentresco  and  -asco,  — ,  to  become 

tender. 
♦Ti'pesco,  tepui,  s.  to  grow  warm. 
♦Toipesco,  torpui,  s.  to  grow  torpid. 
*TreiniPCO,  — ,  s.  to  begm  to  tremble. 
♦Tumesco,  tumui,  s.  |  .    t^*^  4^  ^    n 
♦Turgesco;  -,  s.        \  <^  ^'3^n  to  sweO. 
*Uvesco,  — ,  to  become  moist. 
♦Valesco,  — ,  s.  to  become  strong. 
*Vauesco,  — ,  to  vanish.    *evanesco, 

evanui. 
*Veterasco,  vetSravi,  to  grow  old. 
*Viresco,  virui,  s.  to  grow  green. 
*Vivesco,  vixi,  s.  to  come  to  life.    *r6- 

vivisco,  -vixi. 


§  IT^L.     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation. 


Apiscor,  aptus,  to  get.  The  compounds 
change  a  into  I  in  the  frst  root,  and 
into  e  in  the  third;  as,  adJpiscor, 
adeptus.    So  indipiscor. 

Expergiscor,  experrectus,  to  awake. 

♦Fatiscor,  to  gape  or  crack  open.  The 
compounds  cluinge  a  into  e ;  as,  def  e- 
tiscor,  -fessus. 

Fruor,  frultus  or  fructus,  frulturus,  d. 
to  ejijoy. 

Fuiigor,  functus,  r.  d.  to  perform. 

Gradior,  gressus,  to  wauc.  The  com- 
poumls  change  a  into  e ;  as,  aggrf  dior, 
aggressiis,  r.  d.  Inf.  pres.  aggredi 
ani/ aggrediri ;  so,  progri  di  and progre- 
dii'f ;  and  pres.  ind.  egrCditur,  Plaut. 

♦Iras  cor.  to  be  angry. 

Labor,  lapsus,  r.  to  fall. 

♦Liquor,  to  nieU,  jlow. 

Loquor,  locutus,  r.  d.  to  speak. 

Miuiscor, {obsolete.)  comminiscor, com- 
mentus,  p.  to  invenL  ♦reminiscor, 
to  reiH^mber. 


Morior,  (mori,  rarely  morin,)  mortuus, 

mon turns,  d.  todie.  So  emoriri,  Plaut. 

for  emori. 
Nanciscor,  nactus  or  nanctus  to  obtain. 
Nascor,  natus,  nasclturus,  u.  to  be  born. 
Kitor,  nixus  or  nisus,  nisurus,  to  lean      ^ 

upon. 
Obllvlscor,  oblltus,  d.  p.  to  forget. 
Piiciscor,   pactus,    d.   to  bargain.     So 

depaciscor.     . 
Patior,  passus,  r.  d.  to  suffer,   perpetior, 

-pessus. 

From  plecto,  to  twine,  come,  araplec- 

tor,  am  plexus,  d.  p.  co!ni)lector,  com- 

plexus,  p.     So  circumplector. 
Proficiscor,  profectus,  r.  to  depart. 
QuOror,  questus,  m.  u.  d.  to  complain. 
♦Riiigor,  to  snarL 
Sequor,  stcutus,  r. d.  to  foUoto. 
Tuor,  tutus,  to  protect 

^♦Vescor,  d.  to  eat.  • 

Llciscor,  ultus,  in.  d.  p.  to  avenge. 
Utor,  uaus,  r.  a.  to  rue. 


§175,  176.  VERBS. SECOND    AND    THIRD    ROOTS. 


139 


Note.  Devertor,  pi^cevertor,  revertor,  compounds  of  verto^  are  used  as  depo- 
nents in  the  present  and  imperfect  tenses;  revertor  also,  sometimes,  in  the 
perfect. 

FOURTH    CONJUGATION. 

'  §  ITS,  Verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation  regularly  form  their 
second  root  in  iv,  and  their  third  in  it ;  as,  audio,  audiv^,  au- 
ditum. 

The  following  list  contains  most  regular  verbs  of  this  conjuga- 
tion : — 


Audio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  m.  u.  r.  d.  to  hear. 
*Cio,  civi,  to  excite.  Ct.  cieo,  §  168. 
Condio,  -ivi  oi'  -ii,  to  season. 
Custudio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  guard: 
*I)ormio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  m.  r.  d.  to  sleep. 
Erudio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  instruct. 
Expcdio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  disentangle. 
Flnio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  fnish. 
*Gestio,  -Ivi  w  -ii,  to  exult;  desire. 
Impt'dio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  d.  to  entangle. 
Insiinio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  be  mad. 
Irretio,  -ivi  oi'  ii,  to  ensnare. 
Lenio,  -Ivi  or  ii,  d.  to  mitiqate. 
Mollio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  so/ten. 


*Mugio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  to  bellow. 
Munio,  -Ivi  w  -ii,  r.  d.  to  fortify. 
Ikliitio,  -Ivi,  to  mutter. 
Nutrio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  d.  to  Timtrish. 
Partio,  -Ivi  or  -ii^  r.  to  divide. 
Polio,  -Ivi,  d.  to  pulish. 
Punio,  -ivi  o?'  -ii,  d.  to  punish. 
Redimio,  -Ivi,  to  crown. 
Scio,  -ivi,  u.  r.  to  know. 
Servio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  m.  r.  d.  to  serve, 
Sopio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  to  lidl  asleep. 
Stsibilio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  to  establish. 
Tinnio,  -Ivi  or  -ii,  r.  to  tinkle. 
Vestio,  -ivi  or  -ii,  to  cloilie. 


§  ITO.  The  following  list  contains  those  verbs  of  the  fourth  con- 
jugation which  form  their  second  and  third  roots  irregularly,  and 
those  which  want  either  or  both  of  them. 

Remark.  The  principal  irregularity  in  verbs  of  the  fourth  conjugation 
arises  from  following  the  analogy  of  those  verbs  of  the  third  conjugation  whose 
first  root  ends  in  a  consonant;  as,  sepio,  sepsi,  septum.  A  few  become  irregular 
by  syncope ;  as,  venio,  veni,  ventum. 


AmTcio,  -ui  or  -xi,  amictum,  d.  to  clothe. 

*Balbutio,  — ,  to  stammer. 

Bullio,  ii,  itum,  to  bubble. 

*Csecutio,  — ,  to  be  dim^sighted. 

*Cambio,  — ,  to  exchange. 

*Dementio,  — ,  to  be  mad. 

Effiitio,  — ,  to  babble. 

Eo,  ivi  or  ii,  Itum,  r.  d.  to  go.  The 
compounds  have  only  ii  in  the  perfect, 
except  obeo,  praeeo,  and  subeo,  which 
have  Ivi  or  ii.  All  the  compounds  icant 
the  supine  and  perfect  participles, 
except  adeo,  ambio,  Ineo,  obeo,  pr»- 
ttreo,  sabeo,  circiimeo  or  circueo, 
redeo,  transeo,  and  *tveneo,  venii, 
r.  {.from  venum  eo),  to  be  sold. 

Farcio,  farsi,  fartum  or  farctum,  to 
cram.  The  comjiounds  generally 
change  a  to  e;  as,  re  fere  io,  -fersi, 
-fertum,  but  con-  and  ef-,  -farcio  and 
-fercio. 

Fastldio,  -ii,  -Itum,  d.  to  loathe. 

*Ferio,  — ,  d.  to  stnke. 


*Ferocio,  — ,  to  be  fierce. 

Fulcio,  falsi,  fultum,  d.  to  prop  up. 

*Gannio,  — ,  to  yelp,  bark. 

*Glocio,  — ,  to  cluck  as  a  hen. 

*Glutio,  ivi,  w  glutii,  to  sicallow. 

Grandio,  — ,  to  make  great. 

*Grunnio,  grunnii,  to  gr'unt. 

Haurio,  hausi,  I'ar.  haurii,  haustum, 
rar.  hausitum,  haustHrus,  hausurus, 
u.  (1.  to  draw. 

*Hinnio,  — ,  to  neigh. 

*Ineptio,  — ,  to  trifle. 

*LascIvio,  lasclvii,  to  be  wanton. 

*Llgurio,  llgurii,  to  feed  delicately. 

*Lippio,  — ,  r.  to  be  blear-eyed. 

*Obedio,  obedii.  r.  to  obey.  ^ 

Pario  is  (f  the  tliird  conjugation,  out  its 
comjjounds  are  ofthefmrth,  changing 
a  to  e;  as,  apfrio,  aperui,  apertiim" 
r.  d.  to  open.  Sooperio,  d.  comperio, 
comperi,  compertum,  rarely  dep. 
comperior,  to  find  out.  So  repferio, 
r.  d. 


140 


IRKEGULAR   VERBS. 


177,  178. 


Pavio,  — ,  pavTtuTii,  to  beat. 

♦Piiirio,  — ,  to  ifth. 

Queo,  quivi  or  quii,  quitum,  to  be  able. 

So  *nequeo. 
♦Rancio,  — ,  r.  to  be  hoarse. 
♦  Kuglo,  — ,  to  rtHir  as  a  lion. 
Sievio,  saevii,  itum,  r.  to  rage. 
♦Snjrio,  — ,  to  ptrceire  keenly. 
♦Siilio,   srilui   or  salii,   to  leap.     The 

compounds  change  h  into  I ;  os,  *absl- 

lio,  — .  So  circumsllio.   *assillo,  -ui. 

So dissllio,  insllio.  *desllio,  -ui  or  -ii. 

So  exsUio,  resllio,  subsilio.  *transll- 

io,  -ui  or  -ivi,  d.   So  prosllio. 
Salio,  — ,  itum,  r.  d.  to  salt. 
Sancio,  sanxi,  sancitum  or  sanctum,  d. 

to  ratify,  sanction.  , 

Note.  Desiderntive  verbs  "want  both  the  second  and  third  roots,  except 
these  tliree ; — ♦fsfin'o,  — ^  esuritus,  r.  to  desire  to  eat ;  *nvpturiOj  -id,  to  desire 
to  marry;  *partuiio,  -in,  to  be  in  travail.   See  §  187,  U.  3. 

§  1i77»     Deponent  Verbs  of  the  Fourth  Conjugation. 


Sarcio,  sarsi,  sartum,  d.  to  paich. 
Sarrio,  -ivi  oi'  -ui,  sarrituni,  d.  to  weed, 

hoe. 
♦Scj'itiirio,  — ,  to  gush  out. 
Sentio,  sensi,  sensiim,  r.  to  feel. 
Sepi-lio,  sept-livi  or  -ii,  rar.  sepeli,  sfe- 

pultum,  r.  d.  to  bury. 
Sepio,  sepsi,  septum,  d.  to  hedge  in. 
*SinguItio,  — ,  to  sob,  hictup. 
*Sitio,  sitii,  to  thirst. 
Suffio,  -ii,  -itum,  d.  to  fumigaie. 
*Tussio,  — ,  to  cough. 
*Va<:!;io,  vagii,  to  cry. 
Venio,  veni,  ventum,  r.  to  come. 
Vincio,  viuxi,  viuctum,  r.  d.  to  bind. 


Assentior,  assensus,  r.  d.  p.  to  assent. 

Blaiidior,  blaiulitus,  to  flniler. 

Largior,  lurgitus,  p.  to  give,  bestow. 

Mentior,  meiititus,  r.  p.  to  lie. 

Metior,  meusus  or  metitus,  d.  p.  to 
measure. 

Molior,  molltus,  d.  to  strive,  toiL 

Ordior,  orsus,  d.  p.  to  begin. 

Orior,  ortus,  oriturus,  d.  to  spring  vp. 
Except  in  the  present  infinitive,^  this 
verb  seems  to  be  of  the  third  conjuga- 
tion. 


PSrior,  {obs.  whence  perituf.)  ex- 
pc-rior,  expertus,  r.  d.  to  try.  oppe- 
rior,  oppertus  or  opperitus,  d.  to 
wait  for. 

Partior,  partitas,  d.  to  divide. 

Potior,  potiius,  r.  d.  to  obtain,  enjoy. 
In  the  poets  the  present  indicative  and 
imperfect  subjunctive  are  sometimes 
oftfte  iliird  conjugation. 

Sortior,  sortitus,  r.  to  caU  lots. 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 

§  1T8,  Irregular  verbs  are  such  as  deviate  from  the  com- 
mon foims  in  some  of  the  parts  derived  from  the  first  root. 

They  are  sum,  volo,  feroj  edo,  fiOy  eo,  queo,  and  their  compounds. 

Sum  and  its  compounds  have  already  been  conjugated.  See  §  153.  In  the 
conjugation  of  the  rest,  the  parts  which  are  irregular  are  fully  exhibited,  but 
a  sjTiopsis  only,  of  the  other  parts  is,  in  general,  given.  Some  parts  of  volo 
and  of  its  compounds  are  wanting. 

^    1.    Volo  is  irregular  only  in  the  present  of  the  indicative  and  infin- 
itive, and  in  the  present  and  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive. 

Remakk.  It  is  made  irregular  partly  by  s^mcope,  and  partly  by  a  change  in 
the  vowel  of  the  root.  In  the  present  infinitive  also  and  in  the  imperfect  sub- 
junctive, after  e  was  dropped,  r  following  I  was  changed  uito  /;  as,  velere 
(velre)  velle ;  velertm  (velrem)  vellem. 

Pres.  Indie.        Pres.  Injin.        Perf  Indie. 
v6'-18,  vel'-le,  v61'-u-i,      to  be  willing,  to  wish. 


§  1 78.  IRREGULAR    VERBS.  *  141 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  v6'-Io,  vis,  vult;  Per/.  vol'-u-i. 

P.  vol'-u-mus,  vul'-tis,  vo'-lunt.  Plup.         v6-lu'-e-ram. 

Imperf.    vo-lc'-bam,  v6-le'-bas,  etc.  FuL  perf.  v6-lu'-e-r5. 
Fut.        vo'-lam,  vo'-les,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.      S.  ve'-Hm,  ve'-lis,  ve'-lit;  Perf.  vo-lu'-e-rira. 

P.  v6-li'-mus,  ve-li'-tis,  ve'-lint.  Plup.  vol-u-is'-sem. 

Imperf.  S.  vel'-lem,  vel'-les,  vel'-let; 

P.  vel-le'-mus,  vel-le'-tis,  vel'-lent. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  vel'-le.    •  Pres.  vo'-lens. 

Perf.  vol-u-is'-se. 

Note.  VoU  and  wltis,  for  tmU  and  twftw,  and  mn\  for  visne  are  found  in  Plau- 
tus  and  other  ancient  authors. 

2.  Nolo  is  compounded  of  the  obsolete  ne  (for  non)  and  volo.  The 
V  of  vOoO  after  ne  is  dropped,  and  the  vowek  (e  o)  are  contracted 
into  0. 

Pres.  Indie.        Pres.  Infin.        Perf.  Indie. 
no'-lo,  nol'-le,  nol'-u-i,        to  he  unwilling. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  no'-lo,  non'-vis,  non'- vult;  Perf  nol'-u-I. 

P.  nol'-u-mus,  non-vul'-tis,  no'-lunt.  Plup.  no-lu'-e-ram. 

Imperf.  no-le'-bam,  -bas,  -bat,  etc.  Fut.  perf.  no-lu'-e-r8. 

Fut.  no'-lam,  -les,  -let,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.      S.  no'-lim,  no'-lis,  no'-lit;  Perf  no-lu'-e-rim. 

P.  no-li'-mus,  no-li'-tis,  no'-lint  Plup.  nol-u-is'-sem. 

Imperf.  S.  nol'-lem,  nol'-les,  nol'-let; 

P.  nol-Ie'-mus,  nol-le'-tis,  nol'-lent 

IMPERATIVE. 
Present.  Future. 

Sing.  2.  no'-li ;    Plur.  no-li-te.     Sing.  2.  no-ll-to,    Plur.  nol-i-to'-te, 

3.  no-li'-to;  no-lun'-to. 

INFINITIVE.  PARTICIPLE. 

Pres.  nol'-le.  Pres.  no'-lens. 

Perf.  nol-u-is'-se. 

Note.  In  non-ins^  norir-vuU,  etc.  of  the  present,  non  takes  the  place  of  ne,  but 
nSvis  acd  nevoU  also  occur  in  Plautus. 


142         ^  IREEGULAR   VERBS.  §179. 

3.  Malo  is  compounded  of  magis  and  volo.  In  composition  magis 
drops  its  final  syllable,  and  volo  its  v.  The  \owels  (a  o)  are  then 
contracted  into  a. 

Pres.  Indie,        Pres.  In/in.        Per/.  Indie. 
ma'-lo,  mal'-le,  mal'-u-i,     to  prefer. 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  ma'-lo,  ma'-vis,  ma'-vult ;  Pcrf.       .  mal'-u-i. 

P.  mal'-u-mus,  ma-vul'-tis,  ma'-lunt  Plup.  ma-lu'-e-ram. 

Imperf.    ma-le'-bam,  -bas,  etc.  Fut.  perf.  ma-lu'-e-ro. 
Fut,        ma'-lam,  -les,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.      S.  ma'-lim,  ma'-lis,  ma'-lit;  P^^f-  ma-lu'-e-rim. 

P.  ma-li'-mus,  ma-li'-tis,  ma'-lint.       Plup.  mal-u-is'-sem. 
Imperf.  S.  mal'-lem,  mal'-les,  mal'-let; 

P.  mal-le'-mus,  mal-le'-tis,  mal'-lert. 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres.  mal'-le.  Perf.  mal-u-is'-se. 

Note.  3fdv6lo,  mdvdlunt ;  mavdlet;  mdveUm,  mdvelisj  mdvelit ;  and  mdveUem; 
for  tndlo,  mdluni^  etc.,  occur  in  Plautus. 

"Y"  §  170»  Fero  is  irregular  in  two  respects : — 1.  Its  second  and 
third  roots  are  not  derived  from  the  first,  but  from  otherwise  obsolete 
verbs,  viz.  tulo  for  toUo,  and  tlao^  sup.  tldtum,  by  aphaeresis,  latum : — 
2.  In  the  present  infinitive  active,  in  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  and 
in  certain  parts  of  the  present  indicative  and  imperative,  of  both 
voices,  the  connecting  vowel  is  omitted.  In  the  present  infinitive 
passive,  r  is  doubled. 

ACTIVE   VOICE.  PASSIVE   VOICE. 

Pres.  Indie,  f e'-ro,  (to  bear.)  Pres.  Indie,  fe'-ror,  (to  be  borne.) 

Pres.  Infin.   fer'-re,  Pres.  Infin.  fer'-ri, 

Perf.  Indie,  tii'-li,  Perf.  Part,  la'-tus. 
Supine.          la'-tum. 

INDICATIVE. 
Present. 
S.  f e'-ro,  fers,  fert ;  fe'-ror,  fer'-ris  or  -re,  fer'-tiir ; 

P.  fer'-i-mus,  fer'-tis,  f e'-runt.        f er'-i-mur,  f e-rim'-i-ni,  f e-rim'-tur. 

Imperf.      fe-re'-bam.  Imperf.      fe-re'-bar. 

Fut.  f  e'-ram,  -res,  etc.  Fut.  f  e'-rar,  -re'-ris  or  -re'-re,  etc. 

Perf.  tu'-li.  Perf.  la'-tus  sum  or  fu'-I. 

Plup.  tu'le-ram.  Plup.  la'-tus  6'-ram  or  fu'-e-ram. 

FvA.  perf,  tu'-le-ro  FvA.  perf.  la'-tus  e'-ro  or  fii-e-ro. 


§  180.  IRREGULAR    VERBS.  143 

« 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.  fe'-ram,  -ras,  etc.  'Pres.      fe'-rar,  -ra'-ris  or  -r.i'-re,  eUx, 

Imperf.  fer'-rera,  -res,  etc.  Imperf.  fer'-rer,  -re'-ris,  etc. 

Perf.  tu'-Ie-rim.  Perf.      la'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 

riup.  tu-lis'-sem.  Plup.     la'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem. 

IMPERATIVE. 

Vres.  S.  f  er,        P.  fer'-te.  Pres.  S.  fer'-re,  P.  f  e-rim'-i-ni. 

Fut.   S.  fer'-to,   P.  fer-to'-te, 

fer'-to ;        f  e-run'-to.    Fut.    S.  fer'-tor,  P.  (f e-rem'-i-ni.) 

fer'-tor.  fe-run'-tor. 

INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  fer'-re.  Pres.  fer'-ri. 

Perf.  tu-lis'-se.  Perf.  la'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-se. 

Fut.    la-tu-rus  es'-se.      Fut.    la -turn  i'-ri. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres.  fe'-rens.  Perf.  la'-tus. 

Fut.    la-tu'-rus.  Fut.    fe-ren'-dus. 

GERUND, 
f  e-ren'-di,  etc. 

'  SUPINES. 

Former,  la'-tum.  Latter,  la'-tu. 

Note.  In  the  comic  writers  the  following  reduplicated  forms  are  found  in 
parts  derived  from  the  second  root,  viz.  tetuli,  tetultsti,  tetiilit,  teiulerunt ;  tttulSrOj 
tetulerit;  ietulissem,  and  tetulisse. 


\ 


180.  Flo,  *  to  become,'  is  properly  a*neuter  verb  of  the  third 
conjugation,  having  only  the  parts  derived  from  the  first  root;  but  it 
is  used  also  as  a  passive  of  fdcio,  from  which  it  takes  those  parts  of 
the  passive  which  are  derived  from  the  third  root,  together  with  the 
participle  in  dus.  The  infinitive  present  has  been  changed  from  the 
regular  form  fere  to  feri. 

Pres.  Indie.     Pres.  Infin.    Perf.  Part. 

fi'-o,  fi'-e-ri,  fac'-tus,    to  he  made  or  to  become, 

INDICATIVE. 

Pres.  S.  fi'-o,  fis,  fit ;  Perf        fac'-tiis  sum  or  fuM. 

P.  fi-mus,  fi'-tis,  fi'-unt.    Plup.        fac'-tus  e'-ram  or  fu'-c-ram. 

Imperf.  fi-e'-bam,  fi-e'-bas,  etc.  Fut. perf.  idi.Q,'-XMS  e'-ro  or  fu'-e-r5. 
Fut.       fi'-am,  fi'-es,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 

Pres.  fi'-am,  fi'-as,  etc.  Perf  fac'-tus  sim  or  fu'-e-rim. 

Imp.   fi'-e-rem,  -e'-res,  etc.  Plup.  fac'-tus  es'-sem  or  fu-is'-sem. 


144 


IRREGULAR   VERBS. 


§181. 


IMPERATIVE. 
Pres,  Sing,  fi ;     Plur.  fl'-te. 


PARTICIPLES. 
Per/,  fac'-tus. 
Fut.    fa-ci-en'-diis. 


INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  f  i'-e-ri. 

Per/,  fac'-tus  es'-se  or  fu-is'-sg. 

Fut.  fac'-tum  i'-ri. 

SUPINE. 
Latter,  fac'-tu. 


NoTK.  The  compounds  offdcio  which  retain  a,  have  vlIso/io  in  the  passive; 
as,  calefdcio,  to  warm ;  passive,  calefio ;  but  tliose  which  change  a  into  i  form 
the  passive  regular! v.  (Of.  facio  in  the  list,  §  172.)  Yet  coiifit^  defit^  and  injitj 
occur.    See  ^  183,  12,  13,  14. 

§  181.  Edo,  to  eat,  is  conjugated  regularly  as  a  verb  of  the 
third  conjugation  ;  but  in  the  present  of  the  indicative,  imperative, 
and  infin*'ive  moods,  and  in  the  imperfect  of  the  subjunctive,  it  has 
also  forms  similar  to  those  of  the  corresponding  tenses  of  sum: — 
Thus. 

INDICATIVE. 

Present. 

S.  e'-do,  e'-dis,  e'-dit, 

(or    es,  est) ; 

P.  ed'-i-mus,     ed'-i-tis,        e -dunt 

(or    es'-tis), 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Imperfect. 

S.  ed'-e-rem,        ed'-e-res,  ed'-e-ret, 

(or  es'-sem,  es'-ses,  es'-set) ; 

P.  ed-e-re'-miis,    ed-e-re'-tis,  ed'-e-rent, 

(or  es-se'-mus,        es-se'-tis,  es'-sent). 


PreSy  S.  e'-de, 

(or  es; 

Fut.   S.  6d'-i-t8, 

(or  es'-to, 


BIPERATIVE. 
P.  6d'-I-te, 


es'-te). » 
P.  ed-i-to'-te,  e-dun'-t8. 
es-to'-te). 

INFINITIVE. 
Pres   ed'-e-re,    (or  es'-se). 

passi\t:. 

Pres.        ed'-i-tur,  (or  es'-tur). 

Imperf.     ed-e-re'-tiir,      (or  es-se'-tur). 

Note,  (a.)  In  the  present  subjunctive,  edim,  idis,  etc.,  are  found,  for  idam, 
Idas,  etc. 

(6.)  In  the  compounds  of  ido,  also,  forms  resembling  those  of  sum  occur. 
AmMdk)  has  the  participles  ambens  and  ambestxs  ;  comedo  has  comesus,  comtsurus, 
and  rarely  comestus;  and  adedo  and  exedo  have  adesus  and  exisus. 


L 


§  182,  188.  DEFECTIVE    VERBS.  145 

§  18S.  Eo  is  irregular  in  the  parts  which,  in  other  verbs  are 
formed  from  the  first  root,  except  the  imperfect  subjunctive  and  the 
present  infinitive.  In  these,  and  in  the  parts  formed  from  the  second 
and  third  roots,  it  is  a  regular  verb  of  the  fourth  conjugation. 

Note.  JEo  has  no  fii-st  root,  and  the  parts  usually  derived  from  that  root, 
consist,  in  this  verb,  of  terminations  only. 

Pres.  Indie.     Pres.  In/in.     Per/.  Indie.     Per/.  Part. 

e'-o,  i'-re,  i'-vi,  i'-tum,      to  go. 

INDICATIVE. 
Pres.      S.  e'-o,  is,  it;  Fut.         i'-bo,  i'-bis,  i'-bit,  etc. 

P.  i'-mus,  i'-tis,  e'-unt.        Per/.        i'-vi,  i-vis'-ti,  i'-vit,  etc. 
Imperf.  S.  i'-bam,  i'-bas,  i'-bat;      Plup.        iv'-e-ram,  iv'-e-ras,  etc. 

P.  i-ba'-mus,  etc.  Fut.perf.W-e-roy  iv'-e-ris,  etc. 

SUBJUNCTIVE. 
Pres.      e'-am,  e'-as,  e'-at,  etc.        Per/,  iv'-e-rim,  iv'-e-rls,  etc. 
Imperf.  i'-rem,  i'-res,  i'-ret,  etc.     Plup.  i-vis'-sem,  i-vis'-seg,  etc. 

IMPERATIVE.  INFINITIVE. 

Pres.  S.  i,        P.  i'-te.  Pres.  i'-re. 

Fut.    2.  i'-tS,         i-to'-te,  Per/,  i-vis'-se. 

3.  i'-to;        e-un'-to.  Fut.    i-tu-rus  es'-se. 

PARTICIPLES.  GERUND. 

Pres.  i'-ens,  (gen.  e-un'-tXs.)  e-un'-di, 

Fut.    i-tu'-riis,  a,  um.  e-un'-do,  etc. 

Remark  1.  In  some  of  the  compounds  the  forms  earn,  ies,  let  occur,  though 
rarely,  in  the  future ;  as,  redeam,  redies,  abiet,  exiet,  proaient.  Mis,  issem,  and 
Mse,  are  formed  by  contraction  for  ivistis,  ivissem,  and  ivisse.     See  §  162,  7. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  passive  voice  are  found  the  infinitive  iri,  and  the  third  per- 
sons singular  itur,  ibatur,  ibitur^  Hum  est,  etc. ;  edtur^  iretur^  eundum  est,  etc., 
which  are  used  impersonally.     See  ^  184,  2,  (a.) 

Rem.  3.  The  compounds  of  eOj  including  veneo,  are  conjugated  like  the  sim- 
ple verb,  but  most  of  them  have  li  in  the  perfect  rather  than  ivi.  See  under  eo 
m  §  176.  Adeo,  anteeo,  ineo,  prcetereo,  subeo,  and  transeo,  being  used  actively, 
are  found  in  the  passive  voice.  Inietur  occurs  as  a  future  passive  of  ineo. 
Amino  is  regular,  like  audio,  but  has  either  amblbat  or  ambiebat.  *■' 

Note.  Queo,  I  can,  and  nequeo,  I  cannot,  are  conjugated  like  eo,  but  they 
want  the  imperative  mood  and  the  gerund,  and  their  participles  rarely  occur. 
They  are  sometimes  found  in  the  passive  voice,  before  an  infinitive  passive. 

DEFECTIVE    VERBS. 

§  183.  (1.)  Defective  verbs  are  those  which  are  not  used 
in  certain  tenses,  numbers,  or  persons. 

Remark.  There  are  many  verbs  which  are  not  found  in  all  the  tenses,  nnmbers,  and 
persons,  exhibited  in  the  paradigms.  Some,  not  originally  defective,  are  accounted  so, 
because  they  do  not  occur  in  the  classics  now  extant.  Others  are  in  their  nature  defeo« 
tive.  Thus,  the  first  and  second  persons  of  the  passive  voice  must  be  wanting  in  man} 
verbs,  from  the  nature  of  their  signification. 
IB 


146  DEFECTIVE   VERBS.  §  i8J 

(2.)  1  he  following  list  contains  such  verbs  as  are  remarkable  for 
wanting  many  of  their  parts : — 

1.  Odi,  I  hate.  6.  Van,  to  ^eak.  11.  C^do,  teU,  or  give  me. 

2.  Ccepi,  I  have  be gvn.  7.  Qnsdso.  I  pray.  12.  Con^t,  it  is  done. 
8.  Meinini, /reTTie/nAer.         8.  Ave,     /  hail,  or  13.  De^t,  it  is  warUing. 
4.  Aio,          I  y                        9.  Salve,  )  farewell.  14.  Infit,  he  begins. 

6.  Inquam,  j     *'''^*  10.  Apage,  begone.  15.  Ovat,  Tie  rejoices. 

1.  OJi,  CQ?pi,  and  memini  are  used  chiefly  in  the  perfect  and  in 
the  other  parts  formed  from  the  second  root,  and  are  thence  called 
preteritive  verbs.  Odi  has  also  a  deponent  form  in  the  perfect : — 
Thus, 

Ind.  perf.  o'-di  or  y-sus  sum;  plitp.  od'-fi-ram;  ftU.  perf.  6d'^-ro. 

SuBj.  perf.  od'-e-rim ;  plup.  6-dis'-sem. 

Inf.  perf.  o-dis'-se ;  fut.  o-su'-rum  es'-se. 

Part.  fut.  o-su'-rus;  perf.  o'-sus. 
NoTK  1.  Exosus  and  perosvs,  like  6sus,  are  used  actively.     Odlvit^  for  dcSt,  00 
curs,  iL  Anton,  in  Cic.  Phil.  13,  19 :  and  odiendi  in  Appuleius. 

2.  Ind.  perf.  coe'-pi ;  plup.  coep'-6-ram ;  fui.  perf.  coep'-S-ro. 
SuBj.  perf.  coep'-e-rim ;  phip.  coe-pis  -sem. 

IxF.  /)er/r  cce-pis'-se ;  /««.  coep-tu'-rum  es'-se. 

Part.  fui.  coep-tu'-rus ;  perf.  ccep'-tus. 
Note  2,  In  PJautus  are  found  a  present,  catpio,  present  subjunctive,  coipiam, 
and  infinitive,  ccepire.    Before  an  infinitive  passive,  cceptus  est,  etc.,  rather  than 
co^',  etc.,  are  commonly  used. 

3.  Ind.  perf.  mem'-i-ni ;  plup.  me-min'-e-ram ;  fut.  perf.  mS-mln'-e-ro. 
SuBj.  perf.  me-raln'-e-rim ;  plup.  mem-I-nis -sem. 

Inf.  /jej^Tmem-i-nis'-se. 

Imperat.  2  pers.  S.  me-men'-to;  P.  mem-en-to'-te. 
Note  3.  Odi  and  memini  have,  in  the  perfect,  the  sense  of  the  present,  and, 
in  the  pluperfect  and  future  perfect,  the  sense  of  the  imperfect  and  future ;  as, 
fugiei  aique  oderit.  Cic.  In  this  respect,  now,  I  know,  the  perfect  of  lujsco,  to 
learn,  and  consuevi,  I  am  vront,  the  perfect  of  c&nsfuesco,  I  accustom  myself,  a^ee 
with  odi  and  memini. 

4.  Ind.  ]^es.  ai'-o,*  aMs,  a'-it;  , ,  ai'-unt.* 

imp.  ai-e^-bam,  ai-e'-bas,  ai-e'-bat ;  ai-e-ba'-miis,  ai-e-ba'-tis,  ai-e'-bant. 

SuBj.  pres. ,  ai'-as,  ai'-at ;  , ,  ai'-ant. 

Imperat.  pres.  a'-I.        Part.  pres.  ai'-ens. 
Note  4.    Ais  with  ne  is  contracted  to  otV  like  vtden\  abin' ;  for  videme, 
abisne.    The  comic  ^vriters  use  the  imperfect  aibas,  aibcU  and  atbcmt,  which  are 
dissyUabic. 

6.  Ind.  jTres.  in'-quam,  in'-qu!s,  in'-quit;  in'-^ui-miis,  in'-qul-tts,  in'-qui-unt. 

imp. , ,  in-qui-e'-bat,  anc? In-qui -bat; , , in-qui-e'-bant. 

fut. ,  in'-qui-es,  in'-qui-et;  — — , , . 

j^er/". ,  in-quis'-ti,  in-quit;  , , . 

SvBj.  pres. ,  in'-qui-as,  in'-qui-&t;  ,  m-qui-a'-tis,  in'-qui-ant. 

Imperat.  in'-que,  in'-qul-to. 

6.  Jsv.  pres. , ,  fa'-tur;  fut.  f  a'-bor, ,  f  ab'-I-tur. 

perf.  fatus  est;  plup.  fatus  eram. 

Imperat.  f  a'-re.     Part.  pres.  fans ;  perf.  f  a'-tus ;  fut.  fan'-diis. 
Infix.  j»rc«.  fa'-ri  or  fa'-ri-er.     Gerund,  gen.  fan'-di;  abl  fan'-d5. 
Supine,  fa'-tu. 

•Pronounced  a'-yo,  a'-yunf,  etc.,  wherever  the  diphthong  oi  is  followed  by  a  rowwl 
P«e  4  9,  1. 


§  184.  IMPERSONAL    VERBS.  147 

» 
Interfari  has  the  forms  inter/ dtur,  inter/ dta  est,  inter/dri,  intei/ans^  and 
inter/atus. — J-^dri  has  effdbor,  effabere,  eifdtus  est,  effdti  sunt ;  imperat. 
effdre;  effurt,  effdtus,  effandus,  effando;  ejfdtu. — Prce/dri  occurs  in 
the  following  forms,  prce/dtur,  prce/dmur ;  prcB/ahantur ;  pi'ce/drer; 
prce/arentur ;  prce/dti  su  nus  ;  prcc/dtus  /mro;  imperat.  prcsfdto,  pr^/d- 
mino  ;  prce/ans,  prce/dtvs,  pra/andus;  jyi'CB/ando. — Frd/dri  has  pro/dturf 
pro/dta  est,  pro/ dta  sunt,  pro/dim  and  prd/ans. 

7.  Ind.  pres.  quas'-so, ,  quae^-sit;  quaes''-u-mfi!s, , . 

Inf.  pres.  quaes'-e-re. 

8.  Tmfkrat.  a'-ve,  a-ve'-te;  a-ve^-to.    Inf.  a-ve'-re. 
xsoii!..  Avere  and  solvere  are  often  used  with  jvbeo. 

9.  Ind.  pres.  saF-ve-o;  /ut.  sal-ve'-bis.    Inf.  pres.  sal-ve'-rS. 
Imperat.  sal'-ve,  sal-ve'-te;  sal-ve'-to. 

10.  Imperat.  ap'-a-gg.    So  age  with  a  subject  either  singular  or  plural. 

11.  Imperat.  sing.  c6'-do;  pi.  cet'-te  /or  cSd'-i-tS.  Hence  cSdodum. 

12.  Ind.  pres.  con''-fIt;  /ut.  con-fl'-et. 

Sub  J.  pres.  con-fi'-at;  imper/.  con-fi'-S-rSt.    Inf.  pres.  con-fl'-6-ri. 

13.  Ind.  pres.  de'-fit;  pi.  de-f i'-unt ;  /m<.  de-fi'-St.    Subj.  pres.  d§-fi'-2it. 
Inf.  pres.  de-f i'-e-ri.    So  ef-f  i'-e-ri,  omd  in-ter-f  I'-e-rl.  Plant. ;  and  in-ter- 

fi''-at.  Lucr. 

14.  Ind.  pres.  in'-fit;  pi.  in-ff-unt. 

.  15.  Ind.  pres.  o'-vat.     Subj.  pres.  o'-vSt;  imper/.  6-va'-r6t. 

Part.  pres.  6'- vans ;  per/.  6-va'-tiis ;  /ut.  6v-ar-tu''-rus.    Gerund,  S-van'-dL 

Remark  1.  Among  defective  verbs  are  sometimes,  also,  included  the  follow- 
ing : — Fdrem.  /dres,  etc.,/^re,  (see  §  154,  R.  3. )  Ausim,  ausls,  austt ;  ausint.  Faxo 
and  /axim,faxls,/axit;  /axlmus,  /axitis,  /axint.  Faxem.  The  form  in  o  is 
an  old  future  perfect;  that  in  im  a  perfect,  and  that  in  em  a  pluperfect  sub- 
junctive.  See  §  162,  7,  (c),  and  9. 

Rem.  2.  In  the  present  tense,  the  first  person  singular,  /uro,  to  be  mad,  and 
dor  and  der,  from  do,  to  give,  are  not  used.  So  in  tlie  imperative  scl,  cupe  and 
poUe,  from  scio,  cupio,  and  polleo,  do  not  occur. 

Rem.  3.  A  few  words,  sometimes  classed  with  defectives,  are  formed  by 
contraction  from  a  verb  and  the  conjunction  si;  as,  sis  for  si  vis,  suUis  for  si 
vnUis,  "iodes  for  si  audes  (for  audies.) 

IMPERSONAL    VERBS.  / 

§  184.  («.)  Impersonal  verbs  are  those  which  are  used 
only  in  the  third  person  singular,  and  do  not  admit  of  a  personal 
subject. 

(6.)  The  subject  of  an  impersonal  verb  in  the  active  voice  is,  for  the  most 
part,  either  an  infinitive,  or  an  infinitive  or  subjunctive  clause ;  but  in  English 
the  neuter  pronoun,  it,  commonly  stands  before  the  verb,  and  represents  such 
clause;  as,  me  delectat  scribere,  it  delights  me  to  write.  Sometimes  an  accusa- 
tive depending  on  an  inipersonal  verb  takes,  in  English,  the  place  of  a  sub- 
ject; as,  me  miseret  tut,  1  pity  thee. 

1.  Impersonal  verbs  in  the  active  voice  are  conjugated  in  the  sev- 
eral conjugations  like  delectat,  it  delights ;  decet,  *'■  ^ -—.-•-  --^ 

it  harpens ;  evenit,  it  happens ;  thus : — 


148 


IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 


§  184. 


lit  Gmj. 

2d  OmJ. 

Bd  Cmj. 

iih  Cbiy*. 

Ijn>.  Pres. 

delectat, 

d^cet, 

contingit, 

jvSnit, 

Imp. 

delectabat, 

decebat, 

confmgebat, 

iveniebat, 

F^ 

delectabit, 

decebit, 

continget. 

3veniet, 

Perf. 

delectavit. 

decuit, 

contigit, 

evenit, 

Plup. 

delectaverat, 

decuerat, 

contigerat, 

cvenerat. 

Fut.  perf. 

delectaverit. 

decuerit. 

contigerit. 

evenerit' 

Sub.  Pres. 

delectet, 

deceat, 

contingat, 

eveniat. 

Imp. 

delectaret, 

deceret, 

contingeret, 

evenirtt. 

P^f. 

delectaverit, 

decuerit, 

contigerit, 

evenerit, 

Plup. 

delectavisset 

decuisset. 

contigisset. 

evenisset. 

Ikf.  Pres. 

delectare, 

decere. 

contingere, 

evenire, 

Per/. 

delectavisse. 

decuisse. 

contigisse. 

evenisse. 

2.  (a.)  Most  neuter  and  many  active  verbs  may  be  used  imperson- 
ally in  the  passive  voice,  by  changing  the  personal  subject  of  the  ac- 
tive voice  into  an  ablative  with  the  preposition  a  or  ab  ;  as, 

Illi  pugnarU ;  or  pugnatur  ab  iUis,  they  fight.  lUi  quarwd,  or  guoBrltur  ab 
mis,  they  ask,  Cf.  §  141,  Rem.  2. 

(b.)  In  the  passive  form,  the  subject  in  English  Ts,  commonly,  either 
the  agent,  expressed  or  imderstood,  or  an  abstract  noun  formed  from 
the  verb ;  as, 

Pugnatum  est,  tee,  they,  etc.  fought;  or,  the  batde  was  fought.  Concurritur, 
the  people  run  together;  or,  there  is  a  concourse. 

(c.)  Sometimes  the  English  subject  in  the  passive  form  is,  in  Latin,  an  ob 
lique  case  dependent  on  the  verb ;  as,  fateiur  tibi,  thou  art  favored. 

The  following  are  the  forms  of  impersonal  verbs  in  the  several  conjugations 
of  the  passive  voice: — 

Int>icativk  Mood. 

Pre*,    pugnatur,  favetur,  curritur,  venltur, 

Imp.     pugnabatur,  favebatur,  currebatur,  veniebatur, 

FuL      pugnabltur,  favebltur,  curretur,  venietur, 

Perf.    pugnatum  est  or  fautum  est   or  cursum   est  or    ventum    est   o> 

fuit,  fuit,                         fuit,  fuit, 

Plup.    pugnatum  6rat  or  fautum  £rat  or  cursum  6rat  or    ventum  Srat  or 

niCrat,  fuerat,                    faerat,  fuerat, 

/'irf.j;.  pugnatum  Alitor  fautum  6rit  or  cursum  Srit  or    ventum  6rit  or 

fiierit  "  -  ■                       "  "  ■  "  "  • 


faerit. 


fufirit. 


fufirit. 


SuBJu»cnvB  Moon. 


Pres.    pugnetur,  faveatur,  curratur,  veniatur. 

Imp.      pugnaretur,  faveretur,  curreretur,  veniretur, 

Pcrf.    pugnatum  sit  or  fautum  sit    w  cursum    sit  or     ventum    sit    or 

fuerit,  fuerit,  fuerit,  fuerit, 

Php,   pugnatum  esset  or  fautum  esset  or  cursum  esset  or    ventum  cssct  or 

fuisset.  fuisset.  faisset.  fuisset. 

IxFunnvK  Mood. 

Pres.    pugnari,  faveri,  curri,  veniri, 

Perf.    pugnatum  esse  or  fautum  esse  or  cursum  esse  or    ventum  esso  or 

fuisse,  fuisse,  fuisse,  fuisse, 

Fut.      pugnatum  In.  fautum  iri-  cursum  In.  ventiun  Ixi 


i 


§  184. 


IMPERSONAL    VERBS. 


149 


3.  In  like  manner,  in  the  periphrastic  conjugation,  the  neuter  gen- 
der of  the  participle  in  dus^  both  of  active  and  neuter  verbs,  is  used 
impersonally  with  est,  etc.,  and  the  dative  of  the  person ;  as,  mihi 
scrihendum  fuit,  I  have  been  obliged  to  write ;  moriendum  est  omnibus^ 
all  must  die.    See  §  162,  15,  R.  5. 

Eemark  1.  Grammarians  usually  reckon  only  ten  real  impersonal  verbs,  all 
of  which  are  of  the  second  conjugation,  viz.  decet,  libel,  licet,  liquet,^  miserei, 
oportet,  plget,  poenitet,  pudet,  and  tcedet.  (See  §  169.)  Four  of  these,  decet,  libet, 
Ucet,  and  liquet  occur  also  in  the  third  person  plural,  but  without  personal  sub- 
j«cts.  There  seems,  however,  to  be  no  good  reason  for  distinguishing  the 
verbs  above  enumerated  from  other  impersonal  verbs.  The  following  are  such 
other  verbs  as  are  most  commonly  used  impersonally: — 

(a.)   In  the  first  conjugation : — 

Constat,  it  is  evident.  Vacat,  there  is  leisure.         Pugnatur,     a    battle    is 

Jiivat,  it  delights.  Certatur,  there  is  a  con-       fought. 
Prasstat,  it  is  better.  tention.  ^  Statur,  they  stand  Jimu 

Bestat,  it  remains.  Peccatur,  a  fault  is  com-  • 

Stat,  it  is  resolved.  mitted. 


(p.)   In  the  second  conjugation : — 


Apparet,  it  appears. 
Attlnet,  it  belongs  to. 
DispUcet,  it  displeases. 
Dolet,  it  grieves. 
Miseretur,  it  distresses. 
Patet,  it  is  plain. 


Pertlnet^  it  pertains. 
Placet,  tt  pleases.  ' 
Fletur,  we,  etc.  weep,  or, 

there  is  weeping. 
Nocetur,     injury  is   in- 

fiicted. 


Per^uadetnr,  he,  they,  etc. 
are  persuaded, 

Pertsesum  est,  he,  ffeey, 
etc.  are  disgusted  unth. 

Siletur,  silence  is  main- 
tained. 


Desinltur,  there  is  an  end. 
Scribltvir,  it  is  written. 
Vivitur,  we,  etc.  live. 


(c.)   In  the  third  conjugation  : — 

Accldit,  it  happens.  Miserescit,  it  distresses. 

Conducit,  it  is  useful.  Sufl'icit,  it  suffices. 

Contingit,  it  happens.  Creditur,  it  is  believed. 

Fallit,  or    |  it  escapes  me  ;  Currltur,  people  run. 
Fugit  me, )  I  do  not  know. 

(d.)   In  the  fourth  conjugation : — 

ConvSnitj    it  is   agreed    Expedit,  it  is  expedient.       Scitur.  it  ts  hnovm. 
upon ;  it  is  fit.  Dormitur,  we,  they,  etc.    Itur,  they,  etc.  go. 

Evenit,  it  happens.  sleep.  Vemtur,  they,  etc.  come. 


(e.)   Among  irregular  verbs  :- 


Fit,  it  happens. 
Interest,  it  concerns. 
Obest,  it  is  hurtful. 


Praetfirit  me,    it  is  un- 
known to  me. 
Prodest,  it  avails. 


Refert,  it  concerns. 
Siibit,  it  occurs. 
Superest,  it  remains. 


(f.)  To  these  may  be  added  verbs  signifying  the  state  of  the  weather,  or  the 
operations  of  nature.  The  subject  of  these  may  be  Jupiter,  deus,  or  cmlum, 
which  are  sometimes  expressed.    Of  this  kind  are  the  following: — 

Fulget,      1  Lapldat,  it  rains  stones.  Tonat,  it  thunders. 

FnlguxatUt  lightens.  Lucescit    j  .  ^.  ,  Vesperascit,      )  ewmn^ 

Fulrainat, )  Illucescit, )     ^'     *   ^  Advesperascit,  >     ap~ 

Gelat,  it  freezes.  Ningit,  it  snows.  Invesperascit,  )jn'oache8. 

Grandlnat   ii  hails.  Pluit,  it  rains. 

Lapidat,  ningit,  and  pluit  are  also  used  impersonally  in  the  passive  voice. 
18* 


150 


REDUNDANT   VERBS. 


§185 


Rem.  2.  Impersonal  verbs,  not  being  used  in  the  imperative,  take  the  sub- 
junctive in  its  stead ;  as,  delertet,  let  it  delight.  In  the  passive  voice,  their 
perfect  participles  are  used  only  in  the  neuter. 

Rem.  3.  Most  of  the  impersonal  verbs  -want  participles,  gerunds,  and  su- 
pines; but  pcenitet  has  a  present  participle,  futures  in  rus  and  dus,  and  the  ge- 
rund.   Pudtt  and  plyet  have  also  the  gerund  and  future  passive  participle. 

Rem.  4.  Most  of  the  above  verbs  are  also  used  personally,  but  frequently  in 
a  somewhat  different  sense;  as,  «<  TibeiHs  inter  eos  et  pons  inUresset,  so  that 
the  Tiber  and  bridge  were  between  them. 


REDUNDANT    VERBS. 

'■""    §  18^.     Redundant  verbs  are  those   which   have  different 
fonns  to  express  the  same  meaning. 

Verbs  may  be  redundant  in  termination  ;  as,  fabrico  and  fabr^cory 
to  frame  ; — in  conjugation ;  as,  Idvo,  -are,  and  Idvo,  -ere,  to  wash  ; — 
or  in  certain  tenses ;  as,  odi  and  osus  sum,  I  hate. 

I.  The  following  deponent  verbs,  besides  their  passive  form,  have 
an  active  form  in  o,  of  the  same  meaning,  but  which  is,  in  general, 
rarely  used.  A  few,  however,  which  are  marked  r.,  occur  more  rare- 
ly than  the  corresponding  forms  in  o. 


Abominor,  to  abhor. 

Adfilor,  to  fiaiter. 

Altercor,  to  dispute. 

Amplexor,  to  embrace. 

Arbitror,  to  suppose. 

Argutor,  to  prate. 

Assentior,  to  assenL 

Auciipor,  to  hunt  afler. 

Anguror.  toforettu. 

Aurig:or,  to  drive  a  chariot. 

Ausjiicor,  to  take  the  au- 
spices. 

Cachinnor,  r.  to  laugh 
almid. 

Comltor,  to  accompany. 

Commentor,  to  deliberate. 

Con\ivor,  to  feast  together. 

Cunctor,  (cont.),  to  delay. 

Dignor,  to  deem  worthy. 

Dcpascor,  to  feed  upon. 

Elucubror,  to  elaborate. 


Fabricor,  to  frame. 
Feneror,    to  lend  on  in- 
terest. 
Fluctuor,  to  fluctuate. 
Frustror,  to  aisappoinL 
Frutlcor,  to  sprout. 
Impertior,  r.  to  impart 
Jurgor,  to  quarrel. 
Lacilmor,  r.  to  weep. 
Ludiflcor,  to  ridicule. 
Luxurior,  r,  to  be  rank. 
Medicor,  to  heal. 
Mcreor,  to  deserve. 
Metor,  to  measure. 
Misereor,  to  commiserate. 
Moderor,  to  moderate. 
^Muneror,  r.  to  bestow. 
Nictor,  r.  to  wink. 
Nutrior,  r.  to  nourish. 
Obsonor,  to  cater. 
Opinor,  to  suppose. 


Oscitor,  to  gape. 
Pacificor,  r.   to  make  a 

peace. 
Palpor,  to  caress. 
Partior,  to  divide. 
Populor,  to  lay  waste. 
Punior,  to  punish. 
Rumlnor,  to  ruminate. 
Sciscltor,  to  inquire. 
Sortior,  to  cast  lots. 
Stabulor,  to  stable. 
Tueor,  to  defend. 
Tumultuor,  to  be  in  con- 

fusion. 
Tutor,  to  defend. 
Utor,  to  use. 
Urinor,  to  dive. 
Veliflcor,  to  set  saiL 
Veneror,  to  rererence. 
Yocif  eror,  to  bawL 


2.   The  following  verbs  are  redundant  in  conjugation  : 

to  shine, 
to  wash. 


to  roar. 


Boo,  -are, 
Boo,  -dre,  r. 
Bullo,  -are,  )  .^  j.j 
Bullio,.!re,P^^ 
Cieo,  -ere, 
Cio,  -ire,  r. 
Dense,  -are, 
Dsnseo,  -ere, 
Ferveo,  -ere, 
Ferv'o,  -f  re, 
Fodio,  -fre, 
F6dk),  -Ire,  r, 


to  anoint 


Fulgeo,  -ere, 
Fulgo,  -ere,  r, 
Lavo,  -are, 
Lavo,  -ere,  r. 
Lino, -ere, 
Llnio,  -Ire,  r. 

Scateo,  -ere, 


to  excite. 


to  boil 


to  dig. 


Sc&to,  -Sre,  r. 


to  abound. 


Sono, -are,  I  ^_ 

Sono,  -ere,  \ 
StrIdeo,-ere,K^^.^^ 
Stndo,  -ere,    ) 

Those  marked  r.  are  rare- 
ly uted. 


§186. 


REDUNDANT   VERBS. 


151 


Mdrior^  drior,  and  pdiior,  also,  are  redundant  in  conjugation  in  certain  parts 
See  in  lists  ^  174  and  177. 

§  18G.  1.  Some  verbs  are  spelled  alike,  or  nearly  alike,  but 
differ  in  conjugation,  quantity,  pronunciation,  or  signification,  or  in 
two  or  more  of  these  respects. 

Such  are  the  followins: : — 


Abdico,  -are,  to  abdicate. 

AbdTco,  -ere,  to  refuse. 

Accido,  -ore,  to  full  upon. 

Accldo,  -ere,  to  cut  dovm. 

Addo,  -ere,  to  add. 

Adeo,  -ire,  to  go  to. 

Aggero,  -are,  to  heap  up. 

Aggero,  -ere,  toheap  upon. 

Allego,  -are,  to  depute. 

Alio  go,  -ere,  to  choose. 

Appello,  -are,  to  call. 

Appello,  -ere,  to  drive  to. 

Cado,  -ere,  to  fall. 

Caedo,  -ere,  to  cut. 

Cedo,  -ere,  to  yield. 

Caleo,  -ere,  to  be  hot. 

rJalleo,  -ere,  to  be  hard. 

Cano,  -ere,  to  sing. 

Caneo,  -ere.  to  be  gray. 

Oareo,  -ere,  to  want. 

Caro,  -ere,  to  card  wool. 

Colo,  -are,  to  conceal. 

Csclo,  -are,  to  carve. 

Censeo,  -ere,  to  think. 

Sentio,  -ire,  to  feel. 

Claudo,  -f  re,  to  shut. 

Claudo,  -ere,  to  be  lame. 

Colli  go,  -are,  to  bind  to- 
geilier. 

Colligo,  -ere,  to  collect. 

Colo,  -are,  to  strain. 

Colo,  -ere,  to  cultivate. 

Compello,  are,  to  accost. 

Compello,  -f  re,  to  force. 

Concido,  -ere,  to  cut  to 
jneces. 

Concido,  -ere,  to  fall. 

Conrcendo,  -6re,  to  em- 
bark. 

Coiiscindo,  -Sre,  to  tear 
to  pieces. 

Consterno,  -are,  to  terrify. 

Consterno,  -ere,  to  strew 
over. 

Decido,  -ere,  to  fall  down. 

Decido,  -ere,  to  cut  off. 

Decipio,  -ere,. to  deceive. 

Desipio,  -ere,  to  dote. 

Deligo,  -are,  to  tie  up. 

Dellgo,  ;ere,  to  choose 

Dili  go,  -ere,  to  love. 

Dico,  -€re,  to  say. 

Dl«o,  -ai-e,  to  dedicate. 


fido,  -t^re,  to  eat. 
Edo,  -ere,  to  publish. 
Educo,  -are,  to  educate. 
Ediico,  -ere,  to  draw  out. 
EfFero, -are,  tomakeunld. 
'EfFero,  -re,  to  carry  out. 
Excido,  -ere,  to  fall  out. 
Excido,  -ere,  to  cut  off. 
Ferio,  -ire,  to  strike. 
Fero,  -re,  to  bear. 
Fei'ior,-ari,  to  keep  holiday. 
Frigeo,  -ere,  to  be  cold. 
Frigo,  -ere,  to  fry. 
Fugo,  -are,  to  put  to  flight. 
Fiigio,-ere,  to  fly. 
Fundo,  -are,  to  found. 
Fundo,  -ere,  to  pour  out. 
Incido,  -ere,  to  fall  into. 
Incido,  ere,  to  cut  into. 
Indico,  -are,  to  shaio. 
Indico,  ere,  to  proclaim. 
Inficio,  -ere,  to  stain. 
Inf  itior,  -ari,  to  deny. 
Intercido,  -ere,  to  happen. 
Intercido,  -ere,     to    cut 

asunder. 
Jaceo,  -ere,  to  lie. 
Jacio,  -ere,  to  throw. 
Labo,  -are,  to  totter. 
Labor,  -i,  to  glide. 
Lacto,  -are,  to  suckle. 
Lacto,  -are,  to  deceive. 
Lego,  -are,  to  depute. 
Lego,  -ere,  to  read. 
Liceo,  -ere,  to  be  laioful. 
Liceor,  -eri,  to  bid  for. 
Liquo,  -are,  to  melt. 
Liqueo,  -ere,  to  be  mani-, 

fest. 
Liquor,  -i,  to  melt. 
Mano,  -are,  to  flow. 
Maneo,  -ere,  to  stay.  . 
Mando,  -are,  to  command. 
Man  do,  -ere,  to  eat. 
Meto,  -ei-e,  to  reap. 
Metor,  -ari,  to  measure. 
Metior,  -iri,  to  measure. 
Metuo,  -ere,  to  fear. 
Miseror,  -ari,  to  pity. 
Misfereor,  -eri,  to  pity. 
Moror,  -ari,  to  delay. 
Morior,  -i,  to  die. 
Nitefo,  -grie,  to  gUiier. 


Nitor,  -i,  to  strive. 

Obsero,  -are,  to  lock  up. 

Obsero,  -ere,  to  soto. 

Occido,  -ere,  to  fall. 

Occido,  -ere,  to  kill. 

Operio,  -ire,  to  cover. 

Operor,  -ari,  to  woi^k. 

Opperior,  -iri,  to  wait  for. 

Pando,  -are,  to  bend. 

Pando,  -ere,  to  extend. 

Puro,  -are,  to  prepare. 

Pareo,  -ere,  to  appear. 

Pario,  -ere,  to  bring  forth. 

Pario,  -are,  to  balance. 

Pendeo,  -ere,  to  hang; 

Pendo,  -ere,  to  weigh. 

Percolo,  -are,  to  fl'lter. 

Percolo,  -6re,  to  culorn. 

Permaneo,  -ere,  to  re- 
main. 

Penmano,  -are,  to  flow 
through. 

Prsedico,  -are,  to  publish. 

Prsedico,  -ere,  to  JoretelU 

Prodo,  -ere,  to  betray. 

Prodeo,  -ire,  to  come  forth. 

Recedo,  -ere,  to  retire. 

Recido,  -ere,  to  fall  bach 

Recido,  -ere,  to  cut  off. 

Reddo,  -6re,  to  restore. 

Redeo,  -ire,  to  return. 

Refero,  -re,  to  bring  back 

Referio,  -ire,  to  strike  back 

Relego,  -are,  to  remove. 

Relcgo,  -ere,  to  reailover 

Sedo,  -are,  to  aUay. 

Sedeo,  -ere,  to  sit. 

Sido,  -ere,  to  sink. 

Sero,  -ere,  to  sow. 

Sero,  -ere,  to  entwine. 

Succldo,  -€re,  to  fall  un- 
der. 

Succido,  -€re,  to  cut  down. 

Vado,  -ere,  to  go. 

Vador,  -ari,  to  bind  over 
by  bail. 

Veneo,  -ire,  to  be  sold. 

Venio,  -ire,  to  come. 

Venor,  -ari,  to  hunt. 

Vincio,  -ire,  to  bind. 

Vinco,   ere,  to  conquer. 

Volo,  -are,  to  fly. 

VSlb,  velle,  to  be  wiJUnsf. 


152  DERIVATION  OF  VERBS.  §  187 

2-  Different  verbs  have  sometimes  the  same  perfect ;  as, 

Aceo,  acui,  to  be  sour.  Fulcio,  fulsi,  to  prop.  Paveo,  pavi,  to  /ear. 

Acuo,  acui,  to  sharpen.        Luceo,  luxi,  to  shine.  Pasco,  pavi,  to  feed. 

Cresco,  crevi,  to  grow.  Lugeo,  luxi,  to  mourn.  Pendeo,  pependi,  tohang. 
Cemo,  crevi,  to  decree.  Mulceo,  mulsi,  to  soothe.  Pendo,  pependi,  to  weigL 
Fulgeo,  fulsi,  to  shine.  Mulgeo,  mulsi,  to  ndUc. 

To  these  add  some  of  the  compotmds  of  sto  and  sisto. 

3.  Different  verbs  have  sometimes,  also,  the  same  snplne  or  perfect 
participle;  as, 

Frico,  frictum,  to  i-ub.  Pango,  pactum,  to  drive  Patior,  passus,  to  suffer. 

FrJgo,  firictum,  to  roast.  in.  Teneo,  tentum,  to  hold. 

Maneo,  mansum,  to  re-  Paciscor,  pactus,  to  bar-  Tendo,  tentiim,  to  stretch. 

wMin.  gain.  Verro,  versum,  to  bmsh. 

Mando,  mansum,  to  chew.  Pando,  passum,  to  extend.  Verto,  versxmi,  to  turn. 

DEEIYATION    OF    VERBS. 

'^*^    §  187'.     Verbs  are  derived  either  from  nouns,  from  adjec- 
tives, or  from  other  verbs. 

L  Verbs  derived  from  nouns  or  adjectives  are  called  denomina- 
tives. 

1.  (a.)  Active  denominatives  are  generally  of  the  first  conjuga- 
tion ;  those  which  are  neuter,  of  the  second.  They  are  usually  formed 
by  adding  respectively  o  and  eo  to  the  root ;  as, 

Fkom  Nottns. 
•    Actives.  Neuters. 

Armo,  to  arm,  (arma.)"  Floreo,  to  bloom,  (flos.) 

Fraudo,  to  defraud,  (fraus.)  Frondeo,  to  produce  leaves^  (frons.) 

Nomino,  to  name,  (nomen.)  Luceo,  to  skine,  (lux.) 

Numero,  to  number,  (ntmierus.)         Vlreo,  to  flourish,  (vis.) 

Feom  Adjectives. 

Albo,  to  whiten,  (albus.)  Albeo,  to  be  white,  (albus.) 

Celebro,  to  frequent,  (celeber.)  Calveo,  to  be  bald,  (calvus.) 

Libero,  to  free,  (liber.)  Flaveo,  to  be  yellow,  (flavus.) 

^^     (ft.)   Sometimes  a  preposition  is  prefixed  in  forming  the  deriva- 
taVe ;  as, 

Coacervo,  to  heap  together,  (acervus.)      Exstrrpo,  to  extirpate,  (stirps.) 
Excavo,  to  excavate,  (cavus.)  Illaqueo,  to  insnare,  (laqueus.) 

2.  Many  deponents  of  the  first  conjugation,  derived  from  nouns,  express 
the  exercise  of  the  character,  office,  etc.,  denoted  by  the  primitive ;  as,  archi- 
tector,  to  build;  comiior,  to  accompany;  furor,  to  steal;  from  archUectus, 
c6mes,  and  fur. 

3.  Such  as  denote  resemblance  or  imitation  are  called  imitatires ;  as,  corrO- 
cor,  to  imitate  a  crow,  from  comix ;  Grcecor,  to  imitate  the  Greeks.  Some  of 
fcese  end  in  isso ;  as,  patrisso,  to  imitate  a  father. 

s^^    n.     Verbs  derived  from  other  verbs  are  either  frequentativsSj  in* 
cej^ives,  destder^iives,  diminutives^  or  intensives. 


k 


§  187.  DERIVATION    OF   VERBS.  153 

X  1.  Fre.quentatives  express'a  repetition,  or  an  increase  of  the  action 
expressed  by  the  primitive. 

(a.)  They  are  all  of  the  first  conjugation,  and  are  formed  by  adding 
o  to  the  third  root ;  as,  domo,  {domit-)  domXto.  So  adjuuo,  adj ilfo  ; 
dlcOj  dicto ;  gero,  geato.  In  verbs  of  the  first  conjugation,  at  of  the 
root  is  often  changed  into  it ;  as,  clamo,  to  cry,  (clamdi-)  clamito,  to 
cry  frequently. 

(b.)  A  few  frequentatives  are  formed  by  adding  tto  to  the  first 
root  of  the  primitive ;  as,  ago  {ag-')  dgito.  So  Idteo,  Idtito ;  nosco, 
noscXto ;  qucero,  qucerXto. 

(c. )  Frequentatives,  from  primitives  of  the  second,  third,  and  fourth  conju- 
gations, sometimes  serve  again  as  primitives,  from  which  new  frequentatives 
are  formed ;  as,  dlco,  dicto,  diciito ;  curro,  curso,  cursito ;  venio,  venio,  ventito. 
Sometimes  the  second  or  intermediate  form  is  not  in  use. 

(d.)  Some  frequentatives  are  deponent;  as,  minitor,  from  mtTior  {mindt^); 
versor,  from  verio  {vers-}.  So  amplexor,  sector,  IdqvXtor,  from  amplector,  sequOTj 
and  Idqiuyr. 

[e.)  When  verbs  of  this  class  express  simply  an  increase  of  the  action  do- 
noted  by  the  primitive,  they  are,  by  some  grammarians,  called  intensives. 

\^  2.  Inceptives,  or  inchoatives  mark  the  beginning  of  the  action  or 
state  expressed  by  the  primitive. 

(a.)  They  all  end  in  sco,  and  are  formed  by  adding  that  termina- 
tion to  the  root  of  the  primitive,  with  its  connecting  vowel,  which,  in 
the  third  conjugation,  is  i;  as,  cdleo,  to  be  hot;  cdlesco,  to  grow  hot. 

So  Idbo,  (are),  Idhasco:  inr/emo,  (ere),  ingemisco;  obdormio,  (ire),  obdormisco. 
Eisco  is  contracted  for  Masco,  from  hio,  (are). 
(6.)   Most  inceptives  are  formed  from  verbs  of  the  second  conjugation, 
(c.)    Some  inceptives  are  formed  from  nouns  and  adjectives  by  adding  asco 
^      or  esco  to  the  root;  as,  jmerasco,  from  jmer ;  juvenesco,  from  jiivenU. 

Note.  Inceptives  are  all  neuter,  and  of  the  third  conjugation.    See  §  173. 
Some  verbs  in  sco,  which  are  not  inceptives,  are  active ;  as,  disco,  posco. 

X,  3.  Desideratives  express  a  desire  of  doing  the  act  denoted  by  the 
primitive. 

(a.)  They  are  formed  from  the  third  root,  by  adding  urio ;  as, 
coeno,  to  sup,  (ccendt,)  coendtUrio,  to  desire  to  sup. 

(5.)   Desideratives  are  all  of  the  fourth  conjugation.   See  §  176,  Note. 

(c.)   Verbs  in  urio,  having  u  long,  are  not  desideratives;  as,  prurio,  ligurio. 

■^      4.   Diminutives  denote  a  feeble  or  trifling  action.    They  are  formed 
by  adding  illo  to  the  root  of  the  primitive  ;  as,  conscrlbillo,  to  scribble, 
from  conscrlbo. 
They  are  few  in  number,  and  are  all  of  the  first  conjugation. 

y,  5.  Intensives  denote  eager  action.  They  are  usually  formed  by 
adding  .so,  esso,  or  isso  to  the  root  of  the  primitive ;  as,  facesso,  to  act 
earnestly — from  fadio. 

So  capesso,  incesso,  from  capio  and  incedo.  Concnpisco,  to  desire  greatly,  though 
in  form  an  inceptive,  is,  in  its  signification,  an  intensive. 

Note.  Verbs  of  all  these  classes  have  sometimes  simply  the  meaning  of  their 
primitives. 


154  COMPOSITION   OF  VERBS.  §  188, 189 

COMPOSITION    OF    VERBS. 

§  188.     Verbs  are  compounded  variously : — 

1.  Of  a  noun  and  a  verb ;  as,  ce-Ufico,  beUigSro,  lucrifdcio.   See  §  103,  R.  1. 

2.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb;  as,  ampliftco,  mulUpUco. 

3.  Of  two  verbs ;  as,  cale/dcio,  inadefado,  patefdcio. 

Rem.  In  verbs  of  this  class,  the  first  part,  which  is  a  verb  of  the  second  con- 
jugation, loses  its  final  o;  the  second  part  is  always  the  verb  fdcio. 

4.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  verb ;  as,  benefdcio,  mdledico,  sdtdgo,  nolo,  negli^o. 

5.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  verb ;  as,  adduco,  excdlo,  prddo,  sttbrepo,  discemo, 
tejungo. 

6.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun,  as,  pemocto,  irreiio. 

§  189*  In  composition  with  particles,  the  vowels  a  and  e  and 
the  diphthong  cb  in  the  radical  syllal?le  of  the  simple  verb  are  often 
changed  in  the  compound. 

1.  The  following  simple  verbs  in  composition  change  a  into  e : — 
Arceo,  Carpo,  Farcio,  Jacto,         Pario,        Patro,  Spargo, 
Candeo,         Damno,          Fatiscor,       Lacto,         Partio,       Sacro,         Tracto. 
Capto,            Fallo,             Gradior,        Mando,       Patior,       Scando, 

Exc.  A  is  retained  in  amando,  prcemando,  desacro,  and  reiracto  ;  pradamno^ 
and  pertracto  sometimes  also  occur.  A  is  also  changed  into  e  in  occento  from 
cantOj  and  ankelo  from  halo ;  comperco  also  is  found. 

2.  The  following,  in  the  first  root,  change  a  and  e  into  X;  viz. 
ago,  cado,  egeo,  emo,  frango,  pango,  premo,  rego,  sedeo,  specio,  tango. 

3.  These  change  a  and  e,  in  the  first  and  second  roots,  into  X;  viz. 

salio,  to  leap,  sapio,  taceo,  and  teneo. 

4.  These  change  a  into  X,  and  ce  into  l,  in  all  the  roots ;  viz. 

habeo,  lacio,  lateo,  placeo,  sta.tuo;  caedo,  laedo,  and  quaero. 

5.  The  following  change  a,  in  the  first  root,  into  t,  and  in  the  third 
root  into  e  ;  viz. 

cano,  capio,  fateor,  jacio,  rapio,  and  apiscor. 

Exc.  (a.)  A  is  retained  in  circumago,  per  ago,  said  go;  antehdbeo,  posthdbeo^ 
depango,  repango,  compldceo,  and  perptaceo.  Occdno  and  recdno  also  sometimes 
occur.  E  is  retained  in  coemo,  circum-sedeo,  and  supersedeo.  Antecdpio  and  an- 
ticipo  are  both  used ;  so  also  are  superjdcio  and  superjicio. 

(6.)  Of  go  and  dego  are  formed,  by  contraction,  from  con,  de,  and  ago;  demo, 
promo  and  sumo,  from  de,  pro,  sub,  and  emo ;  prabeo,  and  perhaps  debeo,  from 
prcB,  de,  and  hdbeo ;  pergo  and  surgo,  from  per,  sub,  and  rego. 

Note  1.  Fdcio,  compounded  with  a  preposition,  changes  a  into  i  in  the  first 
rootj  and  into  c  in  the  third ;  as,  officio,  affect,  affectum.  Some  compounds  of 
facto  with  nouns  and  adjectives,  change  a  into  f,  and  also  drop  i  before  o,  and 
are  of  the  first  conjugation;  as,  signlfico,  ketffico,  magni/ico.  Specio  forms 
some  compounds  in  the  same  manner;  as,  conspicor  and  susptcor. 

Note  2.  Lego,  compounded  with  con,  de,  di,  e,  inter,  nec^  and  se,  changes  i 
into  f,  in  the  first  root ;  as,  colUgo,  negligo,  etc. ;  but  with  ad,  pros,  pery,re,  sub, 
and  tram,  it  retains  e ;  as,  allego. 

Note  3.  Calco  and  salto,  in  composition,  change  a  into  u  ;  as,  inculco,  insuUo. 
Plaudo  changes  au  into  o ;  as,  explodo ;  except  applaudo.  Audio  changes  au 
into  e  in  obedio.  Ca'.iio,  claudo,  and  quatio,  drop  a ;  as,  accuso,  recludo,  percutio. 
iuro  changes  u  int:^  t'  in  dejero  and  pejiro,  but  dejuro,  also,  is  in  use. 


§  190,  191.  ADVERBS.  155 

Note  4.  In  the  compounds  of  caveo,  mdneo,  and  traho,  &  remains  unchanged, 
and  so  also  does  ce  in  the  compounds  of  hareo. 

Note  5.   The  simple  verbs  with  which  tlie  following   are   com- 
pounded are  not  used : — 

Defendo,  Impedio,  Confute,  Instlgo,  Conniveo, 

Offendo,  Imbuo,  Refuto,  Impleo,  Percello, 

Experior,  Compello,  (-are,)  Ingruo,  C'ompleo,  Induo,         and  some 

Expedio,  Appello,  (-are,)  Congruo,  Renideo,  Exuo,  others. 

For  the  changes  produced  in  prepositions  by  composition  with  verbs  see 
§196. 

PARTICLES. 

*^  §  190.  1.  Particles  are  those  parts  of  speech  which  are 
neither  declined  nor  conjugated.  They  are  divided  into  four 
classes — adverbs,  prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  interjections. 

Note.   A  word  may  sometimes  belong  to  two  or  more  of  these  classes,  ac- 
cording to  its  connection. 


ADVERBS. 


^ 


I 


2.  An  adverb  is  a  particle  used  to  modify  or  limit  the  mean- 
ing of  a  verb,  an  adjective,  or  another  adverb ;  as, 

BSne  ei  sapienter  dixit,  he  spoke  well  and  wisely;  Canis  egrSgie  Jidelis,  a  re- 
markably faithful  dog;  Nimis  valde  lauddre,  to  praise  too  much.  Compare 
§  277,  R.  1. 

3.  Adverbs,  in  regard  to  their  signification,  are  divided  into  va- 
rious classes ;  as,  adverbs  of  place,  time,  manner,  etc.,  and  some  be- 
long to  either  class  according  to  their  connection. 

4.  In  regard  to  their  etymology,  adverbs  are  either  primitive  or 
derivative.  / 

Remark.  Among  primitive  adverbs  are  here  classed  not  only  such  as  can- 
not be  traced  to  any  more  remote  root,  but  also  all  which  are  not  included  in 
the  regular  classes  of  derivative  adverbs  hereafter  mentioned. 

PRIMITIVE    ADVERBS. 

^  §  lOl*  The  primitive  adverbs  are  few  in  number,  when  com- 
pared with  the  derivatives,  and  most  of  them  are  contained  in  the 
following  lists  marked  I,  IE,  and  III. 

I.     Adverbs  of  Tlace  and  Order. 

adeo,  so  far^  as  far.  alicubi,  somewhere.  aliquoversum,    toward 

adhiic,  to  this  place.  alicunde,  Jrom     some      some  place. 

adversiis,  ^  opposite,  ^  place.  aliunde,  from  another 

adversum,  >  over  against,  aVw,  to  another  place.         place. 

exadversiis, — um, )  toward.  allqua,  in  some  way.  cnxa,      )  t 

alia,  by  another  way.  aliorsum,  towardanothr  circum,  )  "^    "  " 

alias,  m  another  place.  er  place.  circitcr,  on  every  side, 

iklibl,  elsewhere.  aWcinb,  to  some  jdace.  circumcu'Cf    xll  around. 


156 


ADVERBS. 


§191. 


citra,  on  (his  tide. 
citro,  hither. 
contra,  over  against. 
coram,  before. 
dehinc,  henceforth. 
deinceps,  successively. 
deindo,  after  that. 
deiilque,  fnaUy. 
denuo,  again. 
deorsum,  downward. 
dexfrorsum,   toward    the 

rif/ht. 
eft,  ihat  way. 
eadem,  the  same  way. 
eo,  to  that  place,  thither. 
eodem,  to  the  same  place. 
exiude,  ajler  that. 
extra,  wimout. 
extriusecus, /Vwn  without. 
f  ora-s,  out  of  doors. 
forts,  without. 
hac,  iliis  toay. 
liactenus,  thus  far. 
hie,  here. 
hinc,  hence. 
hue,  hither. 
hucusque,  thus  far. 
horsum,  hiiherward. 
Ibi,  there. 

Ibidem,  in  the  same  place. 
iliac,  that  voay. 
illic,  there. 
illinc,  tlience. 
illO,  thitlier. 
illorsum,  thitherward. 
illuc,  thither. 
indc,  thence. 
indldem,  from  the  same 

place. 


Infra,  beJow^  beneath. 
Inlbi,  in  that  place. 
intrinsecus,  from  within 
intra,  intro,  \ 
introreum,    >  within. 
intus,  ) 

istae,  that  toay. 
istic,  there. 
istinc,  Oience. 
isto,  istuc,  iJiUher. 
juxta,  near,  alike. 
necubi,  lest  any  where. 
neutro,  to  neither  side. 


quorsiim?  vihitherwardl 

reSor.sum,l*°f^'^f'*^' 

sicubi,  if  am  where. 
sicunde,  if  from  any  place. 
sinistrorsum,    toward    the 

left. 
subter,  beneath. 
super,  supra,  above,  on  top. 
sursum,  upward. 


neutrubi,  to  neither  place,  turn,   then,    in  the  next 


to  neither  side. 
nullibi,      j^^^i^^g. 
nusquam,  |  ^ 

penitus,  UTithin. 
pone,  post,  behind,  back. 
porro,  onward, 
procul,  far. 
prope,  propter,  near. 
prorsum,  foncard. 
protinus,  onward. 
qua  ?  in  which  way  f 
quaqua,  )  what  way 

quacuraque, )    soever. 
quaque,  wheresoever. 
quilllbet. 


quavis, 


in  every  way. 


place. 
ubi?  where  f 
ubicumque,  )  wherever, 
ubiubi,  )  wheresoever. 

ubms,    j«^-«^!/«^^e^«- 

iultiii,  ultro,  beyond, 
und»^?  whence  f 

undique,    )      ""'cc. 
nndeunde,       )  whence- 
undecumque,  j  soever. 
uspiam,  )  somewhere, 
usquam,  ]  any  where. 
usque,  aU  the  way. 
usquequaque,  in  all  wayt, 
utrimque,  on  both  sides. 
utro?  which  way  f 
utrobi?  in  which  place  f 
utroblque,  in  both  places. 
utroque,  to  both  sides. 
utroqueversum,   toward 

both  sides. 
)lace,  ubif  where?   tmdif 
ad- 
verbs formed  in  a  similar  manner,  thus  constituting  a  svstem  of  adverbial  cor- 
relatives similar  to  that  of  the  pronominal  adjectives,   ^ee  ^  139,  5,  (3.) 

(b.)  As  in  the  case  of  the  pronominal  correlatives,  the  interrogative  and 
relative  forms  are  alike,  beginning  with  «  or  qu.  The  demonstratives  are  formed 
from  is,  which  is  strengthened  by  dem,  and  the  indefinite  from  dUquis.  The 
general  relatives  and  the  general  indefinites  or  universa'ls,  like  those  of  the  pro- 
nominal adjectives,  are  made,  the  former  by  doubling  the  simple  relatives  or 
by  appending  to  them  the  termination  cumque,  '  soever,'  and  the  latter  by  ad- 
ding que,  vis,  or  libit.    "'' 


quo?  whither f 

quoquu,  I  whither- 

quC'Cumque,  )  soever. 
qurxjuuversiis,   toward 
every  side. 


Bemark  1.   (a.)   The  interrogative  adverbs  of  pi 
whence?  quil  whither?  and  quctl  in  what  way?  have  relation  to  other 


Thus 


Jnlerrog. 

Demonstr. 

Relat. 

Gen.  Relat. 

Indefin. 

Gen.  Indefin. 

iibi? 

Ibi, 

ubi, 

ubiubi, 

allcubi, 

ubique, 

Ibidem, 

ubicumquP, 

ubivis, 
ubilibet 

nude? 

fade, 

unde. 

nndeunde, 

allcundf, 

undique, 

indldem, 

undCcumqu6, 

undevis, 

quo? 

eo. 

quo, 

quoquo. 

ailquo, 

undelibet, 
quovis, 

eodem, 

quocuraque, 

quGUbet, 

qua? 

^A 

qua. 

quaqua, 

aliqujl. 

quavis, 
quallbet 

eadem. 

quacumquS. 

§191. 


ADYERBS. 


167 


(c.)  To  those  answering  to  ubif  maybe  added  dliM,  nullihi,  and  {nlbi^  the 
latter  being  a  strengthened  form  of  ibi.  In  lilce  manner  aliuTide,  utrimque,  in- 
irinsecus,  and  extrinseius  may  be  added  to  those  answering  to  unilef  and  alio  to 
those  answering  to  quo?     So  also  to  utro  ?  answer  utroque  and  neutro. 

(c?.)  The  demonstratives  ibi,  inde,  and  eo  are  used  only  in  reference  to  rela- 
tive sentences  which  precede;  but  more  definite  demonstratives  are  formed 
from  the  pronouns  hlc,  iste,  and  ille,  answering  in  like  manner  to  ubi?  zinde? 
and  quo  ?  These  togetlier  with  the  preceding  correlatives  are,  in  the  following 
table,  arranged  respectively  under  their  several  interrogatives  ubi  ?  U7ide  f  quoi 
gud  f  and  qumsum  i — Thus  : 

iibiV  unde?  quo?  qua? 

hie,  hinc,  hiic,  nac, 

istic,  istinc,  istuc,  istac, 

illlc,  illinc,  illuc,  Ulac, 

Ibi,  inde,  eo,  .    ea. 

Ibidem,  indldem,  eodem,  eadem, 

alibi,  aliunde,  alio,  alia, 

aliciibi.  alicunde.  aliquo.  allqua. 


quorsum? 
horsum, 
Istorsum, 
illorsum. 


aliorsum, 
aiiquoversum. 


(e.)  fflc,  Tiinc,  hue,  refer  to  the  place  of  the  speaker;  istlc,  istinc,  istuc,  to  the 
place  of  the  second  person  or  person  addressed ;  and  illlc,  illinc,  illiiCj  to  that  of 
the  third  person  or  the  person  or  thing  spoken  of.  Cf.  ^  207,  R.  23,  (a.)  and  {d.) 

(/.)  The  interrogative  adverbs  ubi,  unde,  quo,  qua,  etc.  are  often  used  with- 
out a  question,  simply  as  adverbs  of  place ;  as,  In  earn  partem  ituros,  atque  ibi 
futaros  Helvetios,  ubi  eos  Ccesar  cotistituisset. 

(g.)  In  consequence  of  a  transfer  of  their  meaning,  some  of  the  adverbs  of 
place,  as,  hlc,  tbi,  ubi,  hinc,  inde,  hacienus,  etc.,  become  also  adverbs  of  time, 
and  some  of  them  are  used  also  as  conjunctions. 

n.     Adverbs  of  Time, 


actutum,  immediately. 
abhinc,  from  this  time. 
adeo,  so  long  (as). 
adhuc,  until  now,  still. 
alias,  at  another  time, 
aliquamdiu,  for  awhile. 
aliquando,  at  some  time. 
aliquoties,  several  times. 
ante,    )  befare, 
antea,  \  previously. 
antehac,  f%rmei-ly. 
bis,  twice,  (see  ^  119). 
circiter,  about,  near. 
eras,  tomorrow. 
cum  or  quum,  when. 
deinceps,  in  succession. 
delude  or  dein,  )  thereupon, 
exinde  or  exin,  |  afterward. 
dehinc,  from  this  time. 
demum,  at  length. 
denique,  lastly. 
diu,  long. 

diidum,  previously. 
eousque,  so  long. 
here  or  lafri,  yesterday. 
hie,  here,  hereupon, 
hinc,  from  this  time,  since. 
hodie,  to-day. 
Ibi,  then,  thereupon. 
Identidem,  now  and  then, 
rateatedlff. 

-     tt 


illico,  immediately. 
inde,  after  that,  then. 
interdum,  sometimes. 
interim,  meanwhile.. 
iterum,  again. 
jam,  now,  already. 

jamjam,  presently.^ 

jampridem,  long  since. 

modo,  just  now. 

mox,  soon  after. 

nondum,  not  yet. 

nonnumquam,  sometimes. 

niidiiis  tertius,  three  days 
ago. 

nunc,  now. 

numquam,  never. 

niip^r,  lately. 

olim,  former^ 

parumper, 

paulisper, 

perendie,  ttvo  days  hence. 

poiTO,  hereafter,  in  fu- 
ture. 

post,  postea,  afterwards. 

posthac,  hereafter. 

postridie.  tht  day  after. 

•pridem,  long  since. 

prldie,  the  day  before. 

prottnils,  instantly. 


'merlv. 
;r,  )for  a 
r,   j      time. 


short 


quamdiu  ?  how  long  t 
quandO?  when? 
quandocumque,    when- 
ever. 
quandoquS,  at  some  time. 
qutlter.  four  times. 

quondam,  formerly. 
quOtidie,  daily. 
quoties  ?  how  often  t 
qiuim  or  cum,  when. 
rursiis,  again. 
saepe,  often. 
sem6l,  once. 
semper,  always. 
statim,  immediately. 
siibinde,  immediately,  now 

and  then. 
tamdiii,  so  long. 
tandem,  at  length. 
tantisper,  for  so  long. 
ter,  thrice. 
toties,  so  often. 
turn,  tunc,  then. 
iibi,  when,  as  soon  as, 
umquam,  ever. 
usque,  until,  ever. 
iit  or  iiti,  as,  of  soon  aa^ 

when. 


158 


ADVERBS. 


§191. 


in.     Adverbs  )f  Manner^  Quality,  Degree,  etc, 


&deo,  so,  to  Vial  degree. 
admodum,  very  much. 
allter,  otherwise. 
ceu,  as^  like  as. 
cur?  whyf 

duutaxiit,  only,  at  least. 
fetiam,  also,  trijy,  yes. 

fortasse,  perhaps. 

firustra,  in  vain. 

gratis,  freely. 

hand,  noL 

haudquaquam,    by   no 
means. 

hucusqug,  so  Jar. 

Ideutldem,  constaiUly. 

imrao,  nay,  on  the   con- 
trary. 

Ita,  so. 

Item,  just  so,  also. 

Itldetn,  in  like  manner. 

juxta,  equally,  alike. 

magis,  more. 

modo,  only. 

nae  or  ne,  truly,  verily. 

ne,  not. 

nedum,  much  less. 

nempe,  truty,  forsooth. 

nequaquam,  )   by  no 

neutlquam,   |  means. 

nSmlrum,  certainly,    to  be 
sure. 


"J"">'      I  too  much. 
nimium,  j 

non,  not. 

omnino,  altogether,  only. 

pjene,  almost. 

palam,  openly. 

pariter,  equally. 

parum,  too  Utile. 

paulatim,  by  degrees. 

penitus,  wholly. 

ptrinde,  I  just  as, 

proinde,  j  as  though. 

perquam,  very  much. 

pleiiimque,  for  Ike  most 

part,  commonly. 

potius,  rather. 

porro,  moi'cover,  then. 

praeter,  beyond,  except. 

prassertim,  particularly. 

profecto,  truly. 

prope,  almost,  near. 

propemodum,  almost. 

prorsus,  wholly. 

quam,  how  much,  as. 

quamobrem,  wherefore. 

quare  ?  why  ?  wherefore  f 

quasi,  as  if,  as  it  were. 

quemadmodum,  as. 

quomodoV  howf  in  what 

manner  ? 
quoque,  also. 
rite,  duly. 
saltern,  at  least. 


sane,  truly. 

sills,  1  ^^^^ 
satius,  rather. 
scilictt,  truly^  to  wiL 
secus,  otherwise. 

sic,  so. 

sicut,   ) 

-  "J  >  so  as.  as. 
sicuti, )  ' 

simul,  together. 

singillatim,  one  by  one, 

solum,  only,  alone. 

tam,  so,  so  much. 

tamquam,  like,  as  if. 

tantepere,  so  greatly. 

tantum,  so  much,  only. 

tautununodo,  only. 

temere,  at  random,. 

una,  together.  ■ 

usquequaque,  in  aJlpoint$^ 

in  aU  ways. 

utique,  at  any  rate,  cer^ 

tainly. 
utpote,  as,  inasmuch  as. 
valde,  very  much. 
vel,  even. 

velut,  )  as,   like  as,   for 
veluti,  J      example. 
vicissim,  in  turn,  again. 
videlicet,  clearly,  to  wiU 
vix,  scarcely. 


Rem.  2.  Adverbs  denoting  quality,  manner,  etc.,  are  sometimes  divided  into 
those  of,  1.  Quality;  q.s,  bene,  male.  2.  Certainty;  as,  certe,  plane.  3.  Con- 
tingence;  sis,  fort^.  4.  Negation;  a.s,haud,nan,ne,immd.  5.  Affirmation;  as, 
nee,  quidem,  utique,  nempe.  6.  Swearing;  as,  hercle.  7.  Explaining;  as,  videli- 
cet, utp6te.  8.  Separation*  as,  seorsum.  9.  Joining  together;  as,  simul,  una. 
10.  Interrogation;  as,  cUr  ?  quare  ?  11.  Quantity  or  degree ;  as,  satis,  ddeo. 
12.  Excess;  sis,  j^er^uam,  maxime.  13.  Defect;  a.s,  pdrum,  pcene.  14.  Prefer- 
ence; &s,  pdtius,  sdtiiis.  15.  Likeness;  sis,  ltd,  sic.  16.  Unlikeness;  as,  dliter. 
17.   Exclusion;  as,  tow^uTO,  sc//«m. 

Rem.  3.  Non  is  the  ordinary  Latin  negation.  Haud  signifies  either  *  not  at 
all,'  or  'not  exactly.'  It  is  used  by  the  comic  and  later  writers  in  all  combina- 
tions, but  in  the  authors  of  the  best  age  its  use  is  more  especially  limited  to  its 
connection  with  adjectives  and  adverbs  denoting  a  measure ;  as,  haud  mullum, 
haud  magnum,  haud  parvus,  haud  mediocris,  haud  paulo,  haud  procul,  haud  huge, 
especially /m«fZ  sane  in  connection  with  other  words;  as,  haud  sane  facile,  res 
haud  sane  diffidlis,  haud  sane  intelligo  ;  also  haud  qiiisqiutm,  haud  umquam,  haud 
gudquam.  With  verbs  haud  is  scarcely  used  until  Livy  and  Tacitus,  except  in 
the  common  phrase  haud  scio  an,  which  is  equivalent  to  nescio  an. — Ne  ,  (or  n  i ) 
is  the  primitive  Latin  negative  particle,  signifying  no  or  not.  It  is  used  in  this 
sense  and  as  an  adverb,  (a)  with  quidem  to  make  an  emphatic  negation  f  the 
word  standing  between  them ;  as,  ne  in  oppidis  quidem.  not  even  in  the  tow  ns ; 
(6)  in  composition  as   in  ne» -io,  rtefas,  ntuttr,  etc. ;  ^c)  with  imperatives  and 


§191.  ADVERBS.  159 

subjunctives  used  as  imperatives ;  as,  Ne  pv^ri,  ne  tarda  anXmu  issuescUe  bella. 
Virg.  So,  also,  in  wishes  and  asseverations;  as,  Ne  id  Jupiter  aneret,  may  Ju- 
piter forbid  it.  Liv.  Ne  vlvain,  si  scio,  may  I  die,  if  I  know.  Cic. ;  and  in  con- 
cessive and  restrictive  clauses;  as,  Ne  fmint,  suppose  there  was  not.  Cic. 
Sint  misericordes  in  furihus  cerarii,  ne  illis  sanguinem  TWstram  largicmtur,  only 
let  them  not,  etc.  Cic.  So  dum  ne,  dummodo  ne,  mddo  ne,  dum  quidem  ne  ;  and  in 
intentionftl  clauses  with  ut. — Immo,  as  a  negative,  substitutes  something 
stronger  in  the  place  of  the  preceding  statement,  which  is  denied ;  as,  Ckima 
igltur  non  bona  est  f  Immo  optima,  sed,  etc.  Cic.  It  may  often  be  translated  by 
'  nay,'  or  '  nay  even.' 

Kem.  4.  Quid  em  gives  particular  emphasis  to  a  word  or  an  idea,  and  then 
answers  to  our  '  certainly '  or  '  indeed,'  but  frequently,  especially  with  a  pro- 
noun, it  merely  adds  emphasis.  Equidem,  which  is  considered  as  a  com- 
Eound  of  ego  and  quidem,  is  used  exclusively  in  this  sense  by  Cicero,  Virgil,  and 
[orace,  but  by  other  and  particularly  by  later  writers  it  is  used  like  quidem. — 
Ne  mp  e,  '  surely,'  is  often  used  ironically,  when  we  refute  a  person  by  con- 
cessions which  he  is  obliged  to  make,  or  by  deductions.  In  other  connections 
it  may  be  translated  *  namely.' 

Rem.  5.  Sic,  itd,  tarn,  a?  also  tantdpere,  and  ddeo  signify  'so.' 
Sic  is  moi'e  particulai-ly  the  demonstrative  ' so,'  or  '  thus ' ;  as,  sic  se  res  hdbet. 
It  a  defines  or  limits  more  accurately,  and  is  equivalent  to  our  '  in  such  a  man- 
ner,' or  '  only  in  so  far ' ;  as,  ita  defendito,  ut  neminem  kedas.  Frequently,  how- 
ever, ita  has  the  signification  of  sic,  biit  sic  has  not  the  limiting  sense  of  ita. — 
Tarn,  'so  much,'  generally  stauds  before  adjectives  and  adverbs,  and  in- 
creases the  degree ;  before  vowels  tantojyere  is  generally  used  instead  of  tarn. — 
Adeo,  'to  that  degree '  or  ' point,'  increases  the  expression  to  a  certain  end  or 
result.  Hence  it  forms  the  transition  to  the  conclusion  of  an  argument  or  to 
the  essential  part  of  a  thing ;  and  Cicero  employs  it  to  introduce  the  proofs  of 
what  he  has  previously  alleged;  as,  Id  adeo  ex  ipso  sendtus  consulto  cognoscite, 
and  always  in  such  case  puts  adeo  after  a  pronoun. 

Rem.  6.  Um  quam,  '  ever,'  and  ^  us  qua  in,  '  somewhere,'  like  quisqunm, 
require  a  negation  in  the  sentence,  and  thus  become  equivalent  to  numquam 
and  nusquam.  A  negative  question,  however,  may  supply  the  place  of  a  nega- 
tive proposition;  as,  num  tu  eum  umquam  vidisti? — Usj^iani,  like  qulspiam,  is 
not  negative,  but  is  the  same  as  alicithi,  but  strengthened,  just  as  quis/nam  is 
the  same  as  aliquis.  So,  also,  quopiam  is  used  affirmatively,  and  quoquam  nega- 
tively.— Jam,  with  a  negative,  answers  to  our  'longer';  as.  Nihil  jam  spero, 
I  no  longer  hope  for  any  thing.  When  used  to  connect  sentences  it  signifies 
'further,'  or  'now.' — Usque  is  commonly  accompanied  by  the  prepositions 
ad,  in,  ab,  or  ex.  It  rarely  signifies  '  ever  and  anon ' ;  as,  NatUram  expellas 
furcd,  tamen  usque  recurret.  Hor. — NUper,  mddo,  and  in  ox  are  relative 
and  indefinite. — DUdum,  '  previously,' or  '  before,'  in  relation  to  a  time  which 
has  just  passed  away,  may  often  be  translated  'just  before." — Jamdudum 
signifies  '  long  before,'  or  '  long  since.'  With  the  poets  jamdudum,  contains  the 
idea  of  impatience,  and  signifies  '  without  delay,'  '  forthwith ' ;  as,  Jamdudum 
sumite  pcenas.  Virg. —  Tandem,  'at  length,'  also  expresses  the  impatience 
with  which  a  question  is  put. 

Rem.  7.  Tunc  is  'then,'  'at  that  time,'  in  opposition  io  nunc,  'now': 
2'um  is  'then,'  as  the  correlative  of  quum,  'when  ;'  as,  quum  omnes  adessent, 
turn  ille  exorsus  est  dicere,  when  all  were  present,  then  he  began  to  speak. 
Without  a  relative  sentence  tum  signifies  '  hereupon,'  or  '  thereupon  ' ;  but  a 
relative  sentence  may  always  be  supplied.  The  same  difference  exists  I  etweeu 
etiam  nunc  and  etiam  tum,  '  still,'  or  '  yet ' ;  and  between  nunc  ipsum  and  \um  ip- 
sum;  quummaxime  and  tummaxime,  'just,'  or  '  even  then ' ;  for  etiam  nunc,  nunc 
ipsum  and  quum  maxime  refer  to  the  present ;  but  etiamtum,  tum  ipsum,  and 
tummaxime,  to  the  past. 


160  DERIVATIOX    OF   ADVERBS.  §192. 

DERIVATION    OF    ADVERBS. 

§  192,  Adverbs  are  derived  from  nouns,  adjectives,  pro- 
nouns, and  participles. 

I.   From  Nouns. 

1.  Of  these  a  few  end  in  im  (generally  aiim),  and  denote  manner; 
as,  ' 

grSf/aiim,  in  herds;  membrdttm,  limb  by  limb;  vtcissdtim,  or  more  frequently, 
i^cissim,  by  turns ;  from  [/rex,  viembrum,  and  licis. 

2.  Some  end  in  itus,  and  denote  origin  or  manner ;  as, 

coelitus,  from  heaven ;  funcUius,  from  the  bottom;  radicttus,  by  the  roots;  from 
adum,  /unduSy  and  radix. 

3.  Some  are  merely  the  different  cases  of  nouns  used  adverbially ; 
as, 

(a.)  Some  adverbs  of  time ;  as,  mdne,  noctii,  did,  tempdri  or  iempdri,  tnitid, 
principid,  miklo. — (b.)  Adverbs  of  place;  as,  fdris,  fOrds. — (c.)  Adverbs  ol 
manner;  as,  sponte,  Jbrte,  gratis  or  gratils,  ingrdtiis,  vmgd^  partim. 

n.  From  Adjectives  and  Participles. 

By  far  the  greater  number  of  derivative  adverbs  come  from  adjec 
tives  and  participles  (present  and  perfect),  and  end  in  e  and  ter. 

1.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  and  participles  of  the  second 
declension,  are  formed  by  adding  e  to  the  root;  as, 

(egre,  scarcely;  alte,  high;  tibei'e,  freely;  longe,  far;  mfsere,  miserably;  plenCf 
fully ;  doctr,  learnedly ;  orndtp,  elegantly ;  from  csger,  ahus,  tiber,  longAs,  mlser^ 
pUnus.  ductus,  and  ortidtus.    Beni,  well,  is  from  bdnM,  or  an  oldet  form  binus. 

Remark.  A  few  adverbs  in  e  differ  in  meaning  from  their  adjectives;  as, 
$dne,  certainly;  valde,  very;  from  sanus,  sound,  well;  and  vdlidus,  strong. 

Exc.  1.  A  few  adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  and  participles  of 
the  second  declension,  add  ite?-,  itus,  im,  or  dtiin  to  the  root;  as, 

ndcii^r,  actively;  antlquiUis,  anciently;  dlv'mUils,  divineh--;  prlvdiim,  privately; 
tttdtirn,  after  Tour  manner;  singuldtim,  singilldtim,  sigilldtim,  or  stngultim,  sever- 
ally; ccesim,  carptim,  sensim,  sUJUim,  etc.  from  ndvus,  antiquus,  6fit?i»u5,  prlvdtus, 
tuus,  singOll,  assus,  carptus,  etc. 

Exc.  2.  Some  adverbs  are  formed  with  two  or  more  of  the  above  termina- 
tions with  the  same  meaning;  ks,,  dure,  duritSr  ;  Jirme,  jii^miler  ;  nave,  ndvlter; 
hrge,  largHvr  ;  luculente,  luiiilenler ;  turbulente,  turbulenter:  so  caute  and  cautim; 
humane,  humuniter,  and  humdnltus  ;  pubUce  and  publicitus. 

2.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  and  participles  of  the  third  de- 
clension, are  formed  by  adding  Iter  to  the  root,  except  when  it  ends 
in  t,  in  yvhich  case  er  only  is  added ;  as, 

dcriter,  ^hiiTpW ;  ftllciter,  happily;  turpiter,  basely; — fleganter,  elegantlv; 
prudentcr,  prudently;  dmnnier,  lovingly;  proper anler,\vVi&X\\\;  from  ncer,  felix, 
Utipfs,  elegans,  prvidens,  dmans,  and  prdpSrans.  So  also  from  the  obsolete  alls 
for  alius,  and  prdpis,  (neuter  prdjii),  come  dliier  and  propter  for  prOpiiir. 

Exc.  From  audax  comes  by  svncope  audacter ;  from  f(n'Us  comes  forixtbr ; 
from  omiUs,  omnino;  from  iibSr,  iihertim;  and  fit)m  neguam,  nequitir. 


\ 


§192.  DERIVATION    OF   ADVERBS.  161 

8.  From  the  cardinal  numerals  are  formed  numeral  adverbs  In 
ies;  as, 

quinquies,  decies,  from  quinque  and  decern.  So  tdtiMs  and  qudiies,  from  tdt  and 
qudt.    See  §  119. 

4.  Some  adverbs  are  merely  certain  cases  of  adjectives.  Such 
are, 

(a.)  Ablatives  in  o,  from  adjectives  and  participles  of  the  second  declension; 
as,  citd,  quickly;  continuo,  immediately;  /also,  falsely;  crebro,  frequently; 
merito,  deservedly;  necdplndto,  unexpectedly ; /ortoi^,  by  chance;  auspicdto, 
auspiciously;  consulto,  designedly;  and  a  few  in  a  from  adjectives  of  the  first 
declension ;  as,  redd,  straight  on ;  una,  together.  In  like  manner,  repente,  sud- 
denly, from  rep  ens ;  and  peregre  or  peregri,  from  pereger. 

{b.)  Nominatives  or  accusatives  of  the  third  declension  in  the  neuter  singu- 
lar; as,  facile,  difficile,  recens,  sublime,  and  impUne ;  and  some  also  of  the 
second  declension ;  as,  ceterum,  plerumque,  multum,  plUrimum,  pdiissimum,  pau- 
lum,  nimium,  pdrum,  and  the  numeral  adverbs,  prlmum,  itSrum,  tertium,  quar- 
tum,  etc.  which  have  also  the  termination  in  6,  and  so  also  postremum  (o),  and 
vltimum  (0).  The  neuter  plural  sometimes  occurs  also,  especially  in  poetry;  as, 
multd  gemere ;  tristia  ululdre ;  crebrd  ferlre. 

(c.)  Accusatives  of  the  first  declension;  as,  Ufariam^  tri/ariam,  muUtfariam^ 
omnifariam,  etc.  soil,  partem. 

Note  1.  The  forms  in  e  and  o  from  adjectives  of  the  second  declension  have 
generally  the  same  meaning,  but  vere  and  vero  have  a  somewhat  dififerent 
sense.  Vere,  truly,  is  the  regular  adverb  of  veriis,  true ;  but  vero  is  used  in 
answers,  in  the  sense  of '  in  truth,'  or  '  certainly.'  In  this  use  it  is  added  to  the 
verb  used  in  the  question ;  as,  aofmstlne  heri  in  convivio  f  The  affirmative  an- 
swer is  ego  vero  adfui,  or  without  the  verb,  ego  vero,  and  negatively,  minime 
vero ;  and  as  vero  thus  merely  indicates  a  reply,  it  is  often  untranslatable  into 
English. —  Certo,  on  the  other  hand,  usually  takes  the  meaning  of  the  adjective 
cerius,  while  certe  often  signifies  *  at  least ' ;  as,  victi  sUmus,  aut,  si  diqnitas  vinci 
non  potest,  fracii  certe ;  but  certe  is  frequently  used  in  the  sense  of  '  certainly,' 
especially  in  the  phrase  certe  scio. 

Note  2.  Some  adjectives,  from  the  nature  of  their  signification,  have  no 
corresponding  adverbs.  Of  some  others,  also,  none  occur  in  the  classics.  Such 
are  dmens,  dlrus,  discors,  gndrus,  rudis,  trux,  imbellis,  immobilis,  and  similar  com- 
pounds. In  place  of  the  adverbs  formed  from  vetiis  and  fidHs,  vetuste  and  an- 
tique are  used  for  the  former,  and  fideliter  for  the  latter,  from  veiustus,  antlquua, 
and  fidelis. 

m.  From  the  adjective  pronouns  are  derived  adverbs  of  place, 
etc.    (See  §  191,  Rem.  1.) 

Remark.  The  terminations  o  and  He  denote  the  place  whither,  instead  of  the 
accusative  of  the  pronoun  with  a  preposition ;  as,  eo  for  ad  eum  Idcum ;  hue  for 
ad  hunc  Idcum ;  the  terminations  ae  and  inc  denote  the  place  from  which ; 
i  and  ic,  the  place  in  which ;  and  a  and  dc,  the  place  by  or  through  which ;  as, 
ea ;  via  or  parte  being  understood. 

IV.  (a.)  A  few  adverbs  are  derived  from  prepositions ;  as,  svbtus,  beneath ;  from 
sitb;  propter,  near;  from  prdpe.  (b.)  Mordicv.3  and  versus  are  derived  from  the 
verbs  mordeo  and  verto. 

Remaek.  Diminitiyes  are  formed  from  a  few  adverbs;  aa,  clam,  clanc^lum; 
primum,  primulum ;  ceUrius,  celerivscuU ;  so&piiis,  soepiuscule ;  bene,  belle,  bellis- 
sime, 

U* 


162  COMPOSITION    OF   ADYERBS.       '  §  193. 

COMPOSITION    OF    ADVERBS. 

§  193.     Adverbs  are  compounded  variously: — 

1.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  noun ;  as,  postrhFie,  qudtlclie,  magv6p?.rS,  mnxfmdpiri^ 
svmmdpei-i,  ^uantdjiere,  lantdperi,  tatiiummOdo,  solummOdo,  nmUinUkta^  quCtannia— 
of  posUrd  die,  niai/nd  Opere,  etc.  — 

2.  Of  a  pronoun  and  a  noun ;  as,  Jiddie,  qudre,  qudmddd — of  hdc  die,  qua  re,  etc 

3.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  noun;  as,  nudius,  scepenumii'd — of  nunc  dies,  etc. 

4.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  noun ;  as,  comminus,  eminus,  iUico,  dblter,  extempld^ 
obviam,  postm/klO,  admddum,  prdpediem— of  con,  e,  and  mdnus ;  in  and  l6cu$ ;  etc. 

5.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  pronoun;  as,  dlioqul  or  alioquin,  ceteroqul  or  ceiir^ 
quin— of  alius  and  qui,  i.  e.  alio  quo  {mddo),  etc. 

6.  Of  a  pronoun  and  an  adverb ;  as,  dliquamdiu,  dlicibi — of  dUqtds,  diO,  and 
ibi ;  nequdquam  and  nequicquam — of  ne  and  quisqvam. 

7.  Of  two  verbs ;  as,  tUcH,  scilicet  videlicet    of  ire,  scire,  videre,  and  licet. 

8.  Of  an  ndverh  find  a.  verb;  as,  qu6libet,ubivis,v.7ideUbet.  So  deinceps — from 
dein  and  capio ;  duntaxat — from  dum  and  tcixo. 

9.  Of  ^  participle  with  various  parts  of  speech;  as,  deorsum,  dextrortum^ 
hortum,  retrorsuni,  sursum— of  de,  dexter,  hie,  retro,  siipSr,  and  vorsus  or  versus, 

10.  Of  two  adverbs ;  as,  jamdudum,  qitamdiu,  iamdiu,  cummaaime,  tummaxime, 
quousque,  siciiL 

11.  Of  a  preposition  and  an  adjective ;  as,  denuo,  imprinOs,  cumprwiis,  op- 
prime,    incassum — of  de  ndvo,  inprimis,  etc. 

12.  Of  a  preposition  and  a  pronoun ;  as,  quapropiir,  posted,  iniered,  prcetSred, 
haclenus,  qudienus,  dllqudtenus,  edienus — ot  propter  qiup,  post  ea  or  earn,  etc. 

13.  Of  a  nreposition  and  an  adverb ;  as,  dbhinc,  ddhuc,  derepenie,  intiribi,  in- 
terdiu,  interuum,  perso'pe. 

14.  Of  two  or  three  prepositions;  as,  ins&pir,  prdtinOs,  indS,  dein,  deindi, 
pSrinde. 

15.  Of  a  conjunction  and  an  adverb ;  as,'  nedjJbi,  siciibi — of  ne,  si,  and  dUciSn, 

16.  Of  an  adverb  and  a  termination  scarcelv  used  except  in  composition; 
as,  ibidem,  pdrumper,  quandocumqui,  ibique,  utcumqui. 

17.  Of  three  different  parts  of  speech;  as,  y*or«f<dw — of  fors,  dt,  dn,  quemad- 
tnddum,  quamobrem,  etc. 

18.  Of  an  adverb  and  an  adjective;  as,  nimirum,  uipdtS. 

19.  Of  an  adjective  and  a  verb ;  as,  quaniumvis,  quuniumlibSt. 

Signification  of  certain  Compound  and  Derivative  Adverbs, 

1.  The  adverbs  continuo,  protinus,  stdtim,  confestim,  subito,  repenie  and  derS~ 
pente,  actutum,  illico,  ilicet,  exiemplo,  signify  in  general  '  directly '  or  '  imme- 
diately'; but,  strictly,  contfnuo  means,  * inamediately  after';  statim,  'without 
delay' ;  confestim, '  directly ' ;  subito,  *  suddenly,  unexpectedly ' ;  protinus,  '  far- 
ther,' viz.  in  the  same  direction,  and  hence,  *  without  interruption ' ;  repenie 
and  derepenie,  *at  once,'  opposed  to  sensim,  'gradually,'  (see  Cic.  Off.  1,  33); 
txctutum, '  instantaneously,'  i.  q.  eddem  actu ;  illivo,  and  more  rarely  ilicet,  '  forth- 
with, the  instant,'  (Yirg.'^n.  2,  424,  Cic.  Mur,  10);  so  also  extemplo,  (Liv.  41, 1). 

2.  Praaertim,  pracipue,  imprimis,  cumprimis,  apprime,  are  generallv  trans- 
lated '  principally,'  but,  properly,  pixesertim  is  '  particularly,'  and  sets  forth  a 
particular  circumstance  with  empliasis;  priecipue,  from  pi^capio,  has  reference 
to  privilege,  and  si^iifies  '  especially ' ;  imprimis  and  cmnprimis,  signify  '  prin- 
cifndly, '  or  '  in  preference  to  others ' ;  and  apprime,  *  before  all,'  '  vBry,*^  is  used 


§  194,  195.      COMPARISON    OF   ADVERBS. ^PREPOSITIONS.      163 

in  pure  Latin  to  quaMfy  and  strengthen  only  adjectives.  Admddum  properly 
signifies  '  according  to  measure,'  that  is,  '  in  as  great  a  measure  as  can  be,' 
'  very,  exceedingly.'  With  numerals  it  denotes  approximation,  '  about.'  Aa- 
mddmn  nihil  and  ddmddum  nuUus  signify  *  nothing  at  all '  and  *  no  one  at  all.' 

3.  Mddo  is  the  usual  equivalent  for  *  only.'  Solum,  '  alone,'  '  merely,'  points 
to  something  higher  or  greater.  Tantum,  '  only,'  'merely,'  intimates  that  some- 
tliing  else  was  expected.  The  significations  of  solum  and  tantum  are  strength- 
ened_  by  m6do,  forming  solummddo  and  tantummddo.  Dunlaxnt,  '  only,  solely,'  is 
not  joined  with  verbs.  It  also  signifies  *  at  least,'  denoting  a  limitation  to  a 
particular  point.  Saltern  also  signifies  '  at  least,'  but  denotes  the  reduction  of  a 
demand  to  a  minimum;  as,  Eripe  mihi  liunc  dot^em,  aut  minue  saltern. 

4.  Frustra  implies  a  disappointed  expectation;  as  in  frustra  suscipire  labores. 
Neqvicquam  denotes  the  absence  of  success,  as  in  Hor,  Carm.  1,  3,  21.  Incas- 
$um,  composed  of  in  and  cassum, '  hollow '  or  '  empty,'  signifies  '  to  no  purpose ' ; 
as,  tela  incassum  jacere. 

COMPARISON    OF    ADVERBS. 

§  104:.  1.  Adverbs  derived  from  adjectives  with  the  termi- 
nations e  and  ter,  and  most  of  those  in  o,  are  compared  like  their 
primitives. 

2.  The  comparative,  like  the  neuter  comparative  of  the  adjective, 
ends  in  ius  ;  the  superlative  is  formed  from  the  superlative  of  the  ad- 
jective by  changing  us  into  e  ;  as, 

dure^durius,  durisslme ;  fddlS,  fddlius,  fdciUXm^;  dcritSr,  dcrtHs,  dcenimS; 
rdrd,  rdrius,  rdjisslme ;  mature,  mdtui'iiis,  mdturissime  or  rndtunime. 

3.  Some  adverbs  have  superlatives  in  5  or  um;  as,  TnSritisslm^,  plurimum, 
prlmo  or  prlmum,  pdtissimum.  * 

4.  If  the  comparison  of  the  adjective  is  irregular  or  defective,  (see 
§§  125,  126),  that  of  the  adverb  is  so  likewise ;  as, 

binS,  melius,  optime ;  mdle,  pejus,  pesstme;  pdrum,  minus,  minimi;  mmtum, 
plus,  2}lurimum  ;  — ,  prius,  prlmo  or  primum ;  — ,  ocius,  ocissime ;  — ,  deterius, 
deterrime ;  — ,  pdtius,  pdtissime  or  pdtissimum ;  merito,  — ,  meritissimo  ;  satis,  sd- 
tius,  — .  Mdgis,  maxime,  (from  magnus,)  has  no  positive;  nujiSr,  nuperrime,  has 
lib  comparative.  Prdpe,  prdpius,  proxtme :  the  adjective  pn-6ptdr  has  no  posi- 
tive in  use.  The  regular  adverb  in  the  positive  degree  from  ubir  is  wanting, 
its  place  being  supplied  by  iibertim,  but  vherius  and  uberHme  are  used.  So  in- 
stead of  tristiter,  tnste,  the  neuter  of  tristis,  is  used,  but  the  comparative  tHstius 
is  regular;  and  from  socot's  only  socordiUs,  the  comparative,  is  in  use. 

5.  Din  and  scepe,  though  not  derived  from  adjectives,  are  yet  compared ; — 
di.u,  diutius,  diutisslme ;  scepS,  soepius,  scepissime.  A  comparative  temperms,  from 
tempirl  or  tempdrl,  also  sometimes  occurs.    So  secus,  sedus. 

6.  Adverbs,  like  adjectives,  are  sometimes  compared  by  prefixing 
magXs  and  maxime  ;  as,  mdgls  aperte,  maxime  accommodate. 

PREPOSITIONS. 

\  §  19*1^.     1.   A  preposition  is  a  particle  which  expresses  the 
relation  between  a  noun  or  pronoun  and  some  preceding  word. 

2.  Prepositions  express  the  relations  of  persons  or  things,  either  to  one 
another,  or  to  actions  an^  conditions ;  as,  anwr  mew  ergtHe^  ray  love  txitirard 
thee ;  eb  eoi  M,  I  go  to  thSS. 


164 


PE-a»OSITIONS. 


§195. 


3.  Some  prepositions  have  the  noun  or  pronoun  which  follows 
them  in  the  accusative,  some,  in  the  ablative,  and  some,  in  either  the 
accusative  or  the  ablative. 

X  4.  Twenty-six  prepositions  have  an  accusative  after  them : — 


ad,  to,  towards,  at,  for. 
adversus,    )  against, 
adversum,  j  towards. 
ant6,  before. 

aptid,  at,  vnth,  near,  be- 
fore, in  presence  of. 

^v^,^L  \  around,  about. 
circum, )  * 

circiter,  about,  near. 

cIs, 


extra,,  vdthoui,  beyond. 
infra,  under,  beneath. 
inter,    between, 

during.  _ 
intra,  within. 
juxta.  near  to,  next  to. 
ob,  for,  on  account  of, 

before. 
penes,  in  the  power  of, 

"^^^^^loniJiis side,  within.    ^-^' tj^rough,  throughout,    i^^s,' ^er,''i^^ 
contra,  against,  opposite.  by,  during.  ultra,  beyond. 

erga,  towards,  opposite.         pone,  behind. 


post,  after,  since,  behind. 

praeter,    past,    before, 
against,  beyond,  besides. 

prope,  near  oy,  nigh. 

propter,  near,  on  account 
of. 

secundum,  after,  behind, 
along,  next  to,  accord- 
ing to. 

supra,  above,  over. 


\^    5.  Eleven  prepositions  have  after  them  an  ablative : — 

>/rowi,  ajier,  by. 


ab, 
abs 

absqiig,  loithoui,  but  for. 
coram,   before,  in  pres- 
ence of. 
cum,  vnih. 


de,  from,  down  from,  af- 
ter, of,  concerning. 

e,    I  out  of,  from,  of,  by, 

ex,  3      after. 

palam,  beforCf  in  pres- 
ence of. 


prse,  before,  for,  on  ac- 
count of,  in  comparison 
with. 

pr5,  before,  for,  instead 
of,  according  to. 

sine,  vnihout. 

teniis,  as  far  as,  up  to. 


,     6.   Five  prepositions  take  after  them  sometimes  an  accusp.tive, 

and  sometimes  an  ablative : — 

clam,  without  the  hnowl-    siib,  under,  about,  near.       super,  above,  over;  upon, 

edge  of  subter,  under,  beneath.  concerning. 

In,  in,  on ;  to,  into,  against. 

Remabk  1.  Prepositions  are  so  called,  because  they  are  generally  placed  be- 
fore the  noun  or  pronoun  whose  relation  they  express.  They  sometimes,  how- 
ever, stand  after  it.   Cf.  §  279, 10. 

Rem.  2.  a  is  used  only  before  consonants ;  db  before  vowels,  and  frequently 
before  consonants,  though  rarely  before  labials :  abs  is  obsolete,  except  in  the 
phrase  abs  te. 

E  is  used  only  before  consonants,  ex  before  both  vowels  and  consonants. 

Rem.  3.  Versus,  which  follows  its  noun,  (cf.  §  235,  R.  3),  usque,  and  exad- 
versus  {-um),  sometimes  take  an  accusative,  stmul  and  prdcul,  an  ablative,  and 
are  then  by  some  called  prepositions.  SScus,  with  an  accusative,  occurs  in 
Pliny  and  Cato. 

Rem.  4.  Many  of  the  prepositions,  especially  those  which  dentte  place,  are 
also  used  as  adverbs.  Cf.  §  191. 


Signification  and  Use  of  certain  Prepositions. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  Ad  denotes  direction,  and  answers  to  the  questions  Whither? 
and  TiU  when  ?  as,  Venio  ad  te.  Sophocles  dd  summxim  senectutem  tragceduia 
fecit.  Cic.  It  also  denotes  a  fixed  time ;  &s,  ddhoram,  at  the  hour;  dd  tempos 
a&quid  facere, — at  the  right  time.  But  sometimes  dd  tempus  denotes  '  for  a 
time.'  Sometimes,  also,  ad  denotes  the  approach  of  time ;  as,  dd  lucem,  dd  ve$- 
peram,  dd  extrimum,  towards  day-bj-eak,  etc. ;  and  also  the  actual  arrival  of  a 
timie ;  as,  dd  prima  signii  verts  profectut  at  the  first  sign  of  Spring. 


I 


§  195.  PREPOSITIONS.  165 

(b.)  In  answer  to  the  question  Where?  tfc?  signifies  'r^ar'  a  place;  as,  dd 
urbem  esse ;  dd  portas  urbis ;  pfigna  navalis  M  Tenedum.  It  is  used  like  tn,  '  at,' 
in  such  phrases  as  ad  tedtm  Bellorue,  or,  without  cedem,  ad  Opis ;  ne<jotium  habere 
ad  jyuvtum. — With  nunierals  it  mav  be  rendered  *  to  the  amount  of  or  '  nearly ' ; 
as,  ad  diuentvs.  It  is  also  used  like  circiter  without  any  case ;  as,  Oiclsis  ad 
hoininum  miUibus  quatuor. — The  phrase  omnes  dd  unum  signifies,  '  all  without 
exception,'  '  every  one.' 

(c.)  Ad  often  denotes  an  object  or  purpose,  and  hence  comes  its  signification 
of '  in  respect  to ' ;  as,  hdmo  dd  lahdi'es  beuiiinpiyer.  It  is  also  used  in  figura- 
tive relations  to  denote  a  model,  standard,  or  object  of  comparison,  where  we 
say  'according  tOj'  or  '  in  comparison  with';  as,  ddmddum,  dd effigiem^  dd slmil- 
itudinem,  dd  spenem  alicujusrei;  dd  normam,  etc.  ddvolunlutem  alicujus  J'acdre 
aliquid.  Ad  verbum  signifies, '  word  for  word ' ;  nihil  dd  lianc  rem^  '  nothing  in 
comparison  with  this  thing.' 

Rem.  6.  A  pud  expresses  nearness  to,  and  was  primarily  used  of  persons  as 
dd  wsis  applied  to  things.  Apud  also  denotes  rest,  and  dd  direction,  motion,  etc. 
Hence  it  signifies  '  with,'  both  literally  and  figuratively.  With  names  of  places 
it  signifies  '  near,'  like  dd;  as,  Male  pugndtum  est  dpud  Cnudium.  But  in  early 
writers,  dpud  is  used  for  in ;  as,  Augustus  dpud  urbem  Nulam  exiinctus  est, — at 
Nola. — VVith  me,  te,  se,  or  the  name  of  a  person,  it  signifies  'at  the  house'  or 

*  dwelling  of ;  as,  Fuisti  dpud  Lcecam  ilia  node. — Before  appellatives  of  persons 
having  authority  in  regard  to  any  matter,  it  is  translated  '  before,'  '  in  the  pres- 
ence of;  9.9),  dpud  jiullves,  dpud  prretorem,  dpud  jiipfdum. — It  is  also  used  with 
names  of  authors,  instead  of  in  with  the  name  of  their  works ;  as,  Apud  Xeno- 
phontem,  but  we  cannot  say  in  Xenojjhonie. 

Rem.  7.  ^(/versus,  confra,  and  croa  signify 'opposite  to.'  Cbn^rd  de- 
notes hostility,  like  our  'against';  ei-gd,  a  friendly  disposition,  'towards';  and 
adversus  is  used  la  either  sense.    But  ergd  sometimes  occurs  in  a  hostile  sense. 

Rem.  8.  Intra  signifies  'within,'  in  regard  both  to  time  and  place.  In  re- 
gard to  place  it  is  used  in  answer  to  both  questions  Where?  and  Whither?  It 
denotes  time  either  as  an  entire  period,  when  it  is  equivalent  to  'during,'  or  as 

*  unfinished,'  when  it  corresponds  with  '  under,'  or  '  before  the  expiration  of.' 

Rem.  9.  Per ,  denoting  place,  signifies,  '  through,'  and  also  '  in,'  in  the  sense 
of  throughout.' — With  the  accusative  of  persons  it  signifies  '  through,'  '  by  the 
insti-umentality  of.'  It  often  expresses  the  manner;  a.?.,  jter  ideras,  by  letter; 
per  injuria  III,  p&r  scelus,  with  injustice,  criminally;  js^r  Iram,  from  or  in  an- 
ger ;  per  simulationem,  per  sjieciem,  per  causam,  under  the  pretext ;  />er  occor- 
sionem,  on  the  occasion ;  jse?' Wt/icu^M»n,  in  a  ridiculous  manner. — It  sometimes 
signifies 'on  account  of;  as,  per  valeiiidlnem,  on  account  of  ilhiess. — Per  me 
licet, — so  far  as  I  am  concerned. 

Rem.  10.  ^  or  d  6 ,  denoting  time,  is  used  with  nouns,  both  abstract  and 
concrete,  with  the  same  general  meaning;  as,  a  prima  cetdte,  db  ineunte  cetdte, 
db  initio  eetdtis,  db  infantid,  a  pueritid,  do  adolescentid  ;  and,  a  puiro,  a  puerisj 
db  adolescentuU),  db  infante,  all  of  which  sig:nf\' '  from  an  early  jige.'  So  also, 
d  pnrvis,  a  parvUhj  d^  tenero,  d  teneiis  vnguicHlis,  which  expressions  are  of 
Greek  origin. — Ab  initio,  d  principio,  a  prlmo,  properly  denote  tlie  space  of  time 
from  the  beginning  down  to  a  certain  point;  as,  Urbem  Eomam  d  principio  re- 
^es  habuere,  i.  e.  for  a  certain  period  after  its  foundation.  But  fi-equently  db 
imtio  is  equivalent  to  initio,  in  the  beginning. — The  adherents  or  followers  of  a 
school  are  often  named  from  its  head;  as,  d  Platone,db  AristotMe,  etc. — In  comic 
writers  ab  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  genitive;  as,  antilla  ab  Andrid. — 
In  a  figurative  sense  it  signifies  '  with  regard  to  ' ;  .is,  db  equitdtu  firmus. — With 
names  of  persons  it  also  denotes  relationship,  and  signifies  'on  the  side  of; 
as,  Augustus  a  matre  Magnum  Pompeiuni  artissimo  contingebai  grddu, — on  his 
mother's  si'ule.—Slatim,  a/nfestim,  recens  db  aliqud  re,  '  immediately  after.' — 
Ab  itinere  aliquid  facer e,  to  do  a  thing  while  on  a  journey. 

Rem.  11.  Cu  m  is  used  not  only  to  designate  accompanying  persons  but  also 
accompanying  curcumstances ;  as,  cum  aliquo  ire ;  hostes  cum  detrimento  sunt 


166  PRErosinoNS.  §  195 

danUsi.  It  signifies  also  '  in,'  i.  e.  *  dresf  ed  in ' ;  as,  cum  tunica  puUd  sedere. 
With  verbs  implying  hostility,  it  signifies  -with,'  in  the  sense  of '  against ' ;  as, 
cum  dUquo  helium  gerere ;  cum  nliquo  queri  to  complain  of  or  against. 

Rem.  12.  D  e  commonly  signifies  '  concemihg,'  *  about.'  Hence  traditur  de 
Eomero  is  very  different  from  traditur  ab  Ecnnero  ;  in  the  former,  Homer  is  the 
object,  in  the  latter  the  agent. — In  the  epistolary  style,  when  a  new  subject 
is  touched  upon,  de  signifies  '  in  regard  to,'  '  as  respects ' ;  as,  de  frdtre,  confido 
tta  esse,  ut  semper  volui. — It  often  signifies  'downfi-om';  and  also  *of,'  in  a 
partitive  sense;  as,  h5mo  de  pKbe,  unus  de  popub. — From  its  partitive  significa- 
tion arises  its  use  in  denoting  time ;  as,  in  comitium  de  nocte  venire,  i.  e.  even  bj 
night,  or  spending  a  part  of  the  night  in  coming;  hence  muUd  de  nocte,  medtd 
de  nocte, '  in  the  depth  of  night,'  '  in  the  middle  of  the  night.' — In  other  cases, 
also,  it  is  used  for  ex  or  db;  as,  Audivi  hoc  de  parents  meopuer.  Cic. ;  especially 
in  connection  with  emere,  mercdri,  conducere.  Triumphum  agere  de  Gatlis  and 
ex  Gallis  are  used  indiscrimmately — Sometimes,  like  secundum,  it  signifies  *  in 
accordance  wiOi,'  '  after ' ;  as,  de  "^consilio  meo : — sometimes  it  denotes  the  man- 
ner of  an  action ;  as,denuo,  de  integro,  afresh;  de  improvlso,  imexpectedly ;  di 
industria,  purposely: — qua  de  re,  qua,  ae  causa,  qiubus  de  causis,  for  which  reason 
or  reasons. 

Rem.  13.  Ex.  'from,'  'out  of.'  Ex  equo pugndre,  to  fight  on  horseback; 
BO  ex  ilinere  scrioere :  ex  adverso,  e  regione,  opposite ;  ex  omni  parte,  in  or  from 
all  parts. — Ex  vino  or  ex  aqua  coquere  or  bibere,  i.  e.  *  with  wine,'  etc.  are  medi- 
cal expressions. — ^It  sometimes  denotes  manner;  as,  ex  animo  lauddre,  to  praise 
heartily;  exsententid  and  ex  voluntdte,  according  to  one's  wish. — It  is  also,  like 
de,  used  in  a  partitive  sense ;  as,  unus  e  plebe,  unus  e  tnuJtis. 

Rem.  14.  In ,  with  the  accusative,  signifying  '  to '  or  '  into,'  denotes  the 
point  towards  which  motion  proceeds;  as,  in  cedem  ire;  or  the  direction  in 
which  a  thing  extends ;  as,  decern  pedes  in  altitudinem,  in  height;  so,  also,  it 
denotes  figuratively  the  object  towards  which  an  action  is  directed,  either 
with  a  friendly  or  a  hostile  design;  as,  amor  in  patriam,  odium  in  mahs  elves, 
in  milites  liberdlis ;  oratio  in  aliquem,  a  speech  against  some  one. — It  also  de- 
notes a  purpose ;  as,  pecunia  data  est  in  rem  mikidrem.  Pax  data  Philippo  in 
has  leges  est,  on  these  conditions. — With  words  denoting  time,  it  expresses  a 
predetermination  of  that  time,  like  '  for ' ;  as,  invitdre  aUquem  in  posterum  diem, 
lor  the  following  day.  In  diemvivere,  to  ld\e  only  for  the  day;  in  futUrum, 
tn  posterum,  in  reliquum,  for  the  future;  in  mtemum,  in  perpetuum,  forever; 
tn  j»rcEsen5,  for  the  present :  with  all  these  adjectives  tempos  may  be  supplied. 
In  with  singuU,  expressed  or  understood,  denotes  a  distribution,  and  may  be 
translated  'to,'  'for,'  'on,'  'over.' — In  singulos  dies,  or  simply  in  dies,  with 
comparatives  and  verbs  denoting  mcrease,  signifies  'from  day  to  day.' — 
In  some  phrases  it  denotes  the  manner  of  an  action;  as,  sei'vllem  in  mSdum^ 
rnirum  in  modum;  so  in  universum,  m  general;  in  commune,  in  common; 
tn  vicem,  alternately,  or,  instead  of;  in  aiicujus  Idcum  aUquid peiere,  in  the 
place,  or,  instead  of. 

Rem.  15.  In ,  with  the  ablative,  signifies  '  in,' '  on,'  '  upon,'  and  answers  to 
the  question.  Where  ?  When  a  number  or  quantity  is  indicated,  it  signifies 
'  among,'  and  is  equivalent  to  inter.  It  may  sometimes  be  translated  '  with,' 
or  'notwithstanding';  as.  In  summd  copid  oratorum,  nemo  tdmen  Ciceronis 
laudem  aiqudvit. — With  nouns  which  by  themselves  denote  time,  such  as 
seciUum,  OTinus,  mensis,  dies,  nox,  vesper,  etc.,  the  time,  in  answer  to  the  ques- 
tion When?  is  expressed  by  the  simple  ablative;  but  in  is  used  with  words 
which  acquire  the  signification  of  time  only  by  such  connection ;  as,  in  con- 
suldtu  In  principio,  in  beUo;  but  even  with  these  in  is  sometimes  omitted,  but 
is  usi'  3(11  v  retained  in  connection  with  the  gerund  or  gerundive ;  as,  in  legendo, 
in  Uptndis  libris.  In  prcesenii,  or  in  prceseniid,  signifies  '  at  tha  present  mo- 
ment,' '  for  the  present.' — Est  in  eo,  ui  aUquidJiai  signifies  that  something  is  oq 
the  point  of  happening.' 


§  196.  PREPOSITIONS    IN    COMPOSITION.  167 

PREPOSITIONS    m    COMPOSITION. 

'^  §  lOG.  Most  of  the  prepositions  are  used  also  in  forming  com- 
pound words.  In  composition,  they  may  be  considered  either  in 
reference  to  their  form,  or  their  force. 

I.  (a.)  Preposition^  in  composition  sometimes  retain  their  final 
consonants,  and  sometimes  change  them,  to  adapt  them  to  the  sounds 
of  the  initial  consonants  of  the  words  with  which  they  are  compound- 
ed. In  some  wordSf  both  forms  are  in  Use ;  in  others,  the  final  con- 
sonant or  consonants  are  omitted. 

1.  A,  in  composition,  is  used  before  m  and  v;  as,  dmdveo,  dvello,  and  some- 
times beforey*  in  afui  and  afdre,  for  abfui  and  aofdre.  Ab  is  used  before 
vowels,  and  before  rf,y,  h,  j,  t,  n,  r,  and  s;  as,  abjuro,  abrdgo,  etc.  Abs  occurs 
only  before  c,  q^  and  t ;  as,  abscondo,  absque,  absiineo.  ^  In  aspello,  aspernor,  and 
asporto,  the  b  of  abs  is  dropped ;  in  aufero  and  aufugio,  it  is  changed  into  u. 

2.  Ad  remains  unchanged  before  vowels  and  before  i,  d,  h,  m,  v.  It  often 
changes  c?into  c,f,  g,  Z,  n,  p,  r,  5,  t,  before  those  letters  respectively;  as,  ac- 
cedb,  affero,  aggredior,  allego,  annltor,  appono,  arrigo,  assequor,  attollo.  Its  d  is 
usually  omitted  before  s  followed  by  a  consonant,  and  before  gn;  a.s,  aspergOf 
aspicio,  agnosco,  agndtus.    Before  q,  the  d  is  changed  into  c ;  as,  acqulro. 

3.  Ante  remains  unchanged,  except  in  anUdpo  and  antistOf  where  it  changes 
e  to  i ;  but  antesto  also  occurs. 

4.  Circum  in  composition  remains  unchanged,  only  in  circumeq  and  its  de- 
rivatives the  m  is  often  dropped ;  as,  circueo,  circuUus,  etc. 

J5.  Cum  (in  composition,  com),  retains  m  before  b,  m,  p;  as,  comUbo,  con^ 
I  mitto,  compono:  before  I,  n^  r,  its  m  is  changed  into  those  letters  respectively; 
'  as,  coUigo,  connltor,  corrtpio:  before  other  consonants,  it  becomes  n;  as,  corU' 
duco,  conjungo.  Before  a  vowel,  gn  or  Ji,  m  is  commonly  omitted ;  as,  coi^o^ 
coqpio,  cognosco,  cohabito ;  but  it  is  sometimes  retained ;  as,  comedo,  cdmes,  cdmi- 
tor.  In  cogo  and  cogito  a  contraction  also  takes  place ;  as,  cddgo,  cogo,  etc.  la 
comburo,  b  is  inserted. 

6.  JSx  is  prefixed  to  vowels,  and  to  c,  h,  p,  q,  s,  t ;  as,  exeo,  exigo,  excurro,  ex- 
Mbeo,  expedio.  Before  /,  x  is  assimilated,  and  also  rarely  becomes  ec ;  as,  effS- 
ro,  or  ecfero.  S  after  x  is  often  omitted;  as,  exequor,  for  exsequor;  in  excidium 
(from  exscindo),  s  is  regularly  dropped.  E  is  prefixed  to  the  other  consonants; 
as,  ebibo,  edlco,  except  in  eclex.  Before  these  however,  with  the  exception  of  n 
and  r,  ex  is  sometimes  used;  as,  exmoveo.    E  is  sometimes  used  before  p;  as, 

7.  In  remains  unchanged  before  a  vowel.  Before  b,  m,  p,  it  changes  n  into 
w;  as,  imbuo,  immitto,  impono :  before  I  and  r,  n  is  assimilated;  as,  illigo,  irretio: 
before  gn,  wis  omitted;  as,  igndrus.  Before  the  other  consonants  in  is  un- 
changed. In  some  compounds,  in  retains  d  before  a  vowel,  from  an  ancient 
form  indu;  B.s,indigena,indigeo,  indoksco.  So  anciently  induperdtor,  for  im^ 
perdtor. 

8.  Inter  remains  imchanged,  except  in  intelUgo  and  its  derivatives,  in  which 
r  before  I  is  assimilated. 

9.  Ob  remains  unchanged  before  vowels  and  generally  before  consonants. 
Its  b  is  assimilated  before  c,  /,  g,  p ;  as,  occurro,  officio,  oggannio,  cppeto.  In 
dmitto,  b  is  dropped.  An  ancient  form  obs,  analagous  to  abs  for  ab,  is  implied 
in  obsolesco,  from  the  simple  verb  oleo,  and  in  ostendo,  for  obsiendo. 

10.  Per  is  unchanged  in  composition,  except  in  pellicio  and  sometimes  in 
pelluceo,  in  which  r  is  assimilated  before  I.    In  pejero,  r  is  dropped. 

11.  Post  remains  unchanged,  except  in  pomarium  and  pomerldidnuSf  in 
which  $t  is  dropped. 


168  PEEP03ITI0NS   IN    COMPOSITION.  §  197. 

12.  Ptxs  and  prceter  in  composition  remain  unchanged,  except  that  pra  is 
shortened  before  a  vowel.    Cf.  §  283,  II   F.xc.  1. 

13.  Prd  has  sometimes  its  vowel  shortiaed,  (cf.  \  285, 2,  Exc.  5)  and,  to  avoid 
hiatus,  it  sometimes  takes  d  before  a  vowel ;  as,  prodeo,  prodesse,  prodigo. 
Before  verbs  beginning  with  r  and  /,  pro  sometimes  becomes  por  and  pol;  as, 
porriyo,  polliccor. 

14.  Sub  in  composition  remains  unchanged  before  a  vowel  and  before  6,  d,  »*, 
I,  n  s,  t,  V.  Before  c,  /,  g,  m,  p,  r,  its  b  is  repilarly  assimilated;  as,  sjiccedo, 
suffei-o,  suggero,  summoceo,  supjjHco,  surnpio.  Before  c,  p,  and  t,  it  sometimes 
takes  the  torm  sus  from  s?^s,  analogous  to  abs  and  o6s ;  as,  susdpio,  susp&ido, 
susiollo:  b  is  omitted  before  s,  followed  by  a  consonant;  as,  suspicio. 

15.  Subter  and  super  in  composition  remain  unchanged. 

16.  Trans  remains  unchanged  before  a  vowel.  It  omits  s  before  s;  as, 
transcendo:  in  irddo^  trdduco,  trdjlcio,  and  trdnOy  ns  is  commonly  omitted. 

(6.)  The  following  words  aire  called  inseparable  prepositionSj  be- 
cause they  are  found  only  in  composition : — 

Ambl  or  amb,  (Greek  ^f*<pi),  around^  about.     Bed  or  re,  a<7am,  back.     V6,  no^. 
Dis  or  di,  asunder.  Se,  qpar/,  ostt/e. 

1.  Amb  is  always  used  before  a  vowel;  as,  ambages,  ambarvdlis,  ambido^  am- 
tngo,  ainbU),  amburo :  except  ampulla,  dmicio,  and  dnhelo.  Before  consonants  it 
has  the  forms  ambi;  as,  ambUdens,  ambijariam,  ambivium:  am;  as,  amplecior, 
amputo :  or  an ;  as,  anceps,  anfracttis,  anqulro. 

2.  Dls  is  prefixed  to  words  beginning  with  c,  p,  q,  s  before  a  v(5wel,  f,  and  h;^ 
as,  discutio,  digndno,  disqulro,  distendo,  dishiasco:  but  disertus  is  formed  from  dis-' 
sero;  before/,  s  is  changed  into  /;  as,  differo:  in  dirim>o,  and  dii'ibeo  {from 
dis  hdbeo),  s  becomes  r.  3l  is  prefixed  to  the  other  consonants,  and  to  s  when 
followed  by  a  consonant;  as,  aiduco,  dlmitlo,  distinguo,  dispicio.  But  both  dis 
and  dl  are  used  before  j;  as,  disjungo,  dijudico,  and  before  r  in  rumpo. 

3.  Red  is  used  before  a  vowel  or  h ;  ri  before  a  consonant ;  as,  reddmo,  redeo, 
rediilbeo,  redigo.  ridoleo,  rSdundo ; — rejicio,  repdno,  reverior.  But  red  is  used  be- 
fore do ;  as,  reddo.  The  connecting  vowel  i  is  found  in  redirlvus ;  and  in  the 
poetical  forms  relligio,  relliquice,  and  Sometimes  in  reccido  the  d  is  assimilated. 
In  later  Avriters  re  is  sometimes  found  before  a  vowel  or  h. 

4.  Se  and  ve  are  prefixed  without  change;  as,  secedo,  securus;  vegrandis, 
vecors. 

§  197*  II.  Prepositions  in  composition  usually  add  their  own 
signification  to  that  of  the  word  with  which  they  are  united ;  but 
sometimes  they  give  to  the  compound  a  meaning  different  from  that 
of  its  simples.    The  following  are  their  most  common  significations : — 

1.  ^,  or  oi,  away,  from,  down;  entirely;  un-.  "With  verbs  it  denotes  re- 
moval, disappearance,  absence;  as,  aufei-6,  abator,  absum.  With  adjectives  it 
denotes  absence,  privation ;  as,  aniens,  absonus. 

2.  .4r/^  to,  toward ;  at,  by.  In  composition  with  verbs  ad  denotes  (a)  motion 
lo.  (not  into),  as,  accedo;  (6)  addition,  as,  ascribe;  (c)  nearness,  as,  assldeo; 
(d)  assent,  favor,  as,  annuo,  arrideo;  (e)  repetition  and  hence  intensity,  as,  accl- 
do;  (/)  at,  in  consequence  of,  as,  arrigo.  It  is  sometimes  augmentative,  rai-ely 
inchoative. 

8.  AndA,  around,  about,  on  both  sides. 

4.  drcum,  around,  about,  on  all  sides. 

5.  Cdm  or  cdn,  together,  entirely.  In  composition  with  verbs  it  denotes  (a) 
iimon,  as,  concurro,  cqpsulo;  (6)  completeness,  as,  combiiro,  conflcio;  (c)  with 
effort^  as,  conjTcio,  conclamo;  (J)  inliai'mony,  as,  consdno,  coii]9eutio;  (e)  on  <x 
over,  like  the  English  it-,  as,  colBno,  to  besmear. 


§197.  PREPOSITIONS    IN    COMPOSITIOX.  169 

6.  Contra,  against,  opposite. 

7.  D(',  off,  away,  through,  over,  down;  entirely;  very,  extremely.  With 
verbs  (/c' denotes  (a)  cfo«t)«,' as, dGmitto;  (b)  removal;  as.detondeo;  (c)  absence; 
as,  desum,  deha-beo;  {<!)  prevention;  as,  dehortor;  (e)  unfriendly  fethn(j ;  as, 
dcspicio,  derideo. — With  adjectives  de  denotes  (o)  down;  as,  declivis;  (6)  without ; 
as,  demens. 

8.  Dis,  asunder,  apart,_  in  pieces,  in  two;  dis-,  un-;  very  greatly.  With 
verbs  dis  denotes  (a)  division;  as,  divido,  dllabor  ;  (6)  difference ;  as,  discrepo, 
dissentio;  (c)  the  reverse  of  the  simple  notion;^?,,  displiceo,  diffido;  {d)  intensity; 
as,  dilaudo. — With  adjectives  dis  denotes  difference ;  as,  discolor,  discors. 

9.  £",  or  ex,  out,  forth,  away,  upward,  without,  -less,  un-;  utterly,  com- 
pletely, very.  With  verbs  it  denotes  {a)  out;  as,  exeo,  eximo,  elaboro;  {b)  re- 
momi  of  something;  as,  edormio;  (c)  publicity ;  as,  edico;  {d)  ascent;  as.  exsisto; 
{e)  completeness ;  as,  edisco,  exuro;  {f)  with  denominative  verbs,  change  of 
character;  as,  expio,  effero  (are);  (g)  removal  of  what  is  expressed  by  the  noun 
whence  the  verb  is  derived;  as  enodo;  {h)  the  reversal  of  the  fundamental  idea  ; 
as,  explico;  (?)  distance;  as,  exaudio. — With  adjectives  formed  from  substan- 
tives it  denotes  absence ;'  as,  exsomnis. 

10.  /n,  with  verbs,  signifies  in,  on,  at ;  into,  against ;  as,  inhahUo,  ireduo,  ingS- 
mo,  ineo,  illldo.  With  adjectives,  un-,  in-,  im-,  il-,  ir-,  not;  as,  ignotus,  inhosjyl- 
tdlis,  immovtalis.  Some  of  its  compounds  have  contrary  significations,  accord- 
ing as  they  are  participles  or  adjectives;  as,  intectus,  part.,  covered,  adj.,  un- 
covered. 

11.  Inter,  between,  among,  at  intervals. 

12.  Ob,  with  verbs,  signifies  to,  towards;  as,  dbeo,  ostendo ;  against;  as,  obluc- 
t07-,  obnuntio ;  at,  before;  as,  dbambuh,  obversor;  upon;  as,  occu/co ;  over;  as, 

obduco. 

13.  Per,  with  verbs,  denotes,  through,  thoroughly,  perfectly,  quite;  as,  j?er- 
duco,  perficio,  perdo :  with  adjectives,  through,  very ;  as,  pernox,  ptrlevis. 

14.  Post,  after,  behind. 

15.  Prce  in  composition  with  verbs  denotes  (a)  before  in  place;  as,  praemitto; 
(J)  byov  past;  as,  prjBfluo;  (t)  in  command;  as,  pra;sum,  prasficio;  {d) superior- 
ity; as,  praestb;  (e)  before  in  time;  as,  pr£edico,  prsecerpo;  at  the  extremity;  as, 
praeuro. — With  adjectives,  {a)  before  in  place  or  time ;  as,  prseceps,  pra^scius ; 
{b)  very ;  as,  praealtus,  prseclarus. 

16.  PrcBter,  past,  by,  beyond,  besides. 

17.  Pro,  before,  forward,  forth,, away,  down;  for;  openly;  as,  pi'Sludo,  por- 
rigo,  proterreo,  protero,  procuro,  prdfiteor. 

18.  Re,  again,  against,  back,  re-,  un-,  away;  greatly;  as,  reflSresco,  rSpendo, 
riferio,  reflgo,  recondo. 

19.  Se,  without,  aside,  apart;  as,  secure,  sepdno,  secedo,  securus. 

20.  Sub,  up,  from  below  upwards,  under.  With  verbs  sub  also  signifies  (a) 
assistance;  as,  subvenio;  (b)  succession;  as,  succino;  (c)  in  place  of;  as,  sufllcio; 
(rf)  near;  as, subsum;  (e)  secretly, clandestinely ;  as,  sunipio,  subuuco;  (f)  sarne- 
ichat,  a  little ;  as,  subildeo,  subaccuso. — With  adjectives  it  signifies,  slightly, 
rather ;  as,  subobscurus,  siibabsurdus,  subacldus. 

21.  Subter,  beneath,  under,  from  under,  secretly,  privately. 

22.  Super,  above,  over,  left  over,  remaining,  super-;  as,  supersMco,  supersum, 
siiperstts,  supei'vucaneus. 

23.  Trans,  over,  across,  through;  beyond;  as,  trddo,  transeo,  transfigo, 
iransalplnus. 

24.  Ve,  not,  without;  very;  as,  vegrandis,  vecors;  vepallidus. 

Remark.  In  composition  the  preposition  seems  often  to  add  nothing  to  the 
signification  of  the  word  with  which  it  is  compounded. 

15 


170. 


CONJUNCTIONS. 

CONJUNCTIONS. 


§198 


"^  §  198.     A  conjunction  is  a  particle  which  connects  words  or 
propositions. 

The  most  usual  conjunctions  are, 


?*<1''®'  1  and,  a*;  than. 
ac,       J     -^ 

ac  si,  as  if. 

^eo,  so  mat,  so. 

^"'      J  whether. 
anne,  ) 

annon,  whether  or  not. 

antequam,  before. 

at,  ast,  hvA. 

at  enim,  Iml  indeed. 

atquT.  but. 

attTiinen,  but  yet. 

aut,  either,  or. 

aut..,uut,  either...07'. 

autem,  but. 

cettTum,  but,  however 

ceu,  as,  like  as,  as  if. 

cum  or  quum,  since. 

donee,  as  long  as,  until 

dum,  provided,  while,  as 

long  as,  until. 
diimmodo,  if  but,  if  only. 
tnimvero,  in  very  deed. 
enim,     )  r. 
etenim,  y     ' 
eC),  tlierefore. 
equlilera,  indeed. 
ergo,  therefore. 
et,  and. 

et...et  )  both. ..and; 
et...que,  |  as  well...as. 
et...neque  or  nee,  on  the 

one  hand,  but  not  on  the 

other. 
f  tiam,  also. 
etiamsi,  |  although, 
etsi,        )  though. 
iceirco,  ] 

itaqne,  J 

licet,  though,  aUhough. 
modo,  provided. 
nam,  namqu6,  for. 


ne,  lest,  that  not 

-ne,  whether. 

neque  or  nee,  neither,  nor. 

neqtie...neque 

nee.. .nee, 

neque.. .nee, 

nec.neque, 

neene,  or  not. 

neque,  neither,  nor. 

neque  or  nee.. .et, 

neque  or  nee.. .que 

the  one  hand, 

other. 
neve  or  neu,  nor,  and  not 
neve. ..neve,  (  neither... 
neu.. .neu,      J      nor^ 
ni,  nisi,  unless. 
nura,  whether. 
preeut,  in  comparisonwith. 
prout,  according  as,  just    sive...sive, 

as,  as.  seu...seu. 


neither, 
...nor. 


not 
on 
bui  on  the 


quo,  in  order  that, 
quoad,  as  long  at,  u-ntU. 
quod,  because,  but. 
quodsi,  but  if. 
quominus,  mat  not. 
quoniam,  since,  because. 
quoque,  al^. 
quum  or  eum,  when,  since, 

because. 
quum.. .turn,  both...and. 
^'d,  but. 

sicSti,  l"''*^'^' "*'"*• 

SI,  if. 

si  mode,  if  only. 

simu],  )  as  soon 

simulae(-atgue)  I    as. 

sin,  but  if  ij  however. 

sive  o)'  seu,  oi'  if. 

whether.. .or. 


proinde,  hence,  therefore,    siquidem,  if  indeed,  since. 
propterea,  therefore,  for    tamen,  however,  still. 


tiiat  reason. 
postquam,  after,  dnce. 
priusquam,  before. 
quam,  as,  than. 
quamvis,  alOiough. 
quaudo,  %quand6quidem, 

whereas,  si?ice. 
quamquam,  although. 
quapropter, 
quai'e, 
quamobrem 
quocirca, 
quantumvis,  |  although, 
quamlibet,     |  however. 
quasi,  as  if  Just  as. 
-que,  and. 

-que...et>,      )  both. ..and; 
-que. ..-que,  )  as  well...as. 
quia,  because. 
quin,  but  that,  that  not 
quippe,  because. 


wherefore. 


tametsi,  although. 
tamquam,  as  if. 
turn. ..turn,  boui...and. 
undc,  whence. 
ut,    )  thai,  as  that,  so  thai, 
uti,  )      to  the  end  thai. 
lit  si,  as  if. 
utrura,  ichether. 

Vlt'    }    "'*^'''    ^^ 

vel...vel,  either...07\ 

velut,   )  even  as,  just  as, 

veluti,  )  like  as. 

vero,  truly,  but  indeed. 

veruni,  but. 

veruntamen,  yet,  notwith- 
standing. 

venim-enim  vero,  bui  in- 
deed. 


Conjunctions,  according  to  theb  different  uses,  are  divided  into 
two  general  classes, — coorduiate  and  subordinate. 

>   1.    Coordinate  conjunctions,  are  such  as  join  coordinate  or  similar 
constructions;  as, 

Luna  ct  slellce  fulgebani.  The  moon  and  the  stars  were  shining.  Oondduni 
venti,  fugiuntque  nubes.  The  winds  subside,  and  tlie  elouds  disperse.  Diffidk 
'ictu  est,  sed  conabor  tamen,  It  is  difficult  to  accomplish,  but  stUl  I  will  try. 


§  198.  CONJUNCTIONS.  171 

Coordinate  conjunctions  include  the  following  subdivisions,  viz.  copulative 
disjunctive,  adversative,  illative,  and  most  of  the  causal  conjunctions. 

Ac  II.  Subordinate  conjunctions  are  such  as  join  dissimilar  construc- 
tions; as, 

Edo,  ut  vivam,  I  eat  that  I  may  live.  Pyrrhus  rex  in  itinere  incidit  in  canem, 
qui  interfecti  hominis  corjms  custodiebat.  Mergi  jpulhs  in  aquam  jussit,  ut  Mbe- 
rent,  quoniara  esse  nollent. 

Subordinate  conjunctions  include  all  those  connectives  which  unite  sub- 
ordinate or  dependent  clauses.  These  are  the  concessive,  illative,  final,  condi- 
tional, interrogative,  and  temporal  conjunctions,  and  the  causals  quod,  quuin,  quo- 
niam,  etc.  To  these  may  be  added  also  the  relatives  whether  pronouns,  adjec- 
tives, or  adverbs. 

The  following  paragraphs  contain  a  specification  of  the  several  conjunctions  comprised 
in  each  of  the  preceding  subdivisions,  and  remarks  respecting  their  particular  import 
and  use  as  connectives. 

1.  Copulative  conjunctions  connect  things  that  are  to  be  considered  joint- 
ly; us,  et,  dc,  atque,  the  enclitic  j we,  which,  combined  with  the  negation 
belonging  to  the  verb,  becomes  neque  or  nee,  and,  the  negation  being  doubled, 
nee  non  or  neque  non,  it  becomes  again  affirmative  and  equivalent  to  e < . 
To  these  are  to  be  added  Hi  am  and  qudque,  with  the  adverbials  item  and 
tiidem. 

Eemark.  (a.)  Et  and  que  differ  in  this,  et  connects  things  which  are  con- 
ceived as  different,  and  quS  adds  what  belongs  to,  or  naturally  flows  from  them. 
£t,  therefore,  is  copulative  and  que  adjunctive.  Hence,  in  an  enumeration  of 
words,  que  frequently  connects  the  last  of  the  series,  and  by  its  means  the  pre- 
ceding idea  is  extended  without  the  addition  of  any  thing  which  is  generically 
different.  In  connecting  propositions  que  denotes  a  consequence,  and  is  equiv- 
alent to  '  and  therefore.' 

(&.)  Ac  never  stands  before  vowels,  atque  chiefly  before  vowels,  but  also  be- 
fore consonants. — Atque,  being  fonned  of  ad  and  que,  properly  signifies  '  and 
also,'  '  and  in  addition,'  thus  putting  things  on  an  equality,  but  giving'empha'sis 
to  the  latter.  In  the-beginning  of  a  proposition,  which  is  explanatory  of  that 
which  precedes,  atque  or  dc  introduces  a  tMing  with  great  weight,  and  may  be 
rendered  '  now ' ;  and  in  answers ;  as,  Cognostlne  lios  versus  f  Ac  memoriter,  it 
is  rendered  '  yes,  and  thatj  Ac  being  an  abridged  form  of  atque  loses  some- 
what of  its  power  in  connecting  single  words,  and  its  use  alternates  with  that 
of  et ;  it  is  preferred  in  subdivisions,  whereas  the  main  propositions  are  con- 
nected by  et. 

(Ci)  Neque,  compounded  of  the  ancient  ne  for  nm  and  que,  is  used  for  et  non. 
Et  non  itself  is  used,  when  only  one  idea  or  one  word  of  a  proposition  is  to  be 
negatived ;  as,  patior  et  non  moleste  fiero ;  and  also  when  our  '  and  not '  is 
used  for  '  and  not  rather '  to  correct  an  improper  supposition ;  as,  Si  quam  Ru- 
hiius  injuriam  suo  nomine  ac  non  impulsu  tuo  fecisset.  Cic.  Et  non  is  commonly 
found  also  in  the  second  clause  of  a  sentence  when  et  precedes,  but  neque, 
also,  is  often  used  in  this  case.  Nee  non  or  neque  non,  in  classical  prose,  is  not 
u^sed  like  et  to  connect  nouns,  but  only  to  join  propositions,  and  the  two  words 
are  separated.  Li  later  writers,  however,  they  are  not  separated  and  are 
equivalent  to  et. 

{d.)  i^.'iioOT  has  a  wider  extent  than  qudque,  for  it  contains  the  idea  of  our 
even,'  and  it  also  adds  a  new  circumstance,  whereas  qudque  denotes  the  ad- 
dition of  a  thing  of  a  similar  kind.  Hence  etiam  is  properly  used  to  connect 
sentences,  while  qudque  refers  to  a  single  word,  Etiam  signifies  'and  further,' 
qudque,  '  and  so,'  '  also.'  Qudque  always  follows  the  word  to  which  it  refers, 
etia7n  in  similar  cases  is  usually  placed  before  it,  but  when  it  connects  proposi- 
tions its  place  is  arbitrary.  Et,  too,  in  classical  prose,  is  sometimes  used  in 
the  sense  of '  also.'  So  of  fee  i  is  non  mddo — sed  et,  'not  only — but  also,'  or  'but 
even.' 


172  CONJUNCTIONS.  §  198. 

(c.)   Copulative  conjunctions  are  often  repeated  in  the  sen;  f  of 'both — and,' 

*  as  well — as,'  '  not  only — but  also  '  EO—et  is  of  common  occurrence ;  so,  in 
later  writers,  but  rarelv  in  Cicero,  et — que  ;  que—et  connect  single  words,  but 
not  in  Cicei-o;  que — qik,  occur  for  the  most  part  only  in  poetry,  or  in  collec- 
tion with  the  relative. — Negative  propositions  are  connected  in  English  by 

*  neither— nor,'  and  in  Latin  by  neqiie—negue,  nec—necy  neque — ticc,  and  rarely 
by  nee — nique.  Propositions,  one  of  which  is  ne^tive  and  the  other  aflinna- 
tiVe  ' on  tlie  one  hand — but  not  on  the  other,'  or,  'not on  the  one  hand — but  on 
the  other,'  are  connected  by  et — neque  or  necy  neque  or  iiec — et,  and  occasionally 
by  nee  or  nique — que. 

2.  DisjuxcTivE  conjunctions  connect  things  that  are  to  be  considered  sepa- 
rately; as,  aui,  vel,  the  enclitic  ve,  and  slve  or  seu. 

Kemakk.  (a.)  Aut  and  vel  differ  in  this;  aut  indicates  a  difference  of  the 
object,  fil,  a  difference  of  expression,  i.  e.  aut  is  objective,  vel,  subjective. 
Vk  is  connected  with  the  verb  velle,  and  is  generally  repeated,  vel — vel,  '  choose 
this  or  clioose  this,'  and  the  single  vel  is  used  by  Cicero  only  to  correct  a  pre- 
ceding expression,  and  commonly  combined  with  dicam,  'potius,  or  etiam. — 
Hence  by  ellipsis  vel  has  acquired 'the  signification  of  the  adverb,  *  even,'  and 
BO  enhances  the  signification  of  the  word  modified  by  it ;  as,  Quum  SophOcies 
vel  optlme  scripserk  Electram,  where  bene  is  to  be  supplied  before  re/,  and  the 
latter  is  used  for  the  purpose  of  coiTCctingthe  preceding  expression.  Cf.  ^  127, 4. 
By  means  of  its  derivation  from  velle  it  has,  also,  the  signification  of '  for  ex- 
ample' or  'to  take  a  case,'  for  which  velat  is  more  frequently  used. — (6.)  Ve, 
the  apocopated  vel,  leaves  the  choice  free  between  two  or  more  things,  and  in 
later  but  good  prose  vel  is  used  in  the  same  manner. 

(c.)  Sice  commonly  retains  the  meaning  of  s7,  and  is  then  the  same  as  vel  si, 
but  sometimes  loses  it,  and  is  then  equivalent  to  vel,  denoting  a  difference  of 
name;  as,  Vocabulum  sive  appellatio.  Quint.  The  form  seu  is  rarely  used  by 
Cicero  except  in  the  combination  seu  pOtius. — {d.)  Aut  and  ve  serve  to  continue 
tlie  negation  in  negsitive  sentences,  where  we  use  '  nor ' ;  as,  nun — aui,  where 
nbn — neque  also  may  be  used.  They  are  used  also  in  negative  questions;  as. 
Nam  Ittjes  nostras  moresve  novitf  Cic;  and  after  comparatives;  as,  Doctrina 
pauto  asperior,  quam  vtntas  aut  natura  2)ati(ttur.  Cic.  It  is  only  when  both 
ideas  are  to  be  united  into  one  that  a  copulative  is  used  instead  of  aut  and  ve. — 
(e.)  '  Either — or'  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  out — aut,  denoting  an  opposition  be- 
tween two  things,  one  of  which  excludes  the  otlier,  or  by  vel — vel,  denoting 
that  the  opposition  is  immaterial  in  respect  to  the  result,  so  that  the  one  need 
not  exclude  the  other;  as,  Vei  imperaiore  \e\  milite  me  utimini.  Sail. — Stve — 
give  is  the  same  as  reZ  si — vel  si,  and  retains  the  meaning  of  fc/ — vel.  If  nouns 
only  are  opp>osed  to  each  other,  an  uncertainty  is  expressed  as  to  how  a  thing 
is  to  be  called;  as,  Cretum  leges,  quas  sive  Jupiter  sive  Minos  sanxU;  i.  e.  I  do 
not  know  whether  I  am  to  say  Jupiter  or  ilinos. 

3.  Comparative  conjunctions  express  a  comparison.  These  are,  ut  or  utl, 
tteut ,  vilut,  prout,  2)r(But,  the  poetical  ctu,  quam,  tamquam,  { with 
and  without  si),  quasi,  ut  si,  dc  si,  with  dc  and  atque ,  when  they  sig- 
nify '  as.' 

fjEM^VRK.  ^c  and  ofyi/g  signify  *  as '  or 'than 'after  adverbs  and  adjectives 
which  denote  similarity  or  dissimilarity;  as,  oeque,  jusctd,  ]>ar  and  /x?<*j7Jy, 
p^iindi  and  2fi'oirtde,  prd  eo,  similis  and  simiUter,  dissimlis,  talis,  totidem,  alius 
and  dliter,  contra,  seius,  contrfniits. —  Quam  is  rarely  used  after  these  words, 
except  when  a  negative  particle  is  joined  with  alius;  as,  V'irtus  nihil  aliud  est, 
quam,  etc. ;  and  et  and  que  do  not  occur  in  this  connection. — Ac  is  used  for 
qufim,  after  comparatives,  in  poetry  and  occasionally  by  late  prose  writers;  as, 
Afiius  atque  kedera.  Hor.     Jnsdnius  ac  si.  Id. 

4.  Concessive  conjunctions  express  a  concession,  with  the  general  signifi- 
cation 'although.'  These  are  etsi,  etiamsi,  idmetsi,  or  tdvieneisl, 
quamquam,  ^uamvls,  quantumvls,  quamlibet,  licit,  ut  in  the 
sense  of 'even  if  or 'although,'  and  quum  when  it  signifies  '  although.' 

Remark.  Tdmen  and  other  particles  signifying  'yet,'  'still,'  are  the  correl- 
atives of  the  concessive  c<«yunctions ;  as,  Ut  dennt  vires^  tamen  ttt  laudanda 


§  198.  CONJUNCTIONS.  173 

voluntas.  Ovid.  TLe  adverb  quidem  becomes  a  concessive  conjtinc  ton,  when  it 
is  used  to  connect  oropositions  and  is  followed  by  scd. —  Qunmquam  in  absolute 
sentences,  sometimes  refers  to  something  preceding,  which  it  limits  and  partly 
nullifies;  as,  Quamquam  quid  luquw' f  Yet  why  do  I  speak? 

5.  Conditional  conjunctions  express  a  condition,  their  fundamental  signi- 
fication being  'if.'     These  are  si,  sin,  ntsl  or  nl,  si  modo,  dumraOdo, 

*  if  only,*  'if  but,' (for  which  duni  and  mo  do  are  also  used  alone),  duin- 
mddd  ne,  or  simply  mddo  ne  or  duinne. 

Remark,  (a.)  In  order  to  indicate  the  connection  with  a  preceding  proposi- 
tion, the  relative  qu6d,  which  in  such  case  loses  its  signification  as  a  pronoun, 
and  may  be  rendered,  '  nay,'  '  now,'  '  and,'  or  '  then,'  is  frequently  put  before 
si  and  sometimes  before  nisi  and  eisi,  so  that  quodsl  may  be  regarded  as  one 
Avord,  signifying  '  now  if,'  '  but  if,'  or  '  if  then.'  It  sei-ves  especially  to  intro- 
duce something  assumed  as  true,  from  which  further  inferences  may  be  drawn. 
It  sometimes  signifies  '  although.'  Quodnisl  signifies  '  if  then — not,'  and  quod- 
eisl,  '  nay,  even  if.'  Quod  is  found  also  before  quum,  ubl,  quid,  qudniam,  ne,  uti- 
nam,  and  even  before  the  relative  pronoun. 

{b.)  Nl  and  nisi  limit  a  statement  by  introducing  an  exception,  and  thus  dif- 
fer from  si  non,  which  introduces  a  negative  case.  It  is  often  immaterial 
whether  nisi  or  si  non  is  used,  but  the  difi'erence  is  still  essential.  Si  non  is 
used  when  single  words  are  opposed  to  one  another,  and  in  this  case  si  mijim 
may  be  used  instead  of  si  non. — If  after  an  affirmative  proposition  its  negative 
opposite  is  added  without  a  verb,  our  '  but  if  not '  is  commonly  expressed  in 
prose  hy  si  minus  or  sin  minus  or  sin  aUter ;  as,  Educ  tecum  etiam  omnes  iuos; 
si  minus,  quam  plurimos.  Cic. ;  rarely  by  si  non. 

6.  Illative  conjunctions  express  an  inference  or  conclusion,  with  the  gen  • 
eral  signification  of  '  therefore,'  '  conseauently.'  These  are  ergo,  tffitur, 
itdque,  eo,  ideo,  iccir  co,  proinae ,  propter  ed,  and  the  relative  con- 
junctions, quapropter,  qudre,  quamobrem,  quocirca,  unde,  ^  vflievQ- 
fore.' 

Remark.  Urgo  and  ir/itiir  denote  a  logical  inference. — Itdque, '  and  thus,' 
expresses  the  relation  of  cause  in  facts. — Ideo,  iccirco,  and  proptered,  '  on  this 
account,'  express  the  agreement  between  intention  and  action. — Ed,  '  on  this 
account,'  or  '  for  this  purpose,'  is  more  frequently  an  adverb  of  place. — 
Proinde,  '  consequently,' implies  an  exhortation. —  Cwf/e,  '  whence,'  is  propeily 
an  adverb  of  place.— ^rfeo,  '  so  that,'  or  simply  '  so,'  is  also  properly  an  adverb. 
Hinc,  'hence,'  and  inde,  'thence,'  continue  to  be  adverbs. 

7.  Causal  conjunctions  express  a  cause  or  i-eason,  with  the  general  signifi- 
cation of  '  for '  and  'because.'  These  are  nam,  nam  que,  enim,  etenim, 
quid,  qudd,  qudniam,  quippe,  qifum,  quando,  quanddquidem, 
slquidem;   and  the  adverbs  nlmlrum,  nemjje,  scilicet,  and  videli  cet. 

Remark,  (a.)  Nam  is  used  at  the  beginning  of  a  pi'oposition,  eimn,  after  the 
first  or  second  word.  Nam  introduces  an  objective  reason,  and  enim  merely  a 
subjective  one.  There  is  the  same  dilference  between  namque  and  etenim. 
Na'mque,  however,  though  constantly  standing  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposi- 
tion in  Cicero,  Csesar,  and  Nepos,  is  in  later  ^vi-itei-s  often  put  after  the  begin- 
ning. Enim  in  the  sense  of  at  enim  or  sed  enim  is  sometimes,  by  comic  Avriters, 
put  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposition. — Nam,  enim,  and  etenim  are  often  used 
in  the  sense  of '  namely,'  or  'to  wit,'  to  introduce  an  explanation  of  some- 
thing going  before.  Nlmlrum,  videlicet,  and  scilicet  likewise  ansAver  to  our 
'  namely '  or  '  viz.'  Nlmlrum,  compounded  of  nl  and  mlrum,  and  signifying 
'  a  wonder  if  not,'  is  used  as  a  connective  in  the  sense  of  '  undoubtedly^ '  or 
'  surely,'  and  implies  strong  confidence  in  the  truth  of  the  proposition  with 
which  it  is  connected. —  Videlicet  and  scilicet  introduce  an  explanation,  with 
this  difference  that  videlicet  generally  indicates  the  trae,  and  scilicet  a  Avrong 
explanation.  Sometimes,  however,  nam,  enim,  etenim,  nlmlrum,  and  videlicet 
are  "iised  in  an  ironical  sense,  nnd  scilicet  introduces  a  true  reason. — Nemj)e, 

*  sursly,'  often  assumes  a  sarcastic  meaning  when  another  person's  concession 
is  taken  for  the  purpose  of  refuting  him. — (6.)    Quid  and  qudd  indicate  a  defi- 

15* 


174  CONJUNCTIONS.  §  198. 

nite  and  conclusive  reason,  qudniam,  (i.  e.  quumjam),  a  motive. — Tdeo,  iccirco, 
prqptired  midd,  and  quid,  are  used  without  any  essential  difference,  except  that 
quid  introduces  a  more  strict  and  logical  reason,  whereas  qudniatn,  si^iifyiug 
'now  as,'  introduces  important  circumstances. —  Quando,  qiutmldquidem,  and 
siquiJem  approach  nearer  to  qudniam  than  to  quid,  as  they  introduce  only  sub- 
jective reasons.  Quamldquulern  denotes  'a  reason  implied  in  a  circumstance 
previously  mentioned ;  siquidem,  a  re»ison  impHed  in  a  concession.  In  slquidem 
the  meaning  of  st  is  generally  dropped,  but  it  sometimes  remains,  and  tlien  si 
and  qiiidem  should  be  written  as  separate  words ;  as,  0  fartundtam  remptibU- 
cam,  si  quidem  hanc  sentlnam  ejecent.  Cic. —  Quippe,  with  the  relative  pronoun 
or  with  quum,  introduces  a  subjective  reason.  When  used  elliptically  without 
a  verb  it  signifies  *  forsooth  '  or  '  indeed.'  Sometimes  it  is  followed  bv  a  sen- 
tence with  enim,  and  in  this  way  gradually  acquires  the  signification  ot  nam. 

8.  Final  conjunctions  express  a  purjwse,  object,  or  result,  with  the  signifi- 
cation of '  in  order  that,'  or  '  in  order  that  not.'  These  are  ut  or  uti,  qud^ 
tie  or  ut  ne,  neve  or  neu,  quln  and  quominus. 

Remark.  Ut,  as  a  conjunction,  indicates  either  a  result  or  a  purpose,  *  so 
that,'  and  '  in  order  that.'  "When  indicating  a  result,  if  a  negative  is  added  to 
it,  it  becomes  tit  non ;  when  indicating  a  purpose,  if  the  negative  is  added,  it, 
becomes  ne  or  at  ne,  but  ut  non  also  is  very  rarely  used  for  m. — Neve  (i.  e.  vel  ne) 
signifies  either  '  or  in  order  that  not,'  of  '  and  'in  order  that  not.'     Ci  n«  is  a 

?leonasm,  not  differing  perceptibly  from  ne.    It  is  used  more  frequently  by 
licero  than  by  other  winters.     Q,u6  ne  for  ne  occurs  once  in  Horace. 

9.  Adversative  conjunctions,  express  opposition,  with  the  signification  of 
*but.'  These  arc  $ed,  autem,  verum,  vero,  at  (poetical  ast),  ai 
inim,  atqul,  tdmen,  attdmen,  sedtdmen,  veruntdmen,  at  vero, 
(Snimvero ),  verumenim,   verum,  vero,   cetSrum. 

Remark,  (a.)  Sed  denotes  a  direct  opposition,  and  interrupts  tlie  narrative  or 
argument;  autein  marks  a  transition,  and  denotes  at  once  a  connection  and  an 
opposition.  Porro,  '  further,'  denotes  progression  and  transition  but  not  oppo- 
Bition,  except  in  later  authors. —  Verum  luis  a  similar  relation  to  vero  as  sea  to 
autem.  Verum,  while  it  denotes  opposition,  contains  also  an  explanation.  Vero 
coimects  things  which  are  different,  but  denotes  the  point  in  fiivor  of  which  the 
decision  should  be.  It  thus  forms  the  transition  to  something  more  important, 
as  in  the  phrase,  Illud  vera  plane  non  est  ferendum,  i.  e.  that  which  I  am  about 
to  mention.  In  affirmative  answers  vera  is  often  added  to  the  verb ;  as,  Dasne  f 
Do  vero.  Hence,  when  the  protasis  supplies  the  place  of  a  question,  it  is  some- 
times introduced  into  the  apodosis  merely  to  show  that  it  contains  an  answer. 
Hence  als''  vero  alone  signifaes  '  yes,'  like'  sdne,  itd,  and  eiinm. — Enimvei'O,  '  yes, 
truly,'  '  in  truth,'  does  not  denote  opjposition.  It  sometimes,  like  vero,  forms 
the  transition  to  that  which  is  most  important.  The  compound  verum  emm- 
vero  denotes  the  most  emphatic  opposition. 

(i.)  At  denotes  that  that  which"  is  opposed  is  equivalent  to  that  which  pre- 
cedes. It  frequently  follows  si,  in  the  sense  of  '  yet,'  or  '  at  least ' ;  as,  etsi  non 
$(wienlissimus,  at  amicissimus.  It  is  especially  used  to  denote  objections  whether 
of  the  speaker  himself  or  of  others.  At  enim  introduces  a  reason  for  the  objec- 
tion implied  in  at. — By  atqul,  *  but  still,'  '  but  yet,'  or  '  nevertheless,'  we  admit 
what  precedes,  but  oppose  Something  else  to  it;  as.  Magnum  narras,  rfx  credi- 
blle.  Atqui  sic  habet.  Hor.  So,  also,  when  that  which  is  admitted,  is  made 
use  of  to  prove  the  contrary.  Finally,  atqul  is  used  in  syllogisms,  when  a  thing 
is  assumed  which  had  before  been  le'ft  undecided ;  in  this  case  it  does  not  de- 
note a  direct  opposition  of  facts,  and  may  be  translated  by  '  now,'  '  but,'  '  but 
noj:.'—Cet€ru7n,i)ropeTW  'as  for  the  re'st,'  is  often  usecl  by  later  WTiters  for 
i^d.— Contra  ea,  in  the  sense  of '  on  the  other  hand,'  is  used' as  a  conjunction. 
So  drfeo  with  a  pronoun,  when  it  may  be  trtmslated  'just,'  'precisely,'  'even,* 
'  indeed,'  or  an  intensive  '  and.' 


10.  Temporal  conjimctions,  express  time.  These  are  quum,  quum  prl- 
ium,  ut,  ut  prlmum,  ubl,  postquam,  antequam,  and  priu$' 
uam,    quando,    slmuldc    or  timulaique,    or   simul   alone,    f««i, 


uam,    quando,    slmuldc    o 
iqui  aum,  donic,  quoad. 


§  198.  CONJUNCTIONS.  175 

Rkmark.  Ut  and  uJl,  as  particles  of  time,  signify  *  when.'  Dum,  dSnec,  and 
quoted  signify  either  '  as  long  as,'  or  *  until.'  Zha?i  often  precedes  intered  or  in- 
terim, and  both  dum  and  donee  are  often  preceded  by  the  adverbs  usqui,  usqw 
€0  or  usque  ddeo. 

11.  IxTEKKOGATiVK  conjunctions  indicate  a  question.  These  are,  num, 
utrum,  an,  and  the  enclitic  ne.  This,  when  attached  to  the  three  preced- 
ing particles,  forming  numne,  utrtcmn4^  and  anne,  does  not  alfect  their 
meaning.  With  non  it  forms  a  special  interrogative  particle  nonne .  To 
these  add  e c  and  eti,  as  they  appear  in  ecquis^  ecquando,  and  enum- 
quani,  and  numquid  and'  ecquid,  when  used  simply  as  interrogativ3 
particles. 

E'emark.  (rt.)  The  interrogative  particles  have  no  distinct  meaning  bj 
themselves  in  direct  questions,  but  only  serve  to  give  to  a  proposition  the  forsn 
of  a  question.  In  direct  speech  the  interrogative  particles  are  sometimes 
omitted,  but  in  indirect  questions  they  are  indispensable,  except  in  the  case  of 
a  double  question,  where  the  first  particle  is  sometimes  omitted. — Ecquid  and 
nwnquid,  as  interi'ogative  particles,  have  the  meaning  of  nu7n,  quid  in  this  case 
having  no  meaning,  but  they  must  be  carefully  distinguished  from  the  inter- 
rogative pronouns  ecquid  and  numquid.  En,  or  when  followed  by  a  9',  ec  is, 
like  num,  ne,  and  an,  an  interrogative  particle,  but  is  always  prefixed  to  some 
other  interrogative  word. 

(6.)  In  direct  questions,  num  and  its  compounds  numne,  niemnam,  numquid, 
numquidnam,  and  the  compounds  with  en  or  ec  suppose  that  the  answer  will  be 
'  no ';  as,  iVwHi />u<rts  we  tarn  demeniem  fuissef  But  ecquid  is  sometimes  used 
in  an  affirmative  sense.  In  general  the  negative  sense  of  these  particles  does 
not  appear  in  indirect  questions. 

(c.)  Ne  properly  denotes  simply  a  question,  but  it  is  used  sometimes  affirma- 
tivel.v  and  sometimes  negatively.  When  nS  is  attached,  not  to  the  principal 
verb  but  to  some  other  word,  a  negative  sense  is  produced;  as,  niene  istud potii- 
isse  fatere  jmtas?  Do  you  believe  that  I  would  have  doi;e  that?  The  answer 
expected  is  '  no.'  Wheli  attached  to  the  principal  verb  ne  often  gives  the  af- 
firmative meaning,  and  the  answer  expected  is  'yes.' — Nonne  is  the  sign  of  an 
affirmative  question ;  as,  Canis  nonne  lupo  simtlis  est  f —  Uirum,  in  accordance 
with  its  derivation  from  iter,  which  of  two,  is  used  only  in  double  questions 
whether  consisting  of  two  or  more.  It  is  sometimes  accompanied  by  ne,  which 
is  usually  separated  from  it  by  one  or  more  words;  as,  Utrum,  taceamne  an 
prizdicem  ?  In  later  writers,  however,  utrumne  is  united  into  one  word.  Ne  is 
rarely  appended  to  interrogative  adjectives,  but  examples  of  such  use  are  some- 
times found  in  poetrv;  as,  uterne;  quone  mah;  guantanS.  In  a  few  passages  it 
is  even  attached  to  tKe  relative  pronoun.  . 

(rf.)  An  is  not  used  as  a  sign  of  an  indirect  question  before  the  silver  ag<;; 
when  so  used  it  answers  to  '  whether.'  It  is  used  bv  Cicero  exclusively  in  a 
second  or  opposite  question,  Avhere  we  use  *  or ' ;  as,  &i  sitis,  nihil  interest  utrum 
aqua  sit,  an  vinuin ;  nee  refert,  utrum  sit  aureum  pocOlum,  an  vitreum,  an  manus 
concdvn.  Sen.  In  direct  i'nten'ogations,  when  no  interrogative  clause  precedes, 
an,  annc,  an  vero  are  likewise  used  in  the  sense  of  *  or,'  that  is  in  such  a  man- 
ner that  a  preceding  interrogation  is  supplied  by  the  mind;  as,  InvUus  te  offtndi, 
an  2nitas  me  delecidri  Icedendis  hominibusf  Here  we  may  supply  before  an 
putns,  etc.  the  sentence, '  Do  you  believe  this  V  ' — An,  after  a  preceding  ques- 
tion, is  rendered  by  '  not,'  and  it  then  indicates  that  the  answer  cannot  be 
doubtful ;  as,  A  rebus  gerendis  senecius  abstrdhit.  Quibus  ?  An  his,  quce  geruntur 
juventute  ac  viribus  ?  Is  it  not  from  those  kinds  of  business,  which  ?  etc.  Here 
we  inay  suppose  aliisrief  to  be  supplied  before  an  hisf  Is  it  from  other  kinds 
ol  business,  or  from  those  V  etc.  buch  questions  may  be  introduced  by  nonnS, 
but  without  allusion  to  an  opposite  question,  which  is  implied  in  an. 

(e.)  To  the  rule  that  dn,  in  indirect  questions,  is  iised  exclusively  to  indicate 
a  second  or  opposite  qiiestion,  there  is  one  great  excei)tinn,  for  it  is  employed 
in  single  indirect  que.^tions  after  such  expressions  as  dubito,  dtdnumesf,  imei'tum 
est ;  delibv-o,  hcesito,  and  especially  after  nescio  or  hated  scio,  all  of  which  denote 
uncertainty/,  but  with  an  inclination  to  the  affirmative;  as,  9i  ptt  ge  liirtus  sine 


176  INTERJECTIONS.  §     99 

fortuna  pondtranda  sit  duMto  an  Jiunc  primum  omnium  ponam,  If  virtne  is  to 
De  estimated  without  leference  to  its  success,  I  am  not  certain  whether  I  should 
not  prefer  this  man  to  all  others.  Nep.  It  is  not  Latin  to  say  dvbito  annon  for 
diibUo  an. — Nescio  an,  or  hand  scio  an  are  used  quite  in  the  sense  of  *  perhaps,' 
so  that  they  are  followed  by  the  negatives  7iullus,  nemo,  numquam,  uistead  of 
uUvs,  quisquam  and  umquam.  When  the  principal  verb  is  omitted,  an  is  often 
used  in  the  sense  of  aut ;  as,  ThemistocUs,  quum  ei  Sinumides,  an  quis  alius, 
ariem  mtmoria  jx)lliceretur,  etc.  In  such  causes  incertum  est  is  understood,  and 
in  Tacitus  is  often  supplied. — The  conjunction  si  is  sometimes  used  m  indirect 
interrogations  instead  of  num,  like  the  Greek  si,  and  it  is  so  used  by  Cicero 
after  the  verb  experior. 

Note  1.  The  conjunctions  -ne,  -que,  -ve,  are  not  used  alone,  but  are  always 
affixed  to  some  other  word,  and  are  hence  called  enclitics. 

Note  2.  Some  words  here  classed  with  conjunctions  are  also  used  as  ad- 
verbs, and  many  classed  as  adverbs  are  likewise  conjunctions;  that  is,  they  at 
the  same  time  qualify  verbs,  etc.,  and  connect  propositions ;  as.  Ceteris  in  rebus, 
quum  venit  calamltas,  tum  detrimeniwn  accipitur.  In  other  concerns,  when  mis- 
fortune comes,  then  damage  is  received. 

Note  3.  Conjimctions,  like  adverbs,  are  variously  compounded  with  other 
parts  of  speech,  and  with  each  other;  as,  atque,  (i.  e.  adque),  iccirco  or  idcirco^ 
(i.  e.  idr<irca),  idea,  namquc,  etc.  In  some,  compounded  of  an  adverb  and  a 
conjunction,  each  of  the  simple  words  retains  its  meaning,  and  properly  belongs 
to  its  own  class;  as,  etiam  {ei  jam)  and  now;  iidque,  and  so;  neque  or  nee,  and 
not. 


\ 


INTEKJECTIONS. 


100.     An  interjection  is  a  particle  used  in  exclamation, 

and  expressing  some  emotion  of  the  mind. 

The  most  usual  interjections  are, 

ah!  ah!  alas!  hem!  oho!  indeed !  well !  kaJi !  alas !  alack! 

&ha!  aha!  ah!  hdha!  heu!  oh!  ah!  alas! 

&page !  awoy  !  begone  !  heus !  ho  !  ho  there  !  hark  !  halloa  ! 

atatl  or  atatte!  oh!  ah!  alas!  h!    hui!  hah!  ho!  oh! 

au!  or  hau!  oh!  ah!  io\  ho!  hurrah!  huzzah! 

ecce!  h!  see!  behold!  o!  o!  oh!  ah! 

ehem!  ha!  what!  oh!  oh!  o!  ah! 

eheu !  ah  !  alas  !  ohe !  ho  !  halloa  !  ho  there  ! 

feho!  ehodum!  ho!  soho!  oho!  oho!  aha! 

eia!  or  heia!  ah!  ah  ha!  indeed!    oi!  hov!  alas! 

en!  lo!  see!  behold!  j)supss i  strange !  wonderful! 

eu !  well  done  !  bravo  !  phui !  foh  !  jugh  ! 

«uge!  well  done  !  good !  -p^jl  pish!  tush! 

2;;^^,'  I  huzzcdi!  hurrah!  "^if'j.^,  ^^''fi\  f\'  f/ 

euoe!   )  st!  hist!  irhist !  hush! 

ha!  hold!  lio!  tatae!  so!  strange! 

ha!  ha!  he!  ha!  ha!  vae!  ah.'  alas.'  woe! 

hei !  ah!  ux>!  alas !  vah !  vaha !  ah !  alas !  oh ! 

Remark  1.  An  interjection  sometimes  denotes  several  different  emotions. 
Thus  vah  is  used  to  express  wonder,  grief,  joy,  and  anger. 

Rem.  2.  Other  parts  of  speech  may  sometimes  be  regarded  as  interjections; 
as,  _paa:/  be  still!  So  iiulignum,  iiifandum,  malum,  miserum,  miseralnle,  nefas, 
when  used  as  expressions  of  astonishment,  grief,  or  horror;  and  made  and 
rnacti,  as  expressions  of  approbation.  In  like  manner  the  adverbs  ncs,  pnfex  to, 
cito,  bene,  belle ;  the  verbs  (fiiaiso,  j^recor,  uro,  obsecro,  amabo,  age,  iigite,  cedo^ 
Sddes,  (for  si  audes),  sis,  suliis,  (for  si  tis  and  .s?'  vidtis),  agesis,  dgedum,  'and  dgiie 
than,  and  the  interrogative  quid?  what?  used  as  exclamations. 


§  200,  201.  SYNTAX. PROPOSITIONS.  177 

Rem.  3.  With  tlie  interjections  may  also  be  classed  the  following  invoca- 
tions of  the  gods  :  hercules,  hercule,  hercle ;  or  mehercules,  mehercule,  meherde  ; 
medius  fidius,  mecasior,  ecastor,  ecire,  pol^  edqjol,  equirlne,  per  deum,  per 
deum  inwm-talem,  per  deos,  per  Jdvem,  pro  (or  proh)  Jupiter,  pro  dii  immor- 
tales,  pro  deum  fidein,  prd  deum  atque  mmlnum  fidem,  pro  deum  immortdlium 
(scil.  fide7h),  etc. 


SYNTAX. 

'\     §200.     1.   Syntax  treats  of  the  construction  of  sentences. 

2.  A  sentence  is  a  thought  expressed  in  words ;  as,  Canes 
latrant,  The  dogs  bark. 

3.  All  sentences  are  either 

(1.)   Declarative;  as,  Fcnfi  splran/,  The  winds  blow : — 
(2.)   Interrogative;  sls,  Splrantneventi?  Do  the  winds  blow?— 
(3.)   Exclamatory;  as,  Quam  vehementer  spirant  vend  I   How 
fiercely  the  winds  blow ! — or 

(4.)   Imperative  ;  as,  Vend,  splrate.  Blow,  winds. 

4.  The  mood  of  the  verb  in  the  first  three  classes  of  sentences  is  either  the 
indicative  or  the  subjunctive;  in  imperative  sentences  it  is  either  the  impera- 

^tive  or  the  subjunctive. 

jf     5.   A  sentence  may  consist  either  of  one  proposition  or  of  two  or 
more  propositions  connected  together. 


^ 


PROPOSITIONS. 

§  301.     1.   A  proposition  consists  of  a  subject  and  a  pre- 
dicate. 

2.  The  subject  of  a  proposition  is  that  of  which  something  is 
affirmed. 

3.  The  predicate  is  that  which  is  affirmed  of  the  subject. 

Thus,  in  the  proposition,  Equus  currit,  The  horse  runs,  equus  is  the 
subject  and  currit  is  the  predicate. 

Note.    The  word  affirm,  as  here  used,  includes  all  the  various  significations  of  the 
verb,  as  expressed  in  the  several  moods. 

4.  Propositions  are  either  principal  or  subordinate, 

5.  A  principal  proposition  is  one  which  makes  complete  sense  by 
itself;  as, 

PhOcion  fuit  perpetuo  pauper,  quum  ditisstmus  esse  jpvaseij  Phocton  was  always 
ftoor,  though  he  might  have  been  very  rich. 


178  SYNTAX. SUBJECT.  §  202. 

6.  A  subordinate  proposition  is  one  which,  by  means  of  a  subordi- 
nate conjunction,  is  made  to  depend  upon  or  limit  some  part  of 
another  proposition ;  as, 

Phocion  fuit  perpetuo  pauper,  quum  ditisslmus  esse  posset,  Phocion  was  al- 
ways poor,  though  tie  might  have  been  very  rich. 

7.  Subordinate  propositions  are  used  either  as  substantives,  adjec- 
tives, or  adverbs,  and  are  accordingly  called  substantive,  adjective  or 
adverbial  propositions  or  clauses. 

8.  Substantive  clauses  are  connected  with  the  propositions  on  which  they 
depend  by  means  of  the  final  conjunctions  ut,  ne,  quo,  quin,  etc.,  sometimes  by 
quod,  and,  in  clauses  containing  an  indirect  question,  by  interrogative  pronouns, 
adjectives,  adverbs  and  conjunctions.     See  §§  262  and'^265. 

Remark.  A  dependent  substantive  clatise  often  takes  the  form  of  the  Ewscusative  with 
the  infinitive,  and  in  that  case  has  no  connective ;  as,  Gaudeo  te  valere. 

9.  Adjective  clauses  are  connected  by  means  of  relatives,  both  pronouns  anc 
pronominal  adjectives;  as,  qui,  qudlis,  quantus,  etc.  Adverbial  clauses  are  con 
nected  either  bv  relative  adverbs  of  place  and  time,  (§  191,  R.  1,  (b.),  or  b^ 
temporal,  conditional,  concessive,  comparative,  and  sometimes  by  causal  cot ' 
junctions. 

10.  A  sentence  consisting  of  one  proposition  is  called  a  simple  sen- 
tence ;  as, 

Cddunt  fdlia,  The  leaves  fall.     Semirdmis  Babylonem  cotuMU. 

11.  A  sentence  consisting  of  a  principal  and  one  or  more  subordi- 
nate propositions  is  called  a  complex  sentence ;  as, 

Qid.  Jit,  ut  nemo  contentus  vlvai  f  How  happens  it,  that  no  one  lives  content? 
Quis  ego  sivi,  me  rogitas,  You  ask  me,  who  I  am. 

12.  A  sentence  consisting  of  two  or  more  principal  propositions, 
either  alone  or  in  connection  with  one  or  more  subordinate  proposi- 
tions, is  called  a  compound  sentence ;  as, 

Spirant  venti  et  cddunt  folia.  The  winds  blow,  and  the  leaves  fall. 

13.  The  propositions  composing  a  complex  or  a  compound  sen- 
tence are  called  its  inejnbers  or  clauses ;  the  principal  proposition  is 
called  the  leading  clause^  its  subject,  the  leading  subject,  and  its  verb, 
the  leading  \erb. 

SUBJECT. 

§  SOS.  1.  The  subject  also  is  either  simple,  complex,  or 
compound, 

2.  The  simple  subject,  which  is  also  called  the  grammatical  sub- 
ject, is  either  a  noun  or  some  word  standing  for  a  noun ;  as, 

Aves  rdlant,  Birds  fly,  Tu  legis.  Thou  readest.  A  est  vocdlis,  ^  is  a  voweL 
Mentiri  est  turpe.  To  lie  is  base. 

3.  The  complex  subject,  called  also  the  logical  subject,  consists  of 
the  simple  subject  with  its  modifications  ;  as, 

Conscientia  bene  actge  vitae  est  Jucundissimu,  The  consciousness  qf  a  well  tmeni 
life  is  very  pleasant.  Here  consaentia  is  the  grammatical,  and  cTMcientiaoiM 
acUe  vUce  the  complex,  subject 


§  202.  SYNTAX. SUBJECT.  ^  179 

4.  The  compound  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  or  com- 
plex subjects  to  whicb  a  single  predicate  belongs ;  as, 

Luna  et  steWse  fulgebant,  The  moon  and  stars  were  shining.  Grammatlce  ac 
musicaj  junctce  fuerunt^  Grammar  and  music  were  united.  Semper  honos  no- 
menqtie  tuum  laudes5'Me  mdnebunt. 

EE]\rARK.  Words  are  said  to  modify  or  limit  other  words,  when  .hey  serve 
to  explain,  describe,  define,  enlarge,  restrict,  or  otherwise  quahfy  their  mean- 
ing. 

5.  Every  sentence  must  contain  a  subject  and  a  predicate,  called 
lis  2->rincipal  or  essential  ^dj^is:  any  sentence  may  also  receive  addi- 
tions to  these,  called  its  subordinate  parts. 

Complex  or  Modified  Subject. 

6.  The  complex  subject  is  formed  by  adding  other  words  to  the 
simple  subject.  All  additions  to  the  subject,  like  the  subject  itself, 
are  either  simple,  complex,  or  compound. 

1.    Simple  additions.     The  subject  may  be  modified  by  adding : — 

1 .  A  single  word : — 

(1.)    A  noun  in  the  same  case ;  as, 

Nos  consiiles  desumus,  We  consuls  are  remiss.  Mucius  augur  multa  narrdvit, 
Mucins  the  augur  related  many  things. 

(2.)  A  noun  or  pronoun  in  an  oblique  case,  modifying  or  limiting 
the  subject ;  as, 

Amor  multitudinis  commdvetur,  The  love  of  the  multitude  is  excited.  Cura  mei, 
Cure  for  me.     Viribus  «sms,  '^eed  of  strength. 

(3.)    An  adjective,  adjective  pronoun,  or  participle ;  as, 

Fugit  invida  cBtas,  Envious  time  flies.  Mea  mater  est  benigna.  Ducit  agmina 
Penthesilea  furens.*'  Litera  scripta  mdnet. 

2.  A  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case ;  as, 

Sdpor  in  gramine.    Opj^ida  sine  prsesidio.    Receptio  ad  te. 

3.  A  dependent  adjective  clause  introduced  by  qui,  qualis,  quan- 
tus,  etc. ;  as, 

Leve  fit,  quod  bene  fertur,  6nus,  The  burden,  t«7ucfe  is  borne  well,  becomes 
light.  Liierce,  quas  scripsisti,  acceptm  sunt.  Ut,  qualis  (ille)  haberi  vellet, 
talis  esset.     Tania  est  inter  eos,  quanta  maxima  esse  potest,  morum  distantia. 

II.    Complex  additions.     The  subject  may  be  modified  : — 

1.   By  a  icord  to  which  other  words  are  added. 

(1.)  When  the  word  to  which  other  words  are  added  is  a  noun  or 
pronoun,  it  may  be  modified  in  any  of  the  ways  above  mentioned. 

(2.)    When  it  is  an  adjective  it  may  be  modified : — 

(rt.)   By  an  adverb  either  simple  or  modified ;  as, 

Erat  exspectdtio  valde  magna.    Prcesidlum  non  nimfs  firmum. 

(/>.)   By  a  noun  in  an  oblique  case ;  as, 

Major  pieiiile,  Superior  in  piety.  Contentionis  cupldus,  Fond  of  corUeniion, 
Patri  siniilis,  Like  liis  father.    JN'udus  membra.  Mvenes  patre  digni. 


160  SYNTAX. SUBJECT.  §  202. 

(c.)   By  an  infinitive,  a  gerund,  or  a  supine ;  as, 

Jrwietus  rincj.  Not  accustomed  to  be  conquered.  Yenandi  siudidstu.  Fond  of 
hunting.     Mlraolie  dictu,  Wonderful  to  tell. 

(fl.)    By  a  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case ;  as, 
Jifulis  in  republlca,  Unskilled  in  civil  affairs.     Ab  eqviitatu  Jij-mus.    Celer  in 
pugnain.    Pronus  ad  fidem. 

(«.)   By  a  subordinate  clause ;  as, 

Melior  est  ceriapnx,  quam  sperata  victoria,  A  certain  peace  is  better  than  an 
exptcttd  victory.    J)ubius  sum,  quid  f  aciam. 

(3.)  When  it  is  a  participle,  it  may  be  modified  like  a  verb.  See 
§203. 

2.  By  a  pJirase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case  to  which 
other  words  are  added ;  as, 

De  victoria  Csesaris  fdma  perfertur,  A  report  concerning  Ooesar's  victory  is 
brought. 

Remark  1.  As  the  case  following  the  preposition  is  that  of  a  noun  or  pro- 
noun, it  may  be  modified  like  the  subject  in  any  of  the  foregoing  ways. 

Rem.  2.  The  preposition  itself  may  be  modified  by  an  adverb,  or 
by  a  noun  or  adjective  in  an  oblique  case ;  as, 

Lon^e  u//ra,  Far  beyond,  ilulto  anfe  noc^em,  Z-on^  before  night  Sexennio 
post  Veios  ca2)ios,  Six  years  after  the  capture  of  Veii. 

3.  By  a  suhordinate  clause j  to  whose  subject  or  predicate  other 
words  are  added. 

Remark.  These  additions  may  be  of  the  same  form  as  those  added  to  the 
principal  subject  or  predicate  of  the  sentence. 

IlL    Compound  additions.     The  subject  may  be  modified : — 

1.  By  two  or  more  nouns  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  connect- 
ed by  a  coordinate  conjunction ;  as, 

ConsuleSy  Brutus  tt  CoUatlnus,  The  consuls,  Brutus  and  CoUaiinus. 

2.  By  two  or  more  oblique  cases  of  a  noun  or  pronoun  connected 
coordinately ;  as, 

VitsejMe  nScisgite  pdtestas.    Pfirlculomm  et  l§,b5rum  inctidmentum. 

3.  By  two  or  more  adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  or  participles, 
connected  coordinately ;  as. 

Grave  helium  perdiutumumjue.   Ardmi  teneri  atque  molles. 

4.  By  two  or  more  adjective  clauses  connected  coordinately ;  as, 
Et  qui  f  ecere,  et  qui  facta  aliorum  scripsere,  muUi  laudantur.  Sail. 

5.  By  two  or  more  of  the  preceding  modifications  connected  coor- 
dinately; as, 

Gewis  hominum  agreste,  sine  leglbus,  sine  imperio,  liberum,  aique  solutum. 

Rem.  1.  A  modified  grammatical  subject,  considered  as  one  com- 
plex idea,  may  itself  be  modified ;  as, 

Omnia  tua  consilia,  AU  thy  counsels.  Here  omnia  modifies,  not  corwjfio,  but 
the  complex  idea  expressed  by  tua  consiUa.  So  Trlginta  naves  longer  Praepd- 
tens  ftnitinHis  rex. 


^  203.  SYNTAX. PREDICATE.  181 

Rem.  2.  An  infinitive,  with  the  words  connected  with  it,  may  be 
the  logical  subject  of  a  proposition  ;  as, 

Vii-tus  est  vitiura  fugere,   To  shun  vice  is  a  virtue. 

Rem.  3.  A  clause,  or  any  member  consisting  of  two  or  more  clauses, 
may  be  the  logical  subject  of  a  proposition ;  as, 

E  coelo  descendit '  Nosce  te  ipsum.'    jEquum  est,  ut  hoc  facias. 

Rem.  4.  The  noun  or  pronoun  which  is  the  subject  of  a  proposi- 
tion Is  put  In  the  nominative,  when  the  verb  of  the  predicate^  is  a 
finite  verb ;  but  when  the  verb  is  in  the  infinitive,  the  subject  i^  put 
in  the  accusative. 

Note  1.    A  verb  in  any  mood,  except  the  infinitive,  is  calted  a  finite  verb. 
Note  2.    In  the  following  pages,  when  the  term  subject  or  predicate  is  used  alone,  the 
grammatical  subject  or  predicate  is  intended. 

PREDICATE. 

§  303.  1.  The  predicate,  like  the  subject,  is  either  simple, 
complex,  or  compound. 

2.  The  simple  predicate,  which  is  also  called  the  grammatical  pre- 
dicate, is  either  a  single  finite  verb,  or  the  copula  sum  with  a  noun, 
adjective,  and  rarely  with  an  adverb ;  as, 

Sol  lucet,  The  sun  shines.  Malta  dnlmalia  repunt,  Many  animals  creep 
Brevis  est  vdluptas,  Pleasure  is  brief  Europa  est  peninsiila,  Europe  is  a  pe- 
ninsfda.     Rectisslme  sunt  apicd  te  omnia. 

3.  The  complex  predicate,  called  also  the  logical  predicate,  con- 
sists of  the  simple  predicate  with  its  modifications ;  as, 

Scipio  fudit  Annibalis  copias,  Scipio  routed  the  forces  of  Hannibal.  Here 
fudit  is  the  grammatical,  and  fiidit  Annibalis  copias  the  logical  predicate. — 
So,  Romulus  Romanae  conditor  urbis  fuit. 

4.  The  compound  predicate  consists  of  two  or  more  simple  or  com* 
plex  predicates  belonging  to  the  same   subject ;  as, 

Prdbitas  laudatur  et  alget.  Honesty  is  praised  and  neglected.  Leti  vis  rapnit, 
rapietque  gentes.  Lucius  Catil'ma  fuit  magna  vi  et  anlmi  et  corporis,  sea  in- 
genio  malo  pravoque. 

Complex  or  Modified  Precncate. 

5.  The  complex  predicate  Is  formed  by  adding  other  words  to  the 
simple  predicate.  All  additions  to  the  predicate,  like  the  predicate 
itself,  are  either  simple,  complex,  or  compound. 

I.   Simple  additions.     The  predicate  may  be  modified  by  adding; — 

1.    A  single  word-, — 

(1.)  A  noun  or  adjective  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject.  This 
occurs  after  certain  neuter  verbs  and  passive  verbs  of  naming,  call- 
ing, etc.  (See  §  210,  R.  3.)  ;  as, 

Sei'vus  ft  hherUnus^  The  slave  becomes  a  /Veecfrwctn.  Servius  TulUus  ^ex  est 
detldratus.     Aristides  ;\\xiit\xs  est  appelldtus.     Jncedo  regina. 

(2.)    A  noun  or  pronoun  in  an  oblique  case ;  as, 

Spe  vlvimus,  We  liveJby  hope     Deus  regit  mundum,  God  rules  the  world. 


]  82  SYNTAX. PREDICATE.  §  203. 

(3.)   An  adverb  either  simple  or  modified ;  as, 

Saepe  venit,  He  came  oflen.  Fesdnalente,  Hasten  slowly.  LiV^ra  f&clle  (K»- 
nitUur.    Chremes  nimis  graviter  ci-uciat  dddlescenlulum. 

(4.)    An  infinitive  mood ;  as, 
Qj^  discere,  He  desires  to  learn.    Audeo  dlcfire.    Ver  esse  cotperat. 

2.  A  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case ;  as,  Venit  ad 
nrbem,  He  came  to  the  city. 

3.  A  dependent  substantive  or  adverbial  clause ;  as, 

Vereor  ne  repreliendar,  I  fear  that  I  shall  be  blamed.  Zencnem^  quum  Athenis 
essem,  audiebam  fre(]uenter.    Fdc  cogites. 

n.  Complex  additions.     The  predicate  may  be  modified  : — 

1.  By  a  word  to  -which  other  words  are  added. 

Remark.  These  words  are  the  same  as  in  the  corresponding  cases  of  com- 
plex additions  to'  the  subject.    See  §  202,  H. 

2.  By  a  phrase  consisting  of  a  preposition  and  its  case,  to  which 
other  words  are  added.     See  complex  additions  to  the  subject,  §  202. 

3.  By  a  subordinate  clause^  to  whose  subject  or  predicate  other 
"words  are  added.     See  complex  subject,  §  202,  IT,  3. 

Rem.  2.  Each  of  the  words  constituting  a  prt)position  may  be  modified  by 
two  or  more  additions  not  dependent  on,  nor  connected  with  each  other,  ana 
consisting  either  of  single  words,  phrases,  or  dependent  clauses;  as,  Agamem- 
nonis  belli  gloria.  Patemum  daium  erga  Rumanos.  Mens  sibi  conscia  recti. 
Mea  maxime  interest,  te  vdlere.  Ago  tibi  gr&tias.  Meipsum  inertise  condem.no. 
Eos  hoc  mdneo.    In  quo  te  accuso.    Mdnet  eum,  ut  suspiciones  \1tet. 

m.  Compound  additions.  1.  The  predicate  may  be  modified  by 
two  or  more  words,  phrases,  or  clauses,  joined  together  by  a  coordi- 
nate conjunction.     See  Compound  additions  to  the  subject,  §  202,  111= 

2.  The  leading  verb  is  usually  either  in  the  indicative  or  impera- 
tive mood,  but  sometimes  in  the  subjunctive  or  the  historical  infin- 
itive. 

3.  The  members  of  a  compound  sentence  are  connected  by  coordi- 
nate conjunctions;  those  of  a  complex  sentence  by  some  relative 
word,  or  by  a  subordinate  conjunction. 

4.  Instead  of  a  dependent  clause  connected  by  a  conjunction,  a 
noun  and  participle,  or  two  nouns,  sometimes  stand  as  an  abridged 
proposition ;  as, 

Bello  confecto  discessU,  i.  e.  quum  bellum  confectum  esset,  cSscessit,  The  war 
being  finished,  or  when  the  war  was  finished,  he  departed!  Nil  desperandum, 
Teucro  duce. 

5.  An  infinitive  may  be  modified  like  the  verb  of  a  predicate. 

6.  Agreement  is  the  correspondence  of  one  word  with  another  in 
gender,  number,  case,  or  person. 

7.  A  word  is  said  to  govern  another,  when  it  requires  it  to  be  put 
in  a  certain  case  or  mood. 

8.  A  word  is  said  to  depend  on  another,  when  its  case,  gender 
number,  mood,  tense,  or  person,  is  determined  by  that  word. 

9.  A  word  is  said  to  follow  another,  when  it  depends  upon  it  in 
construction,  whatever  may  be  its  position  in  the  sentence. 


§204.  SYNTAX. APPOSITICX.  188 


APPOSITION. 

\     §  30  J:.     A  noun,  annexed  to  another  noun  or  to  a  pronoun, 
and  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the  same  case ; 

as, 

Urbs  Roma,  The  city  Rome.  Nos  consules,  We  consuls.  So  Apud  Heroddtum, 
patrem  histdrioe,  sunt  innumerabiles  fabulce^  In  Herodotus,  t\\Q  father  of  history, 
etc.  Cic.  Lapides  silices,  jlint  stones.  Liv.  Ante  me  consulern,  Before  I  waa 
consul.    Fons  cut  iwmen  Arethusa  est.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  A  noun,  thus  annexed  to  another,  is  said  to  be  in  apposition 
to  it.  It  is  generally  added  for  the  sake  of  explanation,  identification,  or  de- 
scription; sometimes  it  denotes  character  or  purpose;  as.  Ejus  fu(jce  cctnitem 
me  adjunxi,  I  added  myself,  as  a  companion  of  his  flight ;  and  sometimes  the 
time,  cause,  reason,  etc.,  of  an  action ;  as,  Alexander  puer,  Alexander  when  a 
boy.     Cato  senex  scrlbere  histdriam  instituit.  Suet. 

(b.)  A  noun  in  apposition,  like  an  adjective  used  as  an  epithet,  (§  205,  N.  2,) 
assumes  the  attribute  denoted  by  it  as  belonging  to  the  noun  which  it  limits, 
while  the  predicate-nominative  affirms  it.  Hence  both  nouns  belong  to  tho 
same  part  of  the  sentence,  whether  subject  or  predicate.  In  cases  or  apposi- 
tion, there  seems  to  be  an  ellipsis  of  the  ancient  participle  ens,  being;  qui  est, 
who  is;  qui  vocatur,  who  is  called;  or  the  like. 

Rem.  2.  If  the  annexed  noun  has  a  form  of  the  same  gender  as  the  other 
noun,  it  takes  that  form ;  as,  U»us  magister  egregius.  Plin.  Philosdphia  magis- 
tra  vitce.  Cic.  If  the  annexed  noun  is  of  the  common  gender,  the  adjective 
qualifying  it  takes  the  gender  of  the  preceding  noun ;  as,  Laurus  fidissimu 
custos. 

Rem.  3.  The  annexed  noun  sometimes  differs  from  the  other  in  gender  or  in 
number;  as,  Duo  fulmina  belli,  Scipiddas,  cladem  Liby(8.  Virg.  Mitylcnoe,  urbs 
nobilis.  Cic.  Tullidla,  dQlicisd  nostrce.  Id.; — and  sometimes  in  both;  as,  Ndie, 
mecB  vires.  Virg.    Nos,  animae  vlles,  inhumdta  infletdque  turba.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  The  substantive  pronoun  is  sometimes  omitted  before  the  wcft'd  in 
apposition  to  it;  as,  Consul  dixi,  scil.  ego;  (I)  the  consul  said.  And  instead  of 
the  substantive  pronoun,  a  possessive  adjective  pronoun  is  sometimes  used;  as, 
Tua  domus,  talis  viri.  Cic.   See  §  211,  R.  3,  (6.) 

Rem,  5.  A  noun  may  be  in  apposition  to  two  or  more  nouns,  and,  in  such 
case,  is  usually  put  in  the  plural ;  as,  M.  Antonius,  C.  Cassius,  tribuni  plebis, 
M.  Antonius,  C.  Cassius,  tribunes  of  the  people.  Cses.  Publius  et  Servius  Sullae, 
Servi  filii.  Sail.  Tib.  et  Gaius  Gracchi.  Cic.  Orationes  L.  et  C.  Aureliorum 
Orestarum.  Id.    But  sometimes  in  the  singular;  as,  Cn.  et  L.  Domitius.  Cic. 

(1.)  So  when  the  nouns  are  connected  by  cum,  the  annexed  noun  taking 
the  case  of  the  former;  as,  Diccearchum  vera  cum  Aristoxeno,  doctos  sane  hom- 
ines, omittdmus.  Cic. 

(2.)  If  the  nouns  are  proper  names  of  different  genders,  a  masculine  noun  is 
annexed  rather  than  a  feminine,  when  both  forms  exist;  as,  Ad  Ftolemceum 
Cleopatramque  reges  legdti  missi  sunt.  Liv. 

Rem.  6.  The  annexed  noun  is  sometimes  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Urbem  Patav! 
locdvlt,  The  city  of  Patavium.  Virg.  Plurimus  Eridani  amnis.  Id.  Arbdrem 
fici  numquam  viderat.  Cic.     In  qpptdo  Antiochite.  Id.   Ruplli  et  Persi  par.  Hor. 

Rem.  7.  The  name  of  a  town  in  the  genitive  occurs  with  an  ablative  in  ap- 
position to  it;  as,  Connthi  Achaice  urbe;  At  Corinth,  a  city  of  Achaia.  Tac. 
Antioch'KB,  celebri  urbe.  Cic.   See  ^  221,  Note,  and  §  254,  Rem.  3. 

Rem.  8.   (a.)   A  proper  name,  after  nomen  or  cognomen,  with  a  verb  followed 

•    by  a  dative,  is  put  in  apposition  either  to  nomen.  etc.,  or  to  the  dative,  the  latter 

by  a  species  of  attraction ;  as,  Fons,  cui  nomen  Arethusa  est.  Cic.   Stirps  viriUSf 

ad  Ascanium  parentes  dixere  nomen.  Liv.    Nomen  Arcturo  est  mthi,  1  have  the 


184  SYNTAX. — ^ADJECTIYES.  §  205. 

name  Arctnrus.  Plant.  Cut  nunc  cognomen  lulo  cuMtur.  Virg.  Cui  Egerio  indt- 
iumnomen.  Liv. — (6.)  The  name  may  also  be  pnt  in  the  genitive;  as,  Nomen 
Wercurii  est  mihi.  Plant.  Q.  MeteUus,  cui  JIacedonIci  nomen  inditum  eral.  Veil. 
Cf.  R.  6. — (c.)  In  Jllaardas,  cui  ftcimus  Aurea  nomen,  Ov.  Met.  15,  96,  Aurea 
is  used  as  an  indeclinable  nonn,  instead  of -4areani  (scil.  (cfatem);  or  Aurece, 
dat.  (scil.  cetdti.) 

Rem.  9.  A  clause  may  supply  the  place  of  one  of  the  nouns;  as,  Cbr/ftet  ora- 
torem  institui — rem  arduam,  Let  him  reflect  that  an  orator  is  training — a  diffi- 
cult thing.  Quint. — So  also  a  neuter  adjective  used  substantively;  as,  Triste 
lupus  sUtbulis,  The  wolf,  a  sad  thing  to  the  folds.  Virg.  Varium  ei  mutabile 
semper  femina.  Id. 

Rem.  10.  Sometimes  the  former  noun  denotes  a  whole,  and  its  parts  are  ex- 
pressed by  nouns  in  apposition  to  it;  as,  Onerdrice,  pars  maxima  ad  ^gimurum, 
— aliae  adversus  urbem  ipsam  delate  sunt,  The  ships  of  burden  were  carried,  the 
greatest  part,  to  ^gimurus, — others  opposite  to  the  city  itself.  Liv.  Pictores 
et  jXKtce  suum  quisque  Opus  a  vulgo  considerdri  ridt.  Cic.  In  the  construction 
of  the  ablative  absolute,  quisque  remains  in  the  nominative,  though  the  word 
to  which  it  is  in  apposition  is  in  the  ablative;  as,  MuUis  ^hi  quisque  imperium 
petentibu^.  Sail.  J.  18.  So  also,  in  Liv.  26,  29,  quisque.  remains  in  the  nomina- 
tive although  the  word  to  which  it  is  in  apposition  is  in  the  accusative  with 
the  infinitive. 

To  this  rule  may  be  subjoined  that  which  relates  to  the  agreement  of  inter- 
rogative and  responsive  words. 

Rem.  11.  The  principal  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  answer  to  a  ques- 
tion, must  be  in  the  same  case  as  the  corresponding  interrogative 
word;  as, 

Quis  herus  estSbi?  Amphitnio,  scil.  est.  Who  is  your  master?  Amphitruo 
(is.)  Plant.  Quid  quceris 7  Librum,  scU.  qucero.  \Vhat  are  you  looking  for? 
A  book.  Quota  Jiord  venisti  f  Sexta.  At  what  hour  did  you  come  ?  At  the 
sixth. 

KoTE  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  a  substantive  pronoun,  the  corresponding 
possessive  pronoun  is  often  used,  agreeing  with  its  noun;  as,  Cujus  est  liber T 
Weus,  (not  Met.)  (See  fj  211,  Rem.  3,  (b.)  So  cu/um for  genitive  cO/m* f  Cujum 
pecusf  an  Meliboei?  Non;  verum  ^gonis.  Virg. 

Note  2.  Sometimes  the  rules  of  syntax  require  the  responsive  to  be  in  a 
diflferent  case  from  that  of  the  interrogative ;  as,  Quanti  emisd  f  Viginti  minis. 
Damnatusne  es  furti?    Imo  alio  crimine.  See  §§  214,  R.  1,  and  217,  R.  2. 

ADJECTIVES. 

§  205*  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles, 
agree  with  their  nouns,  in  gender,  number,  and  case ;  as, 

Bdnus  vir,  A  good  man.  B6nos  vtros,  Good  men. 

Bfnigna  mater,  A  kind  mother.         Vdnoe  leges.  Useless  laws. 
Ti-iste  bellum,  A  sad  war.  Mindcia  verba.  Threatening  words. 

Spe  amissd,  Hope  being  lost.  Hoec  res,  This  thing. 

So,  Mea  mater  est  benigna. 
H(Bc  leges  vdna  sunt. 
Note  1.  Adjectives,  according  to  their  meaning,  (4  104),  are  divided  into 
two  classes — qualifying  and  limiting — the  former  denoting  soma  property  or 
quality  of  a  noun;  as,  a  wise  man,  lead  is  heavy;  the  latter  aejtning  or  restricting 
its  meaning;  as,- </tis  man,  <en  cities.  To  the  former  clas» -belong  such  adjec- 
tives as  denote  a  property  or  quality,  including  all  participles  and  participial 
adjectives;  to  the  latter,  the  adjective  p7:>aouns,  pronominal  adjectives,  and 
numerals. 


I 


§  205.  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES.  185 

Note  2.  An  adjective,  pai-ticiple,  or  pronoun,  may  either  be  used  as  an  epi- 
thet to  modify  a  noun,  or,  with  the  copula  swm,  may  constitute  a  predicate. 
In  the  former 'case  the  quality  is  assumed,  in  the  latter  it  is  asserted.  In  both 
cases,  the  rule  for  their  agreement  is,  in  general,  the  same.  See  §  210,  R.  1. 

Note  3.  Any  word  or  combination  of  words  added  to  a  noun  to  modify  or 
limit  its  meaning  is  of  the  natui-e  of  an  adjective. 

Note  4.  In  the  following  remarks,  the  word  adjective  is  to  be  considered  as  including 
participles,  either  alone  or  combined  with  the  auxiliary  sum,  and  also  adjective  pro- 
nouns, unless  the  contrary  is  intimated. 

Remark  1.  An  adjective  agrees  ^Iso  with  a  substantive  pronoun,  taking  its 
gender  fi-om  that  of  the  noun  for  which  the  pronoun  stands ;  as,  Ipse  capellas 
aeger  dc/o,  scil.  effo,  Mellboeus ;  Virg.  Fortunate  puer,  tu  nunc  eris  alter  ab  illo.  Id. 
Ui  se  totura  ei  trdderet.  Nep.  0  me  miserum  (spoken  by  a  man),  miseram  me 
^  (spoken  by  a  woman).  So  salvi  s&mus,  salves  sumus,  scil.  nos,  masculine  or 
feminine. — In  general  propositions  which  include  both  sexes,  the  pronouns  are 
considered  masculine ;  as,  Nos  fiHges  consumere  nati.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  An  adjective  may  belong  to  each  of  two  or  more  nouns, 
and  in  such  case  is  put  in  the  plural.  If  the  nouns  are  of  the  same 
gender,  the  adjective  agrees  with  them  in  gender,  as  well  as  in  num- 
ber; as, 

Mpus  et  agnus  siti  compulsi,  A  wolf  and  a  lamb,  constrained  by  thirst.  Phsed. 
Sicilia  Sardinidque  amissse.  Liv.  • 

When  the  nouns  are  of  different  genders, 
\     (1.)   If  they  denote  living  things,  the  adjective  Is  masculine  rather 
than  feminine ;  as, 

Pater  miM  et  mater  mortui  sunt,  My  father  and  mother  are  dead.  Ter.  So 
also  tdergue  in  the  singular.  Procumbii  uterque,  scil.  Deucalion  et  Pyrrha. 
Ovid. 

.  (2.)  If  they  denote  things  without  life,  the  adjective  is  generally 
'neuter;  as, 

His  genus,  ceias,  eloquentia  prdpe  sequalia  fuere,  Their  family,  age,  and  elo- 
quence, were  nearly  equal.  Sail.  Regna,  imperia,  nobilitates,  honores,  divitice  in 
cdsu  sita  sunt.  Cic.  ffuic  bella,  raplnce,  discordia  civiUs,  gi'ata  fv£re.  SaU. 
Anima  atque  animus,  quamvls  Integra  recens  in  corpus  eunt.  Lucr. 

Note.  When  nouns  denoting  things  without  life  are  of  the  same  gender 
(either  masculine  or  feminine),  but  of  different  numbers,  the  adjective  is  some- 
times neuter ;  as,  Craeso  et  vita  et  patnmdnii  partes,  et  urbs  Barce  concessa 
stmt.  Just.;  sometimes  also  when  both  nouns  are  in  the  singular  number;  as, 
Plerosque  vehcUas  et  regie  hostibus  igndra  tutata  sunt.  Sail.  Nox  atque  prceda 
remorata  sunt.  Id. 

(3.)  If  one  of  the  nouns  denotes  an  animate,  and  another  an  inan- 
imate thing,  the  adjective  is  sometimes  neuter,  and  sometimes  takes 
the  gender  of  that  which  has  life  ;  as, 

Numfdce  atque  signa  militdria  obscurati  sunt.  The  Numidians  and  the  military 
standards  were  concealed.  Sail.  Romdni  regem  regnum^ue  Maceddnice  sua 
futiira  sdunt.  Liv.    Jane,  fdc  seternos  pdcem  pacisque  mimstros.  Ovid. 

Exc.  to  Rem.  g.  The  adjective  often  agrees  with  the  nearest  noun, 
and  is  understood  with  the  rest;  as, 

Sdciis  et  rege  rece^o.  Our  cbmpanions  and  king  having  been  recovered. 
Virg.     Agri  omnes  et  mdria.  Cic.    Cognltum  est  adlutemf  limro^^  famam^  for- 
i&nai  esse  carissimas.  Cic. 
16^ 


!^ 


^ 


186  SYNTAX. — ^ADJECTIVES.  §  205. 

Note.  A  noun  in  th«  singular,  followed  by  an  ablative  with  c«ni,  has  some- 
times a  plural  adjective,  the  gender  being  the  same  as  if  the  nouns  were  con- 
nected by  e<;  as,  Fllinm  cum  fUto  nccitos.  Liv.  Jlia  cum  Lauso  de  Numliore 
sati.  Ovid. »  F ilium  Alexandn  cum  matre  in  arcem  custodiendos  viitlit.  Just. 

Rem.  3.  (1.)  An  adjective  qualifying  a  collective  noun  is  often 
put  in  the  plural,  taking  the  gender  of  the  individuals  which  the  noun 
denotes;  as. 

Pars  certdre  parati,  A  part,  prepared  to  contend.    Virg.    Pars  per  agros 

dilapsi suarn  quisque  spem  exsequentes.  Liv.   Supplex  turba  erant  sine  judice 

tuti.  Ovid.  This  construction  alwavs  occvrs  when  the  collective  noun  is  the 
subject  of  a  pliu^l  verb.  See  ^  209,  K.  11. 

v2.)  Sometimes,  though  rarely,  an  adjective  in  the  singular  takes  the  gender 
of  the  individuals ;  as.  Pars  ard'uus  altis  pulverulentus  eguis  furit.  Virg.  Part 
una  ducum — fractus  morbo.  Ovid. 

(3.)  Sometimes  other  nouns,  which  only  in  a  figurative  sense  denote  human 
beings,  have  by  s>/nesis  an  adjective  of  a  different  gender  from  their  own,  refer- 
ring to  the  words  wliich  they  mclude ;  as,  Ldtium  Gipuaque  agro  mulctati, 
Latium  and  Capua  were  deprived  of  their  land.  Liv.    Qtpita  conjurdtionis  vir- 

S's  CKsi  ac  securi  percussi  sunt.  Id.    Auxilia  irati.  Id.     So  after  miliia;  as, 
uo  miliia  Tyriorum^  crucibus  affixi.  Curt.    Cf  §  323,  3,  (4.) 

Rem.  4.  Two  adjectives  in  the  singular  are  sometimes  joined  to  a  plural 
noun;  a«,  Maria  TjTrher.um  atque  Adriaticum,  The  Tuscan  and  Adriatic  seas. 
Liv.  Cum  legionibus  secunda  et  tertia.  Liv.  Circa  portas  Colllnam  Esguili- 
namque.  Id.  But  sometimes  the  noun  is  in  the  singular;  as,  Inter  EsquUlnam 
CoUinamque  portara.  Id.  Legio  Martia  et  quarta.  In  comic  writers,  an  adjec- 
tive or  participle  in  the  singular  is  sometimes  used  with  a  plural  pronoun;  as, 
Nobis  praesente.  Plant.    AOsente  nobis.  Ter. 

Rem.  5.  A  participle  which  should  regularly  agree  with  the  subject  of  a 
proposition,  when  placed  after  the  noun  of  the  predicate,  (a)  sometimes  takes 
the  gender  and  number  of  the  latter;  as.  Nun  omnis  error  stuliitia  est  dicenda, 
Not  every  error  is  to  be  called  folly.  Cic.  Cens  universa  Veneli  api>ellati.  Liv. 
(b.)  Sometimes  also  it  agrees  with  a  noun  following  the  subject  and  in  apposi- 
tion to  it;  as,  G}nnthum,  patres  vestri,  totius  Gracice  lumen,  exstinctum  esse 
vOluentnt.  Cic;  or  (c)  with  the  noun  of  a  subordinate  sentence;  as,  lllornm 
urbein  ut  prOpugnaciilum  opposltum  esse  barbdris.  Nep. 

Rem.  6.  ^NTien  the  subject  of  an  infinitive  is  omitted  after  a  dative  of  the 
same  signification,  (^  239,  R.  1,)  an  adjective  in  the  predicate,  belonging  to 
that  subject,  is  sometimes  put  in  the  dative;  as,  Mihi  negligenti  esse  nan  licjuty 
i.  e.  me  neyligentem  esse  mihi  non  licuit.  Cic.  J)a  mihi  ju?to  saneto<7?/c  vidcri. 
Hor.  A  noun  is  sometimes  expressed  with  the  adjective;  as,  Vobis  necesse  est 
fortibus  esse  viris.  Liv.  But  the  adjective  often  agrees  with  the  omitted  sub- 
ject; as,  Expidit  bonas  tsst  vobis,  scil.  vos.  Ter.  Si  civi  EOnidno  licet  esse 
Gadltanura.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  (1.)  An  adjective  is  often  used  alone,  especially  in  the 
plural,  the  noun,  with  which  it  agrees,  being  understood ;  as, 

Boni  sunt  rdH,  scil.  lidrnXnes,  Good  (men)  are  rare.  Qesnr  suos  misit^  scil. 
mihtfs,  Caesar  sent  his  (soldiers).  Dextra,  scil.  numns,  The  right  (hand).  Im- 
plentur  pinyuis  f  erinoe,  scil.  camis.  Virg.  Bibernn,  scil.  castra.  AUujn,  scil. 
mdre.  Quftridna,  &ci].  /ebris.  Immortdlts,  scW.  Dli.  Lucr.  A mmitium^  scU.  hdmi- 
nunu  Ter.  J  Hum  indigiianti  similem,  similem/pie  minanti  aspiieres,  scil.  Immni. 
Virg.  Tibi  primas  dyfero^  scil.  partes.  Cic.  Re^pice  prffitOritum,  scil.  iempus^ 
which  is  often  omitted,  as  in  ex  quo,  ex  eo,  and  ex  illv,  -Kiil.  temjtOre.  Coaiiom 
tx  meOnim  omnium  litins,  scil.  dmhdruvi.  Cic.  So  patrial  ailjcctives";  as, 
JUissi  ad  Pai-thum  Armeummque  legai.  scil.  regem.  In  Tusdildno,  scil. 
prceJio. 


§205.  SYNTAX. ADJECTIVES.  187 

Note  1.  The  noun  to  be  supplied  with  masculine  adjectives  is  commonly 
hdviines,  but  when  they  are  posessives,  it  is  oftener  dmlci,  mllites,  cites,  or  pro- 
pinqui. 

KoTE  2.  The  nonn  to  be  supplied  is  often  contained  in  a  preceding  clause. 

(2.)  An  adjective  in  the  neuter  gender,  without  a  noun,  is  often 
used  substantively,  where,  in  English,  the  word  thing  or  ildnys  is  to 
be  supplied ;  as, 

BCmum,  a  good  thing;  malum,  a  bad  thing,  or,  an  evil.  So  hdnestum,  verum, 
iurpe ;  and  in  the  plural,  bona,  nulla,  turpia,  levia,  coelestia,  etc.  Labor  omnia 
I7nc77,  Labor  overcomes  all  things.  Virg. 

Note  1.  The  Latins  generally  prefeiTed  adding  res  to  an  adjective,  to  using 
its  neuter  as  a  substantive.  But  sometimes,  when  res  is  used,  an  adjective  or 
pronoun  refeiTing  to  it  is  put  in  the  neuter  instead  of  the  feminine;  as,  ESrum 
rerum  utnimque.  Cic.  Bumanarum  rerum  fortuna  pleraque  regit.  Sail.  Ilhid 
te  rdffo,  sumptui  ne  parcas  ulld  in  re,  quod  ad  vdletudlnem  djms  sit.  Cic.  Omnium 
reruvi  mors  est  extremum.  Cic. 

Note  2r  Instead  of  thing  or  things,  other  words  may  sometimes  be  supplied, 
as  the  sense  requires.     With  a  preposition,  neuter  adjectives  form  adverbial 

Ehvases ;  as,  A  prlmo.  At  first.  Plant.  Per  mutua.  Mutually.  Vlrg.  In  prlmis, 
1  the  first  place.    Ad  hoc,  or  Ad  hcec.  Moreover,  besides. 

(3.)  Adjectives  used  substantively  often  have  other  adjectives  aOTceing  with 
them;  as,  J/^a  omnia.  All  other  (things.)  Plin.  Inlguissumi  mei,  My  greatest 
enemies.  Familidris  mens.  Cic.  Iniquus  noster.  Id.  Justa  funewia.  Liv. 
J6cis  omnia  plena,  scil.  sunt.  Virg. 

Rem.  8.  (a.)  Imperatives,  infinitives,  adverbs,  clauses,  and  words  considered 
merely  as  such,  may  be  used  substantively,  and  take  a  neuter  adjective  in  the 
singular  number;  as,  Svipremum  vale  dixit.  He  pronounced  a  last  farewell. 
Ovid.  Dulce  et  decorum  est  pro  patria  mori.  Hor.  Velle  suum  cuigue  est.  Pers. 
Cras  istud  (juando  venit?  Mart.  J.  Ridlbo  actutum.  A.  Id  actutum  diu  est. 
Plant,  F^xcepto  qnod  non  simnl  esses,  cetera  Icetus.  Hor.  (6.)  In  the  poets  and 
later  prose  writers  the  ad;jective,  as  in  Greek,  is  sometimes  in  the  neuter  plural ; 
as,  Ul  ^neas  peldgo  Jacteiur — nota  tibi.  Virg. 

Eem.  9.  (a.)  Adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  instead  of  agreeing  with  their 
nouns,  are  sometimes  put  in  the  neuter  gender,  with  a  partitive  signification, 
and  their  nouns  in  the  genitive;  as,  Multum  tempdns,  for  mulfum  tempus  ;  much 
time.  Id  rei,  for  ea  res ;  that  thing.  So,  plus  eloguentice,  the  other  form  not 
being  admissible  with  plus.  (See  §  110,  (b.)  Neuter  adjectives  are  used  in 
like  manner  in  the  plural;  as,  Vana  rerum,  for  vdnce  res.  tior.  Pleraque  humd- 
ndrum  reimm.  Sail.  Cf.  §  212,  R.  3,  N.  4.  But  in  some  such  examples,  the  ad- 
jective seems  to  be  used  substantively,  according  to  Rem.  7,(2);  as.  Acuta 
belli.  Hor.     Telluris  operta.  Virg.     Summa  pectdns. 

Note.  The  adjectives  thus  used  partitively  in  the  singular,  for  the  most 
part,  signify  quantity.   See  §  212,  Rem.  3,  Note  1. 

Rem.  10.  A  neuter  adjective  is  sometimes  used  adverbially  in  the  nomina- 
tive or  accusative,  both  singular  and  plural;  as,  Dulce  rldentem  Laldgen  amdbo, 
dulce  loquentera.  Hor.  Magnum  strldens.  Virg.  Arma  horrendum  cdnuiire.  Id. 
Malta  deos  venerdti  sunt.  Cic.   Ilodie  aut  summum  cras.  Id.   See  ^  192, 11.  4,  (6.) 

Rem.  11.  (a.)  A  noun  is  sometimes  used  as  an  adjective;  as,  Nemo  mi/es 
JtomOniis,  No  Roman  soldier.  Liv.  'i^Hviio  fere  ddolescens.  Cic.  Vir  nemo  bdaus. 
Id.  Cf.  §  207,  R.  31,  (c.)  Tlberim  accolis  fiuviis  orbdtum.  Tac.  Incola  turba. 
Ovid.  The  poets  use  in  this  manner  the  Greek  patronymics  in  as  and  is; 
as,  Pelias  hasta,  Ovid.  Lauriis  ■  Parndsis.  Id.  Ursa  Libyslis.  Virg.  Cf.  also 
^  129,  8. 

(b.)  An  adverb  is  also  sometnnes  used  as  an  adjective;  as,  Nique  cnim 
igndri  sumus  ante  malorum;  i.  e.  ant^mrum  or  prceteritorum.  Virg.  Nunc 
hdminum  mdres    Plaut. 


k 


188  SYNTAX. ^ADJECTITES.  §  205. 

Rem.  12.  (a.)  An  adjective  or  adjective  pronoun,  used  partitively,  stands 
alone,  and  commonly  taV;es  the  gender  of  tlie  genitive  plural,  which  depends 
upon  it;  but  when  it  is  preceded  by  a  noun  of  a  diflerent  gender,  to  which  it 
refer?,  it  usually  takes  that  gender,  but  sometimes  that  of  the  genitive;  as, 
Klephanio  btUvarum  nulla  est  prudeniior,  No  beast  is  wiser  than  the  elepiiant 
Cic.  InduSy  qui  est  omnium  fiununum  maximus.  Citf.  Velocissimuni  omnium 
anlmalium  est  dtljJiiiuis.  Pliu.  See  §  212,  Rem.  2.—{b.)  So  also  with  de,  ex,  m, 
apwJ,  inter,  etc.,  with  the  ablative  or  accusative  instead  of  the  partitive  geni- 
tive. See  §  212,  R.  2,  N.  4. 

(c.)  When  a  coUectice  noun  follows  in  the  genitive  singular,  (§  212,  R.  2.)  the 
adjective  takes  the  gender  of  the  individuals  which  compose  it;  as,  Vir  for- 
tisslmus  nostrcB  civitatis,  The  bravest  man  of  our  state.  Cic.  Maximus  stirpis. 
Liv. 

Rem.  13.  (a.)  When  a  possessive  pronoun  or  adjective  is  used  instead  of  the 
genitive  of  its  primitive  or  of  its  corresponding  noun  (see  §  211,  R.  3,  (b.)  and 
(c.)  and  R.  4),  an  adjective  agreeing  with  that  genitive  is  sometimes  joined 
with  such  possessive ;  as,  Soli'us  meum  ^eccd/Mm  corrigi  non  pdtest,  The  fault 
of  me  alone  cannot  be  corrected.  Cic.  Noster  duorum  ctentus.  Liv.  Tuum 
ipsius  stadium.  Cic.  Pugna  Romana  stdbilis  $uo  pondere  incumbentium  in  hos- 
tem.  Liv. 

(6.)  Sometimes  a  noun  in  the  genitive  is  expressed,  in  apposition  to  the  sub- 
stantive pronoun  for  which  the  pdlsessive  stands ;  as,  Pectus  tuum,  homlnis 
simplicis.  Cic. 

Rem.  14.  An  adjective,  properly  belonging  to  the  genitive,  is  sometimes 
made  to  agree  with  the  noun  on  which  the  genitive  depends,  and  r^ce  versa; 
as,  JSdificdtidnis  tuse  consilium  for  tuum,  Your  design  of  building.  Cic.  Accii- 
santes  violati  hospitii  foedus,  tor  vidldtum.  Liv.  Ad  majora  initia  rerum  ducenObus 
fdtis,  for  majorum.  Id.  lis  notninibus  civitdtum,  quious  ex  civUdtibus,  etc.,  for 
edrum  civitdtum.  Caes. 

Rem.  15.  (a.)  An  adjective  agreeing  with  a  noun  is  sometimes  used,  instead 
of  an  adverb  qualifying  a  verb,  especially  in  poetry;  as,  Ecce  venii  Telxmon 
properus,  Lo,  Telamon  comes  in  haste.  OVid.  Laiti  pdcem  dgitdbdmus,  for  tefe. 
Sail.  jEneas  se  matutinus  ugebat,  for  mane.  Virg.  Nee  liipus  gregibus  noctur- 
Eus  dbambalat,  i.  e.  by  niglit.  Id. 

(6.)  ^o  nullus  is  used^for  non;  as,  Memini  iaineisi  nuUus  mdneas,  Though 
you  do  not  suggest  it.  Ter.  Sextus  ab  armis  nuUus  discedit.  Cic.  Prior,  ^iri- 
mus,  princeps,  prdpior,  jjroximus,  solus,  Unus,  ultimus,  multus,  totus,  and  some 
others,  are  used  instead  of  their  neuters,  adverbially;  as.  Priori  Jlemo  augurium 
venisse  ftrtur.  Liv.  Hispdnia  postrema  omnium  '^provincidrum  perddmita  est. 
Liv.  Sccerdla  solos  ndvtju  yncnses  AsioB  prcefuii,  Only  nine  months.  Cic.  Unum 
hoc  dlco,  This  onl}'  I  say.  Id.  This  js  sometimes  done,  for  want  of  an  ad- 
verb of  appropriate  meaning;  as,  Prouus  cecidiU  Ovid.  Frequentes  convene- 
rant.  Sail. 

(c.)  In  such  expressions,  tu,  in  the  nominative,  sometimes  takes  an  adjec- 
tive in  the  vocative,  and  riceversd;  as.  Sic  venias  hodieme. -TibulL  StUve, 
primus  omnium  pdrets  pati-icz  appellate.  Plin. 

Rem.  16.  (a.)  A  noun  is  often  qualified  by  two  or  more  adjectives;  and 
sometimes  the  complex  idea,  fonned  by  a  noun  with  one  or  more  adjectives,  is 
itself  qualified  by  other  adjectives,  which  agree  in  gender,  etc.  with  the  noun. 

(6.)  When  several  adjectives,  each  independently  of  the  other,  qualify  a 
noun,  if  they  precede  it,  they  are  almost  always  connected  by  one  or  more  con- 
junctions; as,  Malta  et  rurid  et  cdpiosd  drdtione.  Cic.  If  they  follow  it,  the 
conjunction  is  sometimes  expressed,  and  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Vir  alius  et 
excellens.  Cic.     Actio,  vdria,  vehemens,  plena  vcritdtis.  Id. 

(o.)  But  when  one  of  the  adjectives  qualifies  the  noun,  and  another  the 
complex  idea  formed  by  the  first  with  the  noun,  the  conjunction  is  always 
omitted;  a^*,  PCrlciiirwissimum  chife  6frZ^«?ft,  A  most  dangerous  civil  wai\  Cic. 
Malam  d^mesticam  lUsciplinam.  Id.  So  with  three  or  more  adjectives;  Extcmos 
multos  cldros  viros  nomindrem.  Cic.    Cf.  §  202,  III.,  R.  1. 


§  206.  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES.  189 

Rem.  1 7.  The  first  part,  last  part,  middle  part,  etc.,  of  any  place 
or  time  are  generally  expressed  in  Latin  by  the  adjectives  primus^ 
medius,  ulthnus,  extremus,  intimus,  in/imus,  Imus,  summus,  supremus, 
reliquus,  and  cetera ;  as, 

3fedia  nox,  The  middle  of  the  night.  Summa  arbor,  The  top  of  a  tree. 
Siipn'mos  monies,  The  summits  of  the  mountains.  But  these  adjectives  fre- 
quently occur  Avithout  this  signification ;  as,  Ab  extremo  complexu,  From  the 
last  embrace.  Cic.     Inflmo  loco  ndtus,  Of  the  lowest  rank.  Id. 

Rem.  18.  The  participle  of  the  compound  tenses  of  verbs,  used  impersonally 
in  the  passive  voice,  is  neuter;  as,  Venttim  est.  Cic.  Itum  est  in  viscera  terras. 
Ovid.    Scribendum  est  mXhi.  See  §  184,  2  and  3. 

RELATIVES. 

§  300.     Rem.  19.    (a.)  Relatives  agree  with  their  antece*^ 

dents  in  gender,  number,  and  person,  but  their  case  depends  ou 

the  construction  of  the  clause  to  which  they  belong ;  as, 

Puer  qui  Ugit,  The  boy  who  reads.  JEdificium  quod  exstruxit,  The  house 
which  he  built.  Literce  quas  didi,  The  letter  which  I  gave.  Non  sum  qualis 
eram,  I  am  not  such  as  1  was.  Hor.  So  Deus  cujus  munere  vlvimus,  cui  nullus 
est  simiUs,  quem  colimus,  a  quo  facta  sunt  omnia,  est  (eternus.  Addictus  IJer- 
mippo,  et  ab  hoc  ductus  est.    Aquilo,  quantus  frangit  Uices.  Hor. 

Note  1.  This  rule  includes  all  adjectives  and  adjective  pronoims  which  re- 
late to  a  noun  in  a  preceding  clause.  Its  more  common  application,  however, 
is  to  the  construction  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns  and  the  relative  qui. 

Note  2.  When  a  pronoun  refers  to  the  mere  words  of  a  sentence,  it  is  said  to 
be  used  logically.     Qui  and  is  are  so  used,  and  sometimes  also  hie  and  ille. 

(6.)    The  relative  may  be  considered  as  placed  between  two  cases     . 
of  the  same  noun,  either  expressed  or  understood,  with  the  former  of  ^ 
which  it  agrees  in  gender,  number,  and  person,  and  with  the  latter  in 
gender,  number,  and  case. 

(1.)    Sometimes  both  nouns  are  expressed ;  as, 

Erant  omnlno  dtio  itinera,  quibus  itineribus  ddmo  exire  possent^  There  were 
only  two  routes,  by  which  routes  they  could  leave  home.  Cses.  Crudelissimc 
bello,  quale  bellum  nulla  timquam  barbdria  gessit.  Cic.  But  it  is  most  frequen^ 
with  the  word  dies ;  as.  Fore  in  armis  certo  die,  qui  dies  futurus  erat,  etc.  Cic. 
The  repetition  of  the  substantive  is  necessary,  when,  for  any  reason,  it  becomes 
doubtful  to  which  of  two  or  more  preceding  substantives  the  relative  refers. 

(2.)   Usually  the  antecedent  noun  only  is  expressed ;  as, 
Animum  rege,  qui,  nisi  pdret,  imperat,  Govern  your  passions,  which  rule 
unless  they  obey.  Hor.     Tantce  multltudinis,  quantam  cdpit  urbs  nostra,  con- 
cursus  est  ad  me /actus.  Cic.     Quot  cdpitum  vlvunt,  iotidem  studiSrum  millia. 
Hor. 

(3.)  Sometimes  the  latter  noun  only  is  expressed,  especially  when 
the  relative  clause,  as  is  frequently  the  case,  precedes  that  of  the  an- 
tecedent; as, 

Quibus  de  rebus  ad  me  scripsisti,  c5ram  videbimus ;  scil.  de  rebus,  In  regard  to 
the  things  of  which  you  wrote  to  me,  we  will  consider  when  we  meet.  Cic. 
In  qnem  j)i'lmum  egressi  sunt  locum,  Troja  vdcdtur ;  scil,  locus.  Liv.  Quanta 
vi  expetunt,  tantd  aefimiunt.  Qualesjwe  vism  eram  vldisse  viros,  ex  ordine  tales 
aspicio.  Ovid. 


190  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES.  §  206, 

(a.)  The  place  of  the  antecedent  is  somettmes  supplied  by  a  demonstrative 
pronoun;  as,  Ad  qnas  res  aptissi7ni  erimics,  in  lis  pdtissimum  elaborabimus.  Cic. 
But  the  demonstrative  is  often  omitted  when  its  case  is  the  same  as  that  of  the 
relative,  and  not  un frequently,  also,  when  the  cases  are  different.  When  the 
relative  clause  precedes  that  of  the  antecedent,  is  is  expressed  only  for  the  sake 
of  emphasis.  Hence  we  find  such  sentences  as,  Maximum  oniaihentum  umUi- 
tics  tuUit,  qui  ex  ed  iulUt  verecundium.  Cic.  Terra  quod  accf-jnt,  nunv/uam  sine 
«.<«/•«  redciit.  Id. — The  demonstrative  adjectives  and  adverbs  are  in  like  manner 
often  omitted  before  their  con-esponding  relatives;  talis  before  qudlis,  tanius  be- 
fore quantus,  inde  before  unde,  ibi  before  ubi,  etc. 

{h.)  Sometimes  the  latter  noun  only  is  expressed,  even  when  the  relative 
clause  does  not  precede;  as,  Quis  non  mdlarum  quas  amor  curas  hdbet,  hcec  inter 
obllvUciturf  Hor. 

(4.)  Sometimes  neither  noun  is  expressed ;  this  happens  especially 
when  the  antecedent  is  designedly  left  indefinite,  or  when  it  is  a  sub- 
stantive pronoun ;  as, 

Qui  bene  Idtuit,  bene  vixit,  scil.  hdmo,  (He)  who  has  well  escaped  Jiotice^  haa 
lived  well.  Ovid.  Sunt  quos  curricuh  pulterem  Olympicum  collegisse  jurat, 
soil,  homines,  There  are  whom  it  delights,  i.  e.  Some  delight.  Hor.  Non  habeo 
quod  ie  accusem,  scil.  id  propter  qtiod.  Cic.  Non  solum  sapiens  videi'is,  qui  hinc 
absis,  sed  etiam  bedtus,  scil.  tu.  Cic. 

(5.)  The  relative  is  sometimes  either  entirely  omitted;  as,  Urbs  antiqua  ftdt; 
Tyrii  tenuere  cdloni,  scil.  guam  or  earn,  There  was  an  ancient  city  (which) 
T\Tian  colonists  possessed,  Virg. ;  or,  if  once  expressed,  is  afterwards  omitted, 
even  when,  if  supplied,  its  case  would  be  different;  as,  Bocchus  cum  jiediUbus, 
quos  f'llius  ejus  aaduxerat,  nebue  in  priore  pugnd  adfmrant,  Bomdnos  invddunty 
K)r  et  qui  non  in  priore,  etc.  Sail. 

(6.)  (a.)  The  relative  sometimes  takes  the  case  of  the  antecedent,  instead  of 
its  o\vn  proper  case ;  as,  Quum  sci^lbas  et  dllquid  dgas  eorum,  quorum  consuesti, 
for  qua.  Cic.  Haptim  quibus  quisque  pdterai  eldtis,  exibant,  for  iis,  qua  quisqu^ 
efferre  pdterai,  eldtis.  Liv. 

(J.)  The  antecedent  likewise  sometimes  takes  the  case  of  the  relative,  the 
substantive  either  preceding  or  following  the  pronoun;  as,  Urbem  quam  stdtuo 
vestra  est,  for  urbs.  Virg.  Lunuchum  quern  dedisti  nobis,  quas  turbas  dedii !  for 
Eunuclius.  Ter.  Naucratem  quem  convenire  vOlui,  in  ndvi  non  erat.  Plant 
Atque  dlii^  quorum  comaedia  prisca  %ar(3nim  est,  for  atque  alii  vin,  quorum  est. 
Hor.  IIU,  scripta  quibus  comoedia  prisca  viris  estf  for  illi  viri,  quibus.  Id.  Quos 
pueros  misiram,  episiolam  milii  attHlerunL  Cic. 

These  constructions  are  said  to  occur  by  attraction. 
^  (7.)  (a.)  An  adjective,  which  properly  belongs  to  the  antecedent,  is  some- 
times placed  in  the  relative  clause,  aiid  agrees  with  the  relative;  as.  Inter 
Jdcos,  quos  incondltos  jdciujit,  for  jocos  inconditos,  quos,  etc.  Amidst  the  rtide 
jests  which  they  utter.  Liv.  Verbis,  quae  magna  tUlani.  Virg.  Colore,  quem 
multum  hdbet.  Cic. 

(b.)  This  is  the  common  position  of  the  adjective,  when  it  is  a  numeral,  a 
comparative,  or  a.  superlative ; 'a.s,  Xocte  qii^m  in  terris  ulXimsLm  eyit,  The  last 
night  which  he  spent  upon  earth,  ^siuldpius,  qui  prixnus  vuln'us  oblUjdvisse 
diiitur.  Cic.  Consiliis  pdre,  quae  nunc  pulcherrima  Nautes  dai  senior,  Listen  to 
the  excellent  advice,  which,  etc.  Virg.  Some  instances  occur  in  which  an 
adjective  belonging  to  the  relative  clause,  is  placed  hi  that  of  the  antecedent; 
as,  Quum  venissent  ad  vdda  Volatenana,  quae  nonunaniur,  Vv^hich  are  called 
Volaterran.  Cic. 

^      (8.)    When  to  the  relative  or  demonstrative  is  joined  a  noun  ex- 
'^planatory  of  its  antecedent,  but  of  a  different  gender  or  number,  the 
relatiye  or  demonstrative  usually  agrees  with  that  noun^  as, 


§200.  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES.  191 

Santdnes  non  lojige  a  Tdldsdtium  flnibus  absunt,  quas  cn'ltas  est  in  provincid, 
The  Santones  are  not  far  distant  from  the  borders  of  the  Tolosates,  wliich 
state  is  in  the  province.  Cses.  Ante  cmmtia,  qnod  tempus  T^aud  Imu/e  aberat. 
Sail,  liomie  jdnum  Diunce  puptili  Latlni  ciiru  pdjjulo  Romano  fecerurii :  ea  ei-at 
confessio  caput  rerum  Romam  esse;  i.  e.  that  thing  or  that  act.  Liv.  Si  onmla 
fdiitnda  sunt,  quce  dmici  velint,  non  dmidlice  tales,  sed  conjurationes  putandoB 
sunt ;  i.  e.  such  things  or  such  coniiections.  Cic.  So,  Ista  quidern  vis,  Surely 
this  is  force.  Ea  ipsa  causa  belli  fuit,  for  id  ipsum.  Hither  also  may  be  refer- 
red such  explanatory  sentences  as,  Qui  mens  amor  in  te  est,  Such  is  my  love 
for  you.  Cic. 

(9.)  If  the  relative  refers  to  one  of  two  nouns,  denoting  the  same 
object,  but  of  different  genders,  it  agrees  with  either ;  as, 

Flumen  est  Arar  quod  in  Rhdddnum  injluit.  Caes.  Ad  jlumen  Oxum  perventtim 
est,  qui  turbidus  semjjer  est.  Curt. 

(10.)  When,  in  a  relative  clause  containing  the  ver^  sum  or  a  verb 
of  naming,  esteeming,  etc.,  a  predicate-noun  occurs  of  a  different 
gender  from  the  antecedent,  the  relative  commonly  agrees  with  the 
latter  ;  but  when  the  preceding  noun  is  to  be  explained  and  distin- 
guished from  another,  the  relative  agrees  with  the  former ;  as, 

NdturoB  vultus  quem  dixere  Chaos,  The  appearance  of  nature  which  they 
called  chaos.  Ovid.  Genus  Iwminum  quod  Helotes  vdcdtur.  Nep.  Animal^ 
quem  vocdmus  hominem.  The  animal  whom  we  call  man.  Cic.  Ldcus  in  car- 
cere,  quod  Tullianum  appelldtur.  Sail.  Fecunidrum  conquisUio ;  eos  esse  belli 
clvllis  nervos  dictitans  Mucidnus.  Tac. 

(11.)  The  relative  sometimes  agrees  with  a  noun,  either  equiva- 
lent in  sense  to  the  antecedent,  or  only  implied  in  the  preceding 
clause;  as, 

Abundantia  edrum  rerum,  quse  rnortdles  prima  putant,  An  abundance  of  thostj 
things,  which  mortals  esteem  most  important.  Sail.  Cf.  §  205,  R.  7,  (2.)  N.  1. 
But  sometimes  when  a  neuter  adjective  used  substantively  has  preceded,  res 
witli  a  relative  follows ;  as,  Permulta  sunt,  quce  did  possunt,  qua  re  inteUlgdtur. 
Cic.     Fdtdle  monstrum,  quag,  etc.,  scil.  Cled2)dtra.  Hor.    Cf.  §  323,  3,  (4.) 

(a.)  A  relative  or  demonstrative  pronoun,  referring  to  a  collective  noun,  or 
to  a  noun  which  only  in  a  figui'ative  sense  denotes  a  human  being,  sometimes 
takes  the  gender  and  number  of  the  individuals  which  the  noun  implies ;  as, 
Equitdtum,  quos.  Sail.     Genus,  qui  premuntur.  Cic.     Sendtus — ii.  Sail. 

(6.)  A  pronoun  in  the  plural  often  follows  a  noun  in  the  singular,  refen-ing 
not  only  to  the  noun  but  to  the  class  of  persons  or  things  to  which  it  belongs ; 
as,  Demdd'ttum  dmittdmus ;  nihil  est  enim  w^JMrHstos,  cpiod,  etc.  i.  e.  with  Demo- 
critus  and  his  followers.  Cic.  Dionysius  negdvit  sejure  ilia  nigra  quod  coencB 
cdjmt  erat,  delectdtum.     Turn  is,  qui  ilia  coxerai,  etc.  id. 

(12.)  The  antecedent  is  sometimes  implied  in  a  possessive  pronoun;  as, 
Omnes  lauddre  fortunas  meas,  qui  ndtum  tdli  ingenio  prceditum  hdberem ;  scil. 
mei.  All  were  extolling  my  fortune,  icho,  etc.  Ter.  Id  mea  mintme  rej'ert,  qui 
sum  ndtu  maximus.  Id.  Nostrum  consilium  laudandum  eit,  qui  noluerim,  etc.  Cic. ; 
or  in  a  possessive  adjective;  as,  Servlli  iumultu,  quos,  etc.  Cses. 

(13.)  (a.)  Sometimes  the  antecedent  is  a  proposition;  the  relative  then  is 
commonly  neuter;  as,  Postremo,  quod  difflcdltmum.  inter  rnortdles,  glorid  in- 
vidiam vUisti,  Finally,  you  have  overcome  envy  with  glory,  tchich,  among  men, 
is  most  difficult.  Sail.     Equidem  exspectdbam  Jam  tuas  llteras,  idque  cum  mullis.  ■ 
Cic. 

{b.)  In  such  instances,  id  is  generally  placed  before  the  relative  pronoun, 
refering  to  the  idea  in  the  antecedent  clause;  as,  Slve,  id  nvod  constat,  PUlldnis 
sludiosus  audiendi  fuit.  Cic.     Diem  consumi  vClebant,  id  quod  fecerunt.  Id. 

(c.)  Sometimes  is,  referring  to  a  clause,  agrees  v.it.i  a  noun  followin;4;  us, 
Idem  velle  aique  idem  nolle,  ea  demum  Jirma  dmlviiia  est.  Sail. 


19?  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS RELATIVES.  §  206. 

(14.)  Qmoc?,  relating  to  a  preceding  statement,  and  serving  the  purpose  of 
transition,  is  often  placed  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence  after  a  period,  where 
it  may  be  translated  by  '  nay,'  '  now,'  or  '  and.'  It  is  thus  used  espec-inlly  be- 
fore si  J  et^i,  and  tUd;  as,  Quodsi  illinc  indnis  prdfuyisses,  tamen  ista  taa'fiKja 
nefana  judicaretur,  i.  e.  and  even  if  you  had  fled  without  taking  any  thing 
with  you,  still,  etc.  Cic.  Verr.  1,  14.  'Quodsi,  '  if  then,'  is  especially  used  in  in- 
troducing something  assumed  as  true,  from  which  further  inferences  maj'  be 
drawn.  Sometimes  also  it  is  equivalent  to  '  although.'  Quodnlsi  signifies  '  if 
then — not ' ;  as,  Qiiodnisi  ego  meo  adventu  illius  conatus  dliqunniulum  repressis- 
sem,  tarn  muUos,  etc.  Clm^etsi  is  '  nay,  even  if ;  as,  QudaeUi  inyeniis  magnis 
prcediti  quidam  dicendi  cojnam  sine  rdtione  consiquentur,  ars  tamen  est  dux  cer- 
iior. —  Quod  is  found  also  before  quum,  ubl,  quia,  qmniam,  ne  and  utinam,  where 
the  conjunction  alone  would  seem  to  be  sufficient;  as.  Quod  utinam  ilium,  cujus 
impio  /dcindre  in  has  miserias  projectus  sum,  eddem  hcec  slmulaniem  videam.  Sail. 
It  is  so  used  even  before  a  relative  in  Cic.  Phil.  10,  4,  ^fin. —  Quod,  in  such  ex- 
amples, seems  to  be  an  accusative,  with  propter  or  ac?' understood. 

(15.)  (a.)  A  r^ative  is  always  plural,  when  referring  to  two  or  more  nouns 
in  the  singular.  If  the  nouns  are  of  different  genders,  the  gender  of  the  relative 
is  determined  by  Rem.  2,  page  185;  as,  Ninus  ct  Semirdmis,  qui  Bdbyldna  cotidi- 
derant,  Ninus  and  Semiramis,  who  had  founded  Babylon.  Veil.  Crebro  fUndli 
et  tibicine,  quae  sibi  sumpserat.  Cic.  Ex  summd  Icetitid  at^ue  lasc'fcia,  quae  rfiu- 
turna  quies  pepererat.  Sail.     Naves  et  captlvos  quae  ad  Chium  capia  erant.  Liv. 

(6.)  If  the  antecedents  are  of  different  persons,  the  relative  follows  the  first 
person  rather  than  the  second  or  third,  and  the  second  rather  than  the  third; 
as,  Tu  et  pater,  qui  in  convivio  erdtis.   Ego  et  iu,  quierdmus.  Cf.  ^  209,  R.  12,  (7.) 

(16.)  The  relative  adjectives  qu<}t,  qunntus,  qudlis,  are  construed  like  the 
relative  qui.  They  have  generally,  in  the  antecedent  clause,  the  corresponding 
demonstrative  words,  tM,  tantus,  talis ;  but  these  are  also  often  omitted.  Fre- 
quently also  the  order  of  the  clauses  is  reversed,  so  that  the  relative  clause 
precedes  the  demonstrative. 

(17.)  Qe«,  at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  is  often  translated  like  a  demon- 
strative; as.  Quae  quum  itu  sint,  Since  these  (things)  are  so.  Cic. 

(18.)  The  relative  ^wi  with  SW771  and  either  a  nominative  or  the  ablative,  of 
quality,  is  used  in  explanatory  clauses,  instead  of  pi-o,  '  in  accordance  witli,' 
or  '  according  to ' ;  thus,  instead  of  Ta,  pro  tud  prUdentid,  quid  optimum  factu 
git,  ridibis.  Cic,  we  may  say,  qum  tua  est  prudentia,  or,  qua  priklentid  es.  So, 
Velis  taniumniddo,  quae  tua  virtus,  expugndbis.  Hor.  Qua  prudentia  es,  nihil  te 
fugieU  Cic. 

(19.)  A  relative  clause  is  sometimes  used  for  the  purpose  of  denoting  by 
circurnlocution  the  person  of  the  agent  in  a  definite  but  not  permanent  con- 
dition ;  as,  li,  qui  audiuni,  or  qui  a(kuni,  i.  e.  the  hearers,  the  persons  present. 
So,  also,  a  relative  clause  is  used  for  the  English  expression  '  above  men- 
tioned'; as.  Ex  libris  quos  dixi  or  quos  ante  {supra)  lauddvi:  and  the  English 
*  so  called,'  or  *  what  is  called,'  is  expressed  by  quem,  guam,  quod  vdcant,  or  by 
qui,  qufB,  quod  vdcdtur,  dicitur,  etc. ;  as.  Nee  'Uermas  hos,  quos  vdcant,  impdiii 
{Athenis)  Ucebai.  Cic.   Vestra,  quos  dicitur,  vita,  mors  est.  Id. 

(20.)  Relative  and  demonstrative  adverbs  (see  §  191,  R.  1),  are  frequently 
used  instead  of  relative  and  demonstrative  pronouns  with  prepositions;  as,  J's, 
tinde  te  atdisse  dicis,  i.  e.  a  quo.  Cic.  Dlvitice  dpud  illos  sunt,  aut  iibi  illi  vOlunt, 
i.  e.  djjuc.  quos.  Sail.  Huic  ab  dddlescentid  bella  iniestlna,  ccedes,  rdplnce,  dis- 
cordia  civilis,  grdta  fuere,  Ibique  juventOtem  exercuit,  i.  e.  in  iis,  in  these  things. 
Sail. 

(21.)  With  ywim  9ttt- and  the  superlative  after  tarn  the  verb  of  the  relative 
clause  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Tam  mihi  grdtum  id  etit,  quam  quod  grdtissi- 
num.  Cic.  Tam  enim  sum  amicus  reipidjlicce,  quam  qui  maxime.  Id.  fam  sum 
mltis,  quam  qui  Unissimus.  Id.  So  also  with  ut  qui  without  tam ;  as,  Te  semper 
sic  cdlam  et  tu^or,  ut  quem  chligentisdme.  Id. 


I 


§  207.  SIXTAX. PRONOUNS — DEMONSTRATIVES.  193 

DEMONSTEATIVES. 

§  S07.  Rr.M.  20.  The  oblique  cases  of  the  personal  pronotTii  of  the 
thi»tl  person  {him,  her,  etc.)  are  commonly  expressed  in  prose  by  the  oblique 
cases  of  is,  ea,  id.  Hie  and  ille,  however,  bejj^g  more  emphatic,  take  the  place 
of  is,  ea,  id,  in  lyi'ic  poetry,  and  occasionally  in  prose  also,  when  particuhxr 
emphasis  is  intended.  The  cases  of  ipse,  ijjsn,  ipsum,  also,  are  employed  for 
this  purpose,  when  the  individuality  of  the  person  is  to  be  distinctly  expressed. 
In  reflexive  sentences,  the  oblique  cases  of  the  pronoun  of  the  third  person,  are 
regularly  supplied  by  sui,  stbi,  se;  and  it  is  only  when  the  person  of  the  lead- 
ing subject  is  to  be  referred  to  with  particular  emphasis,  that  ipse  is  used  in- 
stead of  sui. 

Eem.  21.  The  demonstrative  pronouns,  is  and  ille,  are  sometimes  used,  espe- 
cially with  quldem,  where  a  corresponding  word  in  English  is  iinnecessary ; 
as,  Sapientice  studiimi  vetus  id  quidera  in  nustris,  sed  tdmen,  etc.  Cic.  0  hominem 
semjier  ilium  quidem  vvihi  aptum,  nunc  vcro  etiam  sudvem.  Id.  Quern  neque  fides, 
neque  jusjurandum,  neque  ilium  miseincordia,  repr-essit.  Whom  neither  fidelity, 
nor  an  oath,  nor  pity,  has  restrained.  Ter.  Is  when  used  for  the  sake  of  em- 
phasis seems  sometimes  in  English  to  be  supei-fluous ;  as,  3£dle  se  res  hdbet, 
quuvi,  quod  virtute  efflci  debet,  id  tentdtur  pecunid.  Cic. 

Rem.  22.  Sic,  it  a,  id,  hoc,  i  I  lud,  are  often  used  redundantly  as  a  preliminary 
announcement  of  a  subsequent  proposition,  and  are  added  to  the  verb  on  which 
this  proposition  depends ;  as,  Sic  a  mdjoribus  suis  acceperant,  tanta  jiojJidi  i?y- 
mrini  esse  beneficia,  ut,  etc.  Cic.  Te  illud  admdneo,  ut  qudtidie  meditere,  resist- 
endum  esse  Irdcundice.  Id.  Hoc  tlbi  persuddeas  velim,  me  nihil  dmlsisse,  I  wish 
you  to  be  persuaded  of  this — that  1  have  omitted  nothing.  These  pleonastic 
additions  have  generally  no  influence  on  the  construction  of  propositions,  but 
in  a  few  instances  they  are  followed  hy ut;  as,  Z)e  cujus  dlcendi  copid  sTc  accepl- 
mus,  ut,  etc.  Cic.  Ita  enim  deflnit,  ut  perturbdtio  sit,  etc.  Id.  In  the  phrase /;oc, 
illud,  or  id  dgere  ut,  the  pronoun  is  established  by  custom  and  is  necessary. 
See  §  273,  1,  {a.) 

Rem.  23.  (a.)  Hie  'this  '  refers  to  what  is  near  to  the  speaker  either  in  place 
or  time,  ille  ' that '  to  what  is  more  remote.  Hence  hie  sometimes  refers  to  the 
speaker  himself,  and  hie  hdmo  is  then  the  same  as  ego.  On  this  account  hie  is 
sometimes  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  first  person.  When  reference  is 
made  to  two  things  previously  mentioned,  hie  commonly  refers  to  the  latter, 
ille  to  the  former,  and  the  pronouns  are  arranged  in  the  same  order,  as  the  ob- 
jects to  which  they  relate;  as,  Igndvia  coipus  hebetat,  labor  Jirmat;  ilia  mdturam 
seneciutem,  hie  longam  dddlescentiam  reddii.  Sloth  enervates  the  body,  labor 
strengthens  it ;  the  former  produces  premature  old  age,  the  latter  protracted 
youth.  Cels. 

(S.)  But  the  order  is  often  reversed,  so  that  hie  refers  to  the  object  first  men- 
tioned, and  ille  to  the  one  mentioned  last;  as,  Sicdeus  etvirgo  est;  hie  spe  celer, 
ilia  timore.  Ovid.  So  when  alter. ..alter, '  the  one.. .the  other,'  refer  to  two  things 
mentioned  before,  the  previous  order  is  sometimes  observed  and  sometimes  re- 
versed ;  but  wherever  there  is  ambiguity  the  order  is  reversed,  so  that  the  first 
alter  refers  to  the  last  object.  Sometimes  hie. ..hie  are  used  instead  of  hie. ..ille. 
So  ille...ille  sometimes  denote  'the  one...the  other.' 

(c.)  Hie  and  Ule  have  the  same  relation  to  time  present  and  past  as  nunc  and 
tune,  see  §  277;  and  hence  whatever,  in  speaking  of  present  time,  is  expressed 
by  hie  and  its  derivative  adverbs,  hie,  hine,  hue,  and  adhiie,  is  expressed  by  ille 
and  its  derivatives,  when  it  is  spoken  of  as  belonging  to  past  time. 

Rem.  24.  Jlle,  when  not  in  opposition  to  Me,  is  often  xised  to  denote  that 
which  is  of  general  notoriety;  as,  Magno  illi  Altxandro  simillimus.  Very  like 
Alexander  the  Great.  Veil.  Medea  ilia,  The  celebrated  Medea.  Cic.  Hence 
ille  is  sometimes  added  to  other  pronouns,  to  refer  to  something  discussed  be- 
fore ;  as,  Avebant  visere,  quis  ille  tot  per  annos  dpes  nostras  sprevisset.  Tac.  Ille 
is  sometimes  translated  this ;  as,  Unum  ittud  dico,  This  only  I  say.  Cic.    Ill« 


194  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVES.  §  207. 

Bonietimes  marks  a  change  of  persons,  and  may  then  be  translated  *  the  other ' ; 
as,  Vercingetdrix  obviam  Ccesari  prdfUisdtur.  "  Die  (scil.  Ccesar)  qppidum  Novio- 
dumnn  oppuyndre  insUtuerat.  Cses. 

Rem.  25.  Isie  properly  refers  to  the  person  addressed,  and  for  this  re&sou  is 
called  the  demonstrative  of  the  second  person,— i^fe  refers  to  the  person  si)oken 
of,  and  is  hence  called  the  demonstrative  of  the  third  person.  Thus  iste  U6er  is 
thy  book,  but  ilk  liber  is  the  book  of  which  we  are  speaking.  Hence,  in  let- 
ters, hie  and  its  derivatives  are  used  of  the  writer;  wte  and  its  derivatives  of  the 
person  addressed ;  t7/e,  etc.,  of  some  other  person  or  thing.  See{191.  R.  1,(€.) 
Iste  fi'om  its  frequent  forensic  use,  and  its  application  to  the  opponent  often 
denotes  contempt. 

Rem.  26.  (a.)  Js  does  not,  like  ^tV,  ille,  and  iste,  denote  the  place  or  order  of 
the  object  to  which  it  relates,  but  either  refers  without  particular  emphasis  to 
something  already  mentioned  or  to  something  which  is  to  be  defined  by  the 
relative  qui.  Eic,  is,  or  ille,  may  be  used  in  §iis  way  before  the  relative,  but 
only  hie  or  is  after  it;  as.  Qui  ddcet,  is  discit,  or  hie  discit,  but  not  ille  discit,  un- 
less some  individual  is  referred  to. 

{b.)  Is  before  a  relative  or  ui  has  sometimes  the  sense  of  talis,  such,  denoting 
a  cla.ss ;  as,  Neque  enim  iu  is  es,  qui  quid  sis  nescias.  Nor  are  you  such  a  person, 
a&  not  to  know  what  vou  are.  Cic;  sometimes  it  has  the  force  of  Idem;  as,  vo$ 
— tt.  Cic.  Manil,  12.  ' 

(c  )  If  the  noim  to  which  is  refers  is  to  receive  some  additional  predicate, 
we  must  use  ei  is,  atque  is,  isque,  et  is  qtddem,  and  with  a  negative  nee  is ;  as, 
Vincula  vero,  et  ea  sempiiema,  etc.  Cic.  Una  in  ddmo,  et  ea  quldem^  angusta, 
3tc.  Id.  Addlescentes  aliquot,  nee  ii  tenui  l6co  orti,  etc.  Liv.  Sed  is  is  used 
when  the  additional  predicate  is  opposed  to  the  preceding;  as,  Severitdtem  in 
senectate  probo,  sed  earn,  sieut  alia,  mddicam.  Cic.  The  neuter  et  id,  or  idque, 
serves  to  introduce  an  addition  to  the  preceding  proposition ;  as,  Quamquam  te, 
Marce  fUi,  annum  jam  audientem  Craiippum,  idque  Athenis,  etc. 

((L)  Is  is  not  expressed  when  it  would  be  in  the  same  obUque  case  as  the 
preceding  noun  to  which  it  refers ;  as,  Pater  dmai  liberos  et  tdmen  castlgai. 
MuUos  illustrat  fortuna,  dum  vexat. 

•{e.)  When  in  English  'that'  or  'those'  is  used  instead  of  the  repetition  of 
the  preceding  substantive,  is  is  never  used  in  Latin,  and  ille  only  in  later  au- 
thors. In  such  cases  the  noun  is  commonly  not  repeated  in  Latin,  and  no  pro- 
noun is  used  in  its  place ;  as,  Philippus  hostium  manus  scepe  vUdvit,  sudrum  effu- 
gere  non  vdluit,  those  of  his  own  subjects.  Curt.  Sometimes  the  substantive  is 
repeated;  as,  Jodieia  clvitatis  cum  jUdiciis  princtpis  certant.  VeU.  Sometimes 
a  possessive  adjective  is  used  instead  of  the  genitive  depending  on  the  omitted 
substantive;  as,  Tei-entii  fdbulas  st&didse  lego,  Plautinis  minus  delector:  and 
sometimes  instead  of  the  genitive  or  a  possessive  adjective  the  name  of  the  per- 
soif  itself  is  put  in  the  case  which  the  verb  governs ;  as.  Si  cum  Lycurgo  et 
Dracone  et  Solone  nostras  leges  conferre  vdlueritts.  Cic. — ^In  Cicero  hie  and  ille, 
when  the  preceding  substantive  is  understood,  retain  their  demonstrative  sig- 
nification, and  therefore  do  not  merely  supply  the  place  of  the  omitted  sub- 
stantive; as,  Nullam  enim-  virtus  aliam  merceaem  deslderat,  prceter  hanc,  i.  e.  the 
one  of  which  I  am  speaking.  Cic. 

Rem.  27.  (a.)  Idem,  as  denoting  a  subject  which  stands  in  equal  relations  to 
two  diflerent  predicates,  often  supplies  the  place  of  item  or  etiam,  '  also,'  '  at  the 
same  time,'  or  of  tamen,  'yet,'  if  the  things  are  apparently  inconsistent ;  as, 
3fusici,  qui  erant  quondam^ ndem.  poetoe.  Musicians,  who  formerly  were  poets 
also.  Cic.  Euiihrates  et  Tigris  magno  dqudrum  dtvortio  iter  percurrunt ;  ildem 
(and  yet)  pauldtim  in  arctius  co^unt. 

(6.)  Et  ipse,  on  the  other  hand,  denotes  that  the  same  predicate  belongs  to 
two  subjects.  It  is  rendered  by  '  too '  or  '  al?o ' ;  as,  Antoninus  CommMns  nihil 
pdternum  hdbuit,  nisi  quod  contra  Germdnos  feliciter  et  v^sq  puandtit,  for  item 
or  ipse  qudque.  Eutr. — So,  also,  nee  ipse  is  used  in  the  sense  of  '  neither ' ;  as, 
Primis  repulsis  Maharhal  cum  majore  robdre  vlrorum  missus  nee  ipse  eruptidnum 
cOhoriium  susUnuit.  Liv. 


§  207.  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS INTENSIVE,   ETC.  195      . 

[c.)  Idem  is  sometimes  repeated  in  the  sense  of '  at  once,'  denoting  the  nnion 
of  qualities  which  might  be  thought  incompatible;  as,  Fuere  quldam  qjii  udem 
.  ofndte  iidem  versuie  dlcerent^  There  have  been  some  who  could  speak  at  ouco 
elegantly  and  artfully.  Cic. 

{d.)  'The  same  as'  is  variously  expressed  in  Latin,  by  Idem  with  qtii,  ac  or 
atgue^  quam,  quasi,  ut  or  cum ;  as,  Verves  idem  est  qui  fuit  semper,  Verres  is  the 
same  as  he  has  always  been.  Cic.  Vita  est  .Qa,AQm  ac  fuit.  Liv.  Disputdtionem 
exponimus  iisdem  /ere  verbis  ut  actum  est.  Cic.     Eandem  constituit  2>otestdtem 

Iuam  si,  etc.  Cic.    Eodem  loco  res  est,  quasi  ea  2iecu7ita  Ugdta  non  esset.  Id. 
lunc  ego  eodem  mecum  patre  genitum,  etc.     So  also  poetically  with  the  dative ; 
as,  Eadem  aliis  sqpltu^  quiete  est.   Lucr.   Cf.  §  222,  E.  7. 

IPSE,  Intensive  or  Adjunctive. 

Rem.  28.  (a.)  Ip  s  e,  when  used  with  a  substantive  pronoun  taken  reflexively, 
agrees  either  with  such  pronoxm  or  with  the  subject  of  the  proposition,  accord- 
ing as  either  is  emphatic ;_  as,  Agam  per  me  ipse,  I  will  do  it  myself.  Cic.  Non 
igeo  m^diclnd  (i.  e.  ut  alii  vie  consolentur);  me  ipse  consolor.  Cic.  Accusando 
eum,  a  cujus  crudelttdte  vosmet  ipsi  armis  vindicastis.  Liv. —  Cn.  Pompeium  omni- 
bus, Lentulum  m!hi  ipsi  antepono.  Cic.  Fac  ut  te  ipsum  custodias.  Id.  Deforme 
est  de  se  ipsum  prcBdicdre.  Id. — But  Cicero  often  construes  ipse  as  the  subject, 
even  where  the_emphasis  belongs  to  the  object;  as,  Quid  est  negotii  continere 
eos,  quibus  prcssis,  si  te  ipse  contineas  ? 

(b.)  When  ipse  is  joined  with  a  possessive  pronoun  used  reflexively,  it  usually 
takes  the  case  of  the  subject;  as,  Meam  ipse  legem  negligo ;  not  meamipsius,  ♦ 
according  to  §  211,  R.  3,  (a).  So,  Si  ex  scriptis  cognosci  ipsi  suis  pdtuissent.  Cic. 
Eam  fraudem  vestrd  ipsi  virtute  vltastis.  Liv.  But  the  genitive  is  necessary  when 
the  possessive  does  not  refer  to  the  subject;  as,  Tud  ips'ms  causa  hoc  feci.  And 
it  is  sometimes  found  where  the  case  of  the  subject  should  be  used;  as,  Conjec- 
tur am  de  tiw  iipsins  stadia  ceperis,  instead  of  ipse'.— '{c.)  Ipse  is  sometimes  used 
as  reflexive  without  sui;  as,  Omnes  bdni,  quantum  in  ipsis  Juit,  Ccesdrem  occlde- 
runt.  Cic. 

{d.)  Ipse,  with  nouns  denoting  time  or  number,  expresses  exactness,  and 
may  be  rendered, 'just,'  'precisely';  or  'very,'  'only';  as,  Byrrhdchio  sum 
prdfectus  ipso  illo  die,  quo  lex  est  data  de  nobis,  on  the  very  daj.  Cic.  Triginta 
dies  erant  ipsi,  quum  has  dubam  liter  as,  per  quos  nullas  a  vobis  acceperam,  just 
thirty  days.  Id.  Et  quisquam  dubitdbit — quam  facile  imjierio  atque  exercitu 
sdcios  et  vectlgdlia  conservdturus  sit,  qui  ipso  nomine  ac  rumore  defenderit,  by  his 
very  name,  or,  by  his  name  only.  W. 

General  Relatives. 

Rem.  29.  Qui  cum  que,  qui  s  qui  s,  and  the  other  general  relatives  (see  ^  139, 5, 
R.,  are,  in  classical  prose,  always  connected  with  a  verb,  and  form  the  protasis. 
Quicumque  is  commonly  used  as  an  adjective,  and  quisquis  as  a  substantive ; 
but  the  neuter  quodcumque  is  used  as  a  substantive  with  a  following  genitive ; 
as,  Quodcumque  mllitum ;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  quisquis  is  rarely  an  adjec- 
tive; as,  Quisquis  erit  vltce  cdlor.  Hor.;  and  even  the  neuter  ^'Mw/^-witT  is  used  in 
the  same  manner;  as,  Quisquis  honos  tumuli,  quidquid  soldmenhumnndi  est.  Virg. 
Quicumque  seems  sometimes  even  in  Cicero  equivalent  to  omnis  or  gulvis ;  as. 
Quae  sdndri  p)Oterunt,  quacumque  rdtione  sdndbo,  What  can  be  cured,  I  will  cure 
by  every  possible  means.  Cic.  Yet  possum  is  rather  to  be  supplied; — .'in 
whatever  way  I  can.'  But  in  later  writers  qulcumqtie  is  frequently  used  in  the 
absolute  sense  for  gulvis  or  gullibet;  as,  Ciceronem  cuicumgue  eOrum  fortiter 
qppdsuerim.  Quint.  Qudliscumque  and  quaniuscumgue  are  likewise  used  in  an 
absolute  sense  by  ellipsis;  as,  Tu  non  concupisces  guantlcmnqtie  ad  libertdtem 
pervenire  f  At  any  price,  be  it  ever  so  high.  Sen.  So  quisquis  is  occasionally 
used,  not  as  a  relative,  but  as  an  indefinite  pronoun. — Slquis  often  seems  to 
stand  as  a  relative,  like  the  Greek  (trie  for  S^ric,  '  whoever ' ;  but  it  always 
contains  the  idea  of '  perhaps ' ;  as,  Nuda  fere  Alpium  cdcumina  sunt,  et  si  quid 
ist  jpdbuli,  obruv/nt  nives.  Liv. 


196  SYNTAX. INDEFINITE   PRONOUNS.  §  207. 

Ija)EFINlTE    PrONOUKS. 

Rem.  30.  (a.)  Aliguis  and  guispiam  are  particular  and  affirmative,  corres- 
ponding to  the  English  someone;  as,  UeredUas  est  jjecunia,  qtue  morte  aliciijug 
ad  quempiam  perc^nit  jure,  An  inheritance  is  property  which,  at  the  death  of 
some  one,  falls  to  some  fother)  one  by  law.  Cic.  MuUi  sine  doctrlnd  aliquid 
omnium  genetmrn  et  ariium  corts^quuniur.  Id. 

(b.)  AUquh  is  more  emphatic  than  the  indefinite  pronoun  quis.  (See  §  137,  (3.) 
Hence  aliquis  stands  by  itself,  but  quis  is  commonly  connected  with  certain 
conjunctions  or  relative  words,  but  these  are  sometimes  separated  from  it  by 
one  or  more  words.  Sometimes,  however,  quis  is  used  without  such  conjunc- 
tions or  relatives;  as,  Morbus  aui  egestas  aut  quid  ejusmMi.  Cic.  Dttrahere 
quid  de  aliquo.  Id.  Jnjuriam  cui  fdcere.  Id.  So^Dixei-it  quis.  Some  one  might 
say.  But  even  after  those  conjunctions  which  usually  require  quis,  dlwuis  is 
used  wlien  employed  antithetically  and  of  course  emphatically ;  as,  Timebat 
Pompeius  omnia,  ne  aliquid  vos  timeretis.  Cic.  In  English  the  emphasis  of  dliquis 
is  sometimes  expressed  by  'reaUy ' ;  as,  Sensus  vionendi,  si  allquis  esse  pdtest,  is 
ad  exif/uum  ttmpus  duriU.  Cic, —  Quispiam,  also,  is  sometimes  used  like  quis 
after  si,  etc.,  and  sometimes  stands  alone;  as,  Quceret  forinsse  quispiam. 

Rem.  31.  (a.)  C^Mts9«aw»,'anyone,'andMn«s,'any,'areuniversal.  LikewTra- 
guam  and  vsquam  they  are  used  in  propositions  whiclf  involve  aimiversal  nega- 
tive, or  which  express  an  interroration  with  a  negative  force,  or  a  condition 
(usually  with  si  or  jwosi);  also,  after  comparatives,  after  the  adverb  i-ix,  and 
the  preposition  sine  ;  as.  Ncque  ex  casiris  Cutilince  quisquam  omnium  discesserat, 
Nor  had  any  one  departed  from  the  camp  of  Catiline.  Sail.  Nee  ullo  cdsu  pd- 
test continyire,  ut  ulla  iniermissio  flat  ojff'icii.  Cic.  An  quisqnava  pdtest  sine  per- 
turbdtiime  mentis  Irasci?  Id.  Ti trior  hie  iyrannus  Syrdcusdnis  fuii,  quam  quis- 
quam sH/teridrum.  Id.  Vix  quidquam  sj)ei  est.  Sen.  But  after  the  dependent 
negative  particles  ne,  neve,  and  the  negative  interrogative  particle  num,  quis  and 
not  quisquam  is  used. 

(b.)  But  quisquam  and  vUus  after  si  are  often  used  not  in  a  negative  sense, 
but  instead  of  dliquis  o'r  quis,  serving  only  to  increase  the  indefiniteness  which 
would  be  implied  in  the  latter  pronouns ;  as,  Aut  enim  iiemo,  quod  quidtm  mdgis 
cred$,  aut,  si  quisquam,  ille  sdjnens  fuit,  if  any  man.  Cic.  Hence,  ultimately, 
even  without  si,  where  the  indefiniteness  is  to  be  made  emphatic,  quisquam, 
tdlus,  umquam  and  usquam  were  used;  as,  Uuamdiu  quisquam  erit,  qui  te  de- 
ftndere  aiuleat,  r'lres.  Cic.  Bellum  maxime  omnium  memdrdbile,  qua  umquam 
gesta  sunt,  scripturus  sum.  Tac. 

(c.)  Ullus  is  properly  an  adjective,  but  quisquam  is  commonly  used  without 
a  noun,  except  it  is  a  word  denoting  a  person ;  as,  Cuiquam  cni.  To  any  citizen. 
(^Jusquam  ordtoris  eldquentianu  Hence  quisquam  corresponds  to  the  substan- 
tive ni'ino  and  ullus  to  the  adjective  nullus.  Nemo  is  often  used  with  other 
substantives  denoting  male  persons  so  as  to  become  equivalent  to  the  adjective 
nuUus ;  as,  nemo  pictor,  nemo  ddolescens,  and  even  hdmo  nemo.  Cic.  Quisquam 
is  sometimes  used  in  a  similar  mahner:  as,  quisquam  hdmo,  qukquam  clvis.  On 
the  other  hand  nullus  and  ullus  are  used  as  substantives  instead  of  nemo  and 
qui.vpuim,  especiallv  the  genitive  nuUius  and  the  ablative  nullo. 

Rem.  32.  (a.)  A^ius,  like  uUus,  though  properly  an  adjective,  is  sometimes 
used  like  a  pronoun.  It  is  often  repeated,  or  joined  with  an  adverb  derived 
from  it,  in  the  same  proposition,  which  may  be  translated  by  two  separate 
propositions,  commencing  respectively  with  'one.. .another';  as,  Aliud  aliis 
videtur  optimum,  On^  thing  seems  best  to  one,  another  to  another.  Cic,  Aliis 
aliunde  jieriu'dum  est.  Danger  threatens  one  from  one  source,  another  from 
another;  or.  Danger  threatens  different  persons  from  different  sources,  Ter. 
Didnysium  aliter  cum  aliis  de  nobis  Idcutum  audiibam.  Cic. — Alter  is  used  in  the 
same  manner  when  only  two  persons  are  spoken  of,  but  there  are  no  adverl)s  de- 
rived from  it;  as,  Alter  if  altirum  causam  conf^runt,  They  accuse  each  other. 

(bi)  Alius,  repeated  in  diJTtrent  propositions,  is  also  ti-anslated  'onc.another'; 
as,  Aliud  dgitur,  aliud  simuldtur,  One  thing  is  done,  another  pretended.  Cic. 
AUter  loquitur,  aliter  scribit,  like  aliter  ac  or  atque,  He  speaka  otherwise  than 
he  writes.     So  Aliud  Idquitur,  aliud  scribit. 


§  207.  STTNTAX. POSSESSIVE   PRONOUNS.  197 

(c. )  Uterque,  ^  each  of  two,'  is  always  used  by  Cicero  in  the  singular  num- 
ber, when  only  two  individuals  are  spoken  of.  Its  plural,  utrtque,  is  used  only 
when  each  of  two  parties  consists  of  several  individuals;  as,  Mdcedones — Tyrii. 
utrlque.  But  in  other  good  prose  writers  the  plural  utrlqite  is  occasionaUy  used 
in  speaking  of  only  two;  as,  Utinque  Didnysii.  Nep.  Cf.  §209,  R.  11,  (4.) 

Rem.  33.  (a.)  Qui  dam  differs  from  aliquis  by  implying  that  a  person  or 
thing,  though  indefinitely  described,  is  definitely  known ;  as,  Quidam  de  coUe- 
gis  rwstris,  A  certain  one  of  our  colleagues.  Cic.  Scis  me  quodam  iempdre  Met- 
apontum  venisse  tecum.  Id. 

(6.)  Quidam  is  sometimes  used  for  some,  as  opposed  to  the  whole,  or  to  others; 
as,  Excesserunt  urhe  quidam,  alii  mortem  sibi  consclveinmi.  Some  departed  from 
the  city,' others  destroyed  themselves.  Liv.  Hence  it  is  used  to  soften  an  ex- 
pression, where  in  English  we  say  '  so  to  speak,'  etc. ;  as,  Milvo  est  quoddam 
helium  ndturdle  cum  corvo,  A  kind  of  natural  warfare.  Cic.  Fidt  enim  illud  quod- 
dam caecum  tempus  servitutis.  Id.  Etenim  omnes  artes  quce  ad  humdnitdtem  perti- 
nent, habent  quoddam  commune  vinculum  et  quasi  cogndtione  quadam  inter  se  con- 
tinentur.  Id. —  Tamquam  is  used  for  the  same  purpose,  and  also  ut  ita  dicam. 

Rem.  34.  Qulvi  s  andguilibet,^nxiY  one,^  and  Unusquisque, ^eiich,^  are  uni- 
versal and  absolute;  as.  Omnia  sunt  ejusmddi  qui  vis  ut  perspicere  possit,  AU  are 
of  such  a  nature  that  any  one  can  perceive.  Cic.  Hie  dpud  mdjores  nostras  adhib- 
ebdtur  peritus,  nunc  quilibet.  Id.  Ndtura  iinumquemque  trdhit  ad  discendum. 
A  negative  joined  with  them  denies  only  the  universality  which  they  imply; 
as,  Non  cuivis  homtni  continglt  ddlre  Cdrinthum,  i.  e.  not  to  every  man  without 
distinction.  Hor.    Cuiquam  would  have  made  the  negation  universal. 

Rem.  35.  {a.)  Qui s que  signifies  each,  every  one,  distributively  or  relatively, 
and  generally  stands  without  a  noun ;  as.  Quod  cuique  obtigit,  id  quisque  teneat, 
Let  each  one  keep  what  has  fallen  to  each.  Cic.  Hence  it  is  used  particularly 
after  relative  and  interrogative  pronouns  and  adverbs ;  as,  Sclpio  pollicetur  sibi 
magnce  curce  fdre,  ut  omnia  civitdtibus,  quae  ciijusque  fuissent,  restitmrentur. 
Cic.  Ut  prcedlci  posset,  quid  cuique  eventurtim,  et  quo  quisque  fdto  ndtus  esset. 
Id.  Cur  fiat  quidque  quceris:  rede  omnlno.  Id.  Quo  quisque  est  sollertior, 
hoc  ddcei  laboriosius.  Id.  Ut  quisque  optime  dlcit,  ita  masdme  dicendi  difficultdtem 
Umet.  Id.  And  hence  the  expression  qudtusquisque  in  the  sense  of  '  how  few 
among  all.'  It  is  also  used  distributively  after  numerals;  as,  Decimus  quisque 
sorte  lectus,  Every  tenth  man.  Quinto  quoque  anno,  In  every  fifth  year.  So 
also  after  SUMS  ;  as,  Sui  cuique  liberi  cdrissimi:  suum  cuique  j)ldcel.  (Respects 
ing  the  order  of  the  words,  cf.  §  279,  14:  and  respecting  quisque  in  the  nomina- 
tive in  apposition  to  a  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  ablative  absolute  or  in  the  ac- 
cusative with  the  infinitive,  see  §  204,  R.  10.) 

(6.)  Quisque  with  a  superlative,  either  in  the  singular  or  the  plural,  denotes 
universality,  and  is  generally  equivalent  to  omnes  with  the  positive ;  as,  doctis- 
slmus  quisque.  Every  learned  man,  i.  e.  all  the  learned;  but  often,  also,  in  con- 
nection with  the  verb,  it  retains  the  idea  of  a  reciprocal  comparison,  and  is  to 
be  rendered  by  the  superlative ;  as,  In  omni  arte  optimum  quidque  rdrissi7num, 
.  The  best  is  the  rarest.  Cic.  Altissiraa  quseque  ^u»»«a  minimo  sdno  Idbuntur, 
The  deepest  rivers  flow  with  the  least  sound.  Curt.  With  primus,  it  denotes 
the  Jirst  possible ;  as,  Primo  quoque  tempdre.  As  soon  as  possible.  Cic. 

POSSESSIVES. 

Rem.  36.  (a.)  The  possessive  pronouns  mens,  tuus,  szius,  noster,  and  vester, 
are  joined  to  nouns,  to  indicate  an  action  or  possession  of  the  persons  denoted 
by  their  primitives ;  as,  Tutus  amor  mens  est  tibi,  My  love  is  secure  to  you. 
Ovid.  Tuam  vicem  ddlere  sdleo.  Cic. — These  pronouns,  as  in  Enghsh,  when 
belonging  to  two  substantives,  are  generally  expressed  but  oncCj  even  when 
the  substantives  are  of  different  genders ;  as,  dmor  tuus  ac  judicium  de  me. 

(6.)   But  these  pronouns  are  sometimes  used  when  the  persons  to  which  they 
refer  are  the  objects  of  an  action,  feeling,  etc. ;  as.  Nam  neque  tua  negligentid^ 
neque  ddio  id  fecit  tuo,  For  he  did  it  neither  through  neglect  nor  hatred  of  you, 
Ter.    See  §  211,  R.  3. 
IT'** 


Jps 


198  SYNTAX. ^PRONOUNS ^REFLI^IVES.  §  208. 

(c.)  The  possessive  pronouns,  especially  when  nsed  as  reflexives,  are  often 
onxitted ;  as,  Quo  revertar  t  in  patriam  t  scU.  meam,  Whither  shall  I  remm  ? 
to  (my)  country?  Ovid.  Dextra  munera  porrexit,  soil.  sad.  Id.  But  they  are 
expressed  when  emphasis  or  contrast  is  intended,  where  in  English  '  own ' 
might  be  added  to  the  pronoun;  as,  Ego  non  dicam,  tdmen  id pOteritU  cum  dni- 
mis  vestris  coc/itdre.  Cic. 

(rf.)  When  besides  the  person  of  the  subject,  that  of  a  remote  object  also 
occurs  in  the  proposition,  the  possessive  pronoun  will  refer  to  the  latter;  as, 
Patris  dnimum  mihi  reconciliasti,  i.  e.  patrU  mei  dnimum  rather  than  tui. 

(e.)  As  reflexives,  meus,  etc.,  are  translated  my,  thy,  his,  her,  its,  our,  youi 
their;  or  my  o\m,  thy  own,  his  own,  etc. 

THE    REFLEXIVES    S  UI   AND    SUUS. 
'  V  §  S08.     Rem.  37.  (a.)  Sui  and  suus  properly  refer  to  the 
subject  of  the  proposition  in  which  they  stand ;  as, 

Oppldsini /acinus  in  se  ac  suos  foedum  consciscunt,  The  citizens  decide  on  a 
foul  crime  against  themselves  and  their  Mends.  Liv. 
-\     (b.^   They  continue  to  be  used  in  successive  clauses,  if  the  subject 
remains  the  same ;  as. 

Ipse  se  guisque  diligit,  non  ut  aliquam  a  se  ipse  mercedem  extgat  cartidlis  suae, 
'  quod  per  se  sibi  quisque  earns  est.  Cic. 

(1.)  In  dependent  clauses,  in  which  the  subject  does  not  remain 
the  same,  the  reflexives  are  commonly  used  in  references  to  the  lead- 
ing subject,  when  the  thoughts,  language,  purposes,  etc.,  of  that  sub- 
ject are  stated ;  as. 

Aindvistus  prcedicdvit,  non  sese  Gallis,  sed  GaUos  sIbi  helium  infulisse,  Ariovistus 
declared  that  he  had  not  made  Avar  upon  the  Gauls,  but  the  Gauls  upon  him. 
Caes.  Homei'um  CtJldphdiiU  civem  esse  dlcunt  suum.  The  Colophonians  say  that 
Homer  is  their  citizen.  Cic.  Tyrannus  pet'ivU  tU  se  ad  dmicitiam  tertium  ascribe- 
rent.  Id.  But  sometimes,  to  avoid  ambiguity,  the  cases  of  is  or  ille  are  used  in 
such  clauses  in  references  to  the  leading  subject;  as,  Helvetii  scse  AUubrdges  vi 
coacturos  exlsiimdbant,  ut  per  suos  fines  eos  Ire  pdterentur.  Cees.  Here  suos 
refers  to  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause,  and  eos  to  Etlcetii,  the  subject  of 
the  leading  clause.  And  sometimes,  even  in  the  same  dependent  clause,  two 
reflexive  pronouns  are  used,  referring  to  different  persons ;  as,  Scgthce  pelebani, 
ut  regis  sui  /lliam  mdtriindnio  sibi  Jungeret.  Curt. 

S.  (2.)  If,  however,  the  leading  subject,  whose  thoughts,  etc.,  are  ex- 
pressed, is  indefinite,  the  reflexives  relate  to  the  subject  of  a  depend- 
ent clause ;  as, 

iledeam  prcedicani  (soil,  hdnunes)  in  figdfrdtris  sui  membra  in  its  Idcis,  qua 
•     Be  parens  persequeretur,  dissipdvisse.  Cic.    ^sum  regem  trddunt  dperdtum  his 
sacris  se  abdidisse.  Liv. 

'*•-    C^)  (^0  ^^en  the  leading  verb  is  in  the  passive  voice,  the  re- 
'^flexive  often  refers  not  to  its  subject,  but  to  that  which  would  be  its 

subject  in  the  active  voice ;  as, 
A  (hsdre  invitor  ut  sim  slbi  legatus,  i.  e.  Qssar  me  invUaij  I  am  invited  by 

CjEsar  to  become  his  lieutenant.  Cic. 

(6.)  So  when  the  subject  is  a  thing  without  life,  Jhe  reflexive  may 
relate  to  some  other  word  in  the  sentence,  which  denotes  a  thing  hav- 
ing Hfe ;  as, 

Canum  tarn  fida  cusiddia  quid  sign^icat  dliud,  nisi  se  ad  hdmiltum  comiiUk&' 
fates  esse  gUnirdtos  f  Cic. 


N 

ret 


§  208.  SYNTAX. PRONOUNS REFLEXIVES.  199 

A       (4.)    Instead  of  sui  and  suits,  whether  referring  to  a  leadmg  or  a 
Subordinate  subject,  ipse  is  sometimes  used,  to  avoid  ambiguity  from 
the  similarity  of  both  numbers  of  sui,  and  also  to  mark  more  emphat- 
ically than  suus,  the  person  to  whom  it  relates;  as, 

Jugurfha  U'gatos  mlslt,  qui  ipsi  llbeiisque  vltam  peterent,  Jugurtha  sent  ambas- 
sadors to  ask  life  for  himself  and  his  children.  Sail.  £a  mdlestissime  ferre 
hdmines  debenl,  qum  ipsorum  culpa  contracta  sunt. 

>  (5.^  In  the  plural  number,  with  inter,  se  only  is  used,  if  the  person 
or  thmg  referred  to  is  in  the  nominative  or  accusative ;  se  or  ipse,  if 
in  any  other  case ;  as, 

Fratres  inter  se  quum  forma,  turn  nwribus  similes,  Brothers  resembling  each 
other  both  in  person  and  character.  Cic.  Feras  inter  sese  conciUat  ndtura.  Cic. 
Incidunt  dliqua  a  doctis  etiam  inter  ipsos  mutuo  reprehensa.  Quint. 

(6.)  (a.)  When  reference  is  made  not  to  the  subject  of  the  propo- 
sition, but  to  some  other  person  or  thing,  hie,  is,  or  ille,  is  generally 
used,  except  in  the  cases  above  specified ;  as, 

Themistddes  servum  ad  Xerxem  misit,  ut  el  nuntidret,  suis  verbis,  adversdrios 
ejus  in  fugd  esse,  Themistoclcs  sent  his  servant  to  Xerxes,  to  mform  him 
(Xerxes),  in  his  (Themistocles')  name,  that  his  (Xerxes')  enemies  were  upon 
the  point  of  flight.  Nep. 

^        (&.)    But  when  no  ambiguity  would  arise,  and  especially  when  the 
^  verb  is  of  the  first  or  second  person,  sui  and  suus  sometimes  take  the 
place  of  the  demonstrative  pronouns ;  as, 

Suam  rem  sibi  salvam  sistam,  I  will  restore  his  property  entire  to  him.  Plant. 

*.    (c.)    On  the  contrary,  the  demonstratives  are  sometimes  used  for 
'  the  reflexives ;  as, 

Eelvetii  persuddent  Raurdcis,  ut  und  cum  iis  prdficiscantur.  The  Helvetii  per- 
suade the  Rauraci  to  go  with  them.  Cses. — In  some  instances,  a  reflexive  and 
a  demonstrative  are  used  in  reference  to  the  same  person ;  as,  Jta  se  gessit 
(scil.  Lifjdrius)  ut  ei  pdcem  esse  expedlret.  Cic.  C  Claudii  orantis  per  sui  frd- 
tris  pdr'entisque  ejus  manes.  Liv. — Sometimes  the  reflexives  refer  to  different 
subjects  in  the  same  sentence;  as,  Aridvistus  respondit,  neminem  secura  sine 
sua  pernicie  contendisse  (Caes.);  where  se  refers  to  Ariovlstus,  and  sua  to 
neminem. 

s^^^     (7.)  (a.)  Suus  often  refers  to  a  word  in  the  predicate  of  a  sentence, 
-^  and  is  then  usually  placed  after  it ;  as, 

Hunc  elves  sui  ex  urbe  ejecerunt,  Him  his  fellow -citizens  banished  from  the 
city.  Cic.   TitHrius  quumprdcul  Ambiorigem,  suos  cohortantem,  conspexisset.  Goes. 

{^^(b.)    Suus,  and  not  hujus,  is  used  when  a  noun  is  omitted ;  as, 

Octdvius  quem  sui  {scil.  amici)  (hsdrem  salutdbant,    Octavius,  whom  his  fol- 
lowers saluted  as  Cassar. 
•^^    (c.)    Suus  is  also  commonly  used  when  two  nouns  are  coupled  by 
cum  but  not  when  they  are  connected  by  a  conjunction  ;  as, 

Ptdlerfkeus  dmlcos  Demetrii  cum  suis  rebus  dlmlsit,  Ptolemy  dismissed  the 
friends  of  Demetrius  with  then-  efi'ects.  Just. 
^  -   (8.)    Suus  sometimes  denotes  Jk,  favorable  ;  as. 

Sunt  et  sua  dona  jHirenti,  There  are  likewise  for  my  father  suitable  presents. 
Virg.  Ut  liberator  ille  pdpuli  Romdni  cpperlretur  tempdra  sua.  Liv.  Alphemis 
utebdtur  pdpUlo  sane  svLO.  Cic.  Sometimes  it  signifies  j9ec«Zm7-;  as,  Molles  sua 
tura  Sdboei,  scil.  mittunt,  i.  e.  the  frankincense  for  which  their  country  was  fa- 
mous. Virg.     Feasosque  s6por  suus  occipat  artUs.    Id. 


200  SYNTAX. — subject-nominatIte.  §  209. 

NOI^ONATIVE. 

SUBJECT-NOMINATIVE    AND    VEEB. 

§  S09.     (a.)  The  noun  or  pronoun  which  is  the  subject  of 
a  finite  verb  is  put  in  the  nominative. 

Note  1.  (a.)  A  rerb  in  any  mood  except  the  infinitire  is  called  a  finite  rerb.  (6.)  In 
historical  writing  the  nominative  is  sometimesgoined  with  the  present  infinitive  instead 
of  the  imperfect  indicative.  Of.  B>.  5. 

-•     (b.)   A  verb  agrees  with  its  subject-nominative,  in  number 

and  person ;  as, 

£go  Ugo,  I  rea<L  Nos  legtmus,  We  read. 

Tu  scr^U,  Thou  -writest.  Vos  scrlbltis,  You  write. 

Equus  currit,  The  horse  runs.  £qui  curruni,  Horses  run. 

Note  2.  The  imperative  singular  is  sometimes  used  in  addressing  several 
persons;  as,  Hue  notas  adjice  septem,  soil,  vos,  Thebaides.  Ovid.  Met.  6, 182. 
So  Adde  defectionem  Mike,  soil,  vos,  mlUtes.  Liv.  26,  41. 

y^  Hem  ARK  1.  (a.)  The  nominatives  ego,  tu,  nos,  vos,  are  seldom  ex- 
pressed, the  termination  of  the  verb  sufficiently  marking  the  person ; 
as, 

Cupio,  I  desire;  vlvis,  thou  livest;  habemus,  we  have.    See  §  147,  3. 

(b.)  But  when  emphasis  or  opposition  is  intended,  the  nominatives  of  the 
first  and  second  persons  are  expressed ;  as,  Ego  retjes  eject,  vos  tyrannos  intro- 
duciiis,  I  banished  kings,  you  introduce  tyrants.  Auct.  ad  Her.  Nos,  nos,  dico 
dperie,  consules  dcsunius.  Cic.  Tu  es  pdtrdnus,  tu  pater.  Ter.  In  indignant 
questions  and  addresses  tu  is  expressed;  as,  Tu  in  fdrum  prodire,  tnlucem 
consptcere,  tu  in  horum  conspecUim  venire  condris  ?  Auct.  ad  Her. 

>■  Rem.  2.  The  nominative  of  the  third  person  is  often  omitted : — 
(1.)  When  it  has  been  expres'sed  in  a  preceding  proposition  : — 
(a.)  As  nominative;  as,  3fdsa  profluit  ex  monte  Vdsego,  ei  in  Ocednum  infiuit. 
Cses.;  or  (6)  in  an  oblique  case;  as,  Cursorem  mlserunt,  ut  id  nuntidret,  scil. 
cursor.  Nep.:  or  (c)  in  a  possessive  adjective;  as,  Et  vereor  quo  se  Jiinonia 
rertani  Hospttia;  haud  tarUo  cessabit  cardine  rerum,  scil.  ilia,  i.  e.  Juno.  Virg 
Mn.  I.  672. 

(2.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  for  person  or  thing : — 
*"  Thus  hdmines  is  often  omitted  before  aiuni,  dlcuni,  ferunt,  etc. ;  as,  Ut  aiunt^ 
As  they  say.  Cic.  Maxime  admli-antur  eum,  qui  pecunid  non  mdvetur.  Id  -' 
So  bene  est,  "bene  habet  or  bene  agitur.  It  is  well;  as.  Si  vales,  bene  est,  ego  vaieo. 
Cic.  Quum  melius  est,  grdUihr  dis.  Afran.  Optiime  habet,  Nothing'  can  be 
better.  Plant.  Bine  habet:  jacta  sunt  funddmenta  defensionis.  Cic.  Bene  agi- 
tur pro  noxia.  Plant. 

Note  3.  This  omission  of  the  nominative  is  common  in  the  clause  preced- 
ing a  relative ;  as,  Qui  Bdvium  non  odit,  dmei  tua  carrMna,  Mcevi,  scil.  hdmo.  Let 
him  who  hates  not  Bavius,  love  your  verses,  Maevius.  Virg.  Vasidtur  agri  quod 
inter  urbem  ac  Fidenas  est,  scil.  id  spdtium.  Liv.  Sunt  quos  juvat...scii.  tidmines^ 
Tliere  are  (those)  whom  it  delights.  Hor.  Est  qui  nee  veteris  pocula  Massict 
spernit,  scil.  hdmo.  Hor.  Here  sunt  quos  and  est  qui  are  e(^i:ivalent  to  quldam, 
dliquis,  or  dliqui.  So,  Est  quod  gaudeas,  There  is  (reason)  wiiy  vou  should  re- 
joice. Cic.  Neque  erat  cur  falUre  vellent.  Ovid.  Est  ubi  id  vdleat.  Cic.  Est, 
quum  non  est  sdiius,  etc.  Auct,  ad  Her.  In  the  latter  cases  the  adverbs  are 
equivalent  to  m  quo,  scil.  Hho,  tempore. 


§  209.  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOMII^TIVE.  201 

Rem.  3.  (1.)  The  nominative  is  wanting  before  verbs  denoting  tbe 
state  of  the  weather,  or  the  operations  of  nature ;  as, 

FuUjurnt^  It  lightens.  Plin.  Ninyit^  It  snows.  Vh'g.  Lucescebat,  It  was 
growing  light.  Liv.    Jam  adcesperascit.  Cic. 

(2.)    The  nominative  is  also  wanting  before  the  third  person  singu-     J 
lar  of  the  passive  of  neuter  verbs,  and  of  active  verbs  used  imper- 
sonally ;  as, 

Favetur  ttbi  a  me,  Thou  art  favored  by  me.  Ejus  ordtioni  vehementer  ah  omni- 
bus reclaniatum  est.  Cic.  Proiude  ut  bene  vlvitur,  diu  vlvAtur.  Plant.  Ad  exi- 
tum  ventum  est.  Sen.  Actum  est  de  iniperio.  See  §  184,  2 :  and  cf.  §  229, 
R.  5,  (6.) 

Note  4.  A  nominative,  however,  is  expressed  before  the  passive  of  some 
neuter  verbs,  which,  in  the  active  voice,  are  followed  by  an  accusative ;  as, 
Pu(jna  pugndta  est.  Cic.   See^  §  232,  (1.) 

(3.)  It  is  wanting  also  before  the  neuter  of  the  future  passive  parti-  -^ 
ciple  with  est ;  as, 

Si  vis  me  Jlere  dolendum  est  primum  ipsi  tibi,  If  you  wish  me  to  weep,  you 

Jourself  must  first  grieve.  Hor.     Orandum  est,  ut  sit  mens  sdna  in  corpore  sdno. 
uv.    Ad  villam  revertendum  est.  Cic. 

(4.)  The  nominative  is  also  wanting  before  the  impersonal  verba  3> 
miseret^  poenitet,  pUdet,  tcedet,  and  />2V/e<;  as, 

Eos  ineptiar-um  poenitet,  They  repent  of  their  follies.  Cic.  Miseret  te  dliorum, 
iui  te  nee  miseret  nee  2->udet.  Plant.  Me  cMtdtis  morum  jAffet  twdetque.  SuU. — 
In  such  examples,' the  sense  will  sometimes  permit  us  to  supply  fortuna,  condi- 
tio, memdria,  etc.  So  in  the  expression,  Venit  in  mentem,  It  came  into  mind; 
as.  In  mentem  venit  de  speculo,  sell.  t6(jitutio^  etc.  Plant. — An  infinitive  or  a  sub- 
junctive clause  sometimes  forms  the  subject  of  these  verbs;  as,  Te  id  nidlo 
modo  puduit  f  acrre.  To  do  that  by  no  means  shamed  you.  Ter.  Non  jjoenitet 
me,  quantum  profecerim.  Cic. 

(5,)    The  subject  of  the  verb  is  sometimes  an  infinitive  or  a  neuter 
participle  (either  alone  or  with  other  words),  one  or  more  proposi-    -^ 
tions,  or  an  adverb.  (Cf  §  202,  R.  2  and  3  :  and  §  274,  R.  5,  [h.)     The 
verb  is  then  in  the  third  person  singular ;  as, 

Vacare  culpa  magnum  est  solatium.  To  be  free  from  fault  is  a  gi-eat  consola- 
tion. Neque  est  te  Vallere  quidquam.  To  deceive  you  in  any  thing  is  not  (possi- 
ble.) Virg.  Mentiri  non  est  meum.  Plant.  Te  non  istud  audivisse  mlrum  estj 
That  you  have  notheard  that  is  wonderful.  Cic.  '  Summum  jus,  summa  in- 
juria,' factum  est  jam.  tr'itum  sermone  proverhium.  Id.  Ni  degeneratum  in  aliis 
huic  quoque  decdri  offecisset.  Liv.  (Cf.  ^  274,  R.  5,  (6.)  Sin  est  ut  veils  manere 
illam  apud  te.  Ter.  Nee  profuit  Hydrm  crescere  per  damnum,  geminasque 
resiimtre  vires.  Ovid.  Die  mihi,  eras  istud,  Postume,  quando  venit?  Tell  me, 
Postutnus,  when  does  that  to-morrow  comeV  Mart.  Parumne  camjns  atque 
Nepiiino  stipe?-  fusum  est  Ldi'ini  sanguinis  ?  Hor. 

{a.)  This  constrnction  is  especially  common  with  impersonal  verbs;  as,  Oi'a- 
tore\n  m\»ci  no7i  dei et,  That  an  orator  should  be  angry,  is  not  becoming.  Cic. 
Hoc  fit-ri  et  oportet  et  6pus  est.  Id.  Me  pedibus  dileciat  claudere  verba,  Hor. 
Interest  omnium  recte  facere.  Cic.  CCisu  acctdit,  ut,  id  quod  Rurose  audierat 
primus  nuntiaret.  Id.  Somefmes  a  neuter  proi<  nn,  is  interposed  between  a 
proposition  and  its  velb ;  as,  Imjmne  fdtere  quce  llbet,  id  est  rcgem  esse.  Sail. 
Cf.  §  206,  (13,)  («.) 

(G.)  The  nominative  is  also  wanting  before  potest,  coepit  or  coepturr^v^ 
est,  incipit,  desinit,  debet,  so  let,  and  videtur,  when  followed  by  the  in-^ 
finitive  of  an  impersonal  verb ;  as, 


202  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-NOiONATIVE.  §  209. 

Pigere  eumfacti  ccepit,  It  began  to  repent  him  (L  e.  he  jegan  to  repent)  of 
his  conduct.  Just.  Sapitntia  est  una,  <jud  prcBcqftrlcej  in  ts'anquUUtdte  vivi  p6- 
Ust.  Cic.     Toedere  sdlet  dcdros  impenaii.  Quint. 

'-X    Rem.  4.   The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted;  as, 

Di  meliora  pits,  scil.  dent  or  retint,  Majr  the  gods  grant  better  things  to  the 
pious.  Virg.  Verum  hcec  hactenus,  scil.  dixirmis.  Cic.  Pertineo  is  understood  in 
such  expressions  as  nihil  ad  me,  nihil  ad  rem;  Quid  hoc  ad  £picurum?  What 
does  this  concern  Epicurus  ?  Quo7'sus  hcec  t  i.  e.  quorsus  hcec  pertinent  f  What 
is  that  for? — Pdrabo  is  to  be  supplied,  in  Quo  mihi  hanc  rem?  Of  what  use 
is  this  to  me?  and,  Vhde  mihi  dliguam  rem?  Whence  am  I  to  get  any  thing? 
as.  Quo  mihi  b'lblidthecas  ?  Sen.  Unde  mihi  Idpidem  ?  Hor.  A  tense  of/dcio  is 
often  to  be  supplied,  as  in  Rede  ille,  melius  hi;  Bene  Chrysippus,  qui  dCcet.  Cic. 
Nihil  per  vim  umquam  Clodius,  omnia,  per  vim  Milo.  Id.  Qua  quum  dixisset^ 
Cotia  finem.  Id.  So,  also  in  the  phrases  nihil  dliud  quam ;  quia  dliud  quam  ; 
nihil  praterquam,  which  signify  'merely';  as,  Tisaphemes  nihil  dliua  quam 
helium  comjxirdvit.  Nep.  This  verb  is  in  like  manner  omitted  with  nihil  ainjylius 
quam;  nihil  minus  quam,  and  in  the  phrase  si  nihil  dliud. — Ait  or  xnquit  is  some- 
times omitted  in  introducing  the  direct  words  of  another,  and  more  frequently 
in  relating  a  connected  conversation;  as,  Turn  ille;  hie  ego;  huic  ego.  Dlcii  is 
sometimes  omitted  in  quoting  a  person's  words ;  as,  Sclte  Chrysippus :  ut  glddii 
causa  rdginam,  sic  prceier  mundum  cetera  omnia  dliorum  causa  esse  generdta^  Cic. 
— After  per  in  adjurations  oro,  rdgo  or  precor  is  often  omitted ;  as.  Per  ego  vos 
deos  patrios,  vindicate  ab  ultimo  dedecdre  nomen  geniemqm  Persdrum  ;  i.  e.  per 
deos  patrios  vos  oro,  vindicate.  Curt.  This  omission  is  most  common  with  the 
copula  sum ;  as,  Nam  POlydOrus  ego,  scil.  sum.  For  I  am  Polydorus.  Virg.  And 
so  est  and  sunt  are  often  omitted  with  predicate  adjectives,  and  especially  in 
proverbial  phrases;  as,  Quot  hdmtnes  tot  sententia.  Ter.  Omnia  prcecldra  rdra, 
scil.  sunt  Cic.  So  also  est  and  sunt  are  often  omitted  in  the  compound  tenses 
of  the  passive  voice ;  as,  Agra  mulctdti,  scil.  sunt.  Liv.    Cf.  §  270,  B.  3. 

KoTE  5.  In  Latin,  as  in  English,  a  verb  is  often  joined  to  one  of  two  con- 
nected nominatives  and  understood  with  the  other,  and  that  even  when  the 
persons  are  different;  as,  magis  ego  te  amo,  quam  tu  me,  scil.  dmas.  After  a 
negative  verb  a  corresponding  positive  verb  is  sometimes  to  be  suppUed ;  as. 
after  nego,  dlco,  after  veto,  jubeo,  and  in  this  case  et  takes  the  signification  or 
sed.  Cf.  §  323,  1,  (2.),  (b.) 

Note  6.  Sometunes,  when  the  verb  of  an  appended  proposition  is  omitted, 
its  subject  is  attracted  to  the  case  of  a  noun  in  the  leading  proposition  with 
which  is  joined  a  participle  of  the  omitted  verb ;  as,  Hannibal  Minucium,  md- 
gistrum  equitum,  pari  ac  dictatorem  ddlo  productum  in  pralium,  fugdvit,  i.  e. 
pari  ac  dictator  dolo  productus  fuerat.  Nep.  Hann.  5.     So  Liv.  34,  32. 

",  Rem.  5.  In  the  historic  stj^Ie  the  nominative  is  sometimes  found 
with  the  present  infinitive ;  as, 

Inih-im  qudfidie  Ccesar  ^duosfriimentum  flagitare,  Meanwhile  Caesar  was 
daily  demanding  com  of  the  ^dui.  Coes.  Nos  pdvidi  trepidare  m^tu.  Virg. 
Jd  horrendum  ferri.  Id. 

Note  7.  The  infinitive  in  this  construction  is  called  the  historical  infinitive, 
and  is  used  instead  of  the  imperfect  indicative  to  express  in  a  lively  manner  a 
contuiued  or  repeated  action  or  condition. 

V  Rem.  6.  The  relative  qui  may  refer  to  a^  antecedent  either  of  the 
first,  second,  or  third  person ;  and  its  verb  takes  the  person  of  the 
antecedent;  as, 

Egc  qui  lego,  I  who  read.  Tu  qui  sciibis,  Thou  who  wrilest.  JEquus  qui  cur- 
rit,  The  horse  which  runs.  Vos  qui  quaeritis,  You  who  ash. 

^       Rem.  7.  (a.).  Verbs  in  the  first  person  plural,  and  the  second  per- 
son singular,  are  sometimes  used  to  express  general  truths ;  as, 


§  209.  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-N0MINATIV3.  203 

Quam  multa  facimus  causa  dmlcorum  !  How  many  things  we  do  (i.  e.  men  do) 
for  the  sake  of  friends !  Cic.  Si  vis  me  Jlere,  dvlendum  est  j^rlmum  ipsi  tibi, 
Whoever  wishes  me,  etc.  Hor. 

(b.)  Nos  is  often  used  for  ego,  and  nosier  for  mens ;  and  even  when  the  pro- 
noun is  not  expressed,  the  verb  is  frequently  put  in  the  first  person  phiral  in- 
stead of  the  first  person  singular.  The  genitive  nostri  is  used  for  met,  but  nos- 
trum  always  expresses  a  real  plurality. 

Eem.  8.  The  accusative  is  sometimes  used  for  the  nominative  by  attraction. 
See  §  206,  (6.)  {b.)  '     " 

Kem.  9.  The  verb  sometimes  agrees  with  the  predicate-nominative,  especially 
if  it  precedes  the  verb ;  as,  Amaniium  tree  dmoris  integratio  est,  The  quarrels 
of  lovers  are  a  renewal  of  love.  Ter.  Ldca,  quce  2)roxima  Carthayinem,  Numld- 
ia  appellatur.  Sail.  And  sometimes  it  agrees  with  the  nearest  subject  of  a  sub- 
ordinate sentence ;  as,  Sed  ei  cdriara  semper  omnia,  quam  decus  aique  j/udlcitia 
fuit.  Sail.  Cat.  25. 

Kem.  10.  In  cases  of  apposition,  the  verb  commonly  agrees  with  the  noun 
which  is  to  be  explained;  as,  TuUiOla,  dvAicisd  nostrce,  Jl dgitat.  Cic.  But  some- 
times the  verb  agi'ees,  not  with  the  principal  nominative,  but  with  a  nearer 
noun  in  apposition  to  it;  as,  Tungri,  civitas  Gallice,  fo7item  habet  insignem, 
The  Tungi'i,  a  state  of  Gaul,  has  a  remarkable  fountain.  Plin.  Coripli  oppidum 
captum  (est).  Liv. 

Rem.  11.   A  collective  noun  has  sometimes,  especially  in  poetry,  a     ~T 
plural  verb ;  as, 

Pars  epulis  onerant  mensas.  Part  load  the  tables  with  food.  Virg.  Turba 
ruunt.  Ovid.   Atria  iurba  i(dx\Qni',  \*im\xvit  leve  vulgus  QvcaXque.  Id.' 

(1.)  (rt.)  A  plural  verb,  joined  to  a  collective  noun,  usually  expresses  the 
action,  etc.,  of  the  individzials  which  that  noun  denotes.  In  Cicero,  Sallust, 
and  Caesar,  this  construction  scarcely  occurs  in  simple  sentences;  but  it  is 
often  used,  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  expressed  not  in  its  own,  but  in  a 

E receding  clause;  as.  Hue  idem  generi  hiimdno  evenit,quod  in  terrd  collocati  sint, 
ecause  they  (scil.  homines)  live  on  earth.  Cic.    In  Livy  it  occurs  more  fre- 
quently; asj^  Loci'os  omnis  mtdtitudo  abeunt. 

(6.)  Abstract  nouns  are  sometimes  used  collectively,  instead  of  their  con- 
oretes ;  as,  nobiliias  for  nObiles,  juventus  for  juvenes,  vicinia  for  vlc'ini,  servitium 
for  seri'i,  levis  armdtura  for  leviter  ai'nidli,  eto.  (c.)  Miles,  eqiies,  jJedes,  and 
similar  words  are  sometimes  used  collectively  for  the  soldiery,  the  cif\'alry,  etc. 

(2.)  When  two  or  more  clauses  have  the  same  collective  noun  as  their  sub- 
ject, the  verb  is  frequently  singular  in  the  former,  and  plural  in  the  latter;  as, 
Jam  ne  node  quldem  turba''ex  eo  loco  dllabebatur,  refracturosque  canerem  mina- 
bantur.  Liv.  Gens  eddem,  quce  ie  crudeli  Daunia  bel'lo  insequltur,  nos  si  pellant, 
nihil  abfure  credunt.  Virg. 

(3.)  Tantttm,  followed  by  a  genitive  plural,  has  sometimes  a  plural  verb,  like 
a  collective  noun;  as.  Quid  hue  tantum  hominum  inceduntf  Why  are  so  many 
men  coming  hither  V  Plant. 

(4.)  A  plural  verb  is  sometimes  used,  though  not  by  Cicero,  after  uterque 
and  quisque,  pars. ..pars,  dUus...dlium,  and  alter.. .altemm,  on  account  of  the 
idea  of  plurality  which  they  involve;  as,  Uterque  eorum  ex  castris  exercitum 
educiint,  Each  of  them  leads  his  armv  from  tlie  camp.  Caes.  Intimus  quisque 
tibertorum  vincti  nhrepUque  (sunt.)  fac.  Alius  dlium,  ut  prxlium  incipiant, 
circumspectant.  Liv.    Cf.  §  207,  R.  32,  (c.) 

Note  8.  This  constmction  may  be  explained  by  passages  like  the  following, 
in  which  the  plural  is  placed  first,  and  ther'  the  singular,  denoting  its  parts; 
Celeri,  suo  quisque  tempOre,  aderunt.  Liv.  Decemviri  perturbdti  alius  in  dliam 
partem  castrorum  discurnint.  Id.     See  ^  204,  K.  10. 


204  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-XOMINATITE.  §  209. 

Rem.  12.  Two  or  more  nominatives  singular,  not  in  apposition, 
generally  have  a  plural  verb ;  as, 

Furor  IVAque  meiUem  prsecipltant,  Furv  and  rage  hurry  on  (my)  mmd.  Virg. 
Dum  ceias,  metus,  mdffister,  prohlbebant.  Ter. 

(1.^  If  the  predicate  belong  to  the  several  nominatives  jointly,  the  verb  is 
always  plural;  as,  Grammatlce  quondam  ac  musice  jmictjE  fuerunt.  Quint. 
y^     (2.)    A  verb  in  the  singular  is  often  used  after  several  nominatives 
singular,  especially  if  they  denote  things  without  life;  as, 

^fens  enim,  ei  ratio  el  consilium  in  senibtis  est.  Cic.  Beneficentia,  I'MraUtaSy 
hdnitas,  jusUtia  funditus  tolUtur.  Id. 

KoTE  9.  This  construction  is  most  common  when  the  several  nominatives, 
as  in  the  preceding  examples,  constitute,  as  it  were,  but  one  idea.  So  also  the 
compound  subject  Sendtus  pdpulusque  Romdnus  has  always  a  predicate  in  the 
singular.  The  same  construction  sometimes,  especially  in  the  poets,  occiirs 
with  names  of  persons;  as,  Goryias,  Thrdsu}ndchiis,  Protdgdras,  Prddicus.  Uip- 
pias  in  hdaore  fuit.  Cic.  Quin  et  Prdmetneus  et  Pelojjis  parens  didci  Idborum 
deci  pi  tur  sJno.  Hor.  When  the  nominatives  denote  both  persons  and  things, 
the  verb  is  commonly  plural ;  as,  OAlio  consilium  et  Pompeius  obsunt  Liv. 

(3.)  When  one  of  the  nouns  is  plural,  the  verb  is  generally  so;  but  some- 
times it  is  singularj  when  the  plural  noun  does  not  immediately  precede  it;  as, 
Dii  te  petidtes  painique,  et  patris  imago,  et  domus  regia,  et  in  ddmo  regale  so- 
lium, et  nomen  Tarquinium  creat  vocatjue  regem.  Liv. 

(4.)  WTien  each  of  the  nominatives  is  preceded  by  et  or  turn,  the  verb  agrees 
with  the  last ;  as.  Hoc  et  n'vtio  doctis,  et  necessltas  barbdris,  et  mos  geniibus,  ei 
feris  natura  ipsa  prasscripsit.  This,  reason  has  dictated  to  the  learned,  and  ne- 
cessity to  barbarians,  and  custom  to  nations,  and  nature  itself  to  wild  beasts. 
Cic.  Et  Ogo,  et  Cicero  meus  flagitabit.  Id.  Tum  aetas  vire^que,  turn  dr'ita  gloria 
dnimum  stimulabat,  Liv.  So  -wlxen  the  subject  consists  of  two  infinitives;  as, 
£t  f  acere,  et  pati  fortia,  ROmdnum  est.  Cic.  Unusei  alter  always  takes  a  smgu- 
lar  verb ;  as,  Dicit  Onus  et  alter  briviier.  Cic.  Unus  et  alter  assuitur  pannus. 
Hor. 

(5.)  When  the  nominatives  are  connected  by  aut^  sometimes  the 
plural,  but  commonly  the  singular,  is  used ;  as, 

Si  Sicrdtes  aui  AntUithenes  diceret.  If  Socrates  or  Antisthenes  should  say.  Cic. 
Ut  qwosque  stadium  prlvdtim  aui  gratia  occupaverimt.  Liv. 

(o.)  The  plural  is  necessary  with  disjunctives,  if  the  subject  includes  the 
first  or  second  person ;  as,  Qivod  in  Decemvins  neq%i&  ego  neqtie  Ccesar  habiti  es- 
semus.  Cic. — (o.)  With  aut..Mtd  and  nec.nec  the  singular  is  preferred,  but 
with  seu...seu  and  tam...quam  the  verb  is  in  the  plural. 

(6.)  A  nominative  singular,  joined  to  an  ablative  by  the  preposition  cum, 
sometimes  has  a  singular  but  more  frequently  a  plural  verb ;  as,  Domitius  cum 
Jlessala  certus  esse  videbatur.  Cic.  Bocchus,  cum  peditibus,  posiremavi  Rd- 
mdndrum  dcietn  invadimt,  Bocchus,  with  his  foot-soldiers,  attacks  the  rear  of 
the  Roman  army.  Sail.    Ipse  dux,  cum  aliquot  princlpibus,  capiimtur.  Liv. 

(7.)   If  the  nominatives  are  of  different  persons,  the  verb  is  of  the 
rst  person  rather  than  the  second  or  third,  and  of  the  second  rather 
than  the  third ;  as, 

Si  tu  et  Tullia  valetis,  ego  et  Cicero  valemus.  If  you  and  TuUia  are  well, 
Cicero  and  I  are  well.  Cic.  Hoec  neque  ego  neque  tu  f  ecimus.  Ter.  Ego  popO- 
hisque  Romdnus  bellum  judico  fojcioque.  Liv. 

(a.)  Yet  sometimes  the  verb  agrees  in  number  and  person  with  the  nearest 
nominative,  and  is  understood  with  the  other;  as,  Vos  ijisi  et  sendtus  fvequen* 
restitit.  This  is  always  the  case  when  the  action  of  the  verb  is  qualihed  with 
reference  to  each  nommative  separately ;  as,  Ego  misere  tu  fellciter  vfivis. 


^ 


§  210.  SYNTAX. PREDICATE-NOMINATIVE.  205 

Rem.  13.  The  interjections  en,  ecce^  and  0,  are  sometimes  followed 
by  the  nominative ;  as, 

En  Pndmus !  Lo  Priam !  Virg.  En  ego,  vester  Ascanius.  Id.  Ecce  Mmo 
Catienus  !  Cic.    Ecce  iuce  llterce.  Id.    0  vir  fortis  atque  amicus  !  Ter. 

PREDICATF-NOMINATIVE. 

§  310.  A  noun  in  the  predicate,  after  a  verb  neuter  or  pas- 
sive, is  put  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  when  it  denotes  the 
same  person  or  thing ;  as, 

(a.)  When  the  subject  is  in  the  nominative;  Ira  fiiror  hrevis  est,  Anger  is  a 
short  madness.  Hor.  Ef/o  vdtor  Lyconides,  I  am  called  Lyconides.  Plant. 
EijO  imedo  regina,  I  walk  a  queen.  Virg.  Caius  et  Lucius  fratres  fuerunt.  Cic. — 
So  {b.)  when  the  subject  is  in  the  accusative  with  the  ii^nitive;  Judicem  me 
esse  volo.  Cic.  .  . 

(c.)  Somelmes  also  Vi  dative,  denoting  the  same  object,  both  precedes  and 
follows  a  vero  neuter  or  passive.  See  §  227,  N. — And  (a.)  a  predicate  abla- 
tive sometimes  follows  passive  participles  of  choosing,  naming,  etc. ;  as,  Consuli' 
bus  certioribus  yrtdis.  Liv.  See  §  257,  R.  11. 

(e.)  If  the  predicate  noun  has  a  form  of  the  same  gender  as  the  subject,  it 
takes  that  form;  as,  Licentia-  corruptrix  est  morum.  Cf.  §  204,  R.  2. — (j.)  But 
if  the  subject  is  neuter,  the  noun  of  the  predicate,  if  it  has  both  a  masculine 
and  a  feminine  form,  takes  the  former;  as,  Tempus  vltm  magister  est. 

{(J.)  An  infinitive  may  supply  the  place  of  a  predicate  nominative.  See  §  269, 
R.  4. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  Adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  participles, 
standing  in  the  predicate,  after  verbs  neuter  or  passive,  and  relating 
to  the  subject,  agree  with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case. 

(6.)  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  nouns,  the  gender  and  num- 
ber of  such  predicate  adjectives  are  determined  by  §  205,  R.  2. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  noun  in  the  predicate  sometimes  differs  in  gender  and 
number  from  the  subject;  as,  Sanguis  erant  Idcnmce,  Her  tears  were  blood. 
Ovid.   Captlvi  mtlitum  prasda  fuerunt.   Liv, 

(6.)  So  when  a  subject  in  the  singular  is  followed  by  an  ablative  with  cum, 
the  predicate  is  plural;  as,  Exsules  esse  jubet  L.  Tarquinium  cum  conjuge  et 
llbens.  Liv.  ^ 

Rem.  3.  The  verbs  which  most  frequently  have  a  noun,  etc.,  in  the 
predicate  agreeing  in  case,  etc.,  with  their  subject,  are : — 

(1.)  The  copula  sum;  as.  Ego  Jdvis  sum  fllius.  Plant.  JDisce  esse  pater. 
Ter.  The  predicate  with  suin  may  be  an  adverb  of  place,  manner,  etc. ;  as, 
Quod  est  louge  aliter.  Cic.  Rectissime  sunt  apud  te  ovinia.  Every  thing  with 
you  is  in  a  very  good  condition.  Id. ;  or  a  noun  in  an  oblique  dase ;  as,  Numen 
sine  ture  est.  Ovid.     Sunt  nobis  mltia  poma.  Virg. 

(2. )  Certain  neuter  verbs  denoting  existence,  position,  motion,  etc. ; 
as,  vivo,  exsisto,  appdreo,  cddo,  eo,  evddo,  fugio,  incedo,  jdceo,  mdneo,  sedeo,  sto, 
venio,  etc.  Thus,  Eex  circulbat  pedes.  The  king  went  round  on  foot.  Plin. 
Quos  jadicdbat  non  posse  oratores  evddere.  Cic.  Ego  huic  causae  patronus  exstlti. 
Cic.   Qui  Jit,  ut  nemo  contentus  vivat  ? 

(3.)    The  passive  of  verbs  denoting, 

(a.)  To  name  or  call;  as,  appellor,  dicor,  nominor,  nuncupor,  perlnbeor, 
salutor,  scrlboi',  inscrlbor,  vdcor.  Thus,  Cogndmine  Justus  est  appelldtns.  He  waa 
called  by  the  surname  Just.  Nep.    AristiBus  dllvce  dicitur  uiveutor.  Cic. 

18 


206  SYNTAX. ^^GEXfTlVE    AFTER    NOUNS.  §211. 

((>.)  To  choose,  render,  appoint,  or  constitute;  as,  cimsiUuoj',creor^ 
di't  laror,  designor,  fligor,  fio,  redder,  renuncior.  Thus,  Dnx  a  Romanis  electus 
est  Q.  Fdbius.     Postrjiinm^ ^phebus  factus  est.  Nep.     Certior  f actus  sum. 

(f.)  To  esteem  or  reckon;  as,  censeor,  cognoscor,  credor,  deprehendor, 
t'xistfmor,  ducor,  fevor,  lidbeor,  judicor,  jnem6ror,  nurmh-or,  pulor,  reperior,  videcr. 
Thu?,  Ci-edebar  sanguinis  auctor  ego.  Ovid.  Mdlim  videH  timldus  quam  pdrum 
prudens.  Cic. 

Note  1.  With  several  passives  of  the  last  class,  when  followed  by  a  predi- 
cate-nominative, etc.,  an  infinitive  of  sum  is  expressed  or  understood;  as, 
Ameus  nvihi  fiiisse  videor,  I  think  I  was  beside  myself.  Cic.  But  the  dative 
of  the  first  person  is  sometimes  omitted  after  videor ;  as.  Satis  ddcuisse  videor. 
Id. — AtlUus  prudens  esse  putabdtur.  Id.  So  with  dicor  (to  be  said),  and  perhi- 
beor ;  as,  Vertis  patrice  diceris  esse  pater.  Mart.  Hoc  ne  lociitus  sine  mercede 
existimer.  Phaed. 

Note  2.  Audio  is  sometimes  nsed  by  the  poets  like  appellor;  as,  Tu  rexju* 
pater^'ue  audisti  coram.  Hor. 

Rem.  4.  A  predicate-nominative  is  used  after  many  other  verbs  to  denote  a 
purpose,  time,  or  circumstance  of  the  action ;  as,  Comes  a^<?i7w«  yi?^ 
tides,  Jlolides  was  added  as  a  companion.  Virg.  Lupu£  dbawMlai  noctur- 
nus.  Id.  A^aret  liquido  sublimis  in  (zthere  Nlsus.  Id.  So  with  an  active 
verb;  Audivi  hoc  puer.  Cic.  Sapiens  nil  fdcit  inxltus.  Id.  RemxnibUcam  de- 
fendi  adolescens.  Id.    Cf  §  204,  R.  1. 

Note  3.  Insteail  of  the  predicate-nominative,  a  dative  of  the  end  or  purpose 
sometimes  occurs  (see  §227);  sometimes  an  ablative  withjtwo;  as,  audacia 
pro  rauro  «<;  and  sometimes  the  ablatives  loco  or  in  numero  with  a  genitive; 
as,  ille  est  miAi parentis  loco;  in  hostium  numero  habetur. 

Rem.  5.  The  noun  6pus,  signifying  '  need,'  is  often  used  as  a  predicate  after 
sum.  It  is,  in  such  cases,  translated  by  the  adjectives  needful,  necessary,  etc.; 
as,  Dux  nobis  et  auctor  opus  est.  Cic.  MuUi  opus  sunt  boves.  Varr.  {Dixit) 
aurum  et  ancillas  opus  esse.  Ter.    Usus  also  is  occasionally  so  construed. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  pronoun,  which  is  the  subject  of  an  infinitive,  is  omitted, 
the  case  of  the  predicate  is  Sometimes,  in  the  poets,  attracted  into  that  of  the 
subject  of  the  verb  on  which  the  infinitive  depends;  as,  Uxor  invicti  Jdvis  esse 
nescis,  i.  e.  te  esse  vxorem.  Hor.    EetMit  Ajax  esse  Jdvis  pronepos.  Ovid. 

GEmrivE. 

GENITIVE    AFTER    NOUNS. 

§  311.     A  noun  which  limits  the  meaning  of  another  noun, 

denoting  a  different  person  or  thing,  is  put  in  the  genitive ;  as, 

Amor  gloricB,  Love  of  glory;  Arma  AcUUis,  The  arms  of  Achilles;  Paier  pa- 
trice.  The  father  of  the  country;  Vitium  irce.  The  vice  of  anger;  Nemdrum  cut- 
tos,  The  guardian  of  the  groves ;  Amor  habemi.  Love  of  possessing. 

Note  1.  In  the  Irst  example,  &mor  denotes  love  in  general ;  gloria  limits  the  affection 
to  the  particular  object,  glory.  Such  universally  is  the  effect  of  the  genitive,  depending 
upon  a  noun.  Hence  the  limitation  of  a  noun  by  a  genitive  resembles  that  which  is 
effected  by  an  adjective.  In  each  the  noun  limited  constitutes  trith  its  limitation  only 
a  single  idea. 

Remark  1.  The  genitive  denotes  various  relations,  the  most  common  of 
which  are  those  of  Source;  SiS,  Radii  solis,  The  rays  of  the  sun ;— Cause;  as, 
Ddlor  pddagrce.  The  pain  of  the  gout;— Effect;  as.  Art  f ex  mundi,  The  Cre- 
ator of  the  world;— Connection;  as.  Pater  consulis.  Tie  father  of  the  con- 
sul;—Possesa  ton;  &s,  Ddmus  Qesdris,  The  house  of  C  tessiv ;— 0  bj  e  c  t ;  as, 
Cogitcitio  ahcHjus  rei,  A  thought  of  something; — Purpose;  as,  Appdrdtug 
triumphi,  Preparation  for  a  triumph ;— A  whole;  as,  Pars  hOminum,  Apart 


-t 


§211.  STNTAX. GENITIVE   AFTER   NOUNS.  207 

of  men;  this  is  called  the  partitive  genitive; — Character  or  Quality;  as, 
Adolescens  sumnue  auddcice,  A  youth  of  the  greatest  boldness ; — Ma t trial  or 
Co mp orient  Parts;  as,  Montes  auri,  Mountains  cf  gold ;  Acervus  scuiorum, 
A  heap  of  shields ; —  Ti  m  e ;  as,  FrUmentum  dierum  decern,  Corn  for  ten  days. 
Sail. 

Rem.  2.  The  genitive  is  called  subjective  or  active,  -when  it  denotes 
either  that  to  which  a  thing  belongs,  or  the  subject  of  the  action,  feel- 
ing, etc.,  implied  in  the  noun  which  it  limits.  It  is  called  objective  or 
passive,  when  it  denotes  the  obj'ect  afiected  by  such  action,  or  towards 
which  such  feeling  is  directed ;  as, 

Subjective.  Objective. 

Facta  vtrorunT,  Deeds  of  men.  I  Odium  vitii,  Hatred  of  vice.  ! 

Ddlor  dnimi,  Grief  of  mind,     y  Amor  virtutis,  Love  of  virtue. 

Junonis  Ira,  The  angerofjjono.  DesldSrium  otii,  Desire  of  leisure. 

(a.)  Whether  a  genitive  is  subjective  or  objective.,  is  to  be  determined  by 
the  meaning  of  the  words,  and  by  their  connectior  Thus,  proiidenda  Dei 
signifies  God's  providence,  or  that  exercised  by  him  timor  Dei,  the  fear  of 
God,  or  that  exercised  towards  him.  The  same  or  similar  Avords,  in  difterent 
connections,  may  express  both  significations.  Thus,  metus  hostium,  fear  of  the 
enemy,  may  mean,  either  the  fear  felt  by  the  enemy,  or  that  felt  by  their  oppo- 
nents. So  vulnvs  Ulixis  (Virg.  -^n.  2,  486.)  denotes  the  wound  which  Ulysses 
had  given;  vulnus  JEnece,  (Id.  ^n.  12,  323.)  that  which  iEneas  had  received. 

{b.)  The  relation  expressed  by  the  English  possessive  case  is  subjective,  while 
that  denoted  by  o^with  its  case  is  either  subjective  or  objective. 

(c.)  The  objective  genitive  is  of  very  extensive  use  in  Latin  in  the  limitation 
of  verbal  nouns  and  adjectives,  whatever  may  be  the  construction  of  the  verbs 
from  which  such  nouns  and  adjectives  are  derived,  whether  they  take  an  ac- 
cusative or  some  other  case  or  even  a  preposition. 

{d.)  When  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  use  of  the  objective  genitive,  a 
preposition  with  an  accusative  or  ablative  is  commonly  used ;  as,  Anwr  in 
rempublicam,  for  reipublicce,  Love  to  the  state.  Cic.  Odium  erga  R&mdnos,  for 
Romdn&rum.  Nep.  Cura  de  salute  patrics,  for  sdlutis.  Cic.  Prceddtor  ex  sociis, 
for  sdciorum.  Sail.  Sometimes  both  constructions  are  combined;  sls,  Eeverentia 
adversus  hdmines  et  opttmi  cujusque  et  reliquorum.  Cic.  Off.  1,  28. 

Note.  A  limiting  genitive  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  a  noun  in  apposition, 
especially  with  vox,  nomen,  verbum,  etc. ;  as,  vox  voluptatis,  the  word  pleasure ; 
nomen  amicitiae,  the  word  dmlcUia;  domini  appelldtio.  This  is  usual  when  the 
genus  is  defined  by  the  species ;  as,  arbor  flci,  a  fig-trfte ;  jlos  vidlce,  a  Aiolet ; 
virtus  continentise,  the  virtue  of  abstinence :  and  in  geographical  names ;  as, 
oppidum  Antiochise.  Cf.  §  204,  K.  6. — Cicero  frequently  uses  a  genitive  in  this 
manner  with  genus  and  causa ;  as,  Unum  genus  est  eorum,  qui,  etc.  Ducr  sunt 
causce,  una  piidoris,  altera  sceleris. — So,  also,  the  genitive  of  gerunds;  as,  Triste 
est  nomen  ipsum  carendi.  The  very  word  to  want  is  sad.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)   A  substantive  pronoun  in  the  genitive,  limiting  the   ^"^ 
meaning  of  a  noun,  is  commonly  objective  ;  as, 

Cura  mei,  Care  for  me.  Ovid.  Pars  tui,  Part  of  thee.  Id.  Vestri  curam  dgite. 
Curt.  This  genitive  is  used  especially  with  verbal  substantives  in  or,  ix  and  io  ; 
as,  Accusdtoi'  mei.  Cic.  Nimia  cestimdtio  sui.  Id.  Rdtionem  et  sui  et  dliorum 
habere.  Id.  • 

(&.)   Instead  of  the  subjective  or  possessive  genitive  of  a  substantive     jt- 
pronoun,  the  corresponding  adjective  pronoun  is  commonly  used ;  as.        ^ 

Liber  meus,  not  liber  mei,  my  book.  Cura  mea.  My  care,  i.  e.  the  care  exer- 
cised by  me.  Cic.  Tuas  llieras  exspecto.  Id.  Yet  the  subjective  genitive  of  a 
substantive  pronotm  sometimes  occurs ;  as,  Tui  unlus  studio,  By  the  zeal  of 
yourself  alone.  Cic. 


208  SYNTAX. GENITIVE   AFTER   NOUNS.  §211. 

(c.)  And  not  nnfreqnently,  also,  an  adjective  pronoun  occurs  instead  of  the 
objective  genitive;  as,  Mea'injuria,  Injury  to  me.  Sail.  So,  Invldia  tua,  Envy 
ot  tliee.  Fiducia  tiut,  Confidence  in  thee.*  Plaut.  Spes  men,  The  hope  placed 
in  me.  With  causa  the  adjective  pronoun,  and  never  the  genitive,  is  used; 
as,  Med  caum^  For  my  sake.  Plaut. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  Instead,  also,  of  the  subjective  genitive  of  a  «om«,  a  possessive 
adjective  is  often  used;  as,  Causa  regia,  for  causa  regis.  Cic.  Herilis  f'lUus,  for 
lieri  filius.  Id.  Evandrius  ends,  for  Evnndri.  Virg.  Herciileus  hibor,  for  Her- 
culis.  Hor.  Civilis  furor,  for  clvium.  Hor.  So,  also,  for  the  objective  genitive, 
Metus  hostilis.  Fear  of  the  enemy.  Sail. 

{b. )  The  genitive  of  the  person  implied  in  the  adjective  pronoun  or  possessive 
adjective,  or  an  adjective  agreeing  with  such  genitive,  is  sometimes  added  as 
an  apposition;  as,  Vestra.  ipsorum  causa  hoc  fed.  In  the  poets  and  later  prose 
■WTitei-s  a  participle  also  is  found  agreeing  with  such  implied  genitive;  as,  J/ea 
scrijjta  vulgo  recitdre  timentis.  Hor.     Cf.  ^  204,  R.  4,  and  §  205,  R.  13. 

s..         Rem.  5.  In  the  predicate  after  sum,  and  sometimes  aft«r  other 
verbs,  the  dative  is  used  like  the  objective  genitive ;  as, 

Idem  amor  exitium  pecori  (est),  pecdrisque  magistro.  Yirg.  Vttis  ut  arbdrtbus 
decori^  est,  ut  vltlbus  ucce —  Tu  decus  omne  tiiis.  Virg.  In  this  passage  the  dative 
decCri  and  tlie  nominative  decus  are  used  with  no  difference  of  meaning. 
Cf  §  227,  R.  4.  Auttoi- fui  senatui.  Cic.  Murcena  legatus  Lucullo /«i7.  Id. 
Ejit  ille  mihi  semper  deus.  Virg.  Huic  causaB  patronus  exstiti.  Cic.  Huic  ego 
me  hello  ducem  prof  iteor.  Id.  Se  tertium  (esse)  c\u  fdtum  foret  urbis  potlti. 
Id. —  Cum  P.  Afniano  senatus  egit,  ut  legatus  fratri  proficisceretur.  Id.  Coesar 
tegimenta  gfdeis  mllites  ex  v'wiinibus  facere  jubet.  Cffis.  Trimbantibus  Ccesar 
impi^TUt—fminentum  exercitui.  Id.  Qtuni  neque  insidice  consuli  procedebant. 
Sail.  Quern  exitum  tantis  malis  sperarent?  Id.  Sanctus  vir  et  ex  sententia 
ambobus,  scil.  qui  fuit.  Id.  See  ^  227,  R.  4. 

Note.  The  dative  in  the  preceding  examples  has  been  thought  by  some  grammarians 
to  depend  on  the  nouns  connected  with  it;  as,  exitium,  decus,  auctor,  legatus,  deus, 
patronus,  etc. ;  by  others  it  has  been  held  to  depend  on  these  nouns  in  connection  with 
the  verbs,  and  not  upon  either  separately ;  but  the  better  opinion  seems  to  be  that,  which 
makes  such  datives  grammatically  dependent  upon  the  verbs  only,  though  logically  con- 
nected also  with  the  nouns. 

(1.)  Instead,  also,  of  the  possessive  genitive,  a  dative  of  the  person 
may  follow  a  verb,  when  its  act  has  relation  to  the  body  or  possessions 
of  such  person ;  as, 

Sese  omnes  flentes  Caesari  ad  pedes  projecerunt,  They  aU,  weeping,  cast 
themselves  at  the  feet  of  Cassar.  Caes.  Cui  corpus  porrigitur,  For  whom  the 
body,  t.  e.  whose  body,  is  extended.  Virg.  Tuwi  rero  ea;urs»<  jiivenl  dolor  osslbus 
ingens.  Id.     Transftgitur  scutum  Pulfioni.  Cass. 

Rem.  6.    When  the  limiting  noun  denotes  a  property,  charac- 
y   ter,  or-  qualily,  it  has  an  adjective   agreeing  with  it,  and  is  put 
either  in  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  ;  as, 

Vir  exempli  recti,  A  man  of  correct  example.  Liv.  Adolescens  summce  auddcice, 
A  youth  of  the  greatest  boldness.  Sail.  Fossa  pedum  viginti,  A  ditch  of  twenty 
feet,  (i.  e.  in  width).  Cags.  Hamilcar  secmn  duxit  f  ilium  Bann^bdlem  annurum 
novem.  Nep.  Aiheniemes  diUgunt  Periclem,  spectatge  virtutis  virum.  Just. 
Quin^udginla  anrwi-um  yrrperium.  Id.  Iter  imiits  diei.  Cic.  Pulchrltudine  ex- 
Imia  femina,  A  womar  of  exquisite  beauty.  Cic.  Maximo  nalc  fUius,  The 
eldest  son.  Nep.  L.  CdtiVna  Juit  magna  vi  et  dnimi  et  corpdns,  sed  iugenio 
malo  pravoque.  Sail.  Spelunca  inf  inita  altitudine.  Cic. — Sometimes  botli  con- 
structions occur  in  the  same  proposition ;  as,  Lentulum  nostrum,  eximia  spe, 
smnmse  virtutis  dddlescentetn.  Cic. 


I 


§  211.  SYNTAX. GENITIVE   AFTEE   NOUNS.  209 

(1.)  A  genitive  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  tl  ^  adjective;  and  the  noun 
denoting  the  property,  etc.,  is  then  always  put  in  the  ablative;  as,  Est  bos 
cervi  figura,...of  the  form  of  a  stag.  Cses.  Uri  specie  et  colore  tauri.  Id. 
Frutex  palmi  aliUudine.  Plin.    Clam  dlgiti  pollicis  crassitudine.  Cses. 

(2.)  All  the  qualities  and  attributes  of  persons  and  things,  whether  inherent 
or  accidental,  may  be  thus  expressed  by  the  genitive  and  ablative  of  quality, 
provided  the  substantives  are  iinmediately  connected;  as^  fossa  quindecim  pedum; 
homo  antlqud  viriute.  It  hence  follows  that  such  genitives  and  ablatives,  when 
used  to  express  duration  of  time  or  extent  of  space,  are  distinguished  from  the 
cases  in  which  the  accusative  is  required,  since  the  latter  case  always  follows 
adjectives  or  verbs;  &s,  Jhssa  quindecim  pedes  lata.:  puer  decern  annos  natus. 
Of.  §  236. 

(3.)  Whether  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  of  quality  is  preferable  in  particu- 
lar cafes,  can  frequently  be  determined  only  by  reference  to  classical  authority; 
but,  in  general,  the  genitive  is  used  more  frequently  to  express  inherent  quali- 
ties than  such  as  are  merely  accidental,  while  the  ablative  is  used  indifferently 
for  either  purpose.  In  speaking  of  transitory  qualities  or  conditions  the  ffbla- 
tive  is  always  used ;  as.  Magna  timore  stim,  I  am  in  great  fear.  Cic.  Bdiw  dnimo 
sum.  Id.  Quanta  fuerim  dolore  meministi.  Id.  Maximo  h6nore  Serviu^  Tullius 
h'at.  Liv.  With  plural  substantives  the  genitive  is  rare ;  while  in  expressions 
of  measure  it  is  used  rather  than  the  ablative. 

(4.)  An  accusative  instead  of  a  genitive  of  quality  is  used  with  sScus  (sex), 
gUnus  and  pondo ;  as,  Llberorum  cajMuvi  virile  secus  ad  decern  millia  capta,  i.  e. 
of  the  male  sex,  instead  of  sexus  tirllis.  Liv.  So ,  genus,  when  joined  with  a 
pronoun,  as  hoc,  id,  illud,  quod,  or  with  omne,  is  used  for  hujus,  ejus,  omnis,  etc., 
generis ;  as,  Ordtiones  aut  dliquid  id  genus  scrlbere,— -of  that  kind.  Cic.  Omcre~ 
dere  nugas  hoc  genus.  Hor.  So  pondo  is  joined  as  an  indeclinable  word  to  the 
accusatives  Ubram  and  libras;  as,  Dictator  cdronam  auream  ISbroxti  pondo  in 
CdpUolio  Jdvi  donum  pdsuit,...a  pound  in  weight.  Liv.    Cf.  §  236,  R.  7. 

(5.)  The  genitive  mddi  with  an  adjective  pronoun  supplies  the  place  of  a 
pronoun  of  quality ;  as,  cujusm:ddi  Ubrt,  the  same  as  qudles  Ubri,  what  kind  of 
books ;  hujusmddi  libri,  i.  e.  tales  libri,  such  books.  So,  also,  gSnSris  is  used, 
but  less  frequently. 

(6.)  With  the  genitive  of  measure  are  often  connected  such  ablatives  as 
hnpitudine,  IdtUadine,  etc.,  or' in  longitudinem,  etc,  as,  fossa  decern  pSdum  Idti- 
iudine ;  but  the  genitive  does  not  depend  on  these  words. 

(7.)  Sum  may  be  followed  by  either  the  genitive  or  the  ablative  of  quality 
with  an  ellipsis  of  the  word  limited,  which,  with  the  genitive,  is  Mmo,  res,  nego- 
iium,  prdprium  or  prdprius,  etc.,  and  with  the  ablative,  prcecUtus,  instructus, 
orndtus,  etc.  Cf.  Rem.  8,  and  §§  244,  and  249,  I.. 

Rkm.  7.  (1.)  The  limited  noun  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  0  mtsSrce  sortis! 
scW.  homines ;  0  (men)  of  wretched  fortune  I'Lucan.  Ad  Didnce,  scil.  csdem. 
Ter.  Hecidris  Andrdmdche,  scil.  uxor.  Virg.  Suspiciojiis  vltandce,  scil.  causa.  Tac. 
So  filius  or  f'llia ;  as,  Hannibal  Gisgonis. 

( 2. )  The  omitted  noun  may  sometimes  be  supplied  from  the  preceding  words ; 
a?,  Ciijum  pecusf  an  Mellbczif  Non  ;  verum  JEgonis,  scil.  pScu^.  Virg.  An 
adjective  is  often  expressed  referring  to  the  noun  omitted;  as,  Nullam  virtus 
dliam  mercedem  deslderat,  prceter  hanc  (scil.  mercedem)  laudis.  Cic. 

Rem.  8.  The  limited  noun  is  often  wanting  in  the  predicate  of  a 
sentence  after  sum.     This  usually  happens, 

(1.)    When  it  has  been  previously  expressed ;  as, 

Hcec  ddmus  est  Ccesdris,  This  house  is  Caesar's.  Norr.en  auroe  tarn  scspe  vdcd- 
turn  esse  putans  Nymphce.  Ovid.  Naves  dner  arias,  qudrxm  minor  nulla  erat  duum 
tnillium  amphdrum,  i.  e.  qudrum  minor  nulla  erat  quam  i  avis  duum,  etc.  Cic. 

(2.)  When  it  Is  a  general  word  denoting  a  person,  an  animal, 
etc.;  as, 

18* 


210  SYNTAX. — GENITIVE  AFTER  NOUNS.  §  211. 

Thucpdides,  qui  ejusdem  cetdtis  fuU,  scil.  hdmo,  Thucydides,  who  was  of  the 
same  age.  Xep.  MuUum  ei  dHraxit,  quod  dlienee  erat  ciritatis^  scil.  hdmo  or  civis. 
Id.  Prtmum  sdpendium  meruit  annorum  decern  sepiemque,  scil.  udoltscens.  Id. 
Summi  ut  sint  laboris  efficiunt,  scil.  dniTfiaUa.  Caes.  (  Claudius)  sonini  brevissiitii 
erat  Suet.  Mird  suui  dlacritdle.  Cic.  Vulgus  ingenio  mobili  erat.  Sail.  Non 
est  juris  sui.  He  is  not  his  own  master.  Lucau.  Pdtestdtis  sute  esse.  Liv. 
SudruDique  reruin  erant.  Id.    Cf.  Rem.  6,  (7.) 

(3.)  When  it  is  a  general  word  denoting  thing,  for  which,  in  Eng- 
lish, the  words  part,  property,  duty,  office,  business,  characteristic,  etc., 
are  commonly  supplied ;  as, 

Temeritas  est  florentis  cetdtis,  prudentia  seneciutis,  Rashness  is  (the  character- 
istic) of  youth,  prudence  of  old  age.  Cic.  Est  hoc  GaUica  consuMudinis.  Caes. 
So,  stultiiice  est ;  est  ledidtis,  etc.,  which  are  equivalent  to  stuliitia  est,  levitas  est 
Omnia  hostium  erani.     A  paucis  end,  quod  multdrum  esset.  Sail. 

(a.)  This  happens  especially  when  the  subject  of  the  verb  is  an  infinitive,  or 
an  entire  clause,  in  which  case,  instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  personal  pronouns, 
mei,  tui,  etc.,  the  neuters  of  the  possessives,  meum,  tuum,  etc.,  are  used ;  as, 
AdOlescentis  est  mdjores  ndtu  revereri,  It  is  (the  dutv)  of  a  vouth  to  reverence 
the  aged.  Ovid.  Cujusvis  hominis  est  errdre,  mdfius  nisi  insipientis  in  errore 
perseverdre.  Cic.  Pauperis  est  numerdre  pectis.  Ovid.  So  especially  v}dri$  est ; 
as,  Negdvit  moris  esse  Grauorum,  ut  in  convlvio  virorum  accumherent  mulieres,  the 
same  as  inorem  esse  Grcecorum.  Cic.  J^^ihil  tarn  cequandce  llbertutis  esse.  Liv. 
So  when  the  verb  is  omitted ;  Tdtnen  officii  duxit,  exordre  patrem,  scU,  esse. 
Suet.    Non  est  mtndri  meum.  Ter.    Tuum  est,  M.  Cdto,  videre  quid  dgdtur. 

(b.)  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  a  substantive,  also,  the  neuter  of  a  possessive 
adjective  derived  from  it  is  sometimes  used;  as,  Huraanum  est  errdre,  To  en 
is  human.  Ter.    £t  fdcert  et  jMti  fortia  ROmanum  est.  Liv. 

(4.)  The  same  construction  sometimes  occurs  after^dttb,  and  some  other 
verbs  mentioned  in  ^  230,  esse  being  understood;  as,  Asia  ROmdnorvm  facta  est, 
Asia  became  (a  possession)  of  the  Romans.  Just.  Agrum  suoe  chiionis  fecisse. 
Liv. 

(5.)  The  limited  noun  is  sometimes  wanting,  when  it  is  a  general  word, 
though  not  in  the  predicate  after  sum ;  as,  Mugjii  formica  hiboris,  scil.  animal. 
The  ant  (an  animal)  of  great  labor.  Hor.  So  Li  vinit  in  mentem  pdtestdtis  iuce, 
scil.  memdria,  or  the  like.  Cic. 

Note.  When  the  noun  which  is  wanting  denotes  a  thing,  grammarians  sometimes  sup- 
ply nSgotium,  offlcium,  munus,  dpus,  res,  causa,  etc.  It  is  an  instance  of  a  construc- 
tion common  in  Latin,  to  omit  a  noun  when  a  general  idea  is  intended.  See  §  205, 
Bern.  7,  (2.) 

Rem.  9.   The  limiting  noun  also  is  sometimes  omitted;  as, 

Tria  miUia,  scil.  passuum.  In  most  cases  of  this  kind,  an  adjective,  adjec- 
tive pronoun,  or  participle,  is  expressed  in  the  genitive. 

Rem.  10.  Two  genitives  sometimes  limit  the  same  noun,  one  of 
which  is  commonly  subjective,  and  the  other  objective ;  as, 

A^amemnonis  belli  gloria,  Agamemnon's  glory  in  war.  Nep.  lUius  adminit- 
trdtio  provinciae.  Cic.  Eorum  dierum  consmtudine  ItTneris  rwstri  exercitus  per- 
q}ectd.  Cses.  Orbitas  reipublTcae  talium  virorum.  Cic.  Pro  veteribus  Helvetio- 
rum  injui-iis  populi  Romaid.  Caes. 

Rem.  11.  Opus  and  iisus  are  rarely  limited  by  a  genitive  or  accusa- 
tive, but  generally  by  an  ablative,  of  the  thing  needed ;  as, 

Argenti  dpus  fuit,  There  was  need  of  money.  Liv.  Ad  corisiUum  pemandum 
temporis  Opus  esse.  Id.  Prooemii  non  semper  usus  est.  Quint.  Si  quo  opera 
eoruia  usus  est.  Liv.  Pucro  opus  est  cibum.  Plaut  Usus  est  hoxnlnem  as^Mum. 
la.    See  ^  243. 


§  212.      SYNTAX. GENITIVE  AFTER  PARTITIVES.        211 

Rem.  12.    The  relation  denoted  bj'  the  genitive  in  Latin^  is  gener- 
ally express  3d,  in  P^nglish,  by  of,  or  by  the  possessive  case.  Cf.  R.  2,  (/>.)   ^ 
Tlie  objective  genitive  may  often  be  rendered  by  some  other  prepo-  ^ 
sition ;  as, 

Renmlium  ddloris,  A  remedy  for  pain.  Injuria  patris,  Injury  to  a  father. 
Besteiisus  Acerni,  The  descent  to  Avernus.  Ira  belli,  Anger  ou  account  of  the 
war.    FOtestas  rei,  Power  in  or  over  a  thing. 

Note.  Certjiin  limitationa  of  nouns  are  made  by  the  accusative  with  a  preposition, 
and  by  the  ablative,  either  with  or  without  a  preposition.    Of.  f  202,  6,  I.  and  II. 

GENITIVp    AFTER    PARTITIVES. 

§  212,     Nouns,  adjectives,  adjective  pronouns,  and  adverbs,     1^ 
denoting  a  part,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting  the  whole ;  '^ 
as. 

Pars  cMidiis,  A  part  of  the  state.  Nulla  sdrorum,  No  one  of  the  sisters. 
Aliquis  phildsdphdrum,  Some  one  of  the  philosophers.  Quis  mortdlium  ?  Who  of 
mortals  V  Major  juvenum,  The  elder  of  the  youths.  I)ociissimtcs  Romanorum, 
The  most  learned  of  the  Romans.  Multum  pecunue,  Much  (of)  money.  Satis 
eldquenticBj  Enough  of  eloquence.  Ubinani  gentium  sumusf  Where  on  earth 
are  we  ? 

Note.  The  genitive  thus  governed  denotes  either  a  number,  of  which  the  partitive  de- 
eignates  one  or  more  individuals;  or  a  whole,  of  which  the  partitive  designates  a  portion. 
In  the  latter  sense,  the  genitive  of  common  and  abstract  nouns  commonly  follows  either 
the  neuter  of  adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  or  adverbs ;  and  that  of  material  nouns 
depends  on  substantives  signifying  quantity,  weight  or  measure ;  as,  mSdimnuni  tilttci, 
a  bushel  of  wheat;  libra  far  r  is  ;  jugSrum  agri;  magna  vis  auri. 

Remark  1.  Nouns  denoting  a  part  are  pars,  nemo,  nihil,  etc.,  and 
also  nouns  denoting  measure,  weight,  etc. ;  as,  modius,  medimnumj 
and  libra  ;  as,  . 

Nemo  nostrum,  No  one  of  us.  Maxima  pars  \\0Ya\'nnva..  Nihil  humdndrun 
remm.  Cic.     Dlmidium  mlhtum.  Liv.     Medimnum  tritici.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  Adjectives  and  adjective  pronouns,  denoting  a  part  of  a 
number,  including  partitives  and  words  used  partitively,  compara- 
tives, superlatives,  and  numerals,  are  followed  by  the  genitive  plural, 
or  by  the  genitive  singular  of  a  collective  noun. 

(1.)  Partitives  (§104,  9,);  as,  ullus,  nullus,  solus,  alius,  titer,  Uterque,  utercum- 
gue,  utercis,  uterlibet,  neuter,  alter,  alteruter,  aliquis,  quldam,  quispiam,  quisquis, 
quisaue,  quisquam,  qulcumque,  unusquisque,  quis  f  qui  f  quot  f  quotus  ?  quotusquis- 
que  I  tdt,  dllqudt,  nonnulli,  plerlque,  mutti,  pauci,  medius.  Thus,  Quisquis  deorum. 
Whoever  of  the  gods.  Ovid.  Consulum  alter.  One  of  the  consuls.  Liv.  Multi 
hominum,  Many  men.  Plin.  £t  medius  jUvenum  Ibat ;  i.  e.  between.  Ovid.  For 
the  geiuifir  of  adjectives  used  partitively,  see  $  205,  R.  12. 

(2.)  Words  used  partitively;  as,  ExpedHi  mllitum,  The  light-armed  (of  the) 
Boldiei-s.  Liv.  Delecti  equftum  .  Id.  Veteres  Ronidnorum  ductim.  Veil.  Siiperi 
deorum,  Tlie  gods  above.  Hor.  Sancie  deorum.  Virg.  Degeneres  cdnum.  Plin. 
Piscium  ftmince.  Id. 

(3.)  Comparatives  and  superlatives;  as,  Doctior  juvenum.  Ordtoi'um  prces- 
tantxssimus.     E Idquentissimus  Romdnorum.    OpUmus  omnium. 

(4.)  Numerals,  both  cardinal  and  ordinal;  also  the  distributive  singuli;  as, 
Equitum  centum  quinqudginta  inlerfecti,  A  hundred  and  "fifty  of  the  horsemen 
were  killed.  Curt.     mpieMum  octdvus.  Hor.     Singulos  vestrum.  Curt 


-V 


212  SYNTAX. GENITIVE   AFTER   PARTITIYES.  §  212. 

(5.)  The  meaning  is  often  nearly  the  same,  whether  the  partitive  adjective  agrees  in 
case  and  number  with  a  noun,  or  takes  such  noun  after  it  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Docthsl- 
mus  Rd7ndnoru7n,  or,  doctisshnus  Rdmamis:  Alter  consulum,  or  alter  consul.  But  thfe 
genitive  cannot  be  used,  when  the  adjective  includes  the  same  number  of  things  as  that 
of  which  the  whole  consists;  as,  Viniamus  ad  vivos.,  qm  duo  supersunt ;  not  guGriim 
duo,  since  these  are  all,  though  we  say  in  English,  •  of  whom  two  survive.' 

Note  1.  (a.)  The  comparative  with  the  genitive  denotes  one  of  tioo  individ- 
'  uals  or  classes;  the  superlative  denotes  a  part  of  a  number  greater  than  two; 
as,  Major  fratrum,  The  elder  of  two  brothers.  Maximus  frdtrum,  The  eldest 
of  tliree  or  more. 

(6.)  In  like  manner,  titer,  alter,  and  neuter,  generally  refer  to  two;  quiz,  alius, 
and  nullus,  to  a  whole  consisting  of  more  than  two;  as,  Uter  nostrum  ?  Which 
of  us  (two  ?)   Quis  vestrum  t  Which  of  you  (three  or  more  ?) 

NoTK  2.  Nostrum  and  vestrum  are  used  as  partitive  genitives,  in  preference 
to  nostri  and  vestri,  and  are  always  joined  with  omnium  even  when  the  genitive 
is  a  subjective  one;  as,  Patria,  quce  communis  est  omnium  nostrum  parens.  Cic. 
But  vestrum  sometimes  occurs  in  other  connections  also  without  a  partitive 
meaning;  as,  Quis  erit  tarn  ciiptdus  vesttmrn.  Cic. 

Note  3.  The  partitive  word  is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Fies  nobiUum  tu  qud- 
gue  fontium,  scil.  unus.  Hor.   Centies  sestertium,  scil.  centcna  niillia. 

Note  4.  The  noun  denoting  the  whole,  after  a  partitive  word,  is  often  put 
in  the  ablative,  with  the  prepositions  de,  e,  ex,  or  in,  or  m  the  accusative,  with 
ajyud  or  inter ;  as,  Nemo  de  iis.  Alter  ex  censoribus.  Liv.  Unv^  ex  multis.  Cic. 
Acerrimus  ex  sensibus.  Id.  Tholes,  qui  sapientissimas  in  septem  fuit.  Id. 
Primus  inter  omnes.  Virg  Croisus  inter  reges  dpulentissimus.  Sen.  Apud  Hel- 
vetios  nobiUssimu^. 

Note  5.  The  whole  and  its  parts  are  frequently  placed  in  apposition,  dis- 
tributively;  as,  Interfectores,  pars  in  /drum,  pars  Sprdcusas  perguiit.  Liv. 
See  §  204,  R.  10. 

Note  6.  Cuncti  and  omnes,  like  partitives,  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  gen- 
itive plural ;  as,  Attdlus  Macedonum  fere  omnibus  persudsit,  AttrUus  persuaded 
almost  all  the  Macedonians.  Liv.  Cunctos  homlnum.  Ovid.  Cunctas  provinci- 
finmi.  Plin. 

Note  7.  In  the  followingpassage,  the  genitive  singular  seems  to  be  used  like 
that  of  a  collective  noun :  Totius  autem  injustitiae  nulla  cdpitdlior  est,  etc.  Cic. 
Off.  1,  13.  The  phrase  Rem  nulla  vi6do  prdbdbilem  omnium  (Cic.  Nat.  Deor.  1, 
27,)  seems  to  boused  for  Rem  nulh  omnium  mddorum  prdbdbilem. 

Rem.  3.  The  genitive  denoting  a  whole,  may  depend  on  a  neuter 
adjective  or  adjective  pronoun.  With  these  the  genitive  singular  is 
commonly  used ;  as, 

Plus  eldqueniiie.  More  (of)  eloquence.  Tantum  fnhi.  So  much  fidelity.  Id 
(empdris,  That  time.  Ad  hoc  cetdtis.  Sometimes  the  genitive  plural ;  as,  Id 
miseridrutn.  Ter.     Arrndrum  quantum.  Caes. 

Note  1.  (a.)  Most  neuter  adjectives  used  partitively  denote  quantity;  ns, 
tantum,  quantum,  dliquantum,  plus,  minus,  minimnm,  dlmidium,  multum,  ni'mium, 
paulum,  plwimum,  reliquum ;  with  the  compounds  and  diminutives,  ^rrn/M/j<rt», 
tantundem,  quantulum,  quantHlumcumque,  etc. ;  to  which  add  miidium,  summum, 
idtimurn,  dliud,  etc.  The  pronouns  thus  used  are  hoc,  id,  illud,  iMud,  idem,  quod, 
and  quid,  with  their  compounds,  d'iquid,  quidquid,  quippiam,  quidquam,  qiml- 
cumque. 

(6.)  Most  of  these  adjectives  &jd  pronouns  may  either  agree  with  their 
nouns,  or  take  a  genitive ;  but  the  latter  is  more  common.  Tantum,  quantum;- 
dbquanttim,  and  2)liis,  when  they  denote  quantity,  are  used  with  a  genitive  only, 
as  are  also  quid  and  its^  compounds,  when  they  denote  a  part,  sort,  etc.,  and 
gudd  in  the  sense  of  quantum.  Thus,  Quantum  crevii  NUus,  tantum  spei  tn 
atinumest.  Sen.    Quid  muli^ris  uxdrem  hdbes?  What  kind  of  a  woman...  Ter. 


§  212.  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    A'FTER   PARTITIVES.  213 

AUquid  formse.  Cic.   Quid  hoc  rei  est?  What  does  this  mean?  Ter.   Quod  slwA, 
qicod  argenti,  quod  ornamentOrum  J'uity  id  Verves  abstCdit. 

Note  2.  Neuter  adjectives  and  pronouns,  when  followed  by  a  genitive,  are 
to  be  accounted  substantives,  and  m  this  construction  ai-e  found  only  in  the 
nominative  and  accusative. 

NoTii  3.  Sometimes  the  genitive  after  these  adjectives  and  pronouns  is  a 
neuter  adjective,  of  the  second  declension,  without  a  noun ;  as,  Tantum  bdnL 
So  much  good.  Si  gtiid  hdbes  novi,  If  you  have  any  thing  new.  Cic.  Quid 
reliyui  estf  Ter.  I^ ihil  is  also  used  with  such  a  genitive;  as,  iVt7/i7  sinceri,  No 
sincerity.  Cic.  This  construction  occurs  very  rarely  with  neuter  adjectives  in 
e  of  the  third  declension,  and  only  in  connection  with  neuters  of  the  second 
declension ;  as,  Si  quidquam  non  dico  civilis  sed  huimni  esset.  Liv. 
^  Note  4.  In  the  poets  and  in  the  prose  writers  later  than  Cicero,  neuter  ad- 
jectives in  the  plural  number  are  sometimes  foUowed  by  a  genitive,  either  sin- 
gular or  plural,  with  a  partitive  signification ;  as,  ExtJ-'ema  imperii,  The  fron- 
tiers of  the  empire.  Tac.  Pontes  et  viarum  angusta,  The  bridges  and  the  nar- 
row parts  of  the  roads.  Id.  Opdca  Idcorwn.  Virg.  Antlqua  foederum.  Liv. 
Cuncta  camporum.  Tac.  Exercent  colles,  atque  horum-  asperrima  xxiscunt.  Virg. 
Cf.  §  205,  K.  9. 

Rem.  4.  The  adverbs  sat,  satis,  parum,  nimis,  abunde,  largiter^ 
affatlm,  and  partim,  used  partitively,  are  often  followed  by  a  geni- 
tive; as, 

Sat  rdtionis.  Enough  of  reason.  Virg.  Satis  eldquentice,  partem  sapientice, 
Enough  of  eloquence,  (yet)  but  little  wisdom.  Sail.  Nimis  insldidrum.  Cic. 
Terroris  et  J'raudis  douime  est.  Virg.  Auri  et  argenti  largiier.  Plant.  Copidi'um 
affdtim.  Liv.   Quum  j^artim  illorum  mild  fdmilidrissimi  essent,  Cic. 

Note  1.  The  above  words,  though  generally  adverbs,  seem,  in  this  use,  rather 
to  be  nouns  or  adjectives. 

Note  2.  (a.)  The  genitives  gentium,  terrdrum,  I5ci,  and  Idcorum,  with  certain 
adverbs  of  place,  strengthen  their  meaning;  as,  Usquam  terrdrum.  Just.  Usquam 
gentium.  Any  where  whatever.  Plant.  Ifbi  terrdrum  sfunusf  Where  in  the 
world  are  we?  Cic.  Ablre  quo  terrdrum  possent.  Liv.  Ubi  sit  I6ci.  Plin.  Eo 
l6ti,  equivalent  to  eo  loco.  In  that  place.  Tac.  Eddem  loci  res  est.  Cic.  Nescire 
quo  loci  esset.  Id.  But  the  last  three  examples  might  perhaps  more  properly 
be  referred  to  Kem.  3. 

(6.)  The  adverbs  of  place  thus  used  are  ubi,  Obinam,  ubicumque,  ubiObi,  ubivis, 
vbique,  unde,  usquam,  nu^quam,  quo,  quocumque,  quovis,  qudquo,  dllquo,  hie,  hue, 
eo,  eddem.  Ldci  also  occurs  after  ibi  and  ibidem ;  gentium  after  tonge ;  as,  Ibi 
Idci,  In  that  place.  Plin.  Abes  huge  gentium.  Cic.  So,  minime  gentium,  By  no 
means.  Ter.  VicinioB  in  the  genitive  is  used  by  the  comic  writers  after  hie  and 
hue;  as.  Hie  proxtmce  vlcinice.  Plaut.    Hue  viclnice.  Ter.   Cf.  §  221,  K.  3,  (4.) 

Note  3.  Hue,  eo,  quo,  when  used  figuratively  to  express  a  degree,  are  joined 
also  with  other  genitives;  as,  £b  insolentise  fxtrbrisgue  pi-ocessit.  He  advanced 
to  such  a  degree  of  insolence  and  madness.  Plin.  Hue  enim  malorum  ventum 
est.  Curt.  Huccine  rerum  venimus?  Have  we  come  to  this?  Pers.  Eo  miseria- 
rum  venire,  To  such  a  pitch  of  misery.  Sail.    Quo  amentias  progressi  sitis.  Liv. 

Note  4.  The  genitives  ldci,  Idcorum,  and  tempdris,  appear  to  be  redundant 
after  the  adverbs  adhuc,  inde,  inth'ea,  postea,  turn,  and  tunc,  in  expressions  de- 
noting time;  as,  Adhuc  Idcorum,  Till  now.  Plant.  Inde  ldci.  After  that.  Lucr. 
Inierea  ldci.  In  the  mean  time.  Ter.  Postea  ldci,  Afterwards.  Sail.  Turn  tem- 
pdris, and  tunc  tempdris.  At  that  time.  Just.  Ldcdrum  also  occurs  after  icZ, 
denoting  time ;  as.  Ad  id  locdrum.  Up  to  that  time.  Sail.    Cf.  R.  3. 

Note  5.  When  the  genitive  ejus  occurs  after  quoad,  in  such  connections  as 
the  following:  Quoad  ejusfdcere  pdteris.  Cic;  or  passively.  Quoad  ejus  Jieri 
possit,  As  far  as  may  be.  Cic. ;  the  ejus  refers  to  the  preceding  clause;  literally 
as  much  of  it  as  possible. 


214  SYNTAX. — GENITIVB  AFTER  ADJECTIVES.  §  213. 

Note  6.  Prtdie  and  postricKe,  though  reckoned  adverbs,  are  followed  by  a 

genitive,  depending  on  the  noun  dies  contained  in  them ;  as,  Pridie  ejus  diei, 
t.  On  the  day  "before  that  day,  i.  e.  The  day  before.  Cic.  Pridie  insididrum. 
The  day  before  the  ambush.  Tac.  Posirldle  ejus  diei,  The  next  day.  Caes. 
When  they  are  followed  by  an  accusative,  ante  or  post  is  understood.  Cf. 
§238ri,(6.) 

Note  7.  Adverbs  in  the  superlative  degree,  like  then-  adjectives,  are  follow- 
ed by  a  genitive ;  as,  Optime  omnium,  Best  of  all.  Cic. 

GENITIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES. 

§  21S,  A  noun,  limiting  the  meaning  of  an  adjective,  is  put 
in  the  objective  genitive,  to  denote  the  relation  expressed  in 
EngHsh  by  o/J  m,  or  in  respect  to  ;  as, 

Avidus  laudis.  Desirous  of  praise.        Plena  timoris,  Full  of  fear. 

Appetens  gloriae,  Eager  for  glory.        Egenus  aquae.  Destitute  of  water. 

Memor  virtutis.  Mindful  of  virtue.       Doctus  fandi,  Skilful  in  speaking. 

So,  Nescia  mens  f  ati.  The  mind  ignorant  in  regard  to  fate.  Virg.     Impdtens 

Irse,  lit.  Powerless  in  respect  to  anger,  i.  e.  unable  to  control  it.  Liv.     Homines 

expertes  veritatis,  Men  destitute  of  truth.  Cic.    Lactis  abundant,  Abounding 

in  milk.  Virg.     Ter^a  ferax  arborum,  Land  productive  of  trees.  Plin.     Tenax 

ErOposIti  vir^  A  man  tenacious  of  his  purpose.  Hor.  ^^er  animi,  Sick  in  mind. 
,iv.  Ldcus  medius  juguli  summique  lacerti,  i.  e.  between.  Ovid.  Moi'um  din 
versus.  Tac.  Operum  sdlutus.  Hor.  Liber  Idboi-um.  Id.  Integer  vita  scelerisqu^ 
purus,  Upright  in  life,  and  free  from  wickedness.  Hor.  Vini  pollens  Liber.  Plaut. 

From  the  above  examples,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  genitive  after  an  adjective  is  some- 
times translated  by  other  words  besides  q/",  in,  or  in  respect  to,  though  the  relation  which 
it  denotes  remains  the  same.    Cf.  211,  B,.  12. 

Remark  1.  The  following  classes  of  adjectives,  which,  as  denoting  a' relation 
to  a  thing,  are  called  relative  adjectives  (§  104,  13),  are  frequently  limited  by  a 
genitive;  viz.  (1.)  Verbals  in  ax;  as,  cdpax,  edax,  firax,  fhgax,  peTTicox, 
wnax,&tc. — (2.)  Participials  in  ns,  and  a  few  m  ius^  with  their  com- 
pounds; as,  dmans,  appetens,  cOpiens,  efficiens,  pdtiens,  impdtiens,  sitiens; — coti- 
tuUus,  doctus,  sdlatus. — (3.)  Adjectives  denoting  desire  or  aversion;  as, 
avdrus,  avidus,  cupldus,  stOdidsus  ;  fastidiosus  :—p  articipation;  as,  particeps^ 
affinis,  consors,  exsoi's,  expers,  inops : — k nowledge,  e xp erience,  capac- 
ity, and  their  contraries ;  &s,  callidus,  compos,  conscius,  gndrus,  igndrus,  perl- 
tus,  imperitus,  impos,  p6tens,  impOtens,  prudens,  imprudens,  expertus,  inexpertus, 
conscius,  inscius,  nescius,  insdlens,  insolitus^  insueius,  rudis,  sellers : — m emory 
smdforgetfulness;  as,meni07%  immemoi;  etc.: — certainty  and  doubt; 
2is,certus,  incertus,  ambiauus,  dubius,  susperisus: — care  and  neglig ence;  as, 
anxius,  soUkitus,  proviaus,  improvidus,  securus:—fear  and  confidence; 
as,  pdvldus,  timidus,  trepidus,  impdvidus,  fidens,  interritus : — g uiltsmd  inno- 
cence; as,  noxius,  reus,  suspectus,  compertus,  manifestos,  innoxius,  innocenSj 
inso7)s :— /> lenty  and  want;  as,  dbundans,  plenus,  dives,  sdtus,  largus,  inops, 
igenus,  indnis,  pauper,  parens,  s6luius,  vacuus. 

(a.)  In  the  poets  and  later  prose  "writers,  many  other  adjectives,  particularly 
those  which  express  mental  emotions,  are  in  like  manner  limited  by  a  genitive, 
especially  by  dnimi,  ingenii,  mentis,  ircB,  mllitice,  belli,  Idboris,  rerum,  cevi,  futw'i, 
monim,  and  fidei. 

Rem.  2.  The  limiting  genitive,  by  a  Greek  construction,  sometimes  denotes 
a  cause  or  source,  especially  in  the  poets ;  as,  Lassus  maris,  et  viamm,  militiae- 
ywe.  Hor.  .Fessus  rice.  Stat.  Fessus  maris.  Hor.  Attdniius  s&rpentis.  Sil.  Mens 
tnterrita  leti.  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  Participles  in  ns,  when  used  as  such,  take  after  them  th%  same  case 
as  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  derived ;  as,  Se  dmans.  Loving  himself.  Cic 
Jddre  terram  appetens.  Id. 


§  213.     SYNTAX. GENITIVE  AFTER  ADJECTIVES.       215 

Rem.  4.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  denoting  o/,  in,  or  in  respect  to,  a 
different  construction  is  sometimes  used  after  many  of  these  adjec- 
tives; as, 

(1.)  An  infinitive  or  a  subjunctive  clause;  as,  Certm  ire,  Determined  to  ga 
Ovid.  Cantare  perlti.  Virg.  Feilcior  unguere  tela.  Id.  Aiixius  quid  facto 
opus  sit.  Sail.  Vive  nmnor  quam  sis  sevi  brevis.  Hor. — So  dlienus,  dcidus, 
calMus,  ciipidus,  firmus,  freqmns,  gnarus,  impdtens,  inops,  Icetus,  largus,  libei\ 
pollens,  memor,  dubiiLs,  etc. 

(2.)  An  accusative  with  a  preposition ;  as.  Ad  rem  dvidior.  Ter.  Avidus  in 
direptiones.  Liv.  Animus  capax  ad  praecepta.  Ovid.  Ad  casum  fortflnam-y"* 
fellx.  Cic.  Ad  fraudem  callidus.  Id.  Duigens  ad  custodiendum.  Id.  Negli- 
gentior  in  patrem.  Just.  Vir  ad  disciplinam  perltus.  Cic.  Ad  bella  rudis.  Liv. 
Pdtens  in  res  bellicas.  Id.  Aldcer  ad  maleficia.  Cic.  Inter  bellum  et  pacem 
nihil  medium  est.  Id. — So  with  rd,  fertllis,  Jirmus,  injirmus,  pdtens,  si^Hlis,  etc. — 
with  in,  cupidus,  parous,  pdiens,  prodigus,  etc. 

(3.)  An  accusative  without  a  preposition,  chiefly  in  the  poets;  as,  Nudus 
membra,  Bare  as  to  his  limbs.  Virg.  Os,  hiimerosTwe  deo  simiUs  Id.  Cetera 
fulvus.  Hor.    Cuncta  pollens.  Sen.  Ag.     See  §  234,  II. 

(4.)  An  ablative  with  a  preposition;  as,  Avidus  in  pecuniis,yEager  m  re- 
gard to  money.  Cic.  Anxius  de  f  ama.  Quint.  Rudis  in  jiire  clvili.  Cic.  Peri' 
tu8  de  agncultura  Varr.  PrUdens  in  jiire  cMli.  Cic.  Eeus  de  vi.  Id.  Puni$ 
ab  cultu  humane.  Liv.  Certior  f actus  de  re.  Cic.  Sollicitus  de  re.  Id.  Siiper 
scelere  suspectus.  Sail.  Inoiis  ab  amicis.  Cic.  Pauper  in  sere.  Hor.  Mddicua 
in  cultu.  Plin.  Ab  aquis  steHlis.  Apul.  Copiosus  a  frumento.  Cic.  Ab  equitatu 
Jirmus.  Id.  So  with  in,  immddicus,  parens,  uber : — with  ab,  dlienus,  hedius,  ex- 
torris,  immunis,  inops,  liber,  nudus,  orhus,  vacuum. 

(5.)  An  ablative  without  a  preposition ;  as.  Arte  rudis,  Eude  in  art.  Ovid. 
Regni  ciimine  insons.  Liv.  Compos  mente.  Virg.  PrUdens  consllio.  Just.  JEger 
pedibus.  Sail.  Prcestans  ingenio.  Cic.  Mddicus  severitate.  Tac.  Nihil  insl- 
diis  vacuum.  Cic.  Amxyr  et  melle  et  felle  est  fecundisstmus.  Plaut.  MSdius  Pol- 
Itice  et  Castore.  Ovid.     Cf.  Rem.  6. 

In  many  instances,  the  signification  of  the  accusative  and  ablative  after  adjectives  dif- 
fers, in  a  greater  or  less  degree,  from  that  of  the  genitive. 

Rem.  5.  As  many  of  the  adjectives,  which  are  followed  by  a  genitive,  admit  of  other 
constructions,  the  most  common  use  of  each,  with  particular  nouns,  can,  in  general,  b« 
determined  only  by  recourse  to  the  dictionary,  or  to  the  classics.     Some  have, 

(1.)  The  genitive  only;  Ks,benignus,  cdpax,  exsors,  impos,  impdtens,  insdtid- 
bilis,  irritus,  llberdlis,  7nddicus,  munificus,  prcelargus,  and  many  others. 

(2.)  The  genitive  more  frequently;  as,  compos,  consors,  Sgenm,  exhere$, 
expers,  fertilis,  iiidlgus,  inops,  parous,  particeps,  pauper,  prddXgm,  prosper^ 
stertlis. 

(3.)  The  genitive  or  ablative  indifferently;  as,  dives,  fecundm,  f^ra^itf^ 
munis,  indnis,  immddicus,  jejUnus,  largus,  nimius,  dpulentus,  p&rltus,  plenus,  pd- 
tens, p>urus,  refertus,  sdtur,  Uber,  vacuus. 

(4.)  The  ablative  more  frequently;  as,  abundans,  dlienus,  cassus,  cdpidsui, 
extorris,  firmus,  fetus,  frequens,  grdvidus,  gravis,  injirmus,  liber,  Idcuples,  keius, 
macius,  nudus,  dnustus,  orbus,  pollens,  s^tidtus,  truncus,  vdlidus,  viauus. 

(5.)   The  ablative  only;  as,  bedtus,  creber,  densus,  mutilus,  tumidus,  turgidui. 

For  the  ablative  after  many  of  the  preceding  adjectives,  see  §  250. 

Rem.  6.  Some  adjectives  usually  limited  by  a  dative,  sometimes  take  a  gen- 
iti  re  instead  of  the  dative ;  as,  similis,  dissimilis,  etc.   See  §  222,  R,  2. 

Rkm.  7.  Many  adjectives  in  addition  to  the  genitive  or  ablative  denoting  of 
or  in  respect  to,  take  also  another  case  to  express  a  different  relation ;  as.  Mens 
Bibi  conscia  recti.  Cf.  §  222,  R.  3.  Conscius  has  also  sometimes  the  dative  in- 
stdad  of  the  genitive  of  the  thing;  as,  conscius  huic  faclnori.  Cic. 


216  SYNTAX. GENITIVE   AFTER   VERBS.  §  214. 

GENITIVE    AFTER    VERBS 

§  314.     Sum,  and  verbs  of  valuing,  are  followed  by  a  geni- 
tive, denoting  degree  of  estimation  ;  as, 

A  me  argentum,  quanti  est,  smmio,  Take  of  me  so  much  money  as  (he)  is 
■worth.  Ter.  Magiii  cesthnabat  peiuniam,  He  valued  money  greatly.  Cic.  Ager 
nunc  pluris  est,  qimm  tunc  fuit.  Id.  Tanti  est,  It  is  worth  so  much;  and,  abso- 
lutely, It  is  worth  while.  Cic.    Hujus  nonfojcio,  I  dou't  care  that  for  it. 

>  Remark  1.  (a.)  Verbs  of  valuing  are  joined  with  the  genitive, 
when  the  value  is  expressed  in  a  general  or  indejimte  manner  by  : — 

(1.)  A  neuter  adjective  of  quantity;  as,  tanti,  quanti,  pluris,  minoris,  magni, 
permagni,  plurimi,  mazimi,  minimi^  pani,  tantldem,  quanticumque,  quanilvis, 
qtmntihbet,  but  only  very  rarely  inulti  and  majoris. 

(2.)  The  nouns  assis,  Jlocci,  nauci,  ntkiU,  plU,  Uruncii,  and  also  pensi  and 
hiyits. 

V  (^0  ^^*  if  the  price  or  value  of  a  thing  is  a  definite  sum,  or  is  ex- 
pressed  by  a  substantive,  other  than  assis,  Jlocci,  etc.,  it  is  put  in  the 
ablative.   Cf.  §  252. 

Rem.  2.  The  verbs  of  valuing  are  cBsUmo,  existtmo,  duco,  facio,  flo,  hdbeo, 
pendo,  puto,  deputo,  taxo.  Thus,  Ut  quanti  quisque  se  ipse  faciat,  tanti  flat  ai 
dmlcis.  That  as  much  as  each  one  values  himself,  so  much  he  should  be  valued 
by  his  friends.  Cic.  Sed  quia  parvi  id  duceret.  Id.  Hunores  si  magni  non  j)ute- 
mus.  Id.   Non  assis  fdcis  f  Catull.    Neque  quod  dixi,  flocci  ^xistlmat.  Plaut. 

Note  1.  (a.)  The  phrase  oiqui  bdni,  or  cequi  bdnlque  fdcio,  or  consulo,  I  take 
a  thing  in  good  part,  am  satisfied  with  it,  may  be  classed  with  genitives  of  value; 
as,  iVos  aequi  homque  fdcimus.  Liv.  So,  Boni  tonsH/uiV  Plin. — (6.)  A  genitive 
of  price  is  joined  also  to  coeno,  hdbiio,  doceo,  etc.;  as,  quanti  hubitas?  what  rent 
do  you  pay  for  your  house  or  lodging  ?  quanii  dOcet  f  what  are  his  terms  in 
teaching? 

Note  2.  After  cestlmo,  the  ablatives  magna,  permagno,  parvo,  niMlo,  are 
sometimes  used  instead  of  the  genitive;  as.  Data  niagno  cestimas,  accepia, 
parvo.  Sen.  Pro  nildlo,  also,  occurs  after  duco,  hdbeo,  and  puto ;  and  nihil  with 
cesiimo  and  mdror.  Cf.  ^  231,  R.  5. 

Note  3.  The  neuter  adjectives  above  enumerated,  and  hUjus,  may  be  refer- 
red to  a  noun  understood,  as  preiii,  ceris,  pomUris,  nwinenii ;  and  may  be  con- 
sidered as  limiting  a  preceding  noun,  also  understood,  and  denoting  some  per- 
son or  thing;  as,  ^stlmo  te  magni,  i.  e.  hdminem  magni  preiii.  Scio  ejus  orainis 
auciorltdtem  semper  dpud  te  magni  fuisse,  i.  e.  rem  magni  momenti.  The  words 
assis,  etc.,  may  also  be  considered  as  depending  on  an  omitted  noun;  as,  pretio, 
rem,  etc. 

Rem.  3.    Statements  of  price,  also,  when  general  or  indejinite,  are 
^''  put  in  the  genitive  after  verbs  of  buying,  selling,  letting,  and  hiring  ; 
as, 

Mercdtores  non  tantidem  vendunt,  quanti  emerunt.  Cic.  Nulla  pestis  hUmdno 
generi  pliiris  stelit,  quam  Ira.  Sen. 

Note  1.  Verbs  of  buving,  selling,  etc.,  are  emo,  vendo,  the  neutral  passive, 
veneo,  consto,  prOsto,  and  llceo,  to  be  exposed  for  sale. 

Note  2.  With  verbs  of  buying,  selling,  etc.,  the  ablatives  magno,  permagno,  ' 
pluri mo,  parvo,  mini iiw,  and^nihilo  are  often  used  instead  of  the  genitive;  as, 
Non  2)6test  parvo  res  magna  consfdre.  Sen.    Quanti  emere  possuyn  rainimo?  What 
is  the  lowest  price  I  can  buy  at?  Plaut.     Sometimes  also  the  adverbs  care, 
bene,  and  male  tak?  the  place  of  the  genitive  or  ablative  of  price. 


§215,216.     StNTAX. — GENITIVE  AFTER  VERBS.        217 

§  31^.     (1.)  Muereor,  mtseresco,  and  the  impersonals  mise- 
ret,  poenitetf  pudet,  ttEdet,  and  piget,  are  followed  by^a  genitive  +* 
of  the  object  in  respect  to  which  the  feeling  is  exercised ;  as,         ' ' 

Miseremini  sdciorum,  Pity  the  allies.  Cic.  Miserescite  rerjis,  Pity  the  king. 
Virg.  Mea  mater,  tui  me  miseret,  mei  pfget,  I  pity  you,  and  am  dissatisfied 
with  myself.  Ace.  -fibs  ineYitia.n\m_pcemtet.  Cic.  Fratris  7ne  pudet  pif/etque. 
Ter.  Me  clvitdtis  morum  pnget  tcedetc/ue.  Sail.  So  the  compound  distcedet;  flnud 
quod  tui  me,  neque  domi  distcedeat.  Plaut.;  and  the  passive;  Numquam  smccpti 
negotii  eum  pertvesum  est.  Nep.  Lentitiidinis  eorum  pertcesa.  Tac.  Misei-i- 
tum  est  me  tudrum  fortunarum.  Ter.  Cave  te  fratrum  miseredtur.  Cic.  Fudet 
(me)  deorum  hominumque,  I  am  filled  with  shame  in  reference  both  to  gods 
and  men.  Liv. 

Note  1.  MisSrescii  is  sometimes  used  in  the  same  manner  as  miseret ;  as, 
Nunc  te  mtserescat  mei.  Ter.  Misereo,  as  a  personal  verb,  also,  occurs  with  a 
genitive;  as,  Ipse  sui  miseret.  Lucr. 

Kemark.  The  genitive  after  the  above  .impersonals  seems  to  depend  on  some 
general  word  constituting  the  grammatical  subject  of  such  verbs,  and  signify- 
ing, matter,  business,  ,fact,  case,  circumstances,  conduct,  character,  etc.,  cf  |  211, 
R.  8,  (3);  and  §  209,  K.  3,  (4.)  Instead  of  the  genitive  with  its  omitted  noun, 
an  infinitive  or  clause  with  quod  or  with  an  interrogative  particle  is  sometimes 
used  as  a  subject;  as,  iVb«  me  hoc  Jam  dicere  pudebit.  Cic.  No7i  poenUet  me 
quantum  prof  ecerim,  I  am  not  dissatisfied  with  my  progi*ess.  Id.  These  verbs 
have  also  sometimes  a  nominative  ;  as.  Me  quidem  hcec  conditio  non  poeniteL 
Plaut.    Non  te  hsRC  pudent  f  Ter. 

Note  2.  Miseret  occurs  with  an  accusative  of  the  object,  instead  of  a  geni- 
tive ;  as,  Menedemi  vicem  miseret  me.  Ter.  So,  also,  Pertoesus  ignaviam  suam. 
Suet. 

Note  3.  {a.)  These  impersonals,  as  active  verbs,  take  also  an  accusative  of 
the  person  exercising  the  feeling  which  they  express.  See  §  229,  R.  6. — 
{b.)  And  sometimes  also  the  accusative  of  the  neuter  pronouns  and  of  nihil, 
denoting  to  what  degree  the  feelings  are  exercised;  as,  Seqmtur  ut  nihil  {sapieti- 
tern,)  poeniieat.  Cic.    Cf.  §  232,  (3.) 

(2.)  Sdtago  is  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive  denoting  in   ~\ 
what  respect ;  as, 

7s  sdtucjit  rerum  sudrum.  He  is  busily  occupied  with  his  own  affairs.  Ter. 
This  compound  is  often  written  separately,  and  in  either  case  the  genitive 
seems  to  depend  upon  sat.  See  §  212,  R.  4.  Agito,  with  sat,  in  like  manner,  is 
followed  by  a  genitive ;  as.  Nunc  dgttas  sat  tute  tudrum  rerum.  Plaut. 

§  SIO.  Recordor,  memini,  remmiscor,  and  ohliviscor,  are 
followed  by  a  genitive  or  accusative  of  the  object  remembered 
or  forgotten ;  as, 

Flagitiorum  sudrum  recorddUtur.  Cic.  Omnes  gradus  cetatis  rScordor  tua. 
1  call  to  mind  all  the  periods  of  your  life.  Id.  M4mini  vivorum,  I  am  mindful 
of  the  living.  Id.  Niimcros  memini,  I  remember  the  measure.  Virg.  Reminisci 
veieris  f  amse.  Nep,  Dukes  mdriens  remlniscitur  Argos.  Virg.  Reminisci  aral- 
cos.  Ovid.  OhlUus  sui.  Virg.  Injuriarum  obllviscitur.  Nep.  Obllviscor  injurias. 
Cic.   Obllviscere  Graios.  Virg. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  When  the  thing  remembered  or  forgotten  is  expressed  by 
a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective,  it  is  always  put  in  the  accusative.  An  accusa- 
tive of  the  person  with  these  verbs  is  unusual,  except  that  memini,  when  re- 
ferring to  a  contemporary,  always  takes  an  accusative  of  the  person;  as,  Cin- 
nam  memini.  Cic. 

19 


218         SYNTAX. GENITIVE  AFTER  VERBS.        §  217. 

(6.)  An  infinitive  or  a  dependent  clause  sometimes  folk>\rs  these  verbs;  as, 
Memento  mihi  stipjietias  ferre.  Plant  Esse  qudque  infatis  remlniscUur,  aflore 
tempns,  quo  mare,  etc.  Ovid.  OblUi  quid  decea*-  Hor.  Memini  te  scrib^re. 
Cic.    Quae  sum  pnssura  recvnlor.  Ovid. 

Rem.  2.  Rhordor  a.r\(\  memini,  to  remember,  nri  sometimes  folio-wed  by  an 
ablative  with  de;  as,  Petimiis  ui  de  suis  liberis  reto:  dentur.  Cic.  De  palla  mS- 
menio.  Plant. 

Rem.  3.  Memini,  signifying  io  make  mention  of,  has  a  genitive,  or  an  abla- 
tive with  c?€ ;  as,  Neque  hujus  rei  meminit.jMt'ta.  Quint.  31  eministi  de  cxsull- 
bus.  Cic.  "With  vemt  inihi  m  mentera,  the  person  or  thing  may  be  made  the 
subject  ofvinit;  as,  Miseroe,  ubi  venit  in  menlem  jnortis  metus.  Plant.  Vcnit  hoc 
mUii  in  mentem ;  or  an  infinitive  or  subjunctive  clause  jnay  supply  the  place 
of  the  subject: — for  the  genitive  with  this  phrase,  as  in  Sdlet  mini  in  mentem 
vSnlre  illius  temp6ris,  see  §  211,  R.  8,  (5.)  The  genitive  with  recorder  is  very 
rare. 

^^^         §  2t7»     Verbs  of  accusing^  convicting,  condemning,  and  ow?- 

■^^^  quitting,  with  the  accusative  of  the  person,  are  followed  by  a 

genitive  denoting  the  crime  ;  as, 

Arguit  me  furti.  He  charges  me  icith  theft.  Alierum  accOsai  probri,  He  ac- 
cuses another  of  viUany.    Meipsum.  inertias  condemno.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  To  this  rule  belong  the  verbs  of 

Accusing;  acciiso,  Arjo,  arcesso,  arguo,  cito,  defero,  increpo,  incuso,  inslmiSo^ 
postulo,  and  more  rarelv  oUiffo,  anquiro,  astrint/o,  capto,  increpito,  uryeo,  inter- 
rd(/o,  reum  ago  or  fCuio,  fdicui  diem  dico,  cum  aUquo  ago. — C o n  v i c  t  i  n  g  ;  con- 
viiuo,  coarguo,preliendo,  teneor,  obstringor,  obligor.— G  o  n  d  e  m  n  i  n  g  ;  damno,  con- 
demno,  infdnw,  and  more  rarely  jw/i to,  n6to,  plector. — A  c  q  u  i  1 1  i  n  g  ;  absolve, 
libera,  pnrgo,  and  rarely  solco.  To  the  verbs  of  accusing,  etc.,  may  be  added 
the  adjectives  denoting  guilt  and  innocence,  which  likewise  take  a  genitive. 
Cf.  §  213,  R.  1,  (3.)  / 

(b.)  The  genitives  which  follow  these  verbs  are,  audacice,  avaritva:,  ccedis, 
falsi,  furti,  u/navtce,  impietatls,  injUridrutn,  Uritdtis,  majestdtis,  mdlefidi,  mendd- 
cii,  parriildil,  peccdti,  jmfUdtiis,  jjrobri,  proditidnis,  rei  cdpitdlis,  repetunddrum, 
scelerk,  stidtitia,  temeritutls,  tiitwi-is,  tdnitdtis,  vemfuii,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  Instead  of  the  genitive,  an  ablative  with  de  is  often  used  after 
acciiso,  difero,  anquiro,  arguo,  pmstuh,  damno,  condemno,  aJbsolvo,  and  purgo  ;  as, 
Acciisdre  de  negligentia.  Cic.  De  vi  condemndti  sunt.  Id.  De  repctundis  est 
postidatus.  Id.  Sometimes  with  in,  after  acciiso,  coarguo,  conrinco,  teneor,  and 
di'prehendor ;  as.  In  quo  te  occuso  (Cic);  and  after  Z?6e/'0,  with  a  or  ab ;  as, 
A  scC'K're  llbcrdti  simus.  Cic.  Accuso  and  davino  with  inter  occur  in  the 
phrases  inter  slcdrios  accusdre,  etc.,  to  charge  with  assassination. 

(6.)  With  some  of  the  above  verbs,  an  ablative  witlrout  a  preposition  is  often 
used;  as,  Liberdre  culpa.  Cic.  Crimen  quo  argui  posset.  Nep.  Prdtonsfdem 
posffddverat  repC-tundis.  Tac.  This  happens  especially  with  general  words  de- 
noting crime;  as,  scelus,  mdleficium,  peccdtum,  etc.;  as,  il/e  peccato  s<;/fo.  Liv. 
The  ablatives  crimine  and  nomine,  without  a  preposition,  are  often  inserted  be- 
fore the  genitive;  as,  Arcessere  dliquem  cnmine  ambitOs.  Liv.  Nomine  sceUris 
conjurdtionisqut  damndti.  Cic. ;  and  when  not  so  inserted  they  are  to  be  under- 
stood. 

(f.)  Sometimes  a  clause  takes  the  place  of  the  genitive;  as,  Eum  accusdbant 
quod  socit'tatem  fecisset.  Xep.  So  the  infinitive  with  the  accusative.  Qtudf 
quod  me — arguit  servm  accessisse  f  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  jmnishment  is  commonly  expressed  by  the  genitive;  as, 
cdjAtis,  mortis,  mtdtce,  pecHnitB,  quadrupli,  octupli ;  but  sometimes  by  the  abla- 
tive ;  as,  cdpite,  morte,  multd.  pecHnid :  and  always  by  this  case  when  a  definite 
sum  is  mentioned;  us,  quitwUcim  rmilibut  aerit :  or  the  a:  insative  with  ad  or  in f 


§218,219.  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    AFTER   VERBS.  219 

as,  ad  poenam,  ad  bestias,  ad  mStalla,  in  metallum,  in  eoqjensas; — soraetimM, 
thouo;!!  rarely,  in  the  poets,  by  the  dative ;  as,  _  Damnatus  morti.  Liicr. — 
(b.)  Voti  or  vbtonon,  &nd  less  frequently  voto  or  votis  damndri,  signifies  'to  be 
condemned  to  fulfil  one's  vow,'  and  is  consequently  equivalent  to  '  to  obtain 
what  one  wishes.'  So  also  in  the  active  voice,  Damndhis  tu  qu6que  votis.  Vii-w. 
Perdo  is  vised  by  Plautus  as  a  verb  of  accusing,  with  capitis ;  Quern  etjo  capitis 
perdam,  will  cKarge  with  a  capital  offence.  So  capite  or  ca2)nis  penclitari, 
Plaut.,  signifies  'to  be  in  peril  of  one's  life.'  With  phcto  and  plector,  caput  is 
used  in  the  ablative  only. — (c.)  Bamnl  infecii  is  put  in  the  genitive  (depend- 
ing iipon  nomine  understood)  after  sdtlsdo,  promitto,  stipUlarij  repromitio,  and 
cdveo  ;  as.  Si  quis  in  pdriete  demoliendo  damni  infecti  prdniiserit.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  AccUso^  incuso^  and  insimulo,  instead  of  the  genitive,  sometimes  take 
the  accusative,  especially  of  a  neuter  pronoun ;  as,  Si  id  me  non  accusas.  Plaut. 
Qu£e  me  incusaveras.  Ter.  Sic  me  insimUldre  falsum  f  acinus.  Plaut.  See  §  231, 
Rem.  5. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  following  verbs  of  accusing,  etc.,  are  not  followed  by  a 
genitive  of  the  crime,  but,  as  active  verbs,  by  an  accusative  :—-cdlumnior,  carpOy 
cornpio,  crminw,  culpo,  excuse,  multo,  jmnio,  repi^ehendo,  SUgillo,  taxo,  irdduco^ 
vitupero ;  as,  Oidpdre  infecunditatem  agrdrvm.  Colum.  Excusdre  errdrem  et 
ddolescentiam.  Liv. 

(6.)  This  construction  also  sometimes  occurs  with  aoruso,  inciiso^  ar<7?<o,  and  . 
tnarquo;  as,  Ejus  dvdi-itiam  perfidiamque  accusdrat.  Nep.   Culpnm  artjuo.  Liv. 
Witii  invito^  the  punishment  is  put  in  tlie  ablative  only,  without  a  preposition; 
as,  ExsiliiSy  morte  multantur.  Cic. 

§  S18.  Verbs  of  admonishing,  with  the  accusative  of  the  — L 
person,  are  followed  by  a  genitive  of  the  person  or  thing  respect-  ^ 
ing  which  the  admonition  is  given ;  as, 

Millies  temporis  mdnet^  He  admonishes  the  soldiers  of  the  occasion.  Tao. 
Admdnt'bat  dlium  egestatis,  dlium  cupiditatis  sum.  Sail. 

Note.  The  verbs  of  admonishing  are  mdneo,  admdneo,  commdneOj  and  commS- 
nefdcio. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  verbs  of  admonishing  sometimes  have 
an  ablative  with  de;  as,  De  sede  Telluris  me  admdnes.  Cic. — sometimes  an  ac- 
cusative of  a  pronoun  or  adjective  in  the  neuter  gender;  as,  Eos  hoc  mdneo  Cic. 
Illud  me  admdneo.  Id. ;  and  in  the  passive,  Wulta  admdnemur.  Id. — ^rarely  also 
a  noun  in  the  accusative ;  as,  Eain  rem  nos  Idcus  admdnuit.  Sail. 

Rem.  2.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  verbs  of  admonishing  are  also  often  followed 
by  an  infinitive  or  clause;  as,  Sdror  alma  mdnet  succedere  Lauso  Turnmn,  His 
sister  admonishes  Turnus  to  take  the  place  of  Lausus.  Virg.  Mdnet,  ut  susplc- 
iOnes  vltet.  Caes.  Std  eos  hoc  mdneo,  desinant  furere.  Cic.  Mdnet  rationem  irii- 
menti  esse  habendam.  Hirt.  Imraortalia  ne  speres  mdnet  annus.  Hor.  Disci/jillos 
id  unum  mdneo,  ut,  etc.  Quint.    Mdneo  quid  facto  opus  sit.  Ter.   See  §273,  2. 

§  910.    Refert  and  interest  are  followed  by  a  genitive  of  the   "*t 

person  or  thing  whose  concern  or  interest  they  denote ;  as, 

HumdnitdiiB  refert,  It  concerns  human  natui'e.  Plin.  Refert  omnium  dvi- 
madverti  in  mdhs.  Tac.  Interest  omnium  recte  fdcere,  It  concerns  all  to  do 
right.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  the  genitive  of  the  substantive  pronouns,     ^' 
the  adjective  pronouns  mea,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  and  vestra,  are  used;  as, 

Mea,  nihil  refert.  It  does  not  concern  me.  Ter.  Illud  mea  magni  interest, 
Vhtvt  greatly  concerns  me.  Cic.  Tua  et  mea  maxime  interest,  te  vdlere.  Cic. 
Mdgis  rei\)\xb\\csQ  interest  quam  mea.  Id.  Magni  interest  ClCGronis,  veZ  mea 
pdtius,  vd  mehercule  utriusque,  me  intervinlre  dicerUi.  Id. 


9SQ  STNTAX. GENITIVE   AFTER   VERBS.  §  220 

Note.  Refert  rarely  occurs  with  the  genitive,  but  often  with  the  pronouns 
wea,  itui,  etc.,  and  most  frequently  without  either  such  pronoun  or  a  genitive; 
as,  quid  refert  f  magni  or  magndpere  refert. 

Rem.  2.  In  regard  to  the  case  of  these  adjective  pronouns,  grammarians  dif- 
er.  Some  suppose  that  they  are  in  the  accusative  plural  neuter,  agreeing 
with  commdda  or  the  like  understood ;  as,  Interest  mea,  i.  e.  est  inter  mea.  It 
is  among  my  concerns.  Refert  itia,  i.  e.  refert  se  ad  tua,  It  refers  itself  to 
your  conceras.  Others  thuik  that  they  are  in  the  ablative  singular  femi- 
nine, agreeing  with  re,  causa,  etc.,  understood,  or  in  the  dative.  The  better 
opinion  seems  to  be,  that  they  are  in  the  accusative  feminine  for  meam,  iuam, 
sua7n,  etc.,  that  refert  was  originally  rem  fert,  and  that  hence  the  e  of  refert 
is  long. 

Rem.  3.  Instead  of  the  genitive,  an  accusative  with  ad  is  sometimes  used; 
as,  Ad  honorem  meum  interest  qtiam  primum  urbem  me  venire.  Cic.  Quid  id  ad 
me  aut  ad  meam  rem  refert.  Plaut. — sometimes,  though  rarely,  an  accusative 
without  a  preposition ;  as,  Quid  te  igttur  retulit  f  Plaut — or  a  dative ;  as.  Die 
quid  referat  intra  ndturce  fines  viventi.  Hor. 

Rem.  4.  The  subject  of  these  verbs,  or  the  thing  which  is  of  interest  or  im- 
portance, is  sometimes  expressed  by  a  neuter  pronoun;  as.  Id  mea  minXme 
refert.  Ter.  Hoc  vehementer  interest  reipubUca.  Cic. ;  and  sometimes  by  an  in- 
finitive with  its  accusative,  or  trf,  or  an  interrogative  particle  with  a  sub- 
junctive clause ;  as,  multum  m^a  interest  te  esse  dlUgentem,  or  tU  diligens  sis, 
or  utrum  diligens  sis  nee  ne.  When  the  infinitive  alone  is  used  with  refert 
or  interest,  the  preceding  subject  is  understood;  as,  omnium  interest  recte  fd- 
ere,  scil.  se. 

Rem.  5.  The  degree  of  interest  or  importanee  is  expressed  by  adverbs  or  by 
neuter  adjectives,  etc.,  in  the  accusative  or  genitive;  as,  magis,  magndpere,  ve- 
hementer, pdrum,  minime,  etc.;  multum,  plus,  plurimum,  nihil,  aliquid,  etc.; 
tanti,  quanti,  magni,  permagni,  pluris.  But  minimo  discrimlne  refert  is  found 
in  Juv.  G,  123. 

§  220'  Many  verbs  which  are  usually  otherwise  construed, 
are  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive.     This  rule  includes 

1.  Certain  verbs  denoting  an  afiection  of  the  mind ;  ango,  discrHcior,  excrii- 
cio,  failo,  pendeo,  which  are  followed  by  dnimi ;  decipior,  desipio,  faUor,  fastldio^ 
invideo,  miror,  vereor ;  as,  Absurde  fdcis,  qui  angas  te  aulmi.  Plaut.  Me  aiiimi 
fallit  Lucr.  Decipttur  laborum.  Hor.  Besipiebam  mentis.  Plaut.  Justitiaen« 
prius  mlrer  belline  laborum.  Virg. 

2.  The  following,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  idiom;  absUneo,  deslno,  purgo. 
Hor. ;  desisto.  Virg, ;  laudo,  prdhibeo.  Sil. ;  levo,  partici^io.  Plaut. ;  libera.  Liv. ; 
eUssolvo.  Tibull. :  compare  liber  laborum ;  dperum  vacuus ;  purus  sceleris.  §  213. 

3.  Some  verbs  denoting  to  fill,  to  abound,  to  want  or  need,  to  free,  which  are 
commonly  followed  by  an  ablative.  Such  are  dbundo,  cdreo,  comjAeo,  expleo, 
imjjleo,  egeo,  indigeo,  sdturo,  obsdturo,  scdteo ;  a,s,  Adulescentem  siub  temeritatis 
implet.  He  fills  the  youth  with  his  own  rashness.  Liv.  Animum  explesse  flam- 
map.  V^irg.  Egeo  consllii.  Cic.  Non  tam  artis  indigent  quam  laboris.  Id.  See 
Sk  249  and  250,  (2.) 

4.  Pdtior,  which  also  is  usually  followed  by  an  ablative ;  as,  Urbis  pdltri, 
To  make  oneself  master  of  the  city.  Sail.  Pdtln  regni  (Cic),  hostium  (Sail.), 
rerum,  To  make  oneself  master  of  the  world.  Cic.  Pdtio  (active)  occurs  in 
Plautus ;  as,  Eum  nunc  poUvit  serv'Itutis,  He  has  made  him  partaker  of  slavery. 
Li  the  same  writer,  pdtUus  est  hostium  signifies,  '  he  fell  into  the  hands  of  the 
enemy.'  So,  also,  Aliquem  compdtlre  jars&dsd  or  voti.  App.  So,  Renim  dd^vs 
est.  lac.    Domlnationis  4pwd.  Id.   ^^7idt?i<  populorum.  Hot. 


§  221.  SYNTAX. GENITIVE    OP   PLACE.  221 

GENITIVE    OF    PLACE. 

§  ^^1.  1.  The  name  of  a  town  in  which  any  thing  is  said 
to  he,  or  to  he  done,  if  of  the  first  or  second  declension  and  sin- 
gular number,  is  put  in  the  genitive ;  as, 

Uabitat  MllHi,  He  lives  at  Miletus.  Ter.  Quid  Edmoe  fdciam?  What  can  I 
do  at  Rome  V  Juv.    Hercules  Tyri  maxtme  cdlitur.  Cic. 

Note.  For  the  construction  of  nouns  of  the  third  declension  or  plural  num- 
ber, see  §  254.  The  following  appears  to  be  the  best  explanation  that  liJis 
been  given  of  this  diversity  of  construction,  depending  solely  on  the  number 
or  declension  of  the  noun.  The  name  of  the  town  '  where  '  or  '  in  which  '  is 
probably  neither  in  the  genitive  nor  the  ablative,  but  always,  as  in  Greek,  in  the 
dative.  Since  the  genitive  and  dative  are  alike  in  the  singular  of  the  first  de- 
clension and  the  dative  and  ablative  plural  are  the  same  in  all  declensions, 
such  examples  as  Romce  and  Athenis  present  no  difficulty.  In  the  third  de- 
clension the  dative  and  ablative  singular  were  anciently  alike,  and  in  such  ab- 
latives as  Anxuri,  Carihdfjini,  Lacediemdni,  the  old  form  remains,  see  ^  82, 
Exc.  6,  (c.)  In  the  second  declension  there  was  an  old  dative  in  oi,  as  in  Greek, 
which  was  commonly  changed  to  o,  but'  sometimes  to  i:  and  the  latter  is  still 
found  in  nulli,  uni,  etc.,  se*  §  107,  and  in  the  adjective  pronouns;  as,  illi,  etc. 

Remark  1.  Names  of  islands  and  countries  are  sometimes  put  in  the  geni- 
tive, like  names  of  towns ;  as,  Jthdcce  vivere,  To  live  in  Ithaca.  Cic.  Cbrcyroe 
fuimns.  Id.  Conon  plurlmum  Cypri  vixit,  T'widtheus  Lesbi.  Nep.  Quum  Miltlddes 
ddmum  Charsonesi  hdbuit.  Id.  Creke  jussit  considere  Apollo.  Virg.  Romce  Nimid- 
iceque  fdcinora  ejus  memdrat.  Sail. 

Re>i.  2.  (a.)  Instead  of  the  genitive,  the  ablative  of  names  of  towns  of  the 
first  and  second  declension  and  singular  number,  is  sometimes,  though  rarely, 
used ;  as.  Bex  Tyro  dccedit,  The  king  dies  at  Tyre.  Just.  £t  Corintho  et  Athenis 
et  LdceJoemdne  nuncidia  est  victoria.  Id.  Pons  quern  ille  Abydo  fecerat.  Id. 
Hujus  exemplar  Roma  nullum  hdbemtis.  Vitruv.  Non  LibycB,  non  ante  Tyro. 
Virg.  For  the  explanation  of  this  apparent  anomaly,  see  the  preceding  note; 
in  accordance  with  which  it  may  be  remarked,  that  the  adverbs  of  place,  iM^ 
tbi,  ibidem,  alibi,  dlicObi,  hie,  illic,  istlc,  etc.,  appear  from  their  form  to  be  ancient 
datives. — {b.)  When  the  noun  is  qualified  by  an  adjective,  it  is  put,  not  in  the 
genitive,  but  in  the  ablative  with  m ;  as.  In  ipsa  Alexandria.  Cic.  And  poeti- 
cally without  in,  Genus  Longd  nostrum  domindbitur  Alba.  Virg. — (c.)  When 
urbs,  ojipidum,  ldcus{  etc.,  follow  the  genitive  of  place  as  appositions,  they  are 
put  in  the  ablative  either  with,  or,  more  rarely,  without,  in;  as,  Archias  Antid- 
chlce  ndius  est,  celebri  quondam  urbe.  Cic.  Gives  Rdmdnos  Nedjidli,  in  cele- 
bemmo  oppido  scepe  vidimus.  Id.  But  when  ira  Mr6e,  etc.,  precede  the  name  of 
a  town,  the  latter  also  is  put  in  the  ablative ;  as.  In  oppido  Citio.  Nep. ;  and 
'  but  very  rarely  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Cassius  in  oppido  Antiochia  est, — m  the 
town  of  Autioch.  Cic,  where  the  genitive  depends  on  oppido. 

Rem.  3.  The  genitives  domi,  militice,  belli,  and  humi,  are  construed 
Uke  names  of  towns ;  as, 

Tenuii  se  domi.  He  staid  at  home.  Cic.  Vir  domi  cldrus.  Liv.  Spargit  hiimi 
jussos  dentes, — on  the  ground.  Ovid.  Militice  and  belli  are  thus  used,  especially 
when  opposed  to  ddmi ;  as,  Una  semper  militiae  et  domi  fuimus, — both  at  home 
and  in  the  camp.  Ter.  So  DOmi  mlliticeque.  Cic.  Et  dd7m  ei  militice.  Id.  Mllitus 
ddmlque.  Liv.    Militice  et  ddmi.  Ter.    Belli  ddmique,  in  war  and  in  peace.  Hor. 

(1.)  /)(5mt  is  thus  used  with  the  possessives  mece,  tuce,  suce,  nosirce,  vestroe, 
and  dliena ;  as,  DOmi  nostra  vixit.  He  lived  at  my  house.  Cic.  Ajmd  eum  sic 
fui  tamquam  meaj  domi.  Id.  Sacrificium,  quod  aliense  domi  firet  mvlsere.  Id. 
But  with  other  adjectives,  an  ablative,  generally  with  a  preposition,  is  used;  as, 
In  vidud  ddmo.  Ovid.  Pdternd  domo.  Id.  Sometimes  also  with  the  possessives; 
as,  Med  in  domo.  Hor.  In  ddmo  sua.  Nep.  So,  instead  ofMww,' upon  the  ground,' 
19* 


222  STNTAX. ^DATIVE   AFTER   ADJECTIVES.  §  222. 

hhno  is  sometimes  used,  with  or  without  a  preposition;  m,  In  Mmo  drendsd. 
Ovid.     Sedere  Mmo  nudd.  Id. 

(2.)  When  a  genitive  denoting  the  possessor  follows^  either  dond  or  in  dSmo 
is  used ;  as,  Deprehensus  domi  Uczsdris.  Cic.  Domi  Ulius  fuisti.  Id.  In  domo 
Ossdris.  Id.     In  domo  ejus.  Nep. 

(3.)  The  ablative  dvwo  for  d5mt  also  occurs,  but  not  in  Cicero;  a*»,  Ego  id 
nunc  experior  domo.  Plaut.  Domo  se  tenere.  Nep.  Domo  abdltas.  buet. 
BtUo  for  belli  is  found  in  Livy — Domi  beUdque.  So,  also,  humo  for  Mnd ;  Strdtus 
Mmo.  Stat    Figii  humo  plantas.  Yirg.:  and  in  humo  lumen  fiyii.  Ovid. 

(4.)  Terrce  is  sometimes  used  Uke  Mmi;  as,  Sacra  terrae  celdvimiis.  Liv. 
Projectus  terrse.  Virg.  lanes  terrce  condiL  Luc.  So,  also,  drcmz;  Truncum 
riliquU  BX&nai.  VLrg.:  and  ricinKe;  ProxiTwcB  viciniae  habitat.  Plant. 

(5.)  The  genitive  of  names  of  towns,  d6mi,  militice,  etc.,  is  supposed  by  some 
to  depend  on  a  noun  understood ;  as,  urbe,  oppido,  cBckbus,  solo,  Idco,  tempdre^ 
etc,  but  see  a  different  explanation  above  in  Note. 

GENITIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES. 

n.   Certain  adverbs  are  followed  by  the  genitive.  See  §  212,  R.  4. 

in.  The  genitive  plural  sometimes  dep^ds  on  the  preposition 
teniis  ;  as, 

C&mdrum  ienus,  As  far  as  Cum«.  Coel.  Crurum  ienus.  Virg.  Ldterum  iS- 
mis.  Id.  Urbium  Corcyrcs  Unus.  Liv. — For  the  ablative  after  tenus,  and  for  the 
place  of  the  preposition,  see  §  241,  and  R.  1. 

DATIVE. 

§  222,  1.  The  dative  is  the  case  of  reference,  as  it  denotes 
the  object  with  reference  to  which  the  subject  acts,  or  in  reference  to 
which  it  possesses  any  specified  quality  ;  or,  in  other  words,  the  ob- 

i'ect  for  which,  to  the  benefit  or  loss  of  which,  any  thing  is  or  is  done. 
lence,  in  distinction  from  the  dative  of  the  end  (§227)  the  dative  of 
reference  is  called  datlvus  commodi  et  incommodi,  the  dative  of  ad- 
vantage and  disadvantage ;  as, 

Scr^  vobis  hunc  librum,  I  write  this  book  Jvr  you.  Prosum  tibi,  or  Tibi 
tiUlis  sum,  I  am  useful  to  you. 

2.  Hence  the  dative  of  advantage  and  disadvantage  may  be  used 

(a)  with  adjectives  and  particles  whose  meaning  is  incomplete  unless 
the   object  is  mentioned  in  reference  to  which  the  quality  exists. 

(b)  With  verbs  both  transitive  and  intransitive.  If  transitive  they 
take  an  accusative  of  the  nearer  and  a  dative  of  the  remoter  object, 
if  intransitive  they  take  a  dative  only,  (c)  With  certain  verbs  com- 
pounded with  prepositions,  after  which  the  dative  is  used  instead  of 
the  case  which  the  preposition,  if  separate,  would  govern,  {d)  After 
a  few  verbal  substantives  derived  from  verbs  which  govern  a  dative. 

DATIVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES. 

3.  A  noun  limiting  the  meaning  of  an  adjective,  is  put 
in  the  dative,  t  denote  the  object  to  wliich  the  quality  is  di- 
rected; as. 


§  222.  SYNTAX. DATIVE   AFTER   ADJECTIVES.  223 

Utilis  agris.  Useful  to  the  fields  Juv.  Jucundm  dmlcis,  Agreeable  to  his 
friends.  Mart.  Inimlcus  quieii,  Unfriendly  to  rest.  Id.  Charta  inuUlia  scrJbeTido, 
Paper  not  useful  for  writing.  Plin. 

Note.  The  dative  is  commonly  translated  by  the  prepositions  to  or  for ;  but  some- 
times by  other  prepositions,  or  without  a  preposition. 

Remark  1.  Adjectives  signifying  useful^  pleasant^  friendly,  fity 
like,  hiclinedy  ready ^  easy,  clear,  equal,  and  their  opposites,  also  those 
signifying  near,  many  compounded  with  con,  and  verbals  in  Mils,  are 
followed  by  the  dative ;  as, 

Felix  tuis,  Propitious  to  your  friends.  Virg.  Ordtio  ingrdta  Gallis,  A  speech 
displeasing  to  the  Gauls.  Oaes.  Amicus  tyrannidi,  Friendly  to  tyranny.  Nep. 
Lubori  inhdbilis,  Unsuited  to  labor.  Colum.  Patri  similis,  Ljke  his  father.  Cic. 
Nihil  tarn  est  Lysi<»  dlv.ersum,  quam  fsocrdtes.  Aptum  tempori.  Id.  Malo  pro- 
nus.  Sen.  Promptus  seditidni.  Tac.  Cuivis  facile  ^est.  Ter.  Milii  certum  est. 
Cic.  Far  fratri  tuo.  Id.  Falsa  veris  flnitima  sunt.  Id.  Oculi  concolores  corpori. 
Colum.     Multis  bonis  jlebilii.  Hor.     Mors  est  terribiUs  iis,  quorum,  etc.  Cic» 

(a.)  The  following  are  some  of  the  adjectives  includedin  Hem.  1,  viz.  grdtus, 
acceptus,  didcis,  Jucundus,  Icelus,  sudvis ;  ingrdius,  insudvis,  injucundus.  mdlestuSj 
gravis,  dcerbus,  odiosus,  trHstis ; — utilis,  inuttlis,  bdnvs,  sdluber,  sdlutdris,  jructuOsus  ; 
cdldmitosus,  damnosus,  funestus,  noxius,  pestifer,  permciosus,  exttiosus: — amicus, 
benevolus,  cdrus,  fdmilidns,  ceguus,  fidus,  fidelis,  projntius,  secundus ;  inimicus, 
adversus,  cemulus,  dlienus,  contrdrius,  infesitis,  infidus,  tnlguus,  Irdtus; — aptus, 
accommoddtus,  appSsitus,  hdbilis,  idoneus,  opportHnus;  ineptus,  inhdbilis,  impor- 
iunus,  inconveniens ; — cequdlis,  par,  iinpar,  dispar,  similis,  dissimiUs,  absimilisj 
discoloi^  :—pr6nus,  procHvis,  propensus,  promptus,  pdrdtus  :—fdcilis,  difficHls : — 
dpertus,  conspicuus,  mdnifestus,  perspicuus,  obscurus,  certus,  compertus,  notus, 
amhiguus,  dubius,  ignotus,  incertus,  insdliius ; — vlcinus,  flnitimus,  conflnis,  con- 
terminus,  pr6pior,  proximus,  cogndtus,  concdlor,  concors,  congruus,  consanguineus, 
consentdneus,  consonus,  conveniens,  contiguus,  continuus,  continens. 

(b.)  Many  adjectives  of  other  significations,  including  some  compounds  of 
db,  sub,  and  super,  as  obnoxitis,  obvius,  subjectus,  supplex,  and  superstes,  are  also 
followed  by  a  dative  of  the  object. 

(c.)  After  verbals  in  &iKs,  the  dative  is  usually  rendered  by  the  preposition 
by ;  as,  Tibi  credlbllis  sermo,  A  speech  credible  to  you,  i.  e.  worthy  to  be  be- 
lieved by  you.  Ovid. 

{d.)  The  expression  dicto  audiens,  signifying  obedient,  is  followed  by  the  da- 
tive; as,  Syrdcusdni  nobis  dicto  audientes  sunt.  Cic.  Audiens  dicto  fuit  jussis 
mdgistrdtuum.  Nep.  In  this  phrase,  dicto  is  a  dative  limiting  audiens,  and  the 
words  dicto  audiens  seem  to  form  a  compound  equivalent  to  dbediens,  and,  like 
that,  followed  by  a  dative;  thus.  Nee  plebs  nobis  rficto  audiens  atmie  obedient 
sit.  I.iv.     So  dicto  dbediens ;  as,  FutUra  es  dicto  dbediens,  annon,  psitru  Plant. 

Ee3I.  2.  (a.)  The  adjectives  cequdlis,  afflnis,  dlienus,^  cognominis,  communis, 
contrdrius,  fidus,  insuetus,  par,  dispar,  peculidris,  propHus,  prdjnnquus,  sdcer, 
similis,  assimilis,  consimilis,  dissimiUs,  socius,  vlcinus,  sUperstes,  supplex,  and  some 
othei-s,  instead  of  a  dative  of  the  object,  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  genitive; 
as.  Par  hujus.  Equal  to  him.  Lucan.  Proprium  est  oratoris  ornate  dicere.  Cic. 
But  most  of  these  worjis,  when  thus  used,  seem  rather  to  be  taken  substan- 
tively; as,  jEqudlls  ejus.  His  contemporary.  Cic. 

(b.)  Similis,  assimilis,  consimilis,  dissimiUs,  par  and  dispar,  take  the  genitive, 
when  an  mtemal  resemblance,  or  a  resemblance  in  character  or  disposition,  is 
to  be  expressed,  and  hence  we  always  find  mei,  tui,  sui,  nostri,  vestri,  similis; 
as,  Flares  reges  Romuli  quMin  Niimse  similes.  Liv. 

(c.)  Amicus,  immlcus,  ?iXidi  fdmiUdris,  owing  to  their  character  as  substan- 
tives, take  a  genitive  even  in  the  superlative;  as,  Eomo  dmlcissimus  nosirorum 
hdmmum, — very  friendly  to  our  countrymen.  Cic.  On  the  other  hand,  hostis, 
though  a  substantive,  is  sometime*  '^sed  like  an  acyective,  being  modified  by 


1^ 


\  U  M  i    V     /^;  AV    -.L    1,      , 


224  SYNTAX. DATIVE   AFTER   ADJECTIVES.  §  222. 

an  adverb,  and  taking  an  object  in  the  dative;  as,  ExspectanMus  omnibus 
qmsnam  esset  tarn  impius,  tarn  aemens,  tam  diis  hominibusaue  hostis,  qui,  etc. 
Cf.  §277,R.  1. 

Rem.  3.  Some  adjectives  with  the  dative  are  followed  by  another  case  de- 
noting a  different  relation;  &s,  3fem  sibi  conscia  recti,  A  mind  conscious  to  it- 
self of  rectitude.  Virg.     See  §  213,  R.  7. 

Rem.  4.  Many  adjectives,  instead  of  ihe  dative  of  the  object,  are 
often  followed  by  an  accusative  with  a  preposition. 

(1.)  Adjectives  signifying  useful,  fit,  and  the  opposite,  take  an  accusative  of 
the  thing  with  ad,  but  onlv  a  dative  of  the  person;  as,  Homo  ad  nuUam  rem 
utUis.  Cic.    Locus  aptus  a^  insidias.  Id. 

(2.)  Adjectives  denoting  motion  or  tendency,  take  an  accusative  with  ad 
more  frequently  than  a  dative ;  as,  Finer  ad  p'oenas,  ad  prasmia  vHox,  Ovid ; 
Ad  dliquem  morbura  proclivior,  Cic ;  Ad  omne  f  acinus  jxirdtus,  Id. ;  Pronus  ad 
fidera,  Liv.; — sometimes  with  i« ;  as,  C?/er  in  pugnam.  Sil. 

(3.)  Many  adjectives,  signifying  an  affection  of  the  mind,  may  have  an  ac- 
cusative of  the  object  with  in,  erga^  or  adversus,  instead  of  the  dative;  as, 
FidtUs  in  filios.  Just.  Mater  dcerba  in  siws  partus.  Ovid.  Grdtus  erga  me. 
Cic.    Grdtum  adversus  te.  Id.     So  Dlsslmilis  in  dominum.  Tac. 

(4.)  Adjectives  signifying  like,  equal,  common,  etc.,  when  plural,  are  often 
followed  by  the  accusative  with  inter ;  as,  Inter  se  siniUes.  Cic.  Hasc  sunt  in- 
ter eos  commiinia.  Id.    Inter  se  dlversi.  Id. 

Rem.  5.  Fropior  and  proxlmus,  instead  of  the  dative,  have  sometimes,  lik« 
their  primitive  prope,  au  accusative ;  as,  Quod  vitium  propius  virtutem  eraL 
Sail.  F.  Crassm  proxtmus  mare  Oceanum  Jnemdrat.  Cass.  Ager,  qui  proximm 
finem  Megdlopolitdrum  est.  Liv.  Cf.  §  238,  1, 

^  Rem.  6.  (a.)  Some  adjectives,  instead  of  the  dative,  have  at  times  an  abla- 
tive with  a  preposition.  Thus,  par,  communis,  consentdneus,  discors,  with  cum ; 
as,  Quern  pdrem  cum  liberis  j^ecisfj.  Sail.  Consentdneum  cum  its  Uteris.  Cic. 
Civitas  secum  discors.  Liv.  So  dlienus  and  diversus  with  a  or  ab  ;  as,  Alienua 
a  me,  Ter. ;  A  ratione  diversu,^  Cic. ;  or  without  a  preposition ;  as,  AUenum 
nostrd  amicltia.  Id. — {b.)  Fretus,  which  regularly  takes  the  ablative,  is  in  Livy 
construed  with  the  dative;  as,  fortiinse /re<Ms;  nulli  rei  fretm,  etc.  Cf.  ^  244. — 
(c.)  The  participial  adjectives  Junctus  and  conjunctus,  instead  of  the  dative, 
take  sometimes  the  ablative  eitnei  with  or  without  cum. 

Rem.  7.  Idem  is  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative,  chiefly  in  the  poets ;  as 
Jupiter  omnibus  idem.  Vir^.  Invitum  qui  servat,  idem  fddt  occidenti.  Hoi 
In  the  first  example,  omnwus  is  a  dative  of  the  object;  in  the  second,  th<. 
dative  follows  idem,  in  imitation  of  the  Greek  construction  with  etvrdc,  and  is 
equivalent  to  qtuxl  occidens,  or  quod  fdcit  is,  qui  occldit.  Similis  is  construed 
in  the  same  manner  in  Hor.  Sat.  1,  3^  122.  Idem  is  generally  followed  not  by 
a  case,  but  by  qui,  acj  cUque,  ut,  quasi,  or  quam;  sometimes  by  the  preposition 
cum.  Cf.  §  207,  R.  27,  {d.)-  Similis  and  par  are  sometimes,  like  Idem,  followed 
by  ac  and  atqu^. 

Rem.  8.  Some  verbal  substantives  are  followed  by  the  dative,  when  derived 
from  verbs  goveniing  the  dative;  as,  Justitia  est  obtemperdiio  scriptis  legibus 
institutisque  popular um.  Cic.  Trdditio  dhcujus  rei  alteri.  Id.  FxprobrdiU) 
cuiquam  veieris  fortunce.  Liv. 

Note.  A  dative  of  the  object  often  follows  esse  and  other  verbs,  in  connection  \nth  a 
predicate  nominative  or  accusative,  but  such  dative  is  dependent,  not  on  the  noun,  but 
on  the  \»th.  Cf.  J  227,  R.  4 


§  22^^.  SYNTAX. DATIVE   AFTER   VERBS.  225 

DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

§  3S3.  A  noun  limiting  the  meaning. of  a  verb,  is  put  in 
the  dative,  to  denote  the  object  to  or  for  which  any  thing  is,  or 
is  done ;  as, 

Mea  d6mus  tibi  patet,  Mv  house  is  open  to  you.  Cic.  Pars  optdre  Idcum  tecto, 
A  part  choose  a  site ybr  a  huikling.  Virg.  Tibi  seris^  tibi  metis,  You  sow  for 
yourself  you  reap  for  yourself.  Plaut.  TLicet  nemini  contra  patriam  ducere  ex- 
era  turn,  It  is  not  lawful  for  any  one  to  read  an  army  against  his  country.  Cic. 
Hoc  tibi  promitio,  I  promise  you  this.  Id.  Eceret  lateri  letdlis  drundo.  Virg. 
Surdo  fdbulam  narras.  Hor.  Mihi  responsum  dedit.  Virg.  Sic  vos  non  vobis 
fertis  dratra,  bdves.  Id.  Omnibus  bonis  expedit  salvam  esse  rempubUcam.  Cic. 
Ajiiat  habendo  ensem.  Virg. 

Note.  The  dative  is  thus  used  after  all  verbs,  whether  transitive  or  intransitive,  per- 
sonal or  impersonal,  and  in  both  voices,  provided  their  signification  admits  a  reference  to 
a  remoter  object,  for  whom  or  to  whose  benefit  or  injury  any  thing  is  done.  In  the  pas- 
sive voice,  from  their  nature,  neuter  verbs  can  only  be  so  construed  impersonally.  Cf. 
J  142, 1,  and  §  222,  2. 

Remark  1.  The  dative  after  many  verbs  is  rendered  not  by  to  or  for,  but  by  other 
prepositions,  or  without  a  preposition.  Many  intransitive  Latin  verbs  are  translated 
into  Enghsh  by  verbs  transitive,  and  the  dative  after  them  is  usually  rendered  like  the 
object  of  a  transitive  verb. — ^Most  verbs  after  which  the  signs  to  and  for  are  not  used 
•with  the  dative,  are  enumerated  m  this  and  the  following  sections. 

Rem.  2.  Many  verbs  signifying  to  favor,  please,  trust,  assist,  and 
their  contraries,  also  to  command,  obey,  serve,  resist,  threaten,  and 
be  angry,  take  a  dative  of  the  object. 

Note.  The  neuter  verbs  comprehended  in  this  nile  generally  express  in  the 
verbal  form  the  meaning  of  those  adjectives,  which  are  followed  by  the  dative, 
(cf.  ^  222,  R.  1,)  Thus,  (a.)  Ilia  tihi  fdvet,  Slie_  favors  you,  or  is  favorable  to 
yo~d.  Ovid.  Mihi  pldcebat  Pomponius,  mintme  displicebat.  Cic.  Qui  sibi  fldit. 
Hor.  Noji  licet  sui  commodi  causa  ndcere  alteri.  Cic.  Non  invidetur  illi  setati 
sed  ctiam  fdvetur.  Id.  Desperat  saliiti  suxje.  Id.  Neque  mihi  vestra  decreia  aux- 
iliantur.  ball.  Imperat  aut  servit  collecta  pecunia  cuique.  Hor.  Obedlre  et  p)drere 
voluntati.  Cic.  Quoniam  factioni  inimicorum  resistere  nequlv^rit.  Sail.  Mihi 
mindbdtur.  Cic.     Jrasci  Inimicis.  Cees. 

(b.)  So  Ad  filar,  assentior,  blandior,  cotnmSdo,  faveo,  grattficor,  gr&tor,  gratulor,  and 
its  verbal  gratulabundus,  ignosco^  indulgeo,  lenocinor,  palpor,  parco,  plaudo,  responcJeo, 
studeo,  supparasitor ;  (Bmulor,  incommUdo,  invtdeo,  nSceo,  obsum,  officio; — arrideo, 
pldceo;  displiceo ; — credo,  fido,  confido;  deape.ro,  diffldo  ; — admtntculor,  auxilior^ 
mcdeor,  tnSdicor,  dpttulor,  patroclnor,  prosum,  subvSnio,  succurro;  dSsum,  insidior ; — 
impero,  mando,  mddSror,  prcpxtpio,  tempera;  ausculta,  morigSrar,  dbsdio^  absccundo, 
obsequor,  abtempira,  parea,  dicto  audiens  sum ; — ancillor,  f  annular,  mimstro,  servio, 
inservio,  prezstolar; — adversar,  refrOgor,  obsto,  obtrecto,  rehcctor,  rSnltor,  riSpugna,  rS- 
sista,  and,  chiefly  in  the  poets,  bello,  certo,  luctor,  pugno ; — ?ntnar,  camrriinor,  inter- 
rriinar ; — irascor,  succenseo,  stomachar. — To  these  maybe  added  cpcjuo,  adcequo,  convicior, 
degSnera,  excello,  nuba,  suppSdito,  prccvartcor,  rccipio  (to^  promise),  rUnuncia,  suadeo, 
persuadeo,  dissuadeo,  suppltco,  vaco,  videor,  and  sometimes  misceo  and  lUteo : — also  the 
impersonals  acctdit,  convSnit,  conducit,  totitingit,  dScet,  dSlet,  expSdit,  licet,  tlbet,  or 
lubet,  liquet,  placet,  etc. — (c.)  Intransitive  verbs  governing  a  dative  are  often  used  imper- 
sonally in  the  passive  with  the  same  case;  as,  mihi  invidetur,  I  am  envied.  Mihi  malS- 
dicitur,  I  am  reviled.  Mild  pardtur,  I  am  spared.  Hor.  Hoc  persuadetur  mihi,  I  am 
persuaded  of  this. 

(1,)  (a.)  Many  of  the  above  verbs,  which,  as  intransitive,  take  the  dative, 
sometimes  become  transitive  and  are  followed  by  an  accusative ;  as,  ddulor, 
ausculto,  blandior,  degenero,  despero,  indidgeo,  Idteo,  medeor,  mSdicor,  m6deror, 
obtrecto,  prcesiolor,  jjrdvideo,  etc. ;  as,  Addldri  aliquem.  Cic.  Hanc  cave  diigeni- 
res.  Ovid.  Indulgeo  me.  Ter.  Hujus  adventum  prcestolans.  Cses.  Provldere 
rem  frUmentdriam.  Id. — Sometimes  also  by  a  prepositio]\  and  the  ablative  or 
accusative;  as,  A  Stblcis  degdnerdvit  PdncBtius.  Cic.  De  repflblica  desperare. 
Id.  Obtrectdrunt  inter  se.  Nep. — or  by  a  dependent  clause ;  as,  Qu»  desperat 
tractdta  nitescere  posse,  relinqvU.  HcJf. 


226  SYNTAX.— DATIVE   AFTER   VERBS.  §  224. 

{b.)  Others,  as  transitive  verbs,  have,  with  the  dative,  Ln  accusative,  ex- 
pressed or  understood ;  as,  imjyei'O,  vmmh,  ministi-o,  7nhwr,  comnunor,  intcrminor^ 
jiracipio,  recipio,  renuucio,  etc. ;  as,  Kqiiltes  imperat  dvitatlbus ;  where  coyen- 
dos  is  perhaps  to  be  supplied,  He  enjoins  upon  the  states  the  provlduig  of  cav- 
alrv.  Cajs.  See  §  274,  R.  5.  Miiustidre  victum  dhctu.  Varr.  Deflagi-atiouem 
urSi  et  ItulUe  tod  mlruibatur.  Cic. 

(c.)  ^quo  and  adoegtio  are  construed  with  the  accusative  and  either  the  da^ 
tive  or  cum  with  the  ablative. — Jnmleo  takes  either  a  single  dative  of  the  per- 
son or  thing,  a  dative  of  the  person  and  an  accusative  of  the  thing;  as,  IlOiid- 
rem  mihi  invident.  Hor. ;  or,  when  inrldere  is  used  in  the  sense  of  prlrdre,  a  da^ 
tive  of  the  person  and  an  ablative  of  the  thing;  as,  Non  invidei-unt  laiule  sua 
m&llenbus.  Liv.  In  Horace,  by  a  Greek  construction,  the  genitive  is  once  used 
instead  of  the  accusative  or  ablative  of  the  thing;  as,  Neque  ille  sepdsUi  ciceris 
nee  longm  invidet  dveiUB. 

(d.)  Cedo,  used  transitively,  takes  a  dative  of  the  person  and  an  accusative 
of  the  thing;  but  sometimes  the  tiling  is  expressed  by  the  ablative;  as,  cedere 
dlicui  possessione  hortorum.     So,  also,  concedo  tibi  Idcum,  or  concedo  tihi  loco. 

(2.)  Many  verbs  which,  from  their  significations,  might  be  included  in  the 
above  chusses,  are,  as  transitive  verbs,  only  followed  by  an  accusative;  as, 
delecto,  juw,  adjuvu,  adjuio,  kedo,  offendo,  etc. — Jubeo  is  followed  by  the  accusa- 
tive with  an  infinitive,  and  sometimes  by  the  accusative  alone,  or  the  da- 
tive with  the  infinitive  or  subjunctive;  as,  Ji^eo  te  bme  sperare.  Cic.  Lex 
jubet  ea  (jucb  fdcienda  sunt.  Id.  Ubi  Britannlco  jussit  exsurgere.  Tac.  Qulbus 
jusserat,  ut  instantibus  resisterent.  Id. — F'tdo  and  confido  are  often  followed  by 
the  ablative,  with  or  without  a  preposition ;  as,  Fimre  cursu.  Ovid.  Cf.  §  245. 

§  994:.  Many  verbs  compounded  with  these  eleven  prepo- 
sitions, dd^  ante,  con,  in,  inter,  6b,  post,  prce,  pro,  sub,  and  supery 
are  followed  by  the  dative ;  as, 

Annue  coeptis,  Be  fiivorable  to  our  undertakings.  Vir^.  Romanis  equltibus 
liter(B  affei'untur,  Letters  ai'e  brought  to  Oie  Ronuin  knights.  Cic.  Antetellere 
omnibus.  To  excel  all.  Id.  AntetuUt  Iras  religionem.  Nep.  Audetque  %iris  con- 
currcve  virgo.  Virg.  Kxercitum  exercitui,  duces  diicibus  compdrdre.  Liv.  Immi- 
net  his  aer.  Ovid.  Pecori  signum  imjyresstt.  Virg.  Nox  praelio  intej^venit.  Liv. 
Jnierdixii  histrionibus  scenam.  Suet.  Meis  commodis  offhis  et  obstas.  Cic. 
Cum  se  hostiuni  telis  objecisseni.  Id.  Poslhdbui  mea  sh-ia  ludo.  Virg.  Cei-td' 
mini  jtrmsediL  Suet.  Hlbemis  Labienum  prcepdsuit.  Caes.  Genibus  procum- 
bire.  Ovid.  ^Ilseris  succurrere  disco.  Virg.  lis  subsidia  submUtebat.  Caes. 
Timidis  supervenit  jEgle.  Virg. 

Note  1.  This  rule  implies  that  the  compound  retains  the  meaning  of  the 
preposition ;  and  the  dative  following  such  compound  is  then  used  instead  of 
the  case  governed  bv  the  preposition.  When  such  compounds  ax'e  transitive 
they  have  with  the  dative  an  accusative  also,  like  other  transitive  verbs. 

1.  ArcSdo,  accresco,  acciin{bo,  acquiesco,  ddSqiiUo,  adhareo,  adjdceo,  adno,  adnata,  ad- 
ttOy  aditipulor^  adsuvi,  adverser,  affulgto,  allabor,  allfido,  annuo,  appcLreo,  applaudo, 
appropinquo,  arripo,  arrideo,  asptro,  assentior,  asstdeo,  assisto,  assiiesco,  assurgo ; — 
addo,  adkibeo,  adjtcio,  adjungo,  admOveo,  adverto,  advolvo,  affiro,  affigo,  alllgo,  ap- 
pOno,  apptlco,  aspergo. 

2.  AntecSdo,  anticeUo,  anteeOf  antesto,  antCvSnio,  antSverto ; — antS/Sro,  antShabeo, 
ani^jo7io. 

8.  Cohrreo,  eoUudo,  condno,  eongruo,  conxentio,  consSno,  consueseo,  convlvo,  and, 
chiefly  in  the  poets,  co'do,  concumbo,  concurro,  contendo  ; — con/Bro,  conjungo,  eomparOf 
eompOno. 

4.  IncVIo,  inciibo,  incumbo,  indormio,  ingSmisco,  ^nhareo,  Inhio,  innaxcor,  innJtor, 
inst/eo,  insisto,  insto,  hixudo,  insulto,  invado,  invlgHo,  illacrimo,  illudn,  immineo,  im- 
vidrlor,  iinm6ror,  wipendeo,  insum  ; — hnmisceo,  impertio,  hnpono,  imprlmo,  incldo,  t«- 
iliido,  induo,  in/iro,  ingSro,  injicio,  insero,  inspergo,  insuesco,  Inuro. 

5.  Jntercido,  intercldo,  interdado,  interjdceo,  interviico  inter  sum,  intervinio ; — inter- 
dlco,  interjldo,  inUrpOno 


§  225.  SYNTAX. DATIVE   AFTER   VERBS.  227 

6.  Obavibiilo,  Sberro^  SbSgufto,  obluctor,  obmitrmUro^  obrSpo,  obsto^  obsistOy  obstrSpo, 
ob.ium,  ohirfcto,  obi'Stiio,  obversor,  occumbo,  occurro^  occurso,  officio; — ofttuco,  objlcio, 
oJfSro,  ojfunflo,  oppono. 

7  PostfSro,  posthdbeo,  postpSno,  postpUto,  postscrlbo. 

8.  PrefcS'Io,  prcecurro,  prep.eo,  prcplnceo,  prrrrnineo,  prcenlteo,  preBstdeo,  prcBSum,  jjtcb- 
valeo,  pravertor; — i'l-cpfero,  jyrcpficio,  prcepono.  c 

9.  Prucumbo,  prDficio,  propugno,  prospicio,  provtdeo. 

10.  SucrSdo,  succresco,  sucatnibo,  sucnirro,  suffido,  suffragor^  sUbdleo,  subjUceOy 
subrSpo,  stibsum,  subvSnio ; — subdo,  subjtcio,  subjugo,  submitto,  suppOno,  substerno. 

11.  Supercurro,  supersto,  sxipersum^  supervSnio,  supervlvo. 

Note  2.  In  some  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions  the  meaning  of  the 
preposition  is  lost.  Such  compounds  are  either  not  followed  by  a  dative,  or 
the  case  depends,  not  on  the  preposition,  but  on  the  signification  of  the  verb, 
according  to  ^  223. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  Some  verbs,  compounded  with  db,  de,  ez,  circum,  and  Con- 
tra, are  occasionally  followed  by  the  dative;  as,  absum,  desum,  deldbor,  des})erOy 
excklo,  circumdo,  circumfundo,  circumjaceo,  circumjicio,  contradico,  coniraco ;  as, 
Seria  capiti  delopsa,  The  garlands  having  fallen  from  his  head.  Vii'g.  Numqui 
nummi  excidcrunt  tibi  ?  Plant.  Tigris  urbi  circumfundltur.  Plin.  Sibi  desperans. 
Cajs. — (6.)  Circwndo  and  circumfundo  take  either  an  accusative  of  the  thing  with 
a  dative  of  the  person,  or  an  ablative  of  the  thing  with  an  accusative  of  the  per- 
son ;  as,  circwndo  lUicui  custudias,  or  circumdo  Ollquein  cvstudiis.  Asjierr/o,  in- 
spcrqo,  dono^  impertio,  exuo,  and  induo,  are  construed  in  the  same  manner. 
Cf.  \  251,  R,  2. 

Rem.  2.  Some  verbs  of  repelling  and  taking  away  (most  of  which  are  com- 
pounds of  o/»,  lie,  or  ear),  ai*e  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative,  though  more 
commonlv  by  the  ablative;  as,  dbiyo,  abrOt/o,  absiindo,  mifero,  ddimo,  arceo^ 
dvftndo,  demo,  dt'pello,  de7'6(jo,  dciriiho,  erfpio,  eriio,  excutio,  tximo,  extor'jueo,  ex- 
tndio,  exiio,  pruhibeo,  sunipio.  Thus,  Ncc  mihi  te  erijnent,  Nor  shall  they  take 
you  from  me.  Ovid.  Solstitium  pe cori  di'fendite.  Virg.  Ilunc  arcebis  pecori.  Id. 
So  rarely  (d)ruinjK),  dlieno,  furor,  and  rOpio. 

Rem.  3.  Some  verbs  of  differing  (compounds  of  di  or  dis)  likewise  occur 
with  the  dative,  instead  of  the  ablative  with  the  preposition  db,  or  poetically 
with  the  ablative  alone;  a^i,  differo,  discirpo,  discordo,  dissentio,  dissideo,  disto  ; 
as.  Quantum  simplex  hildrisque  nOputi  discrq)tt^  et  quantum  discordtt,  parens 
avaro.  Hor.  Distdbit  infido  scurrse  amicus.  Hor.  Gra;cis  TuscdniccB  stdtuce  dif- 
ferunt.  Quint.  COmcedia  differt  sermoni.  Hor.  So  likewise  misceo;  as,  Mista 
modestiJB  yrdvltas.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  Many  verbs  compounded  Avith  prepositions,  especially  with  ad,  con, 
and  in,  instead  of  the  dative,  §ither  constantly  or  occa^;ionally  take  the  case 
of  the  preposition,  which  is  frequently  repeated.  Sometimes,  also,  a  preposi- 
tion of  similar  signification  is  used;  as.  Ad  prlmam  vocem  timidas  advtrtitis 
aures.  Ovid.  Nano  eum  antecessit.  Nep.  Saxa  rides  sold  codlescere  calce.  Lxicr. 
Inferunt  omnia  in  ignem.  Cajs.  Silex  inctimbi-bat  ad  amnem.  Virg.  Innixus 
modOrrtmine  ndvis.  Ovid.  In  Pansam  frdtrtm  innixus.  Plin.  Qmfei-te  hane 
pdrem  cum  illo  bello.  Cic.  In  this  substitution  of  one  preposition  for  another, 
dd  is  used  for  in,  and  in  for  dd;  db  for  ex  ;  dd,  ante,  contrd,  and  in,  for  6b;  dd 
and  ante,  for  jjro. 

Rem.  5.  Neuter  verbs  of  motion  or  of  rest  in  a  place,  when  compourded 
with  the  prepositions,  dd,  ante,  con,  in,  etc.,  either  take  the  dative,  or,  acquir- 
ing an  active  signification,  are  followed  by  the  accu.sative;  as,  IltlvHii  reliquos 
Gallos  virtute  prceccdunt,  The  Helvetii  sur[)ass  the  other  Gauls  in  valor,  (^ses. 
Uttrque,  Isocratem  (Btute  j)rcecurrit.  Cic.  So  prceeo,  probsto,  prceverto,  prau  ello. 
See  (j  233,  (3.) 

§  225*     I.   Verbs  compounded  with  satvsj  bene^  and  mdley  are 
followed  b/  the  dative ;  as, 


228  SYNTAX.— DATIVE    AFTER    VERBS.  §  225. 

Et  natiirse  et  loglbus  sdtisfecit,  He  satisfied  both  nature  and  the  laws.  Cic. 
Tibi  du  benefdcuint  otnnes,  May  all  the  gods  bless  you.  Plant.  But  also,  Ami- 
cum  erga  Aeney^ti.   Id.    Mdletlicit  utrique.  Ror.    ^o  sdtisfJo,  benedico,  malefdcic 

Note.  These  compounds  are  often  written  separately;  and  the  dative  always  depends 
not  on  satis,  bene,  and  7nale,  but  on  the  simple  verb.  So,  also,  bSne  and  mdl^  alicid 
volo:  as,  Tibi  bene  far TtHiwo  volo.  Ter.  Dli  ego  ex  omntbits  optime  xolo.  Plant.  Non 
eibi  male  vult.  Petron.  In  like  manner  fo/ere  ^Hco,  and  vdle.dlco;  a.<5,  Augustus  disci- 
dens  {e  ciirid)  sSdentibus  singulis  vdlere  dicSbat.  Suet.  Tibi  vdledicSre  non  ticet  gratis. 
8en. — ^In  late  writers  OBnSdico  and  mdlSdlco  sometimes  take  the  accusative. 

n.  Verbs  in  the  passive  voice  are  sometimes  followed  by  a  dative  of  thfc 
agent,  chiefly  in  the  poets  and  the  later  prose  writers ;  as,  Quidquid  in  hoc 
causa  mihi  susceptum  est.  Cic.  Neque  cernitur  uUi,  Nor  is  he  seen  by  any  one, 
Virg.  Ntdla  tudrum  audita  mihi  nec^ue  visa  soronim.  Id.  Barbditts  hie  ego  stmij 
quia  non  intelligor  ulli.  Ovid.  But  the  agent  after  passives  is  usually  in  the 
ablative  with  a  or  ab.  See  §  248, 1. 

HE.  The  participle  in  dus  is  followed  by  a  dative  of  the  agent ; 
as, 

Vhda  omnlbas  endviganda,  The  wave  over  which  (we)  all  must  pass.  Hor. 
Nobis,  cum  simel  occidit  brevis  lux,  Nox  est  perpetua  una  dormienaa.  Catull. 
Adhibenda  est  nobis  diUgentia,  We  must  use  diligence.  Cic.  Vestigia  summoi-um 
Jidminum  sibi  tuenda  esse  dlcit.  Id.  Si  vis  me  fiei'e,  ddlendum  est  prlmum  v^si 
tibi.  Hor.     Faciendum  mihi  putdvi,  tU  responderem.  Id. 

Remark  1.  The  dative  is  sometimes  wanting  when  the  agent  is  indefinite; 
as,  Orandum  est,  ut  sit  metis  sdna  in  corpdre  sdno.  Juv.  Eic  rincendum  aut  md- 
riendum,  milites,  est.  Liv.  In  such  examples,  Obi,  vobis,  nobis,  hdminibus,  etc., 
may  be  supplied.  Cf.  §  141,  R.  2. 

Rem.  2.  The  participle  in  dus  sometimes,  though  rarely,  has,  instead  of  the 
,  dative  of  the  agent,  an  ablative  with  d  or  db ;  as,  Non  eos  in  deotntm  imnunidlinm 
numero  venerandos  a  vubis  et  cdlendos  putdtos  ?  Cic.  Hcbc  a  me  in  dicendo  prce- 
tereunda  non  sunt  Id. — The  dative  after  participles  in  dus  is  by  some  refeiTed 
to  §  226. 

IV.  Verbs  signifying  motion  or  tendency  are  followed  by  an  ac- 
cusative with  dd  or  m ;  as, 

Ad  templum  PaUddis  ibant.  Virg.  Ad  praetorem  Jidndnem  traxit.  Cic.  Vergit 
ad  septemtriones.  Cffis.    In  conspectum  venire.  Nep. 

So  curro,  duco,  fero,  festlno,  jugio,  indlno,  lego,  mitto,  pergo,  porio,  proBcipi- 
to,  prdpero,  tendo,  tollo,  vddo,  verto. 

Remark  1.  So  likewise  verbs  of  calling,  exciting,  etc. ;  as,  Em-um  ad  se 
vdcat.  Virg.  Prdvdcasse  ad  pugnam.  Cic.  So  dniino,  hortor,  incite,  iiir'ito,  Id- 
cesso,  sUmM),  twdto ;  to  which  may  be  added  tUUneo,  conformo,  pertineo,  and 
specto. 

Rem.  2.  But  the  dative  is  sometimes  used  after  these  verbs ;  as,  Cldmor  it 
ccelo.  Virg.  Dum  tibi  llterce  mece  veniant.  Cic.  Gregem  viridi  compdlere  hibis- 
co.  Virg.  Sedlbus  hunc  refer  ante  suis.  Id.  After  venio  both  constructions 
are  used  at  the  same  time;  as,  Venit  mihi  in  mentem.  Cic.  Venit  mihi  in  sus- 
plcionem.  Nep.  Eum  venisse  Germanis  in  amicltiam  cogndverat.  Caes.  Prd- 
pinquo  (to  approach)  takes  the  dative  only. 

Rem.  3.  Sometimes  also  verbs  signifying  motion  are  followed  by  an  accusa- 
tive of  place  without  a  preposition,  a  supine  in  um,  an  infinitive,  or  an  adverb 
of  place ;  as,  'Romam  pro/ectus  est.  Ite  domum.  Rus  ibam,  La\ania  viiiii  li- 
tora.  .Virg.  Neque  ego  ie  derisum  venio.  Plant.  Non  nos  Libgios  popiilare 
pendtes  venimus.  Virg.     Hue  vinit.  Plant.    See  §§  237,  276,  U.  271,  N.  2. 

Rem.  4..  After  do,  scrlbo,  or  mitto  literas,  the  person  for  whom  they  are  writ- 
ten or  to  whom  they  are  sent,  is  put  either  in  the  dative  or  in  the  accusative 
with  ad;  as,  £r  eo  Idco  tibi  Uteras  ante  dederdmiis.  Cic.    VuUurcius  lUerag  sibi 


§  226,  227.        SYNTAX. — dative  after  verbs.  229 

ad  Catillnara  datas  esse,  dicebat.  Id.  Qesar  scribit  Labieuo  cum,  etc.  Cses.  Ad 
me  Curiiis  de  ie  sanpsiL  Cic.  But  to  give  one  a  letter  to  deliver  is  also  ex- 
pressed by  xldre  lUeras  dlicui,  and  also  the  delivery  of  the  letter  by  the  bearer. 

§  SSO.     ^st  is  followed  by  a  dative  denoting  a  possessor ; — 

the  thing  possessed  being  the  subject  of  the  verb. 

Est  thus  used  may  generally  be  translated  by  the  verb  to  have  with  the 
dative  as  its  subject;  as,  Est  ralhi  ddmi  pater,  I  have  a  ftither  at  home.  Virg. 
Sunt  nobis  inltia  poma.  We  have  mellow  apples.  Id.  Grfitid  nubis  6nus  est  tud, 
We  have  need  of  your  favor.  Cic.  Innocentias  plus  j^ericuli  quam  honoris  est. 
Sail.  An  nescis  longas  reglbus  esse  vidnus  f  Ovid.  So  with  an  infinitive  as  the 
subject,  Nee  tibi  sit  duros  dcuisse  in  prcdia  denies.  Tib.  4,  3,  3.  The  fix'st  and 
second  persons  of  sum  are  not  thus  construed. 

Kemark  1.  Hence  milii  est  nomen  signifies,  I  have  the  name,  my  name  is,  or 
I  am  called.  The  proper  name  is  put  either  in  the  nominative,  the  dative,  or 
the  genitive.  See  §  204,  R.  8.  So  also  cognomen,  cognomentum,  and,  in  Taci- 
tus, vocdbulum,  est  mihi. — Sometimes,  also,  a  possessive  adjective  agreeing  with 
nomen,  etc.,  supplies  the  place  of  the  proper  name;  as.  Est  mihi  nomen  Tar- 
quinium.  Gell.    Merciiri^e  impdsuere  mih-t  cognomen.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  The  dative  is  used  with  a  similar  signification  after  fore,  suppetitj 
dbest,  deest,  and  defit ;  as,  Pauper  enim  non  est,  cui  rerum  suppelit  usus.  Hor. 
Si  mihi  Cauda  fOret,  cercdpithecus  eram.  Mart.  Defuit  ars  vobis.  Ovid.  Non 
defdre  Arsacidis  virtutem.  Tac.  Lac  mihi  non  defit.  Virg.  Hoc  unum  illi  ct6- 
fuit.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  With  the  dative  of  the  person  after  est  Sallust  and  Tacitus  some- 
times join,  bv  a  Greek  idiom,  vdlens,  cupiens,  and  invitus;  as,  Quia  neque  plebi 
militia  vdlenti  (esse)  putdbdtur.  Because  the  common  people  were  not  thought 
to  like  the  war.  Sail.  Ut  quibusque  bellum  inintis  aut  cupieniibus  erat,  Accord- 
ing as  each  liked  or  disliked  the  war.  Tac. 

DA.TIVE  OF  THE   EnD  OR  PURPOSE. 

§  22T*     Sum,  and  several  other  verbs,  are  followed  by  two 

datives,  one  of  which  denotes  the  object  to  which,  the  other  the 

end  for  which,,  any  thing  is,  or  is  done  ;  as, 

Mthi  maximce  est  curse,  It  is  a  very  gi-eat  care  to  me.  Cic.  Spero  nobis  haric 
conjunctionem  voluptati  fdre,  I  hope  this  union  will  afibrd  us  pleasure.  Id. 
Matri  puellam  dono  dedit.  Ter.  FS,bio  laudi  datum  est.  Cic.  Vltio  id  tIbi  ver- 
iunt.  Plant.  Id  tibi  honori  hdbetur.  Cic.  Mdturdvit  coUegse  venire  auxilio.  Liv. 
Cui  bono  fait  f  To  whom  was  it  an  advantage  ?  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  verbs  after  which  two  datives  occur,  are  sum,  fSre,  /to,  do,  d5no, 
dilco,  hdbeo,  rSlinquo,  tribuo,  verto ;  also  curro,  eo,  mitto,  pruficiscor^  vinio,  appono,  as- 
ngno,  cede,  comparo,  pateo,  suppSdlto,  Smo,  and  some  others. 

Kem.  2.  The  dative  of  the  end  or  purpose  is  often  used  after  these 
verbs,  without  the  dative  of  the  object ;  as, 

Exemplo  est  formica.  The  ant  is  (serves  for)  an  example.  Hor.  Absentium 
bdna  divisui  fuere.  Liv.  Rellquit  pignori  putdmina.  Plant.  Quce  esui  et  potui 
sunt.  Gell.  Esse  derlsui.  To  be  a  subject  of  ridicule.  Tac.  ROceptui  cdnere, 
To  sound  a  retreat.  Cses.    Aliquid  doti  dicdre,  To  set  out  as  dowry.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  Th5  verb  sum,  with  a  dative  of  the  end,  may  be  va- 
riously rendered  ;  as  by  the  words  brings,  affords,  serves,  does,  etc. 
The  sign  for  is  often  omitted  with  this  dative,  especially  after  sum; 
instead  of  it,  as,  or  some  other  particle,  may  at  times  be  used;  as, 

?9 


230        SYNTAX. DATIVE  AFTER  PAETICLES.       §  228. 

Igpavia  irit  tabi  magno  dedecori,  Cowardice  will  bring  great  disgrace  to  you. 
Cic.  Jfiec  res  est  argumento,  This  thing  is  an  argument,  or  ser\'es  as  an  aV^- 
ment.  Id.    Hoc  vitio  mihi  daiU,  This  they  set  down  as  a  fault  in  me.     Uni- 

versos  curse  hdbuit.    Suet.     Una  res  erat  magno  usui -vviis  of  great  use. 

Lucil.  Quod  tibi  viagndpere  Qordi  esl,  mild  vehetnenter  dispUcet,  What  is  a  great 
pleas^ure,  an  object  of  peculiar  interest  to  you,  etc.  Id. 

(b.)  Sometimes  the  words  ft,  able,  ready,  etc.,  must  be  suppb'ed,  especially 
before  a  gerund  or  a  gerundive;  as,  Quum  solvendo  cirttates  von  essuit,  ....  not 
able  to  pay.  Cic.  iJtrites,  gut  oneri  ferendo  essent.  Liv.  Quob  restinguendo 
igni  fOrtnt.  Liv.    Radix  ejus  est  vescendo.  Plin. 

Bem.  4.  Instead  of  the  dative  of  the  end,  a  predicate  nominative  or  accnsa- 
live  is  sometimes  used;  as,  Aaium  tu  illi  pater  es.  By  nature  yoxi  are  his 
father.  Amor  est  exitium  pecori :  or  the  purpose  is  expressed  by* the  accusa- 
tive with  ad  or  in ;  as,  AUcui  cdmes  est  ad  bellum.  Cic.  Se  Rimis  in  clientelam 
diiabajit.  Cjbs.:  or  by  the  ablative  with  j9?-o;  as,  Inndcentia  pro  malivolentia 
duel  coepit.  Sail.  Alclbus  sunt  arbores  pro  cubilibus.  Cses. 

Kem.  5.  Instead,  also,  of  the  dative  of  the  end  or  purpose,  quo  ?  to  what  «nd? 
for  what  purpose?  why?  sometimes  occurs,  with  an  accusative,  which  gen- 
erally depends  on  a  verb  understood,  or  with  an  infinitive  or  a  clause;  as.  Quo 
r»j7<i  fortunam,  si  non  conceditur  uii?  Hor.  Quo  tibi,  Pasiphaf,  pretiusas  suniSre 
vestesf  Ovid. 

Rem.  6.  After  do  and  other  similar  active  verbs  an  accusative  of  the  purpose 
is  found  in  apposition;  as,  Ldt'mi  coronam  auream  -JSvi  dunum  in  CdpituUum 
miUunt.  Liv.    AUcui  cOmltem  esse  datum.  Cic.   Cf.  §  204,  R.  1 ;  and  §  230,  R.  2. 

KoTE.  The  dative,  instead  of  the  accusative,  is  sometimes  used  after  the 
infinitive,  when  a  dative  precedes,  and  the  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  omitted; 
as,  Vobis  necesse  est  fortihus  esse  viris.  Liv.  Maximo  tibi  et  civi  et  duel  evddere 
conUgit.  Val.  Max.   See  §§  205,  R.  6,  and  239,  R.  1. 

DATIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES. 

§  228.  Some  particles  are  followed  by  the  dative  of  the 
object;  as, 

1.  Some  adverbs  derived  from  adjectives;  as, 

Pr6pius  Tiberi  quam  Thermopylis.  Nep.  Proxime  castris,*  Very  near  to  the 
camp.  Goes.  PrOpius  stabulis  armenta  tenerent.  Virg.  Congruenter  naturae, 
convenienterque  v'ltere,  Agi'eeably  to  nature.  Cic.  Ejnturus  quam  sibi  constan- 
ter  convenienterque  dicat,  non  laborai.  Id.  Nemini  mmium  bene  est.  Afran.  Mlhi 
numquam  in  vita,  fuit  melius.  Hor.  Vwere  vitse  hominum  dmlce.  Cic.  Bene 
mlhi,  bene  vobis.  Plaut.  So,  Mlhi  obviam  venisti.  Cic.  Jn  certdmlna  scbvo  com- 
mmus  ire  viro.  Sil.  Qucestdres  prdvincia  mihi  proBsto  fuerunt.  Cic.  Sdmos  est 
exadversum  Mileto.  App. 

Ee:^iai{K.  Prdpius  and  proxime,  like  their  primitive  pr6pe,  are  sometimes 
construed  with  a  and  the  ablative;  as,  Prdpe  a  meis  aedlbus.  Cic.  Stella 
errantes  propius  a  terris.  Id.  A  Sura  proxime  est  Philiscum,  oppidum  Partho- 
rum.  Plin. 

2.  Certain  prepositions,  especiallv  in  comic  writers;  as,  Mihi  clam  es1,  It  is 
unknown  to  me.  Plaut.  Contra  noils.  Id.  But  iu  such  instances  they  seem 
rather  to  be  used  like  adjectives. 

3.  Certain  interjections;  as,  Heimihi!  Ah  me!  Virg.  Fa  irdhi!  Wo  is  me  1 
Ter.   V(£  vittis  esse  !  Liv.   Vob  misero  mihi.  Plaut    Hem  Uli.  Id.  Ecce  tibi.  Cic. 

Note,  (o.)  The  dative  of  the  substantive  pronouns  seems  sometimes  nearly 
redundant,  but  it  always  conveys  the  expression  of  a  lively  feehng,  and  is 
therQioT9  tirmei  diiivtU  ethi9u$  { 'tA^ 


§  229.  SYNTAX. ACCUSAIIVE   AFTER   VERBS.  231 

Fur  mthi  e«, ....  in  my  opinion.  Plant.  An  ille  mihi  liber,  cui  mulier  imp^rat  f 
Cic.  Tungilium  mihi  eduxit.  Id.  Ubi  nunc  nobis  deus  ille  mdgislerf  Vir*. 
J'xce  tihi  ^eOosus !  Cic.  I/ein  t'lhi  talentum  arfjentl!  Pliilipphum  est.  Tlant.  Sioi 
is  sometimes  subjoined  quite  pleonastically  to  suus ;  as,  Suo  sibi  (jlcidlo  hunc 
jugulo.  Phiut.     hjnorans  suo  sibi  servii  jJcUri.  Id.     Sibi.suo  tempore. 

(b.)  The  following  pln-ases  also  occur  with  vulo  and  a  reflexive  pronoim: 
quid  libi  vis  ?  wliat  do  you  want?  quid  sibi  iste  vull  f  Avliat  does  lie  want?  (juid 
vult  sibi  hcBc  ordtio?  what  does  this  speech  mean?  quid  hcec  sibi  dona  volant^ 
what  is  the  meanuig  of  these  presents?  or,  what  is  their  object? 

ACCUSATIVE. 

ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    VERBS. 

§  SS9.  The  object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  put  in  the  accusa- 
tive ;  as, 

Legatos  mittunt,  They  send  ambassadors.  Cass.  Animus  mdvet  corpus,  The 
mind  moves  the  body.  'Cic.  Da  veniam  hanc,  Grant  this  favor.  Ter.  Eum 
imitdti  sunt,  They  imitated  him.  Cic.    Piscem  Syri  venerantur.  Id. 

Remark  1.  A  transitive  verb,  with  the  accusative,  often  takes  a 
genitive,  dative,  or  ablative,  to  express  some  additional  relation ;  as, 

Te  convince  a.mQi\t'i:B,  I  convict  you  of  madness.  Cic.  Da  Idcum  mitMbrihvLn, 
Give  place  to  your  betters.  Ter.  Solvit  se  Teucria  luctu,  Troy  frees  herself 
from  grief.  Virg.     See  those  cases  respectively. 

Rem.  2.  Such  is  die  difference  of  idiom  between  the  Latin  and  English  languages,  that 
many  verbs  considered  transitive  in  one,  are  used  as  intransitive  in  the  other.  Hence, 
iu  translating  transitive  Liitin  verbs,  a  preposition  must  often  be  supplied  in  English; 
as,  Ut  me  cavSret.  That  he  should  beware  of  nie.  Cic.  On  the  other  hand,  many  verbs, 
which  in  Latin  are  intransitive,  and  do  not  take  an  accusative,  are  rendered  into  English 
by  transitive  verbs;  as,  Ille  7nlhi  fdvet.  He  favors  me:  and  many  verbs  originally  in- 
transitive acquire  a  transitive  signiucation. 

Rem.  3.   The  verb  is  sometimes  omitted : — 

1.  To  avoid  its  repetition ;  as,  Eventum  sendius,  quern  ( sc U.  c?<zre)  videhUur^ 
dabit.  Liv. 

2.  The  interrogative  interjection  quidi  what?  depends  on  ais  or  censes.  So 
slso  quid  vero?  quid  Irjiturf  quider(/o?  quid  enim?  which  are  always  followed 
by  another  question,  and  both  questions  may  be  united  into  one  proposition, 
the  first  serving  merely  to  introduce  the  interrogation.  With  quid  posteaj 
quid  turn  ?  supply  sequitur.  With  qidd  quod,  occurring  in  ti'ansitions,  dlcani  de 
€0  is  omitted,  but  it  may  be  I'endered  'nay,'  'nay  even,'  '  but  now,'  'more- 
over,' etc.,  without  an  interrogation. — D'lcam  is  also  to  be  supplied  with  qtud 
multa  f  quid  plara  ?  ne  multa ;  ne  multis ;  ne  plura.  The  infinitive  dicer e  is  also 
sometimes  omitted;  us,  Nimis  multa  videor  de  me.  Cic.    Ferge  rellqua.  Id. 

Rem.  4.   The  accusative  is  often  omitted : — 

1.  When  it  is  a  reflexive  pronoun ;  as,  Nox  prcedpUat,  soil.  se.  Virg.  Turn 
jordra  dvertit.  Id.    £o  Idvdtum,  scil.  me.  Hot. 

The  reflexives  are  usually  wanting  after  abSleo,  ahstineo,  accingo,  adcpquo.  cpquo,  ag- 
glSniSro,  niigeo,  cclSro,  congSmlno,  contviuo,  flecllno,  decSquo,  dSstno,  diffSro,  diiro, 
Sriimpo,  Jfecto,  dS/lfcto,  facesso,  incipio,  incllno,  instnuo,  irrumpo,  jttngo,  Idvo,  laxo^ 
iStiio,  maturo,  ynollio,  movfo,7nuto,  p57io,  pracipVo,  prorumpo,  (/udtio,  rUmitto,  retracto^ 
sSdo,  sisto,  stabulo,  siippSdito,  lardo,  tcneo,  tendo,  trajtcio^transmitto,  turbo,  vario,  vergo^ 
verto,  deverto,  rSverto,  vestio,  vibro ;  and  more  rarely  after  many  others. 

2.  When  it  is  something  indefinite,  has  been  previously  expressed  in  any 
case,  or  is  easily  supplied;  as,  £go,  ad  quos  scrlbam,  nescio,  scU.  llteras.  Cic. 
De  quo  et  tecum  egi  d'digenter,  et  scripsi  ad  te.  Id.  Bene  fecit  Sllius.  Id.  Ddcii 
in  nostem^  scil.  exercUum.  Liv. 


232  SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE   AFTER   VERBS.  §  230. 

Rem.  5.  An  infinitive,  or  one  or  more  substantive  cLiuses,  may 
/mpplj  the  place  of  the  accusative  after  an  active  verb ;  as, 

Da  mihi  fallere.  Hor.  Reddes  dulce  loqul,  reddes  ridere  decorum.  Id.  t^upio 
roe  esse  cleraentera.  Cic.  Athenienties  stdluerunt  ut  naves  conscendereut.  Id. 
I'ereor  ne  a  doctis  reprehendar.  Id.Euoe,  Bacche,  sonat.  Ovid.  Sometimes 
both  constructions  are  united ;  as,  J)i  iram  mlserantur  indnem  amborum,  et  tan- 
tos  mortalibus  esse  labores.  Virg. — Respecting  the  infinitive  with  and  without 
a  subject-accusative  after  an  active  verb,  see  §  270-273;  and  for  the  subjunc- 
tive after  such  verbs,  see  §  273. 

(a.)  In  such  constructions,  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause  is  sometimes 
put  in  the  accusative  as  the  object  of  the  leading  verb ;  as,  Nosti  Marcellum, 
quam  tardus  sit^  for  Nosti  quam  tardus  sit  Marcellus.  Cic.  Dlum,  ut  v'lvaL, 
cpiaiit.  Ter.    At  te  ego  fdciam,  ut  minus  vdleas.  Plant. 

(6.)  An  ablative  with  de  may  also,  supply  the  place  of  the  accusative,  by  the 
ellipsis  of  some  general  word  denoting  things, /acts,  etc.,  modified  by  such  ab- 
lative; ns,  Be  repiiblicd  vestrd  paucis  accipe.  &all.  Compare  a  similar  omission 
of  a  subject  modified  by  de  and  the  ablative,  §  209,  R.  3,  (2.) 

Rem.  6.  The  impersonal  verbs  of  feeling,  miseret,  pcEnitet,  pudety 
tcedet,  pXget^  mXserescitj  mlseretur,  and  pertcesum  est,  are  followed  by 
an  accusative  of  the  person  exercising  the  feeling,'  and  a  genitive  cdT 
the  object  in  respect  to  which  it  is  exercised.  Cf.  §  215,  (1.) ;  as, 

Eorum  nos  miseret,  "We  pity  them.  Cic.  The  impersonal  Veritum  est  also 
occurs  with  such  an  accusative ;  Quos  non  est  veritum  ponere,  etc.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  Juvatf  delectat,  fallitj  fugit,  prceterit,  and  decet,  with  their 
compounds,  take  an  accusative  of  the  person ;  as, 

Te  hildri  anlmo  esse  valde  me  j'livat,  That  you  are  in  good  spirits  greatly 
delights  me.  Cic.  Fufjit  me  ad  te  scribre.  Cic.  lUud  alterum  quam  sit  difficile^ 
te  non  fugit.  Id.  Nee  vero  Caesarera  fefelUt.  Cses.  Facis,  vi  te  decet.  Ter. 
So  also  when  used  personally;  as,  Parvum  parva  decent.  Hon;  but  decet  often 
takes  tlie  accusative  of  the  person  with  the  infinitive ;  as.  Banc  mdcidam  nos 
decet  efi'ugere.  Ter. ;  and  in  comic  writers  a  dative ;  as,  Vobis  decet.  Ter. 

For  mea,  tua,  sua,  nostra,  restra,  after  refert  and  interest,  see  §  219,  R.  1 :  and  for  the 
accusative  by  attraction,  instead  of  the  nominative,  see  §  206,  (6,)  (6.) 

§  S30.  Verbs  signifying  to  name  or  call ;  to  choose,  render 
or  constitute ;  to  esteem  or  reckon,  which  in  the  passive  voice 
have  two  nominatives,  are  followed  in  the  active  voice  by  two 
accusatives,  one  of  the  object  and  the  other  of  the  predicate. 
Cf.  §  210,  R.  3,  (3.)  ;  as, 

^  Urbem  ex  Antidchi  patris  nomine  Antiochiara  vdcdvit.  He  called  the  city  An- 
tioch,  etc.  Just.  Ludos  fdcis  me.  You  make  game  of  me.  Plaut.  Me  consii- 
lem  fecistis.  Cic.  Iram  bene  Ennius  Initium  dixit  insdnice.  Id.  Ancum  Mai- 
cium  regem  pdpulus  credvit.  Liv.  Sulpicium  accusatikem  suum  n&merdbat^ 
non  competltorem.  Cic.  Quum  vos  testes  hdbeam.  Nep. 

NoTK  1.  The  following  are  among  the  verbs  included  in  this  rule,  viz.  appello,  dlco, 
ndmtno,  nunciipo,  pHrhtbeo,  saluto,  scflbo  and  inscribo,  v5co;  capio,  ecnsfUuo,  creOy  dS- 
elaro,  dctigo,  designo,  dlco,  ellgo,  fdcio,  efflcio,  instUuo,  iSgOy  prudo,  reddo.  rBnuncio; 
duco,  digMr,  existlmo,  habeo,  jwtico.  nvtm&ro.  p&to.  ripSrio,  itUeltlgo.  invinio,  se  prce- 
bere  or  prcestare,  etc. 

Note  2.  An  ablative  with  ex  occurs,  though  rarely,  instead  of  the  accusa- 
tive of  the  object;  as,  Foriuna  me,  qui  liber  ftieram,  servum  fecit,  e  summo 
infimum.  Plaut  Cf.  Qui  recta  prava  fdciunt.  Ter. 

Note  3.  An  infinitive  may  supply  the  place  of  the  objective  accusative;  as, 
8i  sTmulasse  vdcai  crimen.  Ovid. : — ^and  sometimes  of  the  predicate  accusative 


IM<<<^ 


§231.  SYNTAX. — ^ACCUSATIVE   AFTER  VERBS.  233 

also;  as,  Si  rSpt^rire  vdcas  amittgre  certius ;  aut  si  scire  ubi  sit  r6p6rlre  vdcas.  Id. 
So  also  an  adjective  may  supply  the  place  cf  the  predicate  accusative;  as, 
Prc^uit  se  diguum  suis  majdnbus.  Cic.   Oxsdrem  certiorein  fdciunt.  Caes. 

Remark  1.  After  verbs  signifying  to  esteem  or  reckon,  one  of  the 
accusatives  is  often  the  subject,  and  the  other  the  predicate,  of  esse 
expressed  or  understood ;  as, 

Eum  S.varura  possumus  existimdre.  Cic.  Talent  se  imperatorem  prtxbuit.  Nep. 
Prcesta  te  eum,  qui  mild  es  cognitus.  Cic.  Mercurium  omnium  inventorem  artium 
fSrunt;  hunc  vidrum  atque  itin^rum  ducem  arbitraniur.  Caes.;  or  an  adjective 
supplies  the  place  of  the  predicate  accusative ;  as,  JVe  me  existimdris  ad  mdnen- 
dum  esse  propensiorem.  Cic. 

Note  4.  Instead  of  the  predicate  accusative,  (1)  pro  with  the  ablative  some- 
times follows  puto,  duco,  and  hdbeo,  but  denotes  only  an  approximation ;  as, 
AUquidkpro  certo  habere  or  putdre.  Ea  pre  falsis  ducit.  Sail.  Allquem  pro  hoste 
habere.  Cses. — So  also  in  with  the  ablative ;  as,  Nihil  prosier  virtutem  in  bonis 
habere.  Cic.  Aliquem  in  niimero  hostium  ducere.  Cic. — and  the  ablative  with- 
out in ;  as,  Uti  vos  afflnium  loco  ducerem.  Sail. — So  also  e  or  ex  with  the  abla- 
tive ;  as,  C  Di)  fdceret  quod  e  republica  f  ide^'ue  sua  duceret.  Liv. — Sometime? 
(2)  the  genitive;  sls,  OSicii  duxit  exordre  flUce patrem.  Suet.  (See^211, E.  8,<3".j| 
So  with  a  genitive  or  an  ablative  of  price  or  value;  as,  Putdre  allquem  nllillo. 
Cic.  Non  hdbeo  xianci  Marsum  augurem.  Enn — and  sometimes  (3)  a  dative;  as, 
Quando  tu  me  hdbes  desplcatui.  Plaut. : — or  an  adverb ;  as,  jEgre  hdbuit,  f  ilium  ia 
pro  pdfente  ausum.  Liv.  And  (4)  ad  or  iti  with  the  accusative;  as,  Z^ca  ad 
nibernacula  Z^^-^re.  Liv.  Aliquem  in  Patres  legere.  Id.:  or  (5)  the  genitive 
depending  on  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  etc. ;  as.  Qui  servltutem  deditionia 
nomine  aj)pellanL  Cses. 

Rem.  2.  Many  other  verbs,  besides  their  proper  accusative,  take  a 
second,  denoting  a  purpose,  time,  character,  etc. 

Such  are  do,  irlbuo,  sumo,  peto,  pono,  adjungo,  ascribo,  cognosco,  accio,  Jingo, 
^gnifico,  etc. ;  as, 

Qudre  ejus  fugos  comTtera  me  adjungerem.  Cic.  Homlnum  dplnio  socium  me 
ascrlbit  tuis  laudibus.  Id.  Quos  ego  slm  tdties  Jam  dedigndta  maritos.  Virg. 
Hunc  igitur  regexn  agnoscimus,  qui  FklUppuin  dedigndtur  patrem?  Curt.  Flliam 
tuam  mlhi  uxorem  posco.  Plaut.  Petit  hanc  ^dturnia  miinus.  Ovid.  Such 
constructions  may  often  be  referred  to  apposition,  or  to  an  ellipsis  of  esse. 

§  331.     Verbs  of  asking,  demanding,  and  teaching,  and  celo 

(to  conceal),  are  followed  by  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  person, 

the  other  of  the  thing ;  as, 

Hoc  te  vehementer  rdgo.  Cic.  Illud  te  07^0,  ut^  etc.  Id.  Hdgo  te  nunimos, 
I  ask  you  for  money.  Mart.  Posce  deos  veniam,  Ask  favor  of  the  gods.  Virg. 
Quum  legent  quis  musicam  ddcuerit  Epaminondam,  When  they  shall  read  who 
taught  Epaminondas  music.  Nep.  Antigdnus  iter  oranes  celat,  Antigbnus  con 
ceals  his  pute  from  all.  Id.  Deprecdri  deos  mala.  Sen.  Qudtldie  Qesar 
.£duos  frvixnentum  Jldgitdre.  Caes.    Multa  deos  orans.  Virg. 

Remark  1.  This  rule  includes  the  verbs  of  asking  and  demanding,  Jlagito^  efflagito^ 
obsecro,  oro,  exoro,  contendo^  percontor,  posco,  rcposco,  consulo^  prScor,  dSprScor,  rSgo, 
and  interrogo,  which,  with  the  accusative  of  the  person,  take  the  accusative  of  the  neuter 
pronouns  hoc,  id,  illud,  quod,  quid,  more  frequently  than  that  of  a  substantive ;  of  teach- 
ing, doceo,  eddceo,  dedoceo,  and  erudio,  which  last  has  two  accusatives  only  in  the  poeta. 
Admoneo  and  consulo  are  rarely  found  with  two  accusatives;  as,  Consulam  hanc  rem 
anilcos.  Plaut.     Earn  rem  nos  Iticus  admonuit.  Sail. 

Rem.  2.  Instead  of  the  accusative  of  the  person,  verbs  of  asking  and  de- 
manding often  take  the  ablative  with  ab  or  ex;  as,  Non  debebam  abs  te  has  litS-- 
raa  poscere.  Cic.  Viniam  Oremus  ab  ipso.  Virg.  Jsiud  vdlebam  ex  te  percontdrU 
Plaut, 

20* 


234       SYNTAX. — ACCUSATIVE  AFTER  VERBS.        §  232. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  Instead  of  the  accusative  of  the  thing,  the  ablative  with  de  is 
sometimes  used ;  as,  Sic  ego  te  eisJem  de  rebus  interrdgem.  Cic.  De  itinOre 
hosiium  senatum  eddcet.  Sail.  Bassus  noster  me  de  hoc  libro  celdvit.  Cic.  Cf.  §  229, 
B.  5,  {b.) — (6.)  Sometimes  also  instead  of  the  accusative  of  the  thing  an  infini- 
tive, or  an  infinitive  or  subiunctive  clause  is  used;  as,  Deos  precari  debitis,  ut 
urbem  defendant.  Cic.  ih  ddce.am  Rullum  posthac  tacere.  Id.  Docni  id  non 
fieri  posse.  Id.  2)Jcea7?<  eurn  qui  vir  Sex.  Roscius  fuerit.  Id. — (c.)  "With  verbs 
of  terxhing,  the  instrument  by  means  of  which  the  art  is  practised  is  put  in 
the  ablative ;  as,  Aliquem  fldibus  docere.  Cic.  Docere  dUqiiem  armis.  Liv. 
Literce  may  be  used  either  in  the  accusative  or  in  the  ablative ;  as,  Te  llteras 
doceo.  Cic.     Docius  Grcecis  liteids.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  Some  verbs  of  asking,  demanding,  and  teaching,  are  not  followed  by  two  ac- 
cusatives; as,  ex'igo,  peto,  postulo^  qiicEro,  scitor,  sciscttor,  which,  with  the  accusative  of 
the  thing,  take  an  ablative  of  the  person  with  the  preposition  ab,  de,  or  ex;  imbuo,  in- 
stituo,  instnio,  etc.,  which  are  sometimes  used  with  the  ablative  of  the  thing,  generally 
without  a  preposition,  and  are  sometimes  otherwise  construed  ;  as,  Insiituire  dTiquem 
ad  dicendum.  Cic.  ^ 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  Many  active  verbs  with  the  accusative  of  the  person, 
take  also  an  accusative  denoting  in  what  respect  or  to  what  degree 
the  action  of  the  verb  is  exerted. 

(b.)  The  accusative  of  degree,  etc.,  is  commonly  nihil,  a  neuter  pronoun,  or 
a  neuter  adjective  of  quantity;  as,  Xon  quo  me  allquid  juvare  posses.  Cic. 
Pauca  pro  tempore  mllites  hortatus.  Sail.  Id  adjiUa  me.  Ter.  Neque  est  te  fal- 
Ure  quidquam.  Virg.  Cf.  §  232,  (3.) 

Rem.  6.  By  a  similar  construction,  genus  and  secus, '  sex,'  are  sometimes  used 
in  the  accusative,  instead  of  the  genitive  of  quality;  as,  Nullas  hoc  genus  vigt- 
tias  vigildru7it.  Gell.     So,  Omnes  muliebre  secus.  Suet.  Cf.  211,  R.  6,  (4.) 

§  339.  (1.)  Some  neuter  verbs  are  followed  bj  an  accusa- 
tive of  kindred  signification  to  their  own ;  as, 

Wltixxti  jucnndnm  vlvere,  To  live  a  pleasant  life.  Plant.  Mlrum  somnidvi 
somnium,  I  have  dreamed  a  wonderful  di-ea^.  Id.  Furere  hunc  fiirurera. 
Virg.  Istam  pugnam  pugndbo.  Plant.  Pugndre  dlcenda  Musis  proeha.  Hor. 
Lusum  insolentem  ludere.  Id.  Si  non  servitutem  serviat.  Plant.  Quej-or  hand 
/"da'/es  questus.  Stat.  Jurdvi  vei-issimum  jusjurandum.  Cic.  Igmtcts  jubetlre 
vias.  Val.  Flacc.  So,  also.  Ire  exsequias,  To  go  to  a  funeral.  Ter.  Ire  suppe- 
tias,  To  go  to  one's  assistar.ce.  Ire  infltias,  To  deny.  This  expression  .is 
equivalent  to  tn/i^jor,  and  may  like  that  take  an  accusative;  as,  Si  hoc  unum 
aajunxerOj  quod  nemo  eat  infitlas.  Nep. :  or  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive ; 
as,  Neque  infitias  imus  Siciliam  nostram  provinciam  esse.  Liv.  Ut  suum  gau- 
dium  gauderemus.  Coel.  ad  Cic.  Prdficisci  magnum  Iter.  Cic.  Pollux  itque 
reditque  viam.  Virg.   This  accusative  is  usually  qualified  by  an  adjective. 

(2.)    Verbs  commonly  neuter  are  sometimes  used  transitively, 

and  are  then  followed  by  an  accusative. 

Accusatives  are  thus  used  with  oleo  and  sapio,  and  their  compounds,  reddleOj 
rhipio;  as,  Oie<  imguenta.  He  smells  of  perfumes.  Ter.  O^re  peregrinnra, 
To  have  a  foreign  smell.  Cic.  Ordtimes  redolentes  antiquitatem.  Id.  Mella 
herbam  eamsdpiunt,  The  honey  tastes  of  that  herb.  Plin.  Uva  picera  resipiens. 
Id._  So,  Sitio  honores.  Cic.  Camem  pluit.  Liv.  Claudius  aleam  stOdiosissime 
Iwdt.  Suet.  Erumpere  diu  coerdtam  irara  iw  hostes.  Liv.  Libros  cvigildre.  Ovid. 
Prcalre  verba.  Liv.  Nee  foa;-h6minem  s6nat.  Virg.  Suddre  mella.  Id.  Morien- 
tsm.  nd;nine  cldmat.  Id.  Quis  post  vlna  grdvem  vn\\\\.i?iTa  aut  pauperiem  crepaif 
Hor.  Omnes  una  mdnei  nox.  Id.  Ingrdti  dnimi  crimen  horreo.  Cic.  Ego  jnea* 
jueror  fortiinas.  Plant.  Vivere  Bacchanalia.  Juv.  Pastorem  saltdrei  uti  Cy- 
clopa,  rdgdbai.  Hor.  So  the  passive;  Nunc  agresfem  CyClopa  movetur.  Id. 
Xerius  quum  mare  amhCddxisset,  teiTam  navigasset.  Cic.  Q(a  stadium  cun-it.  Id, 
ibmminia  jtLra  migrdrs.  Id.    T«  vfflo  c(^idqui.  Plaut    I£a  (U»sir(re  nt^td.  Cfo. 


§233.  STNTiX. ACCUSATIVE   AFTER   VERBS.  235 

Cdrpdon  ardehat  Alexin.  Virg.   Stygias  jurarAmm  undas.  Ovid.  Ndvigat  aequor. 
Virg.  Cui-rtmm  sequor.  Id.    Fascuntur  sylvas.  Id. 

Note  1.  Accusatives  are  found  in  like  manner  after  ambulo,  calleo,  ddko,  Squfto,  JleOj 
gaudeo,  gSmo,  glorior,  horreo,  IcBtor,  latro,  nato,  paMeo,  paveo,  pSreo,  depSreo,  pr5cSdo, 
quSror,  rldeo,  stleo,  stb1.lo,^tdceo,  trSmo,  trSpido,  vSdo,  vSnio,  etc. 

(3.)  Neuter  verbs  and  sometimes  adjectives  also  may  be  fol- 
lowed by  an  accusative  denoting  in  what  respect,  or  to  what  de- 
gree, the  feeling,  condition,  etc.,  is  manifested ;  as, 

Nihil  Idboro.  Cic.  Num  id  lacrtmat  virgo  ?  Does  the  maid  weep  on  that  ac- 
count? Ter.  Malta  alia  jpeccat.  Cic.  Quicquid  dellrant  reges,  plectuntur 
Achivi.  Hor.  Nee  tu  id  indtgndri  posses.  Liv.  Ulud  mihi  Imtandum  video.  Cic. 
Illud  valde  tiU  assentior.  Id.  Idem  gloridri.  Id.  Hsec  glorians.  Liv.  Hoc 
siOdet  mum.  Hor. — So,  Id  dperam  do,  I  strive  for  this.  Ter.  Consilium  j^t'tisy 
quid  tibi  sim  auctor.  Cic.  Quod  gu'idam  auctores  sunt,  Which  is  attested  by 
some  authors.  Liv.  Nil  nostii  miserere  f  Virg. — NihU  Romance  plebis  similis. 
Liv.  Sendtus  nihil  sdne  intentus.  Sail.  These  limiting  accusatives  have  com- 
monly the  force  of  adverbs,  particularly  nihil,  which  is  used  like  an  eqiphatic 
rum  in  the  sense  of '  in  no  way,'  '  in  no  respect.'  So  non  nihil,  *  to  some  extent,' 
*  in  some  measure.' 

Note  2.  In  the  above  and  similar  examples,  the  prepositions  ob,  propter,  per,  ad,  etc., 
may  often  be  supplied.  This  construction  of  neuter  verbs  is  most  common  with  the 
neuter  accusatives  id,  quid,  quidquam,  atiquid,  quicquid,  quod,  nViil,  nonnViil,  tderriy 
illud,  tantum,  quantum,  unum,  mvlta,  pauca,  alia,  cetera,  omnia,  etc.  Cf.  §  256,  R.  16,  N. 

§  333.  Many  verbs  are  followed  by  an  accusative  depend- 
ing upon  a  preposition  with  which  they  are  compounded. 

(1.)  Active  verbs  compounded  with  trans,  ad,  and  circum,  have 
sometimes  two  accusatives,  one  depending  upon  the  verb,  the  other 
upon  the  preposition ;  as, 

Omnem  eqziitdtum  pontem  transducit.  He  .leads  all  the  cavalry  over  the  bridge. 
Caes.  Agesilaus  HeUespontum  copias  trdjecit.  Nep.  Petreius  jusjurandum  dd- 
igit  Afranium.  Caes.  Roscilluni  Pompdius  omnia  sua  praesidia  circumduxii.  Id. 
So,  Pontus  scopiilos  superjdcit  undam.  Virg.  So,  also,  adverto  and  indUco  with 
dnimum ;  as.  Id  dnimum  advertit.  Caes.  Id  quod  animura  induxerat  paulisper 
non  tlnuit.  Cic.    So,  also,  injicio  in  Plautus — Ego  te  mdnum  injiciam. 

(2.)  Some  other  active  verbs  take  an  accusative  in  the  passive 
voice  depending  upon  their  prepositions ;  as, 

Mdgicas  accingier  artes.  To  prepare  oneself  for  magic  arts.  Virg,  In  prose 
writers  the  ad  is  in  such  cases  repeated;  as,  accingi  ad  co7isuldtum.  Liv. 
Clnssis  circumvehitur  arcem.  Id.  Quod  anguis  d6mi  vectem  circumjectus  fuisset. 
Cic.    Locum  prcetervedtus  sum.  Id. 

(3.)  Many  neuter  verbs,  especially  verbs  of  motion,  or  of  rest  in  a 
place,  when  compounded  with  prepositions  which  govern  an  accusa- 
tive, become  transitive,  and  accordingly  take  an  accusative ;  as, 

Gentes  quce  mare  illud  adjacent.  The  nations  which  border  upon  that  sea.  Nep. 
Obequitdre  agmen.  Curt.  Inceduni  moestos  locos.  Tac.  Transilui  flammas.  Ovid. 
Succedere  tecta.  Cic.  LUdorum  diebus,  qui  cognitlonem  intervenerant.  Tac. 
Adire  provinciam.  Suet.  Caveat  ne  prcelium  ineat.  Cic.  Ingredi  iter  pedibus. 
Cic.     Ipicuri  horti  quos  mddo  prceierlbdmus.  Id. 

Note.  To  this  rule  belong  many  of  the  compounds  of  ambUlo,  cedo,  curro,  eo,  ^qutto, 
Jluo,  gradior,  labor,  no  and  ndto,  rSpo,  salio,  scando,  vddo,  vShor,  venio,  vdlo ; — cd&O, 
jSceo^  sSdeo,  sisto,  sto,  ete.,  with  the  prepositions  included  in  {  224,  and  with  ea;. 


236  SYNTAX. — ^ACCUSATIVE   AFTER   VERBS.  §  234. 

Remark  1.  Some  neuter  verbs  compounded  with  prepositions 
which  govern  an  ablative,  in  like  manner  become  transitive,  and  are 
followed  by  an  accusative ;  as, 

Nerainem  conveni,  I  met  with  no  one.  Cic.  Qui  societatem  coieris.  Id. 
Aversdn  honores.  Ovid.  Ursi  axborem  dvei'si  derepunt.  PI  in.  Edo-rmi  crapulam. 
Cic.  Egressus  exsilium.  Tac.  Evaditque  celer  ilpam.  Virg.  Excedere  nilme- 
rum.  Tac.    Exlre  lirnen.  Ter.    Tibur  aqua  feriUe  prcejiuunt.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  After  verbs  both  active  and  neuter,  compounded  with 
prepositions  which  take  an  accusative,  the  preposition  is  often  repeat- 
ed, or  one  of  similar  signification  is  used ;  as, 

CoEsnr  se  ad  neminem  adjunxit.  Cic.  MuUitudtnem  trans  Khenum  in  GaUiam 
transduce  re.  Caes. — In  Galliam  invdsit  Antonius.  Cic.  Ad  me  adlre  quosdam 
memini.  Id.  Orator  peraqrat  per  animos  hdinlnum.  Id.  Ne  in  senatura  acced^- 
rem.  Id.  Reg'ma  ad  templum  incessit.  Virg.  Juxta  genltorem  adstat  Ldviiiia.  Id. 
Fines  extra  quos  egredi  non  possim.  Cic.  A  dative  instead  of  the  accusative 
often  follows  such  compounds,  according  to  §  224.  Circum  is  not  repeated. 

NcTte.  Some  verbal  nouns  and  verbal  adjectives  in  bundus  are 
followed  bv  an  accusative,  like  the  transitive  verbs  from  which  they 
are  derived ;  as. 

Quid  tibi  hue  receptio  ad  te  est  meum  vlrum?  Wherefore  do  you  receive  my 
husband  hither  to  you  ?  Plant.  Quid  tibi,  malum^  me,  aut  quid  ego  agam,  curdtxo 
'st  V  Id.  Quid  tlbihanc  aditio  est  ?  Id.  Quid  tibi  banc  notw  est,  tnquam,  amicam 
meara?  Quid  tibi  hanc  dif/tto  tactio 'st?  Id.  Hanno  vltdbundus  castra  hostium 
consulesque.  Liv.  Mithrldates  Romanum  medltabundus  beUum.  Just.  Mlrd- 
bundi  vanam  speciem.  Liv.  PopiildbuTidus  agros.  Sisenn.  Camificem  imdgtnd- 
hundus.  App. 

§  934:.  A  verb  in  the  passive  voice  has  the  same  govern- 
ment as  in  the  active,  except  that  the  accusative  of  the  active 
voice  becomes  the  nominative  of  the  passive. 

Note  1.  The  accusative  of  the  person  with  the  infinitive,  after  verbs  of  saying 
and  commanding,  may  become  the  siibject  of  the  passive  voice;  as,  Active, 
IHco  regem  esse  justum ; — Passive,  Rex  dicitur  Justus  esse.  Act.  JObeo  te  re^ 
dire ; — Pass.  JUberis  redlre :  the  construction  in  the  passive  beincr  the  same  as 
though  rigem  and  te  had  depended  immediately  upon  dlco  and  jaoeo. — So,  also, 
when  the  accusative  of  the  person  is  the  object  of  the  verb  and  the  infinitive 
stands  as  the  accusative  of  the  thing.  Cf.  §  270,  N. 

I.  When  a  verb,  which  in  the  active  voice  takes  an  accusative 
both  of  the  person  and'  of  the  thing,  is  changed  to  the  passive  form, 
the  accusative  of  the  person  becomes  the  nominative,  and  the  accusa- 
tive of  the  thing  is  retained  ;  as, 

Rdgdtus  est  sententiam.  He  -was  asked  his  opinion.  Liv.  Interrdgdtus  causam. 
Tac.  Segetes  al!menta^«e  debita  dives  poscebdtur  Mmus.  Ovid.  Motus  dOceri 
gaudet  Idnicos  tndtura  virgo.  Hor.  Omnes  belli  artes  edoctus.  Liv.  Nosne  hoc 
celatos  tarn  diuf  Ter.    Multa  in  extis  mdnemur.  Cic. 

Note  2.  The  accusative  of  the  thing  after  doctxis  and  edoctus  is  rare;  and 
after  celdii  it  is  generally  a  neuter  pronoun;  as  hoc  or  id  celabar;  of  this  I  was 
kept  in  ignorance;  but  it  is  found  also  with  the  person  in  the  dative;  a?.  Id 
Alclbiadi  didtiiis  celdri  non  potuit.  Nep.  Alcib.  6.  Ceto,  and  especially  its  pas- 
sive, generiilly  takes  de  with  the  ablative. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  -Induo  and  exuo,  though  they  do  not  take  two  accusatives 
in  the  active  voice,  are  sometimes  followed  bv  an  accusative  of  the  thing  in 


§  235.       SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE   AFTER   PREPOSITIONS.  237 

the  passive;  as,  InduUur  dtras  vestes,  She  puts  on  sable  garments.  Ovid. 
Thoraca  induttis.  Virg.  Exuta  est  Roma  senectam.  Mart.  So  inducor  and  cin- 
gor;  iis,  Fermm  cingitur.  Vh'g.     So  recingUur  anguem.  Ovid. 

(b.)  When  two  accusatives  follow  an  active  verb  compounded  with  tram, 
the  passive  retains  that  which  depends  upon  the  preposition ;  as,  Belgce  Rhenum 
antlquitus  transducli.  Cas. 

Rem.  2.  The  future  passive  participle  in  the  neuter  gender  with  est,  is  some- 
times, though  rarely,  followed  by  an  accusative ;  as,  Malta  ndds  rebus  quum  sit 
agendum.  Lucr.     Q'uam  (viam)  nobis  ingrediendum  est.   Cic. 

n.  Adjectives,  verbs,  and  perfect  participles,  are  sometimes  fol- 
lowed by  an  accusative  denoting  the  part  to  which  their  signification 
relates;  as, 

Nadus  membra,  Bare  as  to  his  limbs.  Virg-  Os  humerosyj^e  deo  simiUs.  Id. 
Clai-i  genus.  Tac.  Tnbuni  suam  vicem  anxii.  Liv.  Tremit  artus.  Virg.  Cetera 
pnrce  jmer  bello.  Id.  Slblla  colla  tumentem.  Id.  Expleri  mentem  nequit.  Id. 
Gryneus  eruitur  ociilos.  Ovid.  Picti  sciita  Ldbici.  Virg.  Collis  frontem  lentter 
fasttgdtus.  Cses.     Animum  incensus.  Liv.   Obliius  f  aciem  sua  cruore.  Tac. 

Remark  1.  In  this  construction  an  ablative  is  often  joined  with  the  perfect 
participle;  as,  M'des  fractus  membra  labore.  Hor.  Dexterum  genu  lapide 
tcius.  Suet.     Adversum  femur  tragula  grdviter  ictus.   Liv. 

Rem.  2.  This  is  a  Greek  construction,  and  is  usually  called  the  limiting  or 
Gi'eeh  accusative.  It  is  used  instead  of  an  ablative  of  limitation,  (§  250,)  and 
occurs  most  frequently  in  poetry. 

Rem.  3.  A  limiting  accusative  instead  of  the  ablative  is  found  also  in  a  few 
ordinary  expressions,  as  in  partim  (for  ^;a?'^eni),  vicem,  magnam  and  maximam 
partem,  instead  of  magna  or  maxima  ex  parte,  or  the  adverb  fere ;  as,  Maxi- 
mam partem  lacte  vlvunt.  Cses.  Magnam  jfai^tem  ex  iambis  nostra  constat  ordtio. 
Cic.  Livy  has  magna  pars,  viz.  Numidoe,  magna  pars  agi-estes. — So  cetera  and 
reliqua  ave  joined  to  adjectives  in  the  sense  oi  ceteris,  '  for  the  rest,'  '  in  other 
respects ' ;  as,  Proximum  regnum,  cetera  egregium,   ab  una  j^rte  haud  satis 

S'osperum  fuit.  Liv.     So  cetera  similis,  cetera  bonus.     A  te  bis  terve  summum 
?ras  accepi.  Cip. — So,  also,  in  the  expi-essions  id  temporis;  id,  hoc  or  idem 
cetdtis,  illud  Iwrce,  for  eo  temjwre,  ed  estate,  etc. ;  id  genus,  omne  genus,  quod  genus. 

in.  Some  neuter  verbs  which  are  followed  by  an  accusative,  are 
used  in  the  passive  voice,  the  accusative  becoming  the  subject,  ac- 
cording to  the  general  rule  of  active  verbs;  as, 

Tenia  vivitur  cetas.  Ovid.  Bellum  mllUdbitur.  Hor.  Dormitur  Mems.  ]\Iart. 
Malta  peccantur.  Cic.  Ad'dur  Gnossius  Minos.  Sen.  Ne  ab  oinnibus  circumsis- 
Uretur.  Caes.  Hostes  invddi  posse.  Sail.  Campus  dbltur  dgud.  Ovid.  Plures  in- 
euntur  grdtice.  Cic.    Ea  res  siletur.  Id. 

ACCUSATIVE    AFTER    PREPOSITIONS. 

§  33^«  (1.)  Twenty-six  prepositions  are  followed  by  the 
accusative. 

These  are  &d,  adversus  or  adversum,  antS,  &pUd,  circa,  or  eircum,  circiter,  cis  or  citrS, 
contra,  erga,  extra,  infra,  inter,  intra,  juxta,  Sb,  pSnes,  pSr,  post,  ponS,  prcBtSr,  propS, 
propter,  secundum,  supra,  trans,  ultra  ;  as. 

Ad  templum  non  ceqtice  Pallddis  Ibant, — to  the  temple.  Virg.  Adversus  hostes^ 
Against  the  enemy.  Liv.  Germdniqui  cis  Rhenum  incolunt, — this  side  the  Rhine. 
Ctes.  Quum  tantum  resfdeat  intra  muros  mdli.  Cic.  Principio  rerum  imperium 
penes  reges  erat.  Just.  Templum  pdnam  propter  dquam.  Virg.  Inter  agendum. 
Id.  Ante  ddmandum.  Id.  Respecting  the  signification  of  some  of  the  preced- 
ing prepositions  see  §  195,  R.  5,  etc. 


238     SYNTAX. ACCUSATIVE  AFTEB  PREPOSITIONS.   §  235 

Rrmark  1.  Gs  is  generally  used  with  names  of  p. aces;  citra  with  oflier 
words  also;  as,  Cis  Taurum.  Cic.  Gs  Padum.  Liv.  Paucos  cis  menses.  Plant. 
Citra  Veliam.  Cic.  Citra  sdtietatem,  Not  to  satiety.  Col.  CUra  fdtigdtioneTiu 
Cels.     Citra  Trojdna  t€n}pdra.   Ovid. 

Eem.  2.*  Inter^  signifyin;?  between,  applies  to  two  accusatives  jointly,  and 
sometimes  to  a  single  plural  accusative ;  as.  Inter  me  et  Scipionem,  Cic.  Jnter 
tidios  et  pufentes.  Id.  Inter  nos.  Among  ourselves.  Id.  Jnter  fakdrios,  Among 
the  sc\-the-makers.  Cic.  When  it  denotes  time  it  signifies  during,  and  more 
rarely  at ;  as,  Inter  ipsuiii  pugnoB  tempus.  Liv.     hUer  ccenam.  Cic. 

Kem.  3.  Ante  and  post  are  commonly  joined  with  concrete  official  titles, 
when  used  to  indicate  time,  rather  than  with  the  corresponding  abstract  nouns ; 
as,  ani^  or  post  Ctceronem  consulem,  rather  than  ante  or  post  consulatom  Cici' 
ronis. 

(2.)  In  and  sub,  denoting  motion  or  tendency,  are  followed  by  the 
accusative ;  denoting  situation,  they  are  followed  by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Via  ducit  in  urbem,  The  way  conducts  into  the  city.  Virg.  Noster  in  te  amor. 
Cic.  CaUimachi  ep! gramma  in  Cleombrotura  est — on  or  concerning  Cleombrotus. 
Id.  Exercitus  sub  jugum  missus  est,  The  army  was  sent  under  the  yoke.  Coes. 
Magna  mei  sub  terras  ibit  imago.  Virg.  Midid  in  urbe,  In  the  midst  of  the 
city.  Ovid,.  In  his  fuii  Ariovlstus.  Csss.  Bella  sid>  Iliiicis  moenlbus  gerire^ 
To*  wage  war  under  the  Trojan  walls.  Ovid.     Sub  nocte  silenti.  Virg. 

Rem.  4.  The  most  common  significations  of  in,  with  the  accusative,  are, 
into,  to,  towards,  until,  for,  against,  about,  concerning, — with  the  ablative,  in,  on, 
upon,  among.  In  some  instances,  in  and  sub,  denoting  tendency,  are  followed 
by  the  ablative,  and,  denoting  situation,  by  the  accusative;  as.  In  conspectu 
tneo  audet  venire.  Phaed.  Ndtiones  gius  in  amicitiam  pojmli  Roiiidni,  ditionem- 
■nie  essent.  Id.  Sub  jugo  dictator  hastes  inisit.  Liv.  Bastes  sub  montem  conse- 
^isse.  Cses. 

Eeji.  5.  In  and  sub,  in  different  significations,  denoting  neither  tendency  nor 
situation,  are  followed  sometimes  by  the  accusative,  and  sometimes  by  the 
ablative;  as,  ^wwr  crescjf  in  boras.  C)vid.  Host'dem  in  modura.  Cic.  Quod  in 
bdno  serA'o  dlci  posset.  Id.     Sub  ed  conditione.  Ter.     Sub  poena  mortis.  Suet. 

Kem.  6.  In  expressions  relating  to  time,  svb,  denoting  at  or  in,  usually  takes 
the  ablative ;  as,  Sub  adventu  ROmdmrum.  Liv.  Sub  luce.  Ovid.  Sub  tempdre. 
Lucan.  Denoting  near,  about.  Just  before  or  just  after,  it  takes  the  accusative; 
as,  Sub  lucem.  Virg.     Sub  lumiua  prima.  Hor.     Sub  hoc  hems  inquit.  Id. 

Rem.  7.  In  is  used  with  neuter  adjectives  in  the  accusative  in  forming  ad- 
verbial phrases ;  as,  In  universum,  In  general.  In  totum,  Wholly.  So,  in  plenum ; 
inincertum;  intanium;  in  quantum;  inmajus;  in  milius  ;  in  omnia,  in  all  re- 
spects, etc. 

(3.)  Super,  when  denoting  place  or  time,  is  followed  by  the  accusa- 
tive, and  sometimes  poetically  by  the  ablative  ;  but  when  it  signifies 
on,  about,  or  concerning,  it  taJies  the  ablative.  With  the  accusative 
super  signifies  over,  above,  besides  or  in  addition  to  ;  with  numerals, 
more  than;  as, 

Super  Idbentem  culmlna  tecti,  Gliding  over  the  top  of  the  house.  Virg.  SUper 
tres  mddios.  Liv.  Super  nun-bum  etiam  fames  affecit  exercitum.  Id.  Super 
tSmro  prosternit  gramlne  corpus.  He  stretches  his  body  on  the  tender  grass. 
Virg.  JIulia  super  Priamo  ragltans  super  Hectore  muUa, ....  coucemiug  Priam, 
etc.  Id. 

Rem.  8.  The  compound  desfper  is  found  with  the  accusative,  and  insuper 
with  the  accusative  and  the  ablative. 

(4.)    Subter  generally  takes  the    accusative,  but  sometimes,  in 
poetry,  the  ablative ;  as, 
Subter  terras,  Under  the  earth.  Liv.    Subter  densd  testudine.  Virg. 


§  236.       SYNTAX. ACCUSATIV .!:    OF    TIME    AND    SPACE.  239 

(5.)   Clam  is  followed  by  either  the  accusative  or  the  ablative ;  as, 

ClamxoH,  Without  your  knowledge.  Cic.  Clarmpatrem.  Ter.  Clam  matrem 
BUrtm.  Plaut.  Clam  vobis.  Cass.  Neque  jyotest  clam  me  esse.  Plant.  Clam 
axoi*e  raea.  Id.  Its  diminutive  clanculum  is  once  followed  by  tlie  accusative, 
clancidum  patres.  Ter. 

Rem.  9.  The  adverbs  versus  or  versum  and  usque  are  sometimes  annexed 
to  an  accusative,  principally  of  place,  which  depends  on  ad  or  In,  and  sometimes 
the  preposition  is  omitted;  as.  Ad  Oceanum  versus  prdficisci.  Csps.  Fugam 
8.d  se  versum.  Sail.  In  Galliam  versus  castra  mdvere.  Id. —  Usque  ad  Niiman- 
tiam.  Cic.  Usque  in  Pamphyliam.  Id.  Ad  noctem  usque.  Plaut. — Brundusium 
versus.  Cic.  Tenuinos  usqiie  Libyce.  Just.  Usque  Ennam  proftcti.  Cic.  Versus 
is  always  placed  after  the  accusative. —  Usque  occurs  more  rarel}^  with  sub  and 
trans  with  the  accusative ;  as.  Trans  Alpes .  usque  iransferiur.  Cic.  Usque 
sub  extremum  brumw  imbrem. —  Versus  also  rarely  follows  ab,  and  usque 
either  a6  or  ex  with  the  ablative ;  as,  Ab  septemtrione  versus.  Varr.  A  funda- 
mento  usque  movisti  mare.  Plaut.  Usque  ex  ultima  Syria.  Cic.  Usque  a  pueiltia. 
Ter.   Us'jue  a  Roinulo.  Cic.    Usque  a  mane  ad  vesperum.  Plaut. 

Rem.  10.  Prepositions  ai-e  often  used  without  a  noun  depending  upon  them, 
but  such  noun  may  usually  be  supplied  by  the  mind;  as,  Muliis  -post  annis, 
i.  e.  post  id  tempus.  Cic.    Circum  Cbncordice,  scil.  cedem.   Sail. 

Rem.  11.  The  accusative,  in  many  constructions,  is  supposed  to  depend  on  a 
preposition  understood;  as.  Quid  djms  est  plurdf  i.  e.  propter  quid?  why  V  i.  q. 
cur  f  or  guare  ?  Cic.  So,  Quid  me  ostentem  f  Id.  But  it  is  not  easy,  in  every 
case,  to  say  what  preposition  should  be  supplied.  For  the  accusative  without 
a  preposition  after  neuter  verbs,  see  §  232.  -  For  the  accusative  of  limitation, 
see  §  234, 11. 

ACCUSATIVE  OF  TIME  AND  SPACE. 

§  ^36.  Nouns  denoting  duration  of  time,  or  extent  of  space, 
are  put,  after  adjectives  and  verbs,  in  the  accusative,  and  some- 
times after  verbs  in  the  ablative ;  as, 

Ace.  Appius  emeus  multos  annos  Juit,  Appius  was  blind  many  years.  Cic. 
'hldnnrci  Laodicece  fid.  Id.  D'iqs  toto?,  de  virtute  disserunt.  Id.  Ti^  jam  annum 
avdientem  Cratippum.  Id. — Decreverunt  intercaldrium  quinque  et  quadraginta 
dies  lonyum.  Id. —  Quum  dbessem  ab  Amdno  Iter  linius  diet.  Id.  Tres  puteat  cadi 
spdtium  non  ampUus  ulnas.  Virg.  (Cf.  §  256,  R.  6.)  A  portu  stadia  centum  et 
viginti  processimus.  Cic. — Duos  fossas  quindtcim  pedes  Idias  pBduxit, — two 
ditches  fifteen  feet  broad.  CfBs.  Fossce  quinos  pedes  altce.  Id.  Fdrdmina  longa 
pedes  tres  semis.  Cato.  Orbem  dledrium  crassum  dlgitos  sex  fucUo.  Id.— 
AuL.  Vixit  annis  undetrTginta.  Suet.  Quatuordecim  annis  exsUium  tolerdvit, 
Tac.  Triginta  annis  vixit  PancBtius.  Cic. — Fxercitus  Romdnus  trulai  itinere  ab- 
fuit  ah  amne  Tdnai.  Tac.  jEsculdpii  templum  quinque  millibus  passuum  dis- 
tans.  Liv. 

Note  1.  The  ablative  denoting  extent  of  time  and  space  is  rarely  used  by 
Cicero,  and  less  frequently  than  the  accusative  by  other  writers. 

Note  2.  The  accusative  denoting^  extent  of  space  sometimes  follows  the  ab- 
xerhB  longe,  alte,  etc.;  asj  Campestiis  locus  alte  duos  pedes  et  seinissem  in/'(5- 
diendus  est.  Colum.  Verctngetdiix  Idcum  casiris  deligit  ab  Avarico  huge  mUlia 
passuum  sedecim.  Cses. 

Note  3.  {a.)  Old,  in  reference  to  the  time  which  a  person  Jias  lived,  is 
expressed  in  Latin  by  ndtus,  with  an  accusative  of  the  time;  as,  Decessit 
Alexander  mensem  unam,  annos  tres  et  triginta  ndtus.  Just.  (6.)  A  person's 
age  may  also  be  expressed  without  ndtus  by  a  genitive  of  the  time  closely 
connected  with  his  name,  according  to  §  211,  R.  6;  as,  Alexander  annoi'um 
trium  et  triginta  decessit.  (c.)  Older  or  younger  than  a  certain  age  is  ex- 
pressed by  prefixing  to  the  aceusative  or  genitive  of  &e  deSnite  age  the  ad- 


540  SYNTAX. ^ACCUSATIVE    OF    PLACE.  §  237. 

verbs  plus  o?  minus,  or  the  adjectives  major  or  mitwr,  either  with  or  without 
quam.  See  §  256,  R.  6  and  7.— Sometimes,  also,  the  ablative  depends  on  the 
comparative ;  a.s.  Minor  vlginii  quinqve  annis  natus.  Nep.  Minor  triginta  annis 
natu.  Cic.    Biennio  quam  nos  major.  Id.  Cf.  §  256,  R.  16.  (1.) 

Remark  1.  Nouns  denoting  time  or  space,  used  to  limit  otlier  nouns,  are  put 
in  the  genitive  or  ablative.    See  §  211,  R.  6.  . 

Rem  2.  A  term  of  time  not  yet  completed  may  be  expressed  by  an  ordinal 
number;  sis,  Nos  xicC'simnm  iain  diem  putimur  hebescere  aciem  hoi-um  auctorU 
tutis.  Cic.  Punico  bello  duodeclmum  annum  Jtdiia  urebdtur.  Liv.  Hence  in 
the  passive.  Nunc  tertia  viritur  aetas.  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  or  ablative  of  space  is  sometimes  omitted,  while  a 
genitive  depending  on  it  remains;  as,  Castra  quce  dberant  bidui,  scil.  spdtium  at 
sj)dtio.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  To  denote  a  place  by  its  distance  from  another,  the  ablative  is 
commonly  used ;  as,  Millibus  ^ot^umwi  sex  a  Ccesdins  castris  consedit.  Caes.;  but 
sometimes  the  accusative ;  as,  Tria  passuum  millia  ab  ipsa  urbe  castra  pdsuiL 
Liv.  The  only  words  used  for  this  purpose  in  the  ablative  alone  are  spdtio  and 
intervaUo ;  as,  Quindecim  ferme  milUum  spatio  castra  ab  Tdrento  pdsuit.  Id. 

Note  4.  For  ahhinc  and  a  cardinal  number,  with  the  accusative  or  ablative 
of  past  time,  see  §  253,  R.  2.  For  the  ablative  denoting  difference  of  time  or 
space,  see  ^  256,  R.  16. 

Rem.  5.  A  preposition  is  sometimes  expressed  before  an  accusative  of  time 
or  space,  but  it  generally  modifies  the  meaning;  as,  Qu^m  per  dicem  annos 
dlulmus, ....  during  ten  years.  Cic. 

Rem.  6.  When  the  place  from  which  the  distance  is  reckoned  is  not  men- 
tioned, ab  is  sometimes  placed  before  the  ablative  of  distance,  as  if  this  de- 
pended on  the  preposition ;  as,  A  millibus  passuum  duobus  castra  pdsuerunt,  Two 
miles  from  the  place,  or,  Two  miles  off.  Caes. 

Rem.  7.  An  accusative  of  weight  also  occurs  when  expressed  hjUbram  or 
V&ras  in  connection  with  pondo.  Cf.  §  211,  R.  6.  (4.) 

ACCUSATIVE    OF    PLACE. 

§  S37*  After  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion,  the 
name  of  the  town  in  which  the  motion  ends  is  put  in  the  accusa- 
tive without  a  preposition ;  as, 

Reptdus  Carthaginem  rediil,  Regulus  returned  to  Carthage.  Cic.  Capuam 
jlectk  iter.  He  turns  his  course  to  Capua.  Liv.  Calpumius  Romam  prdficisci* 
tur.  Sail.    Romam  erat  nuncidtum.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  accusative,  in  like  manner,  is  used  after  Her  with  sum,  hd- 
beo,  etc. ;  as.  Iter  est  mihi  Lanmnum.  Cic.  Ctesdrem  iter  habere  Capuam.  Id 
And  even  after  sum  alone ;  as,  Omnia  ilia  municipia,  quce  sunt  a  Vibone  Bnindl- 
sium.  Cic.  So  Mith  a  verbal  noun;  sls,,  Adventus&bm2.m.  Liv.  ReditusBxh 
mam.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  preposition  to  be  supplied  is  in,  denoting  to  or  into,  which 
is  sometimes  expressed ;  as,  In  Ephesum  dbii.  Plant.  Ad,  before  the  name 
of  a  town,  denotes  direction  towards  it;  as,  Iter  dirlgere  ad  Miitinam.  Cic;  and 
also  its  vicinity ;  as,  Adolescentulus  miles  profectus  sum  ad  Cdpuam  ;  i.  e.  in  cas- 
tra ad  Cdp'iam.  Id.  So,  Loelius  cum  classe  ad  Brundlsinm  venit.  Caes.  Cxesar 
ad  Genevtn  pervenii.  Id.  Quum  ego  ad  Heracleam  accederem.  Cic. 
^  (6.)  When  urbs,  oppldum,  Idcus,  etc.,  follow  the  names  of  towns  as  apposi- 
tions, they  generally  take  a  preposition ;  as,  Demdrdtus  se  contulit  Tarquinioa,  in 
urbem  Etrui-iie  Horentissimam.  Cic.  Ad  Cirtam  oppldum  ffer  co««i««un<.  Sail.— 
So  also  when  the  name  of  the  town  is  qualified  by  an  adjective;  as,  Magnum 


\ 


§  238.        SYNTAX. ACCUSATJVE    AFTER    ADJECTIVES,  ETC.         241 

iter  ad  doctas  prdficisci  cogor  Athenas.  Prop.    But  the  poets  and  later  prose 
writers  sometines  omit  the  prepositipn ;  as,  Ovid,  Her.  2,  83. 

Rem.  3.  Instead  of  the  accusativ*,  a  dative  is  sometimes,  though  rarely, 
used ;  as,  Carthagini  nuncios  mittam.  Hor.  Cf.  §  225,  IV.  and  R.  2. 

Rem.  4.  Domus  in  both  numbers,  and  rus  in  the  singular,  are  put 
in  the  accusative,  like  names  of  towns ;  as, 

lie  domum,  Go  home.  Virg.  Galli  domos  abi^rant, — ^had  gone  home.  Liv.  Rus 
ibo,  I  will  go  into  the  countiy.  Ter. 

Note,  (a.)  When  ddmus  is  limited  by  a  genitive  or  a  possessive  adjective 
pronoun,' it  sometimes  takes  a  preposition:  with  other  adjectives,  the  preposi- 
tion is  generally  expressed;  as,  Non  intr'o&o  in  nostram  domum.  Plaut.  Venisse 
in  domum  Leccae.  Cic.  Ad  eam  domum  profecti  sunt.  Id.  In  domos  superas 
scandere  cura  fuit.  Ovid.  Rarely,  also,  when  not  limited ;  as,  Socrates  philos!^ 
pliiam  in  domos  introduxit.  Cic.  So,  Idrem  suum.  App.,  or  ad  larem  suum.  Cic. 
Cdricas  in-  Albense  rus  inferre.  Plin.  Quum  in  sua  rura  veneTrunt,  Cic.  With 
the  possessor's  name  in  the  genitive,  either  domum  or  in  ddmum  is  used ;  as, 
Pomponii  domum  venisse.  Cic.     In  ddmum  Mcelii  tela  inferuntur.  Liv. 

(6.)  Domus  is  sometimes  used  in  the  accusative  after  a  verbal  noun;  as, 
Ddmum  reditionis  spe  svhldtd.  Cses.  So,  Itio  domum.  Cic.  Concursus  ddmum, 
Cjes.    Cf.  R.  1. 

Rem.  5.  {a.)  Before  the  names  of  countries  and  of  all  other  places  in  which 
the  motion  ends,  except  those  of  towns,  and  ddmus  and  rus,  the  preposition  is 
commonly  used ;  as,  Ex  Asia  transis  in  Europam.  Curt.  _  Te  in  Epirum  venisse 
gaudeo.  Cic.  But  it  is -sometimes  omitted;  as,  Deveniunt  speluncam.  Virg. 
Devenere  locos.  Id.  Tumiilum  antlquce  CereiHs  sedemque  sacrdtam  venimus.  Id. 
Ibis  Cecrdpios  portus.  Ovid.  So,  also,  before  names  of  countries,  especially 
those  ending  in  us ;  as,  JEgyjitus,  Bospdrus,  Chersdnesus,  Ep'irus,  Peloponnesus^ 
etc.  So,  also,  Illyricum  pi-'djectus.  Cses.  Macedoniam  pervenit.  Liv.  Africam 
transiturus.  Id.  So,  Tacitus  construes  even  names  of  nations,  when  used,  as 
they  often  are,  for  those  of  countries ;  as.  Ductus  inde  Cangos  exerdtus.  Iberos 
ad  patnum  regnum  pervddlt.  So,  Virgil,  Nos  ibimus  Afros. — Pliny  has,  Insulas 
Jtubn  Maris  ndvigant. 

(6.)  Before  the  names  of  small  islands  the  preposition  is  frequently  omitted; 
as,  Pausdniam  cum  classe  Cyprum  mlserunt.  Nep. :  but  rarely  before  the  names 
of  the  larger  islands ;  as,  Sardinia,  Britannia,  Creta,  Evhoea,  Sicilia. 

(c.)  Before  accusatives  of  any  words  denoting  locality  after  verbs  of  motion, 
the  poets  omit  the  preposition;  as,  Italiam — Ldvlnidque  venit  litora.  Virg. — 
The  old  accusative  jdras  is  used,  like  names  of  towns,  to  denote  the  place 
whither,  while  fdris  denotes  the  place  where ;  as,  Vdde  f  oras.  Mart.  Exit  f  5- 
ras.  Plaut. 

ACCUSATIVE      AFTER      ADJECTIVES,      ADVERBS, 
AND    INTERJECTIONS. 

§  238.  1.  (a.)  The  adjectives  propior  and  proximus,  vnih. 
their  adverbs  propius  and  proxime,  like  their  primitive  prope, 
are  often  joined  with  the  accusative ;  as, 

Ipse  propior  montem  suos  colUcat.  Sail.  Crassus  proximus  mare  Oceanum 
liiemdrat.  Cks. — Libyes  propius  mure  Africum  dc^tabant.  Sail.  -  Proxime  His- 
paniam'  Mauri  sunt.  Id. 

(6.)   The  adverbs  2»'idie  and  postrldle  are  also  often  followed  by  the  accusa- 
tive; a»,  Prndie  eum  diem.  Cic.    Prldieldus.  Id.    Postrldle  ludos.  Id. — (c.)    Au 
accusative   somet  mes  follows  inius  and  cdminus ;   as,  Intus  domum.    Plaut 
Agresles  c&minm  '  -e  sues,  scil.  in.  Prop. 
21 


242  SYNTAX. SUBJECT-^CCUSATITE.  §  239. 

Remark  1.  The  accusative  with  pridie  and  postridie  is  by  »ome  referred  to 
ante  and  post  understood.  For  the  genitive  after  these  words,  see  §  212,  R.  4, 
N.  6. — Respecting  rei'sus,  usque,  exadversus  (-um)  and  secvLS  with  the  accusative, 
see  §  195,  R.  3:  and  §  235,  R.  3. 

Rem.  2.  The  adverb  bene,  bv  the  elipsis  of  valere  j^eo^  is  sometimes  followed 
by  the  accusative  in  forms  of  drinking  health ;  as,  Bine,  vos,  bene,  nos,  bene  te, 
bene,  me,  bene  nostram  eiiam  Stephanium!  Plant.  Bene  Messalam,  a  health  to 
Messala.  Tibull.    It  is  also  construed  with  the  dative.  See  §  228,  1, 

2,  In  exclamations,  the  noun  or  pronoun  which  marks  the  d)ject 
of  the  feding  is  put  in  the  accusative  either  with  or  without  the  inter- 
jections, 0 1  ah  1  heu  !  eheu  !  ecce  !  en  I  hem  !  pro  !  or  vcb  .'as, 

En  cfuatuor  aras !  ecce  dims  tibi  Daphni !  Behold  four  altars !  lo,  two  for 
thee,  Daphnis!  Virg.  Eccum!  eccos!  ecciUum!  for  ecce  eum!  ecce  eos!  ecce 
iUum!  Flant.  0  prcecldrum  custodem  !  Cic.  Heu  me  infelicem!  Ter.  Pro  Detm 
hdmmumque  f  Ideni !  Cic.  Ah  Tne,  me  !  Catull.  Eheu  me  miserum  !  Ter.  Hem 
astutlcis  !  Id.  Voe  te  !  Plant  Vce  me  !  Sen.  Miseram  wic .'  Ter.  EOmXnem  gra- 
vem  et  cWem  egregium  !  Cic.    Cf.  §  228,  3. 

Note.  The  accusative  after  interjections  is  supposed  to  depend  on  some 
verb  of  emotion  to  be  supplied. 


SUBJECT- ACCUSATIVE. 

§  339.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  mood  is  put  in  the  ac- 
cusative; as, 

Moleste  Pompeium  idferre  constdbat,  That  Pompeytook  that  ill,  was  evident 
Cic.  Eos  hoc  nomine  appelldri  fas  est.  Id.  Mlror  te  ad  me  nihil  scriberCj 
I  wonder  that  you  do  not  write  to  me.  Cn.  Mag.  in  Cic.  Campos  jubet  esse 
patentes.  Virg. 

Note  1.  In  historical  writing  the  present  infinitive  has  Bometimes  its  subject  in  the 
nominatiye.  Cf.  §209,  R.  5. 

Remark  1.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  omitted  when  it  precedes  in  the 

£niiive  or  dative  case;  as.  Est  adolescentis  m-ajui'es  natu  rereri,  scil.  eum.  Cic. 
qyedit  bonas  esse  vobis,  scil.  vos.  Ter. ;  and  rarely  when  it  precedes  in  the 
accusative;  as,  Ea  popOlus  latari  et  merito  diiere  feri ;  and  also  when  its  place 
is  suppUed  by  a  posse'^sive  pronoun  expressed  or  understood ;  as,  Non  fuit  con- 
silium (meum) — servilibus  officiis  iutentum  cetdtem  dgere  (scil.  me).  Sail. 

«Rem.  2.  A  substantive  pronoun  is  also  sometimes  omitted  before  the  infini- 
tive, when  it  is  the  subject  of  the  preceding  verb;  as,  PoUicUus  sum  suscepturum 
{esse^,  scil.  me,  I  promised  (that  I)  would  undertake.  Ter.  Sed  reddere  posse 
nigdbat,  scil.  se.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  is  often  omitted,  when  it  is  a  general 
word  for  person  or  thing;  as,  Est  dliud  Irdcundum  esse,  dliud  irdtum,  scil.  hdmir- 
nem.  Cic.  See  ^  269,  R.  1. 

Rem.  4.  The  subject-accusative,  like  the  nominative,  is  often  wanting.  See 
4  209,  R.  3.  The  subject  of  the  infinitive  may  be  an  infinitive  or  a  clause. 
See  §  269,  R.  8. 

Note  2.  For  the  verbs  after  which  the  snbject-acensative  with  the  infinitive  is  u?ed. 
Bee  i  272.  For  the  accusative  in  the  predicate  after  infinitives  neuter  and  passive,  see 
{210. 


§  240,  241.  SYNTAX. VOC  ITIVE ABLATIVE.  248 


VOCATIVE. 

§  340.  The  vocative  is  used,  either  with  or  without  an  in- 
terjection, in  addressing  a  person  or  thing. 

Kemark  1.  The  interjections  0,  ^m,  and  pro  (proJi),  also  ah,  au 
(hau),  ehem,  eho,  eJiodum,  eia  (heia),  hem,  heus,  hui,  io,  and  ohe,  are 
followed  by  the  vocative  ;  as, 

0  farmose  puer  !  0  beautiful  boy !  Virg.  Eeu  virgo  !  Id.  Pro  sancte  JupHer  I 
Cic.  Ah  siulte!  Ter.  Beus  Spre!  Id.  Ohelibelle!  Mart.  Ehodum  bone  vir. 
Ter.—  Urbem,  mi  Rufe,  c6le.  Cic.  Quinctili  Vare,  Ugiones  redde.  Suet.  Qm 
moriture  ruts  ?  Hor.    Macte  virtute  esto.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  vocative  is  sometimes  omitted,  while  a  genitive  depending  upon 
it  remains ;  as,  0  mtserce  sortis  !  scil.  hdmines.  Lucan. 

Note.  The  vocatiye  forms  no  part  of  a  proposition,  but  serves  to  designate  the  person 
io  whom  the  proposition  is  addressed. 

ABLATIVE. 

The  ablative  denotes  certain  relations  of  nouns  and  pronouns,  all  of  which  are  express- 
ed in  English  by  means  of  prepositions.  In  Latin  this  case  is  sometimes  accompanied  by 
B  preposition,  and  sometimes  stands  alone.  Gf.  i  87,  6. 

ABLATIVE  AFTER  PREPOSITIONS. 

§  24:1,     Eleven  prepositions  are  followed  by  the  ablative. 

These  are  a,  for  ab,  abs),  absque,  de;  coram,  palam,  cum,  ex,  (e); 

dne,  tenus,  pro,  and  prce  ;  as,  « 

Ah  illo  tempdre,  From  that  time.  Liy.  A  scrlbendo,  From  writing.  Cic. 
Cum  exerdtu,  With  the  anny.  Sail.  Certis  de  causis,  For  certain  reasons.  Cic. 
Ex  fuya,  From  flight.  Id.  Pdlam  pdpulo.  Li  v.  Stne  labor  e.  Cic.  Capulo  ienus. 
Vii'g.     Cantdbit  vacuus  coram  Idtrone  viator.  Juv.   cf.  ^  195,  5. 

Note.  Of  the  prepositions  followed  by  the  ablative,  five  signify  removal  or  separation, 
viz.  a  (db  or  abs),  clS,  e  (or  ex),  absquS  and  sinS. 

Remark  1.  Tenus  is  always  placed  after  its  case.  It  sometimes  takes  the 
genitive  plural.  See  §  221,  III. —  Cum  is  always  appended  to  the  ablative  of  tiie 
personal  pronouns  me,  te,  se,  nobis,  and  vobis,  and  commonly  to  the  ablatives 
of  the  relative  pronoun,  quo,  qua,  quibus,  and  qui.  Cf.  §  133,  4,  and  §  136,  R.  1. 

Rem.  2.  The  adverbs  prdcul  and  slmul  are  sometimes  used  with  an  ablative, 
which  depends  on  the  prepositions  a  or  ab,  and  cum  understood ;  as,  Prdcm 
mari,  Far  from  the  sea.  Liv.  Simul  nobis  habitat.  Ovid.  Procul  diibio.  Suet. 
The  prepositions  are  frequentlv  expressed ;  as,  Frdcul  a  terra.  Cic.  Prdcul  a 
patnd.  Virg.  Tecum  slmul.  Plant.  Vobiscum  simul.  Cic. — So,  rarely,  ceque. 
Qui  me  in  terra  ceque  foriundius  eiit.  Plaut.     Cf.  Novi  ceque  omnia  tecum.  Id. 

Rem.  3.  Some  of  the  above  prepositions,  like  those  followed  by  the  accusa- 
tive, are  occasionally  used  without  a  noun  expressed;  as,  Quum  coram  sumus. 
Cic.   Cum  frdtre  an  sine.  Id.    Cf.  ^  235,  R.  10. 

RE>r.  4.  The  ablative  follows  also  the  prepositions  in  and  svb,  when  tliey 
answer  to  the  question  'where?'  super,  when  it  signifies  'on'  or  'concerning''; 
and  sometimes  clam  and  subier.  Cf.  §  235,  (2.) — (5.) 

Rem.  5.  In  is  generally  joined  with  the  ablative  after  verbs  of  placing,  as, 
pmo,  Idco,  colldco,  stdtuo,  constituo,  and  consido;  as,  Et  sale  tdbentes  artus  in 
Btore  ponunt.  Virg. — So,  also,  after  verbs  signifying  to  have,  hold,  or  regard  • 


244      SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  AFTER  CERTAIN  NOUNS.     §  242,  243. 

as,  h^>eo,  dOco,  nSmero,  etc. — After  verbs  of  assembUnq,  concealing,  and  includ- 
ing, in  is  followed  bv  either  the  accusative  or  the  ablative. — After  def'igo,  in- 
$cribo,  insculpo,  incido,  and  insero,  in  is  usually  joined  with  the  ablative. 

§  S4:3.    Many  verbs  compounded  with  ab,  de,  ex,  and  super, 

are  followed  by  an  ablative  depending  upon  the  preposition ;  as, 

Abesse  urbe,  To  be  absent  from  the  citv.  Cic.  Ahire  sedibus,  To  depart  from 
their  habitations.  Tac.  Ut  se  maledictis  'non  absUmant.  Cic.  DetrOdHtU  naves 
scOjjfdv,  They  push  the  ships  from  the  rock.  Virg.  Navi  egressus  est.  Nep. 
Exctdere  finibus.  Liv.  Qesar  prcello  supersedere  stdtuit.  Caes.  Tributo  ac  ae- 
lectu  supersessum  est.  Cic.  So  the  adjective  extorris ;  as,  JExtorris  putrid,  dUrno. 
Sail.    And  so  the  verbal  eruptio ,  as,  Mutlua  eruptio.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  preposition  is  often  repeated,  or  one  of  similar  signification 
is  used ;  as,  Detraheve  de  txta  fdmd  numquam  cogitdvi.  Cic.  Ex  ocidis  dbiei'unL 
Liv.    £xtre  a  patrid.  Cic.    Exlre  de  tUd.  Id.    Cf.  §  224,  E.  4. 

Rem.  2.  These  compound  verbs  are  often  used  without  a  noun ;  but,  in 
many  cases,  it  maybe  supplied  by  the  mind;  as,  Equites  degressi  ad  pedety 
Bcil.  equis.  Liv.    ASlre  ad  Deos,  scil.  v'ltd.  Cic. 

Reji.  3.  Some  verbs  compounded  with  ab,  de,  and  ear,  instead  of  the  abla- 
tive, are  sometimes  followed  by  the  dative.  See  §  224,  R.  1  and  2.  Some  com- 
pounds, also,  of  neuter  verbs,  occur  with  the  accusative.  See  ^  233,  R.  1. 

ABLATIVE  AFTER  CERTAIN  NOUNS,  ADJECTIVES, 
AND  VERBS. 

§  343.  Opus  and  usus,  signifying  need,  usually  take  the  ab- 
lative of  the  thing  needed ;  as, 

Auctoritate  tud  nobis  dptis  est.  We  need  your  authority.  Cic.  Nunc  animis 
i^js,  nmic  pectore  Jirmo.  Virg.  Naves,  quibus  consuli  ustts  non  esset,  Ships,  for 
which  !he  consul  had  no  occasion.  Liv.  Nufic  viribus  usus,  nunc  manlbus  rdpi' 
dis.  Virg. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  Opus  and  usus  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  ablative  of  a 
perfect  participle ;  as,  Matiirato  dptis  est,  There  is  need  of  haste.  Liv.  Usus  facto 
est  7nihi.  Ter.  Ubi  summus  imperdior  non  adest  ad  exercitum,  citius,  quod  non 
facto  est  usus,  Jit,  quam  quod  facto  est  6pus.  Plant,  After  opus,  a  noun  is  some- 
times expressed  with  the  participle ;  as,  Opnisfuit  Hirtio  convento, — of  meeting, 
or,  to  meet,  §  274,  R.  5.  Cic.  Ojtus  sibi  esse  domino  ejus  invento.  Liv. — or  a  su- 
pine is  used ;  as,  Ita  dictu  dpus  est,  It  is  necessary  to  say,  I  must  say.  Ter. — 
Instead  of  the  ablative  witti  dpus  est,  an  infinitive,  either  alone  or  with  a  sub- 
ject accusative^  or  ut  with  a  subjunctive  clause,  sometimes  occurs ;  as.  Opus 
est  te  dnimo  valere.  Cic.    3Iihi  dpus  est,  ut  lavem.  Id. 

(J.)  Opus  and  usus,  though  nouns,  are  seldom  limited  by  the  genitive.  In  a 
few  passages  they  are  construed  with  the  accusative.  See'^§  211,  R.  11. 

Rem.  2.  Opus  is  sometimes  the  subject  and  sometimes  the  predicate  of  est; 
vsus,  which  seldom  occurs  except  in  ante-classic  poets,  is,  with  only  rare  ex- 
ceptions, the  subject  only.  The  person  to  whom  the  thing  is  needful  is  put  in 
the  dative;  (^  226.)  Wfth  opus  the  thing  needed  may  either  be  the  subject  of 
the  verb  in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  or  follow  it  in  the  ablative ;  as,  Dux 
nobis  dpus  est.  Cic.  Verves  raulta  sibi  dpus  esse  aiebat.  Id.;  or,  Duce  nobis 
dpus  est.  The  former  construction  is  most  common  with  neuter  adjectives  and 
pronouns;  as.  Quod  non  opus  est,  asse  cdrum  est.  Cato  apud  Sen.— In  the 
predicate  opus  acd  Usus  are  commonly  translated  '  needful '  or  '  necessary.* 
Cf.  ^  210,  R.  5. 

NoTS.  Far  tha  abi&taTe  of  chazacter,  quality,  etc.,  limiting  a  noon,  see  i  211,  B.  6. 


§  244,  245.    SYNTAX. — ^ablative  after  certain  nouns.     245 

§  S4:4I.     Digniis,  indignus,  contentus,  prceditus,  and  fretus^     ^ 

are  followed  by  thfe  ablative  of  the  object ;  as, 

Dignits  laude,  Worthy  of  praise.  Hor.  Vox  pdpuU  maj  estate  indigna,  A  speech 
unbecoming  the  dignity  of  the  people.  Cass.  Bestice  eo  contentce  non  mwerunt 
ampUus.  Cic.  Hdrtio  scel&re  prceditus.  Id.  Plerlque  ingenio  freti.  Id. — So, 
JEquum  est  me  atque  illo.  Plaut. 

Remark  1.  The  adverb  digne,  in  one  passage,  takes  the  ablative;  Pec- 
cat  titer  nostrum  cruce  digniits.  Hor. — Dignor,  also,  both  as  the  passive  of  the 
obsolete  digno^  and  as  a  deponent  verb,  is  followed  by  an  ablative  of  the  thing. 
As  a  deponent  it  takes  also  an  accusative  of  the  person ;  as,  Hand  equldem  tali 
me  hondre  dignor.  Virg. — Pass.  Qui  tali  honore  digndti  sunt.  Cic.  Conjugio. 
Anclilsa,  Veneris  digndte  siiperbo.  Virg. — Sometimes  as  a  deponent,  instead  of 
the  ablative  of  the  thing,  it  is  followed  by  an  hifinitive  clause ;  as,  Non  ego 
grammdifcas  ambire  ti-ibus  et  pulpita  dignor.  Hor.  And  both  dignor  and  dedignor 
are  followed  by  two  accusatives,  one  of  the  object  the  other  of  the  predicate. 
See  §  230,  R.  2. 

Rem.  2.  («.)  Dignus  and  indignus  are  sometimes  followed  by  the  genitive; 
as,  Suscipe  cogUdtionem  dignissimam  tzue  virtutis.  Cic.  Indignus  avorum.  Virg. ; 
and  cZ*^?iMS  sometimes  takes  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective  in  the  accusative; 
as,  Non  me  censes  scire  quid  dignus  siem  f  Plaut.  Fretus  is  in  Livy  construed 
with  the  dative.  Cf.  §  222, 'R.  6,  (6.) 

(6.)  Instead  of  an  ablative,  dignus  and  indignus  often  take  an-  infinitive, 
especially  in  the  passive;  as,  Ei'at  dignus  amari.  Virg.;  or  a  subjunctive 
clause,  with  qui  or  ut ;  as,  Dignus  qui  imperet.  Cic.  Non  sum  dignus^  ut  f  igara 
palum  in  parietem.  Plaut.;  or  the  supine  in  u;  as,  Digna  atque  indigna  reldiu 
vociferans.  Virg.  Contentus  is  likewise  joined  with  the  infinitive;  as,  Nonhoec 
artes  contenta  pdternas  edidlcisse  fuii.  Ovid. — So,  Naves  jxmtum  irrumpere 
fretce.  Stat. 

§  24L5,     I.    Uior,  fruor,  fungor,  potior,  vescor,  and  their      ; 
compounds,  are  followed  by  the  ablative  ;  as, 

Ad  quern  turn  Juno  supplex  his  vocibus  usa  est, — addressed  these  words.  Virg. 
Frui  voluptate,  To  enjoy  pleasure.  Cic.  FungUur  oflficio,  He  performs  hia 
duty.  Id.  Oppido  potui  sunt.  Liv.  Vescltur  aura.  Virg.  His  rebus  perfnujr. 
Cic.  Legibus  dbuti.  Id.  Defuncti  imperio.  Liv.  Gravi  opere  perfungimur.  Cic. 
0  tandem  magnis  peldgi  defuncte  periclis.  Virg. 

The  compounds  are  abator,  deutor,  perfruor,  defungor,  and  perfungor. 

Note.  Utor  may  take  a  second  ablative,  as  an  apposition  or  a  predicate, 
like  the  predicate  accusative,  (§  230,  R.  2),  and  may  then  be  translated  by 
the  verb  to  have ;  as,  Ille  facili  me  utetur  patre,  He  shall  have  in  me  an  indul- 
gent Either.  Ter. 

Remark.  In  early  writers  these  verbs  sometimes  take  an  accusative;  as, 
Quam  rem  medici  utuntur.  Varr.  Ingenium  frui.  Ter.  Datdmes  milHdre  mu- 
nus  fungens.  Nep.  Gentem  dllquam  urbem  nostram  pdtliuram  putem.  Cic.  Sa- 
cras  lauros  vescar.  TibuU.  In  proldgis  scribendis  o^ersun  dbutUur.  Ter. — Potior 
is,  also,  found  with  the  genitive.  See  §  220,  4. 

II.    1.   Nltor,  innlUyr,  fldo  and  confido,  may  be  followed  by  the  ablative     y^ 
without  a  pi-eposition ;  as,  Hasta  innixus.  Liv.    FuMre  cursu.  Ovid.    Natura 
Idci  confldeoant.   Cses. 

2.  Misceo  with  its  compounds  takes,  witTi  the  accusative  of  the  object,  the 
ablative  of  the  thing  mingled  with ;  as,  Miscere  pdbula  sale.  Coll.  Aquas  neo- 
tare.  Ovid.    Atir  multo  calore  admixtus.  Cic. 

3.  Assuesco,  assuefdcio,  consuesco,  insuesco,  and  sometimes  acquiesco,  take 
either  the  dative  or  the  ablative  of  the  thing ;  as,  Aves  sanguine  et  praeda  a»- 
suetcB.  Hor.    Nullo  officio  aut  disciplina  assuejactus.  Caes.     Cf.  §  224. 

21* 


246  SYNTAX. — ^ABLATIVE   OP   CAUSE,   ETC.         §  246,  247. 

4.  Fit;  and  ipiilor,  '  to  live  or  feast  upon,'  are  followed  by  the  ablative;  as, 
Daplbus  ijmldmur  6jninis.  Virg.     Lacte  atqtie  pecore  vivunt.  Caes. 

5.  Sto  signifying  'to  be  filled  or  covered  with,'  and  also  when  signifying  ' to 
cost,' is  followed  by  the  ablative  without  a  preposition;  when  signifying 'to 
persevere  in,  stick  to,  abide  bv,'  '  to  rest  or  be  fixed  on,'  it  is  followed  by  the 
abliitive  either  with  or  without  in;  as,  Jam  pulvtre  coelum  stare  vUknt.  Virg.— 
Mullo  sanguine  ac  vulneribus  ea  PoRnls  vktoria  stetil.  Liv.  Stai-e  conditionlbus. 
Cic.  Omms 'm  k&CAnio  sUit  cura  parentis.  Xivg.—  Consto,  'to  consist  of  or  'to 
rest  upon,'  is  followed  bv  the  ablative  either  alone  or  with  ex,  Je,  or  in ;  as 
Constat  mdteries  solido  corpore.  Lucr.    Homo  ex  animo  constat  et  cori)6re.  Cic. 

Kemakk  1.  Fido,  confidOj  misceo,  admisceo,  permisceo^  and  assuesco  often 
take  the  dative. 

Kem.  2.  When  a  preposition  is  expressed  after  the  above  verbs,  sto,  fido, 
conjfido,  nitor,  innltor,  and  asmesco  take  in  or  ad;  acquiesco,  in;  and  ndsceo 
with  its  compounds,  cum. 

§  ^4:6.  Perfect  participles  denoting  origin  are  often  fol- 
lowed by  the  ablative  of  the  source,  without  a  preposition. 

Such  are  nStus,  prd^&tus,  sdttus,  ereatiis,  crStus,  SdUus,  ginttus,  gSnSrdtus,  ortus;  to 
which  may  be  added  driundiis,  descended  fiwm. 

Thus,  Ndteded!  0  son  of  a  goddess!  Virg.  Tantalo  progndtus.  Descended 
from  Tarftalus.  Cic.  Sdtus  Nereide,  Sprung  from  a  Nereid.  Ovid.  Credtiu 
rege.  Id.  Alcdndre  creti.  Virg.  Edite  regibus.  Hor.  Diis  geniie.  Virg.  ArgdU 
ico  generdtvs  Alemdtie.  Ovid.  Ortus  nuUis  rndjorihus.  Hor.  Coelesti  semine 
drimuli.  Lucr. 

Eemakk  1.  The  preposition  is  also  rarely  omitted  after  the  verbs  creo,  genei-o, 
and  nascor ;  as,  Ui  patre  cerio  nascerere.  Cic.    Fortes  creaniur  fortibus.  Hor. 

Rem.  2.  After  participles  denoting  origin,  the  preposition  ex  or  de  is  usually 
joined  to  the  name  of  the  mother;  and  in  a  few  passages  ex  or  ab  is  joined  to 
the  name  of  the  father;  as,  Progndti  ab  Dite  patre.  Cses.  In  speaking  of  one's 
ancestors  oA  is  frequently  used;  as,  PUrosque  Belgas  esse  orios  a  Germauis.  Id. 

Rem.  3.  Origin  from  a  place  or  countrs^  is  generally  expressed  by  a  patrial 
adjective;  as,  ThrdsybQlus  Atheniensis,  'thrasybulus 'o/*  .^/A^n^.  tivy  often 
nsesoA;  as,  Turnus  Herdonius  ab  Aricia.  Caesar  prefers  the  ablative  alone; 
as,  Cn.  Magius  Cremona;  and  in  this  manner  is  expressed  the  tribe  to  which  a 
person  belongs;  as,  Q.  Ferres  Romilia, — of  the  Romilian  tribe. 

ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE,    Etc. 

§  ^^y.  Nouns  denoting  the  cause,  manner,  means,  and  in- 
strument, after  adjectives  and  verbs,  are  put  in  the  ablative  with- 
out a  preposition. 

Note.  The  English  prepositions  with  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  means, 
and  instrument  are  hy^  tcim,  in,  etc._ 

1.  The  cause.  (1.)  Adjectives  which  have  a  passive  significa- 
tion, as  denoting  a  state  or  condition  produced  by  some  externfll 
cause,  may  take  such  cause  in  the  ablative ;  as, 

Co mpdni  fut  runt  superbi  homtnte  a grorum.  Cic.  Animal  pahuln  hstum.  Sen 
Praelioye-ssi  lasslque,  Weary  and  faint  with  the  battle.  Sail.  Homines  cegii 
gravi  morbo.  Cic. 

(2.)  Neuter  verbs  expressing  an  action,  state  of  feeling  of  the 
subject  originating  in  some  external  cause,  may  take  that  cause  in 
the  ablative ;  as, 


§  247.  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    OP    CAUSE,   ETC.  247 

Interiit  fjime,  He  perished  with  hunger.  Laude  aliena  ddlet.  Cic.  Lcetor 
tua  dignitate.  Id.  Gawk  tuo  bono.  Id.  Sua  victoria,  fjluridri.  Cses.  AquUoni- 
bus  It'tbdraiit  querceta.  Hor. — So  with  bene  est  and  tlie  dative ;  as,  Mild  bene  erat 
non  piscibus  urbe  petUis,  sed  pullo  atque  h»do.  Hor.  Ubi  illl  bene  sit  ligno, 
fi^ua  calida,  cibo,  vestimentis,  etc.  Plaut. 

Note  1.  After  such  adjectives  and  neuter  verbs,  a  preposition  with  its  cas« 
often  supplies  the  place  of  the  simple  ablative. 

Note  2.  In  exclamations  of  encouragement  or  approbation,  the  defective 
adjective  macte,  macti,  either  with  or  wituout  the  imperative  of  esse  (esto,  este, 
estate,)  is  joined  with  an  ablative  of  cause,  especially  with  virtuie. 

Note  3.  After  neuter  verbs  and  adjectives  denoting  emotions,  especially 
those  of  care,  (jrief,  and  sorrow,  the  accusative  incem,  with  a  genitive  or  a  pos- 
sessive pronoun,  is  used,  instead  of  the  ablative  vice,  to  signify  ' for '  or  'on 
account  of;  as,  Remittimus  hoc  tibi,  ne  nostram  vicem  irascaris,  That  you  may 
not  be  angry  on  our  account.  Liv.  Tuam  vicem  scejye  dOleo,  qttod,  etc.  Cic. 
Suam  vicem  mdgis  anxius,  quam  ejus,  cui  auanlium  ab  se  petebdtur.  Liv. 

Remark  1.  V/hen  the  cause  is  a  voluntary  agent,  it  is  put  in  the  accusative 
with  the  preposition  ob,  pi-opter,  or  ^;er ;  as,  Non  est  cequum  me  propter  vos 
decipi.  Ter.  These  prepositions,  and  a,  or  ab,  de,  e  or  ex,  and  pr(B,  are  also 
sometimes  used  when  the  cause  is  not  a  voluntary  agent ;  as,  Ob  adulterium 
ccesi.  Virg.    Nee  Idqui  pr£E  moerore  potuit.  Cic. 

Eem.  2.  (a.)  After  active  verbs,  the  cause,  unless  expressed  by  an  ablative 
in  u  from  substantives  having  no  other  case ;  as,  Jussu,  rogdtu  and  adindnltu, 
is  seldom  expressed  by  the  simple  ablative,  but  either  by  a  preposition,  i^r  by 
causa,  gratia,  ergo,  etc.,  with  a  genitive;  as,  Legibus  propter  metum  paret. 
Cic.  Ne  ob  eam  rem  ipsos  despiceret.  Id.  Dondri  virtutis  ergo.  Id.  hi  hoc 
honoris  mci  causa  susceperis.  Id.  But  with  causd^  etj^.,  the  adjective  pronoun 
is  commonly  used  for  the  corresponding  substantive -pronoun ;  as,  Te  dbesse 
mea  caussl,  mokste  fero.  Cic.  Cf.  §  211,  K.  3,  (6.) 

(b.)  When  the  cause  is  a  state  of  feeling,  a  circumlocution  is  often  used  with 
a  perfect  participle  of  some  verb  signifying  '  to  induce ' ;  as,  Cupiditdte  ductus, 
inauctus,  vncltdtus,  ince7isu^,injlammdtus,impulsus,nidtus,  captus,  etc.  Mihi  bene- 
volentia  ductus  ti-ibtiebat  omnia.  Cic.  Livv  frequently  uses  ab  in  this  sense ; 
as,  Ab  Ird,  a  spe,  ab  6dio,  from  anger,  hope,  hatred. 

2.  The  manner.  Cum  is  regularly  joined  with  the  ablative  of 
manner,  when  expressed  simply  by  a  noun,  not  modified  by  any 
other  word ;  and  also  when  an  adjective  it  joined  with  the  noun, 
provided  an  additional  circumstance,  and  not  merely  an  essential 
character  of  the  action,  is  to  be  expressed.     Thus : 

Cum  voluptate  allquem  audire.  Verves  Lampsdcum  venit  cum  magna  caltlml- 
tate  civitdtis.  Cic.  Hence  also  when  the  connection  between  the  subject  and 
the  noun  denoting  the  attribute  is  only  external ;  as,  Procedere  cum  veste  pur-_ 
piirea:  in  distinction  from  Nudis  pedibus  incedere;  Aperto  caplte  sedere,  etc., 
which  express  circumstances  or  attributes  essential  to  the  subject. 

But  raddus,  ratio,  mos,  rltus,  etc.,  signifying  manner,  never  take  cum,  and  it  is 
omitted  in  some  expressions  with  other  substantives;  as.  Hoc  modo  scnjosi ; 
Constiturrunt  qua  ratione  dgeretur ;  More  bestidrum  vdgdri ;  Latronum  ritu  vlvere  ; 
;Equo  ixwlmo  fero ;  Maxima  fide  dmicitias  coluit.  Summa  asquitate  res  consti- 
tuit ;  Viam  incrediblli  celeritate  confecit ;  Librum  magna  cura  diligentia^/we 
scripsit ;  the  action  of  the  verb  being  intimately  connected  with  the  circum- 
stance expressed  by  the  ablative.  So  in  some  expressions  with  substantives 
alone;  as,  ^Wcntio  praterlre  ox  facer  e  dliquid ;  Lege  dgere;  Jure  and  mjuria 
facer e;  Magistrdtus  vltio  credtu^;  Rede  et  ordlne  Jit. 

Rk-.m.  3.  The  m<mmr  is  also  sometimes  denoted  by  de  or  ex  with  the  abla- 
tive; as,  De  or  ex  mdustrid,  On  purpose.  Liv.    iia;  iWe^ro,  Anew.  Quint 


248  SYNTAX. ^ABLATrvTE    OF    CAUSE,    ETC.  §  248. 

8.  The  means  and  instrument.  An  ablative  is  joined  with 
verbs  of  every  kind,  and  also  with  adjectives  of  a  passive  significa- 
tion, to  express  the  means  or  instrument ;  as, 

Amlcos  observantia,  rem  parsimonia  reUnuit,  He  retained  his  friends  by  at- 
tention, his  property  by  frugality.  Cic.  Auro  ostroyue  decori.  Virg.  jEgrescii 
medendo.  Id.  Coriilbus  tuuri,  apri  dentlbus,  morsu  leones  se  iutantur.  Cic 
Ccesiis  est  virgis.  Id.  Trabs  saucia  seciiri.  Ovid.  For  the  ablative  of  the  means 
after  verbs  mJUling,  etc.,  see  §  249, 1. 

Rem.  4.  When  the  means  is  a  person,  it  is  seldom  expressed  by  the  simple 
ablative,  but  either  by  per,  or  by  the  ablative  dpei'd  with  a  genitive  or  a  pos- 
sessive pronomi ;  as,  med,  tttd,  sua,  dperd,  which  are  equfvalent  to  per  me,  per 
te.  per  se,  and  denote  both  good  and  bad  services.  Beneficio  meo,  etc.,  is  used 
or  good  results  only ;  as,  Beneficio  meo  paires  sunt.  Sail.  But  persons  are  some- 
times considered  as  involuntary  agents,  and  as  such  expressed  by  the  ablative 
without  a  preposition;  as.  Servos,  quibus  silvas  publicas  dipdpuldfus  erat.  Cic. — 
When  per  is  used  to  express  the  means,  it  is  connected  with  external  concur- 
ruig  circumstances,  rather  than  with  the  real  means  or  instrument.  Hence 
we  always  say  vi  oppidum  cepit,  but  per  vim  ei  bdna  eripuit. 

Rem.  5.  The  material  instrument  is  always  expressed  by  the  ablative  with- 
out a  preposition ;  as,  Conficere  cervum  sdgtUis ;  gladio  dUqxiem  vidnerdre  ;  ira- 
jicere  pectus  ferro. 

§  24:8.  The  ablative  is  used  with  passive  verbs  to  denote 
the  means  or  agenl  by  which  any  thing  is  effected,  and  which  in 
the  active  voice  is  expressed  by  the  nominative.  This  ablative 
is  used  either  with  ah  or  without  it,  according  as  it  is  a  person 
or  a  thing. 

I.  The  voluntary  agent  of  a  verb  in  the  passive  voice  is  put  in 
the  ablative  with  a  or  o6 ;  as, 

(In  the  active  voice,)  Clodius  me  diUgit,  Clodius  loves  me  (Cic);  (in  the  pas- 
sive,) A  ClOdio  dUigor,  I  am  loved  by  Clodius.  Laudatur  ab  his,  culpdtur  ab 
iUis.  Hor. 

Remark  1.  (1.)  The  general  word  for  persons,  after  verbs  in  the  passive 
voice,  is  often  understood ;  as,  Probltas  laudatur,  scil.  ab  homlnlbus.  Juv.  So 
after  the  passive  of  neuter  verbs;  as,  Discurritur.  Virg.  Toto  certdtum  est  cor- 
'  p&re  regni.  Id.  Cf.  ^  141,  R.  2. 

(2.)  The  agent  is  likewise  oft»n  tmderstood,  when  it  is  the  same  as  the  sub- 
ject of  the  verb,  and  the  expression  is  then  equivalent  to  the  active  voice 
with  a  reflexive  pronoun,  or  to  the  middle  voice  in  Greek;  as,  Quum  omnes  in 
omtti  genere  scelerum  vOluttntur,  scil.  a  se.  Cic. 

Rkm.  2.  Neuter  verbs,  also,  are  sometimes  followed  by  an  ablative 
of  the  voluntary  agent  with  a  or  ab  ;  as, 

M.  Marcellus  periit  ab  Annibale,  M.  Marcellus  was  killed  by  Hannibal.  Plin. 
JVe  vir  ab  hoste  cddat.  Ovid. 

Rem.  3.  The  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted;  as.  Nee  conjuge  captus. 
Ovid.    COlitur  linigerd  turba.  Id.    Pereat  meis  excisus  Argivis.  Hor. 

For  the  dative  of  the  agent  after  verbs  in  the  passive  voice,  and  participles  In  dux,  see 
(  225,  n.  and  LQ. 

II.  The  involuntary  agent  of  a  verb  in  the  passive  voice,  or  of  a  neuter  verb, 
is  put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition,  as  the  cause,  means,  or  instrument; 
as,  Maximo  dOlOre  con/icior.  Cic.  Frangi  ciipldltate.  Id.  jEucidcs  telo  jdcet 
Hector.  Virg. 


§  249.  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE    OF    CAUSE,    ETC.  249 

Note.  The  involuntary  agent  is  sometimes  personified,  and  takes  a  or  ab; 
as.  A  voluptatibus  desen.  Cic.  A  natiira  datum  hdmini  vlvendi  curriculum.  Id. 
Vmci  a  voluptate.  Id.    Victus  a  laboi'e.  Id. 

§  S4:9.  !•  A  noun  denoting  the  means,  by  which  the  action 
of  a  verb  is  performed,  is  put  in  the  ablative  after  verbs  signify- 
ing to  affect  in  any  way,  to  Jill,  furnish,  load,  array,  equip,  en- 
dow, adorn,  reward,  enrich,  and  many  others. 

Rem.*^rk  1.  This  rule  includes  such  verbs  as  afficio,  aspergo,  conspergo,  mspergo,  r'e- 
spergo,  cotnpleo,  expleo,  hnpleo,  oppleo,  repleo,  suppleo,  cumulo,  farcio,  rS/ercio,  sdtio^ 
exsatio,  satUro,  stipo,  constlpo,  dbruo,  SnSro,  augeo,  induo,  vestio,  armo,  orno,  circunido, 
circu7nfundo,  macto,  Idcupleto,  instruo,  imbuo,  dOno,  impertio,  remunHror,  konesto, 
hSnoro,  etc. ;  as, 


Terrors  impletur  Africa,  Africa  is  filled  with  terror.  Sil.  Insiruxere  epalis 
ensas,  They  furnished  the  tables  with  food.  Ovid.  Ul  ejus  dnimum  ]m  opln- 
ionlbus  imbuas,  That  you  should  imbue  his  mind  with  these  sentiments.  Cic. 


Naves  dnerant  auro,  They  load  the  sMps  with  gold.  Virg.  Cumulat  alidria  donis 
He  heaps  the  altars  with  gifts.  Id.  Terra  se  gi-amine  vesilt,  The  earth  clothes 
itself  with  grass.  Id.  Molllbus  orndbat  cornua  sertis.  Id.  Multo  cibo  et  potione 
completi.  Cic.  Libros  puerilibus  f  abulis  refercire.  Id.  Sdiidn  delectatione  non 
possum.  Id.  Hdmines  sdturdti  honoribus.  Id.  Senectus  stipdta  studiis  Juven- 
tutis.  Id.  Me  tanto  honore  hdnestas.  Plaut.  Equis  Africam  Idcupletdvit.  Colura. 
Studium  tuum  nulla  me  ndvd  voluptate  affecit.  Cic.  Teri'am  nox  obruit  umbris. 
Lucr. 

Rem.  2.  Several  verbs  denoting  to  fill,  instead  of  the  ablative,  sometimes 
take  a  genitive.   See  §  220,  3. 

Rem.  3.  The  active  verbs  induo,  dono,  impertio,  aspergo,  inspergo,  circumdo 
and  circumfundo,  instead  of  the  ablative  of  the  thing  with  the  accusative  or 
the  person,  sometimes  take  an  accusative  of  the  thing,  and  a  dative  of  the 

Eerson;  as,  Cui  quum  Deidnlra  tiinicam  indmsset.  Cic.   Ddndre  miinera  cixlibus. 
a  the  earliest  writers  dono,  like  condono,  has  sometimes  two  accusatives  or  an 
accusative  of  the  person  with  the  mfinitive. 

II.  A  noun  denoting  that  in  accordance  with  which  any  thing  is," 
or  is  done,  is  often  put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition ;  as, 

Nostra  more.  According  to  our  custom.  Cic.  Institiito  suo  Ccesar  copias  suas 
eduxit,  According  to  his  practice.  Cass.  Id  factum  consilio  meo, — by  my  ad- 
vice. Ter.    Pdcem  fecit  his  conditionibus, — on  these  conditions.  Nep. 

Note.  The  prepositions  de,  ex,  pro,  and  secundum  are  often  expressed  with 
such  nouns;  as,  Negue  est  factmnis  quidguam  nisi  de  meo  consilio.  Cic.  Ex 
consuetudine  d/ijMiJ/dcere.  Plin.  Ep.  Decet  quidquid  dgas,  dg^re  pro  \inhns. 
Cic.     Secundum  naturam  vlvere.  Id. 

ni.  The  ablative  denoting  accompaniment,  is  usually  joined  with 
cum;  as, 

Vdgamur  egentes  cum  conjiigibus  et  IlbSris,  Needy,  we  wander  with  our 
wives  and  children.  Cic.  ScejJe  admlrdri  sdleo  cum  hoc  C.  Lselio.  Id.  Julium 
cum  his  ad  ie  Uteris  m'tsi.  Id.  Ingressus  est  cum  gladio.  Id.  Romam  veni  cum 
febri.     Cum  occasu  solis  copias  educere, — as  soon  as  the  sun  set. 

• 

Remark.  But  cum  is  sometimes  omitted  before  words  denoting  military 
and  naval  forces,  when  limited  by  an  adjective;  as,  Ad  castra  Ccesdris  omnibus 
cupiis  contenderunt.  Gaes.  Inde  toto  exercitu  prdfectus.  Liv.  Eddem  decern 
ndvibus  C.  Furius  venit.  Liv.  And  sometimes  in  military  language  ciim  is  omit- 
ted, when  accompanying  curcumstances  are  mentioned",  and  not  persons ;  as, 
Casira  clamore  invdaurU. 


250  SYNTAX. — ^ABLATTTB   OF   CAUSE,   ETC.         §  250,  251 

§  250.  1.  A  noun,  adjective,  or  verb,  may  be  followed  by 
the  ablative,  denoting  iti  whcU  respect  their  signification  is  taken ; 
as, 

Piitate  fUius,  con^Uis  jparmSj  In  affection  a  son,  in  connsel  a  parent.  Cic 
Reges  nomine  magis  quam  impSrw,  Kii^^  in  name  rather  than  in  authoritv.  Xep. 
Op/Adam  nomine  Bibrax.  Caes — Jiirt  peritus^  Skilled  in  law.  Cic.  Atixius  a»A- 
mo.  Anxious  in  mind.  Tac  PedUnu  oeger.  Lame  in  his  feet.  SiiU.  Crine  ruber, 
idger  ore.  Mart.  Fronle  leetus.  Tac.  Major  ndtu.  Cic.  Prudendi  non  inferior, 
HSU  vero  itiam  superior.  Id.  JJaximus  ndtu.  Liv. — Atdmo  angi.  To  be  troubled 
in  mind.  Cic  Cbntrindsco  totd  mente  et  omnibus  artubus^  I  am  agitated  in  vaj 
whole  mind  and  in  every  limb.  Id.  Captus  mente.  Affected  in  mind,  i.  e.  de- 
prived of  reason.  Id-  AJtIiro  dcHo  capitur.  Liv.  Ingenii  laude  floruit.  Cic 
PoUere  nobilUdte.  Tac    Asdmoque  et  corpdre  torpei.  Hor. 

Re>iark.  This  may  be  called  the  ablative  qfUmitaiion,  and  denotes  the  relar- 
tion  expressed  in  English  by  '  in  respect  of,'  '  in  regard  to,'  '  as  to,'  or  '  in.' — 
Respecting  the  genitive  of  limitation  after  adjectives,  see  ^  213 ; — after  verbs, 
§  220, 1 :  and  respecting  the  accusative  of  limita.tion,  see  §  231,  K.  5 ;  ^  232,  (3.) ; 
and  \  234,  IL 

2.  (1.)  Adjectives  of  plenty  or  want  are  sometimes  limited  by  the 
ablative;  as, 

Ddmus  plena  servis,  A  house  full  of  servants.  Juv.  Lives  agris,  Bich  in 
land.  Hor.  Ferax  scDciban  bdnis  artibus.  Plin. — Inops  verbis,  Deficient  in  words. 
Cic.  Orba  J'ratribus,  Destitute  of  brothers.  Ovid.  Viduum  arboribus  sUban, 
Colum.  Audus  agris.  Hor.  For  the  genitive  aft«r  adjectives  of  plenty  and 
want,  see  §  213,  R.  3-5. 

(2.)  Verbs  signifying  to  abound,  and  to  be  destitute,  are  followed 
by  the  ablative ;  as, 

Scdtentem  beUms  poatum^  The  sea  abounding  in  monsters.  Hor.  Urbs  rickmdai 
wiiUebus,  The  city  is  fiill  of  soldiers.  Auct.  ad  Her.  ViUa  abundat  porco,  haedo, 
^agno,  gaUtnd,  lacte,  cdseo,  meUe.  Cic —  Virum  qui  pecunid  egeat,  A  man  who  is 
in  want  of  money.  Id.  Cdrere  cuipd,  To  be  free  from  fault.  Id.  Mea  dddles- 
ceniia  indiget  Hldrum  bdnd  existimatione.  Id.  Abundat  audacia,  consUio  et  ra- 
tione  de/iiitur.  Id. 

Remark  1.  To  this  rule  belong  Sbumh,  exubiro,  redii^,  scdteo,  affiuo,  dr- 
cumfluo,  diffluo,  sAperfluo,  supped^,  vdleo,  vigeo; — cdreo^l^^,  indigeo,  vdco,  de- 
ffctor,  de^tuor,  etc 

Rem.  2.  The  genitive,  instead  of  the  afelative,  sometimes  follows  certain 
verbs  signifying  to  abound  or  to  want.  See  ^  220,  3. 

Rem.  3.  To  do  any  thing  with  a  person  or  thing,  is  expressed  in  Latin  by 
fdcere  with  de  ;  as,  Xluid  de  TuUiold  medj^iei  f  Cic  ;  and  more  frequently  by 
the  simpli  ablative,  or  the  dative ;  as.  Quid  hoc  homlue  or  huic  homini  Jacidtis'f 
What  can  yon  do  with  this  man?  Cic  Nescit  quid  Jaciat  auro, — what  he  shall 
do  with  the  gold.  Plant,  Quid  me  fiat  parvi  pendis.  You  care  little  what  be- 
comes of  me.  Ter. — Sum  is  occasionally  used  in  the  same  manner;  as,  Meium 
cqterunt  quidnam  se  futurum  esset, — what  would  become  of  them.  Liv. 

§  S^l.  A  noun  denoting  that  of  which  any  thing  is  de- 
prived, or  from  which  it  is  freed,  removed,  or  separated,  is  often 
put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition. 

This  construction  occurs  after  verbs  signifying  to  deprive,  free,  de- 
bar,  drive  away,  remove,  depart,  and  others  which  imply  separatioru 


§  251.  SYNTAX. ^ABLATIVE    OP    CAUSE,    ETC.  251 

Note.  The  principal  verbs  of  this  class  are  arceo,  petto,  depello,  expello,  ab- 
itco,  interdlco,  defenao,  deturbo,  dejlcio,  ejicio,  absterreo,  deterreo,  moveo,  cimdvco, 
demdveo,  remdveo,  seceiTio,  prdhibeo,  sepdi'O,  excludo,  interdudo,  dbeo,  exeo,  cedo, 
decedo,  discedo,  desisto,  evddo,  abstineo,  spdlio,  prlvo,  M'bo,  llbero,  expedio,  laxo, 
nudo,  solvo,  exsolvo,  exdnero,  levo,  purgo,  to  which  maybe  added  the  adjec- 
tives liber,  immunis,  purus,  vacuus,  and  dlienus ;  as, 

Nudaniur  arbdres  foliis,  The  trees  are  stripped  of  leavps.  Plin.  Hoc  me  libera 
metn,  Free  me  from  this  fear.  Ter.  Tune  earn  phildsdphiam  sequere,  qnm  spdliat 
nos  judicio^  prlvat  approbatiune,  orbat  sensIbusV  Cic.  Solvit  se  Teucria  hictu. 
Virg.  Te  illis  sedibus  arceblt.  Cic.  Q.  Varium  pellere  possession! bus  conOtus 
est.  Id.  0 }n7ies  trihvL  remoti.  Liv.  Levdre  se  sere  alieno.  Cic.  Me  leves  didri 
secernuni  populo.  Hor.  Animus  omni  liber  cura  et  angore.  Cic.  Uirumque 
homlne  dlimisslmum.  Id.  When  dlienus  signifies  '  averse '  or  '  hostile  to,'  it  takes 
the  ablative  with  ab,  or  rarely  the  dative;  as,  Id  dlcit,  quod  illi  causae* ?»rta;me 
est  dlltnum.  Id.  In  the  sense  of  'unsuited,'  it  may  also  be  joined  with  the  gen- 
itive; as,  Quis  dlienum  putet  ejus  esse  dignitatis?  Id. — Alius  too,  in  analogy 
with  adjectives  and  verbs  of  separation,  sometimes  takes  an  ablative ;  as,  Neve 
putes  dlium  sapiente  honoque  bedtum.  Hor. ;  but  this  may  also  be  referred  to  the 
ablative  after  comparatives.    Cf.  §  256,  R.  14. 

Remark  1.  Most  verbs  of  depriving  and  separating  are  more  or  less  fre- 
quently followed  by  ab,  de,  or  ex,  with  the  ablative  of  the  thing,  and  always  by 
ab  with  the  ablative  of  the  person;  as,  Tu  Jupiter,  hunc  a  tuisaris  arcebis.  Cic. 
Prcesidium  ex  arce  pepulerunt.  Nep.  Aquain  de  agro  pellere.  Plin.  Ex  ingrdtd 
civitate  cedere.  Cic.  Arcem  ab  incendio  llberdvii.  Id.  Solvere  belluam  ex  ca- 
tenis.  Auct.  ad  Her. — Sedes  rhnotas  a  Germanis.  Ca^s.  Se  ab  Etruscis  secern 
nere.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  Arceo,  in  the  poets,  sometimes  takes  the  dative,  see  §  224,  R.  2., 
and  sometimes  an  infinitive;  as,  Pldgamque  sedere  cedendo  arcebat.  Ovid. — 
Prdhibeo  and  difendo  take  either  the  accusative  of  the  person  or  thing  to  be 
defended,  with  the  ablative  of  the  thing  to  be  warded  off" — or  the  reverse — 
aliquem  or  dliquid  a  periculo,  or  periculum  ab  dliquo.  They  are  also  sometimes 
construed  with  the  dative,  see  §  224,  R.  2,  and  sometimes  with  infinitive  or 
subjunctive  clauses.  Prdhibeo  has  rarely  two  accusatives;  as.  Id  te  Jupiter 
prdhibessit.  Plant, ;  or  poeticallv  the  accusative  and  genitive ;  as,  CcjJtce  j^rdhU 
here  Poenos  aquilse.  Sil. — Interaico  takes  the  person  either  in  the  accusative  or 
the  dative,  and  the  thing  in  the  ablative,  dllquem  or  dlicid  aliqua  re ;  as.  Qufbus 
quum  aqua  et  igni  interdudssent.  Cjes. — Instead  of  the  ablative,  a  subjunctive 
clause  with  ne,  and  nioj^arely  with  ut,  sometimes  follows  interdlco. — Abgum, 
in  like  mapner,  takd?^he  ablative  with  ab,  and  sometimes  the  dative;  as, 
Curtce  nescio  quid  semjyer  dbest  rei.  Hor.  Cf.  §  224,  R.  1. — Abdico  takes  some- 
times an  ablative,  and  sometimes  an  accusative  of  the  thing  renounced ;  as, 
Abdicdre  se  magistratu.  Cic.  Abdicdre  magistratum.  Sail.  In  Plautus,  dr- 
cumduco,  to  cheat,  takes  the  ablative  of  the  thing.  Interdudo,  instead  of  an 
ablative  of  the  thing  with  an  accusative  of  the  person,  sometimes  takes  an 
accusative  of  the  thing  and  a  dative  of  the  person ;  as,  Itlnerum  angusilce  mul- 
tUvLdlni  fug^m  interduserant.  Caes.:  and,  instead  of  the  ablative  of  the  thing, 
a  subjunctive  clause  with  jMawiwws  occurs:  Intercludor  ddlore,  quomlnus  ad  te 
pldra  scrlbam.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  Verbs  which  signify  to  distinguish,  to  differ,  and  to  disagree,  are 
generally  construed  with  ab,  but  sometimes,  especially  in  the  poets,  with  the 
ablative  alone. 

Note.  Verbs  signifying  to  distinguish,  etc.,  are  distinguo,^  discerno,  secemo, 
differo,  dlscrepo,  dissideo,  aisto,  dissentio,  discordo,  dbhorreo,  alieno,  and  abdlieno. — 
Dissentio,  dissideo,  dlscrepo,  and  discordo  are  construed  also  with  cu7n. — The 
verbs  which  signify  to  differ  are  sometimes  construed  with  the  dative;  as, 
Distat  mfido  scnrrsR  amicus.  Hor.,  and  in  like  manner  the  adjective  <fj«?er««; 
as,  Nihil  est  tain  Lysiae  diversum,  quam  Isocr&tea.  Quint. 


252        SYNTAX. ^ABLATITE    OF   PRICE   AND    TIME.      §  252,  253. 

ABLATIVE    OF    PRICE.  ^ 

§  25^0  The  price  or  value  of  a  thing  is  put  in  the  ablative, 
when  it  is  a  definite  sum,  or  is  expressed  by  a  substantive ;  as, 

Qmim  te  trScentis  talentis  rer/i  Cotto  vendidisses,  When  vou  had  sold  yourself 
to  king  Cottus  for  three  hundred  talents.  Cic.  Vendidit  tic  auro  patridin,  This 
one  sold  his  country  for  gold.  Virg.  Ctbus  uno  asse  vendlis.  Plin.  Constitit  quad- 
ringends  milllbus.  Varr.  Denis  m  diem  assibus  Animum  et  corjnis  {mlfltum) 
cestlmari.  Tac.  Levi  momento  cesUmdre.  Cses.  Istuc  verbum  vile  tst  viginti  mi- 
nis. Plaut.    Asse  cdrum  est.  Sen.  Ep. 

Kemark  1.  The  verbs  which  take  an  ablative  of  price  or  value  are  (1)  (estS- 
mo,  duca,  Jacio,  /io,  habeo,  pendo,  puto,  deputo,  taxo:  (2)  emo,  mercor,  vendo,  do^ 
veneo,  sto,  consto,  prosto,  conduco,  l6co,  vdleo,  liio^  and  liceo. — To  these  must  be 
added  others,  which  express  some  act  or  enjoyment  for  which  a  certain  price 
is  paid;  as,  Ldvor  quddrante.  Trigintamillibus'0K/iMs/?d^?7rti.  Cic.  Vix  drachmis 
tst  obsondtiis  decern.  Ter.  Doceo  talento,  etc.  So  esse  in  the  sense  '  to  be  worth ' ; 
as,  Sextante  sal  in  Italia  erat. 

Rem.  2.  Respecting  the  genitive  of  price  or  value,  when  expressed  in  a  gen- 
eral  or  indejinite  manner,  see  §  214. 

Rem.  3.  The  price  of  a  thing,  contrary  to  the  general  rule,  is  often  expressed 
indefinitely  by  a  neuter  adjective ;  as,  magno,  permagno,  parvo,  tantulo,  plure^ 
minimo^  plurimo,  vlli,  vUion,  vllisdmo,  nimio^  etc. ;  as,  Plure  venit.  Cic.  Qmduxit 
non  maguo  ddmum.  Id.  These  adjectives  refer  to  some  noun  understood,  as 
pretio,  cere,  and  the  like,  which  are  sometimes  expressed;  as,  Pait'o  pretio  ea 
cendidisse.  Cic. — The  adverbs  bene,  pulchre,  rede,  male,  cdre,  etc.,  sometimes 
take  the  place  of  the  genitive  or  ablative  of  price ;  as,  Bene  hnere ;  recte  very- 
dere ;  optime  vendere,  etc. 

Rem.  4.  Varro  has  used  vdleo  with  the  accusative ;  as.  Denarii  dicti,  quod 
denos  an'is  vdlebant. 

Rem.  5.  Muto  and  its  compounds,  commuto  and  pei-muio,  are  commonly  con- 
strued like  verbs  of  selling,  the  thing  parted  with  being  put  in  the  accusative, 
and  the  thing  received  in  exchange  for  it,  in  the  ablative ;  as,  Chddniam  glan- 
dem  pingui  mutdvit  dristd.  Virg.  But  these  cases  are  often  reversed,  so  that  the 
thing  received  is  put  in  the  accusative  and  the  thing  given  for  it  in  the  abla- 
tive; as,  Cur  vaUe  permutem  Sdblnd  dlvitias  dperoswresf  Why  should  I  ex- 
change my  Sabme  valley  for  more  wearisome  riches  V  Hor. — Sometimes  in  this 
construction  cum  is  joined  with  the  ablative. 

ABLATIVE    OF    TIME. 

§  25Sm  A  noun  denoting  the  time  at  or  within  which  any 
thing  is  said  to  be,  or  to  be  done,  is  put  in  the  ablative  without 
a  preposition ;  as. 

Die  quinio  decessit,  He  died  on  the  fifth  day.  Nep.  Hoc  tempore.  At  this 
time.  Cic.  Tertid  vigllia  eruptionem  J'ecerunt,  They  made  a  sally  at  the  third 
watch.  Cses.  Ui  hieme  ndiiges,  That  you  should  sail  in  the  winter.  Cic.  Prox- 
imo triennio  omnes  gentes  subegit.  Nep.  Agamemnon  cum  unlversd  Grcecid  vix 
decern  annis  unam  cipit  urbem.  Nep. 

Note  1.  The  English  expression  *  by  day'  is  rendered  in  Latin  either  by 
interdiu  or  die ;  '  by  night,'  by  noctu  or  node ;  and  '  in  the  evening,'  h\  respere 
OTvesj)eri;  see  §  82,  Exc.  5,  (a.)  Ludis  is  used  for  in  ieinpdre  ludorum;  and 
Sdtunidlibus,  Ldtinis,  glddidtvribus,  for  ludis  Sdturndllbus,  etc.  Other  nouns  not 
properly  expressing  time  are  used  in  that  sense  in  the  ablative  either  with  or 
without  in,  as  initio,  princtpio,  adventu  and  discesstt  dlia'ijus,  cOiniiiis^  tumidtu^ 
dello,  pace,  etc. ;  or  in  initio,  etc.     But  iello  is  more  common  witliout »«,  if  it  is 

C 


§  253.  SYNTAX. ^ABLATIVE    OF   TIME.  253 

joined  with  an  adjective  or  a  genitive ;  as,  Bella  Puntco  secundo,  bello  Ldtlnd- 
rum;  and  so,  2X^0,  pugnd  Chnnensi.  So 'we  sa,j  in  pueritidj  but  omit  in  with 
an  adjective;  as,  extre'md  puer-ttid.  In  is  very  rarely  used  with  nouns  express- 
ing a  certain  space  of  time ;  as,  annus,  dies,  hora,  etc.,  for  the  purpose  of  de- 
noting tlie  time  of  an  event.  In  tempdre  signifies  either  '  in  distress,'  or  '  in 
time,'  i.  e.  '  at  the  right  time ' ;  but  in  both  cases  tempdre  alone  is  used,  and 
tempdre  in  the  sense  of  '  early '  has  even  become  an  adverb,  an  earlier  form  of 
which  was  tempdri  or  tempeH,  whose  comparative  is  temperius. 

Remark  1.  When  a  period  is  marked  by  its  distance  before  or  after  another 
fixed  time,  it  may  be  expressed  by  ante  or  post  with  either  the  accusative  or 
the  ablative. — {a)  The  preposition  is  regidarly  placed  before  the  accusative, 
but  after  the  ablative.  If  an  adjective  is  used,  the  preposition  is  often  placed 
between  the  adjective  and  the  noun.  In  this  connection  the  ordinal  as  well  as 
the  cardinal  luimbers  may  be  used.  Hence  the  English  phrase  '  after  three 
years,'  or  '  three  years  after,'  may  be  expressed  in  these  eight  ways ;  imst  tres 
annos,  trihus  annis  post ;  jwst  iei'tium  annum,  tertio  anno  post ;  tres  post  annos, 
tribus  post  annis ;  iertium  post  annum,  tertio  post  anno. 

{b.)  When  ante  or  post  stands  last,  an  accusative  may  be  added  to  denote 
the  time  before  or  after  which  any  thing  took  place ;  as,  Multis  annis  post  de- 
cemviros.  Cic.  So  Omsul  f actus  est  annis  post  Romam  conditam  treceniis  du6- 
denondyinta. 

Note  2.  Post  and  ante  sometimes  precede  the  ablatives,  as  ante  annis  octo; 
post  paucis  diebus ;  and  also  before  such  ablatives  as  are  used  adverbially,  as 
post  dliquanto ;  ante  paulo. 

Note  3.  Quam  and  a  verb  are  sometimes  added  to  post  and  ante  in  all  the 
forms  above  specified ;  e.  g.  tribus  annis  posiquam  venSrat ;  post  tres  annos  quam 
venerat ;  tertio  anno  postguam  venerat ;  2^st  annum  tertium  quam  venerat,  etc. ; 
all  of  which  expressions  signify  '  three  years  after  he  had  come.'  Sometimes 
post  is  omitted;  as,  tertio  anno  quam  venerat. 

Note  4.  Instead  of  postquam, '  after,'  we  may  use  ex  quo,  quum,  or  a  relative 
agreeing  with  the  preceding  ablative ;  as,  Ipse  octo  diebus,  quibus  has  Itteras  dd- 
bam,  cum  Lepidi  cqpias  me  conjungam ;  i.  e.  in  eight  days  after  the  date  of  this 
letter,  rlanc.  in  Cic.  Fam.  Mors  Sex.  Roscit  quatriduo,  quo  is  occlsus  est, 
Chrysdgdno  nuntidtur, — four  days  after  he  had  been  killed.  Cic.  Quern  tr'iduo, 
quum  has  dnbam  liter  as,  exspectdbam, — three  days  after  the  date  of  this  letter, 
rlanc.  in  Cie.  In  such  cases  in  is  sometimes  joined  with  the  ablative;  as.  In 
diebus  paucis,  quibus  hcec  acta  sunt,  mdritur.  Ter. 

Rem.  2.  The  length  of  time  before  the  present  moment  may  be  expressed  by 
abhinc  with"  the  accusative,  and,  less  frequently,  the  ablative ;  as,  Qucestor  fuisti 
abhinc  annos  qudtuordecim.  Cic.  Cdmitiis  Jam  abhinc  trlginta  diebus  hdbltis.  Id. 
The  same  is  also  expressed  by  ante  with  the  pronoun  hie ;  as,  ante  hos  sex 
me7ises  mdledixisti  miht, — six  mouths  ago.  Phaed.  Ante  is  sometimes  used  in- 
stead of  abhinc :  and  the  length  of  time  before  is  sometimes  expressed  by  the 
ablative  joined  with  hicoxilte;  as,  Paucis  his  diebus,  or  paucis  illis  diebus, — 
a  few  days  ago. 

Rem.  3.  The  time  at  which  any  thing  is  done,  is  sometimes  expressed  by  the 
neuter  accusative  id,  with  a  genitive;  as,  Venit  id  tempdris.  Cic.  So  with  a 
preposition;  Ad  id  diei.  Cell.   See  §  212,  R.  3. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  The  time  at  or  within  which  any  thing  is  done,  is  sometimes, 
with  personal  subjects,  expressed  by  c?e,  with  the  ablative;  as,  De  tertid  vigilia 
ad  hastes  contendit, — in  the  third  watch.  Cses,  Ut  jugfUent  hdmines  surgunt  de 
nocte  latrones.  Hor.  So,  also,  with  sub ;  as,  Ne  sub  ipsa  prdfectione  milites  oppt- 
dum  irrnmperent, — at  the  very  time  of  his  departure.  Cses.  Sub  adventu  Boindn- 
drum.  While  the  Romans  were  ai-riving.  Id. 

ih.)   The  time  idthin  which  any  thing  occurs,  is  also  sometimes  expressed  by 

intra  with  the  accusative;  as,  iJimidiam  partem  ndtionum  subcgit  intra  viginti 

dies.  Plant.    Intra  dScimu?n  diem,  quam  Pheras  venerat,  In  less  than  tan  days 

after...  Li  v.  « 

22 


254  SYNTAX. ABLA  TVE  OF  PLACE.      §254,255. 

Kem.  5.  The  time  within  which  a  thing  happens,  is  often  expressed  by  the 
ablative  with  in ;  especially  (a)  in  <ft)nnection  with  numerals;  as,  Bis  m  die 
tatiiruin  Jieri ;  rix  ier  in  aiino  nuntium  audtre;  and  (6),  as  in  the  use  of  intra^ 
to  denote  that  the  event  happened  before  the  time  specified  had  fully  expired. 

Rem.  6.  Instead  of  in  pueritid^  ddolescentia,  juveritute,  senectute,  etc.,  in  stat- 
ing the  age  at  which  a  person  performed  anj'  action,  the  concretes  pue?-,  ddd- 
lescens,  jiivenis,  senex,  etc.,  are  commonly  ^orned  to  the  verb;  as,  Qi.  PomptiuA, 
idolescens  $e  et  patrem  consilio  servdvii. — So,  also,  adjectives  ending  in  endrins 
are  sometimes  used  in  stating  the  number  of  years  a  person  has  hved;  as, 
Cicero  stxayendnus. 

For  the  ablative  denoting  duration  of  time,  see  §  236. 

ABLATIVE    OF    PLACE. 

§  3^4.     The  name  of  a  town  in  which  any  thing  is  said  to 

he,  or  to  be  ■done,  if  of  the  tliird  declension  or  plural  number,  is 

put  in  the  ablative  without  a  preposition  ;  as, 

Alexander  Babylone  est  mortuus,  Alexander  died  at  Babylon.  Cic.  IntSrSrit 
rmdtum — Thebis  nutritus  an  Argis, — whether  brought  up  at  Thebes  or  at  Argos. 
Hor.    Hdtus  Tibiire  vel  Gabiis.  Id. 

Remark  1.  *In  the  country'  is  expressed  by  rare,  or  more  commonly  by 
run,  without  a  preposition;  as,  Paier /ilium  rxxri  hdbitdre  jussit.  Cic.  With  an 
adjective  oidy  rare  is  used;  as,  Inierdum  nugdiis  rure  pdieimo.  Hor-  Cf. 
§  221,  N. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  preposition  in  is  sometimes  expressed  with  names  of 
towns;  as,  In  Phllippis  quldam  nuncidvit.  Suet. 

(6.)  Names  of  towns  of  the  first  and  second  declension,  and  singular  number, 
and  also  dOmus  and  huimis,  are  in  like  manner  sometimes  put  in  the  ablative 
without  in.  See  ^  221,  R.  2  and  R.  3. — So,  also,  terra  vidrlque,  by  laniand  by 
sea.  In  is  also  frequently  omitted  with  Hco  and  Idcis,  especiallv  whew  joined 
with  an  adjective  and  having  the  meaning  of  '  occasion ' ;  as,  iloc  Idco,  mtdiis 
Idcis,  etc. — Libro  joined  with  an  adjective,  as  hoc,  prlmo,  etc.,  is  used  without 
in  when  the  whole  book  is  meant,  and  with  in  when  only  a  portion  is  referred 
to.  An  ablative  of  place  joined  with  toto,  totd,  tofis,  is  generally  used  without 
in;  as,  Urbe  totd  gemXtus  JiL  Cic.  Totd  Asid  vdgdtitr.  Id.  Totomari.  Id.  But 
in  such  cases  in  is  sometimes  used.     So  cunctd  Asia.  Liv. 

Rem.  3.  Before  the  names  of  countries,  of  nations  used  for  those  of  countries, 
and  of  all  other  places  in  which  any  thing  is  said  to  be  or  to  be  done,  except 
tliose  of  towns,  and  excepting  also  the  phrases  specified  in  the  first  and  second 
remarks,  the  preposition  tft  is  commonly  used;  as,  Iphici-dtes  in  Thvaciix  vixit, 
Charei  in  Sigeo.  Nep.  Bui-e  ego  vtventem,  tu  dicis  in  urbe  bedtum.  Hor.  AioJioc 
Jieri  in  Gr^ecia.  Plant.  In  Bactrianis  Sogdianisji/e  iirbes  condidit.  Liicus  in 
urbe  fuit.  Virg.  But  it  is  sometimes  omitted  by  -wTiters  of  every  class  and 
-.  period ;  as,  Mdites  stdtivis  castris  hdb'bnt.  Sail.  Mngnis  in  laudil/us  fuit  totd 
Groecia.  Nep.  Pdpuli  senstts  maxime  theatro  et  spectaciilis  perspectus  est.  Cic. 
Pompeius  se  oppido  tenet.  Id.  In  the  poets  and  later  prose  writers  this  omis- 
sion is  of  very  frequent  occurrence  not  only  with  names  of  towns  but  with 
ablatives  of  all  nouns  answering  to  the  question,  where?  as,  Xdrita  puppe 
sedens.^  Ovid.  Ibam  forte  Via  Sacrd.  Hor.  Silvisque  agrisque  viisqne  corjwra 
feda  jdcent.  Ovid.  Medio  alveo  concursum  est.  Liv. — FOris,  out  at  the  door, 
abroad,  is  properly  an  ablative  of  place  ;  as,  Foris  ceenat.  Cic.  Cf.  §  237, 
R.  5,  (c.) 

§  235,  1.  After  verbs  expressing  or  implying  motion,  the 
name  of  a  town  whence  the  motion  proceeds,  is  p  it  in  the  abla- 
tive, without  a  preposition  ;  as. 


§  256.    SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  AFTER  COMPARATIVES.     255 

Bnindlsio  piiifecti  siimus,  We  departed  from  Brundisiura.  Cic.  Didnysius 
tyrannus  Svracusis  ex/mlsus  Corinthi  j^ueros  ddcebat.  Id.  Demdrdtus  Tnrquhiioi 
Corintho  Jdgit.  Id.  Aca'pi  tuas  lUeros  ddias  Placeutia.  Id.  Interim  Runia  per 
litems  certiur  ft;  scil.  deltas  or  missus.  Sail.  J.  82.  So,  also,  after  a  verbal 
noun ;  as,  Narbuue  reditus.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  The  ablatives  domo,  humo,  and  rure  or  ruri,  are  used, 
like  names  of  towns,  to  denote  the  place  whence  motion  proceeds ; 
as, 

Domo  prdfectus,  Having  set  out  A-om  home.  Nep.  Surgit  humo  ^'uvenh, 
The  youth  rises  from  the  gi-ound.  Ovid.  Rure  hue  advenit.  Ter.  Si  run  veniet. 
Id.  Virgil  uses  ddmo  with  wide;  as,  Qui  yenusf  wide  d'^-iof  and  Livy,  in- 
stead of  domo  dbesse^  has  esse  ab  ddmo.  With  an  adjective,  rure,  and  not  ruri, 
must  be  used. 

Rkji.  2.  With  names  of  towns  and  ddmus  and  Immus,  when  answering  the 
question  'whence?'  cd),  ex,  or  de,  is  sometimes  used;  as,  Ab  Alexandrtd  prd' 
jectus.   Cic.    J£x  ddmo.  Id.    De  vltiferd  venisse  Vienna.  Mart.    Ab  humo.  Virg. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  With  other  names  of  places  whence  motion  proceeds,  ab,  ex, 
or  de,  is  commonly  expressed;  as,  Me  a  portu  prcemisit.  Plant.  Ex  Asia 
transis  in  Europam.  Curt.  Ex  castris  prdficiscuntur.  Caes.  De  Poinptino, 
scil.  proedio.  Cic. — So,  also,  before  names  or  nations  used  for  those  of  coun- 
tries ;  as.  Ex  Medis  ad  adversuriorum  hlberndcula  j)ervmit.  Nep. 

(6.)  But  the  preposition  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  il/e?-ffi  Macedonia  aZ?o/'<B. 
Liv.  Cldssis  Cypro  advenit.  Curt.  Cessissent  loco.  Liv.  Nl  cite  vicis  et  castellis 
proximis  subventum  foret.  Id.  Ite  sacris,  pr6j)erdte  sacris,  laurumque  capillis 
ponite.  Ovid.  Finibus  omnes  proslluere  suis.  Virg.  Advolvunt  inyenies  monti- 
bus  ornos.  Id.  This  omission  of  the  preposition  is  most  common  in  the  poets 
and  later  prose  writers. 

2.  The  place  hy,  through,  or  over  which,  after  verbs  of  motion,  com- 
monly follows  per ;  but  frequently  also  it  is  put  in  the  ablative  with- 
out a  preposition ;  as. 

Per  Thebas  iter  fecit.  Nep.  Exercltum  vado  transducit.  Cses.  His  pontibus 
pdbuldtum  piittebat.  Id.  Trlbuni  mllitum  porta  Colllna  urbem  intrdvere  sub  sifpiis, 
mMiixque  urbe  agmtne  in  Aventlnum  pergunt.  Liv.  Lcgiones  Penninis  Cottiknis- 
que  Alpibus,  pars  moute  Graio,  trdducuntur.  Tac.  EquUes  via  breviore  proe- 
mlsi.  Cic. 

ABLATIVE    AFTER    C  0  MP  AR  AT  I  VE  s\ 

§  "00«  1.  When  two  objects  are  compared  by  means  of  the  comparative 
degree,  a  conjunction,  as  quam,  atque,  etc.,  is  sometimes  expressed,  and  some- 
times omitted. 

2.  The  comparative  degree,  when  quam  is  omitted,  is  followed 

by  the  ablative  of  that  with  which  the  comparison  is  made ;  as, 

Nihil  est  virtute  formosius.  Nothing  is  more  beautiful  than  virtue.  Cic.  Quis 
C.  La^lio  comior  f  Who  is  more  courteous  than  C.  Lselius  ?   Id. 

Remark  1.  The  person  or  thing  with  which  the  subject  of  a  pro- 
position is  compared,  is  usually  put  in  the  ablative;  as , 

SldCre  pulchrior  ille  est,  iu  Uvior  cortlce.  Hor.  Vtlius  argentum  est  auro,  vir- 
tutibus  o«?;M?rt,  Id.  Tullus  ffostllius  ferocior  Eomnlo  fuit.  Liv.  Lacrima  7ir/«7 
citius  drescii.  Cic.  Qicid  mdgis  est  durum  saxo,  quid  mollius  unda  ?  Ovid.  Hoc 
nemo  fuit  minus  ineptus.  Ter.  Albdnum,  Maecenas,  slve  Fdlernum  te  magis  ap- 
posltis  delcctat.  Hor. 


256  SYNTAX. ^ABLATIVE   AFTEB    fOMPARATIVES.  §  256. 

Rem.  2.  An  object  with  which  a  person  or  thing  addressed  is  compared,  is 
also  put  in  the  ablative;  as,  0 /ons  Baitdusue  splendidior  vitro]  Hor. 

Rem,  3.  Sometimes  the  person  or  thing  with  which  the  subject  of  a  proposi- 
tion is  compared,  instead  of  following  it  in  the  ablative,  is  connected  with  it  by 
quam,  and  it  is  tlien  put  in  the  same  case  as  the  subject,  whether  in  the  nomi- 
native or  the  accusative;  as,  Ordtio  quam  habitus  /uii  imserabilior.  Cic. 
AJjirmo  nuUam  esse  laudem  amj)lidrem  quam  eam.  Id.  So,  also,  when  an  abla- 
tive in  the  case  absolute  talies  the  place  of  the  subject;  as,  Eodem  (scil.  duce) 
plura,  quam  gregario  miUte,  idlerante.  Tac. 

RE3r.  4.  If  the  person  or  thing  which  iSM^ompared  with  any  object  is  neither 
the  subject  of  the  sentence  nor  the  person  addressed,  qitam  is  commonly  used, 
and  the  object  which  follows  it  is  then  put  in  the  nominative  with  sum,  and 
sometimes  in  an  oblique  case  to  agree  with  the  object  with  which  it  is  com- 
pared ;  as,  MeUorem,  quam  ego  sum,  suppono  tibi.  Plant.  £"15^0  Mminem  caUi- 
diOrem  viai  neminem  quam  Phormionem.  Ter.  Adventus  hosUum  fuit  agris, 
quam  urbi  terribilior.  Liv.  Omnes  fontes  aestate,  quam  hieme,  sunt  yelidiores. 
Plin.  Themistoclis  nomen,  quam  Solonis,  est  Ulustrius.  Cic. — The  following 
example  illustrates  both  the  preceding  constructions: — Ul  tibi  viulto  majori, 
quam  Afrlcanus  fuit,  me  non  mvlto  minorem  quam  Lffilium  facile  ei  in  republicd 
et  in  dmicUid  adjunctum  esse  pdtidre.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  person  or  thing  with  which  the  (^Ject  of  an  active  verb  is 
compared,  though  usually  connected  with  it  by  quam,  (R.  4,)  is  sometimes  put 
in  the  ablative,  especially  in  the  poets,  and  frequently  also  even  in  prose,  if  the 
object  is  a  pronoun,  particularly  a  relative  prouoim ;  as,  Attdlo,  quo  grdviorem 
tnimicum  non  habui,  sdrorem  dedit,  He  gave  his  sister  to  Attains,  th<in  whom-,  etc. 
Curt.  Hoc  lUhil  grdtius  fdcere  pdtes.  Cic.  Causam  enim  susccpisti  antiquivrem 
memoria  tud.  Id.  Exeqt  mdnumenium  sere  perennius.  Hor.  Cur  dtlvum  san- 
guine A-iperino  cautius  vitat  f  Id.  Quid  prius  aicam  soHtis  parentis  laudibus  ?  Id. 
Mdjora  viribus  aitdes.  Virg.  NuUam  sacra  vite  prius  severis  arbdrem.  Hor. 
NuUos  his  mallem  ludos  spectasse.  Id.  §  178,  3. 

{b.)  The  ablative  instead  of  quam  is  never  used  with  any  other  oblique  case 
except  the  accusative,  but  quam  is  sometimes  found,  even  where  the  ablative 
might  have  been  used ;  as,  Melior  tOtiorque  est  certa  pax  quam  sjierdta  victona. 
Liv.  After  quam,  if  the  verb  caimot  be  supplied  from  the  preceding  sentence, 
est,  fuit,  etc.,  must  be  added;  as,  Ecec  verba  sunt  M.  Varronis,  quam  fuit 
Claudius,  doctioris.  Gell.  Drusum  Germdnicum  mitwrem  ndtu,  quam  ipse  erat, 
frdtrem  dmisit.  Sen. . 

Rem.  6.  (a.)  Minus,  plus,  and  amplius  with  numerals,  and  with  other  words 
v'enoting  a  certain  measure  or  a  certain  portion  of  a  thing,  are  used  either  with 
or  without  quam,  generally  as  indeclinable  words,  without  influence  upon  the 
constniction,  but  merely  to  modify  the  number;  as,  Non  plus  quam  qudtuor 
millia  effUgerunt,  not  effugit,  Liv.  JPictores  antiqui  non  sunt  usi  plus  quam  qud- 
tuor  cdtdribus,  not  plUribus.    Cic. 

(6.)  Quam  is  frequently  omitted  with  all  cases;  as^  Minus  duo  millia  Jidmi- 
num  ex  tanto  exercitu  effugeruni.  Liv.  Millies  Romdni  scepe  plus  dlmididti  men- 
sis  cibdria  ferebant.  Cic.  Quum  plus  annum  ceger  fuisseL  Liv.  Sedecim  non 
canpUus  eo  anno  legionibus  dffensum  imperium  est.  Id. 

(c.)  These  comparatives,  as  in  the  preceding  ^xample,  are  sometimes  in- 
serted between'  the  numeral  and  its  substantive,  and  sometimes,  when  joined 
with  a  negative,  they  follow  both,  as  a  sort  of  apposition ;  as,  Quinque  millia 
armutorum,  non  amplius,  relictum  erat  pnesidium, — a  garrison  of  five  thousand 
soMiers,  not  more.  Liv.  So,  also,  longius ;  Ccesar  certior  est  f actus,  magnas 
GaUoruin  copias  non  longius  miUia  passumn  octo  ab  kibemis  suis  abfuisse.  Caes. 
See  ^  236. 

(d.)  The  ablative  is  sometimes  used  with  these  as  with  other  comparatives; 
as.  Dies  trlginta  out  plus  eo  in  ndvi  fui.  Ter.  Triennio  amplius.  Cic.  Hora 
amplius  moliibantur.  Id.  Ne  longius  triduo  ch  castris  absit.  Caes.  Apud  Suevos 
non  longius jirmo  rimdnere  Uno  in  loco  incdlendi  causa  licet.  Id.  Quum  initio  non 
amplius  duobus  millibus  habuisseL  SalL 


§  256.    SYNTAX. ABLATIVE  AFTER  COMPARATIVES.     257 

Rem.  7.  Qruim  is  in  like  manner  sometimes  omitted,  -without  a  change  of 
case,  after  7??^7/o/',  7?ziHo?',  and  some  other  comparatives;  as,  Obskks  ne  nUnorea 
octuiium  denum  annorum,  «c?<  majoi'es  quinum  quridrrigeinun,....  of  not  less 
than  eighteen,  nor  more  than  forty-five  years  of  age.  Liv.  Kx  urbdno  exercitUj 
qui  mhiures  (pdnque  et  trlf/inta  annis  erant,  in  ncives  imposUi  nint.  The  genitive 
and  abhftive,  in  these  and  similar  examples,  are  to  be  referred  to  ^  211,  R.  6. 
Lonyiiis  ab  uibe  mille  passuum.  Liv.     Annos  ndtas  vutcjis  quddrdf/intn.  Cic. 

Rem.  8.  When  the  second  member  of  a  comparison  is  an  infinitive  or  a 
clan<e,  f/uam  is  always  expressed;  as,  Nihil  est  in  alcendo  majus  quam  ut  faveat 
oratori  auditor.  Cic. 

Re^i.  9.  Certain  nouns,  participles,  and  adjectives, — as  dplnione^  spe,  ex- 
speitutione,  fide^ — cZuto,  sOUto, — (equo,  credibili,  itScessdrio,  vero,  and  jtisto, — are 
used  in  a  peculiar  manner  in  the  ablative  after  comparatives;  as,  Opinione 
celerius  venturus  esse  dlcitur, — sooner  than  is  expected.  Cffis.  Dicto  citius  tumi- 
da  lequora  pldcat,  Quicker  than  the  word  was  spoken.  Virg.  Injurias  grdvius 
sequo  habere.  Sail. 

(a.)  These  ablatives  supply  the  place  of  a  clause;  thus,  grdmus  cequo  is 
GqvLvv'Aleut  to  grdvius  quam  quod cequiim  est.  They  are  often  omitted;  as,  The- 
misiocles  iJbtrius  vlvebat,  scil.  ceguo.  Nep.  In  such  cases,  the  compafative  may  . 
be  translated  by  the  positive  degree,  with  too,  quite,  or  rather,  as  in  the  above 
example — 'He  lived  too  freely,' or  '  leather  freely.'  Vdluptas  quum  major  est 
atque  longior,  omne  dnimi  lumen  exstinguii, — ^hen  it  is  too  great,  and  of  too  long 
continuance.  Cic.     So  tristior,  scil.  sblito,  rather  sad. 

{b.)  The  English  word  'still,' joined  with  comparatives,  is  expressed  by 
etiam  or  vel,  and  only  in  later  prose  writers  by  ddkuc ;  as,  Ut  in  corponbus  mag- 
tice  dissimllitudines  sunt,  sic  in  djiimis  exsistunt  mdjores  etiam  vdrietdtes.  Cic. 

Rem.  10.  {a.)  With  in/*mor,  the  dative  is  sometimes  used,  instead  of  the 
ablative;  as,  Vir  nulld  arte  cuiquam  inferior.  Sail.  The  ablative  is  also  found; 
as,  Ut  humdnos  cdsus  virtute  iiferiores  putes.  Cic.  But  usually  inferior  is  fol- 
lowed by  quam;  as,  TlmOtheus  belli  laude  non  inferior  fuil,  quam  pater.  Cic. 
Grdtid  non  inferioi',  quam  qui  umguam  fuerunt  amplissimi.  Id. 

(6.)  Qudlis,  '  such  as,'  with  a  comparative,  occurs  poetically  instead  of  the 
relative  pronoun  in  the  ablative;  as,  Nardo  perunctum,  quale  non  jierfectiu^ 
niece  Idbordrint  mdnus ;  instead  of  quo.  Hor.  Epod.  5,  59.  Animce  quales  neque 
candidiores  terra  tulit ;  for  qmbus.  Id.  Sat.  1,  5,  41. 

Rem.  11.  Quam  pro  is  used  after  comparatives,  to  express  disproportion;  as, 
Proelium  atrocius  quam  pro  numero  pugnantium.  The  battle  was  more  severe 
than  was  proportionate  to  the  number  of  the  combatants.  Liv.  Minor j  quam 
pro  tumultu,  ecedes.  Tac. 

Rem.  12.  When  two  adjectives  or  adverbs  are  compared  with  each  other, 
both  are  put  in  the  comparative ;  as,  Triumphus  clarior  quam  gratior,  A  tri- 
umph more  famous  than  acceptable.  Liv.  Fortius  quam  f  elicius  bellum  gesse- 
runt.  So,  also,  when  the  comparative  is  formed  bv  means  of  mdgis ;  as,  Magis 
audacter  quam  Y)a.r?ite  ad  dicendum  veniebat.  Cic. —  Tacitus  uses  the  positive  in 
one  part  of  the  proposition ;  as,  Speciem  excelsce  glorice  vehementius  quam  caute 
apj)etebat ;  or  even  in  both ;  as,  Claris  mdjorlbus  quam  vetustis. 

Rem.  13.  (a.)  Pdtius  and  mdgis  are  sometimes  joined  pleonastically  with 
malle  and  prcestdre,  and  also  with  comparatives ;  as,  Ab  omnibus  se  desertos  po- 
tius  quam  abs  te  defensos  esse  malunt.  Cic.  Qui  magis  vere  vincere  quam  diu 
imperdre  malit.  Liv.  Ut  emdri  potius  quam  servire  prsestaret.  Cic.  Mini  qucevis 
fuga  Taotms  quam  ulla  provincia  esset  OT^tsutior.  Id.  Quis  magis  queat  esse  bear 
tier?  Virg. 

(b.)  So,  also,  the  prepositions  prce,  ante,  prceter,  and  supra,  are  sometinaes 
used  with  a  comparative ;  as,  Unus  prse  ceteris  fortior  exsurgit,  Apul.  Scilere 
ante  alios  immdnior  omnes.  Virg.  They  also  occur  with  a  superlative;  as, 
Ante  alios  cdrissimus.  Nep.  As  these  prepositions,  when  joined  with  the 
positive,  denote  comparison,  they  seem  in  such  examples  to  be  redundant. 
See  §  127. 

22* 


258  SYNTAX. ^ABLATIVE   ABSOLUTE.  §  257. 

Rem.  14.  Alius  is  sometimes  in  poetry  treated  as  a  comparative,  and  con- 
fitmed  with  the  ablative  instead  of  atque' with  the  nominative  or  accusative; 
as,  Nf've  putes  (ilium  sapiente  hbnoqtie  bedtum.  Hor.  Alius  Lysippo.  Id.  But 
compare  \  251,  N. 

RfeM.  15.  By  the  poets  ac  and  aique  are  sometimes  nsed  instead  of  guam 
after  comparatives ;  as,  Quanio  constantior  idem  in  vitiis,  tanto  Uvius  miser  ac 
prior  ilk,  qui,  etc.  Hor.     Arctium  atque  hederd  procera  adstringilur  ilex.  Id- 

Rem.  16.  The  degree  of  difference  between  objects  compared  is 
expressed  by  the  ablative : — 

(1.)  Of  substantives;  as,  Minor  uno  mense,  Younger  by  one  month.  Hor. 
Sesqulpede  guam  tu  longior,  Taller  than  you  by  a  foot  and  a  half.  Plant. 
Hibemia  dimldio  minor  quam  Britannia,  tses.  'Diraidio  minoris  constdbU,  It 
will  cost  less  by  half.  Cic.  Quam  mdlestum  est  Uno  digito  plus  habere  .'....to  have 
one  finger  more,  i.  e.  than  we  have,  to  have  six  fingers.  Id. — but  the  expression 
is  ambiguous,  as  it  might  mean  *  to  have  more  than  one  finger.'  Superat  capite 
ei  cervicibus  altis.  Virg. 

(2.)  Of  neuter  adjectives  of  quantity  and  neuter  pronouns,  in  the  singular 
number.  Such  are  ianio,  quanio,  quo,  eo,  hoc,  multo,  parvo,  pauIo,  nimio,  dli- 
quanto,  taniUlo,  ailero  tanto  (twice  lis  much);  as,  Multo  doctior  es  patre,  Thou 
art  (by)  much  more  learned  than  thy  father.  The  relative  and  demonstrative 
words,  quanto — tanlo,  quo — eo,  or  quo — hoc,  signifying  '  by  how  much — by  so 
much,'  are  often  to  be  translated  by  an  emphatic  the;  as,  Quanto  sumus  sOperi- 
ores,  tanto  nos  submissius  gerdmus,  The  more  eminent  we  are,  the  more  humbly 
let  us  conduct  ourselves :  lit.  by  how  much — by  so  much^.  Cic.  Eo  grdvior 
est  dolor,  quo  culpa  est  mdjor.  'id.  But  the  relative  word  generally  precedes 
the  demonstrative;  a?,  Quo  difficilius,  hoc  prcecldrius.  Id.  Poetically,  also, 
quam  magis — tarn  nulgis  are  used  instead  of  quanto  mdgis — tanto  mdqis.  Virg. 
Mn.  7,  787 :  and  quam  mdgis — tanto  magis.  Lucr.  6,  459. — Iter  multo  /ddlius, — 
much  easier.  Cses.  Parvo  brevius,  A  little  shorter.  Plin.  Eo  indgis.  The  more. 
Cic.  Eo  mtmis.  Id.  Istoc  mdgis  vapuUbis,  So  much  the  more.  Plaut  Via  altero 
tanto  longior, — as  long  again.  Nep.    Multo  id  maximum  fuit.  Liv. 

(3.)  The  ablative  of  degi-ee  is  joined  not  only  with  comparatives  but  with 
verbs  which  contain  the  idea  of  comparison ;  as,  mdlo,  prcesto,  supew,  excello, 
antecello,  antecedo,  and  others  compounded  with  ante ;  and  also  with  ante  and 
post,  in  the  sense  of '  earlier '  and  '  later ' ;  as,  Multo  prcestat.  Sail.  Post  pauh, 
A  little  after.  Id.  MuUo  ante  lucis  adcentum.  Long  before — .  Id.  Maltis  parti- 
bus  is  equivalent  to  multo ;  as,  Numero  muUis  partibus  esset  infei-ior.  Cjbs. 

Note.  The  accusatives  multum,  tantum,  quantum,  and  dltquantum,  are  some- 
times used  instead  of  the  corresponding  ablatives ;  as,  AUquantura  est  ad  rem 
avidior.  Ter.  Multum  imprdbiores  sunt.  Plant.  Quantum  dOmo  inferior,  tan- 
tum gloria  sUperior  evdsit.  Val.  Max.  Cf.  (j  232,  (3.) — So  longe,  Mar,'  is  fre- 
Juentlv  used  for  muUo ;  as,  Longe  melior.  Virg.  Longe  et  multum  anlecellere. 
!ic.    So,'  pars  pedis  sesqui  major, — ^longer  by  one  lialf.  Id. 

ABLATIVE    ABSOLUTE. 

§  25T,  A  noun  and  a  participle  are  put  in  tlie  ablative, 
called  absolute^  to  denote  the  time,  cause,  means,  or  concomitant 
of  an  action,  or  the  condition  on  which  it  depends ;  as, 

Pythdgdras,  Tarqulnio  regnante,  in  Itdliam  venit,  Pythagoras  came  into  Italy, 
in  the  reign  of  Tarquin.  Cic.  Ltipus,  stimiilante  fame,  captai  ov'de,  Hunger  in- 
citing, the  wolf  seeks  the  fold.  Ovid.  Milites,  pCcore  e  longinquiOribus  vlcis 
adacto,  extremam  fdmem  sustentdbant.  Cses.  Eac  oratione  habita,  concdivm 
dlmlsit.  Id.  GaUi^  re  cognlta^obsididnem  relinquunL  Id.  Virtute  excepta,  nihQ 
dmidtid  prObslaiAhus  putetis.  Cic. 


§  257.  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE   ABSOLUTE.  259 

Note  1.  The  Latin  ablative  absolute  may  be  expressed  in  English  by  a  sim- 
ilar constniction,  but  it  is  commonly  better  to  translate  it  by  a  clause  connect- 
ed by  «7/ie«,  since,  wJtile,  although,  after,  as,  etc.,  or  by  a  verbal  substantive; 
as,  Te  adjiivante.  With  thy  assistance.  Non — nisi  te  adjuvante.  Only  with  thy 
assistance,  or  not  without"^thy  assistance.  Te  non  adjuvante.  Without  thy  as- 
sistance.   Cf.  §  274,  R.  5,  (c.) 

Remark  1.  This  construction  is  an  abridged  form  of  expression, 
equivalent  to  a  dependent  clause  connected  by  qiium,  si,  etsi,  quam- 
quam,  quamvis,  etc. 

Thus,  for  Tarquinio  regnnnte,  the  expression  dum  Tarquinitis  regnabat  might 
be  used ;  for  hac  ordtione  hdbitd ; — giiuni  hanc  ordtionem  hdhuisset,  or  quum  hcBC 
ordtio  hdbita  esset, — dbncilium  dimisit.  The  ablative  absolute  may  always  be 
resolved  into  a  proposition,  by  making  the  noun  or  pronoun  the  subject,  and 
the  participle  the  predicate. 

Rem.  2.  This  construction  is  common  only  with  present  and  per- 
fect participles.  Instances  of  its  use  with  participles  in  rus  and  dus 
are  comparatively  rare ;  as, 

CjBsare  venturo,  Phosphdre,  redde  diem.  Mart.  Irrupturis  tarn  infestis  na- 
tionibus.  Liv.  Quu7n  concio  plausum,  nieo  nomine  r^citando,  dedisset, — when  my 
name  was  pronounced.  Cic.  Quum  immolanda  Iphlgenia,  tristis  (Jalchas  esset. 
Id.  Quis  est  enim,  qui,  nullis  officii  prseceptis  tradendis,  philosdphum  se  audeai 
dicere — without  propounding  "any  rules  of  duty.  Cic.  Cf.  §  274,  R.  6,  (c.)  and 
R.  9.  • 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  A  noun  is  put  in  the  ablative  absolute,  only  when  it 
denotes  a  different  person  or  thing  from  any  in  the  leading  clause. 
Cf  §  274,  3,  (a.) 

(b.)  Yet  a  few  examples  occur  of  a  deviation  from  this  principle,  especially 
with  a  substantive  pronoun  referring  to  some  word  in  the  leading  clause ;  as, 
Se  audiente,  scrtbit  Thucydides.  Cic.  Legio  ex  castris  Varronis,  adstante  et  in- 
spectante  ipso,  signa  sustulit.  Caes.  Me  duce,  ad  hunc  voti  flnevi,  me  millte, 
veni.  Ovid.  So  M.  Porcius  Cdto,  vivo  qudque  Scipione,  alldtrdre  ejus  magnitudi- 
nem  soUtus  erat.  Liv. 

Note  2.  Two  participles  must  not  be  put  together  in  the  ablative  absolute 
agi-eeinoj  with  the  same  noun.  Thus,  we  may  say  Porcia  scepe  marltum  cogi- 
tantem  invenerat,  but  not,  Porcia  mailto  cogitante  invento. 

Note  3.  Instead  of  the  ablative  absolute  denoting  a  cause,  an  accusative 
with  6b  or  propter  occurs  in  Livy  and  in  later  writers ;  as,  Cdnopum  condidere 
S/rnidni,  ob  sepultum_i7/ic  rectorem  ndvis  Canopum.  Tac.  Decemviri  libros 
Sibijlllnos  inspicere  jussi  sunt  propter  terrltos  homines  ndvis  pi^odigiis.  Liv. 

Rem.  4.  The  ablative  absolute  serves  to  mark  the  time  of  an  ac- 
tion, by  reference  to  that  of  another  action.  If  the  present  participle 
is  used,  the  time  of  the  action  expressed  by  the  participle,  is  the  ^ame 
as  that  of  the  principal  verb.  The  perfect  participle  and  the  future 
in  rus,  denote  respectively  an  action  as  prior  or  subsequent  to^  that 
expressed  by  the  principal  verb. 

Thus  in  the  preceding  exam.ples — Pythdgdras,  Tartjuinio  regnante,  in  Mliam 
venit,  Pythagoras  came  into  Italy  during  the  reign  of  Tarquinius.  Galli,  re  cog- 
nlta,  obsidionem  relinquunt,  The  Gaulsj  having  learned  the  fact,  abandon  the 
siege.  So,  Rex  dpum  non  nisi  migratiiro  examine  fOras  procedit.  The  king-bee 
does  not  go  abroad,  except  lohen  a  swarm  is  about  to  emigrate.  Plin. 


260  SYNTAX. ABLATIVE   ABSOLUTE.  §  257. 

Note  4.  Non  prius  qiuim,  non  nisiy  ut,  vSliU,  and  tamquam,  are  sometimes 
joined  with  the  participle ;  as.  Tibeiius  excessum  Augusti  non  prius  palam  fei-it, 
quam  Aqrippd  jiiveiie  interempio,  — not  until.  Suet.  GaUi  Iceti^  ut  expldrato  vic- 
toria^ ad  cnstra  Rdmuidrum  ptrgunU  Cses.  AntUkhus,  tamquam  non  transUuris 
in  Asiam  Romanis,  etc.  Liv. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  construction  of  the  ablative  absolute  "with  the 
perfect  passive  participle,  arises  freijuently  from  the  Avant  of  a  par- 
ticiple of  that  tense  in  the  active  voice. 

Thus,  for  CfEsar,  having  sent  forward  the  cavalry,  was  following  with  all  k^a 
forces,'  we  find,  '  Ciesar,  equltatu  prsemisso,  subsequebdtur  omnibus  copiis.^ 

(b.)  As  the  perfect  participle  in  Latin  may  be  used  for  both  the  perfect 
active  and  the  perfect  passive  participles  in  English,  its  meaning  can,  in  many 
instances,  be  determined  only  by  the  connection,  since  the  agent  with  a  or  ai 
is  generally  not  expressed  with  this  pai'ticiple  in  the  ablative  absolute,  as  it  is 
■with  other  parts  of  the  passive  voice.  Thus,  Ccesar,  his  dictis,  concilium  dlmisitj 
might  be  rendered,  '  Caesar,  having  said  this,  or  iJiis  having  been  said  (by  some 
other  person),  dismissed  the  assembly.' 

(c.)  As  the  perfect  participles  of  deponent  verbs  correspond  to  perfect  active 
participles  in  English,  no  such  necessity  exists  for  the  use  of  the  ablative  ab- 
solute with  them ;  as,  Ccesar,  hsec  locutus,  concilium  dimlsit.  In  the  following 
example,  both  constructions,  are  united:  Itdque....agros  Remorum  depopiilati, 
Oinnibus  vlds,  cediflciisque  incensis.  Cais. 

Rem.  6.  The  perfect  participles  of  neuter  deponent  verbs,  and  some  also  of 
active  deponents,  which  admit  of  both  an  active  and  a  passive  sense,  are  used 
in  the  ablative  absolute ;  &,  Ortd  luce.  C^es.  Vtl  exstincto  vel  elapso  anlrao, 
nullum  residere  sensum.  Cic.  Tarn  multis  gloriam  ejus  adeptis.  Plin.  Liter  as 
ad  exercitus,  tamquam  adepto  principatu,  misit.  Tac. 

IlE:vr.  7.  (a.)  As  the  verb  sum  has  no  present  participle,  two 
nouns,  or  a  noun  and  an  adjective,  which  might  be  the  subject  and 
predicate  of  a  dependent  -clause,  are  put  in  the  ablative  absolute 
without  a  participle ;  as, 

Quid,  adolescentulo  duce,  efficere  possent,  What  they  could  do  under  the 
guidance  of  a  vouth.  Cass.  Me  suasore  atqtie  impulsure,  hoc  /actum,  By  my 
advice  and  instigation.  Plant.  Hannibdle  vivo,  While  Hannibal  was  living.  'Xep. 
Invito.  Minerva,  in  opposition  to  one's  genius.  Cic.  Codo  sereno,  when  the 
weather  is  clear.  Virg.  Me  igndro,  without  my  knowledge.  Cic.  With  names 
of  office,  the  concrete  noun  is  commonly  nse^  in  the  ablative  absolute,  rather 
than  the  corresponding  abstract  with  2?*  to  denote  the  time  of  an  event ;  as, 
Romam  venit  Mario  cousiile,  He  came  to  Rome  in  the  consulship  of  Marius.  Cic. 

(b.)  The  nouns  so  used  as  predicates  are  by  some  grammarians  considered 
as  supplying  the  place  of  participles  by  expressing  in  themselves  the  action  of 
a  verb.  Such  are  dux,  cdmes,  adjator  and  adjutrix,  auctor,  testis.  Judex,  inier- 
pres,  mdgister  and  magistra,  prcecejitor  and  prceceptiix  ;  as,  duce  natiira,  in  the 
sense  of  dUcente  ndturd,  under  the  guidance  of  nature ;  Judice  Polybio,  according 
to  the  judgment  of  Polybius. 

Ri«i.  8.  A  clause  sometimes  supplies  the  place  of  the  noun ;  as,  Nondum 
cornperto  quam  in  regionera  venisset  rex.  Liv.  Audita  venisse  nuncium.  Tac. 
Y&le^dicto.  Ovid.  This  construction,  however,  is  confined  to  a  few  participles; 
as,  atidiio,  cogniio,  cornperto,  explordto,  desperdio,  nuncidto,  dicto,  edicto.     But  the 

{)lace  of  such  participle  is  sometimes  supplied  by  a  neuter  adjective  in  the  ab- 
ative;  as,  Incerto  prce  tenebris  quid  petereni.  Liv!  Of.  R.  7,  (a.)  Haud  cuiqiiam 
dObio  quin  hostium  essent.  Id.     Jtixta  pericUldso  vera  an  ficta  promeret  Tac. 

Rem.  9.  (1.)  The  noun  in  the  ablative,  like  the  subject  nominative,  is  some- 
times wanting;  (a)  when  it  is  contained  in  a  preceding  clause;  as,  Atticus  Servi- 
liain,  Bruti  mdtrem,  non  minus  post  mortem  ejus,  quam  florente,  cdluit,  scC  eo, 


§  258.        SYNTAX. CONNECTION  OP  TENSES.         261 

i.  e  Bruto.  Nep.  (6)  When  it  is  the  general  word  for  person  or  persons  fol- 
lowed by  a  descriptive  relative  clause;  as,  Hannibal  Ibrrum  capias  trajecit^ 
prajniissis,  qui  Alpium  iransitus  specular entur.  Liv.  (c)  When  the  participle  ia 
the  neuter  singular  corresponds  to  the  impersonal  construction  of  neuter  verbs 
in  the  j^assive  voice;  as.  In  amnis  transfp'essu,  multum  certato,  Bardesunes  vlcit. 
Tac.  Mihi,  errato,  nulla  venia,  reiie  facto,  exlgua  laus  propdnitur.  Cic.  Quumy 
nondum  palam  facto,  vlvi  mortulque  promiscue  comjMrdr entur.  Liv.  Nam  jam 
cetdte  ea  sum,  ut  non  siet,  peccato,  mi  iynosci  cequum;  i.  e.  si  peccdtum  fuerit.  I'er. 
Cf.  §  274,  R.  5,  (6.) 

(2.)  So  in  descriptions  of  the  weather;  as,  Tranquillo,  scil.  mdri,  the  sea 
being  tranquil.  Liv.  Sereno,  scil.  ccelo,  the  sky  being  clear.  Id.  Ardnei  sereno 
texunt,  niibilo  texunt, — in  clear  and  in  cloudy  weather.  Plin.  Substantives 
when  used  thus  are  to  be  considered  as  ablatives  of  time ;  as,  Cdmltiis,  ludis, 
Circensibus.  Suetonius  has  used  proscriptione  in  the  sense  of  '  during  the  pro- 
scription.'    So  pace  et  Principe.  Tac.    Imperio  p6puli  Romdni.  Caes. 

Rem.  10.  This  ablative  is  sometimes  connected  to  the  preceding  clause  by  a 
conjunction ;  as,  Ccesar,  quamquam  obsidione  Masstlice  retardante,  brevi  tdmen 
omnia  subegit.  Suet.  Decemviri  nan  ante,  quam  perlatis  legibus,  depdsitUros  im- 
perium  esse  aiebant.  Liv. 

Rem.  11.  A  predicate  ablative  is  sometimes  ■  added  to  passive  participles  of 
naming,  choosing^  etc.  §210,(3.);  as,  i^ascfrwid^e  imp eratore  sw/ec to.   Liv. 

CONNECTION    OF    TENSES. 

§  358.  Tenses,  in  regard  to  their  connection,  are  divided 
into  two  classes — principal  and  historical. 

A.  The  principal  tenses  are,  the  present,  the  perfect  definite, 
and  the  two  futures. 

B.  The  historical,  which  are  likewise  called  the  preterite 
tenses  (§  145,  N.  2.),  are  the  imperfect,  the  historical  perfect, 
and  the  pluperfect. 

I.  In  the  connection  of  leading  and  dependent  clauses,  only 
tenses  of  the  same  class  can,  in  general,  be  united  with  each  other. 
Hence : —  t 

1.  A  principal  tense  is  followed  by  the  present  and  perfect  defi- 
nite, and  by  the  periphrastic  form  with  sim.     And : — 

2.  A  preterite  tense  is  followed  by  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect, 
and  by  the  periphrastic  form  with  essem. 

Note.  Tlie  periphrastic  fonns  in  each-  class  supply  the  want  of  subjunctive 
futures  in  the  regular  conjugation. 

The  following  examples  will  illustrate  the  preceding  rules : — 

(a.)  In  the  first  class.  Scio  quid  agas.  Scio  quid  egeris.  Scio  quid  acturus 
sis. — Audlvi  quid  dgas,  I  have  heard'  what  you  are  doing.  Audlm  quid  egeris. 
Audid  quid  acturus  sis. — Audiam  quid  agas,  etc. — Audlvero  quid  agas,  etc. 

(b.)  In  the  second  class.  Sciebam  quid  dgeres.  Sciebam  quid  egisses.  Sciebam 
quid  acturus  esses. — Audlvi  quid  dgeres,  I  heard  what  you  were  doing.  Audlvi 
quid  egisses.     Aud'ivi  quid  acturus  esses. — Audiveram  quid  dgeres,  etc. 

The  following  may  serve  as  additional  examples  in  the  first  class:  viz.  of  principal 
tenses  depending  on, 

(1.)  The  Present;  as,  Non  sum  ita  hebes,  ut  istuc  dicam.  Cic.  Quantum 
ddlorem  acceperim,  tu  existtmare  potes.  Id.  Nee  dubito  quin  reditus  ejus  relpQih 
Uca  sdlutdris  futtirus  sit.  Id. 


262  SYNTAX. CONNECTION    OP   TENSES.  §258. 

(2  ;  The  Perfect  Defintte  ;  as,  Satis  provlstim  est,  trf  ne  gnid  agere  pos- 
Bint.  Id.  Quis  mtlsicis,  quis  huic  studio  lileranim  se  dedldit,  quia  oraneni  illarum 
ai-tium  rim  compreheiiderit.  Id.  BiJ'tctidnes  soils  praedictae  sunt,  guce,  quatiitB, 
guamlo  futurae  sint.  Id. 

(3.)  The  Futures;  fis,  Sic  facilUme,  qunnta  oratorum  <it,  sempergue  fuerit 
paucltas,  judicfibit.  Id.  Ad  qtios  dies  rediturus  sim,  scribam  ad  te.  Id.  Si 
scicris  aspidem  Idtere  mpiam^  ei  velle  dlhpiem  imjn-udenteni  super  earn  assidere, 
cufug  mors  Ubi  enwlumentum  factum  sit,  imprObe  feceris,  nisi  inonueris,  ne  assi- 
deat.  Id.  - 

The  following,  also,  are  additional  examples  in  the  second  class,  Tiz.  of  preterite  tenses 
depemling  on,  , 

(1.)   The  Imperfect;  as,  Dhum  illud  extlmescebam,  ne  quid  turpiter  fUch- 
rem,  reljam  efiecissem.  Cic.    Nan  enim  dubltabam,  quin  eas  Uhenitr  lecturus 
3.  ItL 


(2.)  The  Historical  Perfect;  as,  Veni  in  ejus  villam  ut  libros  inde  prom 6- 
rem.  Id.  Hcec  quum  essent  nuntiata,  Valerius  classem  extemplo  ad  ostium  JliJatA- 
nis  duxit.  Liv. 

(3.)  The  Pluperfect;  as,  Pdvor  ceperat  mllites,  ne  mortiferum  esset  mi- 
nus. Liv.  £(/o  ex  ipso  aiidirram,  qiuim  a  te  I'Mraliter  esset  tractutus.  Cic.  Non 
satis  mihi  constiterat,  cum  dliqudne  dnimi  inei  violestia,  an  pdtius  llbenter  te  Athe- 
nis  yliurus  essem.  Id. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  WTien  the  present  is  used  in  narration  for  the  historical 
perfect,  it  may,  like  the  latter,  be  followed  by  the  imperfect ;  as.  Legates  mit- 
tont,  tU  pdcem  impeti-arent.  Goes. 

(i.)  The  present  is  also  sometimes  foUowed  by  the  perfect  subjunctive  in  its 
historical  sense ;  as,  Pandite  nunc  Ilelicona,  de<e,  cantusque  movete,  Qui  beUo 
exciti  reges,  qua  quemgue  secutoe  Complerint  compos  tides.  V^irg. 

Rem.  2.  The  perfect  definite  is  often  followed  by  the  imperfect,  even  when 
a  pi-esent  action  or  state  is  spoken  of,  if  it  is  possible  to  conceive  of  it  in  its  pro- 
gress, and  not  merely  in  its  conclusion  or  result;  and  especially  when  the  agent 
had  an  intention  accompanying  him  from  the  beginning  to  the  end  of  the 
action;  as,  Fed /joc,  ut  intelligeres,  I  have  done  this  that  you  might  under- 
stand; i.  e.  such  was  my  intention  from  the  beginning.  Sunt  philvsdphi  et  fue- 
runt,  qui  omnlno  nuUam  habere  censerent  humdndrum  rerum  procUrdtidnem 
deos.    Cic. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  historical  perfect  is  not  regularly  followed  by  the  perfect 
Bubjunctive,  as  the  latter  is  not,  in  general,  used  in  reference  to  past  action  in- 
definite. 

(b.)  These  tenses  are,  however,  sometimes  used  in  connection,  in  the  narra- 
tive of  a  past  event,  especially  in  Livy  and  Cornelius  Nepos;  as,  Factum  est, 
vt  plus  guam  collegce  MUtiddes'v Alntrit.  Nep. 

(c.)  The  imperfect  and  perfect  are  even  found  together  after  the  historical 
perfect,  when  one  action  is  represented  as  permanent  or  repeated,  and  the 
other  simply  as  a  fact ;  as,  Adeo  nihil  unsirlti  sunt,  vi  incur  stones  ficereut  ei 
Veios  in  dnimo  habuerint  oppugndre.  Liv. 

{d.)  The  historical  perfect  may  even  be  followed  by  the  present,  when  a 
general  truth  is  to  be  expressed,  and  not  merely  one  which  is  valid  for  the  time 
indicated  by  the  leading  verb;  as,  Aniidcho  pdcem  petenii  ad priores  conditiones 
r^hil  ad(htum,  Africdno  prtedicante,  neque  Romdnis,  si  vincantur,  dninuxs  minui^ 
neque,  si  vincant,  secumis  rebus  insOlescere.  Just. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  As  present  infinitives  and  present  participles  depend  for  theu* 
time  upon  the  verbs  with  which  they  are  connected,  they  are  followed  by  such 
tenses  as  tliose  verbs  may  require;  as,  Apelles  pictores  qu6que  eos  p'eccare 
dicebat,  qui  nan  sentlrent,  quid  esset  satis.  Cic.  Ad  te  scripsi,  te  leviter  acciisans 
in  eo,  quod  de  me  dio  crecUdisses.  Id. 


§  259.  SYNTAX. INDICATIVE    KC  OD.  263 

(b.)  In  like  manner  the  tense  of  the  subjunctive  following  the  infinitive 
future  is  determined  by  the  verb  on  which  such  infinitive  depends;  as,  Sol 
PhaC'thonti  fllio  facturum  se  esse  dixit  fjvicfjuid  optasset.  Cic. 

IiE.M.  5.  (a.)  The  perfect  infinitive  follows  the  general  rule,  and  takes  after 
it  a  principal  or  a  preterite  tense,  according  as  it  is  used  In  the  definite  or  in 
the  historical  sense;  as,  Arbitrumur  nos  ea  prajstitisse,  quce  ratio  et  docirlna 
prsescripserit.  Cic.  £st  quod  yaudeas  ie  in  ista  Idea  venisse,  Ubi  dliquid  sa/jere 
viderere.  Id. 

.  (6.)   But  it  may  sometimes  take  a  diff'erent  tense,  according  to  Rem.  2;  as, 
Ita  mihi  vldeor  et  esse  Deos,  et  qudles  essent  satis  ostendisse.  Cic. 

n.  Tenses  belonging  to  different  classes  may  be  made  dependent 
on  each  other,  when  the  sense  requires  it. 

(a.)  Hence  a  present  or  perfect  definite  may  follow  a  preterite,  when  the  re- 
sult of  a  past  action  extends  to  the  present  time ;  as,  Ar-debat  autem  Eortensiu^ 
cvpiditate  dicendi  sic,  ut  in  nullo  umquam  fiagrantius  studium  viderim;  i.  e.  that 
up  to  this  time  I  have  never  seen.  Cic.  And,  on  the  other  hand,  a  preterite 
may  follow  a  present  to  express  a  continuing  action  in  the  past;  as,  Scitote 
Ojypidum  esse  in  Sicilid  nullum,  quo  in  oppido  non  isti  delecta  mfdier  ad  lib'idinem 
esset:  {essel  here  alludes  to  the  whole  period  of  Verres'  prsetorship.)  Cic. 

{b.)  But  without  violating  the  rule  which  reqjuires  similar  tenses  to  depend 
upon  each  other,  the  hypothetical  imperfect  subjunctive,  may  be  followed  by 
the  pi'esent  or  perfect  subjunctive,  since  the  imperfect  subjunctive  refers  to  the 
present  time;  as,  MemOrdre  possem  quibus  in  locis  maximas  hostium  cojnas 
pdpulus  Roindnus  parvd  mCinu  fuderit.  Sail.  Possem  here  differs  from  jwssum 
only  by  the  hypothetical  form  of  the  expression. 

INDICATIVE    MOOD. 

§  ^00.  The  indicative  is  used  in  every  proposition  in  which 
the  thing  asserted  is  represented  as  a  reality. 

Note.  Hence  it  is  used  even  in  the  expression  of  conditions  and  suppositions 
■with  si,  nisi,  etsi,  and  etiamsi,  when  the  writer,  without  intimating  his  own 
opinion,  supposes  a  thing  as  actual,  or,  with  nisi,  makes  an  exception,  which, 
ofily  for  the  sake  of  the  inference,  he  regards  as  actual ;  as.  Mors  aut  plane 
neyllgenda  est,  si  omnlno  exstinguit  dnimum,  aut  etiam  optanda,  si  allquo  eum 
deilucit,  iibi  sit  fuiiirus  mternus.  Cic.  Adhuc  certe,  nisi  ego  insanio,  stulte  omnia 
et  incaute  flunt.  Id. — It  is  likewise  used  in  interrogations. 

Remark  1.  The  several  tenses  have  already  been  defined,  and  their  usual  significations 
have  been  given  in  the  paradigms.  They  are,  ho\^ver,  sometimes  otherwise  rendered, 
one  tense  being  apparently  used  with  the  meaning  of  another,  either  in  the  same  or  in  a 
diiferent  mood.    Thus, 

(1.)  (a.)  The  present  is  often  used  for  the  historical  perfect  in  narration,  see 
§  145, 1.  3. — (6.)  It  is  sometimes  used  also  for  the  future  to  denote  the  certainty 
of  an  event,  or  to  indicate  passionate  emotion.  SOj  also,  when  the  leading  sen- 
tence contains  the  present  imperative,  si  is  often  joined  with  the  pi-esent  in- 
stead of  the  future;  as,  dej'ende  si  poles. — (c.)  The  present  is  also  used  for  the 
imperfect  or  perfect,  Avhen  it  is  joined  with  dum  '  while ' ;  as,  Dum  ego  in  Std- 
lid  sum,  nidla  stdtua  dejecta  est.  Cic.  It  is  even  so  used  by  Livy  in  transitions 
from  one  event  to  another;  as,  Du7n  in  Asid  bellum  geritur,  we  in  jEtolis  gmdem 
guictce  res  fuerant.  But  the  preterites  are  sometimes  used  with  dum  '  while ' ; 
and  dum  '  as  long  as '  is  regularly  joined  with  the  imperfect. 

(2.)  (rt.)  The  perfect,  in  its  proper  signification,  i.  e.  as  a  perfect  dejinite, 
denotes  au  act  or  state  terminated  at  the  present  time.  Thus  Horace,  at  the 
close  of  a  work,  says,  Exegi  mdnumentum  (ere  perennius',  and  Ovid,  in  like  cir- 
cumstances, Jamque  dpus  exegi.    So,  also,  Panthus  in  Virgil,  ui  order  to  de- 


2G4  SYNTAX.— INDICATIVE    MOOD.  §  259 

note  the  utter  ruin  of  Troy,  exclaims,  Fuiraus  Troes,  fuit  lUum,  i.  e.  we  are  nc 
longer  Trojans,  Ilium  is  no  more. — (i.)  The  perfect  indefinite  or  historical  per- 
fect is  used  in  relating  past  events,  when  no  reference  is  to  be  made  to  the 
time  of  other  events ;  as,  Qesar  RulAcdnem  transiit,  Caesar  crossed  the  Rubicon, 
(c.)  As  in  the  epistolary  stj'le  the  imperfect  is  used  instead  of  the  present, 
when  an  incomplete  action  is  spoken  of  (§  145,  II.  3),  so  the  historical  perfect 
is  in  like  circumstances  employed  instead  of  the  present,  when  speaking  of  a 
completed  action.  With  both  the  imperfect  and  perfect,  when  so  used,  however, 
the  adverbs  nunc  and  etiamnunc  maj'  be  used  instead  of  tunc  and  etiamtum. 

(c?.)  The  historical  perfect  is  sometimes  used  for  the  pluperfect  in  narration; 
as,  Sed  postquam  aspexi,  iUico  cognovi.  But  after  I  (had)  looked  at  it,  I  recog- 
nized it  immediately.  Ter. — This  is  the  usual  construction  after  postquam  cr 
posteaquam,  ubi^  ubi  prhnum,  tU,  ui  prlnium,  qmun  primum,  simul,  siinul  ut,  simul 
ac,  or  simul  at^ue,  all  of  which  have  the  signification  of  '  as  soon  as,'  and  sorie- 
times  after  priusquam.  But  when  several  conditions  are  to  be  expressed  in  past 
time,  the  pluperfect  is  retained  after  these  particles;  as,  Idem  simulac  se  remis- 
erat,  neque  causa  suberat,  qudre  artimi  Idborem  per/trret,  luxuriosus  reperiebatur. 
Nep.  So,  also,  postquam  is  joined  with  the  pluperfect,  when  a  definite  time 
intervenes  between  events,  so  that  there  is  no  connection  between  them ;  as, 
Hannibal  anno  tertio,  postquam  domo  profugerat,  cutn  quinque  ndvibm  Africam 
accessit.  Id. — In  a  very  few  passages  the  imperfect  and  -pluperfect  subjunctive 
are  joined  with  postquam. 

(3.)  The  pluperfect  sometimes  occurs,  where  in  English  we  use  the  historical 

Eerfect;  as,  Dixerat,  et  spissis  noctis  se  condidit  umbris,  She  (had)  said,  and  hid 
erself  in  the  thick  shades  of  night.  Virg.  Sometimes,  also,  it  is  used  for  the 
historical  perfect  to  express  the  rapidity  with  which  events  succeed  each  other; 
so,  also,  for  the  imperfect,  to  denote  what  had  been,  and  stUl  was. 

(4.)  The  future  indicative  is  sometimes  used  forihe  imperative;  as,  Vdlebis, 
Farewell.  Cic.   And: — 

(5.)  The  future  perfect  for  the  future;  as,  Alio  l6co  de  ordtarum  dntmo  et  in- 
Juj-iis  videro,  I  shall  see  (have  seen)....  Cic.  This  use  seems  to  result  from 
viewing  a  future  action  as  if  already  done,  and  intimates  the  rapidity  with 
which  it  will  be  completed. 

Ee3I.  2.  When  a  future  action  is  spoken  of  either  in  the  future,  or  in  the  im- 
perative, or  the  subjunctive  used  imperatively,  and  another  future  action  is 
connected  with  it,  the  latter  is^  expressed  by  the  future  tense,  if  the  actions 
relate  to  the  same  time ;  as,  Ndturam  si  sequemur  ducem,  numquam  aberrabl*- 
mus.  Cic. ;  but  bv  the  future  perfect,  if  the  one  must  be  completed  before  the 
other  is  performed ;  as,  De  Carthdgine  vereri  non  ante  desinam,  quam  illam  ex- 
cisam  esse  cognovero.  Cic.  In  English  the  present  is  often  used  instead  of  the 
future  perfect;  as,  Fdciam  si  potero,  I  will  do  it,  if  I  can.  Ui  semeniem  feceris, 
tta  metes,  As  you  sow,  so  you  will  reap.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  In  expressions  denoting  the  propriety,  practicability  or  advantage 
of  an  action  not  performed,  the  indicative  of  the  preterites  (^  145,  N.  2.)  is  used, 
where  the  English  idiom  would  have  led  us  to  expect  the  imperfect  or  pluper- 
fect subjunctive.  ^ 

(a.)  This  construction  occurs  with  the  verbs  Sportet,  necesse  est,  debeo,  conve- 
nit,  possum,  decet,  licet,  reor,  puto;  and  with  par,  fas,  copia,  mquum,  j ustum, 
consentdneum,  sdiis,  sdtius,  aquius,  melius,  Otilius,  optdbilius,  and  optimum — est, 
h-at,  etc. 

(6.)  In  this  connection  the  imperfect  indicative  expresses  things  which  are 
not,  but  the  time  for  which  is  not  yet  past;  the  historical  perfect  and  the 
pluperfect  indicative,  thm^  which  have  not  been,  but  the  time  for  which  is 
past ;  as.  Ad  mortem  te  duci  jam  prldem  oportebat,  i.  e.  thy  execution  was 
necessary  and  is  still  so;  hence  it  ought  to  take  place.  Cic— Longe  utilius  fuit 
angustias  dAtus  occitpdre.  It  would  have  been  much  better  to  occupy  thfe  pass. 
Curt  CdnUna  erupit  e  sendtu,  triumpkans  gaudio,  quern  omnino  v'tvum  'iUinc  exlre 
non  oporta&rat  Cic. 


§  260.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD.  265 

(c.)  In  both  the  periphrastic  conjugations,  also,  the  preterites  of  the  indica- 
tive have  frequently  the  meaning  of  the  subjunctive;  as,  Tarn  buna  const anter 
prceda  ttnenda  fuit, — ought  to  have  been  kept.  Ovid.  This  is  more  common  in 
hypothetical  sentences  than  in  such  as  are  independent. 

{d.)  The  indicative  in  such  connections  is  retained,  even  when  a  hypotheti- 
cal clause  with  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  subjuuctive  is  added,  and  it  is  here 
in  particular  that  the  indicative  preterites  of  the  periphrastic  conjugations  are 
cmploj'ed ;  as,  Quos  si  duhia  aui  prdcul  essent,  tdmen  omnes  honos  relpubllcce  con- 
sulere  decebat.  Sail.  Quodsi  Cn.  Pompeius  prlvdtus  esset  hoc  tempore,  Uhnen 
6rat  mittendus.  Cic. — Deleri  totus  exercitus  potuit,  si  fucjientes  jjersecuti  victOres 
essent.  Liv.  Quas  nisi  mdnumlsisset,  tormentis  etiam  dedendi  fuerunt.  Cic.  Si  te 
non  invenissem,  periturus  per  proecipitia  fui.  Petr.  But  the  subjunctive  also  is 
admissible  in  such  cases  in  the  periphrastic  conjugations. 

Eem.  4.  (1.)  The  preterites  of  the  indicative  are  often  used  for  the  pluper- 
fect subjunctive,  in  the  conclusion  of  a  conditional  clause,  in  order  to  render  a 
description  more  animated.     They  are  so  used, 

(a.)  When  the  inference  has  already  partly  come  to  pass,  and  would  have 
been  completely  realized,  if  something  else  had  or  had  not  occurred,  whence 
the  adverb  jam  is  frequently  added ;  as.  Jam  fames  quam  pestilenda  tristior 
erat ;  ni  annonce  fdret  subventam, — would  have  been  worse.  Liv.  The  same  is 
expressed  by  the  verb  ccepi  instead  of  Jam;  ns,  Bntanni  circumlre  terga  vincen- 
tium  coeperant,  ni,  etc.  Tac.  And  without  ^am ;  Effigies  Plsonis  iraxerantin 
Gemonias  ac  divellebant  (would  have  entirely  destroyed  them)  tjj,  etc.  Id. 

{b.)  The  perfect  and  pluperfect  are  likewise  used  in  this  sense,  and  a  thing 
which  was  never  accomplished  is  thus,  in  a-  Tively  manner,  described  as  com- 
pleted; as,  JLY  peractum  erat  bellum  sine  sanguine,  si  Pompeium  opprtmere 
Brundisii  (Caesar)  potuisset  Hor. — The  imperfect  indicative  is  rarely  used, 
also,  for  the  imperfect  subjunctive,  whenthis  tense  is  found  in  the  hypotheti- 
cal clause;  as,  Siultum  erat  mdnere,  nisi  Jieret.  Quint. — Sometimes,  also,  the 
preterites  of  the  indicative  are  thus  used  in  the  condition;  as,  At  faerat  melius, 
si  te  puer  iste  tenebat.  Ovid.    See  §  261,  R.  1. 

(2.)  'I  ought'  or  'I  should,'  is  expressed  by  the  indicative  of  deben,  and  pos- 
tum  is  in  like  manner  often  used  for  jjossein ;  as,  Possum  persequi  mulla  oblectd- 
menta  rerum  rustlcdrum,  sed,  etc.,  I  might  speak  of  the  many  pleasures  of  hus- 
bandry, but,  etc. ;  and  it  is  usual  in  like  manner  to  say,  difficile  est,  longum  est, 
infinitum  est,  e.  g.  narrare,  etc.,  for, '  it  would  be  difficult,'  '  it  would  lead  too 
far^'  '  there  would  be  no  end,'  etc. 

(3.)  The  indicative  is  used  in  like  manner  after  many  general  and  relative 
expressions,  especially  after  the  pronouns  and  relative  adverbs  which  are 
either  doubled  or  have  the  suffix  cumque;  as,  quisguis,  qtiotguot,  qulcumque, 
aiut,  utcumque,  etc.,  see  ^§  139, 5, (3.) and  191, I.R.I, (6.);  as,  Quidquid  id  est, 
Umeo  DCrnaos  et  dona  ferentes.  Virg.  Quern  sors  cumque  Mbit,  lucro  appone.  Hor. 
Sed  quoquo  mddo  sese  illud  hctbet.  But  however  that  may  be.  Cic. — In  like  man- 
ner sentences  connected  by  slve — slve  commonly  have  the  verb  in  the  indica- 
tive, unless  there  is  a  special  reason  for  using  the  subjunctive;  as,  Slve  verum 
est,  slve  falsum,  mlhi  quldtm  ita  renuncidtum  est.  Later  writers  however  use 
the  subjunctive  both  with  general  relatives,  etc.,  and  with  slve — slve. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    MOOD. 

"^  §  ^60.     The  subjunctive  mood  is  used  to  express  an  action 
or  state  simply  as  conceived  by  the  mind. 

>iIoTE.  The  subjunctive  character  of  a  proposition  depends,  not  upon  its  sub- 
stance, but  upon  its  form.  '  I  believe,'  '  I  suppose,'  are  only  conceptions,  but 
my  believing  and  supposing  are  stated  as  facts,  and,  of  couise,  are  expressed 
by  means  of  the  mdicative.    When,  on  the  other  hand,  I  say,  '  I  should  be- 

i?  - 


266  SYNTAX.— SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  §  260. 

lieve,'  *  I  should  snppose,'  the  acts  of  believing  and  supposing  are  represented 
not  as  facts,  but  as  mere  conceptions.  Hence  the  verb  that  expresses  the  pur- 
pwose  or  intention  for  which  another  &ct  is  performed,  is  put  in  the  subjunctive, 
since  it  expresses  only  a  conception;  as,  Edo  ut  vivam,  I  eat  that  I  may  live. 
This  mood  takes  its  name  from  its  being  commonly  used  in  svLhjoined  "or  de- 
pendent clauses  attached  to  *he  main  clause  of  a  sentence  hx  a  subordinate 
connective.  In  some  cases,  however,  it  is  found  in  independent  clauses,  or  in 
such,  at  le*ist,  as  have  no  obvious  dependence. 

■^  -■  I.  The  subjunctive,  in  some  of  its  connections,  is  to  be  translated 
by  the  indicative,  particularly  in  indirect  questions^  in  clauses  expres- 
sing a  result^  and  after  adverbs  of  time  ;  as, 

Rdgas  me  quid  tristis  sim, — why  I  am  sad.  Tac.  SteUdrum  tanta  est  mul^ 
tudo,  ut  numerdn  non  possint,— that  they  cannot  be  counted.  Quum  Caesar  asset 
in  Gallia,  When  Caesar  was  in  Gaul.  Caes. 

f.  n.  The  subjunctive  is  used  to  express  what  is  contingent  or  by- 
pothetical,  including  possibility,  power,  liberty,  will,  duty,  and  desire. 

RoiAKE  1.  The  tenses  of  the  subjunctive,  thus  used,  have  the  significations  whkh 
have  been  given  in  the  paradigms,  and  are,  in  general,  not  limited,  in  regard  to  time, 
like  the  corresponding  tenses  of  the  IndicatiTe.    Thus, 

(1.)  The  present  may  refer  either  to  present  or  future  time;  as,  Jlediocrihts 
ei  qu'is  ignoscas  vitiis  teneor,  I  am  subject  to  moderate  faults,  and  such  as  you 
may  excuse.  Hor.  Oral  a  Qssdre  ui  det  stbi  veniam,  He  begs  of  Csesar  that  he 
would  give  him  leave.  Caes. 

(2.)  The  imperfect  may  relate  either  to  past,  present,  or  future  time;  as, 
Si  fata  fuissent  ut  cadere'm.  If  it  had  been  my  fate  that  I  should  fall.  Virg. 
Si  possem,  sanior  essem,  I  would  be  wiser,  if  I  could.  Ovid.  Ceteros  rapereii 
ei  prostemtrem.  The  rest  I  would  seize  and  prostrate.  Ter. 

(3.)  The  perfect  subjunctive  has  always  a  reference  to  present  time,  and  L 
equivalent  to  the  indicative  present  or  perfect  definite;  as,  ETtATxvn.  fortassot 
Perhaps  I  may  have  erred.  Plin. — When  it  has  a  future  signification  it  is  noi 
to  be  accounted  a  perfect,  but  the  subjunctive  of  the  future  jjerfect,  See  Reift 
4  and  7,  (1.)     But  compare  §  258,  R.  1,  {b.)  and  R.  3,  (6.) 

(4.)  The  pluperfect  subjunctive  relates  to  past  time,  expressing  a  contin* 
gency,  which  is  usually  future  with  respect  to  some  past  time  mentioned  ii 
connection  with  it;  as.  Id  responderunt  sefaciuros  esse,  quum  iUe  venio  AquiUm 
venisset  Lemnum....  when  he  should  have  come....  Nep. 

Rem.  2.   The  imperfects  rellem,  nollem,  and  mallem,  in  the  first  person,  ex- 

fress  a  wish,  the  non-reality  and  impossibility  of  which  are  known;  as,  vellem, 
should  have  wished. — In  the  second  person,  where  it  implies  an  indefinite 
person,  and  also  in  the  third  when  the  subject  is  an  indefinite  person,  the  im- 
perfect subjunctive  is  used  in  the  sense  of  the  pluperfect,  and  the  condition  is 
to  be  supplied  by  the  mind.  This  is  the  case  especially  with  the  verbs,  rflco, 
puto,  arbitror,  credo;  also  with  video,  cei-no,  and  dtscerno;  as,  Mcestlque  (credB- 
res  fficios)  redeuni  in  castra,— one  might  have  thought  that  they  were  defeated. 
Liv.  Pecuniae  an  fdnice  minus  parceret,  hand  facile  discerneres.  Sail.  Qm 
vlderet  emium  Trojdnum  introductum,  urbem  captam  diceret.  Cic.  Quis  umquatn 
crederet?  Id.  Quis  piitaret?  Id.— The  imperfect  subjunctive  is  frequently 
used,  also,  for  the  pluperfect  in  inteiTOgative  expressions;  as,  Socrates  quum 
rogaretur  cujdtem  se  esse  diceret,  Munddnum,  inquit.  Id.  Quod  si  quis  deus  dice- 
ret,  numquam  putarem  Tree  in  Acddemid  tamquam  pJiilvsdphum  dispuidtHrum,  If 
any  god  had.said....I  never  should  have  supposed.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  subjunctive  in  all  its  tenses  may  denote  a  supposition  oi 
concession;  as,  Vendat  <edes  vir  J<5«!«,  Suppose .  an  honest  man  is  selUng"  a 
house.  Cic.  Dixerit  Epicurus,  Grant  that  Epicurus  could  have  said.  Id. 
Verum  ameps  pugtice  fuerat  /or/un«.— Fuisset,  Grant  that  it  might  have  been. 
Virg.  Mdlus  Civis  Cn.  Girbo  fuit.  Fuerit  dZ«w,  He  mav  have  been  toothers. 
Cic. — Thi«  concessive  subjunctive  is  equivalent  to  «to  ut 


I  260.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE   MOOD.  267 

Rem.  4.   The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  used  in  independent  pro- 
positions to  soften  an  assertion.     When  so  used,  they  do  not  differ  essentially 
irom  the  present  and  future  indicative ;  as,  Fm'sitan  quceratis.  You  may  per- 
haps ask.    Velim  sic  existimes,  1  would  wish  you  to  think  so.     Nemo  istud  tibi     C 
concedat,  or  concesserit.  No  one  will  grant  you  that.     Hoc  si7ie  ulla'dubmtione     \ 
confinnaverim,  cldquentiam  rem  esse  omnium  difficillimam,  This  I  will  unliesi-       \ 
tatingly  affiiTTi.  Cic.     Nil  ego  conXu\<iYin\  jucmiilo  sdnus  arnica.  Hoi\     The  form        \ 
which  is  called  the  perfect  subjunctive,  when  thus  used  for  the  future,  seems 
to  be  rather  the  subjunctive  of  the  future  perfect:  see  Rem.  7,  (1.)    Vdlo  and 
its  compounds  are  often  so  used  in  the  present;  as,  Velim  obvias  miki  lUeras 
crebro  mittas,  I  wish  that  you  would  frequently  send,  etc.  Cic.     The  perfect 
subjunctive  is  also  rarely  used  in  the  sense  of  a  softened  perfect  indicative ;  as, 
FarsUan  temere  fecerim,  I  may  have  acted  inconsiderately. 

Rem.  5.  The  subjunctive  is  used  in  all  its  tenses,  in  independent  sentences, 
to  express  a  doubtful  question  implying  a  negative  answer;  as,  Quo  eamf 
Whither  shall  I  go  V  Quo  Irem  f  Whither  should  I  go  ?  Quo  Iverim  f  Whither 
was  I  to  have  gone  ?  Quo  Ivissemf  Whither  should  I  have  gone ?  The  answer 
implied  in  all  these  cases  is,  '  nowhei-e.'  So,  Qi4s  dubitet  quin  in  virtute  dlvUice 
sintf  Who  can  doubt  that  riches  consist  in  virtue?  Cic.  Quisquam  tinmen  Juno- 
nis  adoret  prceterea  ?  Virg.  Quidiii,  inquit^  meminerim  ?  Cic.  Quis  vellet  tanti 
nuntius  esse  mdli?  Ovid. 

Rem.  6.  The  present  subjunctive  is  often  used  to  express  a  wish, 
an  exhortation,  asseveration,  request,  command,  or  permission;  as, 

Moriar,  si,  etc.  May  I  die,  if,  etc.  Cic.  Peream,  si  non,  etc.  May  I  perish,  if, 
etc.  Ovid.  So,  Ne  sim  salvus.  Cic.  In  media  arma  i-uamus.  Let  us  rush.... 
Virg-  Ne  me  attingas,  sceleste  !  Do  not  touch  me,  villain !  Ter.  Faciat  quod 
lubet,  Let  him  do  what  he  pleases.  Id.  The  perfect  is  often  so  used ;  as,  Jpse 
viderit,  Let  him  see  to  it  himself.  Cic.  Quam  id  rede  fdciam,  viderint  sdpientes. 
Id.  Meminerimus,  etiam  adversus  infimos  justUiam  esse  servandam.  Id.  Nihil 
incommddo  vuletddlnis  turn  ficeris.  Id.  Emas,  non  quod  opus  est,  sed  quod  necesse 
est.  Sen.  Donis  impii  ne  jildtdre  audeant  deos ;  Fldtonem  audiant.  Cic.  Ndtii- 
ram  expellas  farca,  tdmeti  usque  recurret.  Hor. 

(a.)  The  examples  show  that  the  present  subjunctive,  in  the  first  person 
singular,  is  used  in  asseverations;  in  the  first  person  plural,  in  requests  and  ex- 
hortations; in  the  second  and  third  persons  of  the  present  and  sometimes  of 
the  perfect,  in  commands  and  permissions,  thus  supplying  the  place  of  the  im- 
perative, especially  when  the  person  is  indefinite. 

(b.)  With  these  subjunctives,  as  with  the  imperative,  the  negative  is  usually 
not  non  but  ne ;  as,  ne  dlcas ;  ne  dicat ;  ne  dixeris.  So,  also,  ne  Juerit,  for  licet 
ne  fuerit. 

(c.)  The  subjunctive  for  the  imperative  occurs  most  frequently  in  the  third 
person.  In  the  second  person  it  is  used  principally  with  ne;  as,  ne  cZiras.  In, 
the  latter  case  the  pei'fect  very  frequently  takes  the  place  of  the  present;  as, 
ne  dixeris.  The  subjunctive  is  also  used  in  the  second  person,  instead  of  the 
imperative,  when  the  person  is  indefinite. 

(c?.)  In  precepts  relating  to  past  time,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect,  also,  are 
used  for  the  imperative;  as,  ForsUan  non  neiTW  vir  fortis  dixerit,  restltisses, 
mortem  pugnans  oppetisses, — you  should  have  resisted.  Cic. 

Rem.  7.  In  the  regular  paradigms  of  the  verb,  no  future  subjunctive  was 
exhibited  either  in  the  active  or  passive  voice. 

(1.)  When  the  expression  of  futurity  is  contained  in  another  part  of  the  sen- 
tence, the  future  of  the  subjunctive  is  supplied  by  the  other  tenses  of  that 
mood,  viz.  the  future  subjunctive  by  the  present  and  imperfect,  and  the  future 

Serfect  by  the  perfect  and  pluperfect.  Which  of  these  four  tenses  is  to  be  used 
epends  on  the  leading  verb  and  on  the  completeness  or  incompleteness  of  the 
action  to  be  expressed.  The  perfect  subjunctive  appears  to  be  also  the  sub- 
yinctive  of  the  futui-e  perfect,  and  might  not  improperly  be  so  called;  as, 


268         SYNTAX. PROTASIS  AND  APODOSIS.       §  261 

Tantum  mdneo,  hoc  tempus  si  amiseris,  te  esse  nuUttm  unupiam  magis  tdoneum  r6- 
perturum,  I  only  warn  you,  that,  if  you  should  lose  this  opportunity,  you  will 
never  find  one  more  convenient.  Cic' 

(2.)  If  no  other  future  is  contained  in  the  sentence,  the  place  of  the  future 
subjunctive  active  is  supplied  by  the  participle  in  rus,  with  siin  and  essem;  as, 
Non  dubitai  quin  brevi  TrOja  sit  peritura.  He  does  not  doubt  that  Troy  will 
soon  be  destroyed.  Cic.  In  hypothetical  sentences  the  fonn  with  fuerim  takes 
the  place  of  a  pluperfect  subjunctive;  as,  Qms  inim  dubiM,  quin,  si  Saguntlnis 
impi(/re  tulissemus  dpem,  tdt'um  in  Hisjxiniam  aversuri  bellum  fuerimus.  Liv. 
The  form  in  fuissem  occurs  also,  but  more  rarelv;  as,  Apparuit,  quantam  ex- 
citutura  vwkm  vera  fuisset  eludes,  quum,  etc.  See  Periphrastic  Conjugation^ 
S  162,  14. 

(3.)  The  future  subjunctive  passive  is  supplied,  not  \)j  the  participle  in  <fe«, 
but  by  fulHrum  sit  or  esset,  with  tU  and  the  present  or  imperfect  of  the  sub- 
junctive ;  as,  Non  duUiio  quin  fiitiirum  sit,  ut  laudeturj  I  do  not  doubt  that  he 
will  be  praised. 

PROTASIS    AND    APODOSIS. 

361.     In  a  sentence  containing  a  condition  and  a  conclu 


Aj 


itojij  the  former  is  called  the  protasis,  the  latter  the  apodosis. 

1.  In  the  jDrofosis  of  conditional  clauses  with  51*  and  its  compounds, 
the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  imply  the  non-existence  of 
the  action  or  state  supposed,  the  imperfect,  as  in  English,  implying 
present  time.  In  the  apodosis  the  same  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  de- 
note what  the  result  would  be,  or  would  have  been,  had  the  suppo- 
sition in  the  protasis  been  a  valid  one ;  as. 

Nisi  le  satis  incitdtum  esse  conflderem,  scribfrera  plUra,  Did  I  not  believe 
that  you  have  been  suflficiently  incited,  I  would  ^mte  more  (Cfc);  which  im- 
plies'that  he  does  believe,  and  therefore  mil  not  write.  Si  Nepiunus,  quod  Theseo 
promiseral,  twn  fecisset,  Theseus  filio  Eippdlyto  non  esset  orbatus.  Id. 

2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  in  the  protasis,  imply  the 
real  or  possible  existence  of  the  action  or  state  supposed ;  as. 

Si  velit,  if  he  wishes,  or,  should  wish,  implying  that  he  either  does  wish,  or, 
Bt  least,  may  wish.  In  the  apodosis  tne  present  or  perfect  either  of  the  sub- 
junctive or  of  the  indicative  may  be  used. 

Remark  1.  The  tenses  of  the  indicative  may  also  be  used  in  the  protasis 
of  a  conditional  sentence  with  si,  etc.;  as.  Si  yi'iles,  bene  est.  Cic.  Si  quis  antexi 
mirabatur  quid  esset,  ex  hoc  tenipdre  miretur  pdtius....  Id. — The  conjunction  si 
in  the  protasis  is  often  omitted;  as,  Llbei  agros  emi.  Pr'imum  qucero  quos  agrost 
If  you  will  buy  lands,  I  will  first  ask,  etc.  But  the  protasis  may  be  rendered 
without  ij",  and  either  with  or  without  an  interrogation,  as.  You  will  buy  lands, 
or,  WiU  you  buy  lands  ?  The  futm-e  perfect  often  occurs  in  the  protasis  of 
such  sentences ;  as.  Casus  medicusve  levarit  cegrutn  ex  prcecfptti,  mciter  delira  ne- 
cabit,  (Hon)  Should  chance  or  the  physician  have  saved  him,  the  silly  mother 
will  destroy  him.  Si  is  in  like  manner  omitted  with  the  imperfect  and  pluper- 
fect subjunctive,  in  supposing  a  case  which  is  known  not  to  be  a  real  one;  as, 
Absque  te  esset,  hodie  numquam  ad  solem  occdsum  vlvirem.  Plant. 

Rem.  2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  differ  but  slightly  from  the  in- 
dicative, the  latter  giving  to  a  sentence  the  form  of  reality,  while*  the  subjunc- 
tive represents  it  as  a  conception,  which,  however,  may  at  the  same  tiine  be  a 
reality.  The  second  person  singular  of  the  present  "and  perfect  subjunctive 
often  occurs  in  addressing  an  indefinite  person,  where,  if  the  person  were  defi- 
nite, the  indicative  would  be  used ;  as,  Memdria  minuitur,  lUsi  earn  exerceas. 
Cic.     When  the  imperfect  or  pluperfect  is  required  to  denote  a  past  action, 


§  262.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER   PARTICLES.  269 

the  indicative  must  be  used,  if  its  existence  is  uncertain,  as  those  tenses  in  the 
subjunctive  would  imply  its  non-existence.  In  the  m-diio  obliqua,  when  the 
leading  verb  is  a  present  or  a  future,  the  same  difference  is  observed  between 
the  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  as  in  hypothetical  sentences;  but  when  the  lead- 
ing verb  is  a  preterite  the  difference  between  possibility  and  impossibility  is 
not  expressed. 

Rem.  3.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  sometimes  used,  both  in 
the  protasis  and  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  in  the  sense  of  the  imper- 
fect and  pluperfect;  as,  Tu,  si  hie  sis,  dliter  seniias,  If  you  were  here,  you 
would  think  otherwise.  Ter.  Quos,  ni  mea  cura  resistat,  jam  fiamnuB  iulerint. 
Virg. 

Rem.  4.  The  protasis  of  a  conditional  sentence  is  frequently  not  expressed. 
but  implied ;  as,  Magno  mercentur  Atrldoe,  i.  e.  si  possint.  Virg. ;  or  is  contained 
in  a  participial  clause;  as,  Agis,  etsi  a  multitiidine  victus,  gtorid  tdmen  omnes 
vlcit.  Just.  So,  also,  when  the  participle  is  in  the  ablative  absolute ;  as,  Dond- 
rem  tripddas — divite  me  scilicet  artium,  quas  dut  Parrhdsius  protulit,  aut  Scopas. 
Hor.  C.  Mucins  Porsenam  interftcere,  proposita  sibi  morte.  condtus  est.  Cic. 
It  is  only  in  later  writers  that  the  concessive  conjunctions  eisi,  quamquam,  and 
quamvis  are  expressed  with  the  participle,  but  tdmen  is  often  found  in  the 
apodosis^  even  in  the  classic  period,  when  a  participial  clause  precedes  as  a 
protasis. 

Eem.  5.  In  hypothetical  sentences  relating  to  past  time,  the  actions  seem 
often  to  be  transfeiTed  in  a  measure  to  the  present  by  using  the  imperfect, 
either  in  the  protasis  or  the  apodosis,  instead  of  the  pluperfect ;  as.  Quod  certe 
non  fecisset,  si  suum  numerum  (nautdrum)  naves  haberent.  Cic.  Cimbri  si  stdiim 
infesio  agmme  urbem  petissent,  grande  discrimen  esset.  Flor.  Sometimes  the 
imperfect,  although  the  actions  are  completed,  appears  both  in  the  protasis  and 
the  apodosis. 

Eem.  6.  Nisi,  nisi  vero,  and  nisi  forte  are  joined  with  the  indicative,  when 
they  introduce  a  correction.  Nisi  then  signifies  *  except ' ;  as,  Nescio ;  nisi  hoc 
video.  Cic.  Nisi  vero,  and  nisi  forte,  'unless  perhaps^'  introduce  an  exception, 
and  imply  its  improbability;  as.  Nemo  fere  saltat  sdbrius,  nisi  forte  insdnit.  Cic. 
Nisi  forte  in  the  sense  of  '  unless  you  suppose,'  is  commonly  used  ironically  to 
introduce  a  case  which  is  in  reality  inadmissible. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES. 

A.      SUBSTAKTIVE   CLAUSES. 

*^  §  309*  A  clause  denoting  the  purpose,  object,  or  result  of 
a  preceding  proposition,  takes  the  subjunctive  after  ut,  ne,  quo, 
quin,  and  quommus  ;  as, 

Ea  non,  ut  ie  instituerem,  scripsi,  I  did  not  write  that  in  order  to  instruct 
you.  Cic.  Irritant  ad  pugnandum,  quo  fiant  acriores^  They  stimulate  them  to 
fight,  that  they  may  become  fiercer.  Varr. 

— \  Remark  1.  CTi  or  wifi,  signifying  ' that,*  'in  order  that,*  or  simply 
*  to  *  with  the  infinitive,  relates  either  to  a  purpose  or  to  a  result.  In 
the  latter  case  it  often  refers  to  sic,  ita,  adeo,  tarn,  talis,  tantus,  is, 
ejusmodi,  etc.,  in  the  preceding  clause ;  as, 

Id  mihi  sic  erit  grdtum,  ut  grdtius  e.fse  nihil  possit,  That  will  be  so  agreeable 
to  me,  that  nothing  can  be  more  so.  Cic.  Non  sum  ita  hebes,  ut  istuc  dlcam.  Id. 
Neque  tam  erdmns  dmentes,  ut  explordia  nobis  esset  victoria.  Id.  Tantum  indulsii 
doldn,ut  eum  jpietas  vinceret.  Nep.  Ita  and  tam  are  sometimes  omitted;  as. 
Epdmlnondas  fuit  etiam  disertus,  ut  nemo  Thebdnus  ei  par  esset  eldquentid,  instead 
of  tam  disertus.  Id.  Esse  dportet  ut  vivas,  non  vlvere  ut  edas.  Auct.  ad  Her. 
iol  ejfficit  ut  omnia  floreant.  Cic. 
23* 


270  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE   AFTER   PARTICLES.  §  262. 

Rem.  2.  Ut,  signifying  *  even  if*  or  *  although,'  expresses  a  suppo- 
sition merely  as  a  conception,  and  accordingly  takes  the  subjunctive ; 
as, 

Ut  desint  vires,  idmen  est  laudanda  vdluntas,  Though  strength  be  wanting,  yet 
•the  will  is  to  be  praised.  Ovid.  Ut,  in  this  sense,  takes  the  negative  non;  as, 
Exercttus  si  pacis  nomen  atuUeritj  ut  non  referat  pedtm  (even  if  it  does  not  with- 
draw) insisltt  eerie.  Cic. 

^w^^^  Rem.  3.  Ut,  with  the  subjunctive  denoting  a  result,  is  used  with 
impersonal  verbs  signifying  it  happens,  it  remains,  it  follows,  etc. ;  as, 

Qui  fit,  nt  nemo  contentus  "vlvat?  How  does  it  happen  that  no  one  lives  con- 
tented? Hor.  Huic  contigit,  ut  patt'iam  ex  servltute  in  llbertatem  vindicaret. 
Nep.  Sequltur  ioitur,  ut  etiam  vitia  sint  parca.  Cic.  Reliquum  est,  ut  egdmei 
mild  consulam.  Nep.  Kestat  igitur,  ut  motus  astrorum  sit  vdluntdrius.  Cic. 
Exti-emum  iUud  est,  ut  te  orem  et  obsecrem.  Id. 

Note  1.  To  this  principle  may  be  referred  the  following  verbs  and  phrases 
signifying  '  it  happens,'  viz.  Jit,  Jieri  non  pOtest,  accidit,  incidit,  contingit,  evenU, 
usu  venii,  occurrit  and  est  (it  is  the  case,  or  it  happens,  and  hence  esto,  be  it 
that): — and  the  following,  signifying  ' it  remains,'  or  ' it  follows,'  viz.  futurum, 
extremum,  prope,  proximum,  and  reuquum — est,  relinquitur,  sequltur,  restat,  and 
superest ;  and  sometimes  accedit. 

Note  2.  Contingit  with  the  dative  of  the  person  is  often  joined  with  the 
infinitive,  instead  of  the  subjunctive  with  «x< ;  as,  Non  cuius  homtni  contingit 
Mire  Cdrinthum.  Hor.  And  with  esse  also  and  other  verbs  of  similar  meaning, 
the  predicate  fas  in  the  case  o^  licet)  is  often  found  in  the  dative. — SequHur  and 
tff'icitur,  '  it  follows,'  have  sometimes  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  and 
sometinles  the  subjunctive;  and  Tioscitor,  in  the  same  sense,  the  subjunctive 
only. 

Note  3.  Mas  or  moris  est,  consuetudo  or  consuefudinis  est,  and  natura  or  con- 
tuetudo  fert,  are  often  followed  by  ui  instead  of  the  infinitive. —  Ut  also  occurs 
occasionally  after  many  such  phrases  as  ndvum  est,  rdrum,  ndtHrdle,  necesse, 
us'iidtum,  mlrum,  singildre — est,  etc.,  and  after  cequum,  rectum,  verum,  dule,  veri~ 
Amile,  and  integrum — est. 

For  other  uses  of  ut,  with  the  subjunctive,  see  §  273. 

Rem.  4.  Ut  is  often  omitted  before  the  subjunctive,  after  verbs  de* 
noting  willingness  and  permission ;  also  after  verbs  of  asking,  advis- 
ing, reminding,  etc.,  and  the  imperatives  die  and  fac ;  as, 

Quid  vis  fdciam  ?  What  do  you  wish  (that)  I  should  do  ?  Ter.  Insdni  f^riani 
tine  litOra  ^uctus.  Virg.  Tentes  dissimuldre  rdgat.  Ovid.  Id  sinas  ore.  Id.  Se 
suddere,  dixit,  Phamabdzo  id  negoiii  ddret.  Nep.  Accidat  oportet  actio  vdria. 
Cic.    Fac  cogUes.  Sail.   So,  Vide  ex  ndvi  effersurtur,'  quce,  etc.  Plant 

Terbs  of  willingness,  etc.,  are  vdlo,  mSlo,  permitto,  concSdo,  potior,  slno,  licet,  vSto, 
etc.;  those  of  asking,  etc.,  are  rog-o,  wro,  quceso,  mSneo,  admiineo,  jubeo,  mando,  peto, 
precor,  censeo,  su&deo,  oportet,  nScesse  est,  postUlo,  hortor,  euro,  decerno.  opto,  impiro. 

"K  Rem.  5.  Ne,  *  that  not,' '  in  order  that  not,'  or  '  lest,'  expresses  a 
purpose  negatively ;  as, 

Cava  ne  quid  ei  desit.  Take  care  that  nothing  he  wanting  to  him.  Cic.  Nemo 
prudens  punit,  ut  ait  Plato,  quia  peccdtum  est,  sed  ne  peccetur.  Id.  Ut  ne  is  fi-e- 
quently  used  for  ne,  especially  in  solemn  discourse,  and  hence  in  laws;  as, 
Oi>era  ditur,  ut  jodicin  ne  flant.  Id.  Quo  ne  is  used  in  the  same  manner  in  one 
passage  of  Horace.  Missus  ad  hoc — quo  ne  per  vacuum  Romano  incuiTeret  has- 
tis. — On  the  other  hand  ut  non  is  used  when  a  simple  result  or  consequence  is 
to  be  expressed,  in  which  case  tta,  sic,  tam  are  either  expressed  or  understood ; 

tB,  Turn  foi-te  agrotdhain,  ut  ad  nuptias  tuas  venire  non  possem.    In  a  few  cases, 
owever,  ui  non  is  used  for  ne. —  Ut  non  is  further  used,  when  the  negation  re- 


§  262.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE   AFTER   PARTICLES.  271 

fers  to  a  particular  word  or  to  a  part  only  of  the  sentence,  as  in  similar  cases 
si  non  must  be  used,  and  not  nisi ;  as,  Oonfer  te  ad  Manliuin^  ut  a  vie  iion 
ejectus  ad  dlienos,  sed  inviidtus  ad  tuos  isse  videaris.   Cic. 

.     Rem.  6.  Ne  is  often  omitted  after  cave  ;  as, 

Give  putes,  Take  care  not  to  suppose.  Cic.   Compare  §  267,  R.  3. 

Rem.  7.  After  metuo,  timeo,  vereor,  and  other  expressions  denoting 
fear  or  caution,  ne  must  be  rendered  by  that  or  lest,  and  ut  by  that 
not. 

Note  3.  To  the  verbs  metuo,  ttmeo,  and  vereor  are  to  be  added  the  substan- 
tives expressing  fear,  apprehension  or  danger,  and  the  verbs  terreo,  conterreo, 
deterreo,  cdveo,  to  be  on  one's  guard,  video  and  observo  in  requests  (as,  vide, 
videte  and  videndum  est),  in  the  sense  of '  to  consider ' ;  as, 

Mih  metuebat,  ne  a  servis  indlcaretur,  Milo  feared  that  he  should  be  betrayed 
by  his  servants.  Cic.  Vfireor,  ne,  dum  minuere  velim  Idborem,  augeam.  Id. 
Pdvor  erat,  ne  castra  hostis  aggrederetur.  Liv.  Ilia  duo  vereor,  ut  tlbi  possira 
ccmcedere,  I  fear  that  I  cannot  grant....  Cic.  Cdvendum  est  ne  assentdtoribua  pat- 
fef  aciamus  aures,  neu  dduldH  nos  sinamus.  Cic.  Vide  ne  hoc  tibi  obsit.  TerruU 
gentes,  grdve  ne  rediret  seculum  Pyrrhce.  Multitudinem  deterrent,  ne  frumenium 
conferant.  Caes.    Me  miserum !  uq  prona  c^idiSi?,.  Ovid. 

Note  4.  Neve  or  neu  is  used  as  a  continuative  after  ut  and  ne.  It  is  properly 
equivalent  to  aut  ne,  but  is  also  used  for  et  ne  after  a  preceding  ut ;  as,  on  the 
other  hand,  et  ne  is  used  after  a  negation  instead  of  aut  ne ;  as,  Legem,  tulit,  ne 
guts  ante  actdrum  rerum  accusdretur,  neve  raultaretur.  Nep.  Ccesar  mlliies  non 
tongiore  ordtione  cdhortdtus,  quam  nti  svxb  pristince  virtutis  memdriam  retinerent, 
neu  perturbarentur  dnimo—prosUi  committendi  signum  dedit.  Cses.  Neque,  also, 
is  sometimes  used  for  et  ne  after  ut  and  ne ;  as,  Ui  ea  prcetermiUam,  neque  eos 
appellem.  Cic.  Cur  non  sancUis  ne  vicinu^  patncio  sit  plebeius,  nee  eddem-Uinere 
eat.  Liv. — Ne  non  is  sometimes  used  for  ut  after  verbs  of  fearing;  as,  Timeo  ne 
non  impetrem,  I  fear  I  shall  not  obtain  it. 

Eem.  8.  The  proposition  on  which  the  subjunctive  with  ut  and  ne  depends, 
is  sometimes  omitted ;  as,  Ut  ita  dlcam.  Cic.    Ne  singulos  nominem.  Liv. 

Note  5.  Nedum,  like  ne,  takes  the  subjunctive;  a,s,  Optimis  temporibus  cldris- 
siini  vti-i  vim  tribuniciam  sustinere  non  pdtuerunt:  nedum. /ws  tempOribus  sine 
jUdiciorum  remediis  said  esse  posslmus, — still  less,  etc.  Cic.  Ne  is  sometimes 
used  in  the  sense  of  nedum;  as,  Ndvam  earn  pdtestdtem  (scil.  tribUnorum  plebis) 
eripere  patrtbus  nostris,  ne  nunc  dulcedine  semel  capti  ferant  deslderium.  Liv. — 
Nedum  without  a  verb  has  the  meaning  of  an  adverb,  and  commonly  follows  a 
negative ;  as,  ^gre  inermis  tanta  multitudo,  nedum  armdta,  sustlneri  pdtest.  Liv. 
Ne,  also,  is  used  in  the  same  manner  in  Cic.  Fam.  9,  26. 

Rem.  9.  Quo,  '  that,'  '  in  order  that,*  or,  *  that  by  this  means,' 
pecially  with  a  comparative ;  hon  quo,  or  non  quod,  '  not  that,'  '  not 
as  if;  non  quin,  'not  as  if  not' ;  which  are  followed  in  the  apodosis 
by  sed  quod,  sed  quia,  or  sed  «lone  ;  and  quommus,  '  that  not,'  after 
clauses  denoting  hinderance,  take  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Adjuta  me,  quo  id  fiat  facilius.  Aid  me,  that  that  may  be  done  more  easily. 
Ter.  Non  quo  republicd  sit  mihi  quicquam  cdrius,  sed  desperdtis  etiam  Hippocrates 
vetat  ddUbZre  medic'mam.  Cic.  Non  quod  sola  ornent,  sed  qiTod  excellant.  Id. 
Neque  recUsdvit,  quo  minus  legis  posnam  subiret.  Nep.  Ego  me  ddcem  in  civili 
hello  negdvi  esse,  non  quin  rectum  esset,  sed  quia,  etc.  Cic.  And  instead  of  non 
quin  we  may  say  non  quo  non,  non  quod  non,  or  non  quia  non  ;  and  for  non  quod, 
non  eo  quod,  or  non  ideo  quod. 

^.      Rem.  10.    Quin,  after  negative  propositions  and  questions  witli  quia 
^\nd  quid  implying  a  negative,  takes  the  subjunctive.  Quin  is  used, 


A 


272  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE   AFTER  PARTICLES.  §  262. 

1.  For  a  relative  with  non,  after  nemo,  nuHtu^  fdktl...esty  ripirUar,  invenltur 
etc.,  vix  est,  agre  r^perUur,  etc.;  as,  Messdiiam  nemo  venit,  quin  viderit,  i.e. 
qui  non  v'lderit,  No  one  came  to  Messana  who  did  not  see.  Cic.  Nego  uUam  pic- 
turam  J'uisse....qn'm  conqiusierit,  i.  e.  quam  non,  etc.  Id.  Nihil  est,  qiiin  male 
ftarramo  possit  dep7'dvdfu  Ter.  Quis  est,  quin  cemat,  quanta  vis  sit  in  sen^bus  t 
Cic. 

Note  6.  When  quin  is  used  for  the  relative  it  is  commonly  equivalent  to  the 
nominative  qui,  qua,  quod,  but  it  is  sometimes  used  in  prose  instead  of  the 
accusative,  and  sometimes  after  dies  for  quo,  as  the  ablative  of  time ;  as,  Dies 
fere  nullus  est,  quin  hie  Satrius  ddmum  meam  ventitet,  i.  e.  quo — non  ventifei, 
Cic. —  Qui  non  is  often  used  for  quin ;  as,  Quis  enim  erat,  qui  non  sciret.  Id. ; 
and  when  quin  stands  for  qui  non  or  quod  non,  is  and  id  are  sometimes  added 
for  tha  sake  of  emphasis ;  as.  Cleanthes  negat  idbim  cibum  esse  tarn  grdvem,  quin 
is  die  et  nocie  concoqudtur.  Cic.  Nihil  est  quod  sensum  habeat,  quin  id  intereoL 
Id. — So,  also,  the  place  of  quin  is  supplied  by  ui  non ;  as,  Augustus  numquam 
filios  suos  popub  commenddvit  ut  non  aajicerei  (without  adding)  si  merebuntur. 
Suet.  And  if  no  negation  precedes,  or  if  non  belongs  to  a  particular  word,  and 
not  to  the  verb,  qui  non  and  ut  non  must  of  course  be  used  and  not  quin. 

2.  For  ut  non,  'that  not,'  or  'without'  with  a  participle,  especially  after 
fdcere  non  possum,  Jieri  non  pdtest,  nulla  causa  est,  quid  causes  est  f  rUkil  causoi 
est ;  as,  Fdcere  non  possum  quin  ad  te  mittam,  i.  e.  ut  non,  etc.  Cic.  Numquam 
tarn  male  est  Siculis,  quin  dUquid  fdcete  et  commMe  dicant.  Cic.  Numquam  ac- 
cido,  quin  abs  te  abeam  doctior, — without  going  from  you  wiser.  Ter. 

Note  7.  Quin  takes  the  subjunctive  also  after  the  negative  expressions  non 
dubito,  non  est  dubium,  non  ambigo,  I  doubt  not;  non  dbest;  nihil,  paulum,  non 
procul,  hand  muUum  dbest;  non,  vix,  cegre  abstineo ;  tenere  me,  or  temperdre  mihi 
non  possum ;  non  impedio,  non  recOso,  nihil  prcetermitto,  and  the  like.  In  these 
cases,  however,  the  negation  in  quin  is  superfluous,  and  it  is  generally  trans- 
lated into  English  by  'that,'  'but  that,'  or  'to'  with  an  infinitive;  as,  Non 
dubito  quin  ddmi  sit,  that  he  is  at  home.  Non  mulium  dbest,  quin  miserrimus  sim, 
Not  much  is  wanting  to  make  me  most  wretched.  Cic.  Hence,  as  quin  is  not 
in  such  cases  regarded  as  a  negative,  non  is  superadded  when  a  negative  sense 
is  required ;  as.  In  quibus  non  dubito  quin  offensionem  negligentiie  vitdre  aique 
effugere  non  possum.  Cic.  Dubitandum  iwn  est  quin  numquam  possit  utiUtas  cum 
nbnestdfe  contendere.  Id. 

Note  8.  In  Nepos,  non  dubito,  in  the  sense  of  '  I  do  not  doubt,'  is  always  fol- 
lowed by  the  infinitive  with  the  accusative,  and  the  same  construction  often 
occurs  in  later  writers  but  not  in  Cicero:  in  the  sense  of  to  scruple  or  hesitate, 
when  the  verb  following  has  the  same  subject,  dubito  and  non  dObiio  are  gener- 
ally followed  by  the  infinitive ;  as,  Cicero  non  diibitabat  conjurdtos  suppUcio  af- 
f  icere. — It  may  be  added  that '  I  doubt  whether '  is  expressed  m  Latin  by 
dubito  sitne.  dubito  utrum — an,  dubito  silne — an,  or  dubito  num,  numquid,  for  dubito 
an,  and  dubium  est  an  are  used,  like  nescio  an  with  an  affirmative  meaning. 

Note  9.  Quin  signifies  also  'why  not?'  being  compounded  of  the  old  abla- 
tive qui  and  ne,  i.  e.  non,  and  in  this  sense  is  joined  with  the  indicative  in  ques- 
tions implying  an  exhortation ;  as,  Quin  conscendimus  equos  f  Why  not  mount 
our  horses'?  In  this  sense  it  is  also  joined  with  the  imperative;  as,  Quin  die 
stdtim,  Well,  tell  me:  or  with  the  first  person  of  the  subjunctive.  Hence  with- 
out being  joined  to  any  verb  it  signifies  '  even'  or  'rather.' 

Rem.  11.  The  principal  verbs  of  hinderance,  after  which  qvominus  occurs, 
and  after  which  ne,  and,  if  a  negative  precedes,  quin  also  may  be  used,  are  cie- 
ierreo,  impedio,  intercedo,  obsisto,  obsto,  officio,  prohibeo,  recOso',  and  repugno.  It 
occurs  also  after  stai  or  Jit  per  me,  I  am  the  cause,  non  pugno,  nihil  moror,  non 
condneo  me,  etc. 

NoTB.  Impedio,  deterreo,  and  recOso  are  sometimes,  and  prShtbeo  frequently 
followed  by  the  infinitive.    Instead  of  quominus,  quo  secius  is  sometimes  used. 


§  263.  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE   AFTER   PARTICLES.  273 

§  S03*  The  particles  specified  in  this  section  always  introduce  a  sentence  con- 
-taining  only  a  conception  of  the  miud,  and  are  hence  joined  with  the  subjunctive. 

1.  The  subjunctive  is  used  after  particles  of  wishing,  as  lUmam,  iitij  — +• 
Of  and  O!  si;  as, 

Utinnm  minus  v'iUb  citpldi  fuissemus !  0  that  we  had  heen  less  attached  to  Ufe  I 
Cic.     0  si  sdlihe  quicqucim  virtutis  iidesset !  Virg. 

Remakk.  The  present  and  perfect  tenses,  after  these  particles,  are  used  in 
reference  to  those  wislies  which  are  conceived  as  possible;  the  imperfect  and 
pluperfect  are  emploved  in  expressing  those  wishes  which  are  conceived  as 
wanting  in  reality.  Cf.  §  261,  1  and  2. — '  Would  that  not '  is  expressed  in  Latin 
both  by  u«nrtm  Ke  and  iUinam  non.  Utinam  is  sometimes  omitted;  as,  Tecum 
ludere  slcut  Ipsa  possem, !  CatuU. 

B.    Adverbial  Clausps. 

2.  (1.)  Quamm,  however ;  licet,  although;  tamquam,  tamquam  si,  — \ 
quasi,  ac  si,  ut  si,  velut,  velut  si,  veluti,  sicuti,  and  ceu,  as  if;  modo,  ' 
dum,  and  dumraodo,  provided, — take  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Quamvis  ille  felix  sit,  tdinen,  etc.  However  happy  he  may  be,  still,  etc.  Cic. 
Veritas  licet  nullum  dPJ'ensdrem  obtlneatj  Though  truth  should  obtain  no  de- 
fender. Id.  Tiirnqnnm  clinisa  sit  Asin,  SIC  nihil  pe7-fertur  ad  7ws.  Id.  Sed  quid 
iffo  his  ttstibiis  utor,  quasi  res  dubin  aut  ohscura  sit?  Id.  Me  omnibus  rebus,  juxta 
ac  si  meus  fritter  esset,  sustentCtvit,  He  supported  me  in  every  thing,  just  as 
though  he  were  my  brother.  Id.  Similiter  fdcere  eos, — ut  si  nnutte  certarent, 
iter,  etc.  Id.  Absentis  AriOvisfi  crUdelltatem,  velut  si  coram  ddesset,  ho'rrcrtnt. 
Cass.  Jnque  sinus  euros,  vtluti  cognoscere^-,  ibat.  Ovid.  Slciiti  jur(jio  Ificessi- 
tus  foret,  in  smutum  venit.  Sail.  Hie  vera  inaentem  pu(/nam,  ceu  cetera  nusquam 
bella  forent.  Virg.  Oderint  dum  metuant.  Att.  in  Cic.  Mdnent  inyenia  senibus, 
modo  permaneat  stMium  et  industria.  Cic.  Omnia  hdnesta  neyliyunt  dummodo 
pdtentiam  constquantur.  They  disregard  every  honorable  principle,  provided 
they  can  obtain  power.  Id. 

Note.  Mddo,  dum,  and  dummddo,  when  joined  with  a  negation,  become 
mddo  ne,  dum  ne,  and  dummddo  ne. 

(2.)  Quamvis  (although)  is  in  Cicero  joined  with  a  principaRense  of  the  sub- 
junctive; as,  Quamvis  non  fueris  swasor,  fl/;/>r<56ator  certe  fuisti.  Cic.  In  later 
writers  it  is  often  used  with  the  indicative;  as,  Felicem  Nioben,  quamvis  to< 
funera  vidit.  Ovid.  So  also  once  in  Cicero,  Quamvis  patrem  suum  numquam 
viderat.  Rab.  Post.  2. 

(3.)  Quajjim,  as  a  conjunction,  in  the  sense  of  '  however  much,'  is  joined 
with  the  subjunctive.  So  also  when  its  component  parts  are  separated ;  as, 
C.  (Jracthus  dixit,  sibi  in  somnis  Ti.  frdtrem  visum  esse  dlcere,  quam  vellet  cunc- 
taretur,  tdmen,  etc. —  Quamvis  '  however  much,'  as  an  adverb,  governs  no  ptu-- 
ticular  mood. 

(4.)  £isi,  tdmetsi,  even  if,  although,  and  quamquam,  although,  commonly  in- 
troduce an  indicative  clause : — itiamsi  is  more  frequently  followed  by  the  sub- 
junctive. In  later  prose  writers,  and  sometimes  in  Cicero  and  Sallust  as  well 
as  in  the  poets,  quamquam  is  joined  with  the  subjunctive;  as,  Quamquam  prce- 
sente  Liunlb  loquar.  Cic.  Vi  rigere  prHriam  quamquam  possis.  Sail.  Jug.  3. 
Fllius  quamquam  Thetidos  mdrlnce  Darddnas  turres  quateret.  Hor. 

Remakk.  The  imperfect  subjunctive  with  ac  si,  etc.,  is  used  after  the  pre- 
sent, to  denote  that  in  reality  tlie  thing  is  not  so,  but  in  that  case  a  hypotheti- 
cal subjunctive  must  be  supplied;  as,  Efjndtii  rem  ut  tuedre  cequt  a  te peto,  ac  si 
mea  neydiia  essent,  1.  e.  ac  peierem,  si  mea  negdtia  essent,  as  I  would  pray  i^ 
etc.  Cic. 


A 


274  SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER    PARTICLES.  §  263. 

3.  After  ant^quam  and  priusquam,  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect 
tenses  are  usually  in  the  subjunctive;  the  present  and  perfect  may  be 
"  either  in  the  indicative  or  subjunctive.  The  present  indicative  is 
commonly  used  when  the  action  is  to  be  represented  as  certain,  near 
at  hand,  or  already  be^n ;  the  subjunctive  is  used  when  the  thing  is 
still  doubtful,  and  also  in  general  propositions ;  as, 

£a  causa  ante  moriua  est,  qnam  tu  natus  esses,  That  cause  was  dead  before 
you  were  born.  Cic.  Acertit  equos,  priusquam  pdbula  gustassent  Trojos,  Xan- 
thumque  blbissent,  Virg.  Priusquam  incipias,  consiUto  dpus  est,  Before  you  be- 
gin there  is  need  of  counsel.  SalL 

^^  4.  (1.)  Dum,  doyiec,  and  quoad^  signifying  untU^  are  followed  by 
the  subjunctive,  if  they  refer  to  the  attainment  of  an  object ;  as, 

Dura  liic  veiiiret,  I6cum  relinquere  noluvt,  He  was  unwilling  to  leave  the  place 
until  he  (Milo)  should  come.  Cic.  Nihil  puto  Ubi  esse  uUUus  quam  qpperiri  quoad 
scire  possis,  quid  Ubi  agendum  siL  Id.  Ocn'nu  ietendit-,  et  duxit  longe,  donee  curtor 
ta  colrent  inter  se  capita.  Virg. — In  the  sense  of  'as  long  as,'  tiiese  particles 
take  the  indicative,  but  Tacitus  joins  dmec  with  the  subjunctive  even  when  a 
simple  fact  is  to  be  expressed. 

(2.)  Dum,  while,  is  commonly  used  with  the  indicative  present,  whatever 
may  be  the  tense  of  the  principal  sentence.   Cf.  §  259,  E.  1,  (1.),  (a.) 

5.   Quum  (cum),  when  it  signifies  a  relation  of  time,  takes 

the   indicative ;    when  it  denotes  a  connection  of  ihougM,  the 

subjunctive;  as, 

Qm.  non  dcfendit  injuriam,  neque  rlpulsat  a  stds,  quum  potest,  injuste  fdciL 
Cic.  Quum  recte  niirigdH  poterit,  ium  ndiiges.  Id.  Q-edo  turn,  quum  Sicilia 
florebat  dpibiis  et  cojjUs,  magna  artificia  fuisse  in  ed  insuld.  Id.  Quum  tot  sustin- 
eas  et  taiUa  negotia,  peccem,  si  indrer  iua  iempdra,  Since  you  are  burdened 
with  so  raanv  and  so  important  affairs,  I  should  do  wrong,  if  I  should  occupy 
yo\u-  time.  fior.  Quum  vita  sine  dmlcis  metus  plena  sit,  ratio  ipsa  monet  dmlcit' 
tas  compdrdre.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  The  rule  for  the  use  of  quum  may  be  thus  expressed: 
Quum  temporal  takes  the  indicative,  quum  causal  the  subjunctive.  Hence, 
when  quum  is  mlrely  a  particle  of  time,  with  no  refe:  3nce  to  cause  and  effect, 
and  not  occurring  in  a  historical  narrative  (see  Rem.  2),  it  may  be  joined  with 
any  tense  of  the  indicative.  But  when  it  is  employed  to  express  the  relation 
of  cause  and  effect,  or  has  the  meaning  of '  though '  or  '  although,'  it  is  joined 
with  the  subjunctive  (6.)  Quum,  relating  to  time,  is  commonly  translated 
when,  while,  or  after;  referring  to  a  train  of  thought,  it  signifies  as,  since,  though 
or  although,  because ;  but  may  often  be  translated  when. 

V  Rem.  2.  In  narration,  quum,  even  when  it  relates  to  time,  is  joined 

•^    with  the  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive,  when  a  historical  per- 
fect stands  in  the  principal  clause ;  as, 

Gracchus,  quum  rem  illam  in  religionem  p^piHo  venisse  senttret,  ad  sindtum  rit- 
mil.  Cic.  Alexander,  quum  interemisset  Clltum,  vix  mdnus  a  se  absUnuit.  Id. 

Note.  Quum  temporal,  when  it  expresses  an  action  frequently  repeated, 
may  be  joined  with  the  pluperfect  indicative,  and  the  apodosis  then  contains 
the  imperfect ;  as,  Quum  a7//e;/i  r/r  e.sse  coeperat,  dabat  se  fa6o7'i.  Cic.  Quum 
rdsam  viderat,  tum  incfpere  ver  arbitrabatur.  Id.  Cf.  ^  264,  12. 

Rem.  3.  Quum  in  the  sense  of  '  while '  is  joined  with  the  perfect  and  imper- 
fect indicative,  often  with  the  addition  of  interea  or  interim,  to  express  simulta- 
neous occurrences ;  as,  Cdtulus  cepit  magnum  sua  virtMis  fructum,  quum  omnai 
prdpe  una  voce,  in  eo  ipso  vos  spem  hdbituros  esse,  dixislis.  Cic.    Cceakbdiur  virgis 


§  2G4.        SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  QUI.         275 

in  mkiio  fdro  Messanee  clvis  Romdnm,  judices,  qimm  interea  nulla  vox  alia  isiius 
miseri  audiebatur,  nisi  hcec :  clvis  Romdnus  sum.  Id. 

Re3i.  4.  Quum^  for  the  most  part  preceded  by  an  adverb,  as,  jam,  nondum, 
vix,  (Jdffre,  or  joined  with  repents  or  subllo  is  followed  by  the  indicative,  espe- 
cially by  the  present  indicative,  to  express  the  beginning  of  an  action.  In  the 
cases  mentioned  in  this  and  the  preceding  remark,  the  historians  also  use  quum 
with  the  historical  infinitive. 

For  the  subjunctive  after  si  and  its  compounds,  see  §  261. 

C.    Adjective  Clauses. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    AFTER     QUI. 

§  304:.     Relatives  require  the  subjunctive,  when  the  clauses 
connected  by  them  express  merely  a  conception ;  as,  for  exam-    ~^ 
pie,  a  consequence,  an  innate  quality/,  a  cause,  rnotive,  or  purpose. 

1.  («.)  When  the  relative  qui,  in  a  clause  denoting  a  result  of  the 
character  or  quality  of  something  specified  in  the  antecedent  clause, 
follows  a  demonstrative,  and  is  equivalent  to  tit  with  a  personal  or 
demonstrative  pronoun,  it  takes  the  subjunctive. 

Note.  The  demotistratives  after  which  qui  takes  the  subjunctive,  are  ta'^  with  an 
adjective,  tantus,  talis,  ejusmodi,  kujusmodi,  and  is,  ille,  iste,  and  hie  in  the  sense  of 
talis;  as, 

Quis  est  tarn  Lynceus,  qui  in  taniis  tenebris  nihil  ofFendat  ?  i.  e.  ut  ille  in  tantis^ 
etc..  Who  is  so  quick-sighted,  that  he  would  not  stumble^  (or,  as  not  to  stum- 
ble,) in  such  darkness.  Cic.  Tdlem  te  esse  dportet,  qui  ab  impiorum  chrium  sdeie- 
tdte  sdjungas;  i.e.  ut  tu,  etc.  Id.  At  eafuit  legdtio  Octdvii,  in  qua  jsmaifl 
suspicio  non  sObesset,  i.  e.  ut  in  ed.  Id.  Nee  tdmen  ego  sum  ille  jferreus,  qui  frd- 
tris  cdrissimi  moerdre  non  movear,  i.  e.  ut  ego  non  mOvear.  Id.     Non  siimus  ii, 

?uibus  nihil  vtr-um  esse  videatur,  i.  e.  ut  nobis  nihil,  etc.  Id.    Nulla  gens  tarn 
era  est,  cujus  mentem  non  imbuerit  deorum  djnnio,  i.  e.  ut  ejus  nientem,  etc.  Id. 

(&.)    Sometimes  the  demonstrative  word  is  only  imphed ;  as, 

Ees  parva  dictu,  sed  quae  stiidiis  in  magnum  certdmen  excess erit,  i.  e.  talis 
qucB....oi  such  a  kind  that  it  issued  in  a  violent  contest.  Cic.  Nunc  dlds  dliquid, 
quod  ad  rem  pertineat,  i.  e.  tdle  ut  id,  etc.  Id.  So  quis  sum,  for  num  talis  sum; 
as,  Uuis  sum,  cUjus  aures  kedi  nefas  sit  V  Sen. — In  like  manner,  also,  a  demon- 
strative denoting  a  character  or  quality,  is  implied  in  the  examples  included  in 
the  following  rule  : —  , 

2.  When  the  relative  is  equivalent  to  quamquam  is,  etsi  is,  or  dum- 
modo  is,  it  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Laco,  consilii  quamvis  egregii,  quod  noil  ipse  afferret,  inlmlcus,  Laco,  an  oppo- 
nent of  any  measure,  however  excellent,  provided  he  did  not  himself  propose 
it.  Tac.  Tu  dquam  a  pUmice  postulas,  qui  ipsus  sitiat.  Plant.  Nihil  mdlestum, 
quod  non  desideres,  i.  e.  dummodo  id.   Cic.  , 

3.  Quod,  in  restrictive  clauses,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Quod  sciam,  as  far  as  I  know;  quod  Tnemineriin,  as  far  as  I  recollect;  quod  ^ go 
intelllgam ;  quod  inielllgi  possit ;  quod  covjeciUrd  prdvideri  possit ;  quod  salvd  fide*^ 
possiin;  quod  commddo  tuo  flat,  etc. —  Quidem  is  sometimes  added  to  the  rela-* 
tive  in  such  sentences.     Quod  sine  molestid  tud  flat.  So  far  as  it  can  be  done 
without  troubling  you.  Cic.    In  the  phrases  quantum  possum^  euantum  igo  per- 
gpido,  on  the  other  hand,  tiie  indicative  is  used. 


276         SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  QUI.       §  264. 

4.  A  relative  '•lause,  after  the  comparative  followed  by  quam,  takes 
->    the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Major  sum^  quam  cui  possit  fortuna  ndcere,  i.  e.  quam  ut  miM,  etc.,  I  am  too 
great  for  fortune  to  be  able  to  injure  me.  Ovid.  Atuliid  voce  2>r(ecdnis  majus 
aaiuUum  fail,  quam  quod  wiicersum  homines  capt^rent,  Upon  the  herald's  voice 
being  heard,  the  joy  was  too  great  for  the  people  to  contain.  Liv. 

Remark  1.  The  clause  annexed  by  quam  qui  implies  an  inherent  quality,  or 
a  consequence ;  so  that  <7««w»  quiis  equivalent  to  quam  itt,  which  also  some- 
times occurs.  Sometimes  the  subjunctive  follows  quam  even  without  a  rela- 
tive pronoun ;  a.«,  Jn  his  literis  longior  fui^  quam  aui  vellem,  aut  quam  meputavi 
fore : — and  so  frequently  with  the  verbs  vtlU  and  posse. 

»^  5.  A  relative  clause  expressing  a  purpose^  ainij  or  motive,  and 
Sjquivalent  to  ut  with  a  personal  or  demonstrative  pronoun,  takes  the 
subjunctive;  as, 

LdcedcBmonii  legates  Athenas  miserunt,  qui  eum  abseni^m  acciisarent:  i.e.  trf 
Uli  eum  atcusdi-ejit,  The  Lacedaemonians  sent  ambassadoi-s  to  Athens  to  accuse 
him  in  his  absence.  Xep.  Qesar  eqmtatum  omnem  jjrmmitlit^  qui  videant,  quas  tn 
partes  iter  faciarU.  Caes.  Sunt  autem  mulli,  qui  enpiunt  aliis,  quod  dliis  largian- 
tur.  Cic.    Assidue  repetant,  quas  perdaut,  BiUdes  undas.  Ovid. 

Rem.  2.  So  also  with  relative  adverbs ;  as,  Lampsdcum  ei  (Themi^tocU)  rex 
donarat,  unde  rlnum  suraeret,  i.  e.  ex  qua  or  ut  irtde,  etc.  Nep.  Super  tdbei-ndc- 
uLum  regis,  unde  aJb  omnibus  conspici  posset,  im^go  solis  crystuUo  tnclusa  fulge- 
bat.  Cm-t. 

\.  6.   A  relative  clause  with  the  subjunqtive  after  certain  indefinite 

general  expi-essions,  specifies  the  circumstances  which  characterize 
the  individual  or  class  indefinitely,  referred  to  in  the  leading  clause ; 
as, 

Fuemnt  ed  iempesldte,  qui  dicerent,  There  were  at  that  time  some  who  said. 
Sail.  Enint,  quibus  appeletUior  fdjitce,  videretur.  There  were  those  to  whom 
he  appeared  too  desirous  of  fame.  Tac.  Sunt,  qui  censeant,  Una  dnimum  ei 
corpug  oicidere.  Cic.  Erunt,  qui  ex/VjHidn  veliut.  Id.  Si  quis  ^rit,  qui  perpi- 
iunia  ordtionem  dei^ideret,  alteid  actiont  auditt.  Id.  Venient  legiones,  quae  neque 
me  inuUum  neque  te  iinpun'dum  patiautur.  Tac.  So  after  est  followed  by  quod, 
in  the  sense  of  '  there  is  reason  why ' ;  as,  J-^t  quod  gaudeas.  You  have  cause 
to  rejoice.  Plaut.  Est  quod  visam  (lUmum.  Id.  Si  est  quod  desit,  «e  bedtus 
quidtm  est.  Cic. 

Note  1.  The  expressions  included  in  the  rule  are  est,  sunt,  cutest,  prmsto  sunt,  exsis- 
tunt,  exorluntm,  invSniuntur,  rBpSriuntur,  (sell,  humlnes);  si  quis  est,  tempus  fuit,  tern- 
pus  vcniet,  etc. 

Rem.  3.  The  same  construction  occurs  with  relative  particles  used  indefi- 
nitely; as.  Est  unde  hcec  fiant.  Si  est  culpam  ut  Antiphoin  se  admiserit.  If  it 
chance  that,  etc.  Ter.  Est  ubi  id  isto  nuklo  valeat.  Cic.  So  est  cur  and  est  ut 
in  the  sense  of  est  cur;  as,  JUe  erat,  ut  odisset  defensorem  sdlUlis  mece,  i.  e.  he 
had  reason  to  hate.  Cic.  Non  est  igitur  ut  mirandum  sit,  There  is  no  occasion 
for  wondering.  Id. 

Rem.  4.  The  above  and  similar  expressions  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive 
onlv  when  they  are  indefinite.  Hence,  after  sunt  quldam,  sunt  nonmdli,  sunt 
muUi,  etc.,  Avhen  referring  to  definite  persons,  the  relative  takes  the  indicative; 
as.  Sunt  ordtiones  qucedam,  quas  Menocrito  dabo.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  The  indicative  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  used  after  sunt  qui, 
even  when  taken  indefinitely,  especially  in  the  poets;  as,  Sunt,  ^p^os  juvar.  Hor. 
Sunt  qui  Ua  dicunt.   Sail. 

7.  A  relative  clause  after  a  general  negative,  or  an  interrogative 
^^    expression  implying  a  negative,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  a3» 


] 


§  264.       SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  AFTER  QUI.         277 

Nemo  est,  qui  Jiavd  intelll^at,  There  is  no  one  who  does  not  understand.  Cic. 
Nulla  res  est,  quae  perferre.  possit  continuum  ldbc"em,  There  is  notliing  which 
can  cinhxre  perpetual  labor.  Quint.  Nulla  jmrs  ckt  corporis,  cmve  non  sit  minor. 
Id.  Nihil  est,  quod  tarn  mlseros  f  uciat,  quam  impieias  et  scelus.  Cic.  In  fOro 
vix  decimus  quisque  est,  qui  ipsus  sese  noscat.  Plaut.  Quis  est,  qui  utilia  fiigiat? 
AVho  is  there  that  sliuns  what  is  useful?  Cic.  Quce  latebra  est,  in  quafti  rwn  in- 
tret  metus  mortis  ?  Sen.  Quid  dulcius  quam  habere,  quicum  omnia  audeas  sic  U- 
qui  ut  tecum?  Cic.  (See  respecting  this  use  of  the  indefinite  quicum  rather  than 
the  definite  5?t«CMm,  §  136,  R.  1.)  An  est  guisqucim,  qui  hoc  ignoretV  Is  there 
any  one  who  is  ignorant  of  this  V  Id.  '  Numquid  est  muli,  quod  non  dixeris  V  Ter. 

Note  2.  General  negatives  are  nSmo,  mtllus,  nihil,  unus  non,  alius  non,  non  qitisquam, 
vix  ullus.  nrc  uUus,  etc.,  with  est ;  vix  with  an  ordinal  and  quisque ;  nSgo  esse  quemquam, 
etc.  Interrogative  expressions  implying  a  negative,  are  quis,  quid;  qui,  quce,  quod; 
quantus,  titer,  ecquis,  numquis,  an  qiiisquam,  an  acquis,  qudtus  quisque,  quotus,  etc., 
with  est?  quot,  quam  multi,  etc.,  with  sunt? 

Note  3.  The  same  construction  is  used  after  non  est,  nihil  est,  quid  est,  num- 
quid est,  etc.,  followed  by  quod,  cur,  gudre,  or  quamobrem,  and  denoting  '  there 
is  no  reason  why,'  '  what  cause  is  there?'  'is  there  any  reason?'  as.  Quod 
timeas,  non  est,  There  is  no  reason  why  you  should  fear.  Ovid.  Nihil  est, 
quod  adventum  nostrum  pertiraescas.  Cic.  Quid  est,  quod  de  ejus  clvitdte  dubites  ? 
Id.  Quoeris  a  me,  quid  ego  Cdtilinam  metuam.  Nihil,  et  cUrdvi  ne  quis  metueret. 
Quid  est,  cur  vii^tus  ipsa  per  se  non  efFiciat  bedtos  ?  Id. — So  after  no7i  hdbeo,  or 
nihil  hdbeo ;  as,  Non  hdbeo,  quod  te  acciisera.  Cic.  Nil  hdbeo,  quod  agam,  I  have 
nothing  to  do.  Hor.  Nihil  hdbeo,  quod  ad  te  scribam.  Cic.  So  witliout  a  nega- 
tive, De  qmbus  habeo  ipse,  quid  sentiam.  Id.  Causa  or,  with  quid  and  nitiil, 
causce,  is  sometimes  added ;  as,  Non  fuit  causa,  cur  postHldres.  Id.  Quid  erat 
catisce,  cur  metueret.  Id.  '  .  ' 

Note  4.  (a.)  The  relative  clause  takes  the  subjunctive  after  the  expressions 
included  in  this  and  tlie  last  rule,  only  when  it  expresses  the  character  or 
quality  of  the  subject  of  the  antecedent  clause;  and  the  relative,  as  in  the  pre- 
ceding cases  of  the  relative  with  the  subjunctive,  is  equivalent  to  a  personal  or 
demonstrative  pronoun  with  ut;  as,  NUrno  est,  qui  nesciat.  There  is  no  one  who 
is  ignorant,  i.  e.  no  one  is  ignorant.  Cic.  So,  Sunt,  qui  hoc  carpant,  There  are 
some  who  blame  this,  i.  e.  some  blame  this.  Veil. 

(b.)  If  the  relative  clause  is  to  be  construed  as  a  part  of  the  logical  subject 
it  does  not  require  the  subjunctive;  as,  Nihil  stabile  est,  quod  infldum  est 
Nothing  which  is  faithless  is  firm.  Cic. 

8.  (1.)  A  relative  clause  expressing  the  reason  of  what  goes  before, 
takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Peccdvisse  ndhi  videor,  qui  a  te  discesserim,  I  think  I  did  wrong  in  leaving 
YOU.  Cic.  Inertiam  accusas  ddolescentium,  qui  ista^n  artem  non  ediscant.  You 
Dlame  the  idleness  of  the  young  men,  because  they  do  not  learn  that  art.  Id. 
0  fortunate  ddulescens,  qui  tu^  virtHtis  Homerum  prceconem  invenferis ! — in  hav- 
ing found.  Id.  Cdninius  fuit  mlrificd  vtgilantid,  qui  suo  iota  consHldtu  somnum 
mm  videi-it, — since,  etc.  Id. 

(2.)  Sometimes,  instead  of  qui  alone,  ut  qui,  quippe  qui,  or  utpole 
qui,  is  used,  generally  with  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Convlvia  cum  pritre  non  inibat,  quippe  qui  ne  in  oppidum  guidem  ntsi  perrdro 
venisset.  Cic.  Neque  Antonius  prdcul  dberat,  utpote  qui  magna  exercUu  sequS- 
retur.  Sail.  But  sometimes  with  the  mdicative  in  Sallust  and  Livy ;  as,  Quippe 
qui  omnia  vicerat.  Sail. 

9.  After  dignus,  indignus,  aptus,  and  idoneus,  a  relative  clause 
takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Videtur,  qui  dligunndo  imperet,  dignus  esse.  He  seems  to  be  worthy  at  some 
time  to  command.  Cic.   Rustlci  nostri  quum  jfidem  allciijus  bdnltdtemque  laudant, 
dignum  esse  dlcunt,  quicum  in  tenebris  mlces.  Id.     Nulla  videbatur  aptiur  per* 
24 


278       SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INDIRECT  QUESTIONS.     §  265. 

Sana,  quae  de  cetate  16qu6retur.  Id.  Pompdus  idoneus  non  est,  qui  impetret.  Id. 
JCl  rem  Idoneam,  de  qua  quaeratur,  et  hUmines  dignos,  qulbusci«»  disscratur,  pu- 
tanl.  Id. 

KoTE  5.  If  the  relative  clause  does  not  express  that  of  which  the  person  or 
thing  denoted  bv  the  antecedent  is  worthy,  its  construction  is  not  influenced 
by  this 'rule.  Thus,  Qj«s  serrus  Ubertate'di^us /«?<,  cui  nostra  salus  cara  non 
esset  ?    The  subjunctive  is  here  used  according  to  No.  7  of  this  section. 

Note  6.  The  infinitive  frequently  follows  these  adjectives  in  poetry,  though 
rarely  in  prose;  as,  £t  puer  ipse /nit  cantari  dignus.  Virg.: — and  sometimes 
ut ;  as,  Eras  dignus,  ut  haberes  integram  indnum.  Quint. 

10.  A  relative  clause,  after  unus,  solus,  primus,  etc.,  restricting 
the  affirmation  to  a  particular  subject,  takes  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

H(zc  est  u.na  contentio,  quae  ddJiuc  permanserit,  This  is  the  only  dispute  which 
has  remained  till  this  time.  Cic.  VOluptas  est  sola,  quae  nos  vocet  ad  se,  et  alll- 
ceat  suapte  naturd,  Pleasure  is  the  only  thing  that,  by  its'  own  nature,  invites 
and  allures  us  to  itself.  Id. 

11.  When  the  relative  refers  to  a  dependent  clause,  it  often  takes 
the  subjunctive.    See  §  266. 

1 2.  The  imperfect  and  pluperfect  subjunctive  are  used  in  narra- 
tion after  relative  pronouns  and  adverbs,  when  a  repeated  action  is 
gpoken  of;  as, 

Semper  hdbiti  sunt  fortissimi,  qui  summam  imperii  potirentur.  Those  were  al- 
ways accounted  the  bravest,  who  obtained  the  supreme  dominion.  Xep. 
Quemcumque  Uctor  jtissu  consulis  prehendisset,  tribunus  miiti  jubebat.  Liv. 
Ut  quisque  maxima  laboraret  Idcus,  aut  ipse  occurrebat,  aut  aliquos  mittebat.  So 
after  si  quis  or  qui ;  as,  Si  qui  rem  malitiosius  gessisset,  dcdecus  existimabant 
Cic.  Qudtiens  super  tali  negolio  consultaret,  editd  domus  parte  utebdtur.  Tac. 
Nee  quisquam  Pyrrhum,  qua  tiilisset  impetum,  sustinere  vdluit. — It  is  sometime  i 
found  in  hke  manner  after  quum,  vbi,  tit,  and  si  when  used  in  the  sense  of 
quum,  when  repeated  actions  are  spoken  of;  as.  Id  iibi  dixisset,  hastam  in  fines 
eorum  emiitebcU.  Liv.  Sin  Nwrndcc  prdjnus  accessissent,  ibi  vera  virtuiem  osien- 
dere.  SalL  Sometimes  even  the  present  subjunctive  is  so  used  when  em- 
ployed as  an  aorist  to  express  things  which  have  happened  repeatedly,  and 
stUi  happen  (see  §  145, 1.  2.) ;  as,  Ubi  de  magna  virtMe  d.  glcrid  bOndrum  memo- 
res,  quoe  sibi  quisque,  etc.  Sail. 

Note  7.  This  is  called  the  indefinite  xubjunttive,  or  subjunctive  of  generality,  inasmnch 
as  the  action  is  not  referred  to  a  distinct,  indiTidual  case.  The  indicative,  however,  is 
used  in  such  cases  more  firequently  than  the  subjunctive. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INDIRECT    QUESTIONS. 

-~,i^      §  90^.     Dependent  clauses,  containing  an  indirect  question, 
take  the  subjunctive. 

Note  1.  A  question  is  indirect  when  its  substance  is  stated  in  a  dependent 
clause  without  the  interrogative  form.  Indirect  questions  generally  depend 
upon  those  verbs  and  expressions  which  commonly  take  after  them  the  accusa- 
tive Avith  the  infinitive.    Cf.  §  272.     Thus : — 

Qnsllis  sit  animus,  ijjse  animus  nescU,  The  mind  iteelf  knows  not  what  the 
mind  is.  Cic.  Cridibile  non  est,  quantum  scnbam.  It  is  incredible  how  much  I 
write.  Id.  Quis  e^o  sim,  mej-ogitas?  Do  you  ask  me  who  I  am.*  Plant.  Ad  it 
quid  scribam  nescio.  Cic.  IVec  quid  scriuam  hdbeo.  Nor  have  I  any  thing  to 
write.  Id.  Doce  me,  iibi  sint  dii.  Inform  me  where  the  gods  are.  Id,'  Incertum 
est,  quo  ie  loco  mors  exspectet.  Sen.  Ep.  Quani  i)ndem  sibi  heriditas  -venisset, 
dicet.  Id.    Ntmc  accipe,  quars  deslpiaut  vmnes.  Hor.    Id  utrum  ilU  sentiant,  an 


§  266.      SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE    IN   INSERTED    CLAUSES.       279 

vero  simiilent,  tu  intelUges.  Cic.  Qucero,  niim  tu  sSndtui  causam  iuam  permittas. 
Id.  Vides,  ut  altd  stet  mve  candldum  Soracte.  Hor.  Nescit,  vUdne  fniatur,  an 
sit  djjucl  manes.  Ovid. 

Note  2.  All  interrogatives  whether  adjectives,  pronouns,  or  par- 
ticles, may  serve  as  connectives  of  clauses  containing  indirect  ques- 
tions; as, 

Quantus,  qudlis^  qu5t,  quStus,  quStuplex,  titer  ^  quis,  qtd,  cujas ;  iibi,  qu5,  unde,  quel, 
quorsum,  quamcliu,  quamduditm,  quampndem,  qitoties,  cur,  quare,  qtiaitiobrem,  quemad- 
mSdum.  quomddo,  ut,  quam,  quantopSre,  an,  ne,  num,  utrum,  atine,  annon. 

Remark  1.  The  indicative  is  frequently  used  in  dependent  questions, 
especially  in  Terence  and  Plautus  and  occasionally  in  later  poets;  as,  Vide 
dvdrUia  quid  f  acit.  Ter.  So  Virg.  Eel.  5,  7.  In  the  best  prose  writers  the  in- 
dicative generally  indicates  that  the  question  is  direct,  or  that  the  sentence  is 
not  a  question ;  as,  Qaceramus  ubi  muleftcium  est,  Let  us  seek  there,  where  the 
crime  actually  is.  Cic.  Nihil  est  admirdbllius,  quam  quomddo  ille  mortem  filii 
tulit. 

Rem.  2.  In  double  questions,  *  whether — or,'  the  first  may  be  introduced  by 
utrum,  or  the  enclitic  ne,  or  without  an  interrogative  particle.  Hence  thei*e  are 
four  forms  of  double  questions, — 1.  utrum  (or  utrum  ne), — an.    2.  utrum, — an 

(anne).     3.  -ne, an.     4,  -ne, ne ;    as,  Multum  interest,  utrum  laus 

immanuatur,  an  sdlus  deseratur.  Cic.  The  inten-ogative  particle  utrum  is  not 
used  in  a  single  question ;  and  num — an  is  used  only  in  direct  questions.  The 
English  '  or  not '  in  the  second  part,  which  is  used  without  a  verb,  is  expressed 
in  Latin  by  annon  or  necne,  either  with  or  Avithout  a  verb ;  but  necne  occurs 
only  in  indirect  questions ;  as,  Dii  utrum  sint,  necne  sint,  quceritur.  Cic. — Ne — 
ne,  an — an,  or  num — num  scarcely  occur  except  in  poetical  or  unclassical  lan- 
guage. 

Rem.  3.  DuUto,  diibium  est,  or  incertum  est  an,  dellbero  or  hcesito  an,  and 
especially  hand  scio  an,  nescio  an,  though  implying  some  doubt,  have  generally 
a  sense  almost  affirmative.   Compare  §  198, 11,  R.  (e.) 

Rem.  4.  Nescio  quis,  used  nearly  in  the  sense  of  dliquis,  does  not  influence 
the  mood  of  the  following  verb ;  as,  Sed  cdsu  nescio  quo  in  ea  tempdra  cetas  nos- 
tra incldit.  Cic.  LUcus,  nescio  quo  cdsu,  nocturno  tempdre  incensus  est.  Nep. 
So,  also,  nescio  quomddo,  '  somehow '  or  '  in  some  way ' ;  as,  Sed  nescio  quomo- 
do,  inhceret  in  mentibus  quasi  augHrium.  Cic.  In  like  manner  mlrum  quam,  mi- 
rum  quantum,  nimium  quantum,  and  the  like,  when  united  to  express  only  one 
idea,  do  not  affect  the  mood  of  the  verb ;  as,  Sales  in  dlcendo  nimium  q^iantum 
vdlent, — very  much.  Cic. 

SUBJUNCTIVE    IN    INSERTED    CLAUSES. 

§  306.  1.  When  a  dependent  proposition  containing  either 
an  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  or  a  verb  in  the  subjunctive,  has 
a  clause  connected  with  it,  as  an  essential  part,  either  by  a  rela- 
tive, a  relative  adverb,  or  a  conjunction,  the  verb  of  the  latter 
clause  is  put  in  the  subjunctive ;  as, 

Quid  enim  pdtest  esse  tarn  perspicuum,  quam  esse  allquad  nUmen,  quo  hcec  re- 
gantur?  For  what  can  be  so  clear  as,  that  there  is  some  divinity  by  whom 
these  things  are  governed?  Cic.  Here  the  thing  which  is  stated  to  be  clear  i^, 
not  merely  esse  aliquod  numen,  that  there  is  a  god,  but  also  that  the  world  is 
"governed  by  him.  Hence  the  latter  clause,  quo  hcec  regantur  is  an  essential  part 
of  the  general  proposition.  Illvd  sic  fere  di'flnlri  sdlet,  decorum  id  esse,  quod 
consentdneum  sit  hdminis  excellentim.  Id.  Audiam  quid  sit,  quod  Ej-acHrum  non 
probes,  Ishall  hear  why  it  is  that  you  do  not  approve  cf  Epicurus.  Id  JussU 
ut,  qiuB  venissent,  naves  Euboeam  pet4rent.  Liv. 


280        SYNTAX. SUBJUNCTIVE  IN  INSERTED  CLAUSES.        §  266. 

Bemark  1.  Hence  the  subjunctive  is  used  in  general  sentenses,  in  which 
the  class  of  things  mentioned  exists  only  as  a  conception  or  icea,  while  the 
individual  thing  has  a  real  exist'ence;  as,  Est  enim  vlcUttndi  et  p'lnitndi  mddus, 
aiqne  hnml  siio  an  sdiis  sit  turn  qui  lacessierit  injuria,  suce  pcenitere,  i.  e.  each 
individual  offender  of  the  class. 

Rkm.  2.  \Mien  the  principal  proposition  contains  a  subjunctive  denoting  a 
resuU,  after  ita^  tarn,  talis,  etc.,  the  inserted  clause  has  the  indicative;  as,  Asia 
vt'ro  turn  6/nma  est  et  fertilui,  ut — mvltitudine  edi'um  rcrum,  quffi  exportantur, 
faille  omnibus  terris  anteitU'U.  Cic.  The  same  is  the  case  in  definitions;  as, 
Vidt're  ff/itur  6jx)ftet,  qiue  sitU  cotivementia  cum  ipso  negotio,  hoc  est,  qiias  ab  re 
sejxh-are  mm  possunt.  Cic. — So  also  explanatory  clauses,  especially  circumlo- 
cutions introduced  by  a  relative  pronoun,  are  sometimes  found  with  the  indic- 
ative ;  as,  Itaqut  ille  Mih'itis  item  exlmie  L.  Plotium  dllexit,  cujus  inyenio  jmtubai 
ea,  quae  gesserat,  2X)sse  celtbrari.  Cic. 

KOTE.  To  this  rule  belongs  the  construction  of  the  or^tio  obllqua,  ♦  indirect 
discourse,'  or  '  reported  speech,'  in  which  the  language  of  another  is  presented, 
not  as  it  was  conceived  or  expressed  by  him,  but  in  the  third  person.  Thus, 
Cjesar  said, '  I  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered,'  is  direct, — Csesar  said,  that '  he  came, 
saw,  and  conquered,'  is  indirect  discourse. 

2.  In  the  ordtio  ohliqua,  the  main  proposition  is  expressed  by 
the  accusative  with  the  infinitive ;  and  dependent  clauses  con- 
nected with  it  by  relatives  and  particles,  take  the  subjunctive. 

Thus,  Cicero  and  Quintilian,  in  quoting  the  language  of  Marcus  Antonius, 
make  use,  the  former  of  the  ordtio  dlrecta,  the  latter  of  the  oratio  obllqua ; — 
Antonius  inquit,  '  Ars  edrum  rerum  est,  quae  sciuntur ',  Antonius  says,  '  Art  be- 
longs to  those  thin^  which  are  known.'  Cic.  Antonius  inquit,  aVtera  earum 
rerum  esse,  quae  sciantur,  Antonius  says,  that  'art  belongs  to  those  things 
which  are  kno^vn.'  Quint. 

So,  Socrates  dicire  solebat,  omnes,  in  eo  quod  scirent,  satis  esse  eUquentes,  So- 
crates was  accustomed  to  say,  that '  all  were  sufficiently  eloquent  in  that  which 
they  understood?  Cic.  Catomlrdri  se  aitbat,  quod  non  rideret  hdruspex,  hdruq)i- 
cem  quum  vidisset.  Id.  Negat  jus  esse,  qui  miles  non  sit,  pugndre  cum  hoste.  Id. 
Indigndbantur  ibi  esse  imjjenum,  ubi  non  esset  libertas.  Liv.  Itdque  Athenienses, 
quod  hOnestum  non  esset,  id  ne  utile  qiddem  {esse)  putdverunt.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  Wlien  the  subjunctive  would  be  necessary  in  the  ordtic 
direcia,  to  denote  liberty,  power,  etc.,  the  same  remains  in  the'  ordtio  oblique, 
and  is  not  changed  into  the  infinitive  vnth.  an  accusative;  as.  Ad  hcec  Andnstus 
respondit,  quum  vellet,  congrederetur.  To  this  Ariovistus  replied,  that '  he  might 
meet  him  when  he  pleased.'  Caes.  In  the  ordtio  directa,  this  would  be  congre- 
didns. 

(6.)  The  imperative  in  the  drdtio  dlrecta  is,  in  the  drdtio  obtiqua,  changed 
into  the  subjunctive;  as,  hoc  niihi  dlcite,  which  in  the  drdtio  obllqua  is,  hoc  sibi 
tUcant,  or  hoc  sibi  dicirent,  according  to  the  tense  of  the  leading  verb. 

(c.)  So  also  direct  questions  addressed  to  the  second  person,  when  changed 
from  direct  to  indirect  speAch,  become  subjunctives.  Liv.  6,  37. — But  such 
questions  when  not  addressed  to  the  second  person  are  expressed  in  the  drdtio 
obllqua  hy  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive;  as  when  in  direct  speech  we  say, 
Etiainsi  vMris  contHnKliw  obtivisci  vilim,  num  possum  itiam  ricentium  injwidrum 
memdi-iam  dipdniref  The  6rdtio  obllqua  will  be,  Gesnr  respondit  (histor.  perf.) — 
si  veteris  contumelice  obllvisci  vellet,  num  itiam  r^niltUm  lujuridi^m — memdriam 
depdnire  posse  ?  Cabs.  Very  rarely  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  found 
in  a  question  of  the  second  person,  as  in  Liv.  6,  17:  but  the  subjunctive  in 
questions  of  the  third  person  is  less  uncommon'in  Caesar;  as,  Quis  pdti  posset  f 
for  quern  pdii  posse  f  Quis  hoc  stbi  persudderet  f  for  qu^m  sibi  perFddsurum  f  See 
^  273,  3. 

Rem.  2.  A  writer  may  state  his  own  past  words  or  thoughts  in  drdtio  oitiqua, 
either  preserving  the  first  person,  or  adopting  the  third. 


§  267.  SYNTAX. ^IMPERATIVE    MOOD.  281 

Rem.  3.  When  the  inserted  clanse  contains  the  words  or  sentiments  of  the 
subject  of  the  leading  clause,  all  references  to  Jiim  are  regularly  expressed  bv 
the  reflexives  sui  and  suus;  as,  Bac  necessitate  conctus  ddminonavis  qui  sitciper^, 
multa  jiolllcens,  si  se  co.tsei^asset.  Nep.  And  this  is  equally  time  when  the 
word  to  which  the  pronoun  refers  is  not  in  reality  the  grammatical  subject, 
provided  it  may  still  be  conceived  as  such ;  as,  Quum  ei  in  susptcidnem  vaiisset, 
dliquid  in  epistold  de  se  esse  scriptum.  Nep. ;  for  the  words,  quum  ei  in  suspicw- 
nem  vcnisset,  are  equivalent  to  quu7n  suspicdretur.    See  §  208,  (1.) 

Rem.  4.  The  tenses  to  be  used  in  changing  the  ordiio  drrecta  into  the  oblljimj 
depend  on  the  tense  of  the  verb  which  introduces  the  quotation,  accordhig  to 
the  rule,  §  258.  But  when  the  future  perfect  would  be  used  in  the  direct,"  the 
pluperfect  is  necessary  in  the  oblique  form ;  but  the  perfect  is  used  after  the 
pi'esent,  perfect  definite,  or  future. 

Rem.  5.  When  the  connected  clause  contains  merely  a  descriptive  circum- 
stance, or  expresses  what  is  independent  of  the  sentiment  of  the  preceding 
clause,  it  takes  the  indicative ;  as,  Impirdvit  Alexander  Lysippo,  ut  eorum  eqm- 
tum,  qui  dpud  Gi'dnlcum  ceclderant,  fdceret  stdtuas,  Alexander  ordered  Lysip- 
pu3  to  make  statues  of  those  horsemen  who  had  fallen  at  the  Granicus. 
Sometimes,  in  other  cases,  when  it  is  evident  from  the  sense,  that  the  connect- 
ed clause  is  an  essential  part  of  the  proposition,  the  indicative  is  used,  to  avoid 
giving  the  appearance  of  contingency  to  the  sentence. 

3.    A  clause  connected  to  another  by  a  relative  or  causal  con- 
junction, takes  the  subjunctive,  (whatever  be   the  mood  of  the     ^ 
preceding  verb,)  when  it  contains  not  the  sentiment  or  allegation 
of  the  writer,  but  that  of  some  other  person  alluded  to ;  as, 

Socrates  accusdtus  es<,  quod  corrviTapG,YQt  juventutem^  Socrates  was.  accused 
of  corrupting  the  youth,  lit.,  because  (as  was  alleged)  he  corrupted  the  youth. 
Beuni  invdcdbant,  cujus  ad  solenne  venissent.  They  invoked  the  god,  to  whose 
solemnities  they  had  come.  Liv,  Quos  viceris  dmicos  tibi  esse  cave  credas,  Do 
not  believe  that  those  whom  you  have  conquered  are  your  friends.  Here,  in 
the  first  example,  the"  charge  of  corrupting  the  youth  is  not  made  by  the 
writer,  but  by  the  accusers  of  Socrates.  So,  in  the  second  example,  the  wor- 
shippers allege  that  they  have  come  to  attend  upon  the  solemnities  of  the  god. 
In  the  last,  it  is  implied  by  the  use  of  the  subjunctive  mood,  that  the  belief 
spoken  of  is  that  of  the  person  addressed: — quos  vicisti  Avould  have  been  merely 
an  addition  of  the  speaker,  by  m.eans  of  which  he  would  have  designated  the 
persons  whose  friendship  he  was  speaking  of;  and,  in  general,  the  indicative,  in 
such  sentences,  is  employed  in  those  statements  which  ara  independent  of  the 
sentiments  of  the  person,  to  whose  thoughts  or  words  allusion  is  made.  Cf. 
supra,  2,  R.  5.  '        ' 

Remark..  In  the  preceding  cases,  it  is  not  directly  said  that  the  sentiments 
are  those  of  another  than  the  wi'iter.  In  Cicero,  however,  the  words  dlco^  pido, 
arbitr'ar,  and  the  like,  are  often  construed  in  a  similar  manner,  although,  pro- 
perly speaking,  not  these  verbs,  but  those  in  the  clauses  dependent  on  them, 
should  be  in  the  subjunctive ;  as,  Quum  enim,  Hannibdlis  permissu,  exisset  de 
castris,  rediit  pernio  post^  quod  se  oblUum  nescio  quod  diceret,... because  (as)  he 
siiid,  he  had  forgotten  something.  Cic.  Ab  Atheniensilnis,  Idcum  sepulturce  intra 
urbem  ut  ddrent,  impetrdre  nonpdtui,  quod  religione  se  impedlri  dicerent.  Id. 

.IMPERATIVE    MOOD.  v 

§  S67.    The  imperative  mood  is  used  to  express  a  command^     -^ 
wish^  advice,  or  exhortation  ;  as, 

Nosce  te.  Know  thyself.  Cic.   JEquam  memento  servRre  mentem,  Remember 
to  preserve  an  unrutfted  mind.  Hor.     Euc  ades.  Come  hither.  Virg.    Pasce  ca- 
pellas,  et  pdtum  pastas  age,  et  intur  agendum  occursdre  capro  cav6to.  Id. 
24* 


282  SYNTAX. — INFINITIVE   MOOD.  §  268. 

(1.)  The  imperative  present  denotes  that  an  action  is  to  be  performed  direct- 
ly or  at  once;  as,  lege,  read;  m^rSre^  die;  or  that  a  state  or  condition  is  to  con- 
tinue ;  as,  fife,  live. 

(2.)  The  imperative  fvture  denotes  that  soraethin^  is  to  be  done,  as  soon  as 
Bome'^hing  else  has  taken  place ;  a"?,  Quum  valtiudlm  iuce  consulueris,  turn  con- 
Biilito_  ^dvif/atidni.  Cic.  Priiis  atuhte  paucis ;  quod  quum  dixero,  si  pldcuirit, 
facltote.  Ter.  The  precedent  event  is  often  to  be  supplied  by  the  mind- 
Sometimes,  especially  in  poetry,  the  imperative  present  is  used  for  the  impera- 
tive future,  and,  on  the  other  hand,  sclto  and  scitote,  from  scio,  are  used  instead 
of  the  imperative  present,  which  is  wantmg. 

(3.)  Hence  the  imperative  future  is  properly  used  in  contracts,  laws,  and 
unlls  ;  and  also  in  precepts  and  rules  of  conduct ;  as,  Regio  imperio  duo  sunta, 
iiqve  consiiles  appellantor,  militicB  summum  Jus  habento,  nemlni  parento,  illi» 
sdluspopuli  supreina  lex  esto.  Cic.  Non  satis  est  pukhra  esse  poemdta,  aulcia 
sun  to.  Hor.    Ignoscito  scepe  aUeri,  numquam  tibi.  Syr. 

Remark  1.  With  the  imperative,  not  is  expressed  by  ne,  and  nor 
by  j^eve  ;  as, 

Ne  tania  dTiimis  assuesclte  beUa.  Virg.  Ne  crede  cdlori.  Id.  Sdminem  mar- 
tuum  in  urbe  ne  sepelito,  neve  urito.  Cic. 

Note.  Non  and  neque  occur,  though  rarely,  with  the  imperative ;  as,  Vos 
midque  non  cdris  aures  dnerate  Idpillis,  nee  jrr'ddUe  graves  insuto  vestibus  aura. 
Ovid.  But  with  the  subjunctive  used  for  the  imperative  non  and  especially 
niqiie  are  found  more  frequently.  Cf.  §  260,  R.  6,  (6.) — In  Plautus  and  Terence 
ne  is  of  common  occurrence  both  viith.  the  imperative  and  with  the  preseut 
subjunctive,  and  with  no  diflereuce  of  meaning;  but  later  poets  chiefly  use  ne 
with  the  present  subjunctive,  and  ne  with  the  impei-ativc  only  when  they  speak 
emphatically.  In  classical  prose  writers  the  periphrastic  noU  with  the  infiuitive 
is  preferred. 

Rem.  2.  The  present  and  perfect  subjunctive  are  often  used  instead  of  both 
tenses  of  the  imperative,  to  express  a  command  in  a  milder  fonn,  an  exhorta- 
tion, or  an  entreaty;  as.  Qui  ddipisci  veram  gloriam  volet,  justitict  fungatur 
qfficiis.  Cic.  Quod  dhbitas,  ne  feceris.  Plin.  Ep.  See  ^  260,  II.,  R.  6.  An  imper- 
ative of  the  pei-fect  passive  is  very  rarely  found ;  as,  At  vos  admoniti  nostris 
gu6q*ie  casibus  este.  Ovid.  Jacta  alea  esto.  Goes,  in  Suet.  But  the  subjunctive 
is  more  common ;  as,  Jacta  sit  alea.  Sometimes  also  the  future  indicative ;  as, 
Sed  valebis,  medque  negotia  vldebis,  meque  diis  jucantlbus  ante  brumam  exspec- 
tabis,  instead  of  vale,  vide,  exspectcL.  Cic.  Ubi  sententiam  meam  vobis  peregero. 
turn  qulbus  eddem  pldccbunt,  in  dextram  partem  tdclti  transibitis,  instead  oi 
iransiiote.  Liv.     With  the  future  the  negative  is  non.  See  §  259,  R.  1,  (4.) 

Rem.  3.  Sometimes,  for  the  simple  affirmative  imperative,  cura  or  curdtn  ut, 
yac  «/,  or/ac  alone  is  used  with  the  subjunctive;  as,  Cura  ut  quam  pnmum 
venias,  Come  as  soon  as  possible.  Fac  erudias.  Instruct,  or  Jake  care  to  in- 
struct, Cic.  For  the  negative  imperative  Joe  ne,  cave  ne  or  cave  alone,  with 
the  present  or  perfect  subjunctive  is  used;  but  especially  no/i  with  the  infini- 
tive ;  as,  Ndli  putdre.  Do  not  suppose.  Cic.  Care  existimes,  Do  not  think.  Id. 
NolJte  id  velle  quod  non  Jieri  pdtest,  el  cavete  ne  spe  prcesentis  pads  peipituam 
pacem  omittatis.  Id. 

INFINITIVE    MOOD. 
OF    THE    TENSES    OF    THE    INFINITIVE. 

§  /*Oc5«  1.  The  infinitive  partakes  of  the  properties  of  the  nonn  and 
verb,  just  as  the  participle  combines  the  properties  of  the  adjective  and  verb. 
It  expresses  simply  the  action  or  state  implied  in  the  verb  in  an  abstract  man- 
ner, without  specifying  either  person,  number,  or  time,  and  thus  merely  indi- 
cates whether  an  action  is  in  progress  or  completed. 


§  268.  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE   MOOD.  283 

2.  The  tenses  of  the  infinitive  denote  respectively  an  action 
as  present,  past,  or  future,  in  reference  to  the  time  of  the  verbs 
witli  which  they  are  connected ;  as, 

Ihc  facere  possum,  T  am  able  to  do  this.  Cic.  Vidi  nnstros  inhnlcos  cupPre 
bellam,  I  saw  that  our  enemies  were  desiring  war.  Id.  Nee  gC'inere  acria  ces- 
sabit  turtur  ab  nlmo.  Nor  shall  the  turtle  dove  cease  to  coo  from  the  lofty  elm. 
Virg. —  Viciorem  vidce  succi'ibuisse  queror,  I  complain  that  the  victor  has 
yielded  to  the  vanquished.  Ovid.  Se  a  senibus  audisse  dicebant,  Thev  said 
that  they  had  heard  (it)  from  the  old  men.  Cic.  Audiet  cWes  iicnisse /eiTum 
jurentus.  The  vouth  will  hear  that  the  citizens  have  whetted  the  sword.  Hor. — 
"Ntgat  st'se  rerbum  esse  factilrum,  He  declares  that  he  is  not  about  to  speak. 
Cic.  Postquam  audierat  nan  datum  !ri  filio  uxoi'em  sico,  After  he  had  heard 
that  a  wife  would  not  be  given  to  his  son.  Ter.  Semper  existlmabitis  nihil 
horum  ros  visuros  fore,  You  will  always  suppose  that  you  are  to  see  none  of 
these  things.  Cic. 

Remark  1.  (a.)  The  present  and  perfect  infinitives  are  sometimes  called  re- 
spectively the  infinitives  of  incomplete  and  of  comjAeted  action.  The  present  in- 
finitive, however,  is  sometimes  used  to  denote  a  completed  action.  This  is  the 
usual  construction  with  memfni ;  but  in  such  case  the  speaker  transfers  him- 
self to  the  past,  and  the  expression  denotes  rather  a  recollection  of  the  pro- 
gress than  of  the  completion  of  the  action ;  as,  Hoc  me  memini  dlcere,  I  remem- 
ber my  sayinf/  this.  Cic.  Teucrum  memini  S'ldona  venire,  I  remember  Teucer's 
comiiig  to  S'idon.  Virg.  So  with  mimdrid  teneo.  Cic.  Phil.  8,  10.  Scrlbit  also 
is  construed  like  meniinit;  as,  Cic.  Off.  3,  2:  and  after  the  same  analogy,  and 
for  the  sake  of  vivid  expression  Cicero  says,  M.  Maximum  acceplmus  jatiZe 
celare,  tacere,  disslmulare,  etc.,  though  speaking  of  things  which  lie  had  not 
witnessed  himself.  So,  also,  with  re  cor  dor ; — Recordor  lonf/e  omnibus  iinum  an- 
teferre  Deinosthenem.  Cic.  When  the  action  is  spoken  of  simply  as  a  fact,  the 
perfect  infinitive  is  used  with  memini ;  as,  Memimstis  me  tta  distrlbuisse  causani. 
Cic. 

(6.)  The  passive  voice  having  no  simple  form  for  expressing  the  completed 
state  of  sufltering  makes  use  of  the  combination  of  the  perfect  participle  with 
esse ;  as,  dmdtus  esse,  to  have  been  loved.  When  thus  combined  esse  loses  its 
own  signification  of  a  continued  state,  and  when  this  state  is  to  be  expressed, 
another  infinitive  must  be  chosen;  as,  Constrictam  jam  horum  conscientid  teneri 
conjUrationem  tuam  non  irides  f  Cic.  Sometimes,  however,  when  no  ambiguity- 
can  arise,  esse  in  the  usual  combination  retains  its  original  meaning;  as,  Ajmd 
PlaU'mem  est,  omnem  morem  Ldcedcemoniorum  inflammatum  esse  cujkdiidte  vin- 
cendi.  Id.  Here  infiammdtum  esse  expresses  a  continued  or  habitual  state. — 
Fuisse  with  the  perfect  participle  denotes  a  state  completed  previous  to  a  certain 
past  time ;  as,  Jubet  bdno  dnimo  esse ;  sopitum  fuisse  regem  sUbito  ictu.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  To  express  the  result  of  an  action  rather  than  its  progress,  the  per- 
fect infinitive  is  sometimes  used  instead  of  the  pi'esent,  especially  after  satis 
hdbeo,  satis  mihi  est,  pudet,  contentus  sum,  melius  erit,  volo  or  a  verb  of  equivalent 
meaning;  as,  Bacchdtur  rates,  magmmn  si  pectdre  possit  excussisse  deum.  Virg. 
Quiim  illam  nemo  relit  attigisse.  Plin.  The  poets  use  the  infinitive  perfect  where 
we  should  expect  a  prfesent;  as,  Tendentes  Felion  impdsuisse  Olymjio.  Hor. 

Rem.  3.  The  present  infinitive  is  also  sometimes  used  for  the  future,  espe- 
cially when  the  verb  has  no  future ;  as,  Desine  fata  deum  flecti  sperdre,  Cease 
to  hope  that  the  fates  of  the  gods  will  be  changed.  Virg.  Progeniem  Trojdno 
a  sanguine  duci  audierat.  Id.  Cras  mihi  argentum  dare  dixit,  i.  e.  se  ddturum 
esse.  Ter.   Cdto  qffirmat  se  vivo  ilium  non  triumphare.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  The  infinitive  future  active  is  formed  by  a  combination  of  the 
participle  future  active  with  esse;  as,  dmdturus  esse;  the  infinitive  future  pas- 
sive by  a  combination  of  the  supine  in  vm  with  iri ;  as,  dmdtum  iri.  These 
future  infinitives  denote  an  action  or  state  as  continuing.  The  participle  in 
rws,  which  properly  expresses  intention  (see  ^  162,  14),  takes  also  the  infinitive 
/ii/«.s;>e  to  express  a  past  intention;  as,  Scio  te  scnptiirum  Juisse,  I  know  that 


284  SYNTAX. INFINITIES    MOOD.  §  269. 

yon  have  had  the  intention  to  write,  whence  it  was  an  easy  transition  to  the 
sense,  '  yoti  would  have  written,'  in  conditional  sentences,  when  the  condition 
is  not  fulfilled  This  infinitive  is  used  especially  m  the  apodosis  of  hypotheti- 
cal sentences,  where  in  direct  speech  the  pluperfect  subjunctive  would  be 
used  (cf.  (j  162,  14,  R.  3.);  as,  Eiiamsi  ohtemjyerassei  aitsjndis,  idem  eveutiirum 
fuisse  puto.  Cic.  In  like  manner  the  infinitive  future  with  esse  is  used  in  the 
apodosis  of  hypothetical  sentences  instead  of  the  imperfect  subjunctive ;  as, 
Libertus,  nisi  jur asset,  scelus  se  facturum  (esse)  arbitraodtur.  Id. 

(b.)  Instead  of  the  future  infinitive,  in  both  voices,  y*j//Mra7»  esse  or  j^e, 
followed  by  ut  and  the  subjunctive,  is  often  used ;  the  present  and  imperfect 
subjunctive,  in  such  cases,  denoting  an  unfinished,  the  perfect  and  pluperfect 
a  finished,  future  action ;  as,  Numquam  putavi  fore,  ut  supplex  ad  ie  venirem, 
I  never  supposed  (that  it  would  happen)  that  I  should  come  a  suppliant  to  you. 
Cic.  Susjncor  fore,  ut  infringatur  nOminvm  improbitas.  Id.  Credibnm  fore,  ut 
epistdlam  scripsisses. — So,  also,  in  the  passive  for  a  continued  state  of  future 
suffering  the  present  and  imperfect  are  used;  as.  Credo  fore,  ut  epistdlam  scri- 
batur,  and,  Credebam  fore,  ut  epistdla  scrtberetur.  But  to  express  a  completed 
state  in  future  time  the  perfect  participle  is  employed ;  as,  Quos  spero  brevi 
tenqydre  tecum  copulatos  fore.  Cic.  Quod  videret  nomine  pads  bellum  involutum 
fore.  Id.  This  construction  is  necessarily  used,  when  the  verb  has  either  no 
future  active  participle,  or  no  supine ;  as,  in  such  case,  the  regular  future  infin- 
itive cannot  be  fonned ;  as,  Spero  fore  ut  sdpias. — Fore  is  found  in  two  pas- 
sages pleonastically  joined  with  the  future  participle  active,  viz.  Te  ad  me 
fore  venturum.  Cic.  Att.  5,  21 :  and  Quum  sendtus  censeret — libenter  facttiros 
fore.  Liv.  6,  42. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  periphrastic  infinitive  formed  by  the  future  active  partici- 
ple with  fuisse,  denotes  a  future  action  contingent  upon  a  condition  which  was 
not  fulfilled;  and,  in  the  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  corresponds  to  the 
jiluperfect  subjunctive;  ns,  An  censes  me  tantos  Juboves  suscepturum  fuisse,  si 
tisdem  finibus  gloriam  meam  quibus  v'ltam  essem  terminaturus  f  Do  you  think 
that  I  should  have  undertaken  so  great  labore  if,  etc.  Cic.  Ut  perspicuum  sit 
omnibus,  nisi  tanta  dcerbttas  injuricB  fuissei,  numquam  illos  in  eum  Ucum  progres- 
siiros  fuisse,.. ..that  they  never  would  have  come  into  that  place.  Id.^ 

(6.)  Futui'um  fuisse  \sii\i  ut  QXidi  the  imperfect  subjunctive  passive,  corres- 
ponds to  the  infinitive  fuisse  with  the  future  participle  active  in  a  conditional 
proposition ;  as,  Nisi  nundi  essent  alldti,  existimdbani  plerique  f  uturum  fuisse, 
ut  oppidum  amitteretur,...that  the  town  would  have  been  lost.  Coes. 

(c.)  The  participle  future  passive  cannot  be  used  to  form  an  infinitive  future 
passive,  since  it  always  retains  the  meaning  of  necessity,  and  in  this  sense  has 
three  regular  infinitives,  dmandum  esse,  dmandum  fuisse,  and  dmandum  fore ; 
as,  Instare  hiemem,  aut  sub  peUibus  habendos  mllites  fore,  aut  difi'erendum 
esse  171  (jestdlem  bellum.  Liv. 

Rem.  6.  In  the  apodosis  of  a  conditional  sentence,  the  perfect  infinitive, 
like  the  past  tenses  of  the  indicative,  (see  §  259,  R.  4.),  sometimes  coiTCsponds 
to  the  pluperfect  subjunctive;  as,  (Dixit)  sibi  vita ni  fiVue  suu  cdriorem  tiiisse, 
$i  JibertB  ac  pOdicce  vlvere  Ucltum  fuisset,  (He  said)  that  the  life  of  his  daughter 
had  been  deaier  to  him  than  his  own,  if  it  had  been  pennitted....  Liv.  This 
use  of  the  perfect  infinitive  is  necessary,  when  the  verb  has  no  future  partici- 
ple; as,  Eqwidem  Pldtonem  exisUmo,  si  genus  fdrenst  dlcendi  tractdre  'ccluisset, 
ffrdnssime  et  cdpiosissime  potuisse  dicere, — would  have  been  able  to  speak.  Cic. 

§  369*  The  infinitive  may  be  regarded  either  as  a  verb  or  as  an  ab- 
stract norm,  (a.)  As  a  verb  it  is  used  either  indefinitely  (§  143,  4),  or  with  a 
subject  of  its  own,  which  is  put  in  the  accusative,  (§  239).  But  the  mfinitive 
passive  of  neuter  and  sometimes  of  active  verbs,  like  the  third  person  singular 


subject  in  the  nominative.   See  \  209,  B.  5. 


§  2G9.  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE   MOOD.  285 

(b.)  As  a  noun,  the  infinitive,  either  alone  or  with  a  subject-accusative,has 
two  case?,  the  nominative  and  the  accusative,  and  is  accordingly  used  either 
as  the  subject  or  the  object  of  a  verb. 

THE    INFINITIVE    AS    THE    SUBJECT    OF    A    VERB. 

The  infinitive,  eitlier  with  or  without  a   subject-accusative, 

may  be  the  subject  of  a  verb ;  as, 

Ad  remjMblUnm  ijertlnet  me  consen^ari.  It  concerns  the  state  that  I  should 
be  preserveil.  Cic.  Ninnquam  est  utile  peccare.  To  do  wrong  is  never  useful.  Id. 
Maj'us  dcdecus  est  parta  amittere  quum  omnlno  non  paravisse.  Sail.  In  the  first 
example  conservaH  with  its  subject  accusative  me  is  the  subject  of  pertiiietj 
and  is  equivalent  to  'ray  preservation':  in  the  second,  peccdve  is  the  subject 
of  est  utile.  See  §  202,  2,  and  III.  R.  2. 

Remark  1.  A  general  truth  may  be  expressed  by  the  infinitive  without  a 
subject;  &?i,  Fdcinus  est  vincire  cJfewj  Edmanum,  To  bind  a  Roman  citizen,  or, 
that  one  should  bind  a  Roman  citizen,  is  a  crime.  But  in  such  case  the  verb 
esse  and  verbs  denoting  to  ajypear,  to  be  considered  or  called  {^  210,  R.  3.),  re- 
quire the  noun  or  adjective  of  the  predicate  to  agree  with  the  implied  subject 
in  the  accusative;  ^%  ^Iquum  e^t  pendtis  veninm  poscentem  reddere  rwsus. 
Hor.    Atticus  maximum  aistlmdvit  quiestum,  memorem  gratunif^Me  cognosci.  Nep. 

Note.  The  indefinite  pronoun  dllquem  or  dliquos  may  in  such  cases  be  sup- 
plied, and  the  same  indefiniteness  may  be  expressed  by  te  or  nos,  cf.  §  209,  R.  7; 
but  it  is  still  more  frequently  expressed  by  the  infinitive  passive.  Hence  the 
sentence  Fthinus  est  vinclre  clvem  Romdmim,  may  also  be  expressed  by  Fdiitius 
est  vinciri  civem  Rdmdnum.  So,  Quum  vidirent  de  eOrum  vlrtute  non  desperari. 
Nep. — Tlie  impersonal  verbs  licet,  decei,  oiMvtet,  djms  est,  and  necesse  est,  when 
there  is  no  definite  subje<?t,  are  joined  with  the  infinitive  active  alone;  but 
when  there  is  a  subject-accusative,  they  are  connected  with  the  passive  con- 
struction ;  as,  act.  licet  hoc  facere ;  decei  specimen cdpere  ex  hac  re ;  pass.  Ucei 
hoc  fip.ri;  decet  specimen  cdpL 

Rem.  2.  The  infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject  accusative,  is  often  the 
subject  of  a  proposition,  when  the  substantive  verb  with  a  noun,  a  neuter  ad- 
jective, or  an  impersonal  verb  forms  the  predicate.  Of  tliis  kind  are  Justicm, 
cequum,  vertsimile,  consentdneum,  dpertum — est,  erat,  etc.,  necesse  est,  6jms  est ; — 
appdret,  constat,  convenit,  decet,  licet,  dportet ;  intellifjitur,  j^erspicltm',  etc. ;  as, 
Cui  verba  dare  difficile  est.  Ter.  Mendacem  memorem  esse  6p)Qvtet.  Quint. 
Legem  brevem  esse  ()/9or<e<.  Sen.  Constat  prdfecto' ad  sulutem  civium  inventas 
esse  leges.  Cic.  Non  enim  me  hoc  jam  dicere  pUdebit.  Id.  See  §  209,  R.  3, 
(5.),  (a.) 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  may  itself  be  the  subject  of  an  infinitive ;  as.  Audio 
non  licere  cuiquam  in  nave  cdpillos  deponere.  Ter. 

Rem.  4.  The  infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject  accusative,  may  also  be 
the  predicate  nominative;  as,  Im^Une  qumlibet  facere  id  est  regem  esse.  Sail. 
In  this  sentence  fdcSre  is  the  subject,  and  regem  esse  is  the  predicate;  for  id, 
which  only  represents  by  a  kind  of  apposition  the  clause  impune  giccelibet  facere, 
can  be  omitted. 

Rem.  5.  When  the  infinitive  esse,  (or  others  of  similar  meaning,  as,  Jien, 
vlvere,  vitam  degSre,  cedere,  abire,  etc.),  with  a  predicate  adjective  (or  noun),  is 
joined  with  licet,  such  predicate  is  put  in  the  accusative,  ii"  the  subject-accusa- 
tive of  the  infinitive  is  expressed,  and  sometimes,  also,  when  it  is  omitted,  but 
more  frequently,  in  the  latter  case,  the  predicate  adjective  or  noun  is  attracted 
to  the  dative  following  licet;  as,  Ut  eum  liceat  ante  tempus  consiilem  fieri. 
Auct.  ad  Her.  Medios  esse  jam  nx)n  licebit.  Cic.  Si  civi  Romdno  hcet  esse 
GaditSnum.  Id. — Llcuit  Snim  esse  otioso  Themistocli.  Id.  Milii  neglTgenti  esse 
non  licet.  Id.  Sibi  vUam  filUz  sua  cdriorem  fuisse,  si  libera3  ac  pttdicse  vlvere 
6cUum  fuisset  (soil.  ei).  Liv.    So  also  necesse  est  with  the  predicate  in  the 


286  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  §  270. 

dative.  V56is  necesse  est  fortibus  viris  esse.  Liv. — But  Ucet,  dportet,  and  necesse 
est  are  also  joined  with  the  subjunctive  mood,  and  hence  is  derived  the  con- 
struction of  licet  as  a  conjunction.   See  §  263,  2. 

THE    INFINITIVE    AS    THE     OBJECT    OF    A'  VERB. 

§  970.  The  infinitive,  either  with  or  without  a  subject-ac- 
cusative, may  be  the  object  of  a  verb ;  as, 

Hcec  vitare  cupimus,  We  desire  to  avoid  this.  Cic.  Poeias  omnino  non  conor 
attingere,  I  do  not  at  all  attempt  to  read  the  poets.  Id.  Sententiam  valere 
cupiHrunt^  They  desired  that  the  opinion  should  prevail.  Id.  Spi:ro  te  valere, 
I  hope  that  you  are  well.  Id. 

XoTE.  The  infinitive  as  the  object  of  a  verb  supplies  the  place  of  the  accusa- 
tive of  the  </jin^,  and  hence  many  active  verbs  besides  the  infinitive  take  in 
the  active  voice  an  accusative  6i  the  person,  cf.  §  231,  R.  3,  (6.),  and  in  tho 
passive  retain  the  infinitive;  as,  Consules  jubentur  scribtre  exercitum.  lliiros 
adire  vetiti  sunt.    Cf.  §  234, 1. 

Remark  1.  The  infinitive  alone  may  also  depend  upon  an  adjec- 
tive, and  sometimes  upon  a  noun. 

(a.)  It  may  depend  upon  relative  adjectives,  (see  §  213,  R,  1),  which,  by  the 
poets,  are  joined  with  the  mfinitive  instead  of  their  usual  construction  with  the 
genitive  oi  the  genmd,  etc. ;  as,  Cedere  nescius.  Hor.  Avidi  commiUere  pug- 
nam.  Ovid.  Ciipidus  vidrlri.  Id.  Cantdre  periti  Arcades.  Virg.  Callidus  <on- 
dere  furto.  Hor.  Quidliiet  impotens  sjterdre.  Id.  Suiroms  fdcere  inscius.  Varr. 
Insuetus  vera  audlre.  Liv.  Certa  7n6ri.  Virg.  Felicior  unguere  tela.  Virg. 
So,  Audax  omnia pei-peii.  Resolute  to  endure  everj'  thing.  Hor.  Sollers  omdre 
Cypassis,  Skilful  to  adorn.  Ovid.  Semes  solvere  nodum.  Hor.  Indocllis  patir- 
periem  pdti.  Id.    Non  lenis  fdta  recludere.  Id.    See  §  213,  R.  4,  (1.) 

(6.)  It  may  also  depend  upon  adjectives  signifying  usefulness,  Jitness,  etc., 
■which  are  sometimes  by  the  poets  construed  with  the  infinitive  instead  of  the 
dative;  as,  {T'd)ia)  nspirare  et  adesse  chdns  erat  utilis.  Hor.  uEias  mollis  et 
apta  regi.  Ovid.  Fons  etiam  rlvo  dare  ndmen  idoueus.  Hor.  Fruges  consumere 
nati.  Id.  And  after  dignus  and  contenius;  as,  Dignus  amdH.  Vu-g.  Cf.  §  244, 
B.  2,  (6.) 

(c.)  Upon  a  noun;  as,  Tempus  est  hujus  libi-i  fsM(^TQ  flnem,  It  is  time  to 
finish  this  book.  Nep.  Iniit  consilia  reges  tollere.  He  devised  a  plan  to  destroy 
the  kings.  Id.  Ea  erat  confessio  caput  rerutn  Roniain  esse.  Liv.  Cupido  inces- 
serat  J^fhidpiam  invisere.  Curt.  Q^bus  in  otio  vivere  copia  erat.  Sail.  So,  Nee 
mihi  sunt  vires  inimicos  pellere  tectis,  instead  of  pellendis  inimlcis,  or  ad  peUendos 
inimtcos.  Ovid. 

{d.)  If  for  the  infinitives  depending  on  nouns  or  adjectives  other  nouns  were 
substituted,  these  last  would  be  put  in  the  genitive,  dative,  or  ablative ;  and 
hence  such  infinitives  may  perhaps  be  properly  regarded  as  exceptions  to  the 
rule,  that  the  infinitive  has  but  two  cases,  the  nominative  and  the  accusative. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  infinitive  with  the  accusative  sometimes  stands  uncon- 
nected, especially  in  exclamations  and  indignant  interrogations,  where  crediinJe 
est  t  or  verumne  est  f  may  be  supplied ;  as,  Mene  incepto  desistere  viciam  f  That 
I,  vanquished,  should  desist  from  my  tmdertaking  ?  Virg.  Jle  miseimm  !  te  in 
tantas  cerumnas  propter  me  incldisse :  Cic. — But  ut,  also,  with  the  subjunctive, 
either  with  or  without  an  interrogative  particle,  may  be  used  to.  express  a 
question  with  indignation;  as,  FAne  (scil.  patri)  ego  ut  adverser?  Liv.  Tu  ut 
umquam  te  conlgas?  Cic.  ifudicio  ut  drdtor  decimdnum  persequaturV  Id.; 
where  Jieri  pdtest  f  may  be  supplied. 

(b.)  So,  in  the  ordtio  obllqua,  the  words  signifying  said,  saying,  etc.,  are  often 
omitted,  or  implied  in  a  preceding  verb  or  phrase;  as,  Idjdcile  efflci  posse, 
sciL  discU.  Nep.   Quern  signum  daturum  fugientibut  f  Curt. 


§  271.  STNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  287 

Rem.  3.  The  Infinitive  is  sometimes  to  be  supplied;  and  esse  and  fuisse 
with  a  predicate  adjective,  and  also  in  the  compound  forms  of  the  infinitive, 
both  active  and  passive,  are  commonly  omitted,  especially  after  verbs  of  say- 
ing^ thinkmf),  knowing,  and  perceiving ;  as,  Vos  cognovi  fortes.  Sail.  Quern  pul- 
sum  memordd.  Tac, — So,  also,  with  the  infinitive  perfect  passive  when  depend- 
ing  on  volo,  nolo,  cujno,  and^portet ;  as,  AdOlescenti  morevi  gestum  dporiuit.  Ter. 
Quod  jam  prldem  factum  oportuit.  Cic. — Sometimes  in  a  relative  clause  an  in- 
finitive is  to  be  supplied  from  the  finite  verb  of  the  main  proposition ;  as, 
Quos  vdluit  omnes  interfecit,  scil.  interficere.  Ne  illam  quidem  consequuntur, 
qzutin  putant,  grutiam ;  i.  e.  quam  se  consecuturos  pmt'^'iit'  Cic. 

THE  INFINITIVE  WITHOUT  A  SUBJECT-ACCUSATIVE. 

§  STl.     The  infinitive,  without  a  subject-accusative,  is  used  after     . 
verbs  denoting  ability^  obligation,  intention  or  endeavor ;  after  verbs     V* 
signifying  to  begin,  continue,  cease,  abstain,  dare,  fear,  hesitate,  or  be      ^ 
wont;  and  after  the  passive  of  verbs  of  5a?/m^,  believing,  reckoning, 
etc. 

Note  1.  To  these  classes  belong  possum,  queo,  nSqueo,  vdleo,  dcbeo;  euro,  cdglto, 
aScerno,  statue,  constltuo,  instituo,  paro ;  conor,  nltor,  tendo,  contendo,  tento,  maturo, 
prdpSro,  aggrddior,  perscvero, ; — coRpi,  incipio,  pergo,  destno,  desisto,  intermitto,  parco, 
rScuso ;  sSleo,  assuesco,  consuesco,  insuesco  f  audeo,  vSreor,  mStuo,  r^fonnido,  timeo, 
horreo,  duliito ; — audior,  credor,  existimor,  f^ror,  nSgor,nuntior,  per/iibeor,  putur,  trador, 
jubeor,  videor,  and  cogor. 

Note  2.  When  the  preceding  verbs  are  joined  with  esse,  Mheri,  judicari, 
videri,  etc.,  the  predicate  noun  or  adjective  is  put  in  the  nominative;  as,  Sdlet 
trhtis  videri ;  awJe  sapiens  esse ;  cozjnt  miJii  molestus  esse;  debes  esse  diligens; 
pdtest  liber  esse:  and  so  also  meretur,  scit,  didicit  liber  esse. 

Note  3.  The  poets,  in  imitation  of  the  Greeks,  use  the  infinitive  after  fuge, 
aufer,  cave,  parce,  memento ;  pdveo,  refugio,  qurnro,  urgeo,  Idbaro,  dmo,  gaudeo, 
furo,  calleo,  sumo,  initio,  remitto,  pdtior,  Juro,  conjuro,  pugno,  ndtus,  and  some 
other  verbs,  especially  to  denote  a  wish  or  purpose ;  as,  Iniroiit  videre.  Ter. 
Non  te  frangere  persequor.  Hor.  Non  populdre  j^endtes  venimus.  Virg.  In  this 
construction,  the  poets  are  sometimes  imitated  by  the  later  prose  writers. 

Eemakk  1.  ilany  of  the  verbs  above  enumerated,  instead  of  the  infinitive, 
may  be  followed  by  the  subjunctive  with^C,  ne,  etc.;  and  with  some  of  them 
this  is  the  regular  construction;  as,  Senientiam  ne  diceret,  recusdvit.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  The  passives  dlcor,  trddoi',  feror,  narror,  rep^rior,  existimor,  videor, 
etc.,  may  either  be  used  personally,  with  the  infinitive  alone,  or  impersonally, 
followed  by  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive.  Thus  we  may  say.  Mater 
Pausdnice  eo  tempdre  vixisse  dicitur,  or,  Dicltur  eo  tempdre  mdtrem  Pausdnia 
vixisse,  The  mother  of  Pausanias  is  said  to  have  been  living....or.  It  is  said 
that  the  mother  of  Pausanias  was  living....  Nep.  The  former  construction  is 
more  common  especially  with  videor,  see  §  272,  K.  6 ;  but  the  latter  is  frequent 
with  nuntidtur,  and  very  common  with  the  compound  tenses,  trdditum  est, 
proditum  est,  etc.,  and  with  the  participle  future  passive;  as,  credendum  est, 
mtelligendum  est,  etc. ;  as,  Quorum  neminem  tdlem  fuisse  credendum,  etc.  Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  infinitive  without  a  subject  is  used  after  a  verb,  only  when  it 
denotes  an  action  or  state  of  the  subject  of  that  verb. 

Rem.  4.  The  verbs  to  wish  or  desire,  vdlo,  nolo,  mdlo ;  cupio,  opto,  studeo,  have 
a  twofold  constraction: — the  infinitive  without  a  subject-accusative  is  used 
after  thorny  when  the  subject  remains  the  same;  and  when  followed  by  esse, 
hdberi,  etc.,  the  predicate-noun  or  adjective  is  in_  the  nominative; — but  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  used  when  the  subject  is  changed,  or  when  a 
reflexive  pronoun  of  the  same  person  follows.  We  say,  therefore,  vdlo  eruditus 
filri,  and  on  the  other  hand,  v6lo  te  eruditum  firi,  and  volo  me  erudltum  firu 
So,  Vdlo  18  €Me,  qu»m  iu  me  ess«  vUuisti.  Cic.   C^pio  me  esse  eUmmt^m,  aiqno— 


288  SYNTAX.— INFINITIVE   MOOD.  §  272. 

me  non  dissdlSium  videri.  Id. ;  or,  omitting  the  pronoun,  ciipio  esse  clemen?  nee 
dissolntns  vtderi. — Omnis  hdmines  qui  sese  student  prcestdre  cttens  dnimdUbus^ 
etc.  Sail. 

Note  4.  Vdio  is  used  with  the  present  infinitive  passive;  as,  Me  dmari  rdlo, 
I  wish  to  be  beloved;  hoc  velim  intelliyi,  I  wish  this  to  be  understood;  and  also 
with  the  infinitive  perfect  passive  to  denote  the  ea^er  desire  that  something 
should  be  instantly  accomplished;  as,  Legdti  quod  ernnt  appeUdti  superbius, 
Cdntiihum  patres  vestri — exstinctum  esse  vdluerunt.  Cic;  but  it  occurs  most 
frequently  \^-ith  the  omission  of  esse;  as,  hoc  factum  v6lo;  nunc  illos  commonl- 
tos  velim :  so,  patriam  exstinctam  cupU. 

Note  5.  The  nominative  with  the  infinitive  after  verbs  .of  saying,  perceiv- 
ing, etc.  (§  272),  is  rare  even  in  poetry,  and  is  an  imitation  of  the  Greek  idiom, 
which  requires  the  nominative  with  the  infinitive  when  the  same  subject  re- 
mains; as,  Phuselus  ille,  quern  videiis,  hospites,  ait  fnisse  ndvium  celerrimus. 
Catull,  Quia  retulit  Ajcug  esse  Jovis  nepos,  instead  of  se  esse  Juris  nepotem. 
Ovid.     Stnsit  mediqs  delapsus  in  hosies,  instead  of  se  delapsum  esse.  Virg. 

THE    INFINITIVE    WITH    A    SUB  JE  C  T- A  U  CUS  ATI  VE. 

§  2T2,  The  infinitive  with,  a  subject-accusative  follows  verbs 
of  saying,  thinking,  knowing,  perceiving,  and  the  like ;  as, 

Videbat,  id  non  posse  Jieri,  He  saw  that  that  could  not  be  done.  Nep.  Sentit 
drUmus,  se  sua  vi,  non  dliend,  mOven.  Cic.  Audivi  te  venire.  Me  in  ejus  jidfes- 
tdte  dixi  /oi-e.  Id.  Affirmant  mllitum  jdcere  amnios.  Liv.  Scepe  venit  ad  aures 
meas,  te  istnd  nimis  cribro  die  ere.  Cic.  Earn  pugnam  ad  Perusiam  pugndtam 
{esse),  quidam  auctOres  sunt.  Liv. 

Note  1.  This  rule  includes  all  such  verbs  and  phrases  as  denote  the  exercise  of  the 
external  senses  and  intellectual  faculties,  or  the  communication  of  thought  to  others; 
as,  audio,  vlfien,  aeniiu,  anlmadverto,  tognoaco,  inteltigo,  perctpio.  disco,  scio,  nescio, 
ceiufo,  spcro.  despSro^  fCfi"l/o,  judlco,  credo,  arbitror,  puto,upinor,  duco.  statue,  mUmtni, 
ricordor,  obtiriscor  Opinio  tst,  spfs  est.  bXa:.; — dtro,  trddo,  prudo,  scribo,  refiro,  narro, 
nunlio,  cnnfimw,  nBgo,  ostendo,  indico,  dSceo,  certiurein  fado,  dSmonstro,  pSrhtbeo, 
*pr5mitto,  polllreoi ,  spondee,  etc. ;  but  with  most  of  these  a  diflferent  construction  often 
occurs.    See  f  273 

Note  2.  The  propositions,  whose  subjects  are  thus  put  in  the  accusative  and  their 
verbs  in  the  infinitive,  are  those  which  are  directly  dependent  on  the  verbs  of  saying 
and  perceiving.  Respecting  the  clauses  inserted  in  such  dependent  propositions,  see 
i  266,  1. 

Note  3.  (a.)  WTien -a  relative  clause  inserted  in  a  proposition  containing 
the  accu.sative  with  the  infinitive,  has  the  same  verb  as  the  proposition  in 
which  it  is  inserted,  but  such  verb  is  not  repeated,  the  noun  which  is  the  sub- 
ject of  the  relative  clau.«e  is  also  put  by  attraction  in  the  accusative ;  as,  Te 
susjncor  eisdem  rebus,  quibus  me  ipsum,  comvioveri.  If  the  verb  is  expi-essed 
v:e  mn?^t  say,  eisdem  irbus  co?7im6ciri,  qmbus  {i:go)  ipse  commoveor.  So,  also, 
in  inserted  relative  clauses  \vhere  the  verb,  if  expressed,  would  be  in  the  sub- 
junctive, (see  ^  266,  2.);  as,  (  Verres)  aitbat  se  taniidem  cestimasse,  quanii  Sacer- 
dotem,  for  quanti  Sdcerdos  cestimasset.  Cic.  Cbnfitetur  se  in  ed  parte  Juisse  qui 
te,  qua  virum  omni  laude  dignum  patrem  tuum.  *Id. 

{b.)  The  same  is  the  case  with  the  particle  quam  after  a  comparative,  see 
^  256,  R.  5,  (a.)     But  sometimes  when  quain  connects  a  clause  to  a  preceding 

})roposition  containing  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  the  same  construction 
bllows  that  precedes  quajn,  even  when  tlie  verb  of  the  latter  clause  is  express- 
ed; a5,  Nonne  tibi  affirmdvi  quidvis  me  pOtius  perpessHi-um,  qxmm  ex  Itdlid  ad 
beUum  civile  me  exiturumf  instead  of  quam  exirein  or  quam  ut  exirem.  Cic. 

(c.)  In  long  speeches  in  the  ordtio  obtiqua,  relative  clauses,  having  a  verb 
of  their  own  which  should  properly  be  in  the  subjunctive,  are  put  in  the  ac- 
cusative with  the  infinitive,  if  the  relative  clause'  is  not  subordinate  to  the  one 
with  the  infinitive,  and  which  is  governed  by  a  verb  of  saying  or  perceiving, 


§  272,  SYNTAX.— INFINITIVE    MOOD.  289 

but  is  rather  coordinate  with  it;  in  which  case  the  relative  is  equivalent  to  the 
demonstrative  with  et ;  as.  Nam  illdrum  urbem  ut  propugnaculum  oppdsitum  esse 
harbdris,  apud  quam  jam  bis  classes  regias  fecisse  naufrdyium ;  for  et  Cqmd  earn 
jam  bis,  etc. — In  Livy  and  Tacitus  the  same  construction  sometimes  occurs 
even  after  conjunctions ;  as  after  quum  in  the  sense  of  *  while,'  see  §  263, 5,  R.  3 ; 
after  quamquam  on  account  of  its  absolute  signification,  see  §  198,  4,  and  after 
quia. 

Note  4.  The  personal  pronouns,  which,  with  the  other  moods,  are  expressed 
only  wlien  they  are  emphatic,  must  be  always  expressed  in  the  accusntive 
with  the  infinitive.  The  verbs  'to  promise'  and  'to  hope'  are  in  English 
usually  joined  with  the  infinitive  present  without  a  pronoun,  but  in  Latin  not 
only  is  the  pronoun  expressed,  but  the  infinitive  which  follows  is  in  the  future; 
as,  '  He  promised  to  come,'  is  in  Latin,  Promlsit  se  venturum  (scil.  esse,  see 
§  270,  R.  3).  'But  the  infinitive  present  sometimes  occurs  after  these  verbs; 
as,  Pollicentur  obsides  dure,  Cses.  B.  G.  4,  21 ;  and  the  pronoun  is  occasionally 
omitted,  see  §  239,  R.  2  and  3. 

Remark  1.  When  ambi,^uity  wo\ild  arise  from  the  subject  and  the  object 
of  the  verb  being  both  in  tne  accusative,  the  passive  infinitive  is  substituted 
for  the  active,  by  which  means  the  subject  is  put  in  the  ablative,  or  in  the 
accusative  with  per ;  as,  Ne  fando  quidem  audltum  est,  crocddllum  vidldium  esse 
ab  jEgyptio ;  instead  of  ^gyptiura  crdcdd'dum  violasse.  Cic. 

Rem.  2.  After  verbs  of  saying,  thinking,  etc.,  the  conjunction  that  is  omitted 
m  translating  from  English  into  Latin,  and  the  subject  of  the  dependent  clause 
is  put  in  the  accusative,  and  its  verb  in  the  infinitive. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  with  the  infinitive  is  sometimes  rendered  into  Eng- 
lish bj'  a  similar  fonn;  as.  Si  vis  me  flere.  If  you  wish  me  to  loeep.  Hor.;  but 
the  dependent  clause  is  more  frequently  connected  to  the  verb  of  saying,  etc., 
by  the  conjunction  that,  and  the  infinitive  translated  by  the  indicative  or  po- 
tential mood ;  as,  Seniimus  nivem  esse  albam,  We  perceive  that  snaio  is  white. 
Cic.  Sometimes  the  dependent  clause  is  annexed  to  the  other  without  the 
conjunction;  as,  Credunt  se  negligi,  They  think  they  are  neglected.  Ter. 

Rem.  4.  A  present  infinitive  con-esponds  to  the  imperfect  indicative,  when 
with  an  accusative  it  follows  a  preterite  tense ;  as.  Dixit  CkBsdrem  venire.  He 
said  that  Cassar  was  coming.  Caes.  In  like  manner  the  perfect  infinitive  with 
an  accusative  after  a  preterite  tense  corresponds  to  the  pluperfect  indicative; 
as.  Dixit  Cuesdrem  venisse,  He  said  that  Caesar  had  come.   See  §  268,  2. 

RE»r.  5.  The  present  infinitive,  after  verbs  of  sense,  is  often  equivalent  to 
the  present  participle;  as,  Surgere  videt  Imam.  He  sees  the  moon  (to  rise) 
rising.  Virg.  Arma  riitilare  vident.  Id.  Videois  colliicere  faces.  Id.  Nee 
Zephgros  aiiais  spirave'^  Do  you  not  hear  the  zephyrs  blowing?  Id.  Scepe  hoc 
mdjores  ndtu  dlcere  audivi.  Cic.  The  two  constructions  are  sometimes  united; 
as,  Medium  video  discedere  caelum,  palantesgue  p6lo  Stellas.  Virg. 

Rem.  6.  The  subject-accusative  after  verbs  of  saying,  showing,  and  believing; 
as,  d'ico,  nego,  trddo,  fero,  memdro,  narro,  nuntio,  perhibeo,  prodo,  scr'ibo,  de- 
monstro,  ostendo,  argue,  credo,  jmto,  existimo,  and  the  like,  and  also  after  ji'ibeo, 
veto,  and  pruhibeo,  is  regarded  also  as  the  accusative  of  the  object  after  these 
verbs ;  and  hence  such  verbs  are  used  also  in  the  passive,  the  accusative  of  tiie 
active  voice  becoming,  as  usual,  the  nominative  of  the  passive.  This  is  espe- 
cially the  case  when  their  subject  is  indefinite;  as,  Dicunt  (they  or  people  say) 
vie  virum  prdbum  esse,  or  dlcor  vir  2>rvbus  esse.  So,  Vetdmur  hoc  fdcere,  instead 
of,  Nos  hoc  fdcere  vetant.  Instead  also  of  the  impersonal  videtur  (it  appears) 
followed  by  the  infinitive  with  its  subject-accusative,  it  is  common  to  say 
personally,  videor,  videris^  etc.,  with  the  infinitive;  as,  videor  errasse,  it  appears 
that  I  have  erred. 

S5 


?90  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  §  273 

INFINITIVE    AND    SUBJUNCTIVE    CLAUSES.- 

§  S73.     When  the  particle  tliat^  in  English,  introduces  a 
^^  ,  clause  denoting  a  purpose,  object,  or  result,  it  is  a  sign  of  the 
^    fiubjunctive  in  Latin,  and  is  to  be  expressed  by  ut,  etc. ;  but 
otherwise  it  is  usually  the  sign  of  the  accusative  >vith  the  infini- 
tive.   Cf.  §§  262  and  272. 

1.^  (a.)  Verbs  of  endeavoring  and  resolving  take  after  them  the  in- 
finitive and  more  rarely  the  subjunctive,  when  the  subject  remains 
the  same;  but  when  the  subject  is  changed,  they  take  the  subjunc- 
tive only. 

«  Note  1.   Such  are  statuo,  eonsfituo.  dScemo,  tento,  labdro,  paro,  midUor,  euro,  nltor, 

tontendo,  consilium  capio,  dnir/iutn  or  in  dntmum  induco.  Cf.  4  271,  N.  1.  After  Spg- 
ram  do,  I  exert  myself,  id.  hoc,  or  illud  ago,  I  endeavor,  nthil  antlquius  hdbeo  or  diieo 
quam,  nothing  is  of  more  importance  to  me,  and  video  for  euro,  the  subjunctive  is  al- 
most exclusively  used. 

(&.)  Verbs  of  effecting  are  construed  with  ut  or  ne  and  the  sub- 
junctive. 

Note  2.  Such  are  fdcio,  eficio,  perficio.  ivinco,  pervinco,  tmpetro,  assSqvor,  consi' 
quor,  etc.  But  facire  '  to  effect '  occurs  in  Cic.  Brut.  38,  in  connection  with  the  accusa>- 
tire  and  infinitive  passive. 

Note  3.  Fiicio  with  ut  is  also  used  as  a  periphrasis  for  the  indicative;  as, 
Invitus  qmdem  feci,  ut  L.  FIdminium  e  sendtu  ejicerem,  for  invitus  eject.  Cic. — 
^      '  '       ■  ...--.  J ,  j^j^g  ^g  accusative  with 

takes  also  the  subjunctive, 
with  a  present  or  perfect 
participle;  as,  Lcelium  et  Sclpionem  f acimus 'admirantes.  Cic.    In  the  passive 
the  accusative  also  with  the  infinitive  is  found,  there  being  no  present  par- 
ticiple ;  as,  Isocmtem  Plato  laudari  f  acit  a  Socrdie.  Cic. 

2.   Verbs  signifying  to  request,  to  demand,  to  admonisJi,  to  advise,  to 
..^   encourage,  to  command,  and  the  like,  both  when  the  subject  remains 
the  same  and  when  it  is  changed,  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive 
with  ut  or  ne,  and  only  rarely  by  the  infinitive. 

Note  4.  (a.)  Such  are  rSgo,  5ro,  pricor,  pito;  posco,  postulo,  Jiaglto;  mSneo,  ad- 
mdruo,  commoneo,  hortor,  cohortor,  exhortor,  su&deo,  persuSdeo,  tnstUuo.  (I  instruct), 
impello,  cogo,  mando,  praL$cribo,  idlco,  dSeemo,  ISgem  do,  censeo,  perpello,  excito,  in- 
ato,  impSro,  etc. ;  as,  Te  twn  hortor  sSlum,  sed  itiam  oro,  ut  tota  mente  in  rempubticam 
incumbas.  Cic. 

{h.)  In  the  poets  and  later  prose  writers  the  infinitive  more  firequently  fol- 
lows those  verbs  without  any  difference  of  meaning.  The  poets  even  use  the 
infinitive  to  express  a  purpose;  as,  Proteus  pecus  egit  altos  vis  ere  monies.  Hor. 

(v.)  Nuntio,  scrlbo,  initio,  and  even  dice,  are  followed  by  the  subjunctive, 
when  they  imply  an  injunction  or  intention  that  something  should  be  done; 
as,  Ehec  ut  facias,  scribo.  Cic. 

(d.)  Jubeo  and  veto  commonly  take  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  but 
sometimes  the  subjunctive  with  or  rarely  without  ut.  Sometimes,  with  the 
infinitive,  the  person  to  whom  the  command  is  given  is  omitted,  especially 
when  it  is  either  obvious  from  the  nature  of  the  command  or  indefiHite :  as, 
Castra  mun'ire  jfibet,  ^cW.  miUies.  Cse?.  Lex  recte  facer e  jubtl,  sell,  homines. 
Cic.  With  the  subjunctive  the  dative  of  the  person  sometimes  foUows  jQbeo  ; 
as,  Briiiinnico  j'ussit,  exsurqeret.  Tac. — Impero  is  sometimes  followed  by  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive  passive ;  and  so  also  is  ctnseo,  I  vote,  or,  I  ordain. 
The  latter  is  often  construed  with  the  participle  in  dus  with  tae  expressed  <w 
understood;  as,  Cartlidgincm  delendam  censea. 


J 


§  273.  SYNTAX. INFINITIVE    MOOD.  291 

(e.)  Mdneo  find  admdneo,  *  I  remind,' and  ^erswarfeo,  'I  convince,'  take  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive. 

3.  (rt.)  In  the  oratio  obHrjua,  the  construction  of  the  accusative  with  *H 
the  infinitive,  is  exchanged  for  that  of  the  subjunctive,  to  denote  pos- 
sibility, liberty,  duty,  etc. ;  as, 

Vircjinius  unum  Ap.  Claudium  legum  eacpertem  esse  aiehat :  respicerent  tribunal 
lidmin'es  castellum  07nnium  scelerum.  Liv. 

(6.)  On  the  contrary,  when  the  subjunctive  has  been  used  after  a  verb  of 
requesting,  commanding,  etc.,  the  construction  often  passes  into  that  of  tlie 
accusative  with  the  infinitive ;  the  verb  of  saying  being  considered  as  implied 
in  the  verb  of  requesting,  etc. ;  as,  Orcibat  ne  se  ut  parricidam  llberum  aversa- 
rentur:  sibi  vitam  film  sua  cdriorem  fuisse,  si....  Liv.    Cf.  ^  270,  R.  2,  (6.) 

4.  (a.)  Verbs  which  denote  willingness,  unwillingness,  permission^ 
and  necessity,  commonly  take  the  infinitive,  or  the  accusative  with  the 
infinitive,  but  sometimes  the  subjunctive. 

Note  5.  Such  are  vSlo,  nolo.,  malo,  opto,  permitto,  p&tior,  s^no,  concSdo,  licet,  prSht" 
beo,  Qportet,  and  nScesse  est.  Cf.  §  271,  R.  4.  Vdlo  ut  is  used  to  express  a  strong  em- 
phasis.    Nolo  is  not  construed  with  the  subjunctive. 

{b.)  An  infinitive  passive  without  a  subject  is  sometimes  used  with  dportei; 
as,  Non  dportuit  relictas,  scil.  esse  andllas.  Ter.  Ut  ut  erat,  mansum  tdmen 
dportuit,  scil.  esse.  Id.    JVon  jfutdbant  de  tali  vivo  susplcionibus  dpoi'tere  judicari. 

(c.)  Some  other  verbs  which  regularly  take  the  accusative  with  the  infini- 
tive after  them,  are  occasionally  followed  by  the  subjunctive. 

5.  Quod, '  that,*  commonly  with  the  indicative,  introduces  a  sub- 
stantive clause  containing  the  explanation  or  ground  of  the  predicate 
or  of  some  other  word  in  the  principal  clause. 

Remark.  The  subjunctive  follows  quod  in  those  cases  only  in  which  the 
clause  expresses  the  view  or  sentiment  of  some  other  person  than  the  writer 
or  speaker.   Cf.  §  266,  3. 

Quod  is  used : — 

(1.)  After  such  expressions  as  bene,  male,  prudenter  Jacio ;  bine,  male  jit ; 
evenit,  accidit,  and  the  like ;  prcetereo,  mitto ;  and  generally  adde,  accedit,  etc. ; 
as,  Bene  facts,  quod  me  adjuvas. 

(2.)  To  introduce  the  explanation  of  a  noun,  pronoun,  or  pronominal  adverb 
in  the  principal  clause ;  a,s,  Magnum  beneflcium  est  ndturce,  quod  necesse  es» 
m^ri. 

(3.)  After  verbs  signifying  an  <7/fecfo'ono/'<7ie  wzwc?,  and  the  outward  expres- 
sion of  such  feeling;  and  also  after  verbs  of  pr-aising,  censuring,  accusing,  and 
thanking. 

Note  6.  Such  are  gaudeo,  dSlector,  gratum,  or  jucundum  est  mVii,  angor,  dSleo,  agre, 
mo'este,  or  grdviter  fSro,  succenseo,  jxzn'itet,  mlror,  admtror^  glorior,^ gratulor,  gratias 
ago,  quSror,  in/lignor,  and  others  of  similar  meaning;  as,  Sclpio  sr^pe  querSbatur,  quod 
omnibus  in  rSbiis  humliies  diligentiures  essent,  ut,  etc.  Cic.  Gaudeo  quod  te  inter- 
pella-vi.  Id.  Quod  splratis,  quod  vocem  mittitis,  quod  formas  humhium  hdbStis,  indig- 
nantur.  Liv.  Cdto  miriri  se  aiebat,  quod  non  rlderet  haruspex,  hdrusptcem  quum  vlds- 
ret.  Cic. 

Note  7.  After  those  verbs  which  express  the  feeling  of  joy,  grief,  etc.;  as,  ■ 
aaudeo,  dolen,  mlror,   the  accusative  with  the  infinitive   is   more  commonly 
iround,  but  those  which  denote  the  outward  expi-ession  of  such  feeling  are  more 
commonly  construed  with  quod ;  but  sometimes  this  distinction  is  reversed. 
GraJMor  is  commonly  joined  with  quod. 


292  SYNTAX. ^PAKTICIPLES.  §  274 

Note  8.  A  purely  objective  proposition  is  expressed  by  quod  only  -when  it 
depends  upon  addo^  (generally  in  the  imperative  adde),  ^  upon  Jacio  joined 
with  an  adverb ;  as,  Adde  quod  pubes  iibi  crescit  omnes.  Hor.  Adde  hue  quod 
mercem  sine  fucis  gestat.  Id.  Fecit  hiimaniter  lAcinius,  quod  ad  me  veq)en  vcniL 
Cic.  In  all  other  cases  the  infinitive  is  employed  in  purely  objective  propo- 
sitions. 

6.  By  the  infinitive,  with  or  without  a  subject-accusative,  a  proposition  is 
expressed  as  a  ihouyht,  so  that  it  resembles  an  abstract  noun ;  by  quod,  with 
the  indicative  or  the  subjunctive,  it  is  represented  simply  as  a  fncU  To  the 
latter  is  frequently  joined  hoc,  id,  illud,  istiul,  or  hue,  etc.;  as,  Illud  qudque  nobis 
accedit  incommddum,  quod  M.  Junius  abest.  Cic.  Hue  acccdi-bat,  quod,  etc.  Sail. 
Quod  generally  refers  to  past  time,  and  hence  it  is  preferable  to  say,  Gratisd- 
mum  rnihi  est,  quod  ad  me  tua  mdnu  scripsisti ;  but  with  the  infinitive,  Grdtissl- 
mum  mihi  est  te  bene  valere. 

{a.)  Quod,  with  the  indicative,  in  the  sense  of  as  to,  or  idth  regard  to,  is  used 
at  the  beginning  of  a  sentence,  especially  in  letters,  in  repeatmg  an  expression 
of  a  person  for  the  purpose  of  answering  it ;  as,  Quod  autem  me  Agdmemndnem 
cemuldn  putas,  falleris.  Nep.  Quod  scribis  te  velle  scire,  qui  sit  reipubliC(B  status: 
summa  dissensio  est.  Cic.  Sentences  thus  introduced  by  gxiod  are  in  no  gram- 
matical connection  with  the  verb  that  follows  them.   See  §  206,  (14.) 

(6.)  Quod  is  used  in  explanatory  or  periphrastic  propositions  which  refer  to 
a  preceding  demostrative  pronoun,  as  hoc,  id,  etc.,  unless  such  pronoun  be 
added  pleouastically,  in  the  nominative  or  accusative,  to  verbs  governing  the 
accusative  with  the  infinitive;  as,  Mihi  quidem  viderUur  lidmines  hac  re  maxime 
bellais  prcestdre,  quod  loqui  possuni.  Cic. 

Note  9.  The  construction  of  the  infinitive  resembles,  in  the  fol- 
lowing particulars,  that  of  a  noun  in  the  singular  number  and  neuter 
gender : — 

(a.)  Like  a  noun,  it  may  have  an  adjective  or  pronoun  agreeing  with  it;  as 
Totum  hoc  phllosophari  displlcet.  Cic.  Quum  vivere  ipsum  iurpe  sit  nobis.  Id. 
3/e  hoc  ipsum  nihil  agere  delectai.  Id.  Meum  intelligere  nuUd  pecunid  vendo. 
Petr.    See  §  205,  R.  8. 

(b.)  It  may  be  followed  by  a  limitmg  genitive;  as,  Cujus  nan  dimlcare  fuit 
vincere.  Val.  Max. 

(c.)  It  may  be  either  the  subject  or  object  of  a  verb.  See  §§  209,  R.  3,  (5,) 
and  229,  R.  5.  It  may  also  be  used  after  neuter  verbs,  like  an  accusative, 
depending  on  a  preposition  understood;  as,  Te  accepisse  m^as  titeras  gaudeo. 
Ter.   See  ^  232,  (2,)  and  273,  5. 

(d.)  It  is  also  used  like  a  predicate-nominative;  as,  Videre  est  perspicere 
aUquid.  Cic.   See  ^  210. 

(c.)  It  mav,  like  a  genitive,  limit  the  signification  of  an  adjective  or  noun. 
See  §  270,  R'.  1. 

(/.)  It  may,  like  an  accusative,  depend  on  a  preposition ;  as,  Aristo  et  Pyrrho 
inter  optlme  valere  et  grdvissime  aegrotare,  nihil  prorsus  dicebani  interesse.  Cic. 
Quoti  crimen  dicis  praeter  amasse  meum  1  Ovid.  Inveniet  nil  sibi  legdtum,  praeter 
plorare.  Hor. 

(g.)  It  is  used  also  like  an  ablative;  as,  Audito  regem  in  SiciUam  tendSre. 
Sail. 

{h.)  Sometimes,  also,  especially  in  the  poets,  it  denotes  a  purpose,  like  a 
participle  in  dus,  (see  §  274,  R.  7.);  as,  Loricam  donai  habere  viro.  Virg.;  or 
like  a  dative  of  the  end,  (see  §  227.) 

PARTICIPLES. 

§  ST4:.  1.  Participles  are  foUowed  by  the  same  cases  Mid 
constructions  as  thf  ir  verbs :  as. 


§  274.  SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES.  .  293 

Quldam,  poeta  nomtnatus,  A  certain  one,  called  a  poet.  Cic.  Catulomai  M'lta 
lea'tia,  The  lioness  fojjojetful  of  her  whelps.  Virg.  Favenies  robus  Carthayinien- 
sium,  Favoring  tlie  iiuerests  of  the  Carthadnians.  Liv.  Tendens  ad  sic/era  pal- 
mas.  Virg.  Acci'mitus  rei  ccqntdlis.  Cic.  Frlmd  dicte  mihi  summd  dicende  Cd- 
mi'm't.  Hor.  Omina  docius.  Stat.  Casus  abies  visura  mdrinos.  Id.  Cdrltuvi  vcc- 
bore  mantes.  Ovid.  Parcemlum  est  teneris.  Juv.  Utendum  est  setate.  Ovid. 
L.  Brutus  arcens  reditu  tyrannum,  in  proello  conctdit.  Cic. 

2.  The  present,  perfect,  and  future  active  participles,  denote  re- 
spectively an  action  which  is  present,  past,  or  future,  in  reference  to 
the  time  of  the  verb  with  which  they  are  connected ;  as, 

Simul  hoc  dicens  attoUit  se.  Virg.  Turn  ad  Tkraseam  in  hortis  agentem  mis- 
sus est.  Tac.  Turnuvi  fugientem  hcec  terra  videbit  ?  Virg.  Qiii  missus  ab  Artjis 
Itdld  consederat  urbe.  Id.  Lamia  munere  cedilUdtis  perfunctus,  petit  prceturam. 
Cic.  Jussus  item  fide  pcenas  luam.  Hor.  Juvenis  medios  morlturus  in  hostes 
irruit.  Virg.  VerHnrns  injecit  sese  in  agmen.  Id.  Ilia  tibi  ventura  bella  expS- 
diet.  Id._ 

Note.  The  participle  expresses  the  action  or  state  of  the  verb,  and  also 
marks  its  complete  or  incomplete  state  or  condition.  Cf.  §  144,  1-3.  Except, 
however,  in  deponent  verbs,  the  Latin  language  has  no  active  participle  de- 
noting a  completed  action,  equivalent  to  the  English  '  having  written,'  nor  any 
passive  participle  denoting  a  state  of  suffering  still  going  on,  equivalent  to  the 
English  present  participle  '  being  loved.' 

Remark  1.  The  present  participle,  particularly  that  of  the  verb  eo,  some- 
times denotes  that  which  is  about  to  be  done ;  as,  Interclusit  litems,  et  terruit 
Auster  euntes, ....  as  they  were  on  the  point  of  going.  Virg.  Nee  nos  via  fallit 
euntes.  Id. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  The  present  participle,  also,  sometimes  denotes  a  purpose ;  as, 
[bant,  orantes  vSniam,.. ..to  sue  for  favor....  Virg.  Eurypylum  scltantem  drddUla 
PhceU  mittimus.  Id.  [b.)  It  is  also  used  to  express  a  state  or  condition,  where, 
in  English,  a  substantive  is  employed  with  a  preposition;  as,  ignorans,  from 
ignorance ;  m£tuens,  from  fear ;  consuldtum  jyetens,  in  his  suit  for  the  consulship ; 
omne  malum  nascens  facile  ojjpi'imitur, — in  its  origin. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  The  perfect  participle  passive,  especially  in  the  poets,  often 
denotes  the  result  of  a  past  action,  and  thus  supplies  the  place  of  a  present 
participle  passive;  as,  Ndtus  evdlat  piced  tectus  cdh9i'ne....covered  with  pitchy 
darkness.  Ovid.  Cf.  Virg.  ^n.  1,  480;  2,  277;  4,  72,  589;  5,  113,  708;  6,  335: 
Georg.  1,  204.  It  is  often  to  be  translated  by  a  present  active  participle ;  as, 
Mdnu  pectus  percussa  decorum,  ftdventesgue  abscissa  cdmas,  i.  e.  percutiens,  ah- 
scindens.  Virg.  Tunsse  pectura  palmis.  Id.  So,  also,  sdlltus,  ausus,  fisus,  and 
the  perfect  participles  of  deponent  verbs;  as,  Longum  caniu  solata  iCiborem.  Id. 
Vox  audxtur  fractos  sdnttus  !mitata  tUbdrum.  Id.  Divitidcus  Coesdrem  complexus, 
obsecrdre  ccepit.  Caes.  Concretos  sanguine  cr'ines  gerens.  Virg.  Tonsis  in  val- 
libus,  i.  e.  quae  tondentur.  Id. 

{b.)  The  pei'fect  participle  of  a  preceding  verb  is  often  used  in  a  succeeding 
clause,  to  express  the  completion  of  an  action ;  as,  Exercitum  fundit  fugatque, 
f  usum  persequitur.  Liv.     This  idiom  frequently  occurs  in  Ovid. 

Rem.  4.  Hubeo,  with  perfect  participles  denoting  knoicledge  and  determina- 
tion ;  as,  cognitum,  perspectum,  perceptum,  comprehensum,  explordtum,  stdtiUiim, 
constitutum,  deliberdtum,  persuumm  mihi  hdbeo,  etc.,  forms  a  periphrasis,  like  the 
passive  verb  in  English,  and  equivalent  to  cognovi,  perspexi,  percfqn,  etc.,  in- 
stead of  the  verb  of  the  participle;  as,  Clodii  dfimum  perspectum  or  cognitiim 
hdbeo  ;  for  perspexi,  etc.,  I  perceive,  know,  r'ersudsum  mihi  hubeo  and  persud- 
sis.^imum  hdbeo  are  used  only  in  the  neuter  gender  and  with  an  accusative  with 
the  infinitive  in  the  sense  of  mihi  persudsi  or  persudsuin  7nihi  est.  When  hdbeo 
with  any  other  participle  than  those  above  indicated  is  used,  it  expresses  more, 
than  the  ordinary  perfect  active ;  as,  Quod  me  hcn^tdris  ut  absolvam ;  habeo  ab- 
solutam  wdee  Spas  ad  Coesdrem;  i.  e.  I  have  it  ready.  Cic.  Do,  reddo^  cirOf 
26* 


294  SYNTAX. ^PARTICIPLES.  -  §  274 

ieneo,  possideo^  and  mismmfacio^  are  sometimes  so  construed  witli  participles; 
as,  ilissam  Iram  fdciet,  for  mittet,  Ter.    Eostes  victos  dare,  for  vincere.  Sail. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  The  passive  participles  may  supply  the  place  of  a  rerbal  noun 
in  io  or  m,  the  perfect  being  employed  to  repre.-ent  an  action  as  completed, 
and  tlie  future  when  it  is  conceived  as  still  incomplete ;  as,  Ante  Romain  condi- 
tam,  Before  the  building  of  Rome.  Cic.  Congllia  urbis  delendse,  Plans  for  the 
destruction  of  the  city.  Id.  See  §  275,  II.  With  the  limitations  about  to  be 
made  in  regard  to  the  nominative,  this  construction  is  used  in  aU  the  cases, 
and  even  when  they  are  governed  by  the  prepositions,  ad,  ante,  ob,  post,  prop- 
ter; aZ>  and  ex;  a.s,  Hce  literal  recltafas  magnum  luctum  fecerunt,  The  reading 
of  this  letter.  Liv.  Tarentum  captum.  The  taking  of  Tarentum.  Ob  receptum 
HannibiiUm,  On  account  of  the  reception  of  Hannibal.  Sibi  qiusque  cassi  regis 
expetebai  decus,  The  ^lory  of  killing,  or,  of  having  killed  the  king.  Propter 
Afncam  domltam.  Lutrop.  Ante  Epdminondam  natum.  Nep.  Post  Christum 
natum.  Ah  condita  urhe  ad  liberatam.  Liv.  The  oblique  cases  only  of  partici- 
ples in  dus  are  used  in  this  manner  as  the  nominative  denotes  necessity,  (see 
Rem.  8,)  and  even  the  perfect  participle  is  not  thus  used  in  the  nominative  by 
Cicero. 

(6.)  The  neuter  of  the  perfect  passive  participle  without  a  noun  is  used  by 
Livy,  as  the  subject  of  a  proposition;  as,  Tentatum  ppr  dictatorem,  ut  ambo  pa^ 
tricU  cotisules  credrentur,  rem  ad  inteii^egnum  perduxit :  i.  e.  the  attempt,  or 
the  fact  of  the  attempt  being  made  by  the  dictator.  Compare  a  similar  use 
of  this  participle  in  the  ablative,  ^  257,  R.  9,  (1.)  (c.) 

(c.)  The  English  'without'  with  a  verbal  substantive;  as,  'without  writing, 
without  having  waited,'  etc.,  is  expressed  in  Latin  by  means  of  a  negative 
noun,  adjective  or  particle  connected  with  a  participle;  as,  Ccesar  exercitum 
numquam  per  insidiosa  itinera  duxit,  nisi  perspecixlatus  Idcdrmn  situs,  without 
having  examined  the  localities.  This  form  occurs  often  with  the  ablative 
ab^lute ;  as,  Aihenienses  non  exspectato  auxilio  adversus  ingentem  Persdmm 
exercitum  in  pvodium  egi'ediuntur,  without  waiting  for  assistance.  So,  nuUa 
praestltuta  rfie,  Without  fixing  any  time.  Cic.  Miserum  est  nihil  perficientem 
angi.  Id. 

Rem.  6.  (a.)  The  participle  in  rus,  especially  with  verbs  of  motion,  often 
denotes  intention  or  purpose;  as,  Ad  Jdvem  Ammbnem  pergit  consulturus  de 
drigine  sua.  He  goes  to  Jupiter  Ammon,  to  consult  respecting  his  origin.  Just. 

(J.)  It  is  also  used  where  in  English  a  clause  connected  by  since,  when,  al- 
though, etc.,  is  employed;  as,  Plura  locuturos  dbire  nos  Jussit,  When  or  although 
Ve  intended  to  say  more.  Herculem  Germdni,  itHri  m  prcelium  cdnunt.  Tac. 
Hence  it  is  sometimes  used,  though  not  by  Cicero,  to  express  the  inference 
firom  a  hj^pothetical  proposition ;  as,  Egredltur  castris  Romdnus,  vallum  invasii- 
rus,  ni  cbpia  pugruz  Jieret.  And  with  the  repetition  of  the  preceding  verb ;  as, 
Dedit  viihi  quantum  maxime  pdtvU,  datiirus  ampUus,  si  pdtuisset,  i.  e.  ac  dedissei 
amplius.  Plin.  Ep. 

Rem.  7.  (a.)  The  participle  Indus,  also^ denotes  a  purpose  passively,  when 
joined  with  verbs  signifying  to  give,  to  deliver,  to  agree  for,  to  have,  to  receive, 
to  undertake,  etc.  Such  are  do,  trddo,  tribuo,  atiribuo,  mando,  initio,  permifto, 
concedo,  redimo,  conduco,  Idco,  hdbeo,  acdpio,  suscipio,  relinquo,  euro,  deposco, 
rogo;  as,  Testdmentum  tibi  trddit  legendum,  He  delivers  his  will  to  you  to  read, 
llor.  Attribuit  nos  triicidandos  Cethego.  Cic.  Quod  utendura  acciperis,  reddito. 
Id.  C6non  muros  dirOios  a  Lysandro  reficiendos  curdvit, — ordered  them  to  be 
restored.  Nep. 

{h.)  But  the  same  meaning  mav  be  expressed  actively  by  means  of  ad  and 
the  gerund;  as,  Ozsar  cppidum  ad  diripiendum  mlUtibus  concessit. — The  poets 
sometimes  use  the  infinitive  active  for  the  same  purpose ;  as,  Tristiliam  et  mS- 
tus  tradam  prdiercis  in  mare  Caspium  portare  ventis.  Hor.  In  prose  such  use 
of  the  infinitive  is  of  exceedingly  rare  occurrence ;  a",  Bibire  dare.  Cic. 


§  274.  SYNTAX. PARTICIPLES.  295 

Rem.  8.  (a.)  The  participle  in  dus,  when  agreeing  with  the  subject   j[X 
of  a  sentence,  has  the  signification  o^  necessity  ov  propriety ;  some- 
times, though  rarely,  except  in  later  writers,  that  of  possibility ;  as. 

Is  venr?ran(lus  a  nobis  et  colendus  est,  He  should  be  worshipped  aiKl  honored 
by  us.  Cic.  Delenda  est  Carthago,  Carthage  must  be  destroyed.  Cato.  Hcbc 
speranda  fuerunt.  Virg.  So  with  est  used  impersonally ;  as,  tlirum  pace  nobis 
an  bello  esset  utendum.  Cic. 

(6.)  Sometimes,  also,  when  not  agreeing  with  the  subject  of  a  sentence,  it 
has  this  signification;  as,  Facta  narrdbas  dissimulanda  tibi.  You  were  relating 
facts  which  you  should  liave  concealed."  Ovid.  A.  L.  Bruto  principe  hiijus 
maxime  conservandi  generis  et  nominis.  Cic. 

Kem.  9.  The  participle  in  dus,  in  its  oblique  cases,  supplies  the  place  of  a 
present  participle  of  the  passive  voice,  to  denote  a  continued  or  incomplete 
action ;  as,  Occupdtus  sum  in  lUens  scribendis,  in  writing  letters ;  literally,  in 
letters  which  are  being  written.  See  ^  275,  II. — So,  also,  in  the  poets  both  in 
the  nominative  and  oblique  cases;  as,  Triginta  maqnos  volvendis  mensibus  orbes 
imperio  explebit.  Virg.    Volvenda  dies.  Id.    Cf.  Voiventibus  annis.  Id. 

Kem.  10.  After  participles  in  dus,  the  person  by  whom  a  thing  must  be 
done,  is  put  in  the  dative,  but  in  a  few  passages  even  of  Cicero  it  is  found  in 
the  ablative  with  ab.     See  §  225,  III. 

Rem.  11.  The  neuter  of  the  participle  in  dus,  joined  with  a  tense  of  essfi  in 
the  pei-iphrastic  conjugation  (see  §  184,  3,)  retains  the  signification  of  necessity; 
as,  Audenduin  est,  We  must  venture.  In  early  writers  and  sometimes  also  in 
the  poets,  an  accusative  of  the  object  is  joined  with  this  neuter,  if  the  verb 
is  transitive;  as.  Nunc  pacem  orandum,  nunc — arma  reponendum,  et  bellum  exi- 
tidle  cdvendum.  Sil.  But  in  classical  Latin  such  accusative  is  generally  changed 
to  the  nominative,  and  the  participle  is  made  to  agree  with  it  in  gender  and 
number.  Thns,  instead  of  virtutem  laudandum  est,  we  usually  find  virtus  laur- 
danda  est.  The  accusative  in  this  connection  is  used  by  Cicero  in  only  two 
passages.  Utendum  est  with  the  ablative  occurs  more  than  once  in  Cicero ;  as, 
Quum  sua  culque  judicio  sit  utendum. 

Rem.  12.  In  classical  prose  the  participle  in  dus  never  has  the  signification 
of  2^ssibilitij,  except  when  joined  with  vix;  as,  Vix  ojJtandum  nobis  videbdtur. 
Cic.  Vix  erat  credendum,  i.  e.  vix  credi  pdterat.  Later  writers  use  it  in  this 
sense  with  negative  particles,  and  at  a  later  period  it  was  used  with  stUl  more 
frequency  in  the  sense  of  possibility  as  well  as  in  that  of  necessity. 

3.    (a.)    A  participle  is  often  employed,  instead  of  a.  verb,  in  a 
conditional,  explanatory,  adversative,  relative,  or  other  dependent        , 
clause;  as, 

Cuiio,  ad  fdcum  sedenti  (as  he  was  sitting)  OTa<7nM»i  auri  pondus  Samnltes 
aitulcrunt.  Cic.  Trldui  viam  progressi,  7'ursus  reverterunt ;  for,  quuin  progressi 
essenl.  Cons.  Dionysius  tyrannus,  Syrdcusis  expulsus,  CdrintM  pueros  dOa'bat. 
Cic.  Dionysius,  cultros  metuens  tonsorios,  candenti  carbone  sibi  ddurebat  cdpillum. 
Id.  Risus  interdum  ita  repente  erumjnt,  ut  eum  ciipientis  tenere  neguedmus.  Id. 
Cicon'ue  ablturse  congregantur  in  lOco  certo.  Plin. 

Note  1.  If  the  participle  refers  to  a  noun  not  contained  in  the  leading  proposition,  it 
is  put  with  that  noun  in  the  ablative  absolute.   See  §  257,  R.  3. 

Note  2.  (a.)  The  English  clauses  most  frequently  expressed  in  Latin  by  means  of  par- 
ticiples are  such  as  are  connected  by  relatives  or  by  as,  tvhen,  after,  although,  since,  be- 
cause, etc. ;  as,  Nemo  observat  lunam  nisi  laborantem.  Sen.  Ut  ooillus,  sic  animus^  se 
non  videns,  alia  cernit, — though  not  perceiving  itself.  Cic.  Servllius  Ahala  Spurium 
JHcelium,  regnuTU  a,^p&tentem,  interem it, — because  he  was  aspiring  to  the  sovereignty, 
Cic. — (&.)  AVhen  a  participle  is  connected  with  a  relative  or  interrogative  it  can  only  be 
translated  by  a  circumlocution ;  as,  Non  sunt  ea  bona  dtcenda,  liulbus  abundantem  Kcet 
esse  mlserrimum, — which  one  may  possess  in  abundance,  and  still  be  very  miserable. 
Cio.  SSn&tus  absurflum  esse  dlcSbat,  ign5rare  rSgem,  quid  spSrans  ant  pef«n8  vcnSrit. — 
with  what  hopi*  i^^  request  he  had  come.  Liv. 


296        SYNTAX. GERUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES.      §  275. 

(6.)  When  two  verbs  are  in  Englfsh  connected  by  and^  and  the  actions  de- 
noted by  them  are  regarded  as  simultaneous,  one  of  them  may  be  expressed 
in  Latin  by  the  present  participle;  as,  He  sits  and  holds  his  lute,  Ille  {Ar'ion) 
sedens  cUhdram  tenet.  Ovid.  SimiUhoc  dicens  attolUt  in  (eginim  se  femur.  Virg. 
i.  e.  hoc  Sicit  et  attollU.  But  if  one  of  the  actions  precede  the  other,  the 
perfect  participle  must  be  used;  as,  Cassar  attacked  and  defeated  the  enemy, 
Ccesa?'  hostes  aggressus  fuyavit.  Submersas  obi-ue  puppes,  i.  e.  Submerge  et 
obi-ue.  Virg. — When  the  English  clause  would  be  connected  by  although,  the 
participle  is  often  followed  by  tdmen.  Later  writers  in  such  case  join  the  par- 
ticles quamquam,  quamvis,  etiam  and  vel  with  the  participle  itself;  as,  Gesdrem 
mllites,  quamvis  recusantem  ultra  in  Afiicam  stmt  secuti.  Suet. ;  and  these  are 
sometimes  retamed  in  the  ablative  absolute. — It  is  only  in  late  Latin  that  par- 
ticiples are  sometimes  used  in  describing  persons  as  possessing  certain  attri- 
butes, e.  g.  adslantes,  audientes,  for  it  qui  adslant,  audiunt,  i.  e.  the  bystanders, 
hearers. 

(c.)  A  participle  is  used  with  verbs  signifying  to  represent  and  perceive^ 
especially  to  see  and  hear,  when  the  object  is  described  or  perceived  in  a  parti- 
cular state }  as,  Apelies  pinxit  Alexandi~um  Magnum  fulmen  tenentem.  Plm.  In 
English  tlie  infinitive  is  often  joined  with  verbs  of  seeing  and  hearuig;  as, 
Auctivi  te  cdnentem,  I  heard  you  sing.  Audlri  te  cdnere,  would  be,  I  heard  that 
you  sung.   Videinus  Pdlyphemum  vasld  se  mole  moventem.  Virg. 

Note  3.  In  many  cases,  for  want  of  a  perfect  participle  actire,  and  a  present  participle 
ptssive,  this  construction  cannot  be  used.  Thus,  giium  atnavisset  cannot  be  exchanged 
for  a  participle  corresponding  with  the  English  having  loved.  As  the  perfect  participles 
of  deponent  Terbs,  howeTer,  have  an  active  signification,  they  admit  of  the  participial 
construction.  The  want  of  a  perfect  active  participle  may  also  be  supplied  by  the  perfect 
passive  participle  in  the  ablative  absolute.  See  §  257,  R.  5. 


GERUXDS    AND    GERUNDIVES. 

§  ^75.  I.  Gerunds  are  governed  like  nouns,  and  are  fol- 
lowed bj  the  same  cases  as  their  verbs ;  as, 

Metus  pdrendi  sibi.  Fear  of  obeying  him.  Sail.  Parcendo  victis,  By  sparing 
the  vanquished.  Liv.  Efferor  stfidio  patres  vestros  videndi,  I  am  transported 
with  a  desire  of  seeing  your  fathers.  Cic.  Petendi  consiilatum  gratia.  Sail. 
Verut  ad  recipiendum  peciinias.  Varr. 

Kemark  1.  The  gerund  is  the  same  in  form  as  the  oblique  cases  of  the 
neuter  singular  of  participles  in  dus,  but  it  has  the  meaning  of  the  active  voice. 
It  is  sometimes  translated  by  the  present  participle  with  a  preposition,  and 
sometimes  -by  a  present  infinitive  active;  as.  Consilium  Ldcedcemdnem  occu- 
pandi,  A  design  of  occupj'ing,  or  to  occupy,  Lacedsemon.  Liv. 

Eem.  2.  The  gerund  is  sometimes,  though  rarely,  used  in  a  passive  sense; 
as,  Spes  restltuendi  nulla  erai,— of  being  restored.  Kep.  AUienas  erudiendi 
gratia  jmissus, — for  the  purpose  of  being  instructed.  Just.  Ante  dOmandum. 
Virg.  ^£^5  ad  imperandum.  Cic. 

Eem.  3.  The  gerund  is  in  its  nature  a  verbal  noun,  having  only  the  genitive, 
dative,  ablative,  and,  after  a  preposition,  the  accusative.  In  its  signification  it 
coiTCsponds  with  the  English  present  participle  when  used  as  a  verbal  noun. 
Hence,  in  the  oblique  cases,  it  supplies  the  pkice  of  a  declinable  present  infin- 
itive active ;  but  in  the  accusative  there  is  this  difference  between  the  infini- 
tive used  as  an  accusative  and  the  geruud,  that  the  infinitive  has  simply  the 
power  of  an  abstract  noun,  whereas  the  gerund  expresses  a  real  action';  as, 
Multum  interest  inter  dare  et  dccipere.  Sen.  Non  solum  ad  discendum  prqpensi 
sumug.  $ed  etiam  ad  ddcendum.   Cicu. 


§  275.      SYNTAX. GERUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES.        297 

n.    When  the  object  of  an  active  verb  is  to  be  expressed,  the 
participle  in  dus  is  commonly  used  in  preference  to  the  gerund ;       . 
the  object  taking  the  case  in  which  the  gerund,  if  used,  would      \ 
have  been  put,  and  thcTparticiple  agreeing  with  it.  ) 

Thus,  to  express  '  the  design  of  -writing  a  letter,'  Avliich,  with  the  aid  of  the 
gerund,  would  be  represented  in  Latin  by  Consilium  sci-'ibendi  epistdluni,  the 
participle  in  cZm5  is  commonly  substituted  lor  the  gerund:  and  since,  in  this 
example,  the  genmd,  (scrlbendi)  is  in  the  genitive,  the  rule  requires  that,  in 
substituting  the  participle  for  the  gerund,  the  object  of  the  gerund  {ejnstolam) 
should  also  be  put  in  the  genitive,  and  that  the  participle  {scrlbendus)  should 
agree  with  it  in  gender,  number,  and  case.  Hence  with  the  participle  the  ex- 
pression is.  Consilium  scribendce  episiolce.  Between  the  two  forms  of  construc- 
tion there  is  no  difference  of  signification.  So,  Consilia  urbis  delendse  (Cic), 
for  urbem  delendi,  Plans  for  destroying  the  city.  Reparandanim  classium  causa 
[Snet.),  for  repdrandi  classes.  Perpetiendo  labori  idoneus.  Colum.  ^cZ  defen- 
dendam  Romam  ab  oppugnanda  Capua  duces  Romdnos  abstrdhere.  Liv. 

Remark  1.  The  same  construction  is  used  with  the  future  passive  partici- 
ples of  utor,  fnior,  func/or,  potior,  and  rarely  of  medeor,  as  these  verbs  were 
originally  followed  by  the  accusative ;  as,  yEtas  ad  hcec  utenda  idonea.  Ter. 
JustUicB  fruendae  causa.  Cic.  In  munere  fungendo.  Id.  Ilostes  in  spem  potiun- 
dorura  castrorum  venerant.  Cses.  Aqu<e  sdlubHtdte  medendis^'Me  corporibus  rwb- 
iles.  Veil. 

Rem.  2.  When  a  participle  is  thus  used  for  a  gerund,  it  is  called  a  gerundive, 
and  is  usually  translated  like  a  gerund.  The  gerundive  cannot  be  substituted 
for  the  gerund,  where  ambiguity  would  arise  from  the  gender  not  being  dis- 
tinguishable. It  should  therefore  not  be  used  when  the  object  of  the  gerund 
is  a  neuter  pronoun  or  adjective;  as,  Allquid  /dciendi  rdtio  (Cic),  not  dlicujus. 
Artem  et  vera  ei  falsa  dgudicandi  (Id.),  not  verorum  dljudlcanddrum :  because  it 
would  not  be  known  whether  dlicujui  and  verorum  were  masculine  or  neuter. 
It  is  to  be  remarked,  also,  that  the  change  of  the  gerund  into  the  gerundive  is 
less  frequent  in  some  writers  than  in  others. 

m.  Examples  of  the  construction  of  gerunds,  in  each  of  their  cases,  have  been  al- 
ready given,  among  other  nouns,  under  the  heads  Genitive,  Dative,  Accusative,  and  Ab- 
lative.  The  following  remarks  specify  in  what  connections  they  are  used :  and  when  it 
is  said  that  the  gerundive  is  governed  in  any  of  the  cases  like  the  gerund,  it  will  of  course 
be  understood  of  the  noun  which  is  limited  by  a  gerundive. 

Remark  1.    The  genitive  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  may  follow      > 
either  nouns  or  relative  adjectives ;  as, 

Amor  hdbendi.  Cic.  Pairiam  spes  videndi.  Vir^.  Nam  Jidbet  ndtura,  ut  dlidrum 
omnium  rerum,  sic  Vivendi  mddum.  Cic.  Barbara  consueiMo  hdminum  immd- 
lariildrum.  Id.  Posiremo  Cdtillna  dissimulandi  cavsd'aut  sui  expurgandi,  in 
senatum  venit.  Sail.  JnUa  stmt  consilia  urbis  delendae,  clvium  trucidandorura, 
nominis  Romdni  exstinguendi.  Id.  Venandi  studiosi.  Cic.  Cerium  eundi.  Virg. 
Jnsuetus  ndvigandi.  Cses.    Piritus  civitdtis  regendce.   Nep. 

(1.)  The  nouns  after  which  these  genitives  most  frequently  occur  are  amor, 
ars,  causa,  consilium,  £onsuetudo,  copia,  cupldiias,  deslderium,  difficultas,  finis, 
fdcuUas,  forma,  gratia,  ilUcebra,  libido,  lOcus,  licentia,  modus,  materia,  mos, 
occdsio,  otium,  potestas,  rdtio,  spdiium,  spes,  stadium,  iempus,  usus,  venia,  vis, 
vdluntas. . 

Note  1.  With  these  and  other  substantives  the  infinitive  also  may  be  used, 
when  with  a  tense  of  sum  they  form  a  periphrasis  for  a  verb  which  is  followed 
by  the  infinitive,  or  supply  the  place  of  an  adjective  of  which  the  infinitive  is 
the  subject;  as,  Quibus  dmnia  honesta  atque  inhdnesta  vendere  m^s  irat,  With 
•whom  it  was  a  custom,  or,  who  were  accustomed.  Sail.  Temjms  est  abire,  It  is 
t^e,  L.e.  tempestivum  est,  it  is  proper  to  go. 


298        SYNTAX. GERUNDS  AND  GERUNDIVES.      §  275. 

(2.)  The  relative  adjectives,  which  most  frequently  take  after  them  these 
genitives,  are  such  as  denote  desire,  knowledge,  rememhrance,  and  their  contra- 
ries; as,  dvidus,  cupfdus,  stufliosus,  jyeritus,  imjyerltus,  iTisuetus,  certus,  conscius, 
ignai-us,  iHdis,  etc.  See  §  213,  R.  1,  (3.) 

Note  2.   "With  the  relative  adjectives  the  infinitive  is  also  joined  poetically. 

(3.)  Instead  of  an  accusative  after  the  gerund,  or  a  genitive  plural  with  a 
gcnindive,  a  noun  or  pronoim  in  the  genitive  plural  is  sometimes  joined  with 
tlie  gerund;  as,  Exemplonim  e%en</t^?esfr/Sj  instead  of  exempla  tlfgendi,  or, 
exemjilOrum  cliaenddrum.  Cic.  Eai-um  rerum  infitiandi  ratio.  Id.  FacuUas  agro- 
rum  condonanai.  Cic.    Noniinandi  isturum  erit  cqpia.  Plant. 

(4.)  The  pi'onouu  tui  and  also  the  plurals  vesiri  and  sui,  even  when  feminine, 
are  joined  with  the  masculine  or  neuter  fonn  of  the  gerundive  in  di;  as,  Qud- 
niam  tui  videndi  est  copia.  Plaut.  Non  vereoi-,  ne  quis  hoc  vie  vestri  adhortandi 
causa  magnifice  loqui  existimet.  Liv.  Jn  castra  veneruni  sui  purgandi  causa. — 
With  the  demonstrative  pronouns,  ejus,  hujus,  iUius,  the  participle  usually 
agrees,  but  in  two  passages  of  Terence  ejus,  though  referring  to  a  woman,  has 
the  participle  in  di,  not  in  dee;  as,  Ego  ejus  videndi  ci'ipidus  recta  consequor.  Ter. 
Tui  m  the  first  example  and  ejus  in  the  last  are  feminine. 

(5.)  By  a  Greek  idiom  the  gerund  and  gerundive,  after  the  verb  sum,  are 
sometimes  found  in  the  genitive  denoting  a  tendency  or  purpose,  with  no  noun 
or  adjective  on  which  thev  can  depend;  as,  Regium  imperium  initio  conservandae 
llbertatis  yu€ra<.  Sail.  Sometimes  esse  in  some  form  is  to  be  supplied;  as, 
Qiue  ]X)stquam  gloriosa  m6do,  neque  belli  patrandi  cognovit,  scil.  esse.  Id.  Causa 
or  gratia  may  sometimes  be  supplied.  Li  some  other  cases,  also,  the  word  on 
which  the  gerund  in  di  depends  is  not  expressed,  and  the  gerund  seems  to  be 
used  instead  of  the  infinitive;  sis,  Maneat  nrovimialibus  pdtentiam  suam  tali 
viddo  ostentandi,  scil.  Jacultas.  Tac.  Quum  hdberem  in  dnimo  na^igandi,  sclL 
propOsituin.  Cic. 

Re:^i.  2.  The  dative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  is  used  after  adjec- 
tives which  govern  a  dative  (§  222),  especially  after  those  which  sig- 
nify usefulness  or  fitness ;  and  also  after  certain  verbs  and  phrases, 
to  denote  a  purpose  ;  as, 

Charta  empdreiica  est  inutlUs  scribendo.  Plin.  Capessendae  retpOblicce  Tidbilis. 
Tac.  Ut  nee  triumvh'i  accipiundo,  nee  scrlbce  rof  orundo  siifficireni.  Liv.  L6cum 
oppido  condendo  cajtere.  Id.  Non  fuit  consilium  agrum  colendo  aut  venando 
intentum  ceidtem  dgere.  Sail.  Tihenus  quasi  Jirmajidce  vdletudini  in  Campdniam. 
concessiL  Tac.  Quum  solvendo  cere  dlieno  respublica  non  esset.  Liv.  Quum  sol- 
vendo  civitdies  non  essent, — were  insolvent.  Cic. 

(1.)  The  verbs  and  phrases  upon  which  this  dative  most  frequently  depends 
are,  Studere,  intentum  es^e,  tempus  impendere,  tempus  consHmere  or  insiimere,  dpS- 
ram  dare,  sufficere,  satis  esse,  deesse,  esse,  signifj'ing  to  serve  for,  to  be  ade- 
quate to,  and,  in  later  writers,  on  verbs  of  motion. — The  dative  of  the  gerund 
after  sum  is  usually  supposed  to  depend  on  Iddneus  imderstood ;  but  see  §  227, 
R.  3. 

(2.)  The  dative  of  the  gerundive,  denoting  a  purpose,  is  also  used  after 
names  of  oflBce ;  as.  Decemviri  legibus  scribendis,  i.  e.  the  ten  commissioners 
for  drawing  up  a  code  of  laws.  Liv.  So,  Cdmitia  creandis  decemviris.  Id. 
Triumviroi  agro  dando  cj-ea/.  Id. 

(3.)  A  purpose  is  more  commonly  expressed  hj  ad  and  the  acci>sative  of 
^e  gerund,  or  by  a  clause  with  ut,  than  by  the  dative;  as,  Fecus  ad  vesceuduir 
hdminibus  apta.   Cic. 

Rem.  3.  The  accusative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  follows  the 
prepositions  ad^  to,  or  inter,  during  or  amid,  and  sometimes  antey  circaj 
or  ob ;  as,, 


§  276.  SYNTAX. SUPINES.  299 

Ad  poenltendum  prdph-aL  qui  cito  judicat.  Pub.  Syr.  Inter  btbendum,  While 
drinking.  Just.  Ad  taleramhs  fdcilius  labores.  Quint.  Ad  castra  fdcienda.  Cic. 
06  absulvendum.  Id. 

Note.  The  construction  of  the  gerundive  instead  of  the  gerund  ahnost  in- 
variably occurs  here  when  the  object  of  the  gerund  is  to  be  expressed. 

Rp:]m.  4.    The  ablative  of  gerunds  and  gerundives  follows  the  pre-    j 
positions  a,  (ah)^  de^  e,  (ex)^  or  in ;  or  it  is  used  without  a  preposi-""*^ 
tion,  as  the  ablative  of  cause,  manner,  or  means ;  as, 

Aristdtelem  non  deterruit  a  scrlbendo.  Cic.  Ex  assentatido.  Ter.  Non  videor 
a  defendendis  hominibus  discedere.  Cic.  Crescit  eundo.  Virg.  Item  qucerunt 
mercaturis  f  aciendis.  Cic.  Orationem  Ldtlnam  ISgendis  nostris  efficies  plenio- 
rem.  Id.  ^ 

Note  1.  This  ablative  also  occurs,  though  rarely,  after  pro  and  cum;  as, 
Pro  vapulando.  Plant.    Cum  Idguendo.  Quint. 

Note  2.  Generally  with  the  ablative  of  the  means,  and  always  with  the  ab- 
lative after  a  pi'eposition,  the  gerund,  when  its  object  is  to  be  expressed,  is 
changed  to  the  gerundive.  In  a  few  passages  the  ablative  of  the  gerundive  is 
differently  construed;  vls,  Nullum  officium  referenda  gratia  mdgis  necessdrium 
est,  instead  of  relatione  grdtioe.  §  256.  Cic.  Nee  jam  possidendis  publlcis  agris 
contentos  esse.  §  244.  Liv.  Js  finis  fuit  ulciscenda  Germdnlci  morte, — in  aveng- 
ing the  death  of  Germanicus.  Tac. ;  where  the  ablative  seems  to  imply  time. 
^253. 

SUPINES. 

§  ^  •  0»  Supines,  like  gerunds,  are  verbal  nouns,  having  no  other  cases  except 
the  accusative  and  ablative  singular.  In  certain  connections  they  supply  the  place  of 
the  present  infinitive;  the  supine  in  icm  having  an  active  and  the  supine  in  u  a  passive 
signification.  As  in  the  case  of  gerunds,  we  are  to  regard  their  construction  both  as 
verbs  and  as  nouns.  As  verba  we  are  to  notice  their  government,  as  nouns,  their  de- 
pendence. 

I.    Supines  in  um  are  followed  by  the  same  cases  as  their    -^ 
verbs;  as, 

Non  Grdiis  servUum  matribus  l5o,  I  shall  not  go  to  serve  Grecian  matrons. 
Virg.    Te  id  admonltum  venio.  Plant. 

n.    Supines  in  um  follow  verbs  of  motion,  and  serve  to  denote  -  \ 
the.  purpose  of  the  motion ;  as, 

Cubitum  discesslmus.  Cic.  Ire  dejectum  mdniimenta  regis.  Hot.  Legati 
venerunt  questum  injuHas,  et  res  repetitum.  Liv.  Quum  spectatum  liidos  Iret. 
Nep.  So  after  participles ;  as,  Fatnam  defensura  revdcdtus.  Nep.  Spectatum 
admissi.  Hor. 

Note.  The  construction  of  the  supine  in  wm,  considered  as  a  noun,  is  analogous  to 
that  of  names  of  places  in  answer  to  the  question  'whither?  '  (§  237),  the  notion  oi  pur- 
pose arising  from  its  verbal  character. 

Remark  1.  Supines  in  um  sometimes  follow  verbs  which  do  not  express 
motion ;  as.  Do  f'diam  miptum.  Ter.   Vos  idtum  injurias  hortor.  Sail. 

Rem.  2.  The  supine  in  um  with  eo  literally  signifies  '  I  go  to  do  a  thing,'  and 
hence  '  I  intend,'  oi*,  '  am  going  to.'  Instances  of  this  use  are  found  in  Plautus 
and  Terence  and  in  the  prose  writers  later  than  Cicero;  as.  Men  Giijcerinm, 
quid  dgis?  cur  te  is  perdltum?  Why  are  you  going  to  destroy  yourself V  Plaut. 
Bononim  pr<emia  ereptum  eunt.  Sail.  With  eo  the  supine  in' 'mjji  often  form?  a 
periphrasis  equivalent  to  the  same  mood  and  tense  of  the  verb  from  which  the 


800  SYNTAX. ADVERBS.  §  277. 

supine  is  formed ;  as,  Ne  hdnos  omnes  perdttum  eant  (Sail.),  for  perdani,  Er^ 
turn  emit  (Id.),  for  etipiunt.  UUum  icU  (Tac.),  for  tdUis  est,  Ultum  ire  injuruu 
Jestljuit,  i.  e.  tdcisci.  Sail. 

Re:m.  3.  The  supine  in  nm  most  frequently  occurs  with  the  infinitive  hi, 
■with  which  it  fonns  the  future  infinitive  passive;  as,  Brutum  visum  iri  a  me 
piito.  Cic.  In  this  construction  the  accusative  properly  depends  upon  the  su- 
pine, and  iri  is  used  impersonally ;  '  I  suppose  that  I  am  going  to  see  Brutus.' 
§  1^4,  2,  (a.)  Its  notion  oi  futurity  is  derived  from  the  proper  signification  of 
the  active  voice,  as  perditam  Iri,  to  go  to  destroy,  the  idea  of  intending  passing 
easily  into  tliat  of  futurity. 

Rem.  4.  But  to  express  a  purpose  Latin  writers  in  general  prefer  using  a 
gerund  or  gerundive  in  the  accusative  with  ad  or  in  the  genitiye  with  causa  or 
(fVatid,  a  subjunctive  clause  with  ui  or  qui,  a  present  or  future  active  participle, 
and  sometimes  poetically  an  infinitive.  See  §  275,  R.  1,2:  §§  262,  264,  274, 
and  271. 

in.  The  supine  in  u  is  used  to  limit  the  meaning  of  adjec- 
tives signifying  wonderful,  agreeable,  easy  or  difficult,  worthy  or 
unworthy,  honorable  or  base,  and  a  few  others ;  as, 

MirahUe  dictu!  Wonderful  to  tell,  or  to  be  told!  Virg.  Jucimdum  cogrdtu  aU 
que  audltu.  Pleasant  to  be  known  and  heard.  Cic.  Res  factu  Jucilis,  A  thing 
easy  to  be  done.  Ter.  Fdcilia  inventu.  Gell.  Incredibile  memHi'dtu.  Sail.  Tur- 
pia  dictu.  Cic.    Opiinium  factu.  Id. 

Note.  The  principal  supines  in  u  in  common  use  are  aitditu,  cognltu,  dictu,  factu,  t»- 
venlu,  memurdta  and  natu,  which  occurs  in  the  expressions,  grandis,  major,  minor, 
maximus,  and  minimus  ndtu.  In  magna  natu,  of  an  advanced  age,  and  maxima  natu 
/t/iits,  the  eldest  son,  natu  is  the  ablative  of  a  verbal  substantive,  since  neither  gerunds 
nor  supines  are  joined  with  adjectives. 

Kehark  1.  The  principal  adjectives,  after  which  the  supine  in  u  occurs,  are  affaMis, 
ccrduus,  asper,  bonus,  de/'ormis,  digntis,  intlignus,  dulcis,  diirus,  fdcUis,  difflcilis,  fctdus, 
gravis,  honeftus,  horrendus,  incrcdlbUis,  jucundus,  injucundus,  magnus,  meinurabtlis, 
mollis,  proctlvis,  puicher,  rarus,  turpis,  and  utllis. 

Rem.  2.  The  supine  in  u  is  used  also  after  the  nouns  fas,  nefas,  and  dpus; 
as,  Hoc  Jos  est  dictu.  Cic.  Nefas  dictu.  Ovid.  Dictu  dpus  est.  Ter. — In  the 
following  examples  it  follows  a  verb :  POdei  (fictu,  Tac.  Agr.  32.  Dictu  fasiid- 
ienda  sunt  Val.  Max.  9,  13,  2. 

Rem.  3.  As  the  supine  in  m  is  commonly  translated  by  a  passive  form,  it  is  placed  un- 
der the  passive  voice;  but,  in  many  cases,  it  may  with  equal  or  greater  propriety  be 
translated  actively.  As  a  noun,it8  construction  may  be  referred  to  the  ablative  of  limi- 
tation. $  250. 

Rem.  4.  (a.)  Instead  of  the  supine  in  «,  an  infinitive,  a  gerund  or  gerun- 
dive with  aJd,  or  a  verbal  noun  in  the  ablative,  and  sometimes  in  the  dative  or 
accusative,  may  be  used;  as,  Ardua  imitdiu,  ctlterum  cognosci  Utilia.  Val.  Max. 
JUud  autem  Jacih  ad  credendum  est.  Cic.  Opus  proscriptiune  dignum.  Plin. 
Aqua  potui  jut^aida.  Id.  FdcUior  ad  intellectum  aique  Imitationem,  Quint 
With  6pm  est  the  perfect  passive  participle  is  often  used  instead  of  the  supine 
in  « ;  as,  Opus  est  maturato.  There  is  need  of  haste.  Cf.  ^  243,  R.  1. 

(b.)  The  construction  with  fwf  and  the  gerund;  as,  res  fdcilis  ad  inteUigen- 
dum ;  or  with  sum  and  the  infinitive  active ;  as,  facile  est  invenlre,  is  used  by 
the  best  writers  after  fdcilis,  diffhilis,  and  jicuiulus.  The  most  common  con- 
struction of  dignus  is  with  ^ui  and  the  subjunctive,  (§  264,  9),  but  the  poets 
and  later  prose  writers  have  joined  it  with  the  infinitive  passive. 

ADVERBS. 

§  277.  I.  Adverbs  modify  or  limit  the  meaning  of  verbs, 
adjectives,  aud  sometimes  of  other  adverbs ;  as, 


f  277.  SYNTAX. ADVERBS.  801 

Bene  mdnes.  You  advise  well.  Ter.  Fortisstme  uryentes,  Most  vigorously 
pressing  on.  Plin.    Male  narrando.  Ter.    Lonye  dissimilis.  Cic.   Vakle  bene.  Id. 

Remark  1.  Adverbs  may  also  modify  nouns,  when  they  are  used  as  adjec- 
tives or  participles,  and  accordingly  denote  a  quality,  or  Vhen  a  participle  is 
understood.  Tliey  are  also  joined  to  adjective  pronouns,  when  their  adjective- 
character  predominates;  and  sometimes  limit  the  meaning  of  a  preposition;  as, 
Populus  late  rex,  for  lute  reynans, — ruling  far  and  wide.  Virg.  Nihil  admodum, 
Nothing  at  all.  Cic.  IJdim  plane  noster, — entirely  ours,  that  is,  devoted  to  us. 
Id.  Bomerus  plane  orator.  Id.  Adinodum  puella.  Liv.  LCde  tyrannus.  Hor. 
Grdvibus  superne  ictibus  conjlktabantur,  i.  e.  superne  acddentibus.  Tac.  Multd- 
rum  circa  civHatum,  i.  e.  neighboring  cities.  Liv. 

Rem.  2.  (a.)  Most  of  the  modifications  made  by  adverbs  may  also  be  made 
by  means  of  the  various  cases  of  nouns  and  adjectives,  and  many  modifications 
may  be  made  by  these,  for  expressing  which  no  adverbs  are  in  use.  In  general 
those  limitations  which  ai*e  most  common  can  be  expressed  by  adverbs;  as, 
sdpienter  for  ciim  sdpientid ;  hie  for  in  hoc  Idco ;  bene  for  in  bdno  mddo ;  nunc  for 
hoc  tempdre. — (b.)  The  following  are  examples  of  other  parts  of  speech  used 
adverbially,  viz.  Nihil,  '  in  no  way  ' ;  nonnihil,  '  in  some  measure  ' ;  quidquam, 
*  at  all ' ;  dliquid, '  somewhat ' ;  quidf  *  why  ? ' 

Rem.  3.  A  negative  adverb,  modifying  another  negative  word, 
destroys  the  negation;  as, 

Non  pdrere  noluit,  He  w^s  not  unwilling  to  obey.  Nep.  Ilatid  iyndra  mdli, 
Not  ignorant  of  evil.  Virg.  Eatid  nihil  est,  It  is  something.  Ter.  Nee  hoc  ille 
non  vidit,  And  this  he  clearly  perceived.  Cic.  So,  nonnulli,  some ;  nonnumquam, 
sometimes.  Non,  before  a  negative  word,  commonly  heightens  the  affirmative 
sense,  while  it  softens  the  expression ;  as,  Ildmo  non  indoctus,  i.  e_.  hdmo  sane 
doctus.  Non  semel,  i.  e.  scepius ;  non  iynoro,  non  nescio,  non  sum  nescius,  1  know 
very  well.  Qui  mortem  in  mdlis  ponit,  non  potest  earn  non  timere, — must  needs 
fear  it.  Cic. 

Rem.  4.  When  the  subject  and  predicate  of  a  proposition  are  both 
modified  by  negative  words,  and  also  when  the  predicate  contains 
two  negatives,  the  proposition  is  afBrmative ;  as, 

Nemo  non  videt,  Every  one  sees.  Cic.  Neque  hcec  non  evenerunt.  And  this 
indeed  took  place.  So,  if  both  the  antecedent  and  the  predicate  of  a  relative 
clause  are  negative,  the  proposition  is  affirmative ;  as.  Nemo  est,  qui  nesciai, 
Every  body  knows.  Cic. 

Rem.  5.  (a.)  But  in  the  case  of  non  followed  by  ne — quidem,  the  two  nega- 
tives do  not  destroy  each  other;  as,  'i^on  fuyio  ne  hos  quidem  mores:  and 
when  the  negative  leading  proposition  has  subordinate  subdivisions  with  neque 
^^eque,  neve — neve,  or  non — non,  these  negative  particles  are  equivalent  to  aui 
— aut;  as,  Non  me  carmlnibus  vincet^  nee  Orpheus,  nee  Linus.  Virg.  NemTnem, 
non  re,  non  verbo,  non  vultu  denique  offendi.  Cic.  Nullius  rei  neque  prces,  ne- 
que manceps  f actus  est.  Nep. 

(b.)  In  a  few  passages,  however,  two  negatives  in  Latin,  as  in  Greek, 
Btrengthen  the  negation,  and  this  exception  appears  to  have  been  derived  from 
the  language  of  common  life ;  as.  Jura  te  non  ndcituram  hdmini  nemini.  Plant. 

(c.)  Nemo,  nullus,  nihil,  and  numquam  have  a  different  sense  according  as  the 
non  is  placed  before  or  after  them;  as,  Non  nemo,  some  one;  neino  non,  every 
one;  nonnulli,  some;  nullus  non,  every;  non  nihil,  something;  nihil  non,  every 
thing;  non  numquam,  sometimes;  numquam  non,  at  all  times.  So,  nusquam  non^ 
QyQYj  where,  but  instead  of  nonnusquam,  dllcubi  is  used. 

Rem.  6.  (a.)  Non  is  sometimes  omitted  after  non  modo  or  non  so- 
lum, when  followed,  in  a  subsequent  clause,  by  ne  quidem,  if  both 
clauses  have  the  same  verb,  and  if  the  verb  is  coiMtained  in  the  second 
clause;  as, 

If 


302  SYNTAX. ADVERBS.  §  277. 

MVii  rum  mddo  trasci,  sed  ne  dSlere  qiddem  im^Qne  Ucet,  which  is  equivalent  to 
Mthi  non  rtUklo  non  Irasci,  sed  ne  ddlere  qttidem  impune  licet,  or  Mihi  non  mddo 
irasci,  sed  duUre  qtildemimpune  non  licet,  Not  only  am  I  not  pemiitted  to  be 
angiy,  but  not  even  to  gi'ieve  with  impunity.  Cic.  Quum  sendiui  non  solujn  jur- 
rare  rempublicam,  sed  ne  lugere  quidem  liceret.  Id. 

(b.)  Non  is  also  rarely  omitted  after  non  mddo  when  followed  by  sed  or  verum 
with  ettam,  and  also  after  vie ;  as,  Qui  non  mddo  ea  futura  timet,  verum  etiam 
fert,  sustiiietgue  prcesentia.  Who  not  only  does  not  fear....  Cic.  Hcec  genera 
virtdtum  non  solum  in  inoi-ibiis  nostris,  sed  vix  jam  in  libris  rejienuntur.  These 
virtues  are  not  only  not  found  in  life,  but  scai-cely  in  books.  Id. 

Rem.  7.  Facile,  in  the  sense  of  undoubtedljf,  clearly^  is  joined  to  superlativei, 
and  words  of  similar  import;  as,  Vir  unus  totius  Grcecics  f  kcile  doctissimus.  Cic 
Homo  regionis  illius  virtute  facile  princeps.  Id. 

Rem.  8.  Sentences  are  often  united  by  means  of  an  adverb  which  is  repeated 
before  each  of  the  connected  clauses;  as,  mddo — mddo,  and  nunc — nunc,  (some- 
times— sometimes);  as,  Mddo  hoc,  mddo  illuddlcit;  mddo  h%ic,  mddo  iUuc  vdlai 
Instead  of  the  second  mddo  other  particles  of  time  are  sometimes  used ;  as, 
aliquando,  nonnumquam,  interdum,  scepius,  turn  or  deinde. — Parrt*n^—par/im,' part- 
ly— partly,'  is  sometimes  tised  with  a  genitive  or  the  preposition  ex,  in  the 
sense  of  alii — alii,  as  a  nominative  in  all  the  genders ;  as,  Quum  pariim  e  nobis 
ita  timidi  sunt,  ui,  etc.,  partim  ita  republicd  dversi,  ut,  etc. — Simul — simtd,  '  as 
well — a*,'  like  nunc — nunc,  is  not  found  in  Cicero. — Qua — qitd  is  equivalent  to 
et — et. —  Tum — turn  is  used  sometimes  like  mddo — mddo,  sometimes  lUs.Q  partim — 
pariim ;  as  Erumpunt  scspe  vitia  dmicdrum  turn  in  ipsos  dmicos^  tum  in  dlienos. 
Cic.  EcEC  (bine/icia)  tum  in  Universam  renipOblicam,  turn  in  singulos  elves  con- 
fenaUur.  Id. 

Rem.  9.  Quum — tum  is  equivalent  to  et — et,  except  in  assigning  a  greater 
importance  to  the  second  part:  hence  it  must  be  translated  by  *  both — and 
especially,'  '  not  only — but  also,'  or  •  but  more  particuhu-ly.'  Sometimes  ad- 
ditional weight  is  given  to  the  second  part  by  means  of  vcro,  eerie,  etiam,  qud- 
gue,  prcBcipue,  impi-imis  or  maxime.  This  use  of  quum — tum  seems  to  have  had 
its  origin  in  the  use  of  quum  with  the  subjunctive  and  often  with  the  indica- 
tive in  the  protasis,  followed  by  turn  in  the  apodosis.  When  quum  followed  by 
tum  serves  to  express  the  opposition  between  single  words  which  have  the 
same  verb,  it  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  complete  adverb ;  as,  FortHna  quum  in  relx- 
quis  rebus,  tum  prceclpue  in  bello  jylHi^^Tntim  pdiesi.  Sometimes  the  verb  stands 
in  the  first  part  of  the  sentence ;  as,  Quum  omnis  arrdgnntia  ddiosa  est,  tum  ilia 
ingenii  atqjie  cldquenticB  multo  mdlesiissima.  Tum  is  sometimes  repeated  in  the 
second  part  of  the  sentence ;  as,  Quem  pater  mdriens  quum  tdtdi'ibus  et  jjrdpin- 
quis,  tum  legibus,  tum  cBquitdti  mdgistrdtuum,  tum  Judtciis  vestris  commenddtum 
pHtdvit.  Cic.     Sometimes  the  gradation  is,  quum — tum — tum  vero. 

Rem.  10.  Non  mddo — sed  etiam  (or  non  solum,  or  non  tanlum — verum  etiam) 
generally  expresses  the  transition  from  less  important  to  more  important  thin^, 
like  the  English  'not  only — but  (also)'.  The  transition  from  greater  to  smaller 
things  is  expressed  by  nx>n  mddo — sed,  without  tlie  etiam,  which  we  render  in 
English  by  '  I  will  not  say — but  only,'  and  in  Latin,  too,  we  may  say  non  dicata 
or  non  dico — sed ;  as,  Quid  est  enim  minus  non  dico  drdtdiis,  sed  hdminis. 

Rem.  11.  Tani — quam  expresses  a  comparison  in  degree;  as,  Nemo  tarn 
multa  scHpsif,  quam  multa  sunt  nostra.  With  superlatives  they  are  rendered 
into  ?2nglish  by  '  the — the '  and  comparatives ;  as,  Vetei-nosus  quam  2>liirhnum 
bibit,  tarn  mixime  sitit,  The  more  he  drinks,  the  more  he  thirsts.  Cato.  Quam 
quisque  pe.-isime  fecit,  tam  maxime  tutus  est.  Sail. —  Tarn — quam  quod  maxime 
signifies,  '  as  much  as  possible.' — Non  tam — quam  sismifieSj  'not  so  much — as,* 
or  '  less — than  ' ;  as,  Prdvincia  non  tam  grdtidsa  et  illustris,  quam  negoiidsa  ac 
mdlesta.  Cic. 

Rem.  12.  Non  minus — quam  and  non  mdgis — quam  are  equivalent  to  ceque — 
ac, 'as  much  as,' but  in  7M>«  ma^w — ytwjn  the  greater  weight  is  attached  to  the 
aflSrmative  clause  begin-aing  with  quam ;  as,  Alexander  non  dOcis  magis  quam 


§  277.  SYNTAX. PREPOSITIONS.  303 

mlliiis  munia  exsSquebdtur,  Alexander  performed  as  much  the  service  of  a  sol- 
dier as  that  of  a  commander.  In  this  connection  pliis  frequently  supplies  the 
place  of  mdgis. 

(a.)  Sic  and  ita  are  demonstrative  adverbs  corresponding  to  the  relative  ut 
The  restrictive  meaning  of  ltd  (see  §  191,  E.  5.),  is  sometimes  made  more  em- 

?hatic  by  the  addition  of  LCimen.  Tnntus  is  used  in  a  like  restrictive  sense;  as, 
^n^sidil  lantum  est,  ut  ne  murus  quidem  cingi  possif,  i.  e.  '  only  so  much.'  Oa?s. 

(6.)  Ut — ltd  or  sic  places  sentences  on  an  equalitv.  Tbey  may  sometimes 
be  translated  'although — still,'  or  'indeed — but.' — f he  adverb  «<,"' as,'  some- 
times takes  the  signification  of  the  conjunction  quod,  'because.';  as,  Atgue  ill&, 
ut  semper  fuit  apertisslmus,  non  se  pur'ydvit.  Cic. 

Rem.  13.  In  an  enumeration,  prlmum,  deinde,  turn,  denique  are  commonly 
preferred  to  the  mmierals,  prlmum,  secundo,  (for  secundum  is  not  often  used), 
tertium,  guartum,  etc.,  unless  the  strict  succession  of  the  numbers  is  required. 
Sometimes  turn  is  used  once  or  twice  instead  of  delude,  or  the  series  is  extended 
by  accedit,  hue  adde,  etc.  Sometimes  denique  is  followed  by  ^osirerao  to  form 
the  conclusion  of  a  series,  but  often  denique  without  the  other  adverbs  con*' 
eludes  a  series,  and  is  then  equivalent  to  '  in  short '  or  '  in  fine.'  See  Cic.  Cat. 
1,5. 

Reji.  14.  Minus  is  often  used  for  non ;  as,  Nonnumquam  ea,  qace  prcedicta 
sunt,  minus  eveniunt.  Cic. — So,  si  minus — at,  '  if  not — yet;'  and  sin  minus,  'but 
if  not,'  without  a  verb,  after  a  preceding  si ;  but  with  si  non  tlie  verb  is  repeated. 
—The  English  'how  little'  is  in  Latin  qtiam  non;  and  '  so  little,'  ita  non  ot 
ddeo  non ;  as,  ddeo  non  cUrdbat,  quid  h6mm.es  de  se  Idquerentur. 

Rem.  15.  Nunc  always  expresses  the  time  actually  present,  or  the  time  to 
which  a  narrator  transfers  himself  for  the  purpose  of  making  his  description 
livelier.  Thus  in  speaking  of  the  present  time  we  may  say,  Nunc  pr'imum 
somnia  me  cludunt  or  eluserunt ;  but  in  a  narrative  we  must  say,  Somnia  tunc 
prlmum  se  dicebat  elusisse.  Compare  the  use  of  hie  and  ille.  See  §  207,  R.  23,  (c.) 

Rem.  16.  The  conjunction  dum, '  while,'  when  added  to  negatives,  becomes  an 
adverb,  signifying  "  yet ' ;  as,  tiondum,  '  not  yet ' ;  necdum,  '  and  not  yet ' ;  nul- 
lusdum,  '  no  one  yet ' ;  niJdldum,  '  nothing  yet.'  Hence  vixdum,  signifies  '  scarcely 
yet ' ;  as,  Vixdum  epistdlam  tuam  Ugeram,  quum  ad  me  Curtius  venit.  Cic. — 
So,  also,  the  conjunction  nisi,  by  omitting  its  verb  or  uniting  it  Avith  the  lead- 
ing verb,  acquii-es,  after  negatives  and  negative  questions,  the  sense  of  the  ad- 
verb '  except,'  which  is  generally  expi'essed  by  prceterguam  or  the  pi*eposition 
prceter,  and  must  be  so  expressed  when  no  negative  precedes.  But  the  ex- 
pression *  except  that '  may  be  rendered  either  by  nisi  quod  or  proiterquam 
quod. — After  nihil  dliud  we  may  use  either  nisi  or  quam,  nisi  referring  to  nihil 
and  quam  to  aliud.  Hence  nihil  dliud  nisi  signifies  '  nothing  further,'  or  'noth- 
ing more,'  and  nihil  dliud  quam,  '  nothing  else,'  or  '  no  other  thing  but  this.' 

Rem.  17.  Ut,  *  as,'  in  interposed  clauses,  such  as  ut  dp'inor,  ut  pHio,  ut  censeo, 
ut  credo,  is  frequently  omitted.  Q^edo,  used  in  this  manner  often  takes  an  ironi- 
cal sense. 

PKEPOSITIONS. 

n.  1.  See  respecting  the  construction  of  prepositions  with  the  accusative, 
§  235;  and  with  the  ablative,  §  241.  See,  also,  for  the  different  meanings  of 
prepositions,  §  195,  and  for  their  arrangement,  §  279,  10. 

2.  Two  prepositions  must  not  be  joined  in  Latin,  as  they  sometimes  are  in 
English,  with  the  same  noun;  as,  to  speak /or  and  against  a  laAv;  or,  I  have 
learned  this  toUh,  and,  to  some  extent,  from  him.  These  sentences  may  be 
thus  expressed  in  Latin ;  /j?*o  lege  et  contra  legem  dlcere ;  hcec  cum  eo,  p'oiim 
etinm  ao  eo  dldicl.  Those  dissyllabic  prepositions  onlv,  which  are  sometimes 
used  as  adverbs,  may  follow  another,  without  being  joined  with  a  case ;  as, 
Quod  aut  secundum  ndturam  esset,  aut  contra.  Cic.  C'is  Pddum  ultrdque.  Liv 
Caesar  reverses  the  order.  Intra  extrdque  munitionea.  B.  Civ.  3,  72. 


804  SYNTAX. CONJUNCTIONS.  §  278. 

3.  When  nouns  mutually  dependent  upon  a  preposition  are  in  ap- 
position, when  they  constitute  an  enumeration  without  a  connective, 
and  when  connected  by  copulative,  disjunctive,  adversative,  or  com- 
parative conjunctions,  the  preposition  is  not  repeated,  unless  such 
nouns  are  to  be  distinguished  from  each  oiher,  or  are  emphatic ;  as,. 

QuUl  dlcam  de  thtiSSLuro  omnium  rerum^  memoria?  Hoc  apjxiret  in  bestiis, 
volucribus,  naiitibus,  agrcstibus,  cicurlbus,  feris,  tit  se  ipsa  dlUffant.  Cic. 
Scepissime  inter  me  et  ScipiOnem  de  am'uitid  disserebdtur.  Id.  Quid  /uteres  si 
in  aliquam  dOmnm  villainve  venissesf  Id.  NVdl  per  iram  aut  cupiditutem 
actum  est.  Id.  Themistocks  mm  minus  in  rebus  gereudis  promptus  qitam  exco- 
gitandis  erat.  Nep. 

4.  The  monosyllabic  prepositions  a6,  a<f,  de,  car,  and  in  are  often  used  before 
each  of  two  nouns  connected  by  cf,  etc.,  especially  if  the  qualities  denoted  by 
such  nouns  are  to  be  considered  separately.  If  the  nouns  are  separated  by 
ei — et,  nee — riec,  etc.,  the  prepositions  must  be  repeated;  as,  Ut  eoi-um  et  in 
hellivis  et  in  clvibbus  officiis  vigeai  industi-ia.  Cic. — Inter  is  frequently  repeated 
by  Cicero  after  interesse,  and  other  writers  repeat  it  after  other  verbs  also;  as, 

Cluid  intersit  inter  jyopiddrem — cirem,  ei  inter  canstantem,  sevenim  et  grdvem.  Cic. 
Ctrtdtum  inter  Ap.  CUiudium  m-axinie  feruni  et  inter  P.  Decium.  Liv. 

5.  (a.)  In  poetr}'  a  preposition  is  occasionally  omitted  with  the  first  of  two 
nouns,  and  put  with  the  second  only ;  as,  Quce  nemdra,  aut  quos  dgor  in  specut^ 
(Hor.)  for,  in  qua  nemora  aut  in  'qyi)s  specus  dgor.  So,  |Ior.  Ep.  2,  1,  25. — 
(6.)  An  ellipsis  of  a  preposition  with  the  relative  pronoun  sometimes  occurs, 
togetlier  with  that  of  the  verb  belonging  to  the  preceduig  demonstrative;  as. 
In  eddem  dplnidne  fui^  qua  reliqui  onines,  (Cic),  properly  in  qua  reUqui  omnes 
/ueninL 

CONJUNCTIONS. 

§  3T8.  Copulative,  disjunctive,  and  other  coordinate  con- 
junctions, connect  similar  constructions. 

Note  1.  Clauses  are  similarly  constructed,  which  are  mutually  independent, 
whose  subjects  and  verbs  are  in  the  same  case  and  mood,  and  which  have 
either  no  dependence  or  a  similar  dependence  on  another  clause. 

KoTE  2.  (a.)  Words  have  a  sunilar  construction,  when  they  stand  in  the 
same  relation  to  some  other  word  or  words  in  the  sentence.    Hence, 

(6.)  Conjunctions  connect  the  same  cases  of  nouns  and  pronouns,  depend- 
ent, if  the  cases  are  oblique,  upon  the  same  government;  the  same  number, 
case,  and  gender  of  adjectives,  belonging  to  the  same  noun;  the  same  mood  of 
verbs,  either  independent,  or  alike  dependent;  adverbs  qualifying  the  same 
verbs,  adjectives,  etc. ;  and  prepositions  on  which  depends  the  same  noun  or 
pronoun;  as,  Conctduni  venti,  jugiuTUqne  nubes^  The  winds  subside,  and  the 
clouds  disperse.  Hor.  Ldcum,  quern  et  nan  c6qutt  sol,  et  tangit  ros.  Varr.  Ludi 
decern  per  dies,  facti  sunt,  neque  res  uUa  prceiermissa  est.  Cic.  Vtdes,  ut  alia, 
stei  nive  candidum  Soracte,  nee  Jam  sustineant  Onus  silva  Uborantes,  geluque 
JlUmina  constiterinl  dcuio.  Hor.  Inielligiiis  et  dnimum  ei  prcesto  fuisse,  uec  cvn- 
sllium  d^fuisse.  Cic.  Generi  dnimantium  omni  est  a  naiurd  trihutum,  ut  se  tuedtur, 
decllnetque  ea,  qua  ndcitura  vldeantur.  Id.  AiU  nemo,  aui  Cfito  sapiens  fuit.  Id. 
Pulvis  ei  umbra  sumus.  Hor.  Si  tu  et  TuUia  vdlefis,  ego  et  ClcCro  vdlimus.  Cic. 
Aggere  jacto  turiibusjue  constitutis.  Cies.  Clarus  ei  houoratus  rir.  An  illus- 
trious and  honorable  man.  Id.  CoBsar  Remos  cohortStus,  I'tberdliterque  drdtion^ 
prosc'ciitus.  Caes.  Pater  tuns,  quern  colui  et  dJlexi.  Cic.  Bdgce  spectani  in 
septentriunem  et  orieutem  sOlem.  Cjes.  Navibus  junctis,  ratibus^ue  compluri- 
&JM  factis.  Id.  La^e,  vel'tdbellas  redde.  Plaut.  Aliobrdges  trans  RhOddnum  \\cos 
possessionesyue  Mbebant.  Cses.  Quum  iriumphum  egeris,  censorque  fueris,  ei 
obieris  legdius.  Id.    Qmu/tj  ad  qppidum  accessisset,  castt^dque  ibi  poneret.  Cses, 


§  278.  SYNTAX. — CONJUNCTIONS.  805 

Ades  dntmo,  et  omitte  iitn^drem.  Cic.  Fa  vWere  ac  perspIcSre  pdtestis.  Id. 
Graviter  et  copi()se  dixisse  dlcitur.  Id.  Cum  fratre  an  sine.  Id.  Cf.  §  277,  II.  2. 
Cui  caraiina  cordis  numerosque  intendere  nereis.  Virg.  Nee  census,  nee  cldrum 
nomen  avorum,  sed  probltas  magnos  mg^nmmque  jdcit.  Ovid.  JPhildsophi  ne- 
gant  queraquam  virum  b6num,  esse,  nisi  sapientem.  Cic.  Gloria  virtutem  tarn,- 
guam  umbra  sequiiur.  Id. 

Remark  1.  Copulative  conjunctions  may  connect  either  single 
words  and  phrases  or  entire  clauses ;  the  other  conjunctions,  whether 
coordinate  or  subordinate,  connect  clauses  only. 

Rem.  2.  Words  thus  connected  are  sometimes  in  different  cases,  though  in 
the  same  construction;  as,  Mea,  et  reipublicae  interest.  Cic.  (See  §  219.)  Slve 
es  Romte,  slve  in  Epiro.  Id.  (See  ^  221  and  254.  But  see  also  ^  221,  Note.)  In 
Mettii  descendat  judicis  aures,  et  patris  et  nostras.  Hor.  See  §  211,  R.  3.  In  like 
manner,  Hannibal  non  aliter  vinci  pdiuit,  quam  mora. 

Rem.  3.  As  the  subjunctive  is  often  used  for  the  imperative,  they  may  be 
connected  by  coordinate  conjunctions;  as,  Disce  nee  invideas.  Pers. 
_  Rem.  4.  Where  the  purpose  of  the  writer  requires  it,  coordinate  conjunc- 
tions sometimes  connect  independent  propositions,  whose  verbs  are  in  different 
moods ;  as,  Stuporem  hdmlnis,  vel  dicam  pecudis,  videte.  Cic.  JVec  satis  scio, 
nee,  si  sciam,  d'lcere  ausim.  Liv. 

Rem.  5.  Et  is  used  after  midti  followed  by  another  adjective,  where  in 
English  '  and '  is  usually  omitted ;  as,  Midtce  et  magnce  arodres,  Many  large 
trees.  In  such  cases  et  supplies  the  place  of  et  is,  introducing  a  more  accurate 
description.   See  §  207,  R.  26,  (c) 

Rem.  6.  The  conjunction  is  often  omitted;  as,  (a.)  When  two  single  words, 
as  comprehending  the  whole  idea,  are  opposed  to  each  other,  as,  vetim,  nolim, 
whether  I  would  or  not;  maxima  minima,  the  p^eatest  as  well  as  the  least; 
prima  postrema,  from  the  first  to  the  last;  dignos  indignos  ddire  ;  Ire  redlre,  to 
go  to  and  fro.  ^dlficiis  omnibus  publlcis  privdtis,  sacris  prdfdnis  sic  pepercit. 
Cic.    Nam  gloriam,  hdndrem,  imperium  b&nus  igndvus  ceque  sibi  exoptant.  Sail. 

(b.)  Et  is  very  frequently  omitted  between  the  names  of  two  colleagues;  as, 
Consules  deddrdti  sunt  On.  Pompeius  M.  Crassus.  P.  LentUlo  L.  Tnario,  qutes- 
toribus  urbdnis.  Cic.  Sometimes,  also,  when  the  two  persons  are  not  colleagues. 
It  is  also  occasionally  omitted  between  two  words  in  the  oratorical  style;  as, 
Aderant  dmlci,  prdpinqui.  Id. ;  also  with  verbs ;  as,  Adsunt,  queruntur  Slcull.  Id. 
In  good  prose,  if  three  or  more  substantives  are  joined,  it  is  usual  either  wholly 
to  omit  the  conjunction  or  to  insert  it  between  each.  The  followfng  maj'  serve 
as  an  example  of  both  cases :  Qui  non  modo  Curiis,  Cdtonibus,  Pompeiis,  antiquis 
illis,  sed  his  recentibus,  Mdriis  et  Dldiis  et  Cmliis  commemdrandis  jdcebant.  This 
is  also  the  common  practice  with  adjectives  and  verbs,  and  hence  when  et  has 
not  previously  occurred  in  an  enunieration  of  persons  or  things,  we  should  not 
conclude  the  enumeration  with  et  alii,  et  reliqui,  et  cetera,  etc.,  but  should  make 
use  of  the  adjectives  alone,  alii,  reliqid,  cetera,  etc.  But  though  et,  ac  and  at- 
que  are  not  used  alone  in  the  third  or  fourth  place,  yet  _  the  enclitic  que  fre- 
quently occurs  in  this  position ;  as,  Precor  ut  ea  res  vobis  pdcem,  iranqidllitd- 
tem,  otium,  concordiamque  afftrat.  Cic.  Et  may  be  supplied  also  when  two 
protases  introduced  by  si  are  joined  together;  where  we  say*  if— and  if,'  or 
'  if— and.'  See  an  example  in  Cic.  Off.  3,  9. 

(c.)  An  ellipsis  of  M<  is  supposed  when  ne  precedes  and  et,  atque,  or  qice  is 
used  to  continue  the  sentence,  those  copulative  conjunctions  in  such  case  ob- 
taining the  meaning  of  the  adversative  sed;  as,  MOnere  ccepit  Porum,  ne  ultima 
expiirlH  per-severdret,  dederetque  se  victori.  Curt. 

Rem.  7.  Copulative  conjunctions  are  often  used,  before  each  of  two  or  more 
connected  words  or  clauses,  in  order  to  mark  the  connection  more  forcibly;  as, 
Et  pecunia  persuddet,  et  grdtia,  et  aucidritas  dlcentis,  et  dignitas,  et  postremo 
aspectus.  Quint.  Hoc  et  twpe,  nee  tdmen  iutum.  Cic.  Neque  ndta  est,  et  externa 
"M.  Id.  Et  ifU  et  m^ki  vdlupt&ti  f'$re.  Id.  Before  clausies  tiife  disjunctive  con« 
26* 


806  SYNTAX- — ^ARRANGEMENT   OF   WORDS.  §  279. 

junctions  are  used  in  a  similar  manner;  as,  Res  ipsa  aut  invitdbit  aut  dihortabt- 
iu7'.  Id.  So,  also,  nunc. ..nunc,  slTnuL..simul,  partim...parUin,  qud...qua,  turn... 
turn,  quum...tum,  are  used  before  successive  clauses. 

Kem.  8.  To  connect  different  names  of  the  same  person  or  tliin^,  stve  or  «ctt, 
rather  than  aut  or  vel,  is  employed:  as,  Mars  site  Motors.  Cf.  ^  198,  2,  (c.) 

Rem.  9.  Instead  of  et  and  ut  with  the  negatives  nemo,  nihil,  nullus,  and  num- 
quam,  neque  (or  nee),  and  ne  are  used  with  the  corresponding  afl5rmative  words 
quisquam,  ullus,  um^uam,  and  usquam.  But '  in  order  that  no  one '  is  rendered 
in  Latin  by  ne  quis  and  not  by  ne  guisquam,  see  §  207,  R.  31,  (a.);  as,  Horcs 
quidem  cedunt,  et  dies,  et  menses,  ei  anni :  nee  prceteritum  temjyus  umquam  re- 
vei'Utur.  Cic.  Setidtus  decrevii,  ddrent  6peram  consults,  ne  quid  respOUica  detrl- 
menti  caperet.  Caes. 

Rem.  10.  The  conjunctions  tgitur,  verum,  verumtamen,  sed,  and  sed  tdmen,  in- 
dicate a  return  to  the  construction  of  the  leading  clause,  when  it  has  been 
•  disturbed  bj*  the  insertion  of  another  clause.  These  conjunctions,  in  such 
connection,  are  usually  rendered  by  '  I  say,'  ai.d  sometimes  in  Latin  inquam  is 
so  used.  Nam  also  is  occasionally  employed  in  this  way  and  very  rarely 
ttdque. 

Rem  11.  Vero  and  autem  are  frequently  omitted  in  adversative  clauses, 
especially  in  short  ones;  as,  Vincere  scit  Hannibal,  victoria  uti  nescit.  Li  v.  This 
omission' often  occurs  in  describing  a  progress  from  smaller  to  greater  things, 
as  in  Cic.  Cat.  1,  1.  And  it  is  to  be  remarked  that  non  in  the  second  rnember 
of  such  adversative  sentences  is  used  without  et  or  vero ;  as,  aliena  vitia  videt, 
*sua  non  videt.  But  in  unreal  suppositions  or  ironical  sentences,  where  the  second 
member  contains  the  truth,  et  non  or  ac  non  must  be  used,  where  we  may  sup- 
ply 'rather';  see  §  198,  1,  (c);  as,  Quasi  nunc  id  agdtur, — ac  non  hoc  qusera- 
tur.  Cic. 

INTEKJECTIONS. 

Respecting  the  construction  of  interjections  with  the  nominative,  see  §  209, 
R.  13:— with  the  dative,  ^  228,  3:— with  the  accusative,  §  238,  2:— and  with 
the  vocative,  §  240. 

AKRANGEMENT. 
I.    OF    THE    WORDS    OF    A    PROPOSITION. 

§  3#  O.  1.  In  arranging  the  parts  of  a  proposition  in  English,  after 
connectives,  are  placed,  first,  the  subject  and  the  words  which  modify  or  lijuit 
it ;  next,  the  verb  and  its  modifiers ;  then,  the  object  of  the  verb ;  and  finally, 
p)-epositions  and  the  words  depending  upon  them.  This  is  called  the  logical 
or  natural  order. 

2.  (a.)  In  Latin,  either  of  the  four  principal  parts  of  a  sentence  may  be 
placed  first,  and  there  is  great  freedom  in  the  arrangement  of  the  rest,  but 
with  this  general  restriction  in  prose,  that  toords  which  are  necessary  for  the 
comphie  expression  of  a  thought  ^ould  not  be  separated  by  the  intervention  of  other 
tcords.  In  ordinary  discourse,  especially  in  historical  writing,  the  following 
general  rule  for  the  arrangement^ of  the  parts  of  a  sentence  is  for  t#ie  ni<Dst  part 
observed- 

(&.)  In  a  Latin  sentence,  after  connectives,  are  placed,  first, 
the  subject  and  its  modifiers;  then,  the  oblique  cases  and  other 
woi*ds  which  depend  upon  or  modify  the  verb;  and  last  of  ail, 
the  verb. 


§  279.  SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OP   WORDS.  807 

(c.)  Hence  a  Latin  sentence  regularly  begins  with  the  subject  and  ends 
with  the  principal  verb  of  its  predicate;  as,  Dumnorix  gratia  et  laryltione  apud 
Sequanos  plunmnm  poterat.  Cajs.  But  the  verb  is  often  not  placed  at  the  end 
of  a  sentence,  especially  if  the  sentence  is  long,  or  if  two  many  verbs  would  be 
thus  brought  together  at  the  end.  In  the  familiar  style,  also,  the  verb  is  often 
placed  earlier  in  the  sentence,  and  in  explanatory  clauses  it  is  sometimes 
placed  at  the  very  beginning  of  the  proposition,  in  which  case  a  conjunction  is 
generally  added. 

(d.)  It  is  also  to  be  remarked,  as  a  further  modification  of  the  general  nile 
of  arrangement,  that,  in  sentences  containing  the  expression  of  emotion,  the 
word  whose  emphasis  characterizes  it  as  especially  affecting  the  feelings,  or  as 
forming  a  contrast,  is  placed  at  the  beginning;  as,  Cito  arescit  lacrlma,  prcB- 
tertim  in  dlienis  indlis,  Quickly  dries  the  tear,  especially  when  shed  for  others' 
woes.  Cic.     Sua  vitia  insfpitntes  et  suam  culpam  in  senectutem  conferunt.  Id. 

(c.)  If  there  be  no  emotive  or  pathetic  word  requiring  prominence,  the  place 
at  the  end  of  the  proposition  is  reserved  for  the  significant  word,  that  is,  the 
word  which  is  to  be  most  strongly  impressed  upon  the  understanding  or  mem- 
ory; as,  Gallia  est  omnis  divlsa  in  partes  tres.  Cs&s.  Quod  ante  id  tempus  accidS- 
rat  numquam.  Id.  Quod  dliud  iter  hdberent  nullum.  Id.  Quce  virtus  ex  provir- 
dendo  est  appelldta  prudentia.  Cic. 

3.  (a.)  Connectives  generally  stand  at  the  beginning  of  the  clause 
■which  they  introduce,  and  with  the  following  this  is  their  only  posi- 
tion ;  viz.  et,  etenim,  ac,  at,  atque,  atqui,  neque  or  nee,  aut,  vel,  slve^ 
sin,  sed,  nam,  verum,  and  the  relatives  quare,  quocirca,  and  quamo- 
hrem. 

(b.)  Most  other  connectives  generally  stand  in  the  first  place,  but  when  a 
particular  word  is  peculiarly  emphatic,  this  word  with  all  that  belongs  to  it 
stands  first,  and  the  conjunction  follows  it.  Ut,  even  when  there  is  no  particu- 
lar emphasis,  is  commonly  placed  after  vix,  pcene,  and  2)r6pe,  and  also  after  the 
negatives  nullus,  nemo,  nihil,  and  the  word  tantum.  In  Cicero,  ttdque  stands 
first  and  igitur  is  commonly  placed  after  the  first,  and  sometimes  after  several 
words. 

(c.)  Autem,  enim,  and  vero-(hut),  are  placed  after  the  first  word  of  the  clause, 
or  after  the  second,  when  the  first  two  belong  together,  or  when  one  of  them 
is  the  auxiliary  ver!  j  su7n ;  as,  Ille  enim  revdcdtus  resistere  ccepit.  Cses.  £go 
vero  vellem,  afuisats.  Cic.  Incredibile  est  enim,  quam  sit,  etc.  Id.  They  rarely 
occur  after  several  words ;  as.  Our  non  de  integro  autem  datum.  Id.  The  encli- 
tics que,  ne,  ve,  are  usually  subjoined  to  the  first  word  in  a  clause ;  but  when  a 
monosyllabic  preposition  stands  at  the  beginning,  they  are  often  attached  to  its 
case ;  as,  Romam  Cdto  demigrdvit,  m  foroque  esse  coepit ;  and  this  is  always  the 
case  with  a,  ad  and  ob.     So,  also,  for  the  sake  of  euphony,  Apud  quosque.  Cic. 

(d.)  Quidem  and  qudque,  Avhen  belonging  to  single  words,  are  always  sub- 
joined to  the  emphatic  word  in  a  clause;  as,  Ve7'bo  ille  reus  erat,  re  auidera 
vei'o  Oppianicus.  Cic.  Me  scilicet  maxime,  sed  proxime  ilium  quoqne  jefellis- 
$€?».  Id.  In  negative  sentences,  ne  precedes,  and  quidem  follows,  the  emphatic 
word ;  as,  Ne  ad  Cdtonem  quidem  prOvocdbo.  Cic—  Quidem  is  sometimes  at- 
tracted from  the  word  to  which  it  properly  belongs  to  a  neighboring  pronoun; 
as,  Tibique  persuade,  esse  te  quidem  mihi  cdrisstmum,  sed  multo  fdre  cdriorem, 
si,  etc.,  instead  of,  te  cdrissimum  quidem  mihi  esse. — Prepositions  and  conjunc- 
tions belonging  to  the  word  on  which  the  emphasis  rests  are  placed  with  it  be- 
tween ne  and  quidem;  as,  Ne  infdnis  quidem.  Cic.  ^  Ne  si  duhiteiur  quidem.  Id. 
Ne  quum  in  Sicilid  quidem  J'uit.  Id. ;  and  even  Ne  cujus  rei  argueretur  quidem.— r 
So,  also,  in  Cicero,  non  nisi,  'only,'  are  separated;  and  the  negative  may  even 
be  contained  in  a  verb. 

(e.)  The  preceding  rules  respecting  the  position  of  connectives  are  often 
violated  by  the  poets,  who  place  even  the  prepositive  conjunctions  after  one  or 
more  words  of  a  proposition ;  as,  Ht  tu,  pdtes  nam,  etc..  Hor.    Vivos  et  rddiret 


808  SYNTAX. — ^ARRANGEMENT    OF   WORDS.  §  279. 

ungues.  Id.  They  even  separate  et  from  the  word  belonging  to  it;  as,  Audire 
et  tideor  pios  errare  per  tucos.  Id.  So,  Auctius  atque  dii  melius  fecere.  Id. 
And  they  sometimes  append  que  and  re  neither  to  the  first  word,  nor  to  their 
proper  words  in  other  connections ;  as,  Messallam  terra,  dum  sequlturque  mari, 
instead  of  terra  mdrique.  Tib.  In  such  arbitrary  positions,  however,  these 
coujmictions  are  almost  invariably  joined  to  verbs  only. 

4.  When  a  word  is  repeated  in  the  same  clanse,  so  that  one  is  opposed  to, 
or  distinguished  from,  the  other,  they  must  stand  together ;  as,  Homines  homi- 
nlbus  maxime  utiles  esse  possunt.  Cic.  Eqviies  alii  aJio  dilapsi  sunt.  Liv.  Ugit- 
que  vlrara  vir.  Virg.  Manus  manum  lavai.  Petr.  So,  also,  the  personal  and 
possessive  pronouns ;  as,  Sequere  quo  tua  te  naUira  duciL  Suum  se  nigotium 
dgere  dicunt.  ^ 

5.  Words  used  antithetically  are  also  placed  near  each  other;  as,  Dum  ta- 
cent,  clamant.  Cic.    Fragile  corpus  animus  sempiternus  mdvet.  Id. 

6.  Inquam  and  often  aw,  introducing  a  quotation,  follow  one  or  more  of  the 
words  quoted;  as,  '' Non  nosti  quid  pater,*  inquit,  ^Chrysippus  dicat.*  Hor. 
'  Quid,*  aio, '  tun  cnmina  prodis  f '  Ovid.  When  a  nominative  is  added  to  inquit^ 
it  usually  follows  this  verb ;  as,  Mihi  vero,  inquit  Cotta,  vtdeiur.  Cic— jDlct< 
and  dixit  are  used  hke  inquit  only  by  the  poets. 

7.  (a.)  The  adjective  may  be  placed  before  or  after  its  noun  according  as 
one  or  the  other  is  emphatic,  the  more  emphatic  word  being  pla#ed  before  the 
other.  ^Vhen  any  thing  is  dependent  on  the  adjective,  it  usually  follows  its 
noun.  When  a  noun  is  limited  by  another  noun,  as  well  as  by  an  adjective, 
tiie  adjective  usually  precedes  both;  as,  Ulla  officii  prcecepta.  Oic.  Tuuin  erga 
dignitatem  meam  stadium.  Id. 

(b.)  Demonstratives,  and  the  adjectives  primus,  meditis,  etc.,  when  signifying 
tiie  first  part,  the  middle  part,  etc.,  (see  §  205,  R.  17),  usually  precede  their 
nouns;  as,  Ea  res.  Caes  His  ipsis  verbis.  Cic.  Media  nox.  Caes.  BeUqua 
JEgyptu£.  Cic. 

8.  Monosyllables  are  usually  prefixed  to  longer  words  with  which  they  are 
connected;  as,  Vir  cldrissimus.  Cic.  Di  immortales.  Res  innumerdbUes.  Vis 
tempestdtis.  Cses. 

9.  (a.)  When  nouns  are  put  in  apposition,  the  one  which  explains  or  defines 
the  other  is  general!}'-  put  last,  unless  it  is  to  be  made  emphatic ;  as.  Opes  iirl- 
tamenta  mdlonim.  Ovid.  Hence  names  of  honors  or  dignities,  and  every  thing 
of  the  nature  of  a  title,  are  commonly  placed  aft«r  the  proper  name,  as  explan- 
atory additions.  Thus,  especially,  the  names  of  changeable  Roman  dignities; 
as,  (Cicero  consul;  C  Curioni  trlbiino  plebis ;  but  also  permanent  appellations i 
as,  Ennius  poeta ;  PUdo  philosophus ;  Di6nysius  tyrannus ;  and  such  epithets  jvs 
vir  hdnestissimtis ;  hdmo  doctissimus.    But  the  hereditary  title  rex  is  frequently 

E laced  before  the  name;  as,  rex  Deiotarus;  and  so  the  title  Imperdtor  after  it 
ecame  permanent. 

(6.)  In  the  arrangement  of  the  Roman  names  of  persons,  the  prcendmen 
stands  first,  next  the  nomen  or  name  of  the  gens,  third  the  cognomen  or  name 
of  the  fdmilia,  and  last  the  agnomen ;  as,  PvbUus  Cornelius  Sclpio  Afncdnus. 
The  prsenomen  is  usually  denoted  by  a  letter.  In  the  imperial  times  the  nomen 
is  often  either  omitted  or  follows  as  something  subordinate. 

10.  (a.)  Oblique  cases  precede  the  words  on  which  they  depend, 
but  they  follow  prepositions ;  as,  x 

Popiili  Romani  laus  est.  Cic.  Laudis  avidi,  pecuniae  liberates.  Sail.  Cunctis 
esto  oenignus,  nulli  blandus,  panels  fdmilidiis,  omnibus  oequus.  Sen.  MonO- 
menium  aere  perennius.  Hor.  Hanc  tibi  dono  do.  Ter. — Ad  meridiem  spectans. 
Cic.     Extra  perlcHlum.  Id. 

(b.)  Genitives  depending  upon  neuter  adjectives  are  commonly  placed  last; 
as,  IncM'ta  fortunm.  Liv.    Nee  tibi  plus  cordis,  sed  nanus  oris  tnesL  Ovid. 


§  279.  SYNTAX. ARRANGEMENT    OF    WORDS.  309 

Remark.  This  rule,  so  far  especially  as  it  relates  to  genitives,  is  in  a  great 
degree  arbitrary,  as  the  position  of  the  governed  and  governing  words  depends 
on  the  idea  to  be  expresised ;  thus,  inors  patris  tui^  contrasts  tlie  death  with  the 
preceding  life;  but,  frCiiris  tui  mors  distinguishes  this  case  of  death  from  others. 
Hence  we  say,  dnlmi  imtiis,  Cmimi  morbus,  corporis  partes,  terrce  initus. — An  ob- 
jective genitive  usually  follows  the  worl  on  which  it  depends:  as,  una  shjiitfi- 
cdtione  literarum,  by  means  of  a  single  notice  by  letters. — When  several  geni- 
tives are  dependent' on  one  noun,  the  subjective  genitive  commonly  precedes 
and  the  objective  genitive  may  either  precede  or  follow  the  governing  noun. — 
The'  genitive  dependent  on  causa  or  grnti'i,  'on  account  of,'  regularly  precedes 
these  abhitives;  as,  (jlOrlce  causa,  mortem  db'ire;  iJmolumenti  sui  r/rfitid. 

(c.)  When  a  noixn  which  is  governed  by  a  preposition,  is  modified  by  other 
words  which  precede  it,  the  preposition  usually  stands  before  the  words  by 
which  the  noun  is  modified ;  as,  A  pi'vnd  luce  ad  sextam  horam.  Liv.  Ad  dnlmi 
met  ketitiam.  Cic.     Ad  bene  bedieque  v'lvendum.  Id. 

{d.)  Sometimes,  however,  the  preposition  comes  between  its  noun  and' an 
adjective  or  a  genitive,  by  which  the  noun  is  modified;  as,  Nulla  in  re.  Cic. 
Justis  de  cansis.  Id.  Suos  intei'  cequdles.  Id.  Hanc  ob  causam.  Id.  Magno  cum 
meiu.  Id.  Qua  in  urbe.  Id.  Ed  in  re.  Id.  jEtdtis  suce  cum  prlmis.  Nep. — 
So,  also,  a  conjunction  may  follow  the  preposition;  as,  Pos<  vero  Sulkevicto- 
riam. 

(e.)  Per,  in  adjurations,  is  often  separated  from  its  case  by  other  words;  as, 
Per  ego  te  deos  oro.  Ter. — In  the  poets,  other  prepositions  are  sometimes  sepa- 
rated in  the  same  manner;  as,  Vulnera,  quce.  circum  plurima  muros  accejnt  pa- 
trios.  Virg. 

(/.)  Tenus  and  versus,  and  sometimes  other  prepositions,  (cf.  §  241,  R.  1,) 
follow  their  cases,  especially  when  joined  with  qui  or  Jiic.  This  occurs  most 
frequently  with  the  prepositions  ante,  contra,  inter,  &nd  propter;  more  rai-ely 
with  circa,  circum,  pihies,  ultra  and  adversus ;  and  with  still  less  frequency 
with  post,  per,  ad,  and  de  ;  as,  quam  ante,  quern  contra,  qtios  inter,  quem  prop- 
ter, quos  ad,  quem  ultra,  hunc  adcersus,  hunc  jjost,  quam  circa. — The  preceding 
prepositions,  and  more  rarely  others  also,  sometimes,  especially  in  the  poets 
and  later  prose  writers,  follow  nouns  and  personal  pronouns.  In  such  case,  if 
the  noun  be  modified  by  an  adjective  or  a  genitive,  the  preposition  sometimes 
stands  between  them,  and  sometimes  follows  both;  as,  Postes  sub  ipsos.  Virg. 
Rlpam  dpud  Euphrdtis.  Tac.  Maria  omnia  circum.  Virg.  And  more  rarely 
other  words  intervene ;  as,  His  accensa  super.  Id.  Vitiis  nemo  sine  nascUwr 
Hor. 

11.  Infinitives  precede  the  verbs  on  which  they  depend ;  as, 
Juguriha,  Ohi  eos  Africa  decessisse  ratus  est,  n^ue  propter  Idci  ndturam  Cir- 

lam  armis  expugnare  possit,  mcenia  circumdat.  Sail.     Servire  mxigis  quam  impS- 
rare  parati  estis.  Id. 

12.  A  word  which  has  the  same  relation  to  several  words,  either  precedes  or 
follows  them  all ;  as,  Vir  grams  et  sapiens.  Cic.  Cldrus  et  hdnordtus  vir.  Id. 
/»  scriptoribus  le^endis  et  imltandis,  or  In  legendis  Imttandisque  sci'iptoribus ; 
but  not  In  legendis  scriptoribus  et  Imitandis.  Quum  respondere  7ieque  vellet  neque 
2X)$set.  Hdbentur  et  dlcuntur  tyranni.  AmlcUiam  nee  usu  nee  rdtione  habent 
cognltara. 

13.  Relatives  are  commonly  placed  after  their  antecedents,  and 
as  near  to  them  as  possible ;  as, 

Qui  sim,  ex  eo,  quem  ad  te  mlsi,  cognosces.  SaU.  LitSras  ad  te  misi,  per  quas 
grdtias  tlbi  egi.  Cic. 

14.  Quisque  is  generally  placed  after  se,  sum,  qui,  ordinals  and  superlatives ; 
as,  Suos  quisque  debet  tuein.  Cic.  Satis  superque  est  slbi  sudrum  culque  rerum 
cui'a.  Id.  Severitas  dnimadversionis  inflmo  cuique  grdtisslma.  Id.  Maxlme 
dicet,  quod  est  cujusque  maxime  suum.  Id.  Quisque  very  rarely  begins  a  -ropo- 
sitloD. 


810  SYNTAX. ARKANGEilENT    OF    CLAUSES.  §  280. 

15.  (a.)  An  adverb  is  usually  placed  immediately  before  the  word  which  it 
qualifies;  but  if  the  same  %yor"d  is  modified  by  the  oblique  case  of  a  noun,  the 
latter  commonly  follows  the  adverb;  as,  Male  parta  mule  dilabuniur.  Cic. 
Ifihil  tam  asjyei'um  neque  tam  difficile  esse,  quod  non  cupidissime  facturi  esseni. 
Sail. — Jmjfenum  facile  its  artibits  retinetur,  quibus  initio  partum  est.  Id.  Sed 
masime  ddolescentium  fdmilidntdtes  appetebat.  Id.  Nan  tam  in  bellis  et  in 
prceUis,  quam  in  pi-omissis  ei  fide  firmiorem.  Cic. — (6.)  When  non  belongs  to  a 
single  word  of  tlie  proposition,  it  always  stands  immediately  before  it  ;  as,  non 
te  reprehendo,  sed  jortanam.  But  if  it'belongs  to  the  proposition  generally,  it 
istands  before  the  verb,  and  particularly  before  the  finite  verb,  if  an  infinitive 
depends  on  it ;  as.  Cur  tantdpere  te  angas,  intelligere  sane  non  possum.  Instead 
of  non  dico,  negn  is  generally  used ;  as,  negdvit  eum  ddesse. — The  negatives  'zon, 
tiegue,  nemo,  nullus,  when  joined  to  general  negative  pronouns  or  adverbs,  such  as 
quisquam,  uUus,  umquam,  always  precede  them  though  not  always  immediately ; 
as,  nemini  qiddquam  negdvit ;  non  memim  me  umquam  te  vidisse.  §  207,  R.  31. 

Note  1.  In  some  phrases,  custom  has  established  a  certain  order,  which  must 
be  observed  and  imitated;  as,  Clvis  Rdindnus,  pdpulus  Romdnus,  jus  civile,  ces 
dlimum,  terra  mdrique,  Pontljex  maximus,  mdgister  equitum,  trtbunus  mllitum. 
tribum  mllitum  consuldri  pdtestdte,  Jupiter  optimus  maximus,  via  Appia  ;  ne  quid 
respOhlica  ditrlmenti  capiat.  Cic.  The  ablatives  Opirudne,  spe,  justo,  sdliio,  (see 
§  256,  R.  9),  generaUy  precede  the  comparative. 

Note  2.  Exceptions  to  the  foregoing  principles  are  very  numerous.  These  may  arise 
(a)  from  emphasis;  (6)  from  poetic  license;  and  (c)  from  regard  to  the  harmony  of  the 
sentence.    The  following  general  rule  sometimes  modifies  nearly  all  the  preceding. 

16.  The  emphatic  word  is  placed  before  the  word  or  words  con- 
nected with  it  which  are  not  emphatic. 

Note  3.  The  last  place  is  often  an  emphatic  one,  except  for  the  verb. 
When  the  verb  is  neither  fii"st  nor  last  in  a  proposition  the  word  before  it  is 
emphatic.  An  adjective,  when  emphatic,  commonly  precedes  its  substantive; 
when  not  emphatic,  it  commonly  follows  it.  But  with  the  demonstrative  pro- 
nouns the  rule  is  reversed. 

Note  4.  The  principal  poetical  variation  in  the  arrangement  of  words  consists  in  the 
separation  of  the  adjective  from  its  noun,  and  in  putting  together  words  from  different 
parts  of  a  proposition. 

17.  A  sentence  should  not  close  like  a  hexameter  verse,  with  a  dactyl  and 
spondee ;  as,  JSsse  videtur ;  nor,  in  general,  with  a  monosyllable, 

18.  Hiatus  should  be  avoided ;  that  is,  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel  should 
not  follow  a  word  ending  with  a  vowel. 

19.  A  concurrence  of  long  words  or  long  measures, — of  short  words  or  short 
meastures, — of  words  beginning  alike  or  ending  alike, — should  be  avoided. 

II.  OF  THE  ARRANGEMENT  OF  CLAUSES. 

§  380.  A  compound  sentence,  whose  clauses  are  united  as  prot- 
asis and  apodosis,  or  in  wfiich  the  leading  clause  is  divided  by  the 
insertion  of  one  or  more  subordinate  clauses,  is  called  a  period. 

1.  (a.)  In  the  former  kind  of  period  the  protasis  must  precede  the  apodosis; 
as,  Quum  Pausdnias  semidnimis  ae  templo  eldtus  essei,  confestim  anlmam  efiiavit, 
When  Pausanias  had  been  carried  out  of  the  temple  but  just  alive,  he  imme- 
diately expired.  In  a  period  of  the  latter  kind  the  verb  of  the  principal  propo- 
sition is  placed  at  the  end,  and  the  subordinate  clauses  between  the  parts  of 
the  leading  clause ;  as,  Pausanias,  qinim  semidrUmis  de  templo  eldtus  essei,  con- 
festiiu  animam  efiiavit,  Pausanias,  when  he  had  been  carried  out  of  the  temple 
but  just  alive,  immediately  expired.  Nep. 

(6.)  A  sentence,  such  as  (Scy^io  ea;ercifuOT  ^171  Afi-icam  irdjecit,ut  Hannibdlem 
ex  IvHid.  dedHc^etf  is  not  periodic  in  it»  structure,  but  it  becomes  so  when  w« 


§  280.  SYNTAX. CONNECTION    OF    CLAUSES.  811 

say,  Sclpio,  ut  Hanntbdlem  ex  It&lid  deducSret,  exercUum  in  Afrtcam  trdjecit. 
Periods  in  which  the  subordinate  clause  precedes  with  two  conjunctions;  as, 
Quum  igitur  Romam  venisset,  stativi  imperdtorem  ddiit,  are  made  still  more 
strictly  periodic  by  placing  first  the  conjunction  which  belongs  to  the  whole, 
and  then  ins srting  the  subordinate  proposition;  as,  Itaque,  quum  Romam  ve- 
nisset,  statim  imperatOrem  adiit. 

2.  (o.)  If  the  verbs  of  the  leading  and  dependent  clauses  have  the  same 
subject,  or  the  same  noun  depending  on  them,  they  are  commonly  formed  into 
a  period ;  as,  Antigonus,  quum  adversus  Seleucum  Lysimdchumque  dlmicdret,  in 
prcelio  occlsus  est.  Nep.  Quern,  ut  barbdri  incendium  effuqisse  eminus  vlderunt, 
telis  missis  interf  ecerunt.   Id. 

{b. )  So,  also,  when  the  noun  which  depends  on  the  verb  of  the  leading  clause 
is  the  subject  of 'the  dependent  clause;  as,  L.,Manlio,  2?m?«  dictator  faisset, 
M.  Pomponius,  tribiinus  plebis,  diem  dixit.  Cic. 

3.  When  obscurity  would  arise  from  separating  the  leading  subject  and 
verb  by  dependent  words  or  clauses,  they  are  often  placed  together  at  the  be- 
ginning or  end  of  the  sentence ;  as,  Latas  (sunt)  deinde  leges,  non  solum  qum 
regni  suspicione  consUlem  obsolverent,  sed  qiwe  ddeo  in  contrdrium  verier ent,  utpSpu- 
Idrem  etiari  fdcerent.  Liv.  The  position  of  the  leading  verb  is  also  often 
otherwise  varied,  from  regard  to  emphasis,  to  avoid  monotony,  or  to  prevent 
its  meeting  with  the  verb  of  the  last  dependent  clause;  but  clauses,  when  so 
arranged,  do  not  constitute  a  period. 

4.  When  one  clause  is  interrupted  by  the  introduction  of  another,  the  latter 
should  be  finished  before  the  first  is  resumed. 

5.  Clauses  expressing  a  cause,  a  condition,  a  time,  or  a  comparison,  usually 
precede  the  clauses  to  which  they  relate. 

6.  A  short  clause  usually  stands  before,  rather  than  after,  a  long  one. 

III.  OF  THE  CONNECTION  OF  CLAUSES. 

(1.)  In  connecting  propositions,  relatives,  whether  pronouns,  pronominal  ad- 
jectives, or  adverbs,  are  often  employed  in  order  to  avoid  the  too  frequent  re- 
currence of  et,  auiem,  and  certain  other  conjunctions.  Every  relative  may  be 
used  for  this  purpose  instead  of  its  corresponding  demonstrative  with  et ;  as, 
qui  for  et  is,  qudlis  for  et  talis,  quo  for  et  eo,  etc.  They  are  used  also  before  those 
conjunctions  Avhich  are  joined  with  et  or  autem  at  the  beginning  of  a  proposi- 
tion; as,  si,  nisi,  ut,  quum,  etc.  (see  §206,  (14.);  as,  quod  quum  audlvlssem,  quod 
si  fecissem,  quod  quamvis  non  ignorassem,  for  et  quum  hoc,  et  si  hoc,  et  quamvis 
hoc;  or  quum  autem  hoc,  etc.;  and,  often,  also,  where  in  English  no  conjunction 
is  used,  and  even  before  other  relatives ;  as,  quod  qui  fdcit,  eum  ego  impium 
judico,  i.  e.  et  qui  hoc  fdcit,  or,  qui  autem  hoc  fdcit.  In  the  ablative  with  com- 
paratives the  relative  is  often  used  as  a  connective ;  as,  Cato,  quo  nemo  turn 
erat  prudentim',  i.  e.  Cato,  who  was  more  prudent  than  all  others. 

(2.)  In  propositions  consisting  of  two  members,  the  relative  pronoun  is  joined 
grammatically  either  to  the  apodosis  or  to  the  protasis ;  with  the  former  in, 
Qui,  quu7n  ex  eo  qucerereiur,  cur  tqm  diu  vellet  esse  in  vita.  Nihil  habeo,  inquit, 
quod  accusem  senectutem.  Cic.  de  Sen.  6.  But  is  more  frequent  with  the 
protasis  or  secondary  clause ;  as,  A  quo  quum  qusereretur,  quid  maxime  expe- 
diret,  respondit.  Cic.  Off.  2,  25.  When  it  ie  thus  joined  with  the  protasis,  the 
nominative  of  the  demonstrative  is  supplied  with  the  apodosis  from  another 
case  of  the  relative  in  the  protasis,  as,  in  the  preceding  passage,  from  the  abla- 
tive. But  for  the  sake  of  emphasis  the  demonstrative  may  be  expressed,  and 
frequently,  also,  for  the  sake  of  clearness;  as,  Qui  mos  quum  a  posterioribusnon 
esset  retcntiis,  Arcesllas  eum  revdcdvit.  Cic.  de  Fin._  2,  1.  The  accusative  is 
soinelinies  to  be  suppUed;  as,  Qui  {Herdclltus)  quoniam  intelltgi  noluit,  dmittd- 
mu8.  Cic.  N.  D.  3,  14.  When  the  demonstrative  precedes,  and  is  followed  by 
a  proposition  consisting  of  two  members,  the  relative  is  attached  to  the  prota- 


312  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS.  §  281 

sis,  wlijch  is  placed  first,  and  not  to  the  leading  clanse  or  apodosis;  as,  Fm 
sudsi  Pomptio,  qiiibns  ille  si  paruisset,  Qesar  tantas  6pes,  quant-as  nunc  hdbei^ 
non  hab^rtt.  Cic.  Fura.  6,  6.  Noli  atkersus  eos  me  velle  ducere,  cum  quibus  ne 
contra  te  araia  ferrera,  Itallam  retigui.  Nep.  Att.  4. 

(3.)  Where  in  English  we  nse  'however'  with  the  relative;  as,  He  promised 
me  many  tilings,  which,  however,  he  did  not  perfoiTn,  the  Latins  made  use 
of  the  demonstrative  with  seil  or  renim,  or  the  relative  alone  implying  the  ad- 
versative conjunction;  as,  tnuUa  mihi  pi-dmisit,  sed  ea  non  proesti'tit,  or,  quae 
non  prcesfitit,  but  not  quce  autem  or  qim  vero.  Qui  autem  and  qui  vero  are  used 
however  in  protases,  where  the  relative  retains  its  relative  meaning,  and  there 
is  a  coiTcspondiug  demonstrative  in  the  apodosis;  as.  Qui  autem  vniuia  bona  a 
$e  ipsis  jtetuni,  us  nihil  malum  videri  pdtest,  qtiod  ndtutxB  necessitas  afferoL  Cic 
de  Sen.  2. 

(4.)  In  double  relative  clauses,  especially  where  the  cases  are  different, 
Cicero  frequently  for  the  second  relative  clause  substitutes  the  demonstrative; 
as,  Sed  ips'ius  in  mente  inddebat  species  pulchritudinis  eaAmia  qucedam^  quam  in- 
fu^ns,  in  efiqiie  defixus,  ad,  etc.  for  et  in  qua.  Cic.  Orat.  2.  And  sometimes 
even  when  the  cases  are  the  same;  as.  Quern  Phlluntem  venisse  feruni,  eumqut 
cum  Leonte  disseruisse  quoedam.  Cic.  Tusc.  5,  3 ;  where  et  alone  would  have 
been  sufficient. 

(5.)  From  this  tendency  to  connect  sentences  by  relatives  arose  the  use  of 
quod  before  certain  conjunctions  merely  as  a  copulative.  See  §  206,  (14.) 

(6.)  Neque  or  nee  is  much  used  by  Latin  writers  instead  of  et  and  a  nega- 
tion, and  may  be  so  used  in  all  cases  except  when  the  negative  belongs  to  one 
particular  word ;  see  §  27S,  R.  9.  Neque  or  nee  is  added  to  enim,  vero,  and  to- 
men,  where  we  cannot  use  '  and.'  To  these  negative  expressions  a  second 
negative  is  often  joined,  iu  which  case  neque.  enim  non  is  equivalent  to  nam; 
non  vero  non,  to  aique'etiam,  a  stronger  et;  nee  tdmen  non,  to  aitdmen. 

ANALYSIS. 

§  381.  I.  1.  The  analysis  of  a  complex  or  a  compound  sen- 
tence consists  in  dividing  it  into  its  several  component  propositions, 
and  pointing  out  their  relation  to  each  other. 

2.  In  resolving  a  sentence  into  its  component  clauses,  the  participial  con- 
structions equivalent  to  clauses  should  be  mentioned,  and  eUipses  be  supplied. 
See  §  203,  4;  §  274,  3;  and  §  257. 

3.  In  a  continued  discourse  the  connection  and  relation  of  the  successive 
sentences  also  should  be  specified. 

Rules  for  the  Analysis  of  Complex  and  Compound  Sentences. 

(1.)   State  whether  the  sentence  is  complex  or  compound.  §  201, 11, 12. 

(2.)  If  complex,  (1)  specify  the  principal  and  subordinate  clauses.  (2)  Speci- 
fy the  class  to  which  the  subordinate  proposition  belongs,  (§  201,  7),  and  (3),  its 
connective,  and  the  class  to  which  such  connective  belongs,  (§  201,  8  and  9.) 

(3.)  If  compound,  specify  the  principal  propositions,  with  their  subordinates, 
if  any  they  have,  as  in  the  case  of  complex  sentences. 

11.  The  analysis  of  a  proposition  of  simple  sentence  consists  in  distinguish-' 
ing  the  subject  from  the  predicate,  and,  hi  case  either  of  them  be  compound, 
in  pointing  out  the  simple  subjects  or  predicates  of  which  it  is  composed,  and, 
if  complex,  in  specifying  the  several  modifiers,  whether  of  the  essential  or  sub- 
ordinate partst 


§  281.  SYNTAX. ^ANALYSIS    AND    PARSING.  815 

Eules  for  the  Analysis  of  a  Simple  Sentence. 

1.  Divile  it  into  two  parts — ^the  subject  and  the  predicate,  §201,1 — 3. 
If  these  iire  simple,  the  analj'sis  is  complete,  but  if  either  is  compound: — 

2.  Specify  the  simple  subjects  or  predicates  of  which  the  compound  con- 
sists.— If  either  is  complex: — 

3.  Point  out  the  grammatical  subject,  and  the  words,  phrases ,  etc.  directly 
modifying  it. 

4.  Point  out  the  words,  phrases,  etc.,  which  modify  the  direct  modifiers  of 
the  grammatical  subject,  and  those  which  modify  them,  and  so  on  succes- 
sively, until  the  relation  of  each  of  the  words  composing  the  logical  subject  is 
specified. 

5.  Point  out  the  grammatical  predicate,  and  the  words,  phrases,  etc.,  directly 
modifying  it.  ^ 

6.  Point  out  the  words,  phrases,  etc.,  which  modify  the  direct  modifiers  of 
the  grammatical  predicate,  and  those  which  modify  them,  and  so  on  succes- 
sively, until  the  relation  of  each  of  the  words  composing  the  logical  predicate 
is  specified. 

PARSING. 

ni.  Parsing  consists  in  resolving  a  proposition  into  the  parts  of 
speech  of  which  it  is  composed,  tracing  the  derivation  of  each  word, 
and  giving  the  rules  of  formation  and  construction  applicable  to  it. 

Rules  for  Parsing. 

1.  Name  the  part  of  speech  to  which  each  word  belongs,  includmg  the  sub- 
division in  which  it  is  found. 

2.  If  it  is  an  inflected  word : — 

(1.)  Name  its  root  or  crude  form,  and  decline,  compare,  or  conjugate  it. 

(2.)  If  it  is  a  noun  or  pronoun,  tell  its  gender,  number  and  case: — if  in  tho 
nominative  or  in  the  accusative  with  the  infinitive,  tell  its  verb : — if  in  an  ob- 
lique case  depending  on  some  other  word,  tell  the  word  on  which  its  case 
depends. 

(3.)  If  it  is  an  adjective,  adjective-pronoun,  or  participle,  tell  the  word  which 
it  modifies. 

(4.)  If  it  is  a  finite  verb  or  an  infinitive  with  the  accusative,  teU  its  voice, 
mood,  tense,  number,  person,  and  subject. 

3.  If  it  is  a  conjunction,  tell  its  class  and  what  it  connects. 

4.  If  it  is  a  preposition,  tell  the  words  whose  relation  is  expressed  by  it. 

5.  If  it  is  an  adverb,  tell  its  class  and  what  it  qualifies. 

6.  Prove  the  correctness  of  each  step  of  the  process  by  quoting  the  definition 
or  rule  of  formation  or  construction  on  which  it  depends. 

Note.  The  words  constituting  a  proposition  are  most  conveniently  parsed  in 
that  order  in  which  they  are  arranged  in  analysis. 

Examples  of  Analysis  and  Parsing. 

1.   Equus  currity  The  horse  runs. 

Analysis.  This  is  a  simple  sentence:  its  subject  is  equus,  its  predicate  is 
eurrit,  both  of  which  are  Bimple.  See  §  201, 1-3;  \  202,  2;  and  §  203,  2. 


314  8TNTAX. ^ANALYSIS    AND    PARSING.  §  281. 

Parsing.  Equus  is  a  common  noun,  ^  26,  1  and  3;  of  the  2d  decl.,  \  38; 
raasc.  gender,  §  28,  1;  third  person,  §  35,  2;  its  root  is  equ-,  §40,  10;  decline  it, 
§  46;  it  is  in  the  nominative  case,  singular  number,  §  35,  1,  (6.);  the  subject 
of  CM7V'/<,  §  209,  (a.) — Currit  is  a  neuter  verb,  §  141,  11. ;  of  the  3d  conjugation, 
§  149,  2,  from  curro ;  its  principal  parts  are  cun'o,  cucurri,  cursum,  currere, 
1 151,  4 ;  it  is  from  the  first  root  curr- ;  give  the  formations  of  that  root,  §  151, 1 ; 
it  is  in  the  active  voice,  §  142, 1;  indicative  mood,  §  143, 1;  present  tense,  §  145, 
I.;  third  person,  §  147;  singular  number,  §  146;  agreeing  with  its  subject-rnomi- 
native  equus,  §  209,  {b.) 

l^OTK.  The  questions  to  be  asked  in  parsing  eqmis  are  such  as  ihese,  Wliv  is 
eguus  a  noun  f  Why  a  common  noun  ?  Why  of  the  second  declension  ?  Why 
nt'tscuUne  f  etc. — In  parsing  currit^  the  questions  are.  Why  is  cunnt  a  verb  t 
Why  a  neuter  verb  ?  Why  of  the  third  conjugation  V  Which  are  the  principal 
parts  of  a  verb  ?  Of  what  does  the  Jirst  root  of  a  verb  consist  ?  What  parts 
of  a  verb  are  derived  from  the  Jirst  root  ?  etc.  The  answer  in  each  case  may 
be  foimd  by  consulting  the  etymological  rules  and  definitions. 

2.  Scevius  ventis  agitatur  ingens  pmuSf  The  great  pine  is  more 
violently  shaken  by  the  winds.  Hor. 

Analysis.  Tliis  also  is  a  simple  sentence : — its  subject  is  ingens  plnus,  its 
predicate  scevius  ventis  agitatur;  both  of  which  are  complex,  §  201,  10,  §  202,  6, 
and  §  203,  5. 

The  grammatical  subject  is  pinus,  the  pine;  this  is  modified  by  ingens,  great, 
§  201,  2,  §  202,  2,  and  §  202,  6,  (3.) 

The  grammatical  predicate  is  agttdtur,  is  shaken ;  this  is  modified  by  two 
independent  modifiers,  scevius,  more  violently,  and  ventis,  by  the  winds,  4  203, 
n.  3,  liem.,  §  203, 1.  1,  (2),  and  (3.) 

Parsing.  Plnus  is  a  common  noun,  §  26, 1  and  3;  of  the  2d  and  4th  de- 
clensions, §  88  and  §  99 ;  feminine  gender,  §  29,  2 ;  3d  person,  §  35,  2 ;  from  the 
root  i^Iw-,  §  40,  10;  (decline  it  both  in  the  2d  and  4th  declensions): — it  is  found 
in  the  singular  number,  §  35,  1,  and  the  nominative  case,  the  subject  of  agita- 
tur, §  209,  (a.) 

ingens  is  a  qualifying  adjective  of  quantity,  §  104,  4,  and  ^205,  N.  1;  of  the 
3d  decl.,  §  105,  1,  and  §  38 ;  of  one  termination,  §  108,  and  §  111 ;  from  the  root 
ingent-,  §  40,  10;  (decline  it  like  j^rcRsens,  §  111,  but  with  only  t  in  the  ablative, 
§  113,  Exc.  3,); — it  is  found  in  the  singular  number,  femuiine* gender,  §  26,  E.  4; 
and  nominative  case,  agreeing  with  its  noun  plnus,  §  205. 

Agitatur  is  an  active  frequentative  verb,  §  141,  I.,  and  §  187, 11.  1;  of  the 
1st  conjugation,  §  149,  2 ;  from  the  first  root  of  its  primitive  ago,  §  187,  II.  1,(6.) ; 
(name  its  principal  parts  in  both  voices,  see  §  151,  4;  and  give  the  conjuga- 
tion of  the  passive  voice,  indicative  mood,  present  tense,  see  §  156,); — it  is 
found  in  the  singular  number,  §  146 ;  third  person,  §  147 ;  agreeing  with  its 
subject-nominative  plnus,  §  209,  (b.) 

Scevius  is  a  derivative  adverb  of  manner,  ^  190,  2-4;  in  the  comparative  de- 
gree, from  the  positive  soeve  or  sceviter,  which  is  derived  from  the  adjective 
scevus,  §  194, 1  and  2,  and  §  192, 11.  1,  and  Exc.  1  and  2;  modifying  the  verb 
agitatur,  by  expressing  its  degree,  §  277. 

Ventis  is 'a  conomon  noun,  §  26,  1  and  3 ;  of  the  2d  declension,  §  38 ;  masculine 
gender,  §  46;  from  the  root  vent-,  §  40,  10;  (decline  it); — it  is  found  in  the 
plural  number,  §  35,  1 ;  ablative  case,  modifying  agitatur  by  denoting  its  means 
or  instrument,  §  247. 

3.  Mithriddtes,  duarum  et  vlginti  gentium  rex,  totidem  Unguis  jura 
dixit,  Mithridates,  king  of  twenty-two  nations,  pronounced  judicial 
decisions  in  as  many  languages.  Plin. 

Analysis.  This  also  is  a  simple  sentence;  its  subject  is  Mithriddtes,  dud- 
rum  et  vlyinti  gentium  rex,  its  predicate  is  tdlidem  Unguis  Jura  dixit,  both  of 
which  ai-e  complex,  §  201, 10,  §  202,  6,  and  \  203,  5. 


§  281.  SYNTAX. ANALYSIS    AND    PARSING.  815 

The  grammatical  subject  is  Mi^riddtes;  this  is  modified  directh' by  rea;, 
^  202, 1.  (1.) 

Hex  is  limited  by  geniium,  §  202,  I.  1,  (2.) 

Gentium  is  limited  bv  the  compound  addition  duarum  and  vlginti  connected 
coOrdiuately  by  ef,  §  202,  III.  3. 

The  grammatical  pi-edicate  xS  dixit ;  this  is  limited  by  jura  and  Unguis,  the. 
former  a  simple,  the  latter  a  complex  addition,  as  it  is  modified  by  tditdcm 
§  203,  I.  1,  (2.)  and  11.  1. 

Parsing.  Mithriddtes  is  a  proper  noun,  §  26,  2;  of  the  third  declension^ 
§  38;  masculine  gender,  ^  28,  1;  from  the  root  MUhriddtr-,  §40,  10;  genitive 
Mithriddtis,  §  73, 1;  (decline  it  in  the  singular  number  only,  §.95,  (a.);~it  is 
found  in  the  nominative  case,  the  subject  of  dixit,  §  209,  {a.) 

Hex  is  Q  common  noun — third  declension,  §  38 ;  masculine  gender,  §  28,  1 ; 
from  the  root  reg-,  §  40,  10;  genitive  regis,  §  78,  2;  (decline  it); — it  is  found  in 
the  singular  number — the  nominative  case,  in  apposition  to  Mithriddtes,  §  204. 

Gentium  is  a  common  noun  from  gens — third  declension — feminine  gender, 
§  62;  from  the  root  gent-,  §  56,  I,  K.  1;  genitive  gentis,  §  77,  2  and  (2.);  (de- 
cline it); — it  is  found  in  the  plural  number — genitive  case,  §  83,  II.  3;  limiting 
rex  subjectively,  §  211  and  K.  2. 

Dudrum  is  a  numeral  adjective,  §  104,  5;  of  the  cardinal  kind,  §  117;  from 
duo,  duce,  duo  ;  from  the  root  dvr- ;  (decline  it,  §  118,  1,); — it  is  found  in  the 
plural  number,  §  118,  2;  feminine  gender,  genitive  case,  §  26,  R.  4;  agreeing 
with  its  noun  gentium,  §  205. 

Et  is  a  copMlative  conjunction,  §  198, 1,  connecting  dudrum  and  vtginti,  §  278. 

Vlginti  is  a  numeral  adjective  of  the  cardinal  kind,  indeclinable,  §  118,  1; 
limiting  gentium,  §  205. 

Dixit  is  an  active  verb,  §  141, 1. ;  of  the  third  conjugation,  §  149,  2 ;  from 
dlco,  (give  the  principal  parts  in  the  active  voice,  and  its  first,  second,  and 
third  roots,  §  150,  4,  and  §  171,  1;)  it  is  formed  from  the  second  root  dix-,  (give 
the  formations  of  the  second  root) ; — it  is  found  in  the  active  voice,  §  141,  1 ; 
indicative  mood,  §  143,  1;  perfect  indefinite  tense,  §  145,  IV.  and  Eem.;  sin- 
gular number,  third  person,  agreeing  with  Miihinddtes,  §  209,  (J.) 

Jura  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  third  declension,  from  jus,  root  jur-,  §  56, 1. 
R.  1,  genitive  juris,  §  76,  Exc.  3;  neuter  gender,  §  66;  (decline  it); — it  is  found 
in  the  plural  number,  accusative  case,  §  40,  8;  the  object  of  dixit,  §  229. 

Linguis  is  a  common  noun,  of  the  first  declension,  feminine  gender,  from 
lingua,  root  lingu-,  (decline  it); — found  in  the  plural  number,  ablative  case, 
after  dixit.  §  247. 

Tutidem  is  a  demopstrative  pronominal  adjective,  §  139,  5,  (2.)  and  (3.);  in- 
declinable, §  115,  4 ;  it  is  in  the  ablative  plural,  feminine  gender,  limiting  lin- 
guis, §  205. 

4.  Pausamas,  quum  semianXmis  de  templo  eldtus  essetf  confestim  ant- 
mam  effidvit.  Nep.  Paus.  4. 

Analysis.  This  is  a  complex  sentence,  §  201,  11 ;  consisting  of  two  mem- 
bers, which  are  so  arranged  as  to  constitute  a  period,  §  280,  1. 

The  principal  proposition  is,  Pausanias  confestim  dnimam  effldvit,  §  201,  5. 
The  subordinate  proposition  is,  quum  (is)  semidnlmis  de  templo  eldtus  esset. 
§  201,  6. 

The  leading  proposition  has  a  simple  subject,  Pausanias,  §  2Q2,  2,  and  a 
complex  predicate,  confestim  dnimam  ejfldvit,  §  203,  3 ;  in  which  effldvit  is  the 
grammatical  predicate,  §  203,  2 ;  which  is  modified  by  confestim  and  animum, 
f  203, 1.  1,  (2.)  and  (3.),  and  11.  R.  2,,  and  also  by  the  adverbial  clause  quum 
semidnimis,  etc.  §  201,  6  and  7,  and  §  203, 1.  3. 

The  subordinate  proposition,  which  is  connected  to  the  leading  clause  by 
the  subordinate  conjunction  quum,  §  201,  9,  has  a  simple  subject,  viz.  is  under- 
stood, and  a  complex  predicate,  semidnimis,  de  templo  eldtus  esset,  §  203,  3. — 
The  grammatical  predicate. is  eldtus  esset,  §  203,  2;  which  is  modified  by  semid* 
nimis,  §  203, 1.  1,  (1.),  and  de  templo,  §  203, 1.  2,  and  11.  Rem.  2. 


816  8TNTAX. — ^ANALYSIS   AND   PARSING.  §  281. 

Parsing.  Paus&rdas^  a  Greek  proper  noun,  4  26,  2;— 1st  decl.,  §^  41  and 
44 ;  masc.  gender,  ^  28,  1 ;  root  Pausdnv- ;  found  in  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  the 
subject  ofejiclvii,  §  209,  (a.) 

Cojifestim,  an  adv.  of  time  §  190,  3;  limiting  efflatit^  §  277. . 

Animiwi  is  a  com.  noun  of  1st  decl.,  fern,  gender,  ^  41;  from  dnfTna,  root 
^niin-\  (decline  it); — it  is  found  in  the  sing,  num.,  ace.  case,  the  object  of 
effiarlt,  ^  229. 

KfflOvit,  an  act.  verb,  1st  conj.,  from  efflo,  compo:  nded  of  ex  and  flo,  ^  196,  6; 
(give  the  principal  parts  in  the  act.  voice  and  the  three  roots); — it  is  formed 
from  the  second  root;  (r^ive  the  formations  of  that  root);  in  the  active  voice, 
ind.  mood,  perfect  indefinite  tense,  smg.  num.,  3d  pers.,  agreeing  with  PauscL- 
nw:5,  §209,  (6.) 

Quum  is  a  temporal  conjunction,  §  198, 10;  connecting  the  dependent  to  the 
principal  clause,  §  278. 

SPmianimis  is  a  predicate  adj.,  of  the  3d  decl.,  of  two  terminations,  §  109; 
.{dechne  it); — it  is  in  the  sing,  num.,  masc.  gend.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  is 
nndeRrtood,  §  210,  R.  1,  (a.) 

i>e  is  a  preposition,  expressing  the  relation  between  eldltis  esset  and  i&m^^ 
4195. 

TempU)  is  a  com.  noun,  2d  decl.,  neut.  gend.,  from  templum,  root  tempi-;  (de- 
cline it); — in  the  sing,  num.,  abl.  case,  after  de,  §  241. 

EUitus  esset  is  an  irregular  active  verb,  of  the  third  conjugation,  §  179 ;  from 
tffero,  compounded  of  ea:  and  fero^  ^  196,  6;  (see  fero  and  compounds,  §  172); 
(give  the  principal  paits  m  both  voices,  and  the  1st  and  3d  roots); — it  is  formed 
from  the  third  root,  ilat-^  (give  the  formations  of  that  root  in" the  passive  voice); 
in  the  subjunctive  mootl,  pluperfect  tense,  §  145,  V. ;  sing,  num.,  third  person, 
agreeing  with  is  understood  referring  to  Pausdnias,  §  209,  (6.) 

5.  Romana  pubes,  sedato  tandem  pavdre,  postquam  ex  tarn  turhXdo 
die  Serena  et  tranquilla  lux  rediit^  ubi  vdcuam  sedem  regiam  vldity  etsi 
satis  credebat  patnbus^  qui  proxtmi  steterant,  sublimem  raptum  pro- 
celld ;  tdmeuy  velut  orbUdtis  metu  icta,  moestum  aliquamdiu  silentium 
obtinuit  Liv.  1,  16. 

Analysis.  This  is  a  complex  sentence,  whose  clauses  constitute  a  period, 
\  280.    It  is  composed  of  the  following  members  or  clauses : — 

1.  Komana  piibes  [tamenl  nuzstum  aliquamdiu  silenduri}  obttnidt.  This  is  the 
'  eading  clause.    The  following  are  dependent  clauses. 

2.  velut  orbilatis  metu  icta, 

3.  sedato  tandem  pavore, 

4.  postquam  ex  tarn  turbido  die  sSrena  et  tranquilla  lux  ridiit, 

5.  ubi  vdcuam  sedem  reyiam  vidit, 

6.  etsi  satis  credebat  patnbus, 

7.  qui  proximi  steterani, 

8.  sublimem  raptum  prdcelld. 

NoTB  1.  In  the  preceding  clauses  the  predicates  are  printed  in  Italfcs. 

Note  2.  The  connective  of  the  1st  clause,  is  the  adversative  tamen,  which 
is  inserted  on  account  of  etsi  intervening  between  the  principal  subject  and 
predicate.  The  connective  of  the  2d  clause  is  velut,  of  the  4th  postquam,  of  the 
5th  vbiy  of  the  6th  etsi,  followed  bv  a  clause  constituting  the  protasis,  and  of 
the  7th  qui.    The  3d  and  8th  clauses  have  no  connectives. 

(1.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  leading  clause  is  piibes,  which  is  limited 
by  Romana. — The  grammatical  predicate  is  wtinuit,  which  is  limited  by  dli- 
quanuliu  and  silentium,  and  also  either  directly  or  indirectly  by  all  the  depend- 
ent clauses.     Silentium  is  itself  modified  by  mcestum. 

The  second,  thurd,  fourth,  fifth,  and  sixth  clauses  are  used  adverbially  to 
denote  the  time  and  other  circumstances  modifying  the  principal  predicate 
silentium  obUnwl,  ^  201,  7. 


§281.  SYNTAX.— tANALTSIS   AND   PARSING.  317' 

(2.)  The  second  is  a  participial  clause,  equivalent  to  vSlut  (eaaciL.  pubes) 
Prbitdtis  metu  icta  esset,  §  274,  3,  (a.) 

(3.)  The  third  clause  is  also  participial,  and  is  equivalent  to  quum  tandem 
pdvo7'  sedatus  esset,  §  257,  R.  1 ;  and  hence  pdvore  represents  the  subject,  and 
^eddto  tandem  the  predicate — the  former  being  simple,  the  latter  complex. 

(4.)   The  grammatical  subject  of  the  4th  clause,  which  is  connected  to  the' 
leading  clause  by  postquam,  §  201,  9,  is  lux,  which  is  modified  by  serena  and 
iranquilla. — The  gi-ammatical  predicate  is  rediit,  which  is  modified "^by  postquam 
and  ex  tarn  turbldo  die,  §  203,  I.  1,  (3.),  and  II.  1, 

(5.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  fifth  clause  is  ea  understood. — The 
grammatical  predicate  is  vldit,  which  is  modified  by  ubi  and  vdcuam  sedem 
regiam,  §  203,  I.  1,  (3.)  and  II.  1. 

(6.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  sixth  clause  also  is  ea.  Its  grammati- 
cal predicate  is  credebat,  which  is  modified  by  satis  and  patribus,  ^  203,  I.  (2.) 
and  (3.),  and  by  the  8th  clause,  II.  3. 

(7.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  seventh  clause  is  qjii.  Its  grammatical 
predicate  is  steterant,  which  is  modified  by  proxlmi,  §  203,  I.  (1.)  It  is  an  ad- 
jective clause,  modifying  2^(itribus,  §  201,  7  and  9. 

(8.)  The  grammatical  subject  of  the  eighth  clause,  which  has  no  connective, 
4  20i,  Rem.,  is  eum,  i.  e.  Romulum,  understood.  Its  grammatical  predicate  is 
raptum  (esse),  which  is  modified  by  subllmem  and  prdcelld. 

Parsing.  Romdna  is  a  patrial  adjective,  §  104,  10,  derived  from  Roma, 
§  128,  6,  (a.)  and  (e.);  of  the  1st  and  2d  declensions,  §  105,  2;  fern,  gender, 
sing,  number,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  pubes,  §  205. 

Pubes,  a  collective  noun,"§  26,  4;  3d  decl.,  fem.  gender,  §  62;  from  the  root 
pub-,  §  56,  I.  R.  6;  genitive  pubis,  §  73,  1;  (decline  it); — found  in  the  nom. 
sing.,  the  subject  of  obiinuit,  §  209,  (a.) 

Tdmen,  an  adversative  conjunction,  §  198,  9,  relating  to  etsi  in  the  6th  clause. 

Maestum,  a  qualifying  adj.,  §  205,  .N-  1  j  of  the  1st  and  2d  declensions,  neut. 
gender,  sing,  num.,  ace.  case,  agreeing  with  silentium. 

Aliquamaiu,  an  adverb  of  time,  §  191,  II.;  compounded  of  dllquis  and  diu, 
§  193,  6;  and  limiting  obtinuit,  §  277. 

-.  Silentium,  a  com.  noun,  2d  decl.,  neut.  gender,  §  46;  sing,  number,  ace.  case, 
the  object  of  obtinuit,  §  229. 

Obiinuit,  an  active  verb,  of  the  2d  conj.,  §  149,  2;  from  obtineo,  compounded 
of  ob  and  teneo,  see  §  168 ;  (give  the  principal  parts  in  the  act.  voice,  and  the 
formations  of  the  2d  root,  §  157  at  the  end); — found  in  the  active  voice,  ind. 
mood,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  person,  agreeing  with  pubes,  §  209,  (b.) 

Velut  for  velut  si,  an  adverb,  compounded  of  vel  and  ut,  §193,  10;  modifying 
icta,  and  obttnuisset  understood,  (as  they  would  have  done  if,  etc.) 

Orbitdtis,  an  abstract  noun,  §  26,  5;  from  the  primitive  orbus,  §  101,  1  and  2; 
3d  decl.,  fem.  gender,  §  62;  from  the  root  orbitdtr-,  §  56,  I.,  and  R.  1;  (decline 
it);— found  in  the  sing,  num.,  subjective  gen.  case,  limiting  metu,  §  211. 

Metu,  an  abstract  noun,  4th  decl.,  masc.  gen.,  §  87;  sing,  num.,  abl.  case, 
4  247. 

kta,  a  perf.  part,  pass.,  from  the  active  verb  Ico,^  of  the  3d  conj.  (give  the 
principal  parts  in  both  voices,  and  decline  the  participle); — found  in  the  fem. 
gen.,  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing  with  pubes,  §  205. 

SCiduto,  a  perfect  pass.  part,  from  the  active  verb  sedo,  of  the  1st  conj.,  §  149, 
2;  (give  the  principal  parts  in  both  voices,  §  151,  4;  and  decline  it,  §  105, 
R.  2.); — found  in  the  masc.  gender,  sing,  num.,  abl.  case,  agreeing  with  pa- 
voi-e,  §  205. 

Tnndem,  an  adverb  of  time,  §  191,  II.;  modifying  seddto,  §  277. 

Pdvore,  an  abstract  noun,  §  26,  5,  and  §  102,  1;  (from  pdveo),  3d  decl.,  masc. 
gen.,  §  58;  root  pdvor,  §  56,  II.,  and  §  70,  (decline  it); — found  in  the  sing, 
number,  abl.  case,  absolute  with  seddto,  §  257. 

Posiquam,  an  adverb  of  time,  compounded  of  post  and  quam,  §  193,  10 ;  mod- 
ifying rediit,  and  connecting  the  1st  and  4th  clauses,  §  201,  9. 

Ex^  a  preposition,  §  196,  R.  2. 

Tarn,  an  adverb  of  degree,  S  191.  R-  2;  modifying  turbldo,  ^  2^7. 
27* 


B18  SYNTAX. — ^ANALTSIS    iND    PAESINO.  §281. 

Turbido,  an  adjective,  agreeing  with  die. 

Die,  a  common  noun,  5th  decl.,  masc.  gender,  ^  90,  Exc.  1. ;  sing,  numher, 
abl.  case,  after  the  prep,  ear,  §  241. 

Serena,  an  adj.,  1st  and  2d  decls.,  fern,  gen.,  sing,  num.,  nom.  case,  agreeing 
with  lux,  §  205. 

£i,  a  copulative  conjunction,  §  198,  1;  connecting  sirena  and  tranquiUa, 
^2/8. 

TranquiUa,  like  sSrcna. 

Lux,  a  common  noun,  3d  decl.,  fern,  gen.,  \  62 ;  from  the  root  too-,  §  66, 1., 
and  R.  2 ;  genitive  lucis,  §  78,  2. 

Rediit,  an  irregular  neuter  verb,  of  the  4th  conj.,  §  176;  from  redeo,  com- 
pounded of  eo,  §182,  and  the  inseparable  prep,  red,  §  196,  (-6.),  3;  (give  its  prin- 
cipal parts); — found  in  the  ind.  mood.,  perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers., 
agreemg  with  lux,  §  209,  (6.) 

Ubi,  an  adverb  of  time,  and  like  posiquam,  a  connective,  ^  201,  9 ;  and  modi- 
fying vidit,  §  277. 

Vdcuam,  an  adj.,  qualifying  sedem. 

Sidem,  a  common  noun,  3d  decl.,  fem.  gen.,  §  62 ;  from  the  root  sed-,  §  56, 1., 
B.  6;  genitive  sedis,  §  73,  1;  (decline  it); — found  in  the  sing,  num.,  ace.  case, 
the  object  of  the  transitive  verb  vidit,  §  229. 

Ref/iam,  a  denominative  adj.,  §  128, 1.,  2,  (a.) ;  from  the  primitive  rex,  agree- 
ing with  sedem. 

Vldii,  an  active  verb,  of  the  2d  conj.,  (give  its  principal  parts  in  the  active 
voice,  and  the  formations  of  the  2d  root) ;  found  in  the  active  voice,  ind.  mood, 
perf.  indef.  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  pers.,  agreeing  with  ea,  i.  e.  pubes,  under- 
Btood. 

£tsi,  a  concessive  conjunction,  §  198,  4;  correspondmg  to  the  correlative  ad- 
versative conj.  tdmen,  §  198,  4,  R.  and  9. 

Siitis,  an  adverb  of  degree,  §  191,  III.,  and  R.  2;  modifjnng  credebat,  §  277. 

Credebat,  an  act.  verb,  §141,1.;  3d  conj.,  (give  the  principal  parts  in  the 
active  voice  and  the  formations  of  the  1st  root); — found  in  the  act.  voice,  ind. 
mood,  imperfect  tense,  sing,  num.,  3d  person,  agreeing  with  ea,  soil,  pibes, 
understood. 

Patnbus,  a  common  noun,  §  26,  3;  3d  dec!.,  from  the  root  pair-,  §  56, 11., 
B.  3 ;  gen.  patris,  §  71 ;  masc.  gender,  §  28,  1 ;  plur.  num.,  dat.  case,  depending 
on  credebat,  §  223,  R.  2. 

Qui,  the  subject  of  the  7th  clause,  is  a  relative  pronoun,  §  136;  masc. 
gender,  plur.  num.,  agreeing  with  its  antecedent  patnbus,  §  206,  R.  19,  {a.j; 
and  is  nominative  to  steterant,  §  209,  (a.) 

Proximi,  an  adj.  of  the  superlative  degree,  §  126, 1,  (compare  it);  of  the  1st 
and  2d  decls.,  masc.  gen.,  plur.  num.,  nom.  case,  agreemg  with  qui,  \  205,  §  210, 
B.  1,  (rt.)  and  R.  3,  (2.) 

Steterant,  a.  n&utex  xexb,  1st  conj.,  irregular  in  its  2d  root,  §  165;  (give  its 
principal  parts,  and  the  formations  of  the  2d  root) ; — found  in  the  act.  voice, 
md.  mood,  plup.  tense,  §  145,  V. ;  3d  person  plural,  agreeing  with  its  subject 
qui,  §  209,  (6.) 

Subllmem,  an  adj.,  of  the  3d  decl.,  and  two  terminations,  §  109;  masc.  gen., 
sing,  num.,  ace.  case,  agreeing  with  eum,  (i.  e.  Romnlum,)  understood,  and 
modifying  also  rapium  esse,  §  205,  R.  15. 

Raplum  (esse),  an  act.  verb,  3d  conj.;  (give  the  principal  parts  in  both 
voices  and  the  formations  of  the  3d  root  in  the  passive  voice) — found  in  the 
pass,  voice,  inf.  mood,  perf.  tense;  but,  following  the  imperfect,  it  has  the 
meaning  of  a  pluperfect,  §  268,  2,  and  §  145,  V.;  depending  on  credebat,  §  272. 

PrdceUdf  a  com.  noun,  1st  decL,  fem.  gen.,  sing,  num.,  abL  case,  §  247. 


§  282,  283.   PROSODY. — quantity — general  rules.   819 


PEOSODY. 


§  282.  Prosody  treats  of  tlie  quantity  of  syllables,  and  the 
laws  of  versification. 

QUANTITY. 

1.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  the  relative  time  occupied  in 
pronouncing  it.  Cf.  §  13. 

2.  A  syllable  is  either  shorty  long^  or  common. 

(a.)  The  time  occupied  in  pronouncing  a  short  syllable  is  called  a  nwra  or 
time. 

(b.^  A  long  syllable  requires  two  mores  or  double  the  time  occu- 
pied m  pronouncing  a  short  one ;  as,  amare. 

(c.)  A  common  syllable  is  one  which,  in  poetry,  may  be  made 
either  long  or  short ;  as  the  middle  syllable  of  tenebrce. 

3.  The  quantity  of  a  syllable  is  either  natural  or  accidental ; — 
natural,  when  it  depends  on  the  nature  of  its  vowel ;  accidental,  when 
it  depends  on  its  position. 

Thus  the  e  in  resisto  is  short  by  nature ;  while  in  resUti  it  is  long  by  its  posi- 
tion, since  it  is  followed  by  two  consonants:  §  283,  IV.  On  the  contrary,  the 
e  in  dedfico  is  naturally  long,  but  in  dierro  it  is  made  short  by  being  placed  bo- 
fore  a  vowel :  §  283,  I. 

4.  The  quantity  of  syllables  is  determined  either  by  certain  estab- 
lished rw/cs,  or  by  the  authority  of  the  poets. 

Thus  it  is  poetic  usage  alone  that  determines  the  quantity  of  the  first  sylla- 
bles of  the  following  words,  viz.  mdier^  frater^  pi'dvus,  dico,  duco ;  pater,  dvuSj 
cddo,  mdneo,  gravis,  etc. ;  and  hence  the  quantity  of  such  syllables  can  be  as- 
certained by  practice  only  or  by  consulting  the  gradus  or  lexicon. 

5.  The  rules  of  quantity  are  either  general  or  special.  The  for- 
mer apply  alike  to  all  the  syllables  of  a  word,  the  latter  to  particular 
syllables. 

GENERAL  RULES. 

§  283^  L  (a.)  A  vowel  before  another  vowel,  or  a  diph- 
thong, is  short ;  as,  e  in  mens,  i  in  patriee.     Thus, 

Conscia  mens  recti  famse  mend&cfa  ridet.  Ovid.  F.  4,  311. 
Ipse  Stlam  exlmlce.  laudis  succensus  amore.   Yirg.  A.  7,  496. 

(6.)  So  also  when  h  comes  between  the  vowels,  since  A  is  accounlr 
ed  only  a  breathing;  as,  nihil:  (see  §  2,  6.)     Thus, 

DS  nifiWi  nVUl,  in  nVMttm  nil  posse  rSrerti.    Pers.  4,  81 


820       PROSODY. QUANTITY GENERAL  RULES.     §  283. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  Flo  has  the  i  long,  except  in  fit  and  when  followed 
hjer;  as  J'iunt,  fiebam.     Thus, 

Omnia  jam  /lant,  fUri  quae  posse  nggabam.  Ovid.  Tr.  1,  8.  7. 

(6.)  It  is  sometimes  found  long  even  before  er ;  as,  fieret.  Ter. ;  fUri.  Plant: 
and,  on  the  contrary,  Prudentius  has  fi6  with  t  short. 

Exc.  2.  (a.)  E  is  long  in  the  termination  of  the  genitive  and  dar 
live  of  the  fifth  declension,  when  preceded  and  followed  by  i ;  as, 
faciei.     Thus, 

Non  raidii  solis,  nSque  lucida  tela  disi.  Lucr.  1, 148. 

(5.)  In  fpei,  rei,  and  fidei,  e  is  short. 

Note.  In  Lucretius,  the  e  of  rei  is,  in  a  few  cases,  long,  and  that  offidet  is 
lengthened  once  in  Lucretius  and  once  in  a  line  of  Ennius. 

Exc.  3.  (a.)  A  is  long  in  the  penult  of  old  genitives  in  aX  of  the 
first  declension ;  as,  auldi,  pictau  Cf.  §  43,  1. 

{b.)  ^  and  c  are  also  long  in  proper  names  in  alus^  eftis,  or  dia;  as,  C^us, 
Pompeius,  Aquileia;  and  in  the  adjectives  Grmus  and  Vefus.     Thus, 
^thSrium  sensum,  atque  aurai  simpllcis  ignem.   Vtrg.  A.  6,  747. 
AccTpe,  Fompei,  deductum  carmen  ab  illo.   Ovid.  Pont.  4, 1, 1. 
Necnon  cum  Tenetis  Aqutleia  perf  urit  armis.  SU.  8,  606. 

Exc.  4.  (a.)  /  is  common  in  genitives  in  ius;  as,  unluSy  URus. 
Thus, 

Iliius  et  nitido  stillent  ninguenta  capillo.   TibuU^  1,  7,  51. 
lUius  puro  destillent  tempora  nardo.  Id.  2,  2,  7. 

(b.)  But »  in  the  genitive  of  aUer  is  commonly  short:  and  in  that  of  dUus  it  is 
always  long. 

Exc.  5.  The  first  vowel  of  eheu  is  long ;  that  of  Diana,  to,  and  dke, 
is  common. 

Exc.  6.  Greek  words  retain  their  original  quantities,  and  hence, 
in  many  Greek  words,  a  vowel  is  long,  though  immediately  followed 
by  another  vowel ;  as, 

aer,  AcMia,  AcheldUs,  dia,  eos,  Laertes,  and  Greek  words  having  in  the  orig- 
inal a  long  e  or  0  (a  or  «.)     See  also  §  293,  3. 

(1.)  Words  which,  in  Greek,  are  written  with  ei  («)  before  a  vowel,  and  in 
Latin  with  a  single  e  or  t,  have  the  e  or  i  long;  as,  ./Eneas,  Alexandria,  Oissio- 
pea,  Clio,  Darius,  eUgia,  Galatea,  Medea,  Mausoleum,  Penelopea,  Thalia,  Atrides. 

Hence,  most  adjectives  in  eus,  formed  from  Greek  proper  names,  have  the  e 
long;  as,  CylMreus,  PilUpeus;  and  the  e  remains  long  when  ei  is  restored;  as, 
PeUipela. 

Exc.  Acddemia,  chdrea,  Malea,  pldtea,  and  some  patrouyTnics  and  patrials 
in  ei»  ,*  as,  Nereis,  have  the  penult  common. 

(2.)  Greek  genitives  in  eos,  and  accusatives  in  ea,  from  nominatives  in  eus, 
generally  shorten  the  e ;  as,  Orpheos,  Orphea ; — but  the  e  is  sometimes  length- 
ened by  the  Ionic  dialect;  as,  Cepheos,  Ilidnea. 

(3.)  Greek  words  in  ais,  ois,  aius,  eius,  dus,  aon,  and  ion,  generally  lengthen 
the  first  vowel ;  as,  Nais,  Minois,  Grants,  Nereius,  3Iindlus,  Mdchaon,  Jxlon, 
But  Thebdis,  Slmdis,  Fhdon,  Deucalion,  PygmdUon,  and  many  others,  shorten 
the  former  voweL 

Note  1.  Greek  words  in  aon  and  ion,  with  o  short  in  the  genitive,  have  the 
penult  long;  but  with  o  long  in  the  genitive,  they  have  it  short;  as,  AmythcUm^ 
•aSim ;  DeuouUon,  -imt. 


§  283.     PROSODY. QUANTITY — GENERAL  RULES.       821 

Note  2.  In  Greek  proper  names  in  etis  (gen.  eo«),  as  Orpheus,  the  eu  in  the 
nominative  is  always  a  diphthong  in  the  original,  and,  with  very  few  excep- 
tions, in  the  Latin  poets. 

II.  A  diphthong  is  long ;  as,  aurum,  fcenus,  Euhoea^  Pom- 
pelus,  Orpheu.     Tlius, 

,  InfernTque  Mens,  M^Sque  insula  Circae^  Virg.  A.  3.  388. 

Thesauros  ignotum  arpenti  pondus  et  atiri.  Id.  A.  1.  359. 
Harpyi^qne  colunt  aliie,  Phlnefa  postquam.  Id.  A.  3,  212. 

Exc.  1.  Prce,  in  composition,  is  short  before  a  vowel ;  as,  prceustuSy 
prmdcutus.    Thus, 

Nee  tota  tSLmen  ille  prior  prckunte  carina.  Virg.  A.  5, 186. 
In  Statins,  and  Sidonius  ApoUinaris,  it  is  found  long. 

Exc.  2.  A  diphthong  at  the  end  of  a  -word,  when  the  next  word 
begins  with  a  vowel,  is  sometimes  made  short ;  as, 

InsuHe  lonio  in  magno,  quas  dira  Celaeno.   Virg.  A.  3,  211. 

Exc.  3.  The  diphthongs  consisting  of  u  followed  by  a  vowel  are  either  lone 
or  short;  the  two  vowels  thus  conibined  being  subject  to  the  same  rules  o? 
quantity,  as  their  final  vowel  would  be  if  standing  alone;  as,  qudj  qui,  qudt'wnf 
quia,  quibus,  qudtio,  queror,  cequdr,  lingua,  sanguis. 

in.     A  syllable  formed  by  contraction  is  long ;  as, 
dlius  for  alttus ;  cOgo  for  cdoyo  ;  nil  for  nihil ;  Junior  for  jfw^nior.    Thus, 
Tityre  coge  pecus,  tu  post  carecta  latebas.   Virg.  E.  3,  20. 

rV.  A  vowel  naturally  short,  before  two  consonants,  a  double 
consonant,  or  the  letter  J,  is  long  by  position  ;  as,  drmaj  helium, 
dxiSf  gdza,  major.     Thus, 

Pasci'.re  Sportet  fives  diductutn  dTcere  c&rmen.   Virg.  E.  6,  5. 
Nee  myrtxis  vlncet  corylo3  ;  n5c  laurea  Phoebi.  Id.  E.  7,  o4. 
At  nSbis,  Pax  alma,  veni,  spTcamque  teneto.   Tihull.  1,  10,  67. 
Kara  javant:  primis  sic  major  gratia  pomis.  Mart.  4,  29,  3. 

Note  1.  A  vowel  (other  than  i)  before  j  is  in  reality  lengthened  by  forming 
a  diphthong  with  it,  since  t  and  _;  are  in  fact  but  one  letter.  Thus  major  is 
equivalent  to  maV-or,  which  would  be  pronounced  maf-yor.  See  §  9,  1. 

Exc.  1.  The  compounds  of  jugum  have  i  short  before  /;  as,  btj'u- 
guSj  quddrijiigus.     Thus, 

Intgrea  bijugis  infert  se  LiicSlgiis  albis.  Virg.  A.  10,  575. 

Remark.  The  vowel  is  long  by  position,  when  either  one  or  both 
of  the  consonants  is  in  the  same  word  with  it ;  but  when  both  stand 
at  the  beginning  of  the  following  word,  the  vowel  is  either  long  or 
short;  as, 

Tolle  mSraB ;  sempSr  nScult  diflFerre  p&ratis.  Lucan.  1,  281. 
Ferte  citi  ferrum ;  date  tUd.;  scandlte  mures.   Virg.  A.  9,  87. 
Ne  taimen  igndrSt,  qu»e  sit  sententid  scripto.   Ovid. 

Note  2.  A  short  vowel  at  the  end  of  a  word,  before  an  initial  double  conso- 
naut  or  j  in  the  following  word,  is  not  lengthened. 

Note  3.  In  the  comic  poets  a  vowel  frequently  remains  short  though  fok 
bwed  by  two  consonants,  especially  if  only  one  of  them  is  in  the  same  word. 


822  PROSODY. QUANTITY SPECIAL    RULES.  §  284. 

^  Exc.  2.  A  vowel  naturally  shortj  before  a  mute  followed  by  a 
liquid,  is  common ;  as,  agris^  pJidretra^  volucris,  poplites,  cochlea. 
Thus, 

Et  piTmo  siiuilis  vSlueri,  mox  vera  vSlricris.   Ovid.  M.  13.  607. 
Natum  ante  ora  patris,  patrem  qui  obtruncat  ad  aras.   Virg.  A.  2,  663. 
Nox  tinSbras  profert,  Phoebus  f  ugat  inde  tSnibras.    Ovid. 

Rem.  1.  If  the  vowel  before  a  mute  and  liquid  is  naturally  long,  it  continues 
so;  as,  sdlubris,  ambulacrum. 

Rem.  2.  In  compound  words,  of  which  the  former  part  ends  with  a  mute,  and 
the  latter  begins  with  a  liquid,  a  short  vowel  before  the  mute  is  made  long  by- 
position  ;  as,  dbluo,  obruo,  sublevo,  qimmobrem. 

Rem.  3.  A  mute  and  liquid  at  the  beginning  of  a  word  seldom  lengthen  the 
short  vowel  of  the  preceding  word,  except  in  the  arsis  of  a  foot;  as, 
Terrasju^  tractusq[ue  maris  coelumque  profundum.   Virg.  E.  4,  51. 

Rem.  4.  In  Latin  words,  only  the  liquids  I  and  r  following  a  mute  render 
the  preceding  short  vowel  common;  but,  in  words  of  Greek  origin,  m  and  n 
after  a  mute  nave  the  same  effect,  as  in  Ticmtssa,  Procne,  Cycnus. 


SPECIAL    EULES. 

FIRST  AND  MIDDLE  SYLLABLES. 

I.  DERIVATIVE  WORDS. 

§  284:.  Derivative  words  retain  the  quantitj  of  their  primi 
tives;  as, 

by  conjugation,  amo,  zmat,  amabal,  amar»,  amaiiUj  etc. ;  by  declension,  amor, 
imoi'is,  wnori,  siJndribus,  etc. ;  so,  anlnw?,  anlmdius,  from  ^I/na ;  gemebundus, 
fix)m  ghnere;  famiUa,  from  famUliLs;  mateiyiuSy  frommater ;  propinguus,  from 
prqpe. 

Note  1.  Ldr,  par,  sal,  and  pes  in  declension  shorten  the  vowel  of  the  nomi- 
native; as,  sails,  pedis,  etc. 

Note  2.  The  vowel  of  the  primitive  is  sometimes  lengthened  or  shortened  in 
the  derivative  by  the  addition  or  removal  of  a  consonant- 

Rem.  1.  Derivatives  fix)m  increasing  nouns  of  the  second  or  third 
declension  agree  in  quantity  with  the  increment  of  their  primitives ; 
as, 

puerUia,  from  pu^ri;  virfineusj  from  virgftds;  sdlnber,  fix)m  salutis. 

Rem.  2.  In  verbs,  the  vowels  of  the  derived  tenses  and  of  deriva- 
tive words  agree  in  quantity  with  the  verbal  root  from  which  they 
are  formed ;  as, 

vaoxebam,  m6\eho.  moream,  moverem,  move,  moverc,  moverw,  movendus, 
from  mdv,  the  root  oi  the  present,  with  6  short; — mOv^rawj,  moverim,  movissem, 
movero,  moyisse,  from  mov,  the  root  of  the  perfect,  with  6  long;  motOrjM  and 
motus ;— moto,  motto,  motor,  and  motus,  -us,  from  mot,  the  root  of  the  supine, 
with  6  also  long. 

Rem.  3.  (a.)  Solutum  and  vdluium  from  solw  and  vcHvo  have  the  first  syllable 
short,  as  if  from  s6luo,  vdluo.  So,  from  gigno  come  genui,  gdnitum,  as  if  from 
gino;  and  pdtui,  from  pdUs  sum  (postum). 


§  284.         PROSODY. QUANTITY — ^DEKIVATIVE    WORDS.  323 

(b.)  The  a  in  da,  imperative  of  do,  is  long,  though  short  in  other  parts  of  the 
verb.   See  §  294,  2. 
(c.)   The  0  in  pdsui  and  pdsttum  is  short,  though  long  in  pdTio. 

Exc.  1.  Perfects  and  supines  of  two  syllables  have  the  first 
syllable  long,  even  when  that  of  the  present  is  short ;  as, 

veni,  vldi,  feci,  from  venio,  video,  fdcio ;  cdsum,  motum,  visum,  from  cddo, 
mdveo,  Video. 

Note  3.  Such  perfects  are  supposed  to  have  been  formed  either  by  the  con- 
traction of  reduplicated  syllables,  as  venio,  perf.  veveni,  by  syncope*^  veeni,  by 
crasis  veni,  or  by  the  omission  of  a  consonant,  as  video,  perf  vldsi,  by  syncope 
vldi,  the  vowel  retaining  the  quantity  which  it  had  by  position. 

Note  4.  The  long  vowel  of  dissyllabic  supines  probably  arose  in  like  man- 
ner from  syncope  and  contraction ;  as,  video,  vidsum,  by  syncope  vlsuvi ;  m6veo, 
mdviium,  by  syncope  nuiiium,  by  contraction  motum. 

(1.)  (a.)  These  seven  perfects  have  the  first  syllable  short: — hihi, 
dedi,  fidi,  (from  Jindo),  scidi,  steti,  stiti,  tuli.  So  also  perculi,  from 
vercello. 

(6.)   The  first  syllable  is  also  short  before  a  vowel  (§  283, 1.);  as,  rui. 

(2.)  (a.)  These  ten  supines  have  the  first  syllable  short : — cltum, 
^irom  cieo^,  datum,  itum,  Ittum,  guitum,  ratum,  ruturn,  sdtum,  sXtumy 
and  stdtum. 
-    (S.)  So,  also,  had  the  obsolete  fiium,  from  fM,  whence  comes  futurus. 

Exc.  2.  (a.)  Reduplicated  polysyllabic  perfects  have  the  first  two 
syllables  short ;  as, 

cicidi,  cedni,  Utigi,  didici,  from  cddo,  cdno,  tango,  and  disco. 

(6.)  The  second  syllable  of  reduplicated  perfects  is  sometimes  made  long  by 
position ;  as,  m6mdr(li,  tetendi. —  Cecidi  from  ccedo,  and  pepedi  from  pedo,  retain- 
ing the  quantity  of  their  first  root  also  have  the  second  syllable  long. 

Exc.  3.  Desiderative  verbs  in  urio  have  the  u  short,  though,  in  the  third 
root  of  the  verbs  from  which  they  are  formed,  it  is  long;  as,  coendt&rio  from 
coendtu,  the  third  root  of  coeno.     So  partUrio,  esurio,  nupiurio. 

Exc.  4.  Frequentative  verbs,  formed  from  the  third  root  of  verbs  of  the  first 
conjugation,  have  the  i  short ;  as,  cldmito,  vdllto.   See  §  187,  II.  1. 

Exc.  5.  A  few  other  derivatives  deviate  from  the  quantity  of  their  primi- 
tives. 

1.  Some  have  a  long  vowel  from  a  short  one  in  the  primitive. 
Such  are, 

Deni,  from  decem.  Mobllis,  from  moveo.  Stipendium,  from  stips 

Fdmes  anc?  )from  Persona, /roTTi  persono.  (stipis). 

Fomentum,  j  f oveo.  Kegula  and  )  from  Susplcio,  onis,  from  sus- 

Humanus,  from  homo.  Eex  (regis),  \  rego.  -  picor. 

Laterna,  from  lateo,  Secius,  from  secus.  Tegiila,  from  t6go. 

Litera  from  lino.  Sedes,  from  sedeo. 

Lex  (legis),  from  lego.  Semen,/r07»  sero. 

2.  Some  have  a  short  vowel  from  a  long  one  in  the  primitive. 
Such  are, 

Dicax,  from  dico.  Molestus,  from  moles.  Sagax,  from  sagio. 

Dux  (duels),  from  duco.   Nato,  from  natu.  sup.  Sopor,  from  sopio. 

Fides,  from  f ido.  Noto,  from  notu.  svp.  Vadura,  from  vado. 

Labo,  from  labor,  dep.  v.    odium,  from  odi.  Voco.  from  vox  (vocis.) 
Liicerua,  from  luceo.         Quasillus,  from  qualus. 


324  PEOSODT. — QUANTITY — COMPOUND    WORDS.         §  285. 

Note  1.  Distrius  comes  regularly  (by  syncope)  from  disserttts^  the  prefix  dis 
being  short,  ^  299,  1.  Cf.  dirimo  and  diribeo,  where  s  is  changed  to  r.  See  (j  196, 
(6.)  2. 

Note  2.  Some  other  words  might,  perhaps,  with  propriety  be  added  to  these 
lists :  but,  in  regard  to  the  dex'ivation  of  most  of  them,  grammarians  are  not 
entirely  agreed. 

Kemark  1.  Some  of  these  irregxilarities  seem  to  have  arisen  from  the  influ- 
ence of  syncope  and  crasis.  Thus  viobiUs  may  have  been  mOvibilU;  imtwti, 
mdrifiim,  etc. 

Rem.  2.  Sometimes  the  vowel  in  the  derived  word  being  naturally  short,  is 
restored  to  its  proper  quantity  by  removing  one  of  the  consonants  which,  in 
tlie  primitive,  made  it  long  by  position;  as,  nux,  nucis.  So,  when  the  vowel  of 
the  primitive  is  naturally  long,  but  has  been  made  short  before  another  vowel, 
it  is  sometimes  restored  to  its  original  quantity  by  the  insertion  of  a  consonant; 
as,  hibemus,  from  hiems. 

Rem.  3.  The  first  syllable  in  liquidus  is  supposed  to  be  common,  as  coming^ 
either  from  liquor  or  liipieo ;  as, 

Crassiqae  convSniant  tiquidis,  et  tlqulda  crassis.  Lucr.  4, 1255. 

n.    COMPOUND  WORDS. 

§  285.   1.  Compound  words  retain  the  quantity  of  the  words 

which  compose  them ;  as, 

defero,  of  de  and  firo ;  ddoro,  of  dd  and  dro.  So  dWrior,  dmdviOj  circ&miOj 
cdniedo,  enltor^  produco,  subomo. 

2.  The  chanjre  of  a  vowel  or  a  diphthong  in  forming  the  compound 
does  not  alter  its  quantity  ;  as, 

concido,  from  cddo;  concldoj  from  ccedo;  erigo^  from  rigo;  recludo^  from,  claudo; 
iriiquus,  from  cequMS. 

Exc.  1.  A  long  syllable  in  the  simple  word  becomes  short  in  the  following 
compounds: — aynltus  x^nd  cogititus,  from  rwius;  dijero  and  pejSro,  from  juro; 
hOdie^  from  hoc  die :  vilulum  and  nihU^  from  h'dum ;  causidlcus,  and  other  com- 
pounds ending  in  dictis,  from  dlco. 

Exc.  2.  Jmbecillus,  from  bdcillum,  has  the  second  syllable  long.  The  partici- 
ple ainbUus  has  the  penult  long  from  iium,  but  the  nouns  ambitm  and  awibiUo 
follow  the  rule. 

Exc.  3.  Innuba,  pronuba^  and  subnUba^  from  nibo^  have  «  short;  but  in  con,- 
nubium,  it  is  common. 

Exc.  4.  0  final,  in  the  compounds  of  do  and  $to,  is  cocomon,  though  long  in 
the  simple  verbs.  ^  294,  (a.) 

Note  1.  Prepositions  of  one  syllable,  which  end  in  a  vowel,  are  long  (^  294, 
(a.);  those  which  end  in  a  single  consonant  are  short  (^  299, 1.) — r7-a  from 
trans  is  long ;  as,  trddo,  irdduco. 

Exc.  5.  Pro,  in  the  following  compounds,  is  short:— prdfdnus,  prdfdri^ 
pi'ufecto,  prdfeituSf  pr6ficiscor,  pi'dfiteor,  pr6fugio,  prqfugus,  procella,  prd^ 
fundus^  j>r6nejjos,  pi'oneptis,  and  jyrdiervus.  It  is  common  in  procuro,  pro/undo, 
proj}a<jo,  pnpcUo,  and  proplno. — Respectmg  j?nB  in  composition  before  a  vowel 
see  ^  283,  II.  Exc.  1. 

Rem.  1.  The  Greek  preposition  pro  (before)  is  short;  as,  prdphiia.  In  prol- 
6gus,  propola,  and  prophw,  it  is  common. 

Rem.  2.   The  inseparable  prepositions  di  (for  dis)  and  se  are  long; 
as, 
didueOf  Updro.    £«speetixig  ^serUu^  see  ^  284,  Exo.  5,  8,  N.  1. 


§  286.      PROSODY. — QUANTITY INCREMENT    OP   NOUNS.         325 

Rem.  8.  (a  )  The  inseparable  preposition  re  or  red  is  short ;  as, 

remitto,  refero,  reddmo. 

{h.)  Re  is  sometimes  lengthened  in  reltgio,  reliqum^  reliquus,  repSrit,  reiHUty 
repulit,  recidit,  reducere,  where  some  editors  double  the  consonant  following  re. 
Cf.  §  307,  2.    In  the  impersonal  verb  refert,  re  is  long,  as  coming  from  res. 

Rem.  4.  A  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word,  is  long ; 
the  other  vowels  are  short ;  as, 

mdlo^  qudpropler,  trddo,  {trans  do);  nefas,  valedlco,  hujuscSmddi ;  btceps,  tii- 
dens^  omriiphtens,  significo ;  hddie,  quanddquidem,  pMldsdphus ;  ducenti^  tOcHpleSy 
IVojugena;  Folj/dih^us,  Eurypylus,  Thrdsybulus. 

Exc.  1.  A.  ^  is  sjiort  in  qudsi^  eddem^  when  not  an  ablative,  and  in  some 
Greek  compounds ;  as,  cdtdpulta,  hexameter. 

Exc.  2.  E.  -E  is  long  in  C7'edo,  nemo,  nequam,  nequdquam,  neguidquam,  ne~ 
qids,  nequitia ;  memet,  viecum,  tecum,  secum,  sese,  vecors,  vesdnus,  veneficus,  and 
videlicet; — also  in  words  compounded  with  se  for  sex  or  semi;  as,  seaecim, 
semestris,  semddius ;  but  in  selibra  it  is  found  short  in  Martial. 

Note  2.  (a.)  The  first  e  in  videlicet,  as  in  vide,  is  sometimes  made  short. 
See  §  295,  Exc.  3. 

(b.)  E  is  common  in  some  verbs  compounded  with  fddo;  as,  llquefado^ 
jpdtefdcio,  rdrefdcio,  tdbefacio,  tepefdcio. 

Exc.  3.  1.  (1.)  /  is  long  in  those  compounds  in  which  the  first  part  is  de- 
clined, (§  296;)  as,  quidam,  qulvis,  qullibet,  quantlms,  quanticumque,  tantidem^ 
unlculque,  eldem,  reipublicce,  utrlque. 

(2.)  /is  also  long  in  those  compounds  which  may  be  separated  without  al- 
tering the  sense,  (§296;)  as,  ludlmdgister,  slquis,  agricultura. 

(8.)  /,  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound  word,  is  sometimes  made  long 
by  contraction ;  as,  tlblcen  for  ilMicen,  from  tibia  and  c&no.    See  §  283,  III. 

(4.)   I  is  long  in  blgce,  qtiadrigce,  ilicet,  scilicet. 

(5.)  In  idem,  when  masculine,  i  is  long;  but  when  neuter,  it  is  short.  The  • 
of  uil^ue  and  uirdbique,  the  second  in  ibidem,  and  the  first  in  nimirum,  are  long. 
In  ubicumque,  as  in  ubi,  i  is  common. 

(6.)  Compounds  of  dies  have  the  final  i  of  the  former  part  long;  as,  Mdwumy 
trlduum,  merldies,  qudtldie,  quotldidnus,  pridie,  postrldie. 

Note  3.  In  Greek  words,  i,  ending  the  former  part  of  a  compound,  is  short; 
as,  Callimdclius ;  unless  it  comes  from  the  diphthong  ei  («/),  or  is  made  long  or 
common  by  position.  ^ 

Exc.  4.  O.  (1.)  In  compounds,  the  final  o  of  contro,  intro,  retro,  and  guando 
(except  quandoquidem,)  is  long;  as,  controversia,  introduco,  retrocedo,  quandoque. 
0  is  long  also  in  dlioqui  {-quin),  and  uiroque. 

(2.)  0  is  long  in  the  compounds  of  ^uo  and  eo;  as,  qmmddo,  qudcumque,  qud- 
nam,  quolibet,  quomimis,  quocirca,  qvovis,  qmque  (i.  6.  et  qtio) ;  eddem,  eone  ;  but 
in  the  conjunction  qiwque,  it  is  short. 

(3.)  Greek  words  which  are  written  with  an  omSga  (»)  have  the  o  long;  as, 
geometra,  Mlrwtaurus,  Idgqpus. 

Exc.  5.   U.   Uis  long  in  Jupiter  {JMs  pdter)y  and  jMco  {ju$  dico). 

in.    INCREMENT  OF   NOUNS. 

§  380.  1.  A  noun  is  said  to  increase,  when,  in  any  ot  its  eases, 
it  has  m'ore  syllables  than  in  the  nominative  singular ;  as,  pax,  pacis; 
sermo,  sermonis.  The  number  of  increments  in  any  case  of  a  noun  is 
equal  to  that  of  its  additional  syllables. 


826         PROSODY. QUANTITY INCREMENT    OF   NOUNS.      §  ^87 

2.  Nouns  in  general  have  but  one  increment  in  the  singular,  but 
iter,  supellex,  compounds  of  caput  ending  in  ps,  and  sometimes  jtcur^ 
have  two  increments ;  as, 

iter^  t-lin-e-7'is;  supeUex,  su-pd-lecS-lis ;  anceps,  an-cHp-l-iis ;  jecur,  jedn- 
6-ris. 

Re:mark.  The  double  increase  of  iter,  etc.,  in  the  sinj^ular  number  arises 
from  tiieir  coming  from  obsolete  nominatives,  containing  a  s^^Uable  more  than 
those  now  in  use ;  as,  itinera  etc. 

3.  The  dative  and  ablative  plural  of  the  third  declension  have  one 
iocrement  more  than  the  genitive  singular ;  as, 

reXf  Gen.  re-gis,  D.  and  Ab.  reg-i-bus. 

sei'Tjw,        ser-mo-nis^        -^ ser-mon-l-iiis. 

iter,  t-Uii-^-ris,         \t-i-ner-l-bus. 

4.  The  last  syllable  of  a  word  is  never  considered  as  the  incre- 
ment If  a  word  has  but  one  increment,  it  is  the  penult ;  if  two,  the 
antepenult  is  called  the  first,  and  the  penult  the  second ;  and  if  three, 
the  syllable  before  the  antepenult  is  called  the  first,  the  antepenult 
the  second,  and  the  penult  the  third  increment ;  as, 

1  12  12  123 

ser-mo,  ser-nw-nis,  ser-mon-i-ius ;  i-ter,  i-Un-€-ris,  it-t-ner-i-bus. 

5.  In  the  third  declension,  the  quantity  of  the  first  increment  is  the 
same  in  all  the  other  cases  as  in  the  genitive  singular ;  as, 

sermonis,  sermoni,  sermonem,  sermoTie^  serinmes,  sermonum,  soTnonibus.  Bobw^ 
or  biJjus,  from  bos,  bOvis,  is  lengthened  by  contraction  from  b6vibus. 

Note.  As  adjectives  and  participles  are  declined  like  nouns,  the  same  rules 
of  increment  apply  to  all  of  them;  and  so  also  to  pronouns. 


INCREMENTS    OF    THE    SINGULAR    NUMBER. 

OF   THE  FIRST,  FOURTH,  AND  FIFTH  DECLENSIONS. 

§  S8# •  1.  When  nouns  of  the  first,  fourth,  and  fifth  declensions  in- 
crease in  the  singular  number,  the  increment  consists  of  a  vowel  before  the 
final  vowel,  and  its  quantity  is  determined  by  the  first  general  rule  with  its  ex- 
ceptions, §  283, 1. 

Thus,  aura,  gen.  aurai,  h  283, 1.  Exc.  3,  (a.):  fmctus,  dat  fructid,  ^  283,  L 
(a,):  dies,  gen.  diei,  §  283, 1.  Exc.  2,  (a.) 

INCREMENTS   OF   THE   SECOND   DECLENSION. 

2.   The  increments  of  the  second  declension  in  the  singular 

number  are  short ;  as, 

'    giner,  geniri ;  sdtur,  sdtw'i ;  tenSr,  tSniin ;  vlr,  viri.     Thus, 

Ne,  piiiri,  ne  tanta  anlmls  assuescite  bella.   Virg.  A.  6,  833. 
Monstra  slnunt;  giniros  externis  a£fore  ab  oris.  Id.  A.  7,  270. 

Exc.  The  increment  of  Iber  and  Celtiber  is  long.    For  that  of  genitives  in 
fus,  see  ^  283,  Exo.  4. 


§  287.   PROSODY. QUANTITY INCREMENT  OP  NOUNS. 

INCREMENTS  OF  THE  THIRD  DECLENSION. 

3.  The  increments  of  the  thh-d  declension  and  singular  num- 
ber in  a  and  o  are  long ;  those  in  e,  z,  m,  and  y,  are  short ;  as, 

animal,  antmalls ;  audax,  auddcis;  serrm,  sermonis;  ferox,  ferocis ;  dpus^ 
6peHs ;  celer,  celens ;  miles,  m'ditis ;  supplex,  mpplicis ;  murmur,  murmuris ; 
dux,  duels;  chldmys,  ckldmydis ;  Styx,  Stygis.     Thus, 

PrSnaque  cum  spectent  antmSlia  cetera  terrain.   Ovid.  M.  1,  84. 

Usee  turn  multipllci  poptilos  sermone  replebat.   Virg.  A.  4, 189. 

Incumbent  giinSris  lapsi  sarcire  rulnas.  Id.  G.  4,  249. 

Qualem  virglneo  demessum  poltice  florem.  Id.  A.   11,  68. 

Adsplce,  ventosi  cecidenmt  mitrmuris  aurse.  Id.  E.  9,  58. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  A. 

1.  (a.)  Mascuhnes  in  al  and  ar  (except  Car  and  Nar)  increase 
short ;  as,  Annibal,  Annibalis  ;  Amilcar^  Amilcdris. 

(6.)  Par  and  its  compounds,  and  the  following—- dnas,  mas,  vas  (vddis),  bac- 
car,  Jiepar,  jubar,  lar,  nectar,  and  sal — also  increase  short. 

2.  A,  in  the  increment  of  nouns  in  s  with  a  consonant  before  it,  is 
short ;  as,  daps,  ddpis  ;  Arabs,  Arabis. 

3.  Greek  nouns  in  a  and  as  (adis,  anis,  or  atis)  increase  short ;  as, 
lampas,  lampddis ;  Ale  las,  Meldnis ,  poema^  poemdtis. 

4.  The  following  in  ax  increase  short: — abax,  anihrax,  ArcidpJiylax,  Ataz^ 
Atrax,  climax,  culax,  cdrax,  and  nycticdrax,  dropax,  fax,  karpax,  pdnax,  smUax, 
and  styrax. — The  increment  of  Syphax  is  doubtful. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  O. 

1.  0,  in  the  increment  of  neuter  nouns,  is  short;  as, 

marmor,  marm^ris ;  corpus,  corpdris ;  Bur,  ibdris.  But  os  (the  mouth),  and 
the  neuter  of  comparatives,  like  their  masculine  and  feminine,  increase  long. 
The  increment  of  ddor  is  common. 

2.  0  is  short  in  the  increment  of  Greek  nouns  in  o  or  on,  which, 
in  the  oblique  cases,  have  omicron^  but  long  in  those  which  have 
omega;  as, 

Aedon,  Aeddnis;  Aadmemnon,  Ag&memn^nis: — Plato,  Platonis;  Sinon,  Sinonis; 
Sicyon,  Sicyofiis.     Sldon,  Orion,  and  uEgoeon,  have  the  mcrement  common. 

3.  (a.)  In  the  increment  of  gentile  nouns  in  o  or  on^  whether 
Greek  or  barbaric,  o  is  generally  short ;  as, 

Mdcedo,  Muceddnis.  So,  Amazones,  Adnes,  Myrmiddnes,  Sanidnes,  Saxdnes, 
Sendnes,  Teutdnes,  etc. 

(b.)  But  tlie  following  have  o  long: — Eburdnes,  Lacdnes,  Jones,  Nasamones, 
Suessones  (or  -iones),  Veitones,  Burgundiones.    BrUones  has  the  o  common. 

4.  Greek  nouns  in  or  increase  short ;  as,  Hector,  Hectdris  ;  rhetor, 
rhetdris ;  Afjenor,  Agendris. 

5.  Compounds  of  pus,  (T&yf),  as  tripus,  polypus,  (Edtpus,  and  also  arbor, 
memor,  bos,  comjjos,  iniiws,  and  lejms,  increase  short. 

6.  0,  in  the  increment  of  nouns  in  s  with  a  consonant  before  it,  is 
ehort;  as, 


328         PROSODY. QUANTITY — INCREMENT    OF   NOUNS.      §  288. 

scrobs,  scrdbis ;  inops,  irwl^pM ;  Ddldpes.    But  it  is  long  in  the  increment  of 
cercqps,  Cyclops^  and  hydrops. 
7.  The  increment  of  AUobrox,  Cappddox,  and  proBCOlSy  is  also  short. . 

Exotptions  in  Increments  in  E. 

1.  Nouns  in  en,  cnts  (except  Hymen),  lengthen  their  increment; 
as,  Siren,  Sirenis.  So,  Anienis,  Nerienis,  from  Anio  and  Nerio,  or 
rather  from  the  obsolete  Anien  and  Nerienes. 

2.  Hceres,  Idcuples,  mansues,  merces,  and  quies — also  Iber,  ver,  lex,  rex,  alec  or 
dlex  (hdl^)  narthex  and  vertex— plebs  and  seps — increase  long. 

3.  Greek  nouns  in  es  and  er  (except  aer  and  cetlier)  increase  long ; 
as,  magnes,  magnetis;  crater,  crdteris. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  I. 

1.  Nouns  and  adjectives  in  iar,  increase  long ;  as,  victrix,  victrlcis; 
felix,  fellcis. 

Exc.  C&lix,  Cllix,  coxendix,  filix,  fornix,  Tiysirix,  Idrix,  nix,  pix,  sdUx,  strix, 

and  rarely  sandix  or  sandyx,  increase  short. 

2.  Vlbex  and  the  following  norms  in  is  increase  long: — dis,  glis,  lis,  vis,  Ne- 
sis,  Quiris,  and  Samitis.    The  increment  of  Psophis  is  conmion. 

3.  Greek  nouns,  whose  genitive  is  in  inis  increase  long;  as,  del- 
phin,  delphlnis  ;  Saldmis,  Sdlaminis. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  U. 

1.  Genitives  in  udisj  uris,  and  utis,  from  nominatives  m  us,  have 
the  penult  long;  as, 

pdlus,  pdludis ;  tellus,  teUuns;  virtus,  virtutis.  But  iniercus,  lAgxts  and  picus 
pecudis,  increase  short. 

2.  Fur,  frux,  (obs.),  lux,  and  PoUux,  increase  long. 

Exceptions  in  Increments  in  Y. 

1.  Greek  nouns  whose  genitive  is  in  ynis,  increase  long;  as,  TVa- 
chgn,  Trdchynis.  ^ 

2.  The  increment  oihombyx,  Ceyx,  gryps,  and  mormyr,  is  long;  that  of  Be- 
brvx  and  sandyx  is  common. 

INCEEMENTS    OF    THE    PLURAL    NUMBER. 

§  288.  1.  A  noun  in  the  plural  number  is  said  to  increase, 
when,  in  any  case,  it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  ablative  singular. 

Remark.  When  tRe  ablative  singular  is  wanting,  or  its  place  is  supplied  by 
a  form  derived  from  a  diflferent  root,  an  ablative  may,  for  this  purpose,'  be  as- 
sumed, by  annexing  the  proper  termination  to  the  root  of  the  plural. 

2.  When  a  noim  increases  in  the  plural  number,  its  pe-iult  is  called  the 
plural  increment;  as,  sa  in  musdrum,  no  in  ddmimrum,  p  in  ri^um  and 
riptims. 


§  289,  290.  PROSODY. — quantity — increment  of  verbs.  329 

3.  In  plural  increments,  a,  e,  and  o,  are  long,  i  aad  u  are  short ; 

as, 

bdndi'um,  dnimdbtis,  rerum,  rebus.,  genSrdrum,  ambobus;  sermontbus,  Idcubus. 
Thus, 

Appia,  lons^arum^  tSritur,  reglna  viSrum,  Stat.  S.  2,  2,  12. 
Sunt  lacrymae  reruin^  et  meatem  mortalia  tangunt.    Virg.  A.  1,  462. 
Atque  alii,  quorum  comoedia  prLsca  vlrHrum  est.  Hor.  S.  1,  4,  2. 
FoTlubus  egi-edior,  ventisque  /5renttbus  usus.   Ovid. 

IV.    INCREMENT  OF  VERBS. 

§  280.  1.  A  verb  is  said  to  increase,  when,  in  any  of  its  parts, 
it  has  more  syllables  than  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present 
indicative  active;  as,  das,  da-tis ;  doces,  do-ce-mus. 

2.  The  number  of  increments  in  any  part  of  a  verb  is  equal  to  that 
of  its  additional  syllables.  In  verbs,  as  in  nouns,  the  last  syllable  is 
never  considered  the  increment.  If  a  verb  has  but  one  increment,  it 
is  the  penult ;  and  this  first  increment,  through  all  the  variations  of 
the  verb,  except  in  reduplicated  tenses,  continues  equally  distant 
from  the  first  syllable.  The  remaining  increments  are  numbered 
successively  from  the  first ;  as,  / 

au-dis, 
1 

au-di-tis, 
12 

au-di-e-bas, 
12     3     4 

au-di-e-bam-I-ni. 

8.  A  verb  in  the  active  voice  may  have  three  increments ;  in  the  passive,  it 
may  have  four. 

4.  In  determining  the  increments  of  deponent  verbs,  an  active 
voice,  formed  from  the  same  root,  may  be  supposed. 

1  12 

Thus  the  increments  of  Ice-td-tur,  ket-d-bd-iur,  etc.,  are  reckoned  from  the 
supposed  verb  Iceto,  Icetas. 

§  S90.     In  the  increments  of  verb.s,  a,  e,  and  o,  are  long ; . 

i  and  u  are  short ;  as, 

dmdre,  mdnere,  fadiote,  vdl&mus,  rSgebdmtni.    Thus, 

Et  cantare  pSres,  et  responriSre  paruti.    Virg.  E.  7,  5. 
Sic  equidem  duccbam  Snimo,  rcbarque  futurum.  Id.  A.  6,  G90. 
Cumque  loqui  potent,  miitrem  fdcitote  salutet.    Ooid,  M.  9.  378. 
ScindiCur  incertum  studia  in  contraria  vulgus.    Virg.  A.  2,  3U. 
Nos  numerus  sumus.,  et  frages  consumere  nati.  Hor.  £p.  1,  2,  27. 

(a.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  A. 

The  ^rst  increment  of  do  is  short ;  as,  damuSf  dabamusy  ddret^  dSr 
turitSj  circumddrej  circumddbdmus. 
28* 


a-mas, 

mo-nes, 

1 
a-ma-mus, 

1 

mo-ne-tur, 

1   2 

am-a-ba-mus, 

1  2 

mon-e-re-tur. 

12    3 
S,m-a-v  e-ra-mus. 

12     3 

mon-e-bim-i-ni. 

330         PROSODY. — QUANTITT — INCREMENT   OP   VERBS.      §  290. 

(6.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  E. 

i.  E  before  r  is  short  in  the  Jirst  increment  of  all  the  present  and 
imperfect  tenses  of  the  third  conjugation,  and  in  the  second  increment 
in  beris  and  6ere  ;  as, 

righ'e  (infin.  and  imperat.),  rSgSris  or  regire  (pres.  ind.  pass.),  rSgSrem  and 
rigerer  (imp.  subj.);  dmaMris,  dmdbere  ;  indneberis^  monibere. 

Note  1.  In  velim,  veUs,  etc.,  from  vdlo,  (second  person,  regularly  vdlis,  by 
syncope  and  contraction  vis),  i  is  not  an  increment,  but  represents  the  root 
vowel  6,  and  is  therefore  short;  §  284,  and  §  178, 1. 

2.   -E  is  short  before  ranif  rim^  ro,  and  the  persons  formed  fix)m 
them;  as, 
dindveram,  dmdverat,  amavirim^  mdnuertmus,  rexero,  audiveritis. 

Note  2.  In  verbs  which  have  been  shortened  by  syncope  or  otherwise,  e  be- 
fore r  retains  its  original  quantity ;  as,  Jleram,  for  fihhram. 

For  the  short  e  before  runl,  in  the  perfect  indicative,  as,  ztei&rvmL,  see  SysUHe^ 
4  807. 

(c.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  L 

1.  /before  v  or  s,  in  tenses  formed  from  the  second  root,  is  long; 
as, 

pitivi,  audivi,  qtuesivit,  divisit,  audliimus,  (RvUtmus,  audiveram. 

2.  /  is  long,  after  the  analogy  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  in  the  final 
syllable  of  the  third  root  of  gaudeo,  arcesso^  dlvldo,  facesso,  IdcessOy 
peto,  qucEro,  recenseo  and  obliviscor ;  as, 

gdvisus,  arcessltus,  divisus,  fdcessUus,  IdcessUus,  pedtus,  qucesUus,  recensUus, 
oSutus;  gdvlsurus,  etc. 

3.  /  in  the  first  increment  of  the  fourth  conjugation,  except  in 
Xmus  of  the  perfect  indicative,  is  long ;  as, 

aiulire,  audirem,  audiius,  auditurus,  pres.  verumus,  but  in  the  perfect  vetdmus. 
So  in  the  ancient  forms  in  iham,  ibo,  of  the  fourth  conjugation ;  as,  ntdribai, 
Urubunl ;  and  also  m\bam.  and  ibo,  from.  eo. 

Note  3.  When  a  vowel  follows,  the  i  is  short,  by  §  283 :  as,  aiuSunt,  audle- 
bam. 

'  4.  /is  long  in  the  first  and  second  persons  plural  of  subjunctives  in  sim,  sis, 
sit,  (.tc.,  (^  162,  1,);  as,  siTUUs,  sUis,  vellmus,  velUis,  and  their  compounds;  as, 
possimus,  aclslmiis,  vinllmus,  rwlimus.  So  also  in  ndlito,  noliie,  nolitote,  after  the 
analogy  of  the  fourth  conjugation. 

5.  /  in  ris,  rimus  and  ritisj  in  the  future  perfect  and  perfect  sub- 
junctive, is  common ;  as, 

tJuferfs,  Mart., occkZeris,  Hor.;  videritis  (Ovid),  dedentis  (Id.) ;  fecerimus  {Gar 
tull.),  egerimus  (Virg.) 

(d.)  Exceptions  in  Increments  in  U. 

U  is  lon^  in  the  increment  of  supines,  and  of  participles  formed 
from  the  third  root  of  the  verb ;  as, 
ticuius,  sdidtus,  seculOrus  s'^iHturus. 


§  291.        PROSODY. — QUANTITY — PENULTS.  331 

RULES  FOR  THE  QUANTITY  OF  PENULTIMATE  AND  ANTEPE- 
NULTIMATE SYLLABLES. 

I.  PENULTS. 

§  301*  1.  Words  ending  in  acus^  icus,  and  icwm,  shorten  the 
penult;  as, 

dyndrdcm,  JSgyptidcus,  rusticus,  triticum,  viaticum. 

Except  Ddcus,  merdcus,  dpdctis;  amicus,  api^'lcus,  flcus,  mendicus,  picvs, 
posticus,  pudicus,  sp'icus,  umbilicus,  vlcus. 

2.  Words  ending  in  abrum,  uhrum,  acrum^  and  atrum,  lengthen  the 
penult ;  as, 

candelabrum,  delvbrum,  Idvdcrum,  verdtrum. 

3.  Nouns  in  ca  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

dpdtheca,  chdca,  lactUca,  lorica,  phoca. 

Except  dltca,  brassica,  dica,  fullca,  mantica,  pedica,  pertica,  scitUca,  phdldrica^ 
tunica,  vdmica ;  and  also  some  nouns  in  ica  derived  from  adjectives  in  icus ; 
as,  fabrica,  grammdtica,  etc.     So  m,dnicce. 

4.  Patronymics  in  ades  and  ides  shorten  the  penult ;'  as,  AtlantiadeSf 

Pridmides. 

Except  those  in  ides  which  are  formed  from  nouns  in  eus  or  es  (m) ;  as, 
Airldes,  from  Atreus;  Neoclldes,  from  Neocles ;  except,  also,  AmphidrdldeSj 
Belldes,  Amyclldes,  Lycurgides. 

5.  Patronymics  and  similar  words  in  ais,  eis,  and  ois,  lengthen  the 
penult;  as. 

Achats,  Cfi7'yseis,  Minois.  Except  Phdc&is  and  Thebdis.  The  penult  of  Ne- 
reis is  common. 

6.  Words  in  do  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 

'ddo,  cedo,  dulcedo,  formido,  rodo,  testudo.    Exce 
%e(lo,  Macedo,  modo,  sdUdo,  spddo,  trepido.    Rudo 

7.  Words  in  idus  shorten  the  penult ;  those  in  w^ms  lengthen  it; 

as, 

caUidus,  herbidus,  limpidus,  llvidus,  per f  idus ;  crUdus,  Indus,  nUdus,  sOdus,  Odtis. 
Except  Jdus,  fldus,  infidus,  nidus,  sldus. 

8.  Xouns  in  ga  and  go  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

saga,  collega,  auriga,  ruga;  tmdgo,  cdllgo,  a?rugo.  Except  cdliga,  osstfrdpa, 
tdga,  pldga,  (a  region,  or  a  net),  fiiga  and  its  compounds,  siega,  ecldga,  ego, 
harpdgo,  ligo. 

9.  Words  in  le,  les,  and  lis,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

crlndle,  mantele,  anclle ;  dies,  miles,  proles ;  anndlis,  crudcUs,  civllis,  curulis. — 
Except  male; — verbals  in  His  and  bills;  as,  dgilis,  dmdbilis ; — adjectives  in 
atilis;  as,  wm6raii7zs, ;— and  also,  inddles,  sdbdles;  pSriscelis,  dapstlis,  grdciUSf 
humills,  pd7'ilis,  simills,  sterllis,  mUgilis,  strigilis. 

10.  Words  in  elus,  ela,  elum,  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 
phdselus,  querela,  prelum.     Except  gelus,  gelum,  scelus. 

11.  Diminutives  in  olus^  ola,  o^mth,  ulus,  ula,  ulunij  also  words  in 


vddo,  cedo,  dulcedo,  formido,  rodo,  testudo.    Except  cddo,  divide,  ido  (to  eat), 
comedo,  Macedo,  modo,  sdUdo,  spddo,  trepido.    Rudo  is  common. 


S32  PROSODY. QUANTITY — ^PENULTS.  §  291. 

ilus,  and  those  in  ulus,  ula,  and  uluTUf  of  more  than  two  syllables, 
shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

urceMits,  fllidla,  lectMus,  rdtiuncUla,  corculum,  pabulum;  riitilus,  garrijlWy 
fdbula.     Except  dsilus. 

1 2.  Words  in  ma  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

fdma,  poema,  rima,  pluma.  Except  dnima,  c6ma,  dScuma^  lacrimOy  vic&ma^ 
hama. 

13.  A  vowel  before  final  men  or  mentum  is  long ;  as, 

levdinen,  grdmen,  crimen^  fliimen,  Jumentum,  dtrdmentum.  Except  tdmen,  c6- 
lumen,  Hymen^  eUmentum,  and  a  few  verbal  noiins  derived  from  verbs  of  the 
second  and  third  conjugations ;  as,  dlvnejitum,  ddcuinen  or  dOcumtnium^  emdlu- 
mentum,  mOnwnentum,  regimen,  specimen,  Ugimen,  etc. 

14.  Words  ending  in  imus  shorten  the  penult;  as, 

animus,  dectmns,  flniUmus,  foriisstmus,  maximus.  Except  blmtis,  limus,  mlmtu 
dpimus,  ^iddrimus,  simus,  trimus,  and  two  superlatives,  imus  and  primus. 

KoTE.  When  an  adjective  ends  in  umus  for  imris,  the  quanti^  remains  the 
same ;  as,  dic&mus,  opiumus,  maxumus,  for  decimus,  etc. 

15.  A,  c,  0,  and  u,  before  final  mus  and  murrij  are  long;  as, 
ramus,  remus,  exiremus,  promus,  dumus,  pomum,  vdlemum.     Except  dtdmuSy 

hahamum,  cinndmum,  ddmus,  gl6mus,  humus,  postumus,  thdldmus,  tdmus,  cdldmuSf 
nemus. 

16.  (a.)  Words  in  na,  ne,  ni,  and  nisj  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 
Idna,  drena,  carina,  mdlrona,  luna,  mane,  septeni,  octoni,  {ndnis,  J'lnis,  immunis. 

Except  advena,  cottdna,  pilsdna,  mina,  gena,  bene,  sine,  cdnis,  cinis,  juvenis ;  and 
the  following  in  ina, — bucdna,  ddmlna,  Jiscina,J'emina,  fuscinn,  lamina,  vidchina^ 
pdglna,  pdUna,  sarcina,  tiblcina,  trutlna :  and  in  plur.  dpincB,  mince,  nundimz. 
So  compoimds  of  geno;  as,  indigena. 

(b.)  Verbs  in  ino  and  inor  shorten  the  penult;  as, 

desUno,  fasdno,  inquino,  sino,  crimlnor.  Except  fedino,  prqplno,  sdglno,  dpi' 
nor,  and  tne  compounds  of  cllno ;  as,  incllivo,  etc. 

1 7.  (a.)  Adjectives  in  inus,  when  they  express  time,  or  indicate  a 
material  or  an  inanimate  substance,  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 

crastinus,  diutinus,  pristmus,  perendinus  :  fdginus,  crdclnus,  hydcinthinus,  ddd- 
mantlnus,  crysiallinus,  dledgtnus,  bombycinus.  Except  mMQilnus,  repeni'mus,  ves- 
pertinus. 

■  (h.)  Other  adjectives  and  words  in  inus  and  in  inujn  lengthen  the 
penult;  as, 

canlnus,  blnus,  piregrinus,  mdrlnus,  dandesfinus,  suplnus:  llnum.  Except 
acinus,  dsinus,  coccinus,  cdminus,  eminus,  cdphinus,  ddminus,  /acinus,  fdticinus, 
protinus,  ^nus,  terminus,  geminus,  cirdnus,  minus,  vdticinus,  succinum,  /ascinum. 

18.  A,  e,  0,  and  m,  before  final  nus  and  num,  are  long;  as, 
vrbunus,  serenus,  patronus,  pronus,  minus,  tribunus,  fdnum,  venenum,  donum. 

Except  dnus,  an  old  woman,  gaJbdnus,  manus,  ocednvs,  pWanus,  ebenus,  genus, 
limigenus,  penus,  tenus,  Venus,  dnus,  bdnus,  sdnus,  ihrdnus ;  Idgdnum,  peucSdd- 
num,  popdnum,  tymjxinum,  abrdlOnum. 

19.  Words  ending  in  ha,  ho,  pa^  and  joo,  shorten  the  penult;  as, 
fdba,  juba,  sylldba ;  bibo,  cubo,  pr6bo ;  dldpa,  lUpa,  scdpha ;    crepo,  parUcipo. 

Except  glcba,  scriba,  bubo,  glubo,  Ubo,  nObo,  scribo,  sipho,  cepa,  cupa,  papa,  pUpa^ 
ripa,  scopa,  stupa ;  capo,  repo,  stipo. 


k 


§  ^91.  PROSODY. QUANTITY PENULTS.  333 


20.  •  Words  in  a/,  ar^  are,  and  aris,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

tribunal,  vecilgal :  liipdnar,  2>iJ'^t;'mar ;  altdre,  laquedre ;  ndris^  Except  animal, 
capital,  citbital,  idral,  jubar,  sdlar,  mare,  bimdris,  Mldr'is,  canthdris,  cappdns, 
Icdris. 

21.  Before  final  ra or  ror,  a  and  e  are  short;  i,  o,  and  w,  are  long; 
as, 

dro,  paro,  fero,  gero,  sero,  celero,  tempero,  queror ;  mlror,  sjnro,  tiro ;  auctoro, 
iffnoro,dro;  euro,  cluro,  figuro ;  luror.  ExceTpt  decldro,  pero,  spero  ;  f6ro,  md- 
ror,  sdror,  v&i-o,  furo,  sdturo ;  and  derivatives  from  genitives  increasing  short; 
as,  auguror,  decdro,  memdro,  murmuro,  etc. ;  from  augur,  aug&ris ;  dicv^,  dec6- 
ris,  etc. 

22.  Before  final  rus,  ra,  rum,  e  is  short;  the  other  vowels  are 
long;  as,        , 

merum,  mSrus,  hSdSra,  serum,  ceterum;  cdrus,  mirus,  morus,  murus,  gyrus; 
dm,  spli'a,  ora,  ndtura,  lorum. 

Except,  1.  austerus,  gdlerus,  plerus,  procerus,  sincerus,  serus,  severus,  verus, 
crdtera,  cera,  vera,  panthera,  stdtera. 

Exc.  2.  barbdrus,  cammdrus,  cdmurus,  canthdrus,  clidrus,  fdrus,  Jielleborus, 
nunis,  dpipdrus,  ovlpdrus,  pihosphorus,  pirus,  sdtyrus,  scdrus,  spdrus,  tartdi'us, 
tdrus,  zephyrus ;  amphdra,  ancdra,  cUhdra,  hdra,  lyra,  m^ra,  purpura,  phxlyra, 
pyra,  sdtira ;  fdrum,  gdrum,  pdrum,  suppdrum. 

23.  Adjectives  in  osus  lengthen  the  penult ;  as, 

fuviosus,  vlnosus. 

24.  Nouns  in  etas  and  itas  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 
pietas,  clvttas,  b^nUas. 

25.  Adverbs  in  iim  lengthen  the  penult,  those  in  iter  and  itus 
shorten  it ;  as, 

stdtim,  {constantly),  vtntim,  tnbutim ;  acriter,  funditus.  Except  sidii'm,  (im- 
mediately), cffdtim. 

26.  (a.)  Words  in  ates,  itis,  otis,  and  in  ata,  eta,  ota,  uta,  lengthen 
the  penu.lt,  as, 

vdtes,  pendtes,  vitis,  mUls,  cdryotis,  Icdriotis,  pirdta,  meta,  poeta,  alMa,  cicuia. 
Except  sUis,  pdtis,  drdpeta,  nota,  rdta. 

(b.)  Nouns  in  ita  shorten  the  penult ;  as, 
dmita,  ndvita,  orbita,  semita.     Except  pltulta. 

27.  Nouns  in  aiwm,  lYwm,  wiwm,  lengthen  the  penult ;  as,  * 

lupdtum,  dcdnltum,  verutum.  Except  defi'utum,  pulpitum,  pSiorttum,  lutum 
(mud),  compltum. 

28.  Nouns  and  adjectives  ending  in  tus  lengthen  the  penult;  as, 

barbdius,  grdtus,  boletus,  fdceius,  crlnitus,  perltus,  csgrotus,  totus,  arguius,  hir- 
iutus.  Except  cdtus,  Idius,  {-h-is),  impetus,  metus,  vegetus,  veius;  dnhelitus,  digi- 
tus, grdt'dias,  hdlitus,  hospltus,  servUus,  splritus;  antidotus,  ndtus,  qudtus,  totus 
(so  great);  arbutus,  putus;  indytus;  and  derivatives  from  perfect  participles 
having  a  short  penult;  as,  exercitus,  habitus. 

29.  A  penultimate  vowel  before  v  is  long;  as, 

.  cldva,  dliva,  dives,  ndvis,  clvis,  pdpdver,  pdvo,  privo,  ovum,  prdvus,  uisiivus, 
fugiiivis.  Except  avis,  brevis,  gravis,  Uvis,  dvis ;  cdvo,  grdvo,  jiivo,  Idvo,  levo^ 
ivo ;  dvus,  cdvus,  fdvus,  ndvus,  fdvor,  pdvor,  ndvem. 


834  PROSODY. QUANTITY ANTEPENULTS.       §  292,  293. 

30.  Words  ending  in  deXj  dix,  mex,  nix,  lex,  rex,  lengthen  the 
^enult;  as, 

codex,  judex;  lodix,  radix;  cimex,  pumex;  junix;  ilex;  car  ex,  murex. 
Except  citlex,  dkx,  rumex. 

II.  ANTEPENULTS 

§  ^03*  1.  /  is  short  in  diminutives  in  iculus  and  iceUus  (a,  urn), 
whether  nouns  or  adjectives;  as, 

colliculus,  dulciculus,  crdiicula,  pellicula,  moUiceUus.  Except  words  in  which 
the  preceding  voAvel  is  short;  as,  cuticiUa,  cdnicula:  or  in  which  i  is  long  in  the 
primitive ;  as,  cornicula,  from  comix,  -ids. 

2-  Numerals  in  ginti^  ginia^  eni,  and  esimus,  lengthen  the  antepe- 
nult; as, 
Tiginti,  quddrdginta,  triceni,  quinguagesimus. 

3.  0  and  u  before  final  lentus  are  short;  as, 
tindleiUus,  /raudukntm,  2>'<^i'^rulentiis,  ttHculentus. 

4.  A  vowel  before  final  nea,  neo,  nia,  nio,  nius,  nium,  is  long ;  as, 
ardnea,  linea,  cdneo,  mania,  punio,  Fdvonius,  patrimdnium.     Except  castdiiea, 

finea,  mdneo,  nuneo,  inoneo,  seneo,  Unext,  ignominia,  luscinia,  venia,  Idnio,  venio, 
ingc.nium,  genius,  senio,  senium ;  words  in  vinium,  as,  lenoclnium ;  and  deriva- 
tives in  onius,  when  o  in  the  root  of  the  primitive  is  short;  as,  Agdmemndnivs, 
from  Agdinemnon,  -onis. 

5.  Words  ending  in  areo,  arius,  arium,  erium,  onus,  orium,  lengthen 
the  antepenult;  as, 

dreo,  czbdrius,  planidrium,  dicterium,  censorius,  tenidrium.  Except  cdreo,  vd- 
rius,  desiilerium,  imperium,  mdgi&tenum,  minisieriavi. 

6.  Adjectives  in  a'acus,  alXlis,  lengthen  the  antepenult;  as, 
dqudticus,  plumdtllis.     Except  some  Gi-eek  words  in  dUcm ;  as,  granumUctis 

7.  /  before  final  tudo  is  short ;  as, 
aUitado,  longiiudo. 

8.  Verbals  in  bilis  lengihen  a  but  shorten  i  in  the  antepenult ;  as, 
amdbilis,  tnirdbilis ;  credibills,  terrtbiUs.    In  lidbilis,  b  belongs  to  the  root. 

9.  U  before  v  is  short,  (except  in  JUverna) ;  as, 
juverus,  juvendUs,  juveniUtas,  fiuvivs,  diluvium. 

III.  PENULT  OF  PROPER  NAMES. 

§  S03.  1.  Patrials  and  proper  names  of  more  than  two  sylla- 
bles, found  in  the  poets  with  the  following  terminations,  shorten  the 
penult : — 


ba. 

de, 

0,6 

ges, 
les. 

du?,i3 

ena,i9 

arus. 

atus,5a 

ca  ,1 

le,4 

on,7 

eus,i* 

anes. 

erus,2i 

itus,-» 

W 

pe,5 

0S,8 

lis,io 

gus,i5 

enes, 

yrus. 

otus.2* 

be, 

re, 

er,9 

bus, 

fus,i6 

aris, 

asus. 

ce,3 

al. 

mas, 

cus,ii 

mu«.i'' 

yris, 

osus. 

Che, 

il. 

ras, 

chU8,13 

phub,is 

Lis,»  • 

usus. 

§  293.  PROSODY. QUANTITY PENULTS.  836 

Exceptions. 

iMarica,  Naslca.— 2ErIphyla,  Messala,  Philomela,  Suadela.— SBerenTcc— 
*Enphy]e,  Neobule,  Perimele.— ^Europe,  Sfiiope.— eCavthago,  Cupfivo,  Ciipido, 
Ongo,  Thefino. — ^Alemon,  Anthedoit,  ChalcGdon,  lason,  Philemon,  Pr.lype- 
mon,  Sarpedon,  Thermodon. — 8Cercyros,  Peparethos,  Pharsalos,  SC-nphos. — 
SMt'leager.— lOBessalis,  Eumelis,  Jfiveualis,  Martialis,  Phaselis,  StN'mpiirUis. — 
liBenacus,  Caiciis,  Granicus,  Numicus,  Trlvicus. — i^Ophiuchus. — l^Abvdus. — 
l^Caphareus,  Enipeus,  Prometheus,  Phoroneus,  Salmoneus,  Oileus. — i^Cethe- 

g:is. — ^^Names  in  -clus,  in  -olus  {except  iEolus,  Naubolus),  in  -bulus,  {except 
ibulus)  Eumelus,  Gastulus,  lulus,  Massylus,  Orbelus,  Pharsalus,  Sardanapa- 
lus,  Stymphalus. — ^"^ Some  in  -demus  and  -phemus;  as,  Academus,  Polyphe- 
tnus. — ^sSerlphus. — ^SAlcmena,  Athene,  Camena,  Fidena,  Messena,  Miirena, 
Mycense. — ^o^masis. — 2iiJ6merus.  Iberus. — 22Aratus,  Cseratus,  Torquatus. — 
23Heraclitus,  Hermaphroditus. — 24Buthrotus. 

2.  Proper  names  of  more  than  two  syllables,  found  in  the  poets 
with  the  following  terminations,  lengthen  the  penult : — 


ana,i 
ina,2 

sa, 

num,7 

tas, 

nus,i2 

urus, 

etus,i6 

ta;4 

tum, 

des,9 

pus,i3 

esus,i5 

utus, 

ona,3 

tse,5 

or,8 

tes,io 

irus. 

isus, 

ytus,i7 

yna, 

ene,6 

nas, 

tis,ii 

orus,i4 

ysus, 

vus. 

Exceptions. 

^Sequana. — ^Miitina,  Proserpina,  Kuspina,  Sarsina. — ^Axona,  Matrona.- 
4Dalmata,  Prochyta,  Sarmata,  Lapitha. — 5G.\latffi,  Jaxiimetse,  Massagetse, 
Macetae,  Sauromata». — ^ciymene,  Helene,  Melpomene,  Nyctlmene. — "'Ariml- 
num,  Drepanum. — Sj^^mitor. — ^Miltiades,  Pylades,  Sotades,  Thucydldes ;  pOr- 
tronymics  m  -des,  (§  291,  A,)  and  plurals  in  -ades. — ^"Antiphates,  Charites,  Eu- 
rybates,  Ichnobates,  Euergetes,  Massagetes,  and  all  names  in  -crates. — I'Der- 
cetis. — i^Apidanus,  Aponus,  Ciiranus,  Chrysogonus,  Ciminus,  Clymenus,  Con- 
canus,  Dardanus,  Diadumenus,  Earinus,  Eridanus,  Fuclnus,  Helenus,  Libanus, 
Morini,  Myconus,  Nebrophonus,  Oleiius,  Periclymenus,  Rhodanus,  Santonus, 
Sequani,  Stephanus,  Telegonus,  Terminus,  and  names  in  -gonus  aiid  -xenus. — 
i^Qidipus. — ^^Pacorus,  Bosporus,  and  names  in  -chorus  ana  -phorus;  as,  Stesl- 
chorus.  Phosphorus. — ^^^Ephesus,  Vogesus,  V^olesus. — ^^lapetus,  Taygetus, 
Venetus.-=— I'^^py'tus,  Anytus,  Eurytus,  Hippolytus. 

3.  The  penultimate  vowel  of  the  following  proper  names,  and  ad- 
jectives derived  from  proper  names,  though  followed  by  a  vowel,  is 
long.     See  §  283, 1.  Exc.  6. 

iEneas,  iEthlon,  Achelous,  Achilleus,  Alcyoneus,  Alexandria,  Aloeus,  Al- 
pheus,  Amlneus,  Amphiaraus,  Amphlgenla,  Amphion,  Amythaon,  Arion,  An- 
chlseus,  Atlanteus,  Antiochia,  Bioneus,  Ctiesarea,  Calaurea,  Calliopea,  Cassio- 
pea,  Cleantheas,  Cydoneus,  Cymodocea,  Cytherea,  Darius  (-eus),  DeUh'imia, 
Didymaon,  Diomedeus,  Dollchaon,  Echlon,  Eleus,  Endymioneus,  Enyo,  P^uus, 
Erebeus,  Erectheus,  Galatea,  Giganteiis,  Heraclea  (-ous),  Hippodamla,  Hype- 
rion, Illthyla,  Imaon,  lolaus,  Iphigenia,  Ixlon,  Laodamla,  Latous,  Lesbous, 
Lycaon,  Machaon,  Mausoleum,  Medea,  Menelau?-,  ilethlon,  Myrtous,  Oi)hlon, 
Orion,  Orlthyla,  Orpheus,  Pallanteum  (-us),  Pandion,  Paphagea,  Peneus,  Pen- 
thesllea,  Phoebeus,  Poppea,  Protesiiaus,  Pyreneus,  ISardCus,  Thalia. 

Note.  Eus  in  the  termination  of  Greek  proper  names,  is  commonly  a  diph- 
thong; 'AS,  Alceus,  Qeneus,  Orpheus,  Peleus,  Pei'seus,  Proteus,  Theseus,  Tydeus, 
which  are  dissyllables;  Bridreus,  Empheus,  Macdreus,  Typhoeus,  Avhich  are  tri- 
syllables, Jdomeneus,  etc.  Of.  §  283,  Exc.  6,  Note  2.  But  in  those  Avliich  in 
Greek  are  written  «of  (etos),  CMS  forms  two  syllables;  as,  Aljjheils.  So  also  in 
adjectives  in  eus,  whether  of  Greek  or  Latin  origin;  as,  Er^deiis,  ErectheVt^ 
OrjpkSm ;  auHus,  liffniUs. 


33G       PROSODY. QUANTITY  OF  FINAL  SYLLABLES.     §  294,  295 

QUANTITY    OF    FINAL     SYLLABLES. 
I.    VOWELS. 

MOXOSYLf.ABLES. 

§  294L,  (a.)  All  monosyllables,  except  enclitics,  ending  in  a 
vowel,  are  long ;  as, 

a  J  ah,  da,  std,  e,  de,  me,  te,  se,  ne,  re,  i,  fl,  hi,  qui,  ni,  si,  0  or  6li,  do,  pr6, 
proh,  quo,  sWf  tu. 

*  ,  POLYSYLLABLES. 

A  Jlnal. 

1.  A  final,  in  words  declined,  is  short ;  as,  musd,  templa,  cajn- 
tdj  Tyded.  '  Thus, 

Musa  mihi  causas  memora;  quo  numine  laeso....  Vtrg.  A.  1,  8. 

Exc.   A  final  is  long  in  the  ablative  of  the  first  declension,  and  in 
the  vocative  of  Greek  nouns  in  as  and  es  ;  as, 
Musd,  fundd ;  0  jEnea,  0  Palld,  0  Anchisd. 

2.  A  final,  in  words  not  declined,  is  long;  as,  dmd,  frustrd, 
anted,  ergd,  intra.     Thus, 

Extra  fortSnam  est  quidquid  dSnatur  SLmlcis.  Ulart.  Epig.  5,  42,  7. 

Exc.  A  final  is  short  in  eia,  ita,  quid,  and  in  putd,  when  used  adverbially, 
in  the  sense  of  'for  example.'  It  is  sometimes  short. in  the  preposition  cotitra, 
and  in  numerals  ending  in  ginta ;  as,  triginta,  etc.    In  postea,  it  is  common. 

A  final  is  also  short  in  the  names  of  Greek  letters;  as,  alpha,  be0,  etc.,  and 
in  tdraiantard,  the  imitated  sound  of  the  trumpet. 

E  Jinal. 

§  ^9^.  ^  final,  in  words  of  two  or  more  syllables,  is  short ; 
BS,  ndte,  patre,  ipse,  curre,  regere,  nempe,  ante.     Thus, 

Incip^,  parvS  puer,  rlsu  cognosdri  matrem.  Virg.  E.  4,  60. 

B^MARK.  The  enclitics  -que,  -ne,  -ve,  -ce,  -te,  -pte,  etc.,  as  they  are  not  used 
alone,  have  e  short,  according  to  the  rule;  as,  neque,  hujusce,  suapte.  Cf. 
§  294,  (a.) 

Exc.  1.  E  final  is  long  in  nouns  of  the  first  and  fifth  declensions; 
as, 

Calliope,  Tydide,  fide.  So  also  in  the  compounds  of  re  and  die ;  as,  qudre, 
hddie^  pridie,  postridie,  qudildie,  and  in  the  ablative  fame,  originally  of  the  fifth 
declension. 

Exc.  2.  j&  final  is  long  in  Greek  vocatives  irom  nouns  in  -€s,  of  the  third 
declension ;  as,  AcliUle,  Hippomene ;  and  in  Greek  neuters  plural ;  as,  cete,  mile, 
pelage,  Tempe. 

Exc.  3.  In  the  second  conjugation,  e  final  is  long  in  the  second 
person  singjular  of  the  imperative  active;  as,  dSciy  mone  ; — but  it  is 
sometimes  short  in  cave,  volt    ^nd  vide. 


§  296-298.    PROSODY. — quantity  of  final  syllables.    837 

Exc.  4.  E  final  is  long  in  adverbs  forar-ed  from  adjectives  of  the 
second  declension ;  as, 

pldcide,  pulclire,  voids  for  vdUde,  maxlme ;  but  it  is  short  in  6ene,  mdU,  infernSj 
and  superne. 

Exc.  5.  Fere^  ferme^  and  o^e',  have  the  final  e  long. 

I  final, 

§300*  /final  is  long;  as,  dommi,  fili,  classi,  doceri,  si. 
Thus, 

Qtiid  dSminl  f&cient,  audent  cum  (alia  fGres.  Virg.  E.  3, 16. 

Exc.  1.   (a.)  /final  is  common  in  mihi,  tibi,  sibi,  ibi,  and  iihi. 

[b.)  In  abique  and  commonly  in  ibidem  it  is  long,  but  in  ubivis  and  ubinam  it 
is  short. — (c.)  In  w?si,  qmsi,  and  c«e,  when  a  dissyllable,  i  final  is  common, 
but  usually  short.    In  utlnam  and  utique,  and  rarely,  also,  in  iti,  it  is  short. 

Exc.  2.  /final  is  short  in  the  dative  singular  of  Greek  nouns  of  the  third  de- 
clension, which  increase  in  the  genitive ;  as,  Pallddl,  Mlnotdi,  Tethyi. 

Exc.  3.  /  final  is  short  in  the  vocative  of  Greek  nouns  in  -Is ;  as,  AleaA^ 
Daphni,  Pari.  But  it  is  long  in  vocatives  from  Greek  nouns  in  -is,  [m)  -entos ; 
as,  Simdl,  Pyrdl. 

Exc.  4.  /final  is  short  in  Greek  datives  and  ablatives  plural  in  -d,  or,  be- 
fore a  vowel,  -sin ;  as,  Drydsl,  herolsi,  Troddn. 

O  fined, 

§  397.  0  final,  in  words  of  two  or  more  syllables,  is  com- 
mon ;  as,  virgo,  dmo,  quandS.     Thus, 

ErgS  metu  capita  Scylla  est  inimlca  pSLtemo.   Virg,  Cir.  386. 
Ergo  soUicitae  tu  causa,  pecunia,  vitaB  es  !  Prop.  8,  6, 1. 

Exc.  1.  0  final  is  long  in  the  dative  and  ablative  singular;  as,  ddmino,  regndf 
bono,  sud,  Hid,  eo. 

Exc.  2.  0  final  is  long  in  ablatives  used  as  adverbs ;  as,  certo,  /also,  mSrild, 
vulgo,  eOj  quo ;  and  also  in  omnino,  in  ergo, '  for  the  sake  of,'  and  in  the  inter- 
jection Id. 

Eemark  1.  The  final  o  of  verbs  is  almost  always  long  in  poets  of  the  Augus- 
tan age. 

Rem.  2.  In  poets  subsequent  to  the  Au^stan  age,  final  o  in  verbs,  in  ge- 
runds, and  in  the  adverbs  ddeo,  idea,  ergo,  sera,  vero,  porro,  retro,  immo,  iddrco^ 
subiio,  and  postremo,  is  sometimes  short. 

Exc.  3.  0  final  is  short  in  cito,  illico,  prdfecto,  and  the  compounds  of  mddo ; 
AS,  dummddd,  postmddd,  etc,  and  in  ego  and  hdmo  it  is  more  frequently  short 
than  long. 

Exc.  4.  0  final  in  Greek  nouns  written  with  an  om6ga  (»)  is  long;  as,  Cfi5, 
Dldd,  Atlio,  and  Andrdged,  (gen.) 

V  final, 

§  298.  1.  f^ final  is  long;  as,  vultu,  comu,  Panthu,  dictu, 
diu.     Thus, 

Vulta,  quo  ooelum  tempestatesque  ggrgnat.    Virg.  A.  1,  266. 


838  PROSODY.— QUANTITY  OF  FINAL  SYLLABLES.         §  299. 

Exc.  Indu  and  n^nfi,  ancient  forms  of  in  and  nony  have  t*  short  U  is  also 
short  in  terminations  in  us  short,  when  s  is  removed  by  elision;  as,  contents' ^ 
for  co)dentus.   See  §  305,  2. 

2.    T  final  is  short ;  as,  3/d/y,  ^zpAy.     Thus, 

AB/y  vocant  superi :  nigra  radlce  tenStur.   Ofirf,  M.  14,  292. 
Exc.    Y  in  the  dative  Teihy,  being  formed  by  contraction,  is  long.  §  283,  IlL 

IL    CONSONANTS. 

MONOSYLLABLES. 

§  999  1.  Monosyllabic  substantives  ending  in  a  consonant 
are  long;  all  other  monosyllables  ending  in  a  consonant  are 
short;  as, 

sol,  rlr,  fur,  jus,  splen,  ver,  far,  Idr,  Ndr,  par,  Ser,  fur,  fas,  mas,  res,  pea, 
Dls,  f/lls,  lis,  viS,  Jids,  mos,  ros,  Tros,  os,  {oris),  dos,  gruSj  rus,  tus ; — nee,  In,  an,  ab, 
ad,  quid,  (pLis,  quot,  et;  as, 

Ipse  docet  quid  5gam.    Fas  est  ?f  ab  hoste  doceri.  Ovid.  M.  4,  428. 
Ver  adeo  frondi  neinonim,  ver  utile  silvis.    Virg.  G.  2,  323. 

Note.  The  rules  for  the  quantity  of  final  syllables  ending  in  a  consonant 
imply  that  tlie  consonant  is  single,  and  that  it  is  preceded  by  a  single  voweL 
If  otherwise  the  syllable  will  be  long  by  ^  283,  IV.  and  II. 

Exc.  1.  Cdr,  fel,  mel,  p6l,  rir,  ds  (gen.  ossis),  and  probably  ros  (vddis),  are 
short. 

Exc.  2.  En,  non,  quin,  sin,  eras,  plus,  cur,  and  par,  are  long:  so  also  are 
particles  and  pronouns  ending  in  c,  except  nee,  which  is  short,  and  the  pro- 
nouns hie  and  hoc,  in  the  nominative  and  accusative,  which  are  common. 

Exc.  3.  Monosyllabic  plural  cases  of  pi'onouns  and  forms  of  verbs  in  as,  e», 
and  ?5,  are  long;  as,  has,  quas,  hos,  nos,  ros,  guoSj  his,  gias ; — das,  Jles,  stes,  it, 
fis,  s'ls,  ViS ;  except  es  from  sum  which  is  short. 

Exc.  4.  The  abridged  imperatives  retain  the  quantity  of  their  root;  as,  dU\ 
due,  from  dice,  duco;  fdc,  fir,  from  facia,  fero. 

POLYSYLLABLES. 

D,  L,  N,  R,  T,  final 

2.  Final  syllables  ending  in.  d,  I,  n,  r,  and  <,  are  short ;  as, 
iUud,  consul,  carmen,  pater,  caput         Thus, 

Obstupuit  slmul  ipse.  &imul  perculsus  Achates.    Virg.  A.  1,  513. 

NomSn  Arlonium  STculas  implevdrat  nrbes.   Ovid.  F.  2,  93. 

Dum  loquor.,  Iiorror,  habet;  parsque  est  meniinisse  doldris.  Id.  M.  9,  29L 

Exc.  1.   E  in  lien  is  long. 

Exc.  2.  In  Greek  nouns,  nominatives  in  n  (except  those  in  on, 
"written  with  an  omicron),  masculine  or  feminine  accusatives  in  an  or 
en,  and  genitives  plural  in  on,  lengthen  the  final  syllable ;  as, 

TUSn,  QriOn,  jEnldn,  Anchitin,  CaUidpin ;  iptgrammdm. 


§300.  PROSODY. — QUANTITY  OP  PINAL  SYLLABLES.  839 

Exc.  3.  Aer,  cether,  and  nouns  in  er  which  form  their  genitive  in 
cm,  lengthen  the  final  syllable ;  as, 

cratei',  soter.  So  also  Jher;  but  the  compound  Celtiber  has  soraetimes  m 
Martial  its  last  syllable  short. 

Kemakic.  a  final  syllable  ending  in  t,  may  be  rendered  long  bj'  a  diphthong, 
by  contraction,  by  syncopation,  or  by  position;  as,  aid,  obit  for  dbiit,  fumdt, 
for  fumavit,  amant.    See  \  283,  II.  III.  I\^,  and  \  162,  7,  {d.) 

*  ^       .  M  final. 

Note.  Final  m  with  the  preceding  vowel  is  almost  always  cut  oflF,  when 
the  next  word  licgins  with  a  vowel.   See  Ecthlipsis,  ^  305,  2. 

3.  Final  syllables  ending  in  m,  when  it  is  not  cut  off,  are  short; 
as, 

Quam  laudas,  pluma?  cocto  num  Sldest  hSnor  idem.  Hor.  S.  2,  2,  28. 

Remark.  Hence  in  composition  the  final  syllables  of  cum  and  circum  are 
short;  as,  cdmedo,  circumdgo. 

C  filial, 

4.  Final  syllables  ending  in  c  are  long ;  as,  alec,  illic,  istdc, 
iUuc.     Thus, 

lUlc  indocto  prlmum  se  exercuit  arcu.  Tib.  2, 1,  69. 
Exc.   The  final  syllable  of  donee  is  short ;  as, 

BQnic  eris  felix,  multos  numerabis  amicos.  Ovid.  Trist.  1,  9,  5. 

AS,  ES,  and  OS,  final. 

§  300.     Final  syllables  in  as,  es,  and  os,  are  long ;  as, 

masas,  pleids,  dmds^  JEneds,  quies,  sermones,  dies,  Feneldpes,  d&ceniles,  mdnes, 
hdnos,  vivos,  domiuos.     Thus, 

Has  autem  terr&s,  Itallqiie  banc  lltoris  oram.   Virg.  A.  3,  396. 
Si  modo  lies  illis  cultus,  stmilesque  paratus.   Ovid.  M.  6,  454. 

Exc.  1.  (a.)  AS.  As  is  short  in  anas,  in  Greek  nouns  whose  genitive  ends 
in  ddis  or  ados;  as,  Areas,  Pallas;  and  in  Greek  accusatives  plural  of  the  third 
declension ;  as,  herods,  lanqyddds. 

(b.)  As  is  short  also  in  Latin  nouns  in  as,  ados,  fonned  like  Greek  patronym- 
ics; as,  A2)j)ids. 

Exc.  2.  ES.  (a.)  Final  es  is  short  in  nouns  and  adjectives  of  the 
third  declension  which  increase  short  in  the  genitive;  as,  hospes, 
llinen,  hebes  ;  gen.  Itoapiiis,  etc. 

(b.)  But  it  is  long  in  dii'es,  dries,  paiHes,  Ceres,  ahd^es,  with  its  compounds 
cornip^s,  sonipes,  etc. 

(c.)  As,  in  the  present  tense  of  sum  and  its  compounds,  and  in  the  preposi- 
tion penes,  is  short. 

((/.)  Es  is  short  in  Greek  neuters  in  es;  as,  cacoethes,  and  in  Greek  nomina- 
tives and  vocatives  plural  from  nouns  of  the  third  declension,  whicli  increase 
in  the  genitive;  as.  Arcades,  Tides,  Amazdnes;  from  Areas,  Arcddis,  etc. 

Exc.  3.  OS.  (a.)  Os  is  short  in  compds,  impds,  and  6s  (ossis),  with  its  com- 
pound 6x6$. 


840  PROSODY. QUANTITY  OF  FINAL  SYLLABLES.  §  301. 

(b.)  Os  is  short  in  Greek  nouns  and  cases  written  in  the  original  with  omi- 
cron;  as(l)  in  all  neuters;  as,  chads,  epds,  Arg6s;  (2)  in  all  nouns  of  the  second 
declension ;  as,  Ilios,  Tyrds,  Delds ;  except  those  whose  genitive  is  in  o,  ( Greek 
a);  as,  Athos,  gen.  Aiho ;  (3)  in  genitives  singular  of  the  third  declension;  as, 
Pallddds^  Teihyds,  from  PalMs  and  Teihys. 

IS,  US,  and  YS,  final. 
§  301.     Final  syllables  in  w,  us,  and  ys,  are  short ;  as, 

turris,  mllUis,  mlUs,  amdUs,  amabi$,  viagis ;  pectus,  bdnus,  ejus,  dmdmus,  rurs&s, 
Unas;  Cqpys,  liys.    Thus, 

Non  apis  inde  tulit  collectos  sedula  flores.  Ovid.  M.  13,  928. 
SSriiis  aut  citius  sedem  prSpSramus  ad  unatn.  Id,  M.  10,  33. 
At  Cdpys,  et  quorum  melior  sententia  menti.    Virg.  A.  2,  35. 

Exc.  1.  IS.  (a.)  Is  is  long  in  plural  cases;  as, 

musls,  nobis ;  omnls,  urbis,  {for  omnes,  urbes);  quls,  (for  quels  or  gulbus).  So 
also  in  the  adverbs  gratis,  ingrdtls,  and  f6ris,  which  are  in  reality  datives  or 
ablatives  plural.  ' 

Et  ITquidi  simul  ignis;  ut  his  exordia  prlmia.   Virg.  A.  6,  33. 

Quis  ante  5ra  patrum  Trojae  sub  mcenlbus  altis.  Id.  A.  1,  95. 

Non  omnis  arbusta  juvant,  humilesque  myrlcae.  Id.  E.  4,  2. 

Adde  tot  egregias  urbls,  operumque  laborem.  Id.  G.  2, 155. 

(b.)  Is  is  long  in  the  nominative  of  nouns  whose  genitive  ends  in  His,  Inis,  or 
entis;  as,  Samnis,  Sdldinis,  Simols. 

(c.)  Is  is  long  in  the  second  person  singular  of  the  present  indica- 
tive active  of  the  fourth  conjugation ;  as, 

audls,  nescts.  So  also  in  the  second  persons,  fls,  is,  sis,  vis,  vilis,  and  their 
compounds;  as,  adsls,  possls,  quamvis,  mdlis,  noils,  etc.   Cf.  §  299,  1,  Exc.  3. 

{d.)  Eis,  in  the  future  perfect  and  perfect  subjunctive,  is  common;  as, 
videris. 

Exc.  2.  US.  (a.)  Us  is  long  in  nouns  of  the  third  declension  which 
increase  long,  and  in  the  genitive  singular,  and  the  nominative,  ac- 
cusative, and  vocative  plural  of  the  fourth  declension,  {§  89,  Hem., 
and  §  283,  UT.)  ;  as, 

tdlas,  xdrtus,  incus  ;—frucius.  But  palus,  with  the  us  short,  occurs  in  Horace, 
Art.  Poet,  65. 

(6.)  Us  is  long  in  Greek  nouns  written  in  the  original  with  the  diphthong  ou» 
(owf )whether  in  the  nominative  or  genitive ;  as,  nom.  Amdihus,  OpOs,  (Edijnis, 
trtpus,  PanthUs;  gen.  DldUs,  Sapphus.  But  compounds  of  pus  {Troiig),  when  of 
the  second  declension,  have  us  short;  SiS, polypus. 

Note.  The  last  syllable  of  every  verse,  (except  the  anapasstic  and 
the  Ionic  a  minor e),  maj^  be  either  long  or  short  at  the  option  of  the 
poet. 

Remark.  By  this  is  meant,  that,  although  the  measure  require  a  long  syl- 
lable, a  short  one  may  be  used  in  its  stead ;  and  a  long  syllable  may  be  used 
where  a  short  one  is  required ;  as  in  the  following  verses,  where  the  short  syl- 
lable ma  stands  instead  of  a  long  one,  and  the  long  syllable  cu  instead  of  a 
short  one: — 

Sanguineaque  minu  crepitantia  concutit.  armd.  Ovid.  M.  1, 14S. 

Non  §get  Mauri  ^cullg,  nee  arcfi.  Hor.  Od.  1,  22,  2. 


§  802.  PROSODY. ^VERSIFICATION FEET.  &41 

VERSIFICATION. 

FEET. 

1 
§  SOS.    A  foot  is  a  combination  of  two  or  more  syllables  of 
a  certain  quantity. 

Feet  are  either  simple  or  compound.  Simple  feet  consist  of  two 
or  three  syllables ;  compound  feet  of  four. 

I.    SIMPLE    FEET. 
1.    Of  two  Syllables. 

^ondee, two  long, ;  as, .fundunL 

Pyrrhic, two  short,  w  w ;  as, Beus. 

Trochee,  or  choree, a  long  and  a  short,  —  ^ ;  as, dr-vict. 

Iambus, a  short  and  a  long,  ^^  — ;  as, .erdtU. 

2.    Of  three  Syllables. 

Dactyl a  long  and  two  short,  —  w  w;  as, cdrpdrd. 

AnapcesL..., two  short  and  a  long,  v-^  v_^  — ;  as, ddmtni. 

Tribrach, three  short,  www;  as, jacdrS. 

Molosstcs, three  long, ;  as, contendunL 

Amphibrach, a  short,  a  long,  and  a  short,  w  —  w ;  as, .  .dmare. 

Amphimacru8,ox  Q'etic,Si  long,  a  short,  and  a  long,  —  -w  — ;  as,  ,  .cdstiids. 

Bacchlus, a  short  and  two  long,  >-« ;  as, Cdiones. 

AntibaccMus, two  long  and  a  short, ^ ;  as, RomdnUi. 

^11.    COMPOUND    FEET. 

Disporrdee, a  double  spondee, ;  as, c5nflix?.rilnt. 

Procelevsmatic, a  double  Pyrrhic,  ^-^  v-^  ^.^  ^-^ ;  as, hdmlnlhus. 

Ditrochee, a  double  trochee,  —  w  —  w :  as. cdmjjrdbdvit. 

Di'iambus, a  double  iambus,  w  —  w  — ;  as, dmdverdnt. 

Greater  Ionic, a  spondee  and  a  Pyrrhic, --^  ^',  as,. .  .cdrreximiis. 

Smaller  Ionic, a  Pyn-hic  and  a  spondee,  w  >-' ;  as,. .  .prdpernbdnt 

Choriambtis, a  choree  and  an  iambus,  —  -w  .w  — ;  as, . .  .terrficdnt. 

Antispast, an  iambus  and  a  choree,  w w ;  as, . .  .ddhoislsse. 

First  epitrit, an  iambus  and  a  spondee,  ^~^ ■ ;  as, . .  .dmdvcrunt. 

Second  epitrit, a  trochee  and  a  spondee,  —  ^^ ;  as, . .  .conditores. 

Third  epitrit, a  spondee  and  tm  iambus, w  — ;  as,. .  .discdrdids. 

Fourth  epitrit, a  spondee  and  a  trochee, ;•  —  w;  as,. .  .ddduxistis. 

First  pcemi, a  trochee  and  a  Pyrrhic,  —  www;  as, . .  .tempdribus. 

Second  pceon, an  iambus  and  a  Pyrrhic,  w  —  ^-^  ^ ;  as, . .  .pdtenttd. 

Third  pc^on, .a  Pyrrhic  and  a  trochee,    —  w  —  s-, ;  as, . .  .dnfmdtiis. 

Fourth  pceon, a  Pyrrhic  and  an  iambus,  www  — ;  as,. .  .celeiitds. 

Remark.  Those  feet  are  called  isocnronous,  which  consist  of  equal  times, 
as  the  spondee,  the  dactyl,  the  anapaest,  and  the  proceleusmatic,  one  long  time 
being  considered  equal  to  two  short 

•  29* 


34^  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION — METRE — ^VERSES.   §303,304. 

METRE. 

§  303.  1.  Metre  is  an  arrangement  of  syllables  and  feet 
according  to  certain  rules. 

2.  In  this  general  sense,  it  comprehends  either  an  entire  verse,  a  part  of  a 
verse,  or  any  number  of  verses. 

3.  Metre  is  divided  into  dactylic,  anapcBStic,  iambic,  trochaic,  chori 
amhic,  and  Ionic.  These  names  are  derived  from  the  origiaal  oi 
fundamental  foot  employed  in  each. 

4.  A  metre  or  measure,  in  a  specific  sense,  is  either  a  single  foot 
or  a  combination  of  two  feet  In  the  dactylic,  choriambic,  and  Ionic 
metres,  a  measure  consists  of  one  foot ;  in  the  other  metres,  of  two 
feet     Two  feet  constituting  a  measure  are  sometimes  called  a  syzygy 

VERSES. 

§  304:*     A  verse  is  a  certain  number  of  feet,  arranged  in  a 
regular  order,  and  constituting  a  line  of  poetry. 
-  1.   Two  verses  are  called  a  distich ;  a  half  verse,  a  hemistich^ 

2.  Verses  are  of  different  kinds,  denominated  sometimes,  like  the 
different  species  of  metre,  fix)m  the  foot  which  chiefly  predominates 
in  them  ;  as,  dactylic,  iamhic,  etc. ; — sometimes  from  the  niunber  of 
feet  or  metres  which  they  contain ;  as,  senarius,  consisting  of  six  feet ; 
?ctonarius,  of  eight  feet ;  monometer,  consisting  of  one  measure ;  dime- 
ter, of  two  ;  trimeter,  tetrameter,  pentameter,  hexameter ; — sometimes 
from  a  celebrated  author  who  used  a  particular  species ;  as,  Sapphic, 
Anacreontic,  Alcaic,  Asclepiadic,  Glyconic,  Phalcecian,  Sotadic,  Archi- 
lochian,  Alcmanian,  Pherecratic,  Aristophanic,  etc.,  from  Sappho,  Ana- 
creon,  Alcceus,  Asclepiddes,  Glycon,  Phalcecus,  Sotddes,  Archilochus, 
Alcman,  Pherecrdies,  Aristophanes,  etc. — and  sometimes  from  the 
particular  uses  to  which  they  were  applied ;  as,  the  prosodiac,  from 
its  use  in  solemn  processions,  the  paroemiac,  from  its  frequent  use  in 
proverbs. 

3.  A  verse,  with  respect  to  the  metres  which  it  contains,  may  be 
complete,  deficient,  or  redundant 

(1.)   A  verse  which  is  complete  is  called  acatalectic. 

(2.)  A  verse  which  is  deficient,  if  it  wants  one  syllable  at  the  end, 
is  called  catalectic  ;  if  it  wants  a  whole  foot  or  half  a  metre,  it  is 
called  hrachycatalectic. 

(3.)  A  verse  which  wants  a  syllable  at  the  beginning,  is  called 
acephaloxis. 

(4.)  A  verse  which  has  a  redundant  syllable  or  foot,  is  called 
Tiypercatalectic  or  hypermeter 

4.  Hence,  the  complete  name  of  ever/  verse  consists  of '  three 
terms — the  first  referring  to  the  species,  the  second  to  the  number  of 

^  metres,  and  the  third  to  tide  ending ;  as,  the  dactylic  trimmer* catalectic. 


§  305.  PROSODY. ^VERSIFICATION FIGURES.  343 

5.  A  verse  or  portion  of  a  verse  of  any  kind  (measured  from  the 
beginning)  which  contains  three  half  feet,  or  a  foot  and  a  half,  is 
called  a  trihemimeris ;  if  it  contains  five  half  feet,  or  two  feet  and  a 
half,  it  is  called  a  pentliemimeris  ;  if  seven  half  feet,  or  three  feet  and 
a  half,  a  hepthemimeris  ;  if  nine  half  feet,  or  four  feet  and  a  half,  an 
enneherriimeris.  A  portion  of  a  verse  consisting  of  one  whole  metre 
and  a  half,  is  called  a  hemiolius,  as  being  the  half  of  a  trimeter. 

Note.  The  respective  situation  of  each  foot  in  a  verse  is  called  its  place. 

6.  Scanning  is  the  dividing  of  a  verse  into  the  feet  of  which  it  is 
composed. 

Kemark.  In  order  to  scan  correctly,  it  is  necessary  to  know  the  quantity 
of  each  syllable,  and  also  to  understand  the  following  poetic  usages,  which  are 
sometimes  called 

FIGUEES  OF  PROSODY. 
SYNALCEPHA. 

§  30^.  1.  Synalcepha  is  the  elision  of  a  final  vowel  or 
diphthong  in  scanning,  when  the  following  word  begins  with  a 
vowel. 

Thus,  terra  antlqua  is  read  terr^  antlqua ;  DarddnidoB  infensi^  Darddnid?  in- 
fensi ;  vento  hue,  venf  hue.    So, 

Quidve  moror?  si  omnes  uno  ordine  Mbetis  Achivos.  Virg.  A.  2, 102. 

Which  is  scanned  thus — 

Quidve  moror?  s'  omnes  un'  ordin'  h&betis  Achivos. 

(1.)    The  interjections  0,  heu^  ah,  proh,  vce,  vaA,  are  not  elided ; 

as, 

O  et  de  Latia,  O  et  de  gente  Sabina.    Ovid.  M.  14,  832. 
Remark.  But  0,  though  not  elided,  is  sometimes  made  short;  as, 
Te  Corydon  O  Alexi;  tiShit  sua  quemque  voluptas.   Virg.  E.  2,  65. 

(2.)   Other  long  vowels  and  diphthongs  sometimes  remain  unelided,  in  which 
case,  when  in  the  thesis  of  a  foot,  they  are  commonly  made  short;  as,. 
Victor  Slpud  lupidum  Simoenta  sub  Hid  alto.   Virg.  A.  5,  261. 
Anni  tempore  eo  qui  Etesics  esse  f  eruntur.  Lucr.  6,  717. 
Ter  sunt  conatl  imponere  Pclio  Ossam.   Virg.  0. 1,  281. 
Glauco  et  PdndpecB,  et  Inoo  Melicertae.  Id.  G.  1,  436. 

(3.)  Rarely  a  short  vowel,  also,  remains  without  elision;  as, 

Et  vera  incessu  patuit  £?eS.    nie  ubimatrem....   7i>g-.  A.  1,  405. 

(4.)   Synalcepha  in  a  monosyllable  occasionally  occurs;  as, 

Si  ad  vitulam  spectas,  nihil  est,  quod  pocula  laudes.  Virg.  E.  3,  48. 

For  synalcepha  at  the  end  of  a  line,  see  Synapheia,  §  307,  3. 

EGTHLIPSIS. 

2.  Ecthlipsis  is  the  elision  of  a  final  m  with  the  preceding 
vowel,  when  the  following  word  begins  with  a  vowel.    Thus, 

0  cflras  hSmlnum,  0  quantum  est  in  rSbus  Ii^ne!  Fers.  1, 1. 


844  PROSODY. — ^VERSIFICATION — FIGURES.  §  306. 

Which  is  thus  scanned — 

0  ciiras  homin'  0  quant'  est  in  rSbns  Inane. 
MonstrwT?!  horrendKOT,  informe,  ingens,  cui  lumen  &dcmpt:im.   Virg.  A.  3,  658. 
(1.)   This  elision  was  sometimes  omitted  by  the  early  poets;  as, 

CorpSriim  officium  est  quoniam  premere  omnia  deorsuci.  Lttcr.  1,  363. 

See  §299,  2 
(2.)  Final  s,  also,  with  the  preceding  vowel,  is  sometimes  elide  1  by  the 
early  poets  before  a  vowel,  and  sometimes  s  alone  before  a  consonant;  as,  con- 
tenV  aique  (Enn.),  for  conientus  atgue;  omntiu'  rebus.  (Lucr.)     So, 
Turn  IdtSralV  dolor,  certissimu'  nunciu'  mortis.  Lucil. 
Remabk.    This  elision  took  place  principally  in  short  syllables. 
For  ecthlipsis  at  the  end  of  a  line,  see  Synqpheia^  §  307,  3. 

SYN^RESIS. 

§  306.     1.    Synaeresis  is  the  contraction  into  one  syllable 
of  two  vowels  which  are  usually  pronounced  separately.   Thus, 

AureS,  percussum  Tirga,  rersumque  TSnSnis.   Virg.  A.  7, 190. 
Eosdem  babuit  s5cum,  qalbus  est  elata,  capillos.  Prop.  4,  7,  7. 
Tityre,  pascentes  a  flumlne  reice  capellas.   Virg.  E.  3,  96. 

Remakk  1.  So  Phaethon  is  pronounced  Phcethon ;  alveo,  alvo;  Orphea, 
Orpha ;  deorsum,  dorsum. 

(1.)  S}Tiajresis  is  frequent  in  u,  ildem^  Usdem,  cUi,  diisj  (fein,  deinceps,  ddndCf 
deest,  deerat,  deero,  deerit,  deesse;  as, 

PrsecTpTtatur  Xquis,  et  S.quis  nox  surgit  ab  isdem.  Ovid.  M.  4,  92. 
Sint  Maecenates;  non  deerunt,  Flacce,  Marones.  Slart.  8,  56,  5. 

Rem.  2.  Cui  and  huic  are  usually  monosyllables. 

(2.)  When  two  vowels  in  compound  words  are  read  as  one  syllable,  the 
former  may  rather  be  considered  as  elided  than  as  united  with  the  latter;  as, 
e  in  anteamhalo,  antetre,  aiitehac,  dehinc,  mehercule,  etc.,  and  a  in  cotitralre. 

(3.)  The  syllable  formed  by  the  union  of  i  or  u  followed  by  another  vowel 
retains  the  quantity  of  the  latter  vowel,  whether  long  or  short;  as,dbiete,  ariete, 
dbieynce,  parieilbiis,  consilium,  JortuUus,  NdsidienuSj  vindemidtor,  omnia ;  genua, 
tenuis,  pltultaj  Jlfiviorum,  etc.  In  such  examples,  the  t  and  «  are  pronounced 
like  initial  y  and  tc;  as,  dbyete,  pdryetibus,  consilyum,  fortwltus,  Ndsldyejius, 
omn-yd,  tenicis,  pitwlta,  etc. ;  and,  like  consonants,  they  have,  with  another 
consonant,  the  power  of  lengthening  a  preceding  short  vowel,  as  in  the  above 
examples. 

Note.  In  Statins,  the  word  tenuiore  occurs  as  a  trisyllable,  in  which  the 
three  vowels,  uio,  are  united  in  pronunciation ;  thus,  ien-wio-re. 

{4.)  Sometimes,  after  a  syualoepha  or  echthlipsis,  two  yowels  suffer  synaere- 
sis; as,  sleUio  et,  pronounced  stell-yet:  consilium  ei, — consil-yet. 

(5.)  If  only  one  of  the  vowels  is  tCT-itten,  the  contraction  is  called  ci'asis;  as, 
(fi,  consUi^  for  cb'i,  consiliL 

DIURESIS. 

2.   DicBresis  is  the  division  of  one  syllable  into  two;  as, 

aiddl,  Trdia,  slliia,  suddent ;  for  avlx,  Troia  or  Troja,  silva,  suddent.  So, 
sii^sco  for  stiesco;  reliqMs  for  reliquus;  ecquts  for  ecguis;  miUius  for  nUlvus,  etc., 
as 


§  807.  PROSODY. VERSIFICATION — FIGURES.  845 

^thereum  sensum,  atque  aurai  simplicis  i^em.   Virg.  A.  6,  747. 
Atque  alios  alii  in-Ident,  Veneremque  suadent.  Lucr.  4, 1153. 
Grammatici  certant ;  et  adhuc  sub  iudice  lis  est.  Hor.  A.  P.  78. 
Aurarum'  et  sUucb  metu.  Id.  0.  1,  23,  4. 

(1.)  So  in  Greek  words  originally  written  with  a  diphthong  (2/or?;);  as, 
dlegeia  for  eleg'ia,  Baccheia  for  Bacchea,  Ehoeteius  for  Bhoeteus,  Fields  for  Pllds, 
And  also  in  words  of  Latin  origin ;  as,  Veins  for  Veins,  Aquileid  for  Aquikid. 

Bemabk.  This  figure  is  sometimes  called  dialysis. 

SYSTOLE. 

§  SOT.  1.  Systole  is  the  shortening  of  a  syllable  which  is 
long  by  nature  or  by  position ;  as, 

vide'n  for  videsne,  in  which  e  is  naturally  long;  sdiVn  for  sdtisne,  in  which  i  is 
long  by  position ; — Jwdie  for  hoc  die ;  muUimddis  for  multls  viddis.     So, 
Ducere  muUtmddis  voces,  et  flectere  cantus.  Lucr.  5, 1405. 

(1.)  By  the  omission  of  j  after  ab,  dd,  db,  sub,  and  rS,  in  compound  words, 
those  prepositions  retain  their  naturally  short  quantity,  which  would  otherwise 
be  made  long  by  position;  as,  dbici,  ddicit,  dbias,  etc.     Thus, 

Si  quid  nostra  tuis  adicit  vexatio  rebus.  Mart.  10,  82, 1. 

Remark.  In  some  compounds  the  short  quantity  of  dd  and  db  is  preserved 
before  a  consonant  by  the  elision  of  the  dorbof  the  preposition,  as  in  dpSiHo^ 
6perio,  dmitto,  etc. 

(2.)  The  penult  of  the  third  person  plural  of  cei-tain  perfects  is  said  by 
some  to  be  shortened  by  systole ;  as,  steterunt,  iulerunt,  etc. ;  but  others  ascribe 
tliese  irregularities  to  the  errors  of  transcribers,  or  the  carelessness  of  writers. 

DIASTOLE. 

2.  Diastole  is  the  lengthening  of  a  syllable  which  is  naturally 
short. 

(1.)  It  occurs  most  frequently  in  proper  names  and  in  compounds  of  re;  as, 
Prldmides,  religio,  etc.    Thus, 

Hanc  tibi  Prl&mtdes  mitto,  Ledaea,  saLlutem.  Ovid.  H,  16, 1. 
Retigione  patrum  multos  servata  per  annos.   Virg.  A.  2,  715. 

(2.)  Some  editors  double  the  consonant  after  the  lengthened  re;  as,  relUglo. 
(3.)   Diastole  is  sometimes  called  ectdsis. 

SYNAPHEIA. 

8.  Synapheia  is  such  a  connection  of  two  consecutive  verses, 
that  the  first  syllable  of  the  .latter  verse  has  an  influence  on  the 
final  syllable  of  that  which  precedes,  either  by  position,  synaloe- 
pha,  or  ecthlipsis.    See  §§  283  and  805. 

(1.)   This  figure  is  most  frequent  in  anapaestic  verse,  and  in  the  Ionic  a 
minore. 
The  following  lines  will  illustrate  its  effect: — 

Prseceps  silvas  montesque  fugU 

Citus  Actaion.  Sen. 

Here  the  i  in  the  final  syllable  of  fugit,  which  is  naturally  short,  is  made  long 
by  position  before  the  following  consonants,  to. 


846        PROSODY. VERSIFICATION ARSIS  AXD  THESIS.      §  308. 

Omnia  Mercario  slmTlis,  Tocemqne  coloremgu* 
Et  crlnes  flavos....  Virg.  A.  4,  558. 
Dissldens  plSbi  numero  beat6r7f7» 
Eximit  virtiis.   Hor.  0.  2,  2, 1§. 

In  the  former  of  these  examples,  synapheia  and  svnaloepha  are  combined,  qtie 
being  elided  before  et  in  tlie  following  line;  in  the  latter  there  is  a  similar 
combination  of  synapheia  and  ecthlipsis. 

(2.)  By  sjmapheia,  the  parts  of  a  compound  word  are  sometimes  divided  be- 
tween two  verses ;  as, 

....  si  nonx)ffenderet  vmtm- 
Quemque  po^tarum  llmae  labor  et  mora...  Hor.  A.  P  290 

(3.)  In  hexameter  verse  a  redundant  syllable  at  the  end  of  a  line  elided  be- 
fore a  vowel  at  the  beginning  of  the  next  line,  by  causing  the  accent  to  fall  on 
the  second  syllable  of  the  concluding  spondee,  and  connecting  th«>  two  verses 
bv  synapheia,  excites  the  expectation  of  something  which  is  to  follow,  and 
oiten  tends  to  magnify  the  object;  as, 

Quos  super-  |  -atrJl  sT-  |  -lex,  jam- I  -jam  lap-  |  -s3r3.  cS-  [  -danti-  |  -que 

Immlnet  asslmllis.    Virg.  A.  6,  602. 

Remark.  The  poets  often  make  use  of  other  figures,  also,  which,  however, 
are  not  peculiar  to  them.  Such  are  prosthesis,  aphceresis,  syncdpe,  epeniMsiSf 
apocdpe,  paragogCj  tmesis,  aniiUiesis,  and  metathdsis.   See  ^  322. 

ARSIS  AND  THESIS. 

§  308.  (1-)  Rhythm  is  the  alternate  elevating  and  depress- 
ing of  the  voice  at  regular  intervals  in  pronouncing  the  syllables 
of  verse. 

(2.)  The  elevation  of  the  voice  is  called  arsis,  its  depression  thesis 
These  terms  designate,  also,  the  parts  of  a  foot  on  which  the  eleva- 
tion or  depression  falls. 

1.  The  natural  arsis  is  on  the  long  syllable  of  a  foot;  and  hence, 
in  a  foot  composed  wholly  of  long,  or  wholly  of  short  syllables,  when 
considered  in  itself,  the  place  of  the  arsis  is  undetermined  ;  but  when 
such  foot  is  substituted  for  the  fundamental  foot  of  a  metre,  its  arsis  is 
determined  by  that  of  the  latter. 

Remark.  Hence,  a  spondee,  in  trochaic  or  dactylic  metre,  has  the  arsis  on 
Uie  first  syllable;  but  in  iambic  or  anapaestic  metre,  it  has  it  on  the  last. 

2.  The  arsis  is  either  equal  in  duration  to  the  thesis,  or  twice  aa 
long. 

Thus,  in  the  dactyl,  —  «-'  ^,  and  anapaest,  ^  >^  — ,  it  is  equal ;  in  the  tro- 
chee, —  ^,  and  iambus,  -^  — ,  it  is  twice  as  long.  This  difiereuce  in  the  pro- 
portionate duration  of  the  arsis  and  thesis  constitutes  the  difference  of  rhythm. 
A  foot  is  said  to  have  the  descending  rhj'thm,  when  its  ai'sis  is  at  the  beginning, 
and  the  ascending,  when  the  thesis  is  at  the  beginning. 

3.  The  stress  of  voice  which  falls  upon  the  arsis  of  a  foot,  is  called 
the  ictus.  When  a  long  syllable  in  the  arsis  of  a  foot  is  resolved  into 
two  short  ones,  the  ictus  falls  upon  the  former. 

Note  1.  Some  suppose  that  the  terms  arsis  and  thesis,  as  used  by  the  an- 
cients, denoted  respectively  the  rising  and  falling  of  the  hand  in  beating  time, 
and  that  the  place  of  the  thesis  was  tixe  syllable  which  received  the  ictns 


§  309,  310.    PROSODY. VERSIFICATIOX DACTYLIC  METRE.  347 

Note  2.  As  the  ancient  pronunciation  of  Latin  is  not  now  understood, 
writers  differ  in  regard  to  the  mode  of  reading  verse.  According  to  some,  the 
accent  of  each  word  should  always  be  preserved;  while  others  direct  that  the 
stress  of  voice  should  be  hiid  on  the  arsis  of  the  foot,  and  tliat  no  regard  should 
be  paid  to  tlie  accent. 

It  is  generally  supposed  that  the  final  lettei's  elided  by  syna](x>pha  and  ecth- 
llpsis,  though  omitted  in  scanning,  were  pronounced  in  reading  verse. 

C^SURA. 

§  300.  CcBSiira  is  the  separation,  by  the  ending  of  a  word, 
of  syllables  rhythmically  or  metrically  connected. 

Caesura  is  of  three  kinds: — 1,  of  the  foot;  2,  of  the  rJiytJim;  and  3, 
of  the  verse. 

1.  Caesura  of  the  foot  occurs  when  a  word  ends  before  a  foot  is 
completed;  as, 

Silves-  I  -trem  tenu-  |  -i  Mu-  |  -sam  medi-  |  -taris  a-  |  -veni.   Virg.  E.  1,  2. 

2.  Caesura  of  the  rhythm  is  the  separation  of  the  arsis  from  the 
thesis  by  the  ending  of  a  word,  as  in  the  second,  third,  and  fourth 
feet  of  the  preceding  verse. 

Eem  1.  It  hence  appears  that  the  caesura  of  the  rhythm  is  always  a  csesura 
of  the  foot,  as  e.  g.  in  the  2d,  3d,  and  4th  feet  of  the  preceding  verse;  but,  on 
the  contrary,  that  the  cfflsura  of  the  foot  is  not  always  a  caesura  of  the  rhythm, 
as  e.  g.  in  the  fifth  foot  of  the  same  verse. 

(1.)  Csesura  of  the  rhythm  allows  a  final  syllable  naturally  short, 
to  stand  in  the  arsis  of  the  foot  instead  of  a  long  one,  it  being  length- 
ened by  the  ictus  ;  as,  . 

Pectori-  I  -bus  inhi-  |  -ans  spi-  |  -rantiSL  |  consullt  |  exta.   Virg,  A.  4,  64. 
This  occurs  chiefly  in  hexameter  verse. 

Eem.  2.  Caesura  of  the  foot  and  of  the  verse  do  not  of  themselves  lengthen  a 
short  syllable,  but  they  often  coincide  with  that  of  the  rhythm. 

3.  Csesura  of  the  verse  is  such  a  division  of  a  line  into  two  parts, 
as  affords  to  the  voice  a  convenient  pause  or  rest,  without  injury  to 
the  sense  or  harmony. 

Rem.  3.  The  csesura  of  the  verse  is  often  called  the  ccesural  pause.  In  sev- 
eral kinds  of  verse,  its  place  is  fixed ;  in  others,  it  may  fall  in  more  than  one 
place,  and  the  choice  is  left  to  the  poet.  Of  the  former  kind  is  the  pentameter, 
of  the  latter  the  hexameter. 

The  proper  place  of  the  csesural  pause  •will  be  treated  of,  bo  far  as  shall  be  necessary, 
tinder  each  species  of  verse. 

Rem.  4.  The  effect  of  the  csesura  is  to  connect  the  different  words  har- 
moniously together,  and  thus  to  give  smoothness,  grace,  and  sweetness,  to  the 

verse. 

DIFFERENt    KINDS    OF    METRE. 

DACTYLIC  METRE. 

§  310.  I.  A  hexameter  or  heroic  verse  consists  of  six  feet 
Of  these  the  fifth  is  a  dactyl,  the  sixth  a  spondee,  and  each  of 
the  other  four  either  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee  ;  as. 


848        PEOSODT. VERSIFICATION — DACTYLIC  METRE.        §  SlO. 

At  tvLiA  I  tSrribI- 1  -Igm  s5ni-  |  -Wm  pr5cul  |  SrS  ci-  |  -nort.  Virg.  A.  9,  508. 
Inton-  I  -si  cri-  \  -nes  Ion-  |  -ga  cer-  |  -vice  flti-  |  ebant.    TSbuU.  3,  4,  27. 
Ludere  |  quS  vel-  |  -lem  call-  |  -mo  pEr-  |  -mislt  i-  I  -gresti.   Virg.  B.  1, 10. 

1.  The  fifth  foot  is  sometimes  a  spondee,  and  the  verse  in  such 
case  is  called  spondaic  ;  as, 

Cara  de-  |  -um.  sobo-  |  -les  mag-  |  -num  Jovis  |  Incpe-  |  -mentum.   Virg.  E.  4,  49. 

Eejiark  1.  In  such  verses,  the  fourth  foot  is  commonly  a  dactj-l,  and  the 
fifth  should  not  close  with  the  end  of  a  word.  Spondaic  lines  are' thought  to 
be  especially  adapted  to  the  expression  of  grave  and  solemn  subjects. 

2.  A  light  and  rapid  movement  is  produced  by  the  frequent  recur- 
rence of  dactyls ;  a  slow  and  heavy  one  by  that  of  spondees ;  as, 

Quadrupe-  |  -dante  pu-  |  -trem  soni-  ]  -tii  quatit  |  unguis.  |  camptun.   Virg.  A.  8,  696. 
lUi  In- 1  -ter  se-  |  -se  mag-  |  -na  vi  |  brachia  toUunt.  Id.  A.  8,  452. 

Rem.  2.  Variety  in  the  use  of  dactyls  and  spondees  in  successive  lines,  haa 
an  agreeable  effect.  Hexameter  verse  commonly  ends  in  a  word  of  two  or 
three  syllables,  and  a  monosyllable  at  the  end  of  a  line  is  generally  ungraceful, 
but  sometimes  produces  a  good  effect;  as, 

Sternitur,  |  exSlni-  |  -mlsque,_tre-  |  -mens  pro-  |  -cumblt  hu-  |  -ml  bos.   Virg.  A.  5,  481. 

Parturi- 1  -unt  mon-  |  -tes :  nas-  |  -cetur  |  rldicii-  |  -lus  mus.  Hor.  A.  P.  139. 

3.  The  beauty  and  harmony  of  hexameter  verse  depend  much  on  due  at- 
tention to  the  ccesura.  (See  §  309.)  A  line  in  which  it  is  neglected  is  destitute 
of  poetic  beauty,  and  can  hardly  be  distinguished  from  prose ;  as, 

RomS  I  moenia.  ]  terriilt  |  Implger  |  Hannibal  |  armls.  Enn. 

4.  The  caesural  pause  most  approved  in  heroic  poetry  is  that  which 
occurs  after  the  penthemimeris,  i.  e.  after  the  arsis  in  the  third  foot. 
This  is  particularly  distinguished  as  the  heroic  ccesura.     Thus, 

At  domus  I  Interi-  |  -or  ||  re-  |  -^Lll  \  spl5ndi(^  |  luxu.   Virg.  A.  1,  637. 

5.  Instead  of  the  preceding,  a  caesura  in  the  thesis  of  the  third 
foot,  or  after  the  arsis  of  the  fourth,  was  also  approved  as  heroic ;  as, 

Inf  an-  |  -dum  re-  |  -ginSL  fl  ju-  |  -bes  reno-  |  -rare  do-  |  -lorem.   Virg.  A.  2,  8. 
Inde  to-  I  -ro  piter  |  iEne-  |  -as  I|  sic  [  orsiis  Sib  |  alto.  Id.  A.  2,  2. 

Rem.  3.   When  the  caesural  pause  occurs,  as  in  the  latter  example,  after  the 
hephthemimeris,  i.  e.  after  the  arsis  of  the  fovirth  foot,  another  but  slighter  one  is 
often  found  in  the  second  foot;  as. 
Prima  te-  |  -net,  []  plan-  |  -suque  to-  |  -lat  D  fremi-  |  -tuque  sS-  |  -cundo.   Virg.  A.  5,  338. 

6.  The  caesura  after  the  third  foot,  dividing  the  verse  into  exactly 
equal  parts,  was  least  approved ;  as, 

Cui  non  |  dictus  Hy-  1  -las  puer  fl  et  La-  |  -toniS,  |  Delos.   Virg.  6.  3,  6. 

Rem.  4.  The  caesural  pause  between  the  fourth  and  fifth  feet  was  considered 
as  peculiarly  adapted  to  pastoral  poetry,  particularly  when  the  fourth  foot  was 
a  dactyl,  and  was  hence  termed  the  bucolic  csesnra;  as, 

Stant  Titu-  |  -li  et  tene-  |  -ris  mu-  |  -gltibus  D  aerS.  |  complent.  Nemes. 

Note  1.  The  caesura  after  the  arsis  is  sometimes  called  the  masculine  or 
syllabic  caesura;  that  in  the  thesis,  the  femitiinextr  trochaic,  as  a  trochee  imme- 
diately precedes.  When  a  caesura  occurs  in  the  fifth  foot  it  is  usually  the 
trochaic  caesura,  unless  the  foot  is  a  spondee;  as, 

Fraxinos  |  in  sll-  |  -vis  pul-  |  -cherrimi,  |  plnus  "in  \  hortis.   Virg.  E.  7,  65. 

(a.)  It  is  to  be  remarked  that  two  successive  trochaic  caesuras  in  the  second 
and  Ihird  feet  are,  in  general,  to  be  avoided,  but  they  are  sometimes  employed 
to  express  irregular  or  impetuous  motion ;  as, 


§311.        PROSODY. VERSIFICATION DACTYLIC  METRE.        849 

Una  Eu-  I  -rusquS  No-  |  -tusquS  ru-  |  -unt  ere-  |  -berqug  pro-  |  -cellls.   Virg.  A.  1,  85. 

(b.)  Successive  trochaic  csestiras  are,  in  like  manner,  to  be  avoided  in  the  ihird 
and  fourth  feet,  but  are  approved  in  the  first  and  second,  in  the  fourth  and 
fifth,  and  in  t\\Q  first^  third  and  fifth.  See  Virg.  A.  6,  651:  1,  94:  and  6,  522. 

Note  2.  In  the  principal  crssura  of  the  verse  poets  frequently  introduce  a 
pause  in  the  sense,  vhich  must  be  attended  to  in  order  to  determine  the  place 
of  the  csesural  pause.  For  in  the  common  place  for  the  cassura  in  the  third 
foot  there  is  often  a  csesura  of  the  foot ;  while,  in  the  fourth  foot,  a  still  more 
marked  division  occurs.  In  this  case,  the  latter  is  to  bo-  considered  as  the 
principal  cjssura,  and  distinguished  accordingly;  as. 

Belli  I  ferra-  |  -tos  pos-  |  -tes,  I|  por- 1  -tasque  re-  |  -fregit.  Hor.  S.  1,  4,  61. 

n.  The  Priapean  is  usually  accounted  a  species  of  hexameter.  It 
is  so  constructed  as  to  be  divisible  into  two  portions  of  three  feet  each, 
having  generally  a  trochee  in  the  first  and  fourth  place,  but  often  a 
spondee  and  rarely  a  dactyl ;  in  the  second,  usually  a  dactyl ;  and 
an  amphimacer  and  more  rarely  a  dactyl  in  the  third ;  as, 

0  cS-  I  -I5nia  |  quS  cupis  li  p5nte  j  ludere  |  longo.   CatulU  17, 1. 

It  is,  however,  more  properly  considered  as  choriambic  metre,  consisting  of 
alternate  Glyconics  and  Pherecratics.   See  §  316,  IV.  V.    Thus, 
D  CO-  I  -loniS.,  quS  I  cupis 
PSnte  I  ludSre  Ion-  |  -go. 

Note.  A  regular  hexameter  verse  is  termed  Priapean,  when  it  is  so  con- 
structed as  to  be  divisable  into  two  portions  of  three  feet  each;  as, 

Terta  I  pars  pa-  |  -tri  cULtSL  H  pars  dSita  |  tSrtm  |  matrl.  Cattdl.  62,  64. 
See  above,  6. 

§  311.     m.   A  pentameter  verse  consists  of  five  feet. 

Remark  1.  It  is  generally,  however,  divided,  in  scanning,  into 
two  hemistichs,  the  first  consisting  of  two  feet,  either  dactyls  or  spon- 
dees, followed  by  a  long  syllable ;  the  last,  of  two  dactyls,  also  fol- 
lowed by  a  long  syllable  ;  as, 

Natu-  I  -r»  sequi-  |  -tur  ||  sSminS.  |  quisquS  sii-  \-m.  Frop.  3,  7,  20. 
Carmini-  |  -bus  vl-  |  -ves  ||  tempus  in  |  omne  me-  |  -is.  Ovid. 

1.  According  to  the  more  ancient  and  correct  mode  of  scanning 
pentameter  verse,  it  consists  of  five  feet,  of  which  the  first  and  second 
may  each  be  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee ;  the  third  is  always  a  spondee  ; 
and  the  fourth  and  fifth  are  anapaasts ;  as, 

Natu-  I  -rjg  sequi-  |  -tur  ||  sem-  |  -in&  quis-  |  -que  sfiffl. 
Carmini- 1  -bus  vl- 1  -vSs  |I  tern-  |  -pus  in  om- 1  -ne  meis. 

2.  The  csBsura,  in  pentameter  verse,  always  occurs  after  the  pen- 
themimeris,  i.  e.  at  the  close  of  the  first  hemistich.  It  very  rarely 
lengthens  a  short  syllable. 

3.  The  pentameter  rarely  ends  with  a  word  of  three  syllables.  In  Ovid,  it 
usually  ends  with  a  dissyllable. 

Eem.  2.  This  species  of  verse  is  seldom  used,  except  in  connection  with 
hexameter,  a  line  of  each  recurring  alternately.  This  combination  is  called 
elegiac  verse.    Thus, 

Flebilis  IndignSs,  ElSgeii,  65lv«  capillos. 

Ah  nimis  fix  vero  nunc  tibi  nomSn  6rit!  Ovid.  Am.  3,  9,  8. 

80 


350     PKOSODY. VERSIFICATION ANAP^STIC    METRE.      §  313 

^  §  319.  IV.  The  tetrameter  a  priore,  or  Alcmanian  dactylic  te- 
trameter,  consists  of  the  first  four  feet  of  a  hexameter,  of  which  the 
fourth  is  always  a  dactyl ;  as, 

Garrtiia  |  per  ra-  |  -mos,  StIs  ]  Sbstr^It.  &n.  (Ed.  454. 

V.  The  tetrameter  a  posteriore^  or  spondaic  tetrameter,  consists  of 
the  last  four  feet  of  a  hexameter ;  as, 

Ibimus,  I  0  soci-  |  -I,  coml-  |  -tesque.  Hor.  Od.  1,  7,  26. 

Remark.   The  penultunate  foot  in  this,  as  in  hexameter  verse,  may  be  a 
spondee,  but  in  this  case  the  preceding  foot  should  be  a  dactyl ;  as, 
Menso-  |  -rem  c5hi-  |  -bent  Ar-  |  -chyta.  Hor.  Od.  1,  28,  2. 

Yl.  The  dactylic  trimeter  consists  of  the  last  three  feet  of  a  hexa- 
meter; as, 

Grato  I  PyiThi  sub  \  antro.  Hot.  Od.  1,  5,  3. 

Remabk.  But  this  kind  of  verse  is  more  properly  included  in  choriambio 
metre.   See  §  316,  V. 

Vn.  The  trimeter  catalectic  Archilochian  consists  of  the  first  five 
half  feet  of  a  hexameter,  but  the  first  and  second  feet  are  commonly 
dactyls;  as, 

PuItIs  et  I  umbra  su- 1  -mus.  Hor.  Od.  4,  7, 16. 

VlLl.  The  dactylic  dimeter,  or  Adonic,  consists  of  two  feet,  a  dac- 
tyl and  a  spondee ;  as, 

Rlslt  A-  I  -poUo.  Hor.  Od.  1, 10, 12. 

IX.  The  JEolic  pentameter  consists  of  four  dactyls  preceded  by  a 
spondee,  a  trochee,  or  an  iambus.     Thus 


X.  The  PhalcBcian  pentameter  consists  of  a  dactylic  penthimimeris 
and  a  dactylic  dimeter ;  as, 

Vise- 1  -bat  geli-  |  -dae  B  Sideia  |  briimae.  Boethius. 

Remark.  A  trochee  is  sometimes  found  in  the  first  place  and  an  iambus  in 
the  first  and  second  places. 

XI.  The  Tetrameter  Meiurus,  or  Faliscan  consists  of  the  last  four 
feet  of  a  hexameter,  except  that  the  last  foot  is  an  iambus  instead  of 
a  spondee ;  as, 

Ut  no^  I  frugS  gra- 1  -vis  Cerea  |  6at.  Bc&hius. 

Xn.  The  Tetrameter  Catalectic  consists  of  the  tetrameter  a  priore 
wanting  the  latter  half  of  the  concluding  dactyl ;  as, 

Omne  homl-  |  -num  gSnus  |  in  ter- 1  -ris.  Bo'ithius. 

ANAPiESTIC  METRE.    . 

§  313.  I.  The  anapcestic  monometer  consists  of  two  ana- 
psests;  as, 

XnaiSs- 1 -se  o&n6e.  Sm. 


§  314.         PROSODY. ^VERSIFICATION lAHBIO    METRE. 


851 


n.  The  anapcestic  dimeter  consists  of  two  measures,  or  four 
anapaests;  as, 

PhJlrStrse-  |  -quS  grSLygs  |  dStS  sS-  [  -tS  fSrO....  Sen. 

Remark  1.  The  first  foot  in  each  measure  of  anapcestic  metre  was  very 
often  changed  to  a  dactyl  or  a  spondee,  and  the  second  foot  often  to  a  spondee, 
and,  in  a  few  instances,  to  a  dactyl. 

Rem.  2.  Anapaestic  verses  are  generally  so  constructed  that  each  measure 
ends  with  a  word,  so  that  they  may  be  written  and  read  in  lines  of  one,  two, 
or  more  measures. 


IAMBIC  METRE. 

§  314.  I.  1.  The  iambic  trimeter,  or  senarius,  consists  of 
three  iambic  measures,  or  six  iambic  feet ;  as, 

PhSse-  I  -lus  II-  I  -le,  U  quSm  |  vide-  |  -tls  hos-  |  -pites....   Catull.  4. 1. 

2.  The  caBsura  commonly  occurs  in  the  third  but  sometimes  in  the 
fourth  foot. 

8.  The  pure  iambic  measure  was  seldom  used  by  the  Latin  poets, 
but  to  vary  the  rhythm  spondees  were  introduced  into  the  first,  third, 
and  fifth  places.  In  every  foot,  also,  except  the  last,  which  was  al- 
ways an  iambus,  a  long  syllable  was  often  changed  into  two  short 
ones,  so  that  an  anapaest  or  a  dactyl  was  used  for  a  spondee,  and  a 
tribrach  for  an  iambus,  but  the  use  of  the  dactyl  in  the  fifth  place 
was  very  rare ;  as. 

Quo,  quo  I  sceles-  |  -tl  rui-  |  -tis?  aut  |  cur  dSx-  |  -tSris....  Hor.  Epod.  7, 1. 

iliti-  I  -bus  at-  |  -que  c&ni-  |  -bus  homi- 1  -cidam  Hec-  |  -torem....  Id.  Epod.  17, 12. 

4.  Sometimes,  also,  a  proceleusmatic,  or  double  pyrrhic,  was  used  in  the 
first  place  for  a  spondee.  The  writers  of  comedy,  satire,  and  fable,  admitted 
the  spondee  and  its  etjuivalents  (the  dactyl  and  anapasst)  into  the  second  and 
fourth  places,  as  well  as  the  first,  third,  and  fifth. 

6.  The  foUowmg,  therefore,  is  the  scale  of  the  Iambic  Trimeter: — 
1  2  3  4  6  6 


(---) 


6.  In  the  construction  of  the  Iambic  Trimeter  an  accent  should  fall  on  the 
second  syllable  of  either  the  third  foot  or  both  the  second  and  fourth  feet;  as, 
Ibis  I  Libur-  |  -nis  in-  ]  ter  al- 1  -tS.  na-  |  -vium  |  . 
Utrum-  I  -n6  jus-  \  -si  per-  |  -s&quZ'-  \  -mur  6-  |  -tlum.  | 

n.  The  scazon,  or  choUambus  (lame  iambic),  is  the  iambic  trime- 
ter, with  a  spondee  in  the  sixth  foot,  and  generally  an  iambus  in  the 
fifth;  as. 

Cur  in  |  thea-  |  -trum,  Cato  I  sSve-  |  -re,  ve-  I  -nisti? 

An  Ide-  |  S  tan-  |  -turn  v5n-  \  -eras,  |  ut  ex-  |  -Ires?  Mart.  Ep.  1,  1,  8. 

This  species  of  verse  is  also  called  Eipponaciic  trimeter,  from  its  inventor 
HippSnax.   ' 


852  PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — IAMBIC   METRE.         §  814. 

HI.  The  iambic  tetrameter  or  quadrdtus,  called  also  from  the  num- 
ber of  its  feet  octoriarius,  a  measure  used  by  the  comic  poets,  consists 
of  four  iambic  measures,  subject  to  the  same  variations  as  the  iambic 
trimeter  (I.) ;  as, 

Nunc  hlc  I  dies  I  mim  |  Titam  af-  ]|  -fert,  &li-  |  -os  m5- 1  -res  pos-  |  -tulat.  Ter.  A.  1,2, 18. 
Remark.  The  caesura  regularly  follows  the  second  measure. 

rV.  The  iambic  tetrameter  catalectic  or  Hipponactic,  is  the  iambic 
tetrameter,  wanting  the  last  syllable,  and  having  always  an  iambus 
in  the  seventh  place,  but  admitting  in  the  other  places  the  same  va- 
riations as  the  trimeter  and  tetrameter ;  as, 

Depren- 1  -sSl  na- 1  -tis  in  |  marl,  |  vesa-  |  -nien-  |  -tS  ven-  [  -to.  Catvll.  25, 13. 

V.  The  iambic  trimeter  catalectic  or  Archilochian,  is  the  iambic  tri- 
meter (L),  wanting  the  final  syllable.  Like  the  coromon  iambic  tri- 
meter, it  admits  a  spondee  into  the  first  and  third  places,  but  not  into 
the  fifth ;  as, 

Voca-  I  -tus  at-  |  -quS  non  |  voca-  |  -tus  au-  |  -dit.  Hor.  Od.  2, 18,  40.  * 

Tr&hunt-  |  -que  sic- 1  -cas  mach-  |  -inas  |  carl-  (  -nas.  Id.  Od.  1,  4,  2. 

VI.  The  iambic  dimeter  consists  of  two  iambic  measures,  with  the 
same  variations  as  the  iambic  trimeter  (I.)  ;  as, 

Fort!  I  seque-  |  -mur  p5c-  |  -tore.  Hor.  Epod.  1, 14. 
Canldi-  I  -a  trac-  |  -tarlt  |  dapes.  Id.  Epod.  3,  8. 
Vide-  I  -re  prope- 1  -rantes  |  domum.  Id.  Epod.  3,  62. 

Semabk.  The  iambic  dimeter  is  also  called  the  Archihchian 

The  following  is  its  scale : — 


1 

2 

3 

4 

"""  ~~ 

—  >^w 

VXI.  The  iambic  dimeter  Tiypermeter^  called  also  ArchilocTiian^  is 
the  iambic  dimeter,  with  an  additional  syllable  at  the  end ;  as, 

RSde- 1  -git  in  |  veros  |  timo-  |  -res.  Hor.  Od.  1,  37, 15. 
Remark.  Horace  always  makes  the  third  foot  a  spondee. 

VJil.  The  iambic  dimeter  acephalous  is  the  iambic  dimeter,  want- 
ing the  first  syllable ;  as, 

Non  I  ebur  j  neque  aii-  |  -ream....  Hor.  Od.  2, 18, 1. 

Reslajik.  This  kind  of  verse  is  sometimes  scanned  as  a  catalectic  trochaic 
dimeter.   See  §  315,  IV. 

IX.  The  iambic  dimeter  catalectic^  or  Anacreontic^  is  the  iambic 
dimeter,  wanting  the  final  syllable,  and  having  always  an  iambus  in 
the  third  foot;  as, 

Ut  ti-  I  gris  or-  |  -ba  gna-  |  -tis.  Sen.  Med.  863. 

X.  The  GalUambus  consists  of  two  iambic  dimeters  catalectic,  the 
last  of  which  wants  the  final  syllable. 

Remark  1.  It  was  so  denominated  from  the  GaVi  <x  priests  of  Cybele,  by 
whom  it  was  used. 


§315.     PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — TROCHAIC   METRE.         853 

Rem.  2.  In  the  first  foot  of  each  dimeter  the  anapaest  -was  generally  pre- 
ferred to  the  spondee.  The  catalectic  syllable  at  the  end  of  the  first  dimeter 
is  long,  and  the  second  foot  of  the  second  dimeter  is  commonly  a  tribrach;  as, 

Supgr  51-  I  -tSl  vSc-  I  -tus  A-  I  -t ys  ||  cglerl  |  rate  ma-  |  -na.  CatuU,  63, 1. 

Bem.  3.  The  caesura  uniformly  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  first  dimeter. 

TROCHAIC  METRE. 

§  olo*  1.  Trochaic  verses  bear  a  near  afiinity  to  ismbics.  The  addi- 
tion or  retrenchment  of  a  syllable  at  the  beginning  of  a  pm-e  iambic  verse,  ren- 
ders it  pnre  trochaic,  and  the  addition  or  retrenchment  of  a  syllable  at  the  be- 
ginning of  a  pure  trochaic  line,  renders  it  pure  iambic,  with  the  deficiency  or 
redundancy  of  a  syllable  in  each  case  at  the  end  of  the  verse. 

I.  The  trochaic  tetrameter  catalectic  consists  of  seven  feet,  fol- 
lowed by  a  catalectic  syllable.  In  the  first  five  places  and  very 
rarely  in  the  sixth,  it  admits  a  tribrach,  but  in  the  seventh  a 
trochee  only.  In  the  even  places,  besides  the  tribrach,  it  admits 
also  a  spondee,  a  dactyl,  an  anapaest,  and  sometimes  a  proceleus- 
matic ;  as, 

Jussus  I  Sst  In  I  grmis  |  TrS :  ||  purtis  |  IrS  |  jQssus  |  eai.Auct.  P.  Vin. 

Romu  I  Iseaa  |  ips5.  |  fecit  ||  cum  Sa-  |  -blnls  |  nupti-  |  -as.  Id.  -^^ 

Danai  ]  des,  co-  |  -ite ;  |  vestras  ||  hic  dl-  ]  -es  qus-  |  -rit  mi-  |  -nflfl.  Sen. 

The  following  is  its  scale : — 


1 


2 


Remark  1.  The  pure  trochaic  verse  was  rarely  used,  and  the  dactyl  very 
rarely  occurs  in  the  fourth  place.  The  caesural  pause  uniformly  occurs  afteV 
the  fourth  foot,  thus  dividing  the  verse  into  a  complete  dimeter  and  a  catalec- 
tic dimeter.  The  comic  writers  introduced  the  spondee  jg,nd  its  equivalent  feet 
into  the  odd  places. 

Rem.  2.  The  complete  trochaic  tetrameter  or  octonarius  properly  consists  of 
eight  feet,  all  trochees,  suliject,  however,  to  the  same  variations  as  the  catalec- 
tic tetrameter;  as. 

Ipse  I  summla  |  saxis  1  flxus  |  aspS-  |  -ris,  6-  |  -viscS-  |  -rataa.  Enn. 

II.  The  Sappliic  verse,  invented  by  the  poetess  Sappho,  consists 
of  five  if"^*' — the  first  a  trochee,  the  second  a  spondee,  the  third  a 
dactyl,  and  the  fourth  and  fifth  trochees ;  as, 

Intg-  1  -ger  vl-  |  --iS,  ||  scSle-  |  -rlsqug  |  purtis.  Hor.  Od.  1,  22, 1. 

1.  Sappho,  and,  after  her  example,  Catullus,  sometimes  made  the  second 
foot  a  trochee. 

2.  Those  Sapphics  are  most  harmonious  which  have  the  caesura  after  the 
fifth  semi-foot. 

Note  1.  In  the  composition  of  the  Sapphic  stanza,  a  word  is  sometimes 
divided  between  the  end  of  the  thurd  Sapphic,  and  the  beginning  of  the  Adonio 
which  follows ;  as, 

Labi-  I  -tur  rl-  |  -pa  JStS  |  n5n  pro-  |  -bante  ux- 
5rlu8  1  amnis.  Hor.  Od.  1,  2, 19. 

80* 


854       PROSODY. VERSIFICATION CHORIAMBIC  METRE.    §316. 

It  ha*  been  thought  by  some  that  such  lines  should  be  considered  as  one 
Sapphic  verse  of  seven  feet,  the  fifth  foot  being  either  a  spondee  or  a  trochee. 

Note  2.  This  verse  is  sometimes  scanned  as  epichoriambic,  having  an  epi- 
trite  ill  tL?  first  place,  a  choriambus  in  the  second,  and  ending  with  an  iambic 
sizygv  ca'alectic;  thus, 

Integar  vT-  |  -tS,  Bcelerls-  |  -que  puros. 

m.  The  Phalcecian  verse  consists  of  five  feet-^a  spondee,  a  dac- 
tyl, and  three  ti-oehees ;  as, 

Non  est  |  vivere,  |  Bed  -fk-  \  -lere  |  vita.  Mart. 

Remark  1.  Instead  of  a  spondee  as  the  first  foot,  Catullus  sometimes  uses  a 
trochee  or  an  iambus.  This  writer  also  sometimes  uses  a  spondee  in  the 
second  place. 

Rem.  2.  The  Phalcecian  verse  is  sometimes  called  TiendecasyUabk,  as  con- 
sisting of  eleven  syllables ;  but  that  name  does  not  belong  to  it  exclusively. 

TV.  The  trochaic  dimeter  catalectic  consists  of  three  feet,  properly 
all  trochees,  and  a  catalectic  syllable,  but  admitting  also  in  the  second 
place  a  spondee  or  a  dactyl ;  as, 

Non  e  I  -bur  n6-  |  -que  aure-  |  -um.  Hor.  Od.  2, 18, 1. 
Lenis  I  ac  modi-  |  -cum  flu-  |  -ens 

Aura,  I  nee  ver-  |  -gens  la-  |  -tus.  Sen.  (Ed.  887. 

Note.  This  measure  is  the  same  as  the  acephalous  iambic  dimeter  (see 
§  814,  Vin.),  and  it  is  not  important  whether  it  be  regarded  as  iambic  or 
trochaic. 

CHORIAMBIC    METRE. 

§  310.  (a.)  In  a  pure  choriambic  verse  each  metre  except 
the  last  is  a  choriambus,  and  the  last  an  Iambic  syzygy. 

Note.  A  spondee  and  iambus,  i.  e.  a  third  epitrite,  axe  sometimes  nsed  in 
place  of  the  Iambic  syzygy. 

(h.)  An  epichoriambic  verse  is  composed  of  one  or  more 
choriambi  with  some  other  foot,  especially  a  ditrochee  or  a 
second  epitrite,  joined  with  it 

1.  The  choriambic  pentameter  consists  of  a  spondee,  three  chori- 
ambi, and  an  iambus  ;  as, 

Tu  nS  i  qasslSrls,  |  scirS  nefas,  |  qn&ca  mihi,  quern  tibl.,  Hor.  Od.  1, 11, 1. 

n.  The  choriambic  tetrameter  consists  of  three  choriambi,  or  feet 
of  equal  length,  and  a  Bacchius ;  as, 

Omng  nemus  |  cum  fiuYlIs,  (  omne  cS.nat  |  prof  uudom.  Claud. 

2.  In  this  verse  Horace  substituted  a  spondee  for  the  iambus  con- 
tained in  the  first  choriambus ;  as, 

TS  deos  6-  I  -ro,  Sybarln  |  cur  properes  |  &mand6.    Hor.  Od.  1,  8,  2. 

3.  Some* scan  this  verse  as  an  epichoriambic  tetrameter  catalectic,  begin- 
ning with  the  second  epitrite. 

in.  1.  The  Asclepiadic  tetrameter  (invented  by  the  poet  Ascle- 
piEdes)  consists  of  a  spondee,  two  choriambi,  and  an  iambus ;  as, 

M«c5-  1  -nas,  it&Tis  1)  5dlW  reg-  |  -ibia.   Hor.  Od.  1, 1. 1. 


§  317.         PROSODY. VERSIFICATION IONIC  METRE.  855 

2.  Thi?  form  is  invariably  observed  by  Horace;  but  other  poets  sometimes, 
though  rarely,  make  the  first  foot  a  dactyl. 

8.  The  caesural  pause  occurs  at  the  end  of  the  first  choriambus. 

4.  This  measure  is  sometimes  scanned  as  a  dactylic  pentameter  catalectio. 
See  §  311,  III.    Thus, 

M«ce-  I  -nas,  &«l-  \  vi3  H  edite  |  reglbils. 

lY.  1.  The  choriamhic  trimeter,  or  Glyconic  (invented  by  the  poet 
Glyco),  consists  of  a  spondee,  a  choriambus,  and  an  iambus ;  as, 

Sic  te  I  dlvSL  potSns  1  Cyprl...  Hor.  Od.  1,  3, 1- 

2.  The  first  foot  is  sometimes  an  iambus  or  a  trochee. 

3.  When  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee,  the  verse  might  be  scanned  as  a  dactylic 
trimeter.    Thus, 

Sic  te  1  divi  po-  |  -tens  Cypri.  v 

V.  1.  The  clioriambic  trimeter  catalectic,  or  Pherecratic  (so  called 
from  the  poet  Pherecrates),  is  the  Glyconic  deprived  of  its  final  syl- 
lable, and  consists  of  a  spondee,  a  choriambus,  and  a  catalectic  sylla- 
ble; as, 

GrSLto,  I  Pyrrha,  sub  an-  |  -tro.  Hor.  Od.  1,  5,  8. 
2.  The  first  foot  was  sometimes  a  trochee  or  an  anapest,  rarely  an  iambus.. 
8.  When  the  first  foot  is  a  spondee,  this  measure  might  be  scanned  as  a 
dactylic  trimeter.    See  ^  312,  VI. 

4.  The  Pherecratic  subjoined  to  the  Glyconic  produces  the  Priapean  verse. 
See  §  310,  II. 

VI.  1.  The  choriamhic  dimeter  consists  of  a  choriambus  and  a 
Bacchius;  as, 

Lyda  die  I  pgr  SmnSs.  Hor.  Od.  1,  8, 1. 

2.  This  verse  is  by  some  called  the  choriamhic  dimeter  catalectic.  Cf.  h  316, 
(o.) 

IONIC   METRE. 

§  SIT'.  I.  The  Ionic  a  majore,  or  Sotadic,  (from  the  poet  So- 
tades),  consists  of  three  greater  Ionics  and  a  spondee. 

1.  The  Ionic  feet,  however,  are  often  changed  into  ditrochees,  and  either  of 
the  two  long  syllables  in  those  feet  into  two  short  ones ;  as. 

Has,  cum  gemi-  |  -na  cSmpSde,  |  dedicat  cSL-  |  -tenas, 
Saturne,  ti-  |  -bl  Zoilus,  |  annulos  prl-  |  -ores.  Llart. 

2.  Hence  the  following  is  its  scale : — 


1 

2 

8 

4 

>_,     W      V-'     V-- 

>^     v_,     >_,     ^^ 

Note.  The  final  syllable,  by  §  301,  note,  may  be  short. 

II.  1.  The  Ionic  a  minor e  consists  generally  of  verses  of  three  or 
four  feet,  which  are  all  smaller  Ionics ;  as, 

Puer  alSa,  |  tibi  telas,  |  SperosEe-  |  -que  Minervffl...  Hor.  Od.  3, 12,  4. 

2.  In  this  verse,  as  in  the  anapaestic,  no  place  is  assigned  to  the  pause;  be» 
cause,  since  the  metres,  if  rightly  constructed,  end  with  a  word,  the  effect  of  a 
pause  will  be  produced  at  the  end  of  each  metare. 


356      PEOSODT. — VEESinCATION COMPOUNI    METRES.     §318. 


COilPOUND    METEES. 

§  318*  Compound  metre  is  the  union  of  two  species  of 
metre  in  the  same  verse. 

1.  The  (lactylico-iamhic  metre  or  Elegiambus  consists  of  a  dactylic 
penthemimeris  (  312,  vu.),  followed  by  an  iambic  dimeter  (§  314, 
VI.);  as, 

ScrlberS  |  verslcu-  |  -los  0  8m5-  I  -rf  p5r-  |  -culsum  |  griivl.  Hor.  Epod.  11,  2. 

n.  The  iambico-dactylic  metre  or  lamlelegus  consists  of  the  same 
members  as  the  preceding,  but  in  a  reversed  order ;  as, 

Nlves-  I  -que  de- 1  -ducunt  |  Jovem :  fl  nunc  mSLre,  |  nunc  sllu-  |  -oe.  Hor.  Epod.  13,  2. 

Note.  The  members  composing  this  and  the  preceding  species  of  verse  are 
often  written  in  separate  verses. 

m.  The  greater  Alcaic  consists  of  an  iambic  penthemimeris,  i.  e. 
of  two  iambic  feet  and  a  long  catalectic  syllable,  followed  by  a  chor- 
iambus,  and  an  iambus;  as, 

Vides  I  ut  al-  I  -ta  B  stet  niTe  can-  |  -didum.  H»r.  Od.  1,  9, 1. 
Kemabk  1.  The  first  foot  is  often  a  spondee. 
Rkm.  2.  The  cassura  uniformly  occurs  after  the  catalectic  syllable. 
Rem.  3.   This  verse  is  sometimes  so  scanned  as  to  make  the  last  two  feet 
dactyls. 

IV.  The  dactylico'trochaic  or  Archilochian  heptameter,  consists  of 
the  dactylic  tetrameter  a  prior e  (§312),  followed  by  three  trochees ; 
as, 

SolTltur  I  acrls  hi-  |  -ems  gia-  |  -ta  vic«  fl  verls  |  gt  Fi-  |  -Tonl.  Hot.  Od.  1,  4, 1. 
Beuark.  The  caesura  occurs  between  the  two  members. 

V.  The  dactylico-trochaic  tetrameter  or  lesser  Alcaic,  consists  of  two 
dactyls,  followed  by  two  trochees,  L  e.  of  a  dactylic  dimeter  followed 
by  a  trochaic  monometer ;  as, 

Leya  I  persSnii-  D  -SrS  |  saxi.  Hor.  Od.  1, 17, 12. 

COMBINATION    OF    VERSES    IN    POEMS. 

§  319.  1.  A  poem  may  consist  either  of  one  kind  of  verse 
only  or  of  a  combination  of  two  or  more  kinds. 

2.  A  poem  in  which  only  one  kind  of  verse  is  employed,  is  called 
carmen  monocolon ;  that  which  has  two  kinds,  dlcolon ;  tliat  which 
has  three  kinds,  tricolon. 

3.  AATien  the  poem  returns,  after  the  second  line,  to  the  same 
verse  with  which  it  began,  it  is  called  disirophon ;  when  after  the 
third  line,  trisiropTion ;  and  when  after  the  fourth,  tetraslrophon. 

4.  The  several  verses  which  occur  before  the  poem  returns  to  the 
kind  of  verse  with  which  it  began,  constitute  a  stanza  or  strophe. 

h.  A  poem  consisting  of  two  kinds  of  verse,  when  the  stanza  contains  two 
verses,  is  oailed  dicdlon  distrdphon,  (see  ^  320,  3);  when  it  contains  three,  died- 


§  320.      PROSODY. — VERSIFICATION — HORATIAN  METRES.      857 

Um  tristrdphon,  (Auson.  Profess.  21);  when  four,  dicdhn  tetrastrHphon^  (§  320, 2)  j 

and  when  five,  dicohn  pentastrdphon. 

6.  A  poem  consisting  of  three  kinds  of  verse,  when  the  stanza  contains  three 
verses,  is  called  tricobn  tristrdphon,  (§  320,  15);  when  four,  tricolon  teirastrd- 
phon,  (§  320,  1). 

HORATIAN    METRES. 

§  330.  The  different  species  of  metre  used  by  Horace  in 
his  lyric  compositions  are  twenty.  The  various  forms  in  which 
he  has  employed  them,  either  separate  or  in  conjunction,  are 
nineteen,  arranged,  according  to  the  order  of  preference  given 
to  them  by  the  poet,  in  the  following 

SYNOPSIS. 

1.  Two  greater  Alcaics  (§  318,  iir.),  one  Archilochian  iambic 
dimeter  hypermeter  (§  314,  vii.),  and  one  lesser  Alcaic  (§  318,  v.)  ; 

a«»  ,      !■■  ■ 

VideSjiut  atta  stet  nIvS  candidum 
Soracte,  nee  jam  sustineant  onus 
Silvse  labSrantea,  geluque 
Eluminl  constiterint  icuto.  (1*6. 1,  9.) 

Remark.  This  is  called  the  Horatian  stanza,  because  it  seems  to  have  been 
a  favorite  with  Horace,  being  used  in  thirty-seven  of  his  odes. 

2.  Three  Sapphics  (§  315,  ii.)  and  one  Adonic  (§  312,  viii.) ;  as, 

Jam  satis  terris  nivis  atque  dirse 
Grandlnis  misit  pSiter,  et,  rubeutS 
Dextera  sacras  jJlculatus  arces, 

Terrult  urbem.  {Lib.  1,  2.) 

3.  One  Glyconic  (§  316,  iv.)  and  one  Asclepiadic  {§  316,  iii.) ;  as. 

Sic  te  Diva,  pStens  Cypri, 
Sic  fratrGs  Helenee,  lucidS.  sidSra...  {Lib.  1,  3  ) 

4.  One  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  i.)  and  one  iambic  dimeter  (§  314, 
VI.);  as, 

Ibis  Libuiuls  intSr  altS.  naviam, 

Amice,  propugnacula.  {Epod.  1.) 

5.  Three  Asclepiadics  (§316,  iii.)  and  one  Glyconic  (§316,  iv.) ; 
as, 

Scrlberls  Wrio  f  ortis,  et  hostlum 

Tlctor,  Maeonii  carminis  aliti, 

Quam  rem  cumque  ferox  navlbiis  aut  ^c^uis 

Miles,  te  duce,  gesserit.  {Lib.  1,  6.) 

6.  Two  Asclepiadics  (§  316,  iii.),  one  Pherecratic  (§  316,  v.),  and 
one  Glyconic  (§316,  iv.);  as, 

Dianam,  tenerae,  dlcite  vii^ines : 
Intonsum,  puerl,  dicite  Cynthium, 
Latonamque  supremo 

Dilectam  penitua  JSvi.  {Lib.  1,  21  ) 

7.  The  Asclepiadic  (§  316,  iii.)  alone;  as, 

MSbSnas  &t&Yls  Sdlt^  rSglbus.  (Lib.  1, 1.) 


6oS      PROSODY. ^VERSIFICATION HORATIAN  METRES.      §  320. 

8.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.)  and  one  dactylic  tetrameter 
a  posterior e  (§  312,  v.)  ;  as, 

Laudabant  SLlu  claram  Rhodon,  aufc  Mitylenen, 

Aut.Ephesuin,  bTmarlsve  Corlnthi...  {Lib.  1,  7.) 

9.  The  choriambic  pentameter  (§  316,  i.)  alone;  as, 

Tu  ne  quffislerls,  scire  nefas,  qu5m  mihi,  quein  tibi...    {Ub.  1, 11.) 

10.  One  dacty'lic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.)  and  one  iambic  dimeter 
(§  314,  VI.)  ;  as, 

Nox  erSLt,  et  coelo  f  ulgebat  luoS,  sereno 
Inter  mlaoil  sidera.  {Epod  15.) 

11.  The  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  i.)  containing  spondees;  as. 

Jam,  jam  efflcacl  d5  mSLnus  sclentise.  {Epod.  17.) 

12.  One  choriambic  dimeter  (§316,  vi.)  and  one  choriambic  tetra- 
meter (§  316,  II.)  with  a  variation ;  as, 

Lydia,  die,  per  omnes 
TS  Deos  oro,  Syterln  cur  prSperafl  SLmando...  {Lib.  1,  8.) 

13.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.)  and  one  iambic  trimeter 
•without  spondees  (§  314,  i.) ;  as. 

Altera,  jam  terltur  bellTs  ciTillbus  tttas; 
Suis  et  ipsii  RomSl  Tiribus  ruit.  {Ep5d.  16.) 

14.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.)  and  one  dactylic  penthe- 
mimeris  (§312,  vii.)  ;  as, 

Dlffugere  niTes :  redSunt  jam  grimtoSL  campis, 
Jrborlbusque  comae.  {Lib.  4,  7.) 

15.  One  iambic  trimeter  (§  314,  i.),  one  dactylic  trimeter  catalec- 
tic  (§  312,  VII.),  and  one  iambic  dimeter  (§  314,  vi.) ;  as. 

Petti,  nihil  me,  sicut  antea,  j^Tat 
Scrlbere  versiculos, 
Amore  pSrculsum  grSLyi.  {Epoa.  11.) 

NoTK.    The  second  and  third  lines  are  often  "written  as  one  verse.    See 
S  318,  1. 

16.  One  dactylic  hexameter  (§  310,  i.),  one  iambic  dimeter  (§  814, 
VI.),  and  one  dactylic  penthemimeris  (§312,  vii.) ;  as, 

HorrldSl  tempestas  coelum  contraxit;  St  Imbres 
Nivesque  deducQnt  Joyem : 
Nunc  mare,  nunc  sUuse...  {I^od.  18.) 

Note.  The  second  and  third  lines  of  this  stanza,  also,  are  often  written  as 
one  verse.    See  §  318,  ii. 

17.  One  Archilochian  heptameter  (§  318,  IV.)  and  one  iambic  tri- 
meter catalectic  (§  314,  v.) ;  as, 

Solvltur  acrls  hlems  grata  vice  verls  et  IUT5nl, 
Trahiintque  siccas  machlnae  cirlnas.  (Lit.  1,  4.) 

18.  One  iambic  dimeter  acephalous  (§  314,  viii.)  and  one  iambic 
trimeter  catalectic  (§  314,  v.) ;  as, 

N5n  ebiir  neque  aur5um 
Mea  rgnidet  In  domo  licttnar.  {Lib.  2, 18.) 

19.  The  Ionic  a  minore  (§  317,  ii.)  alone;  as, 

MMriram  Sst  niqae  &mdrl  d&r«  Ifldum,  nSqaS  dOlol...  (Lib.  8, 12.) 


§321.      PROSODY. VERSIFICATION HORATIAN   METRES.      859 


§  331.  A  METRICAL  KEY  TO  THE  ODES  OF  HORACE. 


Containing,  in  alphabetic  order,  the  first  loords  of  each,  with  a  refer- 
ence to  the  numbers  in  the  preceding  Synopsis,  where  the  metre  is 
explained. 


JEVi,  vetiisto No.  1 

^(luam  memento 1 

Albi,  ne  doleas 5 

Altera  jam  terltur 13 

Aiigustam,  amice 1 

At,  0  deomm 4 

Audivere,  Lyce 6 

Bacchiim  in  remotis 1 

Beatus  ille 4 

Coelo  supinas 1 

Coelo  tonantem 1 

Cur  me  querelis 1 

Delicta  majorum 1 

Descende  coelo 1 

Dlanam,  tenerse 6 

Diffugere  nives 14 

Dive,  qiiem  proles 2 

Divis  orte  bonis 5 

Donarera  pateras 7 

Donee  gratus  eram  tibi 3 

Eheu !  fugaces 1 

Est  mihi  nonum 2 

Et  ture  et  fidibus 3 

Exegi  monumentum 7 

Extremum  Tanaim 5 

Faune,  nympharum 2 

Festo  quid  potius  die 3 

Herculis  ritu 2 

Horrida  tempestas 16 

Ibis  Libumis 4 

Icci,  beatis 1 

Ille  et  nefasto 1 

Impios  parrse 2 

Inclusam  DanaCn 6 

Intactis  opulentior 3 

Integer  vitse 2 

Intermissa,  Venus,  diu 3 

Jam  jam  efficaci 11 

Jam  pauca  aratro 1 

Jam  satis  terris 2 

Jam  veris  comltes 5 

Justum  et  tenacem 1 

Laudfibunt  alii 8 

Liipis  et  agnis 4 

Lydia,  die,  per  omnes 12 

Mxcenas  ata,vis 7 

Mala  soluta 4 

Martiis  cffilebs 2 

Mater  seeva  Cupidinum 3 

Mercuri,  facunde 2 

Merciiri,  nam  te 2 

Miserfirum  est 19 


Mollis  inertia No. 

Montium  custos 

Motum  ex  Metello 

Musis  amicus 

Natis  in  usum 

Ne  forte  credas 

Ne  sit  ancillse > 

Nolis  longa  ferce 

Nondum  subacta 

Non  ebur  neque  aureum 

Non  semper  imbres 

Non  usitata 

Non  vides,  quanto 

Nox  erat 

NuUam,  Vare,  sacra 

Nullus  argento 

Nunc  est  bibendunj 

0  crudelis  adhuc 

0  diva,  gratum 

0  fons  Bandusioe 

0  matre  pulchra 

0  nata  mecum 

0  navis,  referent 

0  saepe  mecum 

0  Venus,  reglna 

Odi  prof  anura 

Otium  Divos 

Parcius  junctas 

Parous  Deurum 

Parentis  olim 

Pastor  quum  traheret 

Percicos  odi,  puer 

Petti,  nihil  me 

Phoebe,  silvarumque 

Phoebus  volentem 

Pindarum  quisquis 

Poscimur:  si  quid 

Quaj  cura  Patnam 

Qualem  ministrum. 

Quando  repostum 

Quantum  distet  ab  InScho 

Quera  tu,  Melpomene 

Quern  virum  aut  heroa 

Quid  bellicosus 

Quid  dedicatum 

Quid  fles,  Asterie 

Quid  immerentes 

Quid  obseratis 

Quid  tibi  vis 

Quis  desiderio.  .* 

Quis  multa  gracilis 

Quo  me,  Bacche 


860      PROSODY. VERSIFICATION HORATIAN  METRES.      §  321. 


Quo,  quo,  scelesti  mltis No.  4 

Quum  tu,  Lydia 3 

Rectius  vives 2 

Rogare  longo 4 

Scriberis  Vario 5 

Septirai,  Gades 2 

Sic  te  Diva  potens 3 

Solvitur  acris  hiems 17 

Te  maris  et  tfijrae 8 


Tu  ne  qtisBsigris No.  9 

Tyrrhena  regum. 1 

Ulla  si  juris 2 

Uxor  pauperis  Ibyci 3 

Velox  amoenum 1 

Vides,  ut  alta 1 

Vile  potabis 2 

Vitas  hinnuleo 6 

Vixi  puellis 1 


The  following  are  the  single  metres  used  by  Horace  in  his  lyric 
compositions,  viz : — 


1.  Dactylic  Hexameter. 

2.  Dactylic  Tetrameter  a  posteridri. 
8.  Dactylic  Trimeter  Cat^ectic 

4.  Adonic. 

5.  Trimeter  Iambic. 

6.  Iambic  Trimeter  Catalectic. 

7.  Iambic  Dimeter. 

8.  Arcbilochian  Iambic  Dimeter  Hy- 

permeter. 

9.  Iambic  Dimeter  Acephalous. 
10.  Sapphic. 


11.  Choriambic  Pentameter. 

12.  Choriambic  Tetrameter. 

13.  Asclepiadic  Tetrameter. 

14.  Glyconic. 

15.  Pherecratic. 

16.  Choriambic  Dimeter. 

17.  Ionic  a  viinore. 

18.  Greater  Alcaic. 

19.  Arcbilochian  Heptameter. 

20.  Lesser  Alcaic. 


§  322,  323.  APPENDIX. — GRAMMATICAL  FIGURES.  861 


APPENDIX 


GRAMMATICAL  FIGURES. 

§  333.  Certain  deviations  from  the  regular  form  and  con- 
struction of  words,  are  called  grammatical  figures.  These  may 
relate  either  to  Orthography  and  Etymology,  or  to  Syntax. 

I.    FIGURES  OF  ORTHOGRAPHY  AND  ETYMOLOGY. 

These  are  distinguished  by  the  general  name  of  metaplasm. 

1.  Prosthesis  is  the  prefixing  of  a  letter  or  syllable  to  a  word ;  as,  gndtus,  for 
ndtus;  tetul%  for  iuli.  These,  however,  are  rather  the  ancient  customary  forms, 
from  which  those  now  in  use  were  formed  by  aphseresis. 

2.  Aphceresis  is  the  taking  of  a  letter  or  syllable  from  the  beginning  of  a 
word  f  as,  's<,  for  est ;  rdbonem,  for  arrdbonem. 

3.  Epenthesis  is  the  insertion  of  a  letter  or  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word; 
as,  dlituum,  for  dlituni;  Mdvors,  for  Mars. 

4.  Syncdpe  is  the  omission  of  a  letter  or  syllable  in  the  middle  of  a  word;  as, 
detcm,  for  deOrurn ;  meilm  factiim,  for  meorum  factoi'um;  scecla,  for  scedila;  Jleitif 
for  fievisti;  repostus,  for  repdsitus  ;  aspris,  for  aspens. 

5.  Crasis  is  the  contraction  of  two  vowels  into  one ;  as,  c5go,  for  cddgo ;  nil, 
for  nihtl. 

6.  Paragoge  is  the  addition  of  a  letter  or  syllable  to  the  end  of  a  word;  as, 
med,  for  me ;  dandier,  for  claudi. 

7.  Apocdpe  is  the  omission  of  the  final  letter  or  syllable  of  a  word;  as,  meti', 
for  mene  ;  Antoni,  for  Antonii.  t 

8.  ^7i<j7Aesis  is  the  substitution  of  one  letter  for  another;' as,  oUi,  for  illi; 
optUmus,  for  optimus ;  afficio,  for  adficio.  0  is  often  thus  used  for  m,  especially 
after  v ;  as,  voltus,  for  vultus ;  servom,  for  servum.     So  after  qu ;  as,  ceqtunn,  for 


9.  MetatMsis  is  the  changing  of  the  order  of  letters  in  a  word;  as,  pisiris, 
for  pristis. 

n.    FIGURES  OF  SYNTAX. 

333.     The  figures  of  Syntax  are  ellipsis,  pleonasm,  enal- 
Idge,  and  hyperhaton. 

1.   (a.)  Ellipsis  is  the  omission  of  some  word  or  words  in  a  sen- 
tence ;  as, 

Aiunt,  scil.  hdmines.    Darius  Eystaspis,  soil,  fllius.    Cano,  scil.  Sgo.    Quid 
multa  f  scil.  d'lcam.     Ex  quo,  scil.  tempdre.     Ferina,  scil.  caiv. 

{b.)   Elhpsis  includes  asyndeton,  zeugma,  syllepsis,  and  prolepsis. 
(1.)    -4s^?i<:?eton  is  the  omission  of  the  copulative  conjunction;  as,  dbiit,ex- 
cessit,  evdsit,  erupii  scil.  et.  Cic.    This  is  called  in  pure  Latin  dissdluiio. 
81 


y62  APPENDIX. — ^PIGUEES    OP   SYNTAX.  §323. 

(2.)  (a.)  Zeu^a  is  the  nmtmg  of  two  nouns  or  two  infinitives  to  a  verb, 
which,  as  to  its  meaning,  is  applicable  to  only  one  of  them ;  as,  Pacem  an  hel- 
ium ffereiis:  {Sail.)  ^here  gerens  is  applicable  to  bellum  only,  while />aceffi  re- 
quires dgere.  Sempeme  in  sanguine,  ferro,  fugd  vers^lmurf  (Id.)  where  the 
verb  does  not  properly  apply  to  ftrro. 

(J.)  Nlgo  is  often  thus  used  with  two  propositions,  one  of  which  is  affirma.- 
tive ;  as,  Negant  Ccesdrem  mansurum,  postuldtdque  interpOsita  esse,  for  dicuntque 
postuidta...  Cic.    See  §  209,  Note  4. 

(c.)  When  an  adjective  or  verb,  referring  to  two  or  more  nouns,  agrees  with 
one,  and  is  understood  with  the  rest,  the  construction  is  also  sometimes  called 
zeugma,  but  more  commonly  syllepsis ;  as,  Et  genus,  et  virtus,  nisi  cum  re,  vilior 
alga  est.  Hor.  Caper  tibi  salvus  ei  hcsdi.  Virg.  Quamvis  ille  niger,  quamvis  iu 
Candida  esses.  Id. 

(3.)  Syllepsis  is  when  an  adjective  or  verb,  belonging  to  two  or  more  nouns 
of  different  genders,  persoift,  or  numbers,  agrees  with  one  rather  than  another; 
as,  Attoniti  ndiitdte  patent  Baucis,  timldusqus  Philemon.  Ovid.  ProcumbU 
uterque  pronus  humi,  i.  e.  Deucalion  ei  Pyrrha.  Id.  Sustiillmus  mdnus  et  ggo 
et  Balbus.  Cic.  So,  Ipse  cum  fratre  ddesse  jussi  siimus.  Id.  Pr^'ectisque  dmi- 
ciilo  el  Uteris.  Curt   See  §§  205,  R.  2,  and  209,  R.  12,  (3.)  and  (7.) 

(4.)  Prdlepsis  is  when  the  parts,  differing  in  number  or  person  from  the 
whole,  are  placed  after  it,  the  verb  or  adjective  not  being  repeated;  as,  Prin- 
cipes  utrinmie  pugnam  ciibant,  ab  Sdblnis  Mettius  Curtius,  ab  Romdnis  Hostus 
Hostllius.  Liv.  Bdni  qudniam  convenimus  ambo,  tu  cdldmos  injldre,  ego  dicere 
versus.  Virg. 

2.  (a.)  Pleonasm  is  using  a  greater  number  of  words  than  is  neces- 
sary to  express  the  meaning ;  as, 

Sic  ore  Idcuta  est.  Virg.  Qui  magis  vere  vincere  quam  diu  imperare  malit  Liv. 
Nemo  unus.  Cic.   Forte  jorUind.  Id.    Prudens  sevens.  Ter. 

(&.)  Under  pleonasm  are  included  parelcon,  polysyndeton^  hendi- 
adys,  and  periphrasis. 

(1.)  Pdrelcon  is  the  addition  of  an  unnecessary  syllable  or  particle  to  pro- 
noims,  verbs,  or  adverbs;  as,  egdmet,  dgedum,  fortassean.  Such  additions, 
however,  usually  modify  the  meaning  in  some  degree. 

(2.)  Polpsyndeion  is  a  redundancy  of  conjunctions ;  as,  Una  ^'wrosque  Ndtus- 
que  Tuunt  creJerque  prdcellis  Africus.  Virg. 

(3.)  Eendiddys  is  the  expression  of  an  idea  by  two  nouns  connected  by  e<, 
-que,  or  atque,  instead  of  a  noun  and  a  limiting  adjective 'or  genitive;  as,  Pate- 
ris  Ididmus  el  auro,  for  aureis  pdteris.  Virg.  Libro  et  silveslri  siibere  clausam^ 
for  libro  suberis.  Id.     Cristis  et  auro.  Ovid.    Met.  3,  32. 

(4.)  PeripJirdsis  or  circumldcutio  is  a  circuitous  mode  of  expression;  as,  T?- 
nei-i  foetus  ovium,  i.  e.  agni.  Virg. 

3.  (a.)  Enalldge  is  a  change  of  words,  or  a  substitution  of  one  gen- 
der, number,  case,  person,  tense,  mood,  or  voice  of  the  same  word  for 
another. 

[h.)  En  all  age  includes  antimeria^  heterosis^  antiptosis,  synesiSy  and 
anacolulhon. 

(1.)  Antimeria  is  the  use  of  one  part  of  speech  for  another,  or  the  abstract 
for  the  concrete ;  as,  Nosti-um  istud  vivere  triste,  for  nostra  vita.  Pers.  Aliud 
eras.  Id.    Coujugium  rfci!e6t<.*  for  conjugem.  Virg. 

(2.)  Heterosis  is  the  use  of  one  form  of  noun,  pronouuj  verb,  etc.,  for  another; 
as,  £qo  qudque  una  pereo,  quod  mihi  est  carius,  for  qui  mihi  sum  cdrior.  Ter. 


§  324.     APPENDIX. TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETORIC.      363 

Roraanus  proelio  victor,  for  Romdni  viciores.  Liv.  Many  words  are  used  by  the 
poets  ill  the  plunil  instead  of  the  singular;  asj  colla,  corda,  ora,  etc.  'See  ^  98. 
Me  ivuncus  illapsus  cerebro  sustulerat,  for  sustuhsset.  Hor.    See  §  259,  R.  4. 

(3.)  Antiptosis  is  the  use  of  one  case  for  another;  as,  Cui  nunc  cognomen 
IUlo,  for  lalus.  Virg.  ^  204,  R.  8.  Uxor  invicti  Jovis  esse  nescis,  for  te  esse  vxo- 
rem.  Hor.  §  210,  R.  6. 

(4.)  Synesis^  or  synthesis,  is  adapting  the  construction  to  the  sense  of  a  word, 
rather  than  to  its  gender  or  number;  as,  Subeunt  Te^cea  juveiitus  auxllio  tardi. 
Stat.  Concursus  popiili  mirantiura  quid  rei  est.  Liv.  Pars  in  crucem  acti.  Sail. 
Ubi  illic  est  scelus,  qui  me  perdiditi  Ter.  Jd mea  mtntme  refert,  qui  sum  ndtu 
maximus.  Id.   See  §  205,  R.  3,  (1.)  and  (3.),  and  §  206,  (12.) 

(5.)  Andcdluihon  is  a  disagreement  in  construction  between  the  latter  and 
former  part  of  a  sentence ;  as,  Nam  nos  omnes,  guibus  est  dlicunde  dliquis  objectm 
Idbos,  omne  quod  est  interea  tempus,  priusquam  id  rescitum  est,  lucro  est.  Ter. 
In  this  example,  the  writer  began  as  if  he  intended  to  say  lucro  hdbemuSj  and 
ended  as  if  he  had  said  nobis  omnibus,  leaving  nos  omnes  without  its  verb. 

4.  (a.)  Hyperhdton  is  a  transgression  of  the  usual  order  of  words 
or  clauses. 

(6.)  Hyperbaton  includes  anastrophe^  hysteron  proterouj  Jippallagef 
synchysisj  tmesis,  and  parenthesis. 

(1.)  Anastrdphe  is  an  inversion  of  the  order  of  two  words;  as,  Transtra  per 
et  remos,  for  per  transtra.  Virg.  Collo  ddre  brdcliia  circum,  for  drcumddre.  Id. 
Nox  erit  una  super,  for  superent.  Ovid.     Et  fdcit  are,  for  drefdcit.  Lucr. 

(2.)  Hysteron  p7'6teron  is  reversing  the  natural  order  of  the  sense;  as,  Mdrid- 
mur,  et  in  media  arma  rudmus.  Virg.    Vdlet  atque  vlvit.  Ter. 

(3.)  Eypalldge  is  an  interchange  of  constnictions ;  as,  In  ndvafert  dnimus 
mutdtas  aicere  formas  corpdra,  for  coipdra  mutdta  in  ndvas  formas.  Ovid.  Ddre 
classibus  Austros,  for  ddre  classes  Austris.  Virg. 

(4.)  /St/nc/«sfsis  is  a  confused  position  of  words;  as,  Saxa  vdcant  Itdli,  mSdiis 
qiuB  in  jluciibus,  dras,  for  quce  saxa  in  mediis  Jluctibus,  Mali  vdcant  dras.  Virg. 

(5.)  Tmesis  or  diacdpe  is  the  separation  of  the  parts  of  a  compound  word ; 
as,  Septem  subjecta  trioni  gens,  for  septentrioni.  Virg.  Quce  me  cumque  vdcant 
terrce.  Id.     Per  mthi,  jier,  inquam,  grdtum  feceris.  Cic. 

(6.)  Parenthesis  or  dialysis  is  the  insertion  of  a  word  or  words  in  a  sentence 
interrupting  the  natural  connection;  as,  Tityre  dum  redeo,  (brSvis  est  via,) 
pasce  cdpeltas.  Virg. 

Remark.  To  the  above  may  be  added  archaism  and  Hellenism^ 
which  belong  both  to  the  figures  of  etymology  and  to  those  of  syntax. 

(1.)  Archaism  is  the  use  of  ancient  forms  or  constructions;  as,  auld^,  for 
auke ;  smdti,  for  sendtus ;  fuat,  for  sit ;  prdhibesso,  for  prdhibuero  ;  imjjetrassere, 
for  impetrdturum  esse ;  /drier,  for  fdri  ;  nenu,  for  non ;  endo,  for  in ; —  Operam 
dbutitur,  for  dperd.  Ter.    Quid  tibi  hanc  curdtio  est  rem  ?  Plant. 

{2.)  Hellenism  is  the  use  of  Greek  forms  or  constructions;  as,  Helene,  for 
Helena;  Aniiphon,  for  AntipJu) ;  auras  (gen.),  for  auras;  Pallddos,  Palldda,  for 
Pallddis,  Pallddem ;  Trodsin,  Troddas,  for  Trdddibus,  Trdddes  ; — Abstineto  ird- 
rum.  Hor.  "  Tempus  desistere  pugnce.  Virg. 

§  O'*^:.  (1.)  To  the  grammatical  figures  may  not  improperly  be  subjoined  cer- 
tain others,  which  are  often  referred  to  in  philological  works,  and  which  are  called 

TROPES  AND  FIGURES   OF  RHETORIC. 

(2.)  A  rhetorical  figure  is  a  mode  of  expression  different  from  the  direct  and 
simple  way  of  expressing  the  same  sense.  The  turning  of  a  word  from  its 
original  and  customary  meaning,  is  called  a  trope. 


364      APPENDIX. TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  KHETOKIC.     §  324. 

1.  (a.)  A  metaphor  is  the  transferring  of  a  word  froTQ  the  object  to  which  it 
properly  belongs,  and  applying  it  to  another,  to  which  that  object  has  some 
analogy' ;  as,  Ridet  (iffer,  The  field  smiles.  Virg.  jEtas  anrea,  The  golden  age. 
Ovid.  Xanfragia  fortuius.  The  ^\Teck  of  fortune.  Cic.  Mtntis  oculi.  The  eyes 
of  the  mind.  Id.  Virtus  unlmum  ffloi-ue  stiraulis  concUat.  The  harshness  of  a 
metaphor  is  often  softened  by  means  of  quasi,  tamquam,  guldam,  or  ut  iia  dicam ; 
as,  Jn  una  phitOsdphid  quasi  tabernaciilum  vltce  smz  <xU6carunU  Id.  Opimum 
quoddam  et  tamquam  adipatae  dictionis  genus.  Id. 

(b.)  Cdtachresis  or  abusio  is  a  bold  or  harsh  metaphor;  as,  Vir  grSgis  ipse 
caper.  Virg.    £urus  per  Siculas  equitavit  undas.  Hor. 

2.  Metonymy  is  substituting  the  name  of  an  object  for  that  of  another  to 
which  it  has  a  certain  relation ;  as  the  cause  for  the  effect,  the  container  for 
what  is  contained,  the  property  for  the  substance,  the  si^i  for  the  thing  signi- 
fied, and  their  contraries ;  the  parts  of  the  body  for  certain  affections ;  the  pos- 
sessor for  the  thing  possessed;  place  and  time'for  the  persons  or  thmgs  which 
they  comprise,  etc. ;  as,  Jfortdtes,  for  homines:  Virg.  Amor  dun  Martis,  i.  e. 
beUi.  Id.  Fruges  Cererem  appeUhmus,  vlnum  auiem  Liberum.  Cic.  CCtpio  vigi- 
liam  meawi  fi^i  trddere,  i.  e.  meam  curam.  Id.  Pallida  nwrs.  Hor.  Eausit  p»- 
teram,  i.  e.  vlnum.  Virg.  Vina  c6rdnant,  i.  e.  pateram.  Id.  Necte  temos  colores, 
i.  e.  tria  fila  dtversi  cdloris.  Id.  Cedant  arma  to^ae,  i.  e.  bellum  pad.  Cic. 
Saeciila  mitesceiU^  i.  e.  hdmines  in  soeculis.  Virg.  Vlvat  Pdcuvius  vd  Nestora 
totum.  Juv.  Doctrind  Graecia  nos  superabat,  for  Grceci  superdbant.  Cic.  Pagi 
centum  Suerorum  ad  rlpas  Rhcni  consederant,  for  pdgorum  inc6lce.  Caes.  Tempora 
dmlcorum,  for  res  adverste.  Cic.  Claudius  lege  proedidtorid  vendlis  pependit, 
for  Claudii  prcedium.  Suet.  Vici  ad  Janum  medium  sedentes,  for  Jdni  vi- 
cum.  Cic. 

3.  Synecdoche  is  putting  a  whole  for  a  part,  a  genus  for  a  species,  a  singular 
for  a  plural,  and  their  contraries;  also  the  material  for  the  thing  made  of  it; 
a  definite  for  an  indefinite  number,  etc.;  as,  ¥ ontem  Jerebant.  Id.  Tectum,  for 
ddmus.  Id.  Armdto  milite  complent,  for  armaiis  miliiibus.  Id.  Ferrum,  for  gld- 
dius.  Id.  Qui  C6rinthiis  operibus  abundant,  i.  e.  vdsis.  Cic.  Urbem,  urbem,  mi 
Rufe,  cdle,  i.  e.  Romam.  Cic.    Centrun  puer  ariium,  i.  e.  muUdrum. 

4.  Irony  is  the  inten^onal  use  of  words  which  express  a  sense  contrary  to 
that  which  the  writer  or  speaker  means  to  convey;  as,  Salve  bone  vir,  curasd 
probe.  Ten  Egregiam  vera  laudem,  et  spolia  ampla  referiisj  tuque^  puergue 
tuus.  Virg. 

5.  Hyperbdle  is  the  magnifymo^  or  diminishing  of  a  thing  beyond  the  truth; 
as,  Ipse  arduus,  altdque  pulsai  sldera.  Virg.   Ocior  Euro.  Id. 

6.  Metalcpsis  is  the  including  of  several  tropes  in  one  word ;  as,  PoU  dltquot 
aristas.  Virg.     Here  arisias  is  put  for  messes,  and  this  for  annos. 

7.  (a.)  Allegory  is  a  consistent  series  of  metaphors,  designed  to  illustrate  one 
subject  by  another;  as,  0  ndcis,  referent  in  mare  ie  novi  fiuctus.  Kor. 

(6.)  An  obscure  allegory  or  riddle  is  called  an  cenigma;  as,  Die,  quibus  in 
terris  tres  2^teat  cadi  spdiium  non  amplius  vinos.  Virg. 

8.  Anidndmasia  is  using  a  proper  noun  for  a  common  one,  and  the  contrary; 
as,  Irus  et  est  subifo,  qui  mddo  Croesus  erat,  for  pauper  and  dives.  Ovid.  So,  by 
periphrasis,  potor  Rhoddni,  for  Gallus.  Hor.  Eversor  Carthdginis,  for  Scipio. 
Quint.    EldqucntioB  princeps,  for  Cicero.  Id.     Tydides,  for  Diomedes.  \  u-g. 

9.  Litotes  is  a  mode  of  expressing  something  by  denying  the  contrary;  as, 
Non  laudo,  I  blame.  Ter.    JVon  innoxia  verba.  Virg. 

10.  Aniiphrdsis  is  using  a  word  in  a  sense  opposite  to  its  proper  meaning; 
as, ^un  sacra  yu»ie5.  Virg. 

11.  Euphemism  is  the  use  of  softened  language  to  express 'what  is  offensive 
or  distressing;  as,  St  quid  accidisset  Coesdri,  i.  e.  si  mortuus  esset.  Veil. 

12.  Antdnacldsis  or  punning  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  in  different  senses; 
as,  Quis  neget  JEneoe  ndtum  de  stirpe  Neronem  ?  Sustulit  Uf  mdtrem,  siistuht 
iUe  pairem.  Epigr.    Amari  jucundum  est,  si  cOretur  ne  quid  insii  amari.  Cic. 


§  324.     APPENDIX. — ^TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OP  RHETORIC.      365 

13.  Andphdra  or  Spdndphdra  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  beginning  of 
successive  clauses ;  as,  Nihilne  te  nocturnum  prcesldium  pdldtii,  nihil  urbis  vlgi- 
licp,  nihil  timor  pdpuli,  etc.  Cic.  Te,  dulcis  conjux,  te,  solo  in  lltdre  secum,  te, 
veniente  die,  te,  decedente,  cdnebat.  Vii'g. 

14.  Epistrdphe  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  end  of  successive  clauses ; 
as,  Poems  pdpulm  Romdnus  justltid  vicit,  armis  Aacit,  liberdlitdte  vicit.  Cic.  In 
pure  Latin  this  figure  is  called  conversio. 

15.  Sympldce  is  the  repetition  of  a  word  at  the  beginning,  and  of  another  at 
the  end,  of  successive  clauses,  and  hence  it  includes  the  anaphora  and  the 
epistrophe ;  as,  Quis  leaem  tulit  ?  Rtdlus :  Quis  mdjorem  pdpuli  partem  suffrd- 
giis  prlvdvit  f  Ruilus :  Quis  cdmitiis  prcefuit  ?  Idem  KuUus.  Cic. 

16.  Epdndlepsis  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  or  sentence  after  interven- 
ing words  or  clauses.    See  Virg.  Geor.  II.  4 — 7. 

17.  Anddiplosis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  at  the  end  of  one  clause,  and  the 
beginning  of  another ;  as,  Sequttur  pulcherrimus  Astur,  Astur  eqvo  fldens.  Virg. 
A.  10,  180.  Nunc  etiam  avdes  in  hdrum  conspectum  venire,  venire  audes  in  horum 
conspectum  ?  Cic.     This  is  sometimes  called  epdnastrdphe. 

18.  EpdnMipldsis  is  the  use  of  the  same  word  both  at  the  beginning  and  end 
of  a  sentence ;  as,  Crescit  dnuyr  nummi,  quantum  ipsa  pecunia  crescit.  Juv. 

19.  Epdnddos  or  regressio  is  the  repetition  of  the  same  words  in  an  inverted 
order;  as,  Crudelis  mater  mdgis,  an  puer  imprdbusille?  Imprdbus  ille  puer,  cru- 
delis  tu  qudque,  mdter.  Virg. 

20.  Epizeuxis  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  word  for  the  sake  of  emphasis ;  as, 
Excltate,  excitate  eum  ab  inferis.  Cic.  Ah  Corydon,  Cory^don,  qua  te  dementia 
cepit  f  Virg.     Ibimus,  ibimus,  utcumque  prcecedes.  Hor. 

21.  Climax  is  a  gradual  amplification  by  means  of  a  continued  anadiplosis, 
each  successive  clause  beginning  with  the  conclusion  of  that  which  precedes 
it;  as,  QucB  reUqua  spes  manet  libertdtis,  si  illis  et  quodlibet,  licet;  et  quod  licet^ 
possunt;  ei  quod  possunt,  audent;  et  quod  audent,  vobis  molestum  non  est?  Cic. 
This,  in  pure  Latin,  is  called  grdddtio. 

22.  Incrementum  is  an  amplification  without  a  strici  climax ;  as,  Fdctnus  est, 
vinclri  clvem  Romdnum  ;  scetus,  verberdri  ;  prope  parricldium,  necdri  ;  quid  dl- 
cam  in  crucem  tolli  f  Cic. 

23.  Polyptoton  is  the  repetition  of  a  wordT  in  difierent  cases,  genders,  num- 
bers, tenses,  etc. ;  as,  Jam  cUpeus  cUpeis,  umbdne  repellitur  umbo ;  ense  minax 
ensis,  pede  pes,  et  cusplde  cuspis.  Stat. 

24.  Paregmenon  is  the  use  of  several  words  of  the  S'ame  origin,  in  one  sen- 
tence ;  as,  Abesse  non  pdtest,  quin  ejusdem  hdminis  sit,  qui  improbos  probet,  pro- 
bos  improbare.  Cic.    Istam  pugnara  pugnabo.  Plant. 

25.  Par^«<5mdsia  is  the  use  of  words  which  resemble  each  other  in  sound ; 
as,  Amm"  et  melle  et  felle  est  fecundissimus.  Plant.  Clvem  bondrum  artiura, 
hdndrum  partium.  Cic.  Amantes  sunt  amentes.  Ter.  This  figure  is  sometimes 
called  agnomindtio. 

26.  HdmoeoprdpMron  or  alliteration  is  the  use  in  the  same  sentence  of  sev- 
eral words  beginning  with  the  same  letter^  as,  0  Tite,  tuie  Tdti,  tlbi  tanta, 
tyranne,  tulisti.  Enn.    Neu  patrice  vdlidas  in  viscSra  vertUe  vires.  Virg. 

27.  Antithesis  is  the  placing  of  different  or  opposite  words  or  sentiments  in 
contrast;  as,  Hujus  drdtidnis  difficllius  est  exitum  quam  princlpium  invenlre. 

.  Cic.     Csesar  benfeficiis  ac  munlficentia  magnus  hdbebdtur;  integrltate  vitae 
Cato.  Sail. 

28.  Oxymoron  unites  words  of  contrary  significations,  thus  producing  a  seem- 
ing contradiction ;  as,  Concordia  discors.  Hor.   Quum  tdcent,  cldmant.  Cic. 

29.  Syndnpmia  is  the  use  of  diff'erent  words  or  expressions  having  the  same 
import;  as,  Nonferam,  non  pdtiar,  non  sinam.  Cic.  Promitto,  redpio,  spon^, 
deo.  Id. 

81* 


366      APPENDIX. TROPES  AND  FIGURES  OF  RHETORIC.     §  325. 

30.  Pdrdbdla  or  Simile  is  the  comparison  of  one  thing  with  another;  as,  Ri- 
pente  ie,  tamquam  serpens  e  l^iiHUis,  dcuUsendnentibus,  tnfMo  coUo,  tumidis  cer^ 

victbus,  iniulisti.  Cic. 

31.  Erotesis  is  an  earnest  question,  and  often  implies  a  strong  affirmation  of 
the  contrary ;  as,  Crediiis  dvectos  hosies  ?  Virg.  Eeu !  quoa  me  oequdra  ptossunt 
acctperet  Id. 

32.  Ipdnorihosis  or  Correctio  is  the  recalling  of  a  word,  in  order  to  place  a 
stronger  or  more  significant  one  in  its  stead;  as,  Filium  unlcum  dddlescerUulum 
habeo :  ah  !  quid  dixi  f  me  habere  ?  Imo  haboi.  Ter. 

33.  Aj)dsidpesis,  Eeiicentia,  or  Interruptio,  is  leaving  a  sentence  unfinished 
in  consequence  of  some  emotion  of  the  mind;  as,  Quos  ego — sed  motos  proestat 
componere  Jtucitis.  Virg. 

34.  Prdsdpdjxeia  or  personification  represents  inanimate  things  as  acting  or 
speaking,  and. persons  dead  or  absent  as  alive  and  present;  as,  Quce  (pati-ia) 
tecum,  Giiilina,  sic  dyit.  Cic.   Virttis  sumii  aut  ponit  secures.  Hor. 

35.  -Apostrdphe  is  a  turning  off"  from  the  regular  course  of  the  subject,  to  ad- 
dress some  person  or  thing;  as,  VipoUtur;  quid  non  mortdlia  pectdra  cogiSf 
auri  sa<:ra  fames !  Virg. 

36.  Pdrdleipsis  is  a  pretended  omission  of  something,  in  order  to  render  it 
more  observed.    See  Cic.  Cat.  1,  6,  14. 

37.  Ejjfphonema  or  Accldmdtio  is  an  exclamation  or  grave  reflection  on  some- 
thing said  before ;  as,  TanUe  molis  erat  Momdnam  condere  gentem.  Virg. 

38.  Ecpkonesis  or  Excldmdiio  shows  some  violent  emotion  of  the  mind ;  as, 
0  tempora  !   0  mores  ! 

39.  Apdria,  Didpdresis,  or  DShitdtio,  expresses  a  doubt  in  regard  to  what  is 
to  be  said  or  done ;  as,  Quos  accedam,  aut  quos  appellevi  f  SaU. 

40.  Prdlepsis  is.  the  anticipation  of  an  objection  before  it  is  made,  or  of  an 
event  before  it  occurs;  as,   Verum  anceps  pugncB  fuerai  fortuna.    Fuisset: 

Quern  metui  morituraV  Virg. 

§  33o.  To  the  figures  of  rhetoric  may  be  subjoined  the  follow- 
ing terms,  used  to  designate  defects  or  blemishes  in  style : — 

1.  Barbarism  is  either  the  use  of  a  foreign  word,  or  a  violation  of  the  rules 
of  orthograph}',  etymology^  or  prosody ;  as,  rigordsuSj  for  rigidus  or  severus; 
domminus,  for  ddinUius ;  davi,  for  dedi. 

2.  Solecism  is  a  violation  of  the  rules  of  syntax;  as,  VSnus  pulcher  ;  vos  invt- 
demtts. 

3.  Neotensm  is  the  use  of  words  or  phrases  introduced  by  authors  living 
subsequently  to  the  best  ages  of  Latinity;  as,  murdrum^  a  murder;  considiuld- 
rius,  a  constable. 

4.  Tautology  is  a  repetition  of  the  same  meaning  in  different  words ;  as,  Jam 
vos  aciem,  et  proelia,  et  hostem  poscitis.  Sil. 

5.  Amphibolia  is  the  use  of  equivocal  words  or  constructions;  as,  Galltis,  a 
Gaul,  or  a  cock.    Aio  te,  JEdciwa,,  Komanos  vincere  posse.  Quint. 

6.  Idioiism  is  a  construction  peculiar  to  one  or  more  languages :  thus,  the 
ablative  after  comparatives  is  a  Latinism.  When  a  peculiaritv  oi'  one  language 
is  imitated  in  another,  this  is  also  called  idioiism.  Thus,.  Milte  mihi  verbum, 
instead  of  Fa^:  me  cerii&rem,  is  an  Anglicism. 


§  326.    APPENDIX. — ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING TIME.     367 

ROMAN  MODE   OF  RECKONING. 

I.    OF  TIME. 

1.    The  Roman  Day. 

§  3^6.  (1.)  With  the  Romans,  as  with  us,  the  day  was  either 
civil  or  natural.  Their  civil  day,  like  ours,  extended  from  midnight 
to  midnight.  The  natural  day  continued  from  sunrise  to  sunset,  as, 
on  the  other  hand,  the  night  extended  from  sunset  to  sunrise.  The 
natural  day  and  night  were  each  divided  into  twelve  equal  parts  or 
hours,  which  were  consequently  of  different  length,  according  to  the 
varying  length  of  the  days  and  nights  in  the  successive  seasons  of  the 
year.  It  was  only  at  the  equinox  that  the  diurnal  and  nocturnal 
hours  of  the  Romans  were  equal  to  each  other,  as  each  was  then 
equal  to  the  twenty-fourth  part  of  the  civil  day. 

(2.)  In  the  Roman  camp  the  night  was  further  divided  into  four 
watches  [vigilice),  consisting  each  of  three  Roman  hours,  the  second 
and  fourth  watches  ending  respectively  at  midnight  and  at  sunrise. 

2.    The  Roman  Month  and  Year. 

(1.)  The  calendar  of  the  Romans,  as  rectified  by  Julius  Caesar, 
agreed  with  our  own  in  the  number  of  months,  and  of  the  days  in 
each,  according  to  the  following  table : — 

Januarius  .  31  days.  Mains  .  .  31  days.  September  30  days. 

Februarius  28  or  29.  Junius.  .  30     "  October  .  .  31     " 

Martius.  .  .  31  days.  Quintilis  31     "  November  30    " 

Aprilis  ...  30    "  Sextilis .  31     "  December  31    " 

In  early  times  the  Roman  year  began  with  March,  and  the  names 
Quintilis,  Sextilis,  September,  etc.,  indicated  the  distance  of  those 
months  from  the  commencement  of  the  year.  Quintilis  and  Sextilis 
were  afterwards  called  Julius  and  Augustus  in  honor  of  the  first  two 
emperors.  The  Romans,  instead  of  reckoning  in  an  uninterrupted 
series  from  the  first  to  the  last  day  of  a  month,  had  in  each  month 
three  points  or  periods  from  which  their  days  were  counted — the 
Calends,  the  Nones,  and  the  Ides.  The  Calends  ( Culendce),  were  al- 
ways the  first  day  of  the  month.  The  Nones  (Nonce),  were  the  fifth, 
and  the  Ides  (Idus),  the  thirteenth;  except  in  March,  May,  July,  and 
October,  when  the  Nones  occurred  on  the  seventh  day,  and  the  Ides 
on  the  fifteenth. 

(2.)  They  always  counted  forward,  from  the  day  whose  date  was 
to  be  determined,  to  the  next  Calends,  Nones,  or  Ides,  and  desig- 
nated the  day  by  its  distance  before  such  point.  After  the  first  day 
of  the  month,  therefore,  they  began  to  reckon  so  many  days  before 
the  Nones ;  after  the  Nones,  so  many  days  before  the  Ides ;  and  after 
the  Ides,  so  many  before  the  Calends,  of  the  next  month. 

Thus,  the  second  of  January  was  denoted  by  quarto  Nonas  Jdnunrias,  or 
JanMni,  soil,  die  ante :  the  third,  tertio  Nonas ;  the  Iburth,  pridie  Nonas ; 
and  the  fifth,  Nmis.     The  sixth  was  denoted  by  octavo  Idm ;  the  seventh, 


868  APPENDIX. ^KOMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING ^TIME.  §  326. 

Bepttmo  Idus ;  and  80  on  to  the  thirteenth,  on  which  the  Ides  fell.  The  four- 
teenth was  denoted  bv  undemgesimo  Cdlendas  Februdrias,  or  Februdrii ;  and  so 
on  to  the  end  of  the  month. 

(3.)  The  day  preceding  the  Calends,  Nones,  and  Ides,  was  termed 
pridie  Calendas,  etc.,  soil,  ante :  in  designating  the  other  days,  both 
the  day  of  the  Calends,  etc.,  and  that  whose  date  was  to  be  deter- 
mined, were  reckoned ;  hfence  the  second  day  before  the  Calends, 
etc,  was  called  tei-tio,  the  third  quarto,  etc. 

(4.)  To  reduce  the  Roman  calendar  to  our  own,  therefore,  when 
the  day  is  between  the  Calends  and  the  Nones  or  between  the  Nones 
and  the  Ides,  it  is  necessary  to  take  one  from  the  number  denoting 
the  distance  of  the  given  day  from  the  Nones  or  the  Ides,  and  to  sub- 
tract the  rAnainder  from  the  number  of  the  day  on  which  the  Nones 
or  Ides  fell  in  the  given  month. 

Thxxs,  to  determine  the  day  equivalent  to  IV.  Nonas  Janudrias,  we  take 
1  from  4,  and  subtract  the  remainder,  3,  from  5,  the  day  on  which  the  Nones 
of  January  fell  (i.  e.  4 — 1=3,  and  5 — 3=2):  this  gives  2,  or  the  second  of  Jan- 
uary', for  the  day  in  question.  So  VI.  Idus  Apr'dis :  the  Ides  of  April  falling 
upon  the  13th,  we  take  (6 — 1,  i.  e.)  5  from  13,  which  leaves  8  (i.  e.  6 — 1=5, 
and  13 — 5=:8) :  the  e:ipression,  therefore,  denotes  the  8th  of  AprU. 

(a.)  In  reckoning  the  days  before  the  Calends,  as  they  are  not  the 
last  day  of  the  current  month,  but  the  first  of  the  following,  it  is 
necessary  to  subtract  two  from  the  ijumber  denoting  the  distance  of 
the  given  day  from  the  Calends  of  the  following  month,  and  to  take 
the  remainder  from  the  number  of  days  in  the  month. 

Thus,  XV.  Oil  QuinVdes  is  15—2=13,  and  30—13=17,  i.  e.  the  Roman  date 
XV.  Cal.  Quint,  is  equivalent  to  the  17th  of  June. 

(&.)  To  reduce  our  calendar  to  the  Roman,  the  preceding  method 
is  to  be  reversed.  Thus  when  the  given  day  is  between  the  Calends 
and  the  Nones  or  between  the  Nones  and  the  Ides,  (unless  it  be  the 
day  before  the  Nones  or  the  Ides),  we  are  to  add  one  to  the  number 
denoting  the  day  of  the  month,  according  to  our  reckoning,  on  whicfi 
the  Nones  or  Ides  fell.  But  if  the  day  is  after  the  Ides,  (unless  it  be 
the  last  day  of  the  month),  we  must  add  two  to  the  number  of  days 
in  the  month,  and  then  subtract  the  number  denoting  the  day  of  the 
mouth  as  expressed  in  our  reckoning.  The  remainder  will  be  the 
day  before  the  Nones,  Ides  or  Calends. 

Thus  to  find  the  Roman  date  corresponding  to  the  third  of  April,  we  have 
5+1 — 3=3;  the  required  date,  therefore,  is  ///.  Non.  Apr. — To  find  the  proper 
Roman  expression  for  our  tenth  of  December  we  have  13+1—10=4;  the  date, 
therefore,  is  IV.  Id.  Dec. — The  Roman  expression  for  the  22d  of  August,  in 
pvirsuance  of  the  above  rule,  is  found  thus,  31+2 — 22=11,  and  the  date  is  XI. 
Cal.  Sept. 

(5.)  In  leap  year,  both  the  24th  and  2oth  of  February  were  called 
the  sixth  before  the  Calends  of  March.  The  24th  was  called  dies 
hisextuSy  and  the  year  itself  annus  bisextus,  bissextile  or  leap  year. 

(a.)  The  day  after  the  Calends,  etc.,  was  sometimes  called  postrUUe  cdlen- 
das, etc. 

{b.)  The  names  of  the  months  are  properly  adjectives,  though  often  used  as 
noims,  mensis  being  vmderstood. 


J 


§  326.    APPENDIX. ROMAN  MODE  OF  RECKONING TIME.     369 

(6.)   The  correspondence  of  our  calendar  -witli  that  of  the  Romans 
is  exhibited  in  the  following 

TABLE. 


1       ^«Z/s  0/ 

:Mar.  Mai. 

Jan.  Aug. 

Apr.     J  UN. 

our  months. 

Jul.    Oct. 

Dkc. 

Sei't.   Nov. 

Febk. 

1 

Calend£B. 

Calendse. 

Calendse. 

Calendae. 

2 

VI.    Nonas. 

IV.    Nonas. 

IV.    Nonas. 

IV.    Nonas. 

8 

V. 

m. 

III.        " 

III.        " 

4 

IV.        " 

Pridie   " 

Pridie   " 

Pridie  " 

5 

III.        " 

Nonae. 

Nonae. 

Nonae. 

6 

Pridie  Non. 

VIII.  Idus. 

VIII.  Idus. 

VIII.  Idus. 

7 

Nonae. 

VII.      " 

VII.      " 

VII.      " 

8 

VIII.  Idus. 

VI.        " 

VI. 

VI.       " 

9 

VII.      " 

V. 

V.          " 

V. 

10 

VI. 

IV. 

.IV.        « 

IV,       " 

11 

V.          " 

III.        " 

III.      " 

HI.     " 

12 

IV.        " 

Pridie   " 

Pridie   " 

Pridie  " 

13 

III.        " 

Idus. 

Idus.     • 

Idus. 

14 

Pridie  Id. 

XIX.   Cal. 

XVIII.  Cal. 

XVI.  Cal. 

15 

Idus. 

XVIII.  " 

XVII.    « 

XV.      " 

16 

XVII.  Cal. 

XVII.    " 

XVI.     " 

XIV.    " 

17 

XVI.     " 

XVI.     " 

XV.      " 

XIII.    " 

18 

XV.      " 

XV.      " 

XIV.     " 

XII.      " 

19 

XIV.     " 

XIV.     " 

XIII.     " 

XL       " 

20 

XIII.     " 

XIII.     " 

XII.      " 

X.         " 

21 

XII.      " 

XII.      " 

XI.        " 

IX.       " 

22 

XI.        " 

XI.        " 

X.         « 

VIII.    «» 

23 

X.         " 

X.         " 

IX.        " 

VII.      « 

24 

IX.        ". 

IX. 

VIII.     " 

VI.       " 

25 

VIII.     " 

VIII.     " 

VII.      " 

V.        " 

26 

VII.      " 

VII.       " 

VI.        " 

IV.       " 

27 

VI. 

VI.        " 

V.          " 

•III.     " 

28 

V.         " 

V.         " 

IV.         " 

Pridie  "Mar 

29 

IV.        " 

IV.        " 

III.      " 

80 

III.      " 

III.      " 

Pridie  Cal. 

31 

Pridie  Cal. 

Pridie  Cal. 

(7.)  In  leap-year  the  last  sev^n  days  of  February  were  reckoned  thus: — 

23.  Vn.  Calendas  Martias.  27.    IV.  Cal  Mart. 

24.  bisexto  Cal  Mart.  28.    IIL  •  "        " 

25.  VI.  Cal  Mart.  29.    pridie  Cal  Mart. 

26.  V.      "        " 

(a.)  Hence  in  reducing  a  date  of  February  in  leap-year  to  the  Roman  date, 
for  the  first  23  days  we  proceed  according  to  the  preceding  rule  in  4,  (6.),  as  ii 
the  month  had  only  28  days.  The  24th  is  marited  as  bisexto  Cal  Mart.,  and  to 
obtain  the  proper  expression  for  the  remaining  five  days  we  regard  the  month 
as  having  29  days.  Thus  the  27th  of  February  in  leap-year  is  29-f-2 — 27=4, 
and  the  proper  Roman  expression  is  IV.  Cal  Mart. 

(6.)  On  the  other  hand,  to  reduce  a  Roman  date  of  February  in  leap-year  to 
our  date  we  reverse  the  above  process,  and  during  the  Nones  and  Ides  and 
until  the  VI ].  Calendas  Martias  we  reckon  the  month  to  have  only  28  days: — 
bisexto  Cul  Mart,  is  set  down  as  the  24th,  and  for  the  remaining  days  desig- 
nated as  VI.  V.  IV.  III.  and  pridie  Cal.  Mart,  we  reckon  the  month  to  have 
29  days.  Thus  IIL  Cal  Mart,  is  3—2=1,  and  29—1=28,  and  the  given  day  is 
equivalent  to  the  28th  of  February. 


870  APPENDIX. ^ROMAN  MODE  OF  BECKONING MONET.  §  327. 

(8.)  The  Latins  not  onlr  said  terft'o,  jTTwCe,  etc.,  Qilendas,  etc.,  but  also  ante 
dJeni  tertium,  etc.,  Gilendas,  etc. ;  and  the  latter  form  in  Cicero  and  Livv  is 
far  more  common  than  the  former,  and  is  usually  written  thus,  a.  d.  III. 
CaL,  etc. 

(9.)  The  expression  ante  diem  was  used  as  an  indeclinable  noun,  and  is 
joined  with  in  and  ex ;  as,  Consul  Ldt'nas  fenas  in  ante  diem  tertjum  Idas  Sex- 
tdis  edixit.  The  consul  appointed  the  Latin  festival  for  the  third  dav  before  the 
Ides  of  August.  Liv.  Stipplicatio  iiuUcta  est  ex  ante  diem  quintum  Jilus  Oct-obres. 
Id.     So,  Ad  pridie  Nonas  JJaUts.  Cic. 

(10.)  The  week  of  seven  days  {hebdd7nas\  was  not  in  use  among  the  Romans 
tinder  the  republic,  but  was  introduced  under  the  emperors.  The  days  of  the 
week  were  then  named  fh)m  the  planets;  dies  Solis,  Sunday;  dies  LUnce,  Mon- 
day; dies  Martis,  Tuesday;  dies  Mercurii,  Wednesday;  dies  Jdvis,  Thursday; 
dies  Feneris,. Friday;  dies  Satuj-ni,  Saturday. 

(11.)  The  term  nuTidiTice  (from  ndvem — dies)  denotes  the  regular  market  day 
at  Rome  when  the  coimtry  people  came  into  the  city ;  but  it  is  not  used  for  the 
purpose  of  denoting  the  period  of  eight  days  intervening  between  two  succes- 
sive market  days. 

(12.)  The  year  at  Rome  was  designated  by  the  names  of  the  consuls  for 
that  year.  Thus  Virgil  was  born,  M.  Licinio  Crasso  et  Cn.  Pompeio  Magna 
consutibus,  i.  e.  in  the  year  of  the  consulship  of  Crassus  and  Pompey.  But"  in 
Roman  authors  events  are  often  dated  from  the  year  in  which  "Rome  was 
founded,  which,  according  to  Varro,  was  in  the  7o3d  year  before  the  birth 
of  Christ.  This  period  was  designated  as  anno  urbis  condiioe,  and  by  ab- 
breviation; a.  u.  C.J  or  simply  u.  c,  and  sometimes  by  a.  alone,  before  the 
numerals. 

Thus  the  birth  of  Yirgil  ^ms  a.  u.  e.  684.  To  reduce  such  dates  to  our  reckoning,  if 
the  given  number  is  le«s  than  754,  we  gubtract  it  from  the  latter  number,  and  the  dif- 
ference is  the  required  year  before  Christ.  The  birth  of  Virgil  therefore  is  754 — 684=70 
before  Christ. — But  if  the  number  of  the  Roman  year  exce^  753,  we  deduct  753  from 
the  given  number,  and  the  remainder  is  the  year  after  Christ.  For  example,  the  em.- 
peror  Augustus  died  a.  u.  c.  767,  and  the  corresponding  year  of  our  era  is  767 — 753=14. 


n.    TABLES   OF  MONEY, 


Of  the  As. 


WEIGHT,  AND  MEASURE. 

i  ^  V    ^ 

§  oS  •  •  The  Romans  used  this  word  {Js)  to  denlote,  I.  The  copper  coin, 
whose  value  (in  the  time  of  Cicero)  was  about  one  cent  and  a  half  of  our 
money.  11.  The  unit  of  weight  (libra),  or  of  measure  (jiigemm).  III.  Any 
unit  or  integer  considered  as  divisible;  as,  of  inheritances,  interest,  houses,  etc. ; 
whence  ex  asse  heres,  one  who  inherits  the  whole.  The  multiples  of  the  As  are, 
Dujxtndius  {duo  pondo ;  for  the  As  originally  weighed  a  pound),  t.  e.  2  Asses; 
Sestertius  {sesqui  tertius),  i.  e.  2 J  Asses ;  Tressis,  t.  e.  3  Asses ;  Quntrussis,  i.  e. 
4  Asses ;  and  so  on  to  Centitssis,  i.  e.  100  Asses.  The  As,  whatever  unit  it  re- 
presented, was  divided  into  twelve  parts  or  uncicB,  and  the  diflfereut  fractious 
received  different  names,  as  follows : 


Uncia. 

As 12 

Deunx .- 11 

Dextans 10 

Dodrans j« 9 

Bes 8 

Septunx 7 

Semis 6 


Uncia 

Quincunx 5 

Triens 4 

Quadrans,  or  Teruncius 3 

Sextans 2 

Uncia. 1 


Sescnncia.. . . ; 1| 


327. 


APPENDIX. — TABLES  OP  MONEY,  WEIGHT,  ETC.  371 


The  Vhcia  was  divided  in  the  following  manner: — 

1  Uncia  contained  2  Semunciae. 

"  "         SDuellse. 

"  "  •  4  SicUici. 

"  "        6  Sextaiae. 

"  "         8  Drachmse. 

"  "  24  Scrupiila. 

"  "  48  0b6U.  V 

KoMAN  Coins. 

These  were  the  Teruncius,  Semhella,  and  As  or  Llbella,  of  copper;  the  Ses- 
tertius, Qulndrius  (or  Victmditis),  and  Denarius,  of  silver;  and  the  Aureus. 
of  gold.  .  .        * 

$  Cts.  M. 

The  Teruncius 0  0  3.9 

2    Teruncii  make  1  Sembella 0  0  7.8 

2     Sembellae     "     1  As  or  Libella 0  1  5.6 

2 J  Asses*         "    1  Sestertius.. 0  3  9. 

2     Sestertii       "     1  Quinarius 0  7  8 

2     Quinarii       "    1  Denarius 0  15  6 

25    Denarii        "    1  Aureus 3  90  0 

•  Sometimes  also  (in  copper)  the  triens,  sextans,  uncia,  sextula,  and  dupondlus. 

KoMAN  Computation  of  Monet. 
Sestertii  Nummi. 

$  Cts.  M. 

Sestertius  (or  nummus) 0  3  9 

Decem  sestertii 0  39  0 

Centum  sestertii 3  90  0 

Mille  sestertii  (equal  to  a  sestertium) 39  0  0 

Sestertia. 

Sestertium  (equal  to  mUle  sestertii) 39  0  0 

Decem  sestertia 390  0  0 

Centum,  centum  sestertia,  or  centum  millia  sestertium 3900  0  0 

Decies  sestertium,  or  decies  centena  millia  nummAm 89000  0  0 

Centies,  or  centies  h.  s 390000  0  0 

Millies  H.  s 3900000  0  0 

Millies  centies  h.  s 4290000  0  0 

N.  B. — The  marks  denoting  a  Sestertius  nummus  are. IIS.,  LLS.,  HS.,  which  are  pro- 
perly abbreviations  for  2  1-2  asses.  Observe,  also,  that  when  a  line  is  placed  over  the 
numbers,  centena  millia  is  understood,  as  in  the  case  of  the  numeral  adverbs ;  thus,  H.  S. 

MC.  is  millies  centies  HS. ;  whereas  HS.  MC.  is  only  1100  Sestertii. 

Roman  Calculation  of  Interest. 

The  Romans  received  interest  on  their  loans  monthly,  their  highest  rate  be- 
ing one  per'  cent,  {centesima),  a  month,  i.  e.  12  per.«ent  a  year.  As  this  was 
the  highest  rate,  it  was  reckoned  as  the  as  or  unit  in  reference  to  the  lower 
rates,  which  were  denominated,  according  to  the  usual  division  of  the  as,  semis- 
ses,  irientes,  quddrantes,  etc.,  i.  e.  the  hall^  third,  fourth,  etc.,  of  the  as  or  of 
12  per  cent,  according  to  the  following  table: — 


872  APPENDIX. TABLES  OF  MONET,  WEIGHT,  ETC.        §  327. 

Per  cent,  a  year. 

Asses  usurse  or  centeslmae 12 

Semisses  usurse 6 

Trientes  usurae 4 

Quaclrantes  usurae 3 

Sextantes  usurae 2 

Uncise  usurae 1 

,  Quincunces  usurse 6 

Septunces  usurae 7 

Besses  usurae 8 

Dodrantes  usurae 9 

Dextantes  usurae 10 

Deunces  usurae 11 

EojiAN  Weights. 

Oz.  Dwtfl.    Gr. 

Siliqua 0      0      3.036 

8    Siliquae  make  1  Obolus 0      0      9.107 

2     Oboli         "      1  Scrupulum. ...     0      0  18.214 

8    Scrupula  "      1  Drachma 0      2      6.643 

1}  Drachma  "      1  Sextula 0      3      0.857 

li  Sextula    "      1  Sicilicus 0      4  13.286 

If  Sicilicus  "      1  DueUa 0      6      1.714 

8    Duellse      "      1  Uncia 0    18      5.143 

12    Uncise       "      1  Libra*  (As)  ...  10    18  13.714 

♦The  Libra  was  also  divided,  according  to  the  fractions  of  the  As,  into  Deonx,  etc. 


EOMAJT    MeASUKES    FOB 


Llgula 

4    Ligulae  make  1  Cyathus 

\\  Cyathus    "       1  Acetabulum.. 

4    Acetabula"       1  Hemina 

2    Heminae    "       1  Sextarius  . . . . 
16    Sextaru     "       1  Modius 


Things  Dry. 

Bnglish 

Corn  Measurt. 

Peck.    Gal. 

Pint. 

Sol.  in. 

0         0 

0  1-48 

0.01 

0        0 

0  1-12 

0.04 

0        0 

0  1-8 

0.06 

0        0 

0  1-2 

0.24 

0        0 

1 

0.48 

1        0 

0 

7.68 

BOMAN    MSASUBES   FOB    ThISGS    LiQUID. 

English  Wine  Measure. 

Galls.  Pints.  Sol.  in. 

LlgQla 0  0  1-48  0.117 

4    Ligulae    make    1  Cyathus 0  0 1-12  0.469 

li  Cviithus      "       1  Acetabulum 0  0  1-8  0.704 

2    Acetabaia  "        1  Quartarius 0  0  1-4  1.409 

2     Quartarii    "        1  Hemina 0  0  1-2  2.876 

2    Heminae      "       1  Sextarius* 0  1  5.636 

6     Sextarii      "       1  Congius 0  7  4.942 

4    Congii         "        1  Urna 3  41-2  5.33 

2    Urnae          "       1  Amphora  (or  Quadrantal).      7  1  10.66 

20    Amphorae    "        1  Culeus 143  3  11.095 

•The  SfztoriiM  was  also  divided  into  twelve  eqnal  parts,  called  ey&tki,  and  therefore 
the  catires  were  denominated  sextantes,  quadranles,  trientes,  according  to  the  number  of 
cydthi  which  they  contained. 

N.  B. —  Cidus,  congidrius,  Stud  ddlium,  are  the  names  of  certain  vessels,  not  measures, 
of  capacity.  ^ 


§  327.        APPENDIX. TABLES  OP  MONEY,  WEIGHT,  ETC.  373 

KoMAN  Measures  op  Length. 


paces. 

Digitus  transversus * 0 

1  1-5  Digitus             make  1  Uncia 0 

3  Uiiciae                  "       1  Palmus  minor. .. .  0 

4  Palmi  mlnores    "       1  Pes 0 

"    11-4  Pes                       "       1  PalmTpes 0 

1  1-5  Palmlpea             "       1  Cubitus 0 

1 2-3  Cubitus                "        1  Gradus 0 

2  Gradus                  "        1  Passus 0 

125         Passus                   "        1  Stadium 120 

8         Stadia                  "       1  Milliarium 967 


Feet. 

Inch.  Deo. 

0 

0.725  1-4 

0 

0.967 

0 

2.901 

0 

11.604 

1 

2.505     , 

1 

5.406 

2 

5.01 

4 

10.02 

4.5 


Eo]VLA.N  Square  Measures. 

Roman  English 

sq.  feet.  rods.  Sq.  pis.  Sq.  feet. 

Jugerum(As) 28,800  2  18  250.05 

Deunx 26,400  2  10  183.85 

Dextans 24,000  2  02  117.64 

Dodrans 21,600  1  34  61.42 

Bes 19,200  1  25  257.46 

Septunx 16,800  1  17  191.25 

Semis 14,400  1  09  125.03 

Quincunx 12,000  1  01  •  58.82 

lYiens 9,600  0  32  264.85 

Quadrans 7,200  0  24  198.64 

Sextans 4,800  0  16  132.43 

Uncia 2,400  0  08  66.21 

Kemark  1.  The  Romans  reckoned  their  copper  money  by  asseSf 
their  silver  money  by  sestertii,  and  their  gold  money  by  aurei  and 
sometimes  by  Attic  talents. 

Rem.  2.  The  as,  as  tlie  unit  of  money,  was  originally  a  pound  of  copper, 
but  its  weight  was  gradually  diminished,  untU,  in  the  later  days  of  the  repub- 
lic, it  amounted  to  only  l-24th  of  a  pound. 

Eem.  3.  (a.)  The  denarius  was  a  silver  coin,  originally  equal  in  value  to  ten 
asses,  whence  its  name ;  but,  after  the  weight  of  the  as  was  reduced,  the  dena- 
rius was  equal  to  eighteen  asses. 

(b.)  The  sestertius,  or  sesterce,  was  one  fourth  of  the  denarius,  or  two  asses 
and  a  half  (semistertius).  The  sestertius  was  called  emphatically  nummus,  as  in 
it  all  large  sums  were  reckoned  after  the  coining  of  sUver  money. 

(c.)  The  aureus  (a  gold  coin),  in  the  time  of  the  emperors,  was  equal  to  26 
denarii,  or  100  sesterces. 

Kem.  4.  In  reckoning  money,  the  Romans  called  any  sum  under  2000  ses- 
terces so  ram^y  sestertii;  as,  decern  sestertii,  ten  sesterces;  centum  sestertii,  a 
hundred  sesterces. 

Rem.  5.  Sums  from  2000  sesterces  (inclusive)  to  1,000,000,  they  denoted 
either  by  miUe,  millia,  with  sestertiitin  (gen.  plur.),  or  by  the  plural  of  the 
neuter  noun  ses^erim?ft,  which  itself  signified  a  thousand  aesterces.  Thus  they 
said  quadraginta  millia  sestertiiLm,  or  quadraginta  sestertia,  to  denote  40,000 
sesterces.  With  the  genitive  sestertitim,  millia  was  sometimes  omitted;  as, 
sestertium  centum,  scil.  millia,  100,000  sesterces. 

Rem.  6.  To  denote  a  million,  or  more,  they  used  a  combination;  thus,  dSdet 
centena  millia  sestertium,  1,000,000  sesterces.  The  words  centena  millia,  how- 
ever, were  generally  omitted ;  thus,  decies  sestertiitm,  and  sometimes  merely 
d^cies.  See  §  118,  5.     So,  centies,  10  millions ;  millies,  100  millions. 


874 


APPENDIX. ABBREVIATIONS. 


§  328,  829. 


Rem.  7.  Some  suppose  that  sestertiwn^  when  thus  joined  with  the  numraal  adrerbs,  is 
always  the  neuter  noun  in  the  nominative  or  accusative  singular.  The  genitive  and  ab- 
lative of  that  noun  are  thus  used ;  as,  Deries  sestertii  dote,  With  a  dowry  of  1.000,000 
sesterces.  Tac.  Quitiquagies  sestertio,  5,000,000  sesterces.  Id.  But  this  usage  does  not 
occur  in  Cicero. 


ABBREVIATIONS. 

§  328.     The  follomng  are  the  most  common  abbreviations  of 
Latin  words : — 


A.,  Auhis. 

C,  Caius,  or  Gains. 

Cn.,  Cneils. 

D.,  Decirnus. 

L.,  Lucius, 

M.,  Marcus. 


A.  d.,  ante  diem. 

A.  U.  C,  anno  urbis  con- 
duce. 

Cal.,  or  Kal.,  CSkndcB. 

Cos.,  ComuL 

Coss.,  Consules. 

D.,  D'lvus. 

D.  D.,  dono  dedit. 

D.  D.  D.,  dot,  dicat,  dec^- 
cat,  or  dono  dicat,  de- 
feat. 

Des.,  desipndtus. 

D.  M.,  diis  mdnlhus, 

Eq.  Rom.,  eques  Romanus. 


M.  T.  C,  Marcus  TuUius    Q.,  or  Qu.^  Quinlus. 
"'  '  Ser.,  Sermus. 

S.,  or  Sex.,  Sextus. 


Cicero. 
M.,  Munius. 
Mam.,  Mdinercus. 
N.,  Numerius. 
P.,  PvbUus. 


F.,    Filius ;    as,  M.  F., 

Marci  fUitis. 
Ictus,  jurisconsvltus. 
Id.,  Hus. 
Imp.,  impSrdior. 
J.   0.   M.,    JOvi,   Optimo 

maannw. 
N.,  nepos. 
Kon.,  Nonce. 
P.  C,  patres  conscripti. 
PI.,  pmis. 
Pop.,  pdpulus. 
p.  K.,  jpdpulus  Bdmdnus. 


Sp.,  Spurius. 

T.,  r«us. 

Ti.,  or  Tib.,  Tibhiu*, 


Pont.    Max.,      ponSf&t 

maximus. 
Pr.,  prcBtor. 
Proc,  proconsul. 
Kesp.,  respOblica. 
S.,  salHiem,   sacrum^   or 

sStwtus. 
S.  D.  P.,   sdiam  dteft 

S.  P.  Q.  R.,  Sendtusp6p&. 

lusque  Romanus. 
S.  C,  senate  consuUum. 
Tr.,  U-ibunus. 


To  these  may  be  added  terms  of  reference;  as,  c,  cdput,  chapter;  cf.^  confer^ 
compare;  I  c,  Idco  citato;  1. 1,  l5co  laudato^  in  the  place  quoted;  c,  versus, 
verse. 


DIFFERENT  AGES  OF  ROMAN  LITERATURE. 


§  320.  1.  Of  the  Roman  literature  for  the  first  five  centuries  after  the 
foundation  of  the  city,  but  few  vestiges  remain.  The  writers  of  the  succeed- 
ing centuries  have  been  arranged  in  four  ages,  in  reference  to  the  purity  of 
the  language  in  the  period  in  which  they  flourished.  These  are  called'  the 
golden,  silver,  brazen,  and  iron  ages. 

2.  The  golden  age  is  reckoned  from  the  time  of  Livius  Andronlcus,  about 
A.  U.  C.  514,  to  the  c^eath  of  Aupstus,  A.  U.  C.  767,  or  A.  D.  14,  a  period 
of  a  little  more  than  250  years.  The  writers  of  the  early  part  of  this  age  are 
valued  rather  on  account  of  their  antiquity,  and  in  connection  with  the  his- 
tory of  the  language,  than  as  models  of  style.  It  was  not  till  the  age  of 
Cicero,  that  Roman  literature  reached  its  highest  elevation.  The  era  com- 
prehending the  generation  immediately  preceding,  and  that  immediately  suc- 
ceeding, that  of  Cicero,  as  well  as  his  own,  is  the  period  in  which  the  most 
distinguished  writers  of  Rome  flourished ;  and  their  works  are  the  standai-d  of 
purity  in  the  Latin  language. 


329. 


APPENDIX. WRITERS    IN   DIFFERENT    A.GES. 


875 


8.  The  silver  age  extended  from  the  death  of  Augustus  to  the  death  of 
Trajan,  A.  D.  118,  a  period  of  104  years.  The  writers  of  this  age  were  inferior 
to  those  who  had  preceded  them ;  yet  several  of  them  are  ^yorthy  of  com- 
mendation. 

4.  The  brazen  age  comprised  the  interval  from  the  death  of  Trajan  to  the 
time  wlien  Rome  was  taken  by  the  Goths,  A.  D.  410.  From  the  latter  epoch 
commenced  the  iron  age,  during  which  the  Latin  language  was  much  adulter- 
ated with  foreign  words,  and  its  style  and  spirit  essentially  injured. 

5.  The  body  of  Latin  writings  has  been  otherwise  arranged  by  Dr.  Freund, 
so  as  to  be  comprised  in  three  main  periods,— the  Ante-classical,  Classical,  and 
Post-classicaL  The  ante-classical  extends  from  the  oldest  fragments  of  the 
language  to  Lucretius  and  Varro;  the  classical  from  Cicero  and  Csesar  to 
Tacitus,  Suetonius,  and  the  younger  Pliny  inclusive;  the  post-classical  from 
that  time  to  the  fifth  century  of  our  era.  The  classical  Latinity  is  subdivided 
mto  (a.)  Ciceronian,  {b.)  Augustan,  (c.)  post-Augustan,  and  to  the  language  of 
the  foxirth  and  fifth  centuries  he  has  given  the  title  of  late  Latin. 


LATIN    WRITERS    IN    THE    DIFFERENT    AGES. 


(From  the  Lexicon  of  Facciolatus.) 
WRITERS    OF   THE    GOLDEN   AGE. 


Livius  Andronlcus. 

Lsevius. 
C.  Nsevius. 

Statins  Caecilitis. 
Q.  Ennius. 
M.  Pacuvius. 
L.  Accius. 
C.  Lucilius. 
Sex.  Turpilius. 
L.  Afranius. 


L.  Cornelius  Sisenna. 
P.  Nigidius  Figulus. 
C.  Decius  Laberius. 
M.  Verrius  Flaccus. 

Varro  Attacinus. 

Titinius. 
L.  Pomponius. 
C.  Sempronius  Asellio. 
On.  Matins. 


Q.  Novius. 
C.  Q.  Atta. 
L.  Cassius  Hemina. 

Fenestella. 
Q.  Claud.  Quadrigarius. 

Coelius  Antipater. 

Fabius  Pictor. 
Cn.  Gellius. 
L.  Piso,  and  others. 


Of  the  works  of  the  preceding  writers,  only  a  few  fragments  remain. 


M.  Porcius  Cato. 
M.  Accius  Plautus. 
M.  Terentius  Afer. 
T.  Lucretius  Cams. 
C.  Valei'ius  Catullus. 
P.  Syrus. 
C.  Julius  Caesar. 
C.  Cornelius  Nepos. 
M.  Tullius  Cic6ro. 


Sex.  AureliusPropertius. 
C.  Sallustius  Crispus. 
M.  Terentius  Varro. 
Albius  TibuUus. 
P.  Virgilius  Maro. 
T.  Livius. 
M.  Manilius. 
M.  Vitruvius. 


P.  Ovidius  Naso. 
Q.  Horatius  Flaccus. 
C.  Pedo  Albinovanus. 

Gratius  Faliscus. 

Phaedrus. 
C.  Cornificius. 
A.  Hurtius,  or  Oppius. 
P.  Cornelius  Severus. 


To  these  may  be  added  the  following  names  of  lawyers,  whose  opinions  are 
found  in  the  digests : — 


Q.  Mutius  Scsevola. 
Alfenus  Varus. 


M.  Antistius  Labeo. 


Masurius  Sabinus. 


Of  the  writers  of  the  golden  age,  the  most  distinguished  are  Terence,  Catul- 
lus, Caesar,  Nepos,  Cicero,  VirgU,  Horace,  Ovid,  T.  Livy,  and  Sallust. 


376 


APPENDIX. WIIITERS    IN   DIFFERENT   AGES. 


§329. 


WRITERS  OF  THE  SILVER  AGE. 


A.  Cornelius  Celsus. 
P.  Velleius  Paterculus. 
L.  Junius    Moderatus 
Colamella. 
Pomponius  Mela. 
A.  Persius  Flaccus. 
Q.  Asconius  Pedianus. 
M.  Annaus  Seneca.- 
L.  Annaeus  Seneca. 


M.  Annseus  Lucanus. 
T.  Petronius  Arbiter. 
C.  Plinius  Secundus. 
C.  Silius  Italicus. 
C.  Valerius  Flaccus. 

C.  Julius  Solinus. 

D.  Junius  Juvenalis. 
P.  Papinius  Statins. 
M.  Valerius  Martialis. 


M.  Fabius  Qnintilianus. 

Sex,  Julius  Fi-ontinus. 

C.  Cornelius  Tacitus. 

C.  Plinius  Caecilius  Se- 
cundus. 

L.  Annaeus  Florus. 

C.  Suetonius  Tranquil 
lus. 


The  age  to  wliich  the  following  writers  should  be  assigned  is  somewhat  un- 
certain : — 


Q.  Curtius  Rufus. 
Valerius  Probus. 


Scribonius  Largus. 
Sulpitia. 


L.  Fenestella. 
Atteius  Capito. 


Of  the  writers  of  the  silver  age,  the  most  distinguished  are  Celsus,  Velleius, 
Columella,  the  Senecas,  the  Pliuies,  Juvenal,  Qointilian,  Tacitus,  Suetonius, 
and  Curtius. 

WRITERS  OF  THE  BRAZEN  AGE. 


A.  Gellius. 

L.  Apuleius. 

Q.  Septimius    Tertullia- 

nus. 
Q.  Serenus      Sammoni- 
cus. 
Censorlnus. 
Thascius    Caecilius 
Cyprianus. 
T.  Julius  Calpumius. 
M.  Aurelius  Xemesianus. 
JElius  Spartianus. 
Julius  Capitollnus. 
^lius  Lampridius. 


Vulcatius  Gallicanus. 

TrebeUius  Pollio. 

Flc'^ius  Vopiscus. 

Coelius  Aurelianus. 

Flavins  Eutropius. 

Rhemnius  Fauuius. 

Amobius  Afer. 
L.  Coelius  Lactantius. 

^lius  Donatus. 
C.  Vettus  Juveucus. 

Julius  Firmlcus. 
Fab.  Jlarius  Victorinus. 
Sex.  Rafus,    or     Rufus 
Festus. 


Ammianus   Marcel- 

linus. 
Vegetius  Renatus. 
Aurel.  Theodoras  Macro- 

bius. 
Q.  Aurelius  Symmachua. 
D.  Magnus  Ausonius. 
Paulinus  Nolanus. 
Sex.  Aurelius  Victor. 
Aurel.  Prudentius    ClS- 

mens. 
CI.  Claudianus. 

Marcellus  Empiricus. 
Falcouia  Proba. 


Valerius  Maximus. 
Justlnus. 


Of  an  Age  not  entirely  certain. 


Terentianus  ^laurus. 
^linutius  Felix. 


Sosipater  Charisiiis. 
Flavins  Avianus. 


The  opinions  of  the  following  lawyers  are  found  in  the  digests; — 


Licinius  Proculus. 
Neratius  Priscus. 
P.  Juventius  Celsus. ' 
Priscus  Jabolenus. 
Domitius  Ulpianus. 


Herennius  Modestinus. 
Salvius  Juhanus. 
Cains. 
Callistratus. 
^.miliiis  Papinianus. 


Julius  Paulus. 
Sex.  Pomponius. 
Venuleius  Saturninus. 
Jillius  Marcianus. 
JEMxxs  Gallus,  and  others. 


Of  the  writers  of  the  brazen  age,  Justin,  Terentianus,  Victor,  Lactantius, 
and  Claudian,  are  most  distinguished. 

The  age  to  which  the  following  writers  belong  is  uncertain.  The  style  of 
some  of  them  would  entitle  them  to  be  ranked  with  the  \vTiters  of  the  pVeced- 
ing  ages,  while  that  of  others  would  place  them  even  below  those  of  Uie  iron 
age. 


329. 


APPENDIX. WRITERS    IN    DIFFERENT   AGES. 


877 


Palladius  Rutilius  Tau- 
rus jEmilianus. 

iEmilius  Slacer. 

Messala  Corvinus. 

Vibius  Sequester. 

Julius  Obsequens. 

L.  Ampelius. 

Apicius  Coelius. 

Sex.  Pompeius  Festus. 

Probus  (auctor  Nota- 
rum.) 

Fulgentius  Planciades. 

Hyginus. 

C.  Caesar  Germairfcus. 

P.  Victor. 

P.  Vegetius. 


Auctores  Priapeiorum. 

Catalecta  Virgilii  et 
Ovidii. 

Auctor  orationis  Sallustii 
in  Cic.  et  Ciceronis  in 
Sail. ;  item  illius  A*iti- 
quam  Iret  in  eicsilium. 

Auctor  EpistolsB  ad  Oc- 
tavium. 

Auctor  Panegyrlci  ad 
Pisonem. 

Declamationes  quae  tri- 
buuntur  Quintiliano, 
Porcio  Latroni,  Calpur- 
nio  Flacco. 


Interpres  DarStis  Phry- 
gii,    et   Dictyos    Cre- 

tensis. 
ScholiastsB  Vet6res. 
Grammatici  Antiqui. 
Rhetores  Antiqui. 
Medici  Antiqui. 
Catalecta  Petroniana. 
Pervigilium  Veneris. 
Poematia  et  EpigraramSr- 

ta  vetfera  a  Pithseo  col- 

lecta. 
Monumentum     Ancyra- 

num. 
Fasti  Consulares. 
Inscriptiones  Vetgres. 


WRITERS  OF  THE  IRON  AGE. 


CI.  Rutilius  Numatianus. 
Servius  Honoratus. 
D.  Hieronymus. 
D.  Augustinus. 
Sulpicius  Severus. 
Paulus  Orosius. 
Coelius  Sedulius. 
Codex  Theodosianus. 
Martianus  Capella. 
Claudianus  Mamertus. 
Sidonius  Apollinaris. 


Latinus  Pacatus. 

Claudius  Mamertanus,  et 
alii,  quorum  sunt  Pan- 
egyrlci vetfires. 

Alcimus  Ayitus. 

Manl.  Severinus  Bofi- 
thius. 

Priscianus. 

Nonius  Marcellus. 

Justiniani  lustitutidnes 
et  Codex. 


Ruf.  Festus  Avienus. 
Arator. 

M.  Aurelius  Cassidorus. 
Fl.  Cresconius  Corippus. 
Venantius  Fortunatus. 
Isidorus  Hispalensis. 
Anonymus  Ravennas. 
Aldhelmus  or  Althelmus. 
Paulus  Diaconus. 


82* 


INDEX. 


The  figures  in  the  following  Index  designate  the  Sections  and  their  divisions :  E.  stands 
for  remark,  N.  for  note,  b.  for  exception,  w.  for  tenth,  and*pr.  for  prosody. 


A,  sound  of,  7  and  8*  nonns  in,  of  1st 
decl.,  41;  gender  of,  41;  of  3d  decl.  gender 
of,  66;  genitlTe  of,  68,  2;  in  ace.  sing,  of 
masc.  and  fem.  Greek  nonns,  79  and  80; 
in  nom.  ace.  and  too.  plur.  of  all  neuter 
nouns,  adjectives  and  participles,  40,  8; 
83, 1. ;  85 ;  87 ;  105, 2 ;  rerbals  in,  102, 6,  (c.) ; 
change  of  in  compd.  Terbs,  189;  increment 
in.  3d  decl.,  287,  3:  in  plur..  288;  of  Terbs, 
290 ;  ending  the  first  part  of  compds.,  285, 

A.  4;  final,  quantity  of,  294. 

A,  ah,  abs,  how  used,  195,  E.  2,  and  10; 
in  composition,  196,  i.,l;  before  the  abl. 
of  distance.  236,  E.  6 ;  ah,  de,  or  ex,  with 
abl.  of  depriving,  etc.,  251,  E.  1. 

Abbreviations,  328. 

Abdico,  constr.  of,  251,  E.  2. 

Abest  mihi,  226,  E.  2 ;  non  mxtltum  abest 
quin,  262,  N.  7. 

Abhinc,  253,  E.  2. 

Ablative,  37;  sing.  3d  decl.,  82;  of  adjs. 
of  3d  decl.,  113;  plur.  1st  decl.,  40,  E.  6, 
and  43;  2d  decl.,  40,  e.  6;  3ddecl.,84;  4th 
decl.,  89,5;  used  adverbially,  192,  i-,  n. ; 
of  character,  quality,  etc.,  211,  E.  6;  after 
prepositions,  241;  after  compd.  verbs,  242; 
after  opus  and  usus.  243:  after  digniis,  etc. 
244;  after  utor,  etc.,  245,  i. ;  after  ni!or, 
etc.,  245,  n.;  after  parts,  denoting  origin. 
246;  of  cause,  etc.,  247;  of  means  and 
agent,  248 ;  of  means,  249,  i. ;  of  accord- 
ance, 249.  n. ;  of  accompaniment,  249,  in. ; 
denoting  in  what  respect,  250 ;  after  adjec- 
tives of  plenty  or  want,  250,  2,  (1.);  after 
verbs  of  abounding,  etc.,  250,  2,  (2.);  after 
faro  and  sum.  250,  E.  3;  after  verbs  of  de- 
priving, etc..  251;  of  price,  252;  of  time 
when,  253;  of  place  where,  254;  of  place 
whn:-ice.  255.  1;  of  place  by  or  through 
which,  255,  2;  after  companitives,  256:  of 
degree  of  difference,  256,  E.  16;  abl.  abso- 
lute. 257 :  how  translated,  2-57,  n".  1 ;  equiv- 
alent to  what,  257,  B.  1;  only  with  pres. 
and  perf.  pnrts.,  257.  E.  2;  without  a  parti- 
ciple. 257,  a.  7 :  with  a  clause,  257,  e.  8 ; 
how  it  marks  the  time  of  an  action,  256, 

B.  4;  noun  wanting.  256.  b.  9. 
Abounding  and  wanting,  verbs  of,  with 

abl.  260;  with  gen.  220,  (3.) 


"About  to  do,"  how  expressed,  162, 14; 
"about  to  be  done,"  how  expressed,  162, 
14,  E.  4. 

Abstifuo,  yr.  abl.,  251,  K. ;  vix  or  cegre  ab- 
stineo,  quin,  262,  K.  7. 

Abstract  nouns,  26 ;  formation  from  adja. 
101;  their  terminations,  101,  1  and  2,  (3.); 
from  verbs,  102. 

Abundo,  250,  (2.)  E.  1. 

-abm,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  in,  43. 

Ac  or  atque,  198,  1,  E.  (6.)  and  2.  a.;  in- 
stead of  quam,  256,  b.  15;  ac  si  withsubj., 
263,  2,  and  e. 

Acatalectic  verse,  304,  3.  (1.) 

Accent  in  English,  16;  place  of  secondary 
accent,  16,  1  and  2;  in  Latin,  14  and  15; 
of  dissyllables,  14,  4 ;  of  polysyllables,  14, 
4,  and  15 — ^written  accents,  5,  2,  and  14,  2. 

Accentuation,  14 — 16. 

Accidents  of  nouns,  26.  7:  of  verbs,  141. 

Accipio,  w.  part,  in  dus.  274,  E.  J. 

Accompaniment,  abl.  of,  249,  in. 

Accordance,  abl.  of,  249,  n. 

Achivom  for  Achivorum,  53. 

-acis,  genitives  in.  78,  2,  (1.) 

Accusative,  37 ;  sing.,  terminal  letter  of 
in  masculines  and  feminines,  40,  2;  plural, 
terminal  letter  of  in  do.,  40,  7;  of  3d  decl., 
79;  of  Greek  nouns,  80;  plur.  3d  decl.,  85; 
do.  of  adjs.  of  3d  decl.,  114;  neuter  in  all 
declensions,  sing  and  plur.,  40,  8;  in  f tti 
and  im.  79;  of  Greek  nouns  in  im,  in,  or  a, 
79,  (6.)  and  80;  in  idetn,  80,  E.  1;  in  ym.  or 
yn,  80,  n. ;  in  ea,  80,  m. ;  in  etem,  eta,  c"i, 
or  en,  80.  rv. ;  neuter  used  adverbially,  192, 
n.,  4,  and  205,  b.  10;  ace.  after  verbs,  229 — 
234 ;  omitted,  229,  e.  4 ;  inf  or  a  clause  in- 
stead of.  229.  E.  5;  of  a  person  after  miseret, 
etc.,  229,  B.  6;  after  jurat,  etc.,  229,  E.  7; 
after  nenter  verbs,  232;  after  compound 
verbs,  233 ;  after  verbal  nouns  and  verbal 
adjs.,  233,  n.;  of  part  affected,  234,  n. ;  a 
limiting  ace.  instead  of  the  abl.  in  pardm^ 
vicem,  cetera,  etc.,  234,  n.,  e.  3:  after  pre- 
positions, 235;  of  time  and  space.  236;  of 
place,  237;  after  adverbs  and  interjections, 
238;  ace.  as  subject,  239:  ace.  of  the  thing 
supplied  by  the  inf.,  270,  N.,  ace.  w.  inf., 
272;   do.  exchanged  for  the   ealyunctive. 


INDEX. 


879 


278,  8. — two  accusatives  after  certain  verbs, 
230  and  231;  ace.  of  thing  retained  in  pas- 
sive voice,  234;  places  supplied  by  infini- 
tives, 229,  N.  2;  pred.  ace.  how  supplied, 
ib.  N.  4. 

Accusing  and  acquitting,  verbs  of,  constr., 
217,  and  r.  4. 

Accuso,  constr.,  217,  and  R.  2—5. 

Acephalous  verse.  304,  3,  (3.) 

Acer,  declined,  108,  i. 

Achilles,  declined,  86. 

Acquiesco,  245,  ii.,  3. 

Acute  accent,  5,  2,  and  14,  2 ;  when  used, 
14.3. 

Active  voice,  141. 

Active  verb,  141 ;  used  impersonally,  184, 
2 ;  object  of  act.  verb,  229 ;  two  jases  after, 
229,  R.  1 ;  verb  omitted,  229,  r.  3. 

Ad,  how  used,  195,  R.  5  ;  in  composition, 
198,  1.2;  construction  of  verbs  compound- 
ed with,  224 ;  arf  used  for  in,  224,  r.  4. 

Adde  quod,  273,  N.  8. 

Additions  to  simple  subject,  202,  6,  etc. ; 
to  simple  predicate,  203,  5,  etc. 

Adeo,  adv.,  191,  r.  5  ;  adeo  non,  277,  K. 
14.— verb,  constr.,  233,  3,  and  N. 

-ades,  patronymics  in,  100,  1,  (a.) 

Adest,  qui,  with  subj.,  264,  6. 

Adhuc  locorum,  212,  r.  4,  N.  4. 

Adipiscor,  w.  gen.,  220,  4:  Jin. 

Adjectives,  104—131 ;  classes  of,  104, 1— 
15  ;  declension  of,  105  ;  of  1st  and  2d  decls. 
105—107 ;  of  3d  declension,  108—114 ;  of 
three  terminations,  108 ;  of  two  termina- 
tions, 109,  110 ;  of  one  termination.  111 ; 
their  gen.  sing.,  112  ;  their  abl.  sing.  113  ; 
their  nom.,  ace,  and  gen.  plur.,  114  ;  irreg- 
ular, 115 — 116  ;  defective,  115  ;  redundant, 
116  ;  numeral,  117—121 ;  cardinal,  117, 118  ; 
ordinal,  119,  120;  multiplicative,  121,  1; 
proportional,  121,  2;  temporal,  121,  3;  in- 
terrogative, 121,  5  ;  comparison  of,  122 — 
127  ;  irregular  comparison,  125  ;  defective 
comparison,  126 ;  derivation  of,  128 — 130  ; 
composition  of,  131 :  amplificative,  128,  4  ; 
patrial,  128,  6 ;  verbal,  129 ;  participial, 
130 ;  composition  of  131 ; — how  modified, 
202,  II.,  1,  (2.);  agreement  of,  205;  quali- 
fying aJhd  limiting,  205,  N.  1 ;  modifiers  or 
predicates,  205,  n.  2 ;  with  two  or  more 
nouns,  205,  R.  2  ;  with  a  collective  noun, 
205.  R.  3;  sing,  with  a  plur.  noun,  205, 
B.  4;  dat.  of,  for  ace.  in  the  predicate  of 
ace.  with  the  inf.,  205,  R.  6 ;  without  a 
noun,  205,  R.  7 ;  with  infinitive,  a  clause, 
etc.,  205,  R.  8  ;  in  the  neuter  with  gen.  of 
their  noun,  205,  R.  9,  and  212,  r.  3  ;  neuter 
adjs.  used  adverbially,  205,  r.  10  ;  gender 
of,  when  used  partitively,  205,  R.  12;  in 
genitive  with  possessive  adj.  or  pronoun, 
205,  R.<.13;  agreeing  with  the  governing 
lioun  instead  of  the  gerJtive,  205,  R.  14 ; 
two  or  more  with  one  noun,  205,  R.  16; 
instead  of  an  adverb,  205,  R.  15  ;  first,  last, 
etc.  part  expressed  by  the  adj.  aloae,  205, 
R.  17  ;  agreeing  with  relative  instead  of  its 
antecedent,  206,  (7.);  with  gen.  213;  w. 
gen.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5 ;  w.  dat.,  222 ;  w. 
gen.  or  dat.,  213,  k.  6,  and  222,  a.  2;  of 


plenty  or  want  with  abl.,  250 ;  iv.  inf.  270, 
R.  1 ;  place  of,  279,  7. 

Adjective  pronouns,  134—139;  nature  of, 
132,  5;  classes,  134;  agreement,  205. 

Adjective  clauses,  201,  7 ;  how  connect- 
ed, 201,  9. 

Adjunctive  pronoun,  135,  r.  1. 

Adjuvo  and  adjuto,  constr.,  223,  r.  2,  (2.) 

Admonishing,  verbs  of,  w.  gen.  218 ;  other 
constructions,  218,  R.  1  and  2 ;  273,  n.  4. 

Adolescent,  its  gender,  30;  aa  adj.  how 
compared,  126, 4. 

Adorning,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  249. 

Adonic  verse,  312. 

Adulari,  constr.,  223,  R.  2,  {b),  and  (1),  (a.) 

-Adverbial  correlatives,  191,  v  1 ; — clauses, 
201,7,9. 

Adverbs,  190,  2—194 ;  primitive,  191 ;  of 
place  and  order,  191,  i. ;  correlative,  191, 
R.  1 ;  of  time,  19l,  ii.  ;  of  manner,  quality, 
degree,  191,  iii.  ;  division  of,  191,  r.  2 ; — 
derivation  of,  192 ;  numeral,  192,  ii...  3, 
and  119;  diminutive,  192,  iv.,  r.  ;  compo- 
sition of,  193 ;  signification  of  some  adverbs 
of  time  and  manner,  193 ; — comparison  of, 
194; — ^how  modified,  277,  i.;  used  as  adjec- 
tives, 205,  R.  11;  w.  gen..  212,  r.  4;  w. 
dat.,  228,  (1.);  w.  ace,  2g8;  use  of,  277; 
two  negatives,  force  of,  277,  r.  3 — 5;  equiv- 
alent to  phrases,  277,  R.  8;  of  likeness,  as 
connectives,  278,  R.  1;  place  of  279, 15. 

Adversative  conjunctions,  198,  9. 

Adversus,  how  used,  195,  R.  7. 

^,  how  pronounced,  9. 

JEqualis,  construction  of,  222,  r.  2. 

JEque  with  abl.,  241,  R.  2;  ceque  ac.,  198, 
3,  r. 

JEqui  boni  facio  or  consulo,  214,  N.  1. 

^quo  and  adcequo,  construction  of,  214; 
CRquo,  adj.  w.  comparatives,  256,  R.  9. 

Aer,  ace.  of,  80,  R. ;  pr.  299,  e.  3. 

.SEolic  pentameter,  312,  ix. 

^5,  gender  of,  61,  2 ;  gen.  of,  73,  E.  2. 

.Mstimo,  constr.,  214. 

Stiver,  ace,  80,  r.  ;  pr.  299,  e.  3. 

-CPUS,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  {k.) 

^quum  est,  ut,  262,  e.  3,  N.  2:  <p.quum 
erat,  indie,  instead  of  subj.,  259,  R.  3; 
(F.quum  est,  with  inf.  as  subject,  269,  R,  2. 

Affatim,  w.  genitive,  212,  r.  4. 

Affluo,  constr.,  250,  2,  r.  1. 

Afficio,  constr.,  249,  r.  1. 

Affinis,  constr.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.) 

Ager,  declined,  46. 

Agent,  verbal  nouns  denoting,  102,  6; 
dative  of,  225,  in.,  R.  1;  248,  R.  1;  abl. 
of,  248. 

Ages  of  Roman  literature,  329. 

Agnitus,  pr.  285,  1,  e.  1. 

Agnominatio,  324,  25. 

Ago  w.  gen.  of  the  crime,  217,  R.  1;— 
age  w.  plur.  subject,  183,  10  ■,—id  agere  ut, 
273,  N.  1. 

Agreement  defined,  203,  iii.,  6;  of  adjs., 
etc.,  205;  of  relatives,  206. 

^/,  how  pronounced,  9,  1. — a'i,  old  gen. 
in,  43;  quantity  of  the  a  in  do.,  283,  E.  3. 

Aio,  conjugated,  183,4;  ain'  for  ai^ne; 
ait,  elipsis  of,  209,  R.  4;  its  place  in  a  sen- 
tence, 279,  6. 


880 


INDEX. 


•al,  abl.  of  nowaa  In,  82;  increment  of, 
287,E.  U.)l. 

Alcaic  Terse,  304,  2;— greater,  318,  ni.; 
lesser,  318,  iv. 

Alcmanian  Terse,  304,  2:— dactylic  tetra- 
meter, 312. 
Alfc,  gender  of,  66;  genitiTe,  70. 

Ales,  gender  of,  30  and  61,  2;  genitiTe 
ring.,  73,  2;  gen.  plur.,  83,  ll.,  K.  2. 

Alex,  gender  of,  65,  2. 

Alieno,  and  abaiienOf  constr.,  251,  &.  8, 
and  X. 

Alitnus,  constr.,  222,  r.  1  and  6. 

AUquanto,  127,  2;  256,  R.  16,  (2.) 

Aliquantvm,  256,  R.  16,  N. 

Aliquis,  declined,  133:  how  used,  138,  2: 
207,  R.  30. 

Aliquo,  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4,  N.  2. 

Aliquot,  indeclinable,  115,  4;  correlatiTe, 
121,5. 

Aliquoties,  correlatiTe  of  qtwtief,  121,  5. 

-alts,  adjs.  in,  128,  2;  how  compared,  126, 
4;  alts,  old  adj.,  for  alius,  192jji.,  2. 

AliCer,  from  alis  for  alius,  ly2,  n.,  2. 

Alius,  how  declined,  107 ;  how  used,  207, 
R.  32;  alius — alium,  with  plur.  Terb,  209, 
R.  11,  4 ;  refers  to  more  than  two,  212,  r.  2, 
N.  1,  (6.);  w.  abl.,  256,  B.  14 j  pr.  283,  1, 
X.  4. 

Allegory.  324,  7. 

Alliteration,  324,  26. 

Alphabet,  2,  1. 

Alter,  how  declined,  105, 3 ;  107,  and  R.  2 ; 
gen.  alterius,  quantity  of  283,  i.,  B.  4,  (b.); 
used  for  secundus,  120,  1 ;  answers  to  uter, 
139,  5,  (1.),  (6.) — aitero  tanto,  w.  compara- 
tives, 256,  R.  16. 

Alleruter,  107;  139,  5,  (1.),  (b.)—aUeru- 
terque,  107. 

Altus  and  aUo^  w.  ace.  of  space,  236,  and 
K.  2. 

Ambi,  amb,  am,  or  an,  197,  (6.) 

Ambio,  how  conjugated,  182,  r.  8. — ambi- 
tus, pr.  285,  2,  E.  2. 

Ambo,  how  declined,  118,  R.  1. 

Amicus,  constr.,  222,  r.  2,  (c.) 

jlwio.  conjugated,  15o,  156. 

AmphiboUa,  325,  5. 

AmplificatiTes.  nouns,  100,  4,  la.):  adiec- 
tlTes,  104,  12;  128,4. 

Amplius,  with  or  without  qtiam,  256,  R.  6. 

An,  19S,  11;  use  of,  198,  11,  R.  (d.),  (c); 
265,  R.  2  and  3:  an— an,  265,  R.  2. 

Anabasis.  324,  22. 

Anacoluthon,  323,  3,  (5.) 

Anacreontic  Terse,  304,  2 ;— iambic  dime- 
ter, 314, IX. 

Anadiplosis,  324, 17. 

Analysis  of  sentences,  281. 

Anapaestic  metre,  313 ;  303 ; — monometer, 
813,  I.;— dimeter,  313. 

Anaphora,  324,  13. 

Anastrophe,  324,  4,  (1.) 

Anas,  gen.  of,  72,  E.  1 ;  pr.  300,  E.  1. 

Anceps,  gen.  of,  112,  2;  abl.  of;  113,  n.  3. 

Ancile,  93,  2. 

Androgeos,  declined,  54, 1. 

-aneus,  adjs.  in,  128,  8. 

AngoT,  constr.,  273,  5,  s.  6- 

Animal,  deblinbd,  6T- 


Animan^,  gender  of,  64. 
Animo,^5^. — cuiimi  for  animo,,  220,1: 
213,  R.  l,(a.)  '    • 

Anio,  genitiTe  of,  69,  E.  2. 

Amu,  in  double  questions,  2S5,  B.  2;— 
annon,  ib. 

Annus,  compds.  of,  121,  3. 

Antanaclasis,  324,  12. 

.4nte,  w.  superlatJTes,  127,6;  in  compo- 
sition, 196,  I.,  3;  construction  of  TerlM 
compounded  with,  224;  with  titles,  235,4f 
3;  with  comparatives,  256,  r.  13,  (6.): — 
ante  and  post  w.  ace.  and  abl.  of  time,  253, 
R.  1;  w.  quam  and  a  Terb,  253,  u.  3;  for 
abhinc,  253,  r.  2. 

Antecedent,  135;  ellipsis  of,  206.  (3.),  (4.), 
its  place  supplied  bv  a  demonstrative,  206, 
3,  (a.);  in  the  case  o'f  the  relative,  206,  (6.), 
(6. ) ;  implied  in  a  posees.sive  pronoun,  206, 
(12);  may  be  a  proposition,  206,  (13.) 

.Sntecedo  and  anteeeUo,  constr-  256,  B. 
16,  (3.) 

Antepenult,  13;  quantity  of,  292. 

Antequam,  constr.,  263,  3. 

Antimeria,  323.  3.  (1.) 

Antiphrasis,  324,  10. 

Antiptosis,  323,  3,  (3.) 

Antithesis,  322;  324,^7. 

Antonomasia,  324,  8. 

-anus,  adjs.  in,  128,  6. 

Aorist  tense,  145,  iv.,  B. 

Apage,  183,  10. 

Apertum  est,  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  B.  2. 

Aphaeresis,  322. 

Apiscor  and  adipiseor,  w.  gen.,  220. 

Aplustre,  nom.  plur.  of,  83  and  94,  4. 

Apocope,  322. — Apodosis,  261. 

Apollo,  gen.  of.  69.  e.  2. 

Aposiopesis,  324,  33. 

Apostrophe,  324,  35. 

Apparet.  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  B.  2. 

Appellative  nouns,  26,  3. 

Appello,  constr.,  230,  .n.  1. 

Appetens,  w.  gen.,  213,  R.  1,  (2.) 

Appendix,  322 — 329. 

Apposition,  204 ;  to  two  or  more  nouns, 
204,  R.  5;  to  nouns  connected  by  ann,  204, 
R.  5,  (1.);  to  proper  names  of  different  gen- 
ders, 204,  R.  5,  (2.);  genitive  instead  of, 
204,  R.  6;  211,  R.  2,  n.  ;  abl.  with  gen.,  204, 
R.  7;  of  a  proper  name  with  nomen,  etc., 
204,  R.  8;  of  a  clause,  204,  R.  9;  of  parts 
with  a  whole,  204,  r.  10;  212,  r.  2,  n.  5; 
place  of  nouns  in  apposition,  279,  9. 

Apprime,127,2;  193. 

Aptotes,  94. 

Aptus,  constr.,  222,  R.  land 4,  (1.);  aptus 
qui,  w.  Bubj.,  264,  9;  w.  gerund,  275,  R.  2 
and  3. 

Apud,  195,  R.  6. 

-ar.  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66,  67 ;  genitiTe 
of,  70,  71;  abl.  of,  82;  increment  of,  287, 
E.  (A.)  1. 

Arbitrcr,  in  imperf.  subj.,  260,  R.  2. 

Arbor  (-os).  gender  of,  61. 

Arceo,  w.  abl.,  251,_R.  2. 

Arcesso,  constr.,  217,  R- 1. 

Archaism,  323,  R.,  (1.) 

Archilochian  verse,  304,  2;— penthemi- 
meris,  812 ;— iambic  trimeter,  814,  v.;  do. 


INDEX. 


381 


toieter,  314,  vii. ;— heptameter,  318,  iv. 

ArencB,  as  gen.  of  place,  221,  B.  3,  (4.) 

Argo,  genitive  of,  69,  E.  3. 

Argos  (-g-/),  92,  4. 

Arguo,  constr.,  217,  R.  1. 

Aristophanic  verse,  304,  2. 

-arimn  and  -arius,  nouns  and  a/ljs.  in, 
100,8;  128,3;  121,4. 

Arrangement  of  words,  279 ;  poetical,  279, 
N.  4;  of  clauses,  230. 

Ars,  declined,  57. 

Arsis  and  thesis,  308. 

Article,  wanting  in  Latin,  41,  N. 

-05,  genitives  in,  43;  nouns  inof  3ddecl., 
gender  of,  62 ;  genitive  of,  72 ;  gen.  plur.  of, 
83,  II.,  4;  in  ace.  plur.  of  Greek  nouns  of 

8d  decl.,  85,  E.  2. as  and  -anus,  adjs.  in, 

128,  6;  -as  final,  quantity  of,  300. 

As,  value  of,  327;  how  divided,  327; — 
gender  of,  62,  e.  1 ;  72,  e.  1 ;  gender  of  parts 
ending  in  ns,  64,  2 ;  assis  non  hahere,  214, 
B.  1. 

Asclepiadic  verse,  304,  2; — tetrameter, 
816,  in. 

Asking,  verbs  of,  with  two  aces.,  231; 
constr.  in  the  pass.,  234,  i. 

Aspergo,  249,  i.  and  a.  1  and  3. 

Aspirate,  3,  1. 

Assequnr,  ut,  273,  N.  2. 

-asso  for  -avero,  162,  9. 

assuesco  and  assuefacio,  w.  abl.,  245,  li. ; 
w.  dat.,  245,  ir.,  R.  1. 

Asyndeton,  323,  1,  (1.) 

-et,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  il.,  R.  5. 

At,  conj.,  198,  9;  at  enim,  atqui,  198, 
9,  {b.) 

-atim,  adverbs  in,  192,  i.,  1. 

Atque,  composition  and  meaning,  198,  1, 
E.  (6.)    See  ac. 

Attraction,  206,  (6.);  209,  n.  6  and  E.  8; 
210,  R.  6;  272,  n.  3. 

Attribuo,  w.  participle  in  diis,  274,  E.  7. 

-atus,  adjs.  in,  128,  7. 

Au,  how  pronounced,  9,  2  and  E.  2. 

Audeo,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2. 

Audio,  conjugated,  160 ;  used  like  appel- 
lor, 210,  N.  2;  constr.,  272,  n.  1;  aicdes  for 
audies,  183,  R.  3; — aitdiens,  constr.,  222, 
E.  1. 

-aus,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  62;  genitive 
of,  76,  E.  4. 
Ausculto,  constr.,  222,  R.  2,  (6.),  and  (1.), 

Ausim,  183,  R.  1. 

^Mf  and  reZ,  198,  2,  E.  (a.);  aut  and  r«, 
198,  2.  R.  (f/.);  aut—aMt,  198,  2,  R.  (c); 
aut  with  the  singular,  209.  R.  12,  (5.) 

Autem,  198,  9;  its  position,  279,  3,  (c); 
ellipsis  of  278,  r.  11. 

Authority,  in  prosody,  282,  4. 

Auxiliary  verb,  153. 

-av  and  -atu  in  the  2d  and  3d  roots  of 
verbs  164. 

Avani!^,  with  gen.,  213,  R.  1. 

Ave.  183,  8. 

Avidus,  with  gen.  213,  R.  1;  w.  gen.  of 
gerund,  275,  (2,);  w.  inf.  poetically,  270, 
B.  1. 

-ax.  nouns  in,  gen.  of,  78,  2,  (1.);  adjs. 
In,  129,  6;  verbals  in  with  gen.,  213,  e.  1. 


B. 


B,  roots  of  nouns  ending  in,  56,  I.} 
changed  to  p.,  171,  2. 

Balneum,  plur.  -ea  or  -ecB,  92,  6. 

Barbarism,  325,  1. 

Barbiton,  declined,  54, 1. 

Belle,  bellissime,  192,  iv.  R. 

Belli,  construed  like  names  of  towns,  221, 
E.  3;  bello,  253. 

Bene,  derivation,  192,  ii.,  1;  constr.  of 
its  compounds,  225,  i.;  be?ie  est,  w.  dat., 
228,  1;  bene,  w.  ace,  239,  R.  2;  with  verbs 
of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

-ber,  names  of  months  in,  how  declined, 
71  and  108. 

Bes,  gen.  of,  73,  E.  2. 

Bibi,  pr.,  284,  e.,  (1.) 

Bicorpor,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  2;  115, 1,  (a.) 

Biduum,  triduum.  etc.,  biennium,  etc., 
121,2. 

-bilis,  adjs.  in,  129,  4;  how  compared, 
126,  4;  with  dative,  222,  r.  1. 

Bimestris,  113,  E.  1. 

Bipes,  genitive  of,  112,  1;  abl.  of,  113, 
E.  2;   115,1,  (a.) 

Bomis,  declined,  105,  2;  compared,  125, 
5;  boni  consulo,  214,  n.  1. 

Bos,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.  of,  84,  n.  1;  286, 
5;  gender  of,  30;  genitive  of,  75,  e.  1;  gen. 
plur.,  83,  II.,  R.  1. 

-br,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  ii.,  R.  3. 

Brachycatalectic  verse,  304,  3,  (2.) 

Brazen  age  of  Roman  literature,  329,  4. 

-brum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Bucolic  cajsura,  310,  6,  R.  4. 

-bulum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

-bundus,  adjs.  in,  129, 1;  comparison  of, 
126,5;  with  ace,  233,  N. 


C. 


C,  sound  of,  10;  before  s  in  roots  of 
nouns,  56,  i.,  r.  2;  in  roots  of  verbs,  171,1; 
gender  of  nouns  in,  68;  genitive  of,  (0; 
c  final,  quantity  of,  299,  4;  C.  for  tarns, 
i.  q.  Gaius.  328. 

Cailebs,W2,2\  in  abl.  sing.,  113,  e.  2; 
115,  1,  (a.) 

Caesura,  309;  kinds  of,  309;  in  hexameter 
verse,  310,  3;  ccesural  pause,  309,  3;  in 
hexameter  verse,  4 — 6 ;  in  pentameter  verse, 
311,2;  in  iambic  verse,  314,  i.andx. ;  in 
trochaic  verse,  315,  i ;  in  choriambic  verse, 
316,  III. 

Calco,  change  of  a  to  «  in  its  compds., 
189,  N.  3. 

Calendar,  Roman,  326,  6. 

Calends,  326. 

CaUidus,  270,  R.  1 ;  213,  r.  1. 

Canalis,  abl.  of,  82,  5,  (c.) 

Cano  receptui,  227,  R.  2. 

Capax,  w.  genitive,  213,  R.  1.  (1.),  and 
R.5,  (1.) 

Capio.  conjugated,  159;  adjs.  compound- 
ed of,  112,  2. 

Capital  letters,  how  used  by  the  RomauB, 
2,  2;  as  num.erals,  118,  7. 

Caput  declined,  57;  capitis  and  capite, 
damnare,  accusare,  etc.,  217,  E.  3. 


382 


INDEX. 


Carbasus,  plur.  -t  and  -a,  92,  8.    • 

Cardinal  numbers,  117  and  118. 

Qireo,  250,  2,  r.  1. 

Oirmen,  declined,  57. 

Caro,  gender  of,  59,  3;  gen.  of,  69,  E.  2; 
gen.  plur..  83.  ii.,  5. 

Carthagini,  in  abl.  of  the  place  where,  82, 
«.  5,  (c.) 

Case-endings,  table  of,  39. 

Cases  of  nouns,  36  and  37. 

Casus  recti  and  obliqui,  37,  B. 

Causa,  gratia,  etc.  with  me&,  etc.,  247, 
K.  2 ;  their  place  with  genitive,  279,  B. 

Causal  CO u junctions,  198,  7. 

Cause,  abl.  of,  247;  after  active  verba, 
247,  R.  2;  ace.  of  with  prepositions,  247, 
E.1. 

Cattso.  change  of  au  in  its  compoundB, 
189,  N.  3. 

Cave  or  cave  ne,  w.  subj.,  267,  B.  3;  262, 
H.  3. 

-ce  and  -cine,  enclitic,  134,  B.  4. 

Cedo,  constr.,  223,  R.  2,  (1),  (d.) 

Cedo,  imperative,  183,  ll. 

Celer,  how  declined,  108 :  gen.  plur.,  114, 
■.2. 

Cflo,  with  two  aces.,  231 ;  w.  <fe,  231,  B.  8. 

Censeo,  273,  N.  4. 

Cfntena  millia,  ellipsis  of,  118,  5. 

-ceps,  nouns  in,  gen.  of.  77,  r;  adjs.  in, 
gender  of,  112, 2;  abl.  of,  113,  E.  2,  and  E.  3. 

Ceres,  genitive,  of,  73,  k.  2. 

Certe  and  certo,  19?,  N.  1. 

Certus,  21.3,  R.  1;  275,  m.,  (20j  270,B.l. 

Cetera  and  reliqiia  for  ceteris,  234,  ]I.,&.8. 

Ceteruyn,  198,  8,  R..  (6.) 

Ceu^  w.  subj.,  263.  2. 

Ch,  sound  of.  10.  1;  when  silent,  12,  B.; 
in  syllabication,  18,  2. 

Cliaracter  or  quality,  gen.  of,  211,  B.  6. 

Chaos,  61,  E.  3. 

Cheli/s,  declined,  86. 

Choliambus,  314,  ii. 

Choriambic  metre,  316;  303; — pentame- 
ter, 316,  I. ;— tetrameter,  316,  n. ;— trime- 
ter, 316,  IV. ;— trimeter  catalectic,  316,  v.  ;— 
dimeter,  316,  Ti. 

Cicur,  gen.  plur.  of.  114,  e.  2. 

Circum,  in  composition,  196,  4. 

Circumdo  and  circumfundo,  249,  R.  3. 

Circum&ex  accent,  15,  2,  and  14;  how 
used,  14.  3. 

Cis  and  cifra,  constr.,  235,  B.  1. 

Citerior.  compared.  126,  1. 

a  turn,  pr.,  284.  E.  1,  (2.) 

Clam,  constr..  235.  (5.) 

Ciajiculum,  192.  iv.,  b.;  235,  (5.);  126,1. 

Claudo,  its  compounds,  189.  N.  3. 

CUutse,  201,  13 ;  as  the  subject  of  a  pro- 
position, 202,  III.,  R.  2;  as  an  addition  to 
the  predicate,  203,  n.,  3;  its  gender.  34,  4; 
88  the  object  of  a'  verb,  229,  r.  5  ;  in  abL 
absolute,  2-56,  b.  8 ;  connection  of  clauses, 
198, 1,  and  ii. ;  278,  r.  1 ;  280,  m. ;  arrange- 
ment of,  280 ;  similar  clauses,  278,  N.  1. 

Climax,  324,  21. 

Clothing,  verbs  of.  249,  i. 

Calestis,  abl.  of,  113,  B.  1;  gen.  plur.  of, 
114,  K.  3. 

Caiutn,  plur.  cadi,  92,  4. 


Cano,  w.  gen.  of  price,  214,  v.  1,  (ft.)        ' 

Ca^i  and  cceptus  sum,  183,  2. 

Cognate  object.  232 ;— subject,  234,  in. 

Cosrnitus,  pr..  285.  2,  E.  1. 

Cognomen  follows  the  gentile  name,  279. 
9,  (b.) 

Cognommts,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  1. 

Cogo,  273,  N.  4. 

-cola,  compounds  in,  gen.  plur.  of.  43,  2. 

Collective  nouns,  26,  4;  number  of  their 
verbs,  209,  b.  11. 

Com  for  cum  in  composition,  196,  5: 
197,5. 

Comitiis,  as  abl.  of  time,  253,  N.  1. 

Common,  nouns,  26,  3;— gender,  30; — 
syUables,  282,  2;  283,  rv.,  e.  2. 

Commoneo  and  commonefacio,  constr., 
218;273,  N.  4. 

Communis,  constr.,  222,  b.  2,  (a.)  and  B 
6,  (a.) 

Commuto,  constr.,  252,  b.  5. 

Compar.,  gen.  plur.  of,  114,  E.  2. 

Comparo,  constr.,  224,  N.  1,  3. 

Comparative  conjunctions,  198,  3. 

Comparative  degree,  122,  5 ;  uses  of,  122, 
B.  1,  2,  3;  formation  of,  1^;  by  magis, 
127,  1. — comparatives  declined,  110;  abl. 
sing,  of,  113,^;  w.  gen.,  212,  B.  2,;  denotes 
one  of  two,  212.  r.  2.,  N.  1;  w.  abl.,  256; 
used  pleonastically,  256,  R.  12,  13. 

Comparison,  25;  of  adjs.,  122 — 127;  de- 
grees of,  122,  3;  terminal,  124; — irregular, 
125;  defective,  126;  by  wiogxa  and  maximc, 
127;— of  adverbs,  194. 

Complex  subject,  202,  1,  3,  6;  complex 
predicate,  203,  1,  3,  6 ;  complex  sentence, 
201,  11. 

Complures,  how  declined,  110. 

Compono,  constr.,  224,  N.  1,  3,  and  r.  4. 

Compos  and  impos,  gen.  of,  112,  2:  abl 
of,  113,  K.  2;  115,  1,  (a.);  pr.  300,  e.  3. 

Composition  of  nouns,  103; — of  adjs., 
131 ;— of  verbs,  183 ;— of  adverbs,  193. 

Compound  verbs,  how  conjugated,  163, 
4;— subject,  202,  4;— predicate,  203,  4;— 
sentence,  201,  12 ; — metres,  318 ; — ^words,  in 
syllabication,  23; — nouns,  declension  of, 
91 ;  how  formed,  103 ;  quantity  of  compd. 
words,  2S5. 

Con,  adjs.  compd.  with,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1; 
verbs  compd.  with,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  cum^ 
224,  R.  4. 

Coruedo,  constr.,  273,  N.-5;  274,  B.  7. 

Concessive  conjunctions,  198,  4. 

Concors,  and  discors,  gen.  of,  112,  2;  abl. 
of,  113,  E.  2. 

Concrete,  nouns.  26,  b.  2.;— adjs.,  101, 
B. ;  used  for  abstracts,  in  expressions  of 
time,  253,  a.  6. 

Coiu/itio,  in  abl.,  249.  n. 

Conditional  conjunctions,  198,  5. 

Conduce,  with  part,  ia  dus,  274.  B.  7. 

Condemning,  verbs  of,  w.  gen.,  2l7. 

Confero,  w.  dat,  224,  N.  1.  3. 

Confido,  w.  abl.,  245,  ii. ;  w.  dat.,  245,  B.  1. 

CbH>.  183.  12;  180,  N. 

Confinis,  222,  R.  1. 

Congruo,  224,  N.  1,  3.  and  R.  4. 

Conjugation,  25;  149;  first,  155,  156; 
second,  167;  third,  158,  159;  fourth,  160; 


INDEX. 


388 


of  deponent  verbs,  161;  periphrastic,  162; 
general  rules  of,  163;  of  irregular  verbs," 
178— 1S2 ;  of  defective  verbs,  183 ;  of  imper- 
Boiial  verbs,  184;  regular  atid  irregular 
verbs  in  the  four  conjugations,  164 — 177. — 
conjugations,  how  characterized,  149;  re- 
marlcs  on,  162. 

Conjunctions,  198;  classes  o^  198;  coor- 
dinate, 198,  I. ;  subordinate,  198,  n. ;  encli- 
tics, 198,  N.  1;  copulative  and  disjunctive, 
their  use,  278;  use  of  coordinate  and  sub- 
ordinate conjg.,  198,  R.  1;  repeated,  278, 
R.  7;  when  omitted  between  adjs.,  205,  a. 
16 ;— between  words  opposed,  278,  B.  6. 

Conjungo,  224,  N.  1,  3,  and  R.  4. 

Conjunctus,  222,  r.  6. 

Conjux,  gender  of,  30:  gen.  of,  78,  2,  (5.) 

Connecting  vowel,  150,  5 ;  omitted  in  2d 
root,  163,2;  in  verbal  nouns,  102,  5,  (6.); 
in  verbal  adjs.,  129,  land4,  (6.);  in  compd. 
nouns  and  adjs.,  103,  R.  1. ;  131,  x. 

Connection  of  tenses,  258; — of  words  by 
conjunctions,  278; — of  clauses  by  do.,  278, 
E.  3. 

Connectives,  201,  8,  9;  place  of,  279,  3. 

Conor,  271.  N.  1. 

Conscius,  213,  R.  1;  275,  in.,  (2.) 

Consentaneus,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  w.  abl., 
222,  R.  6;  consentaneutn  erat,  the  indie,  in- 
stead of  the  subj.,  259,  r.  3,  (a.);  with  inf. 
as  subject,  269,  r.  2. 

Consentio,  w.  dat.,  224,  N.  1,  3. 

Consequor,  ut,  273,  n.  2. 

Consido,  241,  R.  5. 

Consonants,  3. 1;  division  of,  ib.;  double, 
8,1,2;  sounds  of,  10—12. 

Consors,  213,  R.  1. 

Constat,  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  R.  2. 

Constituo,  272,  n.  1. 

Consto,  w.  abl.,  245,  ir.,  5. 

Consuetudo  est,  constr.,  262,  R.  3,  N.  2. 

Consuesco,  245,  n.,  3. 

Contendo,  273,  N.  1. 

Contentus,  w.  abl.,  244;  w.  perf.  inf.,  268, 
B.  2. 

Conterminus,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (a.) 

Continens,  abl.  of,  82,  e.  4,  (a.) 

Continental  pronunciation  of  Latin,  6. 

Contingit,  conjugation,  184;  w.  ut,  262, 
B.  3  ;  w.  dat.  and  inf.,  262,  r.  3,  N.  1. 

Continuo,  193,  n.,  1. 

Contra,  how  used,  195,  R.  7. 

Contracted  syllables,  quantity  of,  283,  m. 

Contractions  in  2d  root  of  verbs,  162,  7. 

Convenio,  233,  n. 

Convenit,  the  indie,  for  the  subj.,  259, 
B.  3;  w.  inf..  269,  R.  2. 

Convinco,  217,  R.  1. 

Copia  est,  w.  inf.,  270,  R.  1,  (c) 

Copula,  140,  4. 

Copulative  conjs.,  198, 1;  repeated,  198, 
B.  (e.) 

Cor,  gender  of,  61;  genitive  of,  71,  R.  2; 
compds.  of,  112,  2. 

Correlative  adjs,,  139,  (2.),  (3.);  104,14;— 
adverbs,  191,  R.  1. 

Comu,  declined,  87. 

Crasis,  306,  (5.)  and  322. 

Crater,  genitive  of,  71. 

Gredo^  272,  and  R.  ^\-~crederes,  In  the 


sense  of  a  pluperffect,  260,  ii.,  b.  2;— cre- 
dendum  est,  271,  R.  2. 

Creo,  nascor,  etc.,  246,  R.  1. 

Crime,  in  genitive  after  verbs,  217. 

Crhiiine,  without  a  preposition,  217,  R. 
2,  (b.) 

Crude  form  or  root,  40, 10. 

-crum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Ct,  initial,  12,  3. 

Cui  and  Imic,  how  pronounced,  9,  6;  pr. 
306,  R.  2. 

Cujas,  how  declined,  139,  4,  (6.) 

Cujns,  how  declined,  137,5;  cujusmodi^ 
etc.,  134,  R.  5. 

-ctdum,  verbals  in,  102,  5 ;  contracted  to 
<lum,  102,  5,  (6.) 

-cidus,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  3,  and 
B.,  1,2;  128,5. 

Cum,  prep.,  affixed  to  abl.,  241,  R.  1; 
133,  B.  4;  136,  r.  1;  how  used,  195,  R.  11; 
w.  abl.  of  manner,  247,  2 ;  in  composition, 
196,5. 

Cum  or  guum,  mood  of  the  verb  following 
it,  263,  5. 

Cum,  'while,'  263,  5,  a.  4. 

-cumqiie,  used  to  form  general  indefinites, 
191,  B.  1,  (b.);  139,  5,  R. ;  composition  and 
meaning,  139,  5,  n.  1;  sometimes  separated 
from  qui,  etc.,  323,  4,  (5.) 

Cumprimis,  its  meaning,  193,  ii.,  2. 

Cuncti  and  omnes,  w.  gen.  pliir.  212, 
R.2,  N.  6. 

-cundus,  adjs.  in,  129, 1. 

Cupido,  gender  of,  59,  r.  2. 

Cupidus,  constr.,  213,  R.  1;  275,  (2.); 
270,  R.  1. 

Cupio,  271,  R.  4;  cupiens,  213,  R.  1,  (2.) 

Cwro,  273,  n.  1;  274,  R.  7;  airaut,  267, 

R.3. 

Curritur,  conjugated,  184,  2,  (6.) 
Gustos,  gender  of,  30;  61,  3;'  genitive,  75, 

E.  1. 


D  final  in  prosody,  299,  2 ;  before  s  In 
roots  of  nouns,  66,  R.  1 ;  in  roots  of  verbs, 
171,  3,  and  e.  5. 

Da,  pr.,  284,  R.  2,  (b.) 

Dactylic  metre,  310  and  803 ;— trimeter, 
312,  VI.; — dimeter,  312,  vii.; — hexameter, 
310, 1.  DactyUco-iambic  meter,  318,  i. ;  dac- 
tylico-trochaic  heptameter,  318,  iv. ;— tetra- 
meter, 318,  V. 

Darna,  gender  of,  42,  2. 

Damni  infecti  satisdo,  etc.,  217,  R.  3. 

Dative,  37;  sing,  of  3d  decl.,  79;  plur. 
always  like  abl.,  40,  6;  exceptions  in  do. 
1st  decl.,  43;  of  3d  decl.,  84;  of  4th  decl., 
89,  5;  used  for  predicate  nom.,  210,  n.  3; 
for  gen.,  211,  b.  5;  commodi  et  tncommodij 
222,  land  2;  dative  of  the  end,  227;  dat. 
of  the  object,  after  adjs.,  222;  diiferent  con- 
structions  instead  of,  222,  r.  4  and  6;  after 
idem,  222,  r.  7 ;  after  verbs,  223—227 ;  after 
verbs  compounded  with  ad,  ante,  etc.,  224: 
with  ab,  ex,  de,  ciraim  and  contra,  224,  R.  1 
and  2;  with  dis,  224,  R.  3;  with  satis,  bent 
and  male,  225,  i. ;  dat.  of  the  agent,  225,  n. 


884 


INDEX. 


and  in.;  of  the  poesePBOr  after  est,  226; 
after  particles,  228 ;  dat.  with  the  ace,  223, 
(1.);  two  datives  after  sum,  etc.,  227:  want- 
ing, 225,  iir.,  R. ;  dativu^  ethicus,  228,  «. 

Da/urn.  pr.,  234,  e.  1,  (2.) 

De,  195.  R.  12;  with  abl.  instead  of  ace., 
229,  R.  5.  (6.):  231.  R.  3. 

Dea.  xiat.  and  abl.  plur.  of,  43. 

Btbebat,  indie,  instead  of  subj.,  259,  R.  3. 

Becedo,  \r.  abl.,  251. 

Dfcemo,  273.  n.  1  and  4. 

Decet,  conjugated,  184;  its  constmetion, 
229,  R.  7;  223,  R.  2,(6.);  indie,  for  subj., 
259,  R.  3. 

Dcclaratire  sentences,  200,  3. 

Derlaro,  230.  n.  1. 

Declenjsion,  38;  parts  of  speech  declined, 
25,  3:  of  nouns.  38-40;  rules  of,  40;  first, 
41 — 45;  exceptions  in  do.,  43;  paradigms 
of.  41; — second,  46—54;  paradigms  of,  46; 
exceptions  in  do.,  52;  third,  55—86;  para- 
digms of  57.;  exceptions  in  do.,  68—85; 
fourth,  87 — 89;  paradigms  of,  87;  excep- 
tions in  do.,  89;  formed  by  contraction,  89; 
fifth,  90;  paradigms.  90;  exceptions  in.  90; 
-of  adjs..  Ist  and  2d.  105—107 ;  third,  108— 
111; — declensions,  how  distinguished,  38; 
tabular  riew  of,  39. 

Dedi,  pr..  284.  2,  E.  1. 

Deest  mihi,  226,  R.  2;  pr.,  306, 1,  B.  1,  (1.) 

Defective  nouns,  94—96; — adjs.,  115; — 
verbs,  183. 

Defendo,  251,  R.  2. 

Defero,  w.  gen.  of  the  crime,  217,  R.  1. 

Deficior.  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  H.  1. 

Befit,  183,  13.  and  180,  N. ;  226,  R.  2. 

Beflecto,  229.  r.  4. 

Befimgor,  245,  r. 

Degree,  ace.  of,  231.  R.  5;  232,  (3.) 

Degrees  of  comparison,  122  and  123;  in- 
ferior degrees,  123.  1 :  equal  degrees,  123,  3; 
a  small  degree,  123,  2 ;  superior  degrees  va- 
riously expressed,  127.  2,  3,  4. 

Bejero,  1S9,  n.  3;  pr.,  285,  2,  E.  1. 

Bein,  deinceps,  deinde,  pr.,  306,  1,  B. 
1,  (1) 

Belectat,  conjugated,  184;  its  construc- 
tion, 229,  b.  7 ;  223.  R.  2. 

Belector,  w.  quod,  273.  n.  6. 

Beligo,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  n.  1. 

-dem,  enclitic,  134,  b.  6. 

Demonstrative  adjs.,  104, 15;  139,  5,  R.; 
— ^pronouns,  134;  constr.  of,  207;  in  appo- 
Btion  to  a  clause,  207,  R.  22 ;  206,  (3.) ;  used 
when  the  reference  is  not  to  the  subject, 
208,  (6.);  place  of,  279,  7;  ellipsis  of  de- 
monstratives before  their  relatives,  206,  (3.), 
(a.);  coi^tr.  of  dem.  adjs.,  206,  (16.);  dem. 
advs.  for  dem.  pronouns,  206,  (20.);  dem. 
pronouns  is,  etc.,  used  for  the  oblique  cases 
him,  her,  etc.,  207,  K.20;  redundant,  207. 
b.  21;  dem.  prons.  and  advs.  announcing  a 
proposition,  207,  R.  22. 

Bemoveo,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Benarius,  value  of,  327,  B.  3;  divisions 
of.  ib. 

Benigue,  its  use,  277,  r.,  R.  13. 

Denominatives,  adjs..  128 ; — ^verbs,  187, 1. 

Bens,  gender  of,  04. 1 ;  cr.fapds.  of,  64, 1. 

Bepdlo,  w.  abl.,  251,  k. 


Dependence,  defined,  203,  ni.,  8;  ©f 
tenses,  258. 

Dependent  or  subordinate  propositions, 
201,  6. 

Deponent  verbs,  142,  R.  4;  conjugated, 
161 ;  participles  of,  1G2.  17 ;  lists  of  in  Ist 
conj.,  166;  2d  conj.,  170;  3d  conj.,  174; 
4th  conj.,  177;  increment  of,  289,  3. 

Beposco,  274,  R.  7. 

Depriving,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  251. 

Denvation  of  nouns,  100; — of  adjs.,  128; 
—of  verbs.  187:— of  advs.,  192. 

Derivative  words,  quantity  of.  2S4. 

Beses,  gen.  of,  112,  1;  abl.  of  113,  B.  2; 
defective.  115,  2 ;  compared,  126.  4. 

De-siderative  verbs,  187,  ii.,  3;  176,  H.; 
quantity  of  the  m  in,  284,  e.  3.  — -^ 

Besigno,  with  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1. 

Bespero,  constr.,  224,  R.  1.      , 

Besuper  and  insuper,  236,  B.  8. 

Beterior,  compared,  126, 1. 

Beterreo,  guin,  ne,  or  guominus,  262, 
B.  11 ;  w.  inf.  ib.  v. 

Beturbo,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Bexter,  how  declined,  106;  how  com- 
pared, 12o,  4. 

Belts,  declined,  53;  deum  for  deontm,  53. 

Bi  or  dii,  53 ;  ellipsis  of,  205,  E.  7. 

-di  or  -dis,  see  -dis. 

Diaeresis,  306,  ^;  nutr^^f  fL9. 

Dialysis,  30*^57 

Diana,  pr.  282,  i.,  K.  5. 

Diastole,  307,  2. 

Bico,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1;  ellipsis  of; 
229,  B.  3.  2:  209,  b.  4;  270,  B.  2,  (fe.);  w.inf. 
and  ace,  272,  n.  1;  w.  u/,  273,  2,  (c); 
dicunt,  '  they  say,'  209,  R.  2,  (2.);  ditor,  w. 
predicate  nominative,  210,  B.  3,  (3.),  (o.) 
and  N.  1,  cf  271,  B.  2;  272,  b.  6;  die,  im- 
perative, 162,  4. 

Di«olon,  319,  2. 

Dicto  awliens,  w.  dat.,  222,  B.  1 ;  dicto^ 
w.  comparative,  256,  B.  9. 

-dicus,  words  ending  in,  pr.,  284,  2,  B.  1. 

Bido,  declined.  86 ;  genitive  of,  69,  e.  3. 

Bies,  declined,  90;  its  gender,  90,  E.  1; 
compds.  of  with  numerals,  121,  3;  quantity 
of,  285,  B.  4,  E.  3.  (6.) 

Difference,  degree  of,  how  expressed,  256, 
B.  10. 

Biffero,  constr.,  251,  B.  3,  N. ;  229,  E.  4,1. 

Differing,  verbs  of,  251,  b.  3. 

BifficUe  est,  the  indie,  for  the  subj.,  259, 
B.  4,  (2.);  with  an  inf.  as  subject,  269,  R.  2; 
with  supine  in  «,  276,  iii.,  B.  1;  w.  ad  and 
a  gerund,  276.  in.,  r.  4. 

Bigne,  w.  abl.,  244,  R.  1. 

Bignor,  w.  abl.,  244,  R.  1;  Mt.  ace.  of  the 
person,  ib. ;  w.  inf.,  ib. ;  w.  two  aces.,  ib. 

Bigniis,  w.  abl.  of  the  thing,  244;  w.gen. 
244,  R.  2,  («•);  w.  ace.  of  neut.  pron.  or 
adj..  244,  B.  2,  (a.);  w.  inf.  or  a  subj. 
clause,  244,  B.  2,  (b.);  with  relative  and 
subj.,  264,  9:  w.  supine  in  u,  276,  in.,  b.  1. 

Dimeter.  304,  2. 

Diminutive  nouns,  100,  3;— adjs.,  104,11; 
128.5;— verbs,  187,  n.,  4 ;— «dverbs,  192,  b. 

Diphthongs,  4;  sounds  of,  9;  quantity 
of,  13,  4;  283,11. 

Diptotes,  9i. 


INDEX. 


385 


Dtrfor«/ts,  196,  (6.),  2. 

Dis  or  d>\  inseparable  prep.,  196,  (b.),  2; 
construction  of  some  verbs  compounded 
with,  251,  R.  3,  N. ;  pr.,  285,  2,  R.  2. 

-(lis,  genitives  in,  77,  E.  1;  dis,  adj.,  gen. 
plur.  of,  114,  K.  3. 

Disrerno,  251,  R.  3,  N. ;  in  imperf,  subj. 
for  pluperf.,  260,  ii.,  r.  2. 

Discolor,  abl.  of,  Il3,  E.  2. 

Discordo  and  discrepo,  251,  K.  3,  and  N. 

Diserlus,  pr.,  284,  E.  5,  2,  M.  1. 

Disjunctive  conjs.,  198,  2. 

Bissideo,  constr.,  251,  R.  3,  and  N. 

Bissimilis,  222,  R.  1,  and  R.  2. 

Distich,  304. 

Distinguo  and  disto,  251,  R.  3,  and  n. 

Distributive  numbers,  119. 120 ;  gen.  plur. 
of,  105,  R.  4;  used  for  cardinal  numbers, 
120,  4 ;— for  multiplicatives,  120,  4,  (b.) 

Distrophon,  319,  3. 

i>/M,  compared,  104,  6. 

Dives,  gen.  sing.,  112,  1;  gen.  plur.,  114, 
E.  2;  115,  1,  («.) 

Division  of' words  into  syllables,  17 — 23. 

Do,  149,  E. ;  w.  perf.  participles,  274, 
E.  4 ;  w.  participles  in  dus,  274,  K.  7 ;  incle- 
ment of,  290,  E. ;  284,  e.  4. 

-do,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  59,  2 ;  genitive 
of,  69,  E.  1. 

Doceo,  231,  k.  1 ;  w.  gen.  of  price,  214,  N.  1. 

Doleo,  w.  quod,  etc.,  273,  a.  7. 

Dominus,  declined,  46. 

Domus,  declined,  89;  different  use  of 
domus  and  dorni,  89,  (a.);  constr.  of  gen., 
221,  R.  3;  of  ace,  237,  k.  4;  of  abl.,  255, 
E.  1 ;  254,  R.  2. 

Donee,  w.  subj.,  263,  4;  pr.,  299,  4,  E. 

Dono,  w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  B.  1;  w.  two  da- 
tives, 227,  R.  1. 

Dos,  gen.  of,  61,  3;  doti  dicare,  227,  E.  2. 

Double  consonaiits,  3,  1. 

Doubtful  gender,  30. 

Dubito  and  non  dubito,  262,  N.  7  and  8; 
dubito  an,  198,  11,  (c):  dubito  sit  ne,  etc., 
262,  N.  8. 

Duco.  constr.,  214;  227,  R.  1;  230,  n.  1; 
innumero,  or  in  loco,  230,  N.  4;  due,  im.- 
perat.,  162,  4. 

Dudum  and  jamdudum,  191,  E.  6. 

Duim,  duis,  etc.,  162,  1. 

Dum,  w.  subj.,  263,  4;  dum  ne  and  dum- 
modo  ne,  263,  2,  n.  ;  dum,  '  until,'  263,  4, 
(1.);— 'while,'  263.  4,  (2.)— compounded 
with  a  negative,  277,  R.  16. 

Duntaxat,  193,  ii.,  3. 

Duo,  declined,  118;  duum  for  duorum, 
118,  R.  1. 

-dus,  participle  in,  how  declined,  103, 
R.  2 ;  of  neuter  deponent  verbs,  161 ;  with 
sum,  162,  15;  neuter  in  -dum  with  est,  274, 
R.  11 ;  w.  dat.  of  person,  162,  15,  R.  5;  225, 
III.;  of  dep.  verbs,  162,  17,  (b.);  w.  ace, 
234,  R.  2;  its  signification,  274,  2,  E.  7  and 
8;  used  for  a  gerund,  275,  u. 


B. 


E,  sound  of,  7  and  8 ;  S  changed  to  ii.  or  I, 
56,  R.  4  and  5;  nom.  in  S  in  8d  decl.,  56,  i, 
E.  1,  7 ;  gender  of  nouns  in  e  of  3d  decL, 


66;  genitive  of,  68;  abl.  of,  82;  old  dat.  m, 
79;  ace.  plur.  in,  54,  5;  nom.  plur.  in,  83, 
I.,  1 ;  voc.  in,  81,  R. ;  in  gen.  and  dat.  sing. 
5th  decl.,  90,  E.  2;  cf  40,  11;  advs.  in.  192, 
II. ;  syncope  of  in  imperf.  of  4th  conj.,  162, 
2;  increment  in  e  of  3d  decl.,  287,  3;  plur., 
288;  of  verbs,  290;  c  ending  the  first  part 
of  a  compound  word,  285,  E.  4;  «  final, 
quantity  of,  295. — e  or  ex,  prep.,  see  ex. 

-ea,  Greek  ace.  sing,  ending  in,  54,  6,  and 
80,  m. 

Eapse,  etc.,  135,  R.  3. 

Ecce,  compounded  with  demonstrative 
pronouns,  134,  R.  2;  w.  nom.,  209,  r.  13: 
w.  ace,  238,  2. 

Eccum,  eccillum,  eccistam,  etc.,  134,  E.  2: 
238,2. 

-eci5,  gen.  in,  78,  (2.) 

Ecquis  and  eeqiii,  how  declined,  137,  3, 
and  R.  3;  ecqiicR  and  ecqua^  137,  3,  r.  4; 
ecquis  est  qui,  264,  7,  N.  2;  ecquid,  interrog. 
particlCj  198,  11,  and  K.  a  and  6. 

Ecqiitsnam,  137,  4. 

Ectasis,  307,  2,  (3.) 

Ecthlipsis,  305,  2. 

Edepol,  199,  r.  3. 

Edico,  273,  N.  4. 

Edim,  edis,  etc.,  162, 1. 

-edis,  gen.  in,  73,  e.  1  and  112, 1. 

Editus,  w.  abl.,  246. 

Edo,  '  to  eat,'  conjugated,  181 ;  compds. 
of,  181,  n. 

-edo,  abstracts  in,  101, 1. 

Edoceo,  w.  two  aces.,  231,  B.  1. 

Efficio,  273,  N.  2;—efficiens,  w.  gen.,  213, 
R.  1,  (2.); — ejfficitur,  w.  wf,  or  the  ace.  with 
the  inf.,  262,  r.  3,  n.  1. 

Effugio,  w.  ace,  233,  E.  1. 

Egeo  and  indigeo,  250,  2,  E.  1;  220,  3. 

-egis,  genitives  in,  78,  2. 

Ego,  declined,  133. 

Elieu.  pr.,  283,  i.,  e.  5. 

Ei,  how  pronounced,  9, 1,  and  R.  1 ;  gen- 
itive in,  73,  R. ;  pr.,  283,  i.,  s.  6,  (1.) 

-eia,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

-eis,  fem.  patronymics  in,  100,  1,  (6.) — 
ace  plur.  in.  85,  e.  1,  and  114,  2. 

-eius,  pr.,  283,  i.,  E.  6,  (3.) 

Ejus,  use  of,  208,  (6.) 

Ejusmodi  and  ejusdemmodi,  139,  5,  N.  2. 

-ela,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

Elegiac  verse,  311,  r.  2. 

Ellipsis,  323;  of  pronoun  in  case  of  appo- 
sition, 204,  R.  4 ;  of  the  noun  of  an  adj., 
205,  R.  7 ;  252,  r.  3 ;  of  the  antecedent,  206, 
(3.)  and  (4.);  of  meus,  etc.,  207,  R.  38;  of 
nom.,  209,  r.  2  and  3;  of  verb,  209,  r.  4; 
229,  R.  3;  of  a  noun  limited  by  a  genitive, 

211,  R.  8;  of  gen.,  211,  r.  9;  of  a  partitive, 

212,  R.  1,  N.  3;  of  subject  ace,  239;  269, 
R.  1;  of  ace  after  transitive  verb,  229,  r.  4; 
of  prep..  232,  (2.);  235,  R.  6;  241,  r.  4;  248, 
R.  3;  of  voc,  240;  of  (/uam,2oQ;  of  partici- 
ple, in  abl.  absol.,  257,  R.  7;  of  ut  w.  subj., 
262,  R.  4;  «f  Jift  after  cave,  262,  r.  6;  of /ion 
after  non  modo,  etc.,  277,  R.  6;  of  co.ijunc- 
tions,  278,  R.  6;  of  7  in  composition,  307; 
of  centena  inillia,  321,  R.  (y. 

-ellus,  «,  uin,  diiuinutived  in,  100.,  S, 
A.  3. 


886 


INDEX. 


-em  and  -en,  acc8.  In.  45,1;  80,  IV.}  -em 
In  ace.  sing.  3ddecl.,  73,  80. 

Emo,  252,  r.  1. 

Emphatic  word,  its  place  in  a  sentence, 
279.  2  and  16. 

En,  interrogatire  particle,  198, 11,  andR. 
(a.);  137,  R.  3;  en,  interjection,  l99;  w. 
nom..  209,  r.  13;  w.  ace.  238,  2;  -en,  aec. 
in,  45,  1;  80,  iv. 

Enallage,  323,  3. 

Enclitics,  in  accentuation,  15,  3; — con- 
junctions, 198,  N.  1. 

Endeavoring,  verbs  of,  273,  1,  (a.) 

-endus  and  -undus,  163,  20. 

English  pronunciation  of  Latin,  6. 

Enhn  and  nam,  198,  7,  and  E. ;  279,  3, 
(a.)  and  (c.) 

Enimvero,  198,  9.  R.  (o.) 

EunehemimerLs,  30i,  5. 

Ens,  participle,  154.  R.  1. 

-ensis,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  (a.) 

-entissimus.  superlatives  in,  126,  8 

-eniis,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  (c.) 

Eo,  conjugated,  182;  compds.  of,  182, 
E.  3;  w.  supine  in  utn,  276,  ii.,  R.  2;  w.  two 
datives,  227,  R.  1. 

•eo,  verbs  in  of  1st  conj.,  165,  R.  3. 

Eo,  pron.  w.  comparatives,  256,  R.  16. 
As  adverb  of  place,  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4.,  N.2, 
{b.) — of  degree,  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4.  n.  3-  As 
an  illative  conj.,  198,  6. 

Eodem,  w.  gen.,  212,  R.  4.  N.  3. 

-eos,  Greek  gen.  in,  76,  E.  7  ;  54  5;  pr., 
283,  I.,  E.  6,  (2.) 

Epanadiplosis.  324, 18. 

Epanados,  324,  19. 

Epanalepsis,  324,  16. 

Epanaphora,  324.  13. 

Epanastrophe,  324,  17. 

Epanorthosis.  324,  32. 

Epeuthesis,  322,  3. 

Epicene  nouns,  33. 

Epistrophe,  324.  14. 

Epizeuxis,  324,  20. 

Epu'lor,  with  abl.,  245,  n.,  4. 

Epulum,  92,  6. 

Equality,  how  denoted,  123,  3. 

Eques,  gender  of,  31, 2;  used  collectively, 
209,  R.  11,  (1.),  (6.) 

Equidem,  its  composition  and  use,  191, 
E.  4. 

•er,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  46 — syncopated, 
48,  1:  of  3d  decl.,  gender  of,  58  and  60; 
genitive  of,  70  and  71;  syncopated,  71; — 
adjectives  in,  superlative  of,  125 ;  annexed 
to  pres.  infin.  pass.,  162,  6. 

Erga,  how  tised,  195,  E.  7. 

-ere,  in  3d  pers.  plur.  of  perf.  indie,  ac- 
tive, 162,  8. 

-eris.  genitivea  in,  76;  73,  e.  2;  74,  E.  1; 
and  112,  1  and  2. 

Ergo.  w.  gen.,  147,  R.  2,  (a.) 

Erotesis,  324,  31. 

-errimus,  superlatives  in,  125, 1. 

-es,  proper  names  in,  44,  1 ;  -€S«and  -e  in 
Greek  nouns  changed  to  a.  45.  3 ;  nouns  in 
of  3d  decl.  increasing  in  genitive,  gender  of, 
58;  61;  eenitive  of,  73;  genitive  of  adjs.  in, 
112;  not"  increasing,  gender  of,  62;  genitive 
of,  t3;  in  nom.,  ace,  and  voc.   plur.  of 


masc.  and  fern,  nouns  of  3d  decl. ,  88,  i . ;  85 ; 
final,  sound  of,  8,  E.  2;  quantity  of,  300. 

Escit,  154,  R.  4. 

Exse  and  fuisse,  ellipsis  of,  270,  R.  3. 

-esso,  -isso  or  -so,  intensives  in,  187,  n.,  5. 

Est,  w.  dat.  of  a  possessor,  226 ;  est,  qui, 
with  subj.,  264,  6;  so  est,  unde,  vbi,  eur,  or 
ut,  264,  6,  R.  3. 

Et  and  que,  198, 1,  R.  ^p,.);  et  ipse,  207, 
R.  27,  (6.);  ellipsis  ofetj  298,  R.  6,  (6.);  et  is, 
et  id,  et  is  quidem,  20 (,  R.  26,  (c);  et — et. 
et — qite,  et — neque  or  nee,  198,  1,  R.  («.); 
et  non,  198, 1,  (c.) 

Etenim,  198,  7,  R.  (a.) 

Etiam,  198.  1,  R.  (d.);  with  comparatives, 
256,  R.  9,  (b.)\  127,  3;  etiamnum,  etiam 
twm,  191,  R.  7. 

•eiis.  genitive  in,  73 ;  112, 1. 

Etsi  and  etiamsi,  constr.,  271,  E.  2. 

-etum,  derivative  nouns  in,  100,  7. 

Etymology,  24—199. 

Eit,  the  diphthong,  10,  8;  when  not  a 
diphthong,  10,  8,  r.  3;  in  voc.  sing,  of 
Greek  nouns  in  eus,  81. 

Euphemism,  324,  11. 

Eus,  nouns  in  of  2d  decl.,  54,  5; — adjs. 
in,  128,  1  and  2;  Greek  proper  names  in, 
283,  N.  2;  gen.  of,  76,  e.  7;  ace.  of,  180,  iii. 

-ev  and  -etu,  in  2d  and  3d  roots  of  verbs, 
167. 

Evade,  constr.,  251,  N. 

Evenit,  conjugated,  184 ;  evenit  ut,  262, 
R.  3, 

Ex  and  e,  prep.,  how  used,  195,  E.  2  and 
13; — used  with  partitives  instead  of  the 
genitive,  212,  n.  4 ;  sometimes  omitted,  251, 
and  R.  1;  ex  quo,  scil.  tempore,2o3,  N.  4. 

-ex,  gender  of  nouns  in.  65,  2. 

Exadversus,  w.  ace,  195,  R.  3. 

Excedo,  w.  aec.,  233,  (3.),  N. 

Excello,  constr.,  256,  R.'  16,  (3.) 

Excito,  w.  ut,  273,  n.  4. 

Excludo,  constr.,  251,  N. 

Exeo,  constr.,  251,  N. 

Existimo,  w.  gen.,  214;  w.  two  aces., 
230.  N.  1;  existimor,  constr.,  271,  R.  2. 

Erlex,  112,  2;  196.  i.,  6. 

Exos,  genitive  of,  112.  2. 

Exosus,  183,  1,  Ji. 

Exsistunt  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Exter,  105,  3,  and  N.;  comparison  of. 
125.4. 

Expedio,  251,  V.;  expedit,  w.  dat.,  223. 
R.  2,  (6.) 

Experior  si,  198, 11,  («•) 

Expers,  w.  gen.,  213,  E.  1,  (3.),  and 
E.  5.  (2.) 

Extemplo,  193,  ii.,  1. 

Extera,  how  compared,  125,  4;  extremus, 
how  used,  205,  e.  17;  extremum  est,  ui. 
262,  E.  3. 

Exuo,  constr.,  225,  e.  2;  exuor,  234,1., 
E.  1. 


Fabula,  ellipsis  of,  29,  2 

Fac,  imperative,  162,  4;  fac  ut  orrte,  267, 
B.  3 ;  fac,  '  suppose  or  granting,'  w.  ace.  and 
inf.,273,  N.  3;  pr.,  299,  E.  4. 


INDEX. 


887 


Facile^  adv.,  192,  4,  [b.)\  w.  superlatives, 
etc.,  277,  R.  7. 

FaciUs, constr., 276,  in.,  r.  4;  222,  r.  l,(a.) 

Facio  and  compds.,  passive  of.  180  and  N. ; 
changes  of  in  the  compds.,  189,  n.  1;  w. 
gen.  of  value,  214,  R.  2;  w.  two  aces.,  230, 
N.  1;  w.  abl.,  250,  r.  3;  w.  ut  and  subj., 
273,1,  ^.  2  and  3;  w.  participle,  273,  1; 
w.  rfe,  etc.,  250,  R.  8;/acere  non  possum 
quin^  262,  2;  facere  quod,  273,  n.  8;  ellipsis 
of,  209,  R.  4;  facere  certiorem,  230,  N.  3. 

Faliscan  verse,  312.  xi. 

Fallit  me,  229,  r.  7. 

Familia  with  pater,  etc.,  gen.  of,  43,  2. 

Familiaris,  w.  dat.,  222,  k.  1,  la.);  with 
gen.,  222,  r.  1,  (c.) 

Far,  its  root,  56,  ii.,  r.  6;  gen.  of,  71, 
B.  2;  abl.,  82,  e.  1,  (6.);  94  and  95. 

Fas,  gender  of,  62,  e.  2;  94;. /a*  erat, 
the  indie,  instead  of  the  subj.,  259,  r.  3; 
fas  est,  w.  supine  in  u,  276,  iii.,  r.  2. 

Faxo,  faxim  a,nA  faxem,  162,  9,  and  183, 

R.  1. 

Faitx,  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (5.);  but  of.  94, 
p.  50;  gen.  plur.,  8i3,  ii.,  3. 

Favetur,  conjugated,  184,  2,  (b.)  constr., 
223. 

Fearing,  verbs  of,  w.  ut  and  ne,  262,  r.  7. 

Febris,  ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7,  (1.) 

Fecundus,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Feet,  in  poetry,  302 ;  isochronous,  302,  r. 

Fel,  its  root,  56,  ii.,  R.  6;  its  genitive, 
70,  E.  •  94. 

Felix,  declined,  111;  213,  R.  4,  (1.) 

Fe?7iina,  added  to  epicene  nouns,  133,  N. 

Feminine  nouns,  of  1st  decl.,  41;  of  2d 
decl.,  49 — 51;  of  3d  decl.,  62;  exceptions  in, 
62—65. 

Femur,  genitive  of,  71,  3. 

Fer,  162,  4 ;  quantity  of,  299,  E.  4. 

Fero,  conjugated,  179;  its  compds.,  172, 
■  (p.  ISi)  ;.feHur,  constr.  of,  271,  R.  2. 

-ficus,  comparison  of  adjs.  in,  125,  3,  (a.) 

Fido,  how  conjugated,  142,  R.  2 ;  w.  abl., 
245,  II.;  w.  dat.,  245,  ii.,  r.  1;  223,  R.2. 

Fidi,  (from  findo),  pr.,  284.  e.  1,  (1.) 

Figures  of  prosody,  305—307 ;  of  orthog- 
raphy and  etymology,  322;  of  syntax,  323; 
of  rhetoric,  324. 

Filia,  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  43. 

Filius,  voc.  sing.,  52. 

Filling,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  249,  i. ;  w.  gen., 
220,3. 

Final  syllables,  quantity  of,  294—301;— 
conjunctions,  198,  8. 

Finitimus,  w.  dat.,  222,  R.  1,  (a.) 

ii" to,  conjugated,  180;  w.  gen.  of  value, 
214,  R.  2 ;  w.  two  datives,  227,  K.\;  fit  and 
fieri  non  potest  ut,  262,  R.  o;  fit  per  me, 
262,  R.  11 ;  quantity  of  i  in  fio,  283,  E.  1. 

FlagitOy  w.  two  aces.,  231,  R.  1;  w.  ut, 
273,  N.  4. 

Flecto,  used  reflexively,  229,  R.  4,  1. 

Flocci  habere,  etc.,  214,  r.  1. 

Fluo  and  struo,  2d  and  3d  roots  of,  171,  N. 

Follow,  in  what  sense  used,  203,  9. 

Fans,  gender  of,  64,  1. 

Foras  and  for  is,  237,  E.  5,  (c.) 

Forem,fore,  etc.,  154,  R.  3;  162, 12,  {!.); 
w.  two  datives,  227,  r.  1. 


Fractional  expressions,  121,  6. 

Freeing,  verbs  of,  251. 

Frenum,  plur.  freni  and  frena,  92,  6. 

Frequens,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  3,  (3.): 
cf.  R.  4,  (1.) 

Frequentative  verbs,  187,  li.,  1;  quantity 
ofiin,  284,  E.  4. 

Fretus,  w.  abl.,  244;  w.  dat.,  222,  R.  6; 
w.  inf.,  244,  R.  2,  (6.)  _ 

Fructus.  declined,  87. 

Frugi^  115,  4 ;  comparison  of,  125,  5. 
^Fruor,  w.  abl.,  245,  i. ;  w.  ace,  245,  i.,  R. 

Frux,  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (5.);  94. 

Fugio,  constr.,  225,  iv.;  210,  R.  3,(2.); 
fuge,  poetically,  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  3;  fugitme, 
229,  R.  7. 

Fui,  etc.,  in  compound  tenses,  162,  12, 
(l.);  fuisse,  w.  perf.  pass,  participles,  268, 
R.  1,(6.) 

Fungor,  w.  abl.,  245,  I.;  w.  ace.,  245,  R.; 
275,  II.,  R.  1. 

Fuo,  root  of  fui,  154,  R.  2  and  Sifutum, 
pr.,  284,  E.  1,  (2.) 

Furo,  183,  R.  2. 

Furor,  w.  dat.  or  abl.,  224,  R.  2. 

Future  tense,  145,  ii r . ;  how  supplied  in 
the  subj.,  260,  R.  7;  future  perfect  tense, 
145,  VI.;  old  form  in  so,  162,  9  and  10; 
future  indie,  for  imperative,  267,  R.  2 ;  259, 
R.  1,  (4.);  fut.  imperative,  267,  (2.),  (3.); 
future  pass.  part.  w.  ace,  234,  i.,  r.  2; 
fut.  perf.  for  fut.,  259,  r.  1,  (5.) 

Futurum.  esse  ov  fore,  ut,  w.  subj.,  268, 
E.  4,  (6.);  futurum.  fuisse,  ut,  268,  R.  5. 

G. 

G,  sound  of,  10;  before  s  in  roots  of 
nouns,  56,  R.  2;  in  roots  of  verbs,  171,  1, 
and  E.  5. 

Galliambus,  314,  x. 

Gaudeo,  how  conjugated,  142,  E.  2 ;  with 
abl.,  247, 1,  (2.);  w.  ace,  232,  N.  1;  with 
quod,  etc.,  273,  n.  6. 

Gemo,  w.  ace,  232,  n.  1. 

Gems,  gender  of  names  of,  29. 

•gena,  compounds  in,  43,  2. 

Gener,  declined,  46. 

General  relatives,  139,  5,  R.;  how  used, 
207,  R.  29. 

General  indefinites,  139,  5,  R. 

Gender,  26,  7  and  27;  its  divisions,  27; 
"general  rules  of,  27 — 34 ;  natural  and  gram- 
matical, 27;  mase  from  signification,  28; 
fem.  from  do.,  29;  common  and  doubtful, 
30 ;  epicene,  33 ;  neuter  appellatives  of  per- 
sons, 32,  2;  of  Greek  nouns,  34,  r.  1;  neu- 
ter, 34;  of  1st  decl.,  41;  exes  in  1st  decl., 
42:  of  2d  decl..  46;  exes,  in  2d  decl.,  49; 
of  3d  dec!.,  58,  62,  and  66;  exes,  in  3d  decl., 
59—67;  of  4th  decl.,  87;  exes,  in  4th  decl., 
88;  of  5th* decl.,  90;  exes,  in  5th  decl.,  90, 
gender  of  adjs.,  205. 

Genero,  w.  abl.,  246,  n.  1;  generatus,  w. 
abl.,  248. 

Genitive,  37;  sing.,  1st  decl.,  exes,  in,  43; 
of  3d  decl.,  68;  of  adjectives,  3d  decl.,  112; 
plur.,  1st  decl.,  contracted,  43;  2d  decl., 
do.,  53;  3d  decl.,  83;  terminal  letters  in  all 
the  declensions,  40,  5;   of  adjectives,  8d 


388 


mDEX. 


decl.,  112  and  114;  after  nonns,  211:  its 
place.  279.  R. ;  what  relations  it  denotes. 
211.  R  1;  subjective  and  objective.  211.  R.  2; 
of  sub.*tantive  pronouns  objective.  211,  R. 
3;  possessive  adjective  used  for.  211.  R.  4; 
dative  used  ff r,  211,  R.  5:  of  chanacter  or 
quality,  211,  R.  6;  of  measure,  211,  R.  6. 
and  (3. )  and  (6. ) ;  noun  limited  by,  omitted, 

211.  R.  7;  wanting,  in  the  predicate  after 
su:i:.  211,  R.8;  in  other  case-s,  211.  r.8,(4.): 
omitud,  211,  K.  9;  two  genitives, 211.  r.  10; 
gen.  after  opus  and  f/.vH.«!.  211.  11:  how 
translated.  211,  B.  12:  after  partitives.  212; 
after  a  neuter  adjective  or  adj.  pronoun, 

212.  R.  3:  its  place,  279.  10:  after  adverbs. 
212.  R.4:  after  adjectives,  213;  of  cause  or 
source,  213,  R.  2;  dififerent  constructions 
instead  of.  213,  R.4;  after  dUrnus  and  m- 
dis^Hus,  244,  r.  2;  after  verbs,  214—220; 
after  sum^  and  rerbs  of  valuing.  214;  of 
crime.  217 ;  after  verbs  of  admonisliing,  218 ; 
after  verbs  denoting  an  aifection  of  the 
miud,  220;  instead  of  abl.  after  verbs  of 
abounding,  etc.,  220.  3 ;  instwui  of  predicate 
ace,  23' I,  N.  4;  of  place,  221:  after  parti- 
cles, 221,  II.,  III.;  of  gerunds,  275.  tu.,  r.  1; 
plur.  depending  on  a  gerund.  275,  R.  1, 
(3. ) ;  place  of,  after  neuter  adjectives,  279, 
10. 

Genitives,  two,  limiting  the  same  noun, 
211,  r.  10. 

Genitus,  w.  abl.,  246. 

Genius^  voc.  sing.,  52. 

Gentium,  2^2,  r.  4,  k.  2. 

G(7ius,  in  ace.  instead  of  the  gen.  or  abl., 
BS,  id  genus,  omne  senus.  etc..  234.  ii..  R. 
2.^?!.;  209,  R.  7,  (4.):  231,  r.  6;  used  with 
the  genit.  instead  of  an  apposition,  211, 
B.  2.  N. 

Georgicon,  54,  4. 

Gfro  and  ycT-o,  compounds  of,  in  nouns 
of  2d  decl.,  47;  in  adjs.  of  1st  and  2d  decls., 
105,  3;  not  compared.  127,  7. 

Gerundives,  defined,  275,  r.  2 ;  how  used, 
275.  n. 

Gerunds,  25,  and  148,  2 :  by  what  cases 
followed,  274;  and  gerundives,  genitive  of. 
275,  III..  R.  1;  nouns  which  they  follow,  ib! 
(1.);  adjectives,  lb.  (2.):  after  sum  denoting 
tendency,  275,  (5.);  instead  of  a  noun  in 
apposition,  211,  r.  2,  x. ;  dat.  of.  275,  r.  2: 
ace.  of.  275,  K.  8;  abl.  of,  275,  e.  4;  infinl 
for,  after  adj..  270,  R.  1.  (a.) 

Gigno,  pr.,  284,  r.  3. 

Gl,  tl,  and  thl,  in  syUabication,  18.  3. 

GlorioT,  with  abl.,  247,  1,(2.);  w.  ace, 
232.  X.  1.  and  (3.) 

Glyconic  verse,  304,  2;  316,  it. 

G;!,  initial,  12,  r. 

Gnarus,  w.  gen..  213,  R.  1;  cf.  E.  4,  (1.) 

-go,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  59,  2;  genitive 
of,  69,  K.  1. 

Golden  age,  of  Roman  literature,  329,  2. 

Government  defined,  203,  7. 

Grammatical  subject.  2(»2,  2;  cases  of, 
202,  K.  4;  predicate,  203,  2:  figures.  322. 

Gratia,  w.  gen.,  247,  R.  2;  its  place,  279, 
E. ;  gratias  ago,  constr..  273,  n.  6. 

Gratum  mVii  est,  quod,  273,  n.  6. 

Gratulor^  constr.,  273,  «.  7. 


Grave  accent.  5,  2,  and  14,  2 ;  15.  R.  8. 

Gravidus  and  grarw,  w.  gen.  or  abl., 
213.  R.  5.  (3.) 

Greek  nouns,  gender  of.  34,  r.  1 ;  termi- 
nations of  in  Ist  decl.,  44:  in  2d  decl.,  54; 
terminations  of  in  3d  decl.,  55.  R. :  ace.  of 
in  3d  decl..  80:  declension  of.  in  do.,  86 

Greek  or  limiting  ace.  234.  R.  2. 

Grex,  gender  of,  65,  2;  genitive  of  78, 
2,  (2.)' 

Gnis.  gender  of.  30 ;  genitive  of,  76.  e.  3 

Guilt  and  innocence,  adjectives  of,  with 
gen.,  217,  R.  1. 


H. 


H.  its  nature,  2.  6 ;  its  place  in  syllabi- 
cation, 18.  1;  before  *  in  verbal  roots,  171, 
1;  in  prosody,  283,  i.,  (b.) 

Habeo,  with  two  aces.,  230,  ».  1;  habere 
in  numero  or  in  loco.  230,  N.  4;  w.  gen.  of 
value,  214,  R.  2:  w.  abl.  of  price.  252,  r.  1; 
w.  two  datives,  227,  R- 1:  w.  participle  perf. 
pass.,  274,  R.  4;  w.  participle  in  dus,  274, 
R.  7,  (a-);  habeo,  non  habco.  or  nihil  habeo, 
quod,  w.  subj.,  2t}4,  N.  3;  haberi,  w.  predi- 
cate nom.,  210,  R.  3,(3.),  (f.);  271,  i».  2, 
and  R.  4. 

Habito,  w.  gen.  of  price,  214,  n.  1;  w 
abl.  of.  price,  252.  R.  1. 

Hac  in  answer  to  qua  ?  191,  R.  1.  (c.) 

Hactenus,  adv.  of  place  and  time,  191, 

Hadria.  gender  of,  42.  2. 

H^pt,  for  lice.  134,  r.  1. 

Haud,  signification  and  use,  191,  r.  3; 
haud  multum  abest  qvin,  262,  N.  7;  haud 
scioan,  198,11,  R.  (<■) 

Hebes,  gen.  of,  112, 1;  abl.  of,  113,  E.3; 
defective,  115.  2. 

H':itnihi,22%S. 

Hellenism.  323.  R.  (2.) 

Hetn.  w.  dat.,  228,  3;  w.  ace,  238,  2;  w. 
voc.  240.  R.  1. 

Hemistich,  304. 

Hemiolius.  304,  5. 

Hendiadvs,  323.  2.  (3.) 

Hepar.  genit.  of,  71 ;  abl.  of,  82,  K.  1,  (b.) 

Hephthemimeris,  304,  5. 

Heres,  gender  of.  31.  2 ;  genitive,  73,  E.  1. 

Heroic  caesura,  310,  4  and  5. 

lffro5,  genitive,  75,  2;  ace.  80,  R. ;  dat. 
plur..  84;  ace  plur.,  85,  k.  2;  decUned,86. 

Heteroclite  nouns,  93. 

Heterogeneous  nouns,  34,  R.  2 ;  92. 

Hetero.^is,  323,  3,  (2.) 

Hexameter  verse,  310 ;  Priapean,  310,  ii. 

Hiatus,  279,  18. 

Hibernus,  pr.,  284,  E.  5,  E.  2. 

J/ic.  pron.,  declined,  134;  distinguished 
from  iUf,  207,  e.  23;  hie— hie.  for  hic—ille, 
207,  E.  23,  \b.);  related  in  time  like  nunc 
and  tunc. 

Hie,  adv.  of  place,  hie,  hine,  hue,  etc., 
referring  to  the  place  of  tha  speaker,  191, 
R.  1,  (e.):  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2,  (6.); 
adv.  of  time,  191,  r.  1,  (g.) 

Him,  her,  etc.,  how  expressed  in  Latin, 
207,  a.  20. 


INDEX. 


889 


Hipponactic  trimeter,  314,  ii. :  tetrameter, 
814, IV. 

Historical  present,  145,  i.,  3:  perfect, 
145,  IV.,  K.;  for  the  pluperfect,  259,  r.  1, 
(rf.);  infinitive,  209,  r.  6;  tenses,  258. 

Hoc^  pleonastic,  207,  R.  21  and  22 ;  hoc 
W.  partitive  gen.,  212,  r.  3,  N.  1;  hSc  with 
com  pari  tives,  256,  R.  16. 

Hodie,  pr.,  285,  2,  e.  1. 

Homo,  gender  of,  31, 2 ;  genitive,  69,  e.  2 ; 
homo,  homines,  ellipsis  of,  209,  u.  2,(2.); 
205,  R.  7,(1.);  229,  R.  4. 

Homceopropheron,  324,  26. 

Honor,  {-os),  declined,  57. 

Horace,  key  to  the  odes  of,  321. 

Horatian  metres,  320. 

Horreo,  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Hortor,  w.  ad,  225,  R.  1;  w.  ut,  ne,  etc., 
278,  2 ;  without  ut,  262,  r.  4. 

Hospes,  gender  of,  30 ;  formation  of  nom. 
sing.,  56,  I.,  R.  3;  genitive,  73,  2;  abl.,113, 
I.  2;  as  an  adj.,  129,  8. 

Hostis,  w.  gen.  or  dat.,  222,  r.  2,  (c.) 

'  However  '  w.  a  relative,  how  expressed 
in  Latin,  280,  iii.,  (3.) 

Hue,  w.  genitive,  212,  R.  4,  N.  3,  (b.); 
huccine  rerum,  212,  r.  4,  n.  3. 

Humi,  constr.,  221,  R.  3:  humo,  254,  R.  2: 
265,  R.l! 

Huic,  pronunciation  of,  9,  5;  pr.,  306, 
B.2. 

Hujus  non  facio,  214,  R.  1. 

Hujusmodi,  134,  R.  5;  w.  qui  and  the* 
subj.,  264, 1,  N. 

Hypallage,  323,  4,  (3.) 

Hyperbaton.  323,  4. 

Hyperbole,  324,  5. 

Hypercatalectic  or  hypermeter  verse,  304, 
8,  (4.) 

Hypothetical  sentences,  259,  r.  3,  (c), 
(rf.),  and  R.  4;  260,  n. ;  in  the  inf.,  268,  R.4 
— R.  6. 

Hysteron  proteron,  323,  4,  (2.) 


J,  its  sound,  7  and  8 ;  i  and  j  but  one 
character,  2,  3;  t  for  ii  in  gen.  of  2d  decl., 
62;  i  changed  to  e  in  forming  certain 
noms.,  56,  i.,  B.  3;  nouns  in  i,  gender  of, 
66 ;  genitive  of,  68 ;  genitive  of  Greek  nouns 
in,  73,  R. ;  dat.  of  3d  decl.  in,  79;  abl.  sing. 
in,  82 ;  113 ;  in  gen.  and  dat.  sing,  of  5th 
decl.,  90,  E.  2;  I  ending  the  former  part  of 
a  compound  noun  or  adj.,  103,  R.  1;  131, 
N. ;  i  in  dat.  sing,  of  nineadjs.  in  iM  and  er, 
107;  in  1st  person  sing,  of  the  perf.  act., 
147,  3 ;  I.  the  characteristic  vowel  of  the 
4th  conj.,  149,  2;  cf.  150,  5;  i  or  e  for  the 
Greek  «,  283,  E.  6,  (1.);  increment  in,  3d 
decl.,  287,  3;  plur.,  288;  of  verbs,  290; 
i  final,  quantity  of,  285,  R.  4. ;  296. 

-ia,  abstracts  in,  101,  3;  in  nom.,  ace. 
and  voc.  plur.,  83;  85. 

-iacus,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  (d.) 

Iambic  metre,  314;  303;  tetrameter,  314, 
III.;  trimeter,  314,  i.;  catalectic,  314,  iv. ; 
dimeter,  314,  vt.;  hypermeter,  314,  vii.; 
acepl^^us,  314,  viii. ;  catalectic,  314,  ix. ; 
iambicb-dactylic  metre,  818,  n. 
88* 


-mniM,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  (/.) 

-los,  fem.  patronymics  in,  100-  1.  (-!>.) 

Ibi,  ellipsis  of  before  ubi,  206,' (3.),  (a.) 

-ids,  genitives  in,  78,  2,  (2.)  and  (3.) 
74,  E.  2. 

-ictus,  adjs.  in,  128,  2;  -icius  or  -ilius. 
verbal  adjs.  in,  129,  5. 

Ictus,  308,  3. 

-iculus,a,  urn,  diminutives  in,  100,  3,  r.  1. 

-icus,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  (//.),  and  2,  (a.), 
and  6,  {i.) 

Id,  before  a  relative  pron.,  206,  (13.); 
w.  gen.,  212,  r.  3;  id  temporis,  a.taiis,  id 
genus,  etc.,  "2^^,  ii-,  R-  3;  253,  R.  3;  id  ago^ 
constr.,  273,  N.  1;  207,  k.  22;  id  rpiod  in- 
stead  of  quod,  206,  (13.),  (6.);  as  ace.  of  de- 
gree, etc.,  232,  (3.) 

Idem,  declined,  134,  r.  6 ;  how  used,  207, 
R.  27;  w.  gen.,  212,  r.  3;  w.  dat.,  222,  r.7; 
207,  R.  27,  (rf.);  supplying  the  place  of 
item,  etiam,  or  tamen,  207,  R.  27;  idetn 
qui,  ac,  atque,  ut,  cum.,  etc.,  207,  R.  27,  (a.); 
222,  R.  7 ;  idem — idein,  '  at  once,'  207,  R.  27^ 
(c);  as  ace.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

Ides,  326,  2. 

-ides,  and  -iades,  patronymics  in,  100, 1, 
(a.);  pr.,  291,  4. 

Idiotism,  325,  6. 

•idis,  genitives  in,  73,  E.  1;  74,  B.  2. 

Idoneus,  qui,  264,  9;  270,  K.  1. 

-idiis,  adjs.  in,  129,  2. 

•tei,  in  5th  decl.,  quantity  of  the  e,  288, 

I.,  E.  2. 

-ies,  advs.  in,  192.,  ii.,  3. 

IgituT,  198,  6;  its  place,  279,  3,  (6.); 
equivalent  to  '  I  say,'  278,  B.  10. 

Ignarus,  w.  genitive,  213,  R.  1 ;  275,  UI., 
R.  1,  (2.) 

-ii  in  genitive  contracted,  52;  how  ac- 
cented, 14,  E. 

-?7e,  derivative  nouns  in,  100,  9. 

-j7i5,  adjs.  in,  129,  4;  128,4. 

Iliac,  in  answer  to  qua  ?  l91,  B.  1,  (rf.) 

lUacrimo,  w.  dat.,  224,  n.  1,  4. 

Illative  conjunctions,  198,  6. 

Ille,  declined,  134 ;  its  uses,  207,  R.  20— 
26;  w.  quidem,  redundant,  207,  R.  21; 
its  relation  to  time,  207,  R.  23,  (c);  as  a 
pron.  of  the  3d  pers.,  207,  R.  20;  relation 
of  hie  and  ille,  207,  R.  23;  ille,  qui,  w.  subj., 
264, 1,  N. 

lllic,  pron  ,  how  declined,  134,  R.  3; 
illic,  illuc,  mine,  advs.,  their  reference,  191, 
R.  1,  (e.) 

-illimus,  superlatives  in,  125,  2. 

Illiusmodi,  134,  5. 

-illo,  verbs  in,  187,  h-,  4. 

Illud,  w.  genitive,  212,  B.  3,  N.  1,  (a.); 
pleonastic,  207,  R.  22;  aa  ace.  of  degree, 
232,  (3.) 

Illudo,  w.  dat.,  224,  4. 

-illus,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  8,  A.  8. 

-im,  in  ace.  sing.  3d  decl.,  79;  80;  jw  for 
evm,  134,  R.  1;  -im,  is,  etc.,  in  pres.  subj., 
162,  1 ;  adverbs  in,  192.  i.  and  ii. 

Imbecillus,  pr.,  284,  2,  E.  2. 

Imbuo,  constr.,  2.31,  R.  4. 

Imitative  verbs,  187,  3. 

Immemor,  gen.  of,  112,  2;  abl.,  113,  ».  3; 
gen.  plnr.,  114,  ■■  2 


890 


INDEX. 


Imttjo.  191,  E.  8. 

hnnwdicus,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  E.  5,  (3.) 

hnmunis,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 
cf-  251,  s. 

-imonnim,  derir.  nouns  in,  100,  6; — and 
'iynonia,  verbals  in,  102,  3. 

Impatiens,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (2.) 

Lnpavidus,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1,  (3.) 

I/npedio,  w.  ^utn,  262,  N.  7;  w.  quomi- 
nvs,  262,  R.  11;  w.  inf.,  2(32,  a.  11,  N. 

Inipello,  273,  n.  4. 

Imperative,  143,  3;  its  tenses,  145,  R.  3: 
howu.sed.  267,  (1.),  i2.);  irregular,  162,  4 
and  5 ;  subj.  for  imperative  267,  R.  2 ;  sing. 
for  plur.,  209,  N.  2 ;  used  &a  a  noun,  205, 
E.  8. 

Imperfect  tense,  145.  n. ;  w.  oportet.  etc., 
259.  R.  3;  the  imperf.  indie,  for  plup.  subj., 
259,  K.  4.  * 

Jmperitus,  w.  genit.,  213,  E.  1,  (3.);  of 
gerund,  275,  in.,  R.  1,  (2.) 

Impero,  constr.,  273.  n.  4;  262,  E.  4;  w. 
dat.  and  ace.,  223,  R.  2.  (1.) 

Impersonal  verbs,  184 ;  subject  of,  184,  2 ; 
list  of  in  2d  conj.,  169;  184,  R.  1;  in  1st, 
8d,  and  4th  conj.,  184,  R.  1 ;  constr.  w.  gen., 
215,  1:  219;  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2,  n.  (b.);  w. 
ace,  229.  R,  6  and  7. 

Impertio,  249.  i.,  and  E.  3;  225,  R.  1,  (&.) 

Impetro,  ut.  273,  N.  2. 

Jwp/^o,  249,  E.l:  220,3. 

Impono^  24l,  R.  5. 

hnpos  and  impotens,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1, 
(8.) 

Imprhnis,  193,  n.,  2. 

ImprudenSf  improvidus,  w.  genit.,  213, 
E.  1. 

Impubes,  genitive,  112, 1;  abl.,  113,  B.  2; 
115. 1,  (a.) 

Impulsus,  w.  abl.  of  cause,  247,  R.  2,  (6.) 

-in,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  ii.,  R.  1  and  2; 
In  ace.  sing.,  79. 

In,  prep.,  constr.,  235.  (2.);  signification 
and  use,  195,  R.  14 :  in  composition,  198,  7 ; 
in  with  abl.  instead  of  predicate  ace,  230, 
K.  4:  constr.  of  verbs  compd.  with,  224; 
w.  abl.  after  verbs  of  placing,  holding,  re- 
garding, assembling,  etc..  241,  R.  5;  ellipsis 
of  with  some  ablatives  of  place,  254  and  ks.  ; 
with  ablatives  of  time,  253,  n.  1,  and  r.  5; 
■with  names  of  towns,  254,  r.  2  and  r.  3. 

Inanis,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Incassitm,  193,  li.,  4. 

Incedo,  233,  (3.),  N.;  210,  r.  3  (2.) 

Inceptive  verbs,  187,  ii.,  5;  list  of,  173. 

Incertus,  w.  genit.,  213.  R.  1;  incertum 
est  an,  198, 11,  R.  (e.):  265,  R.  3. 

Inchoatives,  see  inceptive  verbs. 

Inddit  ut,  262,  R.  3. 

Incito,  constr.,  225,  B.  1 ;  incitatus,  w.  abl. 
ofcause,  247,  R.  2.  (b.) 

Incipio,  w.  inf.,  271,  x.  1. 

Indino,  constr.,  229,  R.  4,  1;  225,  iv. 

Incommodo,  w.  dat.,  223,  n.  2,  >.  (b.) 

Increment  of  nouns.  286;  sing,  num., 
287:  plur.  num.,  288:  of  verbs,  289. 

lucre inentum,  324,  22. 

Increpo  and  increpi'o,  w.  gen..  217.  R.  1. 

Incumbo,  w.  dat.,  224.  4;  w.  ad,  224,  E.  4. 

Incuso,  w.  genit.,  217,  R.  1. 


Inde,  ellipsis  of  before  vnde,  206,  (3. ),  (a.) ; 
inde  loci,  212,  R.  4,  i».  4. 

Indeclinable  nouns,  34;  94 ;— adjectives, 
115,  4. 

Indefinite  adjectives,  104:  139,  5,  R.; — 
pronouns,  13S; — adverbs.  191,  R.  4. 

Indicative  mood,  143,  1:  its  tenses,  145; 
how  u.<«d,  259 ;  tenses  used  one  for  another, 
2-59,  R.  1—4;  indie,  of  the  preterites  with 
oportet.  etc.,  259,  R.  3;  in  inserted  clauses, 
266,  2,  R.  3  and  5;  266,  1,  R.  1. 

Iiidico,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1. 

Indigeo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2.);  vr.  genit., 
220,3. 

Indignor,  constr.,  273,  5,  K.  6. 

Indignus,  w.  abl.,  244;  w.  genit.,  244, 
E.  2;  indigniis  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  9;  w.  su- 
pine in  K,  276,  III.,  R.  1. 

In/ligus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (2.) 

Indirect  questions,  subj.  in,  265 : — indi- 
rect reference,  266,  3 : — indirect  discourse, 
266,  1,  X.  and  2. 

Induce,  id  animum  inducere,  233,  (1.); 
pass.  w.  ace,  234,  R.  1;  inductus,  w.  abl. 
ofcause,  247,  R.  2.  (6.) 

Indulgeo.  constr.,  223.  (1.),  (a.) 

Induo,  w.  dat.  and  ace,  224,  4;  w.  abl. 

andace,  249,  I.,  R.  1;  cf.  224,   r.  1,  (b.); 

induo  and  exuo.  constr.  in  pass.,  234.  R.  1. 

-ine  or  -ione,  fem.  patronymics  in,  100, 1,(6.) 

Ineo,  183,  r.  3;  inire  cotnilia,  w.  inf., 
270,  R.  1,  (c);  134,111. 
•    Inert,  abl.  of,  113,  K.  3,  and  r.  1. 

Inexpertus,  w.  genit.,  213.  K.  1. 

Infamo,  w.  genit.  of  crime,  217,  R.  1. 

Infero,  224,  4,  and  R.  4. 

Iri/erus,  comparison  of,  125,  4 ; — inferior 
•w.  dat.,  abl.,  or  qvam,  256,  R.  10;  injimus 
and  imns,  205,  R.  17. 

Infinitive.  143,  4:  as  a  noun,  26,  R. ;  2^; 
its  gender,  34,  4:  205,  R.  8;  its  cases,  269, 
(6.);  as  an  ace,  229,  r.  5;  270;  as  a  verb, 
269,  (a.);  its  tenses,  145.  R.  4;  old  inf.pres. 
pass,  in  -er,  162,  6 : — inf.  as  logical  subj., 
202,  R.  2;  269;  how  modified.  203,  it..  5; 
with  subject  nom.,  209,  r.  5:  for  the  geni- 
tive, 213,  R.  4;  its  subjetc.  239;  w.  dat.  in- 
stead of  ace,  227,  >'.;  construction  and 
meaning  of  its  tenses,  268 ;  inf.  as  subject 
of  inf.,  269,  r.  3;  as  predicate  nom..  269, 
R.  4;  esse,  etc.,  with  licet  and  a  predicate 
noun  or  adj.,  case  of  such  predicate,  269, 
R.  5;  poetically  after  what  verbs,  271,  R.  3; 
depending  on  a  verb,  270 ;  229,  r.  5 :  on  an 
adj.  or  noun,  270,  R.  1;  275,  ii-,  R.  I,  x.  1; 
absolute,  270.  R.  2;  ellipsis  of,  270,  R.  3; 
inf.  without  a  subject  after  what  verbs 
used,  271 ;  with  a  subject,  after  what  verbs, 
272;  273;  how  translated,  272,  r.  3:  used 
likeanonn,  273,  N.  9;  its  place,  279.  11; 
inf.  pres.  for  inf.  perfect,  268,  r.  1;  inf. 
perf.  for  present,  2^,  r.  2:  pres.  for  future, 
268.  R.  3;  poet,  to  denote  a  purpose,  274, 
R.  7.  (b.) 

Infinitum  est,  the  indie,  for  the  subj., 
259.  R.  4.  (2.) 

Infirmus.  w.  genit.  or  abl..  213,  r.  o.  (3.) 

/n/U.  183, 14;  180,  N. 

Inflection,  25 ;  parts  of  speech  inflected, 
24,4. 


INDEX. 


391 


hf^en-?,  abl.  of.  113,  e.  3. 

Inimirvs,  w,  dat.,  222,  r.  1;  w.  genit., 
222,  R.  2,  (r.) 

-inis,  genitives  in,  69,  E.  1  and  2. 

Initio,  "  at  first,"  253,  N. 

Innitor^  224,  r.  4.     See  also  nitor. 

Innocens  and  innoxius^  w.  genit.,  213, 
K.   1. 

Jnsatiabilis,  w.  genit.,  213,  n.  5,  (1.) 

Insciifs,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.) 

Inscribo,  insculpo,  and  insero,  constr., 
241,  R.  5. 

Insimulo,  w.  genit.,  217,  R.  1. 

[nsolen.i  and  insolitus,  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  1. 

Jwo;75.  abl.  of.  113,  E.  3;  115,  1,  {a.\;  w. 

rnit.,  213,  R.  1;  cf.  r.  4,  (1.);  w.  abl.,  250, 

Inquum,  183,  5;  ellipsis  of,  209,  r.  4;  its 
position,  279,  6. 

Inserted  clauses,  266. 

Insinuo,,  constr.,  229,  R.  4, 1. 

Insons,  genit.  plar.  of,  114,  e.  3;  115, 1, 
(a.);  w.  genit.,  213,  R.l. 

Inspergo,  249,  i.,  R.  1  and  R.  3. 

In.ttar,  a  diptote,  94. 

Instituo.  213,  N.4;  230,  N.  1;  231,  R.  4; 
w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Instrument,  abl.  of,  247,  and  B..  5;  w. 
verbs  of  teaching,  231,  r.  3,  (c.) 

Listruo,  231,  R.  4. 

Insumere  tempus,  275,  R.  2. 

Insuesco,  w.  dat.  or  abl.  of  the  thing, 
245,  n.,  3;  w.  inf ,  271,  n.  1. 

Insuttus,  213,  R.  1,  (3.);  222,  R.  2,  (a.); 
275,  in.,  (2.);  270,  R.  1;  275,  in.,  r.  1,  (2.) 

Insuper,  w.  ace.  or  abl.,  235,  R.  8. 

Integer,  w.  genit.,  213;  integrum  est  ut, 
262,  r:  3,  N.  3. 

Intelligo,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1;  w.  ace. 
and  inf.,  272,  n.  1;  intelligitur,  w.  inf.  as 
subject,  269,  r.  2. 

Intention  denoted  by  participle  in  rics 
with5H/w,  162, 14;  274,  r.  6. 

Intentus,  w.  ace.  nihil,  232,  (3.);  intentum 
esse,  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  275,  tn.,  r.  2,  (1.) 

Inter,  use  of,  235,  1,  R.  2 ;  in  composition, 
196,  I.,  8;— w.  se  or  ipse,  208,  (5.);  w.  ge- 
runds, 275,  III.,  R.  3;  instead  of  partitive 
gen.,  212,  n.  3,  N.  4;  construction  of  its 
compds.,  224;  repeated  by  Cicero  after  in- 
teresse,  277,  II.,  4. 

Intercedo,  w.  quin,  ne,  or  quominus,  262, 
R.  11. 

Intercludo  and  interdico,  251,  N.  and  r.  2. 

Interdico,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Interdiu  or  die,  253,  N.  1. 

Interea  loci,  212,  R.  4,  N.  4. 

Interest,  Roman  computation  of,  327. 

Interest,  w.  genit.,  219;  vr.me'a,  etc.,  219, 
R.  1 ;  subject  of,  219,  r.  4 ;  degree  of  interest 
how  expressed,  219.  r.  5. 

Interior,  comparison  of,  126,  1 ;  intimus, 
205,  R.  17. 

Inteijections.  199;  w.  nom.,  209,  r.  13; 
w.  dat.,  223,  (3.);  w.  ace,  238.  2;  w.  voc, 
240:   O,  lieu,  etc..  not  elided,  305. 

InterinittOs  w.  inf..  271.  N.  1. 

Inter pres,  gender  of.  30;  61,  2;  genit.  of, 
73.  3. 

Inttrritus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1  and  2. 


Interrogative  particles,  198,  11;— adja.. 
104,  14;  121,  5;  139,  5.  3;-pronoun8,  137 
in.  indirect  questions,  137,  N. ;  2(55,  N.  2;— 
sentences.  200,  3. 

Interrogo,  w.  twoacca.,  231,  r.  1 ;  constr. 
in  pass.,  234,  i.;  w.  genit.  of  the  ciime, 
217,  r.  1. 

Intersum,  w.  dat..  224,  5. 

Intus,  w.  ace,  33S.  1.  (6.) 

Intra,  how  used,  195.  R.  8;  2-53.  r.  4,  (b.) 

Intransitive  verb,  141,  ii.;  used  imper- 
sonally in  pass.  w.  dat.,  223,  .\.  1,  (c.) 

-inns,  adjs.  In,  128,  1,  2,  and  6. 

Invado,  233,  (3.),  N.  ' 

Invariable  adjs.,  122;  specified,  127,  7. 

InveniOy  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1;  inveni- 
untur.  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Invideo,  constr.,  223.  (1.),  (c);  220,  1; 
invidetur  mihi,  223,  r.  2,  n.  \r.) 

Invitus,  w.  dat.  of  the  person,  226,  r.  3; 
invito.  Minerva,  257,  R.  7. 

Involuntary  agent  of  pass,  verb,  248,  ii., 
and  .\. 

-JO,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  59,  1 ;  personal 
appellatives  in,  100,  4,  (h.);  verbals  in,  102, 
7;  verbs  in  of  3(1  co;^j.,  159. 

Ionic  metre.  317;  303;— a  majore,  317,  i.; 
— a  minnre,  317,  ii. 

-ior,  -ius,  in  terminational  comparatives, 
124,  1. 

Ipse,  declined,  135;  how  used,  1.35,  R.  1; 
207,  R.  28;  used  reflexively,  208.(4.):  207, 
R.  28,  (c);  w.  inter.  208,  (5.):  et  ipse,  207, 
R. 27,(6.);  ipse,  with  the  inf.,  273,  n.9,(o.); 
nunc  ipsum  and  turn  ipswv,  191,  r.  7. 

Ipsiis  and  ipsissimus,  135,  R.  2. 

Irascor,  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2,  n.,  (6.) 

Iri,  w.  supine  in  lan,  276.  ii.,  R.  3. 

Iron  age  of  Roman  literature,  329,  4. 

Irony,  324,  4. 

Irregular  nouns,  92; — adjs.,  115; — verbs, 
178-182. 

-is,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  62 ;  63 ;  genitive 
of,  74 ;  -is  or  -«/.s  instead  of  -Ss  in  ace.  plur. 
of  3d  decl.,  85,  e.  1 ;  abl.  of  adjs.  in  ».<  used 
as  nouns,  82,  e.  4: — used  as  proper  names, 
82,  E.  4,  (b.);  -is  for  -us  in  genitive  of  4th 
decl.,  89,  2;  fem.  patronymics  in,  100,  1, 
(b.);  ellipsis  of  in  2d  root  of  verbs,  162.  7, '  c  ) 

Is,  pron.,  declined,  134;  how  u.><ed.  207, 
R.  26;  referring  to  a  clan.^e.  206,  (13.);  is 
and  ille  with  quidcm  used  pleonastically, 
207,  R.21;  is  for  talis,  207,  k.  26,  (b.y\  2('54, 
1,  N.;  et  is,  atque  is,  isque,  et  is  quidem, 
207,  R.  26,  ;c.) ;  eUipsis  of  is,  207,  R.  26,  (d.); 
is-qui,  264,  1,  N. 

Islands,  gender  of,  29 ;  constr.  of  names 
of,  237,  R.  5,  (h.) 

-issimus,  a,  um,  the  terminational  super- 
lative, 124,  2. 

-isso,  verbs  in,  187,  it.,  5. 

Iste,  how  declined,  134 ;  how  used,  207, 
R.  23,  25;  iste  qui,  w.  subj..  264.  1,  n. 

Istic,  pron.,  declined,  134,  R.  3. 

Istic,  adv.,  istinc,  istuc,  their  reference, 
191,  R.  1.  (e.) 

Istiusmodi,  134,  R.  5. 

-it.  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  u.,  R.  5;  in  8a 
root  of  4th  conj.,  175;  of  certain  verbs  of 
3d  conj.,  171,  E.  7. 


893 


INDEX. 


Ita,  191,  E.  5;  277,  K.  12,  (a.);  ita  non, 
277,  R.  14. 

Itaque,  its  meaning,  198,  6,  K. ;  its  place, 
279.3,(6.)  *^       ' 

Iter^  declined,  57;  71,  2;  with  sum  and 
ace.  of  place,  237,  B.  1;  incremente  of, 
286.2. 

-iter  and  -ter^  advs.  in,  192,  ii.  and  rv. 

-iias^  -ia,  -itia,  -ities,  -itudo^  and  -t<i«, 
abstracts  in,  101, 1. 

-itk,  genitive  in,  73;  78, 1;  112, 1. 

-ito,  frequentatires  in,  187,  ii.,  1. 

-itius  or  -icius,  adjs.  in,  129f  5. 

Itum,  sup.,  in  prosody,  284,  e.  1,  (2.) 

-itus,  advs.  in,  192,  i.  and  n. ;  adjs.  in, 
128,  7.  .  «-^       . 

-IU711,  verbals  in,  102,  2;  -ium  or  -itium, 
nouns  in,  100,  5. 

-ins.  genitives  in,  place  of  English  accent, 
15;  in  what  aiijs.,  107;  quantity  of  the  i, 
283,  I.,  E.  4:— adjs.  in.  128,  1,  2,  and5; 
voc.  sing,  of  patrials  and  possessives  in,  52. 

-»r,  in  2d  roots  of  verbs,  175;  171,  e.  8. 

•ivus,  adjs.  in,  129,  7. 


J.  Towel  before,  in  prosody,  283,  rv.,  w.  1. 

Jaceo,  210,  a. 3,  (2.);  233.  (3.),  n. 

Jam,  with  a  negative,  191,  &.  6;  jamdu- 
dum,  ib. 

Jeatr,  genitive  of,  71,  3;  increments  of, 
286,  2. 

Jejunus,  w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  h.  5,  (3.) 

Jesus,  decl.  of,  53. 

Jocus,  plur.  joci  and  joea,  92,  2. 

Jubar,  abl.  of,  82.  k.  1,  (b.) 

Jtibeo,  constr.,  223.  (2.);  273,  2,  (rf.);  272, 
K.  6;  262,  E.  4;  ellipsis  of  jubeo  valere^288, 
E.  2;  jubeor,  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Jucundus,  constr-,  276,  in.,  r.  1  and  4; 
jucundum  est,  w.  quod,  273.  5,  N.  6. 

Judico,  w.  two  aces.,  236,  N.  1;  w.  ace. 
and  inf..  272,  w.  1;  in  pass.,  210,  r.  3,  (3.), 
(c);  judican  w.  predicate  nominative,  271, 

Jugerum,  93, 1 ;  94. 

Jugum,  quantity  of  its  compdB.,  283,  iv., 
«.  1. 

Jungo,  constr.,  229,  e.  4, 1. 

Junctus  and  conjunctus,  constr.,  222, 
a.  6,  (c.) 

Jupiter,  genitive  of,  71;  declined,  85. 

Jfe  cdiquid  farere,  without  cum,  247,  2. 

«*'«?».  its  compds.,  189,  N.  Z:—juratus, 
with  »•»  tive  meaning,  163. 16  :—juro,  poet, 
w.  inf.,  'T.,  N.  3. 

Jusjwandum,  declined,  91. 

Justum  erat,  indie,  for  subj.,  259,  r.  3; 
justuvi  est  with  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2 ; 
justo  after  comparatives,  256,  B..  9:  its 
place,  279,  N.  1. 

Jurat,  w.  ace,  229,  R.  7. 

Juvenalis.  abl.  of,  82,  E.  4,  (6.) 

Juvfnis,  abl.  of.  82,  e.  4,  (6.);  113,  B.  2; 
comparison  of,  126,  4;  115,  1,  (a.);  for  in 
juventute,  253.  R.  6.  i 

Jiecta  as  an  adv.,  195,  R.  4;  yucts  ««  or 
a<f  iM,  198,  8.  u.  I 


K. 


K,  its  use,  2.  4. 

Key  to  the  Odes  of  Horace,  821. 

Knowing,  verbs  of,  their  construction,  272. 


L,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56.  ii. ;  gender  of 
nouns  in.  66:  genitive  of,  70;— final,  quan- 
tity of,  299,  2. 

Laboro,  constr.,  273,  N.  1;  poet.  w.  inf., 
271,  N.  3. 

Labials,  3,  1. 

Lac,  gender  of,  66,  e.  ;  genitive  of,  70. 

Lacesso,  constr.,  225,  b.  1. 

LgBtor,  w.  abl.,  247,  1,  (2.);  ace, -232,  (3.) 

Lcetus,  w.  abl.  or  gen.,  213,  R.  5,  (4.): 
cf.  B.  4.  (1.) 

Lampas,  declined,  86. 

Lapis,  declined,  57. 

Lar,  pr.,  284.  N.  1. 

Largus.-w.  gen.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,(3.); 
cf.  B.  4,  (1.) 

Lars,  genitive  of,  71. 

Laxsus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  2. 

Lateo,  w.  dat.  or  ace,  223,  B.  2,  N.,  (6.), 
and  (1.),  (a.) 

Latin  grammar,  its  divisions.  1. 

Latinis,  for  ludis  Latinis,  253.  n.  1. 

Latus,  altus,  and  longus,  w.  ace.  of  space, 
236. 

Lavo  andZaaro,  scil.  se,  229,  R.4, 1;  lavo, 
w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  B.  1. 

Laxo,  w.  abl..  251,  x. 

Leading  clau.se.  subject,  and  verb,  201, 13. 

Lego  (ere),  its  form  in  the  compds.,  189, 
N.  2;  constr.,  230.  x.  1. 

Lenio,  constr.,  229,  b.  4,  1. 

-lentus,  adjs.  in,  128,  4. 

Letters,  2;  division  of.  3;  sounds  of,  7; 
numeral,  118,  7 ;  capital,  2,  2 ;  silent,  12,  b.  ; 
terminal  in  3d  decl.,  65. 

Levo,  w.  abl.,  251,  k.;  w.  gen.  poet., 
220,2. 

Lex,  gender,  65,  2;  genitive,  78,  2,  (2.);— 
kgem  dare,  constr.,  273, 2,  k.  i;--iege,  abl. 
of  manner,  247,  2. 

Liber,  w.  abl.  or  gen.,  213,  r.  5,  (4.);  cf. 
220, 2 ;  and 251,  N. ;  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  5,  (4.)  ; 
cf.  B.  4,  (1.) 

Libera,  w.  abl.,  251,  v.;  poetically,  w. 
genit.,  220,  2. 

JJberalis,  w.  genit.,  213,  B.  5,  (1.) 

Libram  and  libras,  236,  B.  7. 

Libra,  abl.  w.  adj.  without  prep.,  254, 
R.  2. 

Licentia,  w.  genit.  of  gerund,  275,  in., 
B.  1,  (1.) 

Liceo,  w.  genit.  of  price,  214,  b.  3;  w. 
abl.,  252,  B.  1. 

Licet,  w.  dat..  223,  B.  2;  w.  subj..  the  ace. 
with  the  inf.,  or  the  inf.  alone.  273.  4:  262, 
B.  4;  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  b.  ^r  case  of 
the  predicate  after  licet  esse,  etc..  269,  k.  5; 
w.  indicative  instead  of  subj.,  259,  B.  3,  (a.) 
— licet,  conj.  w.  subj.,  263,  2. 

Limiting  ace,  234,  n. ;— abl.,  250  and  R. 

4i^nus,  superlatives  in.  125,  2. 

Linf^als  and  liquids,  d.  1. 


INDEX. 


893 


lAquidus,  pr.,  284,  e.  5.,  r.  8. 

-lis,  adjs.  in,  comparison,  125,  2. 

Litems  dart,  scribere  or  mittere,  225,  ni., 
B.  4;  ellipsis  of,  229,  r.  4,  2;  literas  or  Ute- 
ris, after  verbs  of  teaching,  231,  R.  3,  (c.) 

Litotes,  324.  9. 

Li  turn,  pr.,  284,  E.  1,  (2.) 

Loading,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  249,  i.  . 

LocupUs,  genitive  of,  112,  1;  abl.,  113, 
E.  2;  geu.  plur..  114,  e.  3;  115,  1,  (a.);  w. 
abl.  or  gen.,  213,  r.  5,  (4.) 

Lochs,  plur.  loci  And  loca,  92,  r.,  2;  loco 
and  locis,  abl.  of  place  without  a  preposi- 
tion, 254,  R.  2 ;  loco,  w.  gen.  for  predicate 
nom.,  210.  n.  3;  for  predicate  aoc.,  230,  N. 
4;  loci  and  locorum,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2  and  n. 
4 ;  locus  in  apposition  to  names  of  towns, 
237,  R.  2;  loco,  w.  gen.  of  price,  241,  r.  5; 
w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  1 ;  w.  participles  in 
dus,  274,  R.  7 ;  w.  genitive  of  gerunds,  275, 
ui.,  R.  1,  (1.) 

Logical  subject,  202,  3 ;— predicate,  203,3. 

Long  syllable,  282,  2. 

Longe,  w.  comparatives  and  superlatives, 
127,  3;  256,  n.;  w.  ace.  of  space,  236,  n.  1; 
,onge  gentinm,  212,  r.  4,  n.  2,  (6.);  longias 
without  quam,  256,  r.  6. 

Longitudine,  w.  genit.  of  measure,  211, 
R.  6,  (6.) 

Longus,  w.  ace.  of  space,  236;  longum 
est,  the  indicative  instead  of  the  subjunc- 
tive, 259,  R.  4,  (2.) 

-Is,  genitive  of  nouns  in,  77,  2,  (2.) 

Ludis,  for  in  tempore  ludorum,  253,  N.  1 ; 
257,  R.  9,  (2.) 

Luo,  w.  abl.,  252,  r.  1. 

M. 

M,  roots  of  nouns  ending  in,  56,  i. ;  be- 
fore d  changed  to  n,  134,  N.  1;  dropped  in 
the  3d  root  of  certain  verbs,  171,  e.  6;  final, 
quantity  of,  299,  3;  elided,  305,  2. 

-ma,  Greek  nouns  in,  genitive  plur.  of, 
84,  E.  2. 

Mactus,  115,  5;  made,  w.  abl.,  247,  1, 
N.  2;  w.  genit.,  213,  r.  5,  (4.) 

Mag  is  and  niaxime,  use  of  in  forming 
comparatives  and  superlatives,  127,  1 ;  ple- 
onastic with  malle,  etc.,  256,  R.  13. 

Magnus,  compared,  125,  5 ;  w.  supine  in 
«,  276,  III.,  R.  1;  magnam partem.,  234,  ii., 
r.  3;  magni,  parvi,  etc.,  w.  verbs  of  valu- 
ing. 214,  R.  1 ;  magno,  parvo,  etc.,  w.  verbs 
of  buying,  etc.,  252,  r.  3. 

Male,  constr.  of  its  compounds  malefacio, 
maledico,  etc.,  225,  i.;  Twa^e,  instead  of  abl. 
of  price,  252,  r.  3;  male,  bene,  or  prudenter 
facio ;  male  or  bene  fit,  w.  quod,  273,  5,  (1.) 

Malo,  conjugated,  178,  3;  constr.,  273,  4; 
262,  R.  4;  mallem,  meaning  of,  260,  n,  n.2; 
constr.  w.  abl.  like  a  comparative,  ^56,  k. 
16,  (3.) 

Mains,  compared.  125,  5. 

Mando,  constr.,  223,  r.  2.  and  (1.),  (6.); 
9.73,  N.  4;  274   r.  7,  (a.);  262,  r.  4. 

Mane,  94 ;  192,  3. 

Maneo,  210,  r.  8,  (2.) ;  compds.  of,  283, 

(S.),  N- 

Manifestus,  w.  genit.,  213,  a.  1. 


Manner,  advs.  of,  191,  in.,  abl.  of  247; 
with  cum,  247,  2;  w.  de  or  ex,  247.  r.'8. 

Minus,  gender  of.  88;  ellipsis  of,  205,  r. 
7;  manuni  iniicerfl,23S,  (1.) 

Mare,  abl.  of,  82,  e.  1,  (6.);  ellipsis  of, 
205,  R.  7. 

Mas,  gender  of,  62,  e.  1;  genitive.  72, 
E.  1;  genit.  plur.,  83,  ii.,  3,  e-.  ;  used  to 
distinguish  the  sex  of  epicenes,  33,  n. 

Masculine  nouns  of  3d  dccl.,  58;  excep- 
tions in,  59— 61 ;— masculine  caesura,  310, 
N.  1. 

Materfaminas,  declined,  91. 

3/Iateria,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  in., 

R.  1.,  (1.) 

Material  nouns,  26,  6; — adjs.,  104,  8. 

IS'Iaturo,  scil.  se,  229,  R.  4,  1;  w.  inf.,  271^ 
N.  1. 

Me  and  m.i  for  mihi,  133,  R.  1. 

Mea,  tua,  etc.,  w.  rtfett  and  interest, 21%^ 
R.  1  and  2. 

Means,  abl.  of,  247;  when  a  person,  247, 
R.  4 ;  w.  passive  verbs,  248. 

Measure  or  metre,  303 ;  Roman  measures 
of  length,  etc.,  327. 

Medeor,  w.  dat.,  223,  N.  (6.);  its  gerun- 
dive, 275,  II.,  R.  1. 

Medicor,  constr.,  223,  (1.).  (a.) 

Meditor,  constr.,  273,  N.  1. 

Medius,  how  translated,  205,  r.  17;  w. 
genit.,  213;  w.  inter,  212,  r.4,(2.);  w.  abl., 
213,  R.  4,  (5.);  its  place,  279,  7,  (6.) 

Mel,  genitive  of,  70,  E. ;  56,  ii.,  r.  6;  abl., 
82,  E.  5.  (6.);  94. 

Melas,  genitive  of,  72,  e.  2. 

Melius  fuit  and  erat  instead  of  subj.,  259, 
R.  3;  melius  est,  w.  dat.,  228,  1;  melixa 
erit,  w.  perf.  inf.,  268,  R.  2. 

Melos,  nom.  plur.  of,  83,  1;  94. 

Meme  and  mepte,  intensive,  133,  R.  2. 

Memini,  183,  3;  constr.,  216;  w.  present 
inf.,  268,  R.  1;  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1; 
memento,  poet.  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  8. 

Mem'or,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.) ;  w. subj., 
213,  R.  4. 

Memoro,  constr.,  272,  r.  6. 

-men,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  61,  4,  and  66; 
genitive,  71,  1 ;  -men  or  -mentum,  verbals 
in,  102,  4. 

Mens;  in  mentem  venit,  constr.,  216, 
R.3. 

Mercor,  ■%.  abl.  of  price,  252,  r. 

-met,  enclitic,  133,  r.2;  139,  e.  1. 

Metalepsis,  324,  6. 

Metaphor,  324,  1. 

Metaplasm,  322,  1. 

Metathei<is,  322,  9. 

Meto,  171,  E.  2. 

Metonymy,  324,  2. 

Metre,  303 ;  how  divided,  303,  8 ;  different 
kinds,  310—317. 

Metres,  compound,  818;  Horatian,  320. 

■nnetros,  Greek  nouns  in.  49,  2. 

Metuo,  w.  ut  or  ne,  262,  R.  7 ;  w.  inf.,  271, 

N.  1. 

Meus,  voc.  sing,  masc,  105,  r.3;  139,  1; 
used  reflcxiveiy,  139,  r.  2;  how  declined, 
139;  meum  est,  211,  R.  8,  (3.),  (a.) 

Mi,  for  mihi,  133,  r.  1. 

Middle  voice  in  Greek,  248,  E.  1,  (2  ) 


894 


INDEX. 


Mile,  Roman,  827. 

Miles,  declined,  67;  gender,  90;  61,  2; 
genitive,  73. 2 ;  used  collectively,  209,  r.  11, 
(1.),  (b.):  ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7. 

Military  expressions  without  cum,  249, 
III..  R. 

Militia,  construed  like  names  of  towns, 
221,  R.  3. 

Mille,  how  used,  118,  6;  ellipds  of,  327, 
R.  5. 

Million,  how  expressed,  118,  5,  (o.);  a 
million  sesterces,  327.  R.  6. 

Min''  for  mihine,  133,  R.  1. 

•^mino,  in  old  imperatives,  162,  5. 

Minor  and  compds,  w.  ace.  and  dat.,  223, 
(1.).  {b.) 

Ministro,  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2;  and  (1.),  (6.) 

Minus  and  minimum^  w.  genit.,  212,  R.  3, 
K.  1;  minus,  for  non,  277,  i.,  r.  14,-  minus 
without  quam,  256,  r.  6. 

Miror,  conjugated,  161;  w.  genit.  poet., 
220, 1 ;  constr.,  273,  n.  6. 

Mirum  est  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  3;  mirum 
quam,  quantum,  etc.,  264.  r.  4. 

Misceo,  how  construed,  245,Si.,  2,  andR. 
1;  224,  R.  3. 

Misereor,  miseresco,  miseret,  miseritum. 
est,  and  miserescit,  w.  gen.  of  the  thing,  215 ; 
miseret,  etc.,  w.  ace.  of  the  person,  215,  >'. 
3;  229,  R.  6;  and  w.  ace.  of  the  thing,  215, 
H.  2;  w.  ace.  of  degree,  215,  n.  3. 

Mitis,  declined,  109. 

Mitto,  w.  ad  or  in,  225 ;  w.  two  dats.,  227; 
273,  2,  (c):  w.  participle  in  rfw,  274,  r.  7; 
w.  inf.,  271,  N.  3;  w.  quod,  273;  missum 
facio,  274,  r.  4. 

Mn.  initial,  12,  2,  r. 

Mobilis,  pr.,  284,  e.  5,  R.  1. 

Moderor,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (o.) 

Modi  annexed  to  pronouns,  134,  R.  6; 
Its  use,  211,  R.  6,  (5.) 

Modiais,  w.  genit..  213,  R.  5,  (1.) 

Modified  subject,  202,  6;  itself  modified, 
202,  III.,  R.  1;— predicate.  203,  5. 

Modify  or  limit,  in  what  sense  used,  202, 
4,R. 

Modo  as  abl.  of  manner,  247,  2. 

Modo,  conditional  conj.,  198,  5;  w.  subj., 
263,2;  modo,  adv.,  193,  ii.,  3;  modo  ne, 
263,  2,  N.  1 ;  modo— mode,  277,  E.  8. 

Modus,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  lu., 
B.  1,  (1.) 

MoUio,  229,  R.  4, 1. 

Moleste,  cegre  or  graviter  fero,  w.  quod, 
273,  N.  6. 

Moneo.  conjugated,  157;  constr.,  218, 
and  R.  1,  2 ;  273,  n.  4 ;  without  ut,  262,  r.  4 ; 
w.  ace.  and  inf.,  273,  n.  4,  (e.);  in  pass., 
234.1. 

Money.  Roman.  327,  pp.  370--372. 

Monocolon.  319,  2. 

Monometer,  304,  2;  313, 1. 

Slonoptotes.  94. 

Monosyllables,  quantity  of,  294,  (a.); 
299.  1 ;  their  place.  279.  8. 

Mons.  gender  of,  64,  1. 

Months.  Roman,  326.  2;  names  of,  326; 
division  of,  326,  1 ;  gender  of  names  of,  28 ; 
115,  3;  abl.  of  names  in  cr  and  is,  82,  s.  2, 
(a.) 


Moods,  143. 

3Iora,  in  prosody,  282,  2. 

Mos  or  moris  est,  constr.,  262,  N.  2;  W. 
genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  in.,  r.  1,  (1.);  more 
as  abl.  of  manner  without  curw,  247,  2. 

Motion  or  tendency,  verbs  of,  constr., 
225,  IV.;  237,  F.  3. 

Motum,  pr..  284,  k.  5,  r.  1. 

Mountains,  gender  of  names  of,  28,  3. 

Mov/o,  constr.,  229,  R.  4,  1;  251,  X.; 
motus,  w.  abl.  of  cause,  247,  R.  2,  (6.) 

-ms,  nouns  in,  genitive  of,  77,  2,  (1.) 

Multiplicatives,  121,  1. 

Multo,  {are),  constr.,  217,  R.  5. 

Multus,  compared,  125,  5 ;  multi  et,  how 
used,  278,  r.  5;  multo,  wi  comparatives, 
etc.,  127,  3;  256,  r.  16;  so  multum,  ib.,  n.; 
muitiim',  w.  genitive,  212,  r.  3,  N.  1;  as 
ace.  of  degree,  212,  (2.);  mwZfiiS  instead  of  an 
adverb,  205,  R.  15. 

Mus,  gender  of,  30;  67,  4;  genitive,  76, 
B.  3;  genit.  plur.,  83,  ii..  3. 

Munificus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  5,  (1.) 

Mutes,  division  of,  3,  1;  a  mute  and 
a  liquid  in  prosody,  283,  xv.,  e.  2. 

Mutilus,  w.  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (5.) 

Muto,  constr.,  252,  R.  5;  229,  e.  4, 1. 


N. 


N,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  n. ;  nouns  in, 
gender  of,  58;  01:  genitive  of,  70;  71; 
final,  quantity  of,  299,  E. ;  dropped  in  the 
3d  root  of  certain  verbs,  itl,  E.  6. 

-Tiactis,  genitive  of  Greek  names  in,  78, 

2,  (1.) 

Nam  and  enim,  198,  7,  E.,  (a.);  place  ofi 
279.  3,  (a.)  and  (c.) 

Names  of  persons,  their  order,  279,9,(6.); 
of  nations  instead  of  those  of  countries  255, 
R.  3;  237,  R.  5. 

Narro,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1,  and  a. 
6;  narror,  constr.,  271,  R.  2. 

Nascor,  w.  abl.,  246,  E.  1;  nascitur,  w. 
Bubj.,  262,  R.  3,  y.  2. 

Nato,  232,  (2.),  k.  1;  constr.  of  compds., 
233,  (3.),  N. 

Natura  fert,  constr.,  262,  E.  3.,  N.  2. 

Naturale  est,  w.  ut  and  the  subj.,  262, 
R.  3,  jr.  3. 

Natus^  w.  abl.,  246;  natus,  '  old,'  w.  ace, 
236,  N.  3;  poet.  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  3. 

Natu,^\  250,1;  126,4. 

Nauci  habere,  214,  R.  1. 

-ni,  enclitic  conjunction,  198, 11 ;  quan- 
tity of.  295,  R. ;  as  an  interrogative  parti- 
cle, 198.  11,  R.,  (c):  its  place,  279,  3,  (c.) 

Ne,  adv.,  the  primitive  negative  particle, 
191,  HI.,  r!  3,  p.  158;  w.  quidem,  ib. ;  279, 

3,  (rf.);  w.  subjunctives  used  as  impera- 
tives, ib. :  in  wishes,  asseverations  and  con- 
cessions, ib. ;  260,  r.  6,  (6.)  with  the  unper- 
ative,  267,  r.  1 ;  ne  multa,  ne  piura,  etc., 
229,  E.  3.  2;— in  intentional  clauses,  262, 
B.  5;  ne  non,  for  ut,  262,  .>-.  4:  ellipsis  of, 
262,  R.  6;  ne,  for  nedum,  262.  N.  5. 

Nee  or  n€que„  198,  1;  nee  non  or  neque 
non.  ib. ;  nee — nee,  with  the  singular.  209, 
R.  12,  (5.),  (a.);  neque,  for  et  ne,  after  ut 
and  ne,  2i62,  B.  6,  s.  4;— n«  ipse,  207,  R.  27, 


INDEX. 


895 


);n«cij,207,  E.26,(c.); 

1,  277, 1.,  R.  16;  its  place. 


....  necne  or  annon 
R.  2 :  necdum 
279,  3,  (a.) 

Necesse.  defective  adj.,  115,  5;  necesse  est 
ut,.etc.,  262,  R.  3,  n.  2;  without  ut,  262, 
N.  4;  necesse  fuit,  the  indie,  for  the"  subj., 
259,  R.  3;  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  R.  2:  w. 
predicate  dat.,269,  R.  5;  273,  4. 

Necessity,  how  expressed,  162,  15. 

Necessario,  after  comparatives,  256,  R.  9. 

Nedum,  w.  subj.,  262,  n.  5;  without  a 
verb,  ib. 

Nefas,  gender  of,  62,  e.  2:  94;  w.  supine 
in  M,  276,  in.,  r.  2. 

Negatives,  two,  their  force,  277,  R.  8—5; 
negative  joined  to  the  conjunctibn,  as,  nee 
quisquam,  necullus,  etc.,instead of  efnewo, 
et  nulliis^  etc.,  278,  r.  9. 

Negligens,  constr.,  213,  R.  4,  (2.) 

Nego,  instead  of  non  dico,  279,  15,  {&.) ; 
w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1,  and  r.  6;  negor, 
w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1. 

Negotium,  ellipsis  of,  211,  R.  8,  N. 

Nemo,  94  and  95 ;  for  nuUus,  207,  R.  31 ; 
nemo  est  qui,  264,  7,  n.  2;  nemo  non, 
'  every  one,'  277,  r.  5,  (c.) 

Nempe,  191,  r.  4;  198,  7,  R.,  (a.) 

Neoterism,  325,  3. 

Negua  and  nequcB,  138,  2. 

Nequam,  indeclinable,  115,  4;  compared, 
126,5. 

Neque,  see  nee ;  for  et  non,  198,  1,  (c); 
neque — neque,  or  nee — nee,  neque — nee,  nee 
— ne^we,  198,  1,  (c);  neque — et,  ib. ;  neque 
■w.  general  negatives,  279,  15,  (&.);  neque 
non,  277,  r.  3 ;  neque  quisquam,  uUus,  um- 
quam,  etc.,  278,  R.  9. 

Nequeo,  how  conjugated,  182,  N. ;  w.  inf., 
271,  N.  4. 

Ne  quis  or  nequis,  how  declined,  138,  2 ; 
ne  quis,  instead  of  ne  quisquam,  207,  R.  31; 
278,  R.  9. 

Nerio,  genitive  of,  69,  E.  2. 

Nescio  an,  198,  11,  k.,  (e.);  265,  R.  3; 
nescio  quis,  265,  R.  4;  nescio  quomodo,  ib.; 
w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272.  n.  1. 

Nescius,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.) 

-fifus  and  -niis,  adjs.  in,  128,  1,  (ft.) 

Neuter,  nouns,  34 ;  not  found  in  1st  and 
5th  decls.,  40,  9;  of  2d  decl.,  46;  54;  of  3d 
decl.,  66 ;  exes,  in,  66 ;  67 ;  adjs.  used  adverb- 
ially, 205,  R.  10,  adjs.  and  adj.  prons,  w. 
genit.,  212,  R.  3;  ace.  of  denoting  degree  w. 
another  ace.  after  transitive  verbs,  231,  R.  5 ; 
verbs,  141 ;  form  of,  142,  1 ;  neuter  passives, 
142,  2;  neuter  verbs  with  cognate,  etc., 
subjects,  234,  iii. ;  w.  cognate  ace,  232,  (1.) ; 
w.  ace.  of  degree,  etc.,  232,  (3.);  w.  abl.  of 
agent,  248,  r.  2;  used  impersonally,  184,2; 
in  the  passive  voice,  142,  r.  2 ;  participles 
of,  162, 18 ;  neuters  of  possessive  pronouns 
and  adjs.  instead  of  the  genitive  of  their 
personal  pronouns,  or  of  a  corresponding 
noun,  211,  r.  8,  (8.),  {a.)  and  (6.) 

Neutral  passive  verbs,  142,  3. 

Neve  or  neu,  198,  8;  after  ut  and  ne,  262, 
N.  4. 

Ni  or  nisi,  198,  5,  R.,  (6.);  nisi,  '  except,' 
261,  E.  6;  277,  R.  16;  nisi  quod,  ib.;  nisi 
vero,  and  nisi  forte,  '  unless  perhaps,'  ib. 


Nihil,  nihthtm,  94;  yr.  genitive,  212,b.  1; 
instead  of  non,  277,  R.  2,  (6.);  232,  (3.); 
nihil  aliud  quam  or-nisi,  277,  r.  16 ;  nihil. 
ace.  w.  cRstimo  and  motor,  214,  n.  2  niliUt 
■^■J'acio,  214;  as  ace.  of  degree,  215,  N.  3: 
232,  («.);  nihil  est  quod,  etc.,  264,  7,  n.  2; 
nihil  abest,  quin,  262,  n.  7;  nihil  antiquius 
haheo  or  duco  quam,  w.  subj.,  273,  w.  1: 
nihildum,  277,  T.,  r.  16. 

Nimius,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213.  r.  5,  (3.) 

Nimio,  w.  comparatives,  256,  R.  16;  as 
abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

-nis,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  63, 1. 

Nitor,  w.  abl.,  245,  n. ;  w.  in  or  ad,  245, 
II.,  R.  2;  w.  inf.  or  subj.,  273, 1,  N.  1. 

Nix,  56,  R.2;  genit.  sing.,  78,  (3.);  genit 
plur.,  83,  11.,  3. 

No,  constr.  of  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  N. 

Noctu  or  nocte,  253,  n.  1. 

Nolo,  conjugated,  178,  2;  constr.,  273,  4; 
noli  w.  inf.,  paraphrasing  the  imperative, 
267,  N.  andR.  3;  nollem,  meaning  of,  260, 
II.,  R.  2. 

Nomenest,  constr.,  226,  R.  1;  211,  r.  2, 
N. ;  nomine,  without  a  prep,  before  the 
genitive  following  verbs  of  accusing,  217, 
R.2,  (6.);  its  place,  279,  9,  (b.) 

Nominative,  37;  construction  of,  209; 
210;  ellipsis  of,  209.  r.  land  2;  wanting, 
209,  R.  3:  w.  inf.,  209,  r.  5;  after  interjec- 
tions, 209,  R.  13;  formation  in  3d  decl.  from 
the  root,  56;  plural,  3d  decl.,  83;  of  adjs. 
of  3d  decl.,  114.  See  Subject-nominative 
and  Predicate-nominative.  " 

Nomina,  230;  pass.,  210,  R.  3,  (3.) 

Non,  191,  R.  3 ;  ellipsis  of,  after  non  modo, 
etc.,  followed  by  ne  quidem,  277,  R.  6;  non 
quo,  non  quod,  non  quin,  262,  r.  9;  non  est 
quod,  cur,  quare,  or  quamobrem,  w.  subj., 
264,7,  N.3;  non  before  a  negative  word, 
277,  R.  3; — before  ne  quidem,  277,  k.  6; 
position  of,  279,  15,  (b.);  non,  rare  with  the 
imperative,  267,  R.  1;  difference  between 
non  and  /lawrf j  191,  r.  3;  non  nemo,  von 
nulli,  non  nihd,  non  nvmquam,  different 
from  nemo  now,  etc.,  277,  R.  5,  (c);  non 
nihil,  to  some  extent,  232,  (3.);  nonne,  198, 
11,  R.,  (c);  non  modo — sed  etiam,  a,nd  non 
modo — sed,  equivalent  to  non  dicam — sed, 
277,  R.  10;  non  dubito,  non  est  duhium, 
non  ambigo,  non  procul,  non  abest,  quin, 
262,  2,  N.  7;  non  quo  non,  non  quod  nun, 
or  non  quia  non,  instead  of  non  quin;  non 
eo  quod,  non  ideo  quod,  for  non  quod,  262, 
R.  9;  non  priusquain,  non  nisi,  w.  abl.  ab- 
solute, 257,  N.  4;  nondum,2n,  i.,  R.  16; 
non  in  the  second  member  of  adversative 
sentences  without  et  or  vero.  278,  R.  11 ; 
non  nisi,  separated,  279,  3,  Id.) 

Nonce,  '  the  Nones,'  326,  2. 

Nonnullus,  pronominal  adj.,  139,  6,  (1.) 

Nos,  for  ego,  r.  7. 

Noseo,  171,  E.  6. 

Noster,  how  declined,  139,  3. 

Nostras,  how  declined,  139,  4,  (h.) 

Nostrum,  how  formed,  133,  3;  diflferent 
use  of  nostrum,  and  nostri,  212,  r.  2,  N.  2. 

'  Not '  and  '  nor,'  how  expressed  with  the 
imperative,  267,  R.  1;  with  subj.,  260,  E.  6, 
(6.) 


a96 


INDEX. 


Nouns,  26 — 103;  proper,  common,  ab- 
stract, coUectiye,  and  material,  26 ;  gender 
of,  27—34;  number  of,  a5;  cases  of.  36,  37; 
declension  of.  38 — 40;' nouns  of  3i  decl., 
mode  of  declining,  55 ;  compound,  declen- 
sion of,  91 ;  irregular,  92 ;  variable,  92 ;  de- 
fective, in  case,  94;  in  number,  95.  96; 
sing,  and  plur.  having  dififerent  meanings, 
97:  redundant,  99 ;  verbal.  102:  derivation 
of,  100—102;  composition  of,  103;  how 
modified,  201,  m.,  s.  1;  used  as  adjs.,  205, 
K.  11 ;  extent  given  to  the  term  noun,  24, 
a. 

Norum  est  ut,  262,  r.  3,  X.  2. 

Nox,  declined,  57;  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (4.); 
genit.  plur..  83,  ii.,  3. 

A'ox/ws,  w.  genit.  of  the  crime,  213,  h.  1, 
(3.);  217,  R.  1.  (a.);  w.  dat.,  222.  r.  1,  [a.) 

-715,  participles  in,  abl.  of,  113.  2;  when 
used  a^  nouns,  82,  e.  4;  nouns  in,  genit. 
plur.  of,  83,  ir.,  4;  genit.  sing.  of.  77,  2,  (2.) 
and  E.  1;  participials  and  participles  in, 
construction  of.  213,  R.  1  and  3. 

NubUo,  scU.  ca.'o,  257,  9,  (1.) 

iVubo,  w.  dat.,  223;  quantity  of  u  in 
compds.  of,  285,  2,  e.  3. 

Nudo,  w.  abl.,  251,  j^. 

Nudus,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  R.5,  (4.); 
250,  E  ,  (1);  w.acc,  213,  R.4,  (3.) 

Nulhis,  how  decline<i,  107 :  a  pronominal 
adj.,  139,  5,  (1.);  for  non^  205,  r.  15;  refers 
to  more  than  two,  212.  a.  2,  n.,  (b.)  nuUm 
est,  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  7,  N.  2:  nullus  non, 
277,  R.  5,  (c);  nullius  and  nulio,  instead  of 
neminis  and  nemine,  207,  K.  31,  (c);  nul- 
lusdinn,  277,  i.,  R.  16. 

Num,  with  its  compounds,  meaning  of, 
198.  11,  R-.  (b.)\  num — an,  used  only  in 
direct  questions,  265,  R.  2. 

Number,  26,  7;  of  nouns,  35;  of  verbs, 
146 ;  of  the  verb  when  belonging  to  two  or 
more  subjects,  209,  r.  12;  when  belonging 
to  a  collective  noun,  209.  r.  11. 

Numbers,  cardinal,  117,  118;  ordinal, 
119.  120:  distributive,  119,  120;  w.  genit. 
plur.,  212,  B.  2.  (4.) 

Numerals,  adjs..  104. 105 ;  classes  of,  117; 
placed  in  the  relative  clause,  206.  (7.),  (&.); 
w.  genit.  plur.,  212,  r.  2,  (4.):  letters,  118, 
7 :  adverbs,  119;  192,  3;  multiplicative,  121; 
proportional,  temporal,  and  interrogative, 
121. 

Ninmnus,  327,  R.  3.  (&.) 

Numquam  non,  and  non  numquam,  ^TT, 
R.4.(c.) 

Sumqnts.  num  qriis.  or  numqut,  etc., 
how  declined,  137,  3 ;  nvmquis  est  qui,  264, 
7,  y.2;  numqua  and  numqut,  \Z1,  R.4; 
v.umquid,a3  an  interrogative  particle,  198, 
11. 

Nu7nqnisnam,  137,  4. 

Nunc,  use  of.  277,  r.  15 ;  nunc— nunc,  277, 
K.  8;  nunc  and  etiamnune,  w.  imperfect 
and  perfect.  259,  r.  1,  [b.) 

Nuncupo.  w.  two  aces.,  230.  H.  1;  nuncu- 
«or.  210.  R.  3.  (3.1 

Nundime,  326.  2,  (11.) 

Nitntio.  273,  2,  c);  272,  N.  1;  pass.  w. 
inf..  271,  s.  1;  nuntiatur,  constr.,  2(1,  a.  2. 

Nuper,  nwdo  and  ihox',  191,  a.  6. 


Nusquam,  w.  genit.,  212,  a.  4,  K.  2.  (b.) 

Nux,  pr.,  284, 8,  5,  R.  2. 

-nx,  nouns  in,  genitive  of,  65,  6,  7. 


O,  sound  of,  7,  8 :  changed  to  u  in  form- 
ing certain  nominatives  from  the  root,  56, 
I.,  a.  4,  and  u.,  r.  4;  nouns  in,  gender  of^ 
58,  59;  genitive  of,  69;  Greek  nouns  in, 
gender  of,  59,  e.  3;  genitive  of,  69,  e.  8; 
amplificatives  in,  100,  4.  (a.);  verbals  in, 
102.  6,  (c);  adverbs  in,  192;  increment  in, 
of  3d  decl..  287,  3:  of  plur.,  288;  of  verbs, 
290;  final,  quantity  of,  285,  R.  4;  297; 
sometimes  used  for  u  after  v,  322,  8:  63: 
178,1,  X. 

O.  inteij.  w.  nom.,  209,  a.  15;  w.  ace, 
238.  2;  w.  voc.,  240,  a.  1;  Osi,w.  subj., 
263, 1.  * 

6b,  government  of,  195, 4;  275.  in.,  a.  3; 
in  composition,  196,  i.,  9;  construction  of 
verbs  compounded  with,  22A:  of  adjs.,  222, 
R.  1.  (6.) 

Obedio,  how  formed,  189.  n.  3. 

Obequi'to,  constr:.  233,  (3.) 

Obeo,  constr.,  233,  (3. .,  x. :  pass.,  234,  m. 

Object,  of  an  active  verb,  229;  the  dative 
of  the  remote  object,  223,  n. 

Objective  genitive.  211,  r.  2;  after  arija., 
213:  dat.  for  objective  genitive.  211,  r.  5; 
— propositions  after  what,  273,  x.  8. 

Oblique  cases,  37;  their  place,  279,  10 
and  2. 

Ohliviscor,  w.  genitive  or  ace.,  216;  w. 
ace.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Obnoxius,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (b.) 

Obruo.  w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  r.  1. 

Obsecro,  w.  two  aces.,  231.  R.  1. 

Obsequor,  obtempero,  and  obtrecto,  w.  dat , 
223.  R.  2. 

Oljservo,  w.  vt  or  ne,  262.  n.  3. 

Obses,  gender  of,  30 :  genitive  of.  73,  a.  1. 

Obsonor,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  1. 

(X)sto,  and  obsisto,  quominus,  etc.,  262, 
a.  11. 

Obtemperatio,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  8. 

Obtrector,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (a.) 

Obvius,  w.  dat.,  222.  r.  1,  (6.) 

Obviajn,  w.  dat.,  228,  1. 

Occasio,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds.  275,  in., 
B.l,  (1.) 

Occumbo,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  ace,  224  r.  5. 

Oceurro,  w.  dat.,  224;  w.  ace.,  233,  ^3.); 
oecicrrit  ut,  262,  r.  3,  tj.  1. 

Odor,  comparison  of,  126. 1. 

-ccis.  genitive  in.  78,  (4.) ;  112.  2. 

Octonarius.  304,  2;— iambic,  314,  in. 

Odi,  183, 1. 

-odis,  genitives  in,  76.  E.  5;  75,  K.  1. 

-odus,  Greek  nouns  in,  49,  2. 

CE,  how  pronounced,  9 ;  in  nom.  plur.  2d 
decl.,  54.  2. 

CEdipus.  genitive  of,  76,  E.  5- 

(Eta,  gender  of.  42. 

Officio,  w.  quominus,  etc.,  262.  R.  11. 

Ohe.  pr..  283.  i.,  E.  5;  295,  E.  5- 

Oi,  how  pronounced,  9,  1 

-ois.  genitives  in,  75,  E.  2;  words  in,  pr., 
283, 1.;  a.  6,  (3.) 


INDEX. 


397 


Old,  how  expressed  In  Latin,  236,  N.  8. 

Oleo  and  redoleo^  w.  acc.j  232,  (2.) 

Ollus.  for  ille.  whence  oUi,  masc.  plur.  for 
mi,  134,  R.  1. 

-olus,  a,  MW,  dimmutives  in,  100,  3,  A.  2. 

-om,  for  -M/n,  53. 

Omission  of  a  letter  or  syllable,  see  syn- 
cope— of  a  word,  see  ellipsis. 

Omnes,  w.  genitive  plur.,  212,  r.  2,  N.  6; 
omnium,  w.  superlatives,  127,  4,  n.  2; 
omnia,  ace.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

-on,  Greek  nouns  in,  54,  1;  -on  for -orum, 
54,  4;  -on,  roots  in,  of  3ddecl.,  56,  ir.,  R.l; 
nouns  in,  of  3d  decL,  58  and  61,  6;  genit. 
plur.  in,  of  Greek  nouns,  83,  ii.,  6;  -as  and 
-oti,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  changed  to  -us 
and  -urn,  54, 1. 

Onustus,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  r.  5,  (4.) 

Operam  dare,  w.  ut,  273,  n.  1;  w.  dat.  of 
gerund,  275,  iii.,  r.  2,  (1.);  w.  ace.  id,  232, 
(3.) ; — opera  tnea,  equivalent  to  per  me,  247, 
E.  4. 

Opinio  est,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  R.  1; 
opinions  after  comparatives,  256,  r.  9 ;  its 
place,  279,  n.  1. 

Opinor,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Oportet,  w.  inf.  as  its  subject,  269,  r.  2 ; 
w.  inf.,  ace.  with  the  inf.,  or  the  subj.,  273, 
N.  5 ;  without  ut,  262,^  r.  4. 

Oportebat,  oportuit,  the  indie,  instead  of 
the  subj.,  259,  r.  3,  (a.) 

Oppido,  w.  adjs.,  127,  2. 

Oppidum,  in  apposition  to  names  of 
towns,  237,  r.  2,  (6.) 

Oppleo,  w,  abl.,  249,  i.,  R.  1. 

Optabilius  erat,  the  indie.  Instead  of  the 
Bubj.,  259,  R.  3. 

Optime,  instead  of  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  3. 

Opto,  271,  R.  4;  273,4;  opto,  w.  subj., 
without  ut,  262,  r.  4. 

Opulentus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Opus,  work,  declined,  57;  opus,  need, 
w.  genit.  and  ace,  211,  R.  11;  w.  abl.  of 
the  thing,  243 ;  as  subject  or  predicate  of 
est,  243,  R.  2;  210,  K.  5;  w.  perfect  par- 
ticiple, 243,  R.  1;  w.  supine  in  u,  276,  iii., 
R.  2;  opus  est.  w.  inf.  as  subject,  269,  r.  2. 

-or,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  58 ;  61 ;  genit. 
of,  70;  71;  verbals  in,  102,  1;  102,  6. 

Oratio  obliqua,  266,  1,  N.,  and  2;  273,  3; 
tenses  in,  266,  r.  4. 

Orbo,  w.  abl.,  251,  n. 

Orbus,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (1.);  or  genit.,  213, 
R.  5,  (4.) 

Order,  ad  vs.  of,  191,  1. 

Ordinal  numbers,  119, 120 ;  in  expressions 
of  time,  236,  k.  2. 

Origin,  participles  denoting,  w.  abl.,  246; 
from  a  country  expressed  by  a  patrial,  246, 
R.  3. 

-6ris,  genitives  in,  76 ;  112, 2 ;  rSrw,  genit. 
in,  75. 

-orium,  verbals  in,  102,  8. 

Oriundus,  ponstr.,  246. 

Oo,  w.  twoiiccs.,  231,  R.  1;  w.  ut,  ne,  or 
inf.,  273,  2,  x\.  4;  without  ut,  262,  r.  4. 

Orthoepy,  6—23. 

Orthography,  2—5;  figures  of.  322. 

Ortus,  w.  abl.,  246. 

•OS,  nouns  in,  of  2d  decl.,  54,  1;  of  8d 

34 


decl.,  gender  of,  58  and  61,  8;  genit.  of,  76; 
Greek  genitives  in,  68,  1;  final  in  plural 
aces.,  sound  of,  8,  e.  3;  quantity  of;  300. 

05,  (oris),  gender  of,  61,  3;  genit.  of,  75; 
wants  genit.  plur.,  94.  * 

Os,  {ossis),  gender  of,  61,  3;  genit.  of,  75, 
E.  1. 

Ossa,  gender  of,  42, 1. 

Ostendo,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

-osus,  adjs.  in,  128,  4. 

-Otis,  genit.  in,  75 ;  112,  2. 

'  Ought '  or  '  should,'  expressed  by  indio 
of  debeo,  2b9,  r.  4,  (2.) 

-ox,  nouns  in,  genit.  of,  78,  2,  (4.) 

Oxymoron,  324,  26. 


P,  roots  of  nouns  ending  in,  66,  i. ;  when 
inserted  after  m,  in  2d  and  3d  roots  of  verbs, 
171,  3. 

Pace  or  in  pace,  253,  N.  1;  257,  a.  9,  (2.) 

Palatals,  3, 1. 

Palleo,  w.  ace.  232,  n.  1. 

Pan,  ace.  of,  80,  R. 

POnthus,  voc.  of,  54,  5. 

Par,  abl.  of,  82,  e.  1,  (6.);  113,  E.  3;  su- 
perlative of,  126,  2;  w.  dat.  or  genit.,  222, 
R.  2,  (a!);  w.  cu7n  and  the  abl.,  222,  r.  6; 
par  erat,  indie,  instead  of  subj.,  269,  r.  3, 
(a.);  pr.,  284,  N.  1;  par  ac,  198,  3. 

Parabola,  324,  30. 

Paradigms,  of  nouns,  1st  decl.,  41;  2d 
decl.,  46;  3d  decl.,  67;  4th  decl.,  87;  5th 
decl.,  90;— of  adjs.  of  1st  and  2d  decl.,  105 
—107:  3d  decl.,  108— 111;— of  verbs,  sum, 
153;  1st  conj.,  155,  156;  2d  conj.,  157;  3d 
conj.,  158,  159;  4th  conj.,  160;  deponent, 
161;  periphrastic,  conj.,  162;  defective,  183; 
impersonal,  184. 

Paragoge,  322,  6. 

Paratus,  constr.,  222,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Parco.  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2,  n.,  (a.);  parei- 
tur  mihi,  ib.,  (c);  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  8. 

Parcus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  a.  6,  (2.); 
w.  in,  213,  R.  4,  (2.) 

Paregmenon,  324,  24. 

Parelcon,  323,  2,  (1.) 

Parenthesis,  324,  4,  (6.) 

Pariter  ac,  198,  3. 

Paro,  constr.,  273,  N.  1;  w.  Inf.,  27i,  a  1 

Paroemiac  verse,  304,  2. 

Paronomasia,  324,  25. 

Pario,  compds.  of,  163,  E.  4. 

Parsing,  281,  in. 

Pars,  ace.  of,  79, 4;  abl.  of,  82,  e.  6,  (o.); 
ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7;  its  use  in  fractional 
expressions,  121.  6;  magnam  and  maxi- 
mam  partem,2Zi,  ii.,  R.  3;  multis  partibus, 
256,  B.  16,  (3.) 

Part,  ace.  of,  234,  ii. 

Particeps,  genit.  of,  112,2;  genit.  plur 
of,  114,  E.  2;  115,  1,  (a.)— w.  genit.,  213, 
E.  1,  (3.) 

Participial  adjs.,  130 ;— of  perfect  tense, 
meaning  o^  with  tenses  of  sum,  162, 12,  (2. ) ; 
w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (2.) 

Participles,  25  and  148, 1 ;  xnus,  how  de- 
clined, 105.  R.  2;  in  nsy  do..  Ill;  abl.  sing, 
of,  113,  2;  participles  of  active  verba,  148, 


398 


INDEX. 


1,  (2. ) ;  of  neuter  yerbs,  148, 1,  (3.) ;  162, 16 ; 
of  deponent  yerbs,  162, 17;  of  nenter  pas- 
sive verbs.  162,  18;  in  -n«,  genit.  plur.  of, 
162,  19;  pres.  and  perf.  compounded  with 
in,  162,  21;  when  they  become  adjs.  or 
DOQns,  162,  22;  cases  of  in  compd.  tenses, 
162,  12,  13;  sometimes  with  esse  indeclina- 
ble, 162,  13,  (1.);  in  -"«  ^th  stim.  force  of. 
162,  14;  how  modified,  202,  ii.,  (3.);  ajnree- 
ment  of,  205 ;  agreement  with  a  predicate 
nom.  instead  of  the  subject,  205.  B.  5; 
gender  when  used  impersonally,  205.  B.  18; 
perfect  denoting  origin,  with  abl..  246;  in 
abl.  absolute,  256 ; — passive  of  naming,  etc., 
with  predicate  abl.,  257,  B.  11;  their  gov- 
ernment, 274 ;  their  time  how  determined, 
274,  2,  and  3;  perfect  in  circumlocution, 
for  abl.  of  cause,  247,  1,  R.  2,  (b.);  with 
habeoy  etc.,  274.  2,  K.  4;  for  a  verbal  noun, 
274.  2.  R.  5;  for  clauses,  274,  3. 

Participo,  poetically,  w.  genit.,  220,  2. 

Particles,  190, 1. 

Partim,  79,  4;  jyartim,  w.  genit.,  212, 
R.  4;  parti??! — partiyn,  w.  genit.  or  er,  277, 
E.  8. 

Partitive  nouns,  212,  R.  1;— adjs.,  104,  9; 
— partitives  with  plur.  verbs,  ^,  b.  11; 

211,  B.  1 ;  w.  genit.  plur.,  212 ;  ellipsis  of, 

212,  B.  2,  X.  3;  w.  ace.  or  abl.,  212,  b.  2, 
n.  4;  genit.  sing,  after  neuter  adjs., and 
pronouns,  212,  r.  3. 

Parts  of  speech,  24,  2  and  3. 

ParuTti,  lis  meaning,  191,  in.;  C(»npared, 
194.  4;  w.  genit.,  212,  r.4. 

Paru?nper.  its  meaning,  191,  n. 

Parvus,  compared.  125,  6;  parvi,  w. 
verbs  of  valuing,  214,  B.  1,  (a.),  (1.); 
parro,  with  comparatives,  256,  b.  16 ;  after 
ifMimo,  214,  B.  2,  N.  2;  as  abl.  of  price, 
252,  R.  3. 

Pasco,  171,  E.  6. 

Passive  voice,  141,  2;  construction  of, 
234 ;  passive  voice  with  a  reflexive  pronoun 
understood  as  the  agent  equivalent  to  the 
middle  voice  in  Greek,  248,  r.  1,  (2.);  with 
ace.  of  the  thing  234,' i. 

PaUo,  w.  two  dats.,  227,  R.  1. 

Pater,  declined,  57. 

Pater-familias,  etc.,  how  declined,  43,  2. 

Pathetic  or  emotive  word,  279,  2,  {«.) 

Patior,  273,  4;  262.  r.  4;  ^a//>7i5,  w.gen., 

213,  R.  1,(2.);  w.  inf..  271,  N.  3. 

Pa  trial  nouns,  100,2;  in  a,  genitive  of, 
69.  K.:— adjs.,  104,  10;  128,  6,  (a.);  ellipsis 
of  their  substantive,  205,  r.  71  pronouns, 
139.4. 

i'atroeinor,  w.  dat.,  223,  R.  2. 

Patronymics,  100,  1;  in  -es,  genit.  plur. 
in  j/771  instead  of  -arum,  43,  2;  in  a*  and  is 
used  38  adjs..  205.  r.  11;  quantity  of  their 
penult,  291.  4  and  5. 

Pauea^  aec.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

PauUsper,  its  meaning.  191,  ii. 

Paulo^  w.  comparatives,  256,  B.  16;  pau- 
Ivm  abest  qvin,  272.  n.  7. 

Pauper,  abl.  of,  113.  e.  2;  defective,  115, 
1,  (a.);  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  r.  5,  (2.) 

Pavidus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1. 

Pavor  est  ne,  etc.,  2»S,  s.  3. 

Pecus,  I'Vdis),  genit.  of,  67,  K.  8. 


Peeviiaris,  222,  b.  2,  (a.) 

Pedes,  gender  of.  81,  2;  genit.  of,  78,  2; 
fotpedites,  209.  r.  11,  (1.),  (6.) 

Pejero,  pr.,  285,  2,  E.  1. 

Pelagus,  gender  of,  51 ;  ace.  plur.  of,  54, 
5;  94. 

Pello,  171,  K.  1,(6.);  251,  N. 

Pendo,  w.  genit.  of  value,  214;  w.  abl.  of 
price.  262.  r.  1. 

Pensi  and  pili  habere.  214,  R.  1. 

Pentameter  verse.  304,  2 ;  311 ;  312,  ix.,  X. 

Penthemimeris.  304.  5. 

Penult.  13 ;  quantity  of,  291 ;  of  proper 


Per,  its  uses,  195,  B.  9;  247,  1,  b.  1;  w. 
the  means  when  a  person,  247,  3,  a.  4;  in 
adjurations,  279,  10,  (e.);  in  composition, 
196, 1.,  10;  per  compounded  with  adjectives 
strengthens  their  meaning,  127,  2. 

Perceiving,  verbs  of,  their  construction, 
272. 

Percipio,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1 ;  ptr- 
uptuT?i  habeo,  instead  of  percepi,  274,  B.  4. 

Perebntor,  w.  two  aces.,  231,  B.  1. 

Perennis,  abl.  of,  113.  E.  1. 

Perdo,  w.  capitis,  217,  B.  3;  perditum  tr«, 
for  perdere,  276,  ii.,  B.  2. 

Perduim,  for  perdam,  162, 1. 

Perfect  tense,  145,  iv. ;  definite  and  in- 
definite, 145,  IV.,  R. ;  old  form  in  si?n,  162, 
9 ;  quantity  of  dissyllabic  perfects,  284,  e.  1. 
perfect  participles  translated  actively,  162, 
16;  both  actively  and  passively,  162,  17, 
(a.); — of  neuter  verbs,  162,  18;  of  imper- 
sonal verbs,  184,  B.  2;  the  perf.  subj.,  260, 
II.,  B.  1,  (3.);  in  the  connection  of  tenses, 
258 ;  signification  of  perf.  definite,  259,  r.  1, 
(2.),  (o.);  of  perf.  indefinite,  ib..  (6.)— (d.); 
perf.  subj.,  signification  of,  260,  ii.,  R.  1, 
(3.),  and  b.  4  and  6;  in  the  protasis,  261,  2 
and  B.  2  and  3;  263,  R. ;  perf.  subj.  for  im- 
perative, 267,  B.  2;  perf.  inf.,  how  used, 
268,  R.  1,  (a.);  perf.  participle,  274,  2  and 
y. ;  supplies  the  place  of  a  pres.  pass,  par- 
ticiple, 274,  R.3,  (o.);  perf.  part,  of  a  pre- 
ceding verb  used  to  express  the  completion 
ofan  action,  ib.,  (b.)\  yr.  habeo,  274,  E.  4; 
w.  do,  reddo,  euro,  etc.,  ib. ;  supplies  the 
place  of  a  verbal  noun,  Z74,  r.  5 ;  used  in 
curcumlocution  for  abl.  of  cause,  247,  B.  2, 
(b.);  neuter  perf.  pass,  participle  used  aa 
the  subject  of  a  verb,  274,  r.  5,  (6.) 

Perjlcio  ut,  273,  N.  2. 

Pergo.  constr.,  225,  rv. ;  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Perhibeo,  230,  N.  1;  272,  v.  1,  and  r.  6; 
perhibeor,  210,  B.  8,  (3.);  w.  inf.,  271.  N.  1. 

Periclitor,  capitis  or  capite,  217,  R-  3. 

Period,  280. 

Perinde,  191,  in.  ^—cu  or  atqut,  198,  3,  ». 

Periphrasis,  323,  2,  (4.) 

Periphrastic  conjugations,  162,  14  and  15. 
•  Peritus,  213,  R.  1.  and  R.  4;  275.  (2.); 
270,  R.  1;  w.  ad,  213,  B.  4,  (2.);  225,  m., 
B.  1,  (2.) 

Permisceo,  245,  n.,  2,  and  B.  1  and  2. 

Pctttii^o.  73,  4 ;  w.  part.  fut.  pass.,  274, 
B.  7;  w.  subj.  without  tu,  262,  b.  4. 

Permuto,  252,  b.  5. 

Pemox,  genit.  of,  112,  2. 

Perosus,  183,  1,  N. 


INDEX. 


899 


Perpello,  273,  N.  4. 

Perpes,  in  genit.  Ping.,  112,  1;  115,  2. 
Persevero,  w.  inf..  271,  N.  1. 
Personal  pronouns,  1^2,  4;  ellipsis  of  as 
Bubject-nominatives,   209,  R.  1;   expressed 
with  infinitive,  272,  N .  4 ; —personal  termi- 
nations of  verbs,  147,  3. 
Personification,  324,  34. 
Person  of  a  noun  or  pronoun,  35,  2;  132, 
4;  of  a  verb,  147;  used  in  the  imperative, 
147,  2 ;  1st  and  2d  persons  used  indefinitely, 
209,  R.  7 ;  of  verbs  with  nominatives  of  dif- 
ferent persons,  209,  r.  12. 

Perspectum  habeo,  instead  of  versvexi, 
274,  R.  4. 

PersuadeOj  w.  dat.,  223,  N.,  {p.);  hoc  per- 
suadetur  mihi,  223,  N.,  (c.);—persuasum 
tnihi  habeo,  274,  R.  4. 

PertoBsum  est,  constr.,  229,  R.  6;  215,  (1.) 
and  N.  2. 

Pertineo,  ellipsis  of,  209,  R.  4. 

Peto,  constr.,  230,  r.  2;  231,  n.  4:;  peto 
««,  273,  N.  4;  262,  R.  4. 

Pes  and  compds.,  genit.  of,  73,  E.  1;  112, 
1;  abl.  of,  113,  e.  2:  pr.,  284,  n.  1:  300, 
E.  2,  (b.) 

Ph,  in  syllabication,  18,  2 :  when  silent, 
12,  R. 

Phalecian  verse,  304,  2;  pentameter, 
812,  X. 

Piger,  declined,  106 ;  constr.,  222,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Piget,  w.  genit.,  215;  w.  ace.,  229,  e.  6; 
participle  and  gerund  of,  184,  R.  8. 

Pili  habere,  etc.,  214,  R.  1. 

Place,  advs.  of,  191,  i. ;  192,  ni. ;  genit. 
of,  221;  ace.  of,  237;  dat.  of,  237,  R.  3; 
place  where,  abl.  of,  254; — whence,  abl.  of, 
255;  through  which,  255,  2;  place  of  a  foot 
in  verse,  309,  n. 

Plants,  gender  of  their  names,  29. 

Plaudo,  change  of  aw  in  its  compds.,  189, 
N.  3. 

Plenty  or  want,  adjs.  of,  w.  abl.,  250. 

Plenus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.); 
250,  2,  (1.) 

Pleonasm,  323,  2. 

-plex,  adjs.  in,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  3;  liow  de- 
cUued,  121, 1. 

Plerique,  w.  genit.  plur.,  212,  R.  2,  (1.) 

Pluperfect  tense,  145,  v.;  old  form  in 
sein,  162,  9;  for  the  historical  perfect,  259, 
R.  1,  (3.) 

Plural  number,  35, 1;  when  wanting,  95; 
nouns  only  plur.,  96;  plur.  of  Greek  nouns 
of  1st  decl.,  45,  2;  do.  of  2d  decl.,  54,  2;— 
nouns  used  for  singular,  98 ;  nos  for  ego, 
209,  R.  7,  (6. ) ;  of  verbs  with  collective  nouns, 
209,  R.  11;  the  plur.  of  abstract  nouns,  95, 
R. ;  plur.  nouns  in  apposition  to  two  or 
more  nouns  in  the  singular,  204,  R.  5. 

PLurimvm,  w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3;  plurimi 
and  plurinio  after  verbs  of  buying,  etc., 
214,  R.  1,  (1.),  and  r.  3,  n.  2;  plurimo,  abl. 
of  nrice,  252,  r.  3. 

Plus,  declined,  110;  w.  genit.,  212,  R.  3, 
N.  1,  (a.);  with  numerals,  etc.,  with  or 
•without  q-wam,  266,  R.  6;  plus  for  magis, 
277,  R.  12;  plure,  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  8. 

Po'dma,  declined,  57. 

PoeiuB,  gender  of  names  of,  29. 


Pamtet,  w.  genit.,  215;  w.  rabj.,  215,  ». : 
w.  ace.,  229,  R.  6;  participles  of,  184,  R.  3; 
W.  quod,  273,  N.  6. 

Po'dsis,  declined,  86. 

Poetical  arrangement  of  words,  279,  8, 
(c);  16,  N.  4.  .        .     . 

-politanus,  adjs.  in,  128,  6,  (g.) 

Pollens,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (4.); 
ef.  R.  4,  (1.) 

Polliceor,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1. 

Polyptoton,  324,  23. 

Polysyndeton,  323,  2,  (2.) 

Pondn,  indeclinable,  94;  pondo  libram  or 
libras,  211,  r.  6,  (4.) ;  236,  r.  7. 

Pono,  171,  E.  2;  230,  R.  2;  241,  R.  5:  pr., 
284,  R.  2,  (c);  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Posco,  w.  two  aces.,  231 ;  230.  r.  2;  w.  u<, 
etc.,  273,  N.  21;  in  pass.,  234-,  i. 

Position  in  prosody,  283,  iv. 

Positive  degree,  122,  4. 

Possessive,  adjs.,  104;  pronouns,  139:  to 
what  equivalent,  132,  6;  how  used,  207, 
R.  36;  211,  R.  3;  ellipsis  of  when  reflexive, 
207,  R.  36 ;  used  for  subjective  and  posses- 
sive genit.,  211,  R.  3,  (6.),  andR.  8.(3.),(o.); 
for  objective  genit.,  211,  r.  3,  (c);  so  pos- 
sessive adjectives,  211,  r.  4,  and  R.  8,  (3.),« 
(b.) ;  mea,  tua,  etc.,  after  re/ert  and  interest. 
219,  R.l. 

Possideo,  w.  perf.  pass,  part.,  274,  R.  4. 

Possum,  conjugated,  154,  r.  7;  with  su- 
perlatives, 127,  4;  w.  inf.,  271,  N.  1;  pote- 
rat,  the  indie,  for  the  subj.,  259,  R.  3;  pos- 
sum for  possem,  259,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Post,  postquam,  etc.,  how  pronounced, 
8,  E.  4;  post,  its  case,  195,  4;  post  in  com- 
position, 196,  11;  197,  14;  constr.  of  verbs 
compounded  with,  224;  mth  concrete  offi- 
cial titles,  233,  r.  3;  w.  ace.  and  abl.  of 
time,  233,  r.  1 ;  ellipsis  of,  235,  N.  3;  w.  abl. 
like  a  comparative,  256,  r.  16,  (3.) 

Postea  loci,  212,  r.  4,  n.  4. 

Postera,  defective,  115,  5;  compared,  125, 
4;  derivation,  130,  v. 

Posterior  and  postremus,  instead  of  poS' 
terius  and  postremum,  205,  r.  15. 

Postquam  and  posteaquam,  w,  historical 
perfect  instead  of  pluperfect,  259,  R.  1,  (2.), 
Id.) 

Postulo,  w.  two  aces.,  231,  r.  1;  w.  ace 
and  genit.,  217,  R.  1;  w.  de  or  the  simple 
abl.,  217,  R.  2;  w.  subj.,  without  ut,  262, 
R.  4. 

Potens,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.);  w.  in  or 
ad  and  ace.,  212,  R.  4,  (2.) 

Potior,  w.  abl.,  245,  i.;  w.  aec.,  245,  I., 
R.;  w.  genit.,  220,  (4.);  potiundtts,  162,  2f); 
273,  II.,  R.  1. 

Potis,  defective,  115,  5. 

Potius,  compared,  194,  4;  used  pleonasti- 
cally,  256,  R.  13. 

Potus,  translated  actively,  162, 16. 

PrcB,  in  composition  w.  adjs.,  127,  2;  w 
verbs,  197;  before  adjs.,  127,  6;  constr.  ot 
verbs  compounded  with,  224;  pr<B,  with 
comparatives,  127,  6;  256,  r.  13,  (6.) 

Prcebeo,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1. 
Prcecedo,  constr.,  233,  (3.),  and  n.;  224, 
R.  5, 
PraceUo,  prceeo,  etc.,  224,  8,  and  E.  6. 


400 


INDEX. 


Preeeeps,  abl.  of,  113,  b.  2,  and  b.  1. 

Prcefipio,  constr.,  223.  (1.),  (b.) 

Prctcipjto,  229,  R.  4.  1. 

Prcecipue,  prcfserliiri,  etc.,  193,  Ii.,  2. 

Pr<!Pn/7T0,  constr.,  224.  8,  and  b.  5. 

Prcedium,  ellipsis  of.  255,  r.  3. 

Prtpditus.  w.  abl.,  244. 

Prmieste'.  gender  of,  66,  E.,  and  29,  B. 

PrcBtiomen,  its  place,  279,  9.  (b.) 

Prcepes,  genit.  sing,  of,  112,  1;  genit. 
plur..  114,  E.  2. 

PrcF^cribo.  w.  ut,  etc.,  273,  2,  :?.  4. 

Pro-sens,  declined,  111 ;  abl.  of,  113,  B.  2. 

Prrtsfs.  gender  of,  30;  61,  2;  genit.  of, 
73.  E.  1. 

PrrrsUK  233,  (3.),  and  N.;  230.  N.  1;  224, 
8.  and  r.  5:  256,  it.  16.  (Z.);—pra£sto,  adv., 
w.  d:it.,  228,  1; — prcRSto  sunt,  qui,  w.  sabj., 
264.  6.  N.  1. 

P.ffstolor.  w.  dat.,  223,  B.  2,  N. ;  w.  ace, 

223.  (l.;,  (a.) 

PrfTter,  w.  adjs.,  127.  6;  w.  comparatiTCS, 
256.  B.  13,  (ft.);  as  an  adverb.  191,  iii. 

PrfPtereo,  w.  quod,  273.  5,  (1.) 

PrtTterit,  constr.  of,  229,  B.  7. 

PrcFterquam  qvod.  277,  a.  16. 
'       Pr^ffri-fAo,  233,  (2.) 

Prtfvertor,  w.  dat.,  224,  8  and  r.  5. 

Prfcnr,  w.  two  aces.,  231 ;  w.  ut,  273,  N.  4; 
ut  omitted,  262,  e.  4. 

Predicate,  201;  203; — predicate-nomina- 
tive. 210;  differing  in  number  from  the 
Bubject-nomiuative,  210,  B.  2;  instead  of 
dat.  of  the  end,  227,  R.  4 :  after  what  verbs, 
210.  R.  3  and  4;  pred.  adjs..  210,  B.  1 ;  after 
esse,  haberi,  judicari,  videri,  etc.,  271,  s.  2; 
— predicate-accusative,  210,  (ft.);  dative, 
210,  (r.);  abl.,  210,  (rf.):  257,  r.  11. 

Prepositions,  195 — 197;  in  composition, 
193;  with  nouns,  103;  with  adjs.,  131,  11— 
13 ;  with  verbs.  196 :  change  of  in  composi- 
tion, 103,  B.  2;  131,  B.;  196,  (a.);  insepaia- 
ble,  196,  (ft.);  w.  ace,  195,  4;  235;  w.  abl., 
195,  5:  241;  w.  ace.  and  abl..  195,  6;  235, 
(2.)^ — (5.);  used  as  adverbs.  195,  R.  4;  how 
modified,  202,  ii..  b.  2;  verbs  comjmunded 
with.  w.  dat..  224;  w.  ace,  233;  w.  abl., 
242;  compds.  of  a<f.  con,  and  in,  with  ace, 

224,  R.  4;  repeated  after  compds.,  224,  r.  4; 
233,  B.  2;  how  interchanged,  ib. ;  compds. 
of  ad,  ante,  etc.,  with  neuter  verbs  of  mo- 
tion. 224,  R.  5 :  233,  b.  1 ;  repetition  of 
prepositions,  233,  B.  2;  277,  ii.,  3  and  4; 
prepositions  of  one  svUable,  pr.,  285,  2,  s.  1, 
and  E.  5;  ellipsis  of,  232,  (2.);  235,  r.  11.; 
ellipsis  of  their  case,  235,  b.  10;  their  place, 
279.  10 :  quantity  of  di.  se  and  red,  285,  B. 
2  and  3:  put  after  their  case,  279,  10,  B., 
(/.);  repeated,  277,  ii.,  4. 

Present  tense,  145,  i.;  a  principal  tense, 

258,  A. ;  indicative  pres.  for  historical  perf., 

259,  R.  1,  [a.) ;  for  the  fut.,  259,  b.  1,  (ft.); 
for  imperf.  or  perf.  w.  dum,  259,  b.  1,  (c); 
suly.  pres.,  use  of,  260,  n.,  r.  1,  (1.);  used 
to  soften  an  assertion.  260,  ii.,  r.  4;  to  ex- 
press a  wish,  command,  etc.,  260,  r.  6;  257. 
R.  2;  imperative  pres.,  how  used,  145.  R-  3; 
267,  (1.);  infinitive  pres.,  how  used,  268, 
B.  1,  (a.),  and  R.  3.;  272,  b.  4  and  5;  par- 
ticiple pres.,  how  declined,  111,  E. ;  what  it 


denotes,  274,  2  and  n.  ;  denoting  something 
about  to  be  done,  274,  b.  1 ;  also  a  purpose, 
274,  R.  2,  (a.);  and  a  state  or  condition, 
274,  R.  2,  (ft.);  present  pass,  participle, 
how  supplied.  274,  r.  9. 

Preterites,  145,  x.  2;  258,  B. ;  preterites 
of  the  indicative  used  for  the  pluperfect 
subjunctive,  259,  b.  4,  (1.) 

Preteritive  verbs,  183,  i. 

Pretii  and  pretio,  214,  B.  2,  n.  3;  ellipsis 
of,  252,  R.  3. 

Priapean  verse,  310,  ii. 

Price,  ablative  of,  252 ;  genitive  of  tantu 
etc.,  214,  R.  1. 

Pridie,  w.  genit.,  212,  R.  4,  .\.  6;w.  ace, 
238,1. 

Primus,  medius,  etc.,  how  translated, 
205,  R.  17;  their  place,  279.  7;  prior,  pri- 
mus, for  priux,  primum,  205.  r.  15. 

Princeps,  genit.  of,  112,2;  abl.  of,  113, 
E.  2;  115.  1.  (a.);  used  instead  of  an  adverb 
of  time,  205,  B.  15. 

Principal  parts  of  a  verb,  151,  4; — propo- 
sitions, 201,  5;— parts  of  a  proposition,  202, 
5;  tenses,  255.  a. 

Principio,  abl.  of  time,  2-53,  N. 

Priusquam,  with  what  oood,  263,  3. 

Privo,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Pro,  constr.  of  verbs  compounded  with, 
224;  w.  abl.  for  predicate  nom.,  210,  s.  3; 
for  predicate  ace,  230,  x.  4;  in  composition, 
quantity  of.  285,  e.  5,  and  r.  7;  pro  nihilo 
duco,  etc..  214,  r.  2,  n.  2;  pro  eo  and  pro- 
inde  ac.  198,  3,  B. 

Prodivis,  222,  E.  4,  (2.) ;  276,  in^  B.  L 

Procul,  w.  abl.,  195,  R,  3;  241.  r.  2. 

Prodigus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  B.  5,  (2.); 
w.  tn,  213,  R.4,  (2.) 

Prodo,  w.  ace  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1,  and 
B.  6. 

ProdituT,  constr.,  271.  B.  2. 

Prqficiseor,  w.  two  datives,  227,  E.  1. 

Prohibeo,  251,  R.2;  w.  quominus,  262,  a. 
11 ;  273, 4 ;  w.  genit.,  220, 2 ;  w.  abl.,  251,  N. ; 
w.  dat.  or  abl.,  224.  B.  2;  w.  ace  and  inf., 
272.  B.  6. 

Proinde,  adv.,  191,  in.;  proinde  ac,  198, 
3,  B. 

Prolepsis,  323, 1,  (6.)  and  (4.) 

Promitto,  constr.,  272,  N.4;  217,  a.  3,  (c.) 

Pronouns.  132—139;  simple,  132,  2; 
neuter  w.  genit.,  212.  r.  3,  x.  1. 

Pronominal  adj.^.,  139,  5. 

Pronunciation  of  Jjatin,  6. 

Promts,  constr.,  222,  r.  4,  (2.) 

Prope  est,  w.  ut  and  the  subj.,  262,  a.  3, 
N.  1. 

Proper  nouns,  26,  2 ;  found  only  in  1st, 
2d,  and  3d  decls.,  40,  9. 

Propero,  w.  inf.,  271,  w.  1. 

Propinquo,  225,  R.  2. 

Propinquus,  w.  the  dat.  or  genit.,  222, 
B.  2,  (a.) 

Propior,  how  compared,  126,  1;  propior 
and  proximus.w.  dat.,  222,  e.  1;  w.  ace, 
222,  R.  5;  238.1;  instead  of  propius,  prox- 
ime.  205,  b.  15;  proximum  est,  w.  ut  and 
the  subj.,  262.  kI  8,  v.  1. 

Propius  and  proadnu,  ooostr.,  228,  1, 
and  E. 


INDEX. 


401 


Proportional,  adjs.,  121,  2. 

Proposition,  201,  1 ;  analysis  of,  281. 

Proprius,  constr.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.) 

Prorumpo,  constr.,  226,  R.  4,  1. 

Prosodiac  verse,  304,  2. 

Prosody,  282—321;  figures  of,  305—307. 

Prosopopoeia,  324,  34. 

Prosper' Ku^  prosperus,  105,  N. :  w.  genit. 
or  abl..  213,  r.  5,  (2.) 

Prosthesis,  322,  1. 

Pronto^  w.  abl.  of  price,  262,  r.  1. 

Prosum,  154,  r.  6. 

Provideo,  constr.,  223,  (1.),  (a.) 

Protasis  and  apodosis,  261 ;  import  of  tiie 
different  tenses  in  the  protasis  and  apodo- 
sis, 261,  1  and  2. 

Provic/us,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1,  (3.) 

Prudens,  w.  genit.,  223,  R.  1,  (3.) 

Ps,  initial,  12,  r.  :—ps,  nouns  in,  genit. 
of,  77,  2,(1.) 

-psf ,  enclitic,  135,  R.  3. 

Pt,  initial,  12,  r. 

•pte,  enclitic,  133,  R.  2 ;  139. 

Pules  and  impubes,  genit.  of,  112,  1 ;  abl. 
of,  113,  E.  2;  115,  1,  (a.) 

Piidet,  w.  genit.,  215;  w.  inf.,  215;  w. 
ace,  229,  R.  6;  w.  perf.  inf.,  268,  R.  2;  w. 
sup.  in  M,  276,  iii.,  h.  2;  participle  in  dus, 
and  gerund  of,  184,  r.  3. 

Puer,  instead  of  in  pueritia,  253,  R.  6. 

Pueritia,  how  used  in  the  abl.,  253,  n.  1. 

Pugna^  for  in  pugnd,  253,  N.  1;  pugnam 
pugnare,  232,  (1.) 

Pugnattir,  conjugated,  184,  2,  (b.) 

Pidchre^  instead  of  abl.  of  price,  252,  r.  8. 

Punctuation,  5. 

Punio,  constr.,  217,  R.  5. 

Punishment,  constr.  of  words  denoting, 
217,  R.  3. 

Purgo,  w.  genit.,  217,  E.  1;  220,  2;  w. 
abl.,  251,  N. 

Purpose,  denoted  by  ut,  etc.,  with  the 
subj.,  262;  by  participles,  274,  2,  r.  2,  6 
and  7 ;  by  inf.,  271 ;  273,  n.  4,  (b.) ;  by 
gerund.  275,  in.,  i*  2,  and  (1.),  (2.);  by 
supine  in  -um,  276,  ii. 

Purus.  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.); 
cf  251,  N. 

-pus,  Greek  nouns  in,  genit.  of,  76,  e.  5. 

Puto.  w.  genit.  of  value,  214;  w.  abl.  of 
price,  252,  r.  1;  w.  two  aces.,  230,  n.  1, 
aud  N.  4;  w.  ace.  and  inf ,  272.  n.  1;  piUa- 
rt.v,2-)0,  It.,  R.2;  putor,  210,  r:  3,(3.),  (c); 
w.  inf,  271,  N.  1. 


Qu  before  s  in  verbal  roots,  171,  1 

Qua,  adverbial  correlative,  191,  r.  1. 

Qua— qua,  for  et—et,  277,  R.  8. 

Q^^^'o,  constr.,  231,  r.  4;  poet.  w.  inf., 
271,  X.  3. 

Qucpso,  183,  7;  constr.,  282,  r.  4. 

Qiialis,  139,  5,  (3.j ;  w.  comparatives,  256, 
R.  10,  {h.) 

QunHsqiialis  or  qualiscumque,  139,  5; 
207.  R.  29. 

Qualis— talis,  206,  (16.) 

Quam,  w.  compax-atives,  256;  w.  the  su- 
perlative, with  or  without  possum,  127,  4; 
84* 


ellipsis  of  after  phis,  minus,  amplius,  etc., 
256,  R.  6  and  7;  quarti  qui  and  superlative 
after  <a-m,  206,  (21.);  quam  pro,  w.  compar- 
atives, 256,  R.  11;  quam  non,  277,  r.  14; 
quam  and  a  verb  after  ante  and  post,  253, 
R.  1,  N.  3;  quatn,  qui,  w.  comparatives  and 
the  subjunctive,  264,  4. 

Quamquain,  peculiar  use  of,  198,  4,  R.; 
constr.,  263,  2,  (4.);  used  to  connect  an 
abl.  absolute,  257,  R.  10. 

Quamvis,  constr.,  263,  2,  and  (2.),  (3.) 

Quando,  quando-qiiidem,  198,  7,  R.,  [h.) 

Quantity,  adjs.  of,  104,  4;  w.  genit.,  212, 
R.  3,  N.  1;  after  sum  and  verbs  of  valuing, 
214;  adverbs  of,  w.  gouit.,  212,  r.  4. 

Quantity,  in  prosody,  13,  1;  marks  of, 
5,  1;  general  rules  of,  13;  283;  special  rules 
of,  284 ;  of  penults,  291 ;  of  antepenults, 
292;  of  penults  of  proper  names,  293;  or 
final  syllables,  294—301;  of  final  vowels, 
294—298;  of  final  consonants,  299;  of  de- 
rivative words,  284;  of  compound  words, 
285;  of  increments,  286—290;  of  Greek 
words,  2S3,  e.  6. 

Quantus,  pronom.  adj.,  139,  5,  (3.); 
quantus  for  quam,  with  posse  and  superla- 
tives, 127,  X.  1;  constr.,  206,  (16.);  quanta, ' 
w.  comparatives,  256,  R.  16;  quantum,  w. 
genit.,  212,  k.  3,  n.  1;  in  ace.  of  degree, 
231,  R.  5;  232,  (3.);  256,  r.  16,  n.;  quan- 
tum possum,  w.  indicative,  264,  3  Jin.; 
quantus — tantus,  206,  (16.) 

Quantuscum.yue,  quantusquantvs,  quan- 
tuluscumque,  139,  5,  (3.);  w.  indicative,  259, 
R.  4,  (3.);  quanticumque,  207,  K.  29. 

Quasi,  w.  subj.,  263,  2. 

Quatio,  constr.,  229,  r.  4, 1 ;  how  changed 
in  its  compds.,  189,  n.  3. 

-que, itsuse,  198,1,  r.,  (a.);  que — et,  et 
— que,   que — que,   198,    R.,   (e.);  its  place, 

279,  3,  (c.) 

Queis  and  quis,  for  quibiis,  186,  r.  2. 
Qweo,  how  conjugated.  182,  N.;  w.  inf., 
271,  N.  3. 

Queror,  w.  ace,  232,  n.  1;  w.  quod,  273, 

N.  6. 

Qui,  declined,  136;  qui'mtAA.,  136,  r.  1; 
137,  R.  2 ;  interrogative,  137 ;  difference  be- 
tween qui  and  quis,  137,  1 ;  person  of  qui, 
209,  K.  6;  w.  subj.,  264;  when  translated 
like  a  demonstrative,  206,(17.);  with  sum 
instead  of  pro,  206,  (18.);  quicum,  when 
used,  136,   R.  IJin.;  qui  veto,  qui  autem, 

280,  ui.,  (3.);  ex  quo,  for  postquani,  253, 
N.  4. 

Quia,  quod,  and  quoniam,  198,  7,  R.,  (b.) 
Quicque  and  quicquam,  138,  3,  (a.) 
Quicquid,    138,    R.    4;    ace.    of   degree, 

232,  (3.) 

(^uicumque,  how  declined,   136,  3;  how 

used,  207,  R.  29;  w.'indic,  259^  r.  4,  i3.); 

for  omnis,  quivis,  or  quilibet,  207,  R.  29. 
Quid,  137;    w.  genit.,  212,   r.  3,   N.  1, 

(a.);  ace.  of  degree,  231.    R.  5,  {a.);  232. 

(3.) ;  quid  ?  whv  !  235,  k.  11 ;  quid  sibi  vult  ? 

228.  N.,  (ft.);  quid  est  quod?  w.  subj.,  261, 

7,  N.  2;  quid  est  cur  .'etc.,  264,  7,  n.  o;  quid 

aJ.iud  quarn?  209,    r.  4;  qiiid?  quid  vero? 

quid  igitur?  quid  ergo  f  quid  eiiim?   quid 

multa  ?  quid  plura  ?  229,  b.  8,  2. 


402 


INDEX. 


Quidam,  how  declined,  138,5;  how  used, 
207,  K.  33. 

Quidem,  its  meaning,  191,  R.  4:  its  place, 
279,  3.  (d.) 

Quiiibft,  how  declined,  138,  5 :  how  used, 
207,  a.  34. 

Quies  and  compds.,  gender,  61, 1 ;  genit., 
73,4;  96. 

Quin,  198,  8;  w.  subj..  262,  R.  10;  for  a 
relative  with  non,  ib.,  1  and  n.  6;  for  ut 
non,  ib.,  2;  after  non  dtibito,  etc.,  quin? 
why  not?  w.  indie,  ib.,  n.  9. 

Quippe,  198,  7,  R.,  (6.);  quippe  qui^  w. 
Bubj.,264,  8,-(2.) 

Qiiippiam,  138,  3,  (a.) 

>/?!«,  136,  R.  4. 

}uiris.  genit.  ong.,  74,  E.4;  genit.  plur., 
83.  II.,  5: 


Qu 
Qu 

QuWj  declined,  137;  difiference  of  witis 
and  qui,  137.  1 ;  between  quis  and  uter,  212, 
R.  2.  N.l;  7»a5e5«7MJ?  w.  subj.,264,8,(2.); 
between  quis  and  cUiquis,  207,  R.  30,  (6.) 

Quisnam,  qitinam,  how  declined,  137,  2. 

Quispiam,  how  declinsd,  138,  3;  how 
used,  207,  a.  30;  quippiam,  w.  genit.,  212, 
R.  3,  N.  1. 

Quisquam,  how  declined,  138.  3;  how 
used,  207,  r.  31;  quxcquam  and  quidquam, 
w.  genit.,  212,  R.  3;  ace.  of  degree,  231, 
R.  5,  (a.);  232,(3.) 

Quisque,  how  declined,  138.  3;  how  used, 
207,  R.  35;  with  plur.  verb,  209,  r.  11,  (4.); 
its  place,  279,  14;  w.  a  superlative,  207,  R. 
85.  (b.);  in  apposition,  204,  r.  10. 

Quisquis,  declined^  136,  4 ;  its  use,  207, 
R.  2d ;  difference  between  quisquis  and  qui- 
cumque,  207,  R.  29;  w.  indie,  259,  r.  4,  (3.) 

Quivis,  how  declined,  138,  5 ;  how  used, 
207,  R.  34. 

Qko,  the  correlative  adv.,  191,  r.  1;  giw, 
w.  a  comparative,  256,  R.  16,  (2.);  for  trt  eo, 
w.  subj..  202,  R.  9;  as  adv.  of  place,  w.  gen- 
itive, 212,  R.  4,  N.  2,  (6.);  quo  mihi  hanc 
re/n,  209,  r.  4;  228.  r.  5;  quo  secius.  262, 
R.  11.  N. ;  quo  ne,  262.  r.  5. 

Quoad,  w.  subj.,  283,  4:  w.  ejus,  212,  r, 
4,  N.  5. 

Quocum,  quacum,  etc.,  instead  of  cum 
quo,  etc.,  241,  r.  1. 

Quod,  causal  conj.,  198,  7;  construction 
of,  273,  5;  refers  to  past  time,  273,  (6.); 
w.  subj.  of  dico,  puto,  etc..  266,  3,  r.;  quod 
sciam.  etc.,  264^3;  quod,  referring  to  a 
preceding  statement,  206,  (14);  273,  6,  (a.); 
w.  genit.,  212,  r.  3;  before  51,  nwt,  etc., 
206,  (14);  as  ace.  of  degree,  232,  (3.) 

Quojus  and  quoi,  for  cujus  and  cut,  136, 
B.  2. 

Quoque  and  etiam,  difference  between, 
198, 1,  R.,  (</.);  place  of  ^Ko^M^,  279.  3,  {d.) 

Quot,  indecl.,  115,  4;  interrogative,  121, 
5;  139.  5,  (3.);  constr.,  206,  (16);  quot  sunt, 
qui?  264,  7,  ».  2;  quotquot,  w.  indie,  259, 
R.  4,  (3.)  ^ 

Quoteni  and  quotus,  interrogative,  121,  5. 

Quoties,  interrog.  adv.,  121.  5. 

QMOfiAS-^MJ-^yiw.  its  meaning.  207,  R.  35,(a.) 

Quum,  correlative  of  turn,  191,  r.  7;  in- 
stead of  postquam.  253,  N.  4;  —  copj.,  198. 
10;  constr..  263,  5,  and  a.  1—4. 


B. 


R,  before  s  in  roots  of  nouns,  56,  r.  1; 
nouns  in  r,  genitive  of,  70,  71 ;  changed  to 
s  before  5  and  t,  171,  3;  r  final,  quantity 
of,  299,  2. 

Rapio,  w.  dat.  or  abl.,  224.  r.  2. 

Rarum  est,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  n'.  3. 

Rostrum,  plur.  rastri  or  rostra,  92,  6. 

Ratio,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  215,  in.,  r.  1, 
(1.);  rations,  as  abl.  of  manner,  without 
cum,  247,  2. 

Ratum  est,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  2;  ratum, 
pr.,  284,  E.  1.  (2.) 

-re  in  2d  person  sing,  of  passive  v(»ce, 
162,3. 

Re  or  red,  inseparable  prep.,  196,  (6.); 
197,  18 ;  quantity  of,  285,  r.  3,  (a.) 

Reapse,  135,  r.  3. 

Recens.  abl.  of,  11^,  e.  3  and  R.  1;  also 
adverb,  192,  4,  (b.) 

Receptio,  constr.,  233,  R.  2,  N. 

Recingor,  w.  ace.  234,  R.  1. 

Reeordor.  w.  genit.  or  ace,  216;  w.  pre8. 
inf.,  268.  R.  1 ;  w.  ace  and  inf.,  2t2,  N.  1. 

Reetf^  instead  of  abl.  of  price.  252.  r.  3. 

Reckoning,  Roman  mode  of.  326,  327. 

Rectum  est,  ut,  262,  k.  3,  TH.  3. 

Rfcuso  quin,  and  quominus,  262,  n.  7  and 
R.  11;  w.  ne,  2l71,  r.  1;  w.  inf.,  ib.,  s.,  and 
271,  N.l. 

Redda^.  two  aces.,  230,  w.  1;  pass.  210, 
R.  3,  \3)r(6.);  w.  perf.  pass,  part.,  274,  r.  4. 

Redoleo,  w.  ace,  232,  (2.) 

Redundant  nouns,  99 ;  adjs.,  116;  109,  h.; 
111.  N.;  verbs.  185- 

Redundo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2.) 

Reduplication,  163,  r.  ;  of  compound 
verbs,  163.  e.  1;  of  verbs  of  1st  conj.,  165, 
R.  2;  of  2d  conj.,  168,  n.  2;  of  3d  conj., 
171,  E.  1,  (6.);  quantity  of.  284,  z.  2. 

Refero,  w.  ace  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1. 

Refert  and  interest,  w.  genit.,  214;  219; 
w.  the  adj.  pronouns  mea,  etc.,  219,  r.  1; 
w.  ad.  etc.,  219,  R.  Z;fefert,  pr..  285,  R.  3. 

Refertus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213.  R.  5.  (3.) 

Reflexive  pronouns,  132,  4;  139,  r.  2; 
how  used.  208;  for  demonstratives,  208, 
(6.);  ellipsis  of,  229,  r.  4;  in  oratio  obliqua, 
266,  R.  3. 

Reformido,  w.  inf..  271,  If.  1. 

Regno,  w.  genit.,  220,  4- 

Regnum,  declined,  46. 

Rfgo,  conjugated.  158. 

Relative  adjs..  104.  13;  139.  R. ;  govern- 
ment of,  213,  R.  1 ;  222, 3;  adverbs,  w.  subj., 
expressing  a  purpose,  264,  5,  R.  2 ;  used  in- 
definitely, w.  subj.,  264,  R.  3. 

Relative  pronouns,  136;  agreement  of, 
206,  R.  19,-  ellipsis  of,  206,  (5.);  in  the  case 
of  the  antecedent.  2f)Q,  (6.),  (a.);  referring 
to  nouns  of  different  genders,  206.  (9.) ; — to 
a  proposition,  206,  (13.);  agreeing  with  a 
noun  implied.  206.  (11);  number  and  gen- 
der of,  when  referring  to  two  or  more 
nouns,  206,  (15); — relative  clauses  used  as 
circumlocutions  and  to  express  the  English 
'so  oalled,'  206,  (19);  relative  adverbs  for 
relative  pironouns,  206,  (20  j;  the  relative 
adjs.  quot,  quaiitus,  etc.,  constructioD  ot, 


INDEX. 


403- 


206,  (16) ;  qui  with  sum,  instead  of  pro, 
206,  (18) ;  person  of,  209,  r.  6;  206,  R.  19;— 
w.  subj.,  264;  their  place,  279, 13;  280,  iii., 
(2.);  relatives  as  connectives,  280,  iii.,  (1.): 
198,  II. 

Resolving,  verbs  of,  273, 1,  (a.) 

Relinquo,  w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1;  w. 
part,  in  dus,  274,  r.  7;  relinquitur,  w.  ut 
and  the  subj.,  262,  r.  3,  N.  1. 

Reliqua,  ace,  234,  ii.,  R.  3;  reliquum  est 
ut,  262,  R.  3.     • 

Reminiscor,  constr.,  216. 

Remitto,  229,  r.  4, 1. 

Removing,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  251. 

Remuneror,  w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  b.  1. 

Renuncio,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  n.  1;  pass., 
210,  R.  3,  (3.),  {b.) 

Repeated  words,  their  place,  279,  4. 

Repens,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  3. 

Reperio,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1; — repe- 
rior,  210,  B.  3,  (3.),  (c);  271,  r.  2;^repen- 
nntur,  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Repo,  constr.  of  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  N. 

Repono,  241,  E.  5. 

Reposco,  w.  two  aces.  J  231,  r.  1. 

Repugno,  with  quominus  or  ne,  262,  R.  11. 

Res,  decUned,  90;  use  of,  205,  R.  7,  (2.), 
N.  1. 

Reses,  genit.  sing,  of,  112, 1 ;  defective, 
115,  2. 

Resipio,  w.  ace,  232,  (2.) 

Responsives,  cas^  of,  204,  R.  11. 

Respublica,  declined,  91. 

Restat,  ut,  262,  R.  3,  N.  1. 

Rete,  abl.  of ,  82,  E.  1,  (6.) 

Retracto,  constr.,  229,  R.4, 1. 

Reus,  w.  genit.,  213,  K.  1,  (3.) ;  reum  agere 
or  facere,  w.  genit.,  217,  R.  1. 

Rhetoric,  figures  of,  324. 

RJius,  genit.  of,  76,  E.  3;  ace.  of,  80,  li. 

Rhythm,  308,  (1.) 

Rideo,  w.  ace,  232,  n.  1. 

-rimus,  -ritis,  quantity  of,  290,  E.,  (1.),  4. 

•rimus,  superlatives  in,  126, 1. 

Ritu,  as  abl.  of  manner  without  cum, 
247,2. 

Rivers,  gender  of  names  of,  28. 

-rix,  verbals  in,  102,  6,  (a.)  See  tor  and 
trix. 

Rogo,  w.  two  aces.,  231,  R.  1 ;  w.  ut,  273, 
N.  4;  274,  R.  7;  without  ut,  262,  r.  4; 
constr.  in  pass.,  234,  i. 

Roman  day,  326,  1 ; — hour,  ib. ;— month, 
326,  2;— names  of  the  months,  326,  2,  (1); 
—calendar,  table  of,  326,  2,(6),  p.  369;— 
week,  326,  2,  (10) ;  names  of  the  days  of  the 
week,  ib. ; — ^year,  how  designated,  326,  2, 
(11) ;— money,  weights  and  measures,  327 ; — 
tables  of  weights,  etc.,  327,  pp.  370—373;— 
coins,  327,  p.  371 ;— interest,  how  comput- 
ed, ib. 

Root  or  crude  form  of  words  inflected, 
what  and  how  found,  40, 10 ;  formation  of 
nominative  sing,  from  in  3d  decl.,  56,  i. 
and  n. 

Roots  of  verbs,  150;  general,  150,  1; 
special,  150,  2;  second  and  third,  hew 
formed,  150,  3  and  4;  third,  how  determin- 
ed when  there  is  no  supine,  151,  N. ;  first, 
its    derivatives,    151,    1;   irregularities    in 


tenses  formed  from,  162, 1—6 ;  second,  do., 
151,  2;  irregularities  in  tenses  formed  from, 
162,  7—10;  third,  do.,  151,  3;  second  and 
third,  formation  of,  1st  conj.,  164r-166;  2d 
conj.,  167—170;  3d  conj.,  171—174;  4th 
conj.,  175 — 177;  second  and  third  irregu- 
lar, 1st  conj.,  165;  2d  conj.,  168;  4th  couj,, 
176. 

-rs,  nouns  in,  genitive  sing,  of,  77,  2,  (2.) ; 
genit,  plur.  of,  83,  ii.,  4. 

Rudis,  213,  R.  1,  and  r.  4,  (2.);  275,  m., 
E.  1,  (2.) 

Rupes,  declined,  57. 

Rus,  construed  like  names  of  towns,  in 
ace,  237,  R.  4;  in  abl.,  254;  255;  cf  82, 
E.  5,  (6.);  rure,  not  ruri  with  an  adj.,  256, 
E.  1. 

•rus,  participle  in,  how  declined,  105, 
R.  2;  its  signification,  162, 14;  274,  2,  r.  6; 
with  sim  and  cssem  .serving  as  future  sub- 
junctives, 162,  r.  3;  with  esse  and  fuisse, 
162, 14,  R.  3;  268,  R.  4;  genitive  plur.  of, 
162, 19 ;  denotes  intention,  274,  r.  6 ;  used 
for  an  English  clause  connected  by  '  since, 
when,'  etc.,  ib. ;  as  an  apodosis,  ib. 

Eutum,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (2.) 

S. 

jS^,  sound  of,  11 ;  added  to  some  roots  of 
nouns  of  3d  decl.,  56,  i. ;  added  to  roots  of 
verbs  ending  in  a  consonant,  171 ;  used  in- 
stead of  « in  the  3d  root  of  some  verbs,  171, 
E.  6;  inserted  in  some  verbals,  102,  5,  (b.); 
s  preceded  by  a  consonant,  nouns  in,  gen- 
der of,  62:  64;  genit.  of,  77;  final,  elided, 
305,2. 

Sacer,  w.  genit.  or  dat.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.) 

Sacerdos,  gender  of,  30 ;  61,  3. 

Scepe,  comparison  of,  194,  5. 

Sal,  82,  E.  1,  (b.),  and  66,  e.  ;  96, 9;  pr., 
284,  N.  1. 

Salio,  constr.  of  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  N. 

Saltern,  193,  ii.,  3. 

Saluto,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N.  1;  salutor^ 
w.  two  nominatives,  210,  r.  3,  (3.) 

Salve,  183,  9. 

Samnis,  genit.  sing.,  74,  E.  4;  genit. 
plur.,  83,  II.,  5. 

Sapio,  w.  ace,  232,  (2.) 

Sapphic  verse,  304,  2;  315,  ii. 

Sat,  indecl.,  115,  4;  satis,  w.  genit.,  212, 
R.  4;  satis  esse,  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  275,  in., 
R.  2,  (1);  satis  habeo,  and  satis  mihi  esty 
w.  perf.  infin.,  268,  E.  2;  satis  erat,  indie, 
instead  of  subj.,  259,  R.  3;  degrees  of  com- 
parison, 126,  4. 

Satago,  w.  genit.,  215,  (2.) 

Satelles,  gender  of,  30;  61,  2. 

Satiatus,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  R.5,  (3.) 

Satisdo,  w.  damni  infecti,  217,  R.  3,  (c); 
w.  dat.,  225,1. 

Satisfacio,  w.  dat.,  225,  i. 

Saturn,  pr.,  284,  E.  1,  2. 

Saturnalibus,  for  ludis  Sfitumalibus,  253, 

,Ste<Mr,  how  declined,  105,  R.  1;  w.  genit 
or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

Saturo,  w.  abl.,  249,  i.,  E.  1;  vr.  genit. 
poet.,  22(),  3 


404 


INDEX. 


Satus,  w.  abl.,  246. 

Saying,  verbs  of,  constr.,  272;  ellipsis  of, 
270,  R.  2.  (6.)  and  3;  implied,  273,  3,  [6.); 
used  in  the  pa&sive,  272,  r.  6. 

Scando,  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  »• 

Scanning.. 304,  6. 

Scateo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2.),  a.  1;  \rith 
genit.  poet.,  220,  3. 

Scazon,  314,  ii. 

Scifli,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (1.) 

Scilicet,  198,  7,  R.,  (a.) 

Scio,  yr.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  w.  1:  scito, 
162,4. 

Sdtor  and  seiscitor,  constr.,  231,  E.  4. 

-SCO,  Terbs  in.  187,  ii.,  2;  drop  5c  in  2d 
and  3d  root  before  t,  171,  e.  6. 

Scribo,  273.  2.  (c):  w.  two  aces.,  230,  N. 
1;  w.  ace.  and  iilf.,  272,  s.  1,  and  r.  6;  in 
pass.  w.  predicate  nominative,  210,  k.  3, 
(3);  scribit,  w.  pres.  inf.  instead  of  perf., 
268,  R.  1,  (a.) 

Se,  inseparable  prep.,  196,  (b.) 

Se,  w.  inter,  208,  5.    See  sui. 

Secerno.  25l,  N.,  and  R.  2,  x. 

Secus,  for  sexus.  88,  1;  94;  211,  r.  6,  (4.); 
230,  R.  6;  adv.,  191,  iii.;  w.  ace.,  195,  e.  3. 

Sed,  198, 9,  r.,  (a.) ;  its  place,  279, 3,  (a.) ; 
sed,  sed  quod,  sed  quia,  262,  b.  9 ;  serf,  sed 
tamen,  278.  R.  10;  sed  et,  198,  1,  (d.) 

Sedeo,  210,  a.  3,  (2.);  compds.  of,  233, 
(3).  K. 

Sedile,  declined,  57. 

Sedo,  constr.,  229,  E.  4,  1. 

-sem,  old  termination  of  plup.  indie,  ac- 
tive, 162,  9. 

Semi-deponent  verbs,  142,  2. 

Senarius,  304,  2;  Iambic,  314. 

Senex,  its  degrees  of  comparison,  126,  4 ; 
gender  of.  65,  2;  genitive  of,  78,  2.  (2); 
abl.  of,  113,  B.  2;  113,  1;  for  in  senectute, 
253,  R.  6. 

Sentences,  200 ;  analysis  of,  281. 

Sentiments  of  another,  in  dependent 
clauses,  266,  3. 

Sentio,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1. 

Separating,  verbs  of,  w.  abl.,  251. 

Separo,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Sequitur,  constr.  262,  e.  3,  v.  1. 

-sere,  future  infin.  in,  162, 10. 

Sereno,  scil.  ccdo.  257,  r.  9,  (2.) 

Sermo,  declined,  57. 

Serpens,  gender  of,  64,  3. 

Sese,  intensive.  133,  R.  2. 

Servitutem  servire,  232,  (1.) 

Sextertius,  its  value,  327,  E.  2,  {b.);  how 
denoted,  ib. ;  mode  of  reckoning,  ib. ;  ses- 
tertium,  ib.,  r.  5 — 7. 

Seu,  or  sive,  198,  2.  r.,  (c.) 

Ships,  gender  of  their  names,  29. 

Short  syllable.  282,  2. 

Showing,  verbs  of,  constr.,  272,  b.  6. 

Si,  how  pronounced,  11,  E.  1. 

^i  or  -sin,  Greek  datives  in,  84. 

Si,  conj.,  198,  5;  si  for  num,  198, 11,  R., 
(«.);  si  minus,  sin  minus  or  sin  cdiier,  198, 
6,  R.,  (6.);  277,  r.  14;  ellipsis  of  in  the 
protasis,  261,  R.  1;  n  with  the  imperfect 
Bubj.,  instead  of  the  pluperfect,  261,  R.  5; 
st  nihil  aliud,  209,  R.  4 ;  si  quisquam  and  si 
ullus,  207,  B.  30,  (b.) ;  si  non,  262,  e.  6. 


Sibi  suo,  228,  i».,  (a.) 

Sic,  191,  B.  5;  277,  r.  12,(a.);  pleonaa- 
tically,  207,  E.  22. 

Sicuti,  w.  subj.,  263,  2,  (1.) 

Significant  word,  in  a  proposition,  279, 
2,  (e.) 

Siem,  sies,  etc.,  154,  R.  4. 

SUeniio  pratenre  or  facere  aliqmd,  with- 
out cum,  247,  2. 

Sileo,  w.  ace.,  232.  n.  1;  pres.,  234,  m. 

Silver  age  of  Koman  literature,  329,  3. 

-sim,  old  termination  of  perfect  indie, 
active,  162,  9. 

Similar  constructions,  278,  N.  1  and  2. 

SimUe,  324,  30. 

Similis,  w.  genit.  or  dat.,  222,  e.  2,  (o.); 
w.  dat.  in  imitation  of  the  Greek,  222,  b.  7 ; 
similes,  w.  inter.,  222,  R.  4,  (4.);  w.  ac  and 
cUque,  222,  E.  7,  ,pn. 

Simple,  subject,  202,  2  ;^redicate,  203, 
2;— sentences,  201,  10. 

Simul,  w.  abl.,  195,  a.  3;  241,  R.  2; 
sijnul — simul.  277,  R.  8. 

Sm,  198,  5;  its  place,  279,  3,  (a.);  sin         _^ 
minus,  277,  e.  14. 

Singular  number,  35, 1;  sing,  for  plur.,         ^ 
209,  E.  11, 1,  (b.) 

Singtdare  est  ut,  262,  b.  3,  w.  3. 

Sir^i,  119. 

Sino,  273,  4;  262,  b.  4. 

Si^tddem,  198,  7,  E.,  (ft.) 
Siquis,  how  declined,  138,  2;  siqtds  and 
siquid,  how  used,  138,  2,  VO  and  {b.);  207, 
E.  29;  si  quis  est,  qui,  w.  subj.,  264,  6. 

Sis  for  si  t-is,  183.  r.  3. 

Sisto,  constr.,  229.  e.  4, 1. 

Situm,  pr.,  284,  B.  1,  (2.) 

Sive  or  sew,  198, 2,  R. ;  278,  R.  8 :  its  place, 
279,  3,  (a.);  sive — sive,  w.  verb  in  the  indie., 
259,  E.  4,  (3.) 

-so,  -Sim,  sem,  old  verbal  terminations, 
162,9. 

Socius,  w.  genit.  or  dat.,  222,  r.  2,  (a.) 

Sodes,  for  si  audts,  183,  E.  3. 

Solecism,  325,  2. 

Soleo,  how  conjugated,  142,  E.  2 ;  w.  inf., 
271,  K.  1. 

Solitus,  274,  E.  3;  solito,  after  compan^• 
tives,  256,  E.  9 ;  its  place,  279,  n.  1. 

Solum,  solummodo,  193,  ii.,  3. 

Solus,  how  declined,  107 ;  w.  relative  and 
subj.,  264, 10;  for  solum,  205,  B.  15. 

Solutus,  w.  genit.,  213;  w.  abl.,  251,  w.; 
solutum,  pr..  ^A,  R.  3. 

Solvo,  w.  abl.,  251.  n. 

Sons,  genit.  plur.  of,  114,  E.  3;  115, 1,  (a.) 

Sospes,  genit.  of,  112, 1;  abl.  of,  113,  e.  2; 
115,  1,  (a.);  126,  5,  (ft.) 

Sotadic  verse,  304,  2 ;  317,  i. 

Sounds  of  the  letters,  7—12;  of  the 
vowels,  7  and  8 ;  of  the  diphthongs,  9 ;  of 
the  consonants,  10 — 12. 

Space,  ace.  and  abl.  of.  236;  ellipsis  of, 
236,  R.  3. 

Spatium,  w.  genit.  of  gerund,  275,  in., 
b.  1,  (1):  spatio  as  abl.  of  space,  236,  R.  4. 

Specto,  constr.,  225,  R.  1. 

Specus,  88, 1. 

Spero,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  .n.  1. 

Spes  est,  w.  ace.   and  inf.,  272,  V.  \\ 


INDEX. 


405 


^es,  w.  genit.  of  gerands,  275,  ii.,  r.  1, 
(1.);  spe,  after  comparatives,  256,  r.  9j  its 
place,  279,  n    1. 

Spolio,  w.  abl.,  251,  N. 

Spondaic  Terse,  310 ;  tetrameter,  312. 

Spontleo,  163,  R. ;  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272, 

N.  1. 

Stanza,  319,  4. 

Statim,  193,  ii.,  1. 

Statuo,  241,  B.  5;  278,  n.  1;  271,  n.  3; 

272,  N.  1;  statutum  habeo,  274,  r.  4. 
Statum,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (2.) 

Sterilis,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (2): 
w.  arf,  213,  B.  4.  (2.) 

Steti  and  stiti,  pr.,  284,  e.  1,  (1.) 

'  Still,'  w.  comparatives,  how  expressed  in 
Latin,  266,  R.  9,  (b.) 

Stipulor,  217,  B.  3,  (c.) 

Sto,  163,  R.;  w.  genit.  of  price,  214,  r.  3: 
w.  pred.  nom.,  210,  R.  3,  (2.);  w.  abl.,  245, 
n.,  5,  and  r.  2;  stat  per  me,  construction 
of,  262.  R.  11;  compds.  of,  233,  (3.),  n. 

Strophe,  319,  4. 

Studeo,  yr.  dat..  223,  R.  2;  with  gerund, 
275,  III.,  R.  2,  (1.);  with  the  inf.  with  or 
without  an  accusative,  271,  R.  4;   w.  ut, 

273,  4,  (a.) ;  w.  ace.  id,  232,  (3.) 
Studiosus.  w.  genit.,  213,  E.  1:  275,  in., 

E.l,(2.) 
Studium,  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  n., 

Styx,  gender  of,  28,  e. 

Suadeo,  constr.,  273,  n.  4;  262,  r.  4. 

Sub,  in  composition,  force  of,  122 ;  gov- 
ernment of,  235,  (2);  constr.  of  verbs 
compounded  with,  224;  of  adjs.,  222,  r. 
l,(b.) 

Subject  of  a  verb,  140 ;  of  a  proposition, 
201 ;  202 ;  simple,  complex,  and  compound, 
202;  its  place  in  a  sentence,  279, 2;  subject 
of  a  dependent  clause  made  the  object  of 
the  leading  verb,  229,  b.  5,  (a.) 

Subject-nominative,  209;  ellipsis  of,  209, 
B.  1  and  2;  when  wanting,  209,  r.  3;  w. 
infi,  209,  R.  5 ;  239,  n,  1 ;  two  or  more  in 
the  singular  with  a  plural  verb,  209,  b.  12; 
(2.) 

Subject-accusative,  239;  ellipsis  of,  239, 
r.  1 — 3 ;  considered  also  as  the  accusative 
of  the  object  after  verbs  of  saying,  showing, 
and  believing,  272,  r.  6. 

Subjective  genitive,  211,  r.  2;  possessive 
pronoun  used  instead  of,  211,  R.  3. 

Subjectus,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1,  (5.) 

Subjunctive,  143,  2;  its  tenses,  145,  R.  2; 
how  used,  260 — 266,  and  273 ;  various  use 
of  its  tenses,  260 ;  how  translated,  260,  i. 
andir.,  e.  1;  for  imperative,  260,  r.  6;  in 
impersonal  verbs,  184,  b.  2 ;  in  conditional 
clauses,  261;  after  particles,  262  and  263; 
after  qui,  264 ;  after  relative  advs.,  264,  r.  2 ; 
indefinite  subj.,  264,  12  and  n.  ;  in  indirect 
questions,  265 ;  in  inserted  clauses,  266;  in 
©ratio  obliqua,  266,  1  and  2;  after  what 
verbs  used,  273;  after  adjectives,  213,  R.  4; 
exchanged  for  ace.  w.  inf.,  273,  3,  (6.); 
subjunctive  in  doubtful  questions,  260,  r.  6 ; 
in  repeated  actions  after  relative  pronouns 
and  adverbs,  264, 12 


Subito,  193,  II.,  1. 

Subordinate  conjunctions,  198,  ii. ;— pro- 
positions, 201,  6  and  7.  '       '    ** 

Substantive,  26—103;  substantive  pro- 
nouns,  132,  138;  their  gender,  132,  8;  de- 
clined, 133;  as  subject  nominative,  ellipsis 
of,  209,  B.  1;  dat.  of,  redundant,  228,  n.; 
substantive  verb,  153 ;  substantive  clauses. 
201,  7  and  8;  229,  r.  5;  231,  r.  2,  (6.);  subl 
stantive  clause  instead  of  the  abl.  after  opus 
est,  243,  R.  1 ;  and  after  dignus  and  indie- 
nus,  244,  R.  2,  (b.)  * 

Subter,  constr.,  235,  (4.) 

Subtractive  expressions  in  numerals,  118. 
4;  120,  2,3,  and  5.  ' 

_  Succenseo,  223,  R.  2;  w.  quod,  273,  n.  6. 

Sufficio,  w.  dat.  of  gerund,  275,  in., 
R.  2,  (1.) 

Sui,  signification  of,  132, 4;  declined.,  133; 
use  of,  208;  266,  r.  3;  275,  n.,  r.  1,  (4.) 

Sultis  for  si  vidtis,  183,  r.  3. 

Sum,  why  called  an  auxiliary,  153;  why 
substantive,  ib.;  why  the  copula,  140,  4: 
conjugated,  153;  compds.  of,  154,  a.  5— r.  7; 
w.  a  genit.  of  quality,  211,  r.  6,  (7);  in 
expressions  denoting  part,  property,  duty, 
etc.,  211,  R.  8,  (3);  275,  b.  1,  (5);  denot- 
ing degree  of  estunation,  214;  w.  dat.,  226; 
with  two  datives,  227;  how  translated,  227, 
R.  3;  w.  abl.  dengting  in  regard  to,  250, 
B.  3;  w.  an  abl.  of  place,  manner,  etc.,  in 
the  predicate,  210,  B.  3,  (1);  w.  dat.  of  ge- 
rund, 275,  R.  2,  (1);  w.  abl.  of  price,  252, 
R.  1;  w.  genit.  of  value,  214;  sitiit  qui,  w. 
subj.,  264,  6;  sunt  quidam,  nonnulli,  etc., 
264, 6,  R.  4;  ellipsis  of  as  copula,  209,  r.  4 
Jin.',  of  esse  and  fuisse,  270,  r.  3;  sum  w. 
predicate  nom.,  etc.,  210,  r.  3,  (1) ;  esse  w. 
predicate  nom.,  271,  N.  2,  and  r.  4. 

Sumo,  w.  two  aces.,  230,  k.  2;  poet.  w. 
inf.,  271,  N.  3. 

Supellex,  genitive  of,  78,  2,  (2) :  abl.  of, 
82,  E.  5,  (a.)  ' 

Super,  constr.,  235,  (3) ;  of  verbs  com- 
pounded with,  224;  of  adjs.,  222,  r.  1,  (6.) 

Superfluo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  (2),  r.  1. 

Superjacio,  constr.,  233,  (1.) 
Superlative  degree,  122,.  6 ;  particular  use 


place  of,  296,  (7),  (6.) 

Supero,  w.  abl.,  256,  r.  16,  (3.) 

Supersedeo,  w.  abl.,  242. 

Superstes,  genit.  of,  112,  2;  abl.  of,  113, 
E.  2;  115, 1,  (a.) ;  126,  5,  (&.) ;  w.  genit.  or 
dat.,  222,  B.  2,  (a.) 

Supersum,  w.  dat.,  224,  11;  superest  trf, 
etc.,  262,  R.  3,  n.1. 

Supenis,  its  degrees  of  comparison,  125, 
4;  supremus  or  summits,  205,  R.  17;  sum- 
mum  used  adverbially,  205,  R.  10;  234,  ii., 
B.  3. 

Supines,  25  and  143,  3 ;  few  in  number, 
162,  11;  in  um,  by  what  cases  followed, 
276,  I. ;  on  what  verbs  dependent,  276,  ii., 
w.  eo,  276,  n.,  R.  2  and  3;  supines  in  «, 
after  what  adjs.,  276,  m.,  and  B.  1;  after 
fas,  nefas,  and  opus,  276,  iii.,  R.  2;  of  two 
syllables,  quantity  of,  284,  K.  1. 


406 


INDEX. 


Supra,  w.  ace.,  195,  4;  w.  adjs.,  127,  6; 
256,  R.  13.  (fc.) 

Suppedito,\r.  two  dats.,  227,  R.  1;  229, 
B.  4,  1;  w.  abl.,  250.  2,  R.  1. 

Supplex,  genit.  plur.  of,  114,  B.  2;  115, 
1,  (a.);  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1.  (6.) 

Supposition  or  concession  denoted  by  the 
tenses  of  the  subj.,  260,  r.  3. 

Surripio.  w.  dat.  or  abl.,  224,  R.  2. 

Sus,  gender  of,  30;  67,  e.  4;  genit.  of, 
76,  E.  3;  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  84,  e_.  1. 

Suscipio,  w.  participle  in  dus,  274,  r.  7. 

Sjtspensus  and  suspectus^  w.  genit.,  213, 

K.  1. 

Suus,  use  of,  139,  r.  2;  208;  referring  to 
a  word  in  the  predicate,  208,  (7) ;  for  kiijus- 
when  a  noun  is  omitted,  208,  (7.);  when 
two  nouns  are  united  by  cum,  208,  (7), 
(o;  denoting  fit,  etc.,  208,  (8.) 

Syllabic  caesura.  310.  N.  1. 

Syllabication,  17—23. 

Syllables,  number  of,  in  Latin  words,  17 ; 
pure  and  impure.  80 ;  quantity  of  first  and 
middle,  284;  of  penultimate,  291;  of  ante- 
penultimate. 292;  of  final.  294. 

Syllepsis,  323, 1,  (6.)  and  (3.) 

Symploce,  324, 15. 

Synaeresis,  306, 1. 

Synalcepha,  305, 1 

Synapheia,  307,  3. 

Synchysis.  324,  4. 

Syncope,  322,  4 ;  in  genit.  plur.  of  1st 
decl.,  43.  2;  of  2d  decl.,  53;  in  cases  of  bos 
and  sus.  S3,  e.  1  and  84,  e.  1 ;  of  e  in  ob- 
lique cases  of  nouns  in  er  of  2d  decl.,  48; 
of  3d  decl.,  71,  e.  1;  in  perfect,  etc.,  of. 
verbs,  162,  7 ;  see  Omission. 

Synecdoche,  234,  ii.;  323,1,  (5.);  324,3. 

Synesis  or  synthesis,  323,  3,  (4.) 

Synonymia.'  324,  29. 

Synopsis  of  Horatian 

Syntax,  1;  200—281. 

Systole,  307, 1. 

Syzygy,  303,  4. 


T,  sound  of,  12;  before  s  in  roots  of 
nouns,  56,  R.  1 ;  in  roots  of  verbs,  171,  3, 
and  K.  5 ;  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66 ;  genit.  of, 
78 ;  final,  quantity  of,  299,  2. 

Taceo,  w.  ace,  232,  N.  1. 

Tcedet,  w.  genit..  215;  w.  ace.  229,  R.  6. 

Tfutio  w  ace,  233,  R.  2,  n. 

Talma,  gender  of,  42.  2. 

Talis,  demonstr.  adj.,  139,  5,  (3.);  taUs 
followed  bv  qui  and  the  subj.,  264, 1,  N.; 
ellipsis  of. '264,  1.  (6.);  206,  (3),  (a.);  and 
(16) ;  talis  ac,  198,  3,  R. ;  talis— -qualiSj 
206.  (16.) 

Tarn,  191,  r-  5, ;  tarn — quam,  277,  R.  11 ; 
tarn  with  an  adj.  before  qui  and  the  subj., 
264, 1,  Jf. 

Tamen,  how  used,  198,  4,  R. 

Tametsi,  198,  4;  constr.,  263,  2,  (4.) 

Tamquam,  w.  subj.,  263,  2;  used  like 
quidam,  207.  R.  33,  {b.)  Jin.\  w.  abl.  abso- 
lute, 257,  N.  4. 

Tandem^  191,  r.  6. 


ranftrtn,_adv.,  193,  ir.,  3. 

Tantus,  demonstrative,  139,  5,(3.);  fol- 
lowed by  qui  and  the  subj.,  264,  1,  ».; 
eUipsis  of,  264, 1,  (6.);  206,  (3.),  (a.);  and 6; 
iantus — quantus,  206,  (16);  tanti,  quanti, 
etc.,  w.  verbs  of  valuing.  214,  R.  1,  (1.); 
tantum,  w.  "genit.  plur.  and  plur.  verb,  209, 
R.  11,  (3),;  tantum,  w.  genit.,  212.  r.  3,  N. 
1;  fanri  after  refert  and  intcrcif,  219.  R.  5; 
tantum,  ace.  of  degree,  231,  r.  5;  232,  (3.); 
256,  R.  16,  N. ;  tantfi,  w.  comparatives,  256, 
R.  16,  (2.) 

Tantopere,  191,  r.  5. 

Tarrfo.  22^,  R.4, 1. 

Tautology,  325,  4. 

Taxo.  constr.,  217,  R.  5;  w.  abl.  of  price, 
252,  R.  1. 

-te,  encUtic,  133,  r.  2. 

Tempe,  83.  1,  and  94. 

Tempera,  223.  R.  2,  and  (1),  (a.);  temp*- 
rare.mihi  7ion  possum,  quin,  262,  it.  7. 

Temporal  adj.-!..  104, 6;  classes  of,  121,  8;— 
conjunctions,  198, 10.' 

Tempus,  ellipsis  of,  205,  R.  7;  tempus  est^ 
w.  inf.,  270,  R.  1 ;  tempus  impendere,2'h,  m., 
R.  2;  ternpus  eonsumere,  ib.;  temporis  tJlet 
turn  and  tunc,  212,  R.  4,  V.  4;  w.  id,  hoc^ 
or  idem,  234,  n.,  R.  3;  tempore  or  m  tem- 
pore, 253,  N.  1;  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275, 
HI.,  R.  1,  (1.) 

Ttnax,  w.  genitive,  213,  R.  1,  (1.) 

Tendo,  constr.,  225,  iv.;  229,  R.  4, 1;  w. 
inf.,  271,  R.  1. 

Teneo,  w.  perf.  pass,  participle,  274,  R.  4 
Jin. ;  teneri,  perf.  pass,  part.,  268,  R.  1.  (6.) 

Tenses,  144 ;  division  of,  144,  2  and  3 ;  of 
the  subj.,  145,  r.  2;  of  the  imperative,  145, 
R.  3;  of  the  infinitive,  145.  R.  4;  connection 
of,  258;  principal  and  historical,  258,  A. 
and  B. ;  of  indie,  mood,  used  one  for  another, 
259;  future  for  imperative.  259,  R.  1,  (4); 
the  preterites  of  the  indie,  for  the  pluperfect 
subj.  in  the  apodosisof  a  conditional  clause, 
259,  R.  4;  of  subj.  mood,  their  use,  260,  i., 
R.  1.  and  II.,  R.  1;  in  protasis  and  apodo* 
sis,  261;  of  inf.  mood,  use  of,  268;  tensea 
used  in  epistolary  style,  145,  n.,  3;  259,  r. 
1,  (2.),  (c.) 

Tento,  constr.,  273,  N.  1;  w.  inf.,  271, 
N.  1. 

Tenus,w.  genit.,  221,  m.;  w.  abl,,  241, 
R.  1;  place  of,  279. 10;  241,  r.  1. 

-ter,  nouns  in,  48,  1;  71. 

Teres,  in  genit.  sing.,  112,  1;  defective, 
115,  2 ;  its  degrees,  126,  4. 

Terminational  comparative,  and  superla- 
tive, 124;  adjs.  without  such  comparison, 
126,5. 

Terminations  of  inflected  words,  40;  of 
nouns,  table  of,  39;  of  1st  decl.,  41  and  44; 
of  2d  decl.,  46;  of  3d  decl.,  55;  of  4th  decl., 
87;  of  5th  decl.,  90;  masculine  and  femi- 
nine aflBxed  to  the  same  root,  32,  3 ;  of  de- 
grees of  comparison  in,  adjs.,  124,  125;  in 
adverbs,  194,  2 ;  personal,  of  verbs,  147,3; 
verbal,  150;  table  of  verbal,  152. 

Terrce,  as  genit.  of  place,  221,  R.  3,  (4); 
terrS  marique,  254.  R.  2;  terrarum,  212,  R.  4, 
S.  2. 

Terreoy  w.  ut  or  ne,  262,  N.  8. 


INDEX. 


407 


Teruncius,S27,  p.  371;  teruncU  habere, 
214,  R.  1. 

Tete.  intensiye,  133,  R.  2. 

Tetrameter,  304,  2;  a  priore,  312,  iv.; 
a  pdst&rtore,  312,  v. ;  meiurus,  312,  xi. ; 
catalectic,  312,  xir. 

Tetraptotes,  94. 

Tetrastrophon,  319,  3. 
.  r/j,  in  syllabication,  18,  2. 

'  Tliat,'  sign  of  what  moods,  273;  instead 
of  a  repeated  subst.,  how  expressed  in  Latin, 
207.  R.  26,  (e.) 

Thesis,  in  prosody,  308. 

Thinking,  verbs  of,  their  constr  ,  272. 

Thousands,  how  expressed  in  Latin,  118, 
5,  (a.) 

Ti,  how  pronounced,  12. 

Tiaras,  45,  3. 

Tibi,  its  pronunciation,  7,  R.  1 ;  19,  e. 

Tigris,  genit.  of,  75,  2;  ace.  of,  80,  e.  2; 
abl.  of,  82,  E.  2,  (b.) 

Time,  advs.  of,  191,  it.;  conjs.,  198,  10; 
ace.  of,  233;  abl.  of,  253;  with  de  or  sub, 
253,  R.  4 ;  with  intra,  ib. ;  with  rn,  253,  R.  5 ; 
expressed  by  id  with  a  genit.,  253,  r.  3; 
by  the  abl.  absolute,  257 ;  the  concrete  noun 
instead  of  the  abstract  title,  257,  r.  7 ;  mode 
of  reckoning,  326;  table  of,  326,  6. 

Timeo,  223,  r.  2,  (1.);  w.  tU  or  ne,  262, 
R.  7;  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Timidus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1. 

Tiryns,  genit.  of,  77,  E.  2. 

-tis,  genit.  in,  77,  2 ;  71,  2. 

Titles,  place  of,  279,  9,  (a.) 

'Too'  or  'rather,'  how  expressed  in 
Latin,  122,  R.  3;  256,  r.  9. 

-tor  and  -trix,  verbals  in,  102,  6 ;  used  as 
adjs.,  129,  8. 

Tot,  indecl.,  115,  4;  correlative  of  quot, 
121,  5;  206,  (16);  syncope  of,  before  quot, 
206,  (16.) 

Totidem,  indecl.,  115,  4. 

Toties,  correlative  of  quoties,  121,  5. 

Totus,  how  declined,  107;  toto,  tota,  abl. 
without  in,  254,  r.  2 ;  totus,  instead  of  an 
adverb,  205,  R.  15. 

Towns,  gender  of  names  of,  29,  2 ;  constr. ; 
Bee  Place. 

-tr,  roots  of  nouns  in,  56,  ii.,  r.  3. 

Traditio,  w.  dat.,  222,  R.  8. 

Trado,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  n.  1,  and 
R.  6;  w.  part.  fut.  pass.,  274,  r.  7,  (a.); 
traditur,  constr.,  271,  R.  2;  trador,  constr., 
271,  R.  2. 

Tranquillo,  scil.  mari,  257,  R.  9,  (1.) 

Trans,  constr.  of  verbs  compounded  with, 
283,  1;  in  passive,  234,  R.  1,  (6.) 

Trajicio,  constr.,  229,  r.4,  1;  233,  (1.) 

Transitive  verbs,  141;  w.  ace,  229'  ellip- 
Bis  of,  229,  R.  2. 

Trees,  gender  of  names  of,  29 

Tres,  how  declined,  109. 

Trepidus,  w.  genit.,  213,  R.  1. 

Tribuo,  w.  two  datives,  227,  R.  1;  w.  two 
aces.,  230,  R.  2;  w.  part.  perf.  pass.,  274, 
R.  7,  (a.) 

Tricolon,  319,  2 ;  tricolon  tristrophon  and 
tetrastrophon,  319,  6. 

Tricorpor,  abl.  of,  113,  e.  2;  115,  1. 

Tricuspis,  abl.  of,  113,  E.  2. 


Trihemimeris,  804,  5. 

Trimeter,  304,  2;  catalectic,  312,  vil. 

Tripes,   genit.   of,   112,   1;  abl.  of,   113, 

Triptotes,  94. 

Tristrophon,  319,  3. 

Trochaic  or  feminine  cgesura,  310,  n.  1;— 
metre,  315  and  303;  tetrameter  catalectic, 
315,  1.;  dimeter  catalectic,  315,  iv.;  tro- 
chaic pentameter  or  Phalociaia,  315,  iii. 

Tropes,  324. 

-truni,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

Truncus,  w.  abl.  or  genit.,  213,  k.  6,  (4.) 

Tu,  declined,  133 ;  in  nom.  with  adj.  in 
voc.,  205,  R.  15,  (c);  u.sed  iudeffhitely,  209, 
R.7;  when  expressed,  209,  n.  1;  tui,  femi- 
nine, with  masc.  or  neuter  gerundive,  275, 
III.,  R.  1,  (4.) 

Turn  and  quum,  191,  r.  7;  turn — turn, 
277,  R.  8;  turn  and  tunc,  difference  between, 
ib. ;  turn  maxime,  ib. ;  turn  temporis,  212, 
R.  4,  N.  4. 

Tumultu,  as  abl.  of  time,  258,  N.  1. 

Tunc  and  nunc,  191,  r.  7 ;  tunc  temporis^ 
212.  R.4,  N.  4. 

Tumidus  and  turgidus,  w.  abl.,  213,  r. 
5,  (5.) 

Turris.  declined,  57. 

-tiis,  adjs.  in,  128,  7;  nouns  in,  of  8d 
decl.,  76,  E.2;  102,7. 

Tuus,  how  declined,  139 ;  used  reflexive- 
ly,  139  R.  1;  tua  after  re/ert  and  interest. 
219,  R.  1.     • 


U. 


U,  sound  of,  7  and  8 ;  u  and  v,  2,3;  m  in 
genit.  and  voc.  of  Greek  nouns,  54;  roots 
of  nouns  of  3d  decl.  ending  in,  56,  i. ;  dat. 
in,  89;  neuters  of  4th  deci.  in,  87;  dat.  in 
of  4th  decl.,  89,  3;  in  2d  root  of  verbs,  167, 
and  171,  e.  2;  increment  in,  3d  decl.,  287, 
3;  plur.,  288;  of  verbs,  290;  final,  quanti- 
ty of,  298 ;  285,  R.  4 ;  u  and  itu  in  3d  roots 
of  verbs,  167. 

Ua,ue,  etc.,  pronunciation  of,  9,  4  and 
5;  quantity  of,  283,  ii.,  e.  3. 

Uber,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.) 

-ubus,  in  dat.  and  abl.  plur.,  89,  5. 

Ubi,  genit.,  212.  r.  4,  n.  2;  w.  indic. 
perf.  instead  of  pluperf.,  259,  r.  1,  (rf.); 
ubiubi,  191,  R.  1. 

-ucis,  genitives  in,  78,  (5);  112,  2. 

-udis,  genitives  in,  76,  e.  1. 

-uis,  genitives  in,  76,  e.  3. 

-uleus,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  3, 
c.  1. 

Ullm,  pronom.  adj.,  139,  5,  (1),  (a.); 
how  declined,  107;  how  used,  207r.  31. 

Ulterior,  its  degrees,  126,  1 ;  ultimus  for 
ultimum,  20o,  R.  15;  how  translated,  205, 
R.  17. 

JJltrix,  gender  of,  125, 1,  (6.) 

Ultra,  prep.,  195,  4;  adv.,  191,  i. 

Ulturn  ire  for  ulcisci,  276,  ii.,  R.  2. 

-ulum,  verbals  in,  102,  5. 

-ulus,  a,  um,  diminutives  in,  100,  3; 
128,  5. 

-um,  genit.  plur.  in  instead  of  arum,  49^ 
instead  of  orwm,  53;  nouns  ending  iu,  46; 


408 


INDEX. 


In  genit.  plur.  3d  decl.,  83;  114;— adTS.  in, 
192,  II.,  4.  (b.) 

Uncia,  327.  p.  372. 

-undus.  participles  in,  162,  20. 

Unde  domo.  2o5,  r.  1. 

Umguam,  191,  ii. ;  timquam,  usguant,  us- 
que, uspiam,  191,  9.  6. 
-untis.  in  genit.  of  Greek  nouns,  76,  e.  6. 

OiiM,  declined.  107;  when  used  in  plur., 
118,  R.  2;  added  to  superlatives.  127,  N.  2; 
unus  et  alter,  with  verbs  singular,  209, 
R.  12;  w.  relative  and  subj.,  264,  10;  for 
solum,  tantum,  etc.,  205,  r.  15.  (6.);  uniwi, 
as  ace.  of  ^ggree,  232.  (3.) 

Umisqmsqiu,  how  declined,  138,  4. 

-i/r,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  66,  67;  genit. 
of,  70,  n. 
-ura,  verbals  in,  102,  7,  K.  2. 

Urbs,  in  apposition  to  names  of  towns, 
237,  R.  2,  (6.) 
-urio,  verbs  in,  187,  n.,  3. 
-wri5,  genitives  in,  76,  E.  3. 
'US,  nouns  in.  of  2d  decl.,  46;  exceptions 
In,  49 — 51;  voc.  sing,  of,  46,  v.  and  52; 
of  3d  decl.,  gender  o^  66;  67;  genitive  of, 
76;  Greek  genit.  in,  69,  e.  3;  nouns  in  of 
4th  decl..  ^7 — 89;  participles  in,  how  de- 
clined. 105,  R.  2 ;  verbals  in,  102,  7 ;  final, 
quantity  of,  301. 

Us  i  tat  urn  est.  ut,  262,  R.  3.  X.  3. 

Uspiam,  usquam,  usquf,  191,  r.  6;  la- 
qiinm,  w.  genit.,  212,  p..  4,  N.  2;  usque,  w. 
ace..  195,  B.3;  23-5.  r.  9.        • 

Usus,  w.  abl.,  243;  usu  venit,  ut,  262, 
R.  3,  N.  1;  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  m., 
a.  1,(1) 

Ut  or  uti,  a  conj.,  198,  8;  ut  rum  and  ut 
ne,  ib.;  w.  subj.,  262;  its  correlatives,  262, 
R.  1;  ellipsis  of,  262,  R.  4;  its  meaning 
after  metuo,  etc.,  262,  r.  7;  uf  non,  262, 
R.  5,  and  R.  6.  2 :  ut—ita  or  sic,  277,  R.  12, 
(6.);  ut,  'as,'  ellipsis  of,  277,  R.  17;  ut, 
'even  if,'  and  wt  non,  w.  subj.,  262,  e.  2; 
ut  with  certain  impersonal  verbs  and  subj., 
262,  R.  3 ;  in  questions  expressing  indigna- 
tion, 270,  R.  2.  (a.);  ut,  ut  primum,  etc., 
with  the  historical  perf.,  indie,  instead  of 
the  pluperf.,  2.59,  r.  1.  {</.);  its  place,  279, 
8,  (b.);  ut. after  est  with  a  predicate  adj., 
262,  R.  3,  N.  4;  ut  credo,  ut  puto,  etc.,  in 
interpos^  clauses,  277,  i.,  E.  17;  ut,  'be- 
cause,' 277.  I.,  R.  12,  (6.);  ut  qui,  264,  8,  2; 
irfsf,  w.  subj.,  263,  2;  uf  i'a  dicam,207, 
R.  33,  (b.)  fin. ;  ut,  '  as  if,'  w.  abl.  absolute, 
257.  K.  4;  tUiit,  w.  indie,  259,' r.  4,  (3); 
ellipsis  of  ut  when  n«  precedes  and  et,  etc., 
follow.  278,  R.  6,  (r.) 

Utcumque,  w.  indie,  259,  R.  4,  (3.) 

Uter,  how  declined,  107 ;  w.  dual  genit., 
2^,  R.  2,  N.  1. 

Utercumque,  how  declined,  107. 

Uterlibet,  uterque,  a.nd.  utervis,  their  mean- 
ing and  declension,  107;  139,  5,  (1),  (6.); 
uterque,  use  of,  207,  R.  32;  uterque,  w.  plur. 
verb,  209,  R.  11,  f4.) 

Utilis,  w.  dat.,  222,  r.  1;  275,  iii.,  R.  2; 
w.  ad,  222,  r.  4,  (1.);  utile  est  ut,  262,  r.  3, 
N.  3;  utilis,  w.  inf.  poetically,  270,  r.  1,(6.); 
275,  K.  2;  utiUufi  fuit.  indie,  instead  of  subj., 
259.  R.  3;  w.  supine  in  u.  278,  iii.,  r.  1. 


Utinam  and  lUi,  w.  subj.,  263, 1. 

-utis,  genitives  in,  76,  e.  2;  112,  2. 

Z7/or,  w.  abl.,  245;  w.  ace,  24o,  i.,  R.; 
w.  two  ablatives,  245,  N. ;  utor,fruor,  etc., 
their  gerundives,  275,  11.,  a.  1. 

Utpote  qui,  w.  subj..  264,  S,  (2.) 

Ulrique,  how  used,  107,  a.  32,  (c.) 

Utrutn  and  utrumne,  198. 11. 

-utus,  adjectives  in,  128,  7. 

-uus,  adjectives  in,  129,  3. 

-ux,  nouns  in,  genit.  of,  78,  2,  (5.) 

Uxor,  ellipsis  of,  211,  R.  7. 


V,  changed  to  u,  163,  2;  sometimes  drop- 
ped in  forming  the  2d  root  of  verbs  of  tiie 
3d  conj..  171.  E.  4. 

raco/250,  2.  K.  1. 

Vacuus,  w.  genit.  or  abl.,  213,  R.  5,  (3.): 
cf.  251.  N. 

j       Vado,  constr.,  225,  rv.;  232.   s.  1;  233, 
;  (3 1,  N.  1. 

VfR,  w.  dat.,  228,  3;  w.  ace,  238,  2. 

Yalde,  127.  2. 

Valfo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  r.  1;  252;  w.  ace, 
252,  E.  4;  I'alere  or  ca/f  dico,  w.  dat.,  225, 
I.,  Jf.:  w.  inf.,  271,  s.l. 

Valid  us,  213^  R.  5,  (4.) 

Valuing,  verbs  of,  214,  r.  2 ;  w.  genit., 
214:  w.abl.,252,  R.  1. 

Vapulo,  142,  R.  3. 

Vaiiable  nouns,  92;  adjs.,  122. 

Vas,  genit.  of.  72.  e.  1 ;  gender  of,  62, 
K.  1,  and  K.  2;  93,  2. 

-ce,  198,  2,  and  n.  1,  p.  76;  place  of,  279, 
3,  (c.) 

Vehor,  compds    of,  233,  (3.),  n. 

Vel,  198,  2;  difference  between  vel  and 
aut,  198,  R. ;  vel  w.  superlative  degree,  127, 
4;  w.  comparatives,  256,  R.  9,  (b.) 

Velim,  w.  subj.  without  ut,  260,  R.  4; 
262,  R.  4. 

VeUem,  how  used,  260,  R.  2. 

Velox,  constr.,  222.  R.  4,  (2.) 

Velut,  vslut  .«,  veluti.  w.  subj.,  263,  2; 
velva,  'as  if,'  w.  abl.  absolute,  257,  N.  4. 

VenalU,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252. 

Vendo,  w.  abl.,  252;  w.  genit.,  214,  p..  3, 
N.  1. 

Veneo,  142,  R.  3;  2-52;  214,  r.  3,  x.  1. 

Venio,  w.  two  datives,  227,  r.  1 ;  w.  ad 
or  in,  225,  iv. ;  w.  dat.,  225.  r.  2;  venit 
mihi  in  mtntem,  constr.,  211,  r.  ^,  (5); 
216.  R.  3. 

Venitur,  conjugated,  184,  2,  (b.) 

Verbal  terminations,  152;  nouns,  102; 
w.  ace,  233,  R.  2,  n.  ;  of  place.  237,  R  1 ; 
w.  dat.,  222,  r.  8;  w.  abl.  of  place,  255; 
w.  genit.  of  personal  pronouns,  2U,  r.  3, 
(a.);  verbal  adjs.,  129. 

Verbs,  140—189;  subject  of,  140,  1; 
active  or  transitive,  141,  i. ;  neuter  or  in- 
transitive, 141,  u. :  neuter  passive,  142,  2; 
neutral  passive,  142.  3;  deponent.  142,  4; 
common.  142,  4,  (6.);  principal  part-s  of, 
151,  4 ;  neuter,  participles  of,  162,  1'3 :  in 
ceptive,  173;  desiderative,  187.  ii-.  3:  176, 
K.;  irregular,  178—182;  defisctive,  183;  re- 


INDEX. 


409 


dundant,  185;  verbs  spelled  alike,  or 
having  the  same  perfect  or  supine,  186; 
derivation  of,  187;  imitative,  187,  3;  fre- 
quentative, 187,  ir.,  1;  inceptive,  187,  ii., 
2;  desiderative,  187,  it.,  3;  diminutive, 
187,  n.,4;  intensive,  187,  ii.,  5;  187,  ii., 

1,  (e.);  composition  of,  188;  changes  in 
composition,  189 ;  compounds  from  simples 
not  in  use,  189,  N.  4;  agreement  of,  209, 
(6.);  ellipsis  of,  209,  r.  4;  person  of  with 
qui,  209,  R.  6;  agreeing  with  predicate 
nominative,  209,  R.  9;  with  collective 
nouns,  209,  r.  11;  plural  with  two  or  more 
nominatives,  209,  r.  12;  after  titerque,  etc., 
209,  R.  11,  (4);  after  a  nominative  with 
citrn  and  the  abl.,  209,  r.  12,  (6^ ;  after  nomi- 
natives connected  by  aut,  209,  r.  12,  (5); 
their  place  in  a  sentence,  279,  2;  in  a 
period,  280. 

Vere  and  vero,  192,  4,  N.  1. 

Vereor,  w.  genit.  poet.,  220,1;  w.  uf  or 
nc,  262,  R.  7;  w.  inf.,  271,  n.  1. 

Vert  simile  est  ut,  262,  R.  3,  n.  3;  w.  inf. 
as  subject,  269,  R.  2. 

Veritum  est,  w.  ace,  229,  R.  6. 

Vera,  use  of  in  answers,  192,  4,  N.  1 ;  198, 
9.  R.,  (a.);  ellipsis  of,  278,  R.  II;  its  place, 
279,3,  (c) 

Verses j  304 ;  combinations  oA  in  poems, 
319. 

Versification,  302. 

Versus,  w.  ace,  195,  R.  3;  235,  r.  9;  place 
of,  279,  10,  (/) 

Fer^o,  constr.,  225,  iv. ;  w.  two  datives, 
227,  R.  1;  229,  r.  4, 1. 

Verttm  est,  ut,  262,  r.  3,  N.  3;  w.  inf.  as 
subject,  269,  R.  2;  verum,  conj.,  192,  9;  its 
place,  279,  3;  verum  and  verum-tamen, 
'I  say,'  278,  R.  10;  verum.  enimvero,  198, 
9,  R.,  (a.);  vera  after  comparatives,  256, 
E.  9. 

Vescor,  with  abl.,  245,  i.;  with  ace.,  245, 
I.,  R. 

Vespere,  or  -ri,  253,  N.  1. 

Vester,  how  declined,  139,  1;  vestrtlm, 
133,  3;  used  after  partitives,  212,  r.  2,  N.  2. 

Vestio,  229,  r.  4,  1. 

Veto,  273,  2,  (d.);  262,  r.  4;  w.  ace.  and 
inf.,  272,  R.  6. 

Vetus,  declension  of,  112,  2;  its  superla- 
tive, 125,  1;  126,3. 

Via,  abl.  of  place  without  in,  264,  R.3. 

Vicem  for  vice,  247,  1,  n.  3. 

VicinicE,  genit.  of  place,  221,  R.  3,  (4.); 
212,  R.  4,  N.  2,  (6.) 

Vicinus,  w.  dat.  or  genit.,  222,  R.  2,  (a») 

Victrix,  115,  1,  {p.);  how  declined  as  an 
adj.,  129,  8. 

Videlicet  and  scilicet,  198,  7,  B.,  (a.); 
pr..  285,  R.  4,  N.  2. 

Video,  w.  ace.  and  inf.,  272,  N.  1;  w.  ut 
or  rie,  262,  n.  3;  wrferes,  260,  r.  2;  video 
for  euro,  w.  ut,  273,  N.  1;  videor,  constr., 
271,  R.  2;  272,  r,  6. 

Viduus,  constr.,    213,  R.   5,    (4);    250, 

2,  (1.) 

Vigeo,  w.  abl.,  250,  2,  h.  1. 
Vigil^  abl.  of,  113,  E.  3;  genit.  plur.  of, 
114,  E.  2;  115, 1,  (a.) 
Vigili4B,  326, 1,  (2.) 

85  . 


Vigilias,  vigilare,  232. 

Vilis,  w.  abl.  of  price,  252. 

Vir,  how  declined,  48,  2. 

Virgilius,  voc.  of.  52;  accent  of,  14,  B. 

Virgo,  declined,  57. 

Virus,  gender  of,  51. 

Vis,  declined,  85;  ace.  sing,  of,  79,  2; 
abl.  sing.,  82,  e.  2;  genit.  plur.,  83,  ii.,  3; 
94;  vi  and  per  vim,  difference  between, 
247,  3,  R.  4;  w.  genit.  of  gerunds,  275,  iii., 
R.  1,  (1.) 

Vitabundus,  w.  ace.,  233,  R.  2,  n. 

Vitam  vivere,  232,  (1.) 

Vitio  creati  magistratus,  247,  2. 

Vivo,  w.  abl.,  245,  ii..  4;  w.  pred.  nom., 
210,  R.  3,  (2);  tertia  vivitur  CBtas,2Si,  iii. 

Vix,  with  part.  fut.  pass.,  274,  r.  12; 
vixdum,  211,  i.,  r.  16. 

Vocative,  37;  sing.,  its  form,  40,  3;  plur., 
40,4;  eUipsis  of,  240,  r.  2. 

Voco,  constr.,  225,  R.  1;  230,  N.  1;  pass., 
210,  R.  3,  (3.) 

Voices,  141. 

Volucer,  in  genit.  plur.,  108,  R.  2. 

Volo,  (are),  compds.  of,  233,  (3),  N. 

Volo,  conjugated,  178,  1;  w.  perf.  inf., 
268,  R.  2;  w.  perf.  part.,  and  ellipsis  of 
esse,  269,  R.  3;  its  construction,  271,  R.  4, 
and  N.  4;  273,  4;  262,  r.  4;  volens,  w.  dat. 
of  person,  226,  R.  3;  volo  bene  and  7ncUe 
alicui,  225,  i.,  n.  ;  volo,  w.  reflexive  pron., 
228,  N.,  (*.) 

Voluntary  agent  of  pass,  verbs.  248,  r. ; 
ellipsis  of,  141,  r.  2;  248,  l.,  R.  1;  when 
expressed  by  per  and  ace,  247,  r.  4;  of 
neuter  verbs,  248,  r.  2;  dative  of  voluntary 
agent,  225,  ii.  and  in. 

Volutum,  pr.,  284,  R.  3. 

Vos,  see  tu,  133. 

Voti  and  votorum  damnati,  217,  R.  3. 

Vowels,  3,1;  sounds  of,  7  and  8;  vowel, 
before  a  mute  and  liquid,  its  quantity,  13, 
6,  and  283,  iv.,  e.  2;  before  another  vowel, 
quantity  of,  13,  3,  and  283,  i.;  in  Greek 
words,  283,  e.  6;  before  two  consonants, 
18,  5,  and  283,  iv. ;  ending  first  part  of  a 
compound,  quantity  of,  286,  R.  4. 

Vulgus,  gender  of,  51 ;  95. 

Vultiir,  gender  of,  67. 


W. 


W,  not  used  in  Latin,  2,  4. 

Weight,  ace.  of,  236,  r.  7;  weights,  Ro- 
man, 327. 

Willingness,  verbs  of,  constr.,  273,  4. 

Winds,  gender  of  names  of.  28. 
.    Wishing,  verbs  of,  constr.,  271,  R.  4. 

Words,  division  of,  17—23 ;  arrangement 
of,  279 ;  gender  of  as  mere  words,  34,  3. 

Writers  in  different  ages,  329. 


X,  sound  of,  12 ;  its  equivalents,  3.  2 ;  56, 
R.  2;  171,  1;  in  syllabication,  18,  4;  nouns 
in,    gender   of,   32   and   65;    genitive   of, 
1  78,  2. 


410 


INDEX. 


Y,  fonnd  only  in  Greek  words,  2,  5; 
sound  of,  7,  R.  2 ;  8.  b.  5 ;  nouns  in,  gender 
of,  62:  genitive  of,  69;  increment  in,  3d 
decl.,287,  3;  final,  quantity  of,  298;  285, 
K.  4. 

•ycliis,  in  genitive,  78,  2,  (6.) 

-yds,  genitives  in,  78,  2,  (6.) 

-ydis.  genitives  in,  77, 1. 

Yi,  how  pronounced,  9,  1;  abl.  in,  82, 
I.e. 


-ygis,  genitives  in,  178,  2.  (6.) 

■^ynos,  GreeK.  genitive  in.  71,  2. 

-ys,  nouns  in,  gender  of.  62.  63,  e.  ;  geni- 
tive of.  77;  ace.  of.  80.  ii. ;  abl.  of,  82,  E.  6; 
final,  quantity  of,  301. 

-yz,  nouns  in,  gender  of,  65,  6. 


Z. 


Z,  found  only  in  words  derived  from  the 
Greek,  2,  5:  its' equivalents.  3,  2. 
Zeugma,  323,  1,  (6.)  and  (2.) 


^FiriVSRSITT] 


;*; 


RETURN  TO  the  circulation  desk  of  any 

University  of  California  Library 

or  to  the 

NORTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 
BIdg.  400,  Richmond  Field  Station 
University  of  California 
Richmond,  CA  94804-4698 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 
2-month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling 

(415)642-6233 
1-year  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books 

to  NRLF 
Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days 

prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


LIBRARY  USE  OCT  31 '86 


U.  C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


CDHS12Da22 


/ 


/ 


